Optimize IT Change Management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}409|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $33,585 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 27 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
  • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
  • Infrastructure managers and change managers need to re-evaluate their change management processes due to slow change turnaround time, too many unauthorized changes, too many incidents and outages because of poorly managed changes, or difficulty evaluating and prioritizing changes.
  • IT system owners often resist change management because they see it as slow and bureaucratic.
  • Infrastructure changes are often seen as different from application changes, and two (or more) processes may exist.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • ITIL provides a usable framework for change management, but full process rigor is not appropriate for every change request.
  • You need to design a process that is flexible enough to meet the demand for change, and strict enough to protect the live environment from change-related incidents.
  • A mature change management process will minimize review and approval activity. Counterintuitively, with experience in implementing changes, risk levels decline to a point where most changes are “pre-approved.”

Impact and Result

  • Create a unified change management process that reduces risk. The process should be balanced in its approach toward deploying changes while also maintaining throughput of innovation and enhancements.
  • Categorize changes based on an industry-standard risk model with objective measures of impact and likelihood.
  • Establish and empower a change manager and change advisory board with the authority to manage, approve, and prioritize changes.
  • Integrate a configuration management database with the change management process to identify dependencies.

Optimize IT Change Management Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize change management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

  • Optimize IT Change Management – Phases 1-4

1. Define change management

Assess the maturity of your existing change management practice and define the scope of change management for your organization.

  • Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool
  • Change Management Risk Assessment Tool

2. Establish roles and workflows

Build your change management team and standardized process workflows for each change type.

  • Change Manager
  • Change Management Process Library – Visio
  • Change Management Process Library – PDF
  • Change Management Standard Operating Procedure

3. Define the RFC and post-implementation activities

Bookend your change management practice by standardizing change intake, implementation, and post-implementation activities.

  • Request for Change Form Template
  • Change Management Pre-Implementation Checklist
  • Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist

4. Measure, manage, and maintain

Form an implementation plan for the project, including a metrics evaluation, change calendar inputs, communications plan, and roadmap.

  • Change Management Metrics Tool
  • Change Management Communications Plan
  • Change Management Roadmap Tool
  • Optimize IT Change Management Improvement Initiative: Project Summary Template

[infographic]

Workshop: Optimize IT Change Management

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Define Change Management

The Purpose

Discuss the existing challenges and maturity of your change management practice.

Build definitions of change categories and the scope of change management.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand the starting point and scope of change management.

Understand the context of change request versus other requests such as service requests, projects, and operational tasks.

Activities

1.1 Outline strengths and challenges

1.2 Conduct a maturity assessment

1.3 Build a categorization scheme

1.4 Build a risk assessment matrix

Outputs

Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool

Change Management Risk Assessment Tool

2 Establish Roles and Workflows

The Purpose

Define roles and responsibilities for the change management team.

Develop a standardized change management practice for approved changes, including process workflows.

Key Benefits Achieved

Built the team to support your new change management practice.

Develop a formalized and right-sized change management practice for each change category. This will ensure all changes follow the correct process and core activities to confirm changes are completed successfully.

Activities

2.1 Define the change manager role

2.2 Outline the membership and protocol for the Change Advisory Board (CAB)

2.3 Build workflows for normal, emergency, and pre-approved changes

Outputs

Change Manager Job Description

Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)

Change Management Process Library

3 Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

The Purpose

Create a new change intake process, including a new request for change (RFC) form.

Develop post-implementation review activities to be completed for every IT change.

Key Benefits Achieved

Bookend your change management practice by standardizing change intake, implementation, and post-implementation activities.

Activities

3.1 Define the RFC template

3.2 Determine post-implementation activities

3.3 Build your change calendar protocol

Outputs

Request for Change Form Template

Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist

Project Summary Template

4 Measure, Manage, and Maintain

The Purpose

Develop a plan and project roadmap for reaching your target for your change management program maturity.

Develop a communications plan to ensure the successful adoption of the new program.

Key Benefits Achieved

A plan and project roadmap for reaching target change management program maturity.

A communications plan ready for implementation.

Activities

4.1 Identify metrics and reports

4.2 Build a communications plan

4.3 Build your implementation roadmap

Outputs

Change Management Metrics Tool

Change Management Communications Plan

Change Management Roadmap Tool

Further reading

Optimize IT Change Management

Right-size IT change management practice to protect the live environment.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst Perspective

Balance risk and efficiency to optimize IT change management.

Change management (change enablement, change control) is a balance of efficiency and risk. That is, pushing changes out in a timely manner while minimizing the risk of deployment. On the one hand, organizations can attempt to avoid all risk and drown the process in rubber stamps, red tape, and bureaucracy. On the other hand, organizations can ignore process and push out changes as quickly as possible, which will likely lead to change related incidents and debilitating outages.

Right-sizing the process does not mean adopting every recommendation from best-practice frameworks. It means balancing the efficiency of change request fulfillment with minimizing risk to your organization. Furthermore, creating a process that encourages adherence is key to avoid change implementers from skirting your process altogether.

Benedict Chang, Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Infrastructure and application change occurs constantly and is driven by changing business needs, requests for new functionality, operational releases and patches, and resolution of incidents or problems detected by the service desk.

IT managers need to follow a standard change management process to ensure that rogue changes are never deployed while the organization remains responsive to demand.

Common Obstacles

IT system owners often resist change management because they see it as slow and bureaucratic.

At the same time, an increasingly interlinked technical environment may cause issues to appear in unexpected places. Configuration management systems are often not kept up-to-date and do not catch the potential linkages.

Infrastructure changes are often seen as “different” from application changes and two (or more) processes may exist.

Info-Tech’s Approach

Info-Tech’s approach will help you:

  • Create a unified change management practice that balances risk and throughput of innovation.
  • Categorize changes based on an industry-standard risk model with objective measures of impact and likelihood.
  • Establish and empower a Change Manager and Change Advisory Board (CAB) with the authority to manage, approve, and prioritize changes.

Balance Risk and Efficiency to Optimize IT Change Management

Two goals of change management are to protect the live environment and deploying changes in a timely manner. These two may seem to sometimes be at odds against each other, but assessing risk at multiple points of a change’s lifecycle can help you achieve both.

Your challenge

This research is designed to help organizations who need to:

  • Build a right-sized change management practice that encourages adherence and balances efficiency and risk.
  • Integrate the change management practice with project management, service desk processes, configuration management, and other areas of IT and the business.
  • Communicate the benefits and impact of change management to all the stakeholders affected by the process.

Change management is heavily reliant on organizational culture

Having a right-sized process is not enough. You need to build and communicate the process to gather adherence. The process is useless if stakeholders are not aware of it or do not follow it.

Increase the Effectiveness of Change Management in Your Organization

The image is a bar graph, with the segments labelled 1 and 2. The y-axis lists numbers 1-10. Segment 1 is at 6.2, and segment 2 is at 8.6.

Of the eight infrastructure & operations processes measured in Info-Tech’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program, change management has the second largest gap between importance and effectiveness of these processes.

Source: Info-Tech 2020; n=5,108 IT professionals from 620 organizations

Common obstacles

These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

  • Gaining buy-in can be a challenge no matter how well the process is built.
  • The complexity of the IT environment and culture of tacit knowledge for configuration makes it difficult to assess cross-dependencies of changes.
  • Each silo or department may have their own change management workflows that they follow internally. This can make it difficult to create a unified process that works well for everyone.

“Why should I fill out an RFC when it only takes five minutes to push through my change?”

“We’ve been doing this for years. Why do we need more bureaucracy?”

“We don’t need change management if we’re Agile.”

“We don’t have the right tools to even start change management.”

“Why do I have to attend a CAB meeting when I don’t care what other departments are doing?”

Info-Tech’s approach

Build change management by implementing assessments and stage gates around appropriate levels of the change lifecycle.

The image is a circle, comprised of arrows, with each arrow pointing to the next, forming a cycle. Each arrow is labelled, as follows: Improve; Request; Assess; Plan; Approve; Implement

The Info-Tech difference:

  1. Create a unified change management process that balances risk and throughput of innovation.
  2. Categorize changes based on an industry-standard risk model with objective measures of impact and likelihood.
  3. Establish and empower a Change Manager and Change Advisory Board (CAB) with the authority to manage, approve, and prioritize changes.

IT change is constant and is driven by:

Change Management:

  1. Operations - Operational releases, maintenance, vendor-driven updates, and security updates can all be key drivers of change. Example: ITSM version update
    • Major Release
    • Maintenance Release
    • Security Patch
  2. Business - Business-driven changes may include requests from other business departments that require IT’s support. Examples: New ERP or HRIS implementation
    • New Application
    • New Version
  3. Service desk → Incident & Problem - Some incident and problem tickets require a change to facilitate resolution of the incident. Examples: Outage necessitating update of an app (emergency change), a user request for new functionality to be added to an existing app
    • Workaround
    • Fix
  4. Configuration Management Database (CMDB) ↔ Asset Management - In addition to software and hardware asset dependencies, a configuration management database (CMDB) is used to keep a record of changes and is queried to assess change requests.
    • Hardware
    • Software

Insight summary

“The scope of change management is defined by each organization…the purpose of change management is to maximize the number of successful service and product changes by ensuring that the risk have been properly assessed, authorizing changes to process, and managing the change schedule.” – ALEXOS Limited, ITIL 4

Build a unified change management process balancing risk and change throughput.

Building a unified process that oversees all changes to the technical environment doesn’t have to be burdensome to be effective. However, the process is a necessary starting point to identifying cross dependencies and avoiding change collisions and change-related incidents.

Use an objective framework for estimating risk

Simply asking, “What is the risk?” will result in subjective responses that will likely minimize the perceived risk. The level of due diligence should align to the criticality of the systems or departments potentially impacted by the proposed changes.

Integrate your change process with your IT service management system

Change management in isolation will provide some stability, but maturing the process through service integrations will enable data-driven decisions, decrease bureaucracy, and enable faster and more stable throughput.

Change management and DevOps can work together effectively

Change and DevOps tend to be at odds, but the framework does not have to change. Lower risk changes in DevOps are prime candidates for the pre-approved category. Much of the responsibility traditionally assigned to the CAB can be diffused throughout the software development lifecycle.

Change management and DevOps can coexist

Shift the responsibility and rigor to earlier in the process.

  • If you are implementing change management in a DevOps environment, ensure you have a strong DevOps lifecycle. You may wish to refer to Info-Tech’s research Implementing DevOps Practices That Work.
  • Consider starting in this blueprint by visiting Appendix II to frame your approach to change management. Follow the blueprint while paying attention to the DevOps Callouts.

DEVOPS CALLOUTS

Look for these DevOps callouts throughout this storyboard to guide you along the implementation.

The image is a horizontal figure eight, with 7 arrows, each pointing into the next. They are labelled are follows: Plan; Create; Verify; Package; Release; Configure; Monitor. At the centre of the circles are the words Dev and Ops.

Successful change management will provide benefits to both the business and IT

Respond to business requests faster while reducing the number of change-related disruptions.

IT Benefits

  • Fewer change-related incidents and outages
  • Faster change turnaround time
  • Higher rate of change success
  • Less change rework
  • Fewer service desk calls related to poorly communicated changes

Business Benefits

  • Fewer service disruptions
  • Faster response to requests for new and enhanced functionalities
  • Higher rate of benefits realization when changes are implemented
  • Lower cost per change
  • Fewer “surprise” changes disrupting productivity

IT satisfaction with change management will drive business satisfaction with IT. Once the process is working efficiently, staff will be more motivated to adhere to the process, reducing the number of unauthorized changes. As fewer changes bypass proper evaluation and testing, service disruptions will decrease and business satisfaction will increase.

Change management improves core benefits to the business: the four Cs

Most organizations have at least some form of change control in place, but formalizing change management leads to the four Cs of business benefits:

Control

Change management brings daily control over the IT environment, allowing you to review every relatively new change, eliminate changes that would have likely failed, and review all changes to improve the IT environment.

Collaboration

Change management planning brings increased communication and collaboration across groups by coordinating changes with business activities. The CAB brings a more formalized and centralized communication method for IT.

Consistency

Request for change templates and a structured process result in implementation, test, and backout plans being more consistent. Implementing processes for pre-approved changes also ensures these frequent changes are executed consistently and efficiently.

Confidence

Change management processes will give your organization more confidence through more accurate planning, improved execution of changes, less failure, and more control over the IT environment. This also leads to greater protection against audits.

You likely need to improve change management more than any other infrastructure & operations process

The image shows a vertical bar graph. Each segment of the graph is labelled for an infrastructure/operations process. Each segment has two bars one for effectiveness, and another for importance. The first segment, Change Management, is highlighted, with its Effectiveness at a 6.2 and Importance at 8.6

Source: Info-Tech 2020; n=5,108 IT Professionals from 620 organizations

Of the eight infrastructure and operations processes measured in Info-Tech’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program, change management consistently has the second largest gap between importance and effectiveness of these processes.

Executives and directors recognize the importance of change management but feel theirs is currently ineffective

Info-Tech’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program assesses the importance and effectiveness of core IT processes. Since its inception, the MGD has consistently identified change management as an area for immediate improvement.

The image is a vertical bar graph, with four segments, each having 2 bars, one for Effectiveness and the other for Importance. The four segments are (with Effectiveness and Importance ratings in brackets, respectively): Frontline (6.5/8.6); Manager (6.6/8.9); Director (6.4/8.8); and Executive (6.1/8.8)

Source: Info-Tech 2020; n=5,108 IT Professionals from 620 organizations

Importance Scores

No importance: 1.0-6.9

Limited importance: 7.0-7.9

Significant importance: 8.0-8.9

Critical importance: 9.0-10.0

Effectiveness Scores

Not in place: n/a

Not effective: 0.0-4.9

Somewhat Ineffective: 5.0-5.9

Somewhat effective: 6.0-6.9

Very effective: 7.0-10.0

There are several common misconceptions about change management

Which of these have you heard in your organization?

 Reality
“It’s just a small change; this will only take five minutes to do.” Even a small change can cause a business outage. That small fix could impact a large system connected to the one being fixed.
“Ad hoc is faster; too many processes slow things down.” Ad hoc might be faster in some cases, but it carries far greater risk. Following defined processes keeps systems stable and risk-averse.
“Change management is all about speed.” Change management is about managing risk. It gives the illusion of speed by reducing downtime and unplanned work.
“Change management will limit our capacity to change.” Change management allows for a better alignment of process (release management) with governance (change management).

Overcome perceived challenges to implementing change management to reap measurable reward

Before: Informal Change Management

Change Approval:

  • Changes do not pass through a formal review process before implementation.
  • 10% of released changes are approved.
  • Implementation challenge: Staff will resist having to submit formal change requests and assessments, frustrated at the prospect of having to wait longer to have changes approved.

Change Prioritization

  • Changes are not prioritized according to urgency, risk, and impact.
  • 60% of changes are urgent.
  • Implementation challenge: Influential stakeholders accustomed to having changes approved and deployed might resist having to submit changes to a standard cost-benefit analysis.

Change Deployment

  • Changes often negatively impact user productivity.
  • 25% of changes are realized as planned.
  • Implementation challenge: Engaging the business so that formal change freeze periods and regular maintenance windows can be established.

After: Right-Sized Change Management

Change Approval

  • All changes pass through a formal review process. Once a change is repeatable and well-tested, it can be pre-approved to save time. Almost no unauthorized changes are deployed.
  • 95% of changes are approved.
  • KPI: Decrease in change-related incidents

Change Prioritization

  • The CAB prioritizes changes so that the business is satisfied with the speed of change deployment.
  • 35% of changes are urgent.
  • KPI: Decrease in change turnaround time.

Change deployment

  • Users are always aware of impending changes and changes don’t interrupt critical business activities.
  • Over 80% of changes are realized as planned
  • KPI: Decrease in the number of failed deployments.

Info-Tech’s methodology for change management optimization focuses on building standardized processes

 1. Define Change Management2. Establish Roles and Workflows3. Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities4. Measure, Manage, and Maintain
Phase Steps

1.1 Assess Maturity

1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

2.2 Build Core Workflows

3.1 Design the RFC

3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

4.2 Implement the Project

  Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) Change Management Project Summary Template
Phase Deliverables
  • Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool
  • Change Management Risk Assessment Tool
  • Change Manager Job Description
  • Change Management Process Library
  • Request for Change (RFC) Form Template
  • Change Management Pre-Implementation Checklist
  • Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist
  • Change Management Metrics Tool
  • Change Management
  • Communications Plan
  • Change Management Roadmap Tool

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

Change Management Process Library

Document your normal, pre-approved, and emergency change lifecycles with the core process workflows .

Change Management Risk Assessment Tool

Test Drive your impact and likelihood assessment questionnaires with the Change Management Risk Assessment Tool.

Project Summary Template

Summarize your efforts in the Optimize IT Change Management Improvement Initiative: Project Summary Template.

Change Management Roadmap Tool

Record your action items and roadmap your steps to a mature change management process.

Key Deliverable:

Change Management SOP

Document and formalize your process starting with the change management standard operating procedure (SOP).

These case studies illustrate the value of various phases of this project

Define Change Management

Establish Roles and Workflows

Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

A major technology company implemented change management to improve productivity by 40%. This case study illustrates the full scope of the project.

A large technology firm experienced a critical outage due to poor change management practices. This case study illustrates the scope of change management definition and strategy.

Ignorance of change management process led to a technology giant experiencing a critical cloud outage. This case study illustrates the scope of the process phase.

A manufacturing company created a makeshift CMDB in the absence of a CMDB to implement change management. This case study illustrates the scope of change intake.

A financial institution tracked and recorded metrics to aid in the success of their change management program. This case study illustrates the scope of the implementation phase.

Working through this project with Info-Tech can save you time and money

Engaging in a Guided Implementation doesn’t just offer valuable project advice, it also results in significant cost savings.

Guided ImplementationMeasured Vale
Phase 1: Define Change Management
  • We estimate Phase 1 activities will take 2 FTEs 10 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $3,100 (2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year).

Phase 2: Establish Roles and Workflows

  • We estimate Phase 2 will take 2 FTEs 10 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $3,100 (2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year).
Phase 3: Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities
  • We estimate Phase 3 will take 2 FTEs 10 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $3,100 (2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year).

Phase 4: Measure, Manage, and Maintain

  • We estimate Phase 4 will take 2 FTEs 5 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $1,500 (2 FTEs * 2.5 days * $80,000/year).
Total Savings $10,800

Case Study

Industry: Technology

Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

Intel implemented a robust change management program and experienced a 40% improvement in change efficiency.

Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

ITIL Change Management Implementation

With close to 4,000 changes occurring each week, managing Intel’s environment is a formidable task. Before implementing change management within the organization, over 35% of all unscheduled downtime was due to errors resulting from change and release management. Processes were ad hoc or scattered across the organization and no standards were in place.

Results

After a robust implementation of change management, Intel experienced a number of improvements including automated approvals, the implementation of a formal change calendar, and an automated RFC form. As a result, Intel improved change productivity by 40% within the first year of the program’s implementation.

Define Change Management

Establish Roles and Workflows

Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

"Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

Guided Implementation

"Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

Workshop

"We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

Consulting

"Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

Guided Implementation

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

Define Change Management

  • Call #1: Introduce change concepts.
  • Call #2: Assess current maturity.
  • Call #3: Identify target-state capabilities.

Establish Roles and Workflows

  • Call #4: Review roles and responsibilities.
  • Call #5: Review core change processes.

Define RFC and Post- Implementation Activities

  • Call #6: Define change intake process.
  • Call #7: Create pre-implementation and post-implementation checklists.

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

  • Call #8: Review metrics.
  • Call #9: Create roadmap.

Workshop Overview

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

 Day 1Day 2Day 3Day 4Day 5
Activities

Define Change Management

1.1 Outline Strengths and Challenges

1.2 Conduct a Maturity Assessment

1.3 Build a Change Categorization Scheme

1.4 Build Your Risk Assessment

Establish Roles and Workflows

2.1 Define the Change Manager Role

2.2 Outline CAB Protocol and membership

2.3 Build Normal Change Process

2.4 Build Emergency Change Process

2.5 Build Pre-Approved Change Process

Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

3.1 Create an RFC Template

3.2 Determine Post-Implementation Activities

3.3 Build a Change Calendar Protocol

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

4.1 Identify Metrics and Reports

4.2 Create Communications Plan

4.3 Build an Implementation Roadmap

Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

Deliverables
  1. Maturity Assessment
  2. Risk Assessment
  1. Change Manager Job Description
  2. Change Management Process Library
  1. Request for Change (RFC) Form Template
  2. Pre-Implementation Checklist
  3. Post-Implementation Checklist
  1. Metrics Tool
  2. Communications Plan
  3. Project Roadmap
  1. Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)
  2. Workshop Summary Deck

Phase 1

Define Change Management

Define Change Management

1.1 Assess Maturity

1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

Establish Roles and Workflows

2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

2.2 Build Core Workflows

Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

3.1 Design the RFC

3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

4.2 Implement the Project

This phase will guide you through the following steps:

  • Assess Maturity
  • Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

This phase involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Step 1.1

Assess Maturity

Activities

1.1.1 Outline the Organization’s Strengths and Challenges

1.1.2 Complete a Maturity Assessment

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Outcomes of this step

  • An understanding of maturity change management processes and frameworks
  • Identification of existing change management challenges and potential causes
  • A framework for assessing change management maturity and an assessment of your existing change management processes

Define Change Management

Step 1.1: Assess Maturity → Step 1.2: Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

Change management is often confused with release management, but they are distinct processes

Change

  • Change management looks at software changes as well as hardware, database, integration, and network changes, with the focus on stability of the entire IT ecosystem for business continuity.
  • Change management provides a holistic view of the IT environment, including dependencies, to ensure nothing is negatively affected by changes.
  • Change documentation is more focused on process, ensuring dependencies are mapped, rollout plans exist, and the business is not at risk.

Release

  • Release and deployment are the detailed plans that bundle patches, upgrades, and new features into deployment packages, with the intent to change them flawlessly into a production environment.
  • Release management is one of many actions performed under change management’s governance.
  • Release documentation includes technical specifications such as change schedule, package details, change checklist, configuration details, test plan, and rollout and rollback plans.

Info-Tech Insight

Ensure the Release Manager is present as part of your CAB. They can explain any change content or dependencies, communicate business approval, and advise the service desk of any defects.

Integrate change management with other IT processes

As seen in the context diagram, change management interacts closely with many other IT processes including release management and configuration management (seen below). Ensure you delineate when these interactions occur (e.g. RFC updates and CMDB queries) and which process owns each task.

The image is a chart mapping the interactions between Change Management and Configuration Management (CMDB).

Avoid the challenges of poor change management

  1. Deployments
    • Too frequent: The need for frequent deployments results in reduced availability of critical business applications.
    • Failed deployments or rework is required: Deployments are not successful and have to be backed out of and then reworked to resolve issues with the installation.
    • High manual effort: A lack of automation results in high resource costs for deployments. Human error is likely, which adds to the risk of a failed deployment.
  2. Incidents
    • Too many unauthorized changes: If the process is perceived as cumbersome and ineffective, people will bypass it or abuse the emergency designation to get their changes deployed faster.
    • Changes cause incidents: When new releases are deployed, they create problems with related systems or applications.
  3. End Users
    • Low user satisfaction: Poor communication and training result in surprised and unhappy users and support staff.

“With no controls in place, IT gets the blame for embarrassing outages. Too much control, and IT is seen as a roadblock to innovation.” – Anonymous, VP IT of a federal credit union

1.1.1 Outline the Organization’s Strengths and Challenges

Input

  • Current change documentation (workflows, SOP, change policy, etc.)
  • Organizational chart(s)

Output

  • List of strengths and challenges for change management

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. As group, discuss and outline the change management challenges facing the organization. These may be challenges caused by poor change management processes or by a lack of process.
  2. Use the pain points found on the previous slide to help guide the discussion.
  3. As a group, also outline the strengths of change management and the strengths of the current organization. Use these strengths as a guide to know what practices to continue and what strengths you can leverage to improve the change management process.
  4. Record the activity results in the Project Summary Template.

Download the Optimize IT Change Management Improvement Initiative: Project Summary Template

Assess current change management maturity to create a plan for improvement

 ChaosReactiveControlled

Proactive

Optimized
Change Requests No defined processes for submitting changes Low process adherence and no RFC form RFC form is centralized and a point of contact for changes exists RFCs are reviewed for scope and completion RFCs trend analysis and proactive change exists
Change Review Little to no change risk assessment Risk assessment exists for each RFC RFC form is centralized and a point of contact for changes exists Change calendar exists and is maintained System and component dependencies exist (CMDB)
Change Approval No formal approval process exists Approval process exists but is not widely followed Unauthorized changes are minimal or nonexistent Change advisory board (CAB) is established and formalized Trend analysis exists increasing pre-approved changes
Post-Deployment No post-deployment change review exists Process exists but is not widely followed Reduction of change-related incidents Stakeholder satisfaction is gathered and reviewed Lessons learned are propagated and actioned
Process Governance Roles & responsibilities are ad hoc Roles, policies & procedures are defined & documented Roles, policies & procedures are defined & documented KPIs are tracked, reported on, and reviewed KPIs are proactively managed for improvement

Info-Tech Insight

Reaching an optimized level is not feasible for every organization. You may be able to run a very good change management process at the Proactive or even Controlled stage. Pay special attention to keeping your goals attainable.

1.1.2 Complete a Maturity Assessment

Input

  • Current change documentation (workflows, SOP, change policy, etc.)

Output

  • Assessment of current maturity level and goals to improve change management

Materials

Participants

  • Change Manager
  • Service Desk Manager
  • Operations (optional)
  1. Use Info-Tech’s Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool to assess the maturity and completeness of your change process.
  2. Significant gaps revealed in this assessment should be the focal points of your discussion when investigating root causes and brainstorming remediation activities:
    1. For each activity of each process area of change management, determine the degree of completeness of your current process.
    2. Review your maturity assessment results and discuss as a group potential reasons why you arrived at your maturity level. Identify areas where you should focus your initial attention for improvement.
    3. Regularly review the maturity of your change management practices by completing this maturity assessment tool periodically to identify other areas to optimize.

Download the Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool

Case Study

Even Google isn’t immune to change-related outages. Plan ahead and communicate to help avoid change-related incidents

Industry: Technology

Source: The Register

As part of a routine maintenance procedure, Google engineers moved App Engine applications between data centers in the Central US to balance out traffic.

Unfortunately, at the same time that applications were being rerouted, a software update was in progress on the traffic routers, which triggered a restart. This temporarily diminished router capacity, knocking out a sizeable portion of Google Cloud.

The server drain resulted in a huge spike in startup requests, and the routers simply couldn’t handle the traffic.

As a result, 21% of Google App Engine applications hosted in the Central US experienced error rates in excess of 10%, while an additional 16% of applications experienced latency, albeit at a lower rate.

Solution

Thankfully, engineers were actively monitoring the implementation of the change and were able to spring into action to halt the problem.

The change was rolled back after 11 minutes, but the configuration error still needed to be fixed. After about two hours, the change failure was resolved and the Google Cloud was fully functional.

One takeaway for the engineering team was to closely monitor how changes are scheduled. Ultimately, this was the result of miscommunication and a lack of transparency between change teams.

Step 1.2

Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

Activities

1.2.1 Define What Constitutes a Change

1.2.2 Build a Change Categorization Scheme

1.2.3 Build a Classification Scheme to Assess Impact

1.2.4 Build a Classification Scheme to Define Likelihood

1.2.5 Evaluate and Adjust Your Risk Assessment Scheme

Define Change Management

Step 1.1: Assess Maturity → Step 1.2: Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

This step involves the following participants:

  • Infrastructure/Applications Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Outcomes of this step

  • A clear definition of what constitutes a change in your organization
  • A defined categorization scheme to classify types of changes
  • A risk assessment matrix and tool for evaluating and prioritizing change requests according to impact and likelihood of risk

Change must be managed to mitigate risk to the infrastructure

Change management is the gatekeeper protecting your live environment.

Successfully managed changes will optimize risk exposure, severity of impact, and disruption. This will result in the bottom-line business benefits of removal of risk, early realization of benefits, and savings of money and time.

  • IT change is constant; change requests will be made both proactively and reactively to upgrade systems, acquire new functionality, and to prevent or resolve incidents.
  • Every change to the infrastructure must pass through the change management process before being deployed to ensure that it has been properly assessed and tested, and to check that a backout /rollback plan is in place.
  • It will be less expensive to invest in a rigorous change management process than to resolve incidents, service disruptions, and outages caused by the deployment of a bad change.
  • Change management is what gives you control and visibility regarding what is introduced to the live environment, preventing incidents that threaten business continuity.

80%

In organizations without formal change management processes, about 80% (The Visible Ops Handbook) of IT service outage problems are caused by updates and changes to systems, applications, and infrastructure. It’s crucial to track and systematically manage change to fully understand and predict the risks and potential impact of the change.

Attributes of a change

Differentiate changes from other IT requests

Is this in the production environment of a business process?

The core business of the enterprise or supporting functions may be affected.

Does the task affect an enterprise managed system?

If it’s for a local application, it’s a service request

How many users are impacted?

It should usually impact more than a single user (in most cases).

Is there a configuration, or code, or workflow, or UI/UX change?

Any impact on a business process is a change; adding a user or a recipient to a report or mailing list is not a change.

Does the underlying service currently exist?

If it’s a new service, then it’s better described as a project.

Is this done/requested by IT?

It needs to be within the scope of IT for the change management process to apply.

Will this take longer than one week?

As a general rule, if it takes longer than 40 hours of work to complete, it’s likely a project.

Defining what constitutes a change

Every change request will initiate the change management process; don’t waste time reviewing requests that are out of scope.

ChangeService Request (User)Operational Task (Backend)
  • Fixing defects in code
  • Changing configuration of an enterprise system
  • Adding new software or hardware components
  • Switching an application to another VM
  • Standardized request
  • New PC
  • Permissions request
  • Change password
  • Add user
  • Purchases
  • Change the backup tape
  • Delete temporary files
  • Maintain database (one that is well defined, repeatable, and predictable)
  • Run utilities to repair a database

Do not treat every IT request as a change!

  • Many organizations make the mistake of calling a standard service request or operational task a “change.”
  • Every change request will initiate the change management process; don’t waste time reviewing requests that are out of scope.
  • While the overuse of RFCs for out-of-scope requests is better than a lack of process, this will slow the process and delay the approval of more critical changes.
  • Requiring an RFC for something that should be considered day-to-day work will also discourage people from adhering to the process, because the RFC will be seen as meaningless paperwork.

 

1.2.1 Define What Constitutes a Change

Input

  • List of examples of each category of the chart

Output

  • Definitions for each category to be used at change intake

Materials

  • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
  • Service catalog (if applicable)
  • Sticky notes
  • Markers/pens
  • Change Management SOP

Participants

  • Infrastructure Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. As a group, brainstorm examples of changes, projects, service requests (user), operational tasks (backend), and releases. You may add additional categories as needed (e.g. incidents).
  2. Have each participant write the examples on sticky notes and populate the following chart on the whiteboard/flip chart.
  3. Use the examples to draw lines and define what defines each category.
    • What makes a change distinct from a project?
    • What makes a change distinct from a service request?
    • What makes a change distinct from an operational task?
    • When do the category workflows cross over with other categories? (For example, when does a project interact with change management?)
  4. Record the definitions of requests and results in section 2.3 of the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).
ChangeProjectService Request (User)Operational Task (Backend)Release
Changing Configuration ERP upgrade Add new user Delete temp files Software release

Download the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).

Each RFC should define resources needed to effect the change

In addition to assigning a category to each RFC based on risk assessment, each RFC should also be assigned a priority based on the impact of the change on the IT organization, in terms of the resources needed to effect the change.

Categories include

Normal

Emergency

Pre-Approved

The majority of changes will be pre-approved or normal changes. Definitions of each category are provided on the next slide.

Info-Tech uses the term pre-approved rather than the ITIL terminology of standard to more accurately define the type of change represented by this category.

A potential fourth change category of expedited may be employed if you are having issues with process adherence or if you experience changes driven from outside change management’s control (e.g. from the CIO, director, judiciary, etc.) See Appendix I for more details.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Do not rush to designate changes as pre-approved. You may have a good idea of which changes may be considered pre-approved, but make sure they are in fact low-risk and well-documented before moving them over from the normal category.

The category of the change determines the process it follows

 Pre-ApprovedNormalEmergency
Definition
  • Tasks are well-known, documented, and proven
  • Budgetary approval is preordained or within control of change requester
  • Risk is low and understood
  • There’s a low probability of failure
  • All changes that are not pre-approved or emergency will be classified as normal
  • Further categorized by priority/risk
  • The change is being requested to resolve a current or imminent critical/severity-1 incident that threatens business continuity
  • Associated with a critical incident or problem ticket
Trigger
  • The same change is built and changed repeatedly using the same install procedures and resulting in the same low-risk outcome
  • Upgrade or new functionality that will capture a business benefit
  • A fix to a current problem
  • A current or imminent critical incident that will impact business continuity
  • Urgency to implement the change must be established, as well as lack of any alternative or workaround
Workflow
  • Pre-established
  • Repeatable with same sequence of actions, with minimal judgment or decision points
  • Dependent on the change
  • Different workflows depending on prioritization
  • Dependent on the change
Approval
  • Change Manager (does not need to be reviewed by CAB)
  • CAB
  • Approval from the Emergency Change Advisory Board (E-CAB) is sufficient to proceed with the change
  • A retroactive RFC must be created and approved by the CAB

Pay close attention to defining your pre-approved changes. They are going to be critical for running a smooth change management practice in a DevOps Environment

1.2.2 Build a Change Categorization Scheme

Input

  • List of examples of each change category

Output

  • Definitions for each change category

Materials

  • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
  • Service catalog (if applicable)
  • Sticky notes
  • Markers
  • Change Management SOP

Participants

  • Infrastructure Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Discuss the change categories on the previous slide and modify the types of descriptions to suit your organization.
  2. Once the change categories or types are defined, identify several examples of change requests that would fall under each category.
  3. Types of normal changes will be further defined in the next activity and can be left blank for now.
  4. Examples are provided below. Capture your definitions in section 4 of your Change Management SOP.
Pre-Approved (AKA Standard)NormalEmergency
  • Microsoft patch management/deployment
  • Windows update
  • Minor form changes
  • Service pack updates on non-critical systems
  • Advance label status on orders
  • Change log retention period/storage
  • Change backup frequency

Major

  • Active directory server upgrade
  • New ERP

Medium

  • Network upgrade
  • High availability implementation

Minor

  • Ticket system go-live
  • UPS replacement
  • Cognos update
  • Any change other than a pre-approved change
  • Needed to resolve a major outage in a Tier 1 system

Assess the risk for each normal change based on impact (severity) and likelihood (probability)

Create a change assessment risk matrix to standardize risk assessment for new changes. Formalizing this assessment should be one of the first priorities of change management.

The following slides guide you through the steps of formalizing a risk assessment according to impact and likelihood:

  1. Define a risk matrix: Risk matrices can either be a 3x3 matrix (Minor, Medium, or High Risk as shown on the next slide) or a 4x4 matrix (Minor, Medium, High, or Critical Risk).
  2. Build an impact assessment: Enable consistent measurement of impact for each change by incorporating a standardized questionnaire for each RFC.
  3. Build a likelihood assessment: Enable the consistent measurement of impact for each change by incorporating a standardized questionnaire for each RFC.
  4. Test drive your risk assessment and make necessary adjustments: Measure your newly formed risk assessment questionnaires against historical changes to test its accuracy.

Consider risk

  1. Risk should be the primary consideration in classifying a normal change as Low, Medium, High. The extent of governance required, as well as minimum timeline to implement the change, will follow from the risk assessment.
  2. The business benefit often matches the impact level of the risk – a change that will provide a significant benefit to a large number of users may likely carry an equally major downside if deviations occur.

Info-Tech Insight

All changes entail an additional level of risk. Risk is a function of impact and likelihood. Risk may be reduced, accepted, or neutralized through following best practices around training, testing, backout planning, redundancy, timing and sequencing of changes, etc.

Create a risk matrix to assign a risk rating to each RFC

Every normal RFC should be assigned a risk rating.

How is risk rating determined?

  • Priority should be based on the business consequences of implementing or denying the change.
  • Risk rating is assigned using the impact of the risk and likelihood/probability that the event may occur.

Who determines priority?

  • Priority should be decided with the change requester and with the CAB, if necessary.
  • Don’t let the change requester decide priority alone, as they will usually assign it a higher priority than is justified. Use a repeatable, standardized framework to assess each request.

How is risk rating used?

  • Risk rating is used to determine which changes should be discussed and assessed first.
  • Time frames and escalation processes should be defined for each risk level.

RFCs need to clearly identify the risk level of the proposed change. This can be done through statement of impact and likelihood (low/medium/high) or through pertinent questions linked with business rules to assess the risk.

Risk always has a negative impact, but the size of the impact can vary considerably in terms of cost, number of people or sites affected, and severity of the impact. Impact questions tend to be more objective and quantifiable than likelihood questions.

Risk Matrix

Risk Matrix. Impact vs. Likelihood. Low impact, Low Likelihood and Medium Impact, Medium Likelihood are minor risks. High Likelihood, Low Impact; Medium Likelihood, Medium Impact; and Low Likelihood, High Impact are Medium Risk. High Impact, High Likelihood; High Impact, Medium Likelihood; and Medium Impact, High Likelihood are Major risk.

1.2.3 Build a Classification Scheme to Assess Impact

Input

  • Current risk assessment (if available)

Output

  • Tailored impact assessment

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • Infrastructure Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Define a set of questions to measure risk impact.
  2. For each question, assign a weight that should be placed on that factor.
  3. Define criteria for each question that would categorize the risk as high, medium, or low.
  4. Capture your results in section 4.3.1 of your Change Management SOP.
Impact
Weight Question High Medium Low
15% # of people affected 36+ 11-35 <10
20% # of sites affected 4+ 2-3 1
15% Duration of recovery (minutes of business time) 180+ 30-18 <3
20% Systems affected Mission critical Important Informational
30% External customer impact Loss of customer Service interruption None

1.2.4 Build a Classification Scheme to Define Likelihood

Input

  • Current risk assessment (if available)

Output

  • Tailored likelihood assessment

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • Infrastructure Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Define a set of questions to measure risk likelihood.
  2. For each question, assign a weight that should be placed on that factor.
  3. Define criteria for each question that would categorize the risk as high, medium, or low.
  4. Capture your results in section 4.3.2 of your Change Management SOP.
LIKELIHOOD
Weight Question High Medium Low
25% Has this change been tested? No   Yes
10% Have all the relevant groups (companies, departments, executives) vetted the change? No Partial Yes
5% Has this change been documented? No   Yes
15% How long is the change window? When can we implement? Specified day/time Partial Per IT choice
20% Do we have trained and experienced staff available to implement this change? If only external consultants are available, the rating will be “medium” at best. No   Yes
25% Has an implementation plan been developed? No   Yes

1.2.5 Evaluate and Adjust Your Risk Assessment Scheme

Input

  • Impact and likelihood assessments from previous two activities

Output

  • Vetted risk assessment

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • Infrastructure Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Draw your risk matrix on a whiteboard or flip chart.
  2. As a group, identify up to 10 examples of requests for changes that would apply within your organization. Depending on the number of people participating, each person could identify one or two changes and write them on sticky notes.
  3. Take turns bringing your sticky notes up to the risk matrix and placing each where it belongs, according to the assessment criteria you defined.
  4. After each participant has taken a turn, discuss each change as a group and adjust the placement of any changes, if needed. Update the risk assessment weightings or questions, if needed.

Download the Change Management Rick Assessment Tool.

#

Change Example

Impact

Likelihood

Risk

1

ERP change

High

Medium

Major

2

Ticket system go-live

Medium

Low

Minor

3

UPS replacement

Medium

Low

Minor

4

Network upgrade

Medium

Medium

Medium

5

AD upgrade

Medium

Low

Minor

6

High availability implementation

Low

Medium

Minor

7

Key-card implementation

Low

High

Medium

8

Anti-virus update

Low

Low

Minor

9

Website

Low

Medium

Minor

 

Case Study

A CMDB is not a prerequisite of change management. Don’t let the absence of a configuration management database (CMDB) prevent you from implementing change management.

Industry: Manufacturing

Source: Anonymous Info-Tech member

Challenge

The company was planning to implement a CMDB; however, full implementation was still one year away and subject to budget constraints.

Without a CMDB, it would be difficult to understand the interdependencies between systems and therefore be able to provide notifications to potentially affected user groups prior to implementing technical changes.

This could have derailed the change management project.

Solution

An Excel template was set up as a stopgap measure until the full implementation of the CMDB. The template included all identified dependencies between systems, along with a “dependency tier” for each IT service.

Tier 1: The dependent system would not operate if the upstream system change resulted in an outage.

Tier 2: The dependent system would suffer severe degradation of performance and/or features.

Tier 3: The dependent system would see minor performance degradation or minor feature unavailability.

Results

As a stopgap measure, the solution worked well. When changes ran the risk of degrading downstream dependent systems, the impacted business system owner’s authorization was sought and end users were informed in advance.

The primary takeaway was that a system to manage configuration linkages and system dependencies was key.

While a CMDB is ideal for this use case, IT organizations shouldn’t let the lack of such a system stop progress on change management.

Case Study (part 1 of 4)

Intel used a maturity assessment to kick-start its new change management program.

Industry: Technology

Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

Challenge

Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

Solution

Due to the sheer volume of change management activities present at Intel, over 35% of unscheduled outages were the result of changes.

Ineffective change management was identified as the top contributor of incidents with unscheduled downtime.

One of the major issues highlighted was a lack of process ownership. The change management process at Intel was very fragmented, and that needed to change.

Results

Daniel Grove, Senior Release & Change Manager at Intel, identified that clarifying tasks for the Change Manager and the CAB would improve process efficiency by reducing decision lag time. Roles and responsibilities were reworked and clarified.

Intel conducted a maturity assessment of the overall change management process to identify key areas for improvement.

Phase 2

Establish Roles and Workflows

For running change management in DevOps environment, see Appendix II.

Define Change Management

1.1 Assess Maturity

1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

Establish Roles and Workflows

2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

2.2 Build Core Workflows

Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

3.1 Design the RFC

3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

4.2 Implement the Project

This phase will guide you through the following steps:

  • Determine Roles and Responsibilities
  • Build Core Workflows

This phase involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Step 2.1

Determine Roles and Responsibilities

Activities

2.1.1 Capture Roles and Responsibilities Using a RACI Chart

2.1.2 Determine Your Change Manager’s Responsibilities

2.1.3 Define the Authority and Responsibilities of Your CAB

2.1.4 Determine an E-CAB Protocol for Your Organization

Establish Roles and Workflows

Step 2.1: Determine Roles and Responsibilities → Step 2.2: Build Core Workflows

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Outcomes of this step

  • Clearly defined responsibilities to form the job description for a Change Manager
  • Clearly defined roles and responsibilities for the change management team, including the business system owner, technical SME, and CAB members
  • Defined responsibilities and authority of the CAB
  • Protocol for an emergency CAB (E-CAB) meeting

Identify roles and responsibilities for your change management team

Business System Owner

  • Provides downtime window(s)
  • Advises on need for change (prior to creation of RFC)
  • Validates change (through UAT or other validation as necessary)
  • Provides approval for expedited changes (needs to be at executive level)

Technical Subject Matter Expert (SME)

  • Advises on proposed changes prior to RFC submission
  • Reviews draft RFC for technical soundness
  • Assesses backout/rollback plan
  • Checks if knowledgebase has been consulted for prior lessons learned
  • Participates in the PIR, if necessary
  • Ensures that the service desk is trained on the change

CAB

  • Approves/rejects RFCs for normal changes
  • Reviews lessons learned from PIRs
  • Decides on the scope of change management
  • Reviews metrics and decides on remedial actions
  • Considers changes to be added to list of pre-approved changes
  • Communicates to organization about upcoming changes

Change Manager

  • Reviews RFCs for completeness
  • Ensures RFCs brought to the CAB have a high chance of approval
  • Chairs CAB meetings, including scheduling, agenda preparation, reporting, and follow-ups
  • Manages post-implementation reviews and reporting
  • Organizes internal communications (within IT)

2.1.1 Capture Roles and Responsibilities Using a RACI Chart

Input

  • Current SOP

Output

  • Documented roles and responsibilities in change management in a RACI chart

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. As a group, work through developing a RACI chart to determine the roles and responsibilities of individuals involved in the change management practice based on the following criteria:
    • Responsible (performs the work)
    • Accountable (ensures the work is done)
    • Consulted (two-way communication)
    • Informed (one-way communication)
  2. Record your results in slide 14 of the Project Summary Template and section 3.1 of your Change Management SOP.
Change Management TasksOriginatorSystem OwnerChange ManagerCAB MemberTechnical SMEService DeskCIO/ VP ITE-CAB Member
Review the RFC C C A C R C R  
Validate changes C C A C R C R  
Assess test plan A C R R C   I  
Approve the RFC I C A R C   I  
Create communications plan R I A     I I  
Deploy communications plan I I A I   R    
Review metrics   C A R   C I  
Perform a post implementation review   C R A     I  
Review lessons learned from PIR activities     R A   C    

Designate a Change Manager to own the process, change templates, and tools

The Change Manager will be the point of contact for all process questions related to change management.

  • The Change Manager needs the authority to reject change requests, regardless of the seniority of the requester.
  • The Change Manager needs the authority to enforce compliance to a standard process.
  • The Change Manager needs enough cross-functional subject-matter expertise to accurately evaluate the impact of change from both an IT and business perspective.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Some organizations will not be able to assign a dedicated Change Manager, but they must still task an individual with change review authority and with ownership of the risk assessment and other key parts of the process.

Responsibilities

  1. The Change Manager is your first stop for change approval. Both the change management and release and deployment management processes rely on the Change Manager to function.
  2. Every single change that is applied to the live environment, from a single patch to a major change, must originate with a request for change (RFC), which is then approved by the Change Manager to proceed to the CAB for full approval.
  3. Change templates and tools, such as the change calendar, list of preapproved changes, and risk assessment template are controlled by the Change Manager.
  4. The Change Manager also needs to have ownership over gathering metrics and reports surrounding deployed changes. A skilled Change Manager needs to have an aptitude for applying metrics for continual improvement activities.

2.1.2 Document Your Change Manager’s Responsibilities

Input

  • Current Change Manager job description (if available)

Output

  • Change Manager job description and list of responsibilities

Materials

  • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
  • Markers/pens
  • Info-Tech’s Change Manager Job Description
  • Change Management SOP

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

1.Using the previous slide, Info-Tech’s Change Manager Job Description, and the examples below, brainstorm responsibilities for the Change Manager.

2.Record the responsibilities in Section 3.2 of your Change Management SOP.

Example:

Change Manager: James Corey

Responsibilities

  1. Own the process, tools, and templates.
  2. Control the Change Management SOP.
  3. Provide standard RFC forms.
  4. Distribute RFCs for CAB review.
  5. Receive all initial RFCs and check them for completion.
  6. Approve initial RFCs.
  7. Approve pre-approved changes.
  8. Approve the conversion of normal changes to pre-approved changes.
  9. Assemble the Emergency CAB (E-CAB) when emergency change requests are received.
  10. Approve submission of RFCs for CAB review.
  11. Chair the CAB:
    • Set the CAB agenda and distribute it at least 24 hours before the meeting.
    • Ensure the agenda is adhered to.
    • Make the final approval/prioritization decision regarding a change if the CAB is deadlocked and cannot come to an agreement.
    • Distribute CAB meeting minutes to all members and relevant stakeholders.

Download the Change Manager Job Description

Create a Change Advisory Board (CAB) to provide process governance

The primary functions of the CAB are to:

  1. Protect the live environment from poorly assessed, tested, and implemented changes.
    • CAB approval is required for all normal and emergency changes.
    • If a change results in an incident or outage, the CAB is effectively responsible; it’s the responsibility of the CAB to assess and accept the potential impact of every change.
  2. Prioritize changes in a way that fairly reflects change impact and urgency.
    • Change requests will originate from multiple stakeholders, some of whom have competing interests.
    • It’s up to the CAB to prioritize these requests effectively so that business need is balanced with any potential risk to the infrastructure.
    • The CAB should seek to reduce the number of emergency/expedited changes.
  3. Schedule deployments in a way that minimizes conflict and disruption.
    • The CAB uses a change calendar populated with project work, upcoming organizational initiatives, and change freeze periods. They will schedule changes around these blocks to avoid disrupting user productivity.
    • The CAB should work closely with the release and deployment management teams to coordinate change/release scheduling.

See what responsibilities in the CAB’s process are already performed by the DevOps lifecycle (e.g. authorization, deconfliction etc.). Do not duplicate efforts.

Use diverse representation from the business to form an effective CAB

The CAB needs insight into all areas of the business to avoid approving a high-risk change.

Based on the core responsibilities you have defined, the CAB needs to be composed of a diverse set of individuals who provide quality:

  • Change need assessments – identifying the value and purpose of a proposed change.
  • Change risk assessments – confirmation of the technical impact and likelihood assessments that lead to a risk score, based on the inputs in RFC.
  • Change scheduling – offer a variety of perspectives and responsibilities and will be able to identify potential scheduling conflicts.
 CAB RepresentationValue Added
Business Members
  • CIO
  • Business Relationship Manager
  • Service Level Manager
  • Business Analyst
  • Identify change blackout periods, change impact, and business urgency.
  • Assess impact on fiduciary, legal, and/or audit requirements.
  • Determine acceptable business risk.
IT Operations Members
  • Managers representing all IT functions
  • IT Directors
  • Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
  • Identify dependencies and downstream impacts.
  • Identify possible conflicts with pre-existing OLAs and SLAs.
CAB Attendees
  • Specific SMEs, tech specialists, and business and vendor reps relevant to a particular change
  • Only attend meetings when invited by the Change Manager
  • Provide detailed information and expertise related to their particular subject areas.
  • Speak to requirements, change impact, and cost.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Form a core CAB (members attend every week) and an optional CAB (members who attend only when a change impacts them or when they can provide value in discussions about a change). This way, members can have their voice heard without spending every week in a meeting where they do not contribute.

2.1.3 Define the Authority and Responsibilities of Your CAB

Input

  • Current SOP or CAB charter (if available)

Output

  • Documented list of CAB authorities and responsibilities

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

1.Using the previous slide and the examples below, list the authorities and responsibilities of your CAB.

2.Record the responsibilities in section 3.3.2 of your Change Management SOP and the Project Summary Template.

Example:

CAP AuthorityCAP Responsibilities
  • Final authority over the deployment of all normal and emergency changes.
  • Authority to absorb the risk of a change.
  • Authority to set the change calendar:
    • Maintenance windows.
    • Change freeze periods.
    • Project work.
    • Authority to delay changes.
  • Evaluate all normal and emergency changes.
  • Verify all normal change test, backout, and implementation plans.
  • Verify all normal change test results.
  • Approve all normal and emergency changes.
  • Prioritize all normal changes.
  • Schedule all normal and emergency changes.
  • Review failed change deployments.

Establish an emergency CAB (E-CAB) protocol

  • When an emergency change request is received, you will not be able to wait until the regularly scheduled CAB meeting.
  • As a group, decide who will sit on the E-CAB and what their protocol will be when assessing and approving emergency changes.

Change owner conferences with E-CAB (best efforts to reach them) through email or messaging.

E-CAB members and business system owners are provided with change details. No decision is made without feedback from at least one E-CAB member.

If business continuity is being affected, the Change Manager has authority to approve change.

Full documentation of the change (a retroactive RFC) is done after the change and is then reviewed by the CAB.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Members of the E-CAB should be a subset of the CAB who are typically quick to respond to their messages, even at odd hours of the night.

2.1.4 Determine an E-CAB Protocol for Your Organization

Input

  • Current SOP or CAB charter (if available)

Output

  • E-CAB protocol

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Gather the members of the E-CAB and other necessary representatives from the change management team.
  2. Determine the order of operations for the E-CAB in the event that an emergency change is needed.
  3. Consult the example emergency protocol below. Determine what roles and responsibilities are involved at each stage of the emergency change’s implementation.
  4. Document the E-CAB protocol in section 3.4 of your Change Management SOP.

Example

Assemble E-CAB

Assess Change

Test (if Applicable)

Deploy Change

Create Retroactive RFC

Review With CAB

Step 2.2

Build Core Workflows

Activities

2.2.1 Build a CMDB-lite as a Reference for Requested Changes

2.2.2 Create a Normal Change Process

2.2.3 Create a Pre-Approved Change Process

2.2.4 Create an Emergency Change Process

Establish Roles and Workflows

Step 2.1: Determine Roles and Responsibilities → Step 2.2: Build Core Workflows

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Outcomes of this step

  • Emergency change workflow
  • Normal process workflow
  • Pre-approved change workflow

Establishing Workflows: Change Management Lifecycle

Improve

  • A post-implementation review assesses the value of the actual change measured against the proposed change in terms of benefits, costs, and impact.
  • Results recorded in the change log.
  • Accountability: Change Manager Change Implementer

Request

  • A change request (RFC) can be submitted via paper form, phone, email, or web portal.
  • Accountability: Change requester/Initiator

Assess

  • The request is screened to ensure it meets an agreed-upon set of business criteria.
  • Changes are assessed on:
    • Impact of change
    • Risks or interdependencies
    • Resourcing and costs
  • Accountability: Change Manager

Plan

  • Tasks are assigned, planned, and executed.
  • Change schedule is consulted and necessary resources are identified.
  • Accountability: Change Manager

Approve

  • Approved requests are sent to the most efficient channel based on risk, urgency, and complexity.
  • Change is sent to CAB members for final review and approval
  • Accountability: Change Manager
    • Change Advisory Board

Implement

  • Approved changes are deployed.
  • A rollback plan is created to mitigate risk.
  • Accountability: Change Manager Change Implementer

Establishing workflows: employ a SIPOC model for process definition

A good SIPOC (supplier, input, process, output, customer) model helps establish the boundaries of each process step and provides a concise definition of the expected outcomes and required inputs. It’s a useful and recommended next step for every workflow diagram.

For change management, employ a SIPOC model to outline your CAB process:

Supplier

  • Who or what organization provides the inputs to the process? The supplier can be internal or external.

Input

  • What goes into the process step? This can be a document, data, information, or a decision.

Process

  • Activities that occur in the process step that’s being analyzed.

Output

  • What does the process step produce? This can be a document, data, information, or a decision.

Customer

  • Who or what organization(s) takes the output of the process? The customer can be internal or external.

Optional Fields

Metrics

  • Top-level indicators that usually relate to the input and output, e.g. turnaround time, risk matrix completeness.

Controls

  • Checkpoints to ensure process step quality.

Dependencies

  • Other process steps that require the output.

RACI

  • Those who are Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, or Informed (RACI) about the input, output, and/or process.

Establish change workflows: assess requested changes to identify impact and dependencies

An effective change assessment workflow is a holistic process that leaves no stone unturned in an effort to mitigate risk before any change reaches the approval stage. The four crucial areas of risk in a change workflow are:

Dependencies

Identify all components of the change.

Ask how changes will affect:

  • Services on the same infrastructure?
  • Applications?
  • Infrastructure/app architecture?
  • Security?
  • Ability to support critical systems?

Business Impact

Frame the change from a business point of view to identify potential disruptions to business activities.

Your assessment should cover:

  • Business processes
  • User productivity
  • Customer service
  • BCPs

SLA Impact

Each new change can impact the level of service available.

Examine the impact on:

  • Availability of critical systems
  • Infrastructure and app performance
  • Infrastructure and app capacity
  • Existing disaster recovery plans and procedures

Required Resources

Once risk has been assessed, resources need to be identified to ensure the change can be executed.

These include:

  • People (SMEs, tech support, work effort/duration)
  • System time for scheduled implementation
  • Hardware or software (new or existing, as well as tools)

Establishing workflows: pinpoint dependencies to identify the need for additional changes

An assessment of each change and a query of the CMDB needs to be performed as part of the change planning process to mitigate outage risk.

  • A version upgrade on one piece of software may require another component to be upgraded as well. For example, an upgrade to the database management system requires that an application that uses the database be upgraded or modified.
  • The sequence of the release must also be determined, as certain components may need to be upgraded before others. For example, if you upgrade the Exchange Server, a Windows update must be installed prior to the Exchange upgrade.
  • If you do not have a CMDB, consider building a CMDB-lite, which consists of a listing of systems, primary users, SMEs, business owners, and system dependencies (see next slide).

Services Impacted

  • Have affected services been identified?
  • Have supporting services been identified?
  • Has someone checked the CMDB to ensure all dependencies have been accounted for?
  • Have we referenced the service catalog so the business approves what they’re authorizing?

Technical Teams Impacted

  • Who will support the change throughout testing and implementation?
  • Will additional support be needed?
  • Do we need outside support from eternal suppliers?
  • Has someone checked the contract to ensure any additional costs have been approved?

Build a dependency matrix to avoid change related collisions (optional)

A CMDB-lite does not replace a CMDB but can be a valuable tool to leverage when requesting changes if you do not currently have configuration management. Consider the following inputs when building your own CMDB-lite.

  • System
    • To build a CMDB-lite, start with the top 10 systems in your environment that experience changes. This list can always be populated iteratively.
  • Primary Users
    • Listing the primary users will give a change requester a first glance at the impact of the change.
    • You can also use this information when looking at the change communication and training after the change is implemented.
  • SME/Backup
    • These are the staff that will likely build and implement the change. The backup is listed in case the primary is on holiday.
  • Business System Owner
    • The owner of the system is one of the people needed to sign off on the change. Having their support from the beginning of a change is necessary to build and implement it successfully.
  • Tier 1 Dependency
    • If the primary system experiences and outage, Tier 1 dependency functionality is also lost. To request a change, include the business system owner signoffs of the Tier 1 dependencies of the primary system.
  • Tier 2 Dependency
    • If the primary system experiences an outage, Tier 2 dependency functionality is lost, but there is an available workaround. As with Tier 1, this information can help you build a backout plan in case there is a change-related collision.
  • Tier 3 Dependency
    • Tier 3 functionality is not lost if the primary system experiences an outage, but nice-to-haves such as aesthetics are affected.

2.2.1 Build a CMDB-lite as a Reference for Requested Changes

Input

  • Current system ownership documentation

Output

  • Documented reference for change requests (CMDB-lite)

Materials

  • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
  • Sticky notes
  • Markers/pens

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Start with a list of your top 10-15 systems/services with the highest volume of changes.
  2. Using a whiteboard, flip chart, or shared screen, complete the table below by filling the corresponding Primary Users, SMEs, Business System Owner, and Dependencies as shown below. It may help to use sticky notes.
  3. Iteratively populate the table as you notice gaps with incoming changes.
SystemPrimary UsersSMEBackup SME(s)Business System OwnerTier 1 Dependency (system functionality is down)Tier 2 (impaired functionality/ workaround available)Tier 3 Dependency (nice to have)
Email Enterprise Naomi Amos James
  • ITSMs
  • Scan-to-email
  • Reporting
 
  • Lots
Conferencing Tool Enterprise Alex Shed James
  • Videoconferencing
  • Conference rooms (can use Facebook messenger instead in worst case scenario)
  • IM
ITSM (Service Now) Enterprise (Intl.) Anderson TBD Mike
  • Work orders
  • Dashboards
  • Purchasing
 
ITSM (Manage Engine) North America Bobbie Joseph Mike
  • Work orders
  • Dashboards
  • Purchasing
 

Establishing workflows: create standards for change approvals to improve efficiency

  • Not all changes are created equal, and not all changes require the same degree of approval. As part of the change management process, it’s important to define who is the authority for each type of change.
  • Failure to do so can create bureaucratic bottlenecks if each change is held to an unnecessary high level of scrutiny, or unplanned outages may occur due to changes circumventing the formal approval process.
  • A balance must be met and defined to ensure the process is not bypassed or bottlenecked.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Define a list pre-approved changes and automate them (if possible) using your ITSM solution. This will save valuable time for more important changes in the queue.

Example:

Change CategoryChange Authority
Pre-approved change Department head/manager
Emergency change E-CAB
Normal change – low and medium risk CAB
Normal change – high risk CAB and CIO (for visibility)

Example process: Normal Change – Change Initiation

Change initiation allows for assurance that the request is in scope for change management and acts as a filter for out-of-scope changes to be redirected to the proper workflow. Initiation also assesses who may be assigned to the change and the proper category of the change, and results in an RFC to be populated before the change reaches the build and test phase.

The image is a horizontal flow chart, depicting an example of a change process.

The change trigger assessment is critical in the DevOps lifecycle. This can take a more formal role of a technical review board (TRB) or, with enough maturity, may be automated. Responsibilities such as deconfliction, dependency identification, calendar query, and authorization identification can be done early in the lifecycle to decrease or eliminate the burden on CAB.

For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

Example process: Normal Change – Technical Build and Test

The technical build and test stage includes all technical prerequisites and testing needed for a change to pass before proceeding to approval and implementation. In addition to a technical review, a solution consisting of the implementation, rollback, communications, and training plan are also built and included in the RFC before passing it to the CAB.

The image is a flowchart, showing the process for change during the technical build and test stage.

For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

Example process: Normal Change – Change Approval (CAB)

Change approval can start with the Change Manager reviewing all incoming RFCs to filter them for completeness and check them for red flags before passing them to the CAB. This saves the CAB from discussing incomplete changes and allows the Change Manager to set a CAB agenda before the CAB meeting. If need be, change approval can also set vendor communications necessary for changes, as well as the final implementation date of the change. The CAB and Change Manager may follow up with the appropriate parties notifying them of the approval decision (accepted, rescheduled, or rejected).

The image shows a flowchart illustrating the process for change approval.

For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

Example process: Normal Change – Change Implementation

Changes should not end at implementation. Ensure you define post-implementation activities (documentation, communication, training etc.) and a post-implementation review in case the change does not go according to plan.

The image is a flowchart, illustrating the work process for change implementation and post-implementation review.

For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

2.2.2 Create a Normal Change Process

Input

  • Current SOP/workflow library

Output

  • Normal change process

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
  2. Using the examples shown on the previous few slides, work as a group to determine the workflow for a normal change, with particular attention to the following sub-processes:
    1. Request
    2. Assessment
    3. Plan
    4. Approve
    5. Implementation and Post-Implementation Activities
  3. Optionally, you may create variations of the workflow for minor, medium, and major changes (e.g. there will be fewer authorizations for minor changes).
  4. For further documentation, you may choose to run the SIPOC activity for your CAB as outlined on this slide.
  5. Document the resulting workflows in the Change Management Process Library and section 11 of your Change Management SOP.

Download the Change Management Process Library.

Identify and convert low-risk normal changes to pre-approved once the process is established

As your process matures, begin creating a list of normal changes that might qualify for pre-approval. The most potential for value in gains from change management comes from re-engineering and automating of high-volume changes. Pre-approved changes should save you time without threatening the live environment.

IT should flag changes they would like pre-approved:

  • Once your change management process is firmly established, hold a meeting with all staff that make change requests and build changes.
  • Run a training session detailing the traits of pre-approved changes and ask these individuals to identify changes that might qualify.
  • These changes should be submitted to the Change Manager and reviewed, with the help of the CAB, to decide whether or not they qualify for pre-approval.

Pre-approved changes are not exempt from due diligence:

  • Once a change is designated as pre-approved, the deployment team should create and compile all relevant documentation:
    • An RFC detailing the change, dependencies, risk, and impact.
    • Detailed procedures and required resources.
    • Implementation and backout plan.
    • Test results.
  • When templating the RFC for pre-approved changes, aim to write the documentation as if another SME were to implement it. This reduces confusion, especially if there’s staff turnover.
  • The CAB must approve, sign off, and keep a record of all documents.
  • Pre-approved changes must still be documented and recorded in the CMDB and change log after each deployment.

Info-Tech Best Practice

At the beginning of a change management process, there should be few active pre-approved changes. However, prior to launch, you may have IT flag changes for conversion.

Example process: Pre-Approved Change Process

The image shows two horizontal flow charts, the first labelled Pre-Approval of Recurring RFC, and the second labelled Implementation of Child RFC.

For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

Review the pre-approved change list regularly to ensure the list of changes are still low-risk and repeatable.

IT environments change. Don’t be caught by surprise.

  • Changes which were once low-risk and repeatable may cause unforeseen incidents if they are not reviewed regularly.
  • Dependencies change as the IT environment changes. Ensure that the changes on the pre-approved change list are still low-risk and repeatable, and that the documentation is up to date.
  • If dependencies have changed, then move the change back to the normal category for reassessment. It may be redesignated as a pre-approved change once the documentation is updated.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Other reasons for moving a pre-approved change back to the normal category is if the change led to an incident during implementation or if there was an issue during implementation.

Seek new pre-approved change submissions. → Re-evaluate the pre-approved change list every 4-6 months.

The image shows a horizontal flow chart, depicting the process for a pre-approved change list review.

For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

2.2.3 Create a Pre-Approved Change Process

Input

  • Current SOP/workflow library

Output

  • Pre-approved change process

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
  2. Using the examples shown on the previous few slides, work as a group to determine the workflow for a pre-approved change, with particular attention to the following sub-processes:
    1. Request
    2. Assessment
    3. Plan
    4. Approve
  3. Document the process of a converting a normal change to pre-approved. Include the steps from flagging a low-risk change to creating the related RFC template.
  4. Document the resulting workflows in the Change Management Process Library and sections 4.2 and 13 of your Change Management SOP.

Reserve the emergency designation for real emergencies

  • Emergency changes have one of the following triggers:
    • A critical incident is impacting user productivity.
    • An imminent critical incident will impact user productivity.
  • Unless a critical incident is being resolved or prevented, the change should be categorized as normal.
  • An emergency change differs from a normal change in the following key aspects:
    • An emergency change is required to recover from a major outage – there must be a validated service desk critical incident ticket.
    • An urgent business requirement is not an “emergency.”
    • An RFC is created after the change is implemented and the outage is over.
    • A review by the full CAB occurs after the change is implemented.
    • The first responder and/or the person implementing the change may not be the subject matter expert for that system.
  • In all cases, an RFC must be created and the change must be reviewed by the full CAB. The review should occur within two business days of the event.
Sample ChangeQuick CheckEmergency?
Install the latest critical patches from the vendor. Are the patches required to resolve or prevent an imminent critical incident? No
A virus or worm invades the network and a patch is needed to eliminate the threat. Is the patch required to resolve or prevent an imminent critical incident? Yes

Info-Tech Best Practice

Change requesters should be made aware that senior management will be informed if an emergency RFC is submitted inappropriately. Emergency requests trigger urgent CAB meetings, are riskier to deploy, and delay other changes waiting in the queue.

Example process: Emergency Change Process

The image is a flowchart depicting the process for an emergency change process

When building your emergency change process, have your E-CAB protocol from activity 2.1.4 handy.

  • Focus on the following requirements for an emergency process:
    • E-CAB protocol and scope: Does the SME need authorization first before working on the change or can the SME proceed if no E-CAB members respond?
    • Documentation and communication to stakeholders and CAB after the emergency change is completed.
    • Input from incident management.

For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

2.2.4 Create an Emergency Change Process

Input

  • Current SOP/workflow library

Output

  • Emergency change process

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
  2. Using the examples shown on the previous few slides, work as a group to determine the workflow for an emergency change, with particular attention to the following sub-processes:
    1. Request
    2. Assessment
    3. Plan
    4. Approve
  3. Ensure that the E-CAB protocol from activity 2.1.4 is considered when building your process.
  4. Document the resulting workflows in the Change Management Process Library and section 12 of your Change Management SOP.

Case Study (part 2 of 4)

Intel implemented a robust change management process.

Industry: Technology

Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

Challenge

Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

Solution

Intel identified 37 different change processes and 25 change management systems of record with little integration.

Software and infrastructure groups were also very siloed, and this no doubt contributed to the high number of changes that caused outages.

The task was simple: standards needed to be put in place and communication had to improve.

Results

Once process ownership was assigned and the role of the Change Manager and CAB clarified, it was a simple task to streamline and simplify processes among groups.

Intel designed a new, unified change management workflow that all groups would adopt.

Automation was also brought into play to improve how RFCs were generated and submitted.

Phase 3

Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

Define Change Management

1.1 Assess Maturity

1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

Establish Roles and Workflows

2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

2.2 Build Core Workflows

Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

3.1 Design the RFC

3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

4.2 Implement the Project

This phase will guide you through the following activities:

  • Design the RFC
  • Establish Post-Implementation Activities

This phase involves the following participants:

  • IT Director
  • Infrastructure Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Step 3.1

Design the RFC

Activities

3.1.1 Evaluate Your Existing RFC Process

3.1.2 Build the RFC Form

Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

Step 3.1: Design the RFC

Step 3.2: Establish Post-Implementation Activities

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Outcomes of this step

  • A full RFC template and process that compliments the workflows for the three change categories

A request for change (RFC) should be submitted for every non-standard change

An RFC should be submitted through the formal change management practice for every change that is not a standard, pre-approved change (a change which does not require submission to the change management practice).

  • The RFC should contain all the information required to approve a change. Some information will be recorded when the change request is first initiated, but not everything will be known at that time.
  • Further information can be added as the change progresses through its lifecycle.
  • The level of detail that goes into the RFC will vary depending on the type of change, the size, and the likely impact of the change.
  • Other details of the change may be recorded in other documents and referenced in the RFC.

Info-Tech Insight

Keep the RFC form simple, especially when first implementing change management, to encourage the adoption of and compliance with the process.

RFCs should contain the following information, at a minimum:

  1. Contact information for requester
  2. Description of change
  3. References to external documentation
  4. Items to be changed, reason for the change, and impact of both implementing and not implementing the change
  5. Change type and category
  6. Priority and risk assessment
  7. Predicted time frame, resources, and cost
  8. Backout or remediation plan
  9. Proposed approvers
  10. Scheduled implementation time
  11. Communications plan and post-implementation review

3.1.1 Evaluate Your Existing RFC Process

Input

  • Current RFC form or stock ITSM RFC
  • Current SOP (if available)

Output

  • List of changes to the current RFC form and RFC process

Materials

Participants

  • IT Director
  • Infrastructure Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. If the organization is already using an RFC form, review it as a group now and discuss its contents:
    • Does this RFC provide adequate information for the Change Manager and/or CAB to review?
    • Should any additional fields be added?
  2. Show the participants Info-Tech’s Request for Change Form Template and compare it to the one the organization is currently using.
  3. As a group, finalize an RFC table of contents that will be used to formalize a new or improved RFC.
  4. Decide which fields should be filled out by the requester before the initial RFC is submitted to the Change Manager:
    • Many sections of the RFC are relevant for change assessment and review. What information does the Change Manager need when they first receive a request?
    • The Change Manager needs enough information to ensure that the change is in scope and has been properly categorized.
  5. Decide how the RFC form should be submitted and reviewed; this can be documented in section 5 of your Change Management SOP.

Download the Request for Change Form Template.

Design the RFC to encourage process buy-in

  • When building the RFC, split the form up into sections that follow the normal workflow (e.g. Intake, Assessment and Build, Approval, Implementation/PIR). This way the form walks the requester through what needs to be filled and when.
  • Revisit the form periodically and solicit feedback to continually improve the user experience. If there’s information missing on the RFC that the CAB would like to know, add the fields. If there are sections that are not used or not needed for documentation, remove them.
  • Make sure the user experience surrounding your RFC form is a top priority – make it accessible, otherwise change requesters simply will not use it.
  • Take advantage of your ITSM’s dropdown lists, automated notifications, CMDB integrations, and auto-generated fields to ease the process of filling the RFC

Draft:

  • Change requester
  • Requested date of deployment
  • Change risk: low/medium/high
  • Risk assessment
  • Description of change
  • Reason for change
  • Change components

Technical Build:

  • Assess change:
    • Dependencies
    • Business impact
    • SLA impact
    • Required resources
    • Query the CMS
  • Plan and test changes:
    • Test plan
    • Test results
    • Implementation plan
    • Backout plan
    • Backout plan test results

CAB:

  • Approve and schedule changes:
    • Final CAB review
    • Communications plan

Complete:

  • Deploy changes:
    • Post-implementation review

Designing your RFC: RFC draft

  • Change requester – link your change module to the active directory to pull the change requester’s contact information automatically to save time.
  • A requested date of deployment gives approvers information on timeline and can be used to query the change calendar for possible conflicts
  • Information about risk assessment based on impact and likelihood questionnaires are quick to fill out but provide a lot of information to the CAB. The risk assessment may not be complete at the draft stage but can be updated as the change is built. Ensure this field is up-to- date before it reaches CAB.
  • If you have a technical review stage where changes are directed to the proper workflow and resourcing is assessed, the description, reason, and change components are high-level descriptors of the change that will aid in discovery and lining the change up with the business vision (viability from both a technical and business standpoint).
  • Change requester
  • Requested date of deployment
  • Change Risk: low/medium/high
  • Risk assessment
  • Description of change
  • Reason for change
  • Change components

Use the RFC to point to documentation already gathered in the DevOps lifecycle to cut down on unnecessary manual work while maintaining compliance.

Designing your RFC: technical build

  • Dependencies and CMDB query, along with the proposed implementation date, are included to aid in calendar deconfliction and change scheduling. If there’s a conflict, it’s easier to reschedule the proposed change early in the lifecycle.
  • Business, SLA impact, and required resources can be tracked to provide the CAB with information on the business resources required. This can also be used to prioritize the change if conflicts arise.
  • Implementation, test, and backout plans must be included and assessed to increase the probability that a change will be implemented without failure. It’s also useful in the case of PIRs to determine root causes of change-related incidents.
  • Assess change:
    • Dependencies
    • Business impact
    • SLA impact
    • Required resources
    • Query the CMS
  • Plan and test changes:
    • Test plan
    • Test results
    • Implementation plan
    • Backout plan
    • Backout plan test results

Designing your RFC: approval and deployment

  • Documenting approval, rejection, and rescheduling gives the change requester the go-ahead to proceed with the change, rationale on why it was prioritized lower than another change (rescheduled), or rationale on rejection.
  • Communications plans for appropriate stakeholders can also be modified and forwarded to the communications team (e.g. service desk or business system owners) before deployment.
  • Post-implementation activities and reviews can be conducted if need be before a change is closed. The PIR, if filled out, should then be appended to any subsequent changes of the same nature to avoid making the same mistake twice.
  • Approve and schedule changes:
    • Final CAB review
    • Communications plan
  • Deploy changes:
    • Post-implementation review

Standardize the request for change protocol

  1. Submission Standards
    • Electronic submission will make it easier for CAB members to review the documentation.
    • As the change goes through the assessment, plan, and test phase, new documentation (assessments, backout plans, test results, etc.) can be attached to the digital RFC for review by CAB members prior to the CAB meeting.
    • Change management software won’t be necessary to facilitate the RFC submission and review; a content repository system, such as SharePoint, will suffice.
  2. Designate the first control point
    • All RFCs should be submitted to a single point of contact.
    • Ideally, the Change Manager or Technical Review Board should fill this role.
    • Whoever is tasked with this role needs the subject matter expertise to ensure that the change has been categorized correctly, to reject out-of-scope requests, or to ask that missing information be provided before the RFC moves through the full change management practice.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Technical and SME contacts should be noted in each RFC so they can be easily consulted during the RFC review.

3.1.2 Build the RFC Form

Input

  • Current RFC form or stock ITSM RFC
  • Current SOP (if available)

Output

  • List of changes to the current RFC and RFC process

Materials

Participants

  • IT Director
  • Infrastructure Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Use Info-Tech’s Request for Change Form Template as a basis for your RFC form.
  2. Use this template to standardize your change request process and ensure that the appropriate information is documented effectively each time a request is made. The change requester and Change Manager should consolidate all information associated with a given change request in this form. This form will be submitted by the change requester and reviewed by the Change Manager.

Case Study (part 3 of 4)

Intel implemented automated RFC form generation.

Industry: Technology

Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

Challenge

Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

Solution

One of the crucial factors that was impacting Intel’s change management efficiency was a cumbersome RFC process.

A lack of RFC usage was contributing to increased ad hoc changes being put through the CAB, and rescheduled changes were quite high.

Additionally, ad hoc changes were also contributing heavily to unscheduled downtime within the organization.

Results

Intel designed and implemented an automated RFC form generator to encourage end users to increase RFC usage.

As we’ve seen with RFC form design, the UX/UI of the form needs to be top notch, otherwise end users will simply circumvent the process. This will contribute to the problems you are seeking to correct.

Thanks to increased RFC usage, Intel decreased emergency changes by 50% and reduced change-caused unscheduled downtime by 82%.

Step 3.2

Establish Post-Implementation Activities

Activities

3.2.1 Determine When the CAB Would Reject Tested Changes

3.2.2 Create a Post-Implementation Activity Checklist

Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

Step 3.1: Design RFC

Step 3.2: Establish Post-Implementation Activities

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Outcomes of this step

  • A formalized post-implementation process for continual improvement

Why would the CAB reject a change that has been properly assessed and tested?

Possible reasons the CAB would reject a change include:

  • The product being changed is approaching its end of life.
  • The change is too costly.
  • The timing of the change conflicts with other changes.
  • There could be compliance issues.
  • The change is actually a project.
  • The risk is too high.
  • There could be regulatory issues.
  • The peripherals (test, backout, communication, and training plans) are incomplete.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Many reasons for rejection (listed above) can be caught early on in the process during the technical review or change build portion of the change. The earlier you catch these reasons for rejection, the less wasted effort there will be per change.

Sample RFCReason for CAP Rejection
There was a request for an update to a system that a legacy application depends on and only a specific area of the business was aware of the dependency. The CAB rejects it due to the downstream impact.
There was a request for an update to a non-supported application, and the vendor was asking for a premium support contract that is very costly. It’s too expensive to implement, despite the need for it. The CAB will wait for an upgrade to a new application.
There was a request to update application functionality to a beta release. The risk outweighs the business benefits.

Determine When the CAB Would Reject Tested Changes

Input

  • Current SOP (if available)

Output

  • List of reasons to reject tested changes

Materials

  • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
  • Projector
  • Markers/pens
  • Laptop with ITSM admin access
  • Project Summary Template

Participants

  • IT Director
  • Infrastructure Manager
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board

Avoid hand-offs to ensure a smooth implementation process

The implementation phase is the final checkpoint before releasing the new change into your live environment. Once the final checks have been made to the change, it’s paramount that teams work together to transition the change effectively rather than doing an abrupt hand-off. This could cause a potential outage.

1.

  • Deployment resources identified, allocated, and scheduled
  • Documentation complete
  • Support team trained
  • Users trained
  • Business sign-off
  • Target systems identified and ready to receive changes
  • Target systems available for installation maintenance window scheduled
  • Technical checks:
    • Disk space available
    • Pre-requisites met
    • Components/Services to be updated are stopped
    • All users disconnected
  • Download Info-Tech’sChange Management Pre-Implementation Checklist

Implement change →

2.

  1. Verification – once the change has been implemented, verify that all requirements are fulfilled.
  2. Review – ensure that all affected systems and applications are operating as predicted. Update change log.
  3. Transition – a crucial phase of implementation that’s often overlooked. Once the change implementation is complete from a technical point of view, it’s imperative that the team involved with the change inform and train the group responsible for managing the new change.

Create a backout plan to reduce the risk of a failed change

Every change process needs to plan for the potential for failure and how to address it effectively. Change management’s solution to this problem is a backout plan.

A backout plan needs to contain a record of the steps that need to be taken to restore the live environment back to its previous state and maintain business continuity. A good backout plan asks the following questions:

  1. How will failure be determined? Who will make the determination to back out of a change be made and when?
  2. Do we fix on fail or do we rollback to the previous configuration?
  3. Is the service desk aware of the impending change? Do they have proper training?

Notify the Service Desk

  • Notify the Service Desk about backout plan initiation.

Disable Access

  • Disable user access to affected system(s).

Conduct Checks

  • Conduct checks to all affected components.

Enable User Access

  • Enable user access to affected systems.

Notify the Service Desk

  • Notify the service desk that the backout plan was successful.

Info-Tech Best Practice

As part of the backout plan, consider the turnback point in the change window. That is, the point within the change window where you still have time to fully back out of the change.

Ensure the following post-implementation review activities are completed

Service Catalog

Update the service catalog with new information as a result of the implemented change.

CMDB

Update new dependencies present as a result of the new change.

Asset DB

Add notes about any assets newly affected by changes.

Architecture Map

Update your map based on the new change.

Technical Documentation

Update your technical documentation to reflect the changes present because of the new change.

Training Documentation

Update your training documentation to reflect any information about how users interact with the change.

Use a post-implementation review process to promote continual improvement

The post-implementation review (PIR) is the most neglected change management activity.

  • All changes should be reviewed to understand the reason behind them, appropriateness, and recommendations for next steps.
  • The Change Manager manages the completion of information PIRs and invites RFC originators to present their findings and document the lessons learned.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Review PIR reports at CAB meetings to highlight the root causes of issues, action items to close identified gaps, and back-up documentation required. Attach the PIR report to the relevant RFC to prevent similar changes from facing the same issues in the future.

  1. Why do a post-implementation review?
    • Changes that don’t fail but don’t perform well are rarely reviewed.
    • Changes may fail subtly and still need review.
    • Changes that cause serious failures (i.e. unplanned downtime) receive analysis that is unnecessarily in-depth.
  2. What are the benefits?
    • A proactive, post-implementation review actually uses less resources than reactionary change reviews.
    • Root-cause analysis of failed changes, no matter what the impact.
    • Insight into changes that took longer than projected.
    • Identification of previously unidentified risks affecting changes.

Determine the strategy for your PIR to establish a standardized process

Capture the details of your PIR process in a table similar to the one below.

Frequency Part of weekly review (IT team meeting)
Participants
  • Change Manager
  • Originator
  • SME/supervisor/impacted team(s)

Categories under review

Current deviations and action items from previous PIR:

  • Complete
  • Partially complete
  • Complete, late
  • Change failed, rollback succeeded
  • Change failed, rollback failed
  • Major deviation from implementation plan
Output
  • Root cause or failure or deviation
  • External factors
  • Remediation focus areas
  • Remediation timeline (follow-up at appropriate time)
Controls
  • Reviewed at next CAB meeting
  • RFC close is dependent on completion of PIR
  • Share with the rest of the technical team
  • Lessons learned stored in the knowledgebase and attached to RFC for easy search of past issues.

3.2.2 Create a Post-Implementation Activity Checklist

Input

  • Current SOP (if available)

Output

  • List of reasons to reject tested changes

Materials

Participants

  • CIO
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
  2. Brainstorm duties to perform following the deployment of a change. Below is a sample list:
    • Example:
      • Was the deployment successful?
        • If no, was the backout plan executed successfully?
      • List change-related incidents
      • Change assessment
        • Missed dependencies
        • Inaccurate business impact
        • Incorrect SLA impact
        • Inaccurate resources
          • Time
          • Staff
          • Hardware
      • System testing
      • Integration testing
      • User acceptance testing
      • No backout plan
      • Backout plan failure
      • Deployment issues
  3. Record your results in the Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist.

Download the Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist

Case Study

Microsoft used post-implementation review activities to mitigate the risk of a critical Azure outage.

Industry: Technology

Source: Jason Zander, Microsoft

Challenge

In November 2014, Microsoft deployed a change intended to improve Azure storage performance by reducing CPU footprint of the Azure Table Front-Ends.

The deployment method was an incremental approach called “flighting,” where software and configuration deployments are deployed incrementally to Azure infrastructure in small batches.

Unfortunately, this software deployment caused a service interruption in multiple regions.

Solution

Before the software was deployed, Microsoft engineers followed proper protocol by testing the proposed update. All test results pointed to a successful implementation.

Unfortunately, engineers pushed the change out to the entire infrastructure instead of adhering to the traditional flighting protocol.

Additionally, the configuration switch was incorrectly enabled for the Azure Blob storage Front-Ends.

A combination of the two mistakes exposed a bug that caused the outage.

Results

Thankfully, Microsoft had a backout plan. Within 30 minutes, the change was rolled back on a global scale.

It was determined that policy enforcement was not integrated across the deployment system. An update to the system shifted the process of policy enforcement from human-based decisions and protocol to automation via the deployment platform.

Defined PIR activities enabled Microsoft to take swift action against the outage and mitigate the risk of a serious outage.

Phase 4

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

Define Change Management

1.1 Assess Maturity

1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Risk Assessment

Establish Roles and Workflows

2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

2.2 Build Core Workflows

Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

3.1 Design RFC

3.2 Establish post-implementation activities

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

4.2 Implement the Project

This phase will guide you through the following activities:

  • Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar
  • Implement the Project

This phase involves the following participants:

  • CIO/IT Director
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager

Step 4.1

Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

Activities

4.1.1 Create an Outline for Your Change Calendar

4.1.2 Determine Metrics, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and Critical Success Factors (CSFs)

4.1.3 Track and Record Metrics Using the Change Management Metrics Tool

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

Step 4.1: Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

Step 4.2: Implement the Project

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO/IT Director
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager

Outcomes of this step

  • Clear definitions of change calendar content
  • Guidelines for change calendar scheduling
  • Defined metrics to measure the success of change management with associated reports, KPIs, and CSFs

Enforce a standard method of prioritizing and scheduling changes

The impact of not deploying the change and the benefit of deploying it should determine its priority.

Risk of Not Deploying

  • What is the urgency of the change?
  • What is the risk to the organization if the change is not deployed right away?
  • Will there be any lost productivity, service disruptions, or missed critical business opportunities?
    • Timing
      • Does the proposed timing work with the approved changes already on the change schedule?
      • Has the change been clash checked so there are no potential conflicts over services or resources?
    • Once prioritized, a final deployment date should be set by the CAB. Check the change calendar first to avoid conflicts.

Positive Impact of Deployment

  • What benefits will be realized once the change is deployed?
  • How significant is the opportunity that triggered the change?
  • Will the change lead to a positive business outcome (e.g. increased sales)?

“The one who has more clout or authority is usually the one who gets changes scheduled in the time frame they desire, but you should really be evaluating the impact to the organization. We looked at the risk to the business of not doing the change, and that’s a good way of determining the criticality and urgency of that change.” – Joseph Sgandurra, Director, Service Delivery, Navantis

Info-Tech Insight

Avoid a culture where powerful stakeholders are able to push change deployment on an ad hoc basis. Give the CAB the full authority to make approval decisions based on urgency, impact, cost, and availability of resources.

Develop a change schedule to formalize the planning process

A change calendar will help the CAB schedule changes more effectively and increase visibility into upcoming changes across the organization.

  1. Establish change windows in a consistent change schedule:
    • Compile a list of business units that would benefit from a change.
    • Look for conflicts in the change schedule.
    • Avoid scheduling two or more major business units in a day.
    • Consider clients when building your change windows and change schedule.
  2. Gain commitments from key participants:
    • These individuals can confirm if there are any unusual or cyclical business requirements that will impact the schedule.
  3. Properly control your change calendar to improve change efficiency:
    • Look at the proposed start and end times: Are they sensible? Does the implementation window leave time for anything going wrong or needing to roll back the change?
    • Special considerations: Are there special circumstances that need to be considered? Ask the business if you don’t know.
    • The key principle is to have a sufficient window available for implementing changes so you only need to set up calendar freezes for sound business or technical reasons.

Our mantra is to put it on the calendar. Even if it’s a preapproved change and doesn’t need a vote, having it on the calendar helps with visibility. The calendar is the one-stop shop for scheduling and identifying change dependencies.“ – Wil Clark, Director of Service and Performance Management, University of North Texas Systems

Provide clear definitions of what goes on the change calendar and who’s responsible

Roles

  • The Change Manager will be responsible for creating and maintaining a change calendar.
  • Only the Change Manager can physically alter the calendar by adding a new change after the CAB has agreed upon a deployment date.
  • All other CAB members, IT support staff, and other impacted stakeholders should have access to the calendar on a read-only basis to prevent people from making unauthorized changes to deployment dates.

Inputs

  • Freeze periods for individual business departments/applications (e.g. finance month-end periods, HR payroll cycle, etc. – all to be investigated).
  • Maintenance windows and planned outage periods.
  • Project schedules, and upcoming major/medium changes.
  • Holidays.
  • Business hours (some departments work 9-5, others work different hours or in different time zones, and user acceptance testing may require business users to be available).

Guidelines

  • Business-defined freeze periods are the top priority.
  • No major or medium normal changes should occur during the week between Christmas and New Year’s Day.
  • Vendor SLA support hours are the preferred time for implementing changes.
  • The vacation calendar for IT will be considered for major changes.
  • Change priority: High > Medium > Low.
  • Minor changes and preapproved changes have the same priority and will be decided on a case-by-case basis.

The change calendar is a critical pre-requisite to change management in DevOps. Use the calendar to be proactive with proposed implementation dates and deconfliction before the change is finished.

4.1.1 Create Guidelines for Your Change Calendar

Input

  • Current change calendar guidelines

Output

  • Change calendar inputs and schedule checklist

Materials

Participants

  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  • Service Desk Manager
  • Operations (optional)
  1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
    • Example:
      • The change calendar/schedule includes:
        • Approved and scheduled normal changes.
        • Scheduled project work.
        • Scheduled maintenance windows.
        • Change freeze periods with affected users noted:
          • Daily/weekly freeze periods.
          • Monthly freeze periods.
          • Annual freeze periods.
          • Other critical business events.
  2. Create a checklist to run through before each change is scheduled:
    • Check the schedule and assess resource availability:
      • Will user productivity be impacted?
      • Are there available resources (people and systems) to implement the change?
      • Is the vendor available? Is there a significant cost attached to pushing change deployment before the regularly scheduled refresh?
      • Are there dependencies? Does the deployment of one change depend on the earlier deployment of another?
  3. Record your results in your Project Summary Template.

Start measuring the success of your change management project using three key metrics

Number of change-related incidents that occur each month

  • Each month, record the number of incidents that can be directly linked to a change. This can be done using an ITSM tool or manually by service desk staff.
  • This is a key success metric: if you are not tracking change-related incidents yet, start doing so as soon as possible. This is the metric that the CIO and business stakeholders will be most interested in because it impacts users directly.

Number of unauthorized changes applied each month

  • Each month, record the number of changes applied without approval. This is the best way to measure adherence to the process.
  • If this number decreases, it demonstrates a reduction in risk, as more changes are formally assessed and approved before being deployed.

Percentage of emergency changes

  • Each month, compare the number of emergency change requests to the total number of change requests.
  • Change requesters often designate changes as emergencies as a way of bypassing the process.
  • A reduction in emergency changes demonstrates that your process is operating smoothly and reduces the risk of deploying changes that have not been properly tested.

Info-Tech Insight

Start simple. Metrics can be difficult to tackle if you’re starting from scratch. While implementing your change management practice, use these three metrics as a starting point, since they correlate well with the success of change management overall. The following few slides provide more insight into creating metrics for your change process.

If you want more insight into your change process, measure the progress of each step in change management with metrics

Improve

  • Number of repeat failures (i.e. making the same mistake twice)
  • Number of changes converted to pre-approved
  • Number of changes converted from pre-approved back to normal

Request

  • What percentage of change requests have errors or lack appropriate support?
  • What percentage of change requests are actually projects, service requests, or operational tasks?
  • What percentage of changes have been requested before (i.e. documented)?

Assess

  • What percentage of change requests are out of scope?
  • What percentage of changes have been requested before (i.e. documented)?
  • What are the percentages of changes by category (normal, pre-approved, emergency)?

Plan

  • What percentage of change requests are reviewed by the CAB that should have been pre-approved or emergency (i.e. what percentage of changes are in the wrong category)?

Approve

  • Number of changes broken down by department (business unit/IT department to be used in making core/optional CAB membership more efficient)
  • Number of workflows that can be automated

Implement

  • Number of changes completed on schedule
  • Number of changes rolled back
  • What percentage of changes caused an incident?

Use metrics to inform project KPIs and CSFs

Leverage the metrics from the last slide and convert them to data communicable to IT, management, and leadership

  • To provide value, metrics and measurements must be actionable. What actions can be taken as a result of the data being presented?
  • If the metrics are not actionable, there is no value and you should question the use of the metric.
  • Data points in isolation are mostly meaningless to inform action. Observe trends in your metrics to inform your decisions.
  • Using a framework to develop measurements and metrics provides a defined methodology that enables a mapping of base measurements through CSFs.
  • Establishing the relationship increases the value that measurements provide.

Purposely use SDLC and change lifecycle metrics to find bottlenecks and automation candidates.

Metrics:

Metrics are easily measured datapoints that can be pulled from your change management tool. Examples: Number of changes implemented, number of changes without incident.

KPIs:

Key Performance Indicators are metrics presented in a way that is easily digestible by stakeholders in IT. Examples: Change efficiency, quality of changes.

CSFs:

Critical Success Factors are measures of the business success of change management taken by correlating the CSF with multiple KPIs. Examples: consistent and efficient change management process, a change process mapped to business needs

List in-scope metrics and reports and align them to benefits

Metric/Report (by team)Benefit
Total number of RFCs and percentages by category (pre-approved, normal, emergency, escalated support, expedited)
  • Understand change management activity
  • Tracking maturity growth
  • Identifying “hot spots”
Pre-approved change list (and additions/removals from the list) Workload and process streamlining (i.e. reduce “red tape” wherever possible)
Average time between RFC lifecycle stages (by service/application) Advance planning for proposed changes
Number of changes by service/application/hardware class
  • Identifying weaknesses in the architecture
  • Vendor-specific TCO calculations
Change triggers Business- vs. IT-initiated change
Number of RFCs by lifecycle stage Workload planning
List of incidents related to changes Visible failures of the CM process
Percentage of RFCs with a tested backout/validation plan Completeness of change planning
List of expedited changes Spotlighting poor planning and reducing the need for this category going forward (“The Hall of Shame”)
CAB approval rate Change coordinator alignment with CAB priorities – low approval rate indicates need to tighten gatekeeping by the change coordinator
Calendar of changes Planning

4.1.2 Determine Metrics, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and Critical Success Factors (CSFs)

Input

  • Current metrics

Output

  • List of trackable metrics, KPIs and CSFs

Materials

Participants

  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  • Service Desk Manager
  • Operations (optional)
  1. Draw three tables for metrics, KPIs, and CSFs.
  2. Starting with the CSF table, fill in all relevant CSFs that your group wishes to track and measure.
  3. Next, work to determine relevant KPIs correlated with the CSFs and metrics needed to measure the KPIs. Use the tables included below (taken from section 14 of the Change Management SOP) to guide the process.
  4. Record the results in the tables in section 14 of your Change Management SOP.
  5. Decide on where and when to review the metrics to discuss your change management strategy. Designate and owner and record in the RACI and Communications section of your Change Management SOP.
Ref #Metric

M1

Number of changes implemented for a time period
M2 Number of changes successfully implemented for a time period
M3 Number of changes implemented causing incidents
M4 Number of accepted known errors when change is implemented
M5 Total days for a change build (specific to each change)
M6 Number of changes rescheduled
M7 Number of training questions received following a change
Ref#KPIProduct
K1 Successful changes for a period of time (approach 100%) M2 / M1 x 100%
K2 Changes causing incidents (approach 0%) M3 / M1 x 100%
K3 Average days to implement a change ΣM5 / M1
K4 Change efficiency (approach 100%) [1 - (M6 / M1)] x 100%
K5 Quality of changes being implemented (approach 100%) [1 - (M4 / M1)] x 100%
K6 Change training efficiency (approach 100%) [1 - (M7 / M1)] x 100%
Ref#CSFIndicator
C1 Successful change management process producing quality changes K1, K5
C2 Consistent efficient change process K4, K6
C3 Change process maps to business needs K5, K6

Measure changes in selected metrics to evaluate success

Once you have implemented a standardized change management practice, your team’s goal should be to improve the process, year over year.

  • After a process change has been implemented, it’s important to regularly monitor and evaluate the CSFs, KPIs, and metrics you chose to evaluate. Examine whether the process change you implemented has actually resolved the issue or achieved the goal of the critical success factor.
  • Establish a schedule for regularly reviewing the key metrics. Assess changes in those metrics and determine progress toward reaching objectives.
  • In addition to reviewing CSFs, KPIs, and metrics, check in with the release management team and end users to measure their perceptions of the change management process once an appropriate amount of time has passed.
  • Ensure that metrics are telling the whole story and that reporting is honest in order to be informative.

Outcomes of standardizing change management should include:

  1. Improved efficiency, effectiveness, and quality of changes.
  2. Changes and processes are more aligned with the business needs and strategy.
  3. Improved maturity of change processes.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Make sure you’re measuring the right things and considering all sources of information. It’s very easy to put yourself in a position where you’re congratulating yourselves for improving on a specific metric such as number of releases per month, but satisfaction remains low.

4.1.3 Track and Record Metrics Using the Change Management Metrics Tool

Input

  • Current metrics

Output

  • List of trackable metrics, KPIs and CSFs to be observed over the length of a year

Materials

Participants

  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  • Service Desk Manager
  • Operations (optional)

Tracking the progress of metrics is paramount to the success of any change management process. Use Info-Tech’s Change Management Metrics Tool to record metrics and track your progress. This tool is intended to be a substitute for organizations who do not have the capability to track change-related metrics in their ITSM tool.

  1. Input metrics from the previous activity to track over the course of a year.
  2. To record your metrics, open the tool and go to tab 2. The tool is currently primed to record and track five metrics. If you need more than that, you can edit the list in the hidden calculations tab.
  3. To see the progress of your metrics, move to tab 3 to view a dashboard of all metrics in the tool.

Download the Change Management Metrics Tool

Case Study

A federal credit union was able to track maturity growth through the proper use of metrics.

Industry: Federal Credit Union (anonymous)

Source: Info-Tech Workshop

Challenge

At this federal credit union, the VP of IT wanted a tight set of metrics to engage with the business, communicate within IT, enable performance management of staff, and provide visibility into workload demands, among other requirements.

The organization was suffering from “metrics fatigue,” with multiple reports being generated from all groups within IT, to the point that weekly/monthly reports were being seen as spam.

Solution

Stakeholders were provided with an overview of change management benefits and were asked to identify one key attribute that would be useful to their specific needs.

Metrics were designed around the stakeholder needs, piloted with each stakeholder group, fine-tuned, and rolled out.

Some metrics could not be automated off-the-shelf and were rolled out in a manual fashion. These metrics were subsequently automated and finally made available through a dashboard.

Results

The business received clear guidance regarding estimated times to implement changes across different elements of the environment.

The IT managers were able to plan team workloads with visibility into upstream change activity.

Architects were able to identify vendors and systems that were the leading source of instability.

The VP of IT was able to track the maturity growth of the change management process and proactively engage with the business on identified hot spots.

Step 4.2

Implement the Project

Activities

4.2.1 Use a Communications Plan to Gain End User Buy-In

4.2.2 Create a Project Roadmap to Track Your Implementation Progress

Measure, Manage, and Maintain

Step 4.1: Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

Step 3.2: Implement the Project

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO/IT Director
  • IT Managers
  • Change Manager

Outcomes of this step

  • A communications plan for key messages to communicate to relevant stakeholders and audiences
  • A roadmap with assigned action items to implement change management

Success of the new process will depend on introducing change and gaining acceptance

Change management provides value by promptly evaluating and delivering changes required by the business and by minimizing disruption and rework caused by failed changes. Communication of your new change management process is key. If people do not understand the what and why, it will fail to provide the desired value.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Gather feedback from end users about the new process: if the process is too bureaucratic, end users are more likely to circumvent it.

Main Challenges with Communication

  • Many people fail before they even start because they are buried in a mess created before they arrived – either because of a failed attempt to get change management implemented or due to a complicated system that has always existed.
  • Many systems are maintained because “that’s the way it’s always been done.”
  • Organizations don’t know where to start; they think change management is too complex a process.
  • Each group needs to follow the same procedure – groups often have their own processes, but if they don’t agree with one another, this could cause an outage.

Educate affected stakeholders to prepare for organizational change

An organizational change management plan should be part of your change management project.

  • Educate stakeholders about:
    • The process change (describe it in a way that the user can understand and is clear and concise).
      • IT changes will be handled in a standardized and repeatable fashion to minimize change-related incidents.
    • Who is impacted?
      • All users.
    • How are they impacted?
      • All change requests will be made using a standard form and will not be deployed until formal approval is received.
    • Change messaging.
      • How to communicate the change (benefits).
    • Learning and development – training your users on the change.
      • Develop and deliver training session on the Change Management SOP to familiarize users with this new method of handling IT change.

Host a lunch-and-learn session

  • For the initial deployment, host a lunch-and-learn session to educate the business on the change management practice. Relevant stakeholders of affected departments should host it and cover the following topics:
  • What is change management (change management/change control)?
  • The value of change management.
  • What the Change Management SOP looks like.
  • Who is involved in the change management process (the CAB, etc.)?
  • What constitutes a pre-approved change and an emergency change?
  • An overview of the process, including how to avoid unauthorized changes.
  • Who should they contact in case of questions?

Communicate the new process to all affected stakeholders

Do not surprise users or support staff with changes. This will result in lost productivity and low satisfaction with IT services.

  • User groups and the business need to be given sufficient notice of an impending change.
  • This will allow them to make appropriate plans to accept the change, minimizing the impact of the change on productivity.
  • A communications plan will be documented in the RFC while the release is being built and tested.
  • It’s the responsibility of the change team to execute on the communications plan.

Info-Tech Insight

The success of change communication can be measured by monitoring the number of service desk tickets related to a change that was not communicated to users.

Communication is crucial to the integration and overall implementation of your change management initiative. An effective communications plan will:

  • Gain support from management at the project proposal phase.
  • Create end-user buy-in once the program is set to launch.
  • Maintain the presence of the program throughout the business.
  • Instill ownership throughout the business from top-level management to new hires.

Create your communications plan to anticipate challenges, remove obstacles, and ensure buy-in

Management

Technicians

Business Stakeholders

Provide separate communications to key stakeholder groups

Why? What problems are you trying to solve?

What? What processes will it affect (that will affect me)?

Who? Who will be affected? Who do I go to if I have issues with the new process?

When? When will this be happening? When will it affect me?

How? How will these changes manifest themselves?

Goal? What is the final goal? How will it benefit me?

Info-Tech Insight

Pay close attention to the medium of communication. For example, stakeholders on their feet all day would not be as receptive to an email communication compared to those who primarily work in front of a computer. Put yourself into various stakeholders’ shoes to craft a tailored communication of change management.

4.2.1 Use a Communications Plan to Gain End User Buy-In

Input

  • List of stakeholder groups for change management

Output

  • Tailored communications plans for various stakeholder groups

Materials

Participants

  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  • Service Desk Manager
  • Operations (optional)
  1. Using Info-Tech’s Change Management Communications Plan, identify key audiences or stakeholder groups that will be affected by the new change management practice.
  2. For each group requiring a communications plan, identify the following:
    • The benefits for that group of individuals.
    • The impact the change will have on them.
    • The best communication method(s) for them.
    • The time frame of the communication.
  3. Complete this information in a table like the one below:
GroupBenefitsImpactMethodTimeline
IT Standardized change process All changes must be reviewed and approved Poster campaign 6 months
End Users Decreased wait time for changes Formal process for RFCs Lunch-and-learn sessions 3 months
Business Reduced outages Increased involvement in planning and approvals Monthly reports 1 year
  1. Discuss the communications plan:
    • Will this plan ensure that users are given adequate opportunities to accept the changes being deployed?
    • Is the message appropriate for each audience? Is the format appropriate for each audience?
    • Does the communication include training where necessary to help users adopt any new functions/workflows being introduced?

Download the Change Management Communications Plan

Present your SOP to key stakeholders and obtain their approval

Now that you have completed your Change Management SOP, the final step is to get sign-off from senior management to begin the rollout process.

Know your audience:

  • Determine the service management stakeholders who will be included in the audience for your presentation.
  • You want your presentation to be succinct and hard hitting. Management’s time is tight and they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery.
  • Briefly speak about the need for more formal change management and emphasize the benefits of implementing a more formal process with a SOP.
  • Present your current state assessment results to provide context before presenting the SOP itself.
  • As with any other foundational activity, be prepared with some quick wins to gain executive attention.
  • Be prepared to review with both technical and less technical stakeholders.

Info-Tech Insight

The support of senior executive stakeholders is critical to the success of your SOP rollout. Try to wow them with project benefits and make sure they know about the risks/pain points.

Download the Change Management Project Summary Template

4.2.2 Create a Project Roadmap to Track Your Implementation Progress

Input

  • List of implementation tasks

Output

  • Roadmap and timeline for change management implementation

Materials

Participants

  • Change Manager
  • Members of the Change Advisory Board
  • Service Desk Manager
  • Operations (optional)
  1. Info-Tech’s Change Management Roadmap Tool helps you identify and prioritize tasks that need to be completed for the change management implementation project.
  2. Use this tool to identify each action item that will need to be completed as part of the change management initiative. Chart each action item, assign an owner, define the duration, and set a completion date.
  3. Use the resulting rocket diagram as a guide to task completion as you work toward your future state.

Download the Change Management Roadmap Tool

Case Study (part 4 of 4)

Intel implemented a robust change management process.

Industry: Technology

Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

Challenge

Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

Solution

Intel had its new change management program in place and the early milestones planned, but one key challenge with any new project is communication.

The company also needed to navigate the simplification of a previously complex process; end users could be familiar with any of the 37 different change processes or 25 different change management systems of record.

Top-level buy-in was another concern.

Results

Intel first communicated the process changes by publishing the vision and strategy for the project with top management sponsorship.

The CIO published all of the new change policies, which were supported by the Change Governance Council.

Intel cited the reason for success as the designation of a Policy and Guidance Council – a group designed to own communication and enforcement of the new policies and processes put in place.

Summary of Accomplishment

Problem Solved

You now have an outline of your new change management process. The hard work starts now for an effective implementation. Make use of the communications plan to socialize the new process with stakeholders and the roadmap to stay on track.

Remember as you are starting your implementation to keep your documents flexible and treat them as “living documents.” You will likely need to tweak and refine the processware and templates several times to continually improve the process. Furthermore, don’t shy away from seeking feedback from your stakeholders to gain buy-in.

Lastly, keep an eye on your progress with objective, data-driven metrics. Leverage the trends in your data to drive your decisions. Be sure to revisit the maturity assessment not only to measure and visualize your progress, but to gain insight into your next steps.

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

Contact your account representative for more information.

workshops@infotech.com

1-888-670-8889

Additional Support

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic office in Toronto, Ontario, Canada to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

Contact your account representative for more information.

workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

1.1.2 Complete a Change Management Maturity Assessment

Run through the change management maturity assessment with tailored commentary for each action item outlining context and best practices.

2.2.1 Plot the Process for a Normal Change

Build a normal change process using Info-Tech’s Change Management Process Library template with an analyst helping you to right size the process for your organization.

Related Info-Tech Research

Standardize the Service Desk

Improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meeting SLAs.

Stabilize Release and Deployment Management

Maintain both speed and control while improving the quality of deployments and releases within the infrastructure team.

Incident and Problem Management

Don’t let persistent problems govern your department.

Select Bibliography

AXELOS Limited. ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4th edition. TSO, 2019, pp. 118–120.

Behr, Kevin and George Spafford. The Visible Ops Handbook: Implementing ITIL in 4 Practical and Auditable Steps. IT Revolution Press. 2013.

BMC. “ITIL Change Management.” BMC Software Canada, 22 December 2016.

Brown, Vance. “Change Management: The Greatest ROI of ITIL.” Cherwell Service Management.

Cisco. “Change Management: Best Practices.” Cisco, 10 March 2008.

Grove, Daniel. “Case Study ITIL Change Management Intel Corporation.” PowerShow, 2005.

ISACA. “COBIT 5: Enabling Processes.” ISACA, 2012.

Jantti, M. and M. Kainulainen. “Exploring an IT Service Change Management Process: A Case Study.” ICDS 2011: The Fifth International Conference on Digital Society, 23 Feb. 2011.

Murphy, Vawns. “How to Assess Changes.” The ITSM Review, 29 Jan. 2016.

Nyo, Isabel. “Best Practices for Change Management in the Age of DevOps.” Atlassian Engineering, 12 May 2021.

Phillips, Katherine W., Katie A. Liljenquist, and Margaret A. Neale. “Better Decisions Through Diversity.” Kellogg Insight, 1 Oct. 2010.

Pink Elephant. “Best Practices for Change Management.” Pink Elephant, 2005.

Sharwood, Simon. “Google broke its own cloud by doing two updates at once.” The Register, 24 Aug. 2016.

SolarWinds. “How to Eliminate the No: 1 Cause of Network Downtime.” SolarWinds Tech Tips, 25 Apr. 2014.

The Stationery Office. “ITIL Service Transition: 2011.” The Stationary Office, 29 July 2011.

UCISA. “ITIL – A Guide to Change Management.” UCISA.

Zander, Jason. “Final Root Cause Analysis and Improvement Areas: Nov 18 Azure Storage Service Interruption.” Microsoft Azure: Blog and Updates, 17 Dec. 2014.

Appendix I: Expedited Changes

Employ the expedited change to promote process adherence

In many organizations, there are changes which may not fit into the three prescribed categories. The reason behind why the expedited category may be needed generally falls between two possibilities:

  1. External drivers dictate changes via mandates which may not fall within the normal change cycle. A CIO, judge, state/provincial mandate, or request from shared services pushes a change that does not fall within a normal change cycle. However, there is no imminent outage (therefore it is not an emergency). In this case, an expedited change can proceed. Communicate to the change requester that IT and the change build team will still do their best to implement the change without issue, but any extra risk of implementing this expedited change (compared to an normal change) will be absorbed by the change requester.
  2. The change requester did not prepare for the change adequately. This is common if a new change process is being established (and stakeholders are still adapting to the process). Change requesters or the change build team may request the change to be done by a certain date that does not fall within the normal change cycle, or they simply did not give the CAB enough time to vet the change. In this case, you may use the expedited category as a metric (or a “Hall of Shame” example). If you identify a department or individual that frequently request expedited changes, use the expedited category as a means to educate them about the normal change to discourage the behavior moving forward.

Two possible ways to build an expedited change category”

  1. Build the category similar to an emergency change. In this case, one difference would be the time allotted to fully obtain authorization of the change from the E-CAB and business owner before implementing the change (as opposed to the emergency change workflow).
  2. Have the expedited change reflect the normal change workflow. In this case, all the same steps of the normal change workflow are followed except for expedited timelines between processes. This may include holding an impromptu CAB meeting to authorize the change.

Example process: Expedited Change Process

The image is a flowchart, showing the process for Expedited Change.

For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

Appendix II: Optimize IT Change Management in a DevOps Environment

Change Management cannot be ignored because you are DevOps or Agile

But it can be right-sized.

The core tenets of change management still apply no matter the type of development environment an organization has. Changes in any environment carry risk of degrading functionality, and must therefore be vetted. However, the amount of work and rigor put into different stages of the change life cycle can be altered depending on the maturity of the development workflows. The following are several stage gates for change management that MUST be considered if you are a DevOps or Agile shop:

  • Intake assessment (separation of changes from projects, service requests, operational tasks)
    • Within a DevOps or Agile environment, many of the application changes will come directly from the SDLC and projects going live. It does not mean a change must go through CAB, but leveraging the pre-approved category allows for an organization to stick to development lifecycles without being heavily bogged down by change bureaucracy.
  • Technical review
    • Leveraging automation, release contingencies, and the current SDLC documentation to decrease change risk allows for various changes to be designated as pre-approved.
  • Authorization
    • Define the authorization and dependencies of a change early in the lifecycle to gain authorization and necessary signoffs.
  • Documentation/communication
    • Documentation and communication are post-implementation activities that cannot be ignored. If documentation is required throughout the SDLC, then design the RFC to point to the correct documentation instead of duplicating information.

"Understand that process is hard and finding a solution that fits every need can be tricky. With this change management process we do not try to solve every corner case so much as create a framework by which best judgement can be used to ensure maximum availability of our platforms and services while still complying with our regulatory requirements and making positive changes that will delight our customers.“ -IT Director, Information Cybersecurity Organization

Five principals for implementing change in DevOps

Follow these best practices to make sure your requirements are solid:

People

The core differences between an Agile or DevOps transition and a traditional approach are the restructuring and the team behind it. As a result, the stakeholders of change management must be onboard for the process to work. This is the most difficult problem to solve if it’s an issue, but open avenues of feedback for a process build is a start.

DevOps Lifecycles

  • Plan the dev lifecycle so people can’t skirt it. Ensure the process has automated checks so that it’s more work to skirt the system than it is to follow it. Make the right process the process of least resistance.
  • Plan changes from the start to ensure that cross-dependencies are identified early and that the proposed implementation date is deconflicted and visible to other change requesters and change stakeholders.

Automation

Automation comes in many forms and is well documented in many development workflows. Having automated signoffs for QA/security checks and stakeholders/cross dependency owner sign offs may not fully replace the CAB but can ease the burden on discussions before implementation.

Contingencies

Canary releases, phased releases, dark releases, and toggles are all options you can employ to reduce risk during a release. Furthermore, building in contingencies to the test/rollback plan decreases the risk of the change by decreasing the factor of likelihood.

Continually Improve

Building change from the ground up doesn’t meant the process has to be fully fledged before launch. Iterative improvements are possible before achieving an optimal state. Having the proper metrics on the pain points and bottlenecks in the process can identify areas for automation and improvement.

Increasing the proportion of pre-approved changes

Leverage the traditional change infrastructure to deploy changes quickly while keeping your risk low.

  • To designate a change as a pre-approved change it must have a low risk rating (based on impact and likelihood). Fortunately, many of the changes within the Agile framework are designed to be small and lower risk (at least within application development). Putting in the work ahead of time to document these changes, template RFCs, and document the dependencies for various changes allows for a shift in the proportion of pre-approved changes.
  • The designation of pre-approved changes is an ongoing process. This is not an overnight initiative. Measure the proportion of changes by category as a metric, setting goals and interim goals to shift the change proportion to a desired ratio.

The image is a bar graph, with each bar having 3 colour-coded sections: Emergency, Normal, and Pre-Approved. The first bar is before, where the largest change category is Normal. The second bar is after, and the largest change category is Pre-Approved.

Turn your CAB into a virtual one

  • The CAB does not have to fully disappear in a DevOps environment. If the SDLC is built in a way that authorizes changes through peer reviews and automated checks, by the time it’s deployed, the job of the CAB should have already been completed. Then the authorization stage-gate (traditionally, the CAB) shifts to earlier in the process, reducing the need for an actual CAB meeting. However, the change must still be communicated and documented, even if it’s a pre-approved change.
  • As the proportion of changes shifts from a high degree of normal changes to a high degree of pre-approved changes, the need for CAB meetings should decrease even further. As an end-state, you may reserve actual CAB meetings for high-profile changes (as defined by risk).
  • Lastly, change management does not disappear as a process. Periodic reviews of change management metrics and the pre-approved change list must still be completed.

Initiate Your Service Management Program

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}398|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Service Management
  • Parent Category Link: /service-management
  • IT organizations continue attempting to implement service management, often based on ITIL, with limited success and without visible value.
  • More than half of service management implementations have failed beyond simply implementing the service desk and the incident, change, and request management processes.
  • Organizational structure, goals, and cultural factors are not considered during service management implementation and improvement.
  • The business lacks engagement and understanding of service management.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Service management is an organizational approach. Focus on producing successful and valuable services and service outcomes for the customers.
  • All areas of the organization are accountable for governing and executing service management. Ensure that you create a service management strategy that improves business outcomes and provides the value and quality expected.

Impact and Result

  • Identified structure for how your service management model should be run and governed.
  • Identified forces that impact your ability to oversee and drive service management success.
  • Mitigation approach to restraining forces.

Initiate Your Service Management Program Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read this Executive Brief to understand why service management implementations often fail and why you should establish governance for service management.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Identify the level of oversight you need

Use Info-Tech’s methodology to establish an effective service management program with proper oversight.

  • Service Management Program Initiation Plan
[infographic]

Create a Transparent and Defensible IT Budget

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}291|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $29,682 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 12 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
  • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
  • IT struggles to gain budget approval year after year, largely driven by a few key factors:
    • For a long time, IT has been viewed as a cost center whose efficiency needs to be increasingly optimized over time. IT’s relationship to strategy is not yet understood or established in many organizations.
    • IT is one of the biggest areas of cost for many organizations. Often, executives don’t understand or even believe that all that IT spending is necessary to advance the organization’s objectives, let alone keep it up and running.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Internal and external obstacles beyond IT’s control make these challenges with gaining IT budget approval even harder to overcome:

  • Economic pressures can quickly drive IT’s budgetary focus from strategic back to tactical.
  • Corporate-driven categorizations of expenditure, plus disconnected approval mechanisms for capital vs. operational spend, hide key interdependencies and other aspects of IT’s financial reality.
  • Connecting the dots between IT activities and business benefits rarely forms a straight line.

Impact and Result

  • CIOs need a straightforward way to create and present an approval-ready budget.
    • Info-Tech recognizes that connecting the dots to demonstrate value is key to budgetary approval.
    • Info-Tech also recognizes that key stakeholders require different perspectives on the IT budget.
    • This blueprint provides a framework, method, and templated exemplars for creating and presenting an IT budget to stakeholders that will speed up the approval process and ensure more of it is approved.

Create a Transparent and Defensible IT Budget Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Create a Transparent and Defensible IT Budget Storyboard – A step-by-step guide to developing a proposed IT budget that’s sensitive to stakeholder perspectives and ready to approve.

This deck applies Info-Tech’s proven ITFM Cost Model to the IT budgeting process and offers five phases that cover the purpose of your IT budget and what it means to your stakeholders, key budgeting resources, forecasting, selecting and fine-tuning your budget message, and delivering your IT budget executive presentation for approval.

  • Create a Transparent and Defensible IT Budget Storyboard

2. IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook – A structured Excel tool that allows you to forecast your IT budget for next fiscal year across four key stakeholder views, analyze it in the context of past expenditure, and generate high-impact visualizations.

This Excel workbook offers a step-by-step approach for mapping your historical and forecasted IT expenditure and creating visualizations you can use to populate your IT budget executive presentation.

  • IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

3. Sample: IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook – A completed IT Cost Forecasting & Budgeting Workbook to review and use as an example.

This sample workbook offers a completed example of the “IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook” that accompanies the Create a Transparent & Defensible IT Budget blueprint.

  • Sample: IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

4. IT Budget Executive Presentation – A PowerPoint template and full example for pulling together your proposed IT budget presentation.

This presentation template offers a recommended structure for presenting your proposed IT budget for next fiscal year to your executive stakeholders for approval. 

[infographic]

Workshop: Create a Transparent and Defensible IT Budget

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Get into budget-starting position

The Purpose

Understand your IT budget in the context of your organization and key stakeholders, as well as gather your budgeting data and review previous years’ financial performance.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand your organization’s budget process and culture.

Understand your stakeholders’ priorities and perspectives regarding your IT budget.

Gain insight into your historical IT expenditure.

Set next fiscal year’s IT budget targets.

Activities

1.1 Review budget purpose. 

1.2 Understand stakeholders and approvers.

1.3 Gather your data.

1.4 Map and review historical financial performance.

1.5 Rationalize last year’s variances and set next year's budget targets.

Outputs

Budget process and culture assessment.

Stakeholder alignment assessment and pre-selling strategy.

Data prepared for next steps.

Mapped historical expenditure.

Next fiscal year’s budget targets.

2 Forecast project CapEx

The Purpose

Develop a forecast of next fiscal year’s proposed capital IT expenditure driven by your organization’s strategic projects.

Key Benefits Achieved

Develop project CapEx forecast according to the four different stakeholder views of Info-Tech’s ITFM Cost Model.

Ensure that no business projects that have IT implications (and their true costs) are missed.

Activities

2.1 Review the ITFM cost model

2.2 List projects.

2.3 Review project proposals and costs.

2.4 Map and tally total project CapEx.

2.5 Develop and/or confirm project-business alignment, ROI, and cost-benefit statements.

Outputs

Confirmed ITFM cost mdel.

A list of projects.

Confirmed list of project proposals and costs.

Forecasted project-based capital expenditure mapped against the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.

Projects financials in line.

3 Forecast non-project CapEx and OpEx

The Purpose

Develop a forecast of next fiscal year’s proposed “business as usual” non-project capital and operating IT expenditure.

Key Benefits Achieved

Develop non-project CapEx and non-project OpEx forecasts according to the four different stakeholder views of Info-Tech’s ITFM Cost Model.

Make “business as usual” costs fully transparent and rationalized.

Activities

3.1 Review non-project capital and costs. 

3.2 Review non-project operations and costs.

3.3 Map and tally total non-project CapEx and OpEx.

3.4 Develop and/or confirm proposed expenditure rationales.

Outputs

Confirmation of non-project capital and costs.

Confirmation of non-project operations and costs.

Forecasted non-project-based capital expenditure and operating expenditure against the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.

Proposed expenditure rationales.

4 Finalize budget and develop presentation

The Purpose

Aggregate and sanity-check your forecasts, harden your rationales, and plan/develop the content for your IT budget executive presentation.

Key Benefits Achieved

Create a finalized proposed IT budget for next fiscal year that offers different views on your budget for different stakeholders.

Select content for your IT budget executive presentation that will resonate with your stakeholders and streamline approval.

Activities

4.1 Aggregate forecast totals and sanity check.

4.2 Generate graphical outputs and select content to include in presentation.

4.3 Fine-tune rationales.

4.4 Develop presentation and write commentary.

Outputs

Final proposed IT budget for next fiscal year.

Graphic outputs selected for presentation.

Rationales for budget.

Content for IT Budget Executive Presentation.

5 Next steps and wrap-up (offsite)

The Purpose

Finalize and polish the IT budget executive presentation.

Key Benefits Achieved

An approval-ready presentation that showcases your business-aligned proposed IT budget backed up with rigorous rationales.

Activities

5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

Outputs

Completed IT Budget Executive Presentation.

Review scheduled.

Further reading

Create a Transparent and Defensible IT Budget

Build in approvability from the start.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst Perspective

A budget’s approvability is about transparency and rationale, not the size of the numbers.

Jennifer Perrier.

It’s that time of year again – budgeting. Most organizations invest a lot of time and effort in a capital project selection process, tack a few percentage points onto last year’s OpEx, do a round of trimming, and call it a day. However, if you want to improve IT financial transparency and get your business stakeholders and the CFO to see the true value of IT, you need to do more than this.

Yourcrea IT budget is more than a once-a-year administrative exercise. It’s an opportunity to educate, create partnerships, eliminate nasty surprises, and build trust. The key to doing these things rests in offering a range of budget perspectives that engage and make sense to your stakeholders, as well as providing iron-clad rationales that tie directly to organizational objectives.

The work of setting and managing a budget never stops – it’s a series of interactions, conversations, and decisions that happen throughout the year. If you take this approach to budgeting, you’ll greatly enhance your chances of creating and presenting a defensible annual budget that gets approved the first time around.

Jennifer Perrier
Principal Research Director
IT Financial Management Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Common Obstacles

Info-Tech’s Approach

IT struggles to gain budget approval year after year, largely driven by a few key factors:

  • For a long time, IT has been viewed as a cost center whose efficiency needs to be increasingly optimized over time. IT’s relationship to strategy is not yet understood or established in many organizations.
  • IT is one of the biggest areas of cost for many organizations. Often, executives don’t understand, or even believe, that all that IT spending is necessary to advance the organization’s objectives, let alone keep it running.

Internal and external obstacles beyond IT’s control make these challenges even harder to overcome:

  • Economic pressures can quickly drive IT’s budgetary focus from strategic back to tactical.
  • Corporate-driven categorizations of expenditure, plus disconnected approval mechanisms for capital vs. operational spend, hide key interdependencies and other aspects of IT’s financial reality.
  • Connecting the dots between IT activities and business benefits rarely forms a straight line.

CIOs need a straightforward way to create and present an approval-ready budget.

  • Info-Tech recognizes that connecting the dots to demonstrate value is key to budgetary approval.
  • Info-Tech also recognizes that key stakeholders require different perspectives on the IT budget.
  • This blueprint provides a framework, method, and templated exemplars for creating and presenting an IT budget to stakeholders. It will speed the approval process and ensure more of it is approved.

Info-Tech Insight
CIOs need a straightforward way to create and present an approval-ready IT budget that demonstrates the value IT is delivering to the business and speaks directly to different stakeholder priorities.

IT struggles to get budgets approved due to low transparency and failure to engage

Capability challenges

Administrative challenges

Operating challenges

Visibility challenges

Relationship challenges

IT is seen as a cost center, not an enabler or driver of business strategy.

IT leaders are not seen as business leaders.

Economic pressures drive knee-jerk redirection of IT’s budgetary focus from strategic initiatives back to operational tactics.

The vast majority of IT’s
real-life expenditure is in the form of operating expenses i.e. keeping the lights on.

Most business leaders don’t know how many IT resources their business units are really consuming.

Other departments in the organization see IT as a competitor for funding, not a business partner.

Lack of transparency

IT and the business aren’t speaking the same language.

IT leaders don’t have sufficient access to information about, or involvement in, business decisions and objectives.

Outmoded finance department expenditure categorizations don’t accommodate IT’s real cost categories.

IT absorbs unplanned spend because business leaders don’t realize or consider the impact of their decisions on IT.

The business doesn’t understand what IT is, what it does, or what it can offer.

IT and the business don’t have meaningful conversations about IT costs, opportunities, or investments.

Defining and demonstrating the value of IT and its investments isn’t straightforward.

IT leaders may not have the financial literacy or acumen needed to translate IT activities and needs into business terms.

CapEx and OpEx approval and tracking mechanisms are handled separately when, in reality, they’re highly interdependent.

IT activities usually have an indirect relationship with revenue, making value calculations more complicated.

Much of IT, especially infrastructure, is invisible to the business and is only noticed if it’s not working.

The relationship between IT spending and how it supports achievement of business objectives is not clear.

Reflect on the numbers…

The image contains a screenshot of five graphs. The graphs depict Cost and budget management, Cost optimization, Business value, perception of improvement, and intensity of business frustration.

To move forward, first you need to get unstuck

Today’s IT budgeting challenges have been growing for a long time. Overcoming these challenges means untangling yourself from the grip of the root causes.

Principle 1:
IT and the business are fighting diverging forces. Technology has changed monumentally, while financial management hasn’t changed much at all.

Principle 2:
Different stakeholders have different perspectives on your IT budget. Learn and acknowledge what’s important to them so that you can potentially deliver it.

Principle 3:
Connecting the dots to clearly demonstrate IT’s value to the organization is the key to budgetary approval. But those connected dots don’t always result in a straight line.

The three principles above are all about IT’s changing relationship to the business. IT leaders need a systematic and repeatable approach to budgeting that addresses these principles by:

  • Clearly illustrating the alignment between the IT budget and business objectives.
  • Showing stakeholders the overall value that IT investment will bring them.
  • Demonstrating where IT is already realizing efficiencies and economies of scale.
  • Gaining consensus on the IT budget from all parties affected by it.

“The culture of the organization will drive your success with IT financial management.”

– Dave Kish, Practice Lead, IT Financial Management Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Info-Tech’s approach

CIOs need a straightforward way to convince approval-granting CFOs, CEOs, boards, and committees to spend money on IT to advance the organization’s strategies.

IT budget approval cycle

The image contains a screenshot of the IT budget approval cycle.

The Info-Tech difference:

This blueprint provides a framework, method, and templated exemplars for building and presenting your IT budget to different stakeholders. These will speed the approval process and ensure that a higher percentage of your proposed spend is approved.

Info-Tech’s methodology for how to create a transparent and defensible it budget

1. Lay Your Foundation

2. Get Into Budget-Starting Position

3. Develop Your Forecasts

4. Build Your Proposed Budget

5. Create and Deliver Your Budget Presentation

Phase steps

  1. Understand budget purpose
  2. Know your stakeholders
  3. Continuously pre-sell your budget
  1. Gather your data
  2. Review historical performance
  3. Set budget goals
  1. Develop alternate scenarios
  2. Develop project CapEx forecasts
  3. Develop non-project CapEx and OpEx forecasts
  1. Aggregate your forecasts
  2. Stress-test your forecasts
  3. Challenge and perfect your rationales
  1. Plan your presentation content
  2. Build your budget presentation
  3. Present, finalize, and submit your budget

Phase outcomes

An understanding of your stakeholders and what your IT budget means to them.

Information and goals for planning next fiscal year’s IT budget.

Completed forecasts for project and non-project CapEx and OpEx.

A final IT budget for proposal including scenario-based alternatives.

An IT budget presentation.

Insight summary

Overarching insight: Create a transparent and defensible IT budget

CIOs need a straightforward way to create and present an approval-ready IT budget that demonstrates the value IT is delivering to the business and speaks directly to different stakeholder priorities.

Phase 1 insight: Lay your foundation

IT needs to step back and look at it’s budget-creation process by first understanding exactly what a budget is intended to do and learning what the IT budget means to IT’s various business stakeholders.

Phase 2 Insight: Get into budget-starting position

Presenting your proposed IT budget in the context of past IT expenditure demonstrates a pattern of spend behavior that is fundamental to next year’s expenditure rationale.

Phase 3 insight: Develop your forecasts

Forecasting costs according to a range of views, including CapEx vs. OpEx and project vs. non-project, and then positioning it according to different stakeholder perspectives, is key to creating a transparent budget.

Phase 4 insight: Build your proposed budget

Fine-tuning and hardening the rationales behind every aspect of your proposed budget is one of the most important steps for facilitating the budgetary approval process and increasing the amount of your budget that is ultimately approved.

Phase 5 insight: Create and deliver your budget presentation

Selecting the right content to present to your various stakeholders at the right level of granularity ensures that they see their priorities reflected in IT’s budget, driving their interest and engagement in IT financial concerns.

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

This Excel tool allows you to capture and work through all elements of your IT forecasting from the perspective of multiple key stakeholders and generates compelling visuals to choose from to populate your final executive presentation.

The image contains a screenshot of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

Also download this completed sample:

Sample: IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

Key deliverable

IT Budget Executive Presentation Template

Phase 5: Create a focused presentation for your proposed IT budget that will engage your audience and facilitate approval.

The image contains a screenshot of the IT Budget Executive Presentation Template.

Blueprint benefits

IT benefits

Business benefits

  • Improve IT’s overall financial management capability.
  • Streamline the administration of annual IT budget development.
  • Legitimize the true purpose and value of IT operations and associated expenditure.
  • Create visibility on the part of both IT and the business into IT’s mandate, what needs to be in place, and what it costs to fund it.
  • Foster better relationships with business stakeholders by demonstrating IT’s business and financial competency, working in partnership with business leaders on IT investment decisions, and building mutual trust.
  • Better understand the different types of expenditure occurring in IT, including project CapEx, non-project CapEx, and non-project OpEx.
  • Gain insight into the relationship between one-time CapEx on ongoing OpEx and its ramifications.
  • See business priorities and concerns clearly reflected in IT’s budget down to the business-unit level.
  • Receive thorough return on investment calculations and cost-benefit analyses for all aspects of IT expenditure.
  • Understand the direct relationship between IT expenditure and the depth, breadth, and quality of IT service delivery to the business.

Measure the value of this blueprint

Ease budgetary approval and improve its accuracy.

Near-term goals

  • Percentage of budget approved: Target 95%
  • Percentage of IT-driven projects approved: Target 100%
  • Number of iterations/re-drafts required to proposed budget: One iteration

Long-term goal

  • Variance in budget vs. actuals: Actuals less than budget and within 2%

In Phases 1 and 2 of this blueprint, we will help you understand what your approvers are looking for and gather the right data and information.

In Phase 3, we will help you forecast your IT costs it terms of four stakeholder views so you can craft a more meaningful IT budget narrative.

In Phases 4 and 5, we will help you build a targeted presentation for your proposed IT budget.

Value you will receive:

  1. Increased forecast accuracy through using a sound cost-forecasting methodology.
  2. Improved budget accuracy by applying more thorough and transparent techniques.
  3. Increased budget transparency and completeness by soliciting input earlier and validating budgeting information.
  4. Stronger alignment between IT and enterprise goals through building a better understanding of the business values and using language they understand.
  5. A more compelling budget presentation by offering targeted, engaging, and rationalized information.
  6. A faster budgeting rework process by addressing business stakeholder concerns the first time.

An analogy…

“A budget isn’t like a horse and cart – you can’t get in front of it or behind it like that. It’s more like a river…

When developing an annual budget, you have a good idea of what the OpEx will be – last year’s with an annual bump. You know what that boat is like and if the river can handle it.

But sometimes you want to float bigger boats, like capital projects. But these boats don’t start at the same place at the same time. Some are full of holes. And does your river even have the capacity to handle a boat of that size?

Some organizations force project charters by a certain date and only these are included in the following year’s budget. The project doesn’t start until 8-12 months later and the charter goes stale. The river just can’t float all these boats! It’s a failed model. You have to have a great governance processes and clear prioritization so that you can dynamically approve and get boats on the river throughout the year.”

– Mark Roman, Managing Partner, Executive Services,
Info-Tech Research Group and Former Higher Education CIO

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

Guided Implementation

“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

Workshop

“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

Consulting

“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Guided Implementation

Phase 1: Lay Your Foundation

Phase 2: Get Into Budget-Starting Position

Phase 3: Develop Your Forecasts

Phase 4: Build Your Proposed Budget

Phase 5: Create and Deliver Your Budget Presentation

Call #1: Discuss the IT budget, processes, and stakeholders in the context of your unique organization.

Call #2: Review data requirements for transparent budgeting.

Call #3: Set budget goals and process improvement metrics.

Call #4: Review project CapEx forecasts.

Call #5: Review non-project CapEx and OpEx forecasts.

Call #6: Review proposed budget logic and rationales.

Call #7: Identify presentation inclusions and exclusions.

Call #8: Review final budget presentation.

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

Workshop Overview

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5

Get into budget-starting position

Forecast project CapEx

Forecast non-project CapEx and OpEx

Finalize budget and develop presentation

Next Steps and
Wrap-Up (offsite)

Activities

1.1 Review budget purpose.

1.2 Understand stakeholders and approvers.

1.3 Gather your data.

1.4 Map and review historical financial performance.

1.5 Rationalize last year’s variances.

1.5 Set next year’s budget targets.

2.1 Review the ITFM Cost Model.

2.2 List projects.

2.3 Review project proposals and costs.

2.4 Map and tally total project CapEx.

2.5 Develop and/or confirm project-business alignment, ROI, and cost-benefit statements.

3.1 Review non-project capital and costs.

3.2 Review non-project operations and costs.

3.3 Map and tally total non-project CapEx and OpEx.

3.4 Develop and/or confirm proposed expenditure rationales.

4.1 Aggregate forecast totals and sanity check.

4.2 Generate graphical outputs and select content to include in presentation.

4.3 Fine-tune rationales.

4.4 Develop presentation and write commentary.

5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

Deliverables

  1. Budget process and culture assessment.
  2. Stakeholder alignment assessment and pre-selling strategy.
  3. Mapped historical expenditure.
  4. Next fiscal year’s budget targets.
  1. Forecasted project-based capital expenditure mapped against the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
  1. Forecasted non-project-based capital expenditure and operating expenditure against the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
  1. Final proposed IT budget for next fiscal year.
  2. Plan and build content for IT Budget Executive Presentation.
  1. Completed IT Budget Executive Presentation.

Phase 1

Lay Your Foundation

Lay Your
Foundation

Get Into Budget-Starting Position

Develop Your
Forecasts

Build Your
Proposed Budget

Create and Deliver Your Presentation

1.1 Understand what your budget is
and does

1.2 Know your stakeholders

1.3 Continuously pre-sell your budget

2.1 Assemble your resources

2.2 Understand the four views of the ITFM Cost Model

2.3 Review last year’s budget vs.
actuals and five-year historical trends

2.4 Set your high-level goals

3.1 Develop assumptions and
alternative scenarios

3.2 Forecast your project CapEx

3.3 Forecast your non-project CapEx and OpEx

4.1 Aggregate your numbers

4.2 Stress test your forecasts

4.3 Challenge and perfect your
rationales

5.1 Plan your content

5.2 Build your presentation

5.3 Present to stakeholders

5.4 Make final adjustments and submit your IT budget

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Seeing your budget as a living governance tool
  • Understanding the point of view of different stakeholders
  • Gaining tactics for setting future IT spend expectations

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Lay Your Foundation

Before starting any process, you need to understand exactly why you’re doing it.

This phase is about understanding the what, why, and who of your IT budget.

  • Understand what your budget is and does. A budget isn’t just an annual administrative event – it’s an important governance tool. Understand exactly what a budget is and your budgetary accountabilities as an IT leader.
  • Know your stakeholders. The CFO, CEO, and CXOs in your organization have their own priorities, interests, and professional mandates. Get to know what their objectives are and what IT’s budget means to them.
  • Continuously pre-sell your budget. Identifying, creating, and capitalizing on opportunities to discuss your budget well in advance of its formal presentation will get influential stakeholders and approvers on side, foster collaborations, and avoid unpleasant surprises on all fronts.

“IT finance is more than budgeting. It’s about building trust and credibility in where we’re spending money, how we’re spending money. It’s about relationships. It’s about financial responsibility, financial accountability. I rely on my entire leadership team to all understand what their spend is. We are a steward of other people’s money.”

– Rick Hopfer, CIO, Hawaii Medical Service Association

What does your budget actually do?

A budget is not just a painful administrative exercise that you go through once a year.

Most people know what a budget is, but it’s important to understand its true purpose and how it’s used in your organization before you engage in any activity or dialogue about it.

In strictly objective terms:

  • A budget is a calculated estimate of income vs. expenditure for a period in the future, often one year. Basically, it’s an educated guess about how much money will come into a business entity or unit and how much money will go out of it.
  • A balanced budget is where income and expenditure amounts are equal.
  • The goal in most organizations is for the income component of the budget to match or exceed the expenditure component.
    If it doesn’t, this results in a deficit that may lead to debt.

Simply put, a budget’s fundamental purpose is to plan and communicate how an organization will avoid deficit and debt and remain financially viable while meeting its various accountabilities and responsibilities to its internal and external stakeholders.

“CFOs are not thinking that they want to shut down IT spend. Nobody wants to do that. I always looked at things in terms of revenue streams – where the cash inflow is coming from, where it’s going to, and if I can align my cash outflows to my revenue stream. Where I always got suspicious as a CFO is if somebody can’t articulate spending in terms of a revenue stream. I think that’s how most CFOs operate.”

– Carol Carr, Technical Counselor,
Info-Tech Research Group and Former CFO

Put your IT budget in context

Your IT budget is just one of several budgets across your organization that, when combined, create an organization-wide budget. In this context, IT’s in a tough spot.

It’s a competition: The various units in your organization are competing for the biggest piece they can get of the limited projected income pie. It’s a zero-sum game. The organization’s strategic and operational priorities will determine how this projected income is divvied up.

Direct-to-revenue units win: Business units that directly generate revenue often get bigger relative percentages of the organizational budget since they’re integral to bringing in the projected income part of the budget that allows the expenditure across all business units to happen in the first place.

Indirect-to-revenue units lose: Unlike sales units, for example, IT’s relationship to projected income tends to be indirect, which means that IT must connect a lot more dots to illustrate its positive impact on projected income generation.

In financial jargon, IT really is a cost center: This indirect relationship to revenue also explains why the focus of IT budget conversations is usually on the expenditure side of the equation, meaning it doesn’t have a clear positive impact on income.

Contextual metrics like IT spend as a percentage of revenue, IT OpEx as a percentage of organizational OpEx, and IT spend per organizational employee are important baseline metrics to track around your budget, internally benchmark over time, and share, in order to illustrate exactly where IT fits into the broader organizational picture.

Budgeting isn’t a once-a-year thing

Yet, many organizations treat it like a “one and done” point of annual administration. This is a mistake that misses out on the real benefits of budgeting.

Many organizations have an annual budgeting and planning event that takes place during the back half of the fiscal year. This is where all formal documentation around planned projects and proposed spend for the upcoming year is consolidated, culminating in final presentation, adjustment, and approval. It’s basically a consolidation and ranking of organization-wide priorities at the highest level.

If things are running well, this culmination point in the overall budget development and management process is just a formality, not the beginning, middle, and end of the real work. Ideally:

  • Budgets are actually used: The whole organization uses budgets as tools to actively manage day-to-day operations and guide decision making throughout the year in alignment with priorities as opposed to something that’s put on a shelf or becomes obsolete within a few months.
  • Interdependencies are evident: No discrete area of spend focus is an island – it’s connected directly or indirectly with other areas of spend, both within IT and across the organization. For example, one server interacts with multiple business applications, IT and business processes, multiple IT staff, and even vendors or external managed service providers. Cost-related decisions about that one server – maintain, repurpose, consolidate, replace, discard – will drive other areas of spend up or down.
  • There are no surprises: While this does happen, your budget presentation isn’t a great time to bring up a new point of significant spend for the first time. The items in next year’s proposed budget should be priorities that are already known, vetted, supported, and funded.

"A well developed and presented budget should be the numeric manifestation of your IT strategy that’s well communicated and understood by your peers. When done right, budgets should merely affirm what’s already been understood and should get approved with minimal pushback.“

– Patrick Gray, TechRepublic, 2020

Understand your budgetary responsibilities as the IT leader

It’s in your job description. For some stakeholders, it’s the most important part of it.

While not a contract per se, your IT budget is an objective and transparent statement made in good faith that shows:

  • You know what it takes to keep the organization viable.
  • You understand the organization’s accountabilities and responsibilities as well as those of its leaders.
  • You’re willing and able to do your part to meet these accountabilities and responsibilities.
  • You know what your part of this equation is, as well as what parts should and must be played by others.

When it comes to your budget (and all things financial), your job is to be ethical, careful, and wise:

  1. Be honest. Business ethics matter.
  2. Be as accurate as possible. Your expenditure predictions won’t be perfect, but they need to be best-effort and defensible.
  3. Respect the other players. They have their own roles, motivations, and mandates. Accept and respect these by being a supporter of their success instead of an obstacle to them achieving it.
  4. Connect the dots to income. Always keep the demonstration of business value in your sights. Often, IT can’t draw a straight line to income, but demonstrating how IT expenditure supports and benefits future, current, and past (but still relevant) business goals and strategies, which in turn affect income, is the best course.
  5. Provide alternatives. There are only so many financial levers your organization can pull. An action on one lever will have wanted and unwanted consequences on another. Aim to put financial discussions in terms of risk-focused “what if” stories and let your business partners decide if those risks are satisfactory.

Budgeting processes tend to be similar – it’s budgeting cultures that drive differences

The basic rules of good budgeting are the same everywhere. Bad budgeting processes, however, are usually caused by cultural factors and can be changed.

What’s the same everywhere…

What’s unchangeable…

What’s changeable…

For right or wrong, most budgeting processes follow these general steps:

There are usually only three things about an organization’s budgeting process that are untouchable and can’t be changed:

Budgeting processes are rarely questioned. It never occurs to most people to challenge this system, even if it doesn’t work. Who wants to challenge the CFO? No one.

Review your organization’s budgeting culture to discover the negotiable and non-negotiable constraints. Specifically, look at these potentially-negotiable factors if they’re obstacles to IT budgeting success:

  1. Capital project vetting and selection for the next fiscal year starts three-to-six months before the end of the current fiscal year.
  2. Operational expenditure, including salaries, is looked at later with much less formality and scrutiny with an aim to cut.
  3. Each business unit does a budget presentation and makes directed amendments (usually trimming).
  4. The approved budget numbers are plugged into a standard, sub-optimal budget template provided by Finance.
  1. The legal and regulatory mandates that govern financial funding, accounting, and reporting practices. These are often specific to industries and spend types.
  2. The accounting rules your organization follows, such as GAAP, or IFRS. These too may be legally mandated for government entities and publicly-traded companies.
  3. Hard limits on the projected available income the CFO has to distribute.
  • Timeframes and deadlines
  • Order of operations
  • Areas of focus (CapEx vs. OpEx)
  • Funding sources and ownership
  • Review/approval mechanisms
  • Templates and tools

1.1 Review your budgeting process and culture

1 hour

  1. Review the following components of your budget process using the questions provided for each as a guideline.
    1. Legal and regulatory mandates. What are the external rules that govern how we do financial tracking and reporting? How do they manifest in our processes?
    2. Accounting rules used. What rules does our finance department use and why? Do these rules allow for more meaningful representations of IT spend? Are there policies or practices in place that don’t appear to be backed by any external standards?
    3. Timeframes and deadlines. Are we starting the budgeting process too late? Do we have enough time to do proper due diligence? Will expenditures approved now be out of date when we go to execute? Are there mechanisms to update spend plans mid-cycle?
    4. Order of operations. What areas of spend do we always look at first, such as CapEx? Are there any benefits to changing the order in which we do things, such as examining OpEx first?
    5. Areas of focus. Is CapEx taking up most of our budgeting cycle time? Are we spending enough time examining OpEx? Is IT getting enough time from the CFO compared to other units?
    6. Funding sources and ownership. Is IT footing most of the technology bills? Are business unit leaders fronting any technology business case pitches? Is IT appropriately included in business case development? Is there any benefit to implementing show-back or charge-back?
    7. Review/approval mechanisms. Are strategies and priorities used to rank proposed spend clear and well communicated? Are spend approvers objective in their decision making? Do different approvers apply the same standards and tools?
    8. Templates and tools. Are the ones provided by Finance, the PMO, and other groups sufficient to document what we need to document? Are they accessible and easy to use? Are they automated and integrated so we only have to enter data once?
  2. On the slide following these activity instructions, rate how effective each of the above is on a scale of 1-10 (where 10 is very effective) in supporting the budgeting process. Note specific areas of challenge and opportunity for change.

1.1 Review your budgeting process and culture

Input Output Materials Participants
  • Organizational knowledge of typical budgeting processes
  • Copies of budgeting policies, procedures, and tools
  • Rated assessment of your organization’s budget process and culture, as well as major areas of challenge and opportunity for change
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Budget process and culture assessment

Document the outcomes of your assessment. Examples are provided below.

Budgeting area of assessment

Rating

1 = very ineffective

10 = very effective

Challenges

Opportunities for change

Legal and regulatory mandates

7

Significant regulation but compliance steps not clear or supported within departments.

Create, communicate, and train management on compliance procedures and align the financial management tools accordingly.

Accounting rules

6

IT not very familiar with them.

Learn more about them and their provisions to see if IT spend can be better represented.

Timeframes and deadlines

5

Finalize capital project plans for next fiscal four months before end of current fiscal.

Explore flexible funding models that allow changes to budget closer to project execution.

Order of operations

3

Setting CapEx before OpEx leads to paring of necessary OpEx based on CapEx commitments.

Establish OpEx first as a baseline and then top up to target budget with CapEx.

Areas of focus

6

Lack of focus on OpEx means incremental budgeting – we don’t know what’s in there.

Perform zero-based budgeting on OpEx every few years to re-rationalize this spend.

Funding sources and ownership

4

IT absorbing unplanned mid-cycle spend due to impact of unknown business actions.

Implement a show-back mechanism to change behavior or as precursor to limited charge-back.

Review/approval mechanisms

8

CFO is fair and objective with information presented but could demand more evidence.

Improve business sponsorship/fronting of new initiative business cases and IT partnership.

Templates and tools

2

Finance budget template largely irrelevant and unreflective of IT: only two relevant categories.

Adjust account buckets over a period of time, starting with SW/HW and cloud breakouts.

Receptive audiences make communication a lot easier

To successfully communicate anything, you need to be heard and understood.

The key to being heard and understood is first to hear and understand the perspective of the people with whom you’re trying to communicate – your stakeholders. This means asking some questions:

  • What context are they operating in?
  • What are their goals and responsibilities?
  • What are their pressures and stresses?
  • How do they deal with novelty and uncertainty?
  • How do they best take in information and learn?

The next step of this blueprint shows the perspectives of IT’s key stakeholders and how they’re best able to absorb and accept the important information contained in your IT budget. You will:

  • Learn a process for discovering these stakeholders’ IT budget information needs within the context of your organization’s industry, goals, culture, organizational structure, personalities, opportunities, and constraints.
  • Document key objectives and messages when communicating with these various key stakeholders.

There are certain principles, mandates, and priorities that drive your stakeholders; they’ll want to see these reflected in you, your work, and your budget.

Your IT budget means different things to different stakeholders

Info-Tech’s ITFM Cost Model lays out what matters most from various points of view.

The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's ITFM Cost Model.

The CFO: Understand their role

The CFO is the first person that comes to mind in dealing with budgets. They’re personally and professionally on the line if anything runs amiss with the corporate purse.

What are the CFO’s role and responsibilities?

  • Tracking cash flow and balancing income with expenditures.
  • Ensuring fiscal reporting and legal/regulatory compliance.
  • Working with the CEO to ensure financial-strategic alignment.
  • Working with business unit heads to set aligned budgets.
  • Seeing the big picture.

What’s important to the CFO?

  • Costs
  • Benefits
  • Value
  • Analysis
  • Compliance
  • Risk Management
  • Strategic alignment
  • Control
  • Efficiency
  • Effectiveness
  • Reason
  • Rationale
  • Clarity
  • Objectivity
  • Return on investment

“Often, the CFO sees IT requests as overhead rather than a need. And they hate increasing overhead.”

– Larry Clark, Executive Counselor, Info-Tech Research Group and Former CIO

The CFO carries big responsibilities focused on mitigating organizational risks. It’s not their job to be generous or flexible when so much is at stake. While the CEO appears higher on the organizational chart than the CFO, in many ways the CFO’s accountabilities and responsibilities are on par with, and in some cases greater than, those of the CEO.

The CFO: What they want from the IT budget

What they need should look familiar, so do your homework and be an open book.

Your CFO’s IT budget to-do list:

Remember to:

  • A review of the previous year financial performance. This demonstrates to the CFO your awareness, savvy, and overall competence in the financial management realm. This is also your opportunity to start laying out the real-life context within which IT has been operating. Information to show includes:
    • Budget vs. actuals, including an overview of factors that led to major variances.
    • Percentage difference in proposed budget versus previous year’s budget, and major contributing factors to those differences (i.e. unanticipated projects, changes, or events).
  • Presentation of information according to Finance’s existing categories. This makes it as easy as possible for them to plug your numbers into their system.
  • Separate views of overall workforce vs. overall vendor spending. This is a traditional view.
  • Separate views of capital expenditure (CapEx) and operating expenditure (OpEx). This also includes information on expected lifespan of proposed new capital assets to inform depreciation/amortization decisions.
  • Explanation of anticipated sources of funding. Specifically, indicate whether the funding required is a brand-new net increase or a reallocation from the existing pool.
  • Details (upon request). Have these available for every aspect of your proposed budget.
  • Avoid being flashy. Exclude proposed expenditures with a lot of bells and whistles that don’t directly tie to concrete business objectives.
  • Be a conservationist. Show how you plan to re-use or extend assets that you already have.
  • Act like a business leader. Demonstrate your understanding of near-term (12-month) realities, priorities, and goals.
  • Think like them. Present reliable and defensible calculations of benefits versus risks as well as projected ROI for major areas of new or different spending.

The CFO: Budget challenges and opportunities

Budget season is a great time to start changing the conversation and building trust.

Potential challenges

Low trust

Poor financial literacy and historical sloppiness among business unit leaders means that a CFO may come into budget conversations with skepticism. This can put them on the offensive and put you on the defensive. You have to prove yourself.

Competition

You’re not the only department the CFO is dealing with. Everyone is competing for their piece of the pie, and some business unit leaders are persistent. A good CFO will stay out of the politics and not be swayed by sweet talk, but it can be an exhausting experience for them.

Mismatched buckets

IT’s spend classes and categories probably won’t match what’s in Finance’s budget template or general ledger. Annual budgeting isn’t the best time to bring this up. Respect Finance’s categories, but plan to tackle permanent changes at a less busy time.

Potential opportunities

Build confidence

Engaging in the budgeting process is your best chance to demonstrate your knowledge about the business and your financial acumen. The more that the CFO sees that you get it and are taking it seriously, the more confidence and trust they’ll have in you.

Educate

The CFO will not know as much as you about the role technology could and should play in the organization. Introduce new language around technology focused on capabilities and benefits. This will start to shift the conversation away from costs and toward value.

Initiate alignment

An important governance objective is to change the way IT expenditure is categorized and tracked to better reveal and understand what’s really happening. This process should be done gradually over time, but definitely communicate what you want to do and why.

The CXO: Understand their role

CXOs are a diverse group who lead a range of business functions including admin, operations, HR, legal, production, sales and service, and marketing, to name a few.

What are the CXO’s role and responsibilities?

Like you, the CXO’s job is to help the organization realize its goals and objectives. How each CXO does this is specific to the domain they lead. Variations in roles and responsibilities typically revolve around:

  • Law and regulation. Some functions have compliance as a core mandate, including legal, HR, finance, and corporate risk groups.
  • Finance and efficiency. Other functions prioritize time, money, and process such as finance, sales, customer service, marketing, production, operations, and logistics units.
  • Quality. These functions prioritize consistency, reliability, relationship, and brand such as production, customer service, and marketing.

What’s important to the CXO?

  • Staffing
  • Skills
  • Reporting
  • Funding
  • Planning
  • Performance
  • Predictability
  • Customers
  • Visibility
  • Inclusion
  • Collaboration
  • Reliability
  • Information
  • Knowledge
  • Acknowledgement

Disagreement is common between business-function leaders – they have different primary focus areas, and conflict and misalignment are natural by-products of that fact. It’s also hard to make someone care as much about your priorities as you do. Focus your efforts on sharing and partnering, not converting.

The CXO: What they want from the IT budget

Focus on their unique part of the organization and show that you see them.

Your CXO’s IT budget to-do list:

Remember to:

  • A review of the previous year’s IT expenditure on the business function. This includes:
    • Budget vs. actuals (if available) for the business function, and overview of any situations or factors that led to major variances.
    • Percentage difference in proposed budget for that business function vs. the previous year’s spend, and major contributing factors to those differences, i.e. unanticipated projects, changes, or events.
    • Last year’s IT expenditure per business function employee vs. proposed IT expenditure per business function employee (if available). This is a good metric to use going forward as it’s a fair comparative internal benchmark.
  • Separate views of proposed IT workforce vs. proposed IT vendor spending for the business function. Do a specific breakout of proposed expenditure for the major applications that business unit explicitly uses.
  • Separate views of proposed IT capital expenditure (CapEx) and proposed IT operating expenditure (OpEx) for the business function. Show breakdowns for each capital project,
    as well as summaries for their core applications and portion of shared IT services.
  • Celebrate any collaborative wins from last year. You want to reinforce that working together is in both of your best interests and you’d like to keep it going.
  • Get to the apps fast. Apps are visible, concrete, and relatable – this is what the CXO cares about. Core IT infrastructure, on the other hand, is technobabble about something that’s invisible, boring, and disengaging for most CXOs.
  • Focus on the business function’s actual technology needs and consumption. Show them where they stand in relation to others. This will get their attention and serve as an opportunity to provide some education.

The CXO: Budget challenges and opportunities

Seek out your common ground and be the solution for their real problems.

Potential challenges

Different priorities

Other business unit leaders will have bigger concerns than your IT budget. They have their own budget to figure out plus other in-flight issues. The head of sales, for instance, is going to be more concerned with hitting sales goals for this fiscal year than planning for next.

Perceived irrelevance

Some business unit leaders may be completely unaware of how they use IT, how much they use, and how they could use it more or differently to improve their performance. They may have a learning curve to tackle before they can start to see your relationship as collaborative.

Bad track record

If a business unit has had friction with IT in the past or has historically been underserved, they may be hesitant to let you in, may be married to their own solutions, or perhaps do not know how to express what they need.

Potential opportunities

Start collaborating

You and other business unit leaders have a lot in common. You all share the objective of helping the organization succeed. Focus in on your shared concerns and how you can make progress on them together before digging into your unique challenges.

Practice perspective taking

Be genuinely curious about the business unit, how it works, and how they overcome obstacles. See the organization from their point of view. For now, keep your technologies completely out of the discussion – that will come later on.

Build relationships

You only need to solve one problem for a business unit to change how they think of you. Just one. Find that one thing that will make a real difference – ideally small but impactful – and work it into your budget.

The CEO: Understand their role

A CEO sets the tone for an organization, from its overall direction and priorities to its values and culture. What’s possible and what’s not is usually determined by them.

What are the CEO’s role and responsibilities?

  • Assemble an effective team of executives and advisors.
  • Establish, communicate, and exemplify the organizations core values.
  • Study the ecosystem within which the organization exists.
  • Identify and evaluate opportunities.
  • Set long-term directions, priorities, goals, and strategies.
  • Ensure ongoing organizational performance, profitability, and growth.
  • Connect the inside organization to the outside world.
  • Make the big decisions no one else can make.

What’s important to the CEO?

  • Strategy
  • Leadership
  • Vision
  • Values
  • Goals
  • Priorities
  • Performance
  • Metrics
  • Accountability
  • Stakeholders
  • Results
  • Insight
  • Growth
  • Cohesion
  • Context

Unlike the CFO and CXOs, the CEO is responsible for seeing the big picture. That means they’re operating in the realm of big problems and big ideas – they need to stay out of the weeds. IT is just one piece of that big picture, and your problems and ideas are sometimes small in comparison. Use any time you get with them wisely.

The CEO: What they want from the IT budget

The CEO wants what the CFO wants, but at a higher level and with longer-term vision.

Your CEO’s IT budget to-do list:

Remember to:

  • A review of the previous year’s financial performance. In addition to last year’s budget vs. actuals vs. proposed budget and any rationales for variances, the CEO’s interest is in seeing numbers in terms of strategic delivery. Focus on performance against last year’s goals and concrete benefits realized.
  • A review of initiatives undertaken to optimize/reduce operating costs. Note overall gains with a specific look at initiatives that had a substantial positive financial impact.
  • A specific summary of the cost landscape for new strategic or capital projects. Ideally, these projects have already been committed to at the executive level. A more fine-tuned analysis of anticipated costs and variables may be required, including high-level projects with long-term impact on operational expenditure. Categorize these expenditures as investments in innovation, growth, or keeping the lights on.
  • Details (upon request). Have these available for every aspect of your proposed budget.
  • Be brief. Hopefully, the CEO is already well versed on the strategic spend plans. Stay high-level, reserve the deep dive for your documentation, and let the CEO decide if they want to hash anything out in more detail.
  • Be strategic. If you can’t tie it to a strategic objective, don’t showcase it.
  • Use performance language. This means citing goals, metrics, and progress made against them.
  • Ensure the CFO can translate. You may not get a direct audience with the CEO – the CFO may be your proxy for that. Ensure that everything is crystal clear so that the CFO can summarize your budget on your behalf.

The CEO: Budget challenges and opportunities

Strategically address the big issues, but don’t count on their direct assistance.

Potential challenges

Lack of interest

Your CEO may just not be enthusiastic about technology. For them, IT is strictly a cost center operating on the margins. If they don’t have a strategic vision that includes technology, IT’s budget will always be about efficiency and cost control and not investment.

Deep hierarchy

The executive-level CIO role isn’t yet pervasive in every industry. There may be one or more non-IT senior management layers between IT and the office of the CEO, as well as other bureaucratic hurdles, which prohibit your direct access.

Uncertainty

What’s happening on the outside will affect what needs to be done on the inside. The CEO has to assess and respond quickly, changing priorities and plans in an instant. An indecisive CEO that’s built an inflexible organization will make it difficult to pivot as needed.

Potential opportunities

Grow competency

Sometimes, IT just needs to wait it out. The biggest shifts in technology interest often come with an outright change in the organization’s leadership. In the meantime, fine-tune your operational excellence, brush up on business skills, and draft out your best ideas on paper.

Build partnerships

Other business-function executives may need to be IT’s voice. Investment proposals may be more compelling coming from them anyway. Behind-the-scenes partnerships and high-profile champions are something you want regardless of your degree of CEO access.

Bake in resilience

Regardless of who’s at the helm, systematic investment in agile and flexible solutions that can be readily scaled, decoupled, redeployed, or decommissioned is a good strategy. Use recent crises to help make the strategic case for a more resilient posture.

What about the CIO view on the IT budget?

IT leaders tend to approach budgeting from an IT services perspective. After all, that’s how their departments are typically organized.

The CFO expense view, CXO business view, and CEO innovation view represent IT’s stakeholders. The CIO service view, however, represents you, the IT budget creator. This means that the CIO service view plays a slightly different role in developing your IT budget communications.

An IT team effort…

A logical starting point

A supporting view

Most budget drafts start with internal IT management discussion. These managers are differentially responsible for apps dev and maintenance, service desk and user support, networks and data center, security, data and analytics, and so forth.

These common organizational units and their managers tend to represent discrete IT service verticals. This means the CIO service view is a natural structural starting point for your budget-building process. Stakeholder views of your budget will be derived from this first view.

You probably don’t want to lead your budget presentation with IT’s perspective – it won’t make sense to your stakeholders. Instead, select certain impactful pieces of your view to drop in where they provide valued information and augment the IT budget story.

Things to bring forward…

Things to hold back…

  • All major application costs
  • Security/compliance costs
  • Strategic project costs
  • End-user support and enablement costs
  • Data and BI initiative costs
  • Minor applications costs
  • Day-to-day network and data center costs
  • Other infrastructure costs
  • IT management and administration costs

1.2 Assess your stakeholders

1 hour

  1. Use the “Stakeholder alignment assessment” template slide following this one to document the outcomes of this activity.
  2. As an IT management team, identify your key budget stakeholders and specifically those in an approval position.
  3. Use the information provided in this blueprint about various stakeholder responsibilities, areas of focus, and what’s typically important to them to determine each key stakeholder’s needs regarding the information contained in your IT budget. Note their stated needs, any idiosyncrasies, and IT’s current relationship status with the stakeholder (positive, neutral, or negative).
  4. Assess previous years’ IT budgets to determine how well they targeted each different stakeholder’s needs. Note any gaps or areas for future improvement.
  5. Develop a high-level list of items or elements to stop, start, or continue during your next budgeting cycle.
Input Output
  • Organizational awareness of key stakeholders and budget approvers
  • Previous years’ budgets
  • Assessment of key stakeholder needs and a list of potential changes or additions to the IT budget/budget process
Materials Participants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Stakeholder alignment assessment template (following slide)
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Stakeholder alignment assessment

Document the outcomes of your assessment below. Examples are provided below.

Stakeholder

Relationship status

Understanding of needs

Budget changes/additions

CFO

Positive

Wants at least 30% of budget to be CapEx. Needs more detail concerning benefits and tracking of realization.

Do more detailed breakouts of CapEx vs. OpEx as 30% CapEx not realistic – pre-meet. Talk to Enterprise PMO about improving project benefits statement template.

VP of Sales

Negative

Only concerned with hitting sales targets. Needs to respond/act quickly based on reliable data.

Break out sales consumption of IT resources in detail focusing on CRM and SFA tool costs. Propose business intelligence enhancement project.

Director of Marketing

Neutral

Multiple manual processes – would benefit from increased automation of campaign management and social media posting.

Break out marketing consumption of IT resources and publicly share/compare to generate awareness/support for tech investment. Work together to build ROI statements

[Name/Title]

[Positive/Neutral/Negative]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Positive/Neutral/Negative]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Positive/Neutral/Negative]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Positive/Neutral/Negative]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Positive/Neutral/Negative]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Positive/Neutral/Negative]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Positive/Neutral/Negative]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Positive/Neutral/Negative]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

Set your IT budget pre-selling strategy

Pre-selling is all about ongoing communication with your stakeholders. This is the most game-changing thing you can do to advance a proposed IT budget’s success.

When IT works well, nobody notices. When it doesn’t, the persistent criticism about IT not delivering value will pop up, translating directly into less funding. Cut this off at the pass with an ongoing communications strategy based on facts, transparency, and perspective taking.

  1. Know your channels
  2. Identify all the communication channels you can leverage including meetings, committees, reporting cycles, and bulletins. Set up new channels if they don’t exist.

  3. Identify partners
  4. Nothing’s better than having a team of supporters when pitch day comes. Quietly get them on board early and be direct about the role each of you will play.

  5. Always be prepared
  6. Have information and materials about proposed initiatives at-the-ready. You never know when you’ll get your chance. But if your facts are still fuzzy, do more homework first.

  7. Don’t be annoying
  8. Talking about IT all the time will turn people off. Plan chats that don’t mention IT at all. Ask questions about their world and really listen. Empathy’s a powerful tool.

  9. Communicate IT initiatives at launch
  10. Describe what you will be doing and how it will benefit the business in language that makes sense to the beneficiaries of the initiative.

  11. Communicate IT successes
  12. Carry the same narrative forward through to the end and tell the whole story. Include comments from stakeholders and beneficiaries about the value they’re receiving.

Pre-selling with partners

The thing with pre-selling to partners is not to take a selling approach. Take a collaborative approach instead.

A partner is an influencer, advocate, or beneficiary of the expenditure or investment you’re proposing. Partners can:

  • Advise you on real business impacts.
  • Voice their support for your funding request.
  • Present the initial business case for funding approval themselves.
  • Agree to fund all or part of an initiative from their own budget.

When partners agree to pitch or fund an initiative, IT can lose control of it. Make sure you set specific expectations about what IT will help with or do on an ongoing basis, such as:

  • Calculating the upfront and ongoing technology maintenance/support costs of the initiative.
  • Leading the technology vetting and selection process, including negotiating with vendors, setting service-level agreements, and finalizing contracts.
  • Implementing selected technologies and training users.
  • Maintaining and managing the technology, including usage metering.
  • Making sure the bills get paid.

A collaborative approach tends to result in a higher level of commitment than a selling approach.

Put yourself in their shoes using their language. Asking “How will this affect you?” focuses on what’s in it for them.

Example:

CIO: “We’re thinking of investing in technology that marketing can use to automate posting content to social media. Is that something you could use?”

CMO: “Yes, we currently pay two employees to post on Facebook and Twitter, so if it could make that more efficient, then there would be cost savings there.”

Pre-selling with approvers

The key here is to avoid surprises and ensure the big questions are answered well in advance of decision day.

An approver is the CFO, CEO, board, council, or committee that formally commits funding support to a program or initiative. Approvers can:

  • Point out factors that could derail realization of intended benefits.
  • Know that a formal request is coming and factor it into their planning.
  • Connect your idea with others to create synergies and efficiencies.
  • Become active advocates.

When approvers cool to an idea, it’s hard to warm them up again. Gradually socializing an idea well in advance of the formal pitch gives you the chance to isolate and address those cooling factors while they’re still minor. Things you can address if you get an early start with future approvers include:

  • Identify and prepare for administrative, regulatory, or bureaucratic hurdles.
  • Incorporate approvers’ insights about organizational realities and context.
  • Further reduce the technical jargon in your language.
  • Fine tune the relevance and specificity of your business benefits statements.
  • Get a better sense of the most compelling elements to focus on.

Blindsiding approvers with a major request at a budget presentation could trigger an emotional response, not the rational and objective one you want.

Make approvers part of the solution by soliciting their advice and setting their expectations well in advance.

Example:

CIO: “The underwriting team and I think there’s a way to cut new policyholder approval turnaround from 8 to 10 days down to 3 or 4 using an online intake form. Do you see any obstacles?”

CFO: “How do the agents feel about it? They submit to underwriting differently and might not want to change. They’d all need to agree on it. Exactly how does this impact sales?”

1.3 Set your budget pre-selling strategy

1 hour

  1. Use the “Stakeholder pre-selling strategy” template slide following this instruction slide to document the outcomes of this activity.
  2. Carry forward your previously-generated stakeholder alignment assessment from Step 1.2. As a management team, discuss the following for each stakeholder:
    1. Forums and methods of contact and interaction.
    2. Frequency of interaction.
    3. Content or topics typically addressed during interactions.
  3. Discuss what the outcomes of an ideal interaction would look like with each stakeholder.
  4. List opportunities to change or improve the nature of interactions and specific actions you plan to take.
InputOutput
  • Stakeholder Alignment Assessment (in-deck template)
  • Stakeholder Pre-selling Strategy
MaterialsParticipants
  • Stakeholder Pre-selling Strategy (in-deck template)
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Stakeholder pre-selling strategy

Document the outcomes of your discussion. Examples are provided below.

Stakeholder

Current interactions

Opportunities and actions

Forum

Frequency

Content

CFO

One-on-one meeting

Monthly

IT expenditure updates and tracking toward budgeted amount.

Increase one-on-one meeting to weekly. Alternate focus – retrospective update one week, future-looking case development the next. Invite one business unit head to future-looking sessions to discuss their IT needs.

VP of Sales

Executive meeting

Quarterly

General business update - dominates.

Set up bi-weekly one-on-one meeting – initially focus on what sales does/needs, not tech. Later, when the relationship has stabilized, bring data that shows Sales’ consumption of IT resources.

Director of Marketing

Executive meeting

Quarterly

General business update - quiet.

Set up monthly one-on-one meeting. Temporarily embed BA to better discover/understand staff processes and needs.

[Name/Title]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Name/Title]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

[Insert text]

Phase recap: Lay your foundation

Build in the elements from the start that you need to facilitate budgetary approval.

You should now have a deeper understanding of the what, why, and who of your IT budget. These elements are foundational to streamlining the budget process, getting aligned with peers and the executive, and increasing your chances of winning budgetary approval in the end.

In this phase, you have:

  • Reviewed what your budget is and does. Your budget is an important governance and communication tool that reflects organizational priorities and objectives and IT’s understanding of them.
  • Taken a closer look at your stakeholders. The CFO, CEO, and CXOs in your organization have accountabilities of their own to meet and need IT and its budget to help them succeed.
  • Developed a strategy for continuously pre-selling your budget. Identifying opportunities and approaches for building relationships, collaborating, and talking meaningfully about IT and IT expenditure throughout the year is one of the leading things you can do to get on the same page and pave the way for budget approval.

“Many departments have mostly labor for their costs. They’re not buying a million and a half or two million dollars’ worth of software every year or fixing things that break. They don’t share IT’s operations mindset and I think they get frustrated.”

– Matt Johnson, IT Director Governance and Business Solutions, Milwaukee County

Phase 2

Get Into Budget-Starting Position

Lay Your
Foundation

Get Into Budget-Starting Position

Develop Your
Forecasts

Build Your
Proposed Budget

Create and Deliver Your Presentation

1.1 Understand what your budget is
and does

1.2 Know your stakeholders

1.3 Continuously pre-sell your budget

2.1 Assemble your resources

2.2 Understand the four views of the ITFM Cost Model

2.3 Review last year’s budget vs.
actuals and five-year historical trends

2.4 Set your high-level goals

3.1 Develop assumptions and
alternative scenarios

3.2 Forecast your project CapEx

3.3 Forecast your non-project CapEx and OpEx

4.1 Aggregate your numbers

4.2 Stress test your forecasts

4.3 Challenge and perfect your
rationales

5.1 Plan your content

5.2 Build your presentation

5.3 Present to stakeholders

5.4 Make final adjustments and submit your IT budget

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Putting together your budget team and gather your data.
  • Selecting which views of the ITFM Cost Model you’ll use.
  • Mapping and analyzing IT’s historical expenditure.
  • Setting goals and metrics for the next budgetary cycle.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Get into budget-starting position

Now’s the time to pull together your budgeting resources and decision-making reference points.

This phase is about clarifying your context and defining your boundaries.

  • Assemble your resources. This includes the people, data, and other information you’ll need to maximize insight into future spend requirements.
  • Understand the four views of the IT Cost Model. Firm up your understanding of the CFO expense view, CIO service view, CXO business view, and CEO innovation view and decide which ones you’ll use in your analysis and forecasting.
  • Review last year’s budget versus actuals. You need last year’s context to inform next year’s numbers as well as demonstrate any cost efficiencies you successfully executed.
  • Review five-year historical trends. This long-term context gives stakeholders and approvers important information about where IT fits into the business big picture and reminds them how you got to where you are today.
  • Set your high-level goals. You need to decide if you’re increasing, decreasing, or holding steady on your budget and whether you can realistically meet any mandates you’ve been handed on this front. Set a target as a reference point to guide your decisions and flag areas where you might need to have some tough conversations.

“A lot of the preparation is education for our IT managers so that they understand what’s in their budgets and all the moving parts. They can actually help you keep it within bounds.”

– Trisha Goya, Director, IT Governance & Administration, Hawaii Medical Service Association

Gather your budget-building team

In addition to your CFO, CXOs, and CEO, there are other people who will provide important information, insight, and skill in identifying IT budget priorities and costs.

Role

Skill set

Responsibilities

IT Finance Lead

  • Financial acumen, specifically with cost forecasting and budgeting.
  • Understanding of actual IT costs and service-based costing methods.

IT finance personnel will guide the building of cost forecasting methodologies for operating and capital costs, help manage IT cash flows, help identify cost reduction options, and work directly with the finance department to ensure they get what they need.

IT Domain Managers

  • Knowledge of services and their outputs.
  • Understanding of cost drivers for the services they manage.

They will be active participants in budgeting for their specific domains, act as a second set of eyes, assist with and manage their domain budgets, and engage with stakeholders.

Project Managers

  • Knowledge of project requirements.
  • Project budgeting.
  • Understanding of project IT-specific costs.

Project managers will assist in capital and operational forecasting and will review project budgets to ensure accuracy. They will also assist in forecasting the operational impacts of capital projects.

As the head of IT, your role is as the budgeting team lead. You understand both the business and IT strategies, and have relationships with key business partners. Your primary responsibilities are to guide and approve all budget components and act as a liaison between finance, business units, and IT.

Set expectations with your budgeting team

Be clear on your goals and ensure everyone has what they need to succeed.

Your responsibilities and accountabilities.

  • Budget team lead.
  • Strategic direction.
  • Primary liaison with business stakeholders.
  • Pre-presentation approver and final decision maker.

Goals and requirements.

  • Idea generation for investment and cost optimization.
  • Cost prioritization and rationale.
  • Skills requirements and sourcing options.
  • Risk assessment and operational impact.
  • Data format and level of granularity.

Budgeting fundamentals.

  • Review of key finance concepts – CapEx, OpEx, cashflow, income, depreciation, etc.
  • What a budget is, and its component parts.
  • How the budget will be used by IT and the organization.
  • How to calculate cost forecasts.

Their responsibilities and accountabilities.

  • Data/information collection.
  • Operational knowledge of their services, projects, and staff.
  • Cost forecast development for their respective domains/projects.
  • Review and sanity checking of their peers’ cost forecasts.

Timeframes and deadlines.

  • Budgeting stages/phases and their deliverables.
  • Internal IT deadlines.
  • External business deadlines.
  • Goals and cadence of future working sessions and meetings.

Available resources.

  • Internal and external sources of data and information.
  • Tools and templates for tracking information and performing calculations.
  • Individuals who can provide finance concept guidance and support.
  • Repositories for in-progress and final work.

2.1 Brief and mobilize your IT budgeting team

2 hours

  1. Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  2. Organize a meeting with your IT department management team, team leaders, and project managers.
  3. Review their general financial management accountabilities and responsibilities.
  4. Discuss the purpose and context of the budgeting exercise, different budget components, and the organization’s milestones/deadlines.
  5. Identify specific tasks and activities that each member of the team must complete in support of the budgeting exercise.
  6. Set up additional checkpoints, working sessions, or meetings that will take you through to final budget submission.
  7. Document your budget team members, responsibilities, deliverables, and due dates on the “Planning Variables” tab in the IT Cost Forecasting & Budgeting Workbook.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

InputOutput
  • The organization’s budgeting process and procedures
  • Assignment of IT budgeting team responsibilities
  • A budgeting schedule
MaterialsParticipants
  • IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Leverage the ITFM Cost Model

Each of the four views breaks down IT costs into a different array of categories so you and your stakeholders can see expenditure in a way that’s meaningful for them.

You may decide not to use all four views based on your goals, audience, and available time. However, let’s start with how you can use the first two views, the CFO expense view and the CIO service view.

The image contains a screenshot of the CFO expense view.

The CFO expense view is fairly traditional – workforce and vendor. However, Info-Tech’s approach breaks down the vendor software and hardware buckets into on-premises and cloud. Making this distinction is increasingly critical given key differences in CapEx vs. OpEx treatment.

Forecasting this view is mandatory

These two views provide information that will help you optimize IT costs. They’re designed to allow the CFO and CIO to find a common language that will allow them to collaboratively make decisions about managing IT expenditure effectively.

The image contains a screenshot of the CIO service view.

The CIO service view is your view, i.e. it’s how IT tends to organize and manage itself and is often the logical starting point for expenditure planning and analysis. Sub-categories in this view, such as security and data & BI, can also resonate strongly with business stakeholders and their priorities.

Forecasting this view is recommended

Extend your dialogue to the business

Applying the business optimization views of the ITFM Cost Model can bring a level of sophistication to your IT cost analysis and forecasting efforts.

Some views take a bit more work to map out, but they can be powerful tools for communicating the value of IT to the business. Let’s look at the last two views, the CXO business view and the CEO innovation view.

The CXO business view looks at IT expenditure business unit by business unit so that each can understand their true consumption of IT resources. This view relies on having a fair and reliable cost allocation formula, such as one based on relative headcount, so it runs the risk of inaccuracy.

Forecasting this view is recommended

The image contains a screenshot of the CXO business view.

These two views provide information that will help you optimize IT support to the business. These views also have a collaborative goal in mind, enabling IT to talk about IT spend in terms that will promote transparency and engage business stakeholders.

The CEO innovation view is one of the hardest to analyze and forecast since a single spend item may apply to innovation, growth, and keeping the lights on. However, if you have an audience with the CEO and they want IT to play a more strategic or innovative role, then this view is worth mapping.

Forecasting this view is optional

The image contains a screenshot of the CEO innovation view.

2.2 Select the ITFM Cost Model views you plan to complete based on your goals

30 minutes

The IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook contains standalone sections for each view, as well as rows for each lowest-tier sub-category in a view, so each view can be analyzed and forecasted independently.

  1. Review Info-Tech’s ITFM Cost Model and the expenditure categories and sub-categories each view contains.
  2. Revisit your stakeholder analysis for the budgeting exercise. Plan to:
    1. Complete the CFO expense view regardless.
    2. Complete the CIO service view – consider doing this one first for forecasting purposes as it may be most familiar to you and serve as an easier entry point into the forecasting process.
    3. Complete the CXO business view – consider doing this only for select business units if you have the objective of enhancing awareness of their true consumption of IT resources or if you have (or plan to have) a show-back/chargeback mechanism.
    4. Complete the CEO innovation view only if your data allows it and there’s a compelling reason to discuss the strategic or innovative role of IT in the organization.
Input Output
  • Stakeholder analysis
  • Info-Tech’s ITFM Cost Model
  • Decision on which views in the ITFM Cost Model you’ll use for historical expenditure analysis and forecasting purposes
Materials Participants
  • Info-Tech’s ITFM Cost Model
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Gather your budget-building data

Your data not only forms the content of your budget but also serves as the supporting evidence for the decisions you’ve made.

Ensure you have the following data and information available to you and your budgeting team before diving in:

Past data

  • Last fiscal year’s budget.
  • Actuals for the past five fiscal years.
  • Pre-set capital depreciation/amortization amounts to be applied to next fiscal year’s budget.

Current data

  • Current-year IT positions and salaries.
  • Active vendor contracts with payment schedules and amounts (including active multi-year agreements).
  • Cost projections for remainder of any projects that are committed or in-progress, including projected OpEx for ongoing maintenance and support.

Future data

  • Estimated market value for any IT positions to be filled next year (both backfill of current vacancies and proposed net-new positions).
  • Pricing data on proposed vendor purchases or contracts.
  • Cost estimates for any capital/strategic projects that are being proposed but not yet committed, including resulting maintenance/support OpEx.
  • Any known pending credits to be received or applied in the next fiscal year.

If you’re just getting started building a repeatable budgeting process, treat it like any other project, complete with a formal plan/ charter and a central repository for all related data, information, and in-progress and final documents.

Once you’ve identified a repeatable approach that works for you, transition the budgeting project to a regular operational process complete with policies, procedures, and tools.

Review last year’s budget vs. actuals

This is the starting point for building your high-level rationale around what you’re proposing for next fiscal year.

But first, some quick definitions:

  • Budgeted: What you planned to spend when you started the fiscal year.
  • Actual: What you ended up spending in real life by the end of the fiscal year.
  • Variance: The difference between budgeted expenditure and actual expenditure.

For last fiscal year, pinpoint the following metrics and information:

Budgeted and actual IT expenditure overall and by major cost category.

Categories will include workforce (employees/contractors) and vendors (hardware, software, contracted services) at a minimum.

Actual IT expenditure as a percentage of organizational revenue.

This is a widely-used benchmark that your CFO will expect to see.

The known and likely drivers behind budgeted vs. actual variances.

Your rationales will affect your perceived credibility. Be straightforward, avoid defending or making excuses, and just show the facts.

Ask your CFO what they consider acceptable variance thresholds for different cost categories to guide your variance analysis, such as 1% for overall IT expenditure.

Actual IT CapEx and OpEx.

CapEx is often more variable than OpEx over time. Separate them so you can see the real trends for each. Consider:

  • Sub-dividing CapEx by strategic projects and non-strategic “business as usual” spend (e.g. laptops, network maintenance gear).
  • Showing overall CapEx and OpEx as percentages of their organization-wide counterparts if that information is available.

Next, review your five-year historical expenditure trends

The longer-term pattern of IT expenditure can help you craft a narrative about the overarching story of IT.

For the previous five fiscal years, focus on the following:

Actual IT expenditure as a percentage of organizational revenue.

Again, for historical years 2-5, you can break this down into granular cost categories like workforce, software, and infrastructure like you did for last fiscal year. Avoid getting bogged down and focusing on the past – you ultimately want to redirect stakeholders to the future.

Percentage expenditure increase/decrease year to year.

You may choose to show overall IT expenditure amounts, breakdowns by CapEx and OpEx, as well as high-level cost categories.

As you go back in time, some data may not be available to you, may be unreliable or incomplete, or employ the same cost categories you’re using today. Use your judgement on the level of granularity you want to and can apply when going back two to five years in the past.

So, what’s the trend? Consider these questions:

  • Is the year-over-year trend on a steady trajectory or are there notable dips and spikes?
  • Are there any one-time capital projects that significantly inflated CapEx and overall spend in a given year or that forced maintenance-and support-oriented OpEx commitments in subsequent years?
  • Does there seem to be an overall change in the CapEx-to-OpEx ratio due to factors like increased use of cloud services, outsourcing, or contract-based staff?

Take a close look at financial data showcasing the cost-control measures you’ve taken

Your CFO will look for evidence that you’re gaining efficiencies by controlling costs, which is often a prerequisite for them approving any new funding requests.

Your objective here is threefold:

  1. Demonstrate IT’s track record of fiscal responsibility and responsiveness to business priorities.
  2. Acknowledge and celebrate your IT-as-cost-center efficiency gains to clear the way for more strategic discussions.
  3. Identify areas where you can potentially source and reallocate recouped funds to bolster other initiatives or business cases for net-new spend.

This step is about establishing credibility, demonstrating IT value, building trust, and showing the CFO you’re on their team.

Do the following:

  • List any specific cost-control initiatives and their initial objectives and targets.
  • Identify any changes made to those targets and your approaches due to changing conditions, with rationales for the decisions made. For example:
    • Mid-year, the business decided to allow approximately half the workforce to work from home on a permanent basis.
    • As a result, remote-worker demand on the service desk remained high and actually increased in some areas. You were unable to reduce service desk staff headcount as originally planned.
    • You’re now exploring ways to streamline ticket intake and assignment to increase throughput and speed resolution.
  • Report on completed cost-control initiatives first, including targets, actuals, and related impacts. Include select feedback from business stakeholders and users about the impact of your cost-control measure on them.
  • For in-progress initiatives, report progress made to-date, benefits realized to date, and plans for continuation next fiscal year.

“Eliminate the things you don’t need. People will give you what you need when you need it if you’re being responsible with what you already have.”

– Angela Hintz, VP of PMO & Integrated Services,
Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Louisiana

2.3 Review your historical IT expenditure

8 hours

  1. Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.
  2. On Tab 1, “Historical Events & Projects,” note the cost-driving and cost-saving events that occurred last fiscal year that drove any variance between budgeted and actual expenditure. Describe the nature of their impact and current status (ongoing, resolved – temporary impact, or resolved – permanent impact).
  3. Also on Tab 1, “Historical Events & Projects”, summarize the work done on capital or strategic projects, expenditures, and status (in progress, deferred, canceled, or complete).
  4. On Tab 2, “Historical Expenditure”:
    1. Enter the budgeted and actuals data for last fiscal year in columns D-H for the views of the ITFM Cost Model you’re opted to do, i.e. CFO expense view, CIO service view, CXO business view, and CEO innovation view.
    2. Enter a brief rationale for any notable budgeted-versus-actuals variances or other interesting items in column K.
    3. Enter actuals data for the remaining past five fiscal years in columns L-O. Year-over-year comparative metrics will be calculated for you.
    4. Enter FTEs by business function in columns R-AA, rows 34-43.
      Expenditure per FTE and year-over year comparative metrics will be
      calculated for you.
  5. Using Tabs 2, “Historical Expenditure” and 3, “Historical Analysis”, review and analyze the resulting data sets and graphs to identify overall patterns, specifically notable increases or decreases in a particular category of expenditure or where rationales are repeated across categories or views (these are significant).
  6. Finally, flag any data points that help demonstrate achievement of, or progress toward, any cost-control measures you implemented.

2.3 Review your historical IT expenditure

InputOutputMaterialsParticipants
  • Budgeted data for the previous fiscal year and actuals data for the previous five fiscal years
  • Mapped budgeted for last fiscal year, mapped actuals for the past five fiscal years, and variance metrics and rationales
  • IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Pull historical trends into a present-day context when setting your high-level goals

What’s happening to your organization and the ecosystem within which it’s operating right now? Review current business concerns, priorities, and strategies.

Knowing what happened in the past can provide good insights and give you a chance to show stakeholders your money-management track record. However, what stakeholders really care about is “now” and “next”. For them, it’s all about current business context.

Ask these questions about your current context to assess the relevance of your historical trend data:

What’s the state of
the economy and how is
it affecting your organization?

What are the
organization’s stated
strategic goals and objectives?

What has the business
explicitly communicated
about finance-related targets?

What’s the business
executive’s attitude on
budget increase requests?

Some industries are very sensitive to economic cycles, causing wild budget fluctuations year to year. This uncertainty can reduce the volume of spend you automatically carry over one year to the next, making past spend patterns less relevant to your current budgeting effort.

These can change year to year as well, and often manifest on the CapEx side in the form of strategic projects selected. Since this is so variable, using previous years’ CapEx to determine next fiscal’s CapEx isn’t always useful except in regard to multi-year, ongoing capital projects.

Do your best to honor mandates. However, if cuts are suggested that could jeopardize core service delivery, tread cautiously, and pick your battles. You may be able to halt new capital spend to generate cuts, but these projects may get approved anyway, with IT expected to make cuts to OpEx.

If the CFO and others rail against even the most necessary inflation-driven increases, you’ll need to take a conservative approach, focus on cost-saving initiatives, and plan to redirect last year’s expenditures instead of pursuing net-new spend.

Set metrics and targets for some broader budget effectiveness improvement efforts

Budget goalsetting isn’t limited to CapEx and OpEx targets. There are several effectiveness metrics to track overall improvement in your budgeting process.

Step back and think about other budget and expenditure goals you have.
Do you want to:

  • Better align the budget with organizational objectives?
  • Increase cost forecasting accuracy?
  • Increase budget transparency and completeness?
  • Improve the effectiveness of your budget presentation?
  • Reduce the amount of budget rework?
  • Increase the percentage of the budget that’s approved?
  • Reduce variance between what was budgeted and actuals?

Establish appropriate metrics and targets that will allow you to define success, track progress, and communicate achievement on these higher-level goals.

Check out some example metrics in the table below.

Budgeting metric

Improvement driver

Current value

Future target

Percentage of spend directly tied to an organizational goal.

Better alignment via increased communication and partnership with the business.

72%

90%

Number of changes to budget prior to final acceptance.

Better accuracy and transparency via use of zero-based budgeting and enhanced stakeholder views.

8

2

Percentage variance between budgeted vs. actuals.

Improved forecasting through better understanding of business plans and in-cycle show-back.

+4%

+/-2%

Percentage of budget approved after first presentation.

Improved business rationales and direct mapping of expenditure to org priorities.

76%

95%

Percentage of IT-driven project budget approved.

More rigor around benefits, ROI calculation, and quantifying value delivered.

80%

100%

Set your high-level OpEx budget targets

The high-level targets you set now don’t need to be perfect. Think of them as reference points or guardrails to sanity-check the cost forecasting exercise to come.

First things first: Zero-based or incremental for OpEx?

Set your OpEx targets

Incremental budgeting is the addition of a few percentage onto next year’s budget, assuming the previous year’s OpEx is all re-occurring. The percentage often aligns with rates of inflation.

  • Most organizations take this approach because it’s faster and easier.
  • However, incremental budgeting is less accurate. Non-recurring items are often overlooked and get included in the forecast, resulting in budget bloat. Also, redundant or wasteful items can be entirely missed, undermining any cost optimization efforts.

Zero-based budgeting involves rebuilding your budget from scratch, i.e. zero. It doesn’t assume that any of last year’s costs are recurring or consistent year to year.

  • This approach is harder because all relevant historical spend data needs to be collected and reviewed, which not only takes time but the data you need may be unlocatable.
  • Every item needs to be re-examined, re-justified, and tied to an asset, service, or project, which means it’s a far more comprehensive and accurate approach.

Pick a range of percentage change based on your business context and past spend.

  • If economic prospects are negative, start with a 0-3% increase to balance inflation with potential cuts. Don’t set concrete reduction targets at this point, to avoid tunnel vision in the forecasting exercise.
  • If economic prospects are positive, target 3-5% increases for stable scenarios and 6-10% increases for growth scenarios.
  • If CapEx from previous-year projects is switching to steady-state OpEx, then account for these bumps in OpEx.
  • If the benefits from any previous-year efficiency measures will be realized next fiscal year, then account for these as OpEx reductions.

If cost-cutting or optimization is a priority, then a zero-based approach is the right decision. If doing this every year is too onerous, plan to do it for your OpEx at least every few years to examine what’s actually in there, clean house, and re-set.

Set your high-level CapEx budget targets

A lot of IT CapEx is conceived in business projects, so your proposed expenditure here may not be up to you. Exercise as much influence as you can.

First things first: Is it project CapEx, or “business as usual” CapEx?

Project CapEx is tied to one-time strategic projects requiring investment in new assets.

  • This CapEx will probably be variable year to year, going up or down depending on the organization’s circumstances or goals.
  • This area of spend is driven largely by the business and not IT. Plan to set project CapEx targets in close partnership with the business and function as a steward of these funds instead of as an owner.

User-driven “business as usual” CapEx manifests via changes (often increases) in organizational headcount due to growth.

  • Costs here focus on end-user hardware like desktops, laptops, and peripherals.
  • Any new capital software acquisitions you have planned will also be affected in terms of number of licenses required.
  • Get reliable estimates of department-by-department hiring plans for next fiscal year to better account for these in your budget.

Network/data center-driven “business-as-usual” CapEx is about core infrastructure maintenance.

  • Costs here focus on the purchase of network and data center hardware and other equipment to maintain existing infrastructure services and performance.
  • Increased outsourcing often drives down this area of “business as usual” CapEx by reducing the purchase of new on-premises solutions and eliminating network and data center maintenance requirements.

Unanticipated hiring and the need to buy end-user hardware is cited as a top cause of budget grief by IT leaders – get ahead of this. Project CapEx, however, is usually determined via business-based capital project approval mechanisms well in advance. And don’t forget to factor in pre-established capital asset depreciation amounts generated by all the above!

2.4 Set your high-level IT budget targets and metrics

8 hours

  1. Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook to document the outcomes of this activity.
  2. Review the context in which your organization is currently operating and expects to operate in the next fiscal year. Specifically, look at:
    1. The state of the economy.
    2. Stated goals, objectives, and targets.
    3. The executive’s point of view on budget increase requests.
    Document your factors, assessment, rationale, and considerations in the “Business Context Assessment” table on the “Planning Variables” tab in the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.
  3. Based on the business context, anticipated flips of former CapEx to OpEx, and realization of previous years’ efficiency measures, set a general non-project OpEx target as a percentage increase or decrease for next fiscal year to serve as a guideline in the cost forecasting guideline. Document this in the “Budget Targets & Metrics” table on the “Planning Variables” tab in the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook. sed on known capital projects, changes in headcount, typical “business as usual” equipment expenditure, and pre-established capital asset depreciation amounts, set general project CapEx and non-project CapEx targets. Document these in the “Budget Targets & Metrics” table on the “Planning Variables” tab in the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.
  4. Finally, set your overarching IT budget process success metrics. Also document these in the “Budget Targets & Metrics” table on the “Planning Variables” tab in the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

2.4 Set your high-level IT budget targets and metrics

InputOutputMaterialsParticipants
  • Knowledge of current business context and probable context next fiscal year
  • Analysis of historical IT expenditure patterns
  • High-level project CapEx and non-project CapEx and OpEx targets for the next fiscal year
  • IT budget process success metrics
  • IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Phase recap: Get into budget-starting position

Now you’re ready to do the deep dive into forecasting your IT budget for next year.

In this phase, you clarified your business context and defined your budgetary goals, including:

  • Assembling your resources. You’ve built and organized your IT budgeting team, as well as gathered the data and information you’ll need to do your historical expenditure analysis and future forecasting
  • Understanding the four views of the IT Cost Model. You’ve become familiar with the four views of the model and have selected which ones you’ll map for historical analysis and forecasting purposes.
  • Reviewing last year’s budget versus actuals and five-year historical trends. You now have the critical rationale-building context to inform next year’s numbers and demonstrate any cost efficiencies you’ve successfully executed.
  • Setting your high-level goals. You’ve established high-level targets for project and non-project CapEx and OpEx, as well as set some IT budget process improvement goals.

“We only have one dollar but five things. Help us understand how to spend that dollar.”

– Trisha Goya, Director, IT Governance & Administration, Hawaii Medical Service Association

Phase 3

Develop Your Forecasts

Lay Your
Foundation

Get Into Budget-Starting Position

Develop Your
Forecasts

Build Your
Proposed Budget

Create and Deliver Your Presentation

1.1 Understand what your budget is
and does

1.2 Know your stakeholders

1.3 Continuously pre-sell your budget

2.1 Assemble your resources

2.2 Understand the four views of the ITFM Cost Model

2.3 Review last year’s budget vs.
actuals and five-year historical trends

2.4 Set your high-level goals

3.1 Develop assumptions and
alternative scenarios

3.2 Forecast your project CapEx

3.3 Forecast your non-project CapEx and OpEx

4.1 Aggregate your numbers

4.2 Stress test your forecasts

4.3 Challenge and perfect your
rationales

5.1 Plan your content

5.2 Build your presentation

5.3 Present to stakeholders

5.4 Make final adjustments and submit your IT budget

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Documenting the assumptions behind your proposed budget and develop alternative scenarios.
  • Forecasting your project CapEx.
  • Forecasting your non-project CapEx and OpEx.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Develop your forecasts

Start making some decisions.

This phase focuses on putting real numbers on paper based on the research and data you’ve collected. Here, you will:

  • Develop assumptions and alternative scenarios. The assumptions you make are the logical foundation for your decisions, and your primary and alternative scenarios focus your thinking and demonstrate that you’ve thoroughly examined your organization’s current and future context.
  • Forecast your project CapEx costs. These costs are comprised of all the project-related capital expenditures for strategic or capital projects, including in-house labor.
  • Forecast your non-project CapEx and OpEx costs. These costs are the ongoing “business as usual” expenditures incurred via the day-to-day operations of IT and delivery of IT services.

“Our April forecast is what really sets the bar for what our increase is going to be next fiscal year. We realized that we couldn’t change it later, so we needed to do more upfront to get that forecast right.

If we know that IT projects have been delayed, if we know we pulled some things forward, if we know that a project isn’t starting until next year, let’s be really clear on those things so that we’re starting from a better forecast because that’s the basis of deciding two percent, three percent, whatever it’s going to be.”

– Kristen Thurber, IT Director, Office of the CIO, Donaldson Company

When pinning down assumptions, start with negotiable and non-negotiable constraints

Assumptions are things you hold to be true. They may not actually be true, but they are your logical foundation and must be shared with stakeholders so they can follow your thinking.

Start with understanding your constraints. These are either negotiable (adjustable) or non-negotiable (non-adjustable). However, what is non-negotiable for IT may be negotiable for the organization as a whole, such as its strategic objectives. Consider each of the constraints below, determine how it relates to IT expenditure options, and decide if it’s ultimately negotiable or non-negotiable.

Organizational

Legal and Regulatory

IT/Other

Example:
  • Strategic goals and priorities
  • Financial and market performance
  • Governance style and methods
  • Organizational policies
  • Organizational culture
  • Regulatory compliance and reporting
  • Data residency and privacy laws
  • Vendor contract terms and conditions
  • Health and safety
  • Compensation and collective bargaining
  • IT funding and fund allocation flexibility
  • Staff/skills availability and capacity
  • Business continuity and IT performance requirements
  • Time and timeframes
You’re in year one of a three-year vendor contract. All contracts are negotiable, but this one isn’t for two years. This contact should be considered a non-negotiable for current budget-planning purposes.

Identifying your negotiable and non-negotiable constraints is about knowing what levers you can pull. Government entities have more non-negotiable constraints than private companies, which means IT and the organization as a whole have fewer budgetary levers to pull and a lot less flexibility.

An un-pullable lever and a pullable lever (and how much you can pull it) have one important thing in common – they are all fundamental assumptions that influence your decisions.

Brainstorm your assumptions even further

The tricky thing about assumptions is that they’re taken for granted – you don’t always realize you’ve made them. Consider these common assumptions and test them for validity.

My current employees will still be here 18 months from now.

My current vendors aren’t going to discontinue the products we have.

My organization’s executive team will be the same 18 months from now. My current key vendors will be around for years to come.

My organization’s departments, divisions, and general structure will be the same 18 months from now.

IT has to be an innovation leader.

We won’t be involved in any merger/acquisition activity next fiscal year.

IT has always played the same role here and that won’t change.

There won’t be a major natural disaster that takes us offline for days or even weeks.

We must move everything we can to the cloud.

We won’t be launching any new products or services next fiscal year.

Most of our IT expenditure has to be CapEx, as usual.

You won’t put some of these assumptions into your final budget presentation. It’s simply worthwhile knowing what they are so you can challenge them when forecasting.

Based on your assumptions, define the primary scenario that will frame your budget

Your primary scenario is the one you believe is most likely to happen and upon which you’ll build your IT cost forecasts.

Now it’s time to outline your primary scenario.

  • A scenario is created by identifying the variable factors embedded in your assumptions and manipulating them across the range of possibilities. This manipulation of variables will result in different scenarios, some more likely or feasible than others.
  • Your primary scenario is the one you believe is the most feasible and/or likely to happen (i.e. most probable). This is based on:
    • Your understanding of past events and patterns.
    • Your understanding of your organization’s current context.
    • Your understanding of IT’s current context.
    • Your understanding of the organization’s objectives.
    • Your assessment of negotiable and non-negotiable constraints and other assumptions for both IT and the organization.

A note on probability…

  • A non-negotiable constraint doesn’t have any variables to manipulate. It’s a 100% probability that must be rigidly accommodated and protected in your scenario. An example is a long-standing industry regulation that shows no signs of being updated or altered and must be complied with in its current state.
  • A negotiable constraint has many more variables in play. Your goal is to identify the different potential values of the variables and determine the degree of probability that one value is more likely to be true or feasible than another. An example is that you’re directed to cut costs, but the amount could be as little as 3% or as much as 20%.
  • And then there are the unknowns. These are circumstances, events, or initiatives that inevitably happen, but you can’t predict when, what, or how much. This is what contingency planning and insurance are for. Examples include a natural disaster, a pandemic, a supply chain crisis, or the CEO simply changing their mind. Its safe to assume something is going to happen, so if you’re able to establish a contingency fund or mechanisms that let you respond, then do it.

What could or will be your organization’s new current state at the end of next fiscal year?

Next, explore alternative scenarios, even those that may seem a bit outrageous

Offering alternatives demonstrates that you weighed all the pertinent factors and that you’ve thought broadly about the organization’s future and how best to support it.

Primary scenario approval can be helped by putting that scenario alongside alternatives that are less attractive due to their cost, priority, or feasibility. Alternative scenarios are created by manipulating or eliminating your negotiable constraints or treating specific unknowns as knowns. Here are some common alternative scenarios.

The high-cost scenario: Assumes very positive economic prospects. Characterized by more of everything – people and skills, new or more sophisticated technologies, projects, growth, and innovation. Remember to consider the long-term impact on OpEx that higher capital spend may bring in subsequent years.

Target 10-20% more expenditure than your primary scenario

The low-cost scenario: Assumes negative economic prospects or cost-control objectives. Characterized by less of everything, specifically capital project investment, other CapEx, and OpEx. Must assume that business service-level expectations will be down-graded and other sacrifices will be made.

Target 5-15% less expenditure than your primary scenario

The dark horse scenario: This is a more radical proposition that challenges the status quo. For example, what would the budget look like if all data specialists in the organization were centralized under IT? What if IT ran the corporate PMO? What if the entire IT function was 100% outsourced?

No specific target

Case Study

INDUSTRY: Manufacturing

SOURCE: Anonymous

A manufacturing IT Director gets budgetary approval by showing what the business would have to sacrifice to get the cheap option.

Challenge

Solution

Results

A manufacturing business had been cutting costs endlessly across the organization, but specifically in IT.

IT was down to the bone. The IT Director had already been doing zero-based budgeting to rationalize all expenditure, stretching asset lifecycles as long as possible, and letting maintenance work slide.

There were no obvious options left to reduce costs based on what the business wanted to do.

The IT Director got creative. He put together three complete budgets:

  1. The budget he wanted.
  2. A budget where everything was entirely outsourced and there would be zero in-house IT staff.
  3. A budget that was not as extreme as the second one, but still tilted toward outsourcing.

In the budget presentation, he led with the “super cheap” budget where IT was 100% outsourced.

He proceeded to review the things they wouldn’t have under the extreme outsourced scenario, including the losses in service levels that would be necessary to make it happen.

The executive was shocked by what the IT Director showed them.

The executive immediately approved the IT Director’s preferred budget. He was able to defend the best budget for the business by showing them what they stood to lose.

3.1 Document your assumptions and alternative scenarios

2 hours

  1. Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook and document the outcomes of this activity on Tab 9, “Alternative Scenarios.”
  2. As a management team, identify and discuss your non-negotiable and negotiable constraints. Document these in rows 4 and 5 respectively in the Workbook.
  3. Brainstorm, list, and challenge any other assumptions being made by IT or the organization’s executive in terms of what can and cannot be done.
  4. Identify the most likely or feasible scenario (primary) and associated assumptions. You will base your initial forecasting on this scenario.
  5. Identify alternative scenarios. Document each scenario’s name, description, and key assumptions, and major opportunities in columns B-D on Tab 9, “Alternative Scenarios.” You will do any calculations for these scenarios after you have completed the forecast for your primary scenario.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

InputOutput
  • Knowledge of organization’s context, culture, and operations
  • A list of assumptions that will form the logical foundation of your forecasting decisions
  • Identification of the primary budget scenario and alternatives
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Before diving into actual forecasting, get clear on project and non-project CapEx and OpEx

Traditional, binary “CapEx vs. OpEx” distinctions don’t seem adequate for showing where expenditure is really going. We’ve added a new facet to help further differentiate one-time project costs from recurring “business as usual” expenses.

Project CapEx
Includes all workforce and vendor costs associated with planning and execution of projects largely focused on the acquisition or creation of new capital assets.

Non-project CapEx
Includes “business as usual” capital asset acquisition in the interest of managing, maintaining, or supporting ongoing performance of existing infrastructure or services, such as replacement network equipment, end-user hardware (e.g. laptops), or disaster recovery/business continuity redundancies. Also includes ongoing asset depreciation amounts.

Non-project OpEx
Includes all recurring, non-CapEx “business as usual” costs such as labor compensation and training, cloud-based software fees, outsourcing costs, managed services fees, subscriptions, and other discretionary spend.

Depreciation is technically CapEx. However, for practical purposes, most organizations list it under OpEx, which can cause it to get lost in the noise. Here, depreciation is under non-project CapEx to keep its true CapEx nature visible and in the company of other “business as usual” capital purchases that will ultimately join the depreciation ranks.

Forecast your project CapEx costs

This process can be simple as far as overall budget forecasting is concerned. If it isn’t simple now, plan to make it simpler next time around.

What to expect…

  • Ideally, the costs for all projects should have been thoroughly estimated, reviewed, and accepted by a steering committee, your CFO, or other approving entity at the start of the budgeting season, and funding already committed to. In a nutshell, forecasting your project costs should already have been done and will only require plugging in those numbers.
  • If projects have yet to be pitched and rubber stamped, know that your work is cut out for you. Doing things in a rush or without proper due diligence will result in certain costs being missed. This means that you risk going far over budget in terms of actuals next year, or having to borrow from other areas in your budget to cover unplanned or underestimated project costs.

Key forecasting principles…

Develop rigorous business cases
Secure funding approval well in advance
Tie back costs benefitting business units
Consider the longer-term OpEx impact

For more information about putting together sound business cases for different projects and circumstances, see the following Info-Tech blueprints:

Build a Comprehensive Business Case

Fund Innovation with a Minimum Viable Business Case

Reduce Time to Consensus with an Accelerated Business Case

Apply these project CapEx forecasting tips

A good project CapEx forecast requires steady legwork, not last-minute fast thinking.

Tip #1: Don’t surprise your approvers. Springing a capital project on approvers at your formal presentation isn’t a good idea and stands a good chance of rejection, so do whatever you can to lock these costs down well in advance.

Tip #2: Project costs should be entirely comprised of CapEx if possible. Keep in mind that some of these costs will convert to depreciated non-project CapEx and non-project OpEx as they transition from project costs to ongoing “business as usual” costs, usually in the fiscal year following the year of expenditure. Creating projections for the longer-term impacts of these project CapEx costs on future types of expenditure is a good idea. Remember that a one-time project is not the same thing as a one-time cost.

Tip #3: Capitalize any employee labor costs on capital projects. This ensures the true costs of projects are not underestimated and that operational staff aren’t being used for free at the expense of their regular duties.

Tip #4: Capitalizing cloud costs in year one of a formal implementation project is usually acceptable. It’s possible to continue treating cloud costs as CapEx with some vendors via something called reserved instances, but organizations report that this is a lot of work to set up. In the end, most capitalized cloud will convert into non-project OpEx in years two and beyond.

Tip #5: Build in some leeway. By the time a project is initiated, circumstances may have changed dramatically from when it was first pitched and approved, including business priorities and needs, vendor pricing, and skillset availability. Your costing may become completely out of date. It’s a good practice to work within more general cost ranges than with specific numbers, to give you the flexibility to respond and adapt during actual execution.

3.2 Forecast your project CapEx

Time: Depends on size of project portfolio

  1. Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook and navigate to Tab 5, “Project CapEx Forecast”. Add more columns as required. Enter the following for all projects:
    • Row 5 – Its name and/or unique identifier.
    • Row 6 – Its known or estimated project start/end dates.
    • Row 7 – Its status (in proposal, committed, or in progress).
  2. Distribute each project’s costs across the categories listed for each view you’ve selected to map. Do not include any OpEx here – it will be mapped separately under non-project OpEx.
  3. Rationalize your values. A running per-project total for each view, as well as totals for all projects combined, are in rows 16, 28, 39, and 43. Ensure these totals match or are very close across all the views you are mapping. If they don’t match, review the views that are lower-end outliers as there’s a good chance something has been overlooked.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

InputOutput
  • Project proposals and plans, including cost estimations
  • A project CapEx forecast for next fiscal year
MaterialsParticipants
  • IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Forecast your non-project OpEx

Most of your budget will be non-project OpEx, so plan to spend most of your forecasting effort here.

What to expect…

Central to the definition of OpEx is the fact that it’s ongoing. It rarely stops, and tends to steadily increase over time due to factors like inflation, rising vendor prices, growing organizational growth, increases in the salary expectations of employees, and other factors.

The only certain ways to reduce OpEx are to convert it to capitalizable expenditure, decrease staffing costs, not pursue cloud technologies, or for the organization to simply not grow. For most organizations, none of these approaches are feasible. Smaller scale efficiencies and optimizations can keep OpEx from running amok, but they won’t change its overall upward trajectory over time. Expect it to increase.

Key forecasting principles…

Focus on optimization and efficiency.
Aim for full spend transparency.
Think about appropriate chargeback options.
Give it the time it deserves.

For more information about how to make the most out of your IT OpEx, see the following Info-Tech blueprints:

Develop Your Cost Optimization Roadmap

Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

Discover the Hidden Costs of Outsourcing

Apply these non-project OpEx forecasting tips

A good forecast is in the details, so take a very close look to see what’s really there.

Tip #1: Consider zero-based budgeting. You don’t have to do this every year, but re-rationalizing your OpEx every few years, or a just a segment of it on a rotational basis, will not only help you readily justify the expenditure but also find waste and inefficiencies you didn’t know existed.

Tip #2: Capitalize your employee capital project work. While some organizations aren’t allowed to do this, others who can simply don’t bother. Unfortunately, this act can bloat the OpEx side of the equation substantially. Many regular employees spend a significant amount of their time working on capital projects, but this fact is invisible to the business. This is why the business keeps asking why it takes so many people to run IT.

Tip #3: Break out your cloud vs. on-premises costs. Burying cloud apps costs in a generic software bucket works against any transparency ambitions you may have. If you have anything resembling a cloud strategy, you need to track, report, and plan for these costs separately in order to measure benefits realization. This goes for cloud infrastructure costs, too.

Tip #4: Spend time on your CIO service view forecast. Completing this view counts as a first step toward service-based costing and is a good starting point for setting up an accurate service catalog. If looking for cost reductions, you’ll want to examine your forecasts in this view as there will likely be service-level reductions you’ll need to propose to hit your cost-cutting goals.

Tip #5: Budget with consideration for chargeback. chargeback mechanisms for OpEx can be challenging to manage and have political repercussions, but they do shift accountability back to the business, guarantee that the IT bills get paid, and reduce IT’s OpEx burden. Selectively charging business units for applications that only they use may be a good entry point into chargeback. It may also be as far as you want to go with it. Doing the CXO business view forecast will provide insight into your opportunities here.

Forecast your non-project CapEx

These costs are often the smallest percentage of overall expenditure but one of the biggest sources of financial grief for IT.

What to expect…

  • These costs can be hard to predict. Anticipating expenditure on end-user hardware such as laptops depends on knowing how many new staff will be hired by the organization next year. Predicting the need to buy networking hardware depends on knowing if, and when, a critical piece of equipment is going to spontaneously fail. You can never be completely sure.
  • IT often must reallocate funds from other areas of its budget to cover non-project CapEx costs. Unfortunately, keeping the network running and ensuring employees have access to that network is seen exclusively as an IT problem, not a business problem. Plan to change this mindset.

Key forecasting principles…

Discuss hiring plans with the business.
Pay close attention to your asset lifecycles.
Prepare to advise about depreciation schedules.
Build in contingency for the unexpected.

For more information about ensuring IT isn’t left in the lurch when it comes to non-project CapEx, see the following Info-Tech blueprints:

Manage End-User Devices

Develop an Availability and Capacity Management Plan

Modernize the Network

Apply these non-project CapEx forecasting tips

A good forecast relies on your ability to accurately predict the future.

Tip #1: Top up new hire estimations: Talk to every business unit leader about their concrete hiring plans, not their aspirations. Get a number, increase that number by 25% or 20 FTEs (whichever is less), and use this new number to calculate your end-user non-project CapEx.

Tip #2: Make an arrangement for who’s paying for operational technology (OT) devices and equipment. OT involves specialized devices such as in-the-field sensors, scanners, meters, and other networkable equipment. Historically, operational units have handled this themselves, but this has created security problems and they still rely on IT for support. Sort the financials out now, including whose budget device and equipment purchases appear on, as well as what accommodations IT will need to make in its own budget to support them.

Tip #3: Evaluate cloud infrastructure and managed services. These can dramatically reduce your non-project CapEx, particularly on the network and data center fronts. However, these solutions aren’t necessarily less expensive and will drive up OpEx, so tread cautiously.

Tip #4: Definitely do an inventory. If you haven’t invested in IT asset management, put it on your project and budgetary agenda. You can’t manage what you don’t know you have, so asset discovery should be your first order of business. From there, start gathering asset lifecycle information and build in alerting to aid your spend planning.

Tip #5: Think about retirement: What assets are nearing end of life or the end of their depreciation schedule? What impact is this having on non-project OpEx in terms of maintenance and support? Deciding to retire, replace, or extend an IT operational asset will change your non-project CapEx outlook and will affect costs in other areas.

Tip #6: Create a contingency fund: You need one to deal with surprises and emergencies, so why wait?

Document the organization’s projected FTEs by business function

This data point is usually missing from IT’s budget forecasting data set. Try to get it.

A powerful metric to share with business stakeholders is expenditure per employee or FTE. It’s powerful because:

  • It’s one of the few metrics that’s intuitively understood by most people
  • It can show changes in IT expenditure over time at both granular and general levels.

This metric is one of the simplest to calculate. The challenge is in getting your hands on the data in the first place.

  • Most business unit leaders struggle to pin down this number in terms of actuals as they have difficulty determining what an FTE actually is. Does it include contract staff? Part-time staff? Seasonal workers? Volunteers and interns? And if the business unit has high turnover, this number can fluctuate significantly.
  • Encourage your business peers to produce a rational estimate. Unlike the headcount number you’re seeking to forecast for non-project capital expenditure for end-user hardware, this FTE number should strive to be more in the ballpark, as you’re not using it to ensure sufficient funds but comparatively track expenditure year to year.
  • Depending on your industry, employees or FTEs may not be the best measurement. Use what works best for you. Number of unique users is a common one. Other industry-specific examples include per student, per bed, per patient, per account, and per resident.

Start to build in long-term and short-term forecasting into your budgeting process

These are growing practices in mature IT organizations that afford significant flexibility.

Short-term forecasting:

Long-term forecasting:

  • At Donaldson Company, budgeting is a once-a-year event, but they’ve started formalizing a forecast review three times a year.
  • These mini-forecasts are not as full blown as the annual forecasting process. Rather, they look at specific parts of the budget and update it based on changing realities.

“It’s a great step in the right direction. We look at
the current, and then the future. What we’re really pushing is how to keep that outyear spend more in discussion. The biggest thing we’re trying to do when we approve projects is look at what does that approval do to outyear spend? Is it going to increase? Is it going to decrease? Will we be spending more on licensing? On people?”

– Kristen Thurber, IT Director, Office of the CIO,
Donaldson Company

  • In 2017, the Hawaii Medical Service Association accepted the fact that they were very challenged with legacy systems. They needed to modernize.
  • They created a multi-year strategic budget -- a five-year investment plan. This plan was a success. They were able to gain approval for a five-year horizon with variable allocations per year, as required.

“This approach was much better. We now
have a “guarantee” of funding for five years now – they’ve conceptually agreed. Now we don’t have
to make that request for new money every time
if we need more. We can vary the amount every
year – it doesn’t have to be the same.”

– Trisha Goya, Director, IT Governance & Administration,
Hawaii Medical Service Association

3.4 Forecast your non-project OpEx and CapEx

Time: Depends on size of vendor portfolio and workforce

  1. Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook and navigate to Tab 4, “Business as Usual Forecast”. This tab assumes an incremental budgeting approach. Last year’s actuals have been carried forward for you to build upon.
  2. Enter expected percentage-based cost increases/decreases for next fiscal year for each of the following variables (columns E-I): inflation, vendor pricing, labor costs, service levels, and depreciation. Do this for all sub-categories for the ITFM cost model views you’ve opted to map. Provide rationales for your percentage values in column K.
  3. In columns M and N, enter the anticipated percentage allocation of cost to non-project CapEx versus non-project OpEx.
  4. In column O, rows 29-38, enter the projected FTEs for each business function (if available).
  5. If you choose, make longer-term, high-level forecasts for 2-3 years in the future in columns P-U. Performing longer-term forecasts for at least the CFO expense view categories is recommended.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

Input Output
  • Last fiscal year’s actuals
  • Knowledge of likely inflation, vendor cost, and salary expectations for next fiscal year
  • Depreciation amounts
  • A non-project OpEx and CapEx forecast for next fiscal year
Materials Participants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Case Study

INDUSTRY: Insurance

SOURCE: Anonymous

Challenge

Solution

Results

In his first run at the annual budgeting process, a new CIO received delivery dates from Finance and spent the next three months building the budget for the next fiscal year.

He discovered that the organization had been underinvesting in IT for a long time. There were platforms without support, no accounting for currency exchange rates on purchases, components that had not be upgraded in 16 years, big cybersecurity risks, and 20 critical incidences a month.

In his budget, the CIO requested a 22-24% increase in IT expenditure to deal with the critical gaps, and provided a detailed defense of his proposal

But the new CIO’s team and Finance were frustrated with him. He asked his IT finance leader why. She said she didn’t understand what his direction was and why the budgeting process was taking so long – his predecessor did the budget in only two days. He would add up the contracts, add 10% for inflation, and that’s it.

Simply put, the organization hadn’t taken budgeting seriously. By doing it right, the new CIO had inadvertently challenged the status quo.

The CIO ended up under-executing his first budget by 12% but is tracking closer to plan this year. Significantly, he’s been able cut critical incidences from 20 down to only 2-3 per month.

Some friction persists with the CFO, who sees him as a “big spender,” but he believes that this friction has forced him to be even better.

Phase recap: Develop your forecasts

The hard math is done. Now it’s time to step back and craft your final proposed budget and its key messages.

This phase focused on developing your forecasts and proposed budget for next fiscal year. It included:

  • Developing assumptions and alternative scenarios. These will showcase your understanding of business context as well as what’s most likely to happen (or should happen) next year.
  • Forecasting your project CapEx costs. If these costs weren’t laid out already in formal, approved project proposals or plans, now you know why it’s the better approach for developing a budget.
  • Forecasting your non-project CapEx and OpEx costs. Now you should have more clarity and transparency concerning where these costs are going and exactly why they need to go there.

“Ninety percent of your projects will get started but a good 10% will never get off the ground because of capacity or the business changes their mind or other priorities are thrown in. There are always these sorts of challenges that come up.”

– Theresa Hughes, Executive Counselor,
Info-Tech Research Group
and Former IT Executive

Phase 4

Build Your Proposed Budget

Lay Your
Foundation

Get Into Budget-Starting Position

Develop Your
Forecasts

Build Your
Proposed Budget

Create and Deliver Your Presentation

1.1 Understand what your budget is
and does

1.2 Know your stakeholders

1.3 Continuously pre-sell your budget

2.1 Assemble your resources

2.2 Understand the four views of the ITFM Cost Model

2.3 Review last year’s budget vs.
actuals and five-year historical trends

2.4 Set your high-level goals

3.1 Develop assumptions and
alternative scenarios

3.2 Forecast your project CapEx

3.3 Forecast your non-project CapEx and OpEx

4.1 Aggregate your numbers

4.2 Stress test your forecasts

4.3 Challenge and perfect your
rationales

5.1 Plan your content

5.2 Build your presentation

5.3 Present to stakeholders

5.4 Make final adjustments and submit your IT budget

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Pulling your forecasts together into a comprehensive IT budget for next fiscal year.
  • Double checking your forecasts to ensure they’re accurate.
  • Fine tuning the rationales behind your proposals.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Build your proposed budget

Triple check your numbers and put the finishing touches on your approval-winning rationales.

This phase is where your analysis and decision making finally come together into a coherent budget proposal. Key steps include:

  • Aggregating your numbers. This step involves pulling together your project CapEx, non-project CapEx, and non-project OpEx forecasts into a comprehensive whole and sanity-checking your expenditure-type ratios.
  • Stress-testing your forecasts. Do some detailed checks to ensure everything’s accounted for and you haven’t overlooked any significant information or factors that could affect your forecasted costs.
  • Challenging and perfecting your rationales. Your ability to present hard evidence and rational explanations in support of your proposed budget is often the difference between a yes or a no. Look at your proposals from different stakeholder perspectives and ask yourself, “Would I say yes to this if I were them?”

“We don’t buy servers and licenses because we want to. We buy them because we have to. IT doesn’t need those servers out at our data center provider, network connections, et cetera. Only a fraction of these costs are to support us in the IT department. IT doesn’t have control over these costs because we’re not the consumers.”

– Matt Johnson, IT Director Governance and Business Solutions, Milwaukee County

Great rationales do more than set you up for streamlined budgetary approval

Rationales build credibility and trust in your business capabilities. They can also help stop the same conversations happening year after year.

Any item in your proposed budget can send you down a rabbit hole if not thoroughly defensible.

You probably won’t need to defend every item, but it’s best to be prepared to do so. Ask yourself:

  • What areas of spend does the CFO come back to year after year? Is it some aspect of OpEx, such as workforce costs or cloud software fees? Is it the relationship between proposed project spend and business benefits? Provide detailed and transparent rationales for these items to start re-directing long-term conversations to more strategic issues.
  • What areas of spend seem to be recurring points of conflict with business unit leaders? Is it surprise spend that comes from business decisions that didn’t include IT? Is it business-unit leaders railing against chargeback? Have frank, information-sharing conversations focused on business applications, service-level requirements, and true IT costs to support them.
  • What’s on the CEO’s mind? Are they focused on entering a new overseas market, which will require capital investment? Are they interested in the potential of a new technology because competitors are adopting it? It may not be the same focus as last year, so ensure you have fresh rationales that show how IT will help deliver on these business goals.

“Budgets get out of control when one department fails to care for the implications of change within another department's budget. This wastes time, reduces accuracy and causes conflict.”

– Tara Kinney, Atomic Revenue, LLC.

Rationalizing costs depends on the intention of the spend

Not all spending serves the same purpose. Some types require deeper or different justifications than others.

For the business, there are two main purposes for spend:

  1. Spending that drives revenues or the customer experience. Think in terms of return on investment (ROI), i.e. when will the expenditure pay for itself via the revenue gains it helps create?
  2. Spending that mitigates and manages risk. Think in terms of cost-benefit, i.e. what are the costs of doing something versus doing nothing at all?
Source: Kris Blackmon, NetSuite Brainyard.

“Approval came down to ROI and the ability to show benefits realization for years one, two, and three through five.”

– Duane Cooney, Executive Counselor, Info-Tech Research Group, and Former Healthcare CIO

Regardless of its ultimate purpose, all expenditure needs statements of assumptions, obstacles, and likelihood of goals being realized behind it.

  • What are the assumptions that went into the calculation?
  • Is the spend new or a reallocation (and from where)?
  • What’s the likelihood of realizing returns or benefits?
  • What are potential obstacles to realizing returns or benefits?

Rationales aren’t only for capital projects – they can and should be applied to all proposed OpEx and CapEx. Business project rationales tend to drive revenue and the customer experience, demanding ROI calculations. Internal IT-projects and non-project expenditure are often focused on mitigating and managing risk, requiring cost-benefit analysis.

First, make sure your numbers add up

There are a lot of numbers flying around during a budgeting process. Now’s the time to get out of the weeds, look at the big picture, and ensure everything lines up.

Overall

Non-Project OpEx

Non-Project CapEx

Project CapEx

  • Is your proposed budget consistent with previous IT expenditure patterns?
  • Did you account for major known anomalies or events?
  • Is your final total in line with your CFO’s communicated targets and expectations?
  • Are your alternative scenarios realistic and reflective of viable economic contexts that your organization could find itself in in the near term?
  • Are the OpEx-to-CapEx ratios sensible?
  • Does it pass your gut check?
  • Did you research and verify market rates for employees and skill sets?
  • Did you research and verify likely vendor pricing and potential increases?
  • Are cost categories with variances greater than +5% backed up by defensible IT hiring plans or documented operational growth or improvement initiatives?
  • Have you accounted for the absorption of previous capital project costs into day-to-day management, maintenance, and support operations?
  • Do you have accurate depreciation amounts and timeframes for their discontinuation?
  • Are any variances driven by confirmed business plans to increase headcount, necessitating purchase of end-user hardware and on-premises software licenses?
  • Are any variances due to net-new planned/contingency purchases or the retirement of depreciable on-premises equipment?
  • Is funding for all capital projects represented reliable, i.e. has it been approved?
  • Are all in-progress, proposed, or committed project CapEx costs backed up with reliable estimates and full project documentation?
  • Do capital project costs include the capitalizable costs of employees working on those projects, and were these amounts deducted from non-project OpEx?
  • Have you estimated the longer-term OpEx impact of your current capital projects?

4.1 Aggregate your proposed budget numbers and stress test your forecasts

2 hours

  1. Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for this activity. If you have been using it thus far, the Workbook will have calculated your numbers for you across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model on Tab 7, “Proposed Budget”, including:
    1. Forecasted non-project OpEx, non-project CapEx (including depreciation values), project CapEx, and total values.
    2. Numerical and percentage variances from the previous year.
  2. Test and finalize your forecasts by applying the questions on the previous slide.
  3. Flag cost categories where large variances from the previous year or large numbers in general appear – you will need to ensure your rationales for these variances are rigorous in the next step.
  4. Make amendments if needed to Tabs 4, “Business as Usual Forecast” and 5, “Project CapEx Forecast” in the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

InputOutputMaterialsParticipants
  • Final drafts of all IT cost forecasts
  • A final proposed IT budget
  • IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Case Study

INDUSTRY: Healthcare

SOURCE: Anonymous

Challenge

Solution

Results

A senior nursing systems director needed the CIO’s help. She wanted to get a project off the ground, but it wasn’t getting priority or funding.

Nurses were burning out. Many were staying one to two hours late per shift to catch up on patient notes. Their EHR platform had two problematic workflows, each taking up to about 15 minutes per nurse per patient to complete. These workflows were complex, of no value, and just not getting done. She needed a few million dollars to make the fix.

The CIO worked with the director to do the math. In only a few hours, they realized that the savings from rewriting the workflows would allow them to hire over 500 full-time nurses.

The benefits realized would not only help reduce nurse workload and generate savings, but also increase the amount of time spent with patients and number of patients seen overall. They redid the math several times to ensure they were right.

The senior nursing systems director presented to her peers and leadership, and eventually to the Board of Directors. The Board immediately saw the benefits and promoted the project to first on the list ahead of all other projects.

This collaborative approach to generating project benefits statements helped the CIO gain trust and pave the way for future budgets.

The strength of your rationales will determine how readily your budget is approved

When proposing expenditure, you need to thoroughly consider the organization’s goals, its governance culture, and the overall feasibility of what’s being asked.

First, recall what budgets are really about.

The completeness, accuracy, and granularity of your numbers and thorough ROI calculations for projects are essential. They will serve you well in getting the CFO’s attention. However, the numbers will only get you halfway there. Despite what some people think, the work in setting a budget is more about the what, how, and why – that is, the rationale – than about the how much.

Next, revisit Phase 1 of this blueprint and review:

  • Your organization’s budgeting culture and processes.
  • The typical accountabilities, priorities, challenges, opportunities, and expectations associated with your CFO, CEO, and CXO IT budget stakeholders.
  • Your budgetary mandate as the head of IT.

Then, look at each component of your proposed budget through each of these three rationale-building lenses.

Business goals
What are the organization’s strategic priorities?

Governance culture
How constrained is the decision-making process?

Feasibility
Can we make it happen?

Linking proposed spend to strategic goals isn’t just for strategic project CapEx

Tie in your “business as usual” non-project OpEx and CapEx, as well.

Business goals

What are the organization’s strategic priorities?

Context

This is all about external factors, namely the broader economic, political, and industry contexts in which the organization operates.

Lifecycle position

The stage the organization is at in terms of growth, stability, or decline will drive decisions, priorities, and the ability to spend or invest.

Opportunities

Context and lifecycle position determine opportunities, which are often defined in terms of potential cost savings
or ROI.

Tie every element in your proposed budget to an organizational goal.

Non-project OpEx

  • Remember that OpEx is what comes from the realization of past strategic goals. If that past goal is still valid, then the OpEx that keeps that goal alive is, too.
  • Business viability and continuity are often unexpressed goals. OpEx directly supports these goals.
  • Periodically apply zero-based budgeting to OpEx to re-rationalize and identify waste.

Non-project CapEx

  • Know the impact of any business growth goals on future headcount – this is essential to rationalize laptop/desktop and other end-user hardware spend.
  • Position infrastructure equipment spend in terms of having sufficient capacity to support growth goals as well as ensuring network/system reliability and continuity.
  • Leverage depreciation schedules as backup.

Project CapEx

  • Challenge business-driven CapEx projects if they don’t directly support stated goals.
  • Ideally, the goal-supporting rationales for software, hardware, and workforce CapEx have been laid out in an already-approved project proposal. Refer to these plans.
  • If pitching a capital project at the last minute, especially an IT-driven one, expect a “no” regardless of how well it ties to goals.

Your governance culture will determine what you need to show and when you show it

The rigor of your rationales is entirely driven by “how things are done around here.”

Governance Culture

How rigorous/ constrained
is decision-making?

Risk tolerance

This is the organization’s willingness to be flexible, take chances, make change, and innovate. It is often driven by legal and regulatory mandates.

Control

Control manifests in the number and nature of rules and how authority and accountability are centralized or distributed in the organization.

Speed to action

How quickly decisions are made and executed upon is determined by the amount of consultation and number of approval steps.

Ensure all parts of your proposed budget align with what’s tolerated and allowed.

Non-project OpEx

  • Don’t hide OpEx. If it’s a dirty word, put it front and center to start normalizing it.
  • As with business goals, position OpEx as necessary for business continuity and risk mitigation, as well as the thing that keeps long-term strategic goals alive.
  • Focus on efficiency and cost control, both in terms of past and future initiatives, regardless of the governance culture.

Non-project CapEx

  • Treat non-project CapEx in the same way as you would non-project OpEx.
  • IT must make purchases quickly in this area of spend, but drawn-out procurement processes can make this impossible. Consider including a separate proposal to establish a policy that gives IT the control to make end-user and network/data center equipment purchases faster and easier.

Project CapEx

  • If your organization is risk-averse, highly centralized, or slow to act, don’t expect IT to win approval for innovative capital projects. Let the business make any pitches and have IT serve in a supporting role.
  • Capital projects are often committed to 6-12 months in advance and can’t be completed within a fiscal year. Nudge the organization toward longer-term, flexible funding.

No matter which way your goals and culture lean, ground all your rationales in reality

Objective, unapologetic facts are your strongest rationale-building tool.

Feasibility

Can we do it, and what sacrifices will we have to make?

Funding

The ultimate determinant of feasibility is the availability, quantity, and reliability of funding next fiscal year and over the long term to support investment.

Capabilities

Success hinges on both the availability and accessibility of required skills and knowledge to execute on a spend plan in the required timeframe.

Risk

Risk is not just about obstacles to success and what could happen if you do something – it’s also about what could happen if you do nothing at all.

Vet every part of your proposed budget to ensure what you’re asking for is both realistic and possible.

Non-project OpEx

  • Point out your operational waste-reduction and efficiency-gaining efforts in hard, numerical terms.
  • Clearly demonstrate that OpEx cannot be reduced without sacrifices on the business side, specifically in terms of service levels.
  • Define OpEx impacts for all CapEx proposals to ensure funding commitments include long-term maintenance and support.

Non-project CapEx

  • This is a common source of surprise budget overage, and IT often sacrifices parts of its OpEx budget to cover it. Shed light on this problem and define IT’s boundaries.
  • A core infrastructure equipment contingency fund and a policy mandating business units pay for unbudgeted end-user tech due to unplanned or uncommunicated headcount increases are worth pursuing.

Project CapEx

  • Be sure IT is involved with every capital project proposal that has a technological implication (which is usually all of them).
  • Specifically, IT should take on responsibility for tech vendor evaluation and negotiation. Never leave this up to the business.
  • Ensure IT gains funding for supporting any technologies acquired via a capital planning process, including hiring if necessary.

Double-check to ensure your bases are covered

Detailed data and information checklist:

  • I have the following data and information for each item of proposed expenditure:
  • Sponsors, owners, and/or managers from IT and the business.
  • CapEx and OpEx costs broken down by workforce (employees/contract) and vendor (software, hardware, services) at a minimum for both last fiscal year (if continuing spend) and next fiscal year to demonstrate any changes.
  • Projected annual costs for the above, extending two to five years into the future, with dates when new spending will start, known depreciations will end, and CapEx will transition to OpEx.
  • Descriptions of any tradeoffs or potential obstacles.
  • Lifespan information for new, proposed assets informing depreciation scheduling.
  • Sources of funding (especially if new, transferred, or changed).
  • Copies of any research used to inform any of the above.

High-level rationale checklist:

  • I have done the following thinking and analysis for each item of proposed expenditure:
  • Considered it in the context of my organization’s broader operating environment and the constraints and opportunities this creates.
  • Tied it – directly or indirectly – to the achievement or sustainment of current or past (but still relevant) organizational goals.
  • Understood my organization’s tolerances, how things get done, and whether I can win any battles that I need to fight given these realities.
  • Worked with business unit leaders to fully understand their plans and how IT can support them.
  • Obtained current, verifiable data and information and have a good idea if, when, and how this information may change next year.
  • Assessed benefits, risks, dependencies, and overall feasibility, as well as created ROI statements where needed.
  • Stuck to the facts and am confident they can speak for themselves.

For more on creating detailed business cases for projects and investments, see Info-Tech’s comprehensive blueprint, Build a Comprehensive Business Case.

4.2 Challenge and perfect your rationales

2 hours

  1. Based on your analysis in Phase 1, review your organization’s current and near-term business goals (context, lifecycle position, opportunities), governance culture (risk tolerance, control, speed to action), and feasibility (funding, capabilities, risk) to understand what’s possible, what’s not, and your general boundaries.
  2. Review your proposed budget in its current form and flag items that may be difficult or impossible to sell, given the above.
  3. Systematically go through each item in you proposed budget and apply the detailed data and information and high-level rationale checklists on the previous slide to ensure you have considered it from every angle and have all the information you need to defend it.
  4. Track down any additional information needed to fill gaps and fine-tune your budget based on any discoveries, including eliminating or adding elements if needed.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

InputOutput
  • Final drafts of all IT cost forecasts, including rationales
  • Fully rationalized proposed IT budget for next fiscal year
MaterialsParticipants
  • IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Phase recap: Build your proposed budget

You can officially say your proposed IT budget is done. Now for the communications part.

This phase is where everything came together into a coherent budget proposal. You were able to:

  • Aggregate your numbers. This involved pulling for project and non-project CapEx and OpEx forecasts into a single proposed IT budget total.
  • Stress-test your forecasts. Here, you ensured that all your numbers were accurate and made sense.
  • Challenge and perfect your rationales. Finally, you made sure you have all your evidence in place and can defend every component in your proposed IT budget regardless of who’s looking at it.

“Current OpEx is about supporting and aligning with past business strategies. That’s alignment. If the business wants to give up on those past business strategies, that’s up to them.”

– Darin Stahl, Distinguished Analyst and Research Fellow, Info-Tech Research Group

Phase 5

Create and Deliver Your Presentation

Lay Your
Foundation

Get Into Budget-Starting Position

Develop Your
Forecasts

Build Your
Proposed Budget

Create and Deliver Your Presentation

1.1 Understand what your budget is
and does

1.2 Know your stakeholders

1.3 Continuously pre-sell your budget

2.1 Assemble your resources

2.2 Understand the four views of the ITFM Cost Model

2.3 Review last year’s budget vs.
actuals and five-year historical trends

2.4 Set your high-level goals

3.1 Develop assumptions and
alternative scenarios

3.2 Forecast your project CapEx

3.3 Forecast your non-project CapEx and OpEx

4.1 Aggregate your numbers

4.2 Stress test your forecasts

4.3 Challenge and perfect your
rationales

5.1 Plan your content

5.2 Build your presentation

5.3 Present to stakeholders

5.4 Make final adjustments and submit your IT budget

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Planning the content you’ll include in your budget presentation.
  • Pulling together your formal presentation.
  • Presenting, finalizing, and submitting your budget.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Create and deliver your presentation

Pull it all together into something you can show your approvers and stakeholders and win IT budgetary approval.

This phase focuses on developing your final proposed budget presentation for delivery to your various stakeholders. Here you will:

  • Plan your final content. Decide the narrative you want to tell and select the visualizations and words you want to include in your presentation (or presentations) depending on the makeup of your target audience.
  • Build your presentation. Pull together all the key elements in a PowerPoint template in a way that best tells the IT budget story.
  • Present to stakeholders. Deliver your IT budgetary message.
  • Make final adjustments and submit your budget. Address any questions, make final changes, and deconstruct your budget into the account categories mandated by your Finance Department to plug into the budget template they’ve provided.

“I could have put the numbers together in a week. The process of talking through what the divisions need and spending time with them is more time consuming than the budget itself.”

– Jay Gnuse, IT Director, Chief Industries

The content you select to present depends on your objectives and constraints

Info-Tech classifies potential content according to three basic types: mandatory, recommended, and optional. What’s the difference?

Mandatory: Just about every CFO or approving body will expect to see this information. Often high level in nature, it includes:

  • A review of last year’s performance.
  • A comparison of proposed budget totals to last year’s actuals.
  • A breakdown of CapEx vs. OpEx.
  • A breakdown of proposed expenditure according to traditional workforce and vendor costs.

Recommended: This information builds on the mandatory elements, providing more depth and detail. Inclusion of recommended content depends on:

  • Availability of the information.
  • Relevance to a current strategic focus or overarching initiative in the organization.
  • Known business interest in the topic, or the topic’s ability to generate interest in IT budgetary concerns in general.

Optional: This is very detailed information that provides alternative views and serves as reinforcement of your key messages. Consider including it if:

  • You need to bring fuller transparency to a murky IT spending situation.
  • Your audience is open to it, i.e. it wouldn’t be seen as irrelevant, wasting their time, or a cause of discord.
  • You have ample time during your presentation to dive into it.

Deciding what to include or exclude depends 100% on your target audience. What will fulfill their basic information needs as well as increase their engagement in IT financial issues?

Revisit your assumptions and alternative scenarios first

These represent the contextual framework for your proposal and explain why you made the decisions you did.

Stating your assumptions and presenting at least two alternative scenarios helps in the following ways:

  1. Identifies the factors you considered when setting budget targets and proposing specific expenditures, and shows that you know what the important factors are.
  2. Lays the logical foundation for all the rationales you will be presenting.
  3. Demonstrates that you’ve thought broadly about the future of the organization and how IT is best able to support that future organization regardless of its state and circumstances.

Your assumptions and alternative scenarios may not appear back-to-back in your presentation, yet they’re intimately connected in that every unique scenario is based on adjustments to your core assumptions. These tweaks – and the resulting scenarios – reflect the different degrees of probability that a variable is likely to land on a certain value (i.e. an alternative assumption).

Your primary scenario is the one you believe is most likely to happen and is represented by the complete budget you’re recommending and presenting.

Target timeframe for presentation: 2 minutes

Key objectives: Setting context, demonstrating breadth of thought.

Potential content for section:

  • List of assumptions for the budget being presented (primary target scenario).
  • Two or more alternative scenarios.

“Things get cut when the business
doesn’t know what something is,
doesn’t recognize it, doesn’t understand it. There needs to be an education.”

– Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice,
Info-Tech Research Group,

Select your assumptions and scenarios

See Tabs “Planning Variables” and 9, “Alternative Scenarios” in your IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for these outputs.

Core assumptions

Primary target scenario

Alternative scenarios

Full alternative scenario budgets

List

Slide

Slide

Budget

Mandatory: This is a listing of both internal and external factors that are most likely to affect the challenges and opportunities your organization will have and how it can and will operate. This includes negotiable and non-negotiable internal and external constraints, stated priorities, and the expression of known risk factors.

Mandatory: Emanating from your core assumptions, this scenario is a high-level statement of goals, initial budget targets, and proposed budget based on your core assumptions.

Recommended: Two alternatives are typical, with one higher spend and one lower spend than your target. The state of the economy and funding availability are the assumptions usually tweaked. More radical scenarios, like the cost and implications of completely outsourcing IT, can also be explored.

Optional: This is a lot of work, but some IT leaders do it if an alternative scenario is a strong contender or is necessary to show that a proposed direction from the business is costly or not feasible.

The image contains screenshots of tab Planning Variables and Alternative Scenarios.

The first major section of your presentation will be a retrospective

Plan to kick things off with a review of last year’s results, factors that affected what transpired, and longer-term historical IT expenditure trends.

This retrospective on IT expenditure is important for three reasons:

  1. Clarifying definitions and the different categories of IT expenditure.
  2. Showing your stakeholders how, and how well you aligned IT expenditure with business objectives.
  3. Setting stakeholder expectations about what next year’s budget will look like based on past patterns.

You probably won’t have a lot of time for this section, so everything you select to share should pack a punch and perform double duty by introducing concepts you’ll need your stakeholders to have internalized when you present next year’s budget details.

Target timeframe for presentation: 7 minutes

Key objectives: Definitions, alignment, expectations-setting.

Potential content for section:

  • Last fiscal year budgeted vs. actuals
  • Expenditure by type
  • Major capital projects completed
  • Top vendor spend
  • Drivers of last year’s expenditures and efficiencies
  • Last fiscal year in in detail (expense view, service view, business view, innovation view)
  • Expenditure trends for the past five years

“If they don’t know the consequences of their actions, how are they ever going to change their actions?”

– Angela Hintz, VP of PMO & Integrated Services,
Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Louisiana

Start at the highest level

See Tabs 1 “Historical Events & Projects,” 3 “Historical Analysis,” and 6 “Vendor Worksheet” in your IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for these outputs.

Total budgeted vs. total actuals

Graph

Mandatory: Demonstrates the variance between what you budgeted for last year and what was actually spent. Explaining causes of variance is key.

l actuals by expenditure type

Graph

Mandatory: Provides a comparative breakdown of last year’s expenditure by non-project OpEx, non-project CapEx, and project CapEx. This offers an opportunity to explain different types of IT expenditure and why they’re the relative size they are.

Major capital projects completed

List

Mandatory: Illustrates progress made toward strategically important objectives.

Top vendors

List

Recommended: A list of vendors that incurred the highest costs, including their relative portion of overall expenditure. These are usually business software vendors, i.e. tools your stakeholders use every day. The number of vendors shown is up to you.

The image contains screenshots from Tabs 1, 3, and 6 of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

Describe drivers of costs and savings

See Tab 1, “Historical Events & Projects” in your IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for these outputs.

Cost drivers

List

Mandatory: A list of major events, circumstances, business decisions, or non-negotiable factors that necessitated expenditure. Be sure to focus on the unplanned or unexpected situations that caused upward variance.

Savings drivers

List

Mandatory: A list of key initiatives pursued, or circumstances that resulted in efficiencies or savings. Include any deferred or canceled projects.

The image contains screenshots from Tab 1 of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

Also calculate and list the magnitude of costs incurred or savings realized in hard financial terms so that the full impact of these events is truly understood by your stakeholders.

“What is that ongoing cost?
If we brought in a new platform, what
does that do to our operating costs?”

– Kristen Thurber, IT Director, Office of the CIO, Donaldson Company

End with longer-term five-year trends

See Tab 3 “Historical Analysis” in your IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for these outputs.

IT actual expenditure
year over year

Graph

Mandatory: This is crucial for showing overall IT expenditure patterns, particularly percentage changes up or down year to year, and what the drivers of those changes were.

IT actuals as a % of organizational revenue

Graph

Mandatory: You need to set the stage for the proposed percentage of organizational revenue to come. The CFO will be looking for consistency and an overall decreasing pattern over time.

IT expenditure per FTE year over year

Graph

Optional: This can be a powerful metric as it’s simple and easily to understand.

The image contains screenshots from Tab 3 of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

The historical analysis you can do is endless. You can generate many more cuts of the data or go back even further – it’s up to you.

Keep in mind that you won’t have a lot of time during your presentation, so stick to the high-level, high-impact graphs that demonstrate overarching trends or themes.

Show different views of the details

See Tab 3 “Historical Analysis” in your IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for these outputs.

Budgeted vs. actuals CFO expense view

Graph

Mandatory: Showing different types of workforce expenditure compared to different types of vendor expenditure will be important to the CFO.

Budgeted vs. actuals CIO services view

Graph

Optional: Showing the expenditure of some IT services will clarify the true total costs of delivering and supporting these services if misunderstandings exist.

Budgeted vs. actuals CXO business view

Graph

Optional: A good way to show true consumption levels and the relative IT haves and have-nots. Potentially political, so consider sharing one-on-one with relevant business unit leaders instead of doing a big public reveal.

Budgeted vs. actual CEO innovation view

Graph

Optional: Clarifies how much the organization is investing in innovation or growth versus keeping the lights on. Of most interest to the CEO and possibly the CFO, and good for starting conversations about how well funding is aligned with strategic directions.

The image contains screenshots from Tab 3 of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

5.1a Select your retrospective content

30 minutes

  1. Open your copy of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.
  2. From Tabs 1, “Historical Events & Projects, 3 “Historical Analysis”, and 6, “Vendor Worksheet,” select the visual outputs (graphs and lists) you plan to include in the retrospective section of your presentation. Consider the following when determining what to include or exclude:
    1. Fundamentals: Elements such as budgeted vs. actual, distribution across expenditure types, and drivers of variance are mandatory.
    2. Key clarifications: What expectations need to be set or common misunderstandings cleared up? Strategically insert visuals that introduce and explain important concepts early.
    3. Your time allowance. Plan for a maximum of seven minutes for every half hour of total presentation time.
  3. Note what you plan to include in your presentation and set aside.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

InputOutput
  • Data and graphs from the completed IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Selected content and visuals for the historical/ retrospective section of the IT Budget Executive Presentation
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Next, transition from past expenditure to your proposal for the future

Build a logical bridge between what happened in the past to what’s coming up next year using a comparative approach and feature major highlights.

This transitional phase between the past and the future is important for the following reasons:

  1. It illustrates any consistent patterns of IT expenditure that may exist and be relevant in the near term.
  2. It sets the stage for explaining any deviations from historical patterns that you’re about to propose.
  3. It grounds proposed IT expenditure within the context of commitments made in previous years.

Consider this the essential core of your presentation – this is the key message and what your audience came to hear.

Target timeframe for presentation: 10 minutes

Key objectives: Transition, reveal proposed budget.

Potential content for section:

  • Last year’s actuals vs. next year’s proposed.
  • Next year’s proposed budget in context of the past five years’ year-over-year actuals.
  • Last year’s actual expenditure type distribution vs. next year’s proposed budget distribution.
  • Major projects to be started next year.

“The companies...that invest the most in IT aren’t necessarily the best performers.
On average, the most successful small and medium companies are more frugal when it comes to
company spend on IT (as long as they do it judiciously).”

– Source: Techvera, 2023

Compare next year to last year

See Tab 8, “Proposed Budget Analysis” in your IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for these outputs.

Last year’s total actuals vs. next year’s total forecast

Proposed budget in context: Year-over-year expenditure

Last year’s actuals vs. next year’s proposed by expenditure type

Last year’s expenditure per FTE vs. next year’s proposed

Graph

Graph

Graph

Graph

Mandatory: This is the most important graph for connecting the past with the future and is also the first meaningful view your audience will have of your proposed budget for next year.

Mandatory: Here, you will continue the long-term view introduced in your historical data by adding on next year’s projections to your existing five-year historical trend. The percentage change from last year to next year will be the focus.

Recommended: A double-comparative breakdown of last year vs. next year by non-project OpEx, non-project CapEx, and project CapEx illustrates where major events, decisions, and changes are having their impact.

Optional: This graph is particularly useful in demonstrating the success of cost-control if the actual proposed budget is higher that the previous year but the IT cost per employee has gone down.

The image contains screenshots from Tab 8 of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

Select business projects to profile

See Tab 5, “Project CapEx Forecast” in your IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for the data and information to create these outputs.

Major project profile

Slide

Mandatory: Focus on projects for which funding is already committed and lean toward those that are strategic or clearly support business goal attainment. How many you profile is up to you, but three to five is suggested.

Minor project overview

List

Optional: List other projects on IT’s agenda to communicate the scope of IT’s project-related responsibilities and required expenditure to be successful. Include in-progress projects that will be completed next year and net-new projects on the roster.

The image contains screenshots from Tab 5 of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

You can’t profile every project on the list, but it’s important that your stakeholders see their priorities clearly reflected in your budget; projects are the best way to do this.

If you’ve successfully pre-sold your budget and partnered with business-unit leaders to define IT initiatives, your stakeholders should already be very familiar with the project summaries you put in front of them in your presentation.

5.1b Select your transitional past-to-future content

30 minutes

  1. Open your copy of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.
  2. From Tabs 5, “Project CapEx Forecast” and 7, “Proposed Budget Analysis”, select the visual outputs (graphs and lists) you plan to include in the transitional section of your presentation. Consider the following when determining what to include or exclude:
    1. Shift from CapEx to OpEx: If this has been a point of contention or confusion with your CFO in the past, or if your organization has actively committed to greater cloud or outsourcing intensity, you’ll want to show this year-to-year shift in expenditure type.
    2. Strategic priorities: Profile major capital projects that reflect stakeholder priorities. If your audience is already very familiar with these projects, you may be able to skip detailed profiles and simply list them.
    3. Your time allowance. Plan for a maximum of 10 minutes for every half hour of total presentation time.
  3. Note what you plan to include in your presentation and set aside.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

InputOutput
  • Data and graphs from the completed IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Selected content and visuals for the past-to-future transitional section of the IT Budget Executive Presentation
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Finally, carefully select detailed drill-downs that add clarity and depth to your proposed budget

The graphs you select here will be specific to your audience and any particular message you need to send.

This detailed phase of your presentation is important because it allows you to:

  1. Highlight specific areas of IT expenditure that often get buried under generalities.
  2. View your proposed budget from different perspectives that are most meaningful to your audience, such as traditional workforce vs. vendor allocations, expenditure by IT service, business-unit consumption, and the allocation of funds to innovation and growth versus daily IT operations.
  3. Get stakeholder attention. For example, laying out exactly how much money will be spent next year in support of the Sales Department compared to other units will get the VP of Sales’ attention…and everyone else’s, for that matter. This kind of transparency is invaluable for enabling meaningful conversations and thoughtful decision-making about IT spend.

Target timeframe for presentation: 7 minutes, but this phase of the presentation may naturally segue into the final Q&A.

Key objectives: Transparency, dialogue, buy-in.

Potential content for section:

  • Allocation across workforce vs. vendors
  • Top vendors by expenditure
  • Allocation across on-premises vs. cloud
  • Allocation across core IT services
  • Allocation across core business units
  • Allocation across business focus area

“A budget is a quantified version of
your service-level agreements.”

– Darin Stahl, Distinguished Analysis & Research Fellow,
Info-Tech Research Group,

Start with the expense view details

See Tab 8, “Proposed Budget Analysis” in your IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for these outputs.

Proposed budget: Workforce and vendors by expenditure type

Graph

Mandatory: This is the traditional CFO’s view, so definitely show it. The compelling twist here is showing it by expenditure type, i.e. non-project OpEx, non-project CapEx, and project CapEx.

Proposed budget: Cloud vs. on-premises vendor expenditure

Graph

Optional: If this is a point of contention or if an active transition to cloud solutions is underway, then show it.

Top vendors

Graph

Recommended: As with last year’s actuals, showing who the top vendors are slated to be next year speaks volumes to stakeholders about exactly where much of their money is going.

If you have a diverse audience with diverse interests, be very selective – you don’t want to bore them with things they don’t care about.

The image contains screenshots from Tab 8 of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

Offer choice details on the other views

See Tab 8, “Proposed Budget Analysis” in your IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook for these outputs.

Proposed budget: IT services by expenditure type

Graph

Optional: Business unit leaders will be most interested in the application services. Proposed expenditure on security and data and BI services may be of particular interest given business priorities. Don’t linger on infrastructure spend unless chargeback is in play.

Proposed budget: Business units by expenditure type

Graph

Optional: The purpose of this data is to show varying business units where they stand in terms of consumption. It may be more appropriate to show this graph in a one-on-one meeting or other context.

Proposed budget: Business focus by expenditure type

Graph

Optional: The CEO will care most about this data. If they’re not in the room, then consider bypassing it and discuss it separately with the CFO.

Inclusion of these graphs really depends on the makeup of your audience. It’s a good decision to show all of them to your CFO at some point before the formal presentation. Consider getting their advice on what to include and exclude.

The image contains screenshots from Tab 8 of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.

5.1c Select next year’s expenditure sub-category details

30 minutes

  1. Open your copy of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook.
  2. From Tab 8, “Proposed Budget Analysis,” select the visual outputs (graphs) you plan to include in the targeted expenditure sub-category details section of your presentation. Consider the following when determining what to include or exclude:
    1. The presence of important fence-sitters. If there are key individuals who require more convincing, this is where you show them the reality of what it costs to deliver their most business-critical IT services to them.
    2. The degree to which you’ve already gone over the numbers previously with your audience. Again, if you’ve done your pre-selling, this data may be old news and not worth going over again.
    3. Your time allowance. Plan for a maximum of seven minutes for every half hour of total presentation time.
  3. Note what you plan to include in your presentation and set aside.

Download the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook

InputOutput
  • Data and graphs from the completed IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Selected content and visuals for the expenditure category details section of the IT Budget Executive Presentation
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Finalize your line-up and put your selected content into a presentation template

This step is about nailing down the horizontal logic of the story you want to tell. Start by ordering and loading the visualizations of your budget data.

Download Info-Tech’s IT Budget Executive Presentation Template

The image contains a screenshot of the IT Budget Executive Presentation Template.

If you prefer, use your own internal presentation standard template instead and Info-Tech’s template as a structural guide.

Regardless of the template you use, Info-Tech recommends the following structure:

  1. Summary: An overview of your decision-making assumptions, initial targets given the business context, and the total proposed IT budget amount.
  2. Retrospective: An overview of previous years’ performance, with a specific focus on last fiscal year.
  3. Proposed budget overview: A high-level view of the proposed budget for next fiscal year in the context of last year’s performance (i.e. the bridge from past to future), including alternative scenarios considered and capital projects on the roster.
  4. Proposed budget details by category: Detailed views of the proposed budget by expense type, IT service, business unit, and business focus category.
  5. Next steps: Include question-and-answer and itemization of your next actions through to submitting your final budget to the CFO.

Draft the commentary that describes and highlights your data’s key messages

This is where the rationales that you perfected earlier come into play.

Leave the details for the speaker’s notes.
Remember that this is an executive presentation. Use tags, pointers, and very brief sentences in the body of the presentation itself. Avoid walls of text. You want your audience to be listening to your words, not reading a slide.

Speak to everything that represents an increase or decrease of more than 5% or that simply looks odd.
Being transparent is essential. Don’t hide anything. Acknowledge the elephant in the room before your audience does to quickly stop suspicious or doubtful thoughts

Identify causes and rationales.
This is why your numbers are as they are. However, if you’re not 100% sure what all driving factors are, don’t make them up. Also, if the line between cause and effect isn’t straight, craft in advance a very simple way of explaining it that you can offer whenever needed.

Be neutral and objective in your language.
You need to park strong feelings at the door. You’re presenting rational facts and thoroughly vetted recommendations. The best defense is not to be defensive, or even offensive for that matter. You don’t need to argue, plead, or apologize – let your information speak for itself and allow the audience to arrive at their own logical conclusions.

Re-emphasize your core themes to create connections.
If a single strategic project is driving cost increases across multiple cost categories, point it out multiple times if needed to reinforce its importance. If an increase in one area is made possible by a significant offset in another, say so to demonstrate your ongoing commitment to efficiencies. If a single event from last year will continue having cost impacts on several IT services next year, spell this out.

5.2 Develop an executive presentation

Duration: 2 hours

  1. Download the IT Budget Executive Presentation PowerPoint template.
  2. Open your working version of the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook and copy and paste your selected graphs and tables into the template. Note: Pasting as an image will preserve graph formatting.
  3. Incorporate observations and insights about your proposed budget and other analysis into the template where indicated.
  4. Conduct an internal review of the final presentation to ensure it includes all the elements you need and is error-free.

Note: Refer to your organization’s standards and norms for executive-level presentations and either adapt the Info-Tech template accordingly or use your own.

Download the IT Budget Executive Presentation template

Input Output
  • Tabular and graphical data outputs in the IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • Interpretive commentary based on your analysis
  • Executive presentation summarizing your proposed IT budget
Materials Participants
  • IT Cost Forecasting and Budgeting Workbook
  • IT Budget Executive Presentation template
  • CIO/IT Directors
  • IT Financial Lead
  • Other IT Management

Now it’s time to present your proposed IT budget for next fiscal year

If you’ve done your homework and pre-sold your budget, the presentation itself should be a mere formality with no surprises for anyone, including you.

Some final advice on presenting your proposed budget…

Partner up

If something big in your budget is an initiative that’s for a specific business unit, let that business unit’s leader be the face of it and have IT play the role of supporting partner.

Use your champions

Let your advocates know in advance that you’d appreciate hearing their voice during the presentation if you encounter any pushback, or just to reinforce your main messages.

Focus on the CFO

The CFO is the most important stakeholder in the room at the end of the day, even more than the CEO in some cases. Their interests should take priority if you’re pressed for time.

Avoid judgment

Let the numbers speak for themselves. Do point out highlights and areas of interest but hold off on offering emotion-driven opinions. Let your audience draw their own conclusions.

Solicit questions

You do want dialogue. However, keep your answers short and to the point. What does come up in discussion is a good indication of where you’ll need to spend more time in the future.

The only other thing that can boost your chances is if you’re lucky enough to be scheduled to present between 10:00 and 11:00 on a Thursday morning when people are most agreeable. Beyond that, apply the standard rules of good presentations to optimize your success.

Your presentation is done – now re-focus on budget finalization and submission

This final stage tends to be very administrative. Follow the rules and get it done.

  • Incorporate feedback: Follow up on comments from your first presentation and reflect them in your budget if appropriate. This may include:
    • Having follow-up conversations with stakeholders.
    • Further clarifying the ROI projections or business benefits.
    • Adjusting proposed expenditure amounts based on new information or a shift in priorities.
    • Adding details or increasing granularity around specific issues of interest.
  • Trim: Almost every business unit leader will need to make cuts to their initial budget proposal. After all, the CFO has a finite pool of money to allocate. If all’s gone well, it may only be a few percent. Resurrect your less-costly alternative scenario and selectively apply the options you laid out there. Focus on downsizing or deferring capital projects if possible. If you must trim OpEx, remind the CFO about any service-level adjustments that will need to happen to make the less expensive alternatives work.
  • Re-present: It’s not unusual to have to present your budget one more time after you’ve made your adjustments. In some organizations, the first presentation is to an internal executive group while the second one is to a governing board. The same rules apply to this second presentation as to your first one.
  • Submit: Slot your final budget into the list of accounts prescribed in the budget template provided by Finance. These templates often don’t align with IT’s budget categories, but you’ll have to make do.

Phase recap: Create and deliver your presentation

You’ve reached the end of the budget creation and approval process. Now you can refocus on using your budget as a living governance tool.

This phase focused on developing your final proposed budget presentation for delivery to your various stakeholders. Here, you:

  • Planned your final content. You selected the data and visuals to include and highlight.
  • Built your presentation. You pulled everything together into a PowerPoint template and crafted commentary to tell a cohesive IT budget story.
  • Presented to stakeholders. You delivered your proposed IT budget and solicited their comments and feedback.
  • Made final adjustments and submitted your budget. You applied final tweaks, deconstructed your budget to fit Finance’s template, and submitted it for entry into Finance’s system.

“Everyone understands that there’s never enough money. The challenge is prioritizing the right work and funding it.”

– Trisha Goya, Director, IT Governance & Administration, Hawaii Medical Service Association

Next Steps

“Keep that conversation going throughout the year so that at budgeting time no one is surprised…Make sure that you’re telling your story all year long and keep track of that story.”

– Angela Hintz, VP of PMO & Integrated Services,
Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Louisiana

This final section will provide you with:

  • An overall summary of accomplishment.
  • Recommended next steps.
  • A list of contributors to this research.
  • Some related Info-Tech resources.

Summary of Accomplishment

You’ve successfully created a transparent IT budget and gotten it approved.

By following the phases and steps in this blueprint, you have:

  1. Learned more about what an IT budget does and what it means to your key stakeholders.
  2. Assembled your budgeting team and critical data needed for forecasting and budgeting, as well as set expenditure goals for next fiscal year, and metrics for improving the budgeting process overall.
  3. Forecasted your project and non-project CapEx and OpEx for next fiscal year and beyond.
  4. Fine-tuned your proposed expenditure rationales.
  5. Crafted and delivered an executive presentation and got your budget approved.

What’s next?

Use your approved budget as an ongoing IT financial management governance tool and track your budget process improvement metrics.

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech full-service engagement or Guided Implementation.

Contact your account representative for more information.

1-888-670-8889

Research Contributors and Experts

Monica Braun

Research Director, ITFM Practice

Info-Tech Research Group

Carol Carr

Technical Counselor (Finance)

Info-Tech Research Group

Larry Clark

Executive Counselor

Info-Tech Research Group

Duane Cooney

Executive Counselor

Info-Tech Research Group

Lynn Fyhrlund

Former Chief Information Officer

Milwaukee County

Jay Gnuse

Information Technology Director

Chief Industries

Trisha Goya

Director, IS Client Services

Hawaii Medical Service Association

Angela Hintz

VP of PMO & Integrated Services

Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Louisiana

Rick Hopfer

Chief Information Officer

Hawaii Medical Service Association

Theresa Hughes

Executive Counselor

Info-Tech Research Group

Research Contributors and Experts

Dave Kish

Practice Lead, IT Financial Management Practice

Info-Tech Research Group

Matt Johnson

IT Director Governance and Business Solutions

Milwaukee County

Titus Moore

Executive Counselor

Info-Tech Research Group

Angie Reynolds

Principal Research Director, IT Financial Management Practice

Info-Tech Research Group

Mark Roman

Managing Partner, Executive Services

Info-Tech Research Group

Darin Stahl

Distinguished Analyst & Research Fellow

Info-Tech Research Group

Miguel Suarez

Head of Technology

Seguros Monterrey New York Life

Kristen Thurber

IT Director, Office of the CIO

Donaldson Company

Related Info-Tech Research & Services

Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

  • IT spend has increased in volume and complexity, but how IT spend decisions are made has not kept pace.
  • Lay a foundation for meaningful conversations and informed decision making around IT spend by transparently mapping exactly where IT funds are really going.

IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service

  • Is a do-it-yourself approach to achieving spend transparency too onerous? Let Info-Tech do the heavy lifting for you.
  • Using Info-Tech’s ITFM Cost Model, our analysts will map your IT expenditure to four different stakeholder views – CFO Expense View, CIO Service View, CXO Business View, and CEO Innovation View – so that you clearly show where expenditure is going in terms that stakeholders can relate to and better demonstrate IT’s value to the business.
  • Get a full report that shows how your spend is allocated plus benchmarks that compare your results to those of your industry peers.

Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

  • Cost optimization is usually thought about in terms of cuts, when it’s really about optimizing IT’s cost-to-value ratio.
  • Develop a cost-optimization strategy based on your organization’s circumstances and timeline focused on four key areas of IT expenditure: assets, vendors, projects, and workforce.

Bibliography

“How Much Should a Company Spend on IT?” Techvera, no date. Accessed 3 Mar. 2023.
“State of the CIO Study 2023.” Foundry, 25 Jan. 2023. Accessed 3 Mar. 2023.
Aberdeen Strategy & Research. “The State of IT 2023.” Spiceworks. Ziff Davis, 2022. Accessed 28 Feb. 2023.
Ainsworth, Paul. “Responsibilities of the Modern CFO - A Function in Transition.” TopTal, LLC., no date. Accessed 15 Feb. 2023.
Balasaygun, Kaitlin. “For the first time in a long time, CFOs can say no to tech spending.” CNBC CFO Council, 19 Jan. 2023. Accessed 17 Feb. 2023.
Bashir, Ahmad. “Objectives of Capital Budgeting and factors affecting Capital Budget Decisions.” LinkedIn, 27 May 2017. Accessed 14 Apr. 2023.
Blackmon, Kris. “Building a Data-Driven Budget Pitch the C-Suite Can't Refuse.” NetSuite Brainyard, 21 Sep. 2021. Accessed 17 Feb. 2023
Butcher, Daniel. “CFO to CFO: Budgeting to Fund Strategic Plans.” Strategic Finance Magazine/Institute of Management Accountants, 1 Dec. 2021. Accessed 17 Feb. 2023
Gray, Patrick. “IT Budgeting: A Cheat Sheet.” TechRepublic, 29 Jul. 2020. Accessed 28 Feb. 2023.
Greenbaum, David. “Budget vs. Actuals: Budget Variance Analysis & Guide.” OnPlan, 15 Mar. 2022. Accessed 22 Mar. 2023.
Huber, Michael and Joan Rundle. “How to Budget for IT Like a CFO.” Huber & Associates, no date. Accessed 15 Feb. 2023.
Kinney, Tara. “Executing Your Department Budget Like a CFO.” Atomic Revenue, LLC., no date. Accessed 15 Feb. 2023.
Lafley, A.G. “What Only the CFO Can Do.” Harvard Business Review, May 2009. Accessed 15 Mar. 2009.
Moore, Peter D. “IN THE DIGITAL WORLD, IT should be run as a profit center, not a cost center.” Wild Oak Enterprise, 26 Feb. 2020. Accessed 3 Mar. 2023.
Nordmeyer, Bille. “What Factors Are Going to Influence Your Budgeting Decisions?” bizfluent, 8 May 2019. Accessed 14 Apr. 2023
Ryan, Vincent. “IT Spending and 2023 Budgets Under Close Scrutiny.” CFO, 5 Dec. 2022. Accessed 3 Mar. 2023.
Stackpole, Beth. “State of the CIO, 2022: Focus turns to IT fundamentals.” CIO Magazine, 21 Mar. 2022. Accessed 3 Mar. 2023.

Create a Data Management Roadmap

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}122|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $100,135 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 36 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Data Management
  • Parent Category Link: /data-management

Data has quickly become one of the most valuable assets in any organization. But when it comes to strategically and effectively managing those data assets, many businesses find themselves playing catch-up. The stakes are high because ineffective data management practices can have serious consequences, from poor business decisions and missed revenue opportunities to critical cybersecurity risks.

Successful management and consistent delivery of data assets requires collaboration between the business and IT and the right balance of technology, process, and resourcing solutions.

Build an effective and collaborative data management practice

Data management is not one-size-fits-all. Cut through the noise around data management and create a roadmap that is right for your organization:

  • Align data management plans with business requirements and strategic plans.
  • Create a collaborative plan that unites IT and the business in managing data assets.
  • Design a program that can scale and evolve over time.
  • Perform data strategy planning and incorporate data capabilities into your broader plans.
  • Identify gaps in current data services and the supporting environment and determine effective corrective actions.

This blueprint will help you design a data management practice that builds capabilities to support your organization’s current use of data and its vision for the future.

Create a Data Management Roadmap Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Create a Data Management Roadmap Storyboard – Use this deck to help you design a data management practice and turn data into a strategic enabler for the organization.

Effective data delivery and management provides the business with new and improved opportunities to leverage data for business operations and decision making. This blueprint will help you design a data management practice that will help your team build capabilities that align to the business' current usage of data and its vision for the future.

  • Create a Data Management Roadmap – Phases 1-2

2. Data Management Strategy Planning Tools – Use these tools to align with the business and lay the foundations for the success of your data management practice.

Begin by using the interview guide to engage stakeholders to gain a thorough understanding of the business’ challenges with data, their strategic goals, and the opportunities for data to support their future plans. From there, these tools will help you identify the current and target capabilities for your data management practice, analyze gaps, and build your roadmap.

  • Data Strategy Planning Interview Guide
  • Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool
  • Data Management Project Charter Template

3. Stakeholder Communication and Assessment Tools – Use these templates to develop a communication strategy that will convey the value of the data management project to the organization and meet the needs of key stakeholders.

Strong messaging around the value and purpose of the data management practice is essential to ensure buy-in. Use these templates to build a business case for the project and socialize the idea of data management across the various levels of the organization while anticipating the impact on and reactions from key stakeholders.

  • Data Management Communication/Business Case Template
  • Project Stakeholder and Impact Assessment Tool

4. Data Management Strategy Work Breakdown Structure Template – Use this template to maintain strong project management throughout your data management project.

This customizable template will support an organized approach to designing a program that addresses the business’ current and evolving data management needs. Use it to plan and track your deliverables and outcomes related to each stage of the project.

  • Data Management Strategy Work Breakdown Structure Template

5. Data Management Roadmap Tools – Use these templates to plan initiatives and create a data management roadmap presentation.

Create a roadmap for your data management practice that aligns to your organization’s current needs for data and its vision for how it wants to use data over the next 3-5 years. The initiative tool guides you to identify and record all initiative components, from benefits to costs, while the roadmap template helps you create a presentation to share your project findings with your executive team and project sponsors.

  • Initiative Definition Tool
  • Data Management Roadmap Template

6. Track and Measure Benefits Tool – Use this tool to monitor the project’s progress and impact.

Benefits tracking enables you to measure the effectiveness of your project and make adjustments where necessary to realize expected benefits. This tool will help you track benefit metrics at regular intervals to report progress on goals and identify benefits that are not being realized so that you can take remedial action.

  • Track and Measure Benefits Tool

Infographic

Workshop: Create a Data Management Roadmap

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Develop Data Strategies

The Purpose

Understand the business’s vision for data and the role of the data management practice.

Determine business requirements for data.

Map business goals and strategic plans to create data strategies.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of business’s vision for data

Unified vision for data management (business and IT)

Identification of the business’s data strategies

Activities

1.1 Establish business context for data management.

1.2 Develop data management principles and scope.

1.3 Develop conceptual data model (subject areas).

1.4 Discuss strategic information needs for each subject area.

1.5 Develop data strategies.

1.6 Identify data management strategies and enablers.

Outputs

Practice vision

Data management guiding principles

High-level data requirements

Data strategies for key data assets

2 Assess Data Management Capabilities

The Purpose

Determine the current and target states of your data management practice.

Key Benefits Achieved

Clear understanding of current environment

Activities

2.1 Determine the role and scope of data management within the organization.

2.2 Assess current data management capabilities.

2.3 Set target data management capabilities.

2.4 Identify performance gaps.

Outputs

Data management scope

Data management capability assessment results

3 Analyze Gaps and Develop Improvement Initiatives

The Purpose

Identify how to bridge the gaps between the organization’s current and target environments.

Key Benefits Achieved

Creation of key strategic plans for data management

Activities

3.1 Evaluate performance gaps.

3.2 Identify improvement initiatives.

3.3 Create preliminary improvement plans.

Outputs

Data management improvement initiatives

4 Design Roadmap and Plan Implementation

The Purpose

Create a realistic and action-oriented plan for implementing and improving the capabilities for data management.

Key Benefits Achieved

Completion of a Data Management Roadmap

Plan for how to implement the roadmap’s initiatives

Activities

4.1 Align data management initiatives to data strategies and business drivers.

4.2 Identify dependencies and priorities

4.3 Build a data management roadmap (short and long term)

4.4 Create a communication plan

Outputs

Data management roadmap

Action plan

Communication plan

Further reading

Contents

Executive Brief
Analyst Perspective
Executive Summary
Phase 1: Build Business and User Context
Phase 2: Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap
Additional Support
Related Research
Bibliography

Create a Data Management Roadmap

Ensure the right capabilities to support your data strategy.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst Perspective

Establish a data management program to realize the data strategy vision and data-driven organization.

Data is one of the most valuable organizational assets, and data management is the foundation – made up of plans, programs, and practices – that delivers, secures, and enhances the value of those assets.

Digital transformation in how we do business and innovations like artificial intelligence and automation that deliver exciting experiences for our customers are all powered by readily available, trusted data. And there’s so much more of it.

A data management roadmap designed for where you are in your business journey and what’s important to you provides tangible answers to “Where do we start?” and “What do we do?”

This blueprint helps you build and enhance data management capabilities as well as identify the next steps for evaluating, strengthening, harmonizing, and optimizing these capabilities, aligned precisely with business objectives and data strategy.

Andrea Malick
Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Frame the problem

Who this research is for
  • Data management professionals looking to improve the organization’s ability to leverage data in value-added ways
  • Data governance managers and data analysts looking to improve the effectiveness and value of their organization’s data management practice
This research will help you
  • Align data management plans with business requirements and strategic plans.
  • Create a collaborative plan that unites IT and the business in managing the organization’s data assets.
  • Design a data management program that can scale and evolve over time.
This research will also assist
  • Business leaders creating plans to leverage data in their strategic planning and business processes
  • IT professionals looking to improve the environment that manages and delivers data
This research will also help you
  • Perform data strategy planning and incorporate data capabilities and plans into your broader plans.
  • Identify gaps in current data services and the supporting environment and determine effective corrective actions.

Executive Summary

Your Challenge
  • The organizational appetite for data is increasing, with growing demands for data to better support business processes and inform decision making.
  • For data to be accessible and trustworthy for the business it must be effectively managed throughout its lifecycle.
  • With so much data circulating throughout our systems and a steady flow via user activity and business activities, it is imperative that we understand our data environment, focus our data services and oversight on what really matters, and work closely with business leads to ensure data is an integral part of the digital solution.
Common Obstacles
  • Despite the growing focus on data, many organizations struggle to develop an effective strategy for managing their data assets.
  • Successful management and consistent delivery of data assets throughout their lifecycle requires the collaboration of the business and IT and the balance of technology, process, and resourcing solutions.
  • Employees are doing their best to just get things done with their own spreadsheets and familiar patterns of behavior. It takes leadership to pause those patterns and take a thoughtful enterprise and strategic approach to a more streamlined – and transformed – business data service.
Info-Tech’s Approach
  • Incremental approach: Building a mature and optimized practice doesn’t occur overnight – it takes time and effort. Use this blueprint’s approach and roadmap results to support your organization in building a practice that prioritizes scope, increases the effectiveness of your data management practice, and improves your alignment with business data needs.
  • Build smart: Don’t do data management for data management’s sake; instead, align it to business requirements and the business’ vision for the organization’s data. Ensure initiatives and program investments best align to business priorities and support the organization in becoming more data driven and data centric.

Info-Tech Insight

Use value streams and business capabilities to develop a prioritized and practical data management plan that provides the highest business satisfaction in the shortest time.

Full page illustration of the 'Create a Data Management Roadmap' using the image of a cargo ship labelled 'Data Management' moving in the direction of 'Business Strategy'. The caption at the top reads 'Data Management capabilities create new business value by augmenting data & optimizing it for analytics. Data is a digital imprint of organizational activities.'

Data Management Capabilities

A similar concept to the last one, with a ship moving toward 'Business Strategy', except the ship is cross-sectioned with different capabilities filling the interior of the silhouette. Below are different steps in data management 'Data Creation', 'Data Ingestion', 'Data Accumulation, 'Data Augmentation', 'Data Delivery', and 'Data Consumption'.

Data is a business asset and needs to be treated like one

Data management is an enabler of the business and therefore needs to be driven by business goals and objectives. For data to be a strategic asset of the business, the business and IT processes that support its delivery and management must be mature and clearly executed.

Business Drivers
  1. Client Intimacy/Service Excellence
  2. Product and Service Innovations
  3. Operational Excellence
  4. Risk and Compliance Management
Data Management Enablers
  • Data Governance
  • Data Strategy Planning
  • Data Architecture
  • Data Operations Management
  • Data Risk Management
  • Data Quality Management

Industry spotlight: Risk management in the financial services sector

REGULATORY
COMPLIANCE

Regulations are the #1 driver for risk management.

US$11M:

Fine incurred by a well-known Wall Street firm after using inaccurate data to execute short sales orders.
“To successfully leverage customer data while maintaining compliance and transparency, the financial sector must adapt its current data management strategies to meet the needs of an ever-evolving digital landscape.” (Phoebe Fasulo, Security Scorecard, 2021)

Industry spotlight: Operational excellence in the public sector

GOVERNMENT
TRANSPARENCY

With frequent government scandals and corruption dominating the news, transparency to the public is quickly becoming a widely adopted practice at every level of government. Open government is the guiding principle that the public has access to the documents and proceedings of government to allow for effective public oversight. With growing regulations and pressure from the public, governments must adopt a comprehensive data management strategy to ensure they remain accountable to their rate payers, residents, businesses, and other constituents.

  1. Transparency Transparency is not just about access; it’s about sharing and reuse.
  2. Social and commercial value Everything from finding your local post office to building a search engine requires access to data.
  3. Participatory government Open data enables citizens to be more directly informed and involved in decision making.

Industry spotlight: Operational excellence and client intimacy in major league sports

SPORTS
ANALYTICS

A professional sports team is essentially a business that is looking for wins to maximize revenue. While they hope for a successful post-season, they also need strong quarterly results, just like you. Sports teams are renowned for adopting data-driven decision making across their organizations to do everything from improving player performance to optimizing tickets sales. At the end of the day, to enable analytics you must have top-notch information management.

Team Performance Benefits
  1. Talent identification
  2. In-game decision making
  3. Injury reduction
  4. Athlete performance
  5. Bargaining agreement
Team Performance Benefits
  1. Fan engagement
  2. Licensing
  3. Sports gambling
(Deloitte Insights, 2020)
Industry leaders cite data, and the insights they glean from it, as their means of standing apart from their competitors.

Industry spotlight: Operational excellence and service delivery within manufacturing and supply chain services

SUPPLY CHAIN
EFFICIENCY

Data offers key insights and opportunities when it comes to supply chain management. The supply chain is where the business strategy gets converted to operational service delivery of the business. Proper data management enables business processes to become more efficient, productive, and profitable through the greater availability of quality data and analysis.

Fifty-seven percent of companies believe that supply chain management gives them a competitive advantage that enables them to further develop their business (FinancesOnline, 2021).

Involving Data in Your Supply Chain

25%

Companies can reap a 25% increase in productivity, a 20% gain in space usage, and a 30% improvement in stock use efficiency if they use integrated order processing for their inventory system.

36%

Thirty-six percent of supply chain professionals say that one of the top drivers of their analytics initiatives is the optimization of inventory management to balance supply and demand.
(Source: FinancesOnline, 2021)

Industry spotlight: Intelligent product innovation and strong product portfolios differentiate consumer retailers and CPGs

INFORMED PRODUCT
DEVELOPMENT
Consumer shopping habits and preferences are notoriously variable, making it a challenge to develop a well-received product. Information and insights into consumer trends, shopping preferences, and market analysis support the probability of a successful outcome.

Maintaining a Product Portfolio
What is selling? What is not selling?

Product Development
  • Based on current consumer buying patterns, what will they buy next?
  • How will this product be received by consumers?
  • What characteristics do consumers find important?
A combination of operational data and analytics data is required to accurately answer these questions.
Internal Data
  • Organizational sales performance
External Data
  • Competitor performance
  • Market analysis
  • Consumer trends and preferences
Around 75% of ideas fail for organizational reasons – viability or feasibility or time to market issues. On the other hand, around 20% of product ideas fail due to user-related issues – not valuable or usable (Medium, 2020).

Changes in business and technology are changing how organizations use and manage data

The world moves a lot faster today

Businesses of today operate in real time. To maintain a competitive edge, businesses must identify and respond quickly to opportunities and events.

To effectively do this businesses must have accurate and up-to-date data at their fingertips.

To support the new demands around data consumption, data velocity (pace in which data is captured, organized, and analyzed) must also accelerate.

Data Management Implications
  • Strong integration capabilities
  • Intelligent and efficient systems
  • Embedded data quality management
  • Strong transparency into the history of data and its transformation

Studies and projections show a clear case of how data and its usage will grow and evolve.

Zettabyte Era

64.2

More Data

The amount of data created, consumed, and stored globally is forecast to increase rapidly, reaching 64.2 zettabytes in 2020 and projected to grow to over 180 zettabyes in 2025 (Statista, 2021).

Evolving Technologies

$480B

Cloud Proliferation

Global end-user spending on public cloud services is expected to exceed $480 billion next year (Info-Tech, 2021).

To differentiate and remain competitive in today’s marketplace, organizations are becoming more data-driven

Pyramid with a blue tip. Sublevels from top down are labelled 'Analytical Companies', 'Analytical Aspirations', 'Localized Analytics', and 'Analytically Impaired'.

Analytic Competitor

“Given the unforgiving competitive landscape, organizations have to transform now, and correctly. Winning requires an outcome-focused analytics strategy.” (Ramya Srinivasan, Forbes, 2021)
Data and the use of data analytics has become a centerpiece to effective modern business. Top-performing organizations across a variety of industries have been cited as using analytics five times more than lower performers (MIT Sloan).

The strategic value of data

Power intelligent and transformative organizational performance through leveraging data.

Respond to industry disruptors

Optimize the way you serve your stakeholders and customers

Develop products and services to meet ever-evolving needs

Manage operations and mitigate risk

Harness the value of your data

Despite investments in data initiatives, organizations are carrying high levels of data debt

Data debt is the accumulated cost that is associated with the suboptimal governance of data assets in an enterprise, like technical debt.

Data debt is a problem for 78% of organizations.

40%

of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.

66%

of organizations say a backlog of data debt is impacting new data management initiatives.

33%

of organizations are not able to get value from a new system or technology investment.

30%

of organizations are unable to become data-driven.

(Source: Experian, 2020)

The journey to being data-driven

The journey to becoming a data-driven organization requires a pit stop at data enablement.

The Data Economy

Diagram of 'The Data Economy' with three points on an arrow. 'Data Disengaged: You have a low appetite for data and rarely use data for decision making.' 'Data Enabled: Technology, data architecture, and people and processes are optimized and supported by data governance.' 'Data Driven: You are differentiating and competing on data and analytics, described as a “data first” organization. You’re collaborating through data. Data is an asset.'

Measure success to demonstrate tangible business value

Put data management into the context of the business:
  • Tie the value of data management and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.
  • Leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with senior leadership.

Don’t let measurement be an afterthought:

Start substantiating early on how you are going to measure success as your data management program evolves.

Build a right-sized roadmap

Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right-sized to deliver value in your organization.

Key considerations:
  • When building your data management roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
  • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data management partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
  • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organization’s fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolize the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data management milestones
Sample milestones:
  • Data Management Leadership & Org Structure Definition
    Define the home for data management, as approved by senior leadership.
  • Data Management Charter and Policies
    Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.
  • Data Culture Diagnostic
    Understand the organization’s current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.
  • Use Case Build and Prioritization
    Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritize accordingly.
  • Business Data Glossary/Catalog
    Build and/or refresh the business’ glossary for addressing data definitions and standardization issues.
  • Tools & Technology
    Explore the tools and technology offering in the data management space that would serve as an enabler to the program (e.g. RFI, RFP).

Insight summary

Overarching insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively managed data. Whether building customer service excellence or getting ahead of cyberattacks, a data management practice is the dependable mainstay supporting business operations and transformation.

Insight 1

Data – it’s your business.
Data is a digital imprint of business activities. Data architecture and flows are reflective of the organizational business architecture. Take data management capabilities as seriously as other core business capabilities.

Insight 2

Take a data-oriented approach.
Data management must be data-centric – with technology and functional enablement built around the data and its structure and flows. Maintain the data focus during project’s planning, delivery, and evaluation stages.

Insight 3

Get the business into the data business.
Data is not “IT’s thing.” Just as a bank helps you properly allocate your money to achieve your financial goals, IT will help you implement data management to support your business goals, but the accountability for data resides with the business.

Tactical insight

Data management is the program and environment we build once we have direction, i.e. a data strategy, and we have formed an ongoing channel with the guiding voice of the business via data governance. Without an ultimate goal in a strategy or the real requirements of the business, what are we building data systems and processes for? We are used to tech buzz words and placing our hope in promising innovations like artificial intelligence. There are no shortcuts, but there are basic proven actions we can take to meet the digital revolution head on and let our data boost our journey.

Key deliverable:

Data Management Roadmap Template

Use this template to guide you in translating your project's findings and outcomes into a presentation that can be shared with your executive team and project sponsors.

Sample of the 'Data Management Roadmap Template' key deliverable.

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

Use this tool to support your team in assessing and designing the capabilities and components of your organization's data management practice. Sample of the 'Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool' deliverable.

Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard

Sample of the 'Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard' deliverable.

Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to understand how your organization scores across 10 areas relating to data culture.

Business Capability Map

This template takes you through a business capability and value stream mapping to identify the data capabilities required to enable them. Sample of the 'Business Capability Map' deliverable.

Measure the value of this blueprint

Leverage this blueprint’s approach to ensure your data management initiatives align and support your key value streams and their business capabilities.
  • Aligning your data management program and its initiatives to your organization’s business capabilities is vital for tracing and demonstrating measurable business value for the program.
  • This alignment of data management with value streams and business capabilities enables you to use business-defined KPIs and demonstrate tangible value.

Project outcome

Metric

Timely data delivery Time of data delivery to consumption
Improved data quality Data quality scorecard metrics
Data provenance transparency Time for data auditing (from report/dashboard to the source)
New reporting and analytic capabilities Number of level 2 business capabilities implemented as solutions
In Phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you establish the business context, define your business drivers and KPIs, and understand your current data management capabilities and strengths.

In Phase 2, we will help you develop a plan and a roadmap for addressing any gaps and improving the relevant data management capabilities so that data is well positioned to deliver on those defined business metrics.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

Guided Implementation

Workshop

Consulting

"Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Create a Data Management Roadmap project overview

1. Build Business Context and Drivers for the Data Management Program 2. Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap
Best-Practice Toolkit

1.1 Review the Data Management Framework

1.2 Understand and Align to Business Drivers

1.3 Build High-Value Use Cases

1.4 Create a Vision

2.1 Assess Data Management

2.2 Build Your Data Management Roadmap

2.3 Organize Business Data Domains

Guided Implementation
  • Call 1
  • Call 2
  • Call 3
  • Call 4
  • Call 5
  • Call 6
  • Call 7
  • Call 8
  • Call 9
Phase Outcomes
  • An understanding of the core components of an effective data management program
  • Your organization’s business capabilities and value streams
  • A business capability map for your organization
  • High-value use cases for data management
  • Vision and guiding principles for data management
  • An understanding of your organization’s current data management capabilities
  • Definition of target-state capabilities and gaps
  • Roadmap of priority data management initiatives
  • Business data domains and ownership

Guided Implementation

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

Phase 1

Phase 2

Call #1: Understand drivers, business context, and scope of data management at your organization. Learn about Info-Tech’s approach and resources.

Call #2: Get a detailed overview of Info-Tech’s approach, framework, Data Culture Diagnostic, and blueprint.

Call #3:Align your business capabilities with your data management capabilities. Begin to develop a use case framework.

Call #4:Further discuss alignment of business capabilities to data management capabilities and use case framework.

Call #5: Assess your current data management capabilities and data environment. Review your Data Culture Diagnostic Scorecard, if applicable.

Call #6: Plan target state and corresponding initiatives.

Call #7: Identify program risks and formulate a roadmap.

Call #8: Identify and prioritize improvements. Define a RACI chart.

Call #9: Summarize results and plan next steps.

Workshop Overview

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889
Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
Activities
Understand and contextualize

1.1 Review your data strategy.

1.2 Learn data management capabilities.

1.3 Discuss DM capabilities cross-dependencies and interactions.

1.4 Develop high-value use cases.

Assess current DM capabilities and set improvement targets

2.1 Assess you current DM capabilities.

2.2 Set targets for DM capabilities.

Formulate and prioritize improvement initiatives

3.1 Formulate core initiatives for DM capabilities improvement.

3.2 Discuss dependencies across the initiatives and prioritize them.

Plan for delivery dates and assign RACI

4.1 Plan dates and assign RACI for the initiatives.

4.2 Brainstorm initiatives to address gaps and enable business goals.

Next steps and wrap-up (offsite)

5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

Deliverables
  1. Understanding of the data management capabilities and their interactions and logical dependencies
  2. Use cases
  1. DM capability assessment results
  2. DM vision and guiding principles
  1. Prioritized DM capabilities improvement initiatives
  1. DM capabilities improvement roadmap
  2. Business data domains and ownership
  1. Workshop final report with key findings and recommendations

Full page diagram of the 'Data & Analytics landscape'. Caption reads 'The key to landscaping your data environment lies in ensuring foundational disciplines are optimized in a way that recognizes the interdependency among the various disciplines.' Many foundational disciplines are color-coded to a legend determining whether its 'accountability sits with IT' or 'with the business; CDO'. An arrow labeled 'You Are Here' points to 'Data Management', which is coded in both colors meaning both IT and the business are accountable.

What is data management and why is it needed?

“Data management is the development, execution, and supervision of plans, policies, programs and practices that deliver, control, protect and enhance the value of data and information assets throughout their lifecycles.” (DAMA International, 2017)

Achieving successful management and consistent delivery of data assets throughout their lifecycle requires the collaboration of the business and IT and the balance of technology, process, and resourcing solutions.

Who:

This research is designed for:
  • Data management heads and professionals looking to improve their organization’s ability to leverage data in value-added ways.
  • Data management and IT professionals looking to optimize the data environment, from creation and ingestion right through to consumption.

Are your data management capabilities optimized to support your organization’s data use and demand?

What is the current situation?

Situation
  • The volume and variety of data are growing exponentially and show no sign of slowing down.
  • Business landscapes and models are evolving.
  • Users and stakeholders are becoming more and more data-centric, with maturing and demanding expectations.
Complication
  • Organizations struggle to develop a comprehensive approach to optimizing data management.
  • In their efforts to keep pace with the demands for data, data management groups often adopt a piecemeal approach that includes turning to tools as a means to address the needs.
  • Data architecture, models, and designs fail to deliver real and measurable business impact and value. Technology ROI is not realized.
Info-Tech Insight

A data strategy should never be formulated disjointed from the business. Ensure the data strategy aligns with the business strategy and supports the business architecture.

Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework

What Is Data Management?

Data management is the development, execution, and supervision of plans, policies, programs and practices that deliver, control, protect and enhance the value of data and information assets throughout their lifecycles.” (DAMA International, 2017)

The three-tiered Data Management Framework, tiers are labelled 'Data Management Enablers', 'Information Dimensions', and 'Business Information'.

Adapted from DAMA-DMBOK and Advanced Knowledge Innovations Global Solutions

Info-Tech’s Approach

Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework is designed to show how an organization’s business model sits as the foundation of its data management practice. Drawing from the requirements of the underpinning model, a practice is designed and maintained through the creation and application of the enablers and dimensions of data management.

Build a data management practice that is centered on supporting the business and its use of key data assets

Business Resources

Data subject areas provide high-level views of the data assets that are used in business processes and enable an organization to perform its business functions.

Classified by specific subjects, these groups reflect data elements that, when used effectively, are able to support analytical and operational use cases of data.

This layer is representative of the delivery of the data assets and the business’ consumption of the data.

Data is an integral business asset that exists across all areas of an organization

Equation stating 'Trustworthy and Usable Data' plus 'Well-Designed and Executed Processes' equals 'Business Capabilities and Functions'.
Data Management Framework with only the bottom tier highlighted.

For a data management practice to be effective it ultimately must show how its capabilities and operations better support the business in accessing and leveraging its key data assets.*

*This project focuses on building capabilities for data management. Leverage our data quality management research to support you in assessing the performance of this model.

Information dimensions support the different types of data present within an organization’s environment

Information Dimensions

Components at the Information Dimensions layer manage the different types of data and information present with an environment.

At this layer, data is managed based on its type and how the business is looking to use and access the data.

Custom capabilities are developed at this level to support:

  • Structured data
  • Semi-structured data
  • Unstructured data
The types, formats, and structure of the data are managed at this level using the data management enablers to support their successful execution and performance.
Data Management Framework with only the middle tier highlighted.

Build a data management practice with strong process capabilities

Use these guiding principles to contextualize the purpose and value for each data management enabler.

Data Management Framework with only the top tier highlighted.

Data Management Enablers

Info-Tech categorizes data management enablers as the processes that guide the management of the organization’s data assets and support the delivery.

Govern and Direct

  • Ensures data management practices and processes follow the standards and policies outlined for them
  • Manages the executive oversight of the broader practice

Align and Plan

  • Aligns data management plans to the business’ data requirements
  • Creates the plans to guide the design and execution of data management components

Build, Acquire, Operate, Deliver, and Support

  • Executes the operations that manage data as it flows through the business environment
  • Manages the business’ risks in relation to its data assets and the level of security and access required

Monitor and Improve

  • Analyzes the performance of data management components and the quality of business data
  • Creates and execute plans to improve the performance of the practice and the quality and use of data assets

Use Info-Tech’s assessment framework to support your organization’s data management planning

Info-Tech employs a consumer-driven approach to requirements gathering in order to support a data management practice. This will create a vision and strategic plan that will help to make data an enabler to the business as it looks to achieve its strategic objectives.

Data Strategy Planning

To support the project in building an accurate understanding of the organization’s data requirements and the role of data in its operations (current and future), the framework first guides organizations on a business and subject area assessment.

By focusing on data usage and strategies for unique data subject areas, the project team will be better able to craft a data management practice with capabilities that will generate the greatest value and proactively handle evolving data requirements.

Arrow pointing right.

Data Management Assessment

To support the design of a fit-for-purpose data management practice that aligns with the business’ data requirements this assessment will guide you in:

  • Determining the target capabilities for the different dimensions of data management.
  • Identifying the interaction dependencies and coordination efforts required to build a successful data management practice.

Create a Data Management Roadmap

Phase 1

Build Business Context and Drivers for the Data Management Program

Phase 1

1.1 Review the Data Management Framework

1.2 Understand and Align to Business Drivers

1.3 Build High-Value Use Cases

1.4 Create a Vision

Phase 2

2.1 Assess Data Management

2.2 Build Your Data Management Roadmap

2.3 Organize Business Data Domains

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Identify your business drivers and business capabilities.
  • Align data management capabilities with business goals.
  • Define scope and vision of the data management plan.
  • This phase involves the follow

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Data Management Lead/Information Management Lead, CDO, Data Lead
  • Senior Business Leaders
  • Business SMEs
  • Data Owners, Records Managers, Regulatory Subject Matter Experts (e.g. Legal Counsel, Security)

Step 1.1

Review the Data Management Framework

Activities

1.1.1 Walk through the main parts of the best-practice Data Management Framework

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Understand the main disciplines and makeup of a best-practice data management program.
  • Determine which data management capabilities are considered high priority by your organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map
Build Business Context and Drivers
Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

Full page diagram of the 'Data & Analytics landscape'. Caption reads 'The key to landscaping your data environment lies in ensuring foundational disciplines are optimized in a way that recognizes the interdependency among the various disciplines.' Many foundational disciplines are color-coded to a legend determining whether its 'accountability sits with IT' or 'with the business; CDO'. An arrow labeled 'You Are Here' points to 'Data Management', which is coded in both colors meaning both IT and the business are accountable.

Full page illustration of the 'Create a Data Management Roadmap' using the image of a cargo ship labelled 'Data Management' moving in the direction of 'Business Strategy'. The caption at the top reads 'Data Management capabilities create new business value by augmenting data & optimizing it for analytics. Data is a digital imprint of organizational activities.'

Data Management Capabilities

A similar concept to the last one, with a ship moving toward 'Business Strategy', except the ship is cross-sectioned with different capabilities filling the interior of the silhouette. Below are different steps in data management 'Data Creation', 'Data Ingestion', 'Data Accumulation, 'Data Augmentation', 'Data Delivery', and 'Data Consumption'.

Build a Robust & Comprehensive Data Strategy

Business Strategy

Organizational Goals & Objectives

Business Drivers

Industry Drivers

Current Environment

Data Management Capability Maturity Assessment

Data Culture Diagnostic

Regulatory and Compliance Requirements

Data Strategy

Organizational Drivers and Data Value

Data Strategy Objectives & Guiding Principles

Data Strategy Vision and Mission

Data Strategy Roadmap

People: Roles and Organizational Structure

Data Culture & Data Literacy

Data Management and Tools

Risk and Feasibility

Unlock the Value of Data

Generate Game-Changing Insights

Fuel Data-Driven Decision Making

Innovate and Transform With Data

Thrive and Differentiate With a Data-Driven Culture

Elevate Organizational Data IQ

Build a Foundation for Data Valuation

What is a data strategy and why is it needed?

  • Your data strategy is the vehicle for ensuring data is poised to support your organization’s strategic objectives.
  • For any CDO or equivalent data leader, a robust and comprehensive data strategy is the number one tool in your toolkit for generating measurable business value from data.
  • The data strategy will serve as the mechanism for making high-quality, trusted, and well-governed data readily available and accessible to deliver on your organizational mandate.

What is driving the need to formulate or refresh your organization’s data strategy?

Who:

This research is designed for:

  • Chief Data Officer (CDO) or equivalent
  • Head of Data
  • Chief Analytics Officer (CAO)
  • Head of Digital Transformation
  • CIO

Info-Tech Insight

A data strategy should never be formulated disjointed from the business. Ensure the data strategy aligns with the business strategy and supports the business architecture.

Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

Model of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework titled 'Key to Data Enablement'. There are inputs, a main Data Governance cycle, and a selection of outputs. The inputs are 'Business Strategy' and 'Data Strategy' injected into the cycle via 'Strategic Goals & Objectives'. The cycle consists of 'Operating Model', 'Policies & Procedures', 'Data Literacy & Culture', 'Enterprise Projects & Services', 'Data Management', 'Data Privacy & Security', 'Data Leadership', and 'Data Ownership & Stewardship'. The latter two are part of 'Enterprise Governance's 'Oversight & Alignment' cycle. Outputs are 'Defined Data Accountability & Responsibility', 'Knowledge & Common Understanding of Data Assets', 'Trust & Confidence in Traceable Data', 'Improved Data ROI & Reduced Data Debt', and 'Support of Ethical Use of Data in a Data-Driven Culture'.

What is data governance and why is it needed?

  • Data governance is an enabling framework of decision rights, responsibilities, and accountabilities for data assets across the enterprise.
  • It should deliver agreed-upon models that are conducive to your organization’s operating culture, where there is clarity on who can do what with which data and via what means.
  • It is the key enabler for bringing high-quality, trusted, secure, and discoverable data to the right users across your organization.
  • It promotes and drives responsible and ethical use and handling of data while helping to build and foster an organizational culture of data excellence.

Do you feel there is a clear definition of data accountability and responsibility in your organization?

Who:

This research is designed for:

  • Chief Data Officer (CDO) or equivalent
  • Head of Data Governance, Lead Data Governance Officer
  • Head of Data
  • Head of Digital Transformation
  • CIO

Info-Tech Insight

Data governance should not sit as an island in your organization. It must continuously align with the organization’s enterprise governance function.

A diagram titled 'Data Platform Selection - Make complex tasks simple by applying proven methodology to connect businesses to software' with five steps. '1. Formalize a Business Strategy', '2. Identify Platform Specific Considerations', '3. Execute Data Platform Architecture Selection', 'Select Software', 'Achieve Business Goals'.

Info-Tech’s Data Platform Framework

Data pipeline for versatile and scalable data delivery

a diagram showing the path from 'Data Creation' to 'Data Accumulation', to 'Engineering & Augmentation', to 'Data Delivery'. Each step has a 'Fast Lane', 'Operational Lane', and 'Curated Lane'.

What are the data platform and practice and why are they needed?

  • The data platform and practice are two parts of the data and analytics equation:
    • The practice is about the operating model for data; that is, how stakeholders work together to deliver business value on your data platform. These stakeholders are a combination of business and IT from across the organization.
    • The platform is a combination of the architectural components of the data and analytics landscape that come together to support the role the business plays day to day with respect to data.
  • Don’t jump directly into technology: use Info-Tech tools to solve and plan first.
  • Create a continuous roadmap to implement and evolve your data practice and platform.
  • Promote collaboration between the business and IT by clearly defining responsibilities.

Does your data platform effectively serve your reporting and analytics capabilities?

Who:

This research is designed for:

  • Data and Information Leadership
  • Enterprise Information Architect
  • Data Architect
  • Data Engineer/Modeler

Info-Tech Insight

Info-Tech’s approach is driven by business goals and leverages standard data practice and platform patterns. This enables the implementation of critical and foundational data and analytics components first and subsequently facilitates the evolution and development of the practice and platform over time.

Info-Tech’s Reporting and Analytics Framework

Formulating an enterprise reporting and analytics strategy requires the business vision and strategies to first be substantiated. Any optimization to the data warehouse, integration, and source layers is in turn driven by the enterprise reporting and analytics strategy.
A diagram of the 'Reporting and Analytics Framework' with 'Business vision/strategies' fed through four stages beginning with 'Business Intelligence: Reporting & Analytics Strategy', 'Data Warehouse: Data Warehouse/ Data Lake Strategy', 'Integration and Translation: Data Integration Strategy', 'Sources: Source Strategy (Content/Quality)'
The current states of your integration and warehouse platforms determine what data can be used for BI and analytics.
Your enterprise reporting and analytics strategy is driven by your organization’s vision and corporate strategy.

What is reporting and analytics and why is it needed?

  • Reporting and analytics bridges the gap between an organization’s data assets and consumable information that facilitates insight generation and informed or evidence-based decision making.
  • The reporting and analytics strategy drives data warehouse and integration strategies and the data needs to support business decisions.
  • The reporting and analytics strategy ensures that the investment made in optimizing the data environment to support reporting and analytics is directly aligned with the organization’s needs and priorities and hence will deliver measurable business value.

Do you have a strategy to enable self-serve analytics? What does your operating model look like? Have you an analytics CoE?

Who:

This research is designed for:

  • Head of BI and Analytics
  • CIO or Business Unit (BU) Leader looking to improve reporting and analytics
  • Applications Lead

Info-Tech Insight

Formulating an enterprise reporting and analytics strategy requires the business vision and strategies to first be substantiated. Any optimization to the data warehouse, integration, and source layer is in turn driven by the enterprise reporting and analytics strategy.

Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Framework

Info-Tech’s methodology:
    1. Prioritize your core business objectives and identify your business driver.
    2. Learn how business drivers apply to specific tiers of Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model.
    3. Determine the appropriate tactical pattern that addresses your most important requirements.
Visual diagram of the first two parts of the methodology on the left. Objectives apply to the data architecture model, which appropriates tactical patterns, which leads to a focus.
    1. Select the areas of the five-tier architecture to focus on.
    2. Measure your current state.
    3. Set the targets of your desired optimized state.
    1. Roadmap your tactics.
    2. Manage and communicate change.
Visual diagram of the third part of the methodology on the left. A roadmap of tactics leads to communicating change.

What is data architecture and why is it needed?

  • Data architecture is the set of rules, policies, standards, and models that govern and define the type of data collected and how it is used, stored, managed, and integrated within the organization and its database systems.
  • In general, the primary objective of data architecture is the standardization of data for the benefit of the organization.

Is your architecture optimized to sustainably deliver readily available and accessible data to users?

Who:

This research is designed for:

  • Data Architects or their equivalent
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Head of Data
  • CIO
  • Database Administrators

Info-Tech Insight

Data architecture is not just about models. Viewing data architecture as just technical data modeling can lead to a data environment that does not aptly serve or support the business. Identify your business’ priorities and adapt your data architecture to those needs.

A diagram titled 'Build Your Data Quality Program'. '1. Data Quality & Data Culture Diagnostics Business Landscape Exercise', '2. Business Strategy & Use Cases', '3. Prioritize Use Cases With Poor Quality'. 'Info-Tech Insight: As data is ingested, integrated, and maintained in the various streams of the organization's system and application architecture, there are multiple points where the quality of the data can degrade.' A data flow diagram points out how 'Data quality issues can occur at any stage of the data flow', and that it is better to 'Fix data quality root causes here' during the 'Data Creation', 'Data Ingestion', and 'Data Accumulation & Engineering' stages in order 'to prevent expensive cures here' in the 'Data Delivery' and 'Reporting & Analytics' stages.

What is data quality management and why is it needed?

  • Data is the foundation of decisions made at data-driven organizations.
  • Data quality management ensures that foundation is sustainably solid.
  • If there are problems with the organization’s underlying data, it can have a domino effect on many downstream business functions.
  • The transformational insights that executives are constantly seeking can be uncovered by a data quality practice that makes high-quality, trustworthy information readily available to the business users who need it.

Do your users have an optimal level of trust and confidence in the quality of the organization’s data?

Who:

This research is designed for:

  • Chief Data Officer (CDO) or equivalent Head of Data
  • Chief Analytics Officer (CAO)
  • Head of Digital Transformation
  • CIO

Info-Tech Insight

Data quality suffers most at the point of entry. The resulting domino effect of error propagation makes these errors among the most costly forms of data quality errors. Fix data ingestion, whether through improving your application and database design or improving your data ingestion policy, and you will fix a majority of data quality issues.

Info-Tech’s Enterprise Content Management Framework

Drivers Governance Information Architecture Process Policy Systems Architecture
Regulatory, Legal –›
Efficiency, Cost-Effectiveness –›
Customer Service –›
User Experience –›
  • Establish decision-making committee
  • Define and formalize roles (RACI, charter)
  • Develop policies
  • Create business data glossary
  • Decide who approves documents in workflow
  • Operating models
  • Information categories (taxonomy)
  • Classifications, retention periods
  • Metadata (for findability and as tags in automated workflows)
  • Review and approval process, e.g. who approves
  • Process for admins to oversee performance of IM service
  • Process for capturing and classifying incoming documents
  • Audit trails and reporting process
  • Centralized index of data and records to be tracked and managed throughout their lifecycle
  • Data retention policy
  • E-signature policy
  • Email policy
  • Information management policies
  • Access/privacy rules
  • Understand the flow of content through multiple systems (e.g. email, repositories)
  • Define business and technical requirements to select a new content management platform/service
  • Improve integrations
  • Right-size solutions for use case (e.g. DAM)
  • Communication/Change Management
  • Data Literacy

What is enterprise content management and why is it needed?

“Enterprise Content Management is the systematic collection and organization of information that is to be used by a designated audience – business executives, customers, etc. Neither a single technology nor a methodology nor a process, it is a dynamic combination of strategies, methods and tools used to capture, manage, store, preserve and deliver information supporting key organizational processes through its entire lifecycle.” (AIIM, 2021)

  • Changing your ECM capabilities is about changing organizational behavior; take an all-hands-on-deck approach to make the most of information gathering, create a vested interest, and secure buy-in.
  • It promotes and drives responsible and ethical use and handling of content while helping to build and foster an organizational culture of information excellence.

Who:

This research is designed for:

  • Information Architect
  • Chief Data Officer (CDO)
  • Head of Data, Information Management
  • Records Management
  • CIO

Info-Tech Insight

ECM is critical to becoming a digital and modernized operation, where both structured data (such as sales reports) and unstructured content (such as customer sentiment in social media) are brought together for a 360-degree view of the customer or for a comprehensive legal discovery.

Metadata management/Data cataloging

Overview

Metadata is structured information that describes, explains, locates, or otherwise makes it easier to retrieve, use, or manage an information resource. Metadata is often called data about data or information about information (NISO).

Metadata management is the function that manages and maintains the technology and processes that creates, processes, and stores metadata created by business processes and data.

90%

The majority of data is unstructured information like text, video, audio, web server logs, social media, and more (MIT Sloan, 2021).
As data becomes more unstructured, complex, and manipulated, the importance and value of metadata will grow exponentially and support improved:
  • Data consumption
  • Quality management
  • Risk management

Value of Effective Metadata Management

  • Supports the traceability of data through an environment.
  • Creates standards and logging that enable information and data to be searchable and cataloged.
  • Metadata schemas enable easier transferring and distribution of data across different environments.
Data about data: The true value of metadata and the management practices supporting it is its ability to provide deeper understanding and auditability to the data assets and processes of the business.
Metadata supports the use of:
Big Data
Unstructured data
Content and Documents
Unstructured and semi-structured data
Structured data
Master, reference, etc.

Critical Success Factors of Metadata Management

  • Consistent and documented data standards and definitions
  • Architectural planning for metadata
  • Incorporation of metadata into system design and the processing of data
  • Technology to support metadata creation, collection, storage, and reviews (metadata repository, meta marts, etc.)

Info-Tech’s Data Integration Framework

On one hand…

Data has massive potential to bring insight to an organization when combined and analyzed in creative ways.

On the other hand…

It is difficult to bring data together from different sources to generate insights and prevent stale data.

How can these two ideas be reconciled?

Answer: Info-Tech’s Data Integration Onion Framework summarizes an organization’s data environment at a conceptual level and is used to design a common data-centric integration environment.

A diagram of the 'Data Integration Onion Framework' with five layers: 'Enterprise Business Processes', 'Enterprise Analytics', 'Enterprise Integration', 'Enterprise Data Repositories', and 'Enterprise Data' at the center.
Info-Tech’s Data Integration Onion Framework
Data-centric integration is the solution you need to bring data together to break down data silos.

What is data integration and why is it needed?

  • To get more value from their information, organizations are relying on increasingly more complex data sources. These diverse data sources have to be properly integrated to unlock the full potential of that data.
  • Integrating large volumes of data from the many varied sources in an organization has incredible potential to yield insights, but many organizations struggle with creating the right structure for that blending to take place, and that leads to the formation of data silos.
  • Data-centric integration capabilities can break down organizational silos. Once data silos are removed and all the information that is relevant to a given problem is available, problems with operational and transactional efficiencies can be solved, and value from business intelligence (BI) and analytics can be fully realized.

Is your integration near real time and scalable?

Who:

This research is designed for:

  • Data Engineers
  • Business Analysts
  • Data Architects
  • Head of Data Management
  • Enterprise Architects

Info-Tech Insight

Every IT project requires data integration. Any change in the application and database ecosystem requires you to solve a data integration problem.

Info-Tech’s Master Data Management Framework

Master data management (MDM) “entails control over Master Data values and identifiers that enable consistent use, across systems, of the most accurate and timely data about essential business entities” (DAMA, 2017).

The Data Management Framework from earlier with tier 2 item 'Reference and Master' highlighted.

Fundamental objective of MDM: Enable the business to see one view of critical data elements across the organization.

Phases of the MDM Framework. 'Phase 1: Build a Vision for MDM' entails a 'Readiness Assessment', then both 'Identify the Master Data Needs of the Business' and 'Create a Strategic Vision'. 'Phase 2: Create a Plan and Roadmap for the Organization’s MDM Program' entails 'Assess Current MDM Capabilities', then 'Initiative Planning', then 'Strategic Roadmap'.

What is MDM and why is it needed?

  • Master data management (MDM) “entails control over Master Data values and identifiers that enable consistent use, across systems, of the most accurate and timely data about essential business entities” (DAMA, 2017).
  • The fundamental objective of MDM is to enable the business to see one view of critical data elements across the organization.
  • What is included in the scope of MDM?
    • Party data (employees, customers, etc.)
    • Product/service data
    • Financial data
    • Location data

Is there traceability and visibility into your data’s lineage? Does your data pipeline facilitate that single view across the organization?

Who:

This research is designed for:

  • Chief Data Officer (CDO)
  • Head of Data Management, CIO
  • Data Architect
  • Head of Data Governance, Data Officer

Info-Tech Insight

Successful MDM requires a comprehensive approach. To be successfully planned, implemented, and maintained it must include effective capabilities in the critical processes and subpractices of data management.

Data Modeling Framework

  • The framework consists of the business, enterprise, application, and implementation layers.
  • The Business Layer encodes real-world business concepts via the conceptual model.
  • The Enterprise Layer defines all enterprise data asset details and their relationships.
  • The Application Layer defines the data structures as used by a specific application.
  • The Implementation Layer defines the data models and artifacts for use by software tools.
Data Modeling Framework with items from the 'Implementation Layer' contributing to items in the 'Application Layer' and 'Enterprise Layer' before turning into a 'Conceptual Model' in the 'Business Layer'.

Model hierarchy

  • The Conceptual data model describes the organization from a business perspective.
  • The Message model is used to describe internal- and external-facing messages and is equivalent to the canonical model.
  • The Enterprise model depicts the whole organization and is divided into domains.
  • The Analytical model is built for specific business use cases.
  • Application models are application-specific operational models.
Model hierarchy with items from the 'Implementation Layer' contributing to items in the 'Application Layer' and 'Enterprise Layer' before turning into a 'Conceptual Model' in the 'Business Layer'.

Info-Tech Insight

The Conceptual model acts as the root of all the models required and used by an organization.

Data architecture and modeling processes

A diagram moving from right to left through 5 phases: 'Business concepts defined and organized', 'Business concepts enriched with attribution', 'Physical view of the data, still vendor agnostic', 'The view being used by developers and business', and 'Manage the progression of your data assets'.

Info-Tech Insight

The Conceptual data model adds relationships to your business data glossary terms and is the first step of the modeling journey.

Data operations

Objectives of Data Operations Management

  • Implement and follow policies and procedures to manage data at each stage of its lifecycle.
  • Maintain the technology supporting the flow and delivery of data (applications, databases, systems, etc.).
  • Control the delivery of data within the system environment.

Indicators of Successful Data Operations Management

  • Effective delivery of data assets to end users.
  • Successful maintenance and performance of the technical environment that collects, stores, delivers, and purges organizational data.
'Data Lifecycle' with steps 'Create', 'Acquire', 'Store', 'Maintain', 'Use', and 'Archive/Destroy'.
This data management enabler has a heavy focus on the management and performance of data systems and applications.
It works closely with the organization’s technical architecture to support successful data delivery and lifecycle management (data warehouses, repositories, databases, networks, etc.).

Step 1.2

Understand and Align to Business Drivers

Activities

1.2.1 Define your value streams

1.2.2 Identify your business capabilities

1.2.3 Categorize your organization’s key business capabilities

1.2.4 Develop a strategy map tied to data management

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Leverage your organization’s existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map.
  • Determine which business capabilities are considered high priority by your organization.
  • Map your organization’s strategic objectives to value streams and capabilities to communicate how objectives are realized with the support of data.

Outcomes of this step

  • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

Build Business Context and Drivers

Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

Identifying value streams

Value streams connect business goals to organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the marketplace by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.
There are several key questions to ask when endeavouring to identify value streams.

Key Questions

  • Who are your customers?
  • What are the benefits we deliver to them?
  • How do we deliver those benefits?
  • How does the customer receive the benefits?

1.2.1 Define value streams

1-3 hours

Input: Business strategy/goals, Financial statements, Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture

Output: List of organization-specific value streams, Detailed value stream definition(s)

Materials: Whiteboard/kanban board, Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template – contact your Account Representative for details, Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc., Info-Tech’s Archimate models

Participants: Enterprise/Business Architect, Business Analysts, Business Unit Leads, CIO, Departmental Executive & Senior managers

Unify the organization’s perspective on how it creates value.

  1. Write a short description of the value stream that includes a statement about the value provided and a clear start and end for the value stream. Validate the accuracy of the descriptions with your key stakeholders.
  2. Consider:
    • How does the organization deliver those benefits?
    • How does the customer receive the benefits?
    • What is the scope of your value stream? What will trigger the stream to start and what will the final value be?
  3. Avoid:
    • Don’t start with a blank page. Use Info-Tech’s business architecture models for sample value streams.

Contact your Account Representative for access to Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template

Define or validate the organization’s value streams

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. These value realization activities, in turn, depend on data.

If the organization does not have a business architecture function to conduct and guide Activity 1.2.1, you can leverage the following approach:

  • Meet with key stakeholders regarding this topic, then discuss and document your findings.
  • When trying to identify the right stakeholders, consider: Who are the decision makers and key influencers? Who will impact this piece of business architecture–related work? Who has the relevant skills, competencies, experience, and knowledge about the organization?
  • Engage with these stakeholders to define and validate how the organization creates value. Consider:
    • Who are your main stakeholders? This will depend on the industry in which you operate. For example, they could be customers, residents, citizens, constituents, students, patients.
    • What are your stakeholders looking to accomplish?
    • How does your organization’s products and/or services help them accomplish that?
    • What are the benefits your organization delivers to them and how does your organization deliver those benefits?
    • How do your stakeholders receive those benefits?

Align data management to the organization’s value realization activities.

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Info-Tech Insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively managed and governed data. Without this, you could face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, negative impact to reputation and brand, and/or increased exposure to business risk.

Example of value streams – Retail Banking

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Retail Banking

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Example Value Stream for Retail Banking with five value chains. 'Attract Customers: Retail banks design new products to fill gaps in their product portfolios by analyzing the market for changing customer needs and new competitor offerings or pricing; Pricing a product correctly through analysis and rate setting is a delicate balance and fundamental to a bank’s success.' 'Supply Loans and Mortgages and Credit Cards: Selecting lending criteria helps banks decide on the segment of customer they should take on and the degree of risk they are willing to accept.' 'Provide Core Banking Services: Servicing includes the day-to-day interactions with customers for onboarding, payments, adjustments, and offboarding through multiple banking channels; Customer retention and growing share of wallet are crucial capabilities in servicing that directly impact the growth and profitability of retail banks.' 'Offer Card Services: Card servicing involves quick turnarounds on card delivery and acceptance at a large number of merchants; Accurate billing and customizable spending alerts are crucial in ensuring that the customer understands their spending habits.' 'Grow Investments and Manage Wealth: Customer retention can be increased through effective wealth management and additional services that will increase the number of products owned by a customer.'

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

Example of value streams – Higher Education

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Higher Education

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Example Value Stream for Higher Education with five value chains. 'Shape Institutional Research: Institutional research provides direct benefits to both partners and faculty, ensuring efficient use of resources and compliance with ethical and methodological standards; This value stream involves all components of the research lifecycle, from planning and resourcing to delivery and commercialization.' 'Facilitate Curriculum Design: Curriculum design is the process by which learning content is designed and developed to achieve desired student outcomes; Curriculum management capabilities include curriculum planning, design and commercialization, curriculum assessment, and instruction management.' 'Design Student Support Services: Support services design and development provides a range of resources to assist students with academic success, such as accessibility, health and counseling, social services, housing, and academic skills development.' 'Manage Academic Administration: Academic administration involves the broad capabilities required to attract and enroll students in institutional programs; This value stream involves all components related to recruitment, enrollment, admissions, and retention management.' 'Deliver Student Services: Delivery of student services comes after curricular management, support services design, and academic administration. It comprises delivery of programs and services to enable student success; Program and service delivery capabilities include curriculum delivery, convocation management, and student and alumni support services.'

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

Example of value streams – Local Government

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Local Government

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Example Value Stream for Local Government with five value chains. 'Sustain Land, Property, and the Environment: Local governments act as the stewards of the regional land and environment that are within their boundaries; Regional government bodies are responsible for ensuring that the natural environment is protected and sustained for future citizens in the form of parks and public land.' 'Facilitate Civic Engagement: Local governments engage with constituents to maintain a high quality of life through art, culture, and education.' 'Protect Local Health and Safety: Health concerns are managed by a local government through specialized campaigns and clinics; Emergency services are provided by the local authority to protect and react to health and safety concerns including police and firefighting services.' 'Grow the Economy: Economic growth is a cornerstone of a strong local government. Growth comes from flourishing industries, entrepreneurial success, high levels of employment, and income from tourism.' 'Provide Regional Infrastructure: Local governments ensure that infrastructure is built, maintained, and effective in meeting the needs of constituents. (Includes: electricity, water, sustainable energy sources, waste collection, transit, and local transportation.'

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

Example of value streams – Manufacturing

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Manufacturing

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Example Value Stream for Manufacturing with three value chains. 'Design Product: Manufacturers proactively analyze their respective markets for any new opportunities or threats; They design new products to serve changing customer needs or to rival any new offerings by competitors; A manufacturer’s success depends on its ability to develop a product that the market wants at the right price and quality level.' 'Produce Product: Optimizing production activities is an important capability for manufacturers. Raw materials and working inventories need to be managed effectively to minimize wastage and maximize the utilization of the production lines; Processes need to be refined continuously over time to remain competitive and the quality of the materials and final products needs to be strictly managed.' 'Sell Product: Once produced, manufacturers need to sell the products. This is done through distributors, retailers, and, in some cases, directly to the end consumer; After the sale, manufacturers typically have to deliver the product, provide customer care, and manage complaints; Manufacturers also randomly test their end products to ensure they meet quality requirements.'

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

Define the organization’s business capabilities in a business capability map

A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities represent stable business functions and typically will have a defined business outcome.

Business capabilities can be thought of as business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.”

If your organization doesn’t already have a business capability map, you can leverage the following approach to build one. This initiative requires a good understanding of the business. By working with the right stakeholders, you can develop a business capability map that speaks a common language and accurately depicts your business.

Working with the stakeholders as described in the slide entitled “Define or validate the organization’s value streams”:

  • Analyze the value streams to identify and describe the organization’s capabilities that support them.
  • Consider the objective of your value stream. (This can highlight which capabilities support which value stream.)
  • As you initiate your engagement with your stakeholders, don’t start a blank page. Leverage the examples on the next slides as a starting point for your business capability map.
  • When using these examples, consider: What are the activities that make up your particular business? Keep the ones that apply to your organization, remove the ones that don’t, and add any needed.

Align data management to the organization’s value realization activities.

Info-Tech Insight

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data management program must support.

For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

1.2.2 Identify your business capabilities

Input: List of confirmed value streams and their related business capabilities

Output: Business capability map with value streams for your organization

Materials: Your existing business capability map, Business Alignment worksheet provided in the Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool, Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture blueprint

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data stewards, Data custodians, Data leads and administrators

Confirm your organization's existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map:

  • If you have an existing business capability map, meet with the relevant business owners/stakeholders to confirm that the content is accurate and up to date. Confirm the value streams (how your organization creates and captures value) and their business capabilities reflect the organization’s current business environment.
  • If you do not have an existing business capability map, complete this activity to initiate the formulation of a map (value streams and related business capabilities):
    1. Define the organization’s value streams. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define how your organization creates and captures value.
    2. Define the relevant business capabilities. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define the business capabilities.

Note: A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities are business terms defined using nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.” They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of one another, and typically will have a defined business outcome.

Example business capability map – Retail Banking

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data management program.

Example business capability map for: Retail Banking

Example business capability map for Retail Banking with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

Example business capability map – Higher Education

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data management program.

Example business capability map for: Higher Education

Example business capability map for Higher Education with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

Example business capability map – Local Government

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Local Government

Example business capability map for Local Government with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

Example business capability map – Manufacturing

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Manufacturing

Example business capability map for Manufacturing with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

Example business capability map – Retail

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Retail

Example business capability map for Retail with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

1.2.3 Categorize your organization’s key capabilities

Input: Strategic insight from senior business stakeholders on the business capabilities that drive value for the organization

Output: Business capabilities categorized and prioritized (e.g. cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, high value/high risk) See next slide for an example

Materials: Your existing business capability map or the business capability map derived in Activity 1.2.2

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data stewards, Data custodians, Data governance working group

Determine which capabilities are considered high priority in your organization.

  1. Categorize or heatmap the organization’s key capabilities. Consult with senior and other key business stakeholders to categorize and prioritize the business’ capabilities. This will aid in ensuring your data governance future-state planning is aligned with the mandate of the business. One approach to prioritizing capabilities with business stakeholders is to examine them through the lens of cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, and/or by high value/high risk.
  2. Identify cost advantage creators. Focus on capabilities that drive a cost advantage for your organization. Highlight these capabilities and prioritize programs that support them.
  3. Identify competitive advantage differentiators. Focus on capabilities that give your organization an edge over rivals or other players in your industry.

This categorization/prioritization exercise helps highlight prime areas of opportunity for building use cases, determining prioritization, and the overall optimization of data and data governance.

For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

Example of business capabilities categorization or heatmapping – Retail

This exercise is useful in ensuring the data governance program is focused and aligned to support the priorities and direction of the business.

  • Depending on the mandate from the business, priority may be on developing cost advantage. Hence the capabilities that deliver efficiency gains are the ones considered to be cost advantage creators.
  • The business’ priority may be on maintaining or gaining a competitive advantage over its industry counterparts. Differentiation might be achieved in delivering unique or enhanced products, services, and/or experiences, and the focus will tend to be on the capabilities that are more end-stakeholder-facing (e.g. customer-, student-, patient,- and/or constituent-facing). These are the organization’s competitive advantage creators.

Example: Retail

Example business capability map for Retail with capabilities categorized into Cost Advantage Creators and Competitive Advantage creators via a legend. Value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

1.2.4 Develop a strategy map tied to data management

Input: Strategic objectives as outlined by the organization’s business strategy and confirmed by senior leaders

Output: A strategy map that maps your organizational strategic objectives to value streams, business capabilities, and ultimately data programs

Materials: Your existing business capability map or the one created in Activity 1.2.2, Business strategy (see next slide for an example)

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data stewards, Data custodians, Data governance working group

Identify the strategic objectives for the business. Knowing the key strategic objectives will drive business–data governance alignment. It’s important to make sure the right strategic objectives of the organization have been identified and are well understood.

  1. Meet with senior business leaders and other relevant stakeholders to help identify and document the key strategic objectives for the business.
  2. Leverage their knowledge of the organization’s business strategy and strategic priorities to visually represent how these map to value streams, business capabilities, and ultimately data and data governance needs and initiatives. Tip: Your map is one way to visually communicate and link the business strategy to other levels of the organization.
  3. Confirm the strategy mapping with other relevant stakeholders.

Example of a strategy map tied to data management

  • Strategic objectives are the outcomes the organization is looking to achieve.
  • Value streams enable an organization to create and capture value in the market through interconnected activities that support strategic objectives.
  • Business capabilities define what a business does to enable value creation in value streams.
  • Data capabilities and initiatives are descriptions of action items on the data and data governance roadmap that will enable one or multiple business capabilities in its desired target state.

Info-Tech Tip: Start with the strategic objectives, then map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance initiatives that support those capabilities. This process will help you prioritize the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organization.

Example: Retail

Example of a strategy map tied to data management with diagram column headers 'Strategic Objectives' (are realized through...) 'Value Streams' (are enabled by...) 'Key Capabilities' (are driven by...) 'Data Capabilities and Initiatives'. Row headers are objectives and fields are composed of three examples of each column header.

For this strategy map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

Step 1.3

Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Management

Activities

1.3.1 Build high-value use cases

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Understand the main disciplines and makeup of a best-practice data management program.
  • Determine which data management capabilities are considered high priority by your organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

Build Business Context and Drivers

Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

1.3.1 Build high-value use cases

Input: Value streams and business capabilities as defined by business leaders, Business stakeholders’ subject area expertise, Data custodian systems, integration, and data knowledge

Output: Use cases that articulate data-related challenges, needs, or opportunities that are tied to defined business capabilities and hence, if addressed, will deliver measurable value to the organization

Materials: Your business capability map from Activity 1.2.2, Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template, Whiteboard or flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely), Markers/pens

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data stewards and business SMEs, Data custodians, Data leads and administrators

This business needs gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

  1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owner, stewards, SMEs) from a particular line of business as well the relevant data custodian(s) to build cases for their units. Leverage the business capability map you created for facilitating this act.
  2. Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template as seen on the next slide.
  3. Have the stakeholders move through each breakout session outlined in the use case worksheet. Use flip charts or a whiteboard to brainstorm and document their thoughts.
  4. Debrief and document results in the Data Use Case Framework Template.
  5. Repeat this exercise with as many lines of the business as possible, leveraging your business capability map to guide your progress and align with business value.

Tip: Don’t conclude these use case discussions without substantiating what measures of success will be used to demonstrate the business value of the effort to produce the desired future state, as relevant to each particular use case.

Download Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template

Data use cases

Sample Data

The following is the list of use cases as articulated by key stakeholders at [Organization Name].

The stakeholders see these as areas that are relevant and highly valuable for delivering strategic value to [Organization Name].

Use Case 1: Customer/Student/Patient/Resident 360 View

Use Case 2: Project/Department Financial Performance

Use Case 3: Vendor Lifecycle Management

Use Case 4: Project Risk Management

Prioritization of use cases

Example table for use case prioritization. Column headers are 'Use Case', 'Order of Priority', and 'Comments'. Fields are empty.

Use case 1

Sample Data

Problem statement:

  • We are not realizing our full growth potential because we do not have a unified 360 view of our customers/clients/[name of external stakeholder].
  • This impacts: our cross-selling; upselling; talent acquisition and retention; quality of delivery; ability to identify and deliver the right products, markets, and services...

If we could solve this:

  • We would be able to better prioritize and position ourselves to meet evolving customer needs.
  • We would be able to optimize the use of our limited resources.

Use case 1: challenges, risks, and opportunities

Sample Data

  1. What is the number one risk you need to alleviate?
    • Loss of potential revenue, whether from existing or net new customers.
      • How?
        • By not maximizing opportunities with customers or even by losing customers; by not understanding or addressing their greatest needs
        • By not being able to win potential new customers because we don’t understand their needs
  2. What is the number one opportunity you wish to see happen?
    • The ability to better understand and anticipate the needs of both existing and potential customers.
  3. What is the number one pain point you have when working with data?
    • I can’t do my job with confidence because it’s not based on comprehensive, sound, reliable data. My group spends significant time reconciling data sets with little time left for data use and analysis.
  4. What are your challenges in performing the activity today?
    • I cannot pull together customer data in a timely manner due to having a high level of dependence on specific individuals with institutional knowledge rather than having easy access to information.
    • It takes too much time and effort to pull together what we know about a customer.
    • The necessary data is not consolidated or readily/systematically available for consumption.
    • These challenges are heightened when dealing with customers across markets.

Use case 1 (cont'd)

Sample Data

  1. What does “amazing” look like if we solve this perfectly?
    • Employees have immediate, self-service access to necessary information, leading to better and more timely decisions. This results in stronger business and financial growth.
  2. What other business unit activities/processes will be impacted/improved if we solve this?
    • Marketing/bid and proposal, staffing, procurement, and contracting strategy
  3. What compliance/regulatory/policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?
    • PII, GDPR, HIPAA, CCPA, etc.
  4. What measures of success/change should we use to prove the value of the effort (KPIs/ROI)?
    • Win rate, number of services per customer, gross profit, customer retention, customer satisfaction scores, brand awareness, and net promoter score
  5. What are the steps in the process/activity today?
    • Manual aggregation (i.e. pull data from systems into Excel), reliance on unwritten knowledge, seeking IT support, canned reports

Use case 1 (cont'd)

Sample Data

  1. What are the applications/systems used at each step?
    • Salesforce CRM, Excel, personal MS Access databases, SharePoint
  2. What data elements (domains) are involved, created, used, or transformed at each step?
    • Bid and proposal information, customer satisfaction, forecast data, list of products, corporate entity hierarchy, vendor information, key staffing, recent and relevant news, and competitor intelligence

Use case worksheet

Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

1.

What business capability (or capabilities) in your business area is this use case tied to?

Examples: Demand Planning, Assortment Planning, Allocation & Replenishment, Fulfillment Planning, Customer Management
2.

What are your data-related challenges in performing this today?

Use case worksheet (cont’d.)

Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

3.

What are the steps in the process/activity today?

4.

What are the applications/systems used at each step today?

5.

What data domains are involved, created, used, or transformed at each step today?

Use case worksheet (cont’d.)

Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

6.

What does an ideal or improved state look like?

7.

What other business units, business capabilities, activities, or processes will be impacted and/or improved if this were to be solved?

8.

Who are the stakeholders impacted by these changes? Who needs to be consulted?

9.

What are the risks to the organization (business capability, revenue, reputation, customer loyalty, etc.) if this is not addressed?

Use case worksheet (cont’d.)

Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

10.

What compliance, regulatory, or policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?

11.

What measures of success or change should we use to prove the value of the effort (KPIs/ROI)? What is the measurable business value of doing this?

Use case worksheet (cont’d.)

Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

10.

Conclusion: What are the data capabilities that need to be optimized, addressed, or improved to support or help realize the business capability (or capabilities) highlighted in this use case?

(Tip: This will inform your future-state data capabilities optimization planning and roadmapping activities.)

Data Management Workshop
Use Case 1: Covid-19 Emergency Management

[SAMPLE]

Problem Statement

Inability to provide insights to DPH due to inconsistent data, inaccurate reporting, missing governance, and unknown data sources resulting in decisions that impact citizens being made without accurate information.

Challenges
  • Data is not suitable for analytics. It takes lot of effort to clean data.
  • Data intervals are not correct and other data quality issues.
  • The roles are not clearly defined.
  • Lack of communication between key stakeholders.
  • Inconsistent data/reporting/governance in the agencies. This has resulted in number of issues for Covid-19 emergency management. Not able to report accurately on number of cases, deaths, etc.
  • Data collection systems changed overtime (forms, etc.).
  • GIS has done all the reporting. However, why GIS is doing all the reporting is not clear. GIS provides critical information for location. Reason: GIS was ready with reporting solution ArcGIS.
  • Problem with data collection, consolidation, and providing hierarchical view.
  • Change in requirements, metrics – managing crisis by email and resulting in creating one dashboard after another. Not sure whether these dashboards being used.
  • There is a lot of manual intervention and repeated work.
What Does Amazing Look Like?
  • One set of dashboards (or single dashboard) – too much time spend on measure development
  • Accurate and timely data
  • Automated data
  • Access to granular data (for researchers and other stakeholders)
  • Clear ownership of data and analytics
  • It would have been nice to have governance already prior to this crisis
  • Proper metrics to measure usage and value
  • Give more capabilities such as predictive analytics, etc.
Related Processes/Impact
  • DPH
  • Schools
  • Business
  • Citizens
  • Resources & Funding
  • Data Integration & GIS
  • Data Management
  • Automated Data Quality
Compliance
  • HIPAA, FERPA, CJIS, IRS
  • FEMA
  • State compliance requirement – data classification
  • CDC
  • Federal data-sharing agreements/restrictions
Benefits/KPIs
  • Reduction in cases
  • Timely response to outbreak
  • Better use of resources
  • Economic impact
  • Educational benefits
  • Trust and satisfaction

Data Management Workshop
Use Case 1: Covid-19 Emergency Management

[SAMPLE]

Problem Statement

Inability to provide insights to DPH due to inconsistent data, inaccurate reporting, missing governance, and unknown data sources resulting in decisions that impact citizens being made without accurate information.

Current Steps in Process Activity (Systems)
  1. Collect data through Survey123 using ArcGIS (hospitals are managed to report by 11 am) – owned KYEM
  2. KYEM stores this information/data
  3. Deduplicate data (emergency preparedness group)
  4. Generate dashboard using ArcGIS
  5. Map to monitor status of the update
  6. Error correction using web portal (QAQC)
  7. Download Excel/CVS after all 97 hospital reports
  8. Sent to federal platform (White House, etc.)
  9. Generate reports for epidemiologist (done manually for public reporting)
Data Flow diagram

Data flow diagram.

SystemsData Management Dimensions
  1. Data Governance
  2. Data Quality
  3. Data Integrity
  4. Data Integration
  1. Data Architecture
  2. Metadata
  3. Data Warehouse, Reporting & Analytics
  4. Data Security

Data Management Workshop
Use Case 1: Covid-19 Emergency Management

[SAMPLE]

Problem Statement

Inability to provide insights to DPH due to inconsistent data, inaccurate reporting, missing governance, and unknown data sources resulting in decisions that impact citizens being made without accurate information.

List Future Process Steps

Prior to COVID-19 Emergency Response:

  • ArcGIS data integrated available in data warehouse/data lake.
  • KYEM data integrated and available in data warehouse/data lake.
  • CHFS data integrated and available in data warehouse/data lake.
  • Reporting standards and tools framework established.

After COVID-19 Emergency Response:

  • Collect data through Survey123 using ArcGIS (hospitals are managed to report by 11 am) – owned KYEM.
  • Error correction using web portal (QAQC).
  • Generate reports/dashboard/files as per reporting/analytical requirements:
    • Federal reporting
    • COVID dashboards
    • Epidemiologist reports
    • Lab reporting
Future Process and Data Flow

Data flow diagram with future processes.

Step 1.4

Create a Vision and Guiding Principles for Data Management

Activities

1.4.1 Craft a vision

1.4.2 Create guiding principles

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Leverage your organization’s existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map, guided by info-Tech’s approach.
  • Determine which business capabilities are considered high priority by your organization.
  • Map your organization’s strategic objectives to value streams and capabilities to communicate how objectives are realized with the support of data.

Outcomes of this step

  • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

Build Business Context and Drivers

Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

1.4.1 Craft a vision

Input: Organizational vision and mission statements, Stakeholder survey results and elicitation findings, Use cases, Business and data capability map

Output: Vision and mission statements

Materials: Markers and pens, Whiteboard, Online whiteboard, Vision samples and templates

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data managers, Data owners, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor

Complete the vision statement to set the direction, the “why,” for the changes we’re making. The vision is a reference point that should galvanize everyone in the organization and set guardrails for technical and process decisions to follow.

  1. Bring together key business stakeholders (content owners, SMEs, and relevant IT custodians) to craft a data management vision statement.
  2. Start by brainstorming keywords, such as customer-focused, empower the business, service excellence, findable and manageable, protected, accessible, paperless.
  3. Highlight the keywords that resonate most with the group. Refer to example vision statements for ideas.

Create a common data management vision that is consistently communicated to the organization

A data management program should be an enterprise-wide initiative.

  • To create a strong vision for data management, there must be participation from the business and IT. A common vision will articulate the state the organization wishes to achieve and how it will reach that state. Visioning helps to develop long-term goals and direction.
  • Once the vision is established, it must be effectively communicated to everyone, especially those who are involved in creating, managing, disposing, or archiving data.
  • The data management program should be periodically refined. This will ensure the organization continues to incorporate best methods and practices as the organization grows and data needs evolve.
Stock image of a megaphone with multiple icons pouring from its opening.

Info-Tech Tips

  • Use information from the stakeholder interviews to derive business goals and objectives.
  • Work to integrate different opinions and perspectives into the overall vision for data management.
  • Brainstorm guiding principles for content and understand the overall value to the organization.

Create compelling vision and mission statements for the organization’s future data management practice

A vision represents the way your organization intends to be in the future.

A clear vision statement helps align the entire organization to the same end goal.

Your vision should be brief, concise, and inspirational; it is attempting to say a lot in a few words, so be very thoughtful and careful with the words you choose. Consider your strengths across departments – business and IT, the consumers of your services, and your current/future commitments to service quality.

Remember that a vision statement is internally facing for other members of your company throughout the process.

A mission expresses why you exist.

While your vision is a declaration of where your organization aspires to be in the future, your mission statement should communicate the fundamental purpose of the data management practice.

It identifies the function of the practice, what it produces, and its high-level goals that are linked to delivering timely, high-quality, relevant, and valuable data to business processes and end users. Consider if the practice is responsible for providing data for analytical and/or operational use cases.

A mission statement should be a concise and clear statement of purpose for both internal and external stakeholders.

“The Vision is the What, Where or Who you want the company to become. The Mission is the WHY the company exists, it is your purpose, passion or cause.” (Doug Meyer-Cuno, Forbes, 2021)

Data Management Vision and Mission Statements: Draft

Vision and mission statements crafted by the workshop participants. These statements are to be reviewed, refined into a single version, approved by members of the senior leadership team, and then communicated to the wider organization.

Corporate

Group 1

Group 2

Vision:
Create and maintain an institution of world-class excellence.
Vision: Vision:
Mission:
Foster an economic and financial environment conducive to sustainable economic growth and development.
Mission: Mission:

Information management framework

The information management framework is a way to organize all the ECM program’s guidelines and artifacts

Information management framework with 'Information Management Vision' above six principles. Below them are 'Information Management Policies' and 'Information Management Standards and Procedures.'

The vision is a statement about the organization’s goals and provides a basis to guide decisions and rally employees toward a shared goal.

The principles or themes communicate the organization’s priorities for its information management program.

Policies are a set of official guidelines that determine a course of action. For example: Company is committed to safety for its employees.

Procedures are a set of actions for doing something. For example: Company employees will wear protective gear while on the production floor.

Craft your vision

Use the insights you gathered from users and stakeholders to develop a vision statement
  • The beginning of a data management practice is a clear set of goals and key performance indicators (KPIs).
    A good set of goals takes time and input from senior leadership and stakeholders.
  • The data management program lead is selling a compelling vision of what is possible.
  • The vision also helps set the scope and expectations about what the data management program lead is and is not doing.
  • Be realistic about what you can do and how long it will take to see a difference.
Table comparing the talk (mission statements, vision statements, and values) with the walk (strategies/goals, objectives, and tactical plans). Example vision statements:
  • The organization is dedicated to creating an enabling structure that helps the organization get the right information to the right people at the right time.
  • The organization is dedicated to creating a program that recognizes data as an asset, establishing a data-centric culture, and ensuring data quality and accessibility to achieve service excellence.
The vision should be short, memorable, inspirational and draw a clear picture of what that future-state data management experience looks like.

Is it modern and high end, with digital self-service?

Is it a trusted and transparent steward of customer assets?

1.4.2 Create guiding principles

Input: Sample data management guiding principles, Stakeholder survey results and elicitation findings, Use cases, Business and data capability map

Output: Data management guiding principles

Materials: Markers and pens, Whiteboard, Online whiteboard, Guiding principles samples and templates

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data managers, Data owners, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor

Draft a set of guiding principles that express your program’s values as a framework for decisions and actions and keep the data strategy alive.

  1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owners, SMEs, and relevant IT custodians) to craft a set of data management guiding principles.
  2. Refer to industry sample guiding principles for data management.
  3. Discuss what’s important to stakeholders and owners, e.g. security, transparency, integrity. Good guiding principles address real challenges.
  4. A helpful tip: Craft principles as “We will…” statements for the problems you’ve identified.

Twelve data management universal principles

[SAMPLE]
Principle Definitions
Data Is Accessible Data is accessible across the organization based on individuals’ roles and privileges.
Treat Data as an Asset Treat data as a most valuable foundation to make right decisions at the right time. Manage the data lifecycle across organization.
Manage Data Define strategic enterprise data management that defines, integrates, and effectively retrieves data to generate accurate, consistent insights.
Define Ownership & Stewardship Organizations should clearly appoint data owners and data stewards and ensure all team members understand their role in the company’s data management system.
Use Metadata Use metadata to ensure data is properly managed by tacking how data has been collected, verified, reported, and analyzed.
Single Source of Truth Ensure the master data maintenance across the organization.
Ensure Data Quality Ensure data integrity though out the lifecycle of data by establishing a data quality management program.
Data Is Secured Classify and maintain the sensitivity of the data.
Maximize Data Use Extend the organization’s ability to make the most of its data.
Empower the Users Foster data fluency and technical proficiency through training to maximize optimal business decision making.
Share the Knowledge Share and publish the most valuable insights appropriately.
Consistent Data Definitions Establish a business data glossary that defines consistent business definitions and usage of the data.

Create a Data Management Roadmap

Phase 2

Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap

Phase 1

1.1 Review the Data Management Framework

1.2 Understand and Align to Business Drivers

1.3 Build High-Value Use Cases

1.4 Create a Vision

Phase 2

2.1 Assess Data Management

2.2 Build Your Data Management Roadmap

2.3 Organize Business Data Domains

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Understand your current data management capabilities.
  • Define target-state capabilities required to achieve business goals and enable the data strategy.
  • Identify priority initiatives and planning timelines for data management improvements.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Data Management Lead/Information Management Lead, CDO, Data Lead
  • Senior Business Leaders
  • Business SMEs
  • Data owners, records managers, regulatory subject matter experts (e.g. legal counsel, security)

Step 2.1

Assess Your Data Management Capabilities

Activities

2.1.1 Define current state of data management capabilities

2.1.2 Set target state and identify gaps

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Assess the current state of your data management capabilities.
  • Define target-state capabilities required to achieve business goals and enable the data strategy.
  • Identify gaps and prioritize focus areas for improvement.

Outcomes of this step

  • A prioritized set of improvement areas aligned with business value stream and drivers

Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap

Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3

Define current state

The Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool will help you analyze your organization’s data requirements, identify data management strategies, and systematically develop a plan for your target data management practice.
  • Based on Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework, evaluate the current-state performance levels for your organization’s data management practice.
  • Use the CMMI maturity index to assign values 1 to 5 for each capability and enabler.

A visualization of stairs numbered up from the bottom. Main headlines of each step are 'Initial and Reactive', 'Managed while developing DG capabilities', 'Defined DG capabilities', 'Quantitatively Managed by DG capabilities', and 'Optimized'.

Sample of the 'Data Management Current State Assessment' form the Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool.

2.1.1 Define current state

Input: Stakeholder survey results and elicitation findings, Use cases, Business and data management capability map

Output: Current-state data management capabilities

Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

Assign a maturity level value from 1 to 5 for each question in the assessment tool, organized into capabilities, e.g. Data Governance, Data Quality, Risk.

  1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owners, SMEs, and relevant IT custodians) to assign current-state maturity levels in each question of the worksheet.
  2. Remember that there is more distance between levels 4 and 5 than there is between 1 and 2 – the distance between levels is not even throughout.
  3. To help assign values, think of the higher levels as representing cross-enterprise standardization, monitored for continuous improvement, formalized and standardized, while the lower levels mean applied within individual units, not formalized or tracked for performance.
  4. In tab 4, “Current State Assessment,” populate a current-state value for each item in the Data Management Capabilities worksheet.
  5. Once you’ve entered values in tab 4, a visual and summary report of the results will be generated on tab 5, “Current State Results.”

2.1.2 Set target state and identify gaps

Input: Stakeholder survey results and elicitation findings, Use cases, Business and data management capability map to identify priorities

Output: Target-state data management capabilities, Gaps identification and analysis

Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

Assign a maturity level value from 1 to 5 for each question in the assessment tool, organized into capabilities, e.g., Data Governance, Data Quality, Risk.

  1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owners, SMEs, and relevant IT custodians) to assign target-state maturity levels in each question of the worksheet.
  2. Remember that there is more distance between levels 4 and 5 than there is between 1 and 2 – the distance between levels is not even throughout.
  3. To help assign values, think of the higher levels as representing cross-enterprise standardization, monitored for continuous improvement, formalized and standardized, while the lower levels mean applied within individual units, not formalized or tracked for performance.
  4. In tab 6, “Target State & Gap Analysis,” enter maturity values in each item of the Capabilities worksheet in the Target State column.
  5. Once you’ve assigned both target-state and current-state values, the tool will generate a gap analysis chart on tab 7, “Gap Analysis Results,” where you can start to decide first- and second-line priorities.

Step 2.2

Build Your Data Management Roadmap

Activities

2.2.1 Describe gaps

2.2.2 Define gap initiatives

2.2.2 Build a data management roadmap

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Identify and understand data management gaps.
  • Develop data management improvement initiatives.
  • Build a data management–prioritized roadmap.

Outcomes of this step

  • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap

Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3

2.2.1 Describe gaps

Input: Target-state maturity level

Output: Detail and context about gaps to lead planners to specific initiatives

Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

Based on the gaps result, describe the nature of the gap, which will lead to specific initiatives for the data management plan:

  1. In tab 6, “Target State & Gap Analysis,” the same tab where you entered your target-state maturity level, enter additional context about the nature and extent of each gap in the Gap Description column.
  2. Based on the best-practices framework we walked through in Phase 1, note the specific areas that are not fully developed in your organization; for example, we don’t have a model of our environment and its integrations, or there isn’t an established data quality practice with proactive monitoring and intervention.

2.2.2 Define gap initiatives

Input: Gaps analysis, Gaps descriptions

Output: Data management initiatives

Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

Based on the gap analysis, start to define the data management initiatives that will close the gaps and help the organization achieve its target state.

  1. In tab 6, “Target State & Gap Analysis,” the same tab where you entered your target-state maturity level, note in the Gap Initiative column what actions you can take to address the gap for each item. For example, if we found through diagnostics and use cases that users didn’t understand the meaning of their data or reports, an initiative might be, “Build a standard enterprise business data catalog.”
  2. It’s an opportunity to brainstorm, to be creative, and think about possibilities. We’ll use the roadmap step to select initiatives from this list.
  3. There are things we can do right away to make a difference. Acknowledge the resources, talent, and leadership momentum you already have in your organization and leverage those to find activities that will work in your culture. For example, one company held a successful Data Day to socialize the roadmap and engage users.

2.2.3 Build a data management roadmap

Input: Gap initiatives, Target state and current-state assessment

Output: Data management initiatives and roadmap

Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

Start to list tangible actions you will take to address gaps and achieve data objectives and business goals along with timelines and responsibility:

  1. With an understanding of your priority areas and specific gaps, and referring back to your use cases, draw up specific initiatives that you can track, measure, and align with your original goals.
  2. For example, in data governance, initiatives might include:
    • Assign data owners and stewards for all data assets.
    • Consolidate disparate business data catalogs.
    • Create a data governance charter or terms of reference.
  3. Alongside the initiatives, fill in other detail, especially who is responsible and timing (start and end dates). Assigning responsibility and some time markers will help to keep momentum alive and make the work projects real.

Step 2.3

Organize Business Data Domains

Activities

2.3.1 Define business data domains and assign owners

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Identify business data domains that flow through and support the systems environment and business processes.
  • Define and organize business data domains with assigned owners, artifacts, and profiles.
  • Apply the domain map to building governance program.

Outcomes of this step

  • Business data domain map with assigned owners and artifacts

Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap

Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3

2.3.1 Define business data domains

Input: Target-state maturity level

Output: Detail and context about gaps to lead planners to specific initiatives

Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

Identify the key data domains for each line of business, where the data resides, and the main contact or owner.

  1. We have an understanding of what the business wants to achieve, e.g. build customer loyalty or comply with privacy laws. But where is the data that can help us achieve that? What systems is that data moving and living in and who, if anyone, owns it?
  2. Define the main business data domains apart from what system it may be spread over. Use the worksheet on the next slide as an example.
  3. Examples of business data domains: Customer, Product, Vendor.
  4. Each domain should have owners and associated business processes. Assign data domain owners, application owners, and business process owners.

Business and data domains

[SAMPLE]

Business Domain App/Data Domains Business Stewards Application Owners Business Owners
Client Experience and Sales Tech Salesforce (Sales, Service, Experience Clouds), Mulesoft (integration point) (Any team inputting data into the system)
Quality and Regulatory Salesforce
Operations Salesforce, Salesforce Referrals, Excel spreadsheets, SharePoint
Finance Workday, Sage 300 (AccPac), Salesforce, Moneris Finance
Risk/Legal Network share drive/SharePoint
Human Resources Workday, Network share drive/SharePoint HR team
Corporate Sales Salesforce (Sales, Service, Health, Experience Clouds),
Sales and Client Success Mitel, Outlook, PDF intake forms, Workday, Excel. Sales & Client Success Director, Marketing Director CIO, Sales & Client Success Director, Marketing Director

Embrace the technology

Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:
  • Data catalog
  • Business data glossary
  • Data lineage
  • Metadata management
While data governance tools and technologies are no panacea, leverage their automated and AI-enabled capabilities to augment your data governance program.
Array of logos of tech companies whose products are used for this type of work: Informatica, Collibra, Tibco, Alation, Immuta, TopQuadrant, and SoftwareReviews.

Additional Support

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.
Photo of an analyst.

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
Sample of the Data Governance Strategy Map slide from earlier.

Build Your Business and User Context

Work with your core team of stakeholders to build out your data management roadmap, aligning data management initiatives with business capabilities, value streams, and, ultimately, your strategic priorities.
Sample of a 'Data Management Enablers' table.

Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

Develop a data management future-state roadmap and plan based on an understanding of your current data governance capabilities, your operating environment, and the driving needs of your business.

Related Info-Tech Research

Stock image of people pointing to a tablet with a dashboard.

Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.
Sample of the 'Data & Analytics Landscape' slide from earlier.

Understand the Data and Analytics Landscape

Optimize your data and analytics environment.
Stock image of co-workers looking at the same thing.

Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics

Data architecture best practices to prepare data for reporting and analytics.

Research Contributors

Name Position Company
Anne Marie Smith Board of Directors DAMA International
Andy Neill Practice Lead, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Dirk Coetsee Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Graham Price Executive Advisor, Advisory Executive Services Info-Tech Research Group
Igor Ikonnikov Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Jean Bujold Senior Workshop Delivery Director Info-Tech Research Group
Mario Cantin Chief Data Strategist Prodago
Martin Sykora Director NexJ Analytics
Michael Blaha Author, Patterns of Data Modeling Consultant
Rajesh Parab Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Ranjani Ranganathan Product Manager, Research – Workshop Delivery Info-Tech Research Group
Reddy Doddipalli Senior Workshop Director Info-Tech Research Group

Bibliography

AIIM, “What is Enterprise Content Management (ECM)?” Intelligent Information Management Glossary, AIIM, 2021. Web.

BABOK V3: A Guide to Business Analysis Body of Knowledge. IIBA, 2014. Web.

Barton, Dominic, and David Court. "Three Keys To Building a Data-Driven Strategy." McKinsey and Company, 1 Mar. 2013. Web.

Boston University Libraries. "Data Life Cycle » Research Data Management | Boston University." Research Data Management RSS. Boston University, n.d. Accessed Oct. 2015.

Chang, Jenny. “97 Supply Chain Statistics You Must Know: 2020 / 2021 Market Share Analysis & Data.” FinancesOnline, 2021. Web.

COBIT 5: Enabling Information. ISACA, 2013. Web.

CSC (Computer Sciences Corporation), Big Data Infographic, 2012. Web.

DAMA International. DAMA-DMBOK Guide. 1st ed., Technics Publications, 2009. Digital.

DAMA International. “DAMA Guide to the Data Management Body of Knowledge (DAMA-DMBOK2 Guide).” 2nd ed., 2017. Accessed June 2017.

Davenport, Thomas H. "Analytics in Sports: The New Science of Winning." International Institute for Analytics, 2014. Web.

Department of Homeland Security. Enterprise Data Management Policy. Department of Homeland Security, 25 Aug. 2014. Web.

Enterprise Data Management Data Governance Plan. US Federal Student Aid, Feb. 2007. Accessed Oct. 2015.

Experian. “10 signs you are sitting on a pile of data debt.” Experian, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Fasulo, Phoebe. “6 Data Management Trends in Financial Services.” SecurityScorecard, 3 June 2021. Web.

Georgia DCH Medicaid Enterprise – Data Management Strategy. Georgia Department of Community Health, Feb. 2015. Accessed Oct. 2015.

Hadavi, Cyrus. “Use Exponential Growth of Data to Improve Supply Chain Operations.” Forbes, 5 Oct. 2021. Web.

Harbert, Tam. “Tapping the power of unstructured data.” MIT Sloan, 1 Feb. 2021. Web.

Hoberman, Steve, and George McGeachie. Data Modeling Made Simple with PowerDesigner. Technics Pub, 2011. Print.

“Information Management Strategy.” Information Management – Alberta. Service Alberta, Nov.-Dec. 2013. Web.

Jackson, Brian, et al. “2021 Tech Trends.” Info-Tech Research Group, 2021. Web.

Jarvis, David, et al. “The hyperquantified athlete: Technology, measurement, and the business of sports.” Deloitte Insights, 7 Dec. 2020. Web.

Bibliography

Johnson, Bruce. “Leveraging Subject Area Models.” EIMInsight Magazine, vol. 3, no. 4, April 2009. Accessed Sept. 2015.

Lewis, Larry. "How to Use Big Data to Improve Supply Chain Visibility." Talking Logistics, 14 Sep. 2014. Web.

McAfee, Andrew, and Erik Brynjolfsson. “Big Data: The Management Revolution,” Harvard Business Review, vol. 90, no. 10, 2012, pp. 60-68.

Meyer-Cuno, Doug. “Is A Vision Statement Important?” Forbes, 24 Feb. 2021. Web.

MIT. “Big Data: The Management Revolution.” MIT Center for Digital Business, 29 May 2014. Accessed April 2014.

"Open Framework, Information Management Strategy & Collaborative Governance.” MIKE2 Methodology RSS, n.d. Accessed Aug. 2015.

PwC. “Asset Management 2020: A Brave New World.” PwC, 2014. Accessed April 2014.

Riley, Jenn. Understanding Metadata: What is Metadata, and What is it For: A Primer. NISO, 1 Jan. 2017. Web.

Russom, Philip. "TDWI Best Practices Report: Managing Big Data." TDWI, 2013. Accessed Oct. 2015.

Schneider, Joan, and Julie Hall. “Why Most Product Launches Fail.” Harvard Business Review, April 2011. Web.

Sheridan, Kelly. "2015 Trends: The Growth of Information Governance | Insurance & Technology." InformationWeek. UBM Tech, 10 Dec. 2014. Accessed Nov. 2015.

"Sports Business Analytics and Tickets: Case Studies from the Pros." SloanSportsConference. Live Analytics – Ticketmaster, Mar. 2013. Accessed Aug. 2015.

Srinivasan, Ramya. “Three Analytics Breakthroughs That Will Define Business in 2021.” Forbes, 4 May 2021. Web.

Statista. “Amount of data created, consumed, and stored 2010-2020.” Statista, June 2021. Web.

“Understanding the future of operations: Accenture Global Operations Megatrends research.” Accenture Consulting, 2015. Web.

Vardhan, Harsh. “Why So Many Product Ideas Fail?” Medium, 26, Sept. 2020. Web.

Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}255|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $33,656 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
  • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
  • Organizations must adapt their information security programs to accommodate insurance requirements.
  • Organizations need to reduce insurance costs.
  • Some organizations must find alternatives to cyber insurance.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Shopping for insurance policies is not step one.
  • First and foremost, we must determine what the organization is at risk for and how much it would cost to recover.
  • The cyber insurance market is still evolving. As insurance requirements change, effectively managing cyber insurance requires that your organization proactively manages risk.

Impact and Result

Perform an insurance policy comparison with scores based on policy coverage and exclusions.

Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy Storyboard - A step-by-step document that walks you through how to acquire cyber insurance, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Use this blueprint to score your potential cyber insurance policies and develop skills to overcome common insurance pitfalls.

  • Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy Storyboard

2. Acquire cyber insurance with confidence – Learn the essentials of the requirements gathering, policy procurement, and review processes.

Use these tools to gather cyber insurance requirements, prepare for the underwriting process, and compare policies.

  • Threat and Risk Assessment Tool
  • DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool
  • Legacy DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool
  • DRP BIA Scoring Context Example
  • Cyber Insurance Policy Comparison Tool
  • Cyber Insurance Controls Checklist

Infographic

Next-Generation InfraOps

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}457|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
  • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
  • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
  • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • By defining your end goals and framing solutions based on the type of visibility and features you need, you can enable speed and reliability without losing control of the work.

Impact and Result

  • Understand the xOps spectrum and what approaches benefit your organization.
  • Make sense of the architectural approaches and enablement tools available to you.
  • Evolve from just improving your current operations to a continuous virtuous cycle of development and deployment.

Next-Generation InfraOps Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Next-Generation InfraOps Storyboard – A deck that will help you use Ops methodologies to build a virtuous cycle.

This storyboard will help you understand the spectrum of different Agile xOps working modes and how best to leverage them and build an architecture and toolset that support rapid continuous IT operations

  • Next-Generation InfraOps Storyboard
[infographic]

Further reading

Next-Generation InfraOps

Embrace the spectrum of Ops methodologies to build a virtuous cycle.

Executive summary

Your Challenge

IT Operations continue to be challenged by increasing needs for scale and speed, often in the face of constrained resources and time. For most, Agile methodologies have become a foundational part of tackling this problem. Since then, we've seen Agile evolve into DevOps, which started a trend into different categories of "xOps" that are too many to count. How does one make sense of the xOps spectrum? What is InfraOps and where does it fit in?

Common Obstacles

Ultimately, all these methodologies and approaches are there to serve the same purpose: increase effectiveness through automation and improve governance through visibility. The key is to understand what tools and methodologies will deliver actual benefits to your IT operation and to the organization as a whole.

Info-Tech's Approach

By defining your end goals and framing solutions based on the type of visibility and features you need, you can enable speed and reliability without losing control of the work.

  1. Understand the xOps spectrum and what approaches will benefit your organization.
  2. Make sense of the architectural approaches and enablement tools available to you.
  3. Evolve from just improving your current operations to a continuous virtuous cycle of development and deployment.

Info-Tech Insight

InfraOps, when applied well, should be the embodiment of the governance policies as expressed by standards in architecture and automation.

Project overview

Understand the xOps spectrum

There are as many different types of "xOps" as there are business models and IT teams. To pick the approaches that deliver the best value to your organization and that align to your way of operating, it's important to understand the different major categories in the spectrum and how they do or don't apply to your IT approach.

How to optimize the Ops in DevOps

InfraOps is one of the major methodologies to address a key problem in IT at cloud scale: eliminating friction and error from your deliveries and outputs. The good news is there are architectures, tools, and frameworks you can easily leverage to make adopting this approach easier.

Evolve to integration and build a virtuous cycle

Ultimately your DevOps and InfraOps approaches should embody your governance needs via architecture and process. As time goes on, however, both your IT footprint and your business environment will shift. Build your tools, telemetry, and governance to anticipate and adapt to change and build a virtuous cycle between development needs and IT Operations tools and governance.

The xOps spectrum

This is an image of the xOps spectrum. The three main parts are: Code Acceleration (left), Governance(middle), and Infrastructure Acceleration (right)

xOps categories

There is no definitive list of x's in the xOps spectrum. Different organizations and teams will divide and define these in different ways. In many cases, the definitions and domains of various xOps will overlap.

Some of the commonly adopted and defined xOps models are listed here.

Shift left? Shift right?

Cutting through the jargon

  • Shifting left is about focusing on the code and development aspects of a delivery cycle.
  • Shifting right is about remembering that infrastructure and tools still do matter.

Info-Tech Insight

Shifting left or right isn't an either/or choice. They're more like opposite sides of the same coin. Like the different xOps approaches, usually more than one shift approach will apply to your IT Operations.

IT Operations in the left-right spectrum

Shifting from executing and deploying to defining the guardrails and standards

This is an image of the left-right spectrum for your XOps position

Take a middle-out approach

InfraOps and DevOps aren't enemies; they're opposite sides of the same coin.

  • InfraOps is about the automation and standardization of execution. It's an essential element in any fully automated CI/CD pipeline.
  • Like DevOps, InfraOps is built on similar values (the pillars of DevOps).
  • It builds on the principle of Lean to focus on removing friction, or turn-and-type activities, from the pipeline/process.
  • In InfraOps, one of the key methods for removing friction is through automation of the interstitia between different phases of a DevOps or CI/CD cycle.

Optimize the Ops in DevOps

Focus on eliminating friction

This is an image of an approach to optimizing the ops in DevOps.

With the shift from execution to governing and validating, the role of deployment falls downstream of IT Operations.

IT Operations needs to move to a mindset that focuses on creating the guardrails, enforced standards, and compliance rules that need to be used downstream, then apply those standards using automation and tooling to remove friction and error from the interstitia (the white spaces between chevrons) of the various phases.

InfraOps tools

Four quadrants in the shape of a human head, in the boxes are the following: Hyperconverged Infrastructure; Composable Infrastructure; Infrastructure as code and; Automation and Orchestration

Info-Tech Insight

Your tools can be broken into two categories:

  • Infrastructure Architecture
    • HCI vs. CI
  • Automation Tooling
    • IaC and A&O

Keep in mind that while your infrastructure architecture is usually an either/or choice, your automation approach should use any and all tooling that helps.

Infrastructure approach

  • Hyperconverged

  • Composable

Hyperconverged Infrastructure (HCI)

Hyperconvergence is the next phase of convergence, virtualizing servers, networks, and storage on a single server/storage appliance. Capacity scales as more appliances are added to a cluster or stack.
The disruptive departure:

  • Even though servers, networks, and storage were each on their own convergence paths, the three remained separate management domains (or silos). Even single-SKU converged infrastructures like VCE Vblocks are still composed of distinct server, network, and storage devices.
  • In hyperconvergence, the silos collapse into single-software managed devices. This has been disruptive for both the vendors of technology solutions (especially storage) and for infrastructure management.
  • Large storage array vendors are challenged by hyperconvergence alternatives. IT departments need to adapt IT skills and roles away from individual management silos and to more holistic service management.

A comparison between converged and hyperconverged systems.

Info-Tech Insight

HCI follows convergence trends of the past ten years but is also a departure from how IT infrastructure has traditionally been provisioned and managed.

HCI is at the same time a logical progression of infrastructure convergence and a disruptive departure.

Hyperconverged (HCI) – SWOT

HCI can be the foundation block for a fully software defined data center, a prerequisite for private cloud.

Strengths

  • Potentially lower TCO through further infrastructure consolidation, reducing CapEx and OpEx expenditures through facilities optimization and cost consolidation.
  • Operations in particular can be streamlined, since storage, network connections, and processors/memory are all managed as abstractions via a single control pane.
  • HCI comes with built-in automation and analytics that lead to quicker issue resolution.

Opportunities

  • Increased business agility by paving the way for a fully software defined infrastructure stack and cloud automation.
  • Shift IT human assets from hardware asset maintainers and controllers to service delivery managers.
  • Better able to compete with external IT service alternatives.
  • Move toward a hybrid cloud service offering where the service catalog contains both internal and external offerings.

Key attributes of a cloud are automation, resource elasticity, and self-service. This kind of agility is impossible if physical infrastructure needs intervention.

Info-Tech Insight

Virtualization alone does not a private cloud make, but complete stack virtualization (software defined) running on a hands-off preconfigured HCI appliance (or group of appliances) provides a solid foundation for building cloud services.

Hyperconverged (HCI) – SWOT

Silo-busting and private cloud sound great, but are your people and processes able to manage the change?

Weaknesses

  • HCI typically scales out linearly (CPU & storage). This does not suit traditional scale-up applications such as high-performance databases and large-capacity data warehouses.
  • Infrastructure stacks are perceived as more flexible for variable growth across segments. For example, if storage is growing but processing is not, storage can scale separately from processing.

Threats

  • HCI will be disruptive to roles within IT. Internal pushback is a real threat if necessary changes in skills and roles are not addressed.
  • HCI is not a simple component replacement but an adoption of a different kind of infrastructure. Different places in the lifecycles for each of storage, network, and processing devices could make HCI a solution where there is no immediate problem.

In traditional infrastructure, performance and capacity are managed as distinct though complementary jobs. An all-in-one approach may not work.

Composable Infrastructure (CI)

  • Composable infrastructure in many ways represents the opposite of an HCI approach. Its focus is on further disaggregating resources and components used to build systems.
    • Unlike traditional cloud virtual systems, composable infrastructure provides virtual bare metal resources, allowing tightly coupled resources like CPU, RAM, and GPU – or any device/card/module – to be released back and forth into the resource pool as required by a given workload.
    • This is enabled by the use of high-speed, low-latency PCI Express (PCI-e) and Compute Express Link (CXL) fabrics that allow these resources to be decoupled.
    • It also supports the ability to present other fabric types critical for building out enterprise systems (e.g. Ethernet, InfiniBand).
  • Accordingly, CI systems are also based on next-generation network architecture that supports moving critical functions to the network layer, which enables more efficient use of the application-layer resources.

Composable Infrastructure (CI)

  • CI may also leverage network-resident data/infrastructure processing units (DPUs/IPUs), which offload many network, security, and storage functions.
    • As new devices and functions become available, they can be added into the catalog of resources/functions available in a CI pool.

Use Case Example: Composable AI flow

Data Ingestion > Data Cleaning/Tagging > Training > Conclusion

  • At each phase of the process, resources, including specialized hardware like memory and GPU cores, can be dynamically allocated and reallocated to the workload on demand

Composable Infrastructure (CI)

Use cases and considerations

Where it's useful

  • Enable even more efficient allocation/utilization of resources for workloads.
  • Very large memory or shared memory requirements can benefit greatly.
  • Decouple purchasing decisions for underlying resources.
  • Leverage the fabric to make it easier to incrementally upgrade underlying resources as required.
  • Build "the Impossible Server."

Considerations

  • Requires significant footprint/scale to justify in many cases
  • Not necessarily good value for environments that aren't very volatile and heterogeneous in terms of deployment requirements
  • May not be best value for environments where resource-stranding is not a significant issue

Info-Tech Insight

Many organizations using a traditional approach report resource stranding as having an impact of 20% or more on efficiency. When focusing specifically on the stranding of memory in workloads, the number can often approach 40%.

The CI ecosystem

This is an image of the CI ecosystem.

  • The CI ecosystem has many players, large and small!
  • Note that the CI ecosystem is dependent on a large ecosystem of underlying enablers and component builders to support the required technologies.

Understanding the differences

This image shows the similarities and differences between traditional, cloud, hyperconverged, and composable.

Automation approach

  • Infrastructure as Code
  • Automation & Orchestration
  • Metaorchestration

Infrastructure as Code (IaC)

Infrastructure as code (IaC) is the process of managing and provisioning computer data centers through machine-readable definition files rather than physical hardware configuration or interactive configuration tools.

Before IaC, IT personnel would have to manually change configurations to manage their infrastructure. Maybe they would use throwaway scripts to automate some tasks, but that was the extent of it.

With IaC, your infrastructure's configuration takes the form of a code file, making it easy to edit, copy, and distribute.

Info-Tech Insight
IaC is a critical tool in enabling key benefits!

  • Reduced costs
  • Increased scalability, flexibility, and speed
  • Better consistency and version control
  • Reduced deployment errors

Infrastructure as Code (IaC)

  1. IaC uses a high-level descriptive coding language to automate the provisioning of IT infrastructure. This eliminates the need to manually provision and manage servers, OS, database connections, storage, and other elements every time we want to develop, test, or deploy an application.
  2. IaC allows us to define the computer systems on which code needs to run. Most commonly, we use a framework like Chef, Ansible, Puppet, etc., to define their infrastructure. These automation and orchestration tools focus on the provisioning and configuring of base compute infrastructure.
  3. IaC is also an essential DevOps practice. It enables teams to rapidly create and version infrastructure in the same way they version source code and to track these versions so as to avoid inconsistency among IT environments that can lead to serious issues during deployment.
  • Idempotence is a principle of IaC. This means a deployment command always sets the target environment into the same configuration, regardless of the environment's starting state.
    • Idempotency is achieved by either automatically configuring an existing target or discarding the existing target and recreating a fresh environment.

Automation/Orchestration

Orchestration describes the automated arrangement, coordination, and management of complex computer systems, middleware, and services.

This usage of orchestration is often discussed in the context of service-oriented architecture, virtualization, provisioning, converged infrastructure, and dynamic data center topics. Orchestration in this sense is about aligning the business request with the applications, data, and infrastructure.

It defines the policies and service levels through automated workflows,
provisioning, and change management. This creates an application-aligned infrastructure that can be scaled up or down based on the needs of each application.

As the requirement for more resources or a new application is triggered, automated tools now can perform tasks that previously could only be done by multiple administrators operating on their individual pieces of the physical stack.

Orchestration also provides centralized management of the resource pool, including billing, metering, and chargeback for consumption. For example, orchestration reduces the time and effort for deploying multiple instances of a single application.

Info-Tech Insight

Automation and orchestration tools can be key components of an effective governance toolkit too! Remember to understand what data can be pulled from your various tools and leveraged for other purposes such as cost management and portfolio roadmapping.

Automation/Orchestration

There are a wide variety of orchestration and automation tools and technologies.

Configuration Management

Configuration Management

The logos for companies which fall in each of the categories in the column to the left of the image.

CI/CD
Orchestration

Container
Orchestration

Cloud-Specific
Orchestration

PaaS
Orchestration

Info-Tech Insight

Automation and orchestration tools and software offerings are plentiful, and many of them have a different focus on where in the application delivery ecosystem they provide automation functionality.

Often there are different tools for different deployment and service models as well as for different functional phases for each service model.

Automation/Orchestration

Every tool focuses on different aspects or functions of the deployment of resources and applications.

  • Resources
    • Compute
    • Storage
    • Network
  • Extended Services
    • Platforms
    • Infrastructure Services
    • Web Services
  • Application Assets
    • Images
    • Templates
    • Containers
    • Code

Info-Tech Insight

Let the large ecosystem of tools be your ally. Leverage the right tools where needed and then address the complexity of tools using a master orchestration scheme.

Metaorchestration

A Flow chart for the approach to metaorchestration.

Additionally, most tools do not cover all aspects required for most automation implementations, especially in hybrid cloud scenarios.

As such, often multiple tools must be deployed, which can lead to fragmentation and loss of unified controls.

Many enterprises address this fragmentation using a cloud management platform approach.

One method of achieving this is to establish a higher layer of orchestration – an "orchestrator of orchestrators," or metaorchestration.

In complex scenarios, this can be a challenge that requires customization and development.

InfraOps tools ecosystem

Toolkit Pros Cons Tips
HCI Easy scale out Shift in skills required Good for enabling automation and hybridization with current-gen public cloud services
CI Maximal workload resource efficiency Investment in new fabrics and technologies Useful for very dynamic or highly scalable workloads like AI
IaC Error reduction and standardization Managing drift in standards and requirements Leverage a standards and exception process to keep track of drift
A&O Key enabler of DevOps automation within phases Usually requires multiple toolsets/frameworks Use the right tools and stitch together at the metaorchestration layer
Metaorchestration Reduces the complexity of a diverse A&O and IaC toolkit Requires understanding of the entire ecosystems of tools used Key layer of visibility and control for governance

Build a virtuous cycle

Remember, the goal is to increase speed AND reliability. That's why we focus on removing friction from our delivery pipelines.

  • The first step is to identify the points of friction in your cycle and understand the intensity and frequency of these friction points.
  • Depending on your delivery and project management methodology, you'll have a different posture of the different tools that make sense for your pipeline.
  • For example, if you are focused on delivering raw resources for sysadmins and/or you're in a Waterfall methodology where the friction points are large but infrequent, hyperconverged is likely to delivery good value, whereas tools like IaC and orchestration may not be as necessary.

Info-Tech Insight

Remember that, especially in modern and rapid methodologies, your IT footprint can drift unexpectedly. This means you need a real feedback mechanism on where the friction moves to next.

This is particularly important in more Agile methodologies.

Activity: Map your IT operations delivery

Identify your high-friction interstitial points

  • Using the table below, or a table modified to your delivery phases, map out the activities and tasks that are not standardized and automated.
  • For the incoming and outgoing sections, think about what resources and activities need to be (or could be) created, destroyed, or repurposed to efficiently manage each cycle and the spaces between cycles.
Plan Code Test Deploy Monitor
Incoming Friction
In-Cycle Friction
Outgoing Friction

Info-Tech Insight

Map your ops groups to the delivery cycles in your pipeline. How many delivery cycles do you have or need?

Good InfraOps is a reflection of governance policies, expressed by standards in architecture and automation.

Related Info-Tech Research

Evaluate Hyperconverged Infrastructure for Your Infrastructure Roadmap

  • This Info-Tech note covers evaluation of HCI platforms.

Design Your Cloud Operations

  • This Info-Tech blueprint covers organization of operations teams for various deployment and Agile modes.

Bibliography

Banks, Ethan, host. "Choosing Your Next Infrastructure." Datanauts, episode 094, Packet Pushers, 26 July 2017. Podcast.
"Composable Infrastructure Solutions." Hewlett Packard Canada, n.d. Web.
"Composable Infrastructure Technology." Liqid Inc., n.d. Web.
"DataOps architecture design." Azure Architecture Center, Microsoft Learn, n.d. Web.
Tan, Pei Send. "Differences: DevOps, ITOps, MLOps, DataOps, ModelOps, AIOps, SecOps, DevSecOps." Medium, 5 July 2021. Web.

Minimize the Damage of IT Cost Cuts

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}53|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
  • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
  • Average growth rates for Opex and Capex budgets are expected to continue to decline over the next fiscal year.
  • Common “quick-win” cost-cutting initiatives are not enough to satisfy the organization’s mandate.
  • Cost-cutting initiatives often take longer than expected, failing to provide cost savings before the organization’s deadline.
  • Cost-optimization projects often have unanticipated consequences that offset potential cost savings and result in business dissatisfaction.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • IT costs affect the entire business, not just IT. For this reason, IT must work with the business collaboratively to convey the full implications of IT cost cuts.
  • Avoid making all your cuts at once; phase your cuts by taking into account the magnitude and urgency of your cuts and avoid unintended consequences.
  • Don’t be afraid to completely cut a service if it should not be delivered in the first place.

Impact and Result

  • Take a value-based approach to cost optimization.
  • Reduce IT spend while continuing to deliver the most important services.
  • Involve the business in the cost-cutting process.
  • Develop a plan for cost cutting that avoids unintended interruptions to the business.

Minimize the Damage of IT Cost Cuts Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take a value-based approach to cutting IT costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Understand the mandate and take immediate action

Determine your approach for cutting costs.

  • Minimize the Damage of IT Cost Cuts – Phase 1: Understand the Mandate and Take Immediate Action
  • Cost-Cutting Plan
  • Cost-Cutting Planning Tool

2. Select cost-cutting initiatives

Identify the cost-cutting initiatives and design your roadmap.

  • Minimize the Damage of IT Cost Cuts – Phase 2: Select Cost-Cutting Initiatives

3. Get approval for your cost-cutting plan and adopt change management best practices

Communicate your roadmap to the business and attain approval.

  • Minimize the Damage of IT Cost Cuts – Phase 3: Get Approval for Your Cost-Cutting Plan and Adopt Change Management Best Practices
  • IT Personnel Engagement Plan
  • Stakeholder Communication Planning Tool
[infographic]

Workshop: Minimize the Damage of IT Cost Cuts

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Understand the Mandate and Take Immediate Action

The Purpose

Determine your cost-optimization stance.

Build momentum with quick wins.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand the internal and external drivers behind your cost-cutting mandate and the types of initiatives that align with it.

Activities

1.1 Develop SMART project metrics.

1.2 Dissect the mandate.

1.3 Identify your cost-cutting stance.

1.4 Select and implement quick wins.

1.5 Plan to report progress to Finance.

Outputs

Project metrics and mandate documentation

List of quick-win initiatives

2 Select Cost-Cutting Initiatives

The Purpose

Create the plan for your cost-cutting initiatives.

Key Benefits Achieved

Choose the correct initiatives for your roadmap.

Create a sensible and intelligent roadmap for the cost-cutting initiatives.

Activities

2.1 Identify cost-cutting initiatives.

2.2 Select initiatives.

2.3 Build a roadmap.

Outputs

High-level cost-cutting initiatives

Cost-cutting roadmap

3 Get Approval for Your Cost-Cutting Plan and Adopt Change Management Best Practices

The Purpose

Finalize the cost-cutting plan and present it to the business.

Key Benefits Achieved

Attain engagement with key stakeholders.

Activities

3.1 Customize your cost-cutting plan.

3.2 Create stakeholder engagement plans.

3.3 Monitor cost savings.

Outputs

Cost-cutting plan

Stakeholder engagement plan

Cost-monitoring plan

Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}230|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
  • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

More than any other time, our world is changing. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

A new threat will impact your organization's operations at some point. Make sure your plans are flexible enough to manage the inevitable consequences and that you understand where those threats may originate.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential operational impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes may affect operations.
  • Organizational leadership is often taken unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant market upheavals.

Impact and Result

Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks from vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

  • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
  • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts with our Operational Risk Impact Tool.

Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts to Your Organization Storyboard – Use this research to better understand the negative impacts of vendor actions to your brand reputation.

Use this research to identify and quantify the potential operational impacts caused by vendors. Utilize Info-Tech's approach to look at the operational impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

  • Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts to Your Organization Storyboard

2. Operational Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the operational impacts of negative vendor actions.

By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate - possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

  • Operational Risk Impact Tool
[infographic]

Further reading

Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

Understand internal and external vendor risks to avoid potential disaster.

Analyst perspective

Organizations need to be aware of the operational damage vendors may cause to plan around those impacts effectively.

Frank Sewell

Organizations must be mindful that operational risks come from internal and external vendor sources. Missing either component in the overall risk assessment can significantly impact day-to-day business processes that cost revenue, delay projects, and lead to customer dissatisfaction.

Frank Sewell,

Research Director, Vendor Management
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

More than any other time, our world is changing rapidly. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

A new threat will impact your organization's operations at some point. Make sure your plans are flexible enough to manage the inevitable consequences and that you understand where those threats may originate.

Common Obstacles

Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential operational impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes may affect operations.

Organizational leadership is often taken unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant market upheavals.

Info-Tech's Approach

Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks from vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts with our Operational Risk Impact Tool.

Info-Tech Insight

Organizations must evolve their risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to threats in the market. Ongoing monitoring of the vendors tied to company operations, and understanding where those vendors impact your operations, is imperative to avoiding disasters.

Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

There are many components to vendor risk, including: Financial, Reputational, Operational, Strategic, Security, Regulatory & Compliance.

This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

Out of Scope:
This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

Operational risk impacts

Potential losses to the organization due to incidents that affect operations.

  • In this blueprint we’ll explore operational risks, particularly from third-party vendors, and their impacts.
  • Identify potentially disruptive events to assess the overall impact on organizations and implement adaptive measures to identify, manage, and monitor vendor performance.
Operational

The world is constantly changing

The IT market is constantly reacting to global influences. By anticipating changes, leaders can set expectations and work with their vendors to accommodate them.

When the unexpected happens, being able to adapt quickly to new priorities ensures continued long-term business success.

Below are some things no one expected to happen in the last few years:

27%

Businesses are changing their internal processes around TPRM in response to the Pandemic.

70%

Of organizations attribute a third-party breach to too much privileged access.

85%

Of breaches involved human factors (phishing, poor passwords, etc.).

Assess internal and external operational risk impacts

Due diligence and consistent monitoring are the keys to safeguarding your organization.

Two sides of the Same Coin

Internal

  • Poorly vetted supplemental staff
  • Bad system configurations
  • Lack of relevant skills
  • Poor vendor performance
  • Failure to follow established processes
  • Weak contractual accountability
  • Unsupportable or end-of-life system components

External

  • Cyberattacks
  • Supply Chain Issues
  • Geopolitical Disruptions
  • Vendor Acquisitions
  • N-Party Non-Compliance
  • Vendor Fraud

Operational risk is the risk of losses caused by flawed or failed processes, policies, systems, or events that disrupt business operations.

- Wikipedia

Internal operational risk

Vendors operating within your secure perimeter can open your organization to substantial risk.

Frequently monitor your internal process around vendor management to ensure safe operations.

  • Poorly vetted supplemental staff
  • Bad system configurations
  • Lack of relevant skills
  • Poor vendor performance
  • Failure to follow established processes
  • Weak contractual accountability
  • Unsupportable or end-of-life system components

Info-Tech Insight

You may have solid policies, but if your employees and vendors are not following them, they will not protect the organization.

External operational risks

  • Cyberattacks
  • Supplier issues and geopolitical instability
  • Vendor acquisitions
  • N-party vendor non-compliance

Identify and manage operational risks

Poorly configured systems

Failing to ensure that your vendor-supported systems are properly configured and that your vendors are meeting your IT change control and configuration standards is more commonplace than expected. Proper oversight and management of your support vendors are crucial to ensure they are meeting expectations in this regard.

Failure to follow processes

Most companies have policies and procedures around IT change and configuration control, security standards, risk management, vendor performance standards, etc. While having these processes is a good start, failure to perform continuous monitoring and management of these leads to increased risks of incidents.

Supply chain disruptions

Awareness of the supply chain's complications, and each organization's dependencies, are increasing for everyone. However, most organizations still do not understand the chain of n-party vendors that support their specific vendors or how interruptions in their supply chains could affect them. The 2022 Toyota shutdown due to Kojima is a perfect example of how one essential parts vendor could shut down your operations.

What to look for

Identify operational risk impacts

  • Does the vendor have a business continuity plan they will share for your review?
  • Is the vendor operating on old hardware that may be out of warranty or at end of life?
  • Is the vendor operating on older software or shareware that may lack the necessary patches?
  • Does the vendor self-audit, or do they use a vetted third-party audit firm to issue a SOC report annually?
  • Does the vendor have sufficient personnel in acceptable regions to support your operations?
  • Is the vendor willing to make concessions on contractual protections, or are they only offering “one-sided” agreements with “as-is” warranties?

Operational risks

Not knowing where your risks come from creates additional risks to operations.

  • Supply chain disruptions and global shortages.
    • Geopolitical disruptions and natural disasters have caused unprecedented interruptions to business. Do you know where your critical vendors are getting their supplies? Are you aware of their business continuity plans to accommodate for those interruptions?
  • Poor vendor performance.
    • Organizations need to understand where vendors are acting in their operations and manage the impact of replacing that vendor and cutting their losses rather than continuing to throw good money away after a bad performance.
  • Vendor acquisitions.
    • A lot of acquisition is going on in the market today. Large companies are buying competitors, imposing new terms on customers, or removing competing products from the market. Understand your options if a vendor is acquired by a company with which you do not wish to be in a relationship.

It is important to identify where potential risks to your operations may come from to manage and potentially eliminate them from impacting your organization.

Info-Tech Insight

Most organizations realize that their vendors could operationally affect them if an incident occurs. Still, they fail to follow the chain of events that might arise from those incidents to understand the impact fully.

Prepare your vendor risk management for success

Due diligence will enable successful outcomes.

  1. Obtain top-level buy-in; it is critical to success.
  2. Build enterprise risk management (ERM) through incremental improvement.
  3. Focus initial efforts on the “big wins” to prove the process works.
  4. Use existing resources.
  5. Build on any risk management activities that already exist in the organization.
  6. Socialize ERM throughout the organization to gain additional buy‑in.
  7. Normalize the process long term with ongoing updates and continuing education for the organization.

How to assess third-party operational risk

  1. Review Organizational Operations

    Understand the organization’s operational risks to prepare for the “what if” game exercise.
  2. Identify and Understand Potential Operational Risks

    Play the “what if” game with the right people at the table.
  3. Create a Risk Profile Packet for Leadership

    Pull all the information together in a presentation document.
  4. Validate the Risks

    Work with leadership to ensure that the proposed risks are in line with their thoughts.
  5. Plan to Manage the Risks

    Lower the overall risk potential by putting mitigations in place.
  6. Communicate the Plan

    It is important not only to have a plan but also to socialize it in the organization for awareness.
  7. Enact the Plan

    Once the plan is finalized and socialized, put it in place with continued monitoring for success.

Insight summary

Operational risk impacts often come from unexpected places and have unforeseen impacts. Knowing where your vendors place in critical business processes and those vendors' business continuity plans concerning your organization should be a priority for those who manage the vendors.

Insight 1

Organizations fail to plan for vendor acquisitions appropriately.

Vendors routinely get acquired in the IT space. Does your organization have appropriate safeguards from inadvertently entering a negative relationship? Do you have plans around replacing critical vendors purchased in such a manner?

Insight 2

Organizations often fail to understand how they factor into a vendor’s business continuity plan.

If one of your critical vendors goes down, do you know how they intend to re-establish business? Do you know how you factor into their priorities?

Insight 3

Organizations need to have a comprehensive understanding of how their vendor-managed systems integrate with Operations.

Do you understand where in the business processes vendor-supported systems lie? Do you have contingencies around disruptions that account for those pieces missing from the process?

Identifying operational vendor risk

Who should be included in the discussion

  • While it is true that executive-level leadership defines the strategy for an organization, it is vital for those making decisions to make informed decisions.
  • Getting input from operational experts at your organization will enhance your organization's long-term potential for success.
  • Involving those who not only directly manage vendors but also understand your business processes will aid in determining the forward path for relationships with your current vendors and identifying new emerging potential partners.

See the blueprint Build an IT Risk Management Program

Review your operational plans for new risks on a regular basis.

Keep in mind Risk = Likelihood x Impact (R=L*I).

Impact (I) tends to remain the same, while Likelihood (L) is becoming closer to 100% as threat actors become more prevalent

Managing vendor operational risk impacts

What can we realistically do about the risks?

  • Review vendors’ business continuity plans and disaster recovery testing.
    • Understand your priority in their plans.
  • Institute proper contract lifecycle management.
    • Make sure to follow corporate due diligence and risk assessment policies and procedures.
    • Failure to do so consistently can be a recipe for disaster.
  • Develop IT governance and change control.
  • Introduce continual risk assessment to monitor the relevant vendor markets.
    • Regularly review your operational plans for new risks and evolving likelihoods.
    • Risk = Likelihood x Impact (R=L*I).
      • Impact (I) tends to remain the same and be well understood, while Likelihood (L) may often be considered 100%.
  • Be adaptable and allow for innovations that arise from the current needs.
    • Capture lessons learned from prior incidents to improve over time and adjust your plans accordingly.

Organizations need to review their organizational risk plans, considering the placement of vendors in their operations.

Pandemics, extreme weather, and wars that affect global supply chains are current realities, not unlikely scenarios.

Ongoing improvement

Incorporating lessons learned

  • Over time, despite everyone’s best observations and plans, incidents will catch us off guard.
  • When it happens, follow your incident response plans and act accordingly.
  • An essential step is to document what worked and what did not – collectively known as the “lessons learned.”
  • Use the lessons learned document to devise, incorporate, and enact a better risk management process.

Sometimes disasters occur despite our best plans to manage them.

When this happens, it is important to document the lessons learned and improve our plans going forward.

The "what if" game

1-3 hours

Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to help senior leadership identify and pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the "what if" game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible adverse outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

  • Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
  • Use the Operational Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potentials but manage the overall process to keep the discussion pertinent and on track.
  • Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts (SMEs) for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

Download the Operational Risk Impact Tool

Input

  • List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and operational impact
  • List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk

Output

  • Comprehensive operational risk profile on the specific vendor solution

Materials

  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Operational Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion

Participants

  • Vendor Management – Coordinator
  • Organizational Leadership
  • Operations Experts (SMEs)
  • Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager

High risk example from tool

Sample Questions to Ask to Identify Impacts. Lists questions impact score, weight, question and comments or notes.

Being overly reliant on a single talented individual can impose risk to your operations. Make sure you include resiliency in your skill sets for critical business practices.

Impact score and level. Each score for impacts are unique to the organization.

Low risk example from tool

Sample Questions to Ask to Identify Impacts. Lists questions impact score, weight, question and comments or notes. Impact score and level. Each score for impacts are unique to the organization.

Summary

Seek to understand all aspects of your operations.

  • Organizations need to understand and map out where vendors are critical to their operations.
  • Those organizations that consistently follow their established risk assessment and due diligence processes will be better positioned to avoid disasters.
  • Bring the right people to the table to outline potential risks in the market and your organization.
  • Understand how your vendors prioritize your organization in their business continuity processes.
  • Incorporate “lessons learned” from prior incidents into your risk management process to build better plans for future issues.

Organizations must evolve their operational risk assessments considering their vendor portfolio.

Ongoing monitoring of the market and the vendors tied to company operations is imperative to avoiding disaster.

Related Info-Tech Research

Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

  • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

  • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your reputation and brand with our Reputational Risk Impact Tool.

Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization

  • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your strategic plan with our Strategic Risk Impact Tool.

Bibliography

“Weak Cybersecurity is taking a toll on Small Businesses.” Tripwire. August 7, 2022.

SecureLink 2022 White Paper SL_Page_EA+PAM (rocketcdn.me)

Member Poll March 2021 "Guide: Evolving Work Environments Impact of Covid-19 on Profile and Management of Third Parties.“ Shared Assessments. March 2021.

“Operational Risk.” Wikipedia.

Tonello, Matteo. “Strategic Risk Management: A Primer for Directors.” Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, August 23, 2012.

Frigo, Mark L., and Richard J. Anderson. “Embracing Enterprise Risk Management: Practical Approaches for Getting Started.” COSO, 2011.

Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}89|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $20,772 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Innovation
  • Parent Category Link: /innovation
  • Business satisfaction with IT is low.
  • IT and the business have independently evolving strategy, initiatives, and objectives.
  • IT often exceeds their predicted project costs and has difficulty meeting the business’ expectations of project quality and time-to-market.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Business needs are unclear or ambiguous.
  • IT and the business do not know how to leverage each other’s talent and resources to meet their common goals.
  • Not enough steps are taken to fully understand and validate problems.
  • IT can’t pivot fast enough when the business’s needs change.

Impact and Result

Product, service, and process design should always start with an intimate understanding of what the business is trying to accomplish and why it is important.

Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should apply experience design to partner with the business, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Research

Identify goals and objectives for experience design, establish targeted stakeholders, and conduct discovery interviews.

  • Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business – Phase 1: Research
  • Stakeholder Discovery Interview Template

2. Map and iterate

Create the journey map, design a research study to validate your hypotheses, and iterate and ideate around a refined, data-driven understanding of stakeholder problems.

  • Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business – Phase 2: Map and Iterate
  • Journey Map Template
  • Research Study Log Tool
[infographic]

Workshop: Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Introduction to Journey Mapping

The Purpose

Understand the method and purpose of journey mapping.

Key Benefits Achieved

Initial understanding of the journey mapping process and the concept of end-user empathy.

Activities

1.1 Introduce team and discuss workshop motivations and goals.

1.2 Discuss overview of journey mapping process.

1.3 Perform journey mapping case study activity.

Outputs

Case Study Deliverables – Journey Map and Empathy Maps

2 Persona Creation

The Purpose

Begin to understand the goals and motivations of your stakeholders using customer segmentation and an empathy mapping exercise.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand the demographic and psychographic factors driving stakeholder behavior.

Activities

2.1 Discuss psychographic stakeholder segmentation.

2.2 Create empathy maps for four segments.

2.3 Generate problem statements.

2.4 Identify target market.

Outputs

Stakeholder personas

Target market of IT

3 Interview Stakeholders and Start a Journey Map

The Purpose

Get first-hand knowledge of stakeholder needs and start to capture their perspective with a first-iteration journey map.

Key Benefits Achieved

Capture the process stakeholders use to solve problems and empathize with their perspectives, pains, and gains.

Activities

3.1 Review discovery interviewing techniques.

3.2 Review and modify the discovery questionnaire

3.3 Demonstrate stakeholder interview.

3.4 Synthesize learnings and begin creating a journey map.

Outputs

Customized discovery interview template

Results of discovery interviewing

4 Complete the Journey Map and Create a Research Study

The Purpose

Hypothesize the stakeholder journey, identify assumptions, plan a research study to validate your understanding, and ideate around critical junctures in the journey.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand the stakeholder journey and ideate solutions with the intention of improving their experience with IT.

Activities

4.1 Finish the journey map.

4.2 Identify assumptions and create hypotheses.

4.3 Discuss field research and hypothesis testing.

4.4 Design the research study.

4.5 Discuss concluding remarks and next steps.

Outputs

Completed journey map for one IT process, product, or service

Research study design and action plan

Cyber Resilience Report 2018

  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A

"The cyber threat landscape today is highly complex and rapidly changing. Cyber security incidents can have several impacts on organizations and society, both on a physical and non-physical level. Through the use of a computer, criminals can indeed cause IT outages, supply chain disruptions and other physical security incidents"

-- excerpt from the foreword of the BCI Cyber resilience report 2018 by David Thorp, Executive Director, BCI

There are a number of things you can do to protect yourself. And they range, as usual, from the fairly simple to the more elaborate and esoteric. Most companies can, with some common sense, if not close the door on most of these issues, at least prepare themselves to limit the consequences.

Register to read more …

Create an IT View of the Service Catalog

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}396|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $59,399 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 66 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Service Management
  • Parent Category Link: /service-management
  • Organizations often don’t understand which technical services affect user-facing services.
  • Organizations lack clarity around ownership of responsibilities for service delivery.
  • Organizations are vulnerable to change-related incidents when they don’t have insight into service dependencies and their business impact.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Even IT professionals underestimate the effort and the complexity of technical components required to deliver a service.
  • Info-Tech’s methodology promotes service orientation among technical teams by highlighting how their work affects the value of user-facing services.
  • CIOs can use the technical part of the catalog as a tool to articulate the value, dependencies, and constraints of services to business leaders.

Impact and Result

  • Extend the user-facing service catalog to document the people, processes, and technology required to deliver user-facing services.
  • Bring transparency to how services are delivered to better articulate IT’s capabilities and strengthen IT-business alignment.
  • Increase IT’s ability to assess the impact of changes, make informed decisions, and mitigate change-related risks.
  • Respond to incidents and problems in the IT environment with more agility due to reduced diagnosis time for issues.

Create an IT View of the Service Catalog Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build the technical components of your service catalog, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Launch the project

Build a strong foundation for the project to increase the chances of success.

  • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 1: Launch the Project
  • Service Catalog Extension Project Charter
  • Service Catalog Extension Training Deck

2. Identify service-specific technologies

Identify which technologies are specific to certain services.

  • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 2: Identify Service-Specific Technology
  • IT Service Catalog

3. Identify underpinning technologies

Determine which technologies underpin the existence of user-facing services.

  • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 3: Identify Underpinning Services

4. Map the people and processes to the technologies they support

Document the roles and responsibilities required to deliver each user-facing service.

  • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 4: Determine People & Process
  • Service Definitions: Visual Representations
[infographic]

Workshop: Create an IT View of the Service Catalog

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Launch the Project

The Purpose

Build a foundation to kick off the project.

Key Benefits Achieved

A carefully selected team of project participants.

Identified stakeholders and metrics.

Activities

1.1 Create a communication plan

1.2 Complete the training deck

Outputs

Project charter

Understanding of the process used to complete the definitions

2 Identify Service-Specific Technologies and Underpinning Technologies

The Purpose

Determine the technologies that support the user-facing services.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of what is required to run a service.

Activities

2.1 Determine service-specific technology categories

2.2 Identify service-specific technologies

2.3 Determine underpinning technologies

Outputs

Logical buckets of service-specific technologies makes it easier to identify them

Identified technologies

Identified underpinning services and technologies

3 Identify People and Processes

The Purpose

Discover the roles and responsibilities required to deliver each user-facing service.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of what is required to deliver each user-facing service.

Activities

3.1 Determine roles required to deliver services based on organizational structure

3.2 Document the services

Outputs

Mapped responsibilities to each user-facing service

Completed service definition visuals

4 Complete the Service Definition Chart and Visual Diagrams

The Purpose

Create a central hub (database) of all the technical components required to deliver a service.

Key Benefits Achieved

Single source of information where IT can see what is required to deliver each service.

Ability to leverage the extended catalog to benefit the organization.

Activities

4.1 Document all the previous steps in the service definition chart and visual diagrams

4.2 Review service definition with team and subject matter experts

Outputs

Completed service definition visual diagrams and completed catalog

Lay the Strategic Foundations of Your Applications Team

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}171|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
  • As an application leader, you are expected to quickly familiarize yourself with the current state of your applications environment.
  • You need to continuously demonstrate effective leadership to your applications team while defining and delivering a strategy for your applications department that will be accepted by stakeholders.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • The applications department can be viewed as the face of IT. The business often portrays the value of IT through the applications and services they provide and support. IT success can be dominantly driven by the application team’s performance.
  • Conflicting perceptions lead to missed opportunities. Being transparent on how well applications are supporting stakeholders from both business and technical perspectives is critical. This attribute helps validate that technical initiatives are addressing the right business problems or exploiting new value opportunities.

Impact and Result

  • Get to know what needs to be changed quickly. Use Info-Tech’s advice and tools to perform an assessment of your department’s accountabilities and harvest stakeholder input to ensure that your applications operating model and portfolio meets or exceeds expectations and establishes the right solutions to the right problems.
  • Solidify the applications long-term strategy. Adopt best practices to ensure that you are striving towards the right goals and objectives. Not only do you need to clarify both team and stakeholder expectations, but you will ultimately need buy-in from them as you improve the operating model, applications portfolio, governance, and tactical plans. These items will be needed to develop your strategic model and long-term success.
  • Develop an action plan to show movement for improvements. Hit the ground running with an action plan to achieve realistic goals and milestones within an acceptable timeframe. An expectations-driven roadmap will help establish the critical structures that will continue to feed and grow your applications department.

Lay the Strategic Foundations of Your Applications Team Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop an applications strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Get to know your team

Understand your applications team.

  • Lay the Strategic Foundations of Your Applications Team – Phase 1: Get to Know Your Team
  • Applications Strategy Template
  • Applications Diagnostic Tool

2. Get to know your stakeholders

Understand your stakeholders.

  • Lay the Strategic Foundations of Your Applications Team – Phase 2: Get to Know Your Stakeholders

3. Develop your applications strategy

Design and plan your applications strategy.

  • Lay the Strategic Foundations of Your Applications Team – Phase 3: Develop Your Applications Strategy
[infographic]

Workshop: Lay the Strategic Foundations of Your Applications Team

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Get to Know Your Team

The Purpose

Understand the expectations, structure, and dynamics of your applications team.

Review your team’s current capacity.

Gauge the team’s effectiveness to execute their operating model.

Key Benefits Achieved

Clear understanding of the current responsibilities and accountabilities of your teams.

Identification of improvement opportunities based on your team’s performance.

Activities

1.1 Define your team’s role and responsibilities.

1.2 Understand your team’s application and project portfolios.

1.3 Understand your team’s values and expectations.

1.4 Gauge your team’s ability to execute your operating model.

Outputs

Current team structure, RACI chart, and operating model

Application portfolios currently managed by applications team and projects currently committed to

List of current guiding principles and team expectations

Team effectiveness of current operating model

2 Get to Know Your Stakeholders

The Purpose

Understand the expectations of stakeholders.

Review the services stakeholders consume to support their applications.

Gauge stakeholder satisfaction of the services and applications your team provides and supports.

Key Benefits Achieved

Grounded understanding of the drivers and motivators of stakeholders that teams should accommodate.

Identification of improvement opportunities that will increase the value your team delivers to stakeholders.

Activities

2.1 Understand your stakeholders and applications services.

2.2 Define stakeholder expectations.

2.3 Gauge stakeholder satisfaction of applications services and portfolio.

Outputs

Expectations stakeholders have on the applications team and the applications services they use

List of applications expectations

Stakeholder satisfaction of current operating model

3 Develop Your Applications Strategy

The Purpose

Align and consolidate a single set of applications expectations.

Develop key initiatives to alleviate current pain points and exploit existing opportunities to deliver new value.

Create an achievable roadmap that is aligned to organizational priorities and accommodate existing constraints.

Key Benefits Achieved

Applications team and stakeholders are aligned on the core focus of the applications department.

Initiatives to address the high priority issues and opportunities.

Activities

3.1 Define your applications expectations.

3.2 Investigate your diagnostic results.

3.3 Envision your future state.

3.4 Create a tactical plan to achieve your future state.

3.5 Finalize your applications strategy.

Outputs

List of applications expectations that accommodates the team and stakeholder needs

Root causes to issues and opportunities revealed in team and stakeholder assessments

Future-state applications portfolio, operating model, supporting people, process, and technologies, and applications strategic model

Roadmap that lays out initiatives to achieve the future state

Completed applications strategy

Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}205|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
  • Understanding the impact of the machine learning/AI component that is built into most of the enterprise products and tools and its role in the implementation of the solution.
  • Understanding the most important aspects that the organization needs to consider while planning the implementation of the AI-powered product.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Organizations are faced with multiple challenges trying to adopt AI solutions. Challenges include data issues, ethics and compliance considerations, business process challenges, and misaligned leadership goals.
  • When choosing the right product to meet business needs, organizations need to know what questions to ask vendors to ensure they fully understand the implications of buying an AI/ML product.
  • To guarantee the success of your off-the-shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers value, you must start with a clear definition of the business case and an understanding of your data.

Impact and Result

To guarantee success of the off-the-shelf AI implementation and deliver value, in addition to formulating a clear definition of the business case and understanding of data, organizations should also:

  • Know what questions to ask vendors while evaluating AI-powered products.
  • Measure the impact of the project on business and IT processes.

Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI Deck – A step-by-step approach that will help guarantee the success of your Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers business value

Use this practical and actionable framework that will guide you through the planning of your Off-the-Shelf AI product implementation.

  • Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI Storyboard

2. Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis – A tool that will guide the analysis and planning of the implementation

Use this analysis tool to ensure the success of the implementation.

  • Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis

Infographic

Further reading

Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI

A practical guide to ensure return on your Off-the-Shelf AI investment

Executive Summary

Your Challenge
  • Understanding the impact of the machine learning/AI component that is built into most of the enterprise products and tools and its role in the implementation of the solution.
  • What are the most important aspects that organizations needs to consider while planning the implementation of the AI-powered product?
Common Obstacles
  • Organizations are faced with multiple challenges trying to adopt an AI solution. Challenges include data issues, ethics and compliance considerations, business process challenges, and misaligned leadership goals.
  • When choosing the right product to meet business needs, organizations need to know what questions to ask vendors to ensure they fully understand the implications of buying an AI/ML product.
Info-Tech’s Approach

Info-Tech’s approach includes a framework that will guide organizations through the process of the Off-the-Shelf AI product selection.

To guarantee success of the Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and deliver value, organization should start with clear definition of the business case and an understanding of data.

Other steps include:

  • Knowing what questions to ask vendors to evaluate AI-powered products.
  • Measuring the impact of the project on your business and IT processes.
  • Assessing impact on the organization and ensure team readiness.

Info-Tech Insight

To guarantee the success of your Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers value, you must start with a clear definition of the business case and an understanding of your data.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

Guided Implementation

Workshop

Consulting

"Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Getting value out of AI and machine learning investments

92.1%

of companies say they are achieving returns on their data and AI investments

91.7%

said they were increasing investments in data and AI

26.0%

of companies have AI systems in widespread production
However, CIO Magazine identified nine main hurdles to AI adoption based on the survey results:
  • Data issues
  • Business process challenges
  • Implementation challenges and skill shortages
  • Costs of tools and development
  • Misaligned leadership goals
  • Measuring and proving business value
  • Legal and regulatory risks
  • Cybersecurity
  • Ethics
  • (Source: CIO, 2019)
“Data and AI initiatives are becoming well established, investments are paying off, and companies are getting more economic value from AI.” (Source: NewVantage, 2022.)

67% of companies are currently using machine learning, and 97% are using or planning to use it in the next year.” (Source: Deloitte, 2020)

AI vs. ML

Machine learning systems learn from experience and without explicit instructions. They learn patterns from data then analyze and make predictions based on past behavior and the patterns learned.

Artificial intelligence is a combination of technologies and can include machine learning. AI systems perform tasks mimicking human intelligence such as learning from experience and problem solving. Most importantly, AI is making its own decisions without human intervention.

The AI system can make assumptions, test these assumptions, and learn from the results.

(Level of decision making required increases from left to right)
Statistical Reasoning
Infer relationships between variables

Statistical models are designed to find relationships between variables and the significance of those relationships.

Machine Learning:
Making accurate predictions

Machine learning is a subset of AI that discovers patterns from data without being explicitly programmed to do so.

Artificial Intelligence
Dynamic adaptation to novelty

AI systems choose the optimal combination of methods to solve a problem. They make assumptions, reassess the model, and reevaluate the data.

“Machine learning is the study of computer algorithms that improve automatically through experience.” (Tom Mitchell, 1997)

“At its simplest form, artificial intelligence is a field, which combines computer science and robust datasets, to enable problem-solving.” (IBM, “What is artificial intelligence?”)

Types of Off-the-Shelf AI products and solutions

ML/AI-Powered Products Off-the-Shelf Pre-built and Pre-trained AI/ML Models
  • AI/ML capabilities built into the product and might require training as part of the implementation.
  • Off-the-Shelf ML/AI Models, pre-built, pre-trained, and pre-optimized for a particular task. For example, language models or image recognition models that can be used to speed up and simplify ML/AI systems development.
Examples of OTS tools/products: Examples of OTS models:

The data inputs for these models are defined, the developer has to conform to the provided schema, and the data outputs are usually fixed due to the particular task the OTS model is built to solve.

Insight summary

Overarching insight:

To guarantee the success of your Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers value, you must start with a clear definition of the business case and an understanding of your data.

Business Goals

Question the value that AI adds to the tool you are evaluating. Don’t go after the tool simply because it has an AI label attached to it. AI/ML capabilities might add little value but increase implementation complexity. Define the problem you are solving and document business requirements for the tool or a model.

Data

Know your data. Determine data requirements to:

  • Train the model during the implementation and development.
  • Run the model in production.

People/Skills

Define the skills required for the implementation and assemble the team that will support the project from requirements to deployment and support, through its entire lifecycle. Don’t forget about production support and maintenance.

Choosing an AI-Powered Tool

No need to reinvent the wheel and build a product you can buy, but be prepared to work around tool limitations, and make sure you understand the data and the model the tool is built on.

Choosing an AI/ML Model

Using Off-the-Shelf-AI models enables an agile approach to system development. Faster POC and validation of ideas and approaches, but the model might not be customizable for your requirements.

Guaranteeing Off-the-Shelf AI Implementation Success

Info-Tech Insight

To guarantee the success of your Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers value, you must start with a clear definition of the business case and an understanding of your data.

Why do you need AI in your toolset?
Business Goals

Clearly defined problem statement and business requirements for the tool or a model will help you select the right solution that will deliver business value even if it does not have all the latest bells and whistles.

Small chevron pointing right.
Do you know the data required for implementation?
Data

Expected business outcome defines data requirements for implementation. Do you have the right data required to train and run the model?

Large chevron pointing right.
Is your organization ready for AI?
People/Team/ Skills

New skills and expertise are required through all phases of the implementation: design, build, deployment, support, and maintenance, as well as post-production support, scaling, and adoption.

Data Architecture/ Infrastructure

New tool or model will impact your cloud and integration strategy. It will have to integrate with the existing infrastructure, in the cloud or on prem.

Large chevron pointing right.
What questions do you need to ask when choosing the solution?
Product/ Tool or Model Selection

Do you know what model powers the AI tool? What data was used to train the tool and what data is required to run it? Ask the right questions.

Small chevron pointing right.
Are you measuring impact on your processes?
Business and IT Processes

Business processes need to be defined or updated to incorporate the output of the tool back into the business processes to deliver value.

IT governance and support processes need to accommodate the new AI-powered tool.

Small chevron pointing right.
Realize and measure business value of your AI investment
Value

Do you have a clear understanding of the value that AI will bring to your organization?Optimization?Increased revenue?Operational efficiency?

Introduction of Off-the-Shelf AI Requires a Strategic Approach

Business Goals and Value Data People/Team/ Skills Infrastructure Business and IT Processes
AI/ML–powered tools
  • Define a business problem that can be solved with either an AI-powered tool or an AI/ML pre-built model that will become part of the solution.
  • Define expectations and assumptions around the value that AI can bring.
  • Document business requirements for the tool or model.
  • Define the scope for a prototype or POC.
  • Define data requirements.
  • Define data required for implementation.
  • Determine if the required data can be acquired or captured/generated.
  • Document internal and external sources of data.
  • Validate data quality (define requirements and criteria for data quality).
  • Define where and how the data is stored and will be stored. Does it have to be moved or consolidated?
  • Define all stakeholders involved in the implementation and support.
  • Define skills and expertise required through all phases of the implementation: design, build, deployment, support, and maintenance.
  • Define skills and expertise required to grow AI practice and achieve the next level of adoption, scaling, and development of the tool or model POC.
  • Define infrastructure requirements for either Cloud, Software-as-a-Service, or on-prem deployment of a tool or model.
  • Define how the tool is integrated with existing systems and into existing infrastructure.
  • Determine the cost to deploy and run the tool/model.
  • Define processes that need to be updated to accommodate new functionality.
  • Define how the outcome of the tool or a model (e.g. predictions) are incorporated back into the business processes.
  • Define new business and IT processes that need to be defined around the tool (e.g. chatbot maintenance; analysis of the data generated by the tool).
Off-the-shelf AI/ML pre-built models
  • Define the business metrics and KPIs to measure success of the implementation against.
  • Determine if there are requirements for a specific data format required for the tool or a model.
  • Determine if there is a need to classify/label the data (supervised learning).
  • Define privacy and security requirements.
  • Define requirements for employee training. This can be vendor training for a tool or platform training in the case of a pre-built model or service.
  • Define if ML/AI expertise is required.
  • Is the organization ready for ML/AI? Conduct an AI literacy survey and understand team’s concerns, fears, and misconceptions and address them.
  • Define requirements for:
    • Data migration.
    • Security.
    • AI/ML pipeline deployment and maintenance.
  • Define requirements for operation and maintenance of the tool or model.
  • Confirm infrastructure readiness.
  • How AI and its output will be used across the organization.

Define Business Goals and Objectives

Why do you need AI in your toolset? What value will AI deliver? Have a clear understanding of business benefits and the value AI delivers through the tool.

  • Define a business problem that can be solved with either an AI-powered tool or AI/ML pre-built model.
  • Define expectations and assumptions around the value that AI can bring.
  • Document business requirements for a tool or model.
  • Start with the POC or a prototype to test assumptions, architecture, and components of the solution.
  • Define business metrics and KPIs to measure success of the implementation.

Info-Tech Insight

Question the value that AI adds to the tool you are evaluating. Don’t go after the tool simply because it has an AI label attached to it. AI/ML capabilities might add little value but increase implementation complexity. Define the problem you are solving and document business requirements for the tool or a model.

Venn diagram of 'Applied Artificial Intelligence (AAI)' with a larger circle at the top, 'Machine Learning (ML)', and three smaller ovals intersecting, 'Computer Vision', 'Natural Language Processing (NLP)', and 'Robotic Process Automation (RPA)'.

AAI solutions and technologies are helping organizations make faster decisions and predict future outcomes such as:

  • Business process automation
  • Intelligent integration
  • Intelligent insights
  • Operational efficiency improvement
  • Increase revenue
  • Improvement of existing products and services
  • Product and process innovation

1. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool to define business drivers and document business requirements

2-3 hours
Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Business Drivers tab, a table with columns 'AI/ML Tool or Model', 'Use Case', 'Business problem / goal for AI/ML use case', 'Description', 'Business Owner (Primary Stakeholder)', 'Priority', 'Stakeholder Groups Impacted', 'Requirements Defined? Yes/No', 'Related Data Domains', and 'KPIs'. Use the Business Drivers tab to document:
  • Business objectives of the initiative that might drive the AI/ML use case.
  • The business owner or primary stakeholder who will help to define business value and requirements.
  • All stakeholders who will be involved or impacted.
  • KPIs that will be used to assess the success of the POC.
  • Data required for the implementation.
  • Use the Business Requirements tab to document high-level requirements for a tool or model.
  • These requirements will be used while defining criteria for a tool selection and to validate if the tool or model meets your business goals.
  • You can use either traditional BRD format or a user story to document requirements.
Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Business Requirements tab, a table with columns 'Requirement ID', 'Requirement Description / user story', 'Requirement Category', 'Stakeholder / User Role', 'Requirement Priority', and 'Complexity (point estimates)'.

Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

1. Define business drivers and document business requirements

Input

  • Strategic plan of the organization
  • Data strategy that defines target data capabilities required to support enterprise strategic goals
  • Roadmap of business and data initiatives to support target state of data capabilities

Output

  • Prioritized list of business use cases where an AI-powered tool or AI/ML can deliver business value
  • List of high-level requirements for the selected use case

Materials

  • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
  • Off-the-Shelf-AI Analysis Tool, “Business Drivers” and “Business Requirements” tabs

Participants

  • CIO
  • Senior business and IT stakeholders
  • Data owner(s)
  • Data steward(s)
  • Enterprise Architect
  • Data Architect
  • Data scientist/Data analyst

Understand data required for implementation

Do you have the right data to implement and run the AI-powered tool or AI/ML model?

Info-Tech Insight

Know your data. Determine data requirements to:

  • Train the model during the implementation and development, and
  • Run the model in production
AvailabilityArrow pointing rightQualityArrow pointing rightPreparationArrow pointing rightBias, Privacy, SecurityArrow pointing rightData Architecture
  • Define what data is required for implementation, e.g. customer data, financial data, product sentiment.
  • If the data is not available, can it be acquired, gathered, or generated?
  • Define the volume of data required for implementation and production.
  • If the model has to be trained, do you have the data required for training (e.g. dictionary of terms)? Can it be created, gathered, or acquired?
  • Document internal and external sources of data.
  • Evaluate data quality for all data sources based on the requirements and criteria defined in the previous step.
  • For datasets with data quality issues, determine if the data issues can be resolved (e.g. missing values are inferred). If not, can this issue be resolved by using other data sources?
  • Engage a Data Governance organization to address any data quality concerns.
  • Determine if there are requirements for a specific data format required for the tool or model.
  • Determine if there is a need to classify/label or tag the data. What are the metadata requirements?
  • Define whether or not the implementation team needs to aggregate or transform the data before it can be used.
  • Define privacy requirements, as these might affect the availability of the data for ML/AI.
  • Define data bias concerns and considerations. Do you have datasheets for datasets that will be used in this project? What datasets cannot be used to prevent bias?
  • What are the security requirements and how will they affect data storage, product selection, and infrastructure requirements for the tool and overall solution?
  • Define where and how the data is currently stored and will be stored.
  • Does it have to be migrated or consolidated? Does it have to be moved to the cloud or between systems?
  • Is a data lake or data warehouse a requirement for this implementation as defined by the solution architecture?

2. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool to document data requirements

2-3 hours

Use the Data tab to document the following for each data source or dataset:
  • Data Domain – e.g. Customer data
  • Data Concept – e.g. Customer
  • Data Internally Accessible – Identify datasets that are required for the implementation even if the data might not be available internally. Work on determining if the data ca be acquired externally or collected internally.
  • Source System – define the primary source system for the data, e.g. Salesforce
  • Target System (if applicable) – Define if the data needs to be migrated/transferred. For example, you might use a datalake or data warehouse for the AI/ML solution or migrate data to the cloud.
  • Classification/Taxonomy/Ontology
  • Data Steward
  • Data Owner
  • Data Quality – Data quality indicator
  • Refresh Rate – Frequency of data refresh. Indicate if the data can be accessed in real time or near-real time

Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Data tab, a spreadsheet table with the columns listed to the left and below.
  • Retention – Retention policy requirements
  • Compliance Requirements – Define if data has to comply with any of the regulatory requirements, e.g. GDPR
  • Privacy, Bias, and Ethics Considerations – Privacy Act, PIPEDA, etc. Identify if the dataset contains sensitive information that should be excluded from the model, such as gender, age, race etc. Indicate fairness metrics, if applicable.

Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

2. Document data requirements

Input

  • Documented business use cases from Step 1.
  • High-level business requirements from Step 1.
  • Data catalog, data dictionaries, business glossary
  • Data flows and data architecture

Output

  • High-level data requirements
  • List of data sources and datasets that can be used for the implementation
  • Datasets that need to be collected or acquired externally

Materials

  • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
  • Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “Data” tab

Participants

  • CIO
  • Business and IT stakeholders
  • Data owner(s)
  • Data steward(s)
  • Enterprise Architect
  • Data Architect
  • Data scientist/Data analyst

Is Your Organization Ready for AI?

Assess organizational readiness and define stakeholders impacted by the implementation. Build the team with the right skillset to drive the solution.

  • Implementation of the AI/ML-powered Off-the-Shelf Tool or an AI/ML model will require a team with a combination of skills through all phases of the project, from design of the solution to build, production, deployment, and support.
  • Document the skillsets required and determine the skills gap. Before you start hiring, depending on the role, you might find talent within the organization to join the implementation team with little to no training.
  • AI/ML resources that may be needed on your team driving AI implementation (you might consider bringing part-time resources to fill the gaps or use vendor developers) are:
    • Data Scientist
    • Machine Learning Engineer
    • Data Engineer
    • Data Architect
    • AI/ML Ops engineer
  • Define training requirements. Consider vendor training for a tool or platform.
  • Plan for future scaling and the growing of the solution and AI practice. Assess the need to apply AI in other business areas. Work with the team to analyze use cases and prioritize AI initiatives. As the practice grows, grow your team expertise.
  • Identify the stakeholders who will be affected by the AI implementation.
  • Work with them to understand and address any concerns, fears, or misconceptions around the role of AI and the consequences of bringing AI into the organization.
  • Develop a communication and change management plan to educate everyone within the organization on the application and benefits of using AI and machine learning.

Info-Tech Insight:

Define the skills required for the implementation and assemble the team that will support the project through its entire lifecycle. Don’t forget about production, support, and maintenance.

3. Build your implementation team

1-2 hours

Input: Solution conceptual design, Current resource availability

Output: Roles required for the implementation of the solution, Resources gap analysis, Training and hiring plan

Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “People and Team” tab

Participants: Project lead, HR, Enterprise Architect

  1. Review your solution conceptual design and define implementation team roles.
  2. Document requirements for each role.
  3. Review current org chart and job descriptions and identify skillset gaps. Draft an action plan to fill in the roles.
  4. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's People and Team tab to document team roles for the entire implementation, including design, build/implement, deployment, support and maintenance, and future development.

Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's People and Team tab, a table with columns 'Design', 'Implement', 'Deployment', 'Support and Maintenance', and 'Future Development'.

Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

Cloud, SaaS or On Prem – what are my options and what is the impact?

Depending on the architecture of the solution, define the impact on the current infrastructure, including system integration, AI/ML pipeline deployment, maintenance, and data storage

  • Data Architecture: use the current data architecture to design the architecture for an AI-powered solution. Assess changes to the data architecture with the introduction of a new tool to make sure it is scalable enough to support the change.
  • Define infrastructure requirements for either Cloud, Software-as-a-Service, or on-prem deployment of a tool or model.
  • Define how the tool will be integrated with existing systems and into existing infrastructure.
  • Define requirements for:
    • Data migration and data storage
    • Security
    • AI/ML pipeline deployment, production monitoring, and maintenance
  • Define requirements for operation and maintenance of the tool or model.
  • Work with your infrastructure architect and vendor to determine the cost of deploying and running the tool/model.
  • Make a decision on the preferred architecture of the system and confirm infrastructure readiness.

Download the Create an Architecture for AI blueprint

4. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool to document infrastructure decisions

2-3 hours

Input: Solution conceptual design

Output: Infrastructure requirements, Infrastructure readiness assessment

Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “Infrastructure” tab

Participants: Infrastructure Architect, Solution Architect, Enterprise Architect, Data Architect, ML/AI Ops Engineer

  1. Work with Infrastructure, Data, Solution, and Enterprise Architects to define your conceptual solution architecture.
  2. Define integration and storage requirements.
  3. Document security requirements for the solution in general and the data specifically.
  4. Define MLOps requirements and tools required for ML/AI pipeline deployment and production monitoring.
  5. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Infrastructure tab to document requirements and decisions around Data and Infrastructure Architecture.

Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Infrastructure tab, a table with columns 'Cloud, SaaS or On-Prem', 'Data Migration Requirements', 'Data Storage Requirements', 'Security Requirements', 'Integrations Required', and 'AI/ML Pipeline Deployment and Maintenance Requirements'.

Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

What questions do you need to ask vendors when choosing the solution?

Take advantage of Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework (RASF) to guide tool selection, but ask vendors the right questions to understand implications of having AI/ML built into the tool or a model

Data Model Implementation and Integration Deployment Security and Compliance
  • What data (attributes) were used to train the model?
  • Do you have datasheets for the data used?
  • How was data bias mitigated?
  • What are the data labeling/classification requirements for training the model?
  • What data is required for production? E.g. volume; type of data, etc.
  • Were there any open-source libraries used in the model? If yes, how were vulnerabilities and security concerns addressed?
  • What algorithms are implemented in the tool/model?
  • Can model parameters be configured?
  • What is model accuracy?
  • Level of customization required for the implementation to meet our requirements.
  • Does the model require training? If yes, can you provide details? Can you estimate the effort required?
  • Integration capabilities and requirements.
  • Data migration requirements for tool operation and development.
  • Administrator console – is this functionality available?
  • Implementation timeframe.
  • Is the model or tool deployable on premises or in the cloud? Do you support hybrid cloud and multi-cloud deployment?
  • What cloud platforms are your product/model integrated with (AWS, Azure, GCP)?
  • What are the infrastructure requirements?
  • Is the model containerized/ scalable?
  • What product support and product updates are available?
  • Regulatory compliance (GDPR, PIPEDA, HIPAA, PCI DSS, CCPA, SOX, etc.)?
  • How are data security risks addressed?

Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “Vendor Questionnaire” tab to track vendor responses to these questions.

Are you measuring impact on your processes?

Make sure that you understand the impact of the new technology on the existing business and IT processes.

And make sure your business processes are ready to take advantage of the benefits and new capabilities enabled by AI/ML.

Process automation, optimization, and improvement enabled by the technology and AI/ML-powered tools allow organizations to reduce manual work, streamline existing business processes, improve customer satisfaction, and get critical insights to assist decision making.

To take full advantage of the benefits and new capabilities enabled by the technology, make sure that business and IT processes reflect these changes:

  • Processes that need to be updated.
  • How the outcome of the tool or a model (e.g. predictions) is incorporated into the existing business processes and the processes that will monitor the accuracy of the outcome and monitor performance of the tool or model.
  • New business and IT processes that need to be defined for the tool (e.g. chatbot maintenance, analysis of the data generated by the tool, etc.).

5. Document the Impact on Business and IT Processes

2-3 hours

Input: Solution design, Existing business and IT processes

Output: Documented updates to the existing processes, Documented new business and IT processes

Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “Business and IT Processes” tab

Participants: Project lead, Business stakeholders, Business analyst

  1. Review current business processes affected by the implementation of the AI/ML- powered tool or model. Define the changes that need to be made. The changes might include simplification of the process due to automation of some of the steps. Some processes will need to be redesigned and some processes might become obsolete.
  2. Document high-level steps for any new processes that need to be defined around the AI/ML-powered tool. An example of such a process would be defining new IT and business processes to support a new chatbot.
  3. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Business and IT Processes tab, to document process changes.

Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Business and IT Processes tab, a table with columns 'Existing business process affected', 'New business process', 'Stakeholders involved', 'Changes to be made', and 'New Process High-Level Steps'.

Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

AI-powered Tools – Considerations

PROS:
  • Enhanced functionality, allows the power of AI without specialized skills (e.g., Mathematica – recognizing patterns in data).
  • Might be a cheaper option compared to building a solution in-house (chatbot, for ex.).

Info-Tech Insight:

No need to reinvent the wheel and build the product you can buy, but be prepared to work around tool limitations, and make sure you understand the data and the model the tool is built on.

CONS:
  • Dependency on the service provider.
  • The tool might not meet all the business requirements without customization.
  • Bias can be built into the tool:
    • Work with the vendor to understand what data was used to train the model.
    • From the perspective of ethics and bias, learn what model is implemented in the tool and what data attributes the model uses.

Pre-built/pre-trained models – what to keep in mind when choosing

PROS:
  • Lower cost and less time to development compared to creating and training models from scratch (e.g. using image recognition models or pre-trained language models like BERT).
  • If the pre-trained and optimized model perfectly fits your needs, the model accuracy might be high and sufficient for your scenario.
  • Off-the-Shelf AI models are useful for creating prototypes or POCs, for testing a hypothesis, and for validating ideas and requirements.
  • Usage of Off-the-Shelf models shortens the development cycle and reduces investment risks.
  • Language models are particularly useful if you don’t have data to train your own model (a “small data” scenario).
  • Infrastructure and model training cost reduction.
CONS:
  • Might be a challenge to deploy and maintain the system in production.
  • Lack of flexibility: you might not be able to configure input or output parameters to your requirements. For example, a pre-built sentiment analysis model might return four values (“positive,” “negative,” “neutral,” and “mixed”), but your solution will require only two or three values.
  • Might be a challenge to comply with security and privacy requirements.
  • Compliance with privacy and fairness requirements and considerations: what data was used to pretrain the model?
  • If open-source libraries were used to create the model, how will vulnerabilities, risks, and security concerns be addressed?

Info-Tech Insight:

Using Off-the-Shelf AI models enables an agile approach to system development – faster POC and validation of ideas and approaches, but the model might not be customizable for your requirements.

Metrics

Metrics and KPIs for this project will depend on the business goals and objectives that you will identify in Step 1 of the tool selection process.

Metrics might include:

  • Reduction of time spent on a specific business process. If the tool is used to automate certain steps of a business process, this metric will measure how much time was saved, in minutes/hours, compared to the process time before the introduction of the tool.
  • Accuracy of prediction. This metric would measure the accuracy of estimations or predictions compared to the same estimations done before the implementation of the tool. It can be measured by generating the same prediction or estimation using the AI-powered tool or using any methods used before the introduction of the tool and comparing the results.
  • Accuracy of the search results. If the AI-powered tool is a search engine, compare a) how much time it would take a user to find an article or a piece of content they were searching for using new tool vs. previous techniques, b) how many steps it took the user to locate the required article in the search results, and c) the location of the correct piece of content in the search result list (at the top of the search result list or on the tenth page).
  • Time spent on manual tasks and activities. This metric will measure how much time, in minutes/hours, is spent by the employees or users on manual tasks if the tool automates some of these tasks.
  • Reduction of business process steps (if the steps are being automated). To derive this metric, create a map of the business process before the introduction of the AI-powered tool and after, and determine if the tool helped to simplify the process by reducing the number of process steps.

Bibliography

Adryan, Boris. “Is it all machine learning?” Badryan, Oct. 20, 2015. Accessed Feb. 2022.

“AI-Powered Data Management Platform.” Informatica, N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

Amazon Rekognition. “Automate your image and video analysis with machine learning.” AWS. N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

“Artificial Intelligence (AI).” IBM Cloud Education, 3 June 2020. Accessed Feb 2022.

“Artificial intelligence (AI) vs machine learning (ML).” Microsoft Azure Documentation. Accessed Feb. 2022.

“Avante Garde in the Realm of AI” SearchUnify Cognitive Platform. Accessed Feb 2022.

“Azure Cognitive Services.” Microsoft. N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

“Becoming an AI-fueled organization. State of AI in the enterprise, 4th edition,” Deloitte, 2020. Accessed Feb. 2022.

“Coveo Predictive Search.” Coveo, N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

”Data and AI Leadership. Executive Survey 2022. Executive Summary of Findings.” NewVantage Partners. Accessed Feb 2022.

“Einstein Discovery in Tableau.” Tableau, N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

Korolov, Maria. “9 biggest hurdles to AI adoption.” CIO, Feb 26, 2019. Accessed Feb 2022.

Meel, Vidushi. “What Is Deep Learning? An Easy to Understand Guide.” visio.ai. Accessed Feb. 2022.

Mitchell, Tom. “Machine Learning,” McGraw Hill, 1997.

Stewart, Matthew. “The Actual Difference Between Statistics and Machine Learning.” Towards Data Science, Mar 24, 2019. Accessed Feb 2022.

“Sentiment analysis with Cognitive Services.” Microsoft Azure Documentation. Accessed February 2022.

“Three Principles for Designing ML-Powered Products.” Spotify Blog. Oct 2019, Accessed Feb 2022.

“Video Intelligence API.” Google Cloud Platform. N.d. Accessed Feb 2022

Communicate Any IT Initiative

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}428|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Lead
  • Parent Category Link: /lead

IT communications are often considered ineffective and unengaging. This is demonstrated by the:

  • Lack of expectation that IT should communicate well. Why develop a skill that no one expects IT to deliver on?
  • Failure to recognize the importance of communication to engage employees and communicate ideas.
  • Perception that communication is a broadcast not a continuous dialogue.
  • Inability to create, monitor, and manage feedback mechanisms.
  • Overreliance on data as the main method of communication instead of as evidence to support a broader narrative.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Don't make data your star. It is a supporting character. People can argue about the collection methods or interpretation of the data, but they cannot argue with the story you share.
  • Messages are also non-verbal. Practice using your voice and body to set the right tone and impact your audience.
  • Recognize that communications are essential even in highly technical IT environments.
  • Measure if the communication is being received and resulting in the desired outcome. If not, modify what and how the message is being expressed.

Impact and Result

  • Develop an actionable plan to deliver consistent, timely messaging for all audiences.
  • Compose and deliver meaningful messages.
  • Consistently deliver the right information and the right time to the right stakeholders.

Communicate Any IT Initiative Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Communicate Any IT Initiative Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to plan, compose, and deliver communications to any stakeholder up, down, or across the organization.

This blueprint not only provides the tools and techniques for planning, composing, and delivering effective communications, but also walks you through practical exercises. Practice and perfect your communication, composition, and delivery skills for any IT initiative.

  • Communicate Any IT Initiative – Phases 1-3

2. Communicate Any IT Initiative Facilitation Deck – A step-by-step communications workshop deck suitable for any workshop with a communication component.

Communication concepts and exercises that teach you how to plan, compose, and deliver effective communications. The deck includes practical tools, techniques, and skills practice.

  • Communicate Any IT Initiative Facilitation Deck

3. Communications Planner – An communications plan template that includes a section to define a change, a communications plan, communications calendars, and a pitch composition exercise.

This communications planner is a tool that accompanies the Effective IT Communications blueprint and the Communicate Any IT Initiative Facilitation Deck so that you can plan your communications, view your deliverables, and compose your pitch all in one document.

  • Communications Planner Tool

4. Stakeholder Analysis Tool – A tool to help ensure that all stakeholders are identified and none are missed.

A tool for identifying stakeholders and conducting an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.

  • Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool
[infographic]

Further reading

Communicate Any IT Initiative

Plan, compose, and deliver communications that engage your audience.

Executive Summary

Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach
Communicating about your initiative is when the work really begins. Many organizations struggle with:
  • Knowing what target audiences need to be communicated with.
  • Communicating the same message consistently and clearly across target audiences.
  • Communicating to target audiences at the right times.
  • Selecting a channel that will be most effective for the message and practicing to deliver that message.
Some of the challenges IT faces when it comes to communicating its initiatives includes:
  • Not being given the opportunity or time to practice composing or delivering communications.
  • Coordinating the communications of this initiative with other initiative communications.
  • Forgetting to communicate with key stakeholders.
Choosing not to communicate because we do not know how it’s leading to initiative failures and lack of adoption by impacted parties.
For every IT initiative you have going forward, focus on following these three steps:
  1. Create a plan of action around who, what, how, and when communications will take place.
  2. Compose an easy-to-understand pitch for each stakeholder audience.
  3. Practice delivering the message in an authentic and clear manner.
By following these steps, you will ensure that your audience always understands and feels ready to engage with you.

Info-Tech Insight
Every IT employee can be a great communicator; it just takes a few consistent steps, the right tools, and a dedication to practicing communicating your message.

Info-Tech’s approach

Effective communications is not a broadcast but a dialogue between communicator and audience in a continuous feedback loop.

Continuous Feedback Loop

The Info-Tech difference:

  1. The skills needed to communicate effectively as a front-line employee or CIO are the same. It’s important to begin the development of these skills from the beginning of one's career.
  2. Time is a non-renewable resource. Any communication needs to be considered valuable and engaging by the audience or they will be unforgiving.
  3. Don't make data your star. It is a supporting character. People can argue about the collection methods or interpretation of the data, but they cannot argue about the story you share.

Poor communication can lead to dissatisfied stakeholders

27.8% of organizations are not satisfied with IT communications.

25.8% of business stakeholders are not satisfied with IT communications.

Source: Info-Tech Diagnostic Programs; n=34,345 business stakeholders within 604 organizations

The bottom line? Stakeholders for any initiative need to be communicated with often and well. When stakeholders become dissatisfied with IT’s communication, it can lead to an overall decrease in satisfaction with IT.

Good IT initiative communications can be leverage

  • IT risk mitigation and technology initiative funding are dependent on critical stakeholders comprehending the risk impact and initiative benefit in easy-to-understand terms.
  • IT employees need clear and direct information to feel empowered and accountable to do their jobs well.
  • End users who have a good experience engaging in communications with IT employees have an overall increase in satisfaction with IT.
  • Continuously demonstrating IT’s value to the organization comes when those initiatives are clearly aligned to overall objectives – don’t assume this alignment is being made.
  • Communication prevents assumptions and further miscommunication from happening among IT employees who are usually impacted and fear change the most.

“Nothing gets done properly if it's not communicated well.”
-- Nastaran Bisheban, CTO KFC Canada

Approach to communications

Introduction
Review effective communications.

Plan
Plan your communications using a strategic tool.

Compose
Create your own message.

Deliver
Practice delivering your own message.

Info-Tech’s methodology for effective IT communications

1. Plan Strategic Communications 2. Compose a Compelling Message 3. Deliver Messages Effectively
Step Activities
  1. Define the Change
  2. Determine Target Audience
  3. Communication Outcomes
  4. Clarify the Key Message(s)
  5. Identify the Owner and Messenger(s)
  6. Select the Right Channels
  7. Establish a Frequency and Time Frame
  8. Obtain Feedback and Improve
  9. Finalize the Calendar
  1. Craft a Pitch
  2. Revise the Pitch
  1. Deliver Your Pitch
  2. Refine and Deliver Again
Step Outcomes Establish an easy-to-read view of the key communications that need to take place related to your initiative or change. Practice writing a pitch that conveys the message in a compelling and easy-to-understand way. Practice delivering the pitch. Ensure there is authenticity in the delivery while still maintaining the audience’s attention.

This blueprint can support communication about any IT initiative

  • Strategy or roadmap
  • Major transformational change
  • System integration
  • Process changes
  • Service changes
  • New solution rollouts
  • Organizational restructuring

We recommend considering this blueprint a natural add-on to any completed Info-Tech blueprint, whether it is completed in the DIY fashion or through a Guided Implementation or workshop.

Key deliverable:

Communication Planner
A single place to plan and compose all communications related to your IT initiative.

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

Facilitation Guide
A step-by-step guide to help your IT organization develop a communication plan and practice composing and delivering key messages.

Stakeholder Analysis
An ability to assess all stakeholders based on impact, influence, and involvement.

Workshop Overview

MorningAfternoon
ActivitiesPlan Strategic Communications for Your Initiative
  1. Define the Change
  2. Determine Target Audience
  3. Communication Outcomes
  4. Clarify the Key Message(s)
  5. Identify the Owner and Messenger(s)
  6. Select the Right Channels
  7. Establish a Frequency and Time Frame
  8. Obtain Feedback and Improve
  9. Finalize the Calendar
Compose and Deliver a Compelling Message
  1. Craft a Pitch
  2. Revise the Pitch
  3. Deliver Your Pitch
  4. Refine and Deliver Again
Deliverables
  1. Communication planner with weekly, monthly, and yearly calendar views to ensure consistent and ongoing engagement with every target audience member
  1. Crafted pitches that can be used for communicating the initiative to different stakeholders
  2. Skills and ability to deliver messages more effectively

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Key KPIs for communication with any stakeholder

Measuring communication is hard; use these to determine effectiveness:

Goal Key Performance Indicator (KPI) Related Resource
Obtain board buy-in for IT strategic initiatives. X% of IT initiatives that were approved to be funded.
Number of times that technical initiatives were asked to be explained further.
Using our Board Presentation Review
Ensure stakeholders feel engaged during initiatives. X% of business leadership satisfied with the statement “IT communicates with your group effectively.” Using the CIO Business Vision Diagnostic
End users know what IT initiatives are going to impact the products or services they use. X% of end users that are satisfied with communications around changing services or applications. Using the End-User Satisfaction Survey
Project stakeholders receive sufficient communication throughout the initiative. X% overall satisfaction with the quality of the project communications. Using the PPM Customer Satisfaction Diagnostic
Employees are empowered to perform on IT initiatives. X% satisfaction employees have with statement “I have all the resources and information I need to do a great job.” Using the Employee Engagement Diagnostic Program

Phase 1

Plan Strategic Communications

Activities
1.1 Define the Change
1.2 Determine Target Audience
1.3 Communication Outcomes
1.4 Clarify the Key Message(s)
1.5 Identify the Owner and Messenger(s)
1.6 Select the Right Channels
1.7 Establish a Frequency and Time Frame
1.8 Obtain Feedback and Improve
1.9 Finalize the Calendar

Communicate Any IT Initiative Effectively
Phase1 > Phase 2 > Phase 3

This step involves the following participants:
Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Outcomes of this step
Create an easy-to-follow communications plan to ensure that the right message is sent to the right audience using the right medium and frequency.

What is an IT change?

Before communicating, understand the degree of change.

Incremental Change:
  • Changes made to improve current processes or systems (e.g. optimizing current technology).
Transitional Change:
  • Changes that involve dismantling old systems and/or processes in favor of new ones (e.g. new product or services added).
Transformational Change:
  • Significant change in organizational strategy or culture resulting in substantial shift in direction.
Examples:
  • New or changed policy
  • Switching from on-premises to cloud-first infrastructure
  • Implementing ransomware risk controls
  • Implementing a learning & development plan
Examples:
  • Moving to an insourced or outsourced service desk
  • Developing a BI & analytics function
  • Integrating risk into organization risk
  • Developing a strategy (technology, architecture, security, data, service, infrastructure, application)
Examples:
  • Organizational redesign
  • Acquisition or merger of another organization
  • Implementing a digital strategy
  • A new CEO or board taking over the organization's direction

Consider the various impacts of the change

Invest time at the start of the project to develop a detailed understanding of the impact of the change. This will help to create a plan that will simplify the change and save time in the end. Evaluate the impact from a people, process, and technology perspective.

Leverage a design thinking principle: Empathize with the stakeholder – what will change?

People

  • Team structure
  • Reporting structure
  • Career paths
  • Job skills
  • Responsibilities
  • Company vision/mission
  • Number of FTE
  • Culture
  • Training required

Process

  • Budget
  • Work location
  • Daily workflow
  • Working conditions
  • Work hours
  • Reward structure
  • Required number of completed tasks
  • Training required

Technology

  • Required tools
  • Required policies
  • Required systems
  • Training required

1.1 Define the change

30 minutes

  1. While different stakeholders will be impacted by the change differently, it’s important to be able to describe what the change is at a higher level.
  2. Have everyone take eight minutes to jot down what the change is and why it is happening in one to two sentences. Tab 2 of the Communication Planner Tool can also be used to house the different ideas.
  3. Present the change statements to one another.
  4. By leveraging one of the examples or consolidating many examples, as a group document:
    • What is the change?
    • Why is it happening?
  5. The goal is to ensure that all individuals involved in establishing or implementing the change have the same understanding.
Input Output
  • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
  • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
Materials Participants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

Ensure effective communication by focusing on four key elements

Audience
Stakeholders (either groups or individuals) who will receive the communication.

Message
Information communicated to impacted stakeholders. Must be rooted in a purpose or intent.

Messenger
Person who delivers the communication to the audience. The communicator and owner are two different things.

Channel
Method or channel used to communicate to the audience.

Identify the target audience

The target audience always includes groups and individuals who are directly impacted by the change and may also include those who are change adjacent.

Define the target audience: Identify which stakeholders will be the target audience of communications related to the initiative. Stakeholders can be single individuals (CFO) or groups (Applications Team).

Stakeholders to consider:

  • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
  • Who benefits from the initiative?
  • Who loses from the initiative?
  • Who can make approvals?
  • Who controls resources?
  • Who has specialist skills?
  • Who implements the changes?
  • Who will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts in areas of influence that are affected by what you are doing?
  • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
  • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?

1.2a Determine target audience

20 minutes

  1. Consider all the potential individuals or groups of individuals who will be impacted or can influence the outcome of the initiative.
  2. On tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool, list each of the stakeholders who will be part of the target audience. If in person, use sticky notes to define the target audiences. The individuals or group of individuals that make up the target audience are all the people who require being communicated with before, during, or after the initiative.
  3. As you list each target audience, consider how they perceive IT. This perception could impact how you choose to communicate with the stakeholder(s).
InputOutput
  • The change
  • Why the change is needed
  • A list of individuals or group of individuals that will be communicated with.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

1.2b Conduct a stakeholder analysis (optional)

1 hour

  1. For each stakeholder identified as a part of the target audience, conduct an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.
  2. Based on the stakeholder, the influence or impact of the change, initiative, etc. can inform the type and way of communicating.
  3. This is a great activity for those who are unsure how to frame communications for each stakeholder identified as a target audience.
InputOutput
  • The change
  • Why the change is needed
  • A list of individuals or group of individuals that will be communicated with
  • The degree of influence or impact each target audience stakeholder has.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool

Determine the desired outcome of communicating with each audience

For each target audience, there will be an overall goal on why they need to be communicated with. This outcome or purpose is often dependent on the type of influence the stakeholder wields within the organization as well as the type of impact the change or initiative will have. Depending on the target audience, consider each of the communication outcomes listed below.

Communicating Across the Organization Communicating Up to Board or Executives Communicating Within IT
  • Obtain buy-in
  • Obtain approval
  • Obtain funding
  • Demonstrate alignment to organization objectives
  • Reduce concerns about risk
  • Demonstrate alignment to organization objectives
  • Demonstrate alignment to individual departments or functions
  • Obtain other departments’ buy-in
  • Inform about a crisis
  • Inform about the IT change
  • Obtain adoption related to the change
  • Obtain buy-in
  • Inform about the IT change
  • Create a training plan
  • Inform about department changes
  • Inform about organization changes
  • Inform about a crisis
  • Obtain adoption related to the change
  • Distribute key messages to change agents

1.3 Communication outcomes

30 minutes

  1. For each stakeholder, there may be one or more reasons why you need to communicate with them. On tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool or on a whiteboard, begin to identify the objective or outcome your team is seeking by engaging in each target audience.
  2. As you move through the communication outcomes, it could result in more than one outcome for each target audience.
  3. Ensure there is one line for each target audience desired communication outcome. Many stakeholders might need to be communicated with for several reasons. If using the Communication Planner Tool, add the target audience name in column C for as many different communication outcomes there are in column D related to that stakeholder.
InputOutput
  • The change
  • A list of individuals or group of individuals that will be communicated with
  • Outcome or objective of communicating with each stakeholder
MaterialsParticipants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

Establish and define key messages based on organizational objectives

What are key messages?
  • Key messages guide all internal communications to ensure they are consistent, unified, and straightforward.
  • Distill key messages down from organizational objectives and use them to reinforce the organization’s strategic direction. Key messages should inspire employees to act in a way that will help the organization reach its objectives.
How to establish key messages: Ground key messages in organizational strategy and culture. These should be the first places you look to determine the organization’s key messages:
  • Refer to organizational strategy documents. What needs to be reinforced in internal communications to ensure the organization can achieve its strategy? This is a key message.
  • Look at the organization’s values. How do values guide how work should be done? Do employees need to behave in a certain way or keep a certain value top of mind? This is a key message.

Key messages should be clear, concise, and consistent (Porter, 2014). The intent is to convey important information in a way that is relatable and memorable, to promote reinforcement, and ultimately, to drive action.

Info-Tech Insight
Empathizing with the audience is key to anticipating and addressing objections as well as identifying benefits. Customize messaging based on audience attributes such as work model (e.g. hybrid), anticipated objections, what's in it for me? (WIIFM), and specific expectations.

1.4 Clarify the key messages

25 minutes

  1. Divide the number of communication lines up equally amongst the participants.
  2. Based on the outcome expected from engaging that target audience in communications, define one to five key messages that should be expressed.
  3. The key messages should highlight benefits anticipated, concerns anticipated, details about the change, and plan of action or next steps. The goal here is to ensure the target audience is included in the communication process.
  4. The key messages should be focused on how the target audience receives a consistent message, especially if different communication messengers are involved.
  5. Document the key messages on tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool.
InputOutput
  • The change
  • Target audience
  • Communication outcomes
  • Key messages to support a consistent approach
MaterialsParticipants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

Understand to how to identify appropriate messengers

Messages must be communicated by a variety of individuals across the organization. Select the messenger depending on the message characteristics (e.g. audience, message, medium). The same messenger can be used for a variety of messages across different mediums.

Personal impact messages should be delivered by an employee's direct supervisor.

Organizational impact messages and rationale should be delivered by senior leaders in the affected areas.

Chart Preferred Messenger for Change Messages

Recent research by Prosci found employees prefer to hear personal messages from their direct manager and organizational messages from the executive leadership team.

Fifty percent of respondents indicated the CEO as the preferred messenger for organizational change messages.

Select the appropriate messenger

For each audience, message, and medium, review whether the message is personal or organizational to determine which messengers are best.

The number and seniority of messengers involved depends on the size of the change:

  • Incremental change
    • Personal messages from direct supervisors
    • Organizational messages from a leader in the audience’s function or the direct supervisor
  • Transitional change
    • Personal messages from direct supervisors or function leaders
    • Organizational messages from a leader in the audience’s function or the C suite
  • Transformational change
    • Personal messages from direct supervisors or function leaders
    • Organizational messages from the CEO or C-suite
    • Cascading messages are critical in this type of change because all levels of the organization will be involved

Communication owner vs. messenger

Communication Owner

Single person
Accountable for the communication message and activities
Oversees that the communication does not contradict other communications
Validates the key messages to be made

Communication Messenger(s)

Single person or many people
Responsible for delivering the intended message
Engages the target audience in the communication
Ensures the key messages are made in a consistent and clear manner

1.5 Identify the owner and messenger(s)

30 minutes

  1. For every communication, there needs to be a single owner. This is the person who approves the communication and will be accountable for the communication
  2. The messenger(s) can be several individuals or a single individual depending on the target audience and desired outcome being sought through the communications.
  3. Identify the person or role who will be accountable for the communication and document this in the Communication Planner Tool.
  4. Identify the person(s) or role(s) who will be responsible for delivering the communication and engaging the target audience and document this in the Communication Planner Tool.
Input Output
  • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
  • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
Materials Participants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

Review appropriate channel for different types of messages

Communication channels are in-person, paper-based, or tech-enabled. Provide communicators with guidance on which mediums to use in different situations.

First question: Should the communication be delivered in-person or not?
Types of channels In-Person Paper-Based or Tech-Enabled
Questions to consider
  • How is your message likely to be received? Is the message primarily negative?
  • Will the message prompt a lot of dialogue or questions? Will it require significant context or clarification?
Note: Messages that are important, complex, or negative must be delivered in person. This allows the sender to provide context, clarify questions, and collect feedback.
  • Use paper-based and tech-enabled communications to provide reminders or updates.
  • When deciding which of the two to use, think about your audience: do they have regular access to a computer?
Two-way interaction Supplement in-person communications with paper-based or tech-enabled communications to provide follow-up and consistency (Government of Nova Scotia). Tech-enabled communications allow the sender to deliver messages when they do not co-locate with the receiver. That said, make sure paper-based communications are provided to those without regular access to a computer.

Consider accessibility when communicating change – not all employees will have access to the same mediums. To ensure inclusivity, strategically plan which mediums to use to reach the entire audience.

Select communication channels

Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
One-on-One Meetings Individual meetings between managers and their direct reports to ensure they understand the change, can express any concerns, and obtain feedback or recommendations.
  • How the change will impact the employee, what they can expect throughout the change, how they can get support, what the timelines are, etc.
  • Requests for feedback.
  • Responses to feedback.
  • Most applicable for personal messages throughout all stages of change.
  • When real-time feedback is needed.
  • To understand the change’s impact on each employee, understand their emotional reactions and provide support.
  • After a change has been announced and continuing at a regular cadence until after the change has been implemented. Frequency of meetings will vary by employee over the course of the change.
Team Meeting A meeting of a work unit or department. Can be virtual, in person, or a combination. Led by the work unit or department head/manager.
  • How the change will impact the team – how work gets done, who they work with, etc.
  • Available timelines regarding the change.
  • Support available throughout the change.
  • Most applicable for personal messages throughout all change stages.
  • When real-time communication is needed to keep everyone on the same page and provide an opportunity to ask questions (essential for buy-in).
  • To announce a small change or after a larger change announcement. Continue frequently until the end of adoption, with time reserved for ad hoc meetings.
Email Electronic communication sent to the audience’s company emails, or in the absence of that, to their personal emails.
  • Overarching details and timelines.
  • Short, easy-to-digest pieces of information that either provide a summary of what to expect or describe actions employees need to take.
  • Applicable for both personal and organizational messages, depending on the messenger. Send personal messages in separate emails from organizational messages.
  • To communicate key details quickly and to a distributed workforce.
  • To reinforce or reiterate information that has been shared in person. Can be used broadly or target specific employees/groups.

Select communication channels

Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
Town Hall Virtual or in-person meeting where senior leadership shares information with a wide audience about the change and answers questions.
  • Messaging that is applicable to a large audience.
  • The strategic decisions of senior leadership.
  • Highlight positive initiative outcomes.
  • Recognize employee efforts.
  • Report on engagement.
  • Most applicable for organizational messages to launch a change or between milestones in a long-term or complex change.
  • To enable senior leaders to explain strategic decisions to employees.
  • To allow employees to ask questions and provide feedback.
  • When support of senior leadership is critical to change success.
Roadshow A series of meetings where senior leadership or the change champion travels to different geographic locations to hold town halls adapted to each location’s audience.
  • Why the change is happening, when the change is happening, who will be impacted, expectations, and key points of contact.
  • Most applicable for organizational messages to launch a change and between milestones during a long-term, large, or complex change.
  • For a change impacting several locations.
  • When face time with senior leadership is critical to developing understanding and adoption of the change. Satellite locations can often feel forgotten. A roadshow provides access to senior leadership and lends the credibility of the leader to the change.
  • To enable live two-way communication between employees and leadership.

Select communication channels

Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
Intranet An internal company website that a large number of employees can access at any time.
  • Information that has already been communicated to the audience before, so they can access it at any time.
  • FAQs and/or general details about the change (e.g. milestones).
  • Most applicable for organizational messages.
  • To post relevant documentation so the audience can access it whenever they need it.
  • To enable consistency in answers to common questions.
Training Scheduled blocks of time for the team to learn new skills and behaviors needed to successfully adapt to the change.
  • Reinforce the need for change and the benefits the change will have.
  • Most applicable for organizational messages during the implementation stage.
  • To reduce anxiety over change initiatives, improve buy-in, and increase adoption by helping employees develop skills and behaviors needed to perform effectively.
Video Message A prerecorded short video clip designed for either simultaneous broadcast or just-in-time viewing. Can be sent over email or mobile or uploaded to a company portal/intranet.
  • Positive messaging to convey enthusiasm for the change.
  • Details about why the organization is changing and what the benefits will be, updates on major milestone achievements, etc.
  • Most applicable for organizational messages, used on a limited basis at any point during the change.
  • Effective when the message needs to appear more personal by putting a face to the message and when it can be presented in a condensed time frame.
  • When a message needs to be delivered consistently across a variety of employees, locations, and time zones.
  • To provide updates and recognize key achievements.

Select communication channels

Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
Shift Turnover Meeting A meeting between teams or departments when a shift changes over; sometimes called a shift report. Used to communicate any relevant information from the outgoing shift to the incoming shift members.
  • Details related to the activities performed during the shift.
  • Most applicable for personal impact messages during the implementation stage to reinforce information shared using other communication mediums.
  • Where change directly impacts role expectations or performance so teams hear the same message at the same time.
Company Newsletter Electronic or hardcopy newsletter published by the company. Contains timely updates on company information.
  • Overarching change details.
  • Information that has already been communicated through other mediums.
  • Varies with the change stage and newsletter frequency.
  • Most applicable for organizational messages throughout the change.
  • When the change implementation is expected to be lengthy and audiences need to be kept updated.
  • To celebrate change successes and milestone achievements.
Sign/Poster Digital or paper-based sign, graphic, or image. Includes posters, screensavers, etc.
  • Positive messaging to convey enthusiasm for the change.
  • Key dates and activities.
  • Key contacts.
  • Most applicable for organizational messages throughout the change.
  • As visual reminders in common, highly visible locations (e.g. a company bulletin board, elevator TV monitors).

1.6 Select the right channels

20 minutes

  1. Consider the different channels that were described and presented on the previous five slides. Each channel has element(s) to it that will allow it to be more beneficial based on the communication target audience, outcome, and messenger.
  2. Evenly assign the number of communication rows on tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool and input the channel that should be used.
  3. Consider if the channel will:
    • Obtain the desired outcome of the communication.
    • Be completed by the messenger(s) defined.
    • Support the target audience in understanding the key messages.
  4. If any target audience communication requires several channels, add additional rows to the planner on TAB 3.
InputOutput
  • Target audience
  • Communication outcome
  • Communication messenger(s)
  • The right channel selected to support the desired communication outcome.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

Define the communication time frame based on the initiative

Communication occurs during four of the five stages of an initiative:

01 Identify and prioritize 02 Prepare for initiative 03 Create a communication plan 04 Implement change 05 Sustain the desired outcome
Before During After
  • Communication begins with sponsors and the project team.
  • Set general expectations with project team and sponsors.
  • Outline the communication plan for the remaining stages.
  • Set specific expectations with each stakeholder group.
  • Implement the communication plan.
  • Use feedback loops to determine updates or changes to communications.
  • Communication continues as required after the change.
  • Feedback loops continue until change becomes business as usual.
Where communication needs to happen

Don’t forget: Cascade messages down through the organization to ensure those who need to deliver messages have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others. Include a mix of personal and organizational messages, but where possible, separate personal and organizational content into different communications.

Establish a frequency that aligns to the desired communication outcome

Successful communications are frequent communications.

  • The cadence of a communication is highly dependent on the objective of the communication.
  • Each target requires a different frequency as well:
    • Board Presentations > four times a year is a good frequency
    • Executive Leadership > monthly frequency
    • Organizationally > annually and when necessary
    • Organization Crises > daily, if not hourly
    • IT Initiatives and Projects > weekly
    • IT Teams > weekly, if not daily

Tech Team Frequency for Discussing Goals

“When goals are talked about weekly, teams are nearly 3X more likely to feel confident hitting them.”
– Hypercontext, 2022

Info-Tech Insight
Communications made once will always fail. Ensure there is a frequency appropriate for every communication — or do not expect the desired outcome.

1.7 Establish a frequency and time frame

30 minutes

  1. For each row in tab 3, determine how frequently that communication needs to take place and when that communication needs to be completed by.
    • Frequency: How often the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. one-time, monthly, as needed).
    • Time frame: When the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. a planned period or a specific date).
  2. When selecting the time frame, consider what dependencies need to take place prior to that communication. For example, IT employees should not be communicated with on anything that has not yet been approved by the CEO. Also consider when other communications might be taking place so the message is not lost in the noise.
  3. For frequency, the only time that a communication needs to take place once is when presenting up to senior leaders of the organization. And even then it will sometimes require more than one conversation. Be mindful of this.
InputOutput
  • The change
  • Target audience
  • Communication outcome
  • Communication channel
  • Frequency and time frame of the communication
MaterialsParticipants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

First, ensure feedback mechanisms are in place

Soliciting and acting on feedback involves employees in the decision-making process and demonstrates to them that their contributions matter.

Prior to the strategy rollout, make sure you have also established feedback mechanisms to collect feedback on both the messages delivered and how they were delivered. Some ways to collect feedback include:

  • Evaluating intranet comments and interactions (likes, etc.) if this function is enabled.
  • Measuring comprehension and satisfaction through surveys and polls.
  • Looking for themes in the feedback and questions employees bring forward to managers during in-person briefings.

Feedback Mechanisms:

  • CIO Business Vision Survey
  • Engagement Surveys
  • Focus Groups
  • Suggestion Boxes
  • Team Meetings
  • Random Sampling
  • Informal Feedback
  • Direct Feedback
  • Audience Body Language
  • Repeating the Message Back

Select metrics to measure progress on key results

There are two types of metrics that can be used to measure the impact of an internal communications strategy and progress toward strategy goals. These metrics are used to measure both outputs and outcomes.

Select metrics measuring both:
Tactical Effectiveness (Outputs) Strategic Effectiveness (Outcomes)
  • Open rate
  • Click-through rate
  • Employee sentiment
  • Participation rates
  • Physical distractions
  • Shift in behavior
  • Manager capability to communicate
  • Organizational ability to meet goals
  • Engagement
  • Turnover

Pyramid of metrics to measure process on key results

1.8 Obtain feedback and improve

20 minutes

  1. Evenly distribute the number of rows in the communication plan to all those involved. Consider a metric that would help inform whether the communication outcome was achieved.
  2. For each row, identify a feedback mechanism (slide 38) that could be used to enable the collection and confirm a successful outcome.
  3. Come back as a group and validate the feedback mechanisms selected.
  4. The important aspect here is not just to measure if the desired outcome was achieved. However, if the desired outcome is not achieved, consider what you might do to change or enable better communication to that target audience.
  5. Every communication can be better. Feedback, whether it is tactical or strategic, will help inform methods to improve future communication activities.
InputOutput
  • Communication outcome
  • Target audience
  • Communication channel
  • A mechanism to measure communication feedback and adjust future communications when necessary.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

Example of internal communications survey

Use and modify the questions below when building an internal communications survey. Use a Likert scale to gauge responses.

  1. I am satisfied with the communications at our organization.
  2. I am kept fully informed of news and updates relevant to our organization.
  3. I receive information that is relevant to me on a regular basis.
  4. I have the information I need to do my job.
  5. I know where to go to find the information I am looking for.
  6. My manager communicates with me in-person on a regular basis.
  7. I feel I can believe the information I receive from the company.
  8. I feel heard by senior leaders and know that they have received my feedback.
  9. The content and information that I receive is interesting to me.

Create an easy-to-read approach to communication

Example of an easy-to-read approach to communication

1.9 Finalize the calendar

2 hours

  1. Once the information on tabs 2 and 3 of the Communication Planner Tool has been completed, start to organize the information in an easy-to-read view.
  2. Using the annual, monthly, and weekly calendar views on tabs 3 to 5, begin to formalize the dates of when communications will take place.
  3. Following the instructions on each tab, complete one or all of the views of the communication plan. Remember, the stakeholder that makes up the target audience needs to be considered and whether this communication will overlap with any other communications.
InputOutput
  • Communication Plan on tab 2
  • Yearly, monthly, and weekly communication calendars
MaterialsParticipants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

Phase 2

Compose a Compelling Message

Activities

2.1 Craft a Pitch
2.2 Revise the Pitch

This step involves the following participants:
Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Outcomes of this step
Ability to create a clear, concise, and consistent message using best practices and a pitch framework.

Communication Any IT Initiative Effectively

Phase 1 > Phase 2 > Phase 3

Include all the following pieces in your message for an effective communication

Pieces needed in your message for effective communication

Info-Tech Insight
Time is a non-renewable resource. The message crafted must be considered a value-add communication to your audience.

Enable good communication with these components

Be Consistent Be Clear
  • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
  • Test your communication with your team or colleagues to obtain feedback before delivering to a broader audience.
  • A lack of consistency can be interpreted as an attempt at deception. This can hurt credibility and trust.
  • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
  • Choice of language is important: “Do you think this is a good idea? I think we could really benefit from your insights and experience here.” Or do you mean: “I think we should do this. I need you to do this to make it happen.”
  • Don’t use jargon.
Be Relevant Be Concise
  • Talk about what matters to the stakeholder.
  • Talk about what matters to the initiative.
  • Tailor the details of the message to each stakeholder’s specific concerns.
  • IT thinks in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.
  • IT wants to be understood, but this does not matter to stakeholders. Think: “what’s in it for them?”
  • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.
  • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
  • There is a risk of diluting your key message if you include too many other details.
  • If you provide more information than necessary, the clarity and consistency of the message can be lost.

Draft the core messages to communicate

Draft core messages communicating information consistent with the high-level communications plan. This includes the overall goal of communications, key messaging, specifics related to the change action, and customizations for each audience. It’s also important to:

  1. Hook your audience: Use a compelling introduction that ensures your target audience cares about the message. Use a statistic or another piece of information that presents the problem in a unique way.
  2. Demonstrate you can help: Let the audience know that based on the unique problem you can help. There is value to engaging and working with you further.
  3. Repeat messages several times and through several messengers and mediums throughout the change stages to ensure all audience members receive and understand the details.
  4. Write for the ear: Use concise and clear sentences, avoid technological language, and when you speak it aloud ensure it sounds like how you would normally speak.
  5. Keep messaging positive but realistic. Avoid continually telling stakeholders that “change is hard.” Instead, communicate messages around change success to positively prime the audience’s mindset (Harvard Business Review).
  6. Communicate what is meaningfully unchanged. Not everything will be impacted by the change. To help reduce fears, include information about meaningful aspects of employees’ work that will not be changing (e.g. employees are moving to report to a new manager on a new team, but the job responsibilities are staying the same).
  7. Finish with a call to action: Your concluding statement should not be a thank-you but a call to action that ignites how your audience will behave after the communication.

Components of a good pitch

Key Components of a Good Pitch
Purpose of the pitch What are you asking for? What is the desired outcome of the conversation? What three things do you want the audience to take away?
Speak to what matters to them Who is your audience and what are their biggest challenges today? What do they care? What is the “so what”? Humanize it. Start with an example of a real person.
Sell the improvement How is your solution going to solve that problem? Is your solution a pain killer or vitamin?
Show real value How will your solution create real value? How can that be measured? Give an example.
Discuss potential fears Identify and alleviate fears the stakeholder may have in working with you. Think about what they think now and what you want them to think.
Have a call to action Identify what your ask is. What are you looking for from the stakeholder? Listen and respond.
Follow up with a thank-you Did you ensure that the participants’ time was respected and appreciated? Be genuine and sincere.

Key questions to answer with change communication

To effectively communicate change, answer questions before they’re asked, whenever possible. To do this, outline at each stage of the change process what’s happening next for the audience and answer other anticipated questions. Pair key questions with core messages in change communications.

Examples of key questions by change stage include:

What is changing?
When is the change expected?
Who will be championing the change?
What are the change expectations?
Will I have input into how the change is happening?
What’s happening next?
Why are we changing?
Why is the change happening now?
What are the risks of not changing?
What will be new?
What’s in it for me?
What training will be available?
Who will be impacted?
How will I be impacted?
How will my team be impacted?
What’s happening next?
Who should I contact with questions or concerns?
How will I be updated?
How can I access more information?
Will the previous process be available throughout the new process implementation?
What needs to be done and what needs to stop to succeed?
Will I be measured on this change?
What’s happening next?
How can I access more information?
Will this change be added to key performance indicators?
How did the change implementation go?
What’s happening next?
Before change During change After change
Prepare for change Create change action and communication plan Implement change Sustain the change

2.1 Craft a pitch

20 minutes

  1. Using the set of stakeholders identified in activity 1.2, every participant takes one stakeholder.
  2. Open tab 7 of the Communication Planner Tool or use a piece of paper and create a communication message specific to that stakeholder.
  3. Select a topic from your workshop or use something you are passionate about.
  4. Consider the pitch components as a way to create your pitch. Remember to use what you have learned from the planning and composing sections of this training (in bold).
  5. Compose a three-minute pitch that you will deliver to your audience member.
InputOutput
  • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
  • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

Communication Composition Checklist

  • Did you open the communication with a statistic or other memorable piece of information?
  • Is the topic being communicated in a compelling way that engages the target audience?
  • Are there statistics or data to support the story?
  • Are the statistics and data clear so they cannot be conveyed in any other way than their intended method?
  • Are you writing in clear and concise sentences?
  • Are you avoiding any technical jargon?
  • Is the message only focused on what needs to be said? Have you removed all unnecessary components?
  • Is the content organized in priority order? Could you adapt if the presentation time is shortened?
  • Is the way the communication is written sound like how you would speak normally? Are you writing for the ear?
  • Do you have a clear call to action that the audience will be asked to complete at the end?
  • Does your communication encourage discussion with the target audience? Is the audience a part of the solution?

2.2 Revise the pitch

10 minutes

  1. Review the pitch that was created in activity 2.1.
  2. Consider what could be done to make the pitch better:
    • Concise: Identify opportunities to remove unnecessary information.
    • Clear: It uses only terms or language the target audience would understand.
    • Relevant: It matters to the target audience and the problems they face.
    • Consistent: The message could be repeated across audiences.
  3. Validate that when you say the pitch out loud, it sounds like something you would say normally when communicating with other people.
  4. Make updates to the pitch and get ready to present.
Input Output
  • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
  • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
Materials Participants
  • Communication Planner Tool
  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Download the Communication Planner Tool

Phase 3

Deliver Messages Effectively

Activities
3.1 Deliver Your Pitch
3.2 Refine and Deliver Again

This step involves the following participants:
Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Outcomes of this step
Ability to deliver the pitch in a manner that is clear and would be understood by the specific stakeholder the pitch is intended for.

Communicate Any IT Initiative Effectively

Phase 1 > Phase 2 > Phase 3

Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

Using voice and body

Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, and frame all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

Be professional and confident

State the main points of your presentation confidently. While this should be obvious, it is essential. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or a calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

Connect with your audience

Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

Avoid reading from your slides. If there is text on a slide, paraphrase it while maintaining eye contact.

Info-Tech Insight
You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren’t engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

Use clear slides that avoid distracting the audience

Which slide will be better to present?

Sample A:

Sample A

Sample B:

Sample B

3.1 Deliver your pitch

20 minutes

  1. Take ten minutes to think about how to deliver your pitch. Where will you emphasize words, speak louder, softer, lean in, stand tall, make eye contact, etc.?
  2. Group into pairs. One person is the speaker and the other the audience.
  3. Set a timer on your phone or watch.
  4. Speaker:
    1. Take a few seconds to center yourself and prepare to deliver your pitch.
    2. Deliver your pitch to Person 2. Don’t forget to use your body language and your voice to deliver.
  5. Audience:
    1. Repeats ideas back to Person 1. Are the ideas correct? Are you convinced?
    2. Identifies who the audience is. Are they correct?
  6. Reverse roles and repeat.
  7. Discuss and provide feedback to one another.
InputOutput
  • Written pitch
  • Best practices for delivering
  • An ability to deliver the pitch in a clear and concise manner that could be understood by the intended stakeholder.
  • Feedback from person 2.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Pitch framework
  • Communications Plan Tool
  • Piece of paper
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Communication Delivery Checklist

  • Are the slides clean so the audience can focus on your speaking and not on reading the context-heavy slide?
  • Have you practiced delivering the communication to team members or coaches?
  • Have you practiced delivering the communication to someone with little to no technology background?
  • Are you making yourself open to feedback and improvement opportunities?
  • If the communication is derailed from your plan, are you prepared to handle that change?
  • Can you deliver the communication without reading your notes word for word?
  • Have you adapted your voice throughout the communication to highlight specific components you want the audience to focus on?
  • Are you presenting in a way that is genuine to you and your personality?
  • Can you communicate the message within the time allotted?
  • Are you moving in an appropriate manner based on your communication (e.g. toward the screen, across the stage, hand gestures).

3.2 Refine and deliver again

1 hour

  1. Go back to what you wrote as your pitch and take ten minutes to eliminate more information to get the pitch down to two minutes based on the feedback from your original partner.
  2. Repeat the last exercise where you deliver your pitch; however, deliver it to the larger group this time.
  3. Focus on ways to adjust body language and voice to make the message more compelling.
  4. Identify if your audience is telling you anything with their body language (e.g. leaning in, leaning back). Use this to adjust as you are presenting.
  5. Have the group provide additional feedback on what was effective about the message and opportunities to further improve the message.
InputOutput
  • Three-minute pitch
  • Feedback from first delivery
  • An ability to deliver the pitch in a clear and concise manner that could be understood by the intended stakeholder.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Pitch framework
  • Communications Plan Tool
  • Piece of paper
  • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

Info-Tech Insight
Whether the CIO or a service desk technician, delivering a presentation is a fear for every role in IT. Prepare your communication to help overcome the fears that are within your control.

Research Contributors and Experts

Anuja Agrawal, National Communications Director, PwC

Anuja Agrawal
National Communications Director
PwC

Anuja is an accomplished global communications professional, with extensive experience in the insurance, banking, financial, and professional services industry in Asia, the US, and Canada. She is currently the National Communications Director at PwC Canada. Her prior work experience includes communication leadership roles at Deutsche Bank, GE, Aviva, and Veritas. Anuja works closely with senior business leaders and key stakeholders to deliver measurable results and effective change and culture building programs. Anuja has experience in both internal and external communications, including strategic leadership communication, employee engagement, PR and media management, digital and social media, M&A/change and crisis management. Anuja believes in leveraging digital tools and technology-enabled solutions combined with in-person engagement to help improve the quality of dialogue and increase interactive communication within the organization to help build an inclusive culture of belonging.

Nastaran Bisheban, Chief Technology Officer, KFC Canada

Nastaran Bisheban
Chief Technology Officer
KFC Canada

A passionate technologist and seasoned transformational leader. A software engineer and computer scientist by education, a certified Project Manager that holds an MBA in Leadership with Honors and Distinction from University of Liverpool. A public speaker on various disciplines of technology and data strategy with a Harvard Business School executive leadership program training to round it all. Challenges status quo and conventional practices; is an advocate for taking calculated risk and following the principle of continuous improvement. With multiple computer software and project management publications she is a strategic mentor and board member on various non-profit organizations. Nastaran sees the world as a better place only when everyone has a seat at the table and is an active advocate for diversity and inclusion.

Heidi Davidson, Co-founder & CEO, Galvanize Worldwide and Galvanize On Demand

Heidi Davidson
Co-founder & CEO
Galvanize Worldwide and Galvanize On Demand

Dr. Heidi Davidson is the Co-Founder and CEO of Galvanize Worldwide, the largest distributed network of marketing and communications experts in the world. She also is the Co-Founder and CEO of Galvanize On Demand, a tech platform that matches marketing and communications freelancers with client projects. Now with 167 active experts, the Galvanize team delivers startup advisory work, outsourced marketing, training, and crisis communications to organizations of all sizes. Before Galvanize, Heidi spent four years as part of the turnaround team at BlackBerry as the Chief Communications Officer and SVP of Corporate Marketing, where she helped the company move from a device manufacturer to a security software provider.

Eli Gladstone, Co-founder, Speaker Labs

Eli Gladstone
Co-Founder
Speaker Labs

Eli is a Co-Founder of Speaker Labs. He has spent over 6 years helping countless individuals overcome their public speaking fears and communicate with clarity and confidence. When he's not coaching others on how to build and deliver the perfect presentation, you'll probably find him reading some weird books, teaching his kids how to ski or play tennis, or trying to develop a good enough jumpshot to avoid being a liability on the basketball court.

Francisco Mahfuz, Keynote Speaker & Storytelling Coach

Francisco Mahfuz
Keynote Speaker & Storytelling Coach

Francisco Mahfuz has been telling stories in front of audiences for a decade, and even became a National Champion of public speaking. Today, Francisco is a keynote speaker and storytelling coach and offers communication training to individuals and international organisations, and has worked with organisations like Pepsi, HP, the United Nations, Santander and Cornell University. He's the author of Bare: A Guide to Brutally Honest Public Speaking, the host of The Storypowers Podcast, and he’s been part of the IESE MBA communications course since 2020. He's received a BA in English Literature from Birkbeck University in London.

Sarah Shortreed, EVP & CTO, ATCO Ltd.

Sarah Shortreed
EVP & CTO
ATCO Ltd.

Sarah Shortreed is ATCO’s Executive Vice President and Chief Technology Officer. Her responsibilities include leading ATCO’s Information Technology (IT) function as it continues to drive agility and collaboration throughout ATCO’s global businesses and expanding and enhancing its enterprise IT strategy, including establishing ATCO’s technology roadmap for the future. Ms. Shortreed's skill and expertise are drawn from her more than 30-year career that spans many industries and includes executive roles in business consulting, complex multi-stakeholder programs, operations, sales, customer relationship management and product management. She was recently the Chief Information Officer at Bruce Power and has previously worked at BlackBerry, IBM and Union Gas. She sits on the Board of Governors for the University of Western Ontario and is the current Chair of the Chief Information Officer (CIO) Committee at the Conference Board of Canada.

Eric Silverberg, Co-Founder Speaker Labs

Eric Silverberg
Co-Founder
Speaker Labs

Eric is a Co-Founder of Speaker Labs and has helped thousands of people build their public speaking confidence and become more dynamic and engaging communicators. When he's not running workshops to help people grow in their careers, there's a good chance you'll find him with his wife and dog, drinking Diet Coke and rewatching iconic episodes of the reality TV show Survivor! He's such a die-hard fan, that you'll probably see him playing the game one day.

Stephanie Stewart, Communications Officer & DR Coordinator, Info Security Services Simon Fraser University

Stephanie Stewart
Communications Officer & DR Coordinator
Info Security Services Simon Fraser University

Steve Strout, President, Miovision Technologies

Steve Strout
President
Miovision Technologies

Mr. Strout is a recognized and experienced technology leader with extensive experience in delivering value. He has successfully led business and technology transformations by leveraging many dozens of complex global SFDC, Oracle and/or SAP projects. He is especially adept at leading what some call “Project Rescues” – saving people’s careers where projects have gone awry; always driving "on-time and on-budget.“ Mr. Strout is the current President of Miovision Technologies and the former CEO and board member of the Americas’ SAP Users’ Group (ASUG). His wealth of practical knowledge comes from 30 years of extensive experience in many CxO and executive roles at some prestigious organizations such as Vonage, Sabre, BlackBerry, Shred-it, The Thomson Corporation (now Thomson Reuters) and Morris Communications. Served on Boards including Customer Advisory Boards of Apple, AgriSource Data, Dell, Edgewise, EMC, LogiSense, Socrates.ai, Spiro Carbon Group, and Unifi.

Info-Tech Research Group Contributors:
Sanchia Benedict, Research Lead
Koula Bouloukos, Production Manager
Antony Chan, Executive Counsellor
Janice Clatterbuck, Executive Counsellor
Ahmed Jowar, Research Specialist
Dave Kish, Practice Lead
Nick Kozlo, Senior Research Analyst
Heather Leier Murray, Senior Research Analyst
Amanda Mathieson, Research Director
Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead
Joe Meier, Executive Counsellor
Andy Neill, AVP, Research
Thomas Randall, Research Director

Plus an additional two contributors who wish to remain anonymous.

Related Info-Tech Research

Boardroom Presentation Review

  • You will come away with a clear, concise, and compelling board presentation that IT leaders can feel confident presenting in front of their board of directors.
  • Add improvements to your current board presentation in terms of visual appeal and logical flow to ensure it resonates with your board of directors.
  • Leverage a best-of-breed presentation template.

Build a Better Manager

  • Management skills training is needed, but organizations are struggling to provide training that makes a long-term difference in the skills managers actually use in their day to day.
  • Many training programs are ineffective because they offer the wrong content, deliver it in a way that is not memorable, and are not aligned with the IT department’s business objectives.

Crisis Communication Guides

During a crisis it is important to communicate to employees through messages that convey calm and are transparent and tailored to your audience. Use the Crisis Communication Guides to:

  • Draft a communication strategy.
  • Tailor messages to your audience.
  • Draft employee crisis communications.

Use this guide to equip leadership to communicate in times of crisis.

Bibliography

Gallo, Carmine. "How Great Leaders Communicate." Harvard Business Review. 23 November 2022.

Gallup. State of the American Workplace Report. Washington, D.C.: Gallup, 6 February 2020.

Guthrie, Georgina. “Why Good Internal Communications Matter Now More than Ever.” Nulab. 15 Dec. 2021.

Hypercontext. “The State of High Performing Teams in Tech 2022.” Hypercontext. 2022.

Lambden, Duncan. “The Importance of Effective Workplace Communication – Statistics for 2022.” Expert Market. 13 June 2022.

McCreary, Gale & WikiHow. “How to Measure the Effectiveness of Communication: 14 Steps.” WikiHow.

Nowak, Marcin. “Top 7 Communication Problems in the Workplace.” MIT Enterprise Forum CEE, 2021.

Nunn, Philip. “Messaging That Works: A Unique Framework to Maximize Communication Success.” iabc.

Picincu, Andra. “How to Measure Effective Communications.” Small Business Chron. 12 January 2021.

Price. David A. “Pixar Story Rules.”

Prosci. “Best Practices in Change Management 2020 Edition.” Prosci, 2020.

Roberts, Dan. “How CIOs Become Visionary Communicators.” CIO, 2019.

Schlesinger, Mark. “Why building effective communication skill in IT is incredibly important.”

Skills Framework for the Information Age, “Mapping SFIA Levels of Responsibilities to Behavioural Factors.” Skills Framework for the Information Age, 2021.

St. James, Halina. Talk It Out. Podium, 2005.

TeamState. “Communication in the Workplace Statistics: Importance and Effectiveness in 2022.” TeamStage, 2022.

Walters, Katlin. “Top 5 Ways to Measure Internal Communication.” Intranet Connections, 30 May 2019.

Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}544|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $5,734 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Engage
  • Parent Category Link: /engage
  • IT’s performance and stakeholder satisfaction with IT services hinge on IT’s ability to attract and retain top talent and to motivate teams to go above and beyond.
  • With the growing IT job market, turnover is a serious threat to IT’s ability to deliver seamless value and continuously drive innovation.
  • Engagement initiatives are often seen as being HR’s responsibility; however, IT leadership needs to take accountability for the retention and productivity of their employees in order to drive business value.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Engagement is a two-way street. Initiatives must address a known need and be actively sought by employees – not handed down from management.
  • Engagement initiatives are useless unless they target the right issues. It can be tempting to focus on the latest perks and gadgets and ignore difficult issues. Use a systematic approach to uncover and tackle the real problems.
  • It’s time for IT leadership to step up. IT leaders have a much bigger impact on IT staff engagement than HR ever can. Leverage this power to lead your team to peak performance.

Impact and Result

  • Info-Tech engagement diagnostics and accompanying tools will help you perform a deep dive into the root causes of disengagement on your team.
  • The guidance that accompanies Info-Tech’s tools will help you avoid common engagement program pitfalls and empower IT leaders to take charge of their own team’s engagement.

Build an IT Employee Engagement Program Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to discover why engagement is critical to IT performance, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand how our tools will help you construct an effective employee engagement program.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Measure employee engagement

Use Info-Tech's Pulse or Full Engagement Surveys to measure employee engagement.

  • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 1: Measure Employee Engagement
  • Engagement Strategy Record
  • Engagement Communication Template

2. Analyze results and ideate solutions

Understand the drivers of engagement that are important for your team, and involve your staff in brainstorming engagement initiatives.

  • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 2: Analyze Results and Ideate Solutions
  • Engagement Survey Results Interpretation Guide
  • Full Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide
  • Pulse Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide
  • Focus Group Facilitation Guide Driver Definitions
  • One-on-One Manager Meeting Worksheet

3. Select and implement engagement initiatives

Select engagement initiatives for maximal impact, create an action plan, and establish open and ongoing communication about engagement with your team.

  • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 3: Select and Implement Engagement Initiatives
  • Summary of Interdepartmental Engagement Initiatives
  • Engagement Progress One-Pager
[infographic]

Workshop: Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 (Preparation) Run Engagement Survey

The Purpose

Select and run your engagement survey prior to the workshop.

Key Benefits Achieved

Receive an in-depth report on your team’s engagement drivers to form the basis of your engagement strategy.

Activities

1.1 Select engagement survey.

1.2 Identify engagement program goals and metrics.

1.3 Run engagement survey.

Outputs

Full or Pulse engagement survey report

Engagement survey results interpretation guide

2 Explore Engagement

The Purpose

To understand the current state of engagement and prepare to discuss the drivers behind it with your staff.

Key Benefits Achieved

Empower your leadership team to take charge of their own teams’ engagement.

Activities

2.1 Review engagement survey results.

2.2 Finalize focus group agendas.

2.3 Train managers.

Outputs

Customized focus group agendas

3 Hold Focus Groups

The Purpose

Establish an open dialogue with your staff to understand what would improve their engagement.

Key Benefits Achieved

Employee-generated initiatives have the greatest chance at success.

Activities

3.1 Identify priority drivers.

3.2 Identify engagement KPIs.

3.3 Brainstorm engagement initiatives.

3.4 Vote on initiatives within teams.

Outputs

Summary of focus groups results

Identified engagement initiatives

Identified engagement initiatives

4 Select and Plan Initiatives

The Purpose

Learn the characteristics of successful engagement initiatives and build execution plans for each.

Key Benefits Achieved

Choose initiatives with the greatest impact on your team’s engagement, and ensure you have the necessary resources for success.

Activities

4.1 Select engagement initiatives with IT leadership.

4.2 Create initiative project plans.

4.3 Present project plans.

4.4 Define implementation checkpoints.

4.5 Develop communications plan.

4.6 Define strategy for ongoing engagement monitoring.

Outputs

Engagement project plans

Implementation and communication checkpoints

Further surveys planned (optional)

5 Additional Leadership Training

The Purpose

Select training modules that best address your team’s needs from Info-Tech’s modular leadership training program.

Key Benefits Achieved

Arm your IT leadership team with the key skills of effective leadership, tailored to their existing experience level.

Activities

5.1 Adopting an Integrated Leadership Mindset

5.2 Optimizing Talent Leadership Practices

5.3 Driving Diversity & Inclusion

5.4 Fortifying Internal Stakeholder Relations

5.5 Engaging Executives and the Board

5.6 Crafting Your Leadership Brand

5.7 Crafting and Delivering Compelling Presentations

5.8 Communication & Difficult Conversations

5.9 Conflict Management

5.10 Performance Management

5.11 Feedback & Coaching

5.12 Creating a Culture of Personal Accountability

Outputs

Develop the skills to lead resourcefully in times of uncertainty

Apply leadership behaviors across enterprise initiatives to deploy and develop talent successfully

Develop diversity and inclusion practices that turn the IT function and leaders into transformative champions of inclusion

Identify elements of effective partnering to maximize the impact of internal interactions

Understand the major obstacles to CEO and board relevance and uncover the keys to elevating your internal executive profile

Develop a leadership brand statement that demonstrates leadership competency and is aligned with the brand, mission, vision, and goals of the organization

Identify the components of effective presentations and hone your presentation skills

Gain the skills to confront and drive solutions from difficult situations

Develop strategies to engage in conflict constructively and reach a resolution that benefits the team or organization

Learn to identify the root causes of low performance and develop the skills to guide employees through the process of improvement

Adopt a behavior-focused coaching model to help managers sustain and apply effective coaching principles

Understand how and when to encourage autonomy and how to empower employees to take success into their own hands

Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}558|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
  • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
  • Contacts fail to convert to leads because messaging fails to resonate with buyers.
  • Products fail to reach targets given shallow understanding of buyer needs.
  • Sellers' emails go unopened and attempts at discovery fail due to no understanding of buyer challenges, pain points, and needs.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Marketing leaders in possession of well-researched and up-to-date buyer personas and journeys dramatically improve product market fit, lead gen, and sales results.
  • Success starts with product, marketing, and sales alignment on targeted personas.
  • Speed to deploy is enabled via initial buyer persona attribute discovery internally.
  • However, ultimate success requires buyer interviews, especially for the buyer journey.
  • Leading marketers update journey maps every six months as disruptive events such as COVID-19 and new media and tech platform advancements require continual innovation.

Impact and Result

  • Reduce time and treasure wasted chasing the wrong prospects.
  • Improve product-market fit.
  • Increase open and click-through rates in your lead gen engine.
  • Perform more effective sales discovery and increase eventual win rates.

Create a Buyer Persona and Journey Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Our Executive Brief summarizes the challenges faced when buyer persona and journeys are ill-defined. It describes the attributes of, and the benefits that accrue from, a well-defined persona and journey and the key steps to take to achieve success.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Drive an aligned initial draft of buyer persona

Define and align your team on target persona, outline steps to capture and document a robust buyer persona and journey, and capture current team buyer knowledge.

  • Buyer Persona Creation Template
  • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

2. Interview buyers and validate persona and journey

Hold initial buyer interviews, test initial results, and continue with interviews.

3. Prepare communications and educate stakeholders

Consolidate interview findings, present to product, marketing, and sales teams. Work with them to apply to product design, marketing launch/campaigning, and sales and customer success enablement.

  • Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template
[infographic]

Workshop: Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Align Team, Identify Persona, and Document Current Knowledge

The Purpose

Organize, drive alignment on target persona, and capture initial views.

Key Benefits Achieved

Steering committee and project team roles and responsibilities clarified.

Product, marketing, and sales aligned on target persona.

Build initial team understanding of persona.

Activities

1.1 Outline a vision for buyer persona and journey creation and identify stakeholders.

1.2 Identify buyer persona choices and settle on an initial target.

1.3 Document team knowledge about buyer persona (and journey where possible).

Outputs

Documented steering committee and working team

Executive Brief on personas and journey

Personas and initial targets

Documented team knowledge

2 Validate Initial Work and Identify Buyer Interviewees

The Purpose

Build list of buyer interviewees, finalize interview guide, and validate current findings with analyst input.

Key Benefits Achieved

Interview efficiently using 75-question interview guide.

Gain analyst help in persona validation, reducing workload.

Activities

2.1 Share initial insights with covering industry analyst.

2.2 Hear from industry analyst their perspectives on the buyer persona attributes.

2.3 Reconcile differences; update “current understanding.”

2.4 Identify interviewee types by segment, region, etc.

Outputs

Analyst-validated initial findings

Target interviewee types

3 Schedule and Hold Buyer Interviews

The Purpose

Validate current persona hypothesis and flush out those attributes only derived from interviews.

Key Benefits Achieved

Get to a critical mass of persona and journey understanding quickly.

Activities

3.1 Identify actual list of 15-20 interviewees.

3.2 Hold interviews and use interview guides over the course of weeks.

3.3 Hold review session after initial 3-4 interviews to make adjustments.

3.4 Complete interviews.

Outputs

List of interviewees; calls scheduled

Initial review – “are you going in the right direction?”

Completed interviews

4 Summarize Findings and Provide Actionable Guidance to Colleagues

The Purpose

Summarize persona and journey attributes and provide activation guidance to team.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of product market fit requirements, messaging, and marketing, and sales asset content.

Activities

4.1 Summarize findings.

4.2 Create action items for supporting team, e.g. messaging, touch points, media spend, assets.

4.3 Convene steering committee/executives and working team for final review.

4.4 Schedule meetings with colleagues to action results.

Outputs

Complete findings

Action items for team members

Plan for activation

5 Measure Impact and Results

The Purpose

Measure results, adjust, and improve.

Key Benefits Achieved

Activation of outcomes; measured results.

Activities

5.1 Review final copy, assets, launch/campaign plans, etc.

5.2 Develop/review implementation plan.

5.3 Reconvene team to review results.

Outputs

Activation review

List of suggested next steps

Further reading

Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

Make it easier to market, sell, and achieve product-market fit with deeper buyer understanding.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

B2B marketers without documented personas and journeys often experience the following:

  • Contacts fail to convert to leads because messaging fails to resonate with buyers.
  • Products fail to reach targets given shallow understanding of buyer needs.
  • Sellers’ emails go unopened, and attempts at discovery fail due to no understanding of buyer challenges, pain points, and needs.

Without a deeper understanding of buyer needs and how they buy, B2B marketers will waste time and precious resources targeting the incorrect personas.

Common Obstacles

Despite being critical elements, organizations struggle to build personas due to:

  • A lack of alignment and collaboration among marketing, product, and sales.
  • An internal focus; or a lack of true customer centricity.
  • A lack of tools and techniques for building personas and buyer journeys.

In today’s Agile development environment, combined with the pressure to generate revenues quickly, high tech marketers often skip the steps necessary to go deeper to build buyer understanding.

SoftwareReviews’ Approach

With a common framework and target output, clients will:

  • Align marketing, sales, and product, and collaborate together to share current knowledge on buyer personas and journeys.
  • Target 12-15 customers and prospects to interview and validate insights. Share that with customer-facing staff.
  • Activate the insights for more customer-centric lead generation, product development, and selling.

Clients who activate findings from buyer personas and journeys will see a 50% results improvement.

SoftwareReviews Insight:
Buyer personas and buyer journeys are essential ingredients in go-to-market success, as they inform for product, marketing, sales, and customer success who we are targeting and how to engage with them successfully.

Buyer personas and journeys: A go-to-market critical success factor

Marketers – large and small – will fail to optimize product-market fit, lead generation, and sales effectiveness without well-defined buyer personas and a buyer journey.

Critical Success Factors of a Successful G2M Strategy:

  • Opportunity size and business case
  • Buyer personas and journey
  • Competitively differentiated product hypothesis
  • Buyer-validated commercial concept
  • Sales revenue plan and program cost budget
  • Consolidated communications to steering committee

Jeff Golterman, Managing Director, SoftwareReviews Advisory

“44% of B2B marketers have already discovered the power of Personas.”
– Hasse Jansen, Boardview.io!, 2016

Documenting buyer personas enables success beyond marketing

Documenting buyer personas has several essential benefits to marketing, sales, and product teams:

  • Achieve a better understanding of your target buyer – by building a detailed buyer persona for each type of buyer and keeping it fresh, you take a giant step toward becoming a customer-centric organization.
  • Team alignment on a common definition – will happen when you build buyer personas collaboratively and among those teams that touch the customer.
  • Improved lead generation – increases dramatically when messaging and marketing assets across your lead generation engine better resonate with buyers because you have taken the time to understand them deeply.
  • More effective selling – is possible when sellers apply persona development output to their interactions with prospects and customers.
  • Better product-market fit – increases when product teams more deeply understand for whom they are designing products. Documenting buyer challenges, pain points, and unmet needs gives product teams what they need to optimize product adoption.

“It’s easier buying gifts for your best friend or partner than it is for a stranger, right? You know their likes and dislikes, you know the kind of gifts they’ll have use for, or the kinds of gifts they’ll get a kick out of. Customer personas work the same way, by knowing what your customer wants and needs, you can present them with content targeted specifically to their wants and needs.”
– Emma Bilardi, Product Marketing Alliance, 2020

Buyer understanding activates just about everything

Without the deep buyer insights that persona and journey capture enables, marketers are suboptimized.

Buyer Persona and Journey

  • Product design
  • Customer targeting
  • Personalization
  • Messaging
  • Content marketing
  • Lead gen & scoring
  • Sales Effectiveness
  • Customer retention

“Marketing eutopia is striking the all-critical sweet spot that adds real value and makes customers feel recognized and appreciated, while not going so far as to appear ‘big brother’. To do this, you need a deep understanding of your audience coming from a range of different data sets and the capability to extract meaning.”
– Plexure, 2020

Does your organization need buyer persona and journey updating?

“Yes,” if experiencing one or more key challenges:

  • Sales time is wasted on unqualified leads
  • Website abandon rates are high
  • Lead gen engine click-through rates are low
  • Ideal customer profile is ill defined
  • Marketing asset downloads are low
  • Seller discovery with prospects is ineffective
  • Sales win/loss rates drop due to poor product-market fit
  • Higher than desired customer churn

SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
Marketers developing buyer personas and journeys that lack agreement among Marketing, Sales, and Product of personas to target will squander precious time and resources throughout the customer targeting and acquisition process.

Outcomes and benefits

Building your buyer persona and journey using our methodology will enable:

  • Greater stakeholder alignment – when marketing, product, and sales agree on personas, less time is wasted on targeting alternate personas.
  • Improved product-market fit – when buyers see both pain-relieving features and value-based pricing, “because you asked vs. guessed,” win rates increase.
  • Greater open and click-through rates – because you understood buyer pain points and motivations for solution seeking, you’ll see higher visits and engagement with your lead gen engine, and because you asked “what asset types do you find most helpful” your CTAs become ”lead-gen magnets” because you’ve offered the right asset types in your content marketing strategy.
  • More qualified leads – because you defined a more accurate ideal customer profile (ICP) and your lead scoring algorithm has improved, sellers see more qualified leads.
  • Increased sales cycle velocity – since you learned from personas their content and engagement preferences and what collateral types they need during the down-funnel sales discussions, sales calls are more productive and sales cycles shrink.

Our methodology for buyer persona and journey creation

1. Document Team Knowledge of Buyer Persona and Drive Alignment 2. Interview Target Buyer Prospects and Customers 3. Create Outputs and Apply to Marketing, Sales, and Product
Phase Steps
  1. Outline a vision for buyer persona and journey creation and identify stakeholders.
  2. Pull stakeholders together, identify initial buyer persona, and begin to document team knowledge about buyer persona (and journey where possible).
  3. Validate with industry and marketing analyst’s initial buyer persona, and identify list of buyer interviewees.
  1. Hold interviews and document and share findings.
  2. Validate initial drafts of buyer persona and create initial documented buyer journey. Review findings among key stakeholders, steering committee, and supporting analysts.
  3. Complete remaining interviews.
  1. Summarize findings.
  2. Convene steering committee/exec. and working team for final review.
  3. Communicate to key stakeholders in product, marketing, sales, and customer success for activation.
Phase Outcomes
  1. Steering committee and team selection
  2. Team insights about buyer persona documented
  3. Buyer persona validation with industry and marketing analysts
  4. Sales, marketing, and product alignment
  1. Interview guide
  2. Target interviewee list
  3. Buyer-validated buyer persona
  4. Buyer journey documented with asset types, channels, and “how buyers buy” fully documented
  1. Education deck on buyer persona and journey ready for use with all stakeholders: product, field marketing, sales, executives, customer success, partners
  2. Activation will update product-market fit, optimize lead gen, and improve sales effectiveness

Our approach provides interview guides and templates to help rebuild buyer persona

Our methodology will enable you to align your team on why it’s important to capture the most important attributes of buyer persona including:

  • Functional – helps you find and locate your target personas
  • Emotive – deepens team understanding of buyer initiatives, motivations for seeking alternatives, challenges they face, pain points for your offerings to address, and terminology that describes the “space”
  • Solution – enables greater product market fit
  • Behavioral – clarifies how to communicate with personas and understand their content preferences
Functional – “to find them”
Job Role Title Org. Chart Dynamics Buying Center Firmographics
Emotive – “what they do and jobs to be done”
Initiatives: What programs/projects the persona is tasked with and their feelings and aspirations about these initiatives. Motivations? Build credibility? Get promoted? Challenges: Identify the business issues, problems, and pain points that impede attainment of objectives. What are their fears, uncertainties, and doubts about these challenges? Buyer Need: They may have multiple needs; which need is most likely met with the offering? Terminology: What are the keywords/phrases they organically use to discuss the buyer need or business issue?
Decision Criteria – “how they decide”
Buyer Role: List decision-making criteria and power level. The five common buyer roles are champion, influencer, decision maker, user, and ratifier (purchaser/negotiator). Evaluation and Decision Criteria: Which lens – strategic, financial, or operational – does the persona evaluate the impact of purchase through?
Solution Attributes – “what does the ideal solution look like”
Steps in “Jobs to Be Done” Elements of the “Ideal Solution” Business outcomes from ideal solution Opportunity scope; other potential users Acceptable price for value delivered Alternatives that see consideration Solution sourcing: channel, where to buy
Behavioral Attributes – “how to approach them successfully”
Content Preferences: List the persona’s content preferences – blog, infographic, demo, video – vs. long-form assets (e.g. white paper, presentation, analyst report). Interaction Preferences: Which are preferred among in-person meetings, phone calls, emails, videoconferencing, conducting research via Web, mobile, and social? Watering Holes: Which physical or virtual places do they go to network or exchange info with peers (e.g. LinkedIn)?

Buyer journeys are constantly shifting

If you didn’t remap buyer journeys in 2021, you may be losing to competitors that did. Leaders remap buyer journey frequently.

  • The multi-channel buyer journey is constantly changing. Today’s B2B buyer uses industry research sites, vendor content marketing assets, software reviews sites, contacts with vendor salespeople, events participation, peer networking, consultants, emails, social media sites, and electronic media to research purchasing decisions.
  • COVID-19 has dramatically decreased face-to-face interaction. We estimate a B2B buyer spent 20-25% more time online in 2021 than pre-COVID-19 researching software buying decisions. This has diminished the importance of face-to-face selling and given dramatic rise to digital selling and outbound marketing.
  • Content marketing has exploded, but without mapping the buyer journey and knowing where – by channel –and when – by buyer journey step – to offer content marketing assets, we will fail to convert prospects into buyers.

“~2/3 of [B2B] buyers prefer remote human interactions or digital self-service.” And during Aug. ‘20 to Feb. ‘21, use of digital self-service to interact with sales reps leapt by more than 10% for both researching and evaluating new suppliers.”
– Liz Harrison, Dennis Spillecke, Jennifer Stanley, and Jenny Tsai McKinsey & Company, 2021

SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
Marketers are advised to update their buyer journey annually and with greater frequency when the human vs. digital mix is affected due to events such as COVID-19 and as emerging media such as AR shifts asset-type usage and engagement options.

Our approach helps you define the buyer journey

Because marketing leaders need to reach buyers through the right channel with the right message at the right time during their decision cycle, you’ll benefit by using questionnaires that enable you to build the below easily and quickly.

You’ll be more successful by following our overall guidance

Overarching insight

Buyer personas and buyer journeys are essential ingredients in go-to-market success, as they inform for product, marketing, sales, and customer success who we are targeting and how to engage with them successfully.

Align Your Team

Marketers developing buyer personas and journeys that lack agreement among Marketing, Sales, and Product of personas to target will squander precious time and resources throughout the customer targeting and acquisition process.

Jump-Start Persona Development

Marketing leaders leverage the buyer persona knowledge not only from in-house experts in areas such as sales and executives but from analysts that speak with their buyers each and every day.

Buyer Interviews Are a Must

While leaders will get a fast start by interviewing sellers, executives, and analysts, you will fail to craft the right messages, build the right marketing assets, and design the best buyer journey if you skip buyer interviews.

Watch for Disruption

Leaders will update their buyer journey annually and with greater frequency when the human vs. digital mix is effected due to events such as COVID-19 and as emerging media such as AR and VR shifts the way buyers engage.

Advanced Buyer Journey Discovery

Digital marketers that ramp up lead gen engine capabilities to capture “wins” and measure engagement back through the lead gen and nurturing engines will build a more data-driven view of the buyer journey. Target to build this advanced capability in your initial design.

Tools and templates to speed your success

This blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you gather team insights, interview customers and prospects, and summarize results for ease in communications.

To support your buyer persona and journey creation, we’ve created the enclosed tools

Buyer Persona Creation Template

A PowerPoint template to aid the capture and summarizing of your team’s insights on the buyer persona.

Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

For interviewing customers and prospects, this tool is designed to help you interview personas and summarize results for up to 15 interviewees.

Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

A PowerPoint template into which you can drop your buyer persona and journey interviewees list and summary findings.

SoftwareReviews offers two levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

"Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

The "do-it-yourself" step-by-step instructions begin with Phase 1.

Guided Implementation

"Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

A Guided Implementation is a series of analysts inquiries with you and your team.

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout each option.

Guided Implementation

A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

For guidance on marketing applications, we can arrange a discussion with an Info-Tech analyst.

Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

What does our GI on buyer persona and journey mapping look like?

Drive an Aligned Initial Draft of Buyer Persona

  • Call #1: Collaborate on vision for buyer persona and the buyer journey. Review templates and sample outputs. Identify your team.
  • Call #2: Review work in progress on capturing working team knowledge of buyer persona elements.
  • Call #3: (Optional) Review Info-Tech’s research-sourced persona insights.
  • Call #4: Validate the persona WIP with Info-Tech analysts. Review buyer interview approach and target list.

Interview Buyers and Validate Persona and Journey

  • Call #5: Revise/review interview guide and final interviewee list; schedule interviews.
  • Call #6: Review interim interview finds; adjust interview guide.
  • Call #7: Use interview findings to validate/update persona and build journey map.
  • Call #8: Add supporting analysts to final stakeholder review.

Prepare Communications and Educate Stakeholders

  • Call #9: Review output templates completed with final persona and journey findings.
  • Call #10: Add supporting analysts to stakeholder education meetings for support and help with addressing questions/issues.

Workshop overview

Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Day1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
Align Team, Identify Persona, and Document Current Knowledge Validate Initial Work and Identify Buyer Interviewees Schedule and Hold Buyer interviews Summarize Findings and Provide Actionable Guidance to Colleagues Measure Impact and Results
Activities

1.1 Outline a vision for buyer persona and journey creation and identify stakeholders.

1.2 Identify buyer persona choices and settle on an initial target.

1.3 Document team knowledge about buyer persona (and journey where possible).

2.1 Share initial insights with covering industry analyst.

2.2 Hear from industry analyst their perspectives on the buyer persona attributes.

2.3 Reconcile differences; update “current understanding.”

2.4 Identify interviewee types by segment, region, etc.

3.1 Identify actual list of 15-20 interviewees.

A gap of up to a week for scheduling of interviews.

3.2 Hold interviews and use interview guides (over the course of weeks).

3.3 Hold review session after initial 3-4 interviews to make adjustments.

3.4 Complete interviews.

4.1 Summarize findings.

4.2 Create action items for supporting team, e.g. messaging, touch points, media spend, assets.

4.3 Convene steering committee/exec. and working team for final review.

4.4 Schedule meetings with colleagues to action results.

5.1 Review final copy, assets, launch/campaign plans, etc.

5.2 Develop/review implementation plan.

A period of weeks will likely intervene to execute and gather results.

5.3 Reconvene team to review results.

Deliverables
  1. Documented steering committee and working team
  2. Executive Brief on personas and journey
  3. Personas and initial targets
  4. Documented team knowledge
  1. Analyst-validated initial findings
  2. Target interviewee types
  1. List of interviewees; calls scheduled
  2. Initial review – “are we going in the right direction?”
  3. Completed interviews
  1. Complete findings
  2. Action items for team members
  3. Plan for activation
  1. Activation review
  2. List of suggested next steps

Phase 1
Drive an Aligned Initial Draft of Buyer Persona

This Phase walks you through the following activities:

  • Develop an understanding of what comprises a buyer persona and journey, including their importance to overall go-to-market strategy and execution.
  • Sample outputs.

This Phase involves the following stakeholders:

  • Program leadership
  • Product Marketing
  • Product Management
  • Representative(s) from Sales
  • Executive Leadership

1.1 Establish the team and align on shared vision

Input

  • Typically a joint recognition that buyer personas have not been fully documented.
  • Identify working team members/participants (see below), and an executive sponsor.

Output

  • Communication of team members involved and the make-up of steering committee and working team
  • Alignment of team members on a shared vision of “Why Build Buyer Personas and Journey” and what key attributes define both.

Materials

  • N/A

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • CMO/Sponsoring Executive Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
  • SoftwareReviews marketing analyst

60 minutes

  1. Schedule inquiry with working team members and walk the team through the Buyer Persona and Journey Executive Brief PowerPoint presentation.
  2. Optional: Have the (SoftwareReviews Advisory) SRA analyst walk the team through the Buyer Persona and Journey Executive Brief PowerPoint presentation as part of your session.

Review the Create a Buyer Persona Executive Brief (Slides 3-14)

1.2 Document team knowledge of buyer persona

Input

  • Working team member knowledge

Output

  • Initial draft of your buyer persona

Materials

  • Buyer Persona Creation Template

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • CMO/Sponsoring Executive (optional)
  • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

2-3 sessions of 60 minutes each

  1. Schedule meeting with working team members and, using the Buyer Persona Template, lead the team in a discussion that documents current team knowledge of the target buyer persona.
  2. Lead the team to prioritize an initial, single, most important persona and to collaborate to complete the template (and later, the buyer journey). Once the team learns the process for working on the initial persona, the development of additional personas will become more efficient.
  3. Place the PowerPoint template in a shared drive for team collaboration. Expect to schedule several 60-minute meets. Quicken collaboration by encouraging team to “do their homework” by sharing persona knowledge within the shared drive version of the template. Your goal is to get to an initial agreed upon version that can be shared for additional validation with industry analyst(s) in the next step.

Download the Buyer Persona Creation Template

1.3 Validate with industry analysts

Input

  • Identify gaps in persona from previous steps

Output

  • Further validated buyer persona

Materials

  • Bring your Buyer Persona Creation Template to the meeting to share with analysts

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • CMO/Sponsoring Executive (Optional)
  • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
  • Info-Tech analyst covering your product category and SoftwareReviews marketing analyst

30 minutes

  1. Schedule meeting with working team members and discuss which persona areas require further validation from an Info-Tech analyst who has worked closely with those buyers within your persona.

60 minutes

  1. Schedule an inquiry with the appropriate Info-Tech analyst and SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst to share current findings and see:
    1. Info-Tech analyst provide content feedback given what they know about your target persona and product category.
    2. SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst provide feedback on persona approach and to coach any gaps or important omissions.
  2. Tabulate results and update your persona summary. At this point you will likely require additional validation through interviews with customers and prospects.

1.4 Identify interviewees and prepare for interviews

Input

  • Identify segments within which you require persona knowledge
  • Understand your persona insight gaps

Output

  • List of interviewees

Materials

  • Interviewee recording template on following slide
  • Interview guide questions found within the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and data Capture Tool

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

1-2 weeks

  1. Identify the types of customers and prospects that will best represent your target persona. Choose interviewees that when interviewed will inform key differences among key segments (geographies, company size, mix of customers and prospects, etc.).
  2. Recruit interviewees and schedule interviews for 45 minutes.
  3. Keep track of Interviewees using the slide following this one.
  4. In preparation for interviews, review the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool. Review the two sets of questions:
    1. Buyer Persona-Related – use to validate areas where you still have gaps in your persona, OR if you are starting with a blank persona and wish to build your personas entirely based on customer and prospect interviews.
    2. Buyer-Journey Related, which we will focus on in the next phase.

Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

The image shows a table titled ‘Interviewee List.’ A note next to the title indicates: Here you will document your interviewee list and outreach plan. A note in the Segment column indicates: Ensure you are interviewing personas across segments that will give you the insights you need, e.g. by size, by region, mix of customers and prospects. A note in the Title column reads: Vary your title types up or down in the “buying center” if you are seeking to strengthen buying center dynamics understanding. A note in the Roles column reads: Vary your role types according to decision-making roles (decision maker, influencer, ratifier, coach, user) if you are seeking to strengthen decision-making dynamics understanding.

Phase 2
Interview Buyers and Validate Persona and Journey

This Phase walks you through the following activities:

  • Developing final interview guide.
  • Interviewing buyers and customers.
  • Adjusting approach.
  • Validating buyer persona.
  • Crafting buyer journey
  • Gaining analyst feedback.

This Phase involves the following stakeholders:

  • Program leadership
  • Product Marketing
  • Representative(s) from Sales

2.1 Hold interviews

Input

  • List of interviewees
  • Final list of questions

Output

  • Buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys

Materials

  • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and data Capture Tool

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

1-2 weeks

  1. Hold interviews and adjust your interviewing approach as you go along. Uncover where you are not getting the right answers, check with working team and analysts, and adjust.

Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

2.2 Use interview findings to validate what’s needed for activation

Input

  • List of interviewees
  • Final list of questions

Output

  • Buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys
  • Stakeholder feedback that actionable insights are resulting from interviews

Materials

  • Buyer Persona Creation Template
  • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
  • SoftwareReviews marketing analyst

2 hours

  1. Convene your team, with marketing analysts, and test early findings: It’s wise to test initial interview results to check that you are getting the right insights to understand and validate key challenges, pain points, needs, and other vital areas pertaining to the buyer persona. Are the answers you are getting enabling you to complete the Summary slides for later communications and training for Sales?
  2. Check when doing buyer journey interviews that you are getting actionable answers that drive messaging, what asset types are needed, what the marketing channel mix is, and other vital insights to activate the results. Are the answers you are getting adequate to give guidance to campaigners, content marketers, and sales enablement?
  3. See the following slides for detailed questions that need to be answered satisfactorily by your team members that need to “activate” the results.

Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

2.2.1 Are you getting what you need from interviews to inform the buyer persona?

Test that you are on the right track:

  1. Are you getting the functional answers so you can guide sellers to the right roles? Can you guide marketers/campaigners to the right “Ideal Customer Profile” for lead scoring?
  2. Are you capturing the right emotive areas that will support message crafting? Solutioning? SEM/SEO?
  3. Are you capturing insights into “how they decide” so sellers are well informed on the decision-making dynamics?
  4. Are you getting a strong understanding of content, interaction preferences, and news and information sources so sellers can outreach more effectively, you can pinpoint media spend, and content marketing can create the right assets?
Functional – “to find them”
Job Role Title Org. Chart Dynamics Buying Center Firmographics
Emotive – “what they do and jobs to be done”
Initiatives: What programs/projects the persona is tasked with and their feelings and aspirations about these initiatives. Motivations? Build credibility? Get promoted? Challenges: Identify the business issues, problems, and pain points that impede attainment of objectives. What are their fears, uncertainties, and doubts about these challenges? Buyer Need: They may have multiple needs; which need is most likely met with the offering? Terminology: What are the keywords/phrases they organically use to discuss the buyer need or business issue?
Decision Criteria – “how they decide”
Buyer Role: List decision-making criteria and power level. The five common buyer roles are champion, influencer, decision maker, user, and ratifier (purchaser/negotiator). Evaluation and Decision Criteria: Which lens – strategic, financial, or operational – does the persona evaluate the impact of purchase through?
Solution Attributes – “what does the ideal solution look like”
Steps in “Jobs to Be Done” Elements of the “Ideal Solution” Business outcomes from ideal solution Opportunity scope; other potential users Acceptable price for value delivered Alternatives that see consideration Solution sourcing: channel, where to buy
Behavioral Attributes – “how to approach them successfully”
Content Preferences: List the persona’s content preferences – blog, infographic, demo, video – vs. long-form assets (e.g. white paper, presentation, analyst report). Interaction Preferences: Which are preferred among in-person meetings, phone calls, emails, videoconferencing, conducting research via Web, mobile, and social? Watering Holes: Which physical or virtual places do they go to network or exchange info with peers (e.g. LinkedIn)?

2.2.2 Are you getting what you need from interviews to support the buyer journey?

Our approach helps you define the buyer journey

Because marketing leaders need to reach buyers through the right channel with the right message at the right time during their decision cycle, you’ll benefit by using questionnaires that enable you to build the below easily and quickly.

2.3 Continue interviews

Input

  • Final adjustments to list of interview questions

Output

  • Final buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys

Materials

  • Buyer Persona Creation Template
  • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and data Capture Tool

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

1-2 weeks

  1. Continue customer and prospect interviews.
  2. Ensure you are gaining the segment perspectives needed.
  3. Complete the “Summary” columns within the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool.

Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

Phase 3
Prepare Communications and Educate Stakeholders

This Phase walks you through the following activities:

  • Creating outputs for key stakeholders
  • Communicating final findings and supporting marketing, sales, and product activation.

This Phase involves the following stakeholders:

  • Program leadership
  • Product Marketing
  • Product Management
  • Sales
  • Field Marketing/Campaign Management
  • Executive Leadership

3.1 Summarize interview results and convene full working team and steering committee for final review

Input

  • Buyer persona and journey interviews detail

Output

  • Buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys

Materials

  • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool
  • Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • CMO/Sponsoring Executive (Optional)
  • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
  • SoftwareReviews marketing analyst

1-2 hours

  1. Summarize interview results within the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template.

Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

3.2 Convene executive steering committee and working team to review results

Input

  • Buyer persona and journey interviews summary

Output

  • Buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys

Materials

  • Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

1-2 hours

  1. Present final persona and journey results to the steering committee/executives and to working group using the summary slides interview results within the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template to finalize results.

Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

3.3 Convene stakeholder meetings to activate results

Input

  • Buyer persona and journey interviews summary

Output

Activation of key learnings to drive:

  • Better product –market fit
  • Lead gen
  • Sales effectiveness
  • Awareness

Materials

  • Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

Participants

  • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
  • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
  • Stakeholder team members (see left)

4-5 hours

Present final persona and journey results to each stakeholder team. Key presentations include:

  1. Product team to validate product market fit.
  2. Content marketing to provide messaging direction for the creation of awareness and lead gen assets.
  3. Campaigners/Field Marketing for campaign-related messaging and to identify asset types required to be designed and delivered to support the buyer journey.
  4. Social media strategists for social post copy, and PR for other awareness-building copy.
  5. Sales enablement/training to enable updating of sales collateral, proposals, and sales training materials. Sellers to help with their targeting, prospecting, and crafting of outbound messaging and talk tracks.

Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

Summary of Accomplishment

Problem Solved

With the help of this blueprint, you have deepened your and your colleagues’ buyer understanding at both the persona “who they are” level and the buyer journey “how do they buy” level. You are among the minority of marketing leaders that have fully documented a buyer persona and journey – congratulations!

The benefits of having led your team through the process are significant and include the following:

  • Better alignment of customer/buyer-facing teams such as in product, marketing, sales, and customer success.
  • Messaging that can be used by marketing, sales, and social teams that will resonate with buyer initiatives, pain points, sought-after “pain relief,” and value.
  • Places in the digital and physical universe where your prospects “hang out” so you can optimize your media spend.
  • More effective use of marketing assets and sales collateral that align with the way your prospect needs to consume information throughout their buyer journey to make a decision in your solution area.

And by capturing and documenting your buyer persona and journey even for a single buyer type, you have started to build the “institutional strength” to apply the process to other roles in the decision-making process or for when you go after new and different buyer types for new products. And finally, by bringing your team along with you in this process, you have also led your team in becoming a more customer-focused organization – a strategic shift that all organizations should pursue.

If you would like additional support, contact us and we’ll make sure you get the professional expertise you need.

Contact your account representative for more information.

info@softwarereviews.com

1-888-670-8889

Related Software Reviews Research

Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring

  • Save time and money and improve your sales win rates when you apply our methodology to score contacts with your lead gen engine more accurately and pass better qualified leads over to your sellers.
  • Our methodology teaches marketers to develop your own lead scoring approach based upon lead/contact profile vs. your Ideal Customer Profile (ICP) and scores contact engagement. Applying the methodology to arrive at your own approach to scoring will mean reduced lead gen costs, higher conversion rates, and increased marketing-influenced wins.

Bibliography

Bilardi, Emma. “How to Create Buyer Personas.” Product Marketing Alliance, July 2020. Accessed Dec. 2021.

Harrison, Liz, Dennis Spillecke, Jennifer Stanley, and Jenny Tsai. “Omnichannel in B2B sales: The new normal in a year that has been anything but.” McKinsey & Company, 15 March 2021. Accessed Dec. 2021.

Jansen, Hasse. “Buyer Personas – 33 Mind Blowing Stats.” Boardview.io!, 19 Feb. 2016. Accessed Jan. 2022.

Raynor, Lilah. “Understanding The Changing B2B Buyer Journey.” Forbes Agency Council, 18 July 2021. Accessed Dec. 2021.

Simpson, Jon. “Finding Your Audience: The Importance of Developing a Buyer Persona.” Forbes Agency Council, 16 May 2017. Accessed Dec. 2021.

“Successfully Executing Personalized Marketing Campaigns at Scale.” Plexure, 6 Jan. 2020. Accessed Dec 2020.

Ulwick, Anthony W. JOBS TO BE DONE: Theory to Practice. E-book, Strategyn, 1 Jan. 2017. Accessed Jan. 2022.

Info-Tech Quarterly Research Agenda Outcomes Q2-Q3 2023

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}297|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

At Info-Tech, we take pride in our research and have established the most rigorous publication standards in the industry. However, we understand that engaging with all our analysts to gauge the future may not always be possible. Hence, we have curated some compelling recently published research along with forthcoming research insights to assist you in navigating the next quarter.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

We offer a quarterly Research Agenda Outcomes deck that thoroughly summarizes our recently published research, supplying decision makers with valuable insights and best practices to make informed and effective decisions. Our research is supported by our team of seasoned analysts with decades of experience in the IT industry.

By leveraging our research, you can stay updated with the latest trends and technologies, giving you an edge over the competition and ensuring the optimal performance of your IT department. This way, you can make confident decisions that lead to remarkable success and improved outcomes.

Impact and Result

  • Enhance preparedness for future market trends and developments: Keep up to date with the newest trends and advancements in the IT sector to be better prepared for the future.
  • Enhance your decision making: Acquire valuable information and insights to make better-informed, confident decisions.
  • Promote innovation: Foster creativity, explore novel perspectives, drive innovation, and create new products or services.

Info-Tech Quarterly Research Agenda Outcomes Q2/Q3 2023 Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Info-Tech Quarterly Research Agenda Q3 2023 Deck – An overview of our Research Agenda Outcome for Q2 and Q3 of 2023.

A guide to our top research published to date for 2023 (Q2/Q3).

  • Info-Tech Quarterly Research Agenda Outcomes for Q2/Q3 2023
[infographic]

Further reading

Featured Research Projects 2023 (Q2/Q3)

“Here are my selections for the top research projects of the last quarter.”

Photo of Gord Harrison, Head of Research & Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.

Gord Harrison
Head of Research & Advisory
Info-Tech Research Group

CIO

01
Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

Generative AI is here, and it's time to find its best uses – systematically and responsibly.

02
CIO Priorities 2023

Engage cross-functional leadership to seize opportunity while protecting the organization from volatility.

03
Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

If integrated risk is your destination, your IT risk taxonomy is the road to get you there.

04
Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience

Beyond the hype: How it can help you become more customer-focused?

05
Effective IT Communications

Generative AI is here, and it's time to find its best uses – systematically and responsibly.

06
Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT

Select flexible work options that balance organizational and employee needs to drive engagement and improve attraction and retention.

07
Effectively Manage CxO Relations

Make relationship management a daily habit with a personalized action plan.

08
Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

Spend less time struggling with visuals and more time communicating about what matters to your executives.

Applications

09
Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

Your implementation doesn't start with technology but with an effective plan that the team can align on.

10
Develop Your Value-First Business Process Automation Strategy

As you scale your business automations, focus on what matters most.

11
Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

Security

12
Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy

Adapt to changes in the cyber insurance market.

13
Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program

Focus first on business value.

Infrastructure & Operations

14
Automate IT Asset Data Collection

Acquire and use discovery tools wisely to populate, update, and validate the data in your ITAM database.

Industry | Retail

15
Leveraging AI to Create Meaningful Insights and Visibility in Retail

AI prominence across the enterprise value chain.

Industry | Education

16
Understand the Implications of Generative AI in Education

Bans aren't the answer, but what is?

Industry | Wholesale

17
Wholesale Industry Business Reference Architecture

Business capability maps, value streams, and strategy maps for the wholesale industry.

Industry | Retail Banking

18
Mainframe Modernization for Retail Banking

A strategy for modernizing mainframe systems to meet the needs of modern retail banking.

Industry | Utilities

19
Data Analytics Use Cases for Utilities

Building upon the collective wisdom for the art of the possible.

Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

Generative AI is here, and it's time to find its best uses – systematically and responsibly.

CIO
Strategy & Governance

Photo of Bill Wong, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Bill Wong
Principal Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Build Your Generative AI Roadmap' research.

Sample of the 'Build Your Generative AI Roadmap' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

CIO Priorities 2023

Engage cross-functional leadership to seize opportunity while protecting the organization from volatility.

CIO
Strategy & Governance

Photo of Brian Jackson, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Brian Jackson
Principal Research Director

Download this report or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'CIO Priorities 2023' report.

Sample of the 'CIO Priorities 2023' report.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

If integrated risk is your destination, your IT risk taxonomy is the road to get you there.

CIO
Strategy & Governance

Photo of Donna Bales, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Donna Bales
Principal Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Build an IT Risk Taxonomy' research.

Sample of the 'Build an IT Risk Taxonomy' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience

Beyond the hype: How it can help you become more customer-focused?

CIO
Strategy & Governance

Photo of Manish Jain, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Manish Jain
Principal Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience' research.

Sample of the 'Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Effective IT Communications

Empower IT employees to communicate well with any stakeholder across the organization.

CIO
People & Leadership

Photo of Brittany Lutes, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Brittany Lutes
Research Director

Photo of Diana MacPherson, Senior Research Analyst, Info-Tech Research Group.

Diana MacPherson
Senior Research Analyst

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Effective IT Communications' research.

Sample of the 'Effective IT Communications' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT

Select flexible work options that balance organizational and employee needs to drive engagement and improve attraction and retention.

CIO
People & Leadership

Photo of Jane Kouptsova, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Jane Kouptsova
Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT' research.

Sample of the 'Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Effectively Manage CxO Relations

Make relationship management a daily habit with a personalized action plan.

CIO
Value & Performance

Photo of Mike Tweedle, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group.

Mike Tweedle
Practice Lead

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Effectively Manage CxO Relations' research.

Sample of the 'Effectively Manage CxO Relations' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

Spend less time struggling with visuals and more time communicating about what matters to your executives.

CIO
Value & Performance

Photo of Diana MacPherson, Senior Research Analyst, Info-Tech Research Group.

Diana MacPherson
Senior Research Analyst

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics' research.

Sample of the 'Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

Your implementation doesn't start with technology but with an effective plan that the team can align on.

Applications
Business Processes

Photo of Ricardo de Oliveira, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Ricardo de Oliveira
Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook' research.

Sample of the 'Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Develop Your Value-First Business Process Automation Strategy

As you scale your business automations, focus on what matters most.

Applications
Business Processes

Photo of Andrew Kum-Seun, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Andrew Kum-Seun
Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Develop Your Value-First Business Process Automation Strategy' research.

Sample of the 'Develop Your Value-First Business Process Automation Strategy' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

Applications
Application Development

Photo of Vincent Mirabelli, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Vincent Mirabelli
Principal Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment' research.

Sample of the 'Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy

Adapt to changes in the cyber insurance market.

Security
Security Risk, Strategy & Governance

Photo of Logan Rohde, Senior Research Analyst, Info-Tech Research Group.

Logan Rohde
Senior Research Analyst

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy' research.

Sample of the 'Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program

Focus first on business value.

Security
Security Risk, Strategy & Governance

Photo of Michel Hébert, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Michel Hébert
Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program' research.

Sample of the 'Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Automate IT Asset Data Collection

Acquire and use discovery tools wisely to populate, update, and validate the data in your ITAM database.

Infrastructure & Operations
I&O Process Management

Photo of Andrew Sharp, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Andrew Sharp
Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Automate IT Asset Data Collection' research.

Sample of the 'Automate IT Asset Data Collection' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Leveraging AI to Create Meaningful Insights and Visibility in Retail

AI prominence across the enterprise value chain.

Industry Coverage
Retail

Photo of Rahul Jaiswal, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Rahul Jaiswal
Principal Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Leveraging AI to Create Meaningful Insights and Visibility in Retail' research.

Sample of the 'Leveraging AI to Create Meaningful Insights and Visibility in Retail' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Understand the Implications of Generative AI in Education

Bans aren't the answer, but what is?

Industry Coverage
Education

Photo of Mark Maby, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Mark Maby
Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Understand the Implications of Generative AI in Education' research.

Sample of the 'Understand the Implications of Generative AI in Education' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Wholesale Industry Business Reference Architecture

Business capability maps, value streams, and strategy maps for the wholesale industry.

Industry Coverage
Wholesale

Photo of Rahul Jaiswal, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Rahul Jaiswal
Principal Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Wholesale Industry Business Reference Architecture' research.

Sample of the 'Wholesale Industry Business Reference Architecture' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Mainframe Modernization for Retail Banking

A strategy for modernizing mainframe systems to meet the needs of modern retail banking.

Industry Coverage
Retail Banking

Photo of David Tomljenovic, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

David Tomljenovic
Principal Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Mainframe Modernization for Retail Banking' research.

Sample of the 'Mainframe Modernization for Retail Banking' research.

Logo for Info-Tech.

Data Analytics Use Cases for Utilities

Building upon the collective wisdom for the art of the possible.

Industry Coverage
Utilities

Photo of Jing Wu, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

Jing Wu
Principal Research Director

Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

Sample of the 'Data Analytics Use Cases for Utilities' research.

Sample of the 'Data Analytics Use Cases for Utilities' research.

Sneak Peaks: Research coming in next quarter!

“Next quarter we have a big lineup of reports and some great new research!”

Photo of Gord Harrison, Head of Research & Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.

Gord Harrison
Head of Research & Advisory
Info-Tech Research Group

  1. Build MLOps and Engineering for AI and ML

    Enabling you to develop your Engineering and ML Operations to support your current & planned use cases for AI and ML.
  2. Leverage Gen AI to Improve Your Test Automation Strategy

    Enabling you to embed Gen AI to assist your team during testing broader than Gen AI compiling code.
  3. Make Your IT Financial Data Accessible, Reliable, and Usable

    This project will provide a recipe for bringing IT's financial data to a usable state through a series of discovery, standardization, and policy-setting actions.
  4. Implement Integrated AI Governance

    Enabling you to implement best-practice governance principles when implementing Gen AI.
  5. Develop Exponential IT Capabilities

    Enabling you to understand and develop your strategic Exponential IT capabilities.
  6. Build Your AI Strategy and Roadmap

    This project will provide step-by-step guidance in development of your AI strategy with an AI strategy exemplar.
  7. Priorities for Data Leaders in 2024 and Beyond

    This report will detail the top five challenges expected in the upcoming year and how you as the CDAO can tackle them.
  8. Deploy AIOps More Effectively

    This research is designed to assess the process maturity of your IT operations and help identify pain pains and opportunities for AI deployment within your IT operations.
  9. Design Your Edge Computing Architecture

    This research will provide deployment guidelines and roadmap to address your edge computing needs.
  10. Manage Change in the AI-Enabled Enterprise

    Managing change is complex with the disruptive nature of emerging tech like AI. This research will assist you from an organizational change perspective.
  11. Assess the Security and Privacy Impacts of Your AI Vendors

    This research will allow you to enhance transparency, improve risk management, and ensure the security and privacy of data when working with AI vendors.
  12. Prepare Your Board for AI Disruption

    This research will arm you with tools to educate your board on the impact of Gen AI, addressing the potential risks and the potential benefits.

Info-Tech Research Leadership Team

“We have a world-class team of experts focused on providing practical, cutting-edge IT research and advice.”

Photo of Gord Harrison, Head of Research & Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.

Gord Harrison
Head of Research & Advisory
Info-Tech Research Group

Photo of Jack Hakimian, Senior Vice President, Research Development, Info-Tech Research Group.

Jack Hakimian
Senior Vice President
Research Development

Photo of Aaron Shum, Vice President, Security & Privacy Research, Info-Tech Research Group.

Aaron Shum
Vice President
Security & Privacy Research

Photo of Larry Fretz, Vice President, Industry Research, Info-Tech Research Group.

Larry Fretz
Vice President
Industry Research

Photo of Mark Tauschek, Vice President, Research Fellowships, Info-Tech Research Group.

Mark Tauschek
Vice President
Research Fellowships

Photo of Tom Zehren, Chief Product Officer, Info-Tech Research Group.

Tom Zehren
Chief Product Officer

Photo of Rick Pittman, Vice President, Advisory Quality & Delivery, Info-Tech Research Group.

Rick Pittman
Vice President
Advisory Quality & Delivery

Photo of Nora Fisher, Vice President, Shared Services, Info-Tech Research Group.

Nora Fisher
Vice President
Shared Services

Photo of Becca Mackey, Vice President, Workshops, Info-Tech Research Group.

Becca Mackey
Vice President
Workshops

Photo of Geoff Nielson, Senior Vice President, Global Services & Delivery, Info-Tech Research Group.

Geoff Nielson
Senior Vice President
Global Services & Delivery

Photo of Brett Rugroden, Senior Vice President, Global Market Programs, Info-Tech Research Group.

Brett Rugroden
Senior Vice President
Global Market Programs

Photo of Hannes Scheidegger, Senior Vice President, Global Public Sector, Info-Tech Research Group.

Hannes Scheidegger
Senior Vice President
Global Public Sector

About Info-Tech Research Group

Info-Tech Research Group produces unbiased and highly relevant research to help leaders make strategic, timely, and well-informed decisions. We partner closely with your teams to provide everything they need, from actionable tools to analyst guidance, ensuring they deliver measurable results for the organization.

Sample of the IT Management & Governance Framework.

Drive Measurable Results

Our world-class leadership team is continually focused on building disruptive research and products that drive measurable results and save money.

Info-Tech logo.

Better Research Than Anyone

Our team of experts is composed of the optimal mix of former CIOs, CISOs, PMOs, and other IT leaders and IT and management consultants as well as academic researchers and statisticians.

Dramatically Outperform Your Peers

Leverage Industry Best Practices

We enable over 30,000 members to share their insights and best practices that you can use by having direct access to over 100 analysts as an extension of your team.

Become an Info-Tech influencer:

  • Help shape our research by talking with our analysts.
  • Discuss the challenges, insights, and opportunities in your chosen areas.
  • Suggest new topic ideas for upcoming research cycles.

Contact
Jack Hakimian
jhakimian@infotech.com

We interview hundreds of experts and practitioners to help ensure our research is practical and focused on key member challenges.

Why participate in expert interviews?

  • Discuss market trends and stay up to date.
  • Influence Info-Tech's research direction with your practical experience.
  • Preview our analysts' perspectives and preliminary research.
  • Build on your reputation as a thought leader and research contributor.
  • See your topic idea transformed into practical research.

Thank you!

Join us at our webinars to discuss more topics.

For information on Info-Tech's products and services and to participate in our research process, please contact:

Jack Hakimian
jhakimian@infotech.com

Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}121|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $25,000 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Data Management
  • Parent Category Link: /data-management
  • Data can be valuable if used properly or dangerous when mishandled.
  • The organization needs to understand the value of their data before they can establish proper data management practice.
  • Data is not considered a capital asset unless there is a financial transaction (e.g. buying or selling data assets).
  • Data valuation is not easy, and it costs money to collect, store, and maintain data.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Data always outlives people, processes, and technology. They all come and go, while data remains.
  • Oil is a limited resource, data is not. Contrary to oil, data is likely to grow over time.
  • Data is likely to outlast all other current popular financial instruments including currency, assets, or commodities.
  • Data is used internally and externally and can easily be replicated or combined.
  • Data is beyond currency, assets, or commodities and needs to be a category of its own.

Impact and Result

  • Every organization must calculate the value of their data. This will enable organizations to become truly data-driven.
  • Too much time has been spent arguing different methods of valuation. An organization must settle on valuation that is acceptable to all its stakeholders.
  • Align data governance and data management to data valuation. Often organizations struggle to justify data initiatives due to lack of visibility in data valuation.
  • Establish appropriate roles and responsibilities and ensure alignment to a common set of goals as a foundation to get the most accurate future data valuation for your organization.
  • Assess organization data assets and implementation roadmap that considers the necessary competencies and capabilities and their dependencies in moving towards the higher maturity of data assets.

Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the value associated with the organization's data. Review Info-Tech’s methodology for assessing data value and justifying your data initiatives with a value proposition.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Demystify data valuation

Understand the benefits of data valuation.

  • Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated – Phase 1: Demystify Data Valuation

2. Data value chain

Learn about the data value chain framework and preview the step-by-step guide to start collecting data sources.

  • Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated – Phase 2: Data Value Chain

3. Data value assessment

Mature your data valuation by putting in the valuation dimensions and metrics. Establish documented results that can be leveraged to demonstrate value in your data assets.

  • Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated – Phase 3: Data Value Assessment
[infographic]

Workshop: Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Understand the Value of Data Valuation

The Purpose

Explain data valuation approach and value proposition.

Key Benefits Achieved

A clear understanding and case for data valuation.

Activities

1.1 Review common business data sources and how the organization will benefit from data valuation assessment.

1.2 Understand Info-Tech’s data valuation framework.

Outputs

Organization data valuation priorities

2 Capture Organization Data Value Chain

The Purpose

Capture data sources and data collection methods.

Key Benefits Achieved

A clear understanding of the data value chain.

Activities

2.1 Assess data sources and data collection methods.

2.2 Understand key insights and value proposition.

2.3 Capture data value chain.

Outputs

Data Valuation Tool

3 Data Valuation Framework

The Purpose

Leverage the data valuation framework.

Key Benefits Achieved

Capture key data valuation dimensions and align with data value chain.

Activities

3.1 Introduce data valuation framework.

3.2 Discuss key data valuation dimensions.

3.3 Align data value dimension to data value chain.

Outputs

Data Valuation Tool

4 Plan for Continuous Improvement

The Purpose

Improve organization’s data value.

Key Benefits Achieved

Continue to improve data value.

Activities

4.1 Capture data valuation metrics.

4.2 Define data valuation for continuous monitoring.

4.3 Create a communication plan.

4.4 Define a plan for continuous improvements.

Outputs

Data valuation metrics

Data Valuation Communication Plan

Measure and Manage Customer Satisfaction Metrics That Matter the Most

  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
  • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
  • Lack of understanding of what is truly driving customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction.
  • Lack of insight into who our satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
  • Lack of a system for early detection of declines in satisfaction.
  • Lack of clarity on what to improve and how resources should be allocated.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • All software companies measure satisfaction in some way, but many lack understanding of what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true drivers of satisfaction, solution providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, pull actionable insights and feedback, and make changes to products and services that customers really care about and will keep them coming back to you to have their needs met.
  • Obstacles:
    • Use of metrics that don’t provide the insight needed to make impactful changes that will boost satisfaction and ultimately, retention and profit.
    • Lack of a clear definition of what satisfaction means to customers, metric definitions and/or standard methods of measurement, and a consistent monitoring cadence.

Impact and Result

  • Understanding of who your satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
  • Understanding of the true drivers of satisfaction and dissatisfaction among your customer segments.
  • Establishment of a repeatable process and cadence for effective satisfaction measurement and monitoring.
  • Development of an executable customer satisfaction improvement plan that identifies customer journey pain points and areas of dissatisfaction, and outlines how to improve them.
  • Knowledge of where money, time, and other resources are needed most to improve satisfaction levels and ultimately increase retention.

Measure and Manage Customer Satisfaction Metrics That Matter the Most Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Measure and Manage the Customer Satisfaction Metrics that Matter the Most Deck – An overview of how to understand what drives customer satisfaction and how to measure and manage it for improved business outcomes.

Understand the true drivers of customer satisfaction and build a process for managing and improving customer satisfaction.

[infographic]

Further reading

Measure and Manage the Customer Satisfaction Metrics that Matter the Most

Understand what truly keeps your customer satisfied. Start to measure what matters to improve customer experience and increase satisfaction and advocacy. 

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst perspective

Understanding and measuring the true drivers of satisfaction enable the delivery of real customer value

The image contains a picture of Emily Wright.

“Healthy customer relationships are the paramount to long-term growth. When customers are satisfied, they remain loyal, spend more, and promote your company to others in their network. The key to high satisfaction is understanding and measuring the true drivers of satisfaction to enable the delivery of real customer value.

Most companies believe they know who their satisfied customers are and what keeps them satisfied, and 76% of B2B buyers expect that providers understand their unique needs (Salesforce Research, 2020). However, on average B2B companies have customer experience scores of less than 50% (McKinsey, 2016). This disconnect between customer expectations and provider experience indicates that businesses are not effectively measuring and monitoring satisfaction and therefore are not making meaningful enhancements to their service, offerings, and overall experience.

By focusing on the underlying drivers of customer satisfaction, organizations develop a truly accurate picture of what is driving deep satisfaction and loyalty, ensuring that their company will achieve sustainable growth and stay competitive in a highly competitive market.”

Emily Wright

Senior Research Analyst, Advisory

SoftwareReviews

Executive summary

Your Challenge

Common Obstacles

SoftwareReviews’ Approach

Getting a truly accurate picture of satisfaction levels among customers, and where to focus efforts to improve satisfaction, is challenging. Providers often find themselves reacting to customer challenges and being blindsided when customers leave. More effective customer satisfaction measurement is possible when providers self-assess for the following challenges:

  • Lack of understanding of what is truly driving customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction.
  • Lack of insight into who our satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
  • Lack of a system for early detection of declines in satisfaction.
  • Lack of clarity of what needs to be improved and how resources should be allocated.
  • Lack of reliable internal data for effective customer satisfaction monitoring.

What separates customer success leaders from developing a full view of their customers are several nagging obstacles:

  • Use of metrics that don’t provide the insight needed to make impactful changes that will boost satisfaction and ultimately, retention and profit.
  • Friction from customers participating in customer satisfaction studies.
  • Lack of data, or integrated databases from which to track, pull, and analyze customer satisfaction data.
  • Lack a clear definition of what satisfaction means to customers, metric definitions, and/or standard methods of measurement and a consistent monitoring cadence.
  • Lack of time, resources, or technology to uncover and effectively measure and monitor satisfaction drivers.

Through the SoftwareReviews’ approach, customer success leaders will:

  • Understand who your satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
  • Understand the true drivers of satisfaction and dissatisfaction among your customer segments.
  • Establish a repeatable process and cadence for effective satisfaction measurement and monitoring.
  • Develop an executable customer satisfaction improvement plan that identifies customer journey pain points and areas of dissatisfaction, and outlines how to improve them.
  • Know where money, time, and resources are needed most to improve satisfaction levels and ultimately retention.

Overarching SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

All companies measure satisfaction in some way, but many lack understanding of what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true drivers of satisfaction, solution providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, pull actionable insights and feedback, and make changes to products and services that customers really care about. This will keep them coming back to you to have their needs met.

Healthy Customer Relationships are vital for long-term success and growth

Measuring customer satisfaction is critical to understanding the overall health of your customer relationships and driving growth.

Through effective customer satisfaction measurement, organizations can:

Improve Customer Experience

Increase Retention and CLV

Increase Profitability

Reduce Costs

  • Provide insight into where and how to improve.
  • Enhance experience, increase loyalty.
  • By providing strong CX, organizations can increase revenue by 10-15% (McKinsey, 2014).
  • Far easier to retain existing customers than to acquire new ones.
  • Ensuring high satisfaction among customers increases Customer Lifetime Value (CLV) through longer tenure and higher spending.
  • NPS Promoter score has a customer lifetime value that's 600%-1,400% higher than a Detractor (Bain & Company, 2015).
  • Highly satisfied customers spend more through expansions and add-ons, as well as through their long tenure with your company.
  • They also spread positive word of mouth, which brings in new customers.
  • “Studies demonstrate a strong correlation between customer satisfaction and increased profits — with companies with high customer satisfaction reporting 5.7 times more revenue than competitors.” (Matthew Loper, CEO and Co-Founder of WELLTH, 2022)
  • Measuring, monitoring, and maintaining high satisfaction levels reduces costs across the board.
  • “Providing a high-quality customer experience can save up to 33% of customer service costs” (Deloitte, 2018).
  • Satisfied customers are more likely to spread positive word of mouth which reduces acquisition / marketing costs for your company.

“Measuring customer satisfaction is vital for growth in any organization; it provides insights into what works and offers opportunities for optimization. Customer satisfaction is essential for improving loyalty rate, reducing costs and retaining your customers.”

-Ken Brisco, NICE, 2019

Poor customer satisfaction measurement is costly

Virtually all companies measure customer satisfaction, but few truly do it well. All too often, customer satisfaction measurement consists of a set of vanity metrics that do not result in actionable insight for product/service improvement. Improper measurement can result in numerous consequences:

Direct and Indirect Costs

Being unaware of true drivers of satisfaction that are never remedied costs your business directly through customer churn, service costs, etc.

Tarnished Brand

Tarnished brand through not resolving issues drives dissatisfaction; dissatisfied customers share their negative experiences, which can damage brand image and reputation.

Waste Limited Resources

Putting limited resources towards vanity programs and/or fixes that have little to no bearing on core satisfaction drivers wastes time and money.

“When customer dissatisfaction goes unnoticed, it can slowly kill a company. Because of the intangible nature of customer dissatisfaction, managers regularly underestimate the magnitude of customer dissatisfaction and its impact on the bottom line.”

- Lakshmiu Tatikonda, “The Hidden Costs of Customer Dissatisfaction”, 2013

SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

Most companies struggle to understand what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true satisfaction drivers, tech providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, avoiding the numerous harmful consequences that result from average customer satisfaction measurement.

Does your customer satisfaction measurement process need improvement?

Getting an accurate picture of customer satisfaction is no easy task. Struggling with any of the following means you are ready for a detailed review of your customer satisfaction measurement efforts:

  • Not knowing who your most satisfied customers are.
  • Lacking early detection for declining satisfaction – either reactive, or unaware of dissatisfaction as it’s occurring.
  • Lacking a process for monitoring changes in satisfaction and lack ability to be proactive; you feel blindsided when customers leave.
  • Inability to fix the problem and wasting money on the wrong areas, like vanity metrics that don’t bring value to customers.
  • Spending money and other resources towards fixes based on a gut feeling, without quantifying the real root cause drivers and investing in their improvement.
  • Having metrics and data but lacking context; don’t know what contributed to the metrics/results, why people are dissatisfied or what contributes to satisfaction.
  • Lacking clear definition of what satisfaction means to customers / customer segments.
  • Difficulty tying satisfaction back to financial results.

Customers are more satisfied with software vendors who understand the difference between surface level and short-term satisfaction, and deep or long-term satisfaction

Surface-level satisfaction

Surface-level satisfaction has immediate effects, but they are usually short-term or limited to certain groups of users. There are several factors that contribute to satisfaction including:

  • Novelty of new software
  • Ease of implementation
  • Financial savings
  • Breadth of features

Software Leaders Drive Deep Satisfaction

Deep satisfaction has long-term and meaningful impacts on the way that organizations work. Deep satisfaction has staying power and increases or maintains satisfaction over time, by reducing complexity and delivering exceptional quality for end-users and IT alike. This report found that the following capabilities provided the deepest levels of satisfaction:

  • Usability and intuitiveness
  • Quality of features
  • Ease of customization
  • Vendor-specific capabilities

The above solve issues that are part of everyday problems, and each drives satisfaction in deep and meaningful ways. While surface-level satisfaction is important, deep and impactful capabilities can sustain satisfaction for a longer time.

Deep Customer Satisfaction Among Software Buyers Correlates Highly to “Emotional Attributes”

Vendor Capabilities and Product Features remain significant but are not the primary drivers

The image contains a graph to demonstrate a correlation to Satisfaction, all Software Categories.
Source: SoftwareReviews buyer reviews (based on 82,560 unique reviews).

Driving deep satisfaction among software customers vs. surface-level measures is key

Vendor capabilities and product features correlate significantly to buyer satisfaction

Yet, it’s the emotional attributes – what we call the “Emotional Footprint”, that correlate more strongly

Business-Value Created and Emotional Attributes are what drives software customer satisfaction the most

The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate Software Buyer Satisfaction Drivers and Emotional Attributes are what drives software customer satisfaction.

Software companies looking to improve customer satisfaction will focus on business value created and the Emotional Footprint attributes outlined here.

The essential ingredient is understanding how each is defined by your customers.

Leaders focus on driving improvements as described by customers.

SoftwareReviews Insight:

These true drivers of satisfaction should be considered in your customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring efforts. The experience customers have with your product and brand is what will differentiate your brand from competitors, and ultimately, power business growth. Talk to a SoftwareReviews Advisor to learn how users rate your product on these satisfaction drivers in the SoftwareReviews Emotional Footprint Report.

Benefits of Effective Customer Satisfaction Measurement

Our research provides Customer Success leaders with the following key benefits:

  • Ability to know who is satisfied, dissatisfied, and why.
  • Confidence in how to understand or uncover the factors behind customer satisfaction; understand and identify factors driving satisfaction, dissatisfaction.
  • Ability to develop a clear plan for improving customer satisfaction.
  • Knowledge of how to establish a repeatable process for customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring that allows for proactivity when declines in satisfaction are detected.
  • Understanding of what metrics to use, how to measure them, and where to find the right information/data.
  • Knowledge of where money, time, and other resources are needed most to drive tangible customer value.

“81% of organizations cite CX as a competitive differentiator. The top factor driving digital transformation is improving CX […] with companies reporting benefits associated with improving CX including:

  • Increased customer loyalty (92%)
  • An uplift in revenue (84%)
  • Cost savings (79%).”

– Dan Cote, “Advocacy Blooms and Business Booms When Customers and Employees Engage”, Influitive, 2021

The image contains a screenshot of a thought model that focuses on Measure & Manage the Customer Satisfaction Metrics That Matter the Most.

Who benefits from improving the measurement and monitoring of customer satisfaction?

This Research Is Designed for:

  • Customer Success leaders and marketers who are:
    • Responsible for understanding how to benchmark, measure, and understand customer satisfaction to improve satisfaction, NPS, and ROI.
    • Looking to take a more proactive and structured approach to customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring.
    • Looking for a more effective and accurate way to measure and understand how to improve customer satisfaction around products and services.

This Research Will Help You:

  • Understand the factors driving satisfaction and dissatisfaction.
  • Know which customers are satisfied/dissatisfied.
  • Know where time, money, and resources are needed the most in order to improve or maintain satisfaction levels.
  • Develop a formal plan to improve customer satisfaction.
  • Establish a repeatable process for customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring that allows for proactivity when declines in satisfaction are detected.

This Research Will Also Assist:

  • Customer Success Leaders, Marketing and Sales Directors and Managers, Product Marketing Managers, and Advocacy Managers/Coordinators who are responsible for:
    • Product improvements and enhancements
    • Customer service and onboarding
    • Customer advocacy programs
    • Referral/VoC programs

This Research Will Help Them:

  • Coordinate and align on customer experience efforts and actions.
  • Gather and make use of customer feedback to improve products, solutions, and services provided.
  • Provide an amazing customer experience throughout the entirety of the customer journey.

SoftwareReviews’ methodology for measuring the customer satisfaction metrics that matter the most

1. Identify true customer satisfaction drivers

2. Develop metrics dashboard

3. Develop customer satisfaction measurement and management plan

Phase Steps

  1. Identify data sources, documenting any gaps in data
  2. Analyze all relevant data on customer experiences and outcomes
  3. Document top satisfaction drivers
  1. Identify business goals, problems to be solved / define business challenges and marketing/customer success goals
  2. Use SR diagnostic to assess current state of satisfaction measurement, assessing metric alignment to satisfaction drivers
  3. Define your metrics dashboard
  4. Develop common metric definitions, language for discussing, and standards for measuring customer satisfaction
  1. Determine committee structure to measure performance metrics over time
  2. Map out gaps in satisfaction along customer journey/common points in journey where customers are least dissatisfied
  3. Build plan that identifies weak areas and shows how to fix using SR’s emotional footprint, other measures
  4. Create plan and roadmap for CSat improvement
  5. Create communication deck

Phase Outcomes

  1. Documented satisfaction drivers
  2. Documented data sources and gaps in data
  1. Current state customer satisfaction measurement analysis
  2. Common metric definitions and measurement standards
  3. Metrics dashboard
  1. Customer satisfaction measurement plan
  2. Customer satisfaction improvement plan
  3. Customer journey maps
  4. Customer satisfaction improvement communication deck
  5. Customer Satisfaction Committee created

Insight summary

Understanding and measuring the true drivers of satisfaction enable the delivery of real customer value

All software companies measure satisfaction in some way, but many lack understanding of what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true drivers of satisfaction, solution providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, pull actionable insights and feedback, and make changes to products and services that customers really care about and which will keep them coming back to you to have their needs met.

Positive experiences drive satisfaction more so than features and cost

According to our analysis of software buyer reviews data*, the biggest drivers of satisfaction and likeliness to recommend are the positive experiences customers have with vendors and their products. Customers want to feel that:

  1. Their productivity and performance is enhanced, and the vendor is helping them innovate and grow as a company.
  2. Their vendor inspires them and helps them to continually improve.
  3. They can rely on the vendor and the product they purchased.
  4. They are respected by the vendor.
  5. They can trust that the vendor will be on their side and save them time.
*8 million data points across all software categories

Measure Key Relationship KPIs to gauge satisfaction

Key metrics to track include the Business Value Created score, Net Emotional Footprint, and the Love/Hate score (the strength of emotional connection).

Orient the organization around customer experience excellence

  1. Arrange staff incentives around customer value instead of metrics that are unrelated to satisfaction.
  2. Embed customer experience as a core company value and integrate it into all functions.
  3. Make working with your organization easy and seamless for customers.

Have a designated committee for customer satisfaction measurement

Best in class organizations create customer satisfaction committees that meet regularly to measure and monitor customer satisfaction, resolve issues quickly, and work towards improved customer experience and profit outcomes.

Use metrics that align to top satisfaction drivers

This will give you a more accurate and fulsome view of customer satisfaction than standard satisfaction metrics alone will.

Guided Implementation

What is our GI on measuring and managing the customer satisfaction metrics that matter most?

Identify True Customer Satisfaction Drivers

Develop Metrics Dashboard Develop Customer Satisfaction Measurement and Management Plan

Call #1: Discuss current pain points and barriers to successful customer satisfaction measurement, monitoring and maintenance. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #2: Discuss all available data, noting any gaps. Develop plan to fill gaps, discuss feasibility and timelines. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #3: Walk through SoftwareReviews reports to understand EF and satisfaction drivers. Plan next call – 3 days.

Call #4: Segment customers and document key satisfaction drivers. Plan next call – 2 week.

Call #5: Document business goals and align them to metrics. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #6: Complete the SoftwareReviews satisfaction measurement diagnostic. Plan next call – 3 days.

Call #7: Score list of metrics that align to satisfaction drivers. Plan next call – 2 days.

Call #8: Develop metrics dashboard and definitions. Plan next call – 2 weeks.

Call #9: Finalize metrics dashboard and definitions. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #10: Discuss committee and determine governance. Plan next call – 2 weeks.

Call #11: Map out gaps in satisfaction along customer journey as they relate to top satisfaction drivers. Plan next call –2 weeks.

Call #12: Develop plan and roadmap for satisfaction improvement. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #13: Finalize plan and roadmap. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call # 14: Review and coach on communication deck.

A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

For guidance on marketing applications, we can arrange a discussion with an Info-Tech analyst.

Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

Software Reviews offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

Guided Implementation

Workshop

Consulting

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”
Included within Advisory Membership Optional add-ons

Bibliography

“Are you experienced?” Bain & Company, Apr. 2015. Accessed 6 June. 2022.

Brisco, Ken. “Measuring Customer Satisfaction and Why It’s So Important.” NICE, Feb. 2019. Accessed 6 June. 2022.

CMO.com Team. “The Customer Experience Management Mandate.” Adobe Experience Cloud Blog, July 2019. Accessed 14 June. 2022.

Cote, Dan. “Advocacy Blooms and Business Booms When Customers and Employees Engage.” Influitive, Dec. 2021. Accessed 15 June. 2022.

Fanderl, Harald and Perrey, Jesko. “Best of both worlds: Customer experience for more revenues and lower costs.” McKinsey & Company, Apr. 2014. Accessed 15 June. 2022.

Gallemard, Jeremy. “Why – And How – Should Customer Satisfaction Be Measured?” Smart Tribune, Feb. 2020. Accessed 6 June. 2022.

Kumar, Swagata. “Customer Success Statistics in 2021.” Customer Success Box, 2021. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

Lakshmiu Tatikonda, “The Hidden Costs of Customer Dissatisfaction”, Management Accounting Quarterly, vol. 14, no. 3, 2013, pp 38. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

Loper, Matthew. “Why ‘Customer Satisfaction’ Misses the Mark – And What to Measure Instead.” Newsweek, Jan. 2022. Accessed 16 June. 2022.

Maechler, Nicolas, et al. “Improving the business-to-business customer experience.” McKinsey & Company, Mar. 2016. Accessed 16 June.

“New Research from Dimension Data Reveals Uncomfortable CX Truths.” CISION PR Newswire, Apr. 2017. Accessed 7 June. 2022.

Sheth, Rohan. 75 Must-Know Customer Experience Statistics to move Your Business Forward in 2022.” SmartKarrot, Feb. 2022. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

Smith, Mercer. “111 Customer Service Statistics and Facts You Shouldn’t Ignore.” HelpScout, May 2022. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

“State of the Connected Customer.” Salesforce, 2020. Accessed 14 June. 2022

“The true value of customer experiences.” Deloitte, 2018. Accessed 15 June. 2022.

Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}526|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 8.6/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $340,152 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
  • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
  • Technology is a fundamental enabler of an organization’s customer experience management (CXM) strategy. However, many IT departments fail to take a systematic approach when building a portfolio of applications for supporting marketing, sales, and customer service functions.
  • The result is a costly, ineffective, and piecemeal approach to CXM application deployment (including high-profile applications like CRM).

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • IT must work in lockstep with their counterparts in marketing, sales, and customer service to define a unified vision and strategic requirements for enabling a strong CXM program.
  • To deploy applications that specifically align with the needs of the organization’s customers, IT leaders must work with the business to define and understand customer personas and common interaction scenarios. CXM applications are mission critical and failing to link them to customer needs can have a detrimental effect on customer satisfaction and ultimately, revenue.
  • IT must act as a valued partner to the business in creating a portfolio of CXM applications that are cost effective.
  • Organizations should create a repeatable framework for CXM application deployment that addresses critical issues, including the integration ecosystem, customer data quality, dashboards and analytics, and end-user adoption.

Impact and Result

  • Establish strong application alignment to strategic requirements for CXM that is based on concrete customer personas.
  • Improve underlying business metrics across marketing, sales, and service, including customer acquisition, retention, and satisfaction metrics.
  • Better align IT with customer experience needs.

Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a strong technology foundation for CXM, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Drive value with CXM

Understand the benefits of a robust CXM strategy.

  • Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management – Phase 1: Drive Value with CXM
  • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template
  • CXM Strategy Project Charter Template

2. Create the framework

Identify drivers and objectives for CXM using a persona-driven approach and deploy the right applications to meet those objectives.

  • Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management – Phase 2: Create the Framework
  • CXM Business Process Shortlisting Tool
  • CXM Portfolio Designer

3. Finalize the framework

Complete the initiatives roadmap for CXM.

  • Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management – Phase 3: Finalize the Framework
[infographic]

Workshop: Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Create the Vision for CXM Technology Enablement

The Purpose

Establish a consistent vision across IT, marketing, sales, and customer service for CXM technology enablement.

Key Benefits Achieved

A clear understanding of key business and technology drivers for CXM.

Activities

1.1 CXM fireside chat

1.2 CXM business drivers

1.3 CXM vision statement

1.4 Project structure

Outputs

CXM vision statement

CXM project charter

2 Conduct the Environmental Scan and Internal Review

The Purpose

Create a set of strategic requirements for CXM based on a thorough external market scan and internal capabilities assessment.

Key Benefits Achieved

Well-defined technology requirements based on rigorous, multi-faceted analysis.

Activities

2.1 PEST analysis

2.2 Competitive analysis

2.3 Market and trend analysis

2.4 SWOT analysis

2.5 VRIO analysis

2.6 Channel map

Outputs

Completed external analysis

Strategic requirements (from external analysis)

Completed internal review

Channel interaction map

3 Build Customer Personas and Scenarios

The Purpose

Augment strategic requirements through customer persona and scenario development.

Key Benefits Achieved

Functional requirements aligned to supporting steps in customer interaction scenarios.

Activities

3.1 Persona development

3.2 Scenario development

3.3 Requirements definition for CXM

Outputs

Personas and scenarios

Strategic requirements (based on personas)

4 Create the CXM Application Portfolio

The Purpose

Using the requirements identified in the preceding modules, build a future-state application inventory for CXM.

Key Benefits Achieved

A cohesive, rationalized portfolio of customer interaction applications that aligns with identified requirements and allows investment (or rationalization) decisions to be made.

Activities

4.1 Build business process maps

4.2 Review application satisfaction

4.3 Create the CXM application portfolio

4.4 Prioritize applications

Outputs

Business process maps

Application satisfaction diagnostic

Prioritized CXM application portfolio

5 Review Best Practices and Confirm Initiatives

The Purpose

Establish repeatable best practices for CXM applications in areas such as data management and end-user adoption.

Key Benefits Achieved

Best practices for rollout of new CXM applications.

A prioritized initiatives roadmap.

Activities

5.1 Create data integration map

5.2 Define adoption best practices

5.3 Build initiatives roadmap

5.4 Confirm initiatives roadmap

Outputs

Integration map for CXM

End-user adoption plan

Initiatives roadmap

Further reading

Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

Design an end-to-end technology strategy to enhance marketing effectiveness, drive sales, and create compelling customer service experiences.

ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

Technology is the catalyst to create – and keep! – your customers.

"Customers want to interact with your organization on their own terms, and in the channels of their choice (including social media, mobile applications, and connected devices). Regardless of your industry, your customers expect a frictionless experience across the customer lifecycle. They desire personalized and well-targeted marketing messages, straightforward transactions, and effortless service. Research shows that customers value – and will pay more for! – well-designed experiences.

Strong technology enablement is critical for creating customer experiences that drive revenue. However, most organizations struggle with creating a cohesive technology strategy for customer experience management (CXM). IT leaders need to take a proactive approach to developing a strong portfolio of customer interaction applications that are in lockstep with the needs of their marketing, sales, and customer service teams. It is critical to incorporate the voice of the customer into this strategy.

When developing a technology strategy for CXM, don’t just “pave the cow path,” but instead move the needle forward by providing capabilities for customer intelligence, omnichannel interactions, and predictive analytics. This blueprint will help you build an integrated CXM technology roadmap that drives top-line revenue while rationalizing application spend."

Ben Dickie

Research Director, Customer Experience Strategy

Info-Tech Research Group

Framing the CXM project

This Research Is Designed For:

  • IT leaders who are responsible for crafting a technology strategy for customer experience management (CXM).
  • Applications managers who are involved with the selection and implementation of critical customer-centric applications, such as CRM platforms, marketing automation tools, customer intelligence suites, and customer service solutions.

This Research Will Help You:

  • Clearly link your technology-enablement strategy for CXM to strategic business requirements and customer personas.
  • Build a rationalized portfolio of enterprise applications that will support customer interaction objectives.
  • Adopt standard operating procedures for CXM application deployment that address issues such as end-user adoption and data quality.

This Research Will Also Assist:

  • Business leaders in marketing, sales, and customer service who want to deepen their understanding of CXM technologies, and apply best practices for using these technologies to drive competitive advantage.
  • Marketing, sales, and customer service managers involved with defining requirements and rolling out CXM applications.

This Research Will Help Them:

  • Work hand-in-hand with counterparts in IT to deploy high-value business applications that will improve core customer-facing metrics.
  • Understand the changing CXM landscape and use the art of the possible to transform the internal technology ecosystem and drive meaningful customer experiences.

Executive summary

Situation

  • Customer expectations for personalization, channel preferences, and speed-to-resolution are at an all-time high.
  • Your customers are willing to pay more for high-value experiences, and having a strong customer CXM strategy is a proven path to creating sustainable value for the organization.

Complication

  • Technology is a fundamental enabler of an organization’s CXM strategy. However, many IT departments fail to take a systematic approach to building a portfolio of applications to support Marketing, Sales, and Customer Service.
  • The result is a costly, ineffective, and piecemeal approach to CXM application deployment (including high profile applications like CRM).

Resolution

  • IT must work in lockstep with their counterparts in marketing, sales, and customer service to define a unified vision, strategic requirements and roadmap for enabling strong customer experience capabilities.
  • In order to deploy applications that don’t simply follow previously established patterns but are aligned with the specific needs of the organization’s customers, IT leaders must work with the business to define and understand customer personas and common interaction scenarios. CXM applications are mission critical and failing to link them to customer needs can have a detrimental effect on customer satisfaction – and ultimately revenue.
  • IT must act as a valued partner to the business in creating a portfolio of CXM applications that are cost effective.
  • Organizations should create a repeatable framework for CXM application deployment that addresses critical issues, including the integration ecosystem, customer data quality, dashboards and analytics, and end-user adoption.

Info-Tech Insight

  1. IT can’t hide behind the firewall. IT must understand the organization’s customers to properly support marketing, sales, and service efforts.
  2. IT – or Marketing – must not build the CXM strategy in a vacuum if they want to achieve a holistic, consistent, and seamless customer experience.
  3. IT must get ahead of shadow IT. To be seen as an innovator within the business, IT must be a leading enabler in building a rationalized and integrated CXM application portfolio.

Guide to frequently used acronyms

CXM - Customer Experience Management

CX - Customer Experience

CRM - Customer Relationship Management

CSM - Customer Service Management

MMS - Marketing Management System

SMMP - Social Media Management Platform

RFP - Request for Proposal

SaaS - Software as a Service

Customers’ expectations are on the rise: meet them!

Today’s consumers expect speed, convenience, and tailored experiences at every stage of the customer lifecycle. Successful organizations strive to support these expectations.

67% of end consumers will pay more for a world-class customer experience. 74% of business buyers will pay more for strong B2B experiences. (Salesforce, 2018)

5 CORE CUSTOMER EXPECTATIONS

  1. More personalization
  2. More product options
  3. Constant contact
  4. Listen closely, respond quickly
  5. Give front-liners more control

(Customer Experience Insight, 2016)

Customers expect to interact with organizations through the channels of their choice. Now more than ever, you must enable your organization to provide tailored customer experiences.

Realize measurable value by enabling CXM

Providing a seamless customer experience increases the likelihood of cross-sell and up-sell opportunities and boosts customer loyalty and retention. IT can contribute to driving revenue and decreasing costs by providing the business with the right set of tools, applications, and technical support.

Contribute to the bottom line

Cross-sell, up-sell, and drive customer acquisition.

67% of consumers are willing to pay more for an upgraded experience. (Salesforce, 2018)

80%: The margin by which CX leaders outperformer laggards in the S&P 500.(Qualtrics, 2017)

59% of customers say tailored engagement based on past interactions is very important to winning their business. (Salesforce, 2018)

Enable cost savings

Focus on customer retention as well as acquisition.

It is 6-7x more costly to attract a new customer than it is to retain an existing customer. (Salesforce Blog, 2019)

A 5% increase in customer retention has been found to increase profits by 25% to 95%. (Bain & Company, n.d.)

Strategic CXM is gaining traction with your competition

Organizations are prioritizing CXM capabilities (and associated technologies) as a strategic investment. Keep pace with the competition and gain a competitive advantage by creating a cohesive strategy that uses best practices to integrate marketing, sales, and customer support functions.

87% of customers share great experiences they’ve had with a company. (Zendesk, n.d.)

61% of organizations are investing in CXM. (CX Network, 2015)

53% of organizations believe CXM provides a competitive advantage. (Harvard Business Review, 2014)

Top Investment Priorities for Customer Experience

  1. Voice of the Customer
  2. Customer Insight Generation
  3. Customer Experience Governance
  4. Customer Journey Mapping
  5. Online Customer Experience
  6. Experience Personalization
  7. Emotional Engagement
  8. Multi-Channel Integration/Omnichannel
  9. Quality & Customer Satisfaction Management
  10. Customer/Channel Loyalty & Rewards Programs

(CX Network 2015)

Omnichannel is the way of the future: don’t be left behind

Get ahead of the competition by doing omnichannel right. Devise a CXM strategy that allows you to create and maintain a consistent, seamless customer experience by optimizing operations within an omnichannel framework. Customers want to interact with you on their own terms, and it falls to IT to ensure that applications are in place to support and manage a wide range of interaction channels.

Omnichannel is a “multi-channel approach to sales that seeks to provide the customer with a seamless transactional experience whether the customer is shopping online from a desktop or mobile device, by telephone, or in a bricks and mortar store.” (TechTarget, 2014)

97% of companies say that they are investing in omnichannel. (Huffington Post, 2015)

23% of companies are doing omnichannel well.

CXM applications drive effective multi-channel customer interactions across marketing, sales, and customer service

The success of your CXM strategy depends on the effective interaction of various marketing, sales, and customer support functions. To deliver on customer experience, organizations need to take a customer-centric approach to operations.

From an application perspective, a CRM platform generally serves as the unifying repository of customer information, supported by adjacent solutions as warranted by your CXM objectives.

CXM ECOSYSTEM

Customer Relationship Management Platform

  • Web Experience Management Platform
  • E-Commerce & Point of Sale Solutions
  • Social Media Management Platform
  • Customer Intelligence Platform
  • Customer Service Management Tools
  • Marketing Management Suite

Application spotlight: Customer experience platforms

Description

CXM solutions are a broad range of tools that provide comprehensive feature sets for supporting customer interaction processes. These suites supplant more basic applications for customer interaction management. Popular solutions that fall under the umbrella of CXM include CRM suites, marketing automation tools, and customer service applications.

Features and Capabilities

  • Manage sales pipelines, provide quotes, and track client deliverables.
  • View all opportunities organized by their current stage in the sales process.
  • View all interactions that have occurred between employees and the customer, including purchase order history.
  • Manage outbound marketing campaigns via multiple channels (email, phone, social, mobile).
  • Build visual workflows with automated trigger points and business rules engine.
  • Generate in-depth customer insights, audience segmentation, predictive analytics, and contextual analytics.
  • Provide case management, ticketing, and escalation capabilities for customer service.

Highlighted Vendors

Microsoft Dynamics

Adobe

Marketo

sprinklr

Salesforce

SugarCRM

Application spotlight: Customer experience platforms

Key Trends

  • CXM applications have decreased their focus on departmental silos to make it easier to share information across the organization as departments demand more data.
  • Vendors are developing deeper support of newer channels for customer interaction. This includes providing support for social media channels, native mobile applications, and SMS or text-based services like WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger.
  • Predictive campaigns and channel blending are becoming more feasible as vendors integrate machine learning and artificial intelligence into their applications.
  • Content blocks are being placed on top of scripting languages to allow for user-friendly interfaces. There is a focus on alleviating bottlenecks where content would have previously needed to go through a specialist.
  • Many vendors of CXM applications are placing increased emphasis on strong application integration both within and beyond their portfolios, with systems like ERP and order fulfillment.

Link to Digital Strategy

  • For many organizations that are building out a digital strategy, improving customer experience is often a driving factor: CXM apps enable this goal.
  • As part of a digital strategy, create a comprehensive CXM application portfolio by leveraging both core CRM suites and point solutions.
  • Ensure that a point solution aligns with the digital strategy’s technology drivers and user personas.

CXM KPIs

Strong CXM applications can improve:

  • Lead Intake Volume
  • Lead Conversion Rate
  • Average Time to Resolution
  • First-Contact Resolution Rate
  • Customer Satisfaction Rate
  • Share-of-Mind
  • Share-of-Wallet
  • Customer Lifetime Value
  • Aggregate Reach/Impressions

IT is critical to the success of your CXM strategy

Technology is the key enabler of building strong customer experiences: IT must stand shoulder-to-shoulder with the business to develop a technology framework for CXM.

Top 5 Challenges with CXM for Marketing

  1. Maximizing customer experience ROI
  2. Achieving a single view of the customer
  3. Building new customer experiences
  4. Cultivating a customer-focused culture
  5. Measuring CX investments to business outcomes

Top 5 Obstacles to Enabling CXM for IT

  1. Systems integration
  2. Multichannel complexity
  3. Organizational structure
  4. Data-related issues
  5. Lack of strategy

(Harvard Business Review, 2014)

Only 19% of organizations have a customer experience team tasked with bridging gaps between departments. (Genesys, 2018)

IT and Marketing can only tackle CXM with the full support of each other. The cooperation of the departments is crucial when trying to improve CXM technology capabilities and customer interaction and drive a strong revenue mandate.

CXM failure: Blockbuster

CASE STUDY

Industry Entertainment

Source Forbes, 2014

Blockbuster

As the leader of the video retail industry, Blockbuster had thousands of retail locations internationally and millions of customers. Blockbuster’s massive marketing budget and efficient operations allowed it to dominate the competition for years.

Situation

Trends in Blockbuster’s consumer market changed in terms of distribution channels and customer experience. As the digital age emerged and developed, consumers were looking for immediacy and convenience. This threatened Blockbuster’s traditional, brick-and-mortar B2C operating model.

The Competition

Netflix entered the video retail market, making itself accessible through non-traditional channels (direct mail, and eventually, the internet).

Results

Despite long-term relationships with customers and competitive standing in the market, Blockbuster’s inability to understand and respond to changing technology trends and customer demands led to its demise. The organization did not effectively leverage internal or external networks or technology to adapt to customer demands. Blockbuster went bankrupt in 2010.

Customer Relationship Management

  • Web Experience Management Platform
  • E-Commerce & Point of Sale Solutions
  • Social Media Management
  • Customer Intelligence
  • Customer Service
  • Marketing Management

Blockbuster did not leverage emerging technologies to effectively respond to trends in its consumer network. It did not optimize organizational effectiveness around customer experience.

CXM success: Netflix

CASE STUDY

Industry Entertainment

Source Forbes, 2014

Netflix

Beginning as a mail-out service, Netflix offered subscribers a catalog of videos to select from and have mailed to them directly. Customers no longer had to go to a retail store to rent a video. However, the lack of immediacy of direct mail as the distribution channel resulted in slow adoption.

The Situation

In response to the increasing presence of tech-savvy consumers on the internet, Netflix invested in developing its online platform as its primary distribution channel. The benefit of doing so was two-fold: passive brand advertising (by being present on the internet) and meeting customer demands for immediacy and convenience. Netflix also recognized the rising demand for personalized service and created an unprecedented, tailored customer experience.

The Competition

Blockbuster was the industry leader in video retail but was lagging in its response to industry, consumer, and technology trends around customer experience.

Results

Netflix’s disruptive innovation is built on the foundation of great CXM. Netflix is now a $28 billion company, which is tenfold what Blockbuster was worth.

Customer Relationship Management Platform

  • Web Experience Management Platform
  • E-Commerce & Point of Sale Solutions
  • Social Media Management Platform
  • Customer Intelligence Platform
  • Customer Service Management Tools
  • Marketing Management Suite

Netflix used disruptive technologies to innovatively build a customer experience that put it ahead of the long-time, video rental industry leader, Blockbuster.

Leverage Info-Tech’s approach to succeed with CXM

Creating an end-to-end technology-enablement strategy for CXM requires a concerted, dedicated effort: Info-Tech can help with our proven approach.

Build the CXM Project Charter

Conduct a Thorough Environmental Scan

Build Customer Personas and Scenarios

Draft Strategic CXM Requirements

Build the CXM Application Portfolio

Implement Operational Best Practices

Why Info-Tech’s Approach?

Info-Tech draws on best-practice research and the experiences of our global member base to develop a methodology for CXM that is driven by rigorous customer-centric analysis.

Our approach uses a unique combination of techniques to ensure that your team has done its due diligence in crafting a forward-thinking technology-enablement strategy for CXM that creates measurable value.

A global professional services firm drives measurable value for CXM by using persona design and scenario development

CASE STUDY

Industry Professionals Services

Source Info-Tech Workshop

The Situation

A global professional services firm in the B2B space was experiencing a fragmented approach to customer engagement, particularly in the pre-sales funnel. Legacy applications weren’t keeping pace with an increased demand for lead evaluation and routing technology. Web experience management was also an area of significant concern, with a lack of ongoing customer engagement through the existing web portal.

The Approach

Working with a team of Info-Tech facilitators, the company was able to develop several internal and external customer personas. These personas formed the basis of strategic requirements for a new CXM application stack, which involved dedicated platforms for core CRM, lead automation, web content management, and site analytics.

Results

Customer “stickiness” metrics increased, and Sales reported significantly higher turnaround times in lead evaluations, resulting in improved rep productivity and faster cycle times.

Components of a persona
Name Name personas to reflect a key attribute such as the persona’s primary role or motivation.
Demographic Include basic descriptors of the persona (e.g. age, geographic location, preferred language, education, job, employer, household income, etc.)
Wants, needs, pain points Identify surface-level motivations for buying habits.
Psychographic/behavioral traits Observe persona traits that are representative of the customers’ behaviors (e.g. attitudes, buying patterns, etc.).

Follow Info-Tech’s approach to build your CXM foundation

Create the Project Vision

  • Identify business and IT drivers
  • Outputs:
    • CXM Strategy Guiding Principles

Structure the Project

  • Identify goals and objectives for CXM project
  • Form Project Team
  • Establish timeline
  • Obtain project sponsorship
  • Outputs:
    • CXM Strategy Project Charter

Scan the External Environment

  • Create CXM operating model
  • Conduct external analysis
  • Create customer personas
  • Outputs:
    • CXM Operating Model
  • Conduct PEST analysis
  • Create persona scenarios
  • Outputs:
    • CXM Strategic Requirements

Assess the Current State of CXM

  • Conduct SWOT analysis
  • Assess application usage and satisfaction
  • Conduct VRIO analysis
  • Outputs:
    • CXM Strategic Requirements

Create an Application Portfolio

  • Map current processes
  • Assign business process owners
  • Create channel map
  • Build CXM application portfolio
  • Outputs:
    • CXM Application Portfolio Map

Develop Deployment Best Practices

  • Develop CXM integration map
  • Create mitigation plan for poor data quality
  • Outputs:
    • Data Quality Preservation Map

Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

  • Create risk management plan
  • Identify work initiative dependencies
  • Create roadmap
  • Outputs:
    • CXM Initiative Roadmap

Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

  • Identify success metrics
  • Create stakeholder communication plan
  • Present CXM strategy to stakeholders
  • Outputs:
    • Stakeholder Presentation

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

Guided Implementation

“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

Workshop

“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

Consulting

“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Build a Strong Technology Foundation for CXM – project overview

1. Drive Value With CXM 2. Create the Framework 3. Finalize the Framework
Best-Practice Toolkit

1.1 Create the Project Vision

1.2 Structure the CXM Project

2.1 Scan the External Environment

2.2 Assess the Current State of CXM

2.3 Create an Application Portfolio

2.4 Develop Deployment Best Practices

3.1 Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

3.2 Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

Guided Implementations
  • Determine project vision for CXM.
  • Review CXM project charter.
  • Review environmental scan.
  • Review application portfolio for CXM.
  • Confirm deployment best practices.
  • Review initiatives rollout plan.
  • Confirm CXM roadmap.
Onsite Workshop Module 1: Drive Measurable Value with a World-Class CXM Program Module 2: Create the Strategic Framework for CXM Module 3: Finalize the CXM Framework

Phase 1 Outcome:

  • Completed drivers
  • Completed project charter

Phase 2 Outcome:

  • Completed personas and scenarios
  • CXM application portfolio

Phase 3 Outcome:

  • Strategic summary blueprint

Workshop overview

Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
Activities

Create the Vision for CXM Enablement

1.1 CXM Fireside Chat

1.2 CXM Business Drivers

1.3 CXM Vision Statement

1.4 Project Structure

Conduct the Environmental Scan and Internal Review

2.1 PEST Analysis

2.2 Competitive Analysis

2.3 Market and Trend Analysis

2.4 SWOT Analysis

2.5 VRIO Analysis

2.6 Channel Mapping

Build Personas and Scenarios

3.1 Persona Development

3.2 Scenario Development

3.3 Requirements Definition for CXM

Create the CXM Application Portfolio

4.1 Build Business Process Maps

4.2 Review Application Satisfaction

4.3 Create the CXM Application Portfolio

4.4 Prioritize Applications

Review Best Practices and Confirm Initiatives

5.1 Create Data Integration Map

5.2 Define Adoption Best Practices

5.3 Build Initiatives Roadmap

5.4 Confirm Initiatives Roadmap

Deliverables
  1. CXM Vision Statement
  2. CXM Project Charter
  1. Completed External Analysis
  2. Completed Internal Review
  3. Channel Interaction Map
  4. Strategic Requirements (from External Analysis)
  1. Personas and Scenarios
  2. Strategic Requirements (based on personas)
  1. Business Process Maps
  2. Application Satisfaction Diagnostic
  3. Prioritized CXM Application Portfolio
  1. Integration Map for CXM
  2. End-User Adoption Plan
  3. Initiatives Roadmap

Phase 1

Drive Measurable Value With a World-Class CXM Program

Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

Phase 1 outline

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 1: Drive Measurable Value With a World-Class CXM Program

Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

Step 1.1: Create the Project Vision

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Review key drivers from a technology and business perspective for CXM
  • Discuss benefits of strong technology enablement for CXM

Then complete these activities…

  • CXM Fireside Chat
  • CXM Business and Technology Driver Assessment
  • CXM Vision Statement

With these tools & templates:

  • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template

Step 1.2: Structure the Project

Review findings with analyst:

  • Assess the CXM vision statement for competitive differentiators
  • Determine current alignment disposition of IT with different business units

Then complete these activities…

  • Team Composition and Responsibilities
  • Metrics Definition

With these tools & templates:

  • CXM Strategy Project Charter Template

Phase 1 Results & Insights:

  • Defined value of strong technology enablement for CXM
  • Completed CXM project charter

Step 1.1: Create the Project Vision

Phase 1

1.1 Create the Project Vision

1.2 Structure the Project

Phase 2

2.1 Scan the External Environment

2.2 Assess the Current State of CXM

2.3 Create an Application Portfolio

2.4 Develop Deployment Best Practices

Phase 3

3.1 Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

3.2 Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

Activities:

  • Fireside Chat: Discuss past challenges and successes with CXM
  • Identify business and IT drivers to establish guiding principles for CXM

Outcomes:

  • Business benefits of a rationalized technology strategy to support CXM
  • Shared lessons learned
  • Guiding principles for providing technology enablement for CXM

Building a technology strategy to support customer experience isn’t an option – it’s a mission-critical activity

  • Customer-facing departments supply the lifeblood of a company: revenue. In today’s fast-paced and interconnected world, it’s becoming increasingly imperative to enable customer experience processes with a wide range of technologies, from lead automation to social relationship management. CXM is the holistic management of customer interaction processes across marketing, sales, and customer service to create valuable, mutually beneficial customer experiences. Technology is a critical building block for enabling CXM.
  • The parallel progress of technology and process improvement is essential to an efficient and effective CXM program. While many executives prefer to remain at the status quo, new technologies have caused major shifts in the CXM environment. If you stay with the status quo, you will fall behind the competition.
  • However, many IT departments are struggling to keep up with the pace of change and find themselves more of a firefighter than a strategic partner to marketing, sales, and service teams. This not only hurts the business, but it also tarnishes IT’s reputation.

An aligned, optimized CX strategy is:

Rapid: to intentionally and strategically respond to quickly-changing opportunities and issues.

Outcome-based: to make key decisions based on strong business cases, data, and analytics in addition to intuition and judgment.

Rigorous: to bring discipline and science to bear; to improve operations and results.

Collaborative: to conduct activities in a broader ecosystem of partners, suppliers, vendors, co-developers, and even competitors.

(The Wall Street Journal, 2013)

Info-Tech Insight

If IT fails to adequately support marketing, sales, and customer service teams, the organization’s revenue will be in direct jeopardy. As a result, CIOs and Applications Directors must work with their counterparts in these departments to craft a cohesive and comprehensive strategy for using technology to create meaningful (and profitable) customer experiences.

Fireside Chat, Part 1: When was technology an impediment to customer experience at your organization?

1.1.1 30 minutes

Input

  • Past experiences of the team

Output

  • Lessons learned

Materials

  • Whiteboard
  • Markers

Participants

  • Core Team

Instructions

  1. Think about a time when technology was an impediment to a positive customer experience at your organization. Reflect on the following:
    • What frustrations did the application or the technology cause to your customers? What was their reaction?
    • How did IT (and the business) identify the challenge in the first place?
    • What steps were taken to mitigate the impact of the problem? Were these steps successful?
    • What were the key lessons learned as part of the challenge?

Fireside Chat, Part 2: What customer success stories has your organization created by using new technologies?

1.1.2 30 minutes

Input

  • Past experiences of the team

Output

  • Lessons learned

Materials

  • Whiteboard
  • Markers

Participants

  • Core Team

Instructions

  1. Think about a time when your organization successfully leveraged a new application or new technology to enhance the experience it provided to customers. Reflect on this experience and consider:
    • What were the organizational drivers for rolling out the new application or solution?
    • What obstacles had to be overcome in order to successfully deploy the solution?
    • How did the application positively impact the customer experience? What metrics improved?
    • What were the key lessons learned as part of the deployment? If you had to do it all over again, what would you do differently?

Develop a cohesive, consistent, and forward-looking roadmap that supports each stage of the customer lifecycle

When creating your roadmap, consider the pitfalls you’ll likely encounter in building the IT strategy to provide technology enablement for customer experience.

There’s no silver bullet for developing a strategy. You can encounter pitfalls at a myriad of different points including not involving the right stakeholders from the business, not staying abreast of recent trends in the external environment, and not aligning sales, marketing, and support initiatives with a focus on the delivery of value to prospects and customers.

Common Pitfalls When Creating a Technology-Enablement Strategy for CXM

Senior management is not involved in strategy development.

Not paying attention to the “art of the possible.”

“Paving the cow path” rather than focusing on revising core processes.

Misalignment between objectives and financial/personnel resources.

Inexperienced team on either the business or IT side.

Not paying attention to the actions of competitors.

Entrenched management preferences for legacy systems.

Sales culture that downplays the potential value of technology or new applications.

IT is only one or two degrees of separation from the end customer: so take a customer-centric approach

IT →Marketing, Sales, and Service →External Customers

Internal-Facing Applications

  • IT enables, supports, and maintains the applications used by the organization to market to, sell to, and service customers. IT provides the infrastructural and technical foundation to operate the function.

Customer-Facing Applications

  • IT supports customer-facing interfaces and channels for customer interaction.
  • Channel examples include web pages, mobile device applications and optimization, and interactive voice response for callers.

Info-Tech Insight

IT often overlooks direct customer considerations when devising a technology strategy for CXM. Instead, IT leaders rely on other business stakeholders to simply pass on requirements. By sitting down with their counterparts in marketing and sales, and fully understanding business drivers and customer personas, IT will be much better positioned to roll out supporting applications that drive customer engagement.

A well-aligned CXM strategy recognizes a clear delineation of responsibilities between IT, sales, marketing, and service

  • When thinking about CXM, IT must recognize that it is responsible for being a trusted partner for technology enablement. This means that IT has a duty to:
    • Develop an in-depth understanding of strategic business requirements for CXM. Base your understanding of these business requirements on a clear conception of the internal and external environment, customer personas, and business processes in marketing, sales, and customer service.
    • Assist with shortlisting and supporting different channels for customer interaction (including email, telephony, web presence, and social media).
    • Create a rationalized, cohesive application portfolio for CXM that blends different enabling technologies together to support strategic business requirements.
    • Provide support for vendor shortlisting, selection, and implementation of CXM applications.
    • Assist with end-user adoption of CXM applications (i.e. training and ongoing support).
    • Provide initiatives that assist with technical excellence for CXM (such as data quality, integration, analytics, and application maintenance).
  • The business (marketing, sales, customer service) owns the business requirements and must be responsible for setting top-level objectives for customer interaction (e.g. product and pricing decisions, marketing collateral, territory management, etc.). IT should not take over decisions on customer experience strategy. However, IT should be working in lockstep with its counterparts in the business to assist with understanding business requirements through a customer-facing lens. For example, persona development is best done in cross-functional teams between IT and Marketing.

Activity: Identify the business drivers for CXM to establish the strategy’s guiding principles

1.1.3 30 minutes

Input

  • Business drivers for CXM

Output

  • Guiding principles for CXM strategy

Materials

  • Whiteboard
  • Markers

Participants

  • Project Team

Instructions

  1. Define the assumptions and business drivers that have an impact on technology enablement for CXM. What is driving the current marketing, sales, and service strategy on the business side?
Business Driver Name Driver Assumptions, Capabilities, and Constraints Impact on CXM Strategy
High degree of customer-centric solution selling A technically complex product means that solution selling approaches are employed – sales cycles are long. There is a strong need for applications and data quality processes that support longer-term customer relationships rather than transactional selling.
High desire to increase scalability of sales processes Although sales cycles are long, the organization wishes to increase the effectiveness of rep time via marketing automation where possible. Sales is always looking for new ways to leverage their reps for face-to-face solution selling while leaving low-level tasks to automation. Marketing wants to support these tasks.
Highly remote sales team and unusual hours are the norm Not based around core hours – significant overtime or remote working occurs frequently. Misalignment between IT working only core hours and after-hours teams leads to lag times that can delay work. Scheduling of preventative sales maintenance must typically be done on weekends rather than weekday evenings.

Activity: Identify the IT drivers for CXM to establish the strategy’s guiding principles

1.1.4 30 minutes

Input

  • IT drivers for CXM

Output

  • Guiding principles for CXM strategy

Materials

  • Whiteboard
  • Markers

Participants

  • Project Team

Instructions

  1. Define the assumptions and IT drivers that have an impact on technology enablement for CXM. What is driving the current IT strategy for supporting marketing, sales, and service initiatives?
IT Driver Name Driver Assumptions, Capabilities, and Constraints Impact on CXM Strategy
Sales Application Procurement Methodology Strong preference for on-premise COTS deployments over homebrewed applications. IT may not be able to support cloud-based sales applications due to security requirements for on premise.
Vendor Relations Minimal vendor relationships; SLAs not drafted internally but used as part of standard agreement. IT may want to investigate tightening up SLAs with vendors to ensure more timely support is available for their sales teams.
Development Methodology Agile methodology employed, some pockets of Waterfall employed for large-scale deployments. Agile development means more perfective maintenance requests come in, but it leads to greater responsiveness for making urgent corrective changes to non-COTS products.
Data Quality Approach IT sees as Sales’ responsibility IT is not standing as a strategic partner for helping to keep data clean, causing dissatisfaction from customer-facing departments.
Staffing Availability Limited to 9–5 Execution of sales support takes place during core hours only, limiting response times and access for on-the-road sales personnel.

Activity: Use IT and business drivers to create guiding principles for your CXM technology-enablement project

1.1.5 30 minutes

Input

  • Business drivers and IT drivers from 1.1.3 and 1.1.4

Output

  • CXM mission statement

Materials

  • Whiteboard
  • Markers

Participants

  • Core Team

Instructions

1. Based on the IT and business drivers identified, craft guiding principles for CXM technology enablement. Keep guiding principles in mind throughout the project and ensure they support (or reconcile) the business and IT drivers.

Guiding Principle Description
Sales processes must be scalable. Our sales processes must be able to reach a high number of target customers in a short time without straining systems or personnel.
Marketing processes must be high touch. Processes must be oriented to support technically sophisticated, solution-selling methodologies.

2. Summarize the guiding principles above by creating a CXM mission statement. See below for an example.

Example: CXM Mission Statement

To ensure our marketing, sales and service team is equipped with tools that will allow them to reach out to a large volume of contacts while still providing a solution-selling approach. This will be done with secure, on-premise systems to safeguard customer data.

Ensure that now is the right time to take a step back and develop the CXM strategy

Determine if now is the right time to move forward with building (or overhauling) your technology-enablement strategy for CXM.

Not all organizations will be able to proceed immediately to optimize their CXM technology enablement. Determine if the organizational willingness, backbone, and resources are present to commit to overhauling the existing strategy. If you’re not ready to proceed, consider waiting to begin this project until you can procure the right resources.

Do not proceed if:

  • Your current strategy for supporting marketing, sales, and service is working well and IT is already viewed as a strategic partner by these groups. Your current strategy is well aligned with customer preferences.
  • The current strategy is not working well, but there is no consensus or support from senior management for improving it.
  • You cannot secure the resources or time to devote to thoroughly examining the current state and selecting improvement initiatives.
  • The strategy has been approved, but there is no budget in place to support it at this time.

Proceed if:

  • Senior management has agreed that technology support for CXM should be improved.
  • Sub-divisions within IT, sales, marketing, and service are on the same page about the need to improve alignment.
  • You have an approximate budget to work with for the project and believe you can secure additional funding to execute at least some improvement initiatives.
  • You understand how improving CXM alignment will fit into the broader customer interaction ecosystem in your organization.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

1.1.3; 1.1.4; 1.1.5 - Identify business and IT drivers to create CXM guiding principles

The facilitator will work with stakeholders from both the business and IT to identify implicit or explicit strategic drivers that will support (or pose constraints on) the technology-enablement framework for the CXM strategy. In doing so, guiding principles will be established for the project.

Step 1.2: Structure the Project

Phase 1

1.1 Create the Project Vision

1.2 Structure the Project

Phase 2

2.1 Scan the External Environment

2.2 Assess the Current State of CXM

2.3 Create an Application Portfolio

2.4 Develop Deployment Best Practices

Phase 3

3.1 Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

3.2 Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

Activities:

  • Define the project purpose, objectives, and business metrics
  • Define the scope of the CXM strategy
  • Create the project team
  • Build a RACI chart
  • Develop a timeline with project milestones
  • Identify risks and create mitigation strategies
  • Complete the strategy project charter and obtain approval

Outcomes:

CXM Strategy Project Charter Template

  • Purpose, objectives, metrics
  • Scope
  • Project team & RACI
  • Timeline
  • Risks & mitigation strategies
  • Project sponsorship

Use Info-Tech’s CXM Strategy Project Charter Template to outline critical components of the CXM project

1.2.1 CXM Strategy Project Charter Template

Having a project charter is the first step for any project: it specifies how the project will be resourced from a people, process, and technology perspective, and it clearly outlines major project milestones and timelines for strategy development. CXM technology enablement crosses many organizational boundaries, so a project charter is a very useful tool for ensuring everyone is on the same page.

Sections of the document:

  1. Project Drivers, Rationale, and Context
  2. Project Objectives, Metrics, and Purpose
  3. Project Scope Definition
  4. Project Team Roles and Responsibilities (RACI)
  5. Project Timeline
  6. Risk Mitigation Strategy
  7. Project Metrics
  8. Project Review & Approvals

INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

CXM Strategy Project Charter Template

Populate the relevant sections of your project charter as you complete activities 1.2.2-1.2.8.

Understand the roles necessary to complete your CXM technology-enablement strategy

Understand the role of each player within your project structure. Look for listed participants on the activities slides to determine when each player should be involved.

Title Role Within Project Structure
Project Sponsor
  • Owns the project at the management/C-suite level
  • Responsible for breaking down barriers and ensuring alignment with organizational strategy
  • CIO, CMO, VP of Sales, VP of Customer Care, or similar
Project Manager
  • The IT individual(s) that will oversee day-to-day project operations
  • Responsible for preparing and managing the project plan and monitoring the project team’s progress
  • Applications or other IT Manager, Business Analyst, Business Process Owner, or similar
Business Lead
  • Works alongside the IT PM to ensure that the strategy is aligned with business needs
  • In this case, likely to be a marketing, sales, or customer service lead
  • Sales Director, Marketing Director, Customer Care Director, or similar
Project Team
  • Comprised of individuals whose knowledge and skills are crucial to project success
  • Responsible for driving day-to-day activities, coordinating communication, and making process and design decisions. Can assist with persona and scenario development for CXM.
  • Project Manager, Business Lead, CRM Manager, Integration Manager, Application SMEs, Developers, Business Process Architects, and/or similar SMEs
Steering Committee
  • Comprised of C-suite/management level individuals that act as the project’s decision makers
  • Responsible for validating goals and priorities, defining the project scope, enabling adequate resourcing, and managing change
  • Project Sponsor, Project Manager, Business Lead, CFO, Business Unit SMEs and similar

Info-Tech Insight

Do not limit project input or participation to the aforementioned roles. Include subject matter experts and internal stakeholders at particular stages within the project. Such inputs can be solicited on a one-off basis as needed. This ensures you take a holistic approach to creating your CXM technology-enablement strategy.

Activity: Kick-off the CXM project by defining the project purpose, project objectives, and business metrics

1.2.2 30 minutes

Input

  • Activities 1.1.1 to 1.1.5

Output

  • Drivers & rationale
  • Purpose statement
  • Business goals
  • Business metrics
  • CXM Strategy Project Charter Template, sections 1.0, 2.0, and 2.1

Materials

  • Whiteboard
  • Markers

Participants

  • Project Sponsor
  • Project Manager
  • Business Lead
  • Steering Committee

Instructions

Hold a meeting with IT, Marketing, Sales, Service, Operations, and any other impacted business stakeholders that have input into CXM to accomplish the following:

  1. Discuss the drivers and rationale behind embarking on a CXM strategy.
  2. Develop and concede on objectives for the CXM project, metrics that will gauge its success, and goals for each metric.
  3. Create a project purpose statement that is informed by decided-upon objectives and metrics from the steps above. When establishing a project purpose, ask the question, “what are we trying to accomplish?”
  • Example: Project Purpose Statement
    • The organization is creating a CXM strategy to gather high-level requirements from the business, IT, and Marketing, Sales, and Service, to ensure that the selection and deployment of the CXM meets the needs of the broader organization and provides the greatest return on investment.
  • Document your project drivers and rationale, purpose statement, project objectives, and business metrics in Info-Tech’s CXM Strategy Project Charter Template in sections 1.0 and 2.0.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Going forward, set up a quarterly review process to understand changing needs. It is rare that organizations never change their marketing and sales strategy. This will change the way the CXM will be utilized.

    Establish baseline metrics for customer engagement

    In order to gauge the effectiveness of CXM technology enablement, establish core metrics:

    1. Marketing Metrics: pertaining to share of voice, share of wallet, market share, lead generation, etc.
    2. Sales Metrics: pertaining to overall revenue, average deal size, number of accounts, MCV, lead warmth, etc.
    3. Customer Service Metrics: pertaining to call volumes, average time to resolution, first contact resolution, customer satisfaction, etc.
    4. IT Metrics: pertaining to end-user satisfaction with CXM applications, number of tickets, contract value, etc.
    Metric Description Current Metric Future Goal
    Market Share 25% 35%
    Share of Voice (All Channels) 40% 50%
    Average Deal Size $10,500 $12,000
    Account Volume 1,400 1,800
    Average Time to Resolution 32 min 25 min
    First Contact Resolution 15% 35%
    Web Traffic per Month (Unique Visitors) 10,000 15,000
    End-User Satisfaction 62% 85%+
    Other metric
    Other metric
    Other metric

    Understand the importance of setting project expectations with a scope statement

    Be sure to understand what is in scope for a CXM strategy project. Prevent too wide of a scope to avoid scope creep – for example, we aren’t tackling ERP or BI under CXM.

    In Scope

    Establishing the parameters of the project in a scope statement helps define expectations and provides a baseline for resource allocation and planning. Future decisions about the strategic direction of CXM will be based on the scope statement.

    Scope Creep

    Well-executed requirements gathering will help you avoid expanding project parameters, drawing on your resources, and contributing to cost overruns and project delays. Avoid scope creep by gathering high-level requirements that lead to the selection of category-level application solutions (e.g. CRM, MMS, SMMP, etc.), rather than granular requirements that would lead to vendor application selection (e.g. Salesforce, Marketo, Hootsuite, etc.).

    Out of Scope

    Out-of-scope items should also be defined to alleviate ambiguity, reduce assumptions, and further clarify expectations for stakeholders. Out-of-scope items can be placed in a backlog for later consideration. For example, fulfilment and logistics management is out of scope as it pertains to CXM.

    In Scope
    Strategy
    High-Level CXM Application Requirements CXM Strategic Direction Category Level Application Solutions (e.g. CRM, MMS, etc.)
    Out of Scope
    Software Selection
    Vendor Application Review Vendor Application Selection Granular Application System Requirements

    Activity: Define the scope of the CXM strategy

    1.2.3 30 minutes

    Input

    • N/A

    Output

    • Project scope and parameters
    • CXM Strategy Project Charter Template, section 3.0

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Sponsor
    • Project Manager
    • Business Lead

    Instructions

    1. Formulate a scope statement. Decide which people, processes, and functions the CXM strategy will address. Generally, the aim of this project is to develop strategic requirements for the CXM application portfolio – not to select individual vendors.
    2. Document your scope statement in Info-Tech’s CXM Strategy Project Charter Template in section 3.0.

    To form your scope statement, ask the following questions:

    • What are the major coverage points?
    • Who will be using the systems?
    • How will different users interact with the systems?
    • What are the objectives that need to be addressed?
    • Where do we start?
    • Where do we draw the line?

    Identify the right stakeholders to include on your project team

    Consider the core team functions when composing the project team. Form a cross-functional team (i.e. across IT, Marketing, Sales, Service, Operations) to create a well-aligned CXM strategy.

    Required Skills/Knowledge Suggested Project Team Members
    IT
    • Application development
    • Enterprise integration
    • Business processes
    • Data management
    • CRM Application Manager
    • Business Process Manager
    • Integration Manager
    • Application Developer
    • Data Stewards
    Business
    • Understanding of the customer
    • Departmental processes
    • Sales Manager
    • Marketing Manager
    • Customer Service Manager
    Other
    • Operations
    • Administrative
    • Change management
    • Operations Manager
    • CFO
    • Change Management Manager

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t let your project team become too large when trying to include all relevant stakeholders. Carefully limiting the size of the project team will enable effective decision making while still including functional business units such as marketing, sales, service, and finance, as well as IT.

    Activity: Create the project team

    1.2.4 45 minutes

    Input

    • Scope Statement (output of Activity 1.2.3).

    Output

    • Project Team
    • CXM Strategy Project Charter Template, section 4.0

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Business Lead

    Instructions

    1. Review your scope statement. Have a discussion to generate a complete list of key stakeholders that are needed to achieve the scope of work.
    2. Using the previously generated list, identify a candidate for each role and determine their responsibilities and expected time commitment for the CXM strategy project.
    3. Document the project team in Info-Tech’s CXM Strategy Project Charter Template in section 4.0.

    Define project roles and responsibilities to improve progress tracking

    Build a list of the core CXM strategy team members, and then structure a RACI chart with the relevant categories and roles for the overall project.

    Responsible - Conducts work to achieve the task

    Accountable - Answerable for completeness of task

    Consulted - Provides input for the task

    Informed - Receives updates on the task

    Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid missed tasks between inter-functional communications by defining roles and responsibilities for the project as early as possible.

    Benefits of Assigning RACI Early:

    • Improve project quality by assigning the right people to the right tasks.
    • Improve chances of project task completion by assigning clear accountabilities.
    • Improve project buy-in by ensuring that stakeholders are kept informed of project progress, risks, and successes.

    Activity: Build a RACI chart

    1.2.5 30 minutes

    Input

    • Project Team (output of Activity 1.2.4)

    Output

    • RACI chart
    • CXM Strategy Project Charter Template, section 4.2

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Business Lead

    Instructions

    1. Identify the key stakeholder teams that should be involved in the CXM strategy project. You should have a cross-functional team that encompasses both IT (various units) and the business.
    2. Determine whether each stakeholder should be responsible, accountable, consulted, and/or informed with respect to each overarching project step.
    3. Confirm and communicate the results to relevant stakeholders and obtain their approval.
    4. Document the RACI chart in Info-Tech’s CXM Strategy Project Charter Template in section 4.2.
    Example: RACI Chart Project Sponsor (e.g. CMO) Project Manager (e.g. Applications Manager) Business Lead (e.g. Marketing Director) Steering Committee (e.g. PM, CMO, CFO…) Project Team (e.g. PM, BL, SMEs…)
    Assess Project Value I C A R C
    Conduct a Current State Assessment I I A C R
    Design Application Portfolio I C A R I
    Create CXM Roadmap R R A I I
    ... ... ... ... ... ...

    Activity: Develop a timeline in order to specify concrete project milestones

    1.2.6 30 minutes

    Input

    • N/A

    Output

    • Project timeline
    • CXM Strategy Project Charter Template, section 5.0

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Business Lead

    Instructions

    1. Assign responsibilities, accountabilities, and other project involvement to each project team role using a RACI chart. Remember to consider dependencies when creating the schedule and identifying appropriate subtasks.
    2. Document the timeline in Info-Tech’s CXM Strategy Project Charter Template in section 5.0.
    Key Activities Start Date End Date Target Status Resource(s)
    Structure the Project and Build the Project Team
    Articulate Business Objectives and Define Vision for Future State
    Document Current State and Assess Gaps
    Identify CXM Technology Solutions
    Build the Strategy for CXM
    Implement the Strategy

    Assess project-associated risk by understanding common barriers and enablers

    Common Internal Risk Factors

    Management Support Change Management IT Readiness
    Definition The degree of understanding and acceptance of CXM as a concept and necessary portfolio of technologies. The degree to which employees are ready to accept change and the organization is ready to manage it. The degree to which the organization is equipped with IT resources to handle new systems and processes.
    Assessment Outcomes
    • Is CXM enablement recognized as a top priority?
    • Will management commit time to the project?
    • Are employees resistant to change?
    • Is there an organizational awareness of the importance of customer experience?
    • Who are the owners of process and content?
    • Is there strong technical expertise?
    • Is there strong infrastructure?
    • What are the important integration points throughout the business?
    Risk
    • Low management buy-in
    • Lack of funding
    • Lack of resources
    • Low employee motivation
    • Lack of ownership
    • Low user adoption
    • Poor implementation
    • Reliance on consultants

    Activity: Identify the risks and create mitigation strategies

    1.2.7 45 minutes

    Input

    • N/A

    Output

    • Risk mitigation strategy
    • CXM Strategy Project Charter Template, section 6.0

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Business Lead
    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Brainstorm a list of possible risks that may impede the progress of your CXM project.
    2. Classify risks as strategy based (related to planning) or systems based (related to technology).
    3. Brainstorm mitigation strategies to overcome each risk.
    4. On a scale of 1 to 3, determine the impact of each risk on project success and the likelihood of each risk occurring.
    5. Document your findings in Info-Tech’s CXM Strategy Project Charter Template in section 6.0.

    Likelihood:

    1 - High/Needs Focus

    2 - Can Be Mitigated

    3 - Unlikely

    Impact

    1 - High Impact

    2 - Moderate Impact

    3 - Minimal Impact

    Example: Risk Register and Mitigation Tactics

    Risk Impact Likelihood Mitigation Effort
    Cost of time and implementation: designing a robust portfolio of CXM applications can be a time consuming task, representing a heavy investment for the organization 1 1
    • Have a clear strategic plan and a defined time frame
    • Know your end-user requirements
    • Put together an effective and diverse strategy project team
    Availability of resources: lack of in-house resources (e.g. infrastructure, CXM application developers) may result in the need to insource or outsource resources 1 2
    • Prepare a plan to insource talent by hiring or transferring talent from other departments – e.g. marketing and customer service

    Activity: Complete the project charter and obtain approval

    1.2.8 45 minutes

    Input

    • N/A

    Output

    • Project approval
    • CXM Strategy Project Charter Template, section 8.0

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Business Lead
    • Project Team

    Instructions

    Before beginning to develop the CXM strategy, validate the project charter and metrics with senior sponsors or stakeholders and receive their approval to proceed.

    1. Schedule a 30-60 minute meeting with senior stakeholders and conduct a live review of your CXM strategy project charter.
    2. Obtain stakeholder approval to ensure there are no miscommunications or misunderstandings around the scope of the work that needs to be done to reach a successful project outcome. Final sign-off should only take place when mutual consensus has been reached.
      • Obtaining approval should be an iterative process; if senior management has concerns over certain aspects of the plan, revise and review again.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In most circumstances, you should have your CXM strategy project charter validated with the following stakeholders:

    • Chief Information Officer
    • IT Applications Director
    • CFO or Comptroller (for budget approval)
    • Chief Marketing Office or Head of Marketing
    • Chief Revenue Officer or VP of Sales
    • VP Customer Service

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.2.2 Define project purpose, objectives, and business metrics

    Through an in-depth discussion, an analyst will help you prioritize corporate objectives and organizational drivers to establish a distinct project purpose.

    1.2.3 Define the scope of the CXM strategy

    An analyst will facilitate a discussion to address critical questions to understand your distinct business needs. These questions include: What are the major coverage points? Who will be using the system?

    1.2.4; 1.2.5; 1.2.6 Create the CXM project team, build a RACI chart, and establish a timeline

    Our analysts will guide you through how to create a designated project team to ensure the success of your CXM strategy and suite selection initiative, including project milestones and team composition, as well as designated duties and responsibilities.

    Phase 2

    Create a Strategic Framework for CXM Technology Enablement

    Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

    Phase 2 outline: Steps 2.1 and 2.2

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Create a Strategic Framework for CXM Technology Enablement

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Step 2.1: Scan the External Environment

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss external drivers
    • Assess competitive environment
    • Review persona development
    • Review scenarios

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build the CXM operating model
    • Conduct a competitive analysis
    • Conduct a PEST analysis
    • Build personas and scenarios

    With these tools & templates:

    CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template

    Step 2.2: Assess the Current State for CRM

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review SWOT analysis
    • Review VRIO analysis
    • Discuss strategic requirements for CXM

    Then complete these activities…

    • Conduct a SWOT analysis
    • Conduct a VRIO analysis
    • Inventory existing applications

    With these tools & templates:

    CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template

    Phase 2 outline: Steps 2.3 and 2.4

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Create a Strategic Framework for CXM Technology Enablement

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Step 2.3: Create an Application Portfolio

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss possible business process maps
    • Discuss strategic requirements
    • Review application portfolio results

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build business maps
    • Execute application mapping

    With these tools & templates:

    CXM Portfolio Designer

    CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template

    CXM Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    Step 2.4: Develop Deployment Best Practices

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review possible integration maps
    • Discuss best practices for end-user adoption
    • Discuss best practices for customer data quality

    Then complete these activities…

    • Create CXM integration ecosystem
    • Develop adoption game plan
    • Create data quality standards

    With these tools & templates:

    CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • Application portfolio for CXM
    • Deployment best practices for areas such as integration, data quality, and end-user adoption

    Step 2.1: Scan the External Environment

    Phase 1

    1.1 Create the Project Vision

    1.2 Structure the Project

    Phase 2

    2.1 Scan the External Environment

    2.2 Assess the Current State of CXM

    2.3 Create an Application Portfolio

    2.4 Develop Deployment Best Practices

    Phase 3

    3.1 Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

    3.2 Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

    Activities:

    • Inventory CXM drivers and organizational objectives
    • Identify CXM challenges and pain points
    • Discuss opportunities and benefits
    • Align corporate and CXM strategies
    • Conduct a competitive analysis
    • Conduct a PEST analysis and extract strategic requirements
    • Build customer personas and extract strategic requirements

    Outcomes:

    • CXM operating model
      • Organizational drivers
      • Environmental factors
      • Barriers
      • Enablers
    • PEST analysis
    • External customer personas
    • Customer journey scenarios
    • Strategic requirements for CXM

    Develop a CXM technology operating model that takes stock of needs, drivers, barriers, and enablers

    Establish the drivers, enablers, and barriers to developing a CXM technology enablement strategy. In doing so, consider needs, environmental factors, organizational drivers, and technology drivers as inputs.

    CXM Strategy

    • Barriers
      • Lack of Resources
      • Cultural Mindset
      • Resistance to Change
      • Poor End-User Adoption
    • Enablers
      • Senior Management Support
      • Customer Data Quality
      • Current Technology Portfolio
    • Business Needs (What are your business drivers? What are current marketing, sales, and customer service pains?)
      • Acquisition Pipeline Management
      • Live Chat for Support
      • Social Media Analytics
      • Etc.
    • Organizational Goals
      • Increase Profitability
      • Enhance Customer Experience Consistency
      • Reduce Time-to-Resolution
      • Increase First Contact Resolution
      • Boost Share of Voice
    • Environmental Factors (What factors that affect your strategy are out of your control?)
      • Customer Buying Habits
      • Changing Technology Trends
      • Competitive Landscape
      • Regulatory Requirements
    • Technology Drivers (Why do you need a new system? What is the purpose for becoming an integrated organization?)
      • System Integration
      • Reporting Capabilities
      • Deployment Model

    Understand your needs, drivers, and organizational objectives for creating a CXM strategy

    Business Needs Organizational Drivers Technology Drivers Environmental Factors
    Definition A business need is a requirement associated with a particular business process (for example, Marketing needs customer insights from the website – the business need would therefore be web analytics capabilities). Organizational drivers can be thought of as business-level goals. These are tangible benefits the business can measure such as customer retention, operation excellence, and financial performance. Technology drivers are technological changes that have created the need for a new CXM enablement strategy. Many organizations turn to technology systems to help them obtain a competitive edge. External considerations are factors taking place outside of the organization that are impacting the way business is conducted inside the organization. These are often outside the control of the business.
    Examples
    • Web analytics
    • Live chat capabilities
    • Mobile self-service
    • Social media listening
    • Data quality
    • Customer satisfaction
    • Branding
    • Time-to-resolution
    • Deployment model (i.e. SaaS)
    • Integration
    • Reporting capabilities
    • Fragmented technologies
    • Economic factors
    • Customer preferences
    • Competitive influencers
    • Compliance regulations

    Info-Tech Insight

    A common organizational driver is to provide adequate technology enablement across multiple channels, resulting in a consistent customer experience. This driver is a result of external considerations. Many industries today are highly competitive and rapidly changing. To succeed under these pressures, you must have a rationalized portfolio of enterprise applications for customer interaction.

    Activity: Inventory and discuss CXM drivers and organizational objectives

    2.1.1 30 minutes

    Input

    • Business needs
    • Exercise 1.1.3
    • Exercise 1.1.4
    • Environmental factors

    Output

    • CXM operating model inputs
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Info-Tech examples
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Brainstorm the business needs, organizational drivers, technology drivers, and environmental factors that will inform the CXM strategy. Draw from exercises 1.1.3-1.1.5.
    2. Document your findings in the CXM operating model template. This can be found in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    The image is a graphic, with a rectangle split into three sections in the centre. The three sections are: Barriers; CXM Strategy; Enablers. Around the centre are 4 more rectangles, labelled: Business Needs; Organizational Drivers; Technology Drivers; Environmental Factors. The outer rectangles are a slightly darker shade of grey than the others, highlighting them.

    Understand challenges and barriers to creating and executing the CXM technology-enablement strategy

    Take stock of internal challenges and barriers to effective CXM strategy execution.

    Example: Internal Challenges & Potential Barriers

    Understanding the Customer Change Management IT Readiness
    Definition The degree to which a holistic understanding of the customer can be created, including customer demographic and psychographics. The degree to which employees are ready to accept operational and cultural changes and the degree to which the organization is ready to manage it. The degree to which IT is ready to support new technologies and processes associated with a portfolio of CXM applications.
    Questions to Ask
    • As an organization, do we have a true understanding of our customers?
    • How might we achieve a complete understanding of the customer throughout different phases of the customer lifecycle?
    • Are employees resistant to change?
    • Are there enough resources to drive an CXM strategy?
    • To what degree is the existing organizational culture customer-centric?
    • Is there strong technical expertise?
    • Is there strong infrastructure?
    Implications
    • Uninformed creation of CXM strategic requirements
    • Inadequate understanding of customer needs and wants
    • User acceptance
    • Lack of ownership
    • Lack of accountability
    • Lack of sustainability
    • Poor implementation
    • Reliance on expensive external consultants
    • Lack of sustainability

    Activity: Identify CXM challenges and pain points

    2.1.2 30 minutes

    Input

    • Challenges
    • Pain points

    Output

    • CXM operating model barriers
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Info-Tech examples
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Brainstorm the challenges and pain points that may act as barriers to the successful planning and execution of a CXM strategy.
    2. Document your findings in the CXM operating model template. This can be found in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    The image is the same graphic from a previous section. In this instance, the Barriers sections is highlighted.

    Identify opportunities that can enable CXM strategy execution

    Existing internal conditions, capabilities, and resources can create opportunities to enable the CXM strategy. These opportunities are critical to overcoming challenges and barriers.

    Example: Opportunities to Leverage for Strategy Enablement

    Management Buy-In Customer Data Quality Current Technology Portfolio
    Definition The degree to which upper management understands and is willing to enable a CXM project, complete with sponsorship, funding, and resource allocation. The degree to which customer data is accurate, consistent, complete, and reliable. Strong customer data quality is an opportunity – poor data quality is a barrier. The degree to which the existing portfolio of CXM-supporting enterprise applications can be leveraged to enable the CXM strategy.
    Questions to Ask
    • Is management informed of changing technology trends and the subsequent need for CXM?
    • Are adequate funding and resourcing available to support a CXM project, from strategy creation to implementation?
    • Are there any data quality issues?
    • Is there one source of truth for customer data?
    • Are there duplicate or incomplete sets of data?
    • Does a strong CRM backbone exist?
    • What marketing, sales, and customer service applications exist?
    • Are CXM-enabling applications rated highly on usage and performance?
    Implications
    • Need for CXM clearly demonstrated
    • Financial and logistical feasibility
    • Consolidated data quality governance initiatives
    • Informed decision making
    • Foundation for CXM technology enablement largely in place
    • Reduced investment of time and money needed

    Activity: Discuss opportunities and benefits

    2.1.3 30 minutes

    Input

    • Opportunities
    • Benefits

    Output

    • Completed CXM operating model
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Info-Tech examples
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Brainstorm opportunities that should be leveraged or benefits that should be realized to enable the successful planning and execution of a CXM strategy.
    2. Document your findings in the CXM operating model template. This can be found in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    The image is the same graphic from earlier sections, this time with the Enablers section highlighted.

    Ensure that you align your CXM technology strategy to the broader corporate strategy

    A successful CXM strategy requires a comprehensive understanding of an organization’s overall corporate strategy and its effects on the interrelated departments of marketing, sales, and service, including subsequent technology implications. For example, a CXM strategy that emphasizes tools for omnichannel management and is at odds with a corporate strategy that focuses on only one or two channels will fail.

    Corporate Strategy

    • Conveys the current state of the organization and the path it wants to take.
    • Identifies future goals and business aspirations.
    • Communicates the initiatives that are critical for getting the organization from its current state to the future state.

    CXM Strategy

    • Communicates the company’s budget and spending on CXM applications and initiatives.
    • Identifies IT initiatives that will support the business and key CXM objectives, specific to marketing, sales, and service.
    • Outlines staffing and resourcing for CXM initiatives.

    Unified Strategy

    • The CXM implementation can be linked, with metrics, to the corporate strategy and ultimate business objectives.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organization’s corporate strategy is especially important in dictating the direction of the CXM strategy. Corporate strategies are often focused on customer-facing activity and will heavily influence the direction of marketing, sales, customer service, and consequentially, CXM. Corporate strategies will often dictate market targeting, sales tactics, service models, and more.

    Review sample organizational objectives to decipher how CXM technologies can support such objectives

    Identifying organizational objectives of high priority will assist in breaking down CXM objectives to better align with the overall corporate strategy and achieve buy-in from key stakeholders.

    Corporate Objectives Aligned CXM Technology Objectives
    Increase Revenue Enable lead scoring Deploy sales collateral management tools Improve average cost per lead via a marketing automation tool
    Enhance Market Share Enhance targeting effectiveness with a CRM Increase social media presence via an SMMP Architect customer intelligence analysis
    Improve Customer Satisfaction Reduce time-to-resolution via better routing Increase accessibility to customer service with live chat Improve first contact resolution with customer KB
    Increase Customer Retention Use a loyalty management application Improve channel options for existing customers Use customer analytics to drive targeted offers
    Create Customer-Centric Culture Ensure strong training and user adoption programs Use CRM to provide 360-degree view of all customer interaction Incorporate the voice of the customer into product development

    Activity: Review your corporate strategy and validate its alignment with the CXM operating model

    2.1.4 30 minutes

    Input

    • Corporate strategy
    • CXM operating model (completed in Activity 2.1.3)

    Output

    • Strategic alignment between the business and CXM strategies

    Materials

    • Info-Tech examples
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Brainstorm and create a list of organizational objectives at the corporate strategy level.
    2. Break down each organizational objective to identify how CXM may support it.
    3. Validate CXM goals and organizational objectives with your CXM operating model. Be sure to address the validity of each with the business needs, organizational drivers, technology drivers, and environmental factors identified as inputs to the operating model.

    Amazon leverages customer data to drive decision making around targeted offers and customer experience

    CASE STUDY

    Industry E-Commerce

    Source Pardot, 2012

    Situation

    Amazon.com, Inc. is an American electronic commerce and cloud computing company. It is the largest e-commerce retailer in the US.

    Amazon originated as an online book store, later diversifying to sell various forms of media, software, games, electronics, apparel, furniture, food, toys, and more.

    By taking a data-driven approach to marketing and sales, Amazon was able to understand its customers’ needs and wants, penetrate different product markets, and create a consistently personalized online-shopping customer experience that keeps customers coming back.

    Technology Strategy

    Use Browsing Data Effectively

    Amazon leverages marketing automation suites to view recent activities of prospects on its website. In doing so, a more complete view of the customer is achieved, including insights into purchasing interests and site navigation behaviors.

    Optimize Based on Interactions

    Using customer intelligence, Amazon surveys and studies standard engagement metrics like open rate, click-through rate, and unsubscribes to ensure the optimal degree of marketing is being targeted to existing and prospective customers, depending on level of engagement.

    Results

    Insights gained from having a complete understanding of the customer (from basic demographic characteristics provided in customer account profiles to observed psychographic behaviors captured by customer intelligence applications) are used to personalize Amazon’s sales and marketing approaches. This is represented through targeted suggestions in the “recommended for you” section of the browsing experience and tailored email marketing.

    It is this capability, partnered with the technological ability to observe and measure customer engagement, that allows Amazon to create individual customer experiences.

    Scan the external environment to understand your customers, competitors, and macroenvironmental trends

    Do not develop your CXM technology strategy in isolation. Work with Marketing to understand your STP strategy (segmentation, targeting, positioning): this will inform persona development and technology requirements downstream.

    Market Segmentation

    • Segment target market by demographic, geographic, psychographic, and behavioral characteristics
    • What does the competitive market look like?
    • Who are the key customer segments?
    • What segments are you going to target?

    Market Targeting

    • Evaluate potential and commercial attractiveness of each segment, considering the dynamics of the competition
    • How do you target your customers?
    • How should you target them in the future?
    • How do your products/services differ from the competition?

    Product Positioning

    • Develop detailed product positioning and marketing mixes for selected segments
    • What is the value of the product/service to each segment of the market?
    • How are you positioning your product/service in the market?

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is at this point that you should consider the need for and viability of an omnichannel approach to CXM. Through which channels do you target your customers? Are your customers present and active on a wide variety of channels? Consider how you can position your products, services, and brand through the use of omnichannel methodologies.

    Activity: Conduct a competitive analysis to understand where your market is going

    2.1.5 1 hour

    Input

    • Scan of competitive market
    • Existing customer STP strategy

    Output

    • Strategic CXM requirements
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team
    • Marketing SME

    Instructions

    1. Scan the market for direct and indirect competitors.
    2. Evaluate current and/or future segmentation, targeting, and positioning strategies by answering the following questions:
    • What does the competitive market look like?
    • Who are the key customer segments?
    • What segments are you going to target?
    • How do you target your customers?
    • How should you target them in the future?
    • How do your products/services differ from the competition?
    • What is the value of the product/service to each segment of the market?
    • How are you positioning your product/service in the market?
    • Other helpful questions include:
      • How formally do you target customers? (e.g. through direct contact vs. through passive brand marketing)
      • Does your organization use the shotgun or rifle approach to marketing?
        • Shotgun marketing: targets a broad segment of people, indirectly
        • Rifle marketing: targets smaller and more niche market segments using customer intelligence
  • For each point, identify CXM requirements.
  • Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.
  • Activity: Conduct a competitive analysis (cont’d)

    2.1.5 30 minutes

    Input

    • Scan of competitive market

    Output

    • Competitive analysis
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team
    • Marketing SME (e.g. Market Research Stakeholders)

    Instructions

    1. List recent marketing technology and customer experience-related initiatives that your closest competitors have implemented.
    2. For each identified initiative, elaborate on what the competitive implications are for your organization.
    3. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Competitive Implications

    Competitor Organization Recent Initiative Associated Technology Direction of Impact Competitive Implication
    Organization X Multichannel E-Commerce Integration WEM – hybrid integration Positive
    • Up-to-date e-commerce capabilities
    • Automatic product updates via PCM
    Organization Y Web Social Analytics WEM Positive
    • Real-time analytics and customer insights
    • Allows for more targeted content toward the visitor or customer

    Conduct a PEST analysis to determine salient political, economic, social, and technological impacts for CXM

    A PEST analysis is a structured planning method that identifies external environmental factors that could influence the corporate and IT strategy.

    Political - Examine political factors, such as relevant data protection laws and government regulations.

    Economic - Examine economic factors, such as funding, cost of web access, and labor shortages for maintaining the site(s).

    Technological - Examine technological factors, such as new channels, networks, software and software frameworks, database technologies, wireless capabilities, and availability of software as a service.

    Social - Examine social factors, such as gender, race, age, income, and religion.

    Info-Tech Insight

    When looking at opportunities and threats, PEST analysis can help to ensure that you do not overlook external factors, such as technological changes in your industry. When conducting your PEST analysis specifically for CXM, pay particular attention to the rapid rate of change in the technology bucket. New channels and applications are constantly emerging and evolving, and seeing differential adoption by potential customers.

    Activity: Conduct and review the PEST analysis

    2.1.6 30 minutes

    Input

    • Political, economic, social, and technological factors related to CXM

    Output

    • Completed PEST analysis

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Identify your current strengths and weaknesses in managing the customer experience.
    2. Identify any opportunities to take advantage of and threats to mitigate.

    Example: PEST Analysis

    Political

    • Data privacy for PII
    • ADA legislation for accessible design

    Economic

    • Spending via online increasing
    • Focus on share of wallet

    Technological

    • Rise in mobile
    • Geo-location based services
    • Internet of Things
    • Omnichannel

    Social

    • Increased spending power by millennials
    • Changing channel preferences
    • Self-service models

    Activity: Translate your PEST analysis into a list of strategic CXM technology requirements to be addressed

    2.1.7 30 minutes

    Input

    • PEST Analysis conducted in Activity 2.1.6.

    Output

    • Strategic CXM requirements
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    For each PEST quadrant:

    1. Document the point and relate it to a goal.
    2. For each point, identify CXM requirements.
    3. Sort goals and requirements to eliminate duplicates.
    4. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Parsing Requirements from PEST Analysis

    Technological Trend: There has been a sharp increase in popularity of mobile self-service models for buying habits and customer service access.

    Goal: Streamline mobile application to be compatible with all mobile devices. Create consistent branding across all service delivery applications (e.g. website, etc.).

    Strategic Requirement: Develop a native mobile application while also ensuring that resources through our web presence are built with responsive design interface.

    IT must fully understand the voice of the customer: work with Marketing to develop customer personas

    Creating a customer-centric CXM technology strategy requires archetypal customer personas. Creating customer personas will enable you to talk concretely about them as consumers of your customer experience and allow you to build buyer scenarios around them.

    A persona (or archetypal user) is an invented person that represents a type of user in a particular use-case scenario. In this case, personas can be based on real customers.

    Components of a persona Example – Organization: Grocery Store
    Name Name personas to reflect a key attribute such as the persona’s primary role or motivation Brand Loyal Linda: A stay-at-home mother dedicated to maintaining and caring for a household of 5 people
    Demographic Include basic descriptors of the persona (e.g. age, geographic location, preferred language, education, job, employer, household income, etc.) Age: 42 years old Geographic location: London Suburbia Language: English Education: Post-secondary Job: Stay-at-home mother Annual Household Income: $100,000+
    Wants, needs, pain points Identify surface-level motivations for buying habits

    Wants: Local products Needs: Health products; child-safe products

    Pain points: Fragmented shopping experience

    Psychographic/behavioral traits Observe persona traits that are representative of the customers’ behaviors (e.g. attitudes, buying patterns, etc.)

    Psychographic: Detail-oriented, creature of habit

    Behavioral: Shops at large grocery store twice a week, visits farmers market on Saturdays, buys organic products online

    Activity: Build personas for your customers

    2.1.8 2 hours

    Input

    • Customer demographics and psychographics

    Output

    • List of prioritized customer personas
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Info-Tech examples
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    Project Team

    Instructions

    1. In 2-4 groups, list all the customer personas that need to be built. In doing so, consider the people who interact with your organization most often.
    2. Build a demographic profile for each customer persona. Include information such as age, geographic location, occupation, annual income, etc.
    3. Augment the persona with a psychographic profile of each customer. Consider the goals and objectives of each customer persona and how these might inform buyer behaviors.
    4. Introduce your group’s personas to the entire group, in a round-robin fashion, as if you are introducing your persona at a party.
    5. Summarize the personas in a persona map. Rank your personas according to importance and remove any duplicates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    For CXM, persona building is typically used for understanding the external customer; however, if you need to gain a better understanding of the organization’s internal customers (those who will be interacting with CXM applications), personas can also be built for this purpose. Examples of useful internal personas are sales managers, brand managers, customer service directors, etc.

    Sample Persona Templates

    Fred, 40

    The Family Man

    Post-secondary educated, white-collar professional, three children

    Goals & Objectives

    • Maintain a stable secure lifestyle
    • Progress his career
    • Obtain a good future for his children

    Behaviors

    • Manages household and finances
    • Stays actively involved in children’s activities and education
    • Seeks potential career development
    • Uses a cellphone and email frequently
    • Sometimes follows friends Facebook pages

    Services of Interest

    • SFA, career counselling, job boards, day care, SHHS
    • Access to information via in-person, phone, online

    Traits

    General Literacy - High

    Digital Literacy - Mid-High

    Detail-Oriented - High

    Willing to Try New Things - Mid-High

    Motivated and Persistent - Mid-High

    Time Flexible - Mid-High

    Familiar With [Red.] - Mid

    Access to [Red.] Offices - High

    Access to Internet - High

    Ashley, 35

    The Tourist

    Single, college educated, planning vacation in [redacted], interested in [redacted] job opportunities

    Goals & Objectives

    • Relax after finishing a stressful job
    • Have adventures and try new things
    • Find a new job somewhere in Canada

    Behaviors

    • Collects information about things to do in [redacted]
    • Collects information about life in [redacted]
    • Investigates and follows up on potential job opportunities
    • Uses multiple social media to keep in touch with friends
    • Shops online frequently

    Services of Interest

    • SFA, job search, road conditions, ferry schedules, hospital, police station, DL requirements, vehicle rental
    • Access to information via in-person, phone, website, SMS, email, social media

    Traits

    General Literacy - Mid

    Digital Literacy - High

    Detail-Oriented - Mid

    Willing to Try New Things - High

    Motivated and Persistent - Mid

    Time Flexible - Mid-High

    Familiar With [Red.] - Low

    Access to [Red.] Offices - Low

    Access to Internet - High

    Bill, 25

    The Single Parent

    15-year resident of [redacted], high school education, waiter, recently divorced, two children

    Goals & Objectives

    • Improve his career options so he can support his family
    • Find an affordable place to live
    • Be a good parent
    • Work through remaining divorce issues

    Behaviors

    • Tries to get training or experience to improve his career
    • Stays actively involved in his children’s activities
    • Looks for resources and supports to resolve divorce issues
    • Has a cellphone and uses the internet occasionally

    Services of Interest

    • Child care, housing authority, legal aid, parenting resources
    • Access to information via in person, word-of mouth, online, phone, email

    Traits

    General Literacy - Mid

    Digital Literacy - Mid-Low

    Detail-Oriented - Mid-Low

    Willing to Try New Things - Mid

    Motivated and Persistent - High

    Time Flexible - Mid

    Familiar With [Red.] - Mid-High

    Access to [Red.] Offices - High

    Access to Internet - High

    Marie, 19

    The Regional Youth

    Single, [redacted] resident, high school graduate

    Goals & Objectives

    • Get a good job
    • Maintain ties to family and community

    Behaviors

    • Looking for work
    • Gathering information about long-term career choices
    • Trying to get the training or experience that can help her develop a career
    • Staying with her parents until she can get established
    • Has a new cellphone and is learning how to use it
    • Plays videogames and uses the internet at least weekly

    Services of Interest

    • Job search, career counselling
    • Access to information via in-person, online, phone, email, web applications

    Traits

    General Literacy - Mid

    Digital Literacy - Mid

    Detail-Oriented - Mid-Low

    Willing to Try New Things - Mid-High

    Motivated and Persistent - Mid-Low

    Time Flexible - High

    Familiar With [Red.] - Mid-Low

    Access to [Red.] Offices - Mid-Low

    Access to Internet - Mid

    Build key scenarios for each persona to extract strategic requirements for your CXM application portfolio

    A scenario is a story or narrative that helps explore the set of interactions that a customer has with an organization. Scenario mapping will help parse requirements used to design the CXM application portfolio.

    A Good Scenario…

    • Describes specific task(s) that need to be accomplished
    • Describes user goals and motivations
    • Describes interactions with a compelling but not overwhelming amount of detail
    • Can be rough, as long as it provokes ideas and discussion

    Scenarios Are Used To…

    • Provide a shared understanding about what a user might want to do, and how they might want to do it
    • Help construct the sequence of events that are necessary to address in your user interface(s)

    To Create Good Scenarios…

    • Keep scenarios high level, not granular in nature
    • Identify as many scenarios as possible. If you’re time constrained, try to develop 2-3 key scenarios per persona
    • Sketch each scenario out so that stakeholders understand the goal of the scenario

    Activity: Build scenarios for each persona and extract strategic requirements for the CXM strategy

    2.1.9 1.5 hours

    Input

    • Customer personas (output of Activity 2.1.5)

    Output

    • CX scenario maps
    • Strategic CXM requirements
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. For each customer persona created in Activity 2.1.5, build a scenario. Choose and differentiate scenarios based on the customer goal of each scenario (e.g. make online purchase, seek customer support, etc.).
    2. Think through the narrative of how a customer interacts with your organization, at all points throughout the scenario. List each step in the interaction in a sequential order to form a scenario journey.
    3. Examine each step in the scenario and brainstorm strategic requirements that will be needed to support the customer’s use of technology throughout the scenario.
    4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each persona. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Scenario Map

    Persona Name: Brand Loyal Linda

    Scenario Goal: File a complaint about in-store customer service

    Look up “[Store Name] customer service” on public web. →Reach customer support landing page. →Receive proactive notification prompt for online chat with CSR. →Initiate conversation: provide order #. →CSR receives order context and information. →Customer articulates problem, CSR consults knowledgebase. →Discount on next purchase offered. →Send email with discount code to Brand Loyal Linda.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.1; 2.1.2; 2.1.3; 2.1.4 - Create a CXM operating model

    An analyst will facilitate a discussion to identify what impacts your CXM strategy and how to align it to your corporate strategy. The discussion will take different perspectives into consideration and look at organizational drivers, external environmental factors, as well as internal barriers and enablers.

    2.1.5 Conduct a competitive analysis

    Calling on their depth of expertise in working with a broad spectrum of organizations, our facilitator will help you work through a structured, systematic evaluation of competitors’ actions when it comes to CXM.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.1.6; 2.1.7 - Conduct a PEST analysis

    The facilitator will use guided conversation to target each quadrant of the PEST analysis and help your organization fully enumerate political, economic, social, and technological trends that will influence your CXM strategy. Our analysts are deeply familiar with macroenvironmental trends and can provide expert advice in identifying areas of concern in the PEST and drawing strategic requirements as implications.

    2.1.8; 2.1.9 - Build customer personas and subsequent persona scenarios

    Drawing on the preceding exercises as inputs, the facilitator will help the team create and refine personas, create respective customer interaction scenarios, and parse strategic requirements to support your technology portfolio for CXM.

    Step 2.2: Assess the Current State of CXM

    Phase 1

    1.1 Create the Project Vision

    1.2 Structure the Project

    Phase 2

    2.1 Scan the External Environment

    2.2 Assess the Current State of CXM

    2.3 Create an Application Portfolio

    2.4 Develop Deployment Best Practices

    Phase 3

    3.1 Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

    3.2 Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

    Activities:

    • Conduct a SWOT analysis and extract strategic requirements
    • Inventory existing CXM applications and assess end-user usage and satisfaction
    • Conduct a VRIO analysis and extract strategic requirements

    Outcomes:

    • SWOT analysis
    • VRIO analysis
    • Current state application portfolio
    • Strategic requirements

    Conduct a SWOT analysis to prepare for creating your CXM strategy

    A SWOT analysis is a structured planning method that evaluates the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats involved in a project.

    Strengths - Strengths describe the positive attributes that are within your control and internal to your organization (i.e. what do you do better than anyone else?)

    Weaknesses - Weaknesses are internal aspects of your business that place you at a competitive disadvantage; think of what you need to enhance to compete with your top competitor.

    Opportunities - Opportunities are external factors the project can capitalize on. Think of them as factors that represent reasons your business is likely to prosper.

    Threats - Threats are external factors that could jeopardize the project. While you may not have control over these, you will benefit from having contingency plans to address them if they occur.

    Info-Tech Insight

    When evaluating weaknesses of your current CXM strategy, ensure that you’re taking into account not just existing applications and business processes, but also potential deficits in your organization’s channel strategy and go-to-market messaging.

    Activity: Conduct a SWOT analysis

    2.2.1 30 minutes

    Input

    • CXM strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats

    Output

    • Completed SWOT analysis

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Identify your current strengths and weaknesses in managing the customer experience. Consider marketing, sales, and customer service aspects of the CX.
    2. Identify any opportunities to take advantage of and threats to mitigate.

    Example: SWOT Analysis

    Strengths

    • Strong customer service model via telephony

    Weaknesses

    • Customer service inaccessible in real-time through website or mobile application

    Opportunities

    • Leverage customer intelligence to measure ongoing customer satisfaction

    Threats

    • Lack of understanding of customer interaction platforms by staff could hinder adoption

    Activity: Translate your SWOT analysis into a list of requirements to be addressed

    2.2.2 30 minutes

    Input

    • SWOT Analysis conducted in Activity 2.2.1.

    Output

    • Strategic CXM requirements
    • CXM Stakeholder Presentation Template

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    For each SWOT quadrant:

    1. Document the point and relate it to a goal.
    2. For each point, identify CXM requirements.
    3. Sort goals and requirements to eliminate duplicates.
    4. Document your outputs in the CXM Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Parsing Requirements from SWOT Analysis

    Weakness: Customer service inaccessible in real-time through website or mobile application.

    Goal: Increase the ubiquity of access to customer service knowledgebase and agents through a web portal or mobile application.

    Strategic Requirement: Provide a live chat portal that matches the customer with the next available and qualified agent.

    Inventory your current CXM application portfolio

    Applications are the bedrock of technology enablement for CXM. Review your current application portfolio to identify what is working well and what isn’t.

    Understand Your CXM Application Portfolio With a Four-Step Approach

    Build the CXM Application Inventory →Assess Usage and Satisfaction →Map to Business Processes and Determine Dependencies →Determine Grow/Maintain/ Retire for Each Application

    When assessing the CXM applications portfolio, do not cast your net too narrowly; while CRM and MMS applications are often top of mind, applications for digital asset management and social media management are also instrumental for ensuring a well-integrated CX.

    Identify dependencies (either technical or licensing) between applications. This dependency tracing will come into play when deciding which applications should be grown (invested in), which applications should be maintained (held static), and which applications should be retired (divested).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Shadow IT is prominent here! When building your application inventory, ensure you involve Marketing, Sales, and Service to identify any “unofficial” SaaS applications that are being used for CXM. Many organizations fail to take a systematic view of their CXM application portfolio beyond maintaining a rough inventory. To assess the current state of alignment, you must build the application inventory and assess satisfaction metrics.

    Understand which of your organization’s existing enterprise applications enable CXM

    Review the major enterprise applications in your organization that enable CXM and align your requirements to these applications (net-new or existing). Identify points of integration to capture the big picture.

    The image shows a graphic titled Example: Integration of CRM, SMMP, and ERP. It is a flow chart, with icons defined by a legend on the right side of the image

    Info-Tech Insight

    When assessing the current application portfolio that supports CXM, the tendency will be to focus on the applications under the CXM umbrella, relating mostly to marketing, sales, and customer service. Be sure to include systems that act as input to, or benefit due to outputs from, CRM or similar applications. Examples of these systems are ERP systems, ECM (e.g. SharePoint) applications, and more.

    Assess CXM application usage and satisfaction

    Having a portfolio but no contextual data will not give you a full understanding of the current state. The next step is to thoroughly assess usage patterns as well as IT, management, and end-user satisfaction with each application.

    Example: Application Usage & Satisfaction Assessment

    Application Name Level of Usage IT Satisfaction Management Satisfaction End-User Satisfaction Potential Business Impact
    CRM (e.g. Salesforce) Medium High Medium Medium High
    CRM (e.g. Salesforce) Low Medium Medium High Medium
    ... ... ... ... ... ...

    Info-Tech Insight

    When evaluating satisfaction with any application, be sure to consult all stakeholders who come into contact with the application or depend on its output. Consider criteria such as ease of use, completeness of information, operational efficiency, data accuracy, etc.

    Use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment to gather end-user feedback on existing CXM applications

    2.2.3 Application Portfolio Assessment: End-User Feedback

    Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment: End-User Feedback diagnostic is a low-effort, high-impact program that will give you detailed report cards on end-user satisfaction with an application. Use these insights to identify problems, develop action plans for improvement, and determine key participants.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End-User Feedback is an 18-question survey that provides valuable insights on user satisfaction with an application by:

    • Performing a general assessment of the application portfolio that provides a full view of the effectiveness, criticality, and prevalence of all relevant applications.
    • Measuring individual application performance with open-ended user feedback surveys about the application, organized by department to simplify problem resolution.
    • Providing targeted department feedback to identify end-user satisfaction and focus improvements on the right group or line of business.

    INFO-TECH DIAGNOSTIC

    Activity: Inventory your CXM applications, and assess application usage and satisfaction

    2.2.4 1 hour

    Input

    • List of CXM applications

    Output

    • Complete inventory of CXM applications
    • CXM Stakeholder Presentation Template

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. List all existing applications that support the creation, management, and delivery of your customer experience.
    2. Identify which processes each application supports (e.g. content deployment, analytics, service delivery, etc.).
    3. Identify technical or licensing dependencies (e.g. data models).
    4. Assess the level of application usage by IT, management, and internal users (high/medium/low).
    5. Assess the satisfaction with and performance of each application according to IT, management, and internal users (high/medium/low). Use the Info-Tech Diagnostic to assist.

    Example: CXM Application Inventory

    Application Name Deployed Date Processes Supported Technical and Licensing Dependencies
    Salesforce June 2018 Customer relationship management XXX
    Hootsuite April 2019 Social media listening XXX
    ... ... ... ...

    Conduct a VRIO analysis to identify core competencies for CXM applications

    A VRIO analysis evaluates the ability of internal resources and capabilities to sustain a competitive advantage by evaluating dimensions of value, rarity, imitability, and organization. For critical applications like your CRM platform, use a VRIO analysis to determine their value.

    Is the resource or capability valuable in exploiting an opportunity or neutralizing a threat? Is the resource or capability rare in the sense that few of your competitors have a similar capability? Is the resource or capability costly to imitate or replicate? Is the organization organized enough to leverage and capture value from the resource or capability?
    NO COMPETITIVE DISADVANTAGE
    YES NO→ COMPETITIVE EQUALITY/PARITY
    YES YES NO→ TEMPORARY COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE
    YES YES YES NO→ UNUSED COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE
    YES YES YES YES LONG-TERM COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE

    (Strategic Management Insight, 2013)

    Activity: Conduct a VRIO analysis on your existing application portfolio

    2.2.5 30 minutes

    Input

    • Inventory of existing CXM applications (output of Activity 2.2.4)

    Output

    • Completed VRIO analysis
    • Strategic CXM requirements
    • CXM Stakeholder Presentation Template

    Materials

    • VRIO Analysis model
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Evaluate each CXM application inventoried in Activity 2.2.4 by answering the four VRIO questions in sequential order. Do not proceed to the following question if “no” is answered at any point.
    2. Record the results. The state of your organization’s competitive advantage, based on each resource/capability, will be determined based on the number of questions with a “yes” answer. For example, if all four questions are answered positively, then your organization is considered to have a long-term competitive advantage.
    3. Document your outputs in the CXM Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide your through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    2.2.1; 2.2.2 Conduct a SWOT Analysis

    Our facilitator will use a small-team approach to delve deeply into each area, identifying enablers (strengths and opportunities) and challenges (weaknesses and threats) relating to the CXM strategy.

    2.2.3; 2.2.4 Inventory your CXM applications, and assess usage and satisfaction

    Working with your core team, the facilitator will assist with building a comprehensive inventory of CXM applications that are currently in use and with identifying adjacent systems that need to be identified for integration purposes. The facilitator will work to identify high and low performing applications and analyze this data with the team during the workshop exercise.

    2.2.5 Conduct a VRIO analysis

    The facilitator will take you through a VRIO analysis to identify which of your internal technological competencies ensure, or can be leveraged to ensure, your competitiveness in the CXM market.

    Step 2.3: Create an Application Portfolio

    Phase 1

    1.1 Create the Project Vision

    1.2 Structure the Project

    Phase 2

    2.1 Scan the External Environment

    2.2 Assess the Current State of CXM

    2.3 Create an Application Portfolio

    2.4 Develop Deployment Best Practices

    Phase 3

    3.1 Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

    3.2 Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

    Activities

    • Shortlist and prioritize business processes for improvement and reengineering
    • Map current CXM processes
    • Identify business process owners and assign job responsibilities
    • Identify user interaction channels to extract strategic requirements
    • Aggregate and develop strategic requirements
    • Determine gaps in current and future state processes
    • Build the CXM application portfolio

    Outcomes

    CXM application portfolio map

    • Shortlist of relevant business processes
    • Current state map
    • Business process ownership assignment
    • Channel map
    • Complete list of strategic requirements

    Understand business process mapping to draft strategy requirements for marketing, sales, and customer service

    The interaction between sales, marketing, and customer service is very process-centric. Rethink sales and customer-centric workflows and map the desired workflow, imbedding the improved/reengineered process into the requirements.

    Using BPM to Capture Strategic Requirements

    Business process modeling facilitates the collaboration between the business and IT, recording the sequence of events, tasks performed, who performed them, and the levels of interaction with the various supporting applications.

    By identifying the events and decision points in the process and overlaying the people that perform the functions, the data being interacted with, and the technologies that support them, organizations are better positioned to identify gaps that need to be bridged.

    Encourage the analysis by compiling an inventory of business processes that support customer-facing operations that are relevant to achieving the overall organizational strategies.

    Outcomes

    • Operational effectiveness
    • Identification, implementation, and maintenance of reusable enterprise applications
    • Identification of gaps that can be addressed by acquisition of additional applications or process improvement/ reengineering

    INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITY

    Refer to Info-Tech’s Create a Comprehensive BPM Strategy for Successful Process Automation blueprint for further assistance in taking a BPM approach to your sales-IT alignment.

    Leverage the APQC framework to help define your inventory of sales, marketing, and service processes

    APQC’s Process Classification Framework is a taxonomy of cross-functional business processes intended to allow the objective comparison of organizational performance within and among organizations.

    OPERATING PROCESSES
    1.0 Develop Vision and Strategy 2.0 Develop and Manage Products and Services 3.0 Market and Sell Products and Services 4.0 Deliver Products and Services 5.0 Manage Customer Service
    MANAGEMENT AND SUPPORT SERVICES
    6.0 Develop and Manage Human Capital
    7.0 Manage Information Technology
    8.0 Manage Financial Resources
    9.0 Acquire, Construct, and Manage Assets
    10.0 Manage Enterprise Risk, Compliance, and Resiliency
    11.0 Manage External Relationships
    12.0 Develop and Manage Business Capabilities

    (APQC, 2011)

    MORE ABOUT APQC

    • APQC serves as a high-level, industry-neutral enterprise model that allows organizations to see activities from a cross-industry process perspective.
    • Sales processes have been provided up to Level 3 of the APQC framework.
    • The APQC Framework can be accessed through APQC’s Process Classification Framework.
    • Note: The framework does not list all processes within a specific organization, nor are the processes that are listed in the framework present in every organization.

    Understand APQC’s “Market and Sell Products and Services” framework

    3.0 Market and Sell Products

    3.1 Understand markets, customers, and capabilities

    • 3.1.1 Perform customer and market intelligence analysis
    • 3.1.2 Evaluate and prioritize market opportunities

    3.2 Develop marketing strategy

    • 3.2.1 Define offering and customer value proposition
    • 3.2.2 Define pricing strategy to align to value proposition
    • 3.2.3 Define and manage channel strategy

    3.3 Develop sales strategy

    • 3.3.1 Develop sales forecast
    • 3.3.2 Develop sales partner/alliance relationships
    • 3.3.3 Establish overall sales budgets
    • 3.3.4 Establish sales goals and measures
    • 3.3.5 Establish customer management measures

    3.4 Develop and manage marketing plans

    • 3.4.1 Establish goals, objectives, and metrics by products by channels/segments
    • 3.4.2 Establish marketing budgets
    • 3.4.3 Develop and manage media
    • 3.4.4 Develop and manage pricing
    • 3.4.5 Develop and manage promotional activities
    • 3.4.6 Track customer management measures
    • 3.4.7 Develop and manage packaging strategy

    3.5 Develop and manage sales plans

    • 3.5.1 Generate leads
    • 3.5.2 Manage customers and accounts
    • 3.5.3 Manage customer sales
    • 3.5.4 Manage sales orders
    • 3.5.5 Manage sales force
    • 3.5.6 Manage sales partners and alliances

    Understand APQC’s “Manage Customer Service” framework

    5.0 Manage Customer Service

    5.1 Develop customer care/customer service strategy

    • 5.1.1 Develop customer service segmentation
      • 5.1.1.1 Analyze existing customers
      • 5.1.1.2 Analyze feedback of customer needs
    • 5.1.2 Define customer service policies and procedures
    • 5.1.3 Establish service levels for customers

    5.2 Plan and manage customer service operations

    • 5.2.1 Plan and manage customer service work force
      • 5.2.1.1 Forecast volume of customer service contacts
      • 5.2.1.2 Schedule customer service work force
      • 5.2.1.3 Track work force utilization
      • 5.2.1.4 Monitor and evaluate quality of customer interactions with customer service representatives

    5.2 Plan and 5.2.3.1 Receive customer complaints 5.2.3.2 Route customer complaints 5.2.3.3 Resolve customer complaints 5.2.3.4 Respond to customer complaints manage customer service operations

    • 5.2.2 Manage customer service requests/inquiries
      • 5.2.2.1 Receive customer requests/inquiries
      • 5.2.2.2 Route customer requests/inquiries
      • 5.2.2.3 Respond to customer requests/inquiries
    • 5.2.3 Manage customer complaints
      • 5.2.3.1 Receive customer complaints
      • 5.2.3.2 Route customer complaints
      • 5.2.3.3 Resolve customer complaints
      • 5.2.3.4 Respond to customer complaints

    Leverage the APQC framework to inventory processes

    The APQC framework provides levels 1 through 3 for the “Market and Sell Products and Services” framework. Level 4 processes and beyond will need to be defined by your organization as they are more granular (represent the task level) and are often industry-specific.

    Level 1 – Category - 1.0 Develop vision and strategy (10002)

    Represents the highest level of process in the enterprise, such as manage customer service, supply chain, financial organization, and human resources.

    Level 2 – Process Group - 1.1 Define the business concept and long-term vision (10014)

    Indicates the next level of processes and represents a group of processes. Examples include perform after sales repairs, procurement, accounts payable, recruit/source, and develop sales strategy.

    Level 3 – Process - 1.1.1 Assess the external environment (10017)

    A series of interrelated activities that convert input into results (outputs); processes consume resources and require standards for repeatable performance; and processes respond to control systems that direct quality, rate, and cost of performance.

    Level 4 – Activity - 1.1.1.1 Analyze and evaluate competition (10021)

    Indicates key events performed when executing a process. Examples of activities include receive customer requests, resolve customer complaints, and negotiate purchasing contracts.

    Level 5 – Task - 12.2.3.1.1 Identify project requirements and objectives (11117)

    Tasks represent the next level of hierarchical decomposition after activities. Tasks are generally much more fine grained and may vary widely across industries. Examples include create business case and obtain funding, and design recognition and reward approaches.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define the Level 3 processes in the context of your organization. When creating a CXM strategy, concern yourself with the interrelatedness of processes across existing departmental silos (e.g. marketing, sales, customer service). Reserve the analysis of activities (Level 4) and tasks (Level 3) for granular work initiatives involved in the implementation of applications.

    Use Info-Tech’s CXM Business Process Shortlisting Tool to prioritize processes for improvement

    2.3.1 CXM Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    The CXM Business Process Shortlisting Tool can help you define which marketing, sales, and service processes you should focus on.

    Working in concert with stakeholders from the appropriate departments, complete the short questionnaire.

    Based on validated responses, the tool will highlight processes of strategic importance to your organization.

    These processes can then be mapped, with requirements extracted and used to build the CXM application portfolio.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    The image shows a screenshot of the Prioritize Your Business Processes for Customer Experience Management document, with sample information filled in.

    Activity: Define your organization’s top-level processes for reengineering and improvement

    2.3.2 1 hour

    Input

    • Shortlist business processes relating to customer experience (output of Tool 2.3.1)

    Output

    • Prioritized list of top-level business processes by department

    Materials

    • APQC Framework
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Inventory all business processes relating to customer experience.
    2. Customize the impacted business units and factor weightings on the scorecard below to reflect the structure and priorities of your organization.
    3. Using the scorecard, identify all processes essential to your customer experience. The scorecard is designed to determine which processes to focus on and to help you understand the impact of the scrutinized process on the different customer-centric groups across the organization.

    The image shows a chart with the headings Factor, Check If Yes, repeated. The chart lists various factors, and the Check if Yes columns are left blank.

    This image shows a chart with the headings Factor, Weights, and Scores. It lists factors, and the rest of the chart is blank.

    Current legend for Weights and Scores

    F – Finance

    H – Human Resources

    I – IT

    L – Legal

    M – Marketing

    BU1 – Business Unit 1

    BU2 – Business Unit 2

    Activity: Map top-level business processes to extract strategic requirements for the CXM application portfolio

    2.3.3 45 minutes

    Input

    • Prioritized list of top-level business processes (output of Activity 2.3.2)

    Output

    • Current state process maps
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • APQC Framework
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. List all prioritized business processes, as identified in Activity 2.3.2. Map your processes in enough detail to capture all relevant activities and system touchpoints, using the legend included in the example. Focus on Level 3 processes, as explained in the APQC framework.
    2. Record all of the major process steps on sticky notes. Arrange the sticky notes in sequential order.
    3. On a set of different colored sticky notes, record all of the systems that enable the process. Map these system touchpoints to the process steps.
    4. Draw arrows in between the steps to represent manual entry or automation.
    5. Identify effectiveness and gaps in existing processes to determine process technology requirements.
    6. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITY

    Refer to Info-Tech’s Create a Comprehensive BPM Strategy for Successful Process Automation blueprint for further assistance in taking a BPM approach to your sales-IT alignment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Analysis of the current state is important in the context of gap analysis. It aids in understanding the discrepancies between your baseline and the future state vision, and ensures that these gaps are documented as part of the overall requirements.

    Example: map your current CXM processes to parse strategic requirements (customer acquisition)

    The image shows an example of a CXM process map, which is formatted as a flow chart, with a legend at the bottom.

    Activity: Extract requirements from your top-level business processes

    2.3.4 30 minutes

    Input

    • Current state process maps (output of Activity 2.3.3)

    Output

    • Requirements for future state mapping

    Materials

    • Info-Tech examples
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Discuss the current state of priority business processes, as mapped in Activity 2.3.3.
    2. Extract process requirements for business process improvement by asking the following questions:
    • What is the input?
    • What is the output?
    • What are the underlying risks and how can they be mitigated?
    • What conditions should be met to mitigate or eliminate each risk?
    • What are the improvement opportunities?
    • What conditions should be met to enable these opportunities?
    1. Break business requirements into functional and non-functional requirements, as outlined on this slide.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The business and IT should work together to evaluate the current state of business processes and the business requirements necessary to support these processes. Develop a full view of organizational needs while still obtaining the level of detail required to make informed decisions about technology.

    Establish process owners for each top-level process

    Identify the owners of the business processes being evaluated to extract requirements. Process owners will be able to inform business process improvement and assume accountability for reengineered or net-new processes going forward.

    Process Owner Responsibilities

    Process ownership ensures support, accountability, and governance for CXM and its supporting processes. Process owners must be able to negotiate with business users and other key stakeholders to drive efficiencies within their own process. The process owner must execute tactical process changes and continually optimize the process.

    Responsibilities include the following:

    • Inform business process improvement
    • Introduce KPIs and metrics
    • Monitor the success of the process
    • Present process findings to key stakeholders within the organization
    • Develop policies and procedures for the process
    • Implement new methods to manage the process

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify the owners of existing processes early so you understand who needs to be involved in process improvement and reengineering. Once implemented, CXM applications are likely to undergo a series of changes. Unstructured data will multiply, the number of users may increase, administrators may change, and functionality could become obsolete. Should business processes be merged or drastically changed, process ownership can be reallocated during CXM implementation. Make sure you have the right roles in place to avoid inefficient processes and poor data quality.

    Use Info-Tech’s Process Owner Assignment Guide to aid you in choosing the right candidates

    2.3.5 Process Owner Assignment Guide

    The Process Owner Assignment Guide will ensure you are taking the appropriate steps to identify process owners for existing and net-new processes created within the scope of the CXM strategy.

    The steps in the document will help with important considerations such as key requirements and responsibilities.

    Sections of the document:

    1. Define responsibilities and level of commitment
    2. Define job requirements
    3. Receive referrals
    4. Hold formal interviews
    5. Determine performance metrics

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Activity: Assign business process owners and identify job responsibilities

    2.3.6 30 minutes

    Input

    • Current state map (output of Activity 2.3.3)

    Output

    • Process owners assigned
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Using Info-Tech’s Process Owner Assignment Guide, assign process owners for each process mapped out in Activity 2.3.3. To assist in doing so, answer the following questions
    • What is the level of commitment expected from each process owner?
    • How will the process owner role be tied to a formal performance appraisal?
    • What metrics can be assigned?
    • How much work will be required to train process owners?
    • Is there support staff available to assist process owners?
  • Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.
  • Choose the channels that will make your target customers happy – and ensure they’re supported by CXM applications

    Traditional Channels

    Face-to-Face is efficient and has a positive personalized aspect that many customers desire, be it for sales or customer service.

    Telephony (or IVR) has been a mainstay of customer interaction for decades. While not fading, it must be used alongside newer channels.

    Postal used to be employed extensively for all domains, but is now used predominantly for e-commerce order fulfillment.

    Web 1.0 Channels

    Email is an asynchronous interaction channel still preferred by many customers. Email gives organizations flexibility with queuing.

    Live Chat is a way for clients to avoid long call center wait times and receive a solution from a quick chat with a service rep.

    Web Portals permit transactions for sales and customer service from a central interface. They are a must-have for any large company.

    Web 2.0 Channels

    Social Media consists of many individual services (like Facebook or Twitter). Social channels are exploding in consumer popularity.

    HTML5 Mobile Access allows customers to access resources from their personal device through its integrated web browser.

    Dedicated Mobile Apps allow customers to access resources through a dedicated mobile application (e.g. iOS, Android).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your channel selections should be driven by customer personas and scenarios. For example, social media may be extensively employed by some persona types (i.e. Millennials) but see limited adoption in other demographics or use cases (i.e. B2B).

    Activity: Extract requirements from your channel map

    2.3.7 30 minutes

    Input

    • Current state process maps (output of Activity 2.3.3)

    Output

    • Channel map
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Info-Tech examples
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Inventory which customer channels are currently used by each department.
    2. Speak with the department heads for Marketing, Sales, and Customer Service and discuss future channel usage. Identify any channels that will be eliminated or added.
    3. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Business Unit Channel Use Survey

    Marketing Sales Customer Service
    Current Used? Future Use? Current Used? Future Use? Current Used? Future Use?
    Email Yes Yes No No No No
    Direct Mail Yes No No No No No
    Phone No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
    In-Person No No Yes Yes Yes No
    Website Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
    Social Channels No Yes Yes Yes No Yes

    Bring it together: amalgamate your strategic requirements for CXM technology enablement

    Discovering your organizational requirements is vital for choosing the right business-enabling initiative, technology, and success metrics. Sorting the requirements by marketing, sales, and service is a prudent mechanism for clarification.

    Strategic Requirements: Marketing

    Definition: High-level requirements that will support marketing functions within CXM.

    Examples

    • Develop a native mobile application while also ensuring that resources for your web presence are built with responsive design interface.
    • Consolidate workflows related to content creation to publish all brand marketing from one source of truth.
    • Augment traditional web content delivery by providing additional functionality such as omnichannel engagement, e-commerce, dynamic personalization, and social media functionality.

    Strategic Requirements: Sales

    Definition: High-level requirements that will support sales functions within CXM.

    Examples

    • Implement a system that reduces data errors and increases sales force efficiency by automating lead management workflows.
    • Achieve end-to-end visibility of the sales process by integrating the CRM, inventory, and order processing and shipping system.
    • Track sales force success by incorporating sales KPIs with real-time business intelligence feeds.

    Strategic Requirements: Customer Service

    Definition: High-level requirements that will support customer service functions within CXM.

    Examples

    • Provide a live chat portal that connects the customer, in real time, with the next available and qualified agent.
    • Bridge the gap between the source of truth for sales with customer service suites to ensure a consistent, end-to-end customer experience from acquisition to customer engagement and retention.
    • Use customer intelligence to track customer journeys in order to best understand and resolve customer complaints.

    Activity: Consolidate your strategic requirements for the CXM application portfolio

    2.3.8 30 minutes

    Input

    • Strategic CXM requirements (outputs of Activities 2.1.5, 2.1.6, and 2.2.2)

    Output

    • Aggregated strategic CXM requirements
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Aggregate strategic CXM requirements that have been gathered thus far in Activities 2.1.5, 2.1.6, and 2.2.2, 2.3.5, and 2.3.7.
    2. Identify and rectify any obvious gaps in the existing set of strategic CXM requirements. To do so, consider the overall corporate and CXM strategy: are there any objectives that have not been addressed in the requirements gathering process?
    3. De-duplicate the list. Prioritize the aggregated/augmented list of CXM requirements as “high/critical,” “medium/important,” or “low/desirable.” This will help manage the relative importance and urgency of different requirements to itemize respective initiatives, resources, and the time in which they need to be addressed. In completing the prioritization of requirements, consider the following:
    • Requirements prioritization must be completed in collaboration with all key stakeholders (across the business and IT). Stakeholders must ask themselves:
      • What are the consequences to the business objectives if this requirement is omitted?
      • Is there an existing system or manual process/workaround that could compensate for it?
      • What business risk is being introduced if a particular requirement cannot be implemented right away?
  • Document your outputs in the CXM Strategic Stakeholder Presentation Template.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Strategic CXM requirements will be used to prioritize specific initiatives for CXM technology enablement and application rollout. Ensure that IT, the business, and executive management are all aligned on a consistent and agreed upon set of initiatives.

    Burberry digitizes the retail CX with real-time computing to bring consumers back to the physical storefront

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Consumer Goods, Clothing

    Source Retail Congress, 2017

    Burberry London

    Situation

    Internally, Burberry invested in organizational alignment and sales force brand engagement. The more the sales associate knew about the brand engagement and technology-enabled strategy, the better the store’s performance. Before the efforts went to building relationships with customers, Burberry built engagement with employees.

    Burberry embraced “omnichannel,” the hottest buzzword in retailing to provide consumers the most immersive and intuitive brand experience within the store.

    Technology Strategy

    RFID tags were attached to products to trigger interactive videos on the store’s screens in the common areas or in a fitting room. Consumers are to have instant access to relevant product combinations, ranging from craftsmanship information to catwalk looks. This is equivalent to the rich, immediate information consumers have grown to expect from the online shopping experience.

    Another layer of Burberry’s added capabilities includes in-memory-based analytics to gather and analyze data in real-time to better understand customers’ desires. Burberry builds customer profiles based on what items the shoppers try on from the RFID-tagged garments. Although this requires customer privacy consent, customers are willing to provide personal information to trusted brands.

    This program, called “Customer 360,” assisted sales associates in providing data-driven shopping experiences that invite customers to digitally share their buying history and preferences via their tablet devices. As the data is stored in Burberry’s customer data warehouse and accessed through an application such as CRM, it is able to arm sales associates with personal fashion advice on the spot.

    Lastly, the customer data warehouse/CRM application is linked to Burberry’s ERP system and other custom applications in a cloud environment to achieve real-time inventory visibility and fulfillment.

    Burberry digitizes the retail CX with real-time computing to bring consumers back to the physical storefront (cont'd)

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Consumer Goods, Clothing

    Source Retail Congress, 2017

    Burberry London

    Situation

    Internally, Burberry invested in organizational alignment and sales force brand engagement. The more the sales associate knew about the brand engagement and technology-enabled strategy, the better the store’s performance. Before the efforts went to building relationships with customers, Burberry built engagement with employees.

    Burberry embraced “omnichannel,” the hottest buzzword in retailing to provide consumers the most immersive and intuitive brand experience within the store.

    The Results

    Burberry achieved one of the most personalized retail shopping experiences. Immediate personal fashion advice using customer data is only one component of the experience. Not only are historic purchases and preference data analyzed, a customer’s social media posts and fashion industry trend data is proactively incorporated into the interactions between the sales associate and the customer.

    Burberry achieved CEO Angela Ahrendts’ vision of “Burberry World,” in which the brand experience is seamlessly integrated across channels, devices, retail locations, products, and services.

    The organizational alignment between Sales, Marketing, and IT empowered employees to bring the Burberry brand to life in unique ways that customers appreciated and were willing to advocate.

    Burberry is now one of the most beloved and valuable luxury brands in the world. The brand tripled sales in five years, became one of the leading voices on trends, fashion, music, and beauty while redefining what top-tier customer experience should be both digitally and physically.

    Leverage both core CRM suites and point solutions to create a comprehensive CXM application portfolio

    The debate between best-of-breed point solutions versus comprehensive CRM suites is ongoing. There is no single best answer. In most cases, an effective portfolio will include both types of solutions.

    • When the CRM market first evolved, vendors took a heavy “module-centric” approach – offering basic suites with the option to add a number of individual modules. Over time, vendors began to offer suites with a high degree of out-of-the-box functionality. The market has now witnessed the rise of powerful point solutions for the individual business domains.
    • Point solutions augment, rather than supplant, the functionality of a CRM suite in the mid-market to large enterprise context. Point solutions do not offer the necessary spectrum of functionality to take the place of a unified CRM suite.
    • Point solutions enhance aspects of CRM. For example, most CRM vendors have yet to provide truly impressive social media capabilities. An organization seeking to dominate the social space should consider purchasing a social media management platform to address this deficit in their CRM ecosystem.

    Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

    Social Media Management Platform (SMMP)

    Field Sales/Service Automation (FSA)

    Marketing Management Suites

    Sales Force Automation

    Email Marketing Tools

    Lead Management Automation (LMA)

    Customer Service Management Suites

    Customer Intelligence Systems

    Don’t adopt multiple point solutions without a genuine need: choose domains most in need of more functionality

    Some may find that the capabilities of a CRM suite are not enough to meet their specific requirements: supplementing a CRM suite with a targeted point solution can get the job done. A variety of CXM point solutions are designed to enhance your business processes and improve productivity.

    Sales

    Sales Force Automation: Automatically generates, qualifies, tracks, and contacts leads for sales representatives, minimizing time wasted on administrative duties.

    Field Sales: Allows field reps to go through the entire sales cycle (from quote to invoice) while offsite.

    Sales Compensation Management: Models, analyzes, and dispenses payouts to sales representatives.

    Marketing

    Social Media Management Platforms (SMMP): Manage and track multiple social media services, with extensive social data analysis and insight capabilities.

    Email Marketing Bureaus: Conduct email marketing campaigns and mine results to effectively target customers.

    Marketing Intelligence Systems: Perform in-depth searches on various data sources to create predictive models.

    Service

    Customer Service Management (CSM): Manages the customer support lifecycle with a comprehensive array of tools, usually above and beyond what’s in a CRM suite.

    Customer Service Knowledge Management (CSKM): Advanced knowledgebase and resolution tools.

    Field Service Automation (FSA): Manages customer support tickets, schedules work orders, tracks inventory and fleets, all on the go.

    Info-Tech Insight

    CRM and point solution integration is critical. A best-of-breed product that poorly integrates with your CRM suite compromises the value generated by the combined solution, such as a 360-degree customer view. Challenge point solution vendors to demonstrate integration capabilities with CRM packages.

    Refer to your use cases to decide whether to add a dedicated point solution alongside your CRM suite

    Know your end state and what kind of tool will get you there. Refer to your strategic requirements to evaluate CRM and point solution feature sets.

    Standalone CRM Suite

    Sales Conditions: Need selling and lead management capabilities for agents to perform the sales process, along with sales dashboards and statistics.

    Marketing or Communication Conditions: Need basic campaign management and ability to refresh contact records with information from social networks.

    Member Service Conditions: Need to keep basic customer records with multiple fields per record and basic channels such as email and telephony.

    Add a Best-of-Breed or Point Solution

    Environmental Conditions: An extensive customer base with many different interactions per customer along with industry specific or “niche” needs. Point solutions will benefit firms with deep needs in specific feature areas (e.g. social media or field service).

    Sales Conditions: Lengthy sales process and account management requirements for assessing and managing opportunities – in a technically complex sales process.

    Marketing Conditions: Need social media functionality for monitoring and social property management.

    Customer Service Conditions: Need complex multi-channel service processes and/or need for best-of-breed knowledgebase and service content management.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The volume and complexity of both customers and interactions have a direct effect on when to employ just a CRM suite and when to supplement with a point solution. Check to see if your CRM suite can perform a specific business requirement before deciding to evaluate potential point solutions.

    Use Info-Tech’s CXM Portfolio Designer to create an inventory of high-value customer interaction applications

    2.3.9 CXM Portfolio Designer

    The CXM Portfolio Designer features a set of questions geared toward understanding your needs for marketing, sales, and customer service enablement.

    These results are scored and used to suggest a comprehensive solution-level set of enterprise applications for CXM that can drive your application portfolio and help you make investment decisions in different areas such as CRM, marketing management, and customer intelligence.

    Sections of the tool:

    1. Introduction
    2. Customer Experience Management Questionnaire
    3. Business Unit Recommendations
    4. Enterprise-Level Recommendations

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Understand the art of the possible and how emerging trends will affect your application portfolio (1)

    Cloud

    • The emergence and maturation of cloud technologies has broken down the barriers of software adoption.
    • Cloud has enabled easy-to-implement distributed sales centers for enterprises with global or highly fragmented workforces.
    • Cloud offers the agility, scalability, and flexibility needed to accommodate dynamic, evolving customer requirements while minimizing resourcing strain on IT and sales organizations.
    • It is now easier for small to medium enterprises to acquire and implement advanced sales capabilities to compete against larger competitors in a business environment where the need for business agility is key.
    • Although cost and resource reduction is a prominent view of the impact of cloud computing, it is also seen as an agile way to innovate and deliver a product/service experience that customers are looking for – the key to competitive differentiation.

    Mobile

    • Smartphones and other mobile devices were adopted faster than the worldwide web in the late 1990s, and the business and sales implications of widespread adoption cannot be ignored – mobile is changing how businesses operate.
      • Accenture’s Mobility Research Report states that 87% of companies in the study have been guided by a formal mobility strategy – either one that spans the enterprise or for specific business functions.
    • Mobile is now the first point of interaction with businesses. With this trend, gaining visibility into customer insights with mobile analytics is a top priority for organizations.
    • Enterprises need to develop and optimize mobile experiences for internal salespeople and customers alike as part of their sales strategy – use mobile to enable a competitive, differentiated sales force.
    • The use of mobile platforms by sales managers is becoming a norm. Sales enablement suites should support real-time performance metrics on mobile dashboards.

    Understand the art of the possible and how emerging trends will affect your application portfolio (2)

    Social

    • The rise of social networking brought customers together. Customers are now conversing with each other over a wide range of community channels that businesses neither own nor control.
      • The Power Shift: The use of social channels empowered customers to engage in real-time, unstructured conversations for the purpose of product/service evaluations. Those who are active in social environments come to wield considerable influence over the buying decisions of other prospects and customers.
    • Organizations need to identify the influencers and strategically engage them as well as developing an active presence in social communities that lead to sales.
    • Social media does have an impact on sales, both B2C and B2B. A study conducted in 2012 by Social Centered Selling states that 72.6% of sales people using social media as part of their sales process outperformed their peers and exceeded their quota 23% more often (see charts at right).

    The image shows two bar graphs, the one on top titled Achieving Quota: 2010-2012 and the one below titled Exceeding Quota: 2010-2012.

    (Social Centered Learning, n.d.)

    Understand the art of the possible and how emerging trends will affect your application portfolio (3)

    Internet of Things

    • Definition: The Internet of Things (IoT) is the network of physical objects accessed through the internet. These objects contain embedded technology to interact with internal states or the external environment.
    • Why is this interesting?
      • IoT will make it possible for everybody and everything to be connected at all times, processing information in real time. The result will be new ways of making business and sales decisions supported by the availability of information.
      • With ubiquitous connectivity, the current product design-centric view of consumers is changing to one of experience design that aims to characterize the customer relationship with a series of integrated interaction touchpoints.
      • The above change contributes to the shift in focus from experience and will mean further acceleration of the convergence of customer-centric business functions. IoT will blur the lines between marketing, sales, and customer service.
      • Products or systems linked to products are capable of self-operating, learning, updating, and correcting by analyzing real-time data.
      • Take for example, an inventory scale in a large warehouse connected to the company’s supply chain management (SCM) system. When a certain inventory weight threshold is reached due to outgoing shipments, the scale automatically sends out a purchase requisition to restock inventory levels to meet upcoming demand.
    • The IoT will eventually begin to transform existing business processes and force organizations to fundamentally rethink how they produce, operate, and service their customers.

    The image shows a graphic titled The Connected Life by 2020, and shows a number of statistics on use of connected devices over time.

    For categories covered by existing applications, determine the disposition for each app: grow it or cut it loose

    Use the two-by-two matrix below to structure your optimal CXM application portfolio. For more help, refer to Info-Tech’s blueprint, Use Agile Application Rationalization Instead of Going Big Bang.

    1

    0

    Richness of Functionality

    INTEGRATE RETAIN
    1
    REPLACE REPLACE OR ENHANCE

    0

    Degree of Integration

    Integrate: The application is functionally rich, so spend time and effort integrating it with other modules by building or enhancing interfaces.

    Retain: The application satisfies both functionality and integration requirements, so it should be considered for retention.

    Replace/Enhance: The module offers poor functionality but is well integrated with other modules. If enhancing for functionality is easy (e.g. through configuration or custom development), consider enhancement or replace it.

    Replace: The application neither offers the functionality sought nor is it integrated with other modules, and thus should be considered for replacement.

    Activity: Brainstorm the art of the possible, and build and finalize the CXM application portfolio

    2.3.10 1-2 hours

    Input

    • Process gaps identified (output of Activity 2.3.9)

    Output

    • CXM application portfolio
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Review the complete list of strategic requirements identified in the preceding exercises, as well as business process maps.
    2. Identify which application would link to which process (e.g. customer acquisition, customer service resolution, etc.).
    3. Use Info-Tech’s CXM Portfolio Designer to create an inventory of high-value customer interaction applications.
    4. Define rationalization and investment areas.
    5. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Brainstorming the Art of the Possible

    Application Gap Satisfied Related Process Number of Linked Requirements Do we have the system? Priority
    LMA
    • Lead Generation
    • Social Lead Management
    • CRM Integration
    Sales 8 No Business Critical
    Customer Intelligence
    • Web Analytics
    • Customer Journey Tracking
    Customer Service 6 Yes Business Enabling
    ... ... ... ... ... ...

    Use Info-Tech’s comprehensive reports to make granular vendor selection decisions

    Now that you have developed the CXM application portfolio and identified areas of new investment, you’re well positioned to execute specific vendor selection projects. After you have built out your initiatives roadmap in phase 3, the following reports provide in-depth vendor reviews, feature guides, and tools and templates to assist with selection and implementation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Not all applications are created equally well for each use case. The vendor reports help you make informed procurement decisions by segmenting vendor capabilities among major use cases. The strategic requirements identified as part of this project should be used to select the use case that best fits your needs.

    If you want additional support, have our analyst guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.3.2; 2.3.3 Shortlist and map the key top-level business processes

    Based on experience working with organizations in similar verticals, the facilitator will help your team map out key sample workflows for marketing, sales, and customer service.

    2.3.6 Create your strategic requirements for CXM

    Drawing on the preceding exercises, the facilitator will work with the team to create a comprehensive list of strategic requirements that will be used to drive technology decisions and roadmap initiatives.

    2.3.10 Create and finalize the CXM application portfolio

    Using the strategic requirements gathered through internal, external, and technology analysis up to this point, a facilitator will assist you in assembling a categorical technology application portfolio to support CXM.

    Step 2.4: Develop Deployment Best Practices

    Phase 1

    1.1 Create the Project Vision

    1.2 Structure the Project

    Phase 2

    2.1 Scan the External Environment

    2.2 Assess the Current State of CXM

    2.3 Create an Application Portfolio

    2.4 Develop Deployment Best Practices

    Phase 3

    3.1 Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

    3.2 Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

    Activities:

    • Develop a CXM integration map
    • Develop a mitigation plan for poor quality customer data
    • Create a framework for end-user adoption of CXM applications

    Outcomes:

    • CXM application portfolio integration map
    • Data quality preservation plan
    • End-user adoption plan

    Develop an integration map to specify which applications will interface with each other

    Integration is paramount: your CXM application portfolio must work as a unified face to the customer. Create an integration map to reflect a system of record and the exchange of data.

    • CRM
      • ERP
      • Telephony Systems (IVR, CTI)
      • Directory Services
      • Email
      • Content Management
      • Point Solutions (SMMP, MMS)

    The points of integration that you’ll need to establish must be based on the objectives and requirements that have informed the creation of the CXM application portfolio. For instance, achieving improved customer insights would necessitate a well-integrated portfolio with customer interaction point solutions, business intelligence tools, and customer data warehouses in order to draw the information necessary to build insight. To increase customer engagement, channel integration is a must (i.e. with robust links to unified communications solutions, email, and VoIP telephony systems).

    Info-Tech Insight

    If the CXM application portfolio is fragmented, it will be nearly impossible to build a cohesive view of the customer and deliver a consistent customer experience. Points of integration (POIs) are the junctions between the applications that make up the CXM portfolio. They are essential to creating value, particularly in customer insight-focused and omnichannel-focused deployments. Be sure to include enterprise applications that are not included in the CXM application portfolio. Popular systems to consider for POIs include billing, directory services, content management, and collaboration tools.

    After identifying points of integration, profile them by business significance, complexity, and investment required

    • After enumerating points of integration between the CRM platform and other CXM applications and data sources, profile them by business significance and complexity required to determine a rank-ordering of priorities.
    • Points of integration that are of high business significance with low complexity are your must do’s – these are your quick wins that deliver maximum value without too much cost. This is typically the case when integrating a vendor-to-vendor solution with available native connectors.
    • On the opposite end of the spectrum are your POIs that will require extensive work to deliver but offer negligible value. These are your should not do’s – typically, these are niche requests for integration that will only benefit the workflows of a small (and low priority) group of end users. Only accommodate them if you have slack time and budget built into your implementation timeline.

    The image shows a square matrix with Point of Integration Value Matrix in the centre. On the X-axis is Business Significance, and on the Y-axis is POI complexity. In the upper left quadrant is Should Not Do, upper right is Should Do, lower left is Could Do, and lower right is Must do.

    "Find the absolute minimum number of ‘quick wins’ – the POIs you need from day one that are necessary to keep end users happy and deliver value." – Maria Cindric, Australian Catholic University Source: Interview

    Activity: Develop a CXM application integration map

    2.4.1 1 hour

    Input

    • CXM application portfolio (output of Activity 2.3.10)

    Output

    • CXM application portfolio integration map
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. On sticky notes, record the list of applications that comprise the CXM application portfolio (built in Activity 2.3.10) and all other relevant applications. Post the sticky notes on a whiteboard so you can visualize the portfolio.
    2. Discuss the key objectives and requirements that will drive the integration design of the CXM application portfolio.
    3. As deemed necessary by step 2, rearrange the sticky notes and draw connecting arrows between applications to reflect their integration. Allow the point of the arrow to indicate direction of data exchanges.
    4. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Mapping the Integration of CXM Applications

    The image shows several yellow rectangles with text in them, connected by arrows.

    Plug the hole and bail the boat – plan to be preventative and corrective with customer data quality initiatives

    Data quality is king: if your customer data is garbage in, it will be garbage out. Enable strategic CXM decision making with effective planning of data quality initiatives.

    Identify and Eliminate Dead Weight

    Poor data can originate in the firm’s system of record, which is typically the CRM system. Custom queries, stored procedures, or profiling tools can be used to assess the key problem areas.

    Loose rules in the CRM system lead to records of no significant value in the database. Those rules need to be fixed, but if changes are made before the data is fixed, users could encounter database or application errors, which will reduce user confidence in the system.

    • Conduct a data flow analysis: map the path that data takes through the organization.
    • Use a mass cleanup to identify and destroy dead weight data. Merge duplicates either manually or with the aid of software tools. Delete incomplete data, taking care to reassign related data.
    • COTS packages typically allow power users to merge records without creating orphaned records in related tables, but custom-built applications typically require IT expertise.

    Create and Enforce Standards & Policies

    Now that the data has been cleaned, protect the system from relapsing.

    Work with business users to find out what types of data require validation and which fields should have changes audited. Whenever possible, implement drop-down lists to standardize values and make programming changes to ensure that truncation ceases.

    • Truncated data is usually caused by mismatches in data structures during either one-time data loads or ongoing data integrations.
    • Don’t go overboard on assigning required fields – users will just put key data in note fields.
    • Discourage the use of unstructured note fields: the data is effectively lost unless it gets subpoenaed.
    • To specify policies, use Info-Tech’s Master Data Record Tool.

    Profile your customer and sales-related data

    Applications are a critical component of how IT supports Sales, but IT also needs to help Sales keep its data current and accurate. Conducting a sales data audit is critical to ensure Sales has the right information at the right time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data is king. More than ever, having accurate data is essential for your organization to win in hyper-competitive marketplaces. Prudent current state analysis looks at both the overall data model and data architecture, as well as assessing data quality within critical sales-related repositories. As the amount of customer data grows exponentially due to the rise of mobility and the Internet of Things, you must have a forward-looking data model and data marts/customer data warehouse to support sales-relevant decisions.

    • A current state analysis for sales data follows a multi-step process:
      • Determine the location of all sales-relevant and customer data – the sales data inventory. Data can reside in applications, warehouses, and documents (e.g. Excel and Access files) – be sure to take a holistic approach.
    • For each data source, assess data quality across the following categories:
      • Completeness
      • Currency (Relevancy)
      • Correctness
      • Duplication
    • After assessing data quality, determine which repositories need the most attention by IT and Sales. We will look at opportunities for data consolidation later in the blueprint.

    INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITY

    Refer to Info-Tech’s Develop a Master Data Management Strategy and Roadmap blueprint for further reference and assistance in data management for your sales-IT alignment.

    Activity: Develop a mitigation plan for poor quality customer data

    2.4.2 30 minutes

    Input

    • List of departments involved in maintenance of CXM data

    Output

    • Data quality preservation plan
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Inventory a list of departments that will be interacting directly with CXM data.
    2. Identify data quality cleansing and preservation initiatives, such as those in previous examples.
    3. Assign accountability to an individual in the department as a data steward. When deciding on a data steward, consider the following:
    • Data stewards are designated full-time employees who serve as the go-to resource for all issues pertaining to data quality, including keeping a particular data silo clean and free of errors.
    • Data stewards are typically mid-level managers in the business (not IT), preferably with an interest in improving data quality and a relatively high degree of tech-savviness.
    • Data stewards can sometimes be created as a new role with a dedicated FTE, but this is not usually cost effective for small and mid-sized firms.
    • Instead, diffuse the steward role across several existing positions, including one for CRM and other marketing, sales, and service applications.
  • Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.
  • Example: Data Steward Structure

    Department A

    • Data Steward (CRM)
    • Data Steward (ERP)

    Department B

    • Data Steward (All)

    Department C

    • Data Steward (All)

    Determine if a customer data warehouse will add value to your CXM technology-enablement strategy

    A customer data warehouse (CDW) “is a subject-oriented, integrated, time-variant, non-volatile collection of data used to support the strategic decision-making process across marketing, sales, and service. It is the central point of data integration for customer intelligence and is the source of data for the data marts, delivering a common view of customer data” (Corporate Information Factory, n.d.).

    Analogy

    CDWs are like a buffet. All the food items are in the buffet. Likewise, your corporate data sources are centralized into one repository. There are so many food items in a buffet that you may need to organize them into separate food stations (data marts) for easier access.

    Examples/Use Cases

    • Time series analyses with historical data
    • Enterprise level, common view analyses
    • Integrated, comprehensive customer profiles
    • One-stop repository of all corporate information

    Pros

    • Top-down architectural planning
    • Subject areas are integrated
    • Time-variant, changes to the data are tracked
    • Non-volatile, data is never over-written or deleted

    Cons

    • A massive amount of corporate information
    • Slower delivery
    • Changes are harder to make
    • Data format is not very business friendly

    Activity: Assess the need for a customer data warehouse

    2.4.3. 30 minutes

    Input

    • List of data sources
    • Data inflows and outflows

    Output

    • Data quality preservation plan
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Create a shortlist of customer data sources.
    2. Profile the integration points that are necessary to support inflows and outflows of customer data.
    3. Ask the following questions around the need for a CDW based on these data sources and points of integration:
    • What is the volume of customer information that needs to be stored? The greater the capacity, the more likely that you should build a dedicated CDW.
    • How complex is the data? The more complex the data, the greater the need for a CDW.
    • How often will data interchange happen between various applications and data sources? The greater and more frequent the interchange, the greater the need for a CDW.
    • What are your organizational capabilities for building a CDW? Do you have the resources in-house to create a CDW at this time?
  • Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.
  • INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITY

    Refer to Info-Tech’s Build an Agile Data Warehouse blueprint for more information on building a centralized and integrated data warehouse.

    Create a plan for end-user training on new (or refocused) CXM applications and data quality processes

    All training modules will be different, but some will have overlapping areas of interest.

    – Assign Project Evangelists – Analytics Training – Mobile Training

    Application Training

    • Customer Service - Assign Project Evangelists – Analytics Training – Mobile Training
      • Focus training on:
        • What to do with inbound tickets.
        • Routing and escalation features.
        • How to use knowledge management features effectively.
        • Call center capabilities.
    • Sales – Assign Project Evangelists – Analytics Training – Mobile Training
      • Focus training on:
        • Recording of opportunities, leads, and deals.
        • How to maximize sales with sales support decision tree.
    • Marketing - Assign Project Evangelists – Analytics Training
      • Focus training on:
        • Campaign management features.
        • Social media monitoring and engagement capabilities.
    • IT
      • Focus training on:
        • Familiarization with the software.
        • Software integration with other enterprise applications.
        • The technical support needed to maintain the system in the future.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Train customers too. Keep the customer-facing sales portals simple and intuitive, have clear explanations/instructions under important functions (e.g. brief directions on how to initiate service inquiries), and provide examples of proper uses (e.g. effective searches). Make sure customers are aware of escalation options available to them if self-service falls short.

    Ensure adoption with a formal communication process to keep departments apprised of new application rollouts

    The team leading the rollout of new initiatives (be they applications, new governance structures, or data quality procedures) should establish a communication process to ensure management and users are well informed.

    CXM-related department groups or designated trainers should take the lead and implement a process for:

    • Scheduling application platform/process rollout/kick-off meetings.
    • Soliciting preliminary input from the attending groups to develop further training plans.
    • Establishing communication paths and the key communication agents from each department who are responsible for keeping lines open moving forward.

    The overall objective for inter-departmental kick-off meetings is to confirm that all parties agree on certain key points and understand alignment rationale and new sales app or process functionality.

    The kick-off process will significantly improve internal communications by inviting all affected internal IT groups, including business units, to work together to address significant issues before the application process is formally activated.

    The kick-off meeting(s) should encompass:

    • Target business-user requirements
    • The high-level application overview
    • Tangible business benefits of alignment
    • Special consideration needs
    • Other IT department needs
    • Target quality of service (QoS) metrics

    Info-Tech Insight

    Determine who in each department will send out a message about initiative implementation, the tone of the message, the medium, and the delivery date.

    Construct a formal communication plan to engage stakeholders through structured channels

    Tangible Elements of a Communications Plan

    • Stakeholder Group Name
    • Stakeholder Description
    • Message
    • Concerns Relative to Application Maintenance
    • Communication Medium
    • Role Responsible for Communication
    • Frequency
    • Start and End Date

    Intangible Elements of a Communications Plan

    • Establish biweekly meetings with representatives from sales functional groups, who are tasked with reporting on:
      • Benefits of revised processes
      • Metrics of success
      • Resource restructuring
    • Establish a monthly interdepartmental meeting, where all representatives from sales and IT leadership discuss pressing bug fixes and minor process improvements.
    • Create a webinar series, complete with Q&A, so that stakeholders can reference these changes at their leisure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every piece of information that you give to a stakeholder that is not directly relevant to their interests is a distraction from your core message. Always remember to tailor the message, medium, and timing accordingly.

    Carry the CXM value forward with linkage and relationships between sales, marketing, service, and IT

    Once the sales-IT alignment committees have been formed, create organizational cadence through a variety of formal and informal gatherings between the two business functions.

    • Organizations typically fall in one of three maturity stages: isolation, collaboration, or synergy. Strive to achieve business-technology synergy at the operational level.
    • Although collaboration cannot be mandated, it can be facilitated. Start with a simple gauge of the two functions’ satisfaction with each other, and determine where and how inter-functional communication and synergy can be constructed.

    Isolation

    The image shows four shapes, with the words IT, Sales, Customer Service, and Marketing in them.

    • Point solutions are implemented on an ad-hoc basis by individual departments for specific projects.
    • Internal IT is rarely involved in these projects from beginning to end.

    Collaboration

    The image features that same four shapes and text from the previous image, but this time they are connected by dotted lines.

    • There is a formal cross-departmental effort to integrate some point solutions.
    • Internal IT gets involved to integrate systems and then support system interactions.

    Synergy

    The image features the same shapes and text from previous instances, except the shapes are now connect by solid lines and the entire image is surrounded by dotted lines.

    • Cross-functional, business technology teams are established to work on IT-enabled revenue generation initiatives.
    • Team members are collocated if possible.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.4.1 Develop a CXM application integration map

    Using the inventory of existing CXM-supporting applications and the newly formed CXM application portfolio as inputs, your facilitator will assist you in creating an integration map of applications to establish a system of record and flow of data.

    2.4.2 Develop a mitigation plan for poor quality customer data

    Our facilitator will educate your stakeholders on the importance of quality data and guide you through the creation of a mitigation plan for data preservation.

    2.4.3 Assess the need for a customer data warehouse

    Addressing important factors such as data volume, complexity, and flow, a facilitator will help you assess whether or not a customer data warehouse for CXM is the right fit for your organization.

    Phase 3

    Finalize the CXM Framework

    Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Finalize the CXM Framework

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1 week

    Step 3.1: Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss strategic requirements and the associated application portfolio that has been proposed.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Initiatives prioritization

    With these tools & templates:

    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template

    Step 3.2: Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss roadmap and next steps in terms of rationalizing and implementing specific technology-centric initiatives or rollouts.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Confirm stakeholder strategy presentation

    With these tools & templates:

    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template

    Phase 3 Results & Insights:

    • Initiatives roadmap

    Step 3.1: Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

    Phase 1

    1.1 Create the Project Vision

    1.2 Structure the Project

    Phase 2

    2.1 Scan the External Environment

    2.2 Assess the Current State of CXM

    2.3 Create an Application Portfolio

    2.4 Develop Deployment Best Practices

    Phase 3

    3.1 Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

    3.2 Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

    Activities:

    • Create a risk management plan
    • Brainstorm initiatives for CXM roadmap
    • Identify dependencies and enabling projects for your CXM roadmap
    • Complete the CXM roadmap

    Outcomes:

    • Risk management plan
    • CXM roadmap
      • Quick-win initiatives

    A CXM technology-enablement roadmap will provide smooth and timely implementation of your apps/initiatives

    Creating a comprehensive CXM strategy roadmap reduces the risk of rework, misallocation of resources, and project delays or abandonment.

    • People
    • Processes
    • Technology
    • Timeline
    • Tasks
    • Budget

    Benefits of a Roadmap

    1. Prioritize execution of initiatives in alignment with business, IT, and needs.
    2. Create clearly defined roles and responsibilities for IT and business stakeholders.
    3. Establish clear timelines for rollout of initiatives.
    4. Identify key functional areas and processes.
    5. Highlight dependencies and prerequisites for successful deployment.
    6. Reduce the risk of rework due to poor execution.

    Implement planning and controls for project execution

    Risk Management

    • Track risks associated with your CXM project.
    • Assign owners and create plans for resolving open risks.
    • Identify risks associated with related projects.
    • Create a plan for effectively communicating project risks.

    Change Management

    • Brainstorm a high-level training plan for various users of the CXM.
    • Create a communication plan to notify stakeholders and impacted users about the tool and how it will alter their workday and performance of role activities.
    • Establish a formal change management process that is flexible enough to meet the demands for change.

    Project Management

    • Conduct a post-mortem to evaluate the completion of the CXM strategy.
    • Design the project management process to be adaptive in nature.
    • Communication is key to project success, whether it is to external stakeholders or internal project team members..
    • Review the project’s performance against metrics and expectations.

    INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITIES

    Optimize the Change Management Process

    You need to design a process that is flexible enough to meet demand for change and strict enough to protect the live environment from change-related incidents.

    Create Project Management Success

    Investing time up front to plan the project and implementing best practices during project execution to ensure the project is delivered with the planned outcome and quality is critical to project success.

    Activity: Create a risk management plan

    3.1.1 45 minutes

    Input

    • Inventory of risks

    Output

    • Risk management plan
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Create a list of possible risks that may hamper the progress of your CXM project.
    2. Classify risks as strategy-based, related to planning, or systems-based, related to technology.
    3. Brainstorm mitigation strategies to overcome each listed risk.
    4. On a score of 1 to 3, determine the impact of each risk on the success of the project.
    5. On a score of 1 to 3, determine the likelihood of the occurrence for each risk.
    6. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Constructing a Risk Management Plan

    Risk Impact Likelihood Mitigation Effort
    Strategy Risks Project over budget
    • Detailed project plan
    • Pricing guarantees
    Inadequate content governance
    System Risks Integration with additional systems
    • Develop integration plan and begin testing integration methods early in the project
    .... ... ... ...

    Likelihood

    1 – High/ Needs Focus

    2 – Can Be Mitigated

    3 - Unlikely

    Impact

    1 - High Risk

    2 - Moderate Risk

    3 - Minimal Risk

    Prepare contingency plans to minimize time spent handling unexpected risks

    Understanding technical and strategic risks can help you establish contingency measures to reduce the likelihood that risks will occur. Devise mitigation strategies to help offset the impact of risks if contingency measures are not enough.

    Remember

    The biggest sources of risk in a CXM strategy are lack of planning, poorly defined requirements, and lack of governance.

    Apply the following mitigation tips to avoid pitfalls and delays.

    Risk Mitigation Tips

    • Upfront planning
    • Realistic timelines
    • Resource support
    • Change management
    • Executive sponsorship
    • Sufficient funding
    • Expectation setting
    1. Project Starts
    • Expectations are high
  • Project Workload Increases
    • Expectations are high
  • Pit of Despair
    • Why are we doing this?
  • Project Nears Close
    • Benefits are being realized
  • Implementation is Completed
    • Learning curve dip
  • Standardization & Optimization
    • Benefits are high
  • Identify factors to complete your CXM initiatives roadmap

    Completion of initiatives for your CXM project will be contingent upon multiple variables.

    Defining Dependencies

    Initiative complexity will define the need for enabling projects. Create a process to define dependencies:

    1. Enabling projects: complex prerequisites.
    2. Preceding tasks: direct and simplified assignments.

    Establishing a Timeline

    • Assign realistic timelines for each initiative to ensure smooth progress.
    • Use milestones and stage gates to track the progress of your initiatives and tasks.

    Defining Importance

    • Based on requirements gathering, identify the importance of each initiative to your marketing department.
    • Each initiative can be ranked high, medium, or low.

    Assigning Ownership

    • Owners are responsible for on-time completion of their assigned initiatives.
    • Populate a RACI chart to ensure coverage of all initiatives.

    Complex....Initiative

    • Enabling Project
      • Preceding Task
      • Preceding Task
    • Enabling Project
      • Preceding Task
      • Preceding Task

    Simple....Initiative

    • Preceding Task
    • Preceding Task
    • Preceding Task

    Activity: Brainstorm CXM application initiatives for implementation in alignment with business needs

    3.1.2 45 minutes

    Input

    • Inventory of CXM initiatives

    Output

    • Prioritized and quick-win initiatives
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. As a team, identify and list CXM initiatives that need to be addressed.
    2. Plot the initiatives on the complexity-value matrix to determine priority.
    3. Identify quick wins: initiatives that can realize quick benefits with little effort.
    4. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Importance-Capability Matrix

    The image shows a matrix, with Initiative Complexity on the X-axis, and Business Value on the Y-axis. There are circle of different sizes in the matrix.

    Pinpoint quick wins: high importance, low effort initiatives.

    The size of each plotted initiative must indicate the effort or the complexity and time required to complete.
    Top Right Quadrant Strategic Projects
    Top Left Quadrant Quick Wins
    Bottom Right Quadrant Risky Bets
    Bottom Left Quadrant Discretionary Projects

    Activity: Identify any dependencies or enabling projects for your CXM roadmap

    3.1.3 1 hour

    Input

    • Implementation initiatives
    • Dependencies

    Output

    • CXM project dependencies

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Using sticky notes and a whiteboard, have each team member rank the compiled initiatives in terms of priority.
    2. Determine preceding tasks or enabling projects that each initiative is dependent upon.
    3. Determine realistic timelines to complete each quick win, enabling project, and long-term initiative.
    4. Assign an owner for each initiative.

    Example: Project Dependencies

    Initiative: Omnichannel E-Commerce

    Dependency: WEM Suite Deployment; CRM Suite Deployment; Order Fulfillment Capabilities

    Activity: Complete the implementation roadmap

    3.1.4 30 minutes

    Input

    • Implementation initiatives
    • Dependencies

    Output

    • CXM Roadmap
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Establish time frames to highlight enabling projects, quick wins, and long-term initiatives.
    2. Indicate the importance of each initiative as high, medium, or low based on the output in Activity 3.1.2.
    3. Assign each initiative to a member of the project team. Each owner will be responsible for the execution of a given initiative as planned.
    4. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Example: Importance-Capability Matrix

    Importance Initiative Owner Completion Date
    Example Projects High Gather business requirements. Project Manager MM/DD/YYYY
    Quick Wins
    Long Term Medium Implement e-commerce across all sites. CFO & Web Manager MM/DD/YYYY

    Importance

    • High
    • Medium
    • Low

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1 Create a risk management plan

    Based on the workshop exercises, the facilitator will work with the core team to design a priority-based risk mitigation plan that enumerates the most salient risks to the CXM project and addresses them.

    3.1.2; 3.1.3; 3.1.4 Identify initiative dependencies and create the CXM roadmap

    After identifying dependencies, our facilitators will work with your IT SMEs and business stakeholders to create a comprehensive roadmap, outlining the initiatives needed to carry out your CXM strategy roadmap.

    Step 3.2: Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

    Phase 1

    1.1 Create the Project Vision

    1.2 Structure the Project

    Phase 2

    2.1 Scan the External Environment

    2.2 Assess the Current State of CXM

    2.3 Create an Application Portfolio

    2.4 Develop Deployment Best Practices

    Phase 3

    3.1 Create an Initiative Rollout Plan

    3.2 Confirm and Finalize the CXM Blueprint

    Activities:

    • Identify success metrics
    • Create a stakeholder power map
    • Create a stakeholder communication plan
    • Complete and present CXM strategy stakeholder presentation

    Outcomes:

    • Stakeholder communication plan
    • CXM strategy stakeholder presentation

    Ensure that your CXM applications are improving the performance of targeted processes by establishing metrics

    Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

    Key performance indicators (KPIs) are quantifiable measures that demonstrate the effectiveness of a process and its ability to meet business objectives.

    Questions to Ask

    1. What outputs of the process can be used to measure success?
    2. How do you measure process efficiency and effectiveness?

    Creating KPIs

    Specific

    Measurable

    Achievable

    Realistic

    Time-bound

    Follow the SMART methodology when developing KPIs for each process.

    Adhering to this methodology is a key component of the Lean management methodology. This framework will help you avoid establishing general metrics that aren’t relevant.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Metrics are essential to your ability to measure and communicate the success of the CXM strategy to the business. Speak the same language as the business and choose metrics that relate to marketing, sales, and customer service objectives.

    Activity: Identify metrics to communicate process success

    3.2.1 1 hour

    Input

    • Key organizational objectives

    Output

    • Strategic business metrics
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Recap the major functions that CXM will focus on (e.g. marketing, sales, customer service, web experience management, social media management, etc.)
    2. Identify business metrics that reflect organizational objectives for each function.
    3. Establish goals for each metric (as exemplified below).
    4. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.
    5. Communicate the chosen metrics and the respective goals to stakeholders.

    Example: Metrics for Marketing, Sales, and Customer Service Functions

    Metric Example
    Marketing Customer acquisition cost X% decrease in costs relating to advertising spend
    Ratio of lifetime customer value X% decrease in customer churn
    Marketing originated customer % X% increase in % of customer acquisition driven by marketing
    Sales Conversion rate X% increase conversion of lead to sale
    Lead response time X% decrease in response time per lead
    Opportunity-to-win ratio X% increase in monthly/annual opportunity-to-win ratio
    Customer Service First response time X% decreased time it takes for customer to receive first response
    Time-to-resolution X% decrease of average time-to-resolution
    Customer satisfaction X% improvement of customer satisfaction ratings on immediate feedback survey

    Use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Power Map Template to identify stakeholders crucial to CXM application rollouts

    3.2.2 Stakeholder Power Map Template

    Use this template and its power map to help visualize the importance of various stakeholders and their concerns. Prioritize your time according to the most powerful and most impacted stakeholders.

    Answer questions about each stakeholder:

    • Power: How much influence does the stakeholder have? Enough to drive the project forward or into the ground?
    • Involvement: How interested is the stakeholder? How involved is the stakeholder in the project already?
    • Impact: To what degree will the stakeholder be impacted? Will this significantly change how they do their job?
    • Support: Is the stakeholder a supporter of the project? Neutral? A resistor?

    Focus on key players: relevant stakeholders who have high power, should have high involvement, and are highly impacted.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Stakeholder Power Map Template

    Use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Communication Planning Template to document initiatives and track communication

    3.2.3 Stakeholder Communication Planning Template

    Use the Stakeholder Communication Planning Template to document your list of initiative stakeholders so you can track them and plan communication throughout the initiative.

    Track the communication methods needed to convey information regarding CXM initiatives. Communicate how a specific initiative will impact the way employees work and the work they do.

    Sections of the document:

    1. Document the Stakeholder Power Map (output of Tool 3.2.2).
    2. Complete the Communicate Management Plan to aid in the planning and tracking of communication and training.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Activity: Create a stakeholder power map and communication plan

    3.2.4 1 hour

    Input

    • Stakeholder power map

    Output

    • Stakeholder communication plan
    • CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Communication Planning Template
    • Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Power Map Template

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Using Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Power Map Template, identify key stakeholders for ensuring the success of the CXM strategy (Tool 3.2.2).
    2. Using Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Communication Plan Template, construct a communication plan to communicate and track CXM initiatives with all CXM stakeholders (Tool 3.2.3).
    3. Document your outputs in the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template.

    Use Info-Tech’s CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template to sell your CXM strategy to the business

    3.2.5 CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template

    Complete the presentation template as indicated when you see the green icon throughout this deck. Include the outputs of all activities that are marked with this icon.

    Info-Tech has designed the CXM Strategy Stakeholder Presentation Template to capture the most critical aspects of the CXM strategy. Customize it to best convey your message to project stakeholders and to suit your organization.

    The presentation should be no longer than one hour. However, additional slides can be added at the discretion of the presenter. Make sure there is adequate time for a question and answer period.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    After the presentation, email the deck to stakeholders to ensure they have it available for their own reference.

    Activity: Determine the measured value received from the project

    3.2.6 30 minutes

    Input

    • Project Metrics

    Output

    • Measured Value Calculation

    Materials

    • Workbook

    Participants

    • Project Team

    Instructions

    1. Review project metrics identified in phase 1 and associated benchmarks.
    2. After executing the CXM project, compare metrics that were identified in the benchmarks with the revised and assess the delta.
    3. Calculate the percentage change and quantify dollar impact (i.e. as a result of increased customer acquisition or retention).

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.2.4 Create a stakeholder power map and communication plan

    An analyst will walk the project team through the creation of a communication plan, inclusive of project metrics and their respective goals. If you are planning a variety of CXM initiatives, track how the change will be communicated and to whom. Determine the employees who will be impacted by the change.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    • IT must work in lockstep with Marketing, Sales, and Customer Service to develop a comprehensive technology-enablement strategy for CXM.
    • As IT works with its stakeholders in the business, it must endeavor to capture and use the voice of the customer in driving strategic requirements for CXM portfolio design.
    • IT must consider the external environment, customer personas, and internal processes as it designs strategic requirements to build the CXM application portfolio.

    Insight 2

    • The cloud is bringing significant disruption to the CXM space: to maintain relevancy, IT must become deeply involved in ensuring alignment between vendor capabilities and strategic requirements.
    • IT must serve as a trusted advisor on technical implementation challenges related to CXM, such as data quality, integration, and end-user training and adoption.
    • IT is responsible for technology enablement and is an indispensable partner in this regard; however, the business must ultimately own the objectives and communication strategy for customer engagement.

    Insight 3

    • When crafting a portfolio for CXM, be aware of the art of the possible: capabilities are rapidly merging and evolving to support new interaction channels. Social, mobile, and IoT are disrupting the customer experience landscape.
    • Big data and analytics-driven decision making is another significant area of value. IT must allow for true customer intelligence by providing an integration framework across customer-facing applications.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Voice of the Customer for CXM Portfolio Design
    • Understanding of Strategic Requirements for CXM
    • Customer Personas and Scenarios
    • Environmental Scan
    • Deployment Considerations
    • Initiatives Roadmap Considerations

    Processes Optimized

    • CXM Technology Portfolio Design
    • Customer Data Quality Processes
    • CXM Integrations

    Deliverables Completed

    • Strategic Summary for CXM
    • CXM Project Charter
    • Customer Personas
    • External and Competitive Analysis
    • CXM Application Portfolio

    Bibliography

    Accenture Digital. “Growing the Digital Business: Accenture Mobility Research 2015.” Accenture. 2015. Web.

    Afshar, Vala. “50 Important Customer Experience Stats for Business Leaders.” Huffington Post. 15 Oct. 2015. Web.

    APQC. “Marketing and Sales Definitions and Key Measures.” APQC’s Process Classification Framework, Version 1.0.0. APQC. Mar. 2011. Web.

    CX Network. “The Evolution of Customer Experience in 2015.” Customer Experience Network. 2015. Web.

    Genesys. “State of Customer Experience Research”. Genesys. 2018. Web.

    Harvard Business Review and SAS. “Lessons From the Leading Edge of Customer Experience Management.” Harvard Business School Publishing. 2014. Web.

    Help Scout. “75 Customer Service Facts, Quotes & Statistics.” Help Scout. n.d. Web.

    Inmon Consulting Services. “Corporate Information Factory (CIF) Overview.” Corporate Information Factory. n.d. Web

    Jurevicius, Ovidijus. “VRIO Framework.” Strategic Management Insight. 21 Oct. 2013. Web.

    Keenan, Jim, and Barbara Giamanco. “Social Media and Sales Quota.” A Sales Guy Consulting and Social Centered Selling. n.d. Web.

    Malik, Om. “Internet of Things Will Have 24 Billion Devices by 2020.” Gigaom. 13 Oct. 2011. Web.

    McGovern, Michele. “Customers Want More: 5 New Expectations You Must Meet Now.” Customer Experience Insight. 30 July 2015. Web.

    McGinnis, Devon. “40 Customer Service Statistics to Move Your Business Forward.” Salesforce Blog. 1 May 2019. Web.

    Bibliography

    Reichheld, Fred. “Prescription for Cutting Costs”. Bain & Company. n.d. Web.

    Retail Congress Asia Pacific. “SAP – Burberry Makes Shopping Personal.” Retail Congress Asia Pacific. 2017. Web.

    Rouse, Margaret. “Omnichannel Definition.” TechTarget. Feb. 2014. Web.

    Salesforce Research. “Customer Expectations Hit All-Time High.” Salesforce Research. 2018. Web.

    Satell, Greg. “A Look Back at Why Blockbuster Really Failed and Why It Didn’t Have To.” Forbes. 5 Sept. 2014. Web.

    Social Centered Learning. “Social Media and Sales Quota: The Impact of Social Media on Sales Quota and Corporate Review.” Social Centered Learning. n.d. Web.

    Varner, Scott. “Economic Impact of Experience Management”. Qualtrics/Forrester. 16 Aug. 2017. Web.

    Wesson, Matt. “How to Use Your Customer Data Like Amazon.” Salesforce Pardot Blog. 27 Aug. 2012. Web.

    Winterberry Group. “Taking Cues From the Customer: ‘Omnichannel’ and the Drive For Audience Engagement.” Winterberry Group LLC. June 2013. Web.

    Wollan, Robert, and Saideep Raj. “How CIOs Can Support a More Agile Sales Organization.” The Wall Street Journal: The CIO Report. 25 July 2013. Web.

    Zendesk. “The Impact of Customer Service on Customer Lifetime Value 2013.” Z Library. n.d. Web.

    Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}333|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • Infrastructure & Operations is changing rapidly. It’s a constant challenge to find the right skills to support the next new technology while at the same time maintaining the skills in house that allow you to support your existing platforms.
    • A lack of clarity around required skills makes finding the right skills difficult, and it’s not clear whether you should train, hire, contract, or outsource to address gaps.
    • You need to keep up with changes and new strategy while continuing to support your existing environment.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Take a strategic approach to acquiring skills – looking only as far as the needs of the next project will lead to a constant skills shortage with no plan for it to be addressed.
    • Begin by identifying your future state. Identify needed skills in the organization to support planned projects and initiatives, and to mitigate skills-related risks.

    Impact and Result

    • Leverage your infrastructure roadmap and cloud strategy to identify needed skills in your future state environment.
    • Decide how you’ll acquire needed skills based on the characteristics of need for each skill.
    • Communicate the change and create a plan of action for the skills transformation.

    Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should map technical skills for a changing Infrastructure & Operations organization, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify skills needs for the future state environment

    Identify what skills are needed based on where the organization is going.

    • Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization – Phase 1: Identify Skills Needs for Your Future State Environment
    • Future State Playbook
    • IT/Cloud Solutions Architect
    • IT/Cloud Engineer
    • IT/Cloud Administrator
    • IT/Cloud Demand Billing & Accounting Analyst

    2. Acquire needed skills

    Ground skills acquisition decisions in the characteristics of need.

    • Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization – Phase 2: Acquire Needed Skills
    • Technical Skills Map

    3. Maximize the value of the skills map

    Get stakeholder buy-in; leverage the skills map in other processes.

    • Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization – Phase 3: Maximize the Value of Your Skills Map
    • Technical Skills Map Communication Deck Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Review Initiatives and Skills-Related Risks

    The Purpose

    Identify process and skills changes required by the future state of your environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set foundation for alignment between strategy-defined technology initiatives and needed skills.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the list of initiatives and projects with the group.

    1.2 Identify how key support, operational, and deployment processes will change through planned initiatives.

    1.3 Identify skills-related risks and pain points.

    Outputs

    Future State Playbook

    2 Identify Needed Skills and Roles

    The Purpose

    Identify process and skills changes required by the future state of your environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set foundation for alignment between strategy-defined technology initiatives and needed skills.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify skills required to support the new environment.

    2.2 Map required skills to roles.

    Outputs

    IT/Cloud Architect Role Description

    IT/Cloud Engineer Role Description

    IT/Cloud Administrator Role Description

    3 Create a Plan to Acquire Needed Skills

    The Purpose

    Create a skills acquisition strategy based on the characteristics of need.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Optimal skills acquisition strategy defined.

    Activities

    3.1 Modify impact scoring scale for key skills decision factors.

    3.2 Apply impact scoring scales to needed skills

    3.3 Decide whether to train, hire, contract, or outsource to acquire needed skills.

    Outputs

    Technical Skills Map

    4 Develop a Communication Plan

    The Purpose

    Create an effective communication plan for different stakeholders across the organization.

    Identify opportunities to leverage the skills map elsewhere.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a concise, clear, consistent, and relevant change message for stakeholders across the organization.

    Activities

    4.1 Review skills decisions and decide how you will acquire skills in each role.

    4.2 Update roles descriptions.

    4.3 Create a change message.

    4.4 Identify opportunities to leverage the skills map in other processes.

    Outputs

    Technical Skills Map Communication Deck

    Design Your Cloud Operations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}462|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
    • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess your key workflows’ maturity for life in the cloud and evaluate your readiness and need for new ways of working
    • Identify the work that must be done to deliver value in cloud services
    • Design your cloud operations framework and communicate it clearly and succinctly to secure buy-in

    Design Your Cloud Operations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Design Your Cloud Operations Deck – A step-by-step storyboard to help guide you through the activities and tools in this project.

    This storyboard will help you assess your cloud maturity, understand relevant ways of working, and create a meaningful design of your cloud operations that helps align team members and stakeholders.

    • Design Your Cloud Operations – Storyboard
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Roadmap Tool

    2. Planning and design tools.

    Use these templates and tools to assess your current state, design the cloud operations organizing framework, and create a roadmap.

    • Cloud Maturity Assessment

    3. Communication tools.

    Use these templates and tools to plan how you will communicate changes to key stakeholders and communicate the new cloud operations organizing framework in an executive presentation.

    • Cloud Operations Communication Plan
    • Cloud Operations Organizing Framework: Executive Brief

    Infographic

    Workshop: Design Your Cloud Operations

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Day 1

    The Purpose

    Establish Context

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment on target state

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement

    1.2 Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

    1.3 Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    1.4 Develop organization design principles

    Outputs

    Cloud maturity assessment

    Project drivers

    Cloud challenges and objectives

    Organization design principles

    2 Day 2

    The Purpose

    Establish Context

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of cloud workstreams

    Activities

    2.1 Evaluate new ways of working

    2.2 Develop a workstream target statement

    2.3 Identify cloud work

    Outputs

    Workstream target statement

    Cloud operations workflow diagrams

    3 Day 3

    The Purpose

    Design the Organization

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Visualization of the cloud operations future state

    Activities

    3.1 Design a future-state cloud operations diagram

    3.2 Create a current-state cloud operations diagram

    3.3 Define success indicators

    Outputs

    Future-state cloud operations diagram

    Current-state cloud operations diagram

    Success indicators

    4 Day 4

    The Purpose

    Communicate the Changes

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment and buy-in from stakeholders

    Activities

    4.1 Create a roadmap

    4.2 Create a communication plan

    Outputs

    Roadmap

    Communication plan

    Further reading

    It’s “day two” in the cloud. Now what?

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analysts’ Perspective

    The image contains a picture of Andrew Sharp.

    Andrew Sharp

    Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    It’s “day two” in the cloud. Now what?

    Just because you’re in the cloud doesn’t mean everyone is on the same page about how cloud operations work – or should work.

    You have an opportunity to implement new ways of working. But if people can’t see the bigger picture – the organizing framework of your cloud operations – it will be harder to get buy-in to realize value from your cloud services.

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to build out and visualize a cloud operations organizing framework that defines cloud work and aligns it to the right areas.

    The image contains a picture of Nabeel Sherif.

    Nabeel Sherif

    Principal Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    The image contains a picture of Emily Sugerman.

    Emily Sugerman

    Research Analyst

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    Scott Young

    Principal Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Widespread cloud adoption has created new opportunities and challenges:

    • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
    • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist, leading to a lack of direction, employee frustration, missed work, inefficiency, and unacceptable risk.
    • Many organizations have bought their way into a SaaS portfolio. Now, as key applications leave their network, I&O leaders still have accountability for these apps, but little visibility and control over them.
    • Few organizations are, or will ever be, cloud only. Your operations will be both on-prem and in-cloud for the foreseeable future and you must be able to accommodate both.
    • Traditional infrastructure siloes no longer work for cloud operations, but key stakeholders are wary of significant change.

    Clearly communicate the need for operations changes:

    • Identify current challenges with cloud operations. Assess your readiness and fit for new ways of working involved in cloud operations: DevOps, SRE, Platform Engineering, and more.
    • Use Info-Tech’s templates to design a cloud operations organizing framework. Define cloud work, and align work to the right work areas.
    • Communicate the design. Gain buy-in from your key stakeholders for the considerable organizational change management required to achieve durable change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

    Your Challenge

    Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.

    • As key applications leave for the cloud, I&O teams are still expected to manage access, spend, and security but may have little or no visibility or control over the applications themselves.
    • The automation and self-service capabilities of cloud aren’t delivering the speed the business expected because teams don’t work together effectively.
    • Business leaders purchase their own cloud solutions because, from their point of view, IT’s processes are cumbersome and ineffective.
    • Accounting practices and governance mechanisms haven’t adjusted to enable new development practices and technologies.
    • Security and cost management requirements may not be accounted for by teams acquiring or developing solutions.
    • All of this contributes to frustration, missed work, wasteful spending, and unacceptable risk.

    Obstacles, by the numbers:

    85% of respondents reported security in the cloud was a serious concern.

    73% reported balancing responsibilities between a central cloud team and business units was a top concern.

    The average organization spent 13% more than they’d budgeted on cloud – even when budgets were expected to increase by 29% in the next year.

    32% of all cloud spend was estimated to be wasted spend.

    56% of operations professionals said their primary focus is cloud services.

    81% of security professionals thought it was difficult to get developers to prioritize bug fixes.

    42% of security professionals felt bugs were being caught too late in the development process.

    1. Flexera 2022 State of the Cloud Report. 2. GitLab DevSecOps 2021 Survey

    Cloud operations are different, but IT departments struggle to change

    • There’s no sense of urgency in the organization that change is needed, particularly from teams that aren’t directly involved in operations. It can be challenging to make the case that change is needed.
    • Beware “analysis paralysis”! With so many options, philosophies, approaches, and methodologies, it’s easy to be overwhelmed by choice and fail to make needed changes.
    • The solution to the problem requires organizational changes beyond the operations team, but you don’t have the authority to make those changes directly. Operations can influence the solution, but they likely can’t direct it.
    • Behavior, culture, and organizations take time and work to change. Progress is usually evolutionary – but this can also mean it feels like it’s happening too slowly.
    • It’s not just cloud, and it probably never will be. You’ll need to account for operating both on-premises and cloud technologies for the foreseeable future.

    Follow Info-Tech’s Methodology

    1. Ensure alignment with the risks and drivers of the business and understand your organization’s strengths and gaps for a cloud operations world.

    2. Understand the balance of different types of deliveries you’re responsible for in the cloud.

    3. Reduce risk by reinforcing the key operational pillars of cloud operations to your workstreams.

    4. Identify “work areas,” decide which area is responsible for what tasks and how work areas should interact in order to best facilitate desired business outcomes.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram demonstrating Info-Tech's Methodology, as described in the text above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Start by designing operations around the main workflow you have for cloud services; i.e. If you mostly build or host in cloud, build the diagram to maximize value for that workflow.

    Operating Framework Elements

    Proper design of roles and responsibilities for each cloud workflow category will help reduce risk by reinforcing the key operational pillars of cloud operations.

    We base this on a composite of the well-architected frameworks established by the top global cloud providers today.

    Workflow Categories

    • Build
    • Host
    • Consume

    Key Pillars

    • Performance
    • Reliability
    • Cost Effectiveness
    • Security
    • Operational Excellence

    Risks to Mitigate

    • Changes to Support Model
    • Changes to Security & Governance
    • Changes to Skills & Roles
    • Replicating Old Habits
    • Misaligned Stakeholders

    Cloud Operations Design

    Info-Tech’s Methodology

    Assess Maturity and Ways of Working

    Define Cloud Work

    Design Cloud Operations

    Communicate and Secure Buy-in

    Assess your key workflows’ maturity for “life in the cloud,” related to Key Operational Pillars. Evaluate your readiness and need for new ways of working.

    Identify the work that must be done to deliver value in cloud services.

    Define key cloud work areas, the work they do, and how they should share information and interact.

    Outline the change you recommend to a range of stakeholders. Gain buy-in for the plan.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Cloud Maturity Assessment

    Assess the intensity and cloud maturity of your IT operations for each of the key cloud workstreams: Consume, Host, and Build

    The image contains screenshots of the Cloud Maturity Assessment.

    Communication Plan

    Identify stakeholders, what’s in it for them, what the impact will be, and how you will communicate over the course of the change.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Communcation Plan.

    Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook

    Capture the diagram as you build it.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook.

    Roadmap Tool

    Build a roadmap to put the design into action.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Roadmap Tool.

    Key deliverable:

    Cloud Operations Organizing Framework

    The Cloud Operations Organizing Framework is a communication tool that introduces the cloud operations diagram and establishes its context and justification.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework.

    Project Outline

    Phase 1: Establish Context

    1.1: Identify challenges, opportunities, and cloud maturity

    1.2: Evaluate new ways of working

    1.3: Define cloud work

    Phase 2: Design the organization and communicate changes

    2.1: Design a draft cloud operations diagram

    2.2: Communicate changes

    Outputs

    Cloud Services Objectives and Obstacles

    Cloud Operations Workflow Diagrams

    Cloud Maturity Assessment

    Draft Cloud Operations Diagram

    Communication Plan

    Roadmap Tool

    Cloud Operations Organizing Framework

    Project benefits

    Benefits for IT

    Benefits for the business

    • Define the work required to effectively deliver cloud services to deliver business value.
    • Define key roles for operating cloud services.
    • Outline an operations diagram that visually communicates what key work areas do and how they interact.
    • Communicate needed changes to key stakeholders.
    • Receive more value from cloud services when the organization is structured to deliver value including:
      • Avoiding cost overruns
      • Securing services
      • Providing faster, more effective delivery
      • Increasing predictability
      • Reducing error rates

    Calculate the value of Info-Tech’s Methodology

    The value of the project is the delivery of organizational change that improves the way you manage cloud services

    Example Goal

    How this blueprint can help

    How you might measure success/value

    Streamline Responsibilities

    The operations team is spending too much time fighting applications fires, which is distracting it from needed platform improvements.

    • Identify shared and separate responsibilities for development and platform operations teams.
    • Focus the operations team on securing and automating cloud platform(s).
    • Reduce time wasted on back and forth between development and operations teams (20 hrs. per employee per year x 50 staff = 1000 hrs.).
    • Deliver automation features that reduces development lead time by one hour per sprint (40 devs x 20 sprints per yr. x 1 hr. = 800 hrs.).

    Improve Cost Visibility

    The teams responsible for cost management today don’t have the authority, visibility, or time to effectively find wasted spend.

    The teams responsible for cost management today don’t have the authority, visibility, or time to effectively find wasted spend.

    • Ensure operations contributes to visibility and execution of cost governance.
    • $1,000,000 annual spend on cloud services.
    • Of this, assume 32% is wasted spend ($320k).1
    • New cost management function has a target to cut waste by half next year saving ~$160k.
    • Cost visibility and capture metrics (e.g. accurate tagging metrics, right-sizing execution).
    1. Average wasted cloud spend across all organizations, from the 2022 Flexera State of the Cloud Report

    Understand your cloud vision and strategy before you redesign operations

    Guide your operations redesign with an overarching cloud vision and strategy that aligns to and enables the business’s goals.

    Cloud Vision

    The image contains a screenshot of the Define Your Cloud Vision.

    Cloud Strategy

    It is difficult to get or maintain buy-in for changes to operations without everyone on the same page about the basic value proposition cloud offers your organization.

    Do the workload and risk analysis to create a defensible cloud vision statement that boils down into a single statement: “This is how we want to use the cloud.”

    Once you have your basic cloud vision, take the next step by documenting a cloud strategy.

    Establish your steering committee with stakeholders from IT, business, and leadership to work through the essential decisions around vision and alignment, people, governance, and technology.

    Your cloud operations design should align to a cloud strategy document that provides guidelines on establishing a cloud council, preparing staff for changing skills, mitigating risks through proper governance, and setting a direction for migration, provisioning, and monitoring decisions.

    Key Insights

    Focus on the future, not the present

    Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

    Responsibilities change in the cloud

    Understand what you mean by cloud work

    Focus where it matters

    Cloud is a different way of consuming IT resources and applications and it requires a different operational approach than traditional IT.

    In most cases, cloud operations involves less direct execution and more service validation and monitoring

    Work that is invisible to the customer can still be essential to delivering customer value. A lot of operations work is invisible to your organization’s customers but is required to deliver stability, security, efficiency, and more.

    Cloud work is not just applications that have been approved by IT. Consider how unsanctioned software purchased by the business will be integrated and managed.

    Start by designing operations around the main workflow you have for cloud services. If you mostly build or host in the cloud, build the diagram to maximize value for that workflow.

    Design principles will often change over time as the organization’s strategy evolves.

    Identify skills requirements and gaps as early as possible to avoid skills gaps later. Whether you plan to acquire skills via training or cross-training, hiring, contracting, or outsourcing, effectively building skills takes time.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges

    Calls #2&3: Assess cloud maturity and drivers for org. redesign

    Call #4: Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    Call #5: Evaluate new ways of working and identify cloud work

    Calls #6&7: Create your Cloud Operations diagram

    Call #8: Create your communication plan and build roadmap

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish Context

    Design the Organization and Communicate Changes

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement

    1.2 Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

    1.3 Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    1.4 Develop organization design principles

    2.1 Evaluate new ways of working

    2.2 Develop a workstream target statement

    2.3 Identify cloud work

    3.1 Design a future-state cloud operations diagram

    3.2 Create a current state cloud operations diagram

    3.3 Define success indicators

    4.1 Create a roadmap

    4.2 Create a communication plan

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Cloud Maturity Assessment
    2. Cloud Challenges and Objectives
    1. Workstream target statement
    2. Cloud Operations Workflow Diagrams
    1. Future and current state cloud operations diagrams
    1. Roadmap
    2. Communication Plan

    Cloud Operations Organizing Framework.

    Phase 1:

    Establish context

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Establish operating model design principals by identifying goals & challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

    1.2 Evaluate new ways of working

    1.3 Identify cloud work

    2.1 Draft an operating model

    2.2 Communicate proposed changes

    Phase Outcomes:

    Define current maturity and which workstreams are important to your organization.

    Understand new operating approaches and which apply to your workstream balance.

    Identify a new target state for IT operations.

    Before you get started

    Set yourself up for success with these three steps:

    • This methodology and the related slides are intended to be executed via intensive, collaborative working sessions using the rest of this slide deck.
    • Ensure the working sessions are successful by working through these steps before you start work on defining your cloud operations.

    1. Identify an operations design working group

    2. Review cloud vision and strategy

    3. Create a working folder

    This should be a group with insight into current cloud challenges, and with the authority to drive change. This group is the main audience for the activities in this blueprint.

    Review your established planning work and documentation.

    Create a repository to house your notes and any work in progress.

    Create a working folder

    15 minutes

    Create a central repository to support transparency and collaboration. It’s an obvious step, but one that’s often forgotten.

    1. Download all the documents associated with this blueprint to a shared repository accessible to all participants. Keep separate folders for templates and work-in-progress.
    2. Share the link to the repository with all attendees. Include links to the repository in any meeting invites you set up as working sessions for the project.
    3. Use the repository for all the work you do in the activities listed in this blueprint.

    Step 1.1: Identify goals and challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group, which may include:
      • Cloud owners
      • Platform/Applications Team leads
      • Infra & Ops managers

    Outcomes

    • Identify your current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement.
    • Define the advantages you expect to realize from cloud services and any obstacles you have to overcome to meet those objectives.
    • Identify the reasons why redesigning cloud operations is necessary.
    • Develop organization design principles.

    “Start small: Begin with a couple services. Then, based on the feedback you receive from Operations and the business, modify your approach and keep increasing your footprint.” – Nenad Begovic

    Cloud changes operational activities, tactics, and goals

    As you adopt cloud services, the operations core mission remains . . .

    • IT operations are expected to deliver stable, efficient, and secure IT services.

    . . . but operational activities are evolving.

    • Core IT operational processes remain relevant, such as incident or capacity management, but opportunities to automate or outsource operations tasks will change how that work is done.
    • As you rely more on automation and outsourcing, the team may see less direct execution in its day-to-day work and more solution design and validation.
    • Outsourcing frees the team from operational toil but reduces the direct control over your end-to-end solution and increases your reliance on your vendor.
    • Pay-as-you-go pricing models present opportunities for streamlined delivery and cost rationalization but require you to rethink how you do cost and asset management.
    • It’s very easy for the business to buy a SaaS solution without consulting IT, which can lead to duplicated functionality, integration challenges, security threats, and more.

    Design a model for cloud operations that helps you achieve value from your cloud environment.

    “As operating models shift to the cloud, you still need the same people and processes. However, the shift is focused on a higher level of operations. If your people no longer focus on server uptime, then their success metrics will change. When security is no longer protected by the four walls of a datacenter, your threat profile changes.

    (Microsoft, “Understand Cloud Operating Models,” 2022)

    Operational responsibilities are shared with a range of stakeholders

    When using a vendor-operated public cloud, IT exists in a shared responsibility model with the cloud service provider, one that is further differentiated by the type of cloud service model in use: broadly, software-as a service (SaaS), platform-as-a-service (PaaS), or infrastructure-as-a-service (IaaS).

    Your IT operations organization may still reflect a structure where IT retains control over the entire infrastructure stack from facilities to application and defines their operational roles and processes accordingly.

    If the organization chooses a co-location facility, they outsource facility responsibility to a third-party provider, but much of the rest of the traditional IT operating model remains the same. The operations model that worked for an entirely premises-based environment is very different from one that is made up of, for instance, a portfolio of SaaS applications, where your control is limited to the top of the infrastructure stack at the application layer.

    Once an organization migrates workloads to the cloud, IT gives up an increasing amount of control to the vendor, and its traditional operational roles & responsibilities necessarily change.

    The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates what the cloud service models are.

    Align operations with customer value

    • Decisions about operational design should be made with customer value in mind. Remember that cloud adoption should be an enabler of adaptability in the face of changing business needs!
    • Think about how the operations team is indispensable to the value received by your customer. Think about the types of changes that can add to the value your customers receive.
    • A focus on value will help you establish and explain the rationale and urgency required to deliver on needed changes. If you can’t explain how the changes you propose will help deliver value, your proposal will come across as change for the sake of change.
    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate how operational design decisions need to be made with customer value in mind.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Work that is invisible to the customer can still be essential to delivering customer value. A lot of operations work is invisible to your organization’s customers but required to deliver stability, security, efficiency, and more.

    A new consumption model means a different mix of activities

    Evolving to cloud-optimal operations also means re-assessing and adapting your team’s approach to achieving cloud maturity, especially with respect to how automation and standardization can be leveraged to best achieve optimization in cloud.

    Traditional ITDesignExecuteValidateSupportMonitor
    CloudDesignExecuteValidateSupportMonitor

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cloud is a different way of consuming IT resources and applications and requires a different operational approach than traditional IT.

    In most cases, cloud operations involves less direct execution and more service validation and monitoring.

    The Service Models in cloud correspond to the way your organization delivers IT

    Service Model

    Example

    Function

    Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)

    Salesforce.com

    Office 365

    Workday

    Consume

    Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS)

    Azure Stack

    AWS SageMaker

    WordPress

    Build

    Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS)

    Microsoft Azure

    Amazon EC2

    Google Cloud Platform

    Host

    Define how you plan to use cloud services

    Your cloud operations will include different tasks, teams, and workflows, depending on whether you consume cloud services, build them, or host on them.

    Function

    Business Need

    Service Model

    Example Tasks

    Consume

    “I need a commodity, off-the-shelf service that we can configure to our organization’s needs.

    Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)

    Onboard and add users to a new SaaS offering. Vendor management of SaaS providers. Configure/integrate the SaaS offering to meet business needs.

    Build

    “I need to create significantly customized or net-new products and services.”

    Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS) & Infrastructure as-a-Service (IaaS)

    Create custom applications. Build and maintain a container platform. Manage CI/CD pipelines and tools. Share infrastructure and applications patterns.

    Host

    “I need compute, storage, and networking components that reflect key cloud characteristics (on-demand self-service, metered usage, etc.).”

    Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS)

    Stand up compute, networking, and storage resources to host a COTS application. Plan to increase storage capacity to support future demand.

    Align to the well-architected framework

    • Each cloud provider has defined a well-architected framework (WAF) that defines effective deployment and operations for their services.
    • WAFs embody a set of best practices and design principles to leverage the cloud in a more efficient, secure, and cost-effective manner.
    • While each vendor’s WAF has its own definitions and nuances, they collectively share a set of key principles, or “pillars,” that define the desired outcome of any cloud deployment.
    • These pillars address the key areas of risk when migrating to a public cloud platform.

    “In order to accelerate public cloud adoption, you need to focus on infrastructure-as-code and script everything you can. Unlike traditional operations, CloudOps focuses on creating scripts: a script for task A, a script for task B, etc.”

    – Nenad Begovic

    Pillars

    • Reliability
    • Security
    • Cost Optimization
    • Operational Excellence
    • Performance Efficiency

    General Best Practice Capability Areas

    • Host
    • Network
    • Data
    • Identity Management
    • Cost/Subscription Management

    Assess cloud maturity

    2 hours

    1. Download a copy of the Cloud Maturity Assessment Tool.
    2. As a group, work through:
      • The balance of your operations activities from a Host/Build/Consume perspective. What are you responsible for delivering now? How do you expect things will change in the future?
      • Which workstreams to focus on. Are there activity categories that are critical or non-critical or that don’t represent a significant portion of overall work? Conversely, are there workstreams that you feel are subject to particular risk when moving to cloud?
    3. Fill out the Maturity Quiz tab in the Cloud Maturity Assessment Tool for the workstreams you have chosen to focus on.
    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
    • Maturity scoring for key workload streams as they align to the pillars of a general well-architected cloud framework
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Operating model template
    • Cloud platform SMEs

    Download theCloud Maturity Assessment Tool

    Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

    Whiteboard Activity

    An absolute must-have in any successful redesign is a shared understanding and commitment to changing the status quo.

    Without a clear and urgent call to action, the design changes will be seen as change for the sake of change and therefore entirely safe to ignore.

    Take up the following questions as a group:

    1. What kind of organizational change is needed?
    2. Why do we think the need for this change is urgent?
    3. What do we think will happen if no change occurs? What’s the worst-case scenario?

    Record your answers so you can reference and use them in the communication materials you’ll create in Phase 2.

    InputOutput
    • Cloud maturity assessment
    • Objectives and obstacles
    • Insight into existing challenges stemming from organizational design challenges
    • A list of reasons that form a compelling argument for organizational change
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    “We know, for example, that 70 percent of change programs fail to achieve their goals, largely due to employee resistance and lack of management support. We also know that when people are truly invested in change it is 30 percent more likely to stick.”

    – Ewenstein, Smith, Sologar

    McKinsey (2015)

    Consider the value of change from advantage and obstacle perspectives

    Consider what you intend to achieve and the obstacles to overcome to help identify the changes required to achieve your desired future state.

    Advantage Perspective

    Ideas for Change

    Obstacle Perspective

    What advantages do cloud services offer us as an organization?

    For example:

    • Enhance service features.
    • Enhance user experience.
    • Provide ubiquitous access.
    • Scalability to align with demand.
    • Automate or outsource routine tasks.

    What obstacles prevent us from realizing value in cloud services?

    For example:

    • Inadequate stability and reliability
    • Difficult to observe or monitor workloads
    • Challenges ensuring cloud security
    • Insufficient access to relevant skills

    Review risks and challenges

    Changes to Support Model

    • Have we identified who is on the cloud ops team?
    • Do we know where we are procuring skills (internal IT vs. third party) and for how long?
    • Do we know where we are in the migration process?

    Changes to security & governance

    • Have we identified how our attack surface changes in the cloud?
    • Do we have guardrails in place to govern self-provisioning users?
    • Are we managing cost overage risks?

    Replicating old habits

    • Have we made concrete plans to leverage cloud capabilities to standardize and automate outputs?
    • Are we simply reproducing existing systems in the cloud?

    Changes to Skills & Roles

    • Is our staff excited to learn new skills and technologies? Are our specialists prepared to acquire generalist skills to support cloud services?
    • Do we have training plans created and aligned to our technology roadmap?
    • Do we know what head count we need?

    Misaligned stakeholders

    • Have we identified our key stakeholders and teams? Have we considered what changes will impact them and how?
    • Are we meeting regularly and collaborating effectively with our peers, or are we siloed?

    Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    Whiteboard Activity

    1 hour

    1. With your working group, review why you’re using cloud in the first place. What advantages do you expect to realize by adopting cloud services? If we achieve what we’ve set out to do, what should that look and feel like to us, our organization, and our organization’s customers?
      • You should have identified cloud drivers and objectives in your cloud vision and strategy – leverage and validate what you already have!
    2. Next, identify obstacles that are preventing you from fully realizing the value of cloud services.
    3. Finally, brainstorm initial ideas for change. What could we start doing that could help us better use cloud in the future? Are there changes to how we need to organize ourselves to collaborate more effectively?
    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment
    • Identified key business outcomes you expect to realize by adopting cloud services
    • Identified challenges and obstacles that are preventing you from realizing key outcomes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud operations design working group.

    Commonly cited advantages and obstacles

    Cloud Advantages/Objectives

    • Deliver faster on commitments to the business by removing infrastructure provisioning as a bottleneck.
    • Simplify capacity management on flexible cloud-based infrastructure.
    • Reduce capital spending on IT infrastructure.
    • Create sandboxes/innovation practices to experiment with and develop new functionality on cloud platforms.
    • Easily enable ubiquitous access to key corporate services.
    • Minimize the expense and effort required to maintain a data center – power & cooling, cabling, or physical hardware.
    • Leverage existing automation tools from cloud vendors to speed up integration and deployment.
    • Direct costs for specific services can improve transparency and cost allocation, allowing IT to directly “show-back” or charge-back cloud costs to specific cost centers.

    Obstacles

    Need to speed up provisioning of PaaS/IaaS/data resources to development and project teams.

    No time to develop and improve platform services and standards due to other responsibilities.

    We constantly run up unexpected cloud costs.

    Not enough time for continuous learning and development.

    The business will buy SaaS apps and only let us know after they’ve been purchased, leading to overlapping functionality; gaps in compliance, security, or data protection requirements; integration challenges; cost inefficiencies; and more.

    Role descriptions haven’t kept up with tech changes.

    Obvious opportunities to rationalize costs aren’t surfaced (e.g. failing to make use of existing volume licensing agreements).

    Skills needed to properly operate cloud solutions aren’t identified until breakdowns happen.

    Establish organization design principles

    You’ve established a need for organizational change. What will that change look like?

    Design principles are concise, direct statements that describe how you will design your organization to achieve key objectives and address key challenges.

    This is a critically important step for several reasons:

    • A set of clear, concise statements that describe what the design should achieve provides parameters that will help you create and evaluate different design options.
    • A focused, facilitated discussion to create those statements will help uncover conflicting assumptions between key stakeholders.
    • A comprehensive description of the various ways the organization should change makes it easier to identify misaligned or incompatible objectives.
    • A description of what your organization should look like in the future will help you identify where changes will be required .

    Examples of design principles:

    1. We will create a path to review and publish effective application/platform patterns.
    2. A single governing body should have oversight into all cloud costs.
    3. Development must happen only on approved cloud platforms.
    4. Application teams must address operational issues that derive from the applications they’ve created.
    5. Security practices should be embedded into approved cloud platforms and be automatically applied wherever possible.
    6. Focus is on improving developer experience on cloud platforms.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Design principles will often change as the organization’s strategy evolves.

    Align design principles to your objectives

    Developing design principles starts with your key objectives. What do we absolutely have to get right to deliver value through cloud services?

    Once you have your direction set, work through the points in the star model to establish how you will meet your objectives and deliver value. Each point in the star is an important element in your design – taken together, it paints a holistic picture of your future-state organization.

    The changes you choose to implement that affect capabilities, structure, processes, rewards, and people should be self-reinforcing. Each point in the star is connected to, and should support, the other points.

    “There is no one-size-fits-all organization design that all companies – regardless of their particular strategy needs – should subscribe to.”

    – Jay Galbraith, “The Star Model”

    The image contains a screenshot of a modified versio of Jay Galbraith's Star Model of Organizational Design.

    Establish design principles

    Track your findings in the table on the next slide.

    1. Review the cloud objectives and challenges from the previous activity. As a group, decide from that list: what are the key objectives you are trying to achieve? What are the things you absolutely must get right to get value from cloud services?
    2. Work through the following questions as a group:
      • What capabilities or technologies do we need to adopt or leverage differently?
      • How must our structure change? How will power shift in the new structure?
      • Will our new structure require changes to processes or information sharing?
      • How must we change how we motivate or reward employees?
      • What new skills or knowledge is required? How will we acquire those skills or knowledge?
    InputOutput
    • Cloud objectives and challenges
    • Different viewpoints into how your organization must change to realize objectives and overcome challenges
    • Organizational design principles for cloud operations
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip charts
    • Cloud operations design working group

    Design principles (example)

    What is our key objective?

    • Rapidly develop innovative cloud services aligned to business value.

    What capabilities or technologies do we need to adopt or leverage differently?

    • We will adopt more agile development techniques to make smaller changes, faster.
    • We will standardize and automate tasks that are routine and repeatable.

    How must our structure change? How will power shift in the new structure?

    • Embed development teams within business units to better align to business unit needs.
    • Create a focused cloud platform team to develop infrastructure services.

    Will our new structure require changes to processes or information sharing?

    • Development teams will take on responsibility for application support.
    • Platform teams will be deeply embedded with development teams on new projects to build new infrastructure functionality.

    How must we change how we motivate or reward employees?

    • We will highlight innovative work across the company.
    • We will encourage experimentation and risk-taking.

    What new skills or knowledge is required, and how will we acquire it?

    • We will focus on acquiring skills most closely aligned to our technology roadmap.
    • We will ensure budget is available for training employees who ask for it.
    • We will contract to find skills we cannot develop in-house and use engagements as an opportunity to learn internally.

    Step 1.2: Evaluate new ways of working

    Participants

    Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    Shared understanding of the horizon of work possibilities:

    • Ways to work
    • Ways to govern and learn

    Consider the different approaches on the following slides, how they change operational work, and decide which approaches are the right fit for you.

    Evaluate new ways of working

    Cut through the hype

    • There are new approaches/ways of working that deal head on with the persistent breakdowns and headaches that come with operations management – work thrown over the wall from development, manual and repetitive work, siloed teams, and more.
    • Many of these approaches emphasize an operations-aware approach to solutions development and apply techniques traditionally associated with AppDev to Operations.
    • Cloud services present opportunities to outsource/automate away routine tasks.

    “DevOps is a set of practices, tools, and a cultural philosophy that automates and integrates the processes between software development and IT teams. It emphasizes team empowerment, cross-team communication and collaboration, and technology automation.”

    – Atlassian, “DevOps”

    “ITIL 4 brings ITIL up to date by…embracing new ways of working, such as Lean, Agile, and DevOps.”

    – ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4 Edition

    “Over time, left to their own devices, the SRE team should end up with very little operational load and almost entirely engage in development tasks, because the service basically runs and repairs itself.”

    – Ben Treynor Sloss, “Site Reliability Engineering”

    The more things change, the more they stay the same:

    • Core processes remain, but they may be done differently, and new technologies and services create new challenges.
    • Not all approaches are right for all organizations, and what’s right for you depends on how you use cloud services.
    • The best solution draws from these management ideas to build an approach to operations that is right for you.

    Leverage patterns to think about new ways of approaching operations work

    Patterns are strategies, approaches, and philosophies that can help you imagine new ways of working in your own organization.

    • The following slides provide an overview of organizing patterns that are applicable to cloud operations.
    • These are strategies that have been applied successfully elsewhere. Review what they can and cannot do and decide whether they are something you can use in your own organizational design.
    • Not every pattern will apply to every organization. For example, an organization which typically consumes SaaS applications will likely have very little need for SRE approaches and techniques.

    Ways to work

    • What work do we do? What skills do we need?
    • How do we create and support systems?

    Ways to govern and learn

    • How do we set and enforce rules?
    • How do we create and share knowledge?

    Explore Applicable Patterns

    Ways to work

    Ways to govern and learn

    1. DevOps

    2. Site Reliability Engineering

    3. Platform Engineering

    4. Cloud Centre of Excellence

    5. Cloud Community of Practice

    What is DevOps?

    “Look for obstacles constantly and treat them as opportunities to experiment and learn.” – Jez Humble, et al. Lean Enterprise: How High Performance Organizations Innovate at Scale

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • Another word for automation or CI/CD tools.
    • A specific role.
    • A fix-all to address friction between existing siloed application and development teams.
    • An approach that will be successful without getting the basics right first.
    • The right fit for every IT organization or every team.

    An operational philosophy that seeks to:

    • Converge accountability for development and operations to align all teams to the goal of delivering customer value.
    • Improve the relationship between Development and Operations teams.
    • Increase the rate of deployment of valuable functionality into production.
    • “A cultural shift giving development teams more control over shipping code to production.” 1
    • You’re doing a lot of custom development.
    • There are opportunities for operations and development teams to work more closely.
    • You want to improve coding quality and throughput.
    • You want to shift the culture of the team to focus on customer value rather than exclusively uptime or new features.
    1 DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering

    What is Site Reliability Engineering (SRE)?

    “Hope is not a strategy” – Benjamin Treynor Sloss, Site Reliability Engineering: How Google Runs Production Systems

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • Deeply focussed on a specific technical domain; SRE work “does not discriminate between infrastructure, software, networking, or platforms.” 2
    • A different name for a team of sysadmins.
    • A programming framework or a specific set of technologies.
    • A way to manage COTS software. SRE is less useful when you’re using applications out-of-the-box with minimal customization, integration, or development.
    • An application of skills and approaches from software engineering to improve system reliability.
    • A team responsible for “availability, latency, performance, efficiency, change management, monitoring, emergency response, and capacity planning.”3
    • A team responsible for building systems that become “a platform and workflow that encompasses monitoring, incident management, eliminating single points of failure, [and] failure mitigation.”1
    • You are building services and providing them at scale.
    • You want to improve reliability and reduce “the frequency and impact of failures that can impact the overall reliability of a cloud application.”1
    • You need to define related service metrics and SLOs.
    • To increase the use of automation in operations to avoid mistakes and minimize toil. 3
    1 SRE vs Platform Engineering
    2. Lakhani, Usman. “ISite Reliability Engineering: What Is It? Why Is It Important for Online Businesses?,” 2020.
    3. Sloss, “Introduction,” 2017

    What4 is Platform Engineering?

    “Platform engineers can act as a shield between developers and the infrastructure”

    – Carlos Schults, “What is Platform Engineering? The Concept Behind the Term”

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • A team that manages every aspect of each application on a particular platform.
    • Focussed solely on platform reliability and availability.
    • A different name for a team of sysadmins.
    • Needed for all cloud service deployments. Platform engineers are most useful when you’re building extensively on a particular platform (e.g. AWS, Azure, or your internal cloud).
    • Platform engineers design, build, and manage the infrastructure that supports and hosts work done by developers.
    • The work done by platform engineering allows developers to avoid the repetitive work of setting everything up anew each time.
    • Requires engineers with a deep understanding of cloud services and other platform technologies (e.g. Kubernetes).
    • The big public cloud platforms are built for everyone. You need platform engineering when you need to extensively adapt or manage standard cloud services to support your own requirements.
    • Platform engineers are responsible for creating a secure, stable, maintainable environment that enables developers to do their work faster and without having to manage the underlying technology infrastructure.
    1 DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering

    What is a Cloud Center of Excellence?

    You need a strong core to grow a cloud culture.

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • A project management office (PMO) for cloud services.
    • An easy, quick, or temporary fix to cloud governance problems. The CCoE requires champions who provide ongoing support to realize value over time.
    • An approach that’s only for enterprise-sized IT organizations.
    • A standing meeting – members of the CCoE may meet regularly to review progress on their mandate, but work and collaboration need to happen outside of meetings.
    • A cross-functional team responsible for oversight of all cloud initiatives, including architectural, technical, security, financial, contractual, and operational aspects of planned and deployed solutions.
    • The CCoE’s responsibilities typically include governance and continuous improvement; alignment between technical and accounting practices; documentation, training, best practices and standards development; and vendor management.
    • CCoE duties are often part of an existing role rather than a full-time responsibility.
    • You want to enable a core group of cloud experts to promote collaboration and accelerate adoption of cloud services, including members from infrastructure, applications, and security.
    • You need to manage cloud risks, set guidelines and policies, and govern costs across cloud environments.
    • There is an unmet need for training, knowledge sharing, and best practice development across the organization.

    What is a Cloud Community of Practice?

    “We have to stop optimizing for programmers and start optimizing for users”

    – Jeff Atwood

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • A replacement for effective oversight and governance practices, though they may help users navigate and understand governance requirements.
    • A way to advertise cloud to potential new practitioners – engaged members of a CoP are typically already using a particular service.
    • Always exclusively composed of internal staff; in certain cases, a CoP could have external members as well.
    • A network of engaged users and experts who share knowledge and best practices for related technologies, crowdsource solutions to problems, and suggest improvements.
    • Often supported by communication and collaboration tools (e.g. chat channels, knowledge base, forums). May use a range of techniques (e.g. drop-ins, vendor-led training, lunch and learns).
    • Communities of practice may be deliberately created by the organization or develop organically.
    • Communities of practice are an effective way for practitioners to support one another and share ideas and solutions.
    • A CoP can help “shift left” work and help practitioners help themselves.
    • An engaged CoP can help IT to identify improvement opportunities and can also be a channel to communicate updates or changes to practitioners.

    Reinforce what we mean by patterns

    Patterns are . . .

    Ways of Working

    • Sets of habits, processes, and methodologies you want to adopt as part of your operational guidelines and commonly agreed upon definitions.

    Patterns are also . . .

    Ways to Govern and Learn

    • The formal and informal practices and groups that focus on enabling governance, risk management, and adoption.

    Review the implications of each pattern for organizational design

    Ways of Working

    DevOps

    Development teams take on operational work to support the services they create after they are launched to production.

    Some DevOps teams may be aligned around a particular function or product rather than a technology – there are individuals with skills on a number of technologies that are part of the same team.

    Site Reliability Engineering (SRE)

    In the beginning, you can start to adopt SRE practices within existing teams. As demand grows for SRE skills and services, you may decide to create focused SRE roles or teams.

    SRE teams may work across applications or be aligned to just infrastructure services or a particular application, or they may focus on tools that help developers manage reliability. SREs may also be embedded long-term with other teams or take on an internal consulting roles with multiple teams.1

    Platform Engineering

    Platform engineering will often, though not always, be the responsibility of a dedicated team. This team must work very closely with, and tuned into the needs of, its internal customers. There is a constant need to find ways to add value that aren’t already part and parcel of the platform – or its external roadmap.

    This team will take on responsibility for the platform, in terms of feature development, automation, availability and reliability, security, and more. They may also be internal consultants or advisors on the platform to developers.

    1. Gustavo Franco and Matt Brown, “How SRE teams are organized and how to get started.”

    Review the implications of each pattern for organizational design

    Ways to Govern and Learn

    Cloud Center of Excellence

    • A CCoE is a cross-functional group with technical experts from security, infrastructure, applications, and more.
    • There should, ideally, be someone focused on leading the CCoE full-time – often someone with an architecture background. Team members may work on the CCoE part-time alongside their main role, and dedicate more of their time to the CCoE as needed.
    • As the CCoE is a governance function, it will typically bridge and sit above teams working on cloud services, reporting to the CIO, CTO, or to an architecture function.

    Cloud Community of Practice

    • Participation in a community of practice is often above and beyond a core role – it’s a leadership activity taken on by technologically adept experts with a drive to help others.
    • Some organizations will create a role to foster community collaboration, run events, raise opportunities and issues identified by the community with product or technology teams, manage collaboration tools, and more.

    Evolve your organization to meet the needs of increased adoption

    Your operating model should evolve as you increase adoption of cloud services.

    Least Adoption Greatest Adoption

    Initial Adoption

    Early Centralization

    Scaling Up

    Full Steam Ahead

    • One or more small agile teams design, build, manage, and operate individual solutions on cloud resources. Solutions provide early value, and identify new opportunities using small, safe-to-fail experiments.
    • Governance is likely done locally to each team. Knowledge sharing, guidelines, and standards are likely informal.
    • Early experience with cloud services help the organization identify where to invest in cloud services to best meet business demands.
    • Accountability and governance over the platform are more clearly defined, possibly still separate from core IT governance processes. Best practices may be shared across teams through a Community of Practice.
    • Operations may be centralized, where valuable, to support monitoring and incident response.
    • Additional product/service-aligned development teams are created to keep up with demand.
    • There is a focused effort to consolidate best practices and platform knowledge, which can be supported through a culture of learning, effective automation, and appropriate tools.
    • The CCoE takes on additional roles in cloud governance, security, operations, and administration.
    • The organization has reached a relatively steady-state for cloud adoption. Innovation and new service development takes place on a stable platform.
    • A Cloud Center of Excellence is accountable for cloud governance across the organization.
    Adapted from Microsoft, “Get Started: Align your organization,” 2021

    Choose new ways of working that make sense for your team

    1 hour

    Consider if, and how, the approaches to management and governance you’ve just reviewed can offer value to your organization.

    1. List the organizing/managing ideas listed in the previous slides in the table below.
    2. Define why it’s for you. What benefits do you expect to realize? What challenges do you expect this will help you overcome? How does this align with your key benefits and drivers for moving to cloud?
    3. List risks or challenges to adoption. Why will it be hard to do? What could get in the way of adoption? Why might it not be a good fit?
    4. Identify next steps to adopt proposed practices.

    Why it’s for us (drivers)

    Risks or challenges to adoption

    Next steps to build/adopt it

    CCoE

    DevOps

    InputOutput
    • Related Info-Tech slides on new ways of working.
    • Opportunities and challenges in your own cloud deployment that may be addressed through new ways of working.
    • Identify new ways of working aligned to your goals.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Step 1.3: Identify cloud work

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    • Identify core work required to deliver value in key cloud workstreams.

    “At first, for many people, the cloud seems vast. But what you actually do is carve out space.”

    –DevOps Manager

    Identify work

    Before you can identify roles and responsibilities, you have to confirm what work you do as an organization and how that work enables you to meet your goals.

    • A comprehensive approach that connects the work you do to your organizational goals will help you identify work that’s falling through the cracks.
    • Identifying work is an opportunity to look at the tasks you regularly execute and ensure they actually drive value.
    • Working through the exercise as a group will help you develop a common language around the work you do.
    • To make the evident obvious: you can’t decide who should be responsible for something if you don’t know about it in the first place.

    Defining work can be a lot of … work! We recommend you start by identifying work for the workstream you do most – Build, Consume, or Host – to focus your efforts. You can repeat the exercise as needed.

    Map work in workstream diagrams

    The image contains a screenshot of the map work in workstream diagrams.

    The five Well-Architected Framework pillars. These are principles/directions/guideposts that should inform all cloud work.

    The work being done to achieve the workstream target. These are roughly aligned with the three streams on the right.

    Workstream Target: A concise statement of the value you aim to achieve through this workstream. All work should help deliver value (directly or indirectly).

    Define the scope of the exercise

    Whiteboard Activity

    20 minutes

    Over the next few exercises, you’ll do a deep dive into the work you do in one specific workstream. In this exercise, we’ll decide on a workstream to focus on first.

    1. Are you primarily building, hosting on, or consuming cloud services? Start with the workstream where you’re doing the most work.
    2. If this isn’t sufficient to narrow your focus, look at the workstream that is most closely tied to mission critical applications, or that is most in need of review in terms of what work is done and who does it.
    3. You can narrow the scope further if there’s a very specific sub-area that differs from the rest (e.g. managing your O365 environment vs. managing all SaaS applications).
    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
    • Your completed cloud maturity assessment.
    • Identify one workstream where you’ll define work first.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • None
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Create a workstream target statement

    Whiteboard Activity

    30 minutes

    In this activity, come up with a short sentence to describe what all this work you do is building toward. The target statement helps align participants on why work is being done and helps focus the activity on work that is most important to achieving the target statement.

    Start with this common workstream target statement:

    “Deliver valuable, secure, available, reliable, and efficient cloud services.”

    Now, review and adjust the target statement by working through the questions below:

    1. Return to the earlier exercises in Phase 1.1 where you reviewed your key objectives for cloud services. Does the target statement align with what you’d identified previously?
    2. Who is the customer for the work you do? Would they see the target differently than you’ve described it?
    3. Can you be more specific? Are there value drivers that are more specific to your industry, organization, business functions, or products that are key to the value your customers receive from this workstream?
    InputOutput
    • Previous exercises.
    • Workstream target statement.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Identify cloud work

    1-2 hours

    1. Use the workstream diagram template in the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook, or draw the template out on a whiteboard and use sticky notes to identify work.
    2. Identify the workstream at the top of the slide. Update the template value statement on the right with the value statement you created in the previous exercise.
    3. Review one or more of the examples in the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook to get a sense of the level of detail required for this exercise.

    Activity instructions continue on the next slide.

    Some notes to the facilitator:

    • Working directly from the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook will save you time with transcription. Sharing the document with participants (e.g. via OneDrive) will allow you to collaborate and edit the document together in real-time.
    • Don’t worry about being too tidy for the moment, just get the information written down and you can clean up the diagram later.
    InputOutput
    • Previously identified design principles.
    • An understanding of the work done, and that needs to be done, in your cloud environment.
    • Identify the work that needs to be done to support your key cloud services workstream in the future.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Whiteboard and sticky notes (optional)
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Identify cloud work (cont’d)

    4. Work together to identify work, documenting one work item per box. This should focus on future state, so record work whether it’s actually done today or not. Your space is limited on the sheet, so focus on work that is indispensable to delivering the value statement. Use the lists on the right as a reminder of key IT practice areas.

    5. As much as possible, align the work items to the appropriate row (Govern & Align, Design & Execute, or Validate, Support & Monitor). You can overlap boxes between rows if needed.

    Have you captured work related to:

    ITIL practices, such as:

    • Request management
    • Incident & problem management
    • Service catalog
    • Service level management
    • Configuration management

    Security-aligned practices, such as:

    • Identity & access management
    • Vulnerability management
    • Security incident management

    Financial practices, such as:

    • IT asset management
    • Cost management & budgeting
    • Vendor management
    • Portfolio management

    Data-aligned practices, such as:

    • Data integrations
    • Data governance

    Technology-specific tasks, such as:

    • Network, Server & Storage
    • Structured/unstructured DBs
    • Composite services
    • IDEs and compilers

    Other key practices:

    • Monitoring & observability
    • Continuous improvement
    • Testing & quality assurance
    • Training and knowledge management
    • Manage shadow IT

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cloud work is not just applications that have been approved by IT. Consider how unsanctioned software purchased by the business will be integrated and managed.

    Identify cloud work (cont’d)

    6. If you have decided to adopt any of the new ways of working outlined in Step 1.2 (e.g. DevOps, SRE, etc.) review the next slide for examples of the type of work that frequently needs to be done in each of those work models. Add any additional work items as needed.

    7. Consolidate boxes and clean up the diagram (e.g. remove duplicate work items, align boxes, clarify language).

    8. Do a final review. Is all the work in the diagram truly aligned with the value statement? Is the work identified aligned with the design principles from Step 1.1?

    If you used a whiteboard for this exercise, transcribe the output to a copy of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook, and repeat the exercise for other key workstreams. You will use this diagram in Phase 2.

    Examples of work

    Examples of work in the "Host" workstream:

    • Bulk patch servers
    • Add a server
    • Add capacity
    • Develop a new server template
    • Incident management

    Examples of work in the "Build" workstream:

    • Provision a production server
    • Provision a test environment
    • Test recovery procedures
    • Add capacity for a service
    • Publish a new pattern
    • Manage capacity/performance for a service
    • Identify wasted spend across services
    • Identify performance bottlenecks
    • Review and shut down idle/unneeded services

    Examples of work in the "Consume" workstream:

    • Conduct vendor risk assessments
    • Develop a standard evaluation matrix to compare solutions to existing or potential in-house offerings
    • Onboard a solution
    • Offboard a solution
    • Conduct a renewal
    • Review and negotiate a contract
    • Rationalize software titles

    Phase 2:

    Design the organization and communicate changes

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Establish operating model design principals by identifying goals & challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

    1.2 Evaluate new ways of working

    1.3 Identify cloud work

    2.1 Draft an operating model

    2.2 Communicate proposed changes

    Phase Outcomes:

    Draft your cloud operations diagram, identify key messages and impacts to communicate to your stakeholders, and build out the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework communication deck.

    Step 2.1: Identify groups and responsibilities

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    • Cloud Operations Diagram
    • Success Indicators
    • Roadmap

    “No-one ever solved a problem by restructuring.”

    – Anonymous

    Visualize your cloud operations

    Create a visual to help you abstract, analyze, and clarify your vision for the future state of your organization in order to align and instruct stakeholders.

    Create a visual, high-level view of your organization to help you answer questions such as:

    • “What work do we do? What are the roles and responsibilities of different teams?”
    • “How do we interact between work areas?”
    • “How has our organization changed already, and what additional changes may be needed?”
    • “How do we make technology decisions?”
    • “How do we provide services?”
    • “How might this change be received by people on the ground?”
    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Diagram Example.

    Decide whether to centralize or decentralize

    Specialization & Focus: A group or work unit developing a focused concentration of skills, expertise, and activities aligned with an area of focus (such as the ones at right).

    Decentralization: Operational teams that report to a decentralized IT or business function, either directly or via a “dotted line” relationship.

    Decentralization and Specialization can:

    • Duplicate work.
    • Localize decision-making authority, which can increase agility and responsiveness.
    • Transfer authority and accountability to local and typically smaller teams, clarifying responsibilities and encouraging staff to take ownership for service delivery.
    • Enable the team to focus on complex and rapidly changing technologies or processes.
    • Create islands of expertise, which can get in the way of collaboration, innovation, and decision making across groups and work units and make oversight difficult.
    • Complicate the transfer of resources and knowledge between groups.

    Examples: Areas of Focus

    Business unit

    • Manufacturing
    • R&D
    • Sales & Marketing

    Region

    • Americas
    • EMEA
    • APAC

    Service

    • ERP
    • Commercial website

    Technology

    • On-premises servers/storage
    • Network
    • Cloud services

    Operational process focus

    • Capacity management & planning
    • Incident management
    • Problem management

    “The concept of organization design is simple in theory but highly complex in practice. Like any strategic decision, it involves making multiple trade-offs before choosing what is best suited to a business context.”

    – Nitin Razdan & Arvind Pandit

    Identify key work areas

    Balance specialization with effective collaboration

    • Much is said about breaking down organizational silos. But at some level, silos are inevitable – any company with more than one employee will have to divide work up somehow.
    • Dividing up work is a delicate balancing act – ensuring individuals and groups are able to do work that is related, meaningful, and that allows autonomy while allowing for effective collaboration between groups that need to work together to achieve business goals.

    Why “work areas”?

    Why don’t we just use teams, groups, squads, or departments, or some other more common term for groups of people working together?

    • We are not yet at the point of deciding who in the organization should be aligned to which areas in the design.
    • Describing work areas as teams can shift the conversation to the organizational chart – to who does the work, rather than what needs to be done.

    That’s not the goal of this exercise. If the conversation gets stuck on what you do today, it can get in the way of thinking about what you need to do in the future.

    Create a future-state cloud operations diagram

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the example cloud operations diagram example in your copy of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook.
    2. Identify key work areas (e.g. applications, infrastructure, platform engineering, DevOps, security). Add the name of each work area in one of the larger boxes.
      • Go back to your design principles. Did you define any work areas in your design principles that should be represented here?
      • If you have several groups or teams with similar responsibilities, consider lumping them together in one box (e.g. applications teams, 3x DevOps teams).
    3. Copy the tasks from any workstream diagrams you’ve created to the same slide as the organization design diagram. Keep the workstream diagram intact, as you’ll want to be able to refer back to it later.

    Activity instructions continue on the next slide.

    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
    • Cloud Operations Diagram
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip charts
    • Cloud Operations
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Cloud operations diagram (cont’d)

    1-3 hours

    4. As a group, move the work boxes from the workstream diagram into the appropriate work area.

    • Don’t worry about being too tidy for the moment – clean up the diagram when the exercise is done.
    • Make adjustments to the wording of the work boxes if needed.

    5. Use the space between work areas to describe how work areas must interact to achieve organizational goals. For example:

    • What information should be shared between groups?
    • What information sharing channels may be used?
    • What processes will be handed-off between groups and how?
    • How often will teams interact?
    • Will interactions be formal or informal?

    Create a current-state operations diagram

    1 -2 hours

    This exercise can be done by one person, then reviewed with the working group at a later time.

    This current state diagram helps clarify the changes that may need to happen to get to your future state.

    1. Color code the work boxes for each work area. For example, if you have a “DevOps” work area, make all the work boxes assigned to “DevOps” the same color.
    2. On a separate slide, sketch your existing organization indicating your current teams.
    3. Copy the tasks from the future-state diagram to this current-state chart. Align the tasks to the appropriate groups.
    4. Review the chart with the working group. Discuss: are there teams that are doing work today that will also be done by different teams? Are there groups that may merge into one team? What types of changes may be required?
    InputOutput
    • Future-state cloud operations diagram
    • Current-state cloud operations diagram
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Projector/screen/virtual meeting
    • Project lead
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Check for biases to make better choices

    Use the strategies below to spot and address flaws in your team’s thinking about your future-state design.

    Biases

    What’s the risk?

    Mitigation strategies

    Is the team making mistakes due to self-interest, love of a single idea, or groupthink?

    Important information may be ignored or left unspoken.

    Rigorously check for the other biases, below. Tactfully seek dissenting opinions.

    Do recommendations use unreasonable analogies to other successes or failures?

    Opportunities or challenges in the current situation may not be sufficiently understood.

    Ask for other examples, and check whether the analogies are still valid.

    Is the team blinkered by the weight of past decisions?

    Doubling-down on bad decisions (sunk costs) or ignoring new opportunities.

    Ask yourself what you'd do if you were new to the position or organization.

    Does the data support the recommendations?

    Data used to make the case isn't a good fit for the challenge, is based on faulty assumptions, or is incomplete.

    If you had a year to make the decision, what data would you want? How much can you get?

    Are there realistic alternative recommendations?

    Alternatives don't exist or are "strawman" options.

    Ask for additional options.

    Is the recommendation too risk averse or cautious?

    Recommendations that may be too risky are ignored, leading to missed opportunities.

    Review options to accept, transfer, distribute, or mitigate the risk of the decision.

    Framework above adapted from Kahneman, Lovallo, and Sibony (2011)

    Be specific with metrics

    Thinking of ways you could measure success can help uncover what success actually means to you.

    Work collectively to generate success indicators for each key cloud initiative. Success indicators are metrics, with targets, aligned to goals, and if you are able to measure them accurately, they should help you report your progress toward your objectives.

    For example, if your driver is “faster access to resources” you might consider indicators like developer satisfaction, project completion time, average time to provision, etc.

    There are several reasons you may not publicize these metrics. They may be difficult to calculate or misconstrued as targets, warping behavior in unexpected ways. But managed properly, they have value in measuring operational success!

    Examples: Operations redesign project metrics

    Key stakeholder satisfaction scores

    IT staff engagement scores

    Support Delivery of New Functionality

    Double number of accepted releases per cycle

    80% of key cloud initiatives completed on time, on budget, and in scope

    Improve Operational Effectiveness

    <1% of servers have more than two major versions out of date

    No more than one capacity-related incident per Q

    Define success indicators

    Whiteboard Activity

    45 minutes

    1. On a whiteboard, draw a table with key objectives for the design across the top.
      • What cloud objectives should the redesign help you achieve? Refer back to the design principles from Phase 1.
      • Think about the redesign itself. How will you measure whether the project itself is proceeding according to plan? Consider metrics such as employee engagement scores and satisfaction scores from key stakeholders.
    2. Consider whether the metrics are feasible to track. Record your decisions in your copy of the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework deck.
    InputOutput
    • Key design goals
    • Success indicators for your design
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Populate a roadmap

    Tool Activity

    45 minutes

    1. In the Roadmap Tool, populate the data entry tab with the initiatives you will take to support changes toward the new cloud operations organizing framework.
    2. Input each of the tasks in the data entry tab and provide a description and rationale behind the task (as needed).
    3. Assign an effort, priority, and cost level to each task (high, medium, low).
    4. Assign an owner to each task – someone who can take points and shepherd the task to completion.
    5. Identify the timeline for each task based on the priority, effort, and cost (short, medium, and long term).
    6. Highlight risk for each task if it will be deferred.
    7. Track the progress of each task with the status column.
    InputOutput
    • Cloud Operations Organizing Framework
    • Roadmap/ implementation plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Roadmap Tool
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Download the Roadmap Tool

    Step 2.2: Communicate changes

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    • Build a communication plan for key stakeholders
    • Complete the communication deck Cloud Operations Organizing Framework
    • Build a roadmap

    “Words, words, words.”

    – Shakespeare

    Communicate changes

    Which stakeholders will be affected by the changes?

    Decision makers: Who do you ultimately need to convince to proceed with any changes you’ve outlined?

    Peers: How will managers of other areas be affected by the changes you’re proposing? If you are you suggesting changes to the way that they, or their teams, do their work, you will have to present a compelling case that there’s value in it for them.

    Staff: Are you dictating changes or looking for feedback on the path forward?

    The image contains a screenshot of the Five Elements of Change that is displayed in a cycle. The five elements are: What is the change? Why are we doing it? How are we going to go about it? How long will it take us? What is the role of each team and individual.

    Source: The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change

    Follow these guidelines for good communication

    Be relevant

    • Talk about what matters to each stakeholder group.
    • Talk about what matters to the initiative.
    • IT thinks in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be “understood” but this does not matter to stakeholders; think “what’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.
    • If you expect objections, create a plan to handle them.

    Be clear

    • Lead with the point you’re trying to make.
    • Don’t use jargon.
    • Avoid idiomatic language and clichés.
    • Have a third party review draft communications and ask them to tell you the key messages in their own words. If they’re missing the main points, there’s a good chance the draft isn’t clear.

    Be consistent

    • Ensure the core message is consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Changing the core message from one group to another can be interpreted as incompetence or an attempt at deception. This will damage your credibility and can lead to a loss of trust.

    Be concise

    • Get to the point.
    • Minimize word count wherever possible.

    “We tend to use a lot of jargon in our discussions, and that is a sure fire way to turn people away. We realized the message wasn’t getting out because the audience wasn’t speaking the same language. You have to take it down to the next level and help them understand where the needs are.”

    – Jeremy Clement, Director of Finance, College of Charleston

    Create a communication plan

    1 hour

    Fill out the table below.

    Stakeholder group: Identify key stakeholders who may be impacted by changes to the operations team. This might include IT leadership, management, and staff.

    Benefits: What’s in it for them?

    Impact: What are we asking in return?

    How: What mechanisms or channels will you use to communicate?

    When: When (and how often) will you get the message out?

    Benefits

    Impact

    How

    When

    IT Mgrs.

    • Improve agility, stability
    • Deliver faster against business goals
    • Respond to identified needs
    • Improve confidence in IT
    • Must support the process
    • Change and engagement issues during restructuring may affect staff engagement and productivity
    • Training budget required
    • Present at leadership meeting
    • Kick-off email
    • Sept. leadership meeting
    • Weekly touchpoints
    • Informally throughout project

    Ops Staff

    • Clearer direction and clear priorities (Operations mission statement and RACI)
    • Higher-value work – address problems, contribute to plans
    • New skills and training
    • More personal accountability
    • Push toward process consistency
    • Must make time and plan for training during work hours
    • Present at operations team’s offsite meeting
    • AMA channel on Slack
    • 1:1 meetings
    • Add RACI, org. sketch to shared folder
    • Operations offsite
    • Sept. all-hands meeting
    • Ongoing coaching and informal conversations
    InputOutput
    • Discussion
    • Communication Plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Download the Communication Plan Template

    Support the transition with a plan to acquire skills

    Identify the preferred way to acquire needed skill sets: contracting, outsourcing, training, or hiring.

    • Some cloud projects will change the demand for some skills in the organization, and not all skills should be cultivated internally. Uncertainty about future skills and jobs will cause anxiety for your team and can lead to employee exit.
    • Use Info-Tech’s research to conduct a demand analysis to identify which new and critical skills should be acquired via training or hiring (rather than outsourcing or contracting).
    • Create a roadmap to clarify when training needs to be completed, a budget plan that accounts for training costs, and role descriptions that paint a picture of future work.
    • Within the confines of a collective agreement, managers may be required to retrain staff into new roles before those staff are required to do work in their new jobs. Failing to plan can be more consequential.
    • Remember that in cloud, a wealth of automation opportunities present a great option for offloading tasks as well!

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify skills requirements and gaps as early as possible to avoid skills gaps later. Whether you plan to acquire skills via training or cross-training, hiring, contracting, or outsourcing, effectively building skills takes time. Use Info-Tech’s methodology to address skills gaps in a prioritized and rational way.

    Involve HR for implementation

    Your HR team should help you work through:

    • Which staff and managers will move to which roles, and any headcount changes.
    • Job descriptions, performance metrics, career paths, compensation, and succession planning.
    • Organizational change management and implementation plans.

    When do you need to involve HR?

    Role changes will result in job description changes.

    • New or changed job descriptions need to be evaluated for impact on pay, title, exempt status, career pathing, and more.
    • This is especially true in more traditional or unionized organizations that require specific and granular job descriptions of responsibilities.
    • Changed jobs will likely require union review and approval.

    You anticipate changes to the reporting structure.

    • Work with HR to develop a transition plan including communications, training to new managers, and support to new teams.

    You anticipate redundancies.

    • Your HR department can prepare you for difficult discussions, help you navigate labor laws, and support the offboarding process.

    You anticipate new positions.

    • Recruitment and hiring takes time. Give HR advance notice to support recruitment, hiring, and onboarding to ensure you hire the right people, with the right skills, at the right time.

    Training and development budget is required.

    • If training is a critical part of the onboarding process, don’t just assume funding is available. Work with HR to build your case.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    Define your cloud vision before it defines you.

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    Drive consensus by outlining how your organization will use the cloud.

    Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization

    Be practical and proactive – identify needed technical skills for your future-state environment and the most efficient way to acquire them.

    Bibliography

    “2021 GitLab DevSecOps Survey.” Gitlab, 2021.
    “2022 State of the Cloud Report.” Flexera, 2022.
    “DevOps.” Atlassian, ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Atwood, Jeff. “The 2030 Self-Driving Car Bet.” Coding Horror, 4 Mar 2022. Web. 5 Aug 2022.
    Campbell, Andrew. “What is an operating model?” Operational Excellence Society, 12 May 2016. Web. 13 July 2022.
    “DevOps.” Atlassian, ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Ewenstein, Boris, Wesley Smith, Ashvin Sologar. “Changing change management” McKinsey, 1 July 2015. Web. 8 April 2022.
    Franco, Gustavo and Matt Brown. “How SRE teams are organized, and how to get started.” Google Cloud Blog, 26 June 2019. Web. July 13 2022.
    “Get started: Build a cloud operations team.” Microsoft, 10 May 2021.
    ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4 Edition. Axelos, 2019.
    Humble, Jez, Joanne Molesky, and Barry O’Reilly. Lean Enterprise: How High Performance Organizations Innovate at Scale. O’Reilly Media, 2015.
    Franco, Gustavo and Matt Brown. “How SRE teams are organized and how to get started.” 26 June 2019. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Galbraith, Jay. “The Star Model”. ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Kahnemanm Daniel, Dan Lovallo, and Olivier Sibony. “Before you make that big decision.” Harv Bus Rev. 2011 Jun; 89(6): 50-60, 137. PMID: 21714386.
    Kesler, Greg. “Star Model of Organizational Design.” YouTube, 1 Oct 2018. Web Video. 21 Jul 2022.
    Lakhani, Usman. “Site Reliability Engineering: What Is It? Why Is It Important for Online Businesses?” Info-Tech. Web. 25 May 2020.
    Mansour, Sherif. “Product Management: The role and best practices for beginners.” Atlassian Agile Coach, n.d.
    Murphy, Annie, Jamie Kirwin, Khalid Abdul Razak. “Operating Models: Delivering on strategy and optimizing processes.” EY, 2016.
    Shults, Carlos. “What is Platform Engineering? The Concept Behind the Term.” liatrio, 3 Aug 2021. Web. 5 Aug 2022.
    Sloss, Benjamin Treynor. Site Reliability Engineering Part I: Introduction. O’Reilly Media, 2017.
    “SRE vs. Platform Engineering.” Ambassador Labs, 8 Feb 2021.
    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, n.d. Web.
    “Understand cloud operating models.” Microsoft, 02 Sept. 2022.
    Velichko, Ivan. “DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering.” 15 Mar 2022.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Nenad Begovic

    Executive Director, Head of IT Operations

    MUFG Investor Services

    Desmond Durham

    Manager, ICT Planning & Infrastructure

    Trinidad & Tobago Unit Trust Corporation

    Virginia Roberts

    Director, Enterprise IT

    Denver Water

    Denis Sharp

    IT/LEAN Consultant

    Three anonymous contributors

    Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}339|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,449 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Organizations are struggling to understand what's involved in the analytics developer lifecycle to generate reusable insights faster.
    • Discover what it takes to become a citizen analytics developer. Identify the proper way to enable self-serve analytics.
    • Self-serve business intelligence/analytics is misunderstood and confusing to the business, especially with regards to the roles and responsibilities of IT and the business.
    • End users are dissatisfied due to a lack of access to the data and the absence of a single source of truth.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Organizations that take data seriously should:

    • Decouple processes in which data is separated from business processes and elevate the visibility of the organization's data assets.
    • Leverage a secure platform where data can be easily exchanged for insights generation.
    • Create density for analytics where resources are mobilized around analytics ideas to generate value.

    Analytics is a journey, not a destination. This journey can eventually result in some level of sophisticated AI/machine learning in your organization. Every organization needs to mobilize its resources and enhance its analytics capabilities to quickly and incrementally add value to data products and services. However, most organizations fail to mobilize their resources in this way.

    Impact and Result

    • Firms become more agile when they realize efficiencies in their analytics operating models and can quickly implement reusable analytics.
    • IT becomes more flexible and efficient in understanding the business' data needs and eliminates redundant processes.
    • Trust in data-driven decision making goes up with collaboration, engagement, and transparency.
    • There is a clear path to continuous improvement in analytics.

    Establish an Analytics Operating Model Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief that outlines Info-Tech’s methodology for assessing the business' analytics needs and aligning your data governance, capabilities, and organizational structure to deliver analytics faster.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your analytics needs

    This phase helps you understand your organization's data landscape and current analytics environment so you gain a deeper understanding of your future analytics needs.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 1: Define Your Analytics Needs

    2. Establish an analytics operating model

    This phase introduces you to data operating model frameworks and provides a step-by-step guide on how to capture the right analytics operating model for your organization.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 2: Establish an Analytics Operating Model
    • Analytics Operating Model Building Tool

    3. Implement your operating model

    This phase helps you implement your chosen analytics operating model, as well as establish an engagement model and communications plan.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 3: Implement Your Analytics Operating Model
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Analytics Needs

    The Purpose

    Achieve a clear understanding and case for data analytics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A successful analytics operating model starts with a good understanding of your analytical needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Understand your analytics needs.

    1.3 Draft analytics ideas and use cases.

    1.4 Capture minimum viable analytics.

    Outputs

    Documentation of analytics products and services

    2 Perform an Analytics Capability Assessment

    The Purpose

    Achieve a clear understanding of your organization's analytics capability and mapping across organizational functions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand your organization's data landscape and current analytics environment to gain a deeper understanding of your future analytics needs.

    Activities

    2.1 Capture your analytics capabilities.

    2.2 Map capabilities to a hub-and-spoke model.

    2.3 Document operating model results.

    Outputs

    Capability assessment results

    3 Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    The Purpose

    Capture the right analytics operating model for your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Explore data operating model frameworks.

    Capture the right analytics operating model for your organization using a step-by-step guide.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss your operating model results.

    3.2 Review your organizational structure’s pros and cons.

    3.3 Map resources to target structure.

    3.4 Brainstorm initiatives to develop your analytics capabilities.

    Outputs

    Target operating model

    4 Implement Your Analytics Operating Model

    The Purpose

    Formalize your analytics organizational structure and prepare to implement your chosen analytics operating model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Implement your chosen analytics operating model.

    Establish an engagement model and communications plan.

    Activities

    4.1 Document your target organizational structure and RACI.

    4.2 Establish an analytics engagement model.

    4.3 Develop an analytics communications plan.

    Outputs

    Reporting and analytics responsibility matrix (RACI)

    Analytics engagement model

    Analytics communications plan

    Analytics organizational chart

    Build Your First RPA Bot

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}238|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $53,126 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Your organization has many business processes that rely on manual, routine, and repetitive data collection and processing work. These processes need to be automated to meet strategic priorities.
    • Your stakeholders decided to invest in robotic process automation (RPA). They are ready to begin the planning and delivery of their first RPA bot.
    • However, your organization lacks the critical foundations involved in successful RPA delivery, such as analysis of the suitability of candidate processes, business and IT collaboration, and product ownership.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Manage your business and IT debt before you adopt RPA. RPA doubles down on your process inefficiencies, lack of operations and architectural standardization, and unenforced quality standards. RPA solutions will be fragile and prone to failure if debt is not managed.
    • Adopt BizDevOps. RPA will not be successful if your lines-of-business (LOBs) and IT are not working together. IT must empathize with how LOBs operate and proactively support the underlying operational systems. LOBs must be accountable for all products leveraging RPA and be able to rationalize RPA’s technical feasibility.
    • Start with RPA 1.0. Don’t get caught up in the AI and machine learning (RPA 2.0) hype. Evaluate the acceptance and value of RPA 1.0 to establish a sustainable and collaborative foundation for its delivery and management. Then use the lessons learned to prepare for future RPA 2.0 adoption. In many cases, RPA 1.0 is good enough.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish the right expectations. Gain a grounded understanding of RPA value and limitations in your context. Discuss current IT and business operations challenges to determine if they will impact RPA success.
    • Build your RPA governance. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed to support RPA delivery and management through IT and business collaboration.
    • Evaluate the fit of RPA. Obtain a thorough view of the business and technical complexities of your candidate processes. Indicate where and how RPA is expected to generate the most return.

    Build Your First RPA Bot Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how you should build your first RPA bot, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your RPA governance

    Set the expectations of your first RPA bot. Define the guiding principles, ethics, and delivery capabilities that will govern RPA delivery and support.

    • Build Your First RPA Bot – Phase 1: Define Your RPA Governance

    2. Deliver and manage your bots

    Validate the fit of your candidate business processes for RPA and ensure the support of your operational system. Shortlist the features of your desired RPA vendor. Modernize your delivery process to accommodate RPA.

    • Build Your First RPA Bot – Phase 2: Deliver and Manage Your Bots

    3. Roadmap your RPA adoption

    Build a roadmap of initiatives to implement your first bot and build the foundations of your RPA practice.

    • Build Your First RPA Bot – Phase 3: Roadmap Your RPA Adoption
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build Your First RPA Bot

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your RPA Governance

    The Purpose

    State the success criteria of your RPA adoption through defined objectives and metrics.

    Define your RPA guiding principles and ethics.

    Build the RPA capabilities that will support the delivery and management of your bots.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded stakeholder expectations

    RPA guiding principles

    RPA capabilities and the key roles to support RPA delivery and management

    Activities

    1.1 State Your RPA Objectives.

    1.2 Define Your RPA Principles

    1.3 Develop Your RPA Capabilities

    Outputs

    RPA objectives and metrics

    RPA guiding principles and ethics

    RPA and product ownership, RPA capabilities, RPA role definitions

    2 Deliver and Manage Your Bots

    The Purpose

    Evaluate the fit of your candidate business processes for automation.

    Define the operational platform to support your RPA solution.

    Shortlist the desired RPA vendor features.

    Optimize your product delivery process to support RPA.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Verifies the decision to implement RPA for the candidate business process

    The system changes and modifications needed to support RPA

    Prioritized list of RPA vendor features

    Target state RPA delivery process

    Activities

    2.1 Prepare Your RPA Platform

    2.2 Select Your RPA Vendor

    2.3 Deliver and Manage Your Bots

    Outputs

    Assessment of candidate business processes and supporting operational platform

    List of desired RPA vendor features

    Optimized delivery process

    3 Roadmap Your RPA Adoption

    The Purpose

    Build your roadmap to implement your first RPA bot and build the foundations of your RPA practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Implementation initiatives

    RPA adoption roadmap

    Activities

    3.1 Roadmap Your RPA Adoption

    Outputs

    RPA adoption roadmap

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}256|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,953 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 19 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Employees are not paying attention to policies. Awareness and understanding of what the security policy’s purpose is, how it benefits the organization, and the importance of compliance are overlooked when policies are distributed.
    • Informal, un-rationalized, ad hoc policies do not explicitly outline responsibilities, are rarely comprehensive, and are difficult to implement, revise, and maintain.
    • Data breaches are still on the rise and security policies are not shaping good employee behavior or security-conscious practices.
    • Adhering to security policies is rarely a priority to users as compliance often feels like an interference to daily workflow. For a lot of organizations, security policies are not having the desired effect.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Creating good policies is only half the solution. Having a great policy management lifecycle will keep your policies current, effective, and compliant.
    • Policies must be reasonable, auditable, enforceable, and measurable. If the policy items don’t meet these requirements, users can’t be expected to adhere to them. Focus on developing policies to be quantified and qualified for them to be relevant.

    Impact and Result

    • Save time and money using the templates provided to create your own customized security policies mapped to the Info-Tech framework, which incorporates multiple industry best-practice frameworks (NIST, ISO, SOC2SEC, CIS, PCI, HIPAA).

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop and Deploy Security Policies Deck – A step-by-step guide to help you build, implement, and assess your security policy program.

    Our systematic approach will ensure that all identified areas of security have an associated policy.

  • Develop the security policy program.
  • Develop and implement the policy suite.
  • Communicate the security policy program.
  • Measure the security policy program.
    • Develop and Deploy Security Policies – Phases 1-4

    2. Security Policy Prioritization Tool – A structured tool to help your organization prioritize your policy suite to ensure that you are addressing the most important policies first.

    The Security Policy Prioritization Tool assesses the policy suite on policy importance, ease to implement, and ease to enforce. The output of this tool is your prioritized list of policies based on our policy framework.

    • Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    3. Security Policy Assessment Tool – A structured tool to assess the effectiveness of policies within your organization and determine recommended actions for remediation.

    The Security Policy Assessment Tool assesses the policy suite on policy coverage, communication, adherence, alignment, and overlap. The output of this tool is a checklist of remediation actions for each individual policy.

    • Security Policy Assessment Tool

    4. Security Policy Lifecycle Template – A customizable lifecycle template to manage your security policy initiatives.

    The Lifecycle Template includes sections on security vision, security mission, strategic security and policy objectives, policy design, roles and responsibilities for developing security policies, and organizational responsibilities.

    • Security Policy Lifecycle Template

    5. Policy Suite Templates – A best-of-breed templates suite mapped to the Info-Tech framework you can customize to reflect your organizational requirements and acquire approval.

    Use Info-Tech's security policy templates, which incorporate multiple industry best-practice frameworks (NIST, ISO, SOC2SEC, CIS, PCI, HIPAA), to ensure that your policies are clear, concise, and consistent.

    • Acceptable Use of Technology Policy Template
    • Application Security Policy Template
    • Asset Management Policy Template
    • Backup and Recovery Policy Template
    • Cloud Security Policy Template
    • Compliance and Audit Management Policy Template
    • Data Security Policy Template
    • Endpoint Security Policy Template
    • Human Resource Security Policy Template
    • Identity and Access Management Policy Template
    • Information Security Policy Template
    • Network and Communications Security Policy Template
    • Physical and Environmental Security Policy Template
    • Security Awareness and Training Policy Template
    • Security Incident Management Policy Template
    • Security Risk Management Policy Template
    • Security Threat Detection Policy Template
    • System Configuration and Change Management Policy Template
    • Vulnerability Management Policy Template

    6. Policy Communication Plan Template – A template to help you plan your approach for publishing and communicating your policy updates across the entire organization.

    This template helps you consider the budget time for communications, identify all stakeholders, and avoid scheduling communications in competition with one another.

    • Policy Communication Plan Template

    7. Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool – A tool to help you identify initiatives to develop your security awareness and training program.

    Use this tool to first identify the initiatives that can grow your program, then as a roadmap tool for tracking progress of completion for those initiatives.

    • Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define the Security Policy Program

    The Purpose

    Define the security policy development program.

    Formalize a governing security policy lifecycle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding the current state of policies within your organization.

    Prioritizing list of security policies for your organization.

    Being able to defend policies written based on business requirements and overarching security needs.

    Leveraging an executive champion to help policy adoption across the organization.

    Formalizing the roles, responsibilities, and overall mission of the program.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the current state of policies.

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance.

    1.3 Understand the relationship between policies and other documents.

    1.4 Prioritize the development of security policies.

    1.5 Discuss strategies to leverage stakeholder support.

    1.6 Plan to communicate with all stakeholders.

    1.7 Develop the security policy lifecycle.

    Outputs

    Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    Security Policy Lifecycle Template

    2 Develop the Security Policy Suite

    The Purpose

    Develop a comprehensive suite of security policies that are relevant to the needs of the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Time, effort, and money saved by developing formally documented security policies with input from Info-Tech’s subject-matter experts.

    Activities

    2.1 Discuss the risks and drivers your organization faces that must be addressed by policies.

    2.2 Develop and customize security policies.

    2.3 Develop a plan to gather feedback from users.

    2.4 Discuss a plan to submit policies for approval.

    Outputs

    Understanding of the risks and drivers that will influence policy development.

    Up to 14 customized security policies (dependent on need and time).

    3 Implement Security Policy Program

    The Purpose

    Ensure policies and requirements are communicated with end users, along with steps to comply with the new security policies.

    Improve compliance and accountability with security policies.

    Plan for regular review and maintenance of the security policy program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Streamlined communication of the policies to users.

    Improved end user compliance with policy guidelines and be better prepared for audits.

    Incorporate security policies into daily schedule, eliminating disturbances to productivity and efficiency.

    Activities

    3.1 Plan the communication strategy of new policies.

    3.2 Discuss myPolicies to automate management and implementation.

    3.3 Incorporate policies and processes into your security awareness and training program.

    3.4 Assess the effectiveness of security policies.

    3.5 Understand the need for regular review and update.

    Outputs

    Policy Communication Plan Template

    Understanding of how myPolicies can help policy management and implementation.

    Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool

    Security Policy Assessment Tool

    Action plan to regularly review and update the policies.

    Further reading

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Enhance your overall security posture with a defensible and prescriptive policy suite.

    Analyst Perspective

    A policy lifecycle can be the secret sauce to managing your policies.

    A policy for policy’s sake is useless if it isn’t being used to ensure proper processes are followed. A policy should exist for more than just checking a requirement box. Policies need to be quantified, qualified, and enforced for them to be relevant.

    Policies should be developed based on the use cases that enable the business to run securely and smoothly. Ensure they are aligned with the corporate culture. Rather than introducing hindrances to daily operations, policies should reflect security practices that support business goals and protection.

    No published framework is going to be a perfect fit for any organization, so take the time to compare business operations and culture with security requirements to determine which ones apply to keep your organization secure.

    Photo of Danny Hammond, Research Analyst, Security, Risk, Privacy & Compliance Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Danny Hammond
    Research Analyst
    Security, Risk, Privacy & Compliance Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Security breaches are damaging and costly. Trying to prevent and respond to them without robust, enforceable policies makes a difficult situation even harder to handle.
    • Informal, un-rationalized, ad hoc policies are ineffective because they do not explicitly outline responsibilities and compliance requirements, and they are rarely comprehensive.
    • Without a strong lifecycle to keep policies up to date and easy to use, end users will ignore or work around poorly understood policies.
    • Time and money is wasted dealing with preventable security issues that should be pre-emptively addressed in a comprehensive corporate security policy program.
    Common Obstacles

    InfoSec leaders will struggle to craft the right set of policies without knowing what the organization actually needs, such as:

    • The security policies needed to safeguard infrastructure and resources.
    • The scope the security policies will cover within the organization.
    • The current compliance and regulatory obligations based on location and industry.
    InfoSec leaders must understand the business environment and end-user needs before they can select security policies that fit.
    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s Develop and Deploy Security Policies takes a multi-faceted approach to the problem that incorporates foundational technical elements, compliance considerations, and supporting processes:

    • Assess what security policies currently exist within the organization and consider additional secure policies.
    • Develop a policy lifecycle that will define the needs, develop required documentation, and implement, communicate, and measure your policy program.
    • Draft a set of security policies mapped to the Info-Tech framework, which incorporates multiple industry best-practice frameworks (NIST, ISO, SOC2SEC, CIS, PCI, HIPAA).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Creating good policies is only half the solution. Having a great policy management lifecycle will keep your policies current, effective, and compliant.

    Your Challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations design a program to develop and deploy security policies

    • A security policy is a formal document that outlines the required behavior and security controls in place to protect corporate assets.
    • The development of policy documents is an ambitious task, but the real challenge comes with communication and enforcement.
    • A good security policy allows employees to know what is required of them and allows management to monitor and audit security practices against a standard policy.
    • Unless the policies are effectively communicated, enforced, and updated, employees won’t know what’s required of them and will not comply with essential standards, making the policies powerless.
    • Without a good policy lifecycle in place, it can be challenging to illustrate the key steps and decisions involved in creating and managing a policy.

    The problem with security policies

    29% Of IT workers say it's just too hard and time consuming to track and enforce.

    25% Of IT workers say they don’t enforce security policies universally.

    20% Of workers don’t follow company security policies all the time.

    (Source: Security Magazine, 2020)

    Common obstacles

    The problem with security policies isn’t development; rather, it’s the communication, enforcement, and maintenance of them.

    • Employees are not paying attention to policies. Awareness and understanding of what the security policy’s purpose is, how it benefits the organization, and the importance of compliance are overlooked when policies are distributed.
    • Informal, un-rationalized, ad hoc policies do not explicitly outline responsibilities, are rarely comprehensive, and are difficult to implement, revise, and maintain.
    • Date breaches are still on the rise and security policies are not shaping good employee behavior or security-conscious practices.
    • Adhering to security policies is rarely a priority to users as compliance often feels like an interference to daily workflow. For a lot of organizations, security policies are not having the desired effect.
    Bar chart of the 'Average cost of a data breach' in years '2019-20', '20-21', and '21-22'.
    (Source: IBM, 2022 Cost of a Data Breach; n=537)

    Reaching an all-time high, the cost of a data breach averaged US$4.35 million in 2022. This figure represents a 2.6% increase from last year, when the average cost of a breach was US$4.24 million. The average cost has climbed 12.7% since 2020.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    The right policy for the right audience. Generate a roadmap to guide the order of policy development based on organizational policy requirements and the target audience.

    Actions

    1. Develop policy lifecycle
    2. Identify compliance requirements
    3. Understand which policies need to be developed, maintained, or decommissioned
    I. Define Security Policy Program

    a) Security policy program lifecycle template

    b) Policy prioritization tool
    Clockwise cycle arrows at the centre of the table. II. Develop & Implement Policy Suite

    a) Policy template set

    Policies must be reasonable, auditable, enforceable, and measurable. Policy items that meet these requirements will have a higher level of adherence. Focus on efficiently creating policies using pre-developed templates that are mapped to multiple compliance frameworks.

    Actions

    1. Differentiate between policies, procedures, standards, and guidelines
    2. Draft policies from templates
    3. Review policies, including completeness
    4. Approve policies
    Gaining feedback on policy compliance is important for updates and adaptation, where necessary, as well as monitoring policy alignment to business objectives.

    Actions

    1. Enforce policies
    2. Measure policy effectiveness
    IV. Measure Policy Program

    a) Security policy tracking tool

    III. Communicate Policy Program

    a) Security policy awareness & training tool

    b) Policy communication plan template
    Awareness and training on security policies should be targeted and must be relevant to the employees’ jobs. Employees will be more attentive and willing to incorporate what they learn if they feel that awareness and training material was specifically designed to help them.

    Actions

    1. Identify any changes in the regulatory and compliance environment
    2. Include policy awareness in awareness and training programs
    3. Disseminate policies
    Build trust in your policy program by involving stakeholder participation through the entire policy lifecycle.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT/InfoSec Benefits

    • Reduces complexity within the policy creation process by using a single framework to align multiple compliance regimes.
    • Introduces a roadmap to clearly educate employees on the do’s and don’ts of IT usage within the organization.
    • Reduces costs and efforts related to managing IT security and other IT-related threats.

    Business Benefits

    • Identifies and develops security policies that are essential to your organization’s objectives.
    • Integrates security into corporate culture while maximizing compliance and effectiveness of security policies.
    • Reduces security policy compliance risk.

    Key deliverable:

    Security Policy Templates

    Templates for policies that can be used to map policy statements to multiple compliance frameworks.

    Sample of Security Policy Templates.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    The Info-Tech Security Policy Prioritization Tool will help you determine which security policies to work on first.
    Sample of the Security Policy Prioritization Tool.
    Sample of the Security Policy Assessment Tool.

    Security Policy Assessment Tool

    Info-Tech's Security Policy Assessment Tool helps ensure that your policies provide adequate coverage for your organization's security requirements.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Phase

    Purpose

    Measured Value

    Define Security Policy Program Understand the value in formal security policies and determine which policies to prepare to update, eliminate, or add to your current suite. Time, value, and resources saved with guidance and templates:
    1 FTE*3 days*$80,000/year = $1,152
    Time, value, and resources saved using our recommendations and tools:
    1 FTE*2 days*$80,000/year = $768
    Develop and Implement the Policy Suite Select from an extensive policy template offering and customize the policies you need to optimize or add to your own policy program. Time, value, and resources saved using our templates:
    1 consultant*15 days*$150/hour = $21,600 (if starting from scratch)
    Communicate Security Policy Program Use Info-Tech’s methodology and best practices to ensure proper communication, training, and awareness. Time, value, and resources saved using our training and awareness resources:
    1 FTE*1.5 days*$80,000/year = $408
    Measure Security Policy Program Use Info-Tech’s custom toolkits for continuous tracking and review of your policy suite. Time, value, and resources saved by using our enforcement recommendations:
    2 FTEs*5 days*$160,000/year combined = $3,840
    Time, value, and resources saved by using our recommendations rather than an external consultant:
    1 consultant*5 days*$150/hour = $7,200

    After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.

    Overall Impact

    9.5 /10

    Overall Average $ Saved

    $29,015

    Overall Average Days Saved

    25

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is six to ten calls over the course of two to four months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope security policy requirements, objectives, and any specific challenges.

    Call #2: Review policy lifecycle; prioritize policy development.

    Call #3: Customize the policy templates.

    Call #4: Gather feedback on policies and get approval.

    Call #5: Communicate the security policy program.

    Call #6: Develop policy training and awareness programs.

    Call #7: Track policies and exceptions.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889
    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Define the security policy program
    Develop the security policy suite
    Develop the security policy suite
    Implement security policy program
    Finalize deliverables and next steps
    Activities

    1.1 Understand the current state of policies.

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance.

    1.3 Understand the relationship between policies and other documents.

    1.4 Prioritize the development of security policies.

    1.5 Discuss strategies to leverage stakeholder support.

    1.6 Plan to communicate with all stakeholders.

    1.7 Develop the security policy lifecycle.

    2.1 Discuss the risks and drivers your organization faces that must be addressed by policies.

    2.2 Develop and customize security policies.

    2.1 Discuss the risks and drivers your organization faces that must be addressed by policies (continued).

    2.2 Develop and customize security policies (continued).

    2.3 Develop a plan to gather feedback from users.

    2.4 Discuss a plan to submit policies for approval.

    3.1 Plan the communication strategy for new policies.

    3.2 Discuss myPolicies to automate management and implementation.

    3.3 Incorporate policies into your security awareness and training program.

    3.4 Assess the effectiveness of policies.

    3.5 Understand the need for regular review and update.

    4.1 Review customized lifecycle and policy templates.

    4.2 Discuss the plan for policy roll out.

    4.3 Schedule follow-up Guided Implementation calls.

    Deliverables
    1. Security Policy Prioritization Tool
    2. Security Policy Lifecycle
    1. Security Policies (approx. 9)
    1. Security Policies (approx. 9)
    1. Policy Communication Plan
    2. Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool
    3. Security Policy Assessment Tool
    1. All deliverables finalized

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Phase 1

    Define the Security Policy Program

    Phase 1

    1.1 Understand the current state

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework

    1.3 Document your policy hierarchy

    1.4 Prioritize development of security policies

    1.5 Leverage stakeholders

    1.6 Develop the policy lifecycle

    Phase 2

    2.1 Customize policy templates

    2.2 Gather feedback from users on policy feasibility

    2.3 Submit policies to upper management for approval

    Phase 3

    3.1 Understand the need for communicating policies

    3.2 Use myPolicies to automate the management of your security policies

    3.3 Design, build, and implement your communications plan

    3.4 Incorporate policies and processes into your training and awareness programs

    Phase 4

    4.1 Assess the state of security policies

    4.2 Identify triggers for regular policy review and update

    4.3 Develop an action plan to update policies

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the current state of your organization’s security policies.
    • Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance.
    • Prioritize the development of your security policies.
    • Leverage key stakeholders to champion the policy initiative.
    • Inform all relevant stakeholders of the upcoming policy program.
    • Develop the security policy lifecycle.

    1.1 Understand the current state of policies

    Scenario 1: You have existing policies

    1. Use the Security Policy Prioritization Tool to identify any gaps between the policies you already have and those recommended based on your changing business needs.
    2. As your organization undergoes changes, be sure to incorporate new requirements in the existing policies.
    3. Sometimes, you may have more specific procedures for a domain’s individual security aspects instead of high-level policies.
    4. Group current policies into the domains and use the policy templates to create overarching policies where there are none and improve upon existing high-level policies.

    Scenario 2: You are starting from scratch

    1. To get started on new policies, use the Security Policy Prioritization Tool to identify the policies Info-Tech recommends based on your business needs. See the full list of templates in the Appendix to ensure that all relevant topics are addressed.
    2. Whether you’re starting from scratch or have incomplete/ad hoc policies, use Info-Tech’s policy templates to formalize and standardize security requirements for end users.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Policies are living, evolving documents that require regular review and update, so even if you have policies already written, you’re not done with them.

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance

    You have an opportunity to improve your employee alignment and satisfaction, improve organizational agility, and obtain high policy adherence. This is achieved by translating your corporate culture into a policy-based compliance culture.

    Align your security policies to the Info-Tech Security Framework by using Info-Tech’s policy templates.

    Info-Tech’s security framework uses a best-of-breed approach to leverage and align with most major security standards, including:
    • ISO 27001/27002
    • COBIT
    • Center for Internet Security (CIS) Critical Controls
    • NIST Cybersecurity Framework
    • NIST SP 800-53
    • NIST SP 800-171

    Info-Tech Security Framework

    Info-Tech Security Framework with policies grouped into categories which are then grouped into 'Governance' and 'Management'.

    1.3 Document your policy hierarchy

    Structuring policy components at different levels allows for efficient changes and direct communication depending on what information is needed.

    Policy hierarchy pyramid with 'Security Policy Lifecycle' on top, then 'Security Policies', then 'IT and/or Supporting Documentation'.

    Defines the cycle for the security policy program and what must be done but not how to do it. Aligns the business, security program, and policies.
    Addresses the “what,” “who,” “when,” and “where.”

    Defines high-level overarching concepts of security within the organization, including the scope, purpose, and objectives of policies.
    Addresses the high-level “what” and “why.”
    Changes when business objectives change.

    Defines enterprise/technology – specific, detailed guidelines on how to adhere to policies.
    Addresses the “how.”
    Changes when technology and processes change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Design separate policies for different areas of focus. Policies that are written as single, monolithic documents are resistant to change. A hierarchical top-level document supported by subordinate policies and/or procedures can be more rapidly revised as circumstances change.

    1.3.1 Understand the relationship between policies and other documents

    Policy:
    • Provides emphasis and sets direction.
    • Standards, guidelines, and procedures must be developed to support an overarching policy.
    Arrows stemming from the above list, connecting to the three lists below.

    Standard:

    • Specifies uniform method of support for policy.
    • Compliance is mandatory.
    • Includes process, frameworks, methodologies, and technology.
    Two-way horizontal arrow.

    Procedure:

    • Step-by-step instructions to perform desired actions.
    Two-way horizontal arrow.

    Guideline:

    Recommended actions to consider in absence of an applicable standard, to support a policy.
    This model is adapted from a framework developed by CISA (Certified Information Systems Auditor).

    Supporting Documentation

    Considerations for standards

    Standards. These support policies by being much more specific and outlining key steps or processes that are necessary to meet certain requirements within a policy document. Ideally standards should be based on policy statements with a target of detailing the requirements that show how the organization will implement developed policies.

    If policies describe what needs to happen, then standards explain how it will happen.

    A good example is an email policy that states that emails must be encrypted; this policy can be supported by a standard such as Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption that specifically ensures that all email communication is encrypted for messages “in transit” from one secure email server that has TLS enabled to another.

    There are numerous security standards available that support security policies/programs based on the kind of systems and controls that an organization would like to put in place. A good selection of supporting standards can go a long way to further protect users, data, and other organizational assets
    Key Policies Example Associated Standards
    Access Control Policy
    • Password Management User Standard
    • Account Auditing Standard
    Data Security Policy
    • Cryptography Standard
    • Data Classification Standard
    • Data Handling Standard
    • Data Retention Standard
    Incident Response Policy
    • Incident Response Plan
    Network Security Policy
    • Wireless Connectivity Standard
    • Firewall Configuration Standard
    • Network Monitoring Standard
    Vendor Management Policy
    • Vendor Risk Management Standard
    • Third-Party Access Control Standard
    Application Security Policy
    • Application Security Standard

    1.4 Prioritize development of security policies

    The Info-Tech Security Policy Prioritization Tool will help you determine which security policies to work on first.
    • The tool allows you to prioritize your policies based on:
      • Importance: How relevant is this policy to organizational security?
      • Ease to implement: What is the effort, time, and resources required to write, review, approve, and distribute the policy?
      • Ease to enforce: How much effort, time, and resources are required to enforce the policy?
    • Additionally, the weighting or priority of each variable of prioritization can be adjusted.

    Align policies to recent security concerns. If your organization has recently experienced a breach, it may be crucial to highlight corresponding policies as immediately necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you have an existing policy that aligns with one of the Info-Tech recommended templates weight Ease to Implement and Ease to Enforce as HIGH (4-5). This will decrease the priority of these policies.

    Sample of the Security Policy Prioritization Tool.

    Download the Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    1.5 Leverage stakeholders to champion policies

    Info-Tech Insight

    While management support is essential to initiating a strong security posture, allow employees to provide input on the development of security policies. This cooperation will lead to easier incorporation of the policies into the daily routines of workers, with less resistance. The security team will be less of a police force and more of a partner.

    Executive champion

    Identify an executive champion who will ensure that the security program and the security policies are supported.

    Focus on risk and protection

    Security can be viewed as an interference, but the business is likely more responsive to the concepts of risk and protection because it can apply to overall business operations and a revenue-generating mandate.

    Communicate policy initiatives

    Inform stakeholders of the policy initiative as security policies are only effective if they support the business requirements and user input is crucial for developing a strong security culture.

    Current security landscape

    Leveraging the current security landscape can be a useful mechanism to drive policy buy-in from stakeholders.

    Management buy-in

    This is key to policy acceptance; it indicates that policies are accurate, align with the business, and are to be upheld, that funds will be made available, and that all employees will be equally accountable.

    Implement and Optimize Application Integration Governance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}361|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Integration
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-integration
    • Enterprises begin integrating their applications without recognizing the need for a managed and documented governance model.
    • Application Integration (AI) is an inherently complex concept, involving the communication among multiple applications, groups, and even organizations; thus developing a governance model can be overwhelming.
    • The options for AI Governance are numerous and will vary depending on the size, type, and maturity of the organization, adding yet another layer of complexity.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Governance is essential with integrated applications. If you are planning to integrate your applications, you should already be considering a governance model.
    • Proper governance requires oversight into chains of responsibility, policy, control mechanisms, measurement, and communication.
    • People and process are key. Technology options to aid in governance of integrated apps exist, but will not greatly contribute to the success of AI.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess your capabilities and determine which area of governance requires the most attention to achieve success in AI.
    • Form an Integration Center of Competency to oversee AI governance to ensure compliance and increase success.
    • Conduct ongoing training with your personnel to ensure up-to-date skills and end user understanding.
    • Frequently revisit your AI governance strategy to ensure alignment with business goals.

    Implement and Optimize Application Integration Governance Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Implement and optimize Application Integration Governance

    Know where to start and where to focus your attention in the implementation of an AI governance strategy.

    • Storyboard: Implement and Optimize Application Integration Governance

    2. Assess the organization's capabilities in AI Governance

    Assess your current and target states in AI Governance.

    • Application Integration Governance Gap Analysis Tool

    3. Create an Integration Center of Competency

    Have a governing body to oversee AI Governance.

    • Integration Center of Competency Charter Template

    4. Establish AI Governance principles and guidelines

    Create a basis for the organization’s AI governance model.

    • Application Integration Policy and Principles Template

    5. Create an AI service catalog

    Keep record of services and interfaces to reduce waste.

    • Integration Service Catalog Template
    [infographic]

    Avoid Project Management Pitfalls

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}374|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Program & Project Management
    • Parent Category Link: /program-and-project-management
    • IT organizations seem to do everything in projects, yet fewer than 15% successfully complete all deliverables on time and on budget.
    • Project managers seem to succumb to the relentless pressure from stakeholders to deliver more, more quickly, with fewer resources, and with less support than is ideal.
    • To achieve greater likelihood that your project will stay on track, watch out for the four big pitfalls: scope creep, failure to obtain stakeholder commitment, inability to assemble a team, and failure to plan.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • While many project managers worry about proper planning as the key to project success, skilled management of the political factors around a project has a much greater impact on success.
    • Alone, combating scope creep can improve your likelihood of success by a factor of 2x.
    • A strong project sponsor will be key to fighting the inevitable battles to control scope and obtain resources.

    Impact and Result

    • Take steps to avoid falling into common project pitfalls.
    • Assess which pitfalls threaten your project in its current state and take appropriate steps to avoid falling into them.
    • Avoiding pitfalls will allow you to deliver value on time and on budget, creating the perception of success in users’ and managers’ eyes.

    Avoid Project Management Pitfalls Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Learn about common PM pitfalls and the strategies to avoid them

    Consistently meet project goals through enhanced PM knowledge and awareness.

    • Storyboard: Avoid Project Management Pitfalls
    • None

    2. Detect project pitfalls

    Take action and mitigate a pitfall before it becomes a problem.

    • Project Pitfall Detection & Mitigation Tool

    3. Document and report PM issues

    Learn from issues encountered to help map PM strategies for future projects.

    • Project Management Pitfalls Issue Log
    [infographic]

    CIO Priorities 2022

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}328|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • Understand how to respond to trends affecting your organization.
    • Determine your priorities based on current state and relevant internal factors.
    • Assign the right amount of resources to accomplish your vision.
    • Consider what new challenges outside of your control will demand a response.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    A priority is created when external factors hold strong synergy with internal goals and an organization responds by committing resources to either avert risk or seize opportunity. These are the priorities identified in the report:

    1. Reduce Friction in the Hybrid Operating Model
    2. Improve Your Ransomware Readiness
    3. Support an Employee-Centric Retention Strategy
    4. Design an Automation Platform
    5. Prepare to Report on New Environmental, Social, and Governance Metrics

    Impact and Result

    Update your strategic roadmap to include priorities that are critical and relevant for your organization based on a balance of external and internal factors.

    CIO Priorities 2022 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. CIO Priorities 2022 – A report on the key priorities for competing in the digital economy.

    Discover Info-Tech’s five priorities for CIOs in 2022.

    • CIO Priorities Report for 2022

    2. Listen to the podcast series

    Hear directly from our contributing experts as they discuss their case studies with Brian Jackson.

    • Frictionless hybrid working: How the Harvard Business School did it
    • Close call with ransomware: A CIO recounts a near security nightmare
    • How a financial services company dodged "The Great Resignation"
    • How Allianz took a blockchain platform from pilot to 1 million transactions
    • CVS Health chairman David Dorman on healthcare's hybrid future

    Infographic

    Further reading

    CIO Priorities 2022

    A jumble of business-related words. Info-Tech’s 2022 Tech Trends survey asked CIOs for their top three priorities. Cluster analysis of their open-ended responses shows four key themes:
    1. Business process improvements
    2. Digital transformation or modernization
    3. Security
    4. Supporting revenue growth or recovery

    Info-Tech’s annual CIO priorities are formed from proprietary primary data and consultation with our internal experts with CIO stature

    2022 Tech Trends Survey CIO Demographic N=123

    Info-Tech’s Tech Trends 2022 survey was conducted between August and September 2021 and collected a total of 475 responses from IT decision makers, 123 of which were at the C-level. Fourteen countries and 16 industries are represented in the survey.

    2022 IT Talent Trends Survey CIO Demographic N=44

    Info-Tech’s IT Talent Trends 2022 survey was conducted between September and October 2021 and collected a total of 245 responses from IT decision makers, 44 of which were at the C-level. A broad range of countries from around the world are represented in the survey.

    Internal CIO Panels’ 125 Years Of Combined C-Level IT Experience

    Panels of former CIOs at Info-Tech focused on interpreting tech trends data and relating it to client experiences. Panels were conducted between November 2021 and January 2022.

    CEO-CIO Alignment Survey Benchmark Completed By 107 Different Organizations

    Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment program helps CIOs align with their supervisors by asking the right questions to ensure that IT stays on the right path. It determines how IT can best support the business’ top priorities and address the gaps in your strategy. In 2021, the benchmark was formed by 107 different organizations.

    Build IT alignment

    IT Management & Governance Diagnostic Benchmark Completed By 320 Different Organizations

    Info-Tech’s Management and Governance Diagnostic helps IT departments assess their strengths and weaknesses, prioritize their processes and build an improvement roadmap, and establish clear ownership of IT processes. In 2021, the benchmark was formed by data from 320 different organizations.

    Assess your IT processes

    The CIO priorities are informed by Info-Tech’s trends research reports and surveys

    Priority: “The fact or condition of being regarded or treated as more important than others.” (Lexico/Oxford)

    Trend: “A general direction in which something is developing or changing.” (Lexico/Oxford)

    A sequence of processes beginning with 'Sensing', 'Hypothesis', 'Validation', and ending with 'Trends, 'Priorities'. Under Sensing is Technology Research, Interviews & Insights, Gathering, and PESTLE. Under Hypothesis is Near-Future Probabilities, Identify Patterns, Identify Uncertainties, and Identify Human Benefits. Under Validation is Test Hypothesis, Case Studies, and Data-Driven Insights. Under Trends is Technology, Talent, and Industry. Under Priorities is CIO, Applications, Infrastructure, and Security.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Trends & Priorities Research Center

    Image called 'Defining the CIO Priorities for 2022'. Image shows 4 columns, Implications, Resource Investment, Amplifiers, and Actions and Outcomes, with 2 dotted lines, labeled External Context and Internal Context, running through all 4 columns and leading to bottom-right label called CIO Priorities Formed

    The Five Priorities

    Priorities to compete in the digital economy

    1. Reduce Friction in the Hybrid Operating Model
    2. Improve Your Ransomware Readiness
    3. Support an Employee-Centric Retention Strategy
    4. Design an Automation Platform
    5. Prepare to Report on New Environmental, Social, and Governance Metrics

    Reduce friction in the hybrid operating model

    Priority 01 | APO07 Human Resources Management

    Deliver solutions that create equity between remote workers and office workers and make collaboration a joy.

    Hybrid work is here to stay

    CIOs must deal with new pain points related to friction of collaboration

    In 2020, CIOs adapted to the pandemic’s disruption to offices by investing in capabilities to enable remote work. With restrictions on gathering in offices, even digital laggards had to shift to an all-remote work model for non-essential workers.

    Most popular technologies already invested in to facilitate better collaboration

    • 24% Web Conferencing
    • 23% Instant Messaging
    • 20% Document Collaboration

    In 2022, the focus shifts to solving problems created by the new hybrid operating model where some employees are in the office and some are working remotely. Without the ease of collaborating in a central hub, technology can play a role in reducing friction in several areas:

    • Foster more connections between employees. Remote workers are less likely to collaborate with people outside of their department and less likely to spontaneously collaborate with their peers. CIOs should provide a digital employee experience that fosters collaboration habits and keeps workers engaged.
    • Prevent employee attrition. With more workers reevaluating their careers and leaving their jobs, CIOs can help employees feel connected to the overall purpose of the organization. Finding a way to maintain culture in the new context will require new solutions. While conference room technology can be a bane to IT departments, making hybrid meetings effortless to facilitate will be more important.
    • Provide new standards for mediated collaboration. Meeting isn’t as easy as simply gathering around the same table anymore. CIOs need to provide structure around how hybrid meetings are conducted to create equity between all participants. Business continuity processes must also consider potential outages for collaboration services so employees can continue the work despite a major outage.

    Three in four organizations have a “hybrid” approach to work. (Tech Trends 2022 Survey)

    In most organizations, a hybrid model is being implemented. Only 14.9% of organizations are planning for almost everyone to return to the office, and only 9.9% for almost everyone to work remotely.

    Elizabeth Clark

    CIO, Harvard Business School

    "I want to create experiences that are sticky. That keep people coming back and engaging with their colleagues."

    Photo of Elizabeth Clark, CIO, Harvard Business School.

    Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
    Frictionless hybrid working: How the Harvard Business School did it

    Internal interpretation: Harvard Business School

    • March 2020
      The pandemic disrupts in-class education at Harvard Business School. Their case study method of instruction that depends on in-person, high-quality student engagement is at risk. While students and faculty completed the winter semester remotely, the Dean and administration make the goal to restore the integrity of the classroom experience with equity for both remote and in-person students.
    • May 2020
      A cross-functional task force of about 100 people work intensively, conducting seven formal experiments, 80 smaller tests, and hundreds of polling data points, and a technology and facilities solution is designed: two 4K video cameras capturing both the faculty and the in-class students, new ceiling mics, three 85-inch TV screens, and students joining the videoconference from their laptops. A custom Zoom room, combining three separate rooms, integrated all the elements in one place and integrated with the lecture capture system and learning management system.
    • October 2020
      Sixteen classrooms are renovated to install the new solution. Students return to the classroom but in lower numbers due to limits on in-room capacity, but students rotate between the in-person and remote experience.
    • September 2021
      Renovations for the hybrid solution are complete in 26 classrooms and HBS has determined this will be its standard model for the classroom. The case method of teaching is kept alive and faculty and students are thrilled with the results.
    • November 2021
      HBS is adapting its solution for the classroom to its conference rooms and has built out eight different rooms for a hybrid experience. The 4K cameras and TV screens capture all participants in high fidelity as well as the blackboard.

    Photo of a renovated classroom with Zoom participants integrated with the in-person students.
    The renovated classrooms integrate all students, whether they are participating remotely or in person. (Image courtesy of Harvard Business School.)

    Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

    External

    • Organization – About half of IT practitioners in the Tech Trends 2022 survey feel that IT leaders, infrastructure and operations teams, and security teams were “very busy” in 2021. Capacity to adapt to hybrid work could be constrained by these factors.
    • Process – Organizations that want employees to benefit from being back in the office will have to rethink how workers can get more value out of in-person meetings that also require videoconference participation with remote workers.
    • Technology – Fifty-four percent of surveyed IT practitioners say the pandemic raised IT spending compared to the projections they made in 2020. Much of that investment went into adapting to a remote work environment.

    Internal

    • Organization – HBS added 30 people to its IT staff on term appointments to develop and implement its hybrid classroom solutions. Hires included instructional designers, support technicians, coordinators, and project managers.
    • Process – Only 25 students out of the full capacity of 95 could be in the classroom due to COVID-19 regulations. On-campus students rotated through the classroom seats. An app was created to post last-minute seat availability to keep the class full.
    • Technology – A Zoom room was created that combines three rooms to provide the full classroom experience: a view of the instructor, a clear view of each student that enlarges when they are speaking, and a view of the blackboard.

    Resources Applied

    Appetite for Technology

    CIOs and their direct supervisors both ranked internal collaboration tools as being a “critical need to adopt” in 2021, according to Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Benchmark Report.

    Intent to Invest

    Ninety-seven percent of IT practitioners plan to invest in technology to facilitate better collaboration between employees in the office and outside the office by the end of 2022, according to Info-Tech’s 2022 Tech Trends survey.

    “We got so many nice compliments, which you don’t get in IT all the time. You get all the complaints, but it’s a rare case when people are enthusiastic about something that was delivered.” (Elizabeth Clark, CIO, Harvard Business School)

    Harvard Business School

    • IT staff were reassigned from other projects to prioritize building a hybrid classroom solution. A cloud migration and other portfolio projects were put on pause.
    • The annual capital A/V investment was doubled. The amount of spend on conference rooms was tripled.
    • Employees were hired to the media services team at a time when other areas of the organization were frozen.

    Outcomes at Harvard Business School

    The new normal at Harvard Business School

    New normal: HBS has found its new default operating model for the classroom and is extending its solution to its operating environment.

    Improved CX: The high-quality experience for students has helped avoid attrition despite the challenges of the pandemic.

    Engaged employees: The IT team is also engaged and feels connected to the mission of the school.

    Photo of a custom Zoom room bringing together multiple view of the classroom as well as all remote students.
    A custom Zoom room brings together multiple different views of the classroom into one single experience for remote students. (Image courtesy of Harvard Business School.)

    From Priorities to Action

    Make hybrid collaboration a joy

    Align with your organization’s goals for collaboration and customer interaction, with the target of high satisfaction for both customers and employees. Invest in capital projects to improve the fidelity of conference rooms, develop and test a new way of working, and increase IT capacity to alleviate pressure points.

    Foster both asynchronous and synchronous collaboration approaches to avoid calendars filling up with videoconference meetings to get things done and to accommodate workers contributing from across different time zones.

    “We’ll always have hybrid now. It’s opened people’s eyes and now we’re thinking about the future state. What new markets could we explore?” (Elizabeth Clark, CIO, Harvard Business School)

    Take the next step

    Run Better Meetings
    Hybrid, virtual, or in person – set meeting best practices that support your desired meeting norms.

    Prepare People Leaders for the Hybrid Work Environment
    Set hybrid work up for success by providing people leaders with the tools they need to lead within the new model.

    Hoteling and Hot-Desking: A Primer
    What you need to know regarding facilities, IT infrastructure, maintenance, security, and vendor solutions for desk hoteling and hot-desking.

    “Human Resources Management” gap between importance and effectiveness
    Info-Tech Research Group Management and Governance Diagnostic Benchmark 2021

    A bar chart illustrating the Human Resources Management gap between importance and effectiveness. The difference is marked as Delta 2.3.

    Improve your ransomware readiness

    Priority 02 | APO13 Security Strategy

    Mitigate the damage of successful ransomware intrusions and make recovery as painless as possible.

    The ransomware crisis threatens every organization

    Prevention alone won’t be enough against the forces behind ransomware.

    Cybersecurity is always top of mind for CIOs but tends to be deprioritized due to other demands related to digital transformation or due to cost pressures. That’s the case when we examine our data for this report.

    Cybersecurity ranked as the fourth-most important priority by CIOs in Info-Tech’s 2022 Tech Trends survey, behind business process improvement, digital transformation, and modernization. Popular ways to prepare for a successful attack include creating offline backups, purchasing insurance, and deploying new solutions to eradicate ransomware.

    CIOs and their direct supervisors ranked “Manage IT-Related Security” as the third-most important top IT priority on Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Benchmark for 2021, in support of business goals to manage risk, comply with external regulation, and ensure service continuity.

    Most popular ways for organizations to prepare for the event of a successful ransomware attack:

    • 25% Created offline backups
    • 18% Purchased cyberinsurance
    • 19% New tech to eradicate ransomware

    Whatever priority an organization places on cybersecurity, when ransomware strikes, it quickly becomes a red alert scenario that disrupts normal operations and requires all hands on deck to respond. Sophisticated attacks executed at wide scale demonstrate that security can be bypassed without creating an alert. After that’s accomplished, the perpetrators build their leverage by exfiltrating data and encrypting critical systems.

    CIOs can plan to mitigate ransomware attacks in several constructive ways:

    • Business impact analysis. Determine the costs of an outage for specific periods and the system and data recovery points in time.
    • Engage a partner for 24/7 monitoring. Gain real-time awareness of your critical systems.
    • Review your identity access management (IAM) policies. Use of multi-factor authentication and limiting access to only the roles that need it reduces ransomware risk.

    50% of all organizations spent time and money specifically to prevent ransomware in the past year. (Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey)

    John Doe

    CIO, mid-sized manufacturing firm in the US

    "I want to create experiences that are sticky. That keep people coming back and engaging with their colleagues."

    Blank photo.

    Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
    Close call with ransomware: a CIO recounts a near security nightmare

    Internal interpretation: US-based, mid-sized manufacturing firm

    • May 1, 2021
      A mid-sized manufacturing firm (“The Firm”) CIO gets a call from his head of security about odd things happening on the network. A call is made to Microsoft for support. Later that night, the report is that an unwanted crypto-mining application is the culprit. But a couple of hours later, that assessment is proven wrong when it’s realized that hundreds of systems are staged for a ransomware attack. All the attacker has to do is push the button.
    • May 2, 2021
      The Firm disconnects all its global sites to cut off new pathways for the malware to infect. All normal operations cease for 24 hours. It launches its cybersecurity insurance process. The CIO engages a new security vendor, CrowdStrike, to help respond. Employees begin working from home if they can so they can make use of their own internet service. The Firm has cut off its public internet connectivity and is severed from cloud services such as Azure storage and collaboration software.
    • May 4, 2021
      The hackers behind the attack are revealed by security forensics experts. A state-sponsored agency in Russia set up the ransomware and left it ready to execute. It sold the staged attack to a cybercriminal group, Doppel Spider. According to CrowdStrike, the group uses malware to run “big game hunting operations” and targets 18 different countries including the US and multiple industries, including manufacturing.
    • May 10, 2021
      The Firm has totally recovered from the ransomware incident and avoided any serious breach or paying a ransom. The CIO worked more hours than at any other point in his career, logging an estimated 130 hours over the two weeks.
    • November 2021
      The Firm never previously considered itself a ransomware target but has now reevaluated that stance. It has hired a service provider to run a security operations center on a 24/7 basis. It's implemented a more sophisticated detection and response model and implemented multi-factor authentication. It’s doubled its security spend in 2021 and will invest more in 2022.

    “Now we take the approach that if someone does get in, we're going to find them out.” (John Doe, CIO, “The Firm”)

    Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

    External

    • Organization – Organizations must consider how their employees play a role in preventing ransomware and plan for training to recognize phishing and other common traps. They must make plans for employees to continue their work if systems are disrupted by ransomware.
    • Process – Backup processes across multiple systems should be harmonized to have both recent and common points to recover from. Work with the understanding IT will have to take systems offline if ransomware is discovered and there is no time to ask for permission.
    • Technology – Organizations can benefit from security services provided by a forensics-focused vendor. Putting cybersecurity insurance in place not only provides financial protection but also guidance in what to do and which vendors to work with to prevent and recover from ransomware.

    Internal

    • Organization – The Firm was prepared with a business continuity plan to allow many of its employees to work remotely, which was necessary because the office network was incapacitated for ten days during recovery.
    • Process – Executives didn’t seek to assign blame for the security incident but took it as a signal there were some new costs involved to stay in business. It initiated new outsource relationships and hired one more full-time employee to shore up security resources.
    • Technology – New ransomware eradication software was deployed to 2,000 computers. Scripted processes automated much of the work, but in some cases full system rebuilds were required. Backup systems were disconnected from the network as soon as the malware was discovered.

    Resources Applied

    Consider the Alternative

    Organizations should consider how much a ransomware attack on critical systems would cost them if they were down for a minimum of 24-48 hours. Plan to invest an amount at least equal to the costs of that downtime.

    Ask for ID

    Implementing across-the-board multi-factor authentication reduces chances of infection and is cheap, with enterprise solutions ranging from $2 to $5 per user on average. Be strict and deny access when connections don’t authenticate.

    “You'll never stop everything from getting into the network. You can still focus on stopping the bad actors, but then if they do make it in, make sure they don't get far.” (John Doe, CIO, “The Firm”)

    “The Firm” (Mid-Sized Manufacturer)

    • During the crisis, The Firm paused all activities and focused solely on isolating and eliminating the ransomware threat.
    • New outsourcing relationship with a vendor provides a 24/7 Security Operations Center.
    • One more full-time employee on the security team.
    • Doubled investment in security in 2021 and will spend more in 2022.

    Outcomes at “The Firm” (Mid-Sized Manufacturer)

    The new cost of doing business

    Real-time security: While The Firm is still investing in prevention-based security, it is also developing its real-time detection and response capabilities. When ransomware makes it through the cracks, it wants to know as soon as possible and stop it.

    Leadership commitment: The C-suite is taking the experience as a wake-up call that more investment is required in today’s threat landscape. The Firm rates security more highly as an overall organizational goal, not just something for IT to worry about.

    Stock photo of someone using their phone while sitting at a computer, implying multi-factor authentication.
    The Firm now uses multi-factor authentication as part of its employee sign-on process. For employees, authenticating is commonly achieved by using a mobile app that receives a secret code from the issuer.

    From Priorities to Action

    Cybersecurity is everyone’s responsibility

    In Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Benchmark for 2021, the business goal of “Manage Risk” was the single biggest point of disagreement between CIOs and their direct supervisors. CIOs rank it as the second-most important business goal, while CEOs rank it as sixth-most important.

    Organizations should align on managing risk as a top priority given the severity of the ransomware threat. The threat actors and nature of the attacks are such that top leadership must prepare for when ransomware hits. This includes halting operations quickly to contain damage, engaging third-party security forensics experts, and coordinating with government regulators.

    Cybersecurity strategies may be challenged to be effective without creating some friction for users. Organizations should look beyond multi-layer prevention strategies and lean toward quick detection and response, spending evenly across prevention, detection, and response solutions.

    Take the next step

    Create a Ransomware Incident Response Plan
    Don’t be the next headline. Determine your current readiness, response plan, and projects to close gaps.

    Simplify Identity and Access Management
    Select and implement IAM and produce vendor RFPs that will contain the capabilities you need, including multi-factor authentication.

    Cybersecurity Series Featuring Sandy Silk
    More from Info-Tech’s Senior Workshop Director Sandy Silk in this video series created while she was still at Harvard University.

    Gap between CIOs and CEOs in points allocated to “Manage risk” as a top business goal

    A bar chart illustrating the gap between CIOs and CEOs in points allocated to 'Manage risk' as a top business goal. The difference is marked as Delta 1.5.

    Support an employee-centric retention strategy

    Priority 03 | ITRG02 Leadership, Culture & Values

    Avoid being a victim of “The Great Resignation” by putting employees at the center of an experience that will engage them with clear career path development, purposeful work, and transparent feedback.

    Defining an employee-first culture that improves retention

    The Great resignation isn’t good for firms

    In 2021, many workers decided to leave their jobs. Working contexts were disrupted by the pandemic and that saw non-essential workers sent home to work, while essential workers were asked to continue to come into work despite the risks of COVID-19. These disruptions may have contributed to many workers reevaluating their professional goals and weighing their values differently. At the same time, 2021 saw a surging economy and many new job opportunities to create a talent-hungry market. Many workers could have been motivated to take a new opportunity to increase their salary or receive other benefits such as more flexibility.

    Annual turnover rate for all us employees on the rise

    • 20% – Jan.-Aug. 2020, Dipped from 22% in 2019
    • 25% Jan.-Aug. 2021, New record high
    • Data from Visier Inc.

    When you can’t pay them, develop them

    IT may be less affected than other departments by this trend. Info-Tech’s 2022 IT Talent Trends Report shows that on average, estimated turnover rate in IT is lower than the rest of the organization. Almost half of respondents estimated their organization’s voluntary turnover rate was 10% or higher. Only 30% of respondents estimate that IT’s voluntary turnover rate is in the same range. However, CIOs working in industries with the highest turnover rates will have to work to keep their workers engaged and satisfied, as IT skills are easily transferred to other industries.

    49% ranked “enabling learning & development within IT” as high priority, more than any other single challenge. (IT Talent Trends 2022 Survey, N=227)

    A bar chart of 'Industries with highest turnover rates (%)' with 'Leisure and Hospitality' at 6.4%, 'Trade, Transportation & Utilities' at 3.6%, 'Professional and Business' at 3.3%, and 'Other Services' at 3.1%. U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, 2022.

    Jeff Previte

    Executive Vice-President of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage

    “We have to get to know the individual at a personal level … Not just talking about the business, but getting to know the person."

    Photo of Jeff Previte, Executive Vice-President of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage.

    Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
    How a financial services company dodged ‘The Great Resignation’

    Internal interpretation: CrossCountry Mortgage

    • May 2019
      Jeff Previte joins Cleveland, Ohio-based CrossCountry Mortgage in the CIO role. The company faces a challenge with employee turnover, particularly in IT. The firm is a sales-focused organization and saw its turnover rate reach as high as 60%. Yet Previte recognized that IT had some meaningful goals to achieve and would need to attract – and retain – some higher caliber talent. His first objective in his new role was to meet with IT employees and business leadership to set priorities.
    • July 2019
      Previte takes a “people-first” approach to leadership and meets his staff face-to-face to understand their personal situations. He sets to work on defining roles and responsibilities in the organization, spending about a fifth of his time on defining the strategy.
    • June 2020
      Previte assigned his leadership team to McLean & Company’s Design an Impactful Employee Development Program. From there, the team developed a Salesforce tool called the Career Development Workbook. “We had some very passionate developers and admins that wanted to build a home-grown tool,” he says. It turns McLean & Company’s process into a digital tool employees can use to reflect on their careers and explore their next steps. It helps facilitate development conversations with managers.
    • January 2021
      CrossCountry Mortgage changes its approach to career development activities. Going to external conferences and training courses is reduced to just 30% of that effort. The rest is by doing hands-on work at the company. Previte aligned with his executives and road-mapped IT projects annually. Based on employee’s interests, opportunities are found to carve out time from usual day-to-day activities to spend time on a project in a new area. When there’s a business need, someone internally can be ready to transition roles.
    • June 2021
      In the two years since joining the company, Previte has reduced the turnover rate to just 12%. The IT department has grown to more adequately meet the needs of the business and employees are engaged with more opportunities to develop their careers. Instead of focusing on compensation, Previte focused more on engaging employees with a developmentally dedicated environment and continuous hands-on learning.

    “It’s come down to a culture shift. Folks have an idea of where we’re headed as an organization, where we’re headed as an IT team, and how their role contributes to that.” (Jeff Previte, EVP of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage)

    Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

    External

    • Organization – A high priority is being placed on improving IT’s maturity through its talent. Enabling learning and development in IT, enabling departmental innovation, and recruiting are the top three highest priorities according to IT Talent Trends 2022 survey responses.
    • Process – Recruiting is more challenging for industries that operate primarily onsite, according to McLean & Company's 2022 HR Trends Report. They face more challenges attracting applications, more rejected offers, and more candidate ghosting compared to remote-capable industries.
    • Technology – Providing a great employee experience through digital tools is more important as many organizations see a mix of workers in the office and at home. These tools can help connect colleagues, foster professional development, and improve the candidate experience.

    Internal

    • Organization – CrossCountry Mortgage faced a situation where IT employees did not have clarity on their roles and responsibilities. In terms of salary, it wasn’t offering at the high end compared to other employers in Cleveland.
    • Process – To foster a culture of growth and development, CrossCountry Mortgage put in place a performance assessment system that encouraged reflection and goal setting, aided by collaboration with a manager.
    • Technology – The high turnover rate was limiting CrossCountry Mortgage from achieving the level of maturity it needed to support the company’s goals. It ingrained its new PA process with a custom build of a Salesforce tool.

    Resources Applied

    Show me the money

    Almost six in ten Talent Trends survey respondents identified salary and compensation as the reason that employees resigned in the past year. Organizations looking to engage employees must first pay a fair salary according to market and industry conditions.

    Build me up

    Professional development and opportunity for innovative work are the next two most common reasons for resignations. Organizations must ensure they create enough capacity to allow workers time to spend on development.

    “Building our own solution created an element of engagement. There was a sense of ownership that the team had in thinking through this.” (Jeff Previte, CrossCountry Mortgage)

    CrossCountry Mortgage

    • Executive time: CIO spends 10-20% of his time on activities related to designing the approach.
    • Leveraged memberships with Info-Tech Research Group and McLean & Company to define professional development process.
    • Internal IT develops automated workflow in Salesforce.
    • Hired additional IT staff to build out overall capacity and create time for development activities.

    Outcomes at CrossCountry Mortgage

    Engaged IT workforce

    The Great Maturation: IT staff turnover rate dropped to 10-12% and IT talent is developing on the job to improve the department’s overall skill level. More IT staff on hand and more engaged workers mean IT can deliver higher maturity level results.

    Alignment achieved: Connecting IT’s initiatives to the vision of the C-suite creates a clear purpose for IT in its initiatives. Staff understand what they need to achieve to progress their careers and can grow while they work.

    Photo of employees from CrossCountry Mortgage assisting with a distribution event.
    Employees from CrossCountry Mortgage headquarters assist with a drive-thru distribution event for the Cleveland Food Bank on Dec. 17, 2021. (Image courtesy of CrossCountry Mortgage.)

    From Priorities to Action

    Staff retention is a leadership priority

    The Great Resignation trend is bringing attention to employee engagement and staff retention. IT departments are busier than ever during the pandemic as they work overtime to keep up with a remote workforce and new security threats. At the same time, IT talent is among the most coveted on the market.

    CIOs need to develop a people-first approach to improve the employee experience. Beyond compensation, IT workers need clarity in terms of their career paths, a direct connection between their work and the goals of the organization, and time set aside for professional development.

    Info-Tech’s 2021 benchmark for “Leadership, Culture & Values” shows that most organizations rate this capability very highly (9) but see room to improve on their effectiveness (6.9).

    Take the next step

    IT Talent Trends 2022
    See how IT talent trends are shifting through the pandemic and understand how themes like The Great Resignation has impacted IT.

    McLean & Company’s Modernize Performance Management
    Customize the building blocks of performance management to best fit organizational needs to impact individual and organizational performance, productivity, and engagement.

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure
    Define future-state work units, roles, and responsibilities that will enable the IT organization to complete the work that needs to be done.

    “Leadership, Culture & Values” gap between importance and effectiveness
    Info-Tech Research Group Management and Governance Diagnostic Benchmark 2021

    A bar chart illustrating the 'Leadership, Culture & Values' gap between importance and effectiveness. The difference is marked as Delta 2.1.

    Design an automation platform

    Priority 04 | APO04 Innovation

    Position yourself to buy or build a platform that will enable new automation opportunities through seamless integration.

    Build it or buy it, but platform integration can yield great benefits

    Necessity is the mother of innovation

    When it’s said that digital transformation accelerated during the pandemic, what’s really meant is that processes that were formerly done manually became automated through software. In responses to the Tech Trends survey, CIOs say digital transformation was more of a focus during the pandemic, and eight in ten CIOs also say they shifted more than 20% of their organization’s processes to digital during the pandemic. Automating tasks through software can be called digitalization.

    Most organizations became more digitalized during the pandemic. But how they pursued it depends on their IT maturity. For digital laggards, partnering with a technology services platform is the path of least resistance. For sophisticated innovators, they can consider building a platform to address the specific needs of their business process. Doing so requires the foundation of an existing “digital factory” or innovation arm where new technologies can be tested, proofs of concept developed, and external partnerships formed. Patience is key with these efforts, as not every investment will yield immediate returns and some will fail outright.

    Build it or buy it, platform participants integrate with their existing systems through application programming interfaces (APIs). Organizations should determine their platform strategies based on maturity, then look to integrate the business processes that will yield the most gains.

    What role should you play in the platform ecosystem?

    A table with levels on the maturity ladder laid out as a sprint. Column headers are maturity levels 'Struggle', 'Support', 'Optimize', 'Expand', and 'Transform', row headers are 'Maturity' and 'Role'. Roles are assigned to one or many levels. 'Improve' is solely under Struggle. 'Integrate' spans from Support to Transform. 'Buy' spans Support to Expand. 'Build' begins midway through Expand and all of Transform. 'Partner' spans from Optimize to halfway through Transform.

    68% of CIOs say digital transformation became much more of a focus for their organization during the pandemic (Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey)

    Bob Crozier

    Chief Architect, Allianz Technology & Global Head of Blockchain, Allianz Technology SE

    "Smart contracts are really just workflows between counterparties."

    Photo of Bob Crozier, Chief Architect, Allianz Technology & Global Head of Blockchain, Allianz Technology SE.

    Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
    How Allianz took a blockchain platform from pilot to 1 million transactions

    Internal interpretation: Allianz Technology

    • 2015
      After smart contracts are demonstrated on the Ethereum blockchain, Allianz and other insurers recognize the business value. There is potential to use the capability to administer a complex, multi-party contract where the presence of the reinsurer in the risk transfer ecosystem is required. Manual contracts could be turned into code and automated. Allianz organized an early proof of concept around a theoretical pandemic excessive loss contract.
    • 2018
      Allianz Chief Architect Bob Crozier is leading the Global Blockchain Center of Competence for Allianz. They educate Allianz on the value of blockchain for business. They also partner with a joint venture between the Technology University of Munich and the state of Bavaria. A cohort of Masters students is looking for real business problems to solve with open-source distributed ledger technology. Allianz puts its problem statement in front of the group. A student team presents a proof of concept for an international motor insurance claims settlement and it comes in second place at a pitch day competition.
    • 2019
      Allianz brings the concept back in-house, and its business leaders return to the concept. Startup Luther Systems is engaged to build a minimum-viable product for the solution, with the goal being a pilot involving three or four subsidiaries in different countries. The Blockchain Center begins communicating with 25 Allianz subsidiaries that will eventually deploy the platform.
    • 2020
      Allianz is in build mode on its international motor insurance claims platform. It leverages its internal Dev/SecOps teams based in Munich and in India.
    • May 2021
      Allianz goes live with its new platform on May 17, decommissioning its old system and migrating all live claims data onto the new blockchain platform. It sees 400 concurrent users go live across Europe.
    • January 2022
      Allianz mines its one-millionth block to its ledger on Jan. 19, with each block representing a peer-to-peer transaction across its 25 subsidiaries in different countries. The platform has settled hundreds of millions of dollars.

    Stock photo of two people arguing over a car crash.

    Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

    External

    • Organization – To explore emerging technologies like blockchain, organizations need staff that are accountable for innovation and have leeway to develop proofs of concept. External partners are often required to bring in fresh ideas and move quickly towards an MVP.
    • Process – According to the Tech Trends 2022 survey, 84% of CIOs consider automation a high-value digital capability, and 77% say identity verification is a high-value capability. A blockchain platform using smart contracts can deliver those.
    • Technology – The Linux Foundation’s Hyperledger Fabric is an open-source blockchain technology that’s become popular in the financial industry for its method of forming consensus and its modular architecture. It’s been adopted by USAA, MasterCard, and PayPal. It also underpins the IBM Blockchain Platform and is supported by Azure Blockchain.

    Internal

    • Organization – Allianz is a holding company that owns Allianz Technology and 25 operating entities across Europe. It uses the technology arm to innovate on the business process and creates shared platforms that its entities can integrate with to automate across the value chain.
    • Process – Initial interest in smart contracts on blockchain were funneled into a student competition, where a proof of concept was developed. Allianz partnered with a startup to develop an MVP, then developed the platform while aligning with its business units ahead of launch.
    • Technology – Allianz built its blockchain platform on Hyperledger Fabric because it was a permissioned system, unlike other public permissionless blockchains such as Ethereum, and because its mining mechanism was much more energy efficient compared to other blockchains using Proof of Work consensus models.

    Resources Applied

    Time to innovate

    Exploring emerging technology for potential use cases is difficult for staff tasked with running day-to-day operations. Organizations serious about innovation create a separate team that can focus on “moonshot” projects and connect with external partners.

    Long-term ROI

    Automation of new business processes often requires a high upfront initial investment for a long-term efficiency gain. A proof of concept should demonstrate clear business value that can be repeated often and for a long period.

    “My next project has to deliver in the tens of millions of value in return. The bar is high and that’s what it should be for a business of our size.” (Bob Crozier, Allianz)

    Allianz

    • Several operating entities from different countries supplied subject matter expertise and helped with the testing process.
    • Allianz Technology team has eight staff members. It is augmented by Luther Systems and the team at industry group B3i.
    • Funding of less than $5 million to develop. Dev team continues to add improvements.
    • Operating requires just one full-time employee plus infrastructure costs, mostly for public cloud hosting.

    Outcomes at Allianz

    From insurer to platform provider

    Deliver your own SaaS: Allianz Technology built its blockchain-based claims settlement platform and its subsidiaries consume it as software as a service. The platform runs on a distributed architecture across Europe, with each node running the same version of the software. Operating entities can also integrate their own systems to the platform via APIs and further automate business processes such as billing.

    Ready to scale: After processing one million transactions, the international claims settlement platform is proven and ready to add more participants. Crozier sees auto repair shops and auto manufacturers as the next logical users.

    Stock photo of Blockchain.
    Allianz is a shareholder of the Blockchain Insurance Industry Initiative (B3i). It is providing a platform used by a group of insurance companies in the commercial and reinsurance space.

    When should we use blockchain? THREE key criteria:

    • Redundant processes
      Different entities follow the same process to achieve the desired outcome.
    • Audit trail
      Accountability in the decision making must be documented.
    • Reconciliation
      Parties need to be able to resolve disputes by tracing back to the truth.

    From Priorities to Action

    It’s a build vs. buy question for platforms

    Allianz was able to build a platform for its group of European subsidiaries because of its established digital factory and commitment to innovation. Allianz Technology is at the “innovate” level of IT maturity, allowing it to create a platform that subsidiaries can integrate with via APIs. For firms that are lower on the IT maturity scale, buying a platform solution is the better path to automation. These firms will be concerned with integrating their legacy systems to platforms that can reduce the friction of their operating environments and introduce modern new capabilities.

    From Info-Tech’s Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook

    An infographic comparing pros and cons of Build versus Buy. On the 'Build: High Delivery Capacity & Capability' side is 'Custom Development', 'Data Integration', 'AI/ML', 'Configuration', 'Native Workflow', and 'Low & No Code'. On the 'Buy: Low Delivery Capacity & Capability' side is 'Outsource Development', 'iPaaS', 'Chatbots', 'iBPMS & Rules Engines', 'RPA', and 'Point Solutions'.

    Take the next step

    Accelerate Your Automation Processes
    Integrate automation solutions and take the first steps to building an automation suite.

    Build Effective Enterprise Integration on the Back of Business Process
    From the backend to the frontlines – let enterprise integration help your business processes fly.

    Evolve Your Business Through Innovation
    Innovation teams are tasked with the responsibility of ensuring that their organizations are in the best position to succeed while the world is in a period of turmoil, chaos, and uncertainty.

    “Innovation” gap between importance and effectiveness Info-Tech Research Group Management and Governance Diagnostic Benchmark 2021

    A bar chart illustrating the 'Innovation' gap between importance and effectiveness. The difference is marked as Delta 2.1.

    Prepare to report on new environmental, social, and governance (ESG) metrics

    Priority 05 | ITRG06 Business Intelligence and Reporting

    Be ready to either lead or support initiatives to meet the criteria of new ESG reporting mandates and work toward disclosure reporting solutions.

    Time to get serious about ESG

    What does CSR or ESG mean to a CIO?

    Humans are putting increasing pressure on the planet’s natural environment and creating catastrophic risks as a result. Efforts to mitigate these risks have been underway for the past 30 years, but in the decade ahead regulators are likely to impose more strict requirements that will be linked to the financial value of an organization. Various voluntary frameworks exist for reporting on environmental, social, and governance (ESG) or corporate social responsibility (CSR) metrics. But now there are efforts underway to unify and clarify those standards.

    The most advanced effort toward a global set of standards is in the environmental area. At the United Nations’ COP26 summit in Scotland last November, the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) announced its headquarters (Frankfurt) and three other international office locations (Montreal, San Francisco, and London) and its roadmap for public consultations. It is working with an array of voluntary standards groups toward a consensus.

    In Info-Tech’s 2022 Tech Trends survey, two-thirds of CIOs say their organization is committed to reducing greenhouse gas emissions, yet only 40% say their organizational leadership is very concerned with reducing those emissions. CIOs will need to consider how to align organizational concern with internal commitments and new regulatory pressures. They may investigate new real-time reporting solutions that could serve as a competitive differentiator on ESG.

    Standards informing the ISSB’s global set of climate standards

    A row of logos of organizations that inform ISSB's global set of climate standards.

    67% of CIOs say their organization is committed to reducing greenhouse gases, with one-third saying that commitment is public. (Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey)

    40% of CIOs say their organizational leadership is very concerned with reducing greenhouse gas emissions.

    David W. Dorman

    Chairman of the board, CVS Health

    “ESG is a question of what you do in the microcosm of your company to make sure there is a clear, level playing field – that there is a color-blind, gender-blind meritocracy available – that you are aware that not in every case can you achieve that without really focusing on it. It’s not going to happen on its own. That’s why our commitments have real dollars behind them and real focus behind them because we want to be the very best at doing them.”

    Photo of David W. Dorman, Chairman of the Board, CVS Health.

    Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
    CVS Health chairman David Dorman on healthcare's hybrid future

    Internal interpretation: CVS Health

    CVS Health established a new steering committee of senior leaders in 2020 to oversee ESG commitments. It designs its corporate social responsibility strategy, Transform Health 2030, by aligning company activities in four key areas: healthy people, healthy business, healthy planet, and healthy community. The strategy aligns with the United Nations’ Sustainable Development Goals. In alignment with these goals, CVS identifies material topics where the company has the most ability to make an impact. In 2020, its top three topics were:

    1. Access to quality health care
    2. Patient and customer safety
    3. Data protection and privacy
    Material Topic
    Access to quality health care
    Material Topic
    Patient and customer safety
    Material Topic
    Data protection and privacy
    Technology Initiative
    MinuteClinic’s Virtual Collaboration for Nurses

    CVS provided Apple iPads compliant with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) to clinics in a phased approach, providing training to more than 700 providers in 26 states by February 2021. Nurses could use the iPads to attend virtual morning huddles and access clinical education. Nurses could connect virtually with other healthcare experts to collaborate on delivering patient care in real-time. The project was able to scale across the country through a $50,000 American Nurses Credentialing Center Pathway Award. (Wolters Kluwer Health, Inc.)

    Technology Initiative
    MinuteClinic’s E-Clinic

    MinuteClinics launched this telehealth solution in response to the pandemic, rolling it out in three weeks. The solution complemented video visits delivered in partnership with the Teladoc platform. Visits cost $59 and are covered by Aetna insurance plans, a subsidiary of CVS Health. It hosted more than 20,000 E-Clinic visits through the end of 2020. CVS connected its HealthHUBs to the solution to increase capacity in place of walk-in appointments and managed patients via phone for medication adherence and care plans. CVS also helped behavioral health providers transition patients to virtual visits. (CVS Health)

    Technology Initiative
    Next Generation Authentication Platform

    CVS patented this solution to authenticate customers accessing digital channels. It makes use of the available biometrics data and contextual information to validate identity without the need for a password. CVS planned to extend the platform to voice channels as well, using voiceprint technology. The solution prevents unauthorized access to sensitive health data while providing seamless access for customers. (LinkedIn)

    Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

    External

    • Organization – Since the mid-2010s, younger investors have demonstrated reliance on ESG data when making investment decisions, resulting in the creation of voluntary standards that offered varied approaches. Organizations in ESG exchange-traded funds are outperforming the overall S&P 500 (S&P Global Market Intelligence).
    • Process – Organizations are issuing ESG reports today despite the absence of clear rules to follow for reporting results. With regulators expected to step in to establish more rigid guidelines, many organizations will need to revisit their approach to ESG reports.
    • Technology – Real-time reporting of ESG metrics will become a competitive advantage before 2030. Engineering a solution that can alert organizations to poor performance on ESG measures and allow them to respond could avert losing market value.

    Internal

    • Organization – CVS Health established an ESG Steering Committee in 2020 composed of senior leaders including its chief governance officers, chief sustainability officer, chief risk officer, and controller and SVP of investor relations. It is supported by the ESG Operating Committee.
    • Process – CVS conducts a materiality assessment in accordance with Global Reporting Initiative standards to determine the most significant ESG impacts it can make and what topics most influence the decisions of stakeholders. It engages with various stakeholder groups on CSR topics.
    • Technology – CVS technology initiatives during the pandemic focused on supporting patients and employees in collaborating on health care delivery using virtual solutions, providing rich digital experiences that are easily accessible while upholding high security and privacy standards.

    Resources Applied

    Lack of commitment

    While 83% of businesses state support for the Sustainable Development Goals outlined by the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI), only 40% make measurable commitments to their goals.

    Show your work

    The GRI recommends organizations not only align their activities with sustainable development goals but also demonstrate contributions to specific targets in reporting on the positive actions they carry out. (GRI, “State of Progress: Business Contributions to the SDGS.”)

    “We end up with a longstanding commitment to diversity because that’s what our customer base looks like.” (David Dorman, CVS Health)

    CVS Health

    • The MinuteClinic Virtual Collaboration solution was piloted in Houston, demonstrated success, and won additional $50,000 funding from the Pathway to Excellence Award to scale the program across the country (Wolters Kluwer Health, Inc.).
    • The Next-Gen Authentication solution is provided by the vendor HYPR. It is deployed to ten million users and looking to scale to 30 million more. Pricing for enterprises is quoted at $1 per user, but volume pricing would apply to CVS (HYPR).

    Outcomes at CVS Health

    Delivering on hybrid healthcare solutions

    iPads for collaboration: Healthcare practitioners in the MinuteClinic Virtual Collaboration initiative agreed that it improved the use of interprofessional teams, working well virtually with others, and improved access to professional resources (Wolters Kluwer Health, Inc.)

    Remote healthcare: Saw a 400% increase in MinuteClinic virtual visits in 2020 (CVS Health).

    Verified ID: The Next Generation Authentication platform allowed customers to register for a COVID-19 vaccination appointment. CVS has delivered more than 50 million vaccines (LinkedIn).

    Stock photo of a doctor with an iPad.
    CVS Health is making use of digital channels to connect its customers and health practitioners to a services platform that can supplement visits to a retail or clinic location to receive diagnostics and first-hand care.

    From Priorities to Action

    Become your organization’s ESG Expert

    The risks posed to organizations and wider society are becoming more severe, driving a transition from voluntary frameworks for ESG goals to a mandatory one that’s enforced by investors and governments. Organizations will be expected to tie their core activities to a defined set of ESG goals and maintain a balance sheet of their positive and negative impacts. CIOs should become experts in ESG disclosure requirements and recommend the steps needed to meet or exceed competitors’ efforts. If a leadership vacuum for ESG accountability exists, CIOs can either seek to support their peers that are likely to become accountable or take a leadership role in overseeing the area. CIOs should start working toward solutions that deliver real-time reporting on ESG goals to make reporting frictionless.

    “If you don’t have ESG oversight at the highest levels of the company, it won’t wind up getting the focus. That’s why we review it at the Board multiple times per year. We have an annual report, we compare how we did, what we intended to do, where did we fall short, where did we exceed, and where we can run for daylight to do more.” (David Dorman, CVS Health)

    Take the next step

    ESG Disclosures: How Will We Record Status Updates on the World We Are Creating?
    Prepare for the era of mandated environmental, social, and governance disclosures.

    Private Equity and Venture Capital Growing Impact of ESG Report
    Learn about how the growing impact of ESG affects both your organization and IT specifically, including challenges and opportunities, with expert assistance.

    “Business Intelligence and Reporting” gap between importance and effectiveness
    Info-Tech Research Group Management and Governance Diagnostic Benchmark 2021

    A bar chart illustrating the 'BI and Reporting' gap between importance and effectiveness. The difference is marked as Delta 2.4.

    The Five Priorities

    Priorities to compete in the digital economy

    1. Reduce Friction in the Hybrid Operating Model
    2. Improve Your Ransomware Readiness
    3. Support an Employee-Centric Retention Strategy
    4. Design an Automation Platform
    5. Prepare to Report on New Environmental, Social, and Governance Metrics

    Contributing Experts

    Elizabeth Clark

    CIO, Harvard Business School
    Photo of Elizabeth Clark, CIO, Harvard Business School.

    Jeff Previte

    Executive Vice-President of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage
    Photo of Jeff Previte, Executive Vice-President of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage.

    Bob Crozier

    Chief Architect, Allianz Technology & Global Head of Blockchain, Allianz Technology SE
    Photo of Bob Crozier, Chief Architect, Allianz Technology & Global Head of Blockchain, Allianz Technology SE.

    David W. Dorman

    Chairman of the Board, CVS Health
    Photo of David W. Dorman, Chairman of the Board, CVS Health.

    Info-Tech’s internal CIO panel contributors

    • Bryan Tutor
    • John Kemp
    • Mike Schembri
    • Janice Clatterbuck
    • Sandy Silk
    • Sallie Wright
    • David Wallace
    • Ken McGee
    • Mike Tweedie
    • Cole Cioran
    • Kevin Tucker
    • Angelina Atkins
    • Yakov Kofner
    Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor. Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.
    Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.
    Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.

    Thank you for your support

    Logo for the Blockchain Research Institute.
    Blockchain Research Institute

    Bibliography – CIO Priorities 2022

    “2020 Corporate Social Responsibility Report.” CVS Health, 2020, p. 127. Web.

    “Adversary: Doppel Spider - Threat Actor.” Crowdstrike Adversary Universe, 2021. Accessed 29 Dec. 2021.

    “Aetna CVS Health Success Story.” HYPR, n.d. Accessed 6 Feb. 2022.

    Baig, Aamer. “The CIO agenda for the next 12 months: Six make-or-break priorities.” McKinsey Digital, 1 Nov. 2021. Web.

    Ball, Sarah, Kristene Diggins, Nairobi Martindale, Angela Patterson, Anne M. Pohnert, Jacinta Thomas, Tammy Todd, and Melissa Bates. “2020 ANCC Pathway Award® winner.” Wolters Kluwer Health, Inc., 2021. Accessed 6 Feb. 2022.

    “Canadian Universities Propose Designs for a Central Bank Digital Currency.” Bank of Canada, 11 Feb. 2021. Accessed 14 Dec. 2021.

    “Carbon Sequestration in Wetlands.” MN Board of Water and Soil Resources, n.d. Accessed 15 Nov. 2021.

    “CCM Honored as a NorthCoast 99 Award Winner.” CrossCountry Mortgage, 1 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Cheek, Catherine. “Four Things We Learned About the Resignation Wave–and What to Do Next.” Visier Inc. (blog), 5 Oct. 2021. Web.

    “Companies Using Hyperledger Fabric, Market Share, Customers and Competitors.” HG Insights, 2022. Accessed 25 Jan. 2022.

    “IFRS Foundation Announces International Sustainability Standards Board, Consolidation with CDSB and VRF, and Publication of Prototype Disclosure Requirements.” IFRS, 3 Nov. 2021. Web.

    “IT Priorities for 2022: A CIO Report.” Mindsight, 28 Oct. 2021. Web.

    “Job Openings and Labor Turnover Survey.” Databases, Tables & Calculators by Subject, U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, 2022. Accessed 9 Feb. 2022.

    Kumar, Rashmi, and Michael Krigsman. “CIO Planning and Investment Strategy 2022.” CXOTalk, 13 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Leonhardt, Megan. “The Great Resignation Is Hitting These Industries Hardest.” Fortune, 16 Nov. 2021. Accessed 7 Jan. 2022.

    “Most companies align with SDGs – but more to do on assessing progress.” Global Reporting Initiative (GRI), 17 Jan. 2022. Web.

    Navagamuwa, Roshan. “Beyond Passwords: Enhancing Data Protection and Consumer Experience.” LinkedIn, 15 Dec. 2020.

    Ojo, Oluwaseyi. “Achieving Digital Business Transformation Using COBIT 2019.” ISACA, 19 Aug. 2019. Web.

    “Priority.” Lexico.com, Oxford University Press, 2021. Web.

    Riebold, Jan, and Yannick Bartens. “Reinventing the Digital IT Operating Model for the ‘New Normal.’” Capgemini Worldwide, 3 Nov. 2020. Web.

    Samuels, Mark. “The CIO’s next priority: Using the tech budget for growth.” ZDNet, 1 Sept. 2021. Accessed 1 Nov. 2021.

    Sayer, Peter. “Exclusive Survey: CIOs Outline Tech Priorities for 2021-22.” CIO, 5 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Shacklett, Mary E. “Where IT Leaders Are Likely to Spend Budget in 2022.” InformationWeek, 10 Aug. 2021. Web.

    “Table 4. Quits Levels and Rates by Industry and Region, Seasonally Adjusted - 2021 M11 Results.” U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, Economic News Release, 1 Jan. 2022. Accessed 7 Jan. 2022.

    “Technology Priorities CIOs Must Address in 2022.” Gartner, 19 Oct. 2021. Accessed 1 Nov. 2021.

    Thomson, Joel. Technology, Talent, and the Future Workplace: Canadian CIO Outlook 2021. The Conference Board of Canada, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “Trend.” Lexico.com, Oxford University Press, 2021. Web.

    Vellante, Dave. “CIOs signal hybrid work will power tech spending through 2022.” SiliconANGLE, 25 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Whieldon, Esther, and Robert Clark. “ESG funds beat out S&P 500 in 1st year of COVID-19; how 1 fund shot to the top.” S&P Global Market Intelligence, April 2021. Accessed Dec. 2021.

    Mergers & Acquisitions: The Buy Blueprint

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}325|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

    There are four key scenarios or entry points for IT as the acquiring organization in M&As:

    • IT can suggest an acquisition to meet the business objectives of the organization.
    • IT is brought in to strategy plan the acquisition from both the business’ and IT’s perspectives.
    • IT participates in due diligence activities and valuates the organization potentially being acquired.
    • IT needs to reactively prepare its environment to enable the integration.

    Consider the ideal scenario for your IT organization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Acquisitions are inevitable in modern business, and IT’s involvement in the process should be too. This progression is inspired by:

    • The growing trend for organizations to increase, decrease, or evolve through these types of transactions.
    • A maturing business perspective of IT, preventing the difficulty that IT is faced with when invited into the transaction process late.
    • Transactions that are driven by digital motivations, requiring IT’s expertise.
    • There never being such a thing as a true merger, making the majority of M&A activity either acquisitions or divestitures.

    Impact and Result

    Prepare for a growth/integration transaction by:

    • Recognizing the trend for organizations to engage in M&A activity and the increased likelihood that, as an IT leader, you will be involved in a transaction in your career.
    • Creating a standard strategy that will enable strong program management.
    • Properly considering all the critical components of the transaction and integration by prioritizing tasks that will reduce risk, deliver value, and meet stakeholder expectations.

    Mergers & Acquisitions: The Buy Blueprint Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how your organization can excel its growth strategy by engaging in M&A transactions. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Proactive Phase

    Be an innovative IT leader by suggesting how and why the business should engage in an acquisition or divestiture.

    • One-Pager: M&A Proactive
    • Case Study: M&A Proactive
    • Information Asset Audit Tool
    • Data Valuation Tool
    • Enterprise Integration Process Mapping Tool
    • Risk Register Tool
    • Security M&A Due Diligence Tool

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    Create a standardized approach for how your IT organization should address acquisitions.

    • One-Pager: M&A Discovery & Strategy – Buy
    • Case Study: M&A Discovery & Strategy – Buy

    3. Due Diligence & Preparation

    Evaluate the target organizations to minimize risk and have an established integration project plan.

    • One-Pager: M&A Due Diligence & Preparation – Buy
    • Case Study: M&A Due Diligence & Preparation – Buy
    • IT Due Diligence Charter
    • Technical Debt Business Impact Analysis Tool
    • IT Culture Diagnostic
    • M&A Integration Project Management Tool (SharePoint)
    • SharePoint Template: Step-by-Step Deployment Guide
    • M&A Integration Project Management Tool (Excel)
    • Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    Deliver on the integration project plan successfully and communicate IT’s transaction value to the business.

    • One-Pager: M&A Execution & Value Realization – Buy
    • Case Study: M&A Execution & Value Realization – Buy

    Infographic

    Workshop: Mergers & Acquisitions: The Buy Blueprint

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Pre-Transaction Discovery & Strategy

    The Purpose

    Establish the transaction foundation.

    Discover the motivation for acquiring.

    Formalize the program plan.

    Create the valuation framework.

    Strategize the transaction and finalize the M&A strategy and approach.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All major stakeholders are on the same page.

    Set up crucial elements to facilitate the success of the transaction.

    Have a repeatable transaction strategy that can be reused for multiple organizations.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct the CIO Business Vision and CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics.

    1.2 Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.

    1.3 Identify the rationale for the company's decision to pursue an acquisition.

    1.4 Assess the IT/digital strategy.

    1.5 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the acquisition.

    1.6 Create the IT vision and mission statements and identify IT guiding principles and the transition team.

    1.7 Document the M&A governance.

    1.8 Establish program metrics.

    1.9 Create the valuation framework.

    1.10 Establish the integration strategy.

    1.11 Conduct a RACI.

    1.12 Create the communication plan.

    1.13 Prepare to assess target organization(s).

    Outputs

    Business perspectives of IT

    Stakeholder network map for M&A transactions

    Business context implications for IT

    IT’s acquiring strategic direction

    Governance structure

    M&A program metrics

    IT valuation framework

    Integration strategy

    RACI

    Communication plan

    Prepared to assess target organization(s)

    2 Mid-Transaction Due Diligence & Preparation

    The Purpose

    Establish the transaction foundation.

    Discover the motivation for integration.

    Assess the target organization(s).

    Create the valuation framework.

    Plan the integration roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All major stakeholders are on the same page.

    Methodology identified to assess organizations during due diligence.

    Methodology can be reused for multiple organizations.

    Integration activities are planned and assigned.

    Activities

    2.1 Gather and evaluate the stakeholders involved, M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.

    2.2 Review the business rationale for the acquisition.

    2.3 Establish the integration strategy.

    2.4 Create the due diligence charter.

    2.5 Create a list of IT artifacts to be reviewed in the data room.

    2.6 Conduct a technical debt assessment.

    2.7 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.

    2.8 Identify the needed workforce supply.

    2.9 Create the valuation framework.

    2.10 Establish the integration roadmap.

    2.11 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.

    2.12 Estimate integration costs.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder map

    IT strategy assessment

    IT operating model and IT governance structure defined

    Business context implications for IT

    Integration strategy

    Due diligence charter

    Data room artifacts

    Technical debt assessment

    Culture assessment

    Workforce supply identified

    IT valuation framework

    Integration roadmap and associated resourcing

    3 Post-Transaction Execution & Value Realization

    The Purpose

    Establish the transaction foundation.

    Discover the motivation for integration.

    Plan the integration roadmap.

    Prepare employees for the transition.

    Engage in integration.

    Assess the transaction outcomes.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All major stakeholders are on the same page.

    Integration activities are planned and assigned.

    Employees are set up for a smooth and successful transition.

    Integration strategy and roadmap executed to benefit the organization.

    Review what went well and identify improvements to be made in future transactions.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify key stakeholders and determine IT transaction team.

    3.2 Gather and evaluate the M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.

    3.3 Review the business rationale for the acquisition.

    3.4 Establish the integration strategy.

    3.5 Prioritize integration tasks.

    3.6 Establish the integration roadmap.

    3.7 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.

    3.8 Estimate integration costs.

    3.9 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.

    3.10 Identify the needed workforce supply.

    3.11 Create an employee transition plan.

    3.12 Create functional workplans for employees.

    3.13 Complete the integration by regularly updating the project plan.

    3.14 Begin to rationalize the IT environment where possible and necessary.

    3.15 Confirm integration costs.

    3.16 Review IT’s transaction value.

    3.17 Conduct a transaction and integration SWOT.

    3.18 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions.

    Outputs

    M&A transaction team

    Stakeholder map

    IT strategy assessed

    IT operating model and IT governance structure defined

    Business context implications for IT

    Integration strategy

    Integration roadmap and associated resourcing

    Culture assessment

    Workforce supply identified

    Employee transition plan

    Employee functional workplans

    Updated integration project plan

    Rationalized IT environment

    SWOT of transaction

    M&A Buy Playbook refined for future transactions

    Further reading

    Mergers & Acquisitions: The Buy Blueprint

    For IT leaders who want to have a role in the transaction process when their business is engaging in an M&A purchase.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Don’t wait to be invited to the M&A table, make it.

    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Research Analyst, CIO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.
    Brittany Lutes
    Research Analyst,
    CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst, CIO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.
    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst,
    CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    IT has always been an afterthought in the M&A process, often brought in last minute once the deal is nearly, if not completely, solidified. This is a mistake. When IT is brought into the process late, the business misses opportunities to generate value related to the transaction and has less awareness of critical risks or inaccuracies.

    To prevent this mistake, IT leadership needs to develop strong business relationships and gain respect for their innovative suggestions. In fact, when it comes to modern M&A activity, IT should be the ones suggesting potential transactions to meet business needs, specifically when it comes to modernizing the business or adopting digital capabilities.

    IT needs to stop waiting to be invited to the acquisition or divestiture table. IT needs to suggest that the table be constructed and actively work toward achieving the strategic objectives of the business.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    There are four key scenarios or entry points for IT as the acquiring organization in M&As:

    • IT can suggest an acquisition to meet the business objectives of the organization.
    • IT is brought in to strategy plan the acquisition from both the business’ and IT’s perspectives.
    • IT participates in due diligence activities and valuates the organization potentially being acquired.
    • IT needs to reactively prepare its environment to enable the integration.

    Consider the ideal scenario for your IT organization.

    Common Obstacles

    Some of the obstacles IT faces include:

    • IT is often told about the transaction once the deal has already been solidified and is now forced to meet unrealistic business demands.
    • The business does not trust IT and therefore does not approach IT to define value or reduce risks to the transaction process.
    • The people and culture element are forgotten or not given adequate priority.

    These obstacles often arise when IT waits to be invited into the transaction process and misses critical opportunities.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Prepare for a growth/integration transaction by:

    • Recognizing the trend for organizations to engage in M&A activity and the increased likelihood that, as an IT leader, you will be involved in a transaction in your career.
    • Creating a standard strategy that will enable strong program management.
    • Properly considering all the critical components of the transaction and integration by prioritizing tasks that will reduce risk, deliver value, and meet stakeholder expectations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As the number of merger, acquisition, and divestiture transactions continues to increase, so too does IT’s opportunity to leverage the growing digital nature of these transactions and get involved at the onset.

    The changing M&A landscape

    Businesses will embrace more digital M&A transactions in the post-pandemic world

    • When the pandemic occurred, businesses reacted by either pausing (61%) or completely cancelling (46%) deals that were in the mid-transaction state (Deloitte, 2020). The uncertainty made many organizations consider whether the risks would be worth the potential benefits.
    • However, many organizations quickly realized the pandemic is not a hindrance to M&A transactions but an opportunity. Over 16,000 American companies were involved in M&A transactions in the first six months of 2021 (The Economist). For reference, this had been averaging around 10,000 per six months from 2016 to 2020.
    • In addition to this transaction growth, organizations have increasingly been embracing digital. These trends increase the likelihood that, as an IT leader, you will engage in an M&A transaction. However, it is up to you when you get involved in the transactions.

    The total value of transactions in the year after the pandemic started was $1.3 billion – a 93% increase in value compared to before the pandemic. (Nasdaq)

    Virtual deal-making will be the preferred method of 55% of organizations in the post-pandemic world. (Wall Street Journal, 2020)

    Your challenge

    IT is often not involved in the M&A transaction process. When it is, it’s often too late.

    • The most important driver of an acquisition is the ability to access new technology (DLA Piper), and yet 50% of the time, IT isn’t involved in the M&A transaction at all (IMAA Institute, 2017).
    • Additionally, IT’s lack of involvement in the process negatively impacts the business:
      • Most organizations (60%) do not have a standardized approach to integration (Steeves and Associates).
      • Weak integration teams contribute to the failure of 70% of M&A integrations (The Wall Street Journal, 2019).
      • Less than half (47%) of organizations actually experience the positive results sought by the M&A transaction (Steeves and Associates).
    • Organizations pursuing M&A and not involving IT are setting themselves up for failure.

    Only half of M&A deals involve IT (Source: IMAA Institute, 2017)

    Common Obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • IT is rarely afforded the opportunity to participate in the transaction deal. When IT is invited, this often happens later in the process where integration will be critical to business continuity.
    • IT has not had the opportunity to demonstrate that it is a valuable business partner in other business initiatives.
    • One of the most critical elements that IT often doesn’t take the time or doesn’t have the time to focus on is the people and leadership component.
    • IT waits to be invited to the process rather then actively involving themselves and suggesting how value can be added to the process.

    In hindsight, it’s clear to see: Involving IT is just good business.

    47% of senior leaders wish they would have spent more time on IT due diligence to prevent value erosion. (Source: IMAA Institute, 2017)

    40% of acquiring businesses discovered a cybersecurity problem at an acquisition.” (Source: Okta)

    Info-Tech's approach

    Acquisitions & Divestitures Framework

    Acquisitions and divestitures are inevitable in modern business, and IT’s involvement in the process should be too. This progression is inspired by:

    1. The growing trend for organizations to increase, decrease, or evolve through these types of transactions.
    2. Transactions that are driven by digital motivations, requiring IT’s expertise.
    3. A maturing business perspective of IT, preventing the difficulty that IT is faced with when invited into the transaction process late.
    4. There never being such a thing as a true merger, making the majority of M&A activity either acquisitions or divestitures.
    A diagram highlighting the 'IT Executives' Role in Acquisitions and Divestitures' when they are integrated at different points in the 'Core Business Timeline'. There are four main entry points 'Proactive', 'Discovery and Strategy', 'Due Diligence and Preparation', and 'Execution and Value Realized'. It is highlighted that IT can and should start at 'Proactive', but most organizations start at 'Execution and Value Realized'. 'Proactive': suggest opportunities to evolve the organization; prove IT's value and engage in growth opportunities early. Innovators start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Proactive' are 'Organization strategies are defined' and 'M and A is considered to enable strategy'. After a buy or sell transaction is initiated is 'Discovery and Strategy': pre-transaction state. If it is a Buy transaction, 'Establish IT's involvement and approach'. If it is a Sell transaction, 'Prepare to engage in negotiations'. Business Partners start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Discovery and Strategy' are 'Searching criteria is set', 'Potential candidates are considered', and 'LOI is sent/received'. 'Due Diligence and Preparation': mid-transaction state. If it is a Buy transaction, 'Identify potential transaction benefits and risks'. If it is a Sell transaction, 'Comply, communicate, and collaborate in transaction'. Trusted Operators start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Due Diligence and Preparation' are 'Due diligence engagement occurs', 'Final agreement is reached', and 'Preparation for transaction execution occurs'. 'Execution and Value Realization': post-transaction state. If it is a Buy transaction, 'Integrate the IT environments and achieve business value'. If it is a Sell transaction, 'Separate the IT environment and deliver on transaction terms'. Firefighters start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Execution and Value Realization' are 'Staff and operations are addressed appropriately', 'Day 1 of implementation and integration activities occurs', '1st 100 days of new entity state occur' and 'Ongoing risk mitigating and value creating activities occur'.

    The business’ view of IT will impact how soon IT can get involved

    There are four key entry points for IT

    A colorful visualization of the four key entry points for IT and a fifth not-so-key entry point. Starting from the top: 'Innovator', Information and Technology as a Competitive Advantage, 90% Satisfaction; 'Business Partner', Effective Delivery of Strategic Business Projects, 80% Satisfaction; 'Trusted Operator', Enablement of Business Through Application and Work Orders, 70% Satisfaction; 'Firefighter', Reliable Infrastructure and IT Service Desk, 60% Satisfaction; and then 'Unstable', Inability to Consistently Deliver Basic Services, <60% Satisfaction.
    1. Innovator: IT suggests an acquisition to meet the business objectives of the organization.
    2. Business Partner: IT is brought in to strategy plan the acquisition from both the business’ and IT’s perspective.
    3. Trusted Operator: IT participates in due diligence activities and valuates the organization potentially being acquired.
    4. Firefighter: IT reactively engages in the integration with little time to prepare.

    Merger, acquisition, and divestiture defined

    Merger

    A merger looks at the equal combination of two entities or organizations. Mergers are rare in the M&A space, as the organizations will combine assets and services in a completely equal 50/50 split. Two organizations may also choose to divest business entities and merge as a new company.

    Acquisition

    The most common transaction in the M&A space, where an organization will acquire or purchase another organization or entities of another organization. This type of transaction has a clear owner who will be able to make legal decisions regarding the acquired organization.

    Divestiture

    An organization may decide to sell partial elements of a business to an acquiring organization. They will separate this business entity from the rest of the organization and continue to operate the other components of the business.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A true merger does not exist, as there is always someone initiating the discussion. As a result, most M&A activity falls into acquisition or divestiture categories.

    Buying vs. selling

    The M&A process approach differs depending on whether you are the executive IT leader on the buy side or sell side

    This blueprint is only focused on the buy side:

    • More than two organizations could be involved in a transaction.
    • Examples of buy-related scenarios include:
      • Your organization is buying another organization with the intent of having the purchased organization keep its regular staff, operations, and location. This could mean minimal integration is required.
      • Your organization is buying another organization in its entirety with the intent of integrating it into your original company.
      • Your organization is buying components of another organization with the intent of integrating them into your original company.
    • As the purchasing organization, you will probably be initiating the purchase and thus will be valuating the selling organization during due diligence and leading the execution plan.

    The sell side is focused on:

    • Examples of sell-related scenarios include:
      • Your organization is selling to another organization with the intent of keeping its regular staff, operations, and location. This could mean minimal separation is required.
      • Your organization is selling to another organization with the intent of separating to be a part of the purchasing organization.
      • Your organization is engaging in a divestiture with the intent of:
        • Separating components to be part of the purchasing organization permanently.
        • Separating components to be part of a spinoff and establish a unit as a standalone new company.
    • As the selling organization, you could proactively seek out suitors to purchase all or components of your organization, or you could be approached by an organization.

    For more information on divestitures or selling your entire organization, check out Info-Tech’s Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint.

    Core business timeline

    For IT to be valuable in M&As, you need to align your deliverables and your support to the key activities the business and investors are working on.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Buying Organizations in Mergers, Acquisitions, or Divestitures

    1. Proactive

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    3. Due Diligence & Preparation

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    Phase Steps

    1. Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    2. Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    3. Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities
    1. Establish the M&A Program Plan
    2. Prepare IT to Engage in the Acquisition
    1. Assess the Target Organization
    2. Prepare to Integrate
    1. Execute the Transaction
    2. Reflection and Value Realization

    Phase Outcomes

    Be an innovative IT leader by suggesting how and why the business should engage in an acquisition or divestiture.

    Create a standardized approach for how your IT organization should address acquisitions.

    Evaluate the target organizations successfully and establish an integration project plan.

    Deliver on the integration project plan successfully and communicate IT’s transaction value to the business.

    Potential metrics for each phase

    1. Proactive

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    3. Due Diligence & Preparation

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    • % Share of business innovation spend from overall IT budget
    • % Critical processes with approved performance goals and metrics
    • % IT initiatives that meet or exceed value expectation defined in business case
    • % IT initiatives aligned with organizational strategic direction
    • % Satisfaction with IT's strategic decision-making abilities
    • $ Estimated business value added through IT-enabled innovation
    • % Overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT
    • % Percent of business leaders that view IT as an Innovator
    • % IT budget as a percent of revenue
    • % Assets that are not allocated
    • % Unallocated software licenses
    • # Obsolete assets
    • % IT spend that can be attributed to the business (chargeback or showback)
    • % Share of CapEx of overall IT budget
    • % Prospective organizations that meet the search criteria
    • $ Total IT cost of ownership (before and after M&A, before and after rationalization)
    • % Business leaders that view IT as a Business Partner
    • % Defects discovered in production
    • $ Cost per user for enterprise applications
    • % In-house-built applications vs. enterprise applications
    • % Owners identified for all data domains
    • # IT staff asked to participate in due diligence
    • Change to due diligence
    • IT budget variance
    • Synergy target
    • % Satisfaction with the effectiveness of IT capabilities
    • % Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • $ Impact of vendor SLA breaches
    • $ Savings through cost-optimization efforts
    • $ Savings through application rationalization and technology standardization
    • # Key positions empty
    • % Frequency of staff turnover
    • % Emergency changes
    • # Hours of unplanned downtime
    • % Releases that cause downtime
    • % Incidents with identified problem record
    • % Problems with identified root cause
    • # Days from problem identification to root cause fix
    • % Projects that consider IT risk
    • % Incidents due to issues not addressed in the security plan
    • # Average vulnerability remediation time
    • % Application budget spent on new build/buy vs. maintenance (deferred feature implementation, enhancements, bug fixes)
    • # Time (days) to value realization
    • % Projects that realized planned benefits
    • $ IT operational savings and cost reductions that are related to synergies/divestitures
    • % IT staff–related expenses/redundancies
    • # Days spent on IT integration
    • $ Accurate IT budget estimates
    • % Revenue growth directly tied to IT delivery
    • % Profit margin growth

    The IT executive’s role in the buying transaction is critical

    And IT leaders have a greater likelihood than ever of needing to support a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.

    1. Reduced Risk

      IT can identify risks that may go unnoticed when IT is not involved.
    2. Increased Accuracy

      The business can make accurate predictions around the costs, timelines, and needs of IT.
    3. Faster Integration

      Faster integration means faster value realization for the business.
    4. Informed Decision Making

      IT leaders hold critical information that can support the business in moving the transaction forward.
    5. Innovation

      IT can suggest new opportunities to generate revenue, optimize processes, or reduce inefficiencies.

    The IT executive’s critical role is demonstrated by:

    • Reduced Risk

      47% of senior leaders wish they would have spent more time on IT due diligence to prevent value erosion (IMAA Institute, 2017).
    • Increased Accuracy

      87% of respondents to a Deloitte survey effectively conducted a virtual deal, with a focus on cybersecurity and integration (Deloitte, 2020).
    • Faster Integration

      Integration costs range from as low as $4 million to as high as $3.8 billion, making the process an investment for the organization (CIO Dive).
    • Informed Decision Making

      Only 38% of corporate and 22% of private equity firms include IT as a significant aspect in their transaction approach (IMAA Institute, 2017).
    • Innovation

      Successful CIOs involved in M&As can spend 70% of their time on aspects outside of IT and 30% of their time on technology and delivery (CIO).

    Playbook benefits

    IT Benefits

    • IT will be seen as an innovative partner to the business, and its suggestions and involvement in the organization will lead to benefits, not hindrances.
    • Develop a streamlined method to valuate the potential organization being purchased and ensure risk management concerns are brought to the business’ attention immediately.
    • Create a comprehensive list of items that IT needs to do during the integration that can be prioritized and actioned.

    Business Benefits

    • The business will get accurate and relevant information about the organization being acquired, ensuring that the anticipated value of the transaction is correctly planned for.
    • Fewer business interruptions will happen, because IT can accurately plan for and execute the high-priority integration tasks.
    • The business can make a fair offer to the purchased organization, having properly valuated all aspects being bought, including the IT environment.

    Insight summary

    Overarching Insight

    As an IT executive, take control of when you get involved in a growth transaction. Do this by proactively identifying acquisition targets, demonstrating the value of IT, and ensuring that integration of IT environments does not lead to unnecessary and costly decisions.

    Proactive Insight

    CIOs on the forefront of digital transformation need to actively look for and suggest opportunities to acquire or partner on new digital capabilities to respond to rapidly changing business needs.

    Discovery & Strategy Insight

    IT organizations that have an effective M&A program plan are more prepared for the buying transaction, enabling a successful outcome. A structured strategy is particularly necessary for organizations expected to deliver M&As rapidly and frequently.

    Due Diligence & Preparation Insight

    Most IT synergies can be realized in due diligence. It is more impactful to consider IT processes and practices (e.g. contracts and culture) in due diligence rather than later in the integration.

    Execution & Value Realization Insight

    IT needs to realize synergies within the first 100 days of integration. The most successful transactions are when IT continuously realizes synergies a year after the transaction and beyond.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Key Deliverable: M&A Buy Playbook

    The M&A Buy Playbook should be a reusable document that enables your IT organization to successfully deliver on any acquisition transaction.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Buy Playbook' deliverable.

    M&A Buy One-Pager

    See a one-page overview of each phase of the transaction.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Buy One-Pagers' deliverable.

    M&A Buy Case Studies

    Read a one-page case study for each phase of the transaction.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Buy Case Studies' deliverable.

    M&A Integration Project Management Tool (SharePoint)

    Manage the integration process of the acquisition using this SharePoint template.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Integration Project Management Tool (SharePoint)' deliverable.

    M&A Integration Project Management Tool (Excel)

    Manage the integration process of the acquisition using this Excel tool if you can’t or don’t want to use SharePoint.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Integration Project Management Tool (Excel)' deliverable.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 6 to 10 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

      Proactive Phase

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.
    • Discovery & Strategy Phase

    • Call #2: Determine stakeholders and their perspectives of IT.
    • Call #3: Identify how M&A could support business strategy and how to communicate.
    • Due Diligence & Preparation Phase

    • Call #4: Establish a transaction team and acquisition strategic direction.
    • Call #5: Create program metrics and identify a standard integration strategy.
    • Call #6: Assess the potential organization(s).
    • Call #7: Identify the integration program plan.
    • Execution & Value Realization Phase

    • Call #8: Establish employee transitions to retain key staff.
    • Call #9: Assess IT’s ability to deliver on the acquisition transaction.

    The Buy Blueprint

    Phase 1

    Proactive

    Phase 1

    Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Acquisition
    • 3.1 Assess the Target Organization
    • 3.2 Prepare to Integrate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic
    • Conduct the CIO Business Vision diagnostic
    • Visualize relationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers
    • Group stakeholders into categories
    • Prioritize your stakeholders
    • Plan to communicate
    • Valuate IT
    • Assess the IT/digital strategy
    • Determine pain points and opportunities
    • Align goals to opportunities
    • Recommend growth opportunities

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT and business leadership

    What is the Proactive phase?

    Embracing the digital drivers

    As the number of merger, acquisition, or divestiture transactions driven by digital means continues to increase, IT has an opportunity to not just be involved in a transaction but actively seek out potential deals.

    In the Proactive phase, the business is not currently considering a transaction. However, the business could consider one to reach its strategic goals. IT organizations that have developed respected relationships with the business leaders can suggest these potential transactions.

    Understand the business’ perspective of IT, determine who the critical M&A stakeholders are, valuate the IT environment, and examine how it supports the business goals in order to suggest an M&A transaction.

    In doing so, IT isn’t waiting to be invited to the transaction table – it’s creating it.

    Goal: To support the organization in reaching its strategic goals by suggesting M&A activities that will enable the organization to reach its objectives faster and with greater-value outcomes.

    Proactive Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Proactive phase, you should have addressed the following:

    • Understand what mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures are.
    • Understand what mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures mean for the business.
    • Understand what mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures mean for IT.

    Review the Executive Brief for more information on mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures for purchasing organizations.

    Proactive

    Step 1.1

    Identify M&A Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT

    Activities

    • 1.1.1 Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic
    • 1.1.2 Conduct the CIO Business Vision diagnostic
    • 1.1.3 Visualize relationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers
    • 1.1.4 Group stakeholders into categories
    • 1.1.5 Prioritize your stakeholders
    • 1.16 Plan to communicate

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leader
    • IT leadership
    • Critical M&A stakeholders

    Outcomes of Step

    Understand how the business perceives IT and establish strong relationships with critical M&A stakeholders.

    Business executives' perspectives of IT

    Leverage diagnostics and gain alignment on IT’s role in the organization

    • To suggest or get involved with a merger, acquisition, or divestiture, the IT executive leader needs to be well respected by other members of the executive leadership team and the business.
    • Specifically, the Proactive phase relies on the IT organization being viewed as an Innovator within the business.
    • Identify how the CEO/business executive currently views IT and where they would like IT to move within the Maturity Ladder.
    • Additionally, understand how other critical department leaders view IT and how they view the partnership with IT.
    A colorful visualization titled 'Maturity Ladder' detailing levels of IT function that a business may choose from based on the business executives' perspectives of IT. Starting from the bottom: 'Struggle', Does not embarrass, Does not crash; 'Support', Keeps business happy, Keeps costs low; 'Optimize', Increases efficiency, Decreases costs; 'Expand', Extends into new business, Generates revenue; 'Transform', Creates new industry.

    Misalignment in target state requires further communication between the CIO and CEO to ensure IT is striving toward an agreed-upon direction.

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision (CIO BV) diagnostic measures a variety of high-value metrics to provide a well-rounded understanding of stakeholder satisfaction with IT.

    Sample of Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision diagnostic measuring percentages of high-value metrics like 'IT Satisfaction' and 'IT Value' regarding business leader satisfaction. A note for these two reads 'Evaluate business leader satisfaction with IT this year and last year'. A section titled 'Relationship' has metrics such as 'Understands Needs' and 'Trains Effectively'. A note for this section reads 'Examine indicators of the relationship between IT and the business'. A section titled 'Security Friction' has metrics such as 'Regulatory Compliance-Driven' and 'Office/Desktop Security'.

    Business Satisfaction and Importance for Core Services

    The core services of IT are important when determining what IT should focus on. The most important services with the lowest satisfaction offer the largest area of improvement for IT to drive business value.

    Sample of Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision diagnostic specifically comparing the business satisfaction of 12 core services with their importance. Services listed include 'Service Desk', 'IT Security', 'Requirements Gathering', 'Business Apps', 'Data Quality', and more. There is a short description of the services, a percentage for the business satisfaction with the service, a percentage comparing it to last year, and a numbered ranking of importance for each service. A note reads 'Assess satisfaction and importance across 12 core IT capabilities'.

    1.1.1 Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic

    2 weeks

    Input: IT organization expertise and the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic

    Output: An understanding of an executive business stakeholder’s perception of IT

    Materials: CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Business executive/CEO

    1. The CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic can be a powerful input. Speak with your Info-Tech account representative to conduct the diagnostic. Use the results to inform current IT capabilities.
    2. You may choose to debrief the results of your diagnostic with an Info-Tech analyst. We recommend this to help your team understand how to interpret and draw conclusions from the results.
    3. Examine the results of the survey and note where there might be specific capabilities that could be improved.
    4. Determine whether there are any areas of significant disagreement between the you and the CEO. Mark down those areas for further conversations. Additionally, take note of areas that could be leveraged to support growth transactions or support your rationale in recommending growth transactions.

    Download the sample report.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    1.1.2 Conduct the CIO Business Vision diagnostic

    2 weeks

    Input: IT organization expertise, CIO BV diagnostic

    Output: An understanding of business stakeholder perception of certain IT capabilities and services

    Materials: CIO Business Vision diagnostic, Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Senior business leaders

    1. The CIO Business Vision (CIO BV) diagnostic can be a powerful tool for identifying IT capability focus areas. Speak with your account representative to conduct the CIO BV diagnostic. Use the results to inform current IT capabilities.
    2. You may choose to debrief the results of your diagnostic with an Info-Tech analyst. We recommend this to help your team understand how to interpret the results and draw conclusions from the diagnostic.
    3. Examine the results of the survey and take note of any IT services that have low scores.
    4. Read through the diagnostic comments and note any common themes. Especially note which stakeholders identified they have a favorable relationship with IT and which stakeholders identified they have an unfavorable relationship. For those who have an unfavorable relationship, identify if they will have a critical role in a growth transaction.

    Download the sample report.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Create a stakeholder network map for M&A transactions

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Example:

    Diagram of stakeholders and their relationships with other stakeholders, such as 'Board Members', 'CFO/Finance', 'Compliance', etc. with 'CIO/IT Leader' highlighted in the middle. There are unidirectional black arrows and bi-directional green arrows indicating each connection.

      Legend
    • Black arrows indicate the direction of professional influence
    • Dashed green arrows indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape that the M&A transaction will occur within. This will identify who holds various levels of accountability and decision-making authority when a transaction does take place.

    Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantial relationships with your stakeholders.

    1.1.3 Visualize relationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of M&A stakeholders

    Output: Relationships among M&A stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership

    1. The purpose of this activity is to list all the stakeholders within your organization that will have a direct or indirect impact on the M&A transaction.
    2. Determine the critical stakeholders, and then determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
      • Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
      • Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps IT leaders categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership in the merger, acquisition, or divestiture process.

    A prioritization map of stakeholder categories split into four quadrants. The vertical axis is 'Influence', from low on the bottom to high on top. The horizontal axis is 'Ownership/Interest', from low on the left to high on the right. 'Spectators' are low influence, low ownership/interest. 'Mediators' are high influence, low ownership/interest. 'Noisemakers' are low influence, high ownership/interest. 'Players' are high influence, high ownership/interest.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.

    Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.

    Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.

    Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    1.1.4 Group stakeholders into categories

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder map, Stakeholder list

    Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Stakeholders

    1. Identify your stakeholders’ interest in and influence on the M&A process as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model to the right to determine each stakeholder’s category.

    Same prioritization map of stakeholder categories as before. This one has specific stakeholders mapped onto it. 'CFO' is mapped as low interest and middling influence, between 'Mediator' and 'Spectator'. 'CIO' is mapped as higher than average interest and high influence, a 'Player'. 'Board Member' is mapped as high interest and high influence, a 'Player'.

    Level of Influence
    • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
    • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
    • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
    • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
    • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.
    Level of Interest

    How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Level of Support

    Supporter

    Evangelist

    Neutral

    Blocker

    Stakeholder Category Player Critical High High Critical
    Mediator Medium Low Low Medium
    Noisemaker High Medium Medium High
    Spectator Low Irrelevant Irrelevant Low

    Consider the three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by answering the following question: How significant is that stakeholder to the M&A or divestiture process?

    These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive your focused attention.

    1.1.5 Prioritize your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder matrix

    Output: Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership, M&A/divestiture stakeholders

    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: How significant is that stakeholder to the M&A transaction process?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.

    Stakeholder

    Category

    Level of Support

    Prioritization

    CMO Spectator Neutral Irrelevant
    CIO Player Supporter Critical

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    A revisit to the map of stakeholder categories, but with strategies listed for each one, and arrows on the side instead of an axis. The vertical arrow is 'Authority', which increases upward, and the horizontal axis is Ownership/Interest which increases as it moves to the right. The strategy for 'Players' is 'Engage', for 'Mediators' is 'Satisfy', for 'Noisemakers' is 'Inform', and for 'Spectators' is 'Monitor'.

    Type

    Quadrant

    Actions

    Players High influence, high interest – actively engage Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence, low interest – keep satisfied They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence, high interest – keep informed Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence, low interest – monitor They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying stakeholder groups, the IT executive leader can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers while ensuring the needs of Mediators and Players are met.

    1.1.6 Plan to communicate

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder priority, Stakeholder categorization, Stakeholder influence

    Output: Stakeholder communication plan

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership, M&A/divestiture stakeholders

    The purpose of this activity is to make a communication plan for each of the stakeholders identified in the previous activities, especially those who will have a critical role in the M&A transaction process.

    1. In the M&A Buy Playbook, input the type of influence each stakeholder has on IT, how they would be categorized in the M&A process, and their level of priority. Use this information to create a communication plan.
    2. Determine the methods and frequency of communication to keep the necessary stakeholder satisfied and maintain or enhance IT’s profile within the organization.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Proactive

    Step 1.2

    Assess IT’s Current Value and Method to Achieve a Future State

    Activities

    • 1.2.1 Valuate IT
    • 1.2.2 Assess the IT/digital strategy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leader
    • IT leadership
    • Critical stakeholders to M&A

    Outcomes of Step

    Identify critical opportunities to optimize IT and meet strategic business goals through a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.

    How to valuate your IT environment

    And why it matters so much

    • Valuating your current organization’s IT environment is a critical step that all IT organizations should take, whether involved in an M&A or not, to fully understand what it might be worth.
    • The business investments in IT can be directly translated into a value amount. For every $1 invested in IT, the business might be gaining $100 in value back or possibly even loosing $100.
    • Determining, documenting, and communicating this information ensures that the business takes IT’s suggestions seriously and recognizes why investing in IT is so critical.
    • There are three ways a business or asset can be valuated:
      • Cost Approach: Look at the costs associated with building, purchasing, replacing, and maintaining a given aspect of the business.
      • Market Approach: Look at the relative value of a particular aspect of the business. Relative value can fluctuate and depends on what the markets and consequently society believe that particular element is worth.
      • Discounted Cash Flow Approach: Focus on what the potential value of the business could be or the intrinsic value anticipated due to future profitability.
    • (Source: “Valuation Methods,” Corporate Finance Institute)

    Four ways to create value through digital

    1. Reduced costs
    2. Improved customer experience
    3. New revenue sources
    4. Better decision making
    5. (Source: McKinsey & Company)

    1.2.1 Valuate IT

    1 day

    Input: Valuation of data, Valuation of applications, Valuation of infrastructure and operations, Valuation of security and risk

    Output: Valuation of IT

    Materials: Relevant templates/tools listed on the following slides, Capital budget, Operating budget, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership

    The purpose of this activity is to demonstrate that IT is not simply an operational functional area that diminishes business resources. Rather, IT contributes significant value to the business.

    1. Review each of the following slides to valuate IT’s data, applications, infrastructure and operations, and security and risk. These valuations consider several tangible and intangible factors and result in a final dollar amount.
    2. Input the financial amounts identified for each critical area into a summary slide. Use this information to determine where IT is delivering value to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consistency is key when valuating your IT organization as well as other IT organizations throughout the transaction process.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Data valuation

    Data valuation identifies how you monetize the information that your organization owns.

    Create a data value chain for your organization

    When valuating the information and data that exists in an organization, there are many things to consider.

    Info-Tech has two tools that can support this process:

    1. Information Asset Audit Tool: Use this tool first to take inventory of the different information assets that exist in your organization.
    2. Data Valuation Tool: Once information assets have been accounted for, valuate the data that exists within those information assets.

    Data Collection

    Insight Creation

    Value Creation

    Data Valuation

    01 Data Source
    02 Data Collection Method
    03 Data
    04 Data Analysis
    05 Insight
    06 Insight Delivery
    07 Consumer
    08 Value in Data
    09 Value Dimension
    10 Value Metrics Group
    11 Value Metrics
    Screenshots of Tab 2 of Info-Tech's Data Valuation Tool.

    Instructions

    1. Using the Data Valuation Tool, start gathering information based on the eight steps above to understand your organization’s journey from data to value.
    2. Identify the data value spectrum. (For example: customer sales service, citizen licensing service, etc.)
    3. Fill out the columns for data sources, data collection, and data first.
    4. Capture data analysis and related information.
    5. Then capture the value in data.
    6. Add value dimensions such as usage, quality, and economic dimensions.
      • Remember that economic value is not the only dimension, and usage/quality has a significant impact on economic value.
    7. Collect evidence to justify your data valuation calculator (market research, internal metrics, etc.).
    8. Finally, calculate the value that has a direct correlation with underlying value metrics.

    Application valuation

    Calculate the value of your IT applications

    When valuating the applications and their users in an organization, consider using a business process map. This shows how business is transacted in the company by identifying which IT applications support these processes and which business groups have access to them. Info-Tech has a business process mapping tool that can support this process:

    • Enterprise Integration Process Mapping Tool: Complete this tool first to map the different business processes to the supporting applications in your organization.

    Instructions

    1. Start by calculating user costs. This is the product of the (# of users) × (% of time spent using IT) × (fully burdened salary).
    2. Identify the revenue per employee and divide that by the average cost per employee to calculate the derived productivity ratio (DPR).
    3. Once you have calculated the user costs and DPR, multiply those total values together to get the application value.
    4. User Costs

      Total User Costs

      Derived Productivity Ratio (DPR)

      Total DPR

      Application Value

      # of users % time spent using IT Fully burdened salary Multiply values from the 3 user costs columns Revenue per employee Average cost per employee (Revenue P.E) ÷ (Average cost P.E) (User costs) X (DPR)

    5. Once the total application value is established, calculate the combined IT and business costs of delivering that value. IT and business costs include inflexibility (application maintenance), unavailability (downtime costs, including disaster exposure), IT costs (common costs statistically allocated to applications), and fully loaded cost of active (full-time equivalent [FTE]) users.
    6. Calculate the net value of applications by subtracting the total IT and business costs from the total application value calculated in step 3.
    7. IT and Business Costs

      Total IT and Business Costs

      Net Value of Applications

      Application maintenance Downtime costs (include disaster exposure) Common costs allocated to applications Fully loaded costs of active (FTE) users Sum of values from the four IT and business costs columns (Application value) – (IT and business costs)

    (Source: CSO)

    Infrastructure valuation

    Assess the foundational elements of the business’ information technology

    The purpose of this exercise is to provide a high-level infrastructure valuation that will contribute to valuating your IT environment.

    Calculating the value of the infrastructure will require different methods depending on the environment. For example, a fully cloud-hosted organization will have different costs than a fully on-premises IT environment.

    Instructions:

    1. Start by listing all of the infrastructure-related items that are relevant to your organization.
    2. Once you have finalized your items column, identify the total costs/value of each item.
      • For example, total software costs would include servers and storage.
    3. Calculate the total cost/value of your IT infrastructure by adding all of values in the right column.

    Item

    Costs/Value

    Hardware Assets Total Value +$3.2 million
    Hardware Leased/Service Agreement -$
    Software Purchased +$
    Software Leased/Service Agreement -$
    Operational Tools
    Network
    Disaster Recovery
    Antivirus
    Data Centers
    Service Desk
    Other Licenses
    Total:

    For additional support, download the M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations.

    Risk and security

    Assess risk responses and calculate residual risk

    The purpose of this exercise is to provide a high-level risk assessment that will contribute to valuating your IT environment. For a more in-depth risk assessment, please refer to the Info-Tech tools below:

    1. Risk Register Tool
    2. Security M&A Due Diligence Tool

    Instructions

    1. Review the probability and impact scales below and ensure you have the appropriate criteria that align to your organization before you conduct a risk assessment.
    2. Identify the probability of occurrence and estimated financial impact for each risk category detail and fill out the table on the right. Customize the table as needed so it aligns to your organization.
    3. Probability of Risk Occurrence

      Occurrence Criteria
      (Classification; Probability of Risk Event Within One Year)

      Negligible Very Unlikely; ‹20%
      Very Low Unlikely; 20 to 40%
      Low Possible; 40 to 60%
      Moderately Low Likely; 60 to 80%
      Moderate Almost Certain; ›80%

    Note: If needed, you can customize this scale with the severity designations that you prefer. However, make sure you are always consistent with it when conducting a risk assessment.

    Financial & Reputational Impact

    Budgetary and Reputational Implications
    (Financial Impact; Reputational Impact)

    Negligible (‹$10,000; Internal IT stakeholders aware of risk event occurrence)
    Very Low ($10,000 to $25,000; Business customers aware of risk event occurrence)
    Low ($25,000 to $50,000; Board of directors aware of risk event occurrence)
    Moderately Low ($50,000 to $100,000; External customers aware of risk event occurrence)
    Moderate (›$100,000; Media coverage or regulatory body aware of risk event occurrence)

    Risk Category Details

    Probability of Occurrence

    Estimated Financial Impact

    Estimated Severity (Probability X Impact)

    Capacity Planning
    Enterprise Architecture
    Externally Originated Attack
    Hardware Configuration Errors
    Hardware Performance
    Internally Originated Attack
    IT Staffing
    Project Scoping
    Software Implementation Errors
    Technology Evaluation and Selection
    Physical Threats
    Resource Threats
    Personnel Threats
    Technical Threats
    Total:

    1.2.2 Assess the IT/digital strategy

    4 hours

    Input: IT strategy, Digital strategy, Business strategy

    Output: An understanding of an executive business stakeholder’s perception of IT, Alignment of IT/digital strategy and overall organization strategy

    Materials: Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Business executive/CEO

    The purpose of this activity is to review the business and IT strategies that exist to determine if there are critical capabilities that are not being supported.

    Ideally, the IT and digital strategies would have been created following development of the business strategy. However, sometimes the business strategy does not directly call out the capabilities it requires IT to support.

    1. On the left half of the corresponding slide in the M&A Buy Playbook, document the business goals, initiatives, and capabilities. Input this information from the business or digital strategies. (If more space for goals, initiatives, or capabilities is needed, duplicate the slide).
    2. On the other half of the slide, document the IT goals, initiatives, and capabilities. Input this information from the IT strategy and digital strategy.

    For additional support, see Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Proactive

    Step 1.3

    Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities

    Activities

    • 1.3.1 Determine pain points and opportunities
    • 1.3.2 Align goals with opportunities
    • 1.3.3 Recommend growth opportunities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leader
    • IT leadership
    • Critical M&A stakeholders

    Outcomes of Step

    Establish strong relationships with critical M&A stakeholders and position IT as an innovative business partner that can suggest growth opportunities.

    1.3.1 Determine pain points and opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic, CIO Business Vision diagnostic, Valuation of IT environment, IT-business goals cascade

    Output: List of pain points or opportunities that IT can address

    Materials: Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business stakeholders

    The purpose of this activity is to determine the pain points and opportunities that exist for the organization. These can be external or internal to the organization.

    1. Identify what opportunities exist for your organization. Opportunities are the potential positives that the organization would want to leverage.
    2. Next, identify pain points, which are the potential negatives that the organization would want to alleviate.
    3. Spend time considering all the options that might exist, and keep in mind what has been identified previously.

    Opportunities and pain points can be trends, other departments’ initiatives, business perspectives of IT, etc.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    1.3.2 Align goals with opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic, CIO Business Vision diagnostic, Valuation of IT environment, IT-business goals cascade, List of pain points and opportunities

    Output: An understanding of an executive business stakeholder’s perception of IT, Foundations for growth strategy

    Materials: Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business stakeholders

    The purpose of this activity is to determine whether a growth or separation strategy might be a good suggestion to the business in order to meet its business objectives.

    1. For the top three to five business goals, consider:
      1. Underlying drivers
      2. Digital opportunities
      3. Whether a growth or reduction strategy is the solution
    2. Just because a growth or reduction strategy is a solution for a business goal does not necessarily indicate M&A is the way to go. However, it is important to consider before you pursue suggesting M&A.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    1.3.3 Recommend growth opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: Growth or separation strategy opportunities to support business goals, Stakeholder communication plan, Rationale for the suggestion

    Output: M&A transaction opportunities suggested

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Business executive/CEO

    The purpose of this activity is to recommend a merger, acquisition, or divestiture to the business.

    1. Identify which of the business goals the transaction would help solve and why IT is the one to suggest such a goal.
    2. Leverage the stakeholder communication plan identified previously to give insight into stakeholders who would have a significant level of interest, influence, or support in the process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    With technology and digital driving many transactions, leverage this opening and begin the discussions with your business on how and why an acquisition would be a great opportunity.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    By the end of this Proactive phase, you should:

    Be prepared to suggest M&A opportunities to support your company’s goals through growth or acquisition transactions

    Key outcome from the Proactive phase

    Develop progressive relationships and strong communication with key stakeholders to suggest or be aware of transformational opportunities that can be achieved through growth or reduction strategies such as mergers, acquisitions, or divestitures.

    Key deliverables from the Proactive phase
    • Business perspective of IT examined
    • Key stakeholders identified and relationship to the M&A process outlined
    • Ability to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT’s value to the business
    • Assessment of the business, digital, and IT strategies and how M&As could support those strategies
    • Pain points and opportunities that could be alleviated or supported through an M&A transaction
    • Acquisition or buying recommendations

    The Buy Blueprint

    Phase 2

    Discovery & Strategy

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3Phase 4
    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Acquisition
    • 3.1 Assess the Target Organization
    • 3.2 Prepare to Integrate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create the mission and vision
    • Identify the guiding principles
    • Create the future-state operating model
    • Determine the transition team
    • Document the M&A governance
    • Create program metrics
    • Establish the integration strategy
    • Conduct a RACI
    • Create the communication plan
    • Assess the potential organization(s)

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish the Transaction FoundationDiscover the Motivation for AcquiringFormalize the Program PlanCreate the Valuation FrameworkStrategize the TransactionNext Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    • 0.1 Conduct the CIO Business Vision and CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostics
    • 0.2 Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process
    • 0.3 Identify the rationale for the company's decisions to pursue an acquisition
    • 1.1 Review the business rationale for the acquisition
    • 1.2 Assess the IT/digital strategy
    • 1.3 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the acquisition
    • 1.4 Create the IT vision statement, create the IT mission statement, and identify IT guiding principles
    • 2.1 Create the future-state operating model
    • 2.2 Determine the transition team
    • 2.3 Document the M&A governance
    • 2.4 Establish program metrics
    • 3.1 Valuate your data
    • 3.2 Valuate your applications
    • 3.3 Valuate your infrastructure
    • 3.4 Valuate your risk and security
    • 3.5 Combine individual valuations to make a single framework
    • 4.1 Establish the integration strategy
    • 4.2 Conduct a RACI
    • 4.3 Review best practices for assessing target organizations
    • 4.4 Create the communication plan
    • 5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    • 5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Business perspectives of IT
    2. Stakeholder network map for M&A transactions
    1. Business context implications for IT
    2. IT’s acquisition strategic direction
    1. Operating model for future state
    2. Transition team
    3. Governance structure
    4. M&A program metrics
    1. IT valuation framework
    1. Integration strategy
    2. RACI
    3. Communication plan
    1. Completed M&A program plan and strategy
    2. Prepared to assess target organization(s)

    What is the Discovery & Strategy phase?

    Pre-transaction state

    The Discovery & Strategy phase during an acquisition is a unique opportunity for many IT organizations. IT organizations that can participate in the acquisition transaction at this stage are likely considered a strategic partner of the business.

    For one-off acquisitions, IT being invited during this stage of the process is rare. However, for organizations that are preparing to engage in many acquisitions over the coming years, this type of strategy will greatly benefit from IT involvement. Again, the likelihood of participating in an M&A transaction is increasing, making it a smart IT leadership decision to, at the very least, loosely prepare a program plan that can act as a strategic pillar throughout the transaction.

    During this phase of the pre-transaction state, IT will also be asked to participate in ensuring that the potential organization being sought will be able to meet any IT-specific search criteria that was set when the transaction was put into motion.

    Goal: To identify a repeatable program plan that IT can leverage when acquiring all or parts of another organization’s IT environment, ensuring customer satisfaction and business continuity

    Discovery & Strategy Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Discovery & Strategy phase, you should have addressed the following:

    • Understand the business perspective of IT.
    • Know the key stakeholders and have outlined their relationships to the M&A process.
    • Be able to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT's value to the business.
    • Understand the rationale for the company's decisions to pursue an acquisition and the opportunities or pain points the acquisition should address.

    Discovery & Strategy

    Step 2.1

    Establish the M&A Program Plan

    Activities

    • 2.1.1 Create the mission and vision
    • 2.1.2 Identify the guiding principles
    • 2.1.3 Create the future-state operating model
    • 2.1.4 Determine the transition team
    • 2.1.5 Document the M&A governance
    • 2.1.6 Create program metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Establish an M&A program plan that can be repeated across acquisitions.

    The vision and mission statements clearly articulate IT’s aspirations and purpose

    The IT vision statement communicates a desired future state of the IT organization, whereas the IT mission statement portrays the organization’s reason for being. While each serves its own purpose, they should both be derived from the business context implications for IT.

    Vision Statements

    Mission Statements

    Characteristics

    • Describe a desired future
    • Focus on ends, not means
    • Concise
    • Aspirational
    • Memorable
    • Articulate a reason for existence
    • Focus on how to achieve the vision
    • Concise
    • Easy to grasp
    • Sharply focused
    • Inspirational

    Samples

    To be a trusted advisor and partner in enabling business innovation and growth through an engaged IT workforce. (Source: Business News Daily) IT is a cohesive, proactive, and disciplined team that delivers innovative technology solutions while demonstrating a strong customer-oriented mindset. (Source: Forbes, 2013)

    2.1.1 Create the mission and vision statements

    2 hours

    Input: Business objectives, IT capabilities, Rationale for the transaction

    Output: IT’s mission and vision statements for growth strategies tied to mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create mission and vision statements that reflect IT’s intent and method to support the organization as it pursues a growth strategy.

    1. Review the definitions and characteristics of mission and vision statements.
    2. Brainstorm different versions of the mission and vision statements.
    3. Edit the statements until you get to a single version of each that accurately reflects IT’s role in the growth process.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Guiding principles provide a sense of direction

    IT guiding principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of IT in constructing, transforming, and operating the enterprise by informing and restricting IT investment portfolio management, solution development, and procurement decisions.

    A diagram illustrating the place of 'IT guiding principles' in the process of making 'Decisions on the use of IT'. There are four main items, connecting lines naming the type of process in getting from one step to the next, and a line underneath clarifying the questions asked at each step. On the far left, over the question 'What decisions should be made?', is 'Business context and IT implications'. This flows forward to 'IT guiding principles', and they are connected by 'Influence'. Next, over the question 'How should decisions be made?', is the main highlighted section. 'IT guiding principles' flows forward to 'Decisions on the use of IT', and they are connected by 'Guide and inform'. On the far right, over the question 'Who has the accountability and authority to make decisions?', is 'IT policies'. This flows back to 'Decisions on the use of IT', and they are connected by 'Direct and control'.

    IT principles must be carefully constructed to make sure they are adhered to and relevant

    Info-Tech has identified a set of characteristics that IT principles should possess. These characteristics ensure the IT principles are relevant and followed in the organization.

    Approach focused. IT principles should be focused on the approach – how the organization is built, transformed, and operated – as opposed to what needs to be built, which is defined by both functional and non-functional requirements.

    Business relevant. Create IT principles that are specific to the organization. Tie IT principles to the organization’s priorities and strategic aspirations.

    Long lasting. Build IT principles that will withstand the test of time.

    Prescriptive. Inform and direct decision making with actionable IT principles. Avoid truisms, general statements, and observations.

    Verifiable. If compliance can’t be verified, people are less likely to follow the principle.

    Easily Digestible. IT principles must be clearly understood by everyone in IT and by business stakeholders. IT principles aren’t a secret manuscript of the IT team. IT principles should be succinct; wordy principles are hard to understand and remember.

    Followed. Successful IT principles represent a collection of beliefs shared among enterprise stakeholders. IT principles must be continuously communicated to all stakeholders to achieve and maintain buy-in.

    In organizations where formal policy enforcement works well, IT principles should be enforced through appropriate governance processes.

    Consider the example principles below

    IT Principle Name

    IT Principle Statement

    1. Risk Management We will ensure that the organization’s IT Risk Management Register is properly updated to reflect all potential risks and that a plan of action against those risks has been identified.
    2. Transparent Communication We will ensure employees are spoken to with respect and transparency throughout the transaction process.
    3. Integration for Success We will create an integration strategy that enables the organization and clearly communicates the resources required to succeed.
    4. Managed Data We will handle data creation, modification, integration, and use across the enterprise in compliance with our data governance policy.
    5. Establish a single IT Environment We will identify, prioritize, and manage the applications and services that IT provides in order to eliminate redundant technology and maximize the value that users and customers experience.
    6. Compliance With Laws and Regulations We will operate in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations for both our organization and the potentially purchased organization.
    7. Defined Value We will create a plan of action that aligns with the organization’s defined value expectations.
    8. Network Readiness We will ensure that employees and customers have immediate access to the network with minimal or no outages.
    9. Operating to Succeed We will bring all of IT into a central operating model within two years of the transaction.

    2.1.2 Identify the guiding principles

    2 hours

    Input: Business objectives, IT capabilities, Rationale for the transaction, Mission and vision statements

    Output: IT’s guiding principles for growth strategies tied to mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create the guiding principles that will direct the IT organization throughout the growth strategy process.

    1. Review the role of guiding principles and the examples of guiding principles that organizations have used.
    2. Brainstorm different versions of the guiding principles. Each guiding principle should start with the phrase “We will…”
    3. Edit and consolidate the statements until you have a list of approximately eight to ten statements that accurately reflect IT’s role in the growth process.
    4. Review the guiding principles every six months to ensure they continue to support the delivery of the business’ growth strategy goals.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Create two IT teams to support the transaction

    IT M&A Transaction Team

    • The IT M&A Transaction Team should consist of the strongest members of the IT team who can be expected to deliver on unusual or additional tasks not asked of them in normal day-to-day operations.
    • The roles selected for this team will have very specific skills sets or deliver on critical integration capabilities, making their involvement in the combination of two or more IT environments paramount.
    • These individuals need to have a history of proving themselves very trustworthy, as they will likely be required to sign an NDA as well.
    • Expect to have to certain duplicate capabilities or roles across the M&A transaction team and operational team.

    IT Operational Team

    • This group is responsible for ensuring the business operations continue.
    • These employees might be those who are newer to the organization but can be counted on to deliver consistent IT services and products.
    • The roles of this team should ensure that end users or external customers remain satisfied.

    Key capabilities to support M&A

    Consider the following capabilities when looking at who should be a part of the M&A transaction team.

    Employees who have a significant role in ensuring that these capabilities are being delivered will be a top priority.

    Infrastructure

    • Systems Integration
    • Data Management

    Business Focus

    • Service-Level Management
    • Enterprise Architecture
    • Stakeholder Management
    • Project Management

    Risk & Security

    • Privacy Management
    • Security Management
    • Risk & Compliance Management

    Build a lasting and scalable operating model

    An operating model is an abstract visualization, used like an architect’s blueprint, that depicts how structures and resources are aligned and integrated to deliver on the organization’s strategy.

    It ensures consistency of all elements in the organizational structure through a clear and coherent blueprint before embarking on detailed organizational design.

    The visual should highlight which capabilities are critical to attaining strategic goals and clearly show the flow of work so that key stakeholders can understand where inputs flow in and outputs flow out of the IT organization.

    As you assess the current operating model, consider the following:

    • Does the operating model contain all the necessary capabilities your IT organization requires to be successful?
    • What capabilities should be duplicated?
    • Are there individuals with the skill set to support those roles? If not, is there a plan to acquire or develop those skills?
    • A dedicated project team strictly focused on M&A is great. However, is it feasible for your organization? If not, what blockers exist?
    A diagram with 'Initiatives' and 'Solutions' on the left and right of an area chart, 'Customer' at the top, the area between them labelled 'Functional Area n', and six horizontal bars labelled 'IT Capability' stacked on top of each other. The 'IT Capability' bars are slightly skewed to the 'Solutions' side of the chart.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Investing time up-front getting the operating model right is critical. This will give you a framework to rationalize future organizational changes, allowing you to be more iterative and allowing your model to change as the business changes.

    2.1.3 Create the future-state operating model

    4 hours

    Input: Current operating model, IT strategy, IT capabilities, M&A-specific IT capabilities, Business objectives, Rationale for the transaction, Mission and vision statements

    Output: Future-state operating model

    Materials: Operating model, Capability overlay, Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to establish what the future-state operating model will be if your organization needs to adjust to support a growth transaction.

    1. Ensuring that all the IT capabilities are identified by the business and IT strategy, document your organization’s current operating model.
    2. Identify what core capabilities would be critical to the buying transaction process and integration. Highlight and make copies of those capabilities in the M&A Buy Playbook.
    3. Arrange the capabilities to clearly show the flow of inputs and outputs. Identify critical stakeholders of the process (such as customers or end users) if that will help the flow.
    4. Ensure the capabilities that will be decentralized are clearly identified. Decentralized capabilities do not exist within the central IT organization but rather in specific lines of businesses or products to better understand needs and deliver on the capability.

    An example operating model is included in the M&A Buy Playbook. This process benefits from strong reference architecture and capability mapping ahead of time.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    2.1.4 Determine the transition team

    3 hours

    Input: IT capabilities, Future-state operating model, M&A-specific IT capabilities, Business objectives, Rationale for the transaction, Mission and vision statements

    Output: Transition team

    Materials: Reference architecture, Organizational structure, Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a team that will support your IT organization throughout the transaction. Determining which capabilities and therefore which roles will be required ensures that the business will continue to get the operational support it needs.

    1. Based on the outcome of activity 2.1.3, review the capabilities that your organization will require on the transition team. Group capabilities into functional groups containing capabilities that are aligned well with one another because they have similar responsibilities and functionalities.
    2. Replace the capabilities with roles. For example, stakeholder management, requirements gathering, and project management might be one functional group. Project management and stakeholder management might combine to create a project manager role.
    3. Review the examples in the M&A Buy Playbook and identify which roles will be a part of the transition team.

    For more information, see Redesign Your Organizational Structure

    What is governance?

    And why does it matter so much to IT and the M&A process?

    • Governance is the method in which decisions get made, specifically as they impact various resources (time, money, and people).
    • Because M&A is such a highly governed transaction, it is important to document the governance bodies that exist in your organization.
    • This will give insight into what types of governing bodies there are, what decisions they make, and how that will impact IT.
    • For example, funds to support integration need to be discussed, approved, and supplied to IT from a governing body overseeing the acquisition.
    • A highly mature IT organization will have automated governance, while a seemingly non-existent governance process will be considered ad hoc.
    A pyramid with four levels representing the types of governing bodies that are available with differing levels of IT maturity. An arrow beside the pyramid points upward. The bottom of the arrow is labelled 'Traditional (People and document centric)' and the top is labelled 'Adaptive (Data centric)'. Starting at the bottom of the pyramid is level 1 'Ad Hoc Governance', 'Governance that is not well defined or understood within the organization. It occurs out of necessity but often not by the right people'. Level 2 is 'Controlled Governance', 'Governance focused on compliance and decisions driven by hierarchical authority. Levels of authority are defined and often driven by regulatory'. Level 3 is 'Agile Governance', 'Governance that is flexible to support different needs and quick response in the organization. Driven by principles and delegated throughout the company'. At the top of the pyramid is level 4 'Automated Governance', 'Governance that is entrenched and automated into organizational processes and product/service design. Empowered and fully delegated governance to maintain fit and drive organizational success and survival'.

    2.1.5 Document M&A governance

    1-2 hours

    Input: List of governing bodies, Governing body committee profiles, Governance structure

    Output: Documented method on how decisions are made as it relates to the M&A transaction

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine the method in which decisions are made throughout the M&A transaction as it relates to IT. This will require understanding both governing bodies internal to IT and those external to IT.

    1. First, determine the other governance structures within the organization that will impact the decisions made about M&A. List out these bodies or committees.
    2. Create a profile for each committee that looks at the membership, purpose of the committee, decision areas (authority), and the process of inputs and outputs. Ensure IT committees that will have a role in this process are also documented. Consider the benefits realized, risks, and resources required for each.
    3. Organize the committees into a structure, identifying the committees that have a role in defining the strategy, designing and building, and running.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Current-state structure map – definitions of tiers

    Strategy: These groups will focus on decisions that directly connect to the strategic direction of the organization.

    Design & Build: The second tier of groups will oversee prioritization of a certain area of governance as well as design and build decisions that feed into strategic decisions.

    Run: The lowest level of governance will be oversight of more-specific initiatives and capabilities within IT.

    Expect tier overlap. Some committees will operate in areas that cover two or three of these governance tiers.

    Measure the IT program’s success in terms of its ability to support the business’ M&A goals

    Upper management will measure IT’s success based on your ability to support the underlying reasons for the M&A. Using business metrics will help assure business stakeholders that IT understands their needs and is working with the business to achieve them.

    Business-Specific Metrics

    • Revenue Growth: Increase in the top line as seen by market expansion, product expansion, etc. by percentage/time.
    • Synergy Extraction: Reduction in costs as determined by the ability to identify and eliminate redundancies over time.
    • Profit Margin Growth: Increase in the bottom line as a result of increased revenue growth and/or decreased costs over time.

    IT-Specific Metrics

    • IT operational savings and cost reductions due to synergies: Operating expenses, capital expenditures, licenses, contracts, applications, infrastructure over time.
    • Reduction in IT staff expense and headcount: Decreased budget allocated to IT staff, and ability to identify and remove redundancies in staff.
    • Meeting or improving on IT budget estimates: Delivering successful IT integration on a budget that is the same or lower than the budget estimated during due diligence.
    • Meeting or improving on IT time-to-integration estimates: Delivering successful IT integration on a timeline that is the same or shorter than the timeline estimated during due diligence.
    • Business capability support: Delivering the end state of IT that supports the expected business capabilities and growth.

    Establish your own metrics to gauge the success of IT

    Establish SMART M&A Success Metrics

    S pecific Make sure the objective is clear and detailed.
    M easurable Objectives are measurable if there are specific metrics assigned to measure success. Metrics should be objective.
    A ctionable Objectives become actionable when specific initiatives designed to achieve the objective are identified.
    R ealistic Objectives must be achievable given your current resources or known available resources.
    T ime-Bound An objective without a timeline can be put off indefinitely. Furthermore, measuring success is challenging without a timeline.
    • What should IT consider when looking to identify potential additions, deletions, or modifications that will either add value to the organization or reduce costs/risks?
    • Provide a definition of synergies.
    • IT operational savings and cost reductions due to synergies: Operating expenses, capital expenditures, licenses, contracts, applications, infrastructure.
    • Reduction in IT staff expense and headcount: Decreased budget allocated to IT staff, and ability to identify and remove redundancies in staff.
    • Meeting or improving on IT budget estimates: Delivering successful IT integration on a budget that is the same or lower than the budget estimated during due diligence.
    • Meeting or improving on IT time-to-integration estimates: Delivering successful IT integration on a timeline that is the same or shorter than the timeline estimated during due diligence.
    • Revenue growth: Increase in the top line as a result, as seen by market expansion, product expansion, etc.
    • Synergy extraction: Reduction in costs, as determined by the ability to identify and eliminate redundancies.
    • Profit margin growth: Increase in the bottom line as a result of increased revenue growth and/or decreased costs.

    Metrics for each phase

    1. Proactive

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    3. Valuation & Due Diligence

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    • % Share of business innovation spend from overall IT budget
    • % Critical processes with approved performance goals and metrics
    • % IT initiatives that meet or exceed value expectation defined in business case
    • % IT initiatives aligned with organizational strategic direction
    • % Satisfaction with IT's strategic decision-making abilities
    • $ Estimated business value added through IT-enabled innovation
    • % Overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT
    • % Percent of business leaders that view IT as an Innovator
    • % IT budget as a percent of revenue
    • % Assets that are not allocated
    • % Unallocated software licenses
    • # Obsolete assets
    • % IT spend that can be attributed to the business (chargeback or showback)
    • % Share of CapEx of overall IT budget
    • % Prospective organizations that meet the search criteria
    • $ Total IT cost of ownership (before and after M&A, before and after rationalization)
    • % Business leaders that view IT as a Business Partner
    • % Defects discovered in production
    • $ Cost per user for enterprise applications
    • % In-house-built applications vs. enterprise applications
    • % Owners identified for all data domains
    • # IT staff asked to participate in due diligence
    • Change to due diligence
    • IT budget variance
    • Synergy target
    • % Satisfaction with the effectiveness of IT capabilities
    • % Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • $ Impact of vendor SLA breaches
    • $ Savings through cost-optimization efforts
    • $ Savings through application rationalization and technology standardization
    • # Key positions empty
    • % Frequency of staff turnover
    • % Emergency changes
    • # Hours of unplanned downtime
    • % Releases that cause downtime
    • % Incidents with identified problem record
    • % Problems with identified root cause
    • # Days from problem identification to root cause fix
    • % Projects that consider IT risk
    • % Incidents due to issues not addressed in the security plan
    • # Average vulnerability remediation time
    • % Application budget spent on new build/buy vs. maintenance (deferred feature implementation, enhancements, bug fixes)
    • # Time (days) to value realization
    • % Projects that realized planned benefits
    • $ IT operational savings and cost reductions that are related to synergies/divestitures
    • % IT staff–related expenses/redundancies
    • # Days spent on IT integration
    • $ Accurate IT budget estimates
    • % Revenue growth directly tied to IT delivery
    • % Profit margin growth

    2.1.6 Create program metrics

    1-2 hours

    Input: IT capabilities, Mission, vision, and guiding principles, Rationale for the acquisition

    Output: Program metrics to support IT throughout the M&A process

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine how IT’s success throughout a growth transaction will be measured and determined.

    1. Document a list of appropriate metrics on the whiteboard. Remember to include metrics that demonstrate the business impact. You can use the sample metrics listed on the previous slide as a starting point.
    2. Set a target and deadline for each metric. This will help the group determine when it is time to evaluate progression.
    3. Establish a baseline for each metric based on information collected within your organization.
    4. Assign an owner for tracking each metric as well as someone to be accountable for performance.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Discovery & Strategy

    Step 2.2

    Prepare IT to Engage in the Acquisition

    Activities

    • 2.2.1 Establish the integration strategy
    • 2.2.2 Conduct a RACI
    • 2.2.3 Create the communication plan
    • 2.2.4 Assess the potential organization(s)

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Identify IT’s plan of action when it comes to the acquisition and align IT’s integration strategy with the business’ M&A strategy.

    Integration strategies

    There are several IT integration strategies that will help you achieve your target technology environment.

    IT Integration Strategies
    • Absorption. Convert the target organization’s strategy, structure, processes, and/or systems to that of the acquiring organization.
    • Best-of-Breed. Pick and choose the most effective people, processes, and technologies to form an efficient operating model.
    • Transformation Retire systems from both organizations and use collective capabilities, data, and processes to create something entirely new.
    • Preservation Retain individual business units that will operate within their own capability. People, processes, and technologies are unchanged.

    The approach IT takes will depend on the business objectives for the M&A.

    • Generally speaking, the integration strategy is well understood and influenced by the frequency of and rationale for acquiring.
    • Based on the initiatives generated by each business process owner, you need to determine the IT integration strategy that will best support the desired target technology environment.

    Key considerations when choosing an IT integration strategy include:

    • What are the main business objectives of the M&A?
    • What are the key synergies expected from the transaction?
    • What IT integration best helps obtain these benefits?
    • What opportunities exist to position the business for sustainable growth?

    Absorption and best-of-breed

    Review highlights and drawbacks of absorption and best-of-breed integration strategies

    Absorption
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses striving to reduce costs and drive efficiency gains.
    • Economies of scale realized through consolidation and elimination of redundant applications.
    • Quickest path to a single company operation and systems as well as lower overall IT cost.
      Drawbacks
    • Potential for disruption of the target company’s business operations.
    • Requires significant business process changes.
    • Disregarding the target offerings altogether may lead to inferior system decisions that do not yield sustainable results.
    Best-of-Breed
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses looking to expand their market presence or acquire new products. Essentially aligning the two organizations in the same market.
    • Each side has a unique offering but complementing capabilities.
    • Potential for better buy-in from the target because some of their systems are kept, resulting in willingness to
      Drawbacks
    • May take longer to integrate because it tends to present increased complexity that results in higher costs and risks.
    • Requires major integration efforts from both sides of the company. If the target organization is uncooperative, creating the desired technology environment will be difficult.

    Transformation and preservation

    Review highlights and drawbacks of transformation and preservation integration strategies

    Transformation
      Highlights
    • This is the most customized approach, although it is rarely used.
    • It is essential to have an established long-term vision of business capabilities when choosing this path.
    • When executed correctly, this approach presents potential for significant upside and creation of sustainable competitive advantages.
      Drawbacks
    • This approach requires extensive time to implement, and the cost of integration work may be significant.
    • If a new system is created without strategic capabilities, the organizations will not realize long-term benefits.
    • The cost of correcting complexities at later stages in the integration effort may be drastic.
    Preservation
      Highlights
    • This approach is appropriate if the merging organizations will remain fairly independent, if there will be limited or no communication between companies, and if the companies’ market strategies, products, and channels are entirely distinct.
    • Environment can be accomplished quickly and at a low cost.
      Drawbacks
    • Impact to each business is minimal, but there is potential for lost synergies and higher operational costs. This may be uncontrollable if the natures of the two businesses are too different to integrate.
    • Reduced benefits and limited opportunities for IT integration.

    2.2.1 Establish the integration strategy

    1-2 hours

    Input: Business integration strategy, Guiding principles, M&A governance

    Output: IT’s integration strategy

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine IT’s approach to integration. The approach might differ slightly from transaction to transaction. However, the business’ approach to transactions should give insight into the general integration strategy IT should adopt.

    1. Make sure you have clearly articulated the business objectives for the M&A, the technology end state for IT, and the magnitude of the overall integration.
    2. Review and discuss the highlights and drawbacks of each type of integration.
    3. Use Info-Tech’s Integration Posture Selection Framework on the next slide to select the integration posture that will appropriately enable the business. Consider these questions during your discussion:
      1. What are the main business objectives of the M&A? What key IT capabilities will need to support business objectives?
      2. What key synergies are expected from the transaction? What opportunities exist to position the business for sustainable growth?
      3. What IT integration best helps obtain these benefits?

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Integration Posture Selection Framework

    Business M&A Strategy

    Resultant Technology Strategy

    M&A Magnitude (% of Acquirer Assets, Income, or Market Value)

    IT Integration Posture

    A. Horizontal Adopt One Model ‹10% Absorption
    10 to 75% Absorption or Best-of-Breed
    ›75% Best-of-Breed
    B. Vertical Create Links Between Critical Systems Any
    • Preservation (Differentiated Functions)
    • Absorption or Best-of-Breed (Non-Differentiated Functions)
    C. Conglomerate Independent Model Any Preservation
    D. Hybrid: Horizontal & Conglomerate Independent Model Any Preservation

    2.2.2 Conduct a RACI

    1-2 hours

    Input: IT capabilities, Transition team, Integration strategy

    Output: Completed RACI for transition team

    Materials: Reference architecture, Organizational structure, Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to identify the core accountabilities and responsibilities for the roles identified as critical to your transition team. While there might be slight variation from transaction to transaction, ideally each role should be performing certain tasks.

    1. First, identify a list of critical tasks that need to be completed to support the purchase or acquisition. For example:
      • Communicate with the company M&A team.
      • Identify critical IT risks that could impact the organization after the transaction.
      • Identify key artifacts to collect and review during due diligence.
    2. Next, identify at the activity level which role is accountable or responsible for each activity. Enter an A for accountable, R for responsible, or A/R for both.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Communication and change

    Prepare key stakeholders for the potential changes

    • Anytime you are starting a project or program that will depend on users and stakeholders to give up their old way of doing things, change will force people to become novices again, leading to lost productivity and added stress.
    • Change management can improve outcomes for any project where you need people to adopt new tools and procedures, comply with new policies, learn new skills and behaviors, or understand and support new processes.
    • M&As move very quickly, and it can be very difficult to keep track of which stakeholders you need to be communicating with and what you should be communicating.
    • Not all organizations embrace or resist change in the same ways. Base your change communications on your organization’s cultural appetite for change in general.
      • Organizations with a low appetite for change will require more direct, assertive communications.
      • Organizations with a high appetite for change are more suited to more open, participatory approaches.

    Three key dimensions determine the appetite for cultural change:

    • Power Distance. Refers to the acceptance that power is distributed unequally throughout the organization.
      In organizations with a high power distance, the unequal power distribution is accepted by the less powerful employees.
    • Individualism. Organizations that score high in individualism have employees who are more independent. Those who score low in individualism fall into the collectivism side, where employees are strongly tied to one another or their groups.
    • Uncertainty Avoidance. Describes the level of acceptance that an organization has toward uncertainty. Those who score high in this area find that their employees do not favor uncertain situations, while those that score low in this area find that their employees are comfortable with change and uncertainty.

    2.2.3 Create the communication plan

    1-2 hours

    Input: IT’s M&A mission, vision, and guiding principles, M&A transition team, IT integration strategy, RACI

    Output: IT’s M&A communication plan

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, RACI, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a communication plan that IT can leverage throughout the initiative.

    1. Create a structured communication plan that allows for continuous communication with the integration management office, senior management, and the business functional heads.
    2. Outline key topics of communication, with stakeholders, inputs, and outputs for each topic.
    3. Review Info-Tech’s example communication plan in the M&A Buy Playbook and update it with relevant information.
    4. Does this communication plan make sense for your organization? What doesn’t make sense? Adjust the communication guide to suit your organization.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Assessing potential organizations

    As soon as you have identified organizations to consider, it’s imperative to assess critical risks. Most IT leaders can attest that they will receive little to no notice when they have to assess the IT organization of a potential purchase. As a result, having a standardized template to quickly gauge the value of the business can be critical.

    Ways to Assess

    1. News: Assess what sort of news has been announced in relation to the organization. Have they had any risk incidents? Has a critical vendor announced working with them?
    2. LinkedIn: Scan through the LinkedIn profiles of employees. This will give you a sense of what platforms they have based on their employees.
    3. Trends: Some industries will have specific solutions that are relevant and popular. Assess what the key players are (if you don’t already know) to determine the solution.
    4. Business Architecture: While this assessment won’t perfect, try to understand the business’ value streams and the critical business and IT capabilities that would be needed to support them.

    2.2.4 Assess the potential organization(s)

    1-2 hours

    Input: Publicized historical risk events, Solutions and vendor contracts likely in the works, Trends

    Output: IT’s valuation of the potential organization(s) for acquisition

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the organization(s) that your organization is considering purchasing.

    1. Complete the Historical Valuation Worksheet in the M&A Buy Playbook to understand the type of IT organization that your company may inherit and need to integrate with.
      • The business likely isn’t looking for in-depth details at this time. However, as the IT leader, it is your responsibility to ensure critical risks are identified and communicated to the business.
    2. Use the information identified to help the business narrow down which organizations should be targeted for the acquisition.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    By the end of this pre-transaction phase you should:

    Have a program plan for M&As and a repeatable M&A strategy for IT when engaging in growth transactions

    Key outcomes from the Discovery & Strategy phase
    • Be prepared to analyze and recommend potential organizations that the business can acquire or merge with, using a strong program plan that can be repeated across transactions.
    • Create a M&A strategy that accounts for all the necessary elements of a transaction and ensures sufficient governance, capabilities, and metrics exist.
    Key deliverables from the Discovery & Strategy phase
    • Create vision and mission statements
    • Establish guiding principles
    • Create a future-state operating model
    • Identify the key roles for the transaction team
    • Identify and communicate the M&A governance
    • Determine target metrics
    • Identify the M&A operating model
    • Select the integration strategy framework
    • Conduct a RACI for key transaction tasks for the transaction team
    • Document the communication plan

    M&A Buy Blueprint

    Phase 3

    Due Diligence & Preparation

    Phase 1Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4
    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Acquisition
    • 3.1 Assess the Target Organization
    • 3.2 Prepare to Integrate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Drive value with a due diligence charter
    • Identify data room artifacts
    • Assess technical debt
    • Valuate the target IT organization
    • Assess culture
    • Prioritize integration tasks
    • Establish the integration roadmap
    • Identify the needed workforce supply
    • Estimate integration costs
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Create functional workplans for employees
    • Align project metrics with identified tasks

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team
    • Business leaders
    • Prospective IT organization
    • Transition team

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish the Transaction FoundationDiscover the Motivation for IntegrationAssess the Target Organization(s)Create the Valuation FrameworkPlan the Integration RoadmapNext Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    • 0.1 Identify the rationale for the company's decisions to pursue an acquisition.
    • 0.2 Identify key stakeholders and determine the IT transaction team.
    • 0.3 Gather and evaluate the M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.
    • 1.1 Review the business rationale for the acquisition.
    • 1.2 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the acquisition.
    • 1.3 Establish the integration strategy.
    • 1.4 Create the due diligence charter.
    • 2.1 Create a list of IT artifacts to be reviewed in the data room.
    • 2.2 Conduct a technical debt assessment.
    • 2.3 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.
    • 2.4 Identify the needed workforce supply.
    • 3.1 Valuate the target organization’s data.
    • 3.2 Valuate the target organization’s applications.
    • 3.3 Valuate the target organization’s infrastructure.
    • 3.4 Valuate the target organization’s risk and security.
    • 3.5 Combine individual valuations to make a single framework.
    • 4.1 Prioritize integration tasks.
    • 4.2 Establish the integration roadmap.
    • 4.3 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.
    • 4.4 Estimate integration costs.
    • 5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.
    • 5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. IT strategy
    2. IT operating model
    3. IT governance structure
    4. M&A transaction team
    1. Business context implications for IT
    2. Integration strategy
    3. Due diligence charter
    1. Data room artifacts
    2. Technical debt assessment
    3. Culture assessment
    4. Workforce supply identified
    1. IT valuation framework to assess target organization(s)
    1. Integration roadmap and associated resourcing
    1. Acquisition integration strategy for IT

    What is the Due Diligence & Preparation phase?

    Mid-transaction state

    The Due Diligence & Preparation phase during an acquisition is a critical time for IT. If IT fails to proactively participate in this phase, IT will have to merely react to integration expectations set by the business.

    While not all IT organizations are able to participate in this phase, the evolving nature of M&As to be driven by digital and technological capabilities increases the rationale for IT being at the table. Identifying critical IT risks, which will inevitably be business risks, begins during the due diligence phase.

    This is also the opportunity for IT to plan how it will execute the planned integration strategy. Having access to critical information only available in data rooms will further enable IT to successfully plan and execute the acquisition to deliver the value the business is seeking through a growth transaction.

    Goal: To thoroughly evaluate all potential risks associated with the organization(s) being pursued and create a detailed plan for integrating the IT environments

    Due Diligence Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Due Diligence & Preparation phase, you must have addressed the following:

    • Understand the rationale for the company's decisions to pursue an acquisition and what opportunities or pain points the acquisition should alleviate.
    • Identify the key roles for the transaction team.
    • Identify the M&A governance.
    • Determine target metrics.
    • Select an integration strategy framework.
    • Conduct a RACI for key transaction tasks for the transaction team.

    Before coming into the Due Diligence & Preparation phase, we recommend addressing the following:

    • Create vision and mission statements.
    • Establish guiding principles.
    • Create a future-state operating model.
    • Identify the M&A operating model.
    • Document the communication plan.
    • Examine the business perspective of IT.
    • Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.
    • Be able to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT’s value to the business.

    The Technology Value Trinity

    Delivery of Business Value & Strategic Needs

    • Digital & Technology Strategy
      The identification of objectives and initiatives necessary to achieve business goals.
    • IT Operating Model
      The model for how IT is organized to deliver on business needs and strategies.
    • Information & Technology Governance
      The governance to ensure the organization and its customers get maximum value from the use of information and technology.

    All three elements of the Technology Value Trinity work in harmony to deliver business value and achieve strategic needs. As one changes, the others need to change as well.

    • Digital and IT Strategy tells you what you need to achieve to be successful.
    • IT Operating Model and Organizational Design is the alignment of resources to deliver on your strategy and priorities.
    • Information & Technology Governance is the confirmation of IT’s goals and strategy, which ensures the alignment of IT and business strategy. It’s the mechanism by which you continuously prioritize work to ensure that what is delivered is in line with the strategy. This oversight evaluates, directs, and monitors the delivery of outcomes to ensure that the use of resources results in the achieving the organization’s goals.

    Too often strategy, operating model and organizational design, and governance are considered separate practices. As a result, “strategic documents” end up being wish lists, and projects continue to be prioritized based on who shouts the loudest – not based on what is in the best interest of the organization.

    Due Diligence & Preparation

    Step 3.1

    Assess the Target Organization

    Activities

    • 3.1.1 Drive value with a due diligence charter
    • 3.1.2 Identify data room artifacts
    • 3.1.3 Assess technical debt
    • 3.1.4 Valuate the target IT organization
    • 3.1.5 Assess culture

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team
    • Business leaders
    • Prospective IT organization
    • Transition team

    Outcomes of Step

    This step of the process is when IT should actively evaluate the target organization being pursued for acquisition.

    3.1.1 Drive value with a due diligence charter

    1-2 hours

    Input: Key roles for the transaction team, M&A governance, Target metrics, Selected integration strategy framework, RACI of key transaction tasks for the transaction team

    Output: IT Due Diligence Charter

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a charter leveraging the items completed in the previous phase, as listed on the Due Diligence Prerequisite Checklist slide, to gain executive sign-off.

    1. In the IT Due Diligence Charter in the M&A Buy Playbook, complete the aspects of the charter that are relevant for you and your organization.
    2. We recommend including these items in the charter:
      • Communication plan
      • Transition team roles
      • Goals and metrics for the transaction
      • Integration strategy
      • Acquisition RACI
    3. Once the charter has been completed, ensure that business executives agree to the charter and sign off on the plan of action.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    3.1.2 Identify data room artifacts

    4 hours

    Input: Future-state operating model, M&A governance, Target metrics, Selected integration strategy framework, RACI of key transaction tasks for the transaction team

    Output: List of items to acquire and review in the data room

    Materials: Critical domain lists on following slides, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a list of the key artifacts that should be asked for and reviewed during the due diligence process.

    1. Review the lists on the following pages as a starting point. Identify which domains, stakeholders, artifacts, and information should be requested for the data room. This information should be directed to the target organization.
    2. IT leadership may or may not be asked to enter the data room directly. Therefore, it’s important that you clearly identify these artifacts.
    3. List each question or concern, select the associated workstream in the M&A Buy Playbook, and update the status of the information retrieval.
    4. Use the comments section to document your discoveries or concerns.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Critical domains

    Understand the key stakeholders and outputs for each domain

    Each critical domain will likely have different stakeholders who know that domain best. Communicate with these stakeholders throughout the M&A process to make sure you are getting accurate information and interpreting it correctly.

    Domain

    Stakeholders

    Key Artifacts

    Key Information to request

    Business
    • Enterprise Architecture
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Business Process Owners
    • Business capability map
    • Capability map (the M&A team should be taking care of this, but make sure it exists)
    • Business satisfaction with various IT systems and services
    Leadership/IT Executive
    • CIO
    • CTO
    • CISO
    • IT budgets
    • IT capital and operating budgets (from current year and previous year)
    Data & Analytics
    • Chief Data Officer
    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Master data domains, system of record for each
    • Unstructured data retention requirements
    • Data architecture
    • Master data domains, sources, and storage
    • Data retention requirements
    Applications
    • Applications Manager
    • Application Portfolio Manager
    • Application Architect
    • Applications map
    • Applications inventory
    • Applications architecture
    • Copy of all software license agreements
    • Copy of all software maintenance agreements
    Infrastructure
    • Head of Infrastructure
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Infrastructure map
    • Infrastructure inventory
    • Network architecture (including which data centers host which infrastructure and applications)
    • Inventory (including integration capabilities of vendors, versions, switches, and routers)
    • Copy of all hardware lease or purchase agreements
    • Copy of all hardware maintenance agreements
    • Copy of all outsourcing/external service provider agreements
    • Copy of all service-level agreements for centrally provided, shared services and systems
    Products and Services
    • Product Manager
    • Head of Customer Interactions
    • Product lifecycle
    • Product inventory
    • Customer market strategy

    Critical domains (continued)

    Understand the key stakeholders and outputs for each domain

    Domain

    Stakeholders

    Key Artifacts

    Key Information to request

    Operations
    • Head of Operations
    • Service catalog
    • Service overview
    • Service owners
    • Access policies and procedures
    • Availability and service levels
    • Support policies and procedures
    • Costs and approvals (internal and customer costs)
    IT Processes
    • CIO
    • IT Management
    • VP of IT Governance
    • VP of IT Strategy
    • IT process flow diagram
    • Processes in place and productivity levels (capacity)
    • Critical processes/processes the organization feels they do particularly well
    IT People
    • CIO
    • VP of Human Resources
    • IT organizational chart
    • Competency & capacity assessment
    • IT organizational structure (including resources from external service providers such as contractors) with appropriate job descriptions or roles and responsibilities
    • IT headcount and location
    Security
    • CISO
    • Security Architect
    • Security posture
    • Information security staff
    • Information security service providers
    • Information security tools
    • In-flight information security projects
    Projects
    • Head of Projects
    • Project portfolio
    • List of all future, ongoing, and recently completed projects
    Vendors
    • Head of Vendor Management
    • License inventory
    • Inventory (including what will and will not be transitioning, vendors, versions, number of licenses)

    Assess the target organization’s technical debt

    The other organization could be costly to purchase if not yet modernizing.

    • Consider the potential costs that your business will have to spend to get the other IT organization modernized or even digital.
    • This will be highly affected by your planned integration strategy.
    • A best-of-breed strategy might simply mean there's little to bring over from the other organization’s environment.
    • It’s often challenging to identify a direct financial cost for technical debt. Consider direct costs but also assess categories of impact that can have a long-term effect on your business: lost customer, staff, or business partner goodwill; limited flexibility and resilience; and health, safety, and compliance impacts.
    • Use more objective measures to track subjective impact. For example, consider the number of customers who could be significantly affected by each tech debt in the next quarter.

    Focus on solving the problems you need to address.

    Analyzing technical debt has value in that the analysis can help your organization make better risk management and resource allocation decisions.

    Review these examples of technical debt

    Do you have any of these challenges?

    Applications
    • Inefficient or incomplete code
    • Fragile or obsolete systems of record that limit the implementation of new functionality
    • Out-of-date IDEs or compilers
    • Unsupported applications
    Data & Analytics
    • Data presented via API that does not conform to chosen standards (EDI, NRF-ARTS, etc.)
    • Poor data governance
    • No transformation between OLTP and the data warehouse
    • Heavy use of OLTP for reporting
    • Lack of AI model and decision governance, maintenance
    End-User Computing
    • Aging and slow equipment
    • No configuration management
    • No MDM/UEM
    Security
    • Unpatched/unpatchable systems
    • Legacy firewalls
    • No data classification system
    • “Perimeter” security architecture
    • No documented security incident response
    • No policies, or unenforced policies
    Operations
    • Incomplete, ineffective, or undocumented business continuity and disaster recovery plans
    • Insufficient backups or archiving
    • Inefficient MACD processes
    • Application sprawl with no record of installed applications or licenses
    • No ticketing or ITSM system
    • No change management process
    • No problem management process
    • No event/alert management
    Infrastructure
    • End-of-life/unsupported equipment
    • Aging power or cooling systems
    • Water- or halon-based data center fire suppression systems
    • Out-of-date firmware
    • No DR site
    • Damaged or messy cabling
    • Lack of system redundancy
    • Integrated computers on business equipment (e.g. shop floor equipment, medical equipment) running out-of-date OS/software
    Project & Portfolio Management
    • No project closure process
    • Ineffective project intake process
    • No resource management practices

    “This isn’t a philosophical exercise. Knowing what you want to get out of this analysis informs the type of technical debt you will calculate and the approach you will take.” (Scott Buchholz, CTO, Deloitte Government & Public Services Practice, The Wall Street Journal, 2015)

    3.1.3 Assess technical debt

    1-2 hours

    Input: Participant views on organizational tech debt, Five to ten key technical debts, Business impact scoring scales, Reasonable next-quarter scenarios for each technical debt, Technical debt business impact analysis

    Output: Initial list of tech debt for the target organization

    Materials: Whiteboard, Sticky notes, Technical Debt Business Impact Analysis Tool, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business leaders, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the technical debt of the other IT organization. Taking on unnecessary technical debt is one of the biggest risks to the IT environment

    1. This activity can be completed by leveraging the blueprint Manage Your Technical Debt, specifically the Technical Debt Business Impact Analysis Tool. Complete the following activities in the blueprint:
      • 1.2.1 Identify your technical debt
      • 1.2.2 Select tech debt for your impact analysis
      • 2.2.2 Estimate tech debt impact
      • 2.2.3 Identify the most-critical technical debts
    2. Review examples of technical debt in the previous slide to assist you with this activity.
    3. Document the results from tab 3, Impact Analysis, in the M&A Buy Playbook if you are trying to record all artifacts related to the transaction in one place.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    How to valuate an IT environment

    And why it matters so much

    • Valuating the target organization’s IT environment is a critical step to fully understand what it might be worth. Business partners are often not in the position to valuate the IT aspects to the degree that you would be.
    • The business investments in IT can be directly translated to a value amount. Meaning for every $1 invested in IT, the business might be gaining $100 in value back or possibly even loosing $100.
    • Determining, documenting, and communicating this information ensures that the business takes IT’s suggestions seriously and recognizes why investing in IT can be so critical.
    • There are three ways a business or asset can be valuated:
      • Cost Approach: Look at the costs associated with building, purchasing, replacing, and maintaining a given aspect of the business.
      • Market Approach: Look at the relative value of a particular aspect of the business. Relative value can fluctuate and depends on what the markets and consequently society believe that particular element is worth.
      • Discounted Cash Flow Approach: Focus on what the potential value of the business could be or the intrinsic value anticipated due to future profitability.

    The IT valuation conducted during due diligence can have a significant impact on the final financials of the transaction for the business.

    3.1.4 Valuate the target IT organization

    1 day

    Input: Valuation of data, Valuation of applications, Valuation of infrastructure and operations, Valuation of security and risk

    Output: Valuation of target organization’s IT

    Materials: Relevant templates/tools, Capital budget, Operating budget, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Prospective IT organization

    The purpose of this activity is to valuate the other IT organization.

    1. Review each of slides 42 to 45 to generate a valuation of IT’s data, applications, infrastructure, and security and risk. These valuations consider several tangible and intangible factors and result in a final dollar amount. For more information on this activity, review Activity 1.2.1 from the Proactive phase.
    2. Identify financial amounts for each critical area and add the financial output to the summary slide in the M&A Buy Playbook.
    3. Compare this information against your own IT organization’s valuation.
      1. Does it add value to your IT organization?
      2. Is there too much risk to accept if this transaction goes through?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consistency is key when valuating your IT organization as well as other IT organizations throughout the transaction process.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Culture should not be overlooked, especially as it relates to the integration of IT environments

    • There are three types of culture that need to be considered.
    • Most importantly, this transition is an opportunity to change the culture that might exist in your organization’s IT environment.
    • Make a decision on which type of culture you’d like IT to have post-transition.

    Target Organization’s Culture

    The culture that the target organization is currently embracing. Their established and undefined governance practices will lend insight into this.

    Your Organization’s Culture

    The culture that your organization is currently embracing. Examine people’s attitudes and behaviors within IT toward their jobs and the organization.

    Ideal Culture

    What will the future culture of the IT organization be once integration is complete? Are there aspects that your current organization and the target organization embrace that are worth considering?

    Culture categories

    Map the results of the IT Culture Diagnostic to an existing framework

    Competitive
    • Autonomy
    • Confront conflict directly
    • Decisive
    • Competitive
    • Achievement oriented
    • Results oriented
    • High performance expectations
    • Aggressive
    • High pay for good performance
    • Working long hours
    • Having a good reputation
    • Being distinctive/different
    Innovative
    • Adaptable
    • Innovative
    • Quick to take advantage of opportunities
    • Risk taking
    • Opportunities for professional growth
    • Not constrained by rules
    • Tolerant
    • Informal
    • Enthusiastic
    Traditional
    • Stability
    • Reflective
    • Rule oriented
    • Analytical
    • High attention to detail
    • Organized
    • Clear guiding philosophy
    • Security of employment
    • Emphasis on quality
    • Focus on safety
    Cooperative
    • Team oriented
    • Fair
    • Praise for good performance
    • Supportive
    • Calm
    • Developing friends at work
    • Socially responsible

    Culture Considerations

    • What culture category was dominant for each IT organization?
    • Do you share the same dominant category?
    • Is your current dominant culture category the most ideal to have post-integration?

    3.1.5 Assess Culture

    3-4 hours

    Input: Cultural assessments for current IT organization, Cultural assessment for target IT organization

    Output: Goal for IT culture

    Materials: IT Culture Diagnostic, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT employees of current organization, IT employees of target organization, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the different cultures that might exist within the IT environments of both organizations. More importantly, your IT organization can select its desired IT culture for the long term if it does not already exist.

    1. Complete this activity by leveraging the blueprint Fix Your IT Culture, specifically the IT Culture Diagnostic. Fill out the diagnostic for the IT department in your organization:
      1. Answer the 16 questions in tab 2, Diagnostic.
      2. Find out your dominant culture and review recommendations in tab 3, Results.
    2. Document the results from tab 3, Results, in the M&A Buy Playbook if you are trying to record all artifacts related to the transaction in one place.
    3. Repeat the activity for the target organization.
    4. Leverage the information to determine what the goal for the culture of IT will be post-integration if it will differ from the current culture.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Due Diligence & Preparation

    Step 3.2

    Prepare to Integrate

    Activities

    • 3.2.1 Prioritize integration tasks
    • 3.2.2 Establish the integration roadmap
    • 3.2.3 Identify the needed workforce supply
    • 3.2.4 Estimate integration costs
    • 3.2.5 Create an employee transition plan
    • 3.2.6 Create functional workplans for employees
    • 3.2.7 Align project metrics with identified tasks

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Transition team
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Have an established plan of action toward integration across all domains and a strategy toward resources.

    Don’t underestimate the importance of integration preparation

    Integration is the process of combining the various components of one or more organizations into a single organization.

    80% of integration should happen within the first two years. (Source: CIO Dive)

    70% of M&A IT integrations fail due to components that could and should be addressed at the beginning. (Source: The Wall Street Journal, 2019)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Integration is not rationalization. Once the organization has integrated, it can prepare to rationalize the IT environment.

    Integration needs

    Identify your domain needs to support the target technology environment

    Set up a meeting with your IT due diligence team to:

    • Address data, applications, infrastructure, and other domain gaps.
    • Discuss the people and processes necessary to achieve the target technology environment and support M&A business objectives.

    Use this opportunity to:

    • Identify data and application complexities between your organization and the target organization.
    • Identify the IT people and process gaps, redundancies, and initiatives.
    • Determine your infrastructure needs and identify redundancies.
      • Does IT have the infrastructure to support the applications and business capabilities of the resultant enterprise?
      • Identify any gaps between the current infrastructure in both organizations and the infrastructure required in the resultant enterprise.
      • Identify any redundancies.
      • Determine the appropriate IT integration strategies.
    • Document your gaps, redundancies, initiatives, and assumptions to help you track and justify the initiatives that must be undertaken and help estimate the cost of integration.

    Integration implications

    Understand the implications for integration with respect to each target technology environment

    Domain

    Independent Models

    Create Links Between Critical Systems

    Move Key Capabilities to Common Systems

    Adopt One Model

    Data & Analytics

    • Consider data sources that might need to be combined (e.g. financials, email lists, internet).
    • Understand where each organization will warehouse its data and how it will be managed in a cost-effective manner.
    • Consider your reporting and transactional needs. Initially systems may remain separate, but eventually they will need to be merged.
    • Analyze whether or not the data types are compatible between companies.
    • Understand the critical data needs and the complexity of integration activities.
    • Consider your reporting and transactional needs. Initially systems may remain separate, but eventually they will need to be merged.
    • Focus on the master data domains that represent the core of your business.
    • Assess the value, size, location, and cleanliness of the target organization’s data sets.
    • Determine the data sets that will be migrated to capture expected synergies and drive core capabilities while addressing how other data sets will be maintained and managed.
    • Decide which applications to keep and which to terminate. This includes setting timelines for application retirement.
    • Establish interim linkages and common interfaces for applications while major migrations occur.

    Applications

    • Establish whether or not there are certain critical applications that still need to be linked (e.g. email, financials).
    • Leverage the unique strengths and functionalities provided by the applications used by each organization.
    • Confirm that adequate documentation and licensing exists.
    • Decide which critical applications need to be linked versus which need to be kept separate to drive synergies. For example, financial, email, and CRM may need to be linked, while certain applications may remain distinct.
    • Pay particular attention to the extent to which systems relating to customers, products, orders, and shipments need to be integrated.
    • Determine the key capabilities that require support from the applications identified by business process owners.
    • Assess which major applications need to be adopted by both organizations, based on the M&A goals.
    • Establish interim linkages and common interfaces for applications while major migrations occur.
    • Decide which applications to keep and which to terminate. This includes setting timelines for application retirement.
    • Establish interim linkages and common interfaces for applications while major migrations occur.

    Integration implications (continued)

    Understand the implications for integration with respect to each target technology environment

    Domain

    Independent Models

    Create Links Between Critical Systems

    Move Key Capabilities to Common Systems

    Adopt One Model

    Infrastructure

    • Assess the infrastructure demands created by retaining separate models (e.g. separate domains, voice, network integration).
    • Evaluate whether or not there are redundant data centers that could be consolidated to reduce costs.
    • Assess the infrastructure demands created by retaining separate models (e.g. separate domains, voice, network integration).
    • Evaluate whether or not there are redundant data centers that could be consolidated to reduce costs.
    • Evaluate whether certain infrastructure components, such as data centers, can be consolidated to support the new model while also eliminating redundancies. This will help reduce costs.
    • Assess which infrastructure components need to be kept versus which need to be terminated to support the new application portfolio. Keep in mind that increasing the transaction volume on a particular application increases the infrastructure capacity that is required for that application.
    • Extend the network to integrate additional locations.

    IT People & Processes

    • Retain workers from each IT department who possess knowledge of key products, services, and legacy systems.
    • Consider whether there are redundancies in staffing that could be eliminated.
    • The IT processes of each organization will most likely remain separate.
    • Consider the impact of the target organization on your IT processes.
    • Retain workers from each IT department who possess knowledge of key products, services, and legacy systems.
    • Consider whether there are redundancies in staffing that could be eliminated.
    • Consider how critical IT processes of the target organization fit with your current IT processes.
    • Identify which redundant staff members should be terminated by focusing on the key skills that will be necessary to support the common systems.
    • If there is overlap with the IT processes in both organizations, you may wish to map out both processes to get a sense for how they might work together.
    • Assess what processes will be prioritized to support IT strategies.
    • Identify which redundant staff members should be terminated by focusing on the key skills that will be necessary to support the prioritized IT processes.

    Integration implications (continued)

    Understand the implications for integration with respect to each target technology environment

    Domain

    Independent Models

    Create Links Between Critical Systems

    Move Key Capabilities to Common Systems

    Adopt One Model

    Leadership/IT Executive

    • Have insight into the goals and direction of the organization’s leadership. Make sure that a communication path has been established to receive information and provide feedback.
    • The decentralized model will require some form of centralization and strong governance processes to enable informed decisions.
    • Ensure that each area can deliver on its needs while not overstepping the goals and direction of the organization.
    • This will help with integration in the sense that front-line employees can see a single organization beginning to form.
    • In this model, there is the opportunity to select elements of each leadership style and strategy that will work for the larger organization.
    • Leadership can provide a single and unified approach to how the strategic goals will be executed.
    • More often than not, this would be the acquiring organization’s strategic direction.

    Vendors

    • Determine which contracts the target organization currently has in place.
    • Having different vendors in place will not be a bad model if it makes sense.
    • Spend time reviewing the contracts and ensuring that each organization has the right contracts to succeed.
    • Identify what redundancies might exist (ERPs, for example) and determine if the vendor would be willing to terminate one contract or another.
    • Through integration, it might be possible to engage in one set of contract negotiations for a single application or technology.
    • Identify whether there are opportunities to combine contracts or if they must remain completely separated until the end of the term.
    • In an effort to capitalize on the contracts working well, reduce the contracts that might be hindering the organization.
    • Speak to the vendor offering the contract.
    • Going forward, ensure the contracts are negotiated to include clauses to allow for easier and more cost-effective integration.

    Integration implications (continued)

    Understand the implications for integration with respect to each target technology environment

    Domain

    Independent Models

    Create Links Between Critical Systems

    Move Key Capabilities to Common Systems

    Adopt One Model

    Security

    • Both organizations would need to have a process for securing their organization.
    • Sharing and accessing information might be more difficult, as each organization would need to keep the other organization separate to ensure the organization remains secure.
    • Creating standard policies and procedures that each organization must adhere to would be critical here (for example, multifactor authentication).
    • Establish a single path of communication between the two organizations, ensuring reliable and secure data and information sharing.
    • Leverage the same solutions to protect the business as a whole from internal and external threats.
    • Identify opportunities where there might be user points of failure that could be addressed early in the process.
    • Determine what method of threat detection and response will best support the business and select that method to apply to the entire organization, both original and newly acquired.

    Projects

    • Projects remain ongoing as they were prior to the integration.
    • Some projects might be made redundant after the initial integration is over.
    • Re-evaluate the projects after integration to ensure they continue to deliver on the business’ strategic direction.
    • Determine which projects are similar to one another and identify opportunities to leverage business needs and solutions for each organization where possible.
    • Review project histories to determine the rationale for and success of projects that could be reused in either organization going forward.
    • Determine which projects should remain ongoing and which projects could wait to be implemented or could be completely stopped.
    • There might be certain modernization projects ongoing that cannot be stopped.
    • However, for all other projects, embrace a single portfolio.
    • Completely reduce or remove all ongoing projects from the one organization and continue with only the projects of the other organization.
    • Add in new projects when they arise as needed.

    3.2.1 Prioritize integration tasks

    2 hours

    Input: Integration tasks, Transition team, M&A RACI

    Output: Prioritized integration list

    Materials: Integration task checklist, Integration roadmap

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to prioritize the different integration tasks that your organization has identified as necessary to this transaction. Some tasks might not be relevant for this particular transaction, and others might be critical.

    1. Download the SharePoint or Excel version of the M&A Integration Project Management Tool. Identify which integration tasks you want as part of your project plan. Alter or remove any tasks that are irrelevant to your organization. Add in tasks you think are missing.
    2. When deciding criticality of the task, consider the effect on stakeholders, those who are impacted or influenced in the process of the task, and dependencies (e.g. data strategy needs to be addressed first before you can tackle its dependencies, like data quality).
    3. Feel free to edit the way you measure criticality. The standard tool leverages a three-point scale. At the end, you should have a list of tasks in priority order based on criticality.

    Record the updates in the M&A Integration Project Management Tool (SharePoint).

    Record the updates in the M&A Integration Project Management Tool (Excel).

    Integration checklists

    Prerequisite Checklist
    • Build the project plan for integration and prioritize activities
      • Plan first day
      • Plan first 30/100 days
      • Plan first year
    • Create an organization-aligned IT strategy
    • Identify critical stakeholders
    • Create a communication strategy
    • Understand the rationale for the acquisition or purchase
    • Develop IT's purchasing strategy
    • Determine goal opportunities
    • Create the mission and vision statements
    • Create the guiding principles
    • Create program metrics
    • Consolidate reports from due diligence/data room
    • Conduct culture assessment
    • Create a transaction team
    • Assess workforce demand and supply
    • Plan and communicate potential layoffs
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Identify the IT investment
    Business
    • Design an enterprise architecture
    • Document your business architecture
    • Identify and assess all of IT's risks
    Leadership/IT Executive
    • Build an IT budget
    • Structure operating budget
    • Structure capital budget
    • Identify the needed workforce demand vs. capacity
    • Establish and monitor key metrics
    • Communicate value realized/cost savings
    Data
    • Confirm data strategy
    • Confirm data governance
    • Data architecture
    • Data sources
    • Data storage (on-premises vs. cloud)
    • Enterprise content management
    • Compatibility of data types between organizations
    • Cleanliness/usability of target organization data sets
    • Identify data sets that need to be combined to capture synergies/drive core capabilities
    • Reporting and analytics capabilities
    Applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
      • ERP
      • CRM
      • Email
      • HRIS
      • Financial
      • Sales
      • Risk
      • Security
    • Leverage application rationalization framework to determine applications to keep, terminate, or create
    • Develop method of integrating applications
    • Model critical applications that have dependencies on one another
    • Identify the infrastructure capacity required to support critical applications
    Operations
    • Communicate helpdesk/service desk information
    • Manage sales access to customer data
    • Determine locations and hours of operation
    • Consolidate phone lists and extensions
    • Synchronize email address books

    Integration checklists (continued)

    Infrastructure
    • Determine single network access
    • Manage organization domains
    • Consolidate data centers
    • Compile inventory of vendors, versions, switches, and routers
    • Review hardware lease or purchase agreements
    • Review outsourcing/service provider agreements
    • Review service-level agreements
    • Assess connectivity linkages between locations
    • Plan to migrate to a single email system if necessary
    Vendors
    • Establish a sustainable vendor management office
    • Review vendor landscape
    • Identify warranty options
    • Rationalize vendor services and solutions
    • Identify opportunities to mature the security architecture
    People
    • Design an IT operating model
    • Redesign your IT organizational structure
    • Conduct a RACI
    • Conduct a culture assessment and identify goal IT culture
    • Build an IT employee engagement program
    • Determine critical roles and systems/process/products they support
    • Create a list of employees to be terminated
    • Create employee transition plans
    • Create functional workplans
    Projects
    • Stop duplicate or unnecessary target organization projects
    • Communicate project intake process
    • Prioritize projects
    Products & Services
    • Ensure customer services requirements are met
    • Ensure customer interaction requirements are met
    • Select a solution for product lifecycle management
    Security
    • Conduct a security assessment of target organization
    • Develop accessibility prioritization and schedule
    • Establish an information security strategy
    • Develop a security awareness and training program
    • Develop and manage security governance, risk, and compliance
    • Identify security budget
    • Build a data privacy and classification program
    IT Processes
    • Evaluate current process models
    • Determine productivity/capacity levels of processes
    • Identify processes to be terminated
    • Identify process expectations from target organization
    • Establish a communication plan
    • Develop a change management process
    • Establish/review IT policies

    3.2.2 Establish the integration roadmap

    2 hours

    Input: Prioritized integration tasks, Employee transition plan, Integration RACI, Costs for activities, Activity owners

    Output: Integration roadmap

    Materials: M&A Integration Project Plan Tool (SharePoint), M&A Integration Project Plan Tool (Excel)

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Transition team, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a roadmap to support IT throughout the integration process. Using the information gathered in previous activities, you can create a roadmap that will ensure a smooth integration.

    1. Leverage our M&A Integration Project Management Tool to track critical elements of the integration project. There are a few options available:
      1. Follow the instructions on the next slide if you are looking to upload our SharePoint project template.
      2. If you cannot or do not want to use SharePoint as your project management solution, download our Excel version of the tool.
        **Remember that this your tool, so customize to your liking.
    2. Identify who will own or be accountable for each of the integration tasks and establish the time frame for when each project should begin and end. This will confirm which tasks should be prioritized.

    Record the updates in the M&A Integration Project Management Tool (SharePoint).

    Record the updates in the M&A Integration Project Management Tool (Excel).

    Integration Project Management Tool (SharePoint Template)

    Follow these instructions to upload our template to your SharePoint environment

    1. Create or use an existing SP site.
    2. Download the M&A Integration Project Plan Tool (SharePoint) .wsp file from the Mergers & Acquisitions: The Buy Blueprint landing page.
    3. To import a template into your SharePoint environment, do the following:
      1. Open PowerShell.
      2. Connect-SPO Service (need to install PowerShell module).
      3. Enter in your tenant admin URL.
      4. Enter in your admin credentials.
      5. Set-SPO Site https://YourDomain.sharepoint.com/sites/YourSiteHe... -DenyAddAndCustomizePages 0
      OR
      1. Turn on both custom script features to allow users to run custom
    4. Screenshot of the 'Custom Script' option for importing a template into your SharePoint environment. Feature description reads 'Control whether users can run custom script on personal sites and self-service created sites. Note: changes to this setting might take up to 24 hours to take effect. For more information, see http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkIn=397546'. There are options to prevent or allow users from running custom script on personal/self-service created sites.
    5. Enable the SharePoint Server Standard Site Collection features.
    6. Upload the .wsp file in Solutions Gallery.
    7. Deploy by creating a subsite and select from custom options.
      • Allow or prevent custom script
      • Security considerations of allowing custom script
      • Save, download, and upload a SharePoint site as a template
    8. Refer to Microsoft documentation to understand security considerations and what is and isn’t supported:

    For more information, check out the SharePoint Template: Step-by-Step Deployment Guide.

    Participate in active workforce planning to transition employees

    The chosen IT operating model, primary M&A goals, and any planned changes to business strategy will dramatically impact IT staffing and workforce planning efforts.

    Visualization of the three aspects of 'IT workforce planning', as listed below.

    IT workforce planning

    • Primary M&A goals
      If the goal of the M&A is cost cutting, then workforce planning will be necessary to identify labor redundancies.
    • Changes to business strategy
      If business strategy will change after the merger, then workforce planning will typically be more involved than if business strategy will not change.
    • Integration strategy
      For independent models, workforce planning will typically be unnecessary.
      For connection of essential systems or absorption, workforce planning will likely be an involved, time-consuming process.
    1. Estimate the headcount you will need through the end of the M&A transition period.
    2. Outline the process you will use to assess staff for roles that have more than one candidate.
    3. Review employees in each department to determine the best fit for each role.
    4. Determine whether terminations will happen all together or in waves.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t be a short-term thinker when it comes to workforce planning! IT teams that only consider the headcount needed on day one of the new entity will end up scrambling to find skilled resources to fill workforce gaps later in the transition period.

    3.2.3 Identify the needed workforce supply

    3-4 hours

    Input: IT strategy, Prioritized integration tasks

    Output: A clear indication of how many resources are required for each role and the number of resources that the organization actually has

    Materials: Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Target organization employees, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine the anticipated amount of work that will be required to support projects (like integration), administrative, and keep-the-lights-on activities.

    1. Download the Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator.
    2. The calculator requires minimal up-front staff participation: You can obtain meaningful results with participation from as few as one person with insight on the distribution of your resources and their average work week or month.
    3. The calculator will yield a report that shows a breakdown of your annual resource supply and demand, as well as the gap between the supply and demand. Further insight on project and non-project supply and demand are provided.
    4. Repeat the tool several times to identify the needs of your IT environment for day one, day 30/100, and year one. Anticipate that these will change over time. Also, do not forget to obtain this information from the target organization. Given that you will be integrating, it’s important to know how many staff they have in which roles.
    5. **For additional information, please review slides starting from slide 44 in Establish Realistic IT Resource Management Practices to see how to use the tool.

    Record the results in the Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator.

    Resource Supply-Demand Calculator Output Example

    Example of a 'Resource Management Supply-Demand Analysis Report' with charts and tables measuring Annualized Resource Supply and Demand, Resource Capacity Confidence, Project Capacity, and combinations of those metrics.

    Resource Capacity Confidence. This figure is based on your confidence in supply confidence, demand stability, and the supply-demand ratio.

    Importance of estimating integration costs

    Change is the key driver of integration costs

    Integration costs are dependent on the following:
    • Meeting synergy targets – whether that be cost saving or growth related.
      • Employee-related costs, licensing, and reconfiguration fees play a huge part in meeting synergy targets.
    • Adjustments related to compliance or regulations – especially if there are changes to legal entities, reporting requirements, or risk-mitigation standards.
    • Governance or third party–related support required to ensure timelines are met and the integration is a success.
    Integration costs vary by industry type.
    • Certain industries may have integration costs made up of mostly one type, differing from other industries, due to the complexity and different demands of the transaction. For example:
      • Healthcare integration costs are mostly driven by regulatory, safety, and quality standards, as well as consolidation of the research and development function.
      • Energy and Utilities tend to have the lowest integration costs due to most transactions occurring within the same sector rather than as a cross-sector investment. For example, oil and gas acquisitions tend to be for oil fields and rigs (strategic fixed assets), which can easily be added to the buyer’s portfolio.

    Integration costs are more related to the degree of change required than the size of the transaction.

    3.2.4 Estimate integration costs

    3-4 hours

    Input: Integration tasks, Transition team, Valuation of current IT environment, Valuation of target IT environment, Outputs from data room, Technical debt, Employees

    Output: List of anticipated costs required to support IT integration

    Materials: Integration task checklist, Integration roadmap, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to estimate the costs that will be associated with the integration. It’s important to ensure a realistic figure is identified and communicated to the larger M&A team within your company as early in the process as possible. This ensures that the funding required for the transaction is secured and budgeted for in the overarching transaction.

    1. On the associated slide in the M&A Buy Playbook, input:
      • Task
      • Domain
      • Cost type
      • Total cost amount
      • Level of certainty around the cost
    2. Provide a copy of the estimated costs to the company’s M&A team. Also provide any additional information identified earlier to help them understand the importance of those costs.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Employee transition planning

    Considering employee impact will be a huge component to ensure successful integration

    • Meet With Leadership
    • Plan Individual and Department Redeployment
    • Plan Individual and Department Layoffs
    • Monitor and Manage Departmental Effectiveness
    • For employees, the transition could mean:
      • Changing from their current role to a new role to meet requirements and expectations throughout the transition.
      • Being laid off because the role they are currently occupying has been made redundant.
    • It is important to plan for what the M&A integration needs will be and what the IT operational needs will be.
    • A lack of foresight into this long-term plan could lead to undue costs and headaches trying to retain critical staff, rehiring positions that were already let go, and keeping redundant employees longer then necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Being transparent throughout the process is critical. Do not hesitate to tell employees the likelihood that their job may be made redundant. This will ensure a high level of trust and credibility for those who remain with the organization after the transaction.

    3.2.5 Create an employee transition plan

    3-4 hours

    Input: IT strategy, IT organizational design, Resource Supply-Demand Calculator output

    Output: Employee transition plans

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook, Whiteboard, Sticky notes, Markers

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a transition plan for employees.

    1. Transition planning can be done at specific individual levels or more broadly to reflect a single role. Consider these four items in the transition plan:
      • Understand the direction of the employee transitions.
      • Identify employees that will be involved in the transition (moved or laid off).
      • Prepare to meet with employees.
      • Meet with employees.
    2. For each employee that will be facing some sort of change in their regular role, permanent or temporary, create a transition plan.
    3. For additional information on transitioning employees, review the blueprint Streamline Your Workforce During a Pandemic.

    **Note that if someone’s future role is a layoff, then there is no need to record anything for skills needed or method for skill development.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    3.2.6 Create functional workplans for employees

    3-4 hours

    Input: Prioritized integration tasks, Employee transition plan, Integration RACI, Costs for activities, Activity owners

    Output: Employee functional workplans

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook, Learning and development tools

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT management team, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a functional workplan for the different employees so that they know what their key role and responsibilities are once the transaction occurs.

    1. First complete the transition plan from the previous activity (3.2.5) and the separation roadmap. Have these documents ready to review throughout this process.
    2. Identify the employees who will be transitioning to a new role permanently or temporarily. Creating a functional workplan is especially important for these employees.
    3. Identify the skills these employees need to have to support the separation. Record this in the corresponding slide in the M&A Buy Playbook.
    4. For each employee, identify someone who will be a point of contact for them throughout the transition.

    It is recommended that each employee have a functional workplan. Leverage the IT managers to support this task.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Metrics for integration

    Valuation & Due Diligence

    • % Defects discovered in production
    • $ Cost per user for enterprise applications
    • % In-house-built applications vs. enterprise applications
    • % Owners identified for all data domains
    • # IT staff asked to participate in due diligence
    • Change to due diligence
    • IT budget variance
    • Synergy target

    Execution & Value Realization

    • % Satisfaction with the effectiveness of IT capabilities
    • % Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • $ Impact of vendor SLA breaches
    • $ Savings through cost-optimization efforts
    • $ Savings through application rationalization and technology standardization
    • # Key positions empty
    • % Frequency of staff turnover
    • % Emergency changes
    • # Hours of unplanned downtime
    • % Releases that cause downtime
    • % Incidents with identified problem record
    • % Problems with identified root cause
    • # Days from problem identification to root cause fix
    • % Projects that consider IT risk
    • % Incidents due to issues not addressed in the security plan
    • # Average vulnerability remediation time
    • % Application budget spent on new build/buy vs. maintenance (deferred feature implementation, enhancements, bug fixes)
    • # Time (days) to value realization
    • % Projects that realized planned benefits
    • $ IT operational savings and cost reductions that are related to synergies/divestitures
    • % IT staff–related expenses/redundancies
    • # Days spent on IT integration
    • $ Accurate IT budget estimates
    • % Revenue growth directly tied to IT delivery
    • % Profit margin growth

    3.2.7 Align project metrics with identified tasks

    3-4 hours

    Input: Prioritized integration tasks, Employee transition plan, Integration RACI, Costs for activities, Activity owners, M&A goals

    Output: Integration-specific metrics to measure success

    Materials: Roadmap template, M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to understand how to measure the success of the integration project by aligning metrics to each identified task.

    1. Review the M&A goals identified by the business. Your metrics will need to tie back to those business goals.
    2. Identify metrics that align to identified tasks and measure achievement of those goals. For each metric you consider, ask the following questions:
      • What is the main goal or objective that this metric is trying to solve?
      • What does success look like?
      • Does the metric promote the right behavior?
      • Is the metric actionable? What is the story you are trying to tell with this metric?
      • How often will this get measured?
      • Are there any metrics it supports or is supported by?

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    By the end of this mid-transaction phase you should:

    Have successfully evaluated the target organization’s IT environment, escalated the acquisition risks and benefits, and prepared IT for integration.

    Key outcomes from the Due Diligence & Preparation phase
    • Participate in due diligence activities to accurately valuate the target organization(s) and determine if there are critical risks or benefits the current organization should be aware of.
    • Create an integration roadmap that considers the tasks that will need to be completed and the resources required to support integration.
    Key deliverables from the Due Diligence & Preparation phase
    • Establish a due diligence charter
    • Create a list of data room artifacts and engage in due diligence
    • Assess the target organization’s technical debt
    • Valuate the target IT organization
    • Assess and plan for culture
    • Prioritize integration tasks
    • Establish the integration roadmap
    • Identify the needed workforce supply
    • Estimate integration costs
    • Create employee transition plans
    • Create functional workplans for employees
    • Align project metrics with identified tasks

    M&A Buy Blueprint

    Phase 4

    Execution & Value Realization

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Phase 4

    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Acquisition
    • 3.1 Assess the Target Organization
    • 3.2 Prepare to Integrate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Rationalize the IT environment
    • Continually update the project plan
    • Confirm integration costs
    • Review IT’s transaction value
    • Conduct a transaction and integration SWOT
    • Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Vendor management team
    • IT transaction team
    • Company M&A team

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Engage in Integration

    Day 4

    Establish the Transaction FoundationDiscover the Motivation for IntegrationPlan the Integration RoadmapPrepare Employees for the TransitionEngage in IntegrationAssess the Transaction Outcomes (Must be within 30 days of transaction date)

    Activities

    • 0.1 Understand the rationale for the company's decisions to pursue an acquisition.
    • 0.2 Identify key stakeholders and determine the IT transaction team.
    • 0.3 Gather and evaluate the M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.
    • 1.1 Review the business rationale for the acquisition.
    • 1.2 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the acquisition.
    • 1.3 Establish the integration strategy.
    • 1.4 Prioritize Integration tasks.
    • 2.1 Establish the integration roadmap.
    • 2.2 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.
    • 2.3 Estimate integration costs.
    • 3.1 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.
    • 3.2 Identify the needed workforce supply.
    • 3.3 Create an employee transition plan.
    • 3.4 Create functional workplans for employees.
    • I.1 Complete the integration by regularly updating the project plan.
    • I.2 Begin to rationalize the IT environment where possible and necessary.
    • 4.1 Confirm integration costs.
    • 4.2 Review IT’s transaction value.
    • 4.3 Conduct a transaction and integration SWOT.
    • 4.4 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions.

    Deliverables

    1. IT strategy
    2. IT operating model
    3. IT governance structure
    4. M&A transaction team
    1. Business context implications for IT
    2. Integration strategy
    1. Integration roadmap and associated resourcing
    1. Culture assessment
    2. Workforce supply identified
    3. Employee transition plan
    1. Rationalized IT environment
    2. Updated integration project plan
    1. SWOT of transaction
    2. M&A Buy Playbook refined for future transactions

    What is the Execution & Value Realization phase?

    Post-transaction state

    Once the transaction comes to a close, it’s time for IT to deliver on the critical integration tasks. Set the organization up for success by having an integration roadmap. Retaining critical IT staff throughout this process will also be imperative to the overall transaction success.

    Throughout the integration process, roadblocks will arise and need to be addressed. However, by ensuring that employees, technology, and processes are planned for ahead of the transaction, you as IT will be able to weather those unexpected concerns with greater ease.

    Now that you as an IT leader have engaged in an acquisition, demonstrating the value IT was able to provide to the process is critical to establishing a positive and respected relationship with other senior leaders in the business. Be prepared to identify the positives and communicate this value to advance the business’ perception of IT.

    Goal: To carry out the planned integration activities and deliver the intended value to the business

    Execution Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Execution & Value Realization phase, you must have addressed the following:

    • Understand the rationale for the company's decisions to pursue an acquisition and what opportunities or pain points the acquisition should alleviate.
    • Identify the key roles for the transaction team.
    • Identify the M&A governance.
    • Determine target metrics and align to project tasks.
    • Select an integration strategy framework.
    • Conduct a RACI for key transaction tasks for the transaction team.
    • Create a list of data room artifacts and engage in due diligence (directly or indirectly).
    • Prioritize integration tasks.
    • Establish the integration roadmap.
    • Identify the needed workforce supply.
    • Create employee transition plans.

    Before coming into the Execution & Value Realization phase, we recommend addressing the following:

    • Create vision and mission statements.
    • Establish guiding principles.
    • Create a future-state operating model.
    • Identify the M&A operating model.
    • Document the communication plan.
    • Examine the business perspective of IT.
    • Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.
    • Be able to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT's value to the business.
    • Establish a due diligence charter.
    • Assess the target organization’s technical debt.
    • Valuate the target IT organization.
    • Assess and plan for culture.
    • Estimate integration costs.
    • Create functional workplans for employees.

    Integration checklists

    Prerequisite Checklist
    • Build the project plan for integration and prioritize activities
      • Plan first day
      • Plan first 30/100 days
      • Plan first year
    • Create an organization-aligned IT strategy
    • Identify critical stakeholders
    • Create a communication strategy
    • Understand the rationale for the acquisition or purchase
    • Develop IT's purchasing strategy
    • Determine goal opportunities
    • Create the mission and vision statements
    • Create the guiding principles
    • Create program metrics
    • Consolidate reports from due diligence/data room
    • Conduct culture assessment
    • Create a transaction team
    • Assess workforce demand and supply
    • Plan and communicate potential layoffs
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Identify the IT investment
    Business
    • Design an enterprise architecture
    • Document your business architecture
    • Identify and assess all of IT's risks
    Leadership/IT Executive
    • Build an IT budget
    • Structure operating budget
    • Structure capital budget
    • Identify the needed workforce demand vs. capacity
    • Establish and monitor key metrics
    • Communicate value realized/cost savings
    Data
    • Confirm data strategy
    • Confirm data governance
    • Data architecture
    • Data sources
    • Data storage (on-premises vs. cloud)
    • Enterprise content management
    • Compatibility of data types between organizations
    • Cleanliness/usability of target organization data sets
    • Identify data sets that need to be combined to capture synergies/drive core capabilities
    • Reporting and analytics capabilities
    Applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
      • ERP
      • CRM
      • Email
      • HRIS
      • Financial
      • Sales
      • Risk
      • Security
    • Leverage application rationalization framework to determine applications to keep, terminate, or create
    • Develop method of integrating applications
    • Model critical applications that have dependencies on one another
    • Identify the infrastructure capacity required to support critical applications
    Operations
    • Communicate helpdesk/service desk information
    • Manage sales access to customer data
    • Determine locations and hours of operation
    • Consolidate phone lists and extensions
    • Synchronize email address books

    Integration checklists (continued)

    Infrastructure
    • Determine single network access
    • Manage organization domains
    • Consolidate data centers
    • Compile inventory of vendors, versions, switches, and routers
    • Review hardware lease or purchase agreements
    • Review outsourcing/service provider agreements
    • Review service-level agreements
    • Assess connectivity linkages between locations
    • Plan to migrate to a single email system if necessary
    Vendors
    • Establish a sustainable vendor management office
    • Review vendor landscape
    • Identify warranty options
    • Rationalize vendor services and solutions
    • Identify opportunities to mature the security architecture
    People
    • Design an IT operating model
    • Redesign your IT organizational structure
    • Conduct a RACI
    • Conduct a culture assessment and identify goal IT culture
    • Build an IT employee engagement program
    • Determine critical roles and systems/process/products they support
    • Create a list of employees to be terminated
    • Create employee transition plans
    • Create functional workplans
    Projects
    • Stop duplicate or unnecessary target organization projects
    • Communicate project intake process
    • Prioritize projects
    Products & Services
    • Ensure customer services requirements are met
    • Ensure customer interaction requirements are met
    • Select a solution for product lifecycle management
    Security
    • Conduct a security assessment of target organization
    • Develop accessibility prioritization and schedule
    • Establish an information security strategy
    • Develop a security awareness and training program
    • Develop and manage security governance, risk, and compliance
    • Identify security budget
    • Build a data privacy and classification program
    IT Processes
    • Evaluate current process models
    • Determine productivity/capacity levels of processes
    • Identify processes to be terminated
    • Identify process expectations from target organization
    • Establish a communication plan
    • Develop a change management process
    • Establish/review IT policies

    Execution & Value Realization

    Step 4.1

    Execute the Transaction

    Activities

    • 4.1.1 Rationalize the IT environment
    • 4.1.2 Continually update the project plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Vendor management team
    • IT transaction team
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Successfully execute on the integration and strategize how to rationalize the two (or more) IT environments and update the project plan, strategizing against any roadblocks as they might come.

    Compile –› Assess –› Rationalize

    Access to critical information often does not happen until day one

    • As the transaction comes to a close and the target organization becomes the acquired organization, it’s important to start working on the rationalization of your organization.
    • One of the most important elements will be to have a complete understanding of the acquired organization’s IT environment. Specifically, assess the technology, people, and processes that might exist.
    • This rationalization will be heavily dependent on your planned integration strategy determined in the Discovery & Strategy phase of the process.
    • If your IT organization was not involved until after that phase, then determine whether your organization plans on remaining in its original state, taking on the acquired organization’s state, or forming a best-of-breed state by combining elements.
    • To execute on this, however, a holistic understanding of the new IT environment is required.

    Some Info-Tech resources to support this initiative:

    • Reduce and Manage Your Organization’s Insider Threat Risk
    • Build an Application Rationalization Framework
    • Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools
    • Consolidate IT Asset Management
    • Build Effective Enterprise Integration on the Back of Business Process
    • Consolidate Your Data Centers

    4.1.1 Rationalize the IT environment

    6-12 months

    Input: RACI chart, List of critical applications, List of vendor contracts, List of infrastructure assets, List of data assets

    Output: Rationalized IT environment

    Materials: Software Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Vendor management

    The purpose of this activity is to rationalize the IT environment to reduce and eliminate redundant technology.

    1. Compile a list of the various applications and vendor contracts from the acquired organization and the original organization.
    2. Determine where there is repetition. Have a member of the vendor management team review those contracts and identify cost-saving opportunities.

    This will not be a quick and easy activity to complete. It will require strong negotiation on the behalf of the vendor management team.

    For additional information and support for this activity, see the blueprint Master Contract Review and Negotiations for Software Agreements.

    4.1.2 Continually update the project plan

    Reoccurring basis following transition

    Input: Prioritized integration tasks, Integration RACI, Activity owners

    Output: Updated integration project plan

    Materials: M&A Integration Project Management Tool

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT transaction team, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to ensure that the project plan is continuously updated as your transaction team continues to execute on the various components outlined in the project plan.

    1. Set a regular cadence for the transaction team to meet, update and review the status of the various integration task items, and strategize how to overcome any roadblocks.
    2. Employ governance best practices in these meetings to ensure decisions can be made effectively and resources allocated strategically.

    Record the updates in the M&A Integration Project Management Tool (SharePoint).

    Record the updates in the M&A Integration Project Management Tool (Excel).

    Execution & Value Realization

    Step 4.2

    Reflection and Value Realization

    Activities

    • 4.2.1 Confirm integration costs
    • 4.2.2 Review IT’s transaction value
    • 4.2.3 Conduct a transaction and integration SWOT
    • 4.2.4 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Transition team
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Review the value that IT was able to generate around the transaction and strategize on how to improve future acquisition transactions.

    4.2.1 Confirm integration costs

    3-4 hours

    Input: Integration tasks, Transition team, Previous RACI, Estimated costs

    Output: Actual integration costs

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT transaction team, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to confirm the associated costs around integration. While the integration costs would have been estimated previously, it’s important to confirm the costs that were associated with the integration in order to provide an accurate and up-to-date report to the company’s M&A team.

    1. Taking all the original items identified previously in activity 3.2.4, identify if there were changes in the estimated costs. This can be an increase or a decrease.
    2. Ensure that each cost has a justification for why the cost changed from the original estimation.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    Track synergy capture through the IT integration

    The ultimate goal of the M&A is to achieve and deliver deal objectives. Early in the M&A, IT must identify, prioritize, and execute upon synergies that deliver value to the business and its shareholders. Continue to measure IT’s contribution toward achieving the organization’s M&A goals throughout the integration by keeping track of cost savings and synergies that have been achieved. When these achievements happen, communicate them and celebrate success.

    1. Define Synergy Metrics: Select metrics to track synergies through the integration.
      1. You can track value by looking at percentages of improvement in process-level metrics depending on the synergies being pursued.
      2. For example, if the synergy being pursued is increasing asset utilization, metrics could range from capacity to revenue generated through increased capacity.
    2. Prioritize Synergistic Initiatives: Estimate the cost and benefit of each initiative's implementation to compare the amount of business value to the cost. The benefits and costs should be illustrated at a high level. Estimating the exact dollar value of fulfilling a synergy can be difficult and misleading.
        Steps
      • Determine the benefits that each initiative is expected to deliver.
      • Determine the high-level costs of implementation (capacity, time, resources, effort).
    3. Track Synergy Captures: Develop a detailed workplan to resource the roadmap and track synergy captures as the initiatives are undertaken.

    Once 80% of the necessary synergies are realized, executive pressure will diminish. However, IT must continue to work toward the technology end state to avoid delayed progression.

    4.2.2 Review IT’s transaction value

    3-4 hours

    Input: Prioritized integration tasks, Integration RACI, Activity owners, M&A company goals

    Output: Transaction value

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company's M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to track how your IT organization performed against the originally identified metrics.

    1. If your organization did not have the opportunity to identify metrics earlier, determine from the company M&A team what those metrics might be. Review activity 3.2.7 for more information on metrics.
    2. Identify whether the metric (which should be used to support a goal) was at, below, or above the original target metric. This is a very critical task for IT to complete because it allows IT to confirm that they were successful engaging in the transaction and that the business can count on them in future transactions.
    3. Be sure to record accurate and relevant information on why the outcomes (good or bad) are supporting the M&A goals that were set out by the business.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    4.2.3 Conduct a transaction and integration SWOT

    2 hours

    Input: Integration costs, Retention rates, Value IT contributed to the transaction

    Output: Strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business transaction team

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the positive and negative elements of the transaction.

    1. Consider the various internal and external elements that could have impacted the outcome of the transaction.
      • Strengths. Internal characteristics that are favorable as they relate to your development environment.
      • Weaknesses Internal characteristics that are unfavorable or need improvement.
      • Opportunities External characteristics that you may use to your advantage.
      • Threats External characteristics that may be potential sources of failure or risk.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    M&A Buy Playbook review

    With an acquisition complete, your IT organization is now more prepared then ever to support the business through future M&As

    • Now that the transaction is more than 80% complete, take the opportunity to review the key elements that worked well and the opportunities for improvement in future transactions.
    • Critically examine the M&A Buy Playbook your IT organization created and identify what worked well to help the transaction and where your organization could adjust to do better in future transactions.
    • If your organization were to engage in another acquisition under your IT leadership, how would you go about the transaction to make sure the company meets its goals?

    4.2.4 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    4 hours

    Input: Transaction and integration SWOT

    Output: Refined M&A playbook

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO

    The purpose of this activity is to revise the playbook and ensure it is ready to go for future transactions.

    1. Using the outputs from the previous activity, 4.2.3, determine what strengths and opportunities there were that should be leveraged in the next transaction.
    2. Likewise, determine which threats and weaknesses could be avoided in the future transactions.
      Remember, this is your M&A Buy Playbook, and it should reflect the most successful outcome for you in your organization.

    Record the results in the M&A Buy Playbook.

    By the end of this post-transaction phase you should:

    Have completed the integration post-transaction and be fluidly delivering the critical value that the business expected of IT.

    Key outcomes from the Execution & Value Realization phase
    • Ensure the integration tasks are being completed and that any blockers related to the transaction are being removed.
    • Determine where IT was able to realize value for the business and demonstrate IT’s involvement in meeting target goals.
    Key deliverables from the Execution & Value Realization phase
    • Rationalize the IT environment
    • Continually update the project plan for completion
    • Confirm integration costs
    • Review IT’s transaction value
    • Conduct a transaction and integration SWOT
    • Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Congratulations, you have completed the M&A Buy Blueprint!

    Rather than reacting to a transaction, you have been proactive in tackling this initiative. You now have a process to fall back on in which you can be an innovative IT leader by suggesting how and why the business should engage in an acquisition. You now have:

    • Created a standardized approach for how your IT organization should address acquisitions.
    • Evaluated the target organizations successfully and established an integration project plan.
    • Delivered on the integration project plan successfully and communicated IT’s transaction value to the business.

    Now that you have done all of this, reflect on what went well and what can be improved in case if you have to do this all again in a future transaction.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8899

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    John Annand
    Principal Research Director | Infrastructure
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Scott Bickley
    Principal Research Director | Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Cole Cioran
    Practice Lead | Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Dana Daher
    Research Analyst | Strategy & Innovation
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Eric Dolinar
    Manager | M&A Consulting
    Deloitte Canada
    Christoph Egel
    Director, Solution Design & Deliver
    Cooper Tire & Rubber Company
    Nora Fisher
    Vice President | Executive Services Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Larry Fretz
    Vice President | Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Research Contributors and Experts

    David Glazer
    Vice President of Analytics
    Kroll
    Jack Hakimian
    Senior Vice President | Workshops and Delivery
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Gord Harrison
    Senior Vice President | Research & Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Jennifer Jones
    Research Director | Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Nancy McCuaig
    Senior Vice President | Chief Technology and Data Office
    IGM Financial Inc.
    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Kenneth McGee
    Research Fellow | Strategy & Innovation
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Nayma Naser
    Associate
    Deloitte
    Andy Neill
    Practice Lead | Data & Analytics, Enterprise Architecture
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Rick Pittman
    Vice President | Research
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Rocco Rao
    Research Director | Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Mark Rosa
    Senior Vice President & Chief Information Officer
    Mohegan Gaming and Entertainment
    Tracy-Lynn Reid
    Research Lead | People & Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Jim Robson
    Senior Vice President | Shared Enterprise Services (retired)
    Great-West Life
    Steven Schmidt
    Senior Managing Partner Advisory | Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Nikki Seventikidis
    Senior Manager | Finance Initiative & Continuous Improvement
    CST Consultants Inc.
    Allison Straker
    Research Director | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Justin Waelz
    Senior Network & Systems Administrator
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Sallie Wright
    Executive Counselor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    “5 Ways for CIOs to Accelerate Value During Mergers and Acquisitions.” Okta, n.d. Web.

    Altintepe, Hakan. “Mergers and acquisitions speed up digital transformation.” CIO.com, 27 July 2018. Web.

    “America’s elite law firms are booming.” The Economist, 15 July 2021. Web.

    Barbaglia, Pamela, and Joshua Franklin. “Global M&A sets Q1 record as dealmakers shape post-COVID world.” Nasdaq, 1 April 2021. Web.

    Boyce, Paul. “Mergers and Acquisitions Definition: Types, Advantages, and Disadvantages.” BoyceWire, 8 Oct. 2020. Web.

    Bradt, George. “83% Of Mergers Fail -- Leverage A 100-Day Action Plan For Success Instead.” Forbes, 27 Jan. 2015. Web.

    Capgemini. “Mergers and Acquisitions: Get CIOs, IT Leaders Involved Early.” Channel e2e, 19 June 2020. Web.

    Chandra, Sumit, et al. “Make Or Break: The Critical Role Of IT In Post-Merger Integration.” IMAA Institute, 2016. Web.

    Deloitte. “How to Calculate Technical Debt.” The Wall Street Journal, 21 Jan. 2015. Web.

    Ernst & Young. “IT As A Driver Of M&A Success.” IMAA Institute, 2017. Web.

    Fernandes, Nuno. “M&As In 2021: How To Improve The Odds Of A Successful Deal.” Forbes, 23 March 2021. Web.

    “Five steps to a better 'technology fit' in mergers and acquisitions.” BCS, 7 Nov. 2019. Web.

    Fricke, Pierre. “The Biggest Opportunity You’re Missing During an M&Aamp; IT Integration.” Rackspace, 4 Nov. 2020. Web.

    Garrison, David W. “Most Mergers Fail Because People Aren't Boxes.” Forbes, 24 June 2019. Web.

    Harroch, Richard. “What You Need To Know About Mergers & Acquisitions: 12 Key Considerations When Selling Your Company.” Forbes, 27 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Hope, Michele. “M&A Integration: New Ways To Contain The IT Cost Of Mergers, Acquisitions And Migrations.” Iron Mountain, n.d. Web.

    “How Agile Project Management Principles Can Modernize M&A.” Business.com, 13 April 2020. Web.

    Hull, Patrick. “Answer 4 Questions to Get a Great Mission Statement.” Forbes, 10 Jan. 2013. Web.

    Kanter, Rosabeth Moss. “What We Can Learn About Unity from Hostile Takeovers.” Harvard Business Review, 12 Nov. 2020. Web.

    Koller, Tim, et al. “Valuation: Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies, 7th edition.” McKinsey & Company, 2020. Web.

    Labate, John. “M&A Alternatives Take Center Stage: Survey.” The Wall Street Journal, 30 Oct. 2020. Web.

    Lerner, Maya Ber. “How to Calculate ROI on Infrastructure Automation.” DevOps.com, 1 July 2020. Web.

    Loten, Angus. “Companies Without a Tech Plan in M&A Deals Face Higher IT Costs.” The Wall Street Journal, 18 June 2019. Web.

    Low, Jia Jen. “Tackling the tech integration challenge of mergers today” Tech HQ, 6 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Lucas, Suzanne. “5 Reasons Turnover Should Scare You.” Inc. 22 March 2013. Web.

    “M&A Trends Survey: The future of M&A. Deal trends in a changing world.” Deloitte, Oct. 2020. Web.

    Maheshwari, Adi, and Manish Dabas. “Six strategies tech companies are using for successful divesting.” EY, 1 Aug. 2020. Web.

    Majaski, Christina. “Mergers and Acquisitions: What's the Difference?” Investopedia, 30 Apr. 2021.

    “Mergers & Acquisitions: Top 5 Technology Considerations.” Teksetra, 21 Jul. 2020. Web.

    “Mergers Acquisitions M&A Process.” Corporate Finance Institute, n.d. Web.

    “Mergers and acquisitions: A means to gain technology and expertise.” DLA Piper, 2020. Web.

    Nash, Kim S. “CIOs Take Larger Role in Pre-IPO Prep Work.” The Wall Street Journal, 5 March 2015. Web.

    Paszti, Laila. “Canada: Emerging Trends In Information Technology (IT) Mergers And Acquisitions.” Mondaq, 24 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Patel, Kiison. “The 8 Biggest M&A Failures of All Time” Deal Room, 9 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Peek, Sean, and Paula Fernandes. “What Is a Vision Statement?” Business News Daily, 7 May 2020. Web.

    Ravid, Barak. “Tech execs focus on growth amid increasingly competitive M&A market.” EY, 28 April 2021. Web.

    Resch, Scott. “5 Questions with a Mergers & Acquisitions Expert.” CIO, 25 June 2019. Web.

    Salsberg, Brian. “Four tips for estimating one-time M&A integration costs.” EY, 17 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Samuels, Mark. “Mergers and acquisitions: Five ways tech can smooth the way.” ZDNet, 15 Aug. 2018. Web.

    “SAP Divestiture Projects: Options, Approach and Challenges.” Cognizant, May, 2014. Web.

    Steeves, Dave. “7 Rules for Surviving a Merger & Acquisition Technology Integration.” Steeves and Associates, 5 Feb. 2020. Web.

    Tanaszi, Margaret. “Calculating IT Value in Business Terms.” CSO, 27 May 2004. Web.

    “The CIO Playbook. Nine Steps CIOs Must Take For Successful Divestitures.” SNP, 2016. Web.

    “The Role of IT in Supporting Mergers and Acquisitions.” Cognizant, Feb. 2015. Web.

    Torres, Roberto. “M&A playbook: How to prepare for the cost, staff and tech hurdles.” CIO Dive, 14 Nov. 2019. Web.

    “Valuation Methods.” Corporate Finance Institute, n.d. Web.

    Weller, Joe. “The Ultimate Guide to the M&A Process for Buyers and Sellers.” Smartsheet, 16 May 2019. Web.

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}275|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $71,830 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 25 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /organizational-design

    Most organizations go through an organizational redesign to:

    • Better align to the strategic objectives of the organization.
    • Increase the effectiveness of IT as a function.
    • Provide employees with clarity in their roles and responsibilities.
    • Support new capabilities.
    • Better align IT capabilities to suit the vision.
    • Ensure the IT organization can support transformation initiatives.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizational redesign is only as successful as the process leaders engage in. It shapes a story framed in a strong foundation of need and a method to successfully implement and adopt the new structure.
    • Benchmarking your organizational redesign to other organizations will not work. Other organizations have different strategies, drivers, and context. It’s important to focus on your organization, not someone else's.
    • You could have the best IT employees in the world, but if they aren’t structured well your organization will still fail in reaching its vision.

    Impact and Result

    • We are often unsuccessful in organizational redesign because we lack an understanding of why this initiative is required or fail to recognize that it is a change initiative.
    • Successful organizational design requires a clear understanding of why it is needed and what will be achieved by operating in a new structure.
    • Additionally, understanding the impact of the change initiative can lead to greater adoption by core stakeholders.

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Deck – A defined method of redesigning your IT structure that is founded by clear drivers and consistently considering change management practices.

    The purpose of this storyboard is to provide a four-phased approach to organizational redesign.

    • Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure – Phases 1-4

    2. Communication Deck – A method to communicate the new organizational structure to critical stakeholders to gain buy-in and define the need.

    Use this templated Communication Deck to ensure impacted stakeholders have a clear understanding of why the new organizational structure is needed and what that structure will look like.

    • Organizational Design Communications Deck

    3. Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Executive Summary Template – A template to secure executive leadership buy-in and financial support for the new organizational structure to be implemented.

    This template provides IT leaders with an opportunity to present their case for a change in organizational structure and roles to secure the funding and buy-in required to operate in the new structure.

    • Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Executive Summary

    4. Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Workbook – A method to document decisions made and rationale to support working through each phase of the process.

    This Workbook allows IT and business leadership to work through the steps required to complete the organizational redesign process and document key rationale for those decisions.

    • Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Workbook

    5. Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Operating Models and Capability Definitions – A tool that can be used to provide clarity on the different types of operating models that exist as well as the process definitions of each capability.

    Refer to this tool when working through the redesign process to better understand the operating model sketches and the capability definitions. Each capability has been tied back to core frameworks that exist within the information and technology space.

    • Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Operating Models and Capability Definitions

    Infographic

    Workshop: Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish the Organizational Design Foundation

    The Purpose

    Lay the foundation for your organizational redesign by establishing a set of organizational design principles that will guide the redesign process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly articulate why this organizational redesign is needed and the implications the strategies and context will have on your structure.

    Activities

    1.1 Define the org design drivers.

    1.2 Document and define the implications of the business context.

    1.3 Align the structure to support the strategy.

    1.4 Establish guidelines to direct the organizational design process.

    Outputs

    Clear definition of the need to redesign the organizational structure

    Understanding of the business context implications on the organizational structure creation.

    Strategic impact of strategies on organizational design.

    Customized Design Principles to rationalize and guide the organizational design process.

    2 Create the Operating Model Sketch

    The Purpose

    Select and customize an operating model sketch that will accurately reflect the future state your organization is striving towards. Consider how capabilities will be sourced, gaps in delivery, and alignment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A customized operating model sketch that informs what capabilities will make up your IT organization and how those capabilities will align to deliver value to your organization.

    Activities

    2.1 Augmented list of IT capabilities.

    2.2 Capability gap analysis

    2.3 Identified capabilities for outsourcing.

    2.4 Select a base operating model sketch.

    2.5 Customize the IT operating model sketch.

    Outputs

    Customized list of IT processes that make up your organization.

    Analysis of which capabilities require dedicated focus in order to meet goals.

    Definition of why capabilities will be outsourced and the method of outsourcing used to deliver the most value.

    Customized IT operating model reflecting sourcing, centralization, and intended delivery of value.

    3 Formalize the Organizational Structure

    The Purpose

    Translate the operating model sketch into a formal structure with defined functional teams, roles, reporting structure, and responsibilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A detailed organizational chart reflecting team structures, reporting structures, and role responsibilities.

    Activities

    3.1 Categorize your IT capabilities within your defined functional work units.

    3.2 Create a mandate statement for each work unit.

    3.3 Define roles inside the work units and assign accountability and responsibility.

    3.4 Finalize your organizational structure.

    Outputs

    Capabilities Organized Into Functional Groups

    Functional Work Unit Mandates

    Organizational Chart

    4 Plan for the Implementation & Change

    The Purpose

    Ensure the successful implementation of the new organizational structure by strategically communicating and involving stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear plan of action on how to transition to the new structure, communicate the new organizational structure, and measure the effectiveness of the new structure.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify and mitigate key org design risks.

    4.2 Define the transition plan.

    4.3 Create the change communication message.

    4.4 Create a standard set of FAQs.

    4.5 Align sustainment metrics back to core drivers.

    Outputs

    Risk Mitigation Plan

    Change Communication Message

    Standard FAQs

    Implementation and sustainment metrics.

    Further reading

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Designing an IT structure that will enable your strategic vision is not about an org chart – it’s about how you work.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Structure enables strategy.

    The image contains a picture of Allison Straker.

    Allison Straker

    Research Director,

    Organizational Transformation

    The image contains a picture of Brittany Lutes.

    Brittany Lutes

    Senior Research Analyst,

    Organizational Transformation

    An organizational structure is much more than a chart with titles and names. It defines the way that the organization operates on a day-to-day basis to enable the successful delivery of the organization’s information and technology objectives. Moreover, organizational design sees beyond the people that might be performing a specific role. People and role titles will and often do change frequently. Those are the dynamic elements of organizational design that allow your organization to scale and meet specific objectives at defined points of time. Capabilities, on the other hand, are focused and related to specific IT processes.

    Redesigning an IT organizational structure can be a small or large change transformation for your organization. Create a structure that is equally mindful of the opportunities and the constraints that might exist and ensure it will drive the organization towards its vision with a successful implementation. If everyone understands why the IT organization needs to be structured that way, they are more likely to support and adopt the behaviors required to operate in the new structure.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your organization needs to reorganize itself because:

    • The current IT structure does not align to the strategic objectives of the organization.
    • There are inefficiencies in how the IT function is currently operating.
    • IT employees are unclear about their role and responsibilities, leading to inconsistencies.
    • New capabilities or a change in how the capabilities are organized is required to support the transformation.

    Common Obstacles

    Many organizations struggle when it comes redesigning their IT organizational structure because they:

    • Jump right into creating the new organizational chart.
    • Do not include the members of the IT leadership team in the changes.
    • Do not include the business in the changes.
    • Consider the context in which the change will take place and how to enable successful adoption.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Successful IT organization redesign includes:

    • Understanding the drivers, context, and strategies that will inform the structure.
    • Remaining objective by focusing on capabilities over people or roles.
    • Identifying gaps in delivery, sourcing strategies, customers, and degrees of centralization.
    • Remembering that organizational design is a change initiative and will require buy-in.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A successful redesign requires a strong foundation and a plan to ensure successful adoption. Without these, the organizational chart has little meaning or value.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who are looking to:

    • Redesign the IT structure to align to the strategic objectives of the enterprise.
    • Increase the effectiveness in how the IT function is operating in the organization.
    • Provide clarity to employees around their roles and responsibilities.
    • Ensure there is an ability to support new IT capabilities and/or align capabilities to better support the direction of the organization.
    • Align the IT organization to support a business transformation such as becoming digitally enabled or engaging in M&A activities.

    Organizational design is a challenge for many IT and digital executives

    69% of digital executives surveyed indicated challenges related to structure, team silos, business-IT alignment, and required roles when executing on a digital strategy.

    Source: MIT Sloan, 2020

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make IT organizational redesign difficult to address for many organizations:

    • Confuse organizational design and organizational charts as the same thing.
    • Start with the organizational chart, not taking into consideration the foundational elements that will make that chart successful.
    • Fail to treat organizational redesign as a change management initiative and follow through with the change.
    • Exclude impacted or influential IT leaders and/or business stakeholders from the redesign process.
    • Leverage an operating model because it is trending.

    To overcome these barriers:

    • Understand the context in which the changes will take place.
    • Communicate the changes to those impacted to enable successful adoption and implementation of a new organizational structure.
    • Understand that organizational design is for more than just HR leaders now; IT executives should be driving this change.

    Succeed in Organizational Redesign

    75% The percentage of change efforts that fail.

    Source: TLNT, 2019

    55% The percentage of practitioners who identify how information flows between work units as a challenge for their organization.

    Source: Journal of Organizational Design, 2019

    Organizational design defined

    If your IT strategy is your map, your IT organizational design represents the optimal path to get there.

    IT organizational design refers to the process of aligning the organization’s structure, processes, metrics, and talent to the organization’s strategic plan to drive efficiency and effectiveness.

    Why is the right IT organizational design so critical to success?

    Adaptability is at the core of staying competitive today

    Structure is not just an organizational chart

    Organizational design is a never-ending process

    Digital technology and information transparency are driving organizations to reorganize around customer responsiveness. To remain relevant and competitive, your organizational design must be forward looking and ready to adapt to rapid pivots in technology or customer demand.

    The design of your organization dictates how roles function. If not aligned to the strategic direction, the structure will act as a bungee cord and pull the organization back toward its old strategic direction (ResearchGate.net, 2014). Structure supports strategy, but strategy also follows structure.

    Organization design is not a one-time project but a continuous, dynamic process of organizational self-learning and continuous improvement. Landing on the right operating model will provide a solid foundation to build upon as the organization adapts to new challenges and opportunities.

    Understand the organizational differences

    Organizational Design

    Organizational design the process in which you intentionally align the organizational structure to the strategy. It considers the way in which the organization should operate and purposely aligns to the enterprise vision. This process often considers centralization, sourcing, span of control, specialization, authority, and how those all impact or are impacted by the strategic goals.

    Operating Model

    Operating models provide an architectural blueprint of how IT capabilities are organized to deliver value. The placement of the capabilities can alter the culture, delivery of the strategic vision, governance model, team focus, role responsibility, and more. Operating model sketches should be foundational to the organizational design process, providing consistency through org chart changes.

    Organizational Structure

    The organizational structure is the chosen way of aligning the core processes to deliver. This can be strategic, or it can be ad hoc. We recommend you take a strategic approach unless ad hoc aligns to your culture and delivery method. A good organizational structure will include: “someone with authority to make the decisions, a division of labor and a set of rules by which the organization operates” (Bizfluent, 2019).

    Organizational Chart

    The capstone of this change initiative is an easy-to-read chart that visualizes the roles and reporting structure. Most organizations use this to depict where individuals fit into the organization and if there are vacancies. While this should be informed by the structure it does not necessarily depict workflows that will take place. Moreover, this is the output of the organizational design process.

    Sources: Bizfluent, 2019; Strategy & Business, 2015; SHRM, 2021

    The Technology Value Trinity

    The image contains a diagram of the Technology Value Trinity as described in the text below.

    All three elements of the Technology Value Trinity work in harmony to delivery business value and achieve strategic needs. As one changes, the others need to change as well.

    How do these three elements relate?

    • Digital and IT strategy tells you what you need to achieve to be successful.
    • Operating model and organizational design align resources to deliver on your strategy and priorities. This is done by strategically structuring IT capabilities in a way that enables the organizations vision and considers the context in which the structure will operate.
    • I&T governance is the confirmation of IT’s goals and strategy, which ensures the alignment of IT and business strategy and is the mechanism by which you continuously prioritize work to ensure that what is delivered is in line with the strategy.

    Too often strategy, organizational design, and governance are considered separate practices – strategies are defined without teams and resources to support. Structure must follow strategy.

    Info-Tech’s approach to organizational design

    Like a story, a strategy without a structure to deliver on it is simply words on paper.

    Books begin by setting the foundation of the story.

    Introduce your story by:

    • Defining the need(s) that are driving this initiative forward.
    • Introducing the business context in which the organizational redesign must take place.
    • Outlining what’s needed in the redesign to support the organization in reaching its strategic IT goals.

    The plot cannot thicken without the foundation. Your organizational structure and chart should not exist without one either.

    The steps to establish your organizational chart - with functional teams, reporting structure, roles, and responsibilities defined – cannot occur without a clear definition of goals, need, and context. An organizational chart alone won’t provide the insight required to obtain buy-in or realize the necessary changes.

    Conclude your story through change management and communication.

    Good stories don’t end without referencing what happened before. Use the literary technique of foreshadowing – your change management must be embedded throughout the organizational redesign process. This will increase the likelihood that the organizational structure can be communicated, implemented, and reinforced by stakeholders.

    Info-Tech uses a capability-based approach to help you design your organizational structure

    Once your IT strategy is defined, it is critical to identify the capabilities that are required to deliver on those strategic initiatives. Each initiative will require a combination of these capabilities that are only supported through the appropriate organization of roles, skills, and team structures.

    The image contains a diagram of the various services and blueprints that Info-Tech has to offer.

    Embed change management into organizational design

    Change management practices are needed from the onset to ensure the implementation of an organizational structure.

    For each phase of this blueprint, its important to consider change management. These are the points when you need to communicate the structure changes:

    • Phase 1: Begin to socialize the idea of new organizational structure with executive leadership and explain how it might be impactful to the context of the organization. For example, a new control, governance model, or sourcing approach could be considered.
    • Phase 2: The chosen operating model will influence your relationships with the business and can create/eliminate silos. Ensure IT and business leaders have insight into these possible changes and a willingness to move forward.
    • Phase 3: The new organizational structure could create or eliminate teams, reduce or increase role responsibilities, and create different reporting structures than before. It’s time to communicate these changes with those most impacted and be able to highlight the positive outcomes of the various changes.
    • Phase 4: Should consider the change management practices holistically. This includes the type of change and length of time to reach the end state, communication, addressing active resistors, acquiring the right skills, and measuring the success of the new structure and its adoption.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do not undertake an organizational redesign initiative if you will not engage in change management practices that are required to ensure its successful adoption.

    Measure the value of the IT organizational redesign

    Given that the organizational redesign is intended to align with the overall vision and objectives of the business, many of the metrics that support its success will be tied to the business. Adapt the key performance indicators (KPIs) that the business is using to track its success and demonstrate how IT can enable the business and improve its ability to reach those targets.

    Strategic Resources

    The percentage of resources dedicated to strategic priorities and initiatives supported by IT operating model. While operational resources are necessary, ensuring people are allocating time to strategic initiatives as well will drive the business towards its goal state. Leverage Info-Tech’s IT Staffing Assessment diagnostic to benchmark your IT resource allocation.

    Business Satisfaction

    Assess the improvement in business satisfaction overall with IT year over year to ensure the new structure continues to drive satisfaction across all business functions. Leverage Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision diagnostic to see how your IT organization is perceived.

    Role Clarity

    The degree of clarity that IT employees have around their role and its core responsibilities can lead to employee engagement and retention. Consider measuring this core job driver by leveraging Info-Tech’s Employee Engagement Program.

    Customer & User Satisfaction

    Measure customer satisfaction with technology-enabled business services or products and improvements in technology-enabled client acquisition or retention processes. Assess the percentage of users satisfied with the quality of IT service delivery and leverage Info-Tech’s End-User Satisfaction Survey to determine improvements.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Redesigning Your IT Organization

    Phase

    1. Establish the Organizational Design Foundation

    2. Create the Operating Model Sketch

    3. Formalize the Organizational Structure

    4. Plan for Implementation and Change

    Phase Outcomes

    Lay the foundation for your organizational redesign by establishing a set of organizational design principles that will guide the redesign process.

    Select and customize an operating model sketch that will accurately reflect the future state your organization is striving towards. Consider how capabilities will be sourced, gaps in delivery, and alignment.

    Translate the operating model sketch into a formal structure with defined functional teams, roles, reporting structure, and responsibilities.

    Ensure the successful implementation of the new organizational structure by strategically communicating and involving stakeholders.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Organizational redesign processes focus on defining the ways in which you want to operate and deliver on your strategy – something an organizational chart will never be able to convey.

    Phase 1 insight

    Focus on your organization, not someone else's’. Benchmarking your organizational redesign to other organizations will not work. Other organizations have different strategies, drivers, and context.

    Phase 2 insight

    An operating model sketch that is customized to your organization’s specific situation and objectives will significantly increase the chances of creating a purposeful organizational structure.

    Phase 3 insight

    If you follow the steps outlined in the first three phases, creating your new organizational chart should be one of the fastest activities.

    Phase 4 insight

    Throughout the creation of a new organizational design structure, it is critical to involve the individuals and teams that will be impacted.

    Tactical insight

    You could have the best IT employees in the world, but if they aren’t structured well your organization will still fail in reaching its vision.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:


    Communication Deck

    Communicate the changes to other key stakeholders such as peers, managers, and staff.

    Workbook

    As you work through each of the activities, use this workbook as a place to document decisions and rationale.

    Reference Deck

    Definitions for every capability, base operating model sketches, and sample organizational charts aligned to those operating models.

    Job Descriptions

    Key deliverable:

    Executive Presentation

    Leverage this presentation deck to gain executive buy-in for your new organizational structure.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Create an organizational structure that aligns to the strategic goals of IT and the business.
    • Provide IT employees with clarity on their roles and responsibilities to ensure the successful delivery of IT capabilities.
    • Highlight and sufficiently staff IT capabilities that are critical to the organization.
    • Define a sourcing strategy for IT capabilities.
    • Increase employee morale and empowerment.

    Business Benefits

    • IT can carry out the organization’s strategic mission and vision of all technical and digital initiatives.
    • Business has clarity on who and where to direct concerns or questions.
    • Reduce the likelihood of turnover costs as IT employees understand their roles and its importance.
    • Create a method to communicate how the organizational structure aligns with the strategic initiatives of IT.
    • Increase ability to innovate the organization.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    IT design needs to support organizational and business objectives, not just IT needs.

    INDUSTRY: Government

    SOURCE: Analyst Interviews and Working Sessions

    Situation

    IT was tasked with providing equality to the different business functions through the delivery of shared IT services. The government created a new IT organizational structure with a focus on two areas in particular: strategic and operational support capabilities.

    Challenge

    When creating the new IT structure, an understanding of the complex and differing needs of the business functions was not reflected in the shared services model.

    Outcome

    As a result, the new organizational structure for IT did not ensure adequate meeting of business needs. Only the operational support structure was successfully adopted by the organization as it aligned to the individual business objectives. The strategic capabilities aspect was not aligned to how the various business lines viewed themselves and their objectives, causing some partners to feel neglected.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs.

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Call #1: Define the process, understand the need, and create a plan of action.

    Phase 2

    Call #2: Define org. design drivers and business context.

    Call #3: Understand strategic influences and create customized design principles.

    Call #4: Customize, analyze gaps, and define sourcing strategy for IT capabilities.

    Call #5: Select and customize the IT operating model sketch.

    Phase 3

    Call #6: Establish functional work units and their mandates.

    Call #7: Translate the functional organizational chart to an operational organizational chart with defined roles.

    Phase 4

    Call #8: Consider risks and mitigation tactics associated with the new structure and select a transition plan.

    Call #9: Create your change message, FAQs, and metrics to support the implementation plan.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish the Organizational Redesign Foundation

    Create the Operating Model Sketch

    Formalize the Organizational Structure

    Plan for Implementation and Change

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Define the org. design drivers.

    1.2 Document and define the implications of the business context.

    1.3 Align the structure to support the strategy.

    1.4 Establish guidelines to direct the organizational design process.

    2.1 Augment list of IT capabilities.

    2.2 Analyze capability gaps.

    2.3 Identify capabilities for outsourcing.

    2.4 Select a base operating model sketch.

    2.5 Customize the IT operating model sketch.

    3.1 Categorize your IT capabilities within your defined functional work units.

    3.2 Create a mandate statement for each work unit.

    3.3 Define roles inside the work units and assign accountability and responsibility.

    3.4 Finalize your organizational structure.

    4.1 Identify and mitigate key org. design risks.

    4.2 Define the transition plan.

    4.3 Create the change communication message.

    4.4 Create a standard set of FAQs.

    4.5 Align sustainment metrics back to core drivers.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Foundational components to the organizational design
    2. Customized design principles
    1. Heat mapped IT capabilities
    2. Defined outsourcing strategy
    3. Customized operating model
    1. Capabilities organized into functional groups
    2. Functional work unit mandates
    3. Organizational chart
    1. Risk mitigation plan
    2. Change communication message
    3. Standard FAQs
    4. Implementation and sustainment metrics
    1. Completed organizational design communications deck

    This blueprint is part one of a three-phase approach to organizational transformation

    PART 1: DESIGN

    PART 2: STRUCTURE

    PART 3: IMPLEMENT

    IT Organizational Architecture

    Organizational Sketch

    Organizational Structure

    Organizational Chart

    Transition Strategy

    Implement Structure

    1. Define the organizational design drivers, business context, and strategic alignment.

    2. Create customized design principles.

    3. Develop and customize a strategically aligned operating model sketch.

    4. Define the future-state work units.

    5. Create future-state work unit mandates.

    6. Define roles by work unit.

    7. Turn roles into jobs with clear capability accountabilities and responsibilities.

    8. Define reporting relationships between jobs.

    9. Assess options and select go-forward organizational sketch.

    11. Validate organizational sketch.

    12. Analyze workforce utilization.

    13. Define competency framework.

    14. Identify competencies required for jobs.

    15. Determine number of positions per job

    16. Conduct competency assessment.

    17. Assign staff to jobs.

    18. Build a workforce and staffing plan.

    19. Form an OD implementation team.

    20. Develop change vision.

    21. Build communication presentation.

    22. Identify and plan change projects.

    23. Develop organizational transition plan.

    24. Train managers to lead through change.

    25. Define and implement stakeholder engagement plan.

    26. Develop individual transition plans.

    27. Implement transition plans.

    Risk Management: Create, implement, and monitor risk management plan.

    HR Management: Develop job descriptions, conduct job evaluation, and develop compensation packages.

    Monitor and Sustain Stakeholder Engagement

    Phase 1

    Establish the Organizational Redesign Foundation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1 Define the organizational redesign driver(s)

    1.2 Create design principles based on the business context

    1.3a (Optional Exercise) Identify the capabilities from your value stream

    1.3b Identify the capabilities required to deliver on your strategies

    1.4 Finalize your list of design principles

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Embed change management into the organizational design process

    Articulate the Why

    Changes are most successful when leaders clearly articulate the reason for the change – the rationale for the organizational redesign of the IT function. Providing both staff and executive leaders with an understanding for this change is imperative to its success. Despite the potential benefits to a redesign, they can be disruptive. If you are unable to answer the reason why, a redesign might not be the right initiative for your organization.

    Employees who understand the rationale behind decisions made by executive leaders are 3.6 times more likely to be engaged.

    McLean & Company Engagement Survey Database, 2021; N=123,188

    Info-Tech Insight

    Successful adoption of the new organizational design requires change management from the beginning. Start considering how you will convey the need for organizational change within your IT organization.

    The foundation of your organizational design brings together drivers, context, and strategic implications

    All aspects of your IT organization’s structure should be designed with the business’ context and strategic direction in mind.

    Use the following set of slides to extract the key components of your drivers, business context, and strategic direction to land on a future structure that aligns with the larger strategic direction.

    REDESIGN DRIVERS

    Driver(s) can originate from within the IT organization or externally. Ensuring the driver(s) are easy to understand and articulate will increase the successful adoption of the new organizational structure.

    BUSINESS CONTEXT

    Defines the interactions that occur throughout the organization and between the organization and external stakeholders. The context provides insight into the environment by both defining the purpose of the organization and the values that frame how it operates.

    STRATEGY IMPLICATIONS

    The IT strategy should be aligned to the overall business strategy, providing insight into the types of capabilities required to deliver on key IT initiatives.

    Understand IT’s desired maturity level, alignment with business expectations, and capabilities of IT

    Where are we today?

    Determine the current overall maturity level of the IT organization.

    Where do we want to be as an organization?

    Use the inputs from Info-Tech’s diagnostic data to determine where the organization should be after its reorganization.

    How can you leverage these results?

    The result of these diagnostics will inform the design principles that you’ll create in this phase.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s diagnostics to provide an understanding of critical areas your redesign can support:

    CIO Business Vision Diagnostic

    Management & Governance Diagnostic

    IT Staffing Diagnostic

    The image contains a picture of Info-Tech's maturity ladder.

    Consider the organizational design drivers

    Consider organizational redesign if …

    Effectiveness is a concern:

    • Insufficient resources to meet demand
    • Misalignment to IT (and business) strategies
    • Lack of clarity around role responsibility or accountability
    • IT functions operating in silos

    New capabilities are needed:

    • Organization is taking on new capabilities (digital, transformation, M&A)
    • Limited innovation
    • Gaps in the capabilities/services of IT
    • Other external environmental influences or changes in strategic direction

    Lack of business understanding

    • Misalignment between business and IT or how the organization does business
    • Unhappy customers (internal or external)

    Workforce challenges

    • Frequent turnover or inability to attract new skills
    • Low morale or employee empowerment

    These are not good enough reasons …

    • New IT leader looking to make a change for the sake of change or looking to make their legacy known
    • To work with specific/hand-picked leaders over others
    • To “shake things up” to see what happens
    • To force the organization to see IT differently

    Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid change for change’s sake. Restructuring could completely miss the root cause of the problem and merely create a series of new ones.

    1.1 Define the organizational redesign driver(s)

    1-2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm a list of current pain points or inhibitors in the current organizational structure, along with a set of opportunities that can be realized during your restructuring. Group these pain points and opportunities into themes.
    2. Leverage the pain points and opportunities to help further define why this initiative is something you’re driving towards. Consider how you would justify this initiative to different stakeholders in the organization.
    3. Questions to consider:
      1. Who is asking for this initiative?
      2. What are the primary benefits this is intended to produce?
      3. What are you optimizing for?
      4. What are we capable of achieving as an IT organization?
      5. Are the drivers coming from inside or outside the IT organization?
    4. Once you’ve determined the drivers for redesigning the IT organization, prioritize those drivers to ensure there is clarity when communicating why this is something you are focusing time and effort on.

    Input

    Output

    • Knowledge of the current organization
    • Pain point and opportunity themes
    • Defined drivers of the initiative

    Materials

    Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    Frame the organizational design within the context of the business

    Workforce Considerations:

    • How does your organization view its people resources? Does it have the capacity to increase the number of resources?
    • Do you currently have sufficient staff to meet the demands of the organization? Are you able to outsource resources when demand requires it?
    • Are the members of your IT organization unionized?
    • Is your workforce distributed? Do time zones impact how your team can collaborate?

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Culture:

    Culture, "the way we do things here,” has huge implications for executing strategy, driving engagement, and providing a guiding force that ensures organizations can work together toward common goals.

    • What is the culture of your organization? Is it cooperative, traditional, competitive, or innovative? (See appendix for details.)
    • Is this the target culture or a stepping-stone to the ideal culture?
    • How do the attitudes and behaviors of senior leaders in the organization reinforce this culture?

    Consider whether your organization’s culture can accept the operating model and organizational structure changes that make sense on paper.

    Certain cultures may lean toward particular operating models. For example, the demand-develop-service operating model may be supported by a cooperative culture. A traditional organization may lean towards the plan-build-run operating model.

    Ensure you have considered your current culture and added exercises to support it.

    If more capacity is required to accomplish the goals of the organization, you’ll want to prepare the leaders and explain the need in your design principles (to reflect training, upskilling, or outsourcing). Unionized environments require additional consideration. They may necessitate less structural changes, and so your principles will need to reflect other alternatives (hiring additional resources, creative options) to support organizational needs. Hybrid or fully remote workforces may impact how your organization interacts.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Control & Governance:

    It is important to consider how your organization is governed, how decisions are made, and who has authority to make decisions.

    Strategy tells what you do, governance validates you’re doing the right things, and structure is how you execute on what’s been approved.

    • How do decisions get considered and approved in your organization? Are there specific influences that impact the priorities of the organization?
    • Are those in the organization willing to release decision-making authority around specific IT components?
    • Should the organization take on greater accountability for specific IT components?

    Organizations that require more controls may lean toward more centralized governance. Organizations that are looking to better enable and empower their divisions (products, groups, regions, etc.) may look to embed governance in these parts of the organization.

    For enterprise organizations, consider where IT has authority to make decisions (at the global, local, or system level). Appropriate governance needs to be built into the appropriate levels.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Financial Constraints:

    Follow the money: You may need to align your IT organization according to the funding model.

    • Do partners come to IT with their budgets, or does IT have a central pool that they use to fund initiatives from all partners?
    • Are you able to request finances to support key initiatives/roles prioritized by the organization?
    • How is funding aligned: technology, data, digital, etc.? Is your organization business-line funded? Pooled?
    • Are there special products or digital transformation initiatives with resources outside IT? Product ownership funding?
    • How are regulatory changes funded?
    • Do you have the flexibility to adjust your budget throughout the fiscal year?
    • Are chargebacks in place? Are certain services charged back to business units

    Determine if you can move forward with a new model or if you can adjust your existing one to suit the financial constraints.

    If you have no say over your funding, pre-work may be required to build a business case to change your funding model before you look at your organizational structure – without this, you might have to rule out centralized and focus on hybrid/centralized. If you don’t control the budget (funding comes from your partners), it will be difficult to move to a more centralized model.

    A federated business organization may require additional IT governance to help prioritize across the different areas.

    Budgets for digital transformation might come from specific areas of the business, so resources may need to be aligned to support that. You’ll have to consider how you will work with those areas. This may also impact the roles that are going to exist within your IT organization – product owners or division owners might have more say.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Business Perspective of IT:

    How the business perceives IT and how IT perceives itself are sometimes not aligned. Make sure the business’ goals for IT are well understood.

    • Are your business partners satisfied if IT is an order taker? Do they agree with the need for IT to become a business partner? Is IT expected to innovate and transform the organization?
    • Is what the business needs from IT the same as what IT is providing currently?

    Business Organization Structure and Growth:

    • How is the overall organization structured: Centralized/decentralized? Functionally aligned? Divided by regions?
    • In what areas does the organization prioritize investments?
    • Is the organization located across a diverse geography?
    • How big is the organization?
    • How is the organization growing and changing – by mergers and acquisitions?

    If IT needs to become more of a business partner, you’ll want to define what that means to your organization and focus on the capabilities to enable this. Educating your partners might also be required if you’re not aligned.

    For many organizations, this will include stakeholder management, innovation, and product/project management. If IT and its business partners are satisfied with an order-taker relationship, be prepared for the consequences of that.

    A global organization will require different IT needs than a single location. Specifically, site reliability engineering (SRE) or IT support services might be deployed in each region. Organizations growing through mergers and acquisitions can be structured differently depending on what the organization needs from the transaction. A more centralized organization may be appropriate if the driver is reuse for a more holistic approach, or the organization may need a more decentralized organization if the acquisitions need to be handled uniquely.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Sourcing Strategy:

    • What are the drivers for sourcing? Staff augmentation, best practices, time zone support, or another reason?
    • What is your strategy for sourcing?
    • Does IT do all of your technology work, or are parts being done by business or other units?
    • Are we willing/able to outsource, and will that place us into non-compliance (regulations)?
    • Do you have vendor management capabilities in areas that you might outsource?
    • How cloud-driven is your organization?
    • Do you have global operations?

    Change Tolerance:

    • What’s your organization’s tolerance to make changes around organizational design?
    • What's the appetite and threshold for risk?

    Your sourcing strategy affects your organizational structure, including what capabilities you group together. Since managing outsourced capabilities also includes the need for vendor management, you’ll need to ensure there aren’t too many capabilities required per leader. Look closely at what can be achieved through your operating model if IT is done through other groups. Even though these groups may not be in scope of your organization changes, you need to ensure your IT team works with them effectively.

    If your organization is going to push back if there are big structural changes, consider whether the changes are truly necessary. It may be preferred to take baby steps – use an incremental versus big-bang approach.

    A need for incremental change might mean not making a major operating model change.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org Design. Implication

    Stakeholder Engagement & Focus:

    Identify who your customers and stakeholders are; clarify their needs and engagement model.

    • Who is the customer for IT products and services?
    • Is your customer internal? External? Both?
    • How much of a priority is customer focus for your organization?
    • How will IT interact with customers, end users, and partners? What is the engagement model desired?

    Business Vision, Services, and Products:

    Articulate what your organization was built to do.

    • What does the organization create or provide?
    • Are these products and services changing?
    • What are the most critical capabilities to your organization?
    • What makes your organization a success? What are critical success factors of the organization and how are they measuring this to determine success?

    For a customer or user focus, ensure capabilities related to understanding needs (stakeholder, UX, etc.) are prioritized. Hybrid, decentralized, or demand-develop-service models often have more of a focus on customer needs.

    Outsourcing the service desk might be a consideration if there’s a high demand for the service. A differentiation between these users might mean there’s a different demand for services.

    Think broadly in terms of your organizational vision, not just the tactical (widget creation). You might need to choose an operating model that supports vision.

    Do you need to align your organization with your value stream? Do you need to decentralize specific capabilities to enable prioritization of the key capabilities?

    1.2 Create design principles based on the business context

    1-3 hours

    1. Discuss the business context in which the IT organizational redesign will be taking place. Consider the following standard components of the business context; include other relevant components specific to your organization:
    • Culture
    • Workforce Considerations
    • Control and Governance
    • Financial Constraints
    • Business Perspective of IT
    • Business Organization Structure and Growth
    • Sourcing Strategy
    • Change Tolerance
    • Stakeholder Engagement and Focus
    • Business Vision, Services, and Products
  • Different stakeholders can have different perspectives on these questions. Be sure to consider a holistic approach and engage these individuals.
  • Capture your findings and use them to create initial design principles.
  • Input

    Output

    • Business context
    • Design principles reflecting how the business context influences the organizational redesign for IT

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • List of Context Questions
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    How your IT organization is structured needs to reflect what it must be built to do

    Structure follows strategy – the way you design will impact what your organization can produce.

    Designing your IT organization requires an assessment of what it needs to be built to do:

    • What are the most critical capabilities that you need to deliver, and what does success look like in those different areas?
    • What are the most important things that you deliver overall in your organization?

    The IT organization must reflect your business needs:

    • Understand your value stream and/or your prioritized business goals.
    • Understand the impact of your strategies – these can include your overall digital strategy and/or your IT strategy

    1.3a (Optional Exercise) Identify the capabilities from your value stream

    1 hour

    1. Identify your organization’s value stream – what your overall organization needs to do from supplier to consumer to provide value. Leverage Info-Tech’s industry reference architectures if you haven’t identified your value stream, or use the Document Your Business Architecture blueprint to create yours.
    2. For each item in your value stream, list capabilities that are critical to your organizational strategy and IT needs to further invest in to enable growth.
    3. Also, list those that need further support, e.g. those that lead to long wait times, rework time, re-tooling, down-time, unnecessary processes, unvaluable processes.*
    4. Capture the IT capabilities required to enable your business in your draft principles.
    The image contains a screenshot of the above activity: Sampling Manufacturing Business Capabilities.
    Source: Six Sigma Study Guide, 2014
    Input Output
    • Organization’s value stream
    • List of IT capabilities required to support the IT strategy
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    Your strategy will help you decide on your structure

    Ensure that you have a clear view of the goals and initiatives that are needed in your organization. Your IT, digital, business, and/or other strategies will surface the IT capabilities your organization needs to develop. Identify the goals of your organization and the initiatives that are required to deliver on them. What capabilities are required to enable these? These capabilities will need to be reflected in your design principles.

    Sample initiatives and capabilities from an organization’s strategies

    The image contains a screenshot of sample initiatives and capabilities from an organization's strategies.

    1.3b Identify the capabilities required to deliver on your strategies

    1 hour

    1. For each IT goal, there may be one or more initiatives that your organization will need to complete in order to be successful.
    2. Document those goals and infinitives. For each initiative, consider which core IT capabilities will be required to deliver on that goal. There might be one IT capability or there might be several.
    3. Identify which capabilities are being repeated across the different initiatives. Consider whether you are currently investing in those capabilities in your current organizational structure.
    4. Highlight the capabilities that require IT investment in your design principles.
    InputOutput
    • IT goals
    • IT initiatives
    • IT, digital, and business strategies
    • List of IT capabilities required to support the IT strategy
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    Create your organizational design principles

    Your organizational design principles should define a set of loose rules that can be used to design your organizational structure to the specific needs of the work that needs to be done. These rules will guide you through the selection of the appropriate operating model that will meet your business needs. There are multiple ways you can hypothetically organize yourself to meet these needs, and the design principles will point you in the direction of which solution is the most appropriate as well as explain to your stakeholders the rationale behind organizing in a specific way. This foundational step is critical: one of the key reasons for organizational design failure is a lack of requisite time spent on the front-end understanding what is the best fit.

    The image contains an example of organizing design principles as described above.

    1.4 Finalize your list of design principles

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the key outputs from your data collection exercises and their implications.
    2. Consider each of the previous exercises – where does your organization stand from a maturity perspective, what is driving the redesign, what is the business context, and what are the key IT capabilities requiring support. Identify how each will have an implication on your organizational redesign. Leverage this conversation to generate design principles.
    3. Vote on a finalized list of eight to ten design principles that will guide the selection of your operating model. Have everyone leave the meeting with these design principles so they can review them in more detail with their work units or functional areas and elicit any necessary feedback.
    4. Reconvene the group that was originally gathered to create the list of design principles and make any final amendments to the list as necessary. Use this opportunity to define exactly what each design principle means in the context of your organization so everyone has the same understanding of what this means moving forward.
    InputOutput
    • Organizational redesign drivers
    • Business context
    • IT strategy capabilities
    • Organizational design principles to help inform the selection of the right operating model sketch
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    Example design principles

    Your eight to ten design principles will be those that are most relevant to YOUR organization. Below are samples that other organizations have created, but yours will not be the same.

    Design Principle

    Description

    Decision making

    We will centralize decision making around the prioritization of projects to ensure that the initiatives driving the most value for the organization as a whole are executed.

    Fit for purpose

    We will build and maintain fit-for-purpose solutions based on business units’ unique needs.

    Reduction of duplication

    We will reduce role and application duplication through centralized management of assets and clearly differentiated roles that allow individuals to focus within key capability areas.

    Managed security

    We will manage security enterprise-wide and implement compliance and security governance policies.

    Reuse > buy > build

    We will maximize reuse of existing assets by developing a centralized application portfolio management function and approach.

    Managed data

    We will create a specialized data office to provide data initiatives with the focus they need to enable our strategy.

    Design Principle

    Description

    Controlled technical diversity

    We will control the variety of technology platforms we use to allow for increased operability and reduction of costs.

    Innovation

    R&D and innovation are critical – we will build an innovation team into our structure to help us meet our digital agenda.

    Resourcing

    We will separate our project and maintenance activities to ensure each are given the dedicated support they need for success and to reduce the firefighting mentality.

    Customer centricity

    The new structure will be directly aligned with customer needs – we will have dedicated roles around relationship management, requirements, and strategic roadmapping for business units.

    Interoperability

    We will strengthen our enterprise architecture practices to best prepare for future mergers and acquisitions.

    Cloud services

    We will move toward hosted versus on-premises infrastructure solutions, retrain our data center team in cloud best practices, and build roles around effective vendor management, cloud provisioning, and architecture.

    Phase 2

    Create the Operating Model Sketch

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    2.1 Augment the capability list

    2.2 Heatmap capabilities to determine gaps in service

    2.3 Identify the target state of sourcing for your IT capabilities

    2.4 Review and select a base operating model sketch

    2.5 Customize the selected overlay to reflect the desired future state

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Embed change management into the organizational design process

    Gain Buy-In

    Obtain desire from stakeholders to move forward with organizational redesign initiative by involving them in the process to gain interest. This will provide the stakeholders with assurance that their concerns are being heard and will help them to understand the benefits that can be anticipated from the new organizational structure.

    “You’re more likely to get buy-in if you have good reason for the proposed changes – and the key is to emphasize the benefits of an organizational redesign.”

    Source: Lucid Chart

    Info-Tech Insight

    Just because people are aware does not mean they agree. Help different stakeholders understand how the change in the organizational structure is a benefit by specifically stating the benefit to them.

    Info-Tech uses capabilities in your organizational design

    We differentiate between capabilities and competencies.

    Capabilities

    • Capabilities are focused on the entire system that would be in place to satisfy a particular need. This includes the people who are competent to complete a specific task and also the technology, processes, and resources to deliver.
    • Capabilities work in a systematic way to deliver on specific need(s).
    • A functional area is often made up of one or more capabilities that support its ability to deliver on that function.
    • Focusing on capabilities rather then the individuals in organizational redesign enables a more objective and holistic view of what your organization is striving toward.

    Competencies

    • Competencies on the other hand are specific to an individual. It determines if the individual poses the skills or ability to perform.
    • Competencies are rooted in the term competent, which looks to understand if you are proficient enough to complete the specific task at hand.
    • Source: The People Development Magazine, 2020

    Use our IT capabilities to establish your IT organization design

    The image contains a diagram of the various services and blueprints that Info-Tech has to offer.

    2.1 Augment the capability list

    1-3 hours

    1. Using the capability list on the previous slide, go through each of the IT capabilities and remove any capabilities for which your IT organization is not responsible and/or accountable. Refer to the Operating Model and Capability Definition List for descriptions of each of the IT capabilities.
    2. Augment the language of specific capabilities that you feel are not directly reflective of what is being done within your organizational context or that you feel need to be changed to reflect more specifically how work is being done in your organization.
    • For example, some organizations may refer to their service desk capability as help desk or regional support. Use a descriptive term that most accurately reflects the terminology used inside the organization today.
  • Add any core capabilities from your organization that are missing from the provided IT capability list.
    • For example, organizations that leverage DevOps capabilities for their product development may desire to designate this in their operating model.
  • Document the rationale for decisions made for future reference.
  • Input Output
    • Baseline list of IT capabilities
    • IT capabilities required to support IT strategy
    • Customized list of IT capabilities
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Gaps in delivery

    Identify areas that require greater focus and attention.

    Assess the gaps between where you currently are and where you need to be. Evaluate how critical and how effective your capabilities are:

    • Criticality = Importance
      • Try to focus on those which are highly critical to the organization.
      • These may be capabilities that have been identified in your strategies as areas to focus on.
    • Effectiveness = Performance
      • Identify those where the process or system is broken or ineffective, preventing the team from delivering on the capability.
      • Effectiveness could take into consideration how scalable, adaptable, or sustainable each capability is.
      • Focus on the capabilities that are low or medium in effectiveness but highly critical. Addressing the delivery of these capabilities will lead to the most positive outcomes in your organization.

    Remember to identify what allows the highly effective capabilities to perform at the capacity they are. Leverage this when increasing effectiveness elsewhere.

    High Gap

    There is little to no effectiveness (high gap) and the capability is highly important to your organization.

    Medium Gap

    Current ability is medium in effectiveness (medium gap) and there might be some priority for that capability in your organization.

    Low Gap

    Current ability is highly effective (low gap) and the capability is not necessarily a priority for your organization.

    2.2 Heatmap capabilities to determine gaps in delivery

    1-3 hours

    1. At this point, you should have identified what capabilities you need to have to deliver on your organization's goals and initiatives.
    2. Convene a group of the key stakeholders involved in the IT organizational design initiative.
    3. Review your IT capabilities and color each capability border according to the effectiveness and criticality of that capability, creating a heat map.
    • Green indicates current ability is highly effective (low gap) and the capability is not necessarily a priority for your organization.
    • Yellow indicates current ability is medium in effectiveness (medium gap) and there might be some priority for that capability in your organization.
    • Red indicates that there is little to no effectiveness (high gap) and the capability is highly important to your organization.
    Input Output
    • Selected capabilities from activity 2.1
    • Gap analysis in delivery of capabilities currently
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Don’t forget the why: why are you considering outsourcing?

    There are a few different “types” of outsourcing:

    1. Competitive Advantage – Working with a third-party organization for the knowledge, insights, and best practices they can bring to your organization.
    2. Managed Service– The third party manages a capability or function for your organization.
    3. Staff Augmentation – Your organization brings in contractors and third-party organizations to fill specific skills gaps.

    Weigh which sourcing model(s) will best align with the needed capabilities to deliver effectively

    Insourcing

    Staff Augmentation

    Managed Service

    Competitive Advantage

    Description

    The organization maintains full responsibility for the management and delivery of the IT capability or service.

    Vendor provides specialized skills and enables the IT capability or service together with the organization to meet demand.

    Vendor completely manages the delivery of value for the IT capability, product or service.

    Vendor has unique skills, insights, and best practices that can be taught to staff to enable insourced capability and competency.

    Benefits

    • Retains in-house control over proprietary knowledge and assets that provide competitive or operational advantage.
    • Gains efficiency due to integration into the organization’s processes.
    • Provision of unique skills.
    • Addresses variation in demand for resources.
    • Labor cost savings.
    • Improves use of internal resources.
    • Improves effectiveness due to narrow specialization.
    • Labor cost savings.
    • Gain insights into aspects that could provide your organization with advantages over competitors.
    • Long-term labor cost savings.
    • Short-term outsourcing required.
    • Increase in-house competencies.

    Drawbacks

    • Quality of services/capabilities might not be as high due to lack of specialization.
    • No labor cost savings.
    • Potentially inefficient distribution of labor for the delivery of services/capabilities.
    • Potential conflicts in management or delivery of IT services and capabilities.
    • Negative impact on staff morale.
    • Limited control over services/capabilities.
    • Limited integration into organization’s processes.
    • Short-term labor expenses.
    • Requires a culture of continuous learning and improvement.

    Your strategy for outsourcing will vary with capability and capacity

    The image contains a diagram to show the Develop Vendor Management Capabilities, as described in the text below.

    Capability

    Capacity

    Outsourcing Model

    Low

    Low

    Your solutions may be with you for a long time, so it doesn’t matter whether it is a strategic decision to outsource development or if you are not able to attract the talent required to deliver in your market. Look for a studio, agency, or development shop that has a proven reputation for long-term partnership with its clients.

    Low

    High

    Your team has capacity but needs to develop new skills to be successful. Look for a studio, agency, or development shop that has a track record of developing its customers and delivering solutions.

    High

    Low

    Your organization knows what it is doing but is strapped for people. Look at “body shops” and recruiting agencies that will support short-term development contracts that can be converted to full-time staff or even a wholesale development shop acquisition.

    High

    High

    You have capability and capacity for delivering on your everyday demands but need to rise to the challenge of a significant, short-term rise in demand on a critical initiative. Look for a major system integrator or development shop with the specific expertise in the appropriate technology.

    Use these criteria to inform your right sourcing strategy

    Sourcing Criteria

    Description

    Determine whether you’ll outsource using these criteria

    1. Critical or commodity

    Determine whether the component to be sourced is critical to your organization or if it is a commodity. Commodity components, which are either not strategic in nature or related to planning functions, are likely candidates for outsourcing. Will you need to own the intellectual property created by the third party? Are you ok if they reuse that for their other clients?

    2. Readiness to outsource

    Identify how easy it would be to outsource a particular IT component. Consider factors such as knowledge transfer, workforce reassignment or reduction, and level of integration with other components.

    Vendor management readiness – ensuring that you have sufficient capabilities to manage vendors – should also be considered here.

    3. In-house capabilities

    Determine if you have the capability to deliver the IT solutions in-house. This will help you establish how easy it would be to insource an IT component.

    4. Ability to attract resources (internal vs. outsourced)

    Determine if the capability is one that is easily sourced with full-time, internal staff or if it is a specialty skill that is best left for a third-party to source.

    Determine your sourcing model using these criteria

    5. Cost

    Consider the total cost (investment and ongoing costs) of the delivery of the IT component for each of the potential sourcing models for a component.

    6. Quality

    Define the potential impact on the quality of the IT component being sourced by the possible sourcing models.

    7. Compliance

    Determine whether the sourcing model would fit with regulations in your industry. For example, a healthcare provider would only go for a cloud option if that provider is HIPAA compliant.

    8. Security

    Identify the extent to which each sourcing option would leave your organization open to security threats.

    9. Flexibility

    Determine the extent to which the sourcing model will allow your organization to scale up or down as demand changes.

    2.3 Identify capabilities that could be outsourced

    1-3 hours

    1. For each of the capabilities that will be in your future-state operating model, determine if it could be outsourced. Review the sourcing criteria available on the previous slide to help inform which sourcing strategy you will use for each capability.
    2. When looking to outsource or co-source capabilities, consider why that capability would be outsourced:
    • Competitive Advantage – Work with a third-party organization for the knowledge, insights, and best practices they can bring to your organization.
    • Managed Service – The third party manages a capability or function for your organization.
    • Staff Augmentation – Your organization brings in contractors and third-party organizations to fill specific skills gaps.
  • Place an asterisk (*) around the capabilities that will be leveraging one of the three previous sourcing options.
  • InputOutput
    • Customized IT capabilities
    • Sourcing strategy for each IT capability
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    What is an operating model?

    Leverage a cohesive operating model throughout the organizational design process.

    An IT operating model sketch is a visual representation of the way your IT organization needs to be designed and the capabilities it requires to deliver on the business mission, strategic objectives, and technological ambitions. It ensures consistency of all elements in the organizational structure through a clear and coherent blueprint.

    The visual should be the optimization and alignment of the IT organization’s structure to deliver the capabilities required to achieve business goals. Additionally, it should clearly show the flow of work so that key stakeholders can understand where inputs flow in and outputs flow out of the IT organization. Investing time in the front end getting the operating model right is critical. This will give you a framework to rationalize future organizational changes, allowing you to be more iterative and your model to change as the business changes.

    The image contains an example of an operating model as described in the text above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every structure decision you make should be based on an identified need, not on a trend.Build your IT organization to enable the priorities of the organization.

    Each IT operating model is characterized by a variety of advantages and disadvantages

    Centralized

    Hybrid

    Decentralized

    Advantages
    • Maximum flexibility to allocate IT resources across business units.
    • Low-cost delivery model and greatest economies of scale.
    • Control and consistency offers opportunity for technological rationalization and standardization and volume purchasing at the highest degree.
    • Centralizes processes and services that require consistency across the organization.
    • Decentralizes processes and services that need to be responsive to local market conditions.
    • Eliminates duplication and redundancy by allowing effective use of common resources (e.g. shared services, standardization).
    • Goals are aligned to the distinct business units or functions.
    • Greater flexibility and more timely delivery of services.
    • Development resources are highly knowledgeable about business-unit-specific applications.
    • Business unit has greatest control over IT resources and can set and change priorities as needed.

    Disadvantages

    • Less able to respond quickly to local requirements with flexibility.
    • IT can be resistant to change and unwilling to address the unique needs of end users.
    • Business units can be frustrated by perception of lack of control over resources.
    • Development of special business knowledge can be limited.
    • Requires the most disciplined governance structure and the unwavering commitment of the business; therefore, it can be the most difficult to maintain.
    • Requires new processes as pooled resources must be staffed to approved projects.
    • Redundancies, conflicts, and incompatible technologies can result from business units having differentiated services and applications – increasing cost.
    • Ability to share IT resources is low due to lack of common approaches.
    • Lack of integration limits the communication of data between businesses and reduces common reporting.

    Decentralization can take many forms – define what it means to your organization

    Decentralization can take a number of different forms depending on the products the organization supports and how the organization is geographically distributed. Use the following set of explanations to understand the different types of decentralization possible and when they may make sense for supporting your organizational objectives.

    Line of Business

    Decentralization by lines of business (LoB) aligns decision making with business operating units based on related functions or value streams. Localized priorities focus the decision making from the CIO or IT leadership team. This form of decentralization is beneficial in settings where each line of business has a unique set of products or services that require specific expertise or flexible resourcing staffing between the teams.

    Product Line

    Decentralization by product line organizes your team into operationally aligned product families to improve delivery throughput, quality, and resource flexibility within the family. By adopting this approach, you create stable product teams with the right balance between flexibility and resource sharing. This reinforces value delivery and alignment to enterprise goals within the product lines.

    Geographical

    Geographical decentralization reflects a shift from centralized to regional influences. When teams are in different locations, they can experience a number of roadblocks to effective communication (e.g. time zones, regulatory differences in different countries) that may necessitate separating those groups in the organizational structure, so they have the autonomy needed to make critical decisions.

    Functional

    Functional decentralization allows the IT organization to be separated by specialty areas. Organizations structured by functional specialization can often be organized into shared service teams or centers of excellence whereby people are grouped based on their technical, domain, or functional area within IT (Applications, Data, Infrastructure, Security, etc.). This allows people to develop specialized knowledge and skills but can also reinforce silos between teams.

    2.4 Review and select a base operating model sketch

    1 hour

    1. Review the set of base operating model sketches available on the following slides.
    2. For each operating model sketch, there are benefits and risks to be considered. Make an informed selection by understanding the risks that your organization might be taking on by adopting that particular operating model.
    3. If at any point in the selection process the group is unsure about which operating model will be the right fit, refer back to your design principles established in activity 1.4. These should guide you in the selection of the right operating model and eliminate those which will not serve the organization.
    InputOutput
    • Organizational design principles
    • Customized list of IT capabilities
    • Operating model sketch examples
    • Selected operating model sketch
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Centralized Operating Model #1: Plan-Build-Run

    I want to…

    • Establish a formalized governance process that takes direction from the organization on which initiatives should be prioritized by IT.
    • Ensure there is a clear separation between teams that are involved in strategic planning, building solutions, and delivering operational support.
    • Be able to plan long term by understanding the initiatives that are coming down the pipeline and aligning to an infrequent budgeting plan.

    BENEFITS

    • Effective at implementing long-term plans efficiently; separates maintenance and projects to allow each to have the appropriate focus.
    • More oversight over financials; better suited for fixed budgets.
    • Works across centralized technology domains to better align with the business’ strategic objectives – allows for a top-down approach to decision making.
    • Allows for economies of scale and expertise pooling to improve IT’s efficiency.
    • Well-suited for a project-driven environment that employs waterfall or a hybrid project management methodology that is less iterative.

    RISKS

    • Creates artificial silos between the build (developers) and run (operations staff) teams, as both teams focus on their own responsibilities and often fail to see the bigger picture.
    • Miss opportunities to deliver value to the organization or innovate due to an inability to support unpredictable/shifting project demands as decision making is centralized in the plan function.
    • The portfolio of initiatives being pursued is often determined before requirements analysis takes place, meaning the initiative might be solving the wrong need or problem.
    • Depends on strong hand-off processes to be defined and strong knowledge transfer from build to run functions in order to be successful.
    The image contains an example of a Centralized Operating Model: Plan-Build-Run.

    Centralized Operating Model #2: Demand-Develop-Service

    I want to…

    • Listen to the business to understand new initiatives or service enhancements being requested.
    • Enable development and operations to work together to seamlessly deliver in a DevOps culture.
    • Govern and confirm that initiatives being requested by the business are still aligned to IT’s overarching strategy and roadmap before prioritizing those initiatives.

    BENEFITS

    • Aligns well with an end-to-end services model; constant attention to customer demand and service supply.
    • Centralizes service operations under one functional area to serve shared needs across lines of business.
    • Allows for economies of scale and expertise pooling to improve IT’s efficiency.
    • Elevates sourcing and vendor management as its own strategic function; lends well to managed service and digital initiatives.
    • Development and operations housed together; lends well to DevOps-related initiatives and reduces the silos between these two core groups.

    RISKS

    • IT prioritizes the initiatives it thinks are a priority to the business based on how well it establishes good stakeholder relations and communications.
    • Depends on good governance to prevent enhancements and demands from being prioritized without approval from those with accountability and authority.
    • This model thrives in a DevOps culture but does not mean it ensures your organization is a “DevOps” organization. Be sure you're encouraging the right behaviors and attitudes.

    The image contains an example of a Centralized Operating Model: Demand, Develop, Service.

    Hybrid Operating Model #1: LOB/Functional Aligned

    I want to…

    • Better understand the various needs of the organization to align IT priorities and ensure the right services can be delivered.
    • Keep all IT decisions centralized to ensure they align with the overarching strategy and roadmap that IT has set.
    • Organize your shared services in a strategic manner that enables delivery of those services in a way that fits the culture of the organization and the desired method of operating.

    BENEFITS

    • Best of both worlds of centralization and decentralization; attempts to channel benefits from both centralized and decentralized models.
    • Embeds key IT functions that require business knowledge within functional areas, allowing for critical feedback and the ability to understand those business needs.
    • Places IT in a position to not just be “order takers” but to be more involved with the different business units and promote the value of IT.
    • Achieves economies of scale where necessary through the delivery of shared services that can be requested by the function.
    • Shared services can be organized to deliver in the best way that suits the organization.

    RISKS

    • Different business units may bypass governance to get their specific needs met by functions – to alleviate this, IT must have strong governance and prioritize amongst demand.
    • Decentralized role can be viewed as an order taker by the business if not properly embedded and matured.
    • No guaranteed synergy and integration across functions; requires strong communication, collaboration, and steering.
    • Cannot meet every business unit’s needs – can cause tension from varying effectiveness of the IT functions.

    The image contains an example of a Hybrid Operating Model: LOB/Functional Aligned.

    Hybrid Model #2: Product-Aligned Operating Model

    I want to…

    • Align my IT organization into core products (services) that IT provides to the organization and establish a relationship with those in the organization that have alignment to that product.
    • Have roles dedicated to the lifecycle of their product and ensure the product can continuously deliver value to the organization.
    • Maintain centralized set of standards as it applies to overall IT strategy, security, and architecture to ensure consistency across products and reduce silos.

    BENEFITS

    • Focus is on the full lifecycle of a product – takes a strategic view of how technology enables the organization.
    • Promotes centralized backlog around a specific value creator, rather than a traditional project focus that is more transactional.
    • Dedicated teams around the product family ensure you have all of the resources required to deliver on your product roadmap.
    • Reduces barriers between IT and business stakeholders; focuses on technology as a key strategic enabler.
    • Delivery is largely done through frequent releases that can deliver value.

    RISKS

    • If there is little or no business involvement, it could prevent IT from truly understanding business demand and prioritizing the wrong work.
    • A lack of formal governance can create silos between the IT products, causing duplication of efforts, missed opportunities for collaboration, and redundancies in application or vendor contracts.
    • Members of each product can interpret the definition of standards (e.g. architecture, security) differently.

    The image contains an example of the Hybrid Operating Model: Product-Aligned Operating Model.

    Hybrid Operating Model #3: Service-Aligned Operating Model

    I want to…

    • Decentralize the IT organization by the various IT services it offers to the organization while remaining centralized with IT strategy, governance, security and operational services.
    • Ensure IT services are defined and people resources are aligned to deliver on those services.
    • Enable each of IT’s services to have the autonomy to understand the business needs and be able to manage the operational and new project initiatives with a dedicated service owner or business relationship manager.

    BENEFITS

    • Strong enabler of agility as each service has the autonomy to make decisions around operational work versus project work based on their understanding of the business demand.
    • Individuals in similar roles that are decentralized across services are given coaching to provide common direction.
    • Allows teams to efficiently scale with service demand.
    • This is a structurally baseline DevOps model. Each group will have services built within that have their own dedicated teams that will handle the full gambit of responsibilities, from new features to enhancements and maintenance.

    RISKS

    • Service owners require a method to collaborate to avoid duplication of efforts or projects that conflict with the efforts of other IT services.
    • May result in excessive cost through role redundancies across different services, as each will focus on components like integration, stakeholder management, project management, and user experiences.
    • Silos cause a high degree of specialization, making it more difficult for team members to imagine moving to another defined service group, limiting potential career advancement opportunities.
    • The level of complex knowledge required by shared services (e.g. help desk) is often beyond what they can provide, causing them to rely on and escalate to defined service groups more than with other operating models.

    The image contains an example of the Hybrid Operating Model: Service-Aligned Operating Model.

    Decentralized Model: Division Decentralization (LoB, Geography, Function, Product)

    I want to…

    • Decentralize the IT organization to enable greater autonomy within specific groups that have differing customer demands and levels of support.
    • Maintain a standard level of service that can be provided by IT for all divisions.
    • Ensure each division has access to critical data and reports that supports informed decision making.

    BENEFITS

    • Organization around functions allows for diversity in approach in how areas are run to best serve a specific business unit’s needs.
    • Each functional line exists largely independently, with full capacity and control to deliver service at the committed SLAs.
    • Highly responsive to shifting needs and demands with direct connection to customers and all stages of the solution development lifecycle.
    • Accelerates decision making by delegating authority lower into the function.
    • Promotes a flatter organization with less hierarchy and more direct communication with the CIO.

    RISKS

    • Requires risk and security to be centralized and have oversight of each division to prevent the decisions of one division from negatively impacting other divisions or the enterprise.
    • Less synergy and integration across what different lines of business are doing can result in redundancies and unnecessary complexity.
    • Higher overall cost to the IT group due to role and technology duplication across different divisions.
    • It will be difficult to centralize aspects of IT in the future, as divisions adopt to a culture of IT autonomy.

    The image contains an example of the Decentralized Model: Division Decentralization.

    Enterprise Model: Multi-Modal

    I want to…

    • Have an organizational structure that leverages several different operating models based on the needs and requirements of the different divisions.
    • Provide autonomy and authority to the different divisions so they can make informed and necessary changes as they see fit without seeking approval from a centralized IT group.
    • Support the different initiatives the enterprise is focused on delivering and ensure the right model is adopted based on those initiatives.

    BENEFITS

    • Allows for the organization to work in ways that best support individual areas; for example, areas that support legacy systems can be supported through traditional operating models while areas that support digital transformations may be supported through more flexible operating models.
    • Enables a specialization of knowledge related to each division.

    RISKS

    • Inconsistency across the organization can lead to confusion on how the organization should operate.
    • Parts of the organization that work in more traditional operating models may feel limited in career growth and innovation.
    • Cross-division initiatives may require greater oversight and a method to enable operations between the different focus areas.

    The image contains an example of the Enterprise Model: Multi-Modal.

    Create enabling teams that bridge your divisions

    The following bridges might be necessary to augment your divisions:

    • Specialized augmentation: There might not be a sufficient number of resources to support each division. These teams will be leveraged across the divisions; this means that the capabilities needed for each division will exist in this bridge team, rather than in the division.
    • Centers of Excellence: Capabilities that exist within divisions can benefit from shared knowledge across the enterprise. Your organization might set up centers of excellence to support best practices in capabilities organization wide. These are Forums in the unfix model, or communities of practice and support capability development rather than deliveries of each division.
    • Facilitation teams might be required to support divisions through coaching. This might include Agile or other coaches who can help teams adopt practices and embed learnings.
    • Holistic teams provide an enterprise view as they work with various divisions. This can include capabilities like user experience, which can benefit from the holistic perspective rather than a siloed one. People with these capabilities augment the divisions on an as-needed basis.
    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the use of bridges on divisions.

    2.5 Customize the selected sketch to reflect the desired future state

    1-3 hours

    1. Using the baseline operating model sketch, walk through each of the IT capabilities. Based on the outputs from activity 2.1:
      1. Remove any capabilities for which your IT organization is not responsible and/or accountable.
      2. Augment the language of specific capabilities that you feel are not directly reflective of what is being done within your organizational context or that you feel need to be changed to reflect more specifically how work is being done in your organization.
      3. Add any core capabilities from your organization that are missing from the provided IT capability list.
    2. Move capabilities to the right places in the operating model to reflect how each of the core IT processes should interact with one another.
    3. Add bridges as needed to support the divisions in your organization. Identify which capabilities will sit in these bridges and define how they will enable the operating model sketch to deliver.
    InputOutput
    • Selected base operating model sketch
    • Customized list of IT capabilities
    • Understanding of outsourcing and gaps
    • Customized operating model sketch
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Operating model sketch examples
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Document the final operating model sketch in the Communications Deck

    Phase 3

    Formalize the Organizational Structure

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    3.1 Create work units

    3.2 Create work unit mandates

    3.3 Define roles inside the work units

    3.4 Finalize the organizational chart

    3.5 Identify and mitigate key risks

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Embed change management into the organizational design process

    Enable adoption of the new structure.

    You don’t have to make the change in one big bang. You can adopt alternative transition plans such as increments or pilots. This allows people to see the benefits of why you are undergoing the change, allows the change message to be repeated and applied to the individuals impacted, and provides people with time to understand their role in making the new organizational structure successful.

    “Transformational change can be invigorating for some employees but also highly disruptive and stressful for others.”

    Source: OpenStax, 2019

    Info-Tech Insight

    Without considering the individual impact of the new organizational structure on each of your employees, the change will undoubtedly fail in meeting its intended goals and your organization will likely fall back into old structured habits.

    Use a top-down approach to build your target-state IT organizational sketch

    The organizational sketch is the outline of the organization that encompasses the work units and depicts the relationships among them. It’s important that you create the structure that’s right for your organization, not one that simply fits with your current staff’s skills and knowledge. This is why Info-Tech encourages you to use your operating model as a mode of guidance for structuring your future-state organizational sketch.

    The organizational sketch is made up of unique work units. Work units are the foundational building blocks on which you will define the work that IT needs to get done. The number of work units you require and their names will not match your operating model one to one. Certain functional areas will need to be broken down into smaller work units to ensure appropriate leadership and span of control.

    Use your customized operating model to build your work units

    WHAT ARE WORK UNITS?

    A work unit is a functional group or division that has a discrete set of processes or capabilities that it is responsible for, which don’t overlap with any others. Your customized list of IT capabilities will form the building blocks of your work units. Step one in the process of building your structure is grouping IT capabilities together that are similar or that need to be done in concert in the case of more complex work products. The second step is to iterate on these work units based on the organizational design principles from Phase 1 to ensure that the future-state structure is aligned with enablement of the organization’s objectives.

    Work Unit Examples

    Here is a list of example work units you can use to brainstorm what your organization’s could look like. Some of these overlap in functionality but should provide a strong starting point and hint at some potential alternatives to your current way of organizing.

    • Office of the CIO
    • Strategy and Architecture
    • Architecture and Design
    • Business Relationship Management
    • Projection and Portfolio Management
    • Solution Development
    • Solution Delivery
    • DevOps
    • Infrastructure and Operations
    • Enterprise Information Security
    • Security, Risk & Compliance
    • Data and Analytics

    Example of work units

    The image contains an example of work units.

    3.1 Create functional work units

    1-3 hours

    1. Using a whiteboard or large tabletop, list each capability from your operating model on a sticky note and recreate your operating model. Use one color for centralized activities and a second color for decentralized activities.
    2. With the group of key IT stakeholders, review the operating model and any important definitions and rationale for decisions made.
    3. Starting with your centralized capabilities, review each in turn and begin to form logical groups of compatible capabilities. Review the decentralized capabilities and repeat the process, writing additional sticky notes for capabilities that will be repeated in decentralized units.
    4. Note: Not all capabilities need to be grouped. If you believe that a capability has a high enough priority, has a lot of work, or is significantly divergent from others put this capability by itself.
    5. Define a working title for each new work unit, and discuss the pros and cons of the model. Ensure the work units still align with the operating model and make any changes to the operating model needed.
    6. Review your design principles and ensure that they are aligned with your new work units.
    InputOutput
    • Organizational business objectives
    • Customized operating model
    • Defined work units
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Group formation

    Understand the impact of the functional groups you create.

    A group consists of two or more individuals who are working toward a common goal. Group formation is how those individuals are organized to deliver on that common goal. It should take into consideration the levels of hierarchy in your structure, the level of focus you give to processes, and where power is dispersed within your organizational design.

    Importance: Balance highly important capabilities with lower priority capabilities

    Specialization: The scope of each role will be influenced by specialized knowledge and a dedicated leader

    Effectiveness: Group capabilities that increase their efficacy

    Span of Control: Identify the right number of employees reporting to a single leader

    Choose the degree of specialization required

    Be mindful of the number of hats you’re placing on any one role.

    • Specialization exists when individuals in an organization are dedicated to performing specific tasks associated with a common goal and requiring a particular skill set. Aligning the competencies required to carry out the specific tasks based on the degree of complexity associated with those tasks ensures the right people and number of people can be assigned.
    • When people are organized by their specialties, it reduces the likelihood of task switching, reduces the time spent training or cross-training, and increases the focus employees can provide to their dedicated area of specialty.
    • There are disadvantages associated with aligning teams by their specialization, such as becoming bored and seeing the tasks they are performing as monotonous. Specialization doesn’t come without its problems. Monitor employee motivation

    Info-Tech Insight

    Smaller organizations will require less specialization simply out of necessity. To function and deliver on critical processes, some people might be asked to wear several hats.

    Avoid overloading the cognitive capacity of employees

    Cognitive load refers to the number of responsibilities that one can successfully take on.

    • When employees are assigned an appropriate number of responsibilities this leads to:
      • Engaged employees
      • Less task switching
      • Increased effectiveness on assigned responsibilities
      • Reduced bottlenecks
    • While this cognitive load can differ from employee to employee, when assigning role responsibilities, ensure each role isn’t being overburdened and spreading their focus thin.
    • Moreover, capable does not equal successful. Just because someone has the capability to take on more responsibilities doesn’t mean they will be successful.
    • Leverage the cognitive load being placed on your team to help create boundaries between teams and demonstrate clear role expectations.
    Source: IT Revolution, 2021

    Info-Tech Insight

    When you say you are looking for a team that is a “jack of all trades,” you are likely exceeding appropriate cognitive loads for your staff and losing productivity to task switching.

    Factors to consider for span of control

    Too many and too few direct reports have negative impacts on the organization.

    Complexity: More complex work should have fewer direct reports. This often means the leader will need to provide lots of support, even engaging in the work directly at times.

    Demand: Dynamic shifts in demand require more managerial involvement and therefore should have a smaller span of control. Especially if this demand is to support a 24/7 operation.

    Competency Level: Skilled employees should require less hands-on assistance and will be in a better position to support the business as a member of a larger team than those who are new to the role.

    Purpose: Strategic leaders are less involved in the day-to-day operations of their teams, while operational leaders tend to provide hands-on support, specifically when short-staffed.

    Group formation will influence communication structure

    Pick your poison…

    It’s important to understand the impacts that team design has on your services and products. The solutions that a team is capable of producing is highly dependent on how teams are structured. For example, Conway’s Law tells us that small distributed software delivery teams are more likely to produce modular service architecture, where large collocated teams are better able to create monolithic architecture. This doesn’t just apply to software delivery but also other products and services that IT creates. Note that small distributed teams are not the only way to produce quality products as they can create their own silos.

    Sources: Forbes, 2017

    Create mandates for each of your identified work units

    WHAT ARE WORK UNIT MANDATES?

    The work unit mandate should provide a quick overview of the work unit and be clear enough that any reader can understand why the work unit exists, what it does, and what it is accountable for.

    Each work unit will have a unique mandate. Each mandate should be distinguishable enough from your other work units to make it clear why the work is grouped in this specific way, rather than an alternative option. The mandate will vary by organization based on the agreed upon work units, design archetype, and priorities.

    Don’t just adopt an example mandate from another organization or continue use of the organization’s pre-existing mandate – take the time to ensure it accurately depicts what that group is doing so that its value-added activities are clear to the larger organization.

    Examples of Work Unit Mandates

    The Office of the CIO will be a strategic enabler of the IT organization, driving IT organizational performance through improved IT management and governance. A central priority of the Office of the CIO is to ensure that IT is able to respond to evolving environments and challenges through strategic foresight and a centralized view of what is best for the organization.

    The Project Management Office will provide standardized and effective project management practices across the IT landscape, including an identified project management methodology, tools and resources, project prioritization, and all steps from project initiation through to evaluation, as well as education and development for project managers across IT.

    The Solutions Development Group will be responsible for the high-quality development and delivery of new solutions and improvements and the production of customized business reports. Through this function, IT will have improved agility to respond to new initiatives and will be able to deliver high-quality services and insights in a consistent manner.

    3.2 Create work unit mandates

    1-3 hours

    1. Break into teams of three to four people and assign an equal number of work units to each team.
    2. Have each team create a set of statements that describe the overall purpose of that working group. Each mandate statement should:
    • Be clear enough that any reader can understand.
    • Explain why the work unit exists, what it does, and what it is accountable for.
    • Be distinguishable enough from your other work units to make it clear why the work is grouped in this specific way, rather than an alternative option.
  • Have each group present their work unit mandates and make changes wherever necessary.
  • InputOutput
    • Work units
    • Work unit mandates
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Identify the key roles and responsibilities for the target IT organization

    Now that you have identified the main units of work in the target IT organization, it is time to identify the roles that will perform that work. At the end of this step, the key roles will be identified, the purpose statement will be built, and accountability and responsibility for roles will be clearly defined. Make sure that accountability for each task is assigned to one role only. If there are challenges with a role, change the role to address them (e.g. split roles or shift responsibilities).

    The image contains an example of two work units: Enterprise Architecture and PMO. It then lists the roles of the two work units.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do not bias your role design by focusing on your existing staff’s competencies. If you begin to focus on your existing team members, you run the risk of artificially narrowing the scope of work or skewing the responsibilities of individuals based on the way it is, rather than the way it should be.

    3.3 Define roles inside the work units

    1-3 hours

    1. Select a work unit from the organizational sketch.
    2. Describe the most senior role in that work unit by asking, “what would the leader of this group be accountable or responsible for?” Define this role and move the capabilities they will be accountable for under that leader. Repeat this activity for the capabilities this leader would be responsible for.
    3. Continue to define each role that will be required in that work unit to deliver or provide oversight related to those capabilities.
    4. Continue until key roles are identified and the capabilities each role will be accountable or responsible for are clarified.
    5. Remember, only one role can have accountability for each capability but several can have responsibility.
    6. For each role, use the list of capabilities that the position will be accountable, responsible, or accountable and responsible for to create a job description. Leverage your own internal job descriptions or visit our Job Descriptions page.
    InputOutput
    • Work units
    • Work unit mandates
    • Responsibilities
    • Accountabilities
    • Roles with clarified responsibilities and accountabilities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Delivery model for product or solution development

    Can add additional complexity or clarity

    • Certain organizational structures will require a specific type of resourcing model to meet expectations and deliver on the development or sustainment of core products and solutions.
    • There are four common methods that we see in IT organizations:
      • Functional Roles: Completed work is handed off from functional team to functional team sequentially as outlined in the organization’s SDLC.
      • Shared Service & Resource Pools (Matrix): Resources are pulled whenever the work requires specific skills or pushed to areas where product demand is high.
      • Product or System: Work is directly sent to the teams who are directly managing the product or directly supporting the requestor.
      • Skills & Competencies: Work is directly sent to the teams who have the IT and business skills and competencies to complete the work.
    • Each of these will lead to a difference in how the functional team is skilled. They could have a great understanding of their customer, the product, the solution, or their service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Despite popular belief, there is no such thing as the Spotify model, and organizations that structured themselves based on the original Spotify drawing might be missing out on key opportunities to obtain productivity from employees.

    Sources: Indeed, 2020; Agility Scales

    There can be different patterns to structure and resource your product delivery teams

    The primary goal of any product delivery team is to improve the delivery of value for customers and the business based on your product definition and each product’s demand. Each organization will have different priorities and constraints, so your team structure may take on a combination of patterns or may take on one pattern and then transform into another.

    Delivery Team Structure Patterns

    How Are Resources and Work Allocated?

    Functional Roles

    Teams are divided by functional responsibilities (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk) and arranged according to their placement in the software development lifecycle (SDLC).

    Completed work is handed off from team to team sequentially as outlined in the organization’s SDLC.

    Shared Service and Resource Pools

    Teams are created by pulling the necessary resources from pools (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk).

    Resources are pulled whenever the work requires specific skills or pushed to areas where product demand is high.

    Product or System

    Teams are dedicated to the development, support, and management of specific products or systems.

    Work is directly sent to the teams who are directly managing the product or directly supporting the requester.

    Skills and Competencies

    Teams are grouped based on skills and competencies related to technology (e.g. Java, mobile, web) or familiarity with business capabilities (e.g. HR, Finance).

    Work is directly sent to the teams who have the IT and business skills and competencies to complete the work.

    Delivery teams will be structured according to resource and development needs

    Functional Roles

    Shared Service and Resource Pools

    Product or System

    Skills and Competencies

    When your people are specialists versus having cross-functional skills

    Leveraged when specialists such as Security or Operations will not have full-time work on the product

    When you have people with cross-functional skills who can self-organize around a product’s needs

    When you have a significant investment in a specific technology stack

    The image contains a diagram of functional roles.The image contains a diagram of shared service and resource pools.The image contains a diagram of product or system.The image contains a diagram of skills and competencies.

    For more information about delivering in a product operating model, refer to our Deliver Digital Products at Scale blueprint.

    3.4 Finalize the organizational chart

    1-3 hours

    1. Import each of your work units and the target-state roles that were identified for each.
    2. In the place of the name of each work unit in your organizational sketch, replace the work unit name with the prospective role name for the leader of that group.
    3. Under each of the leadership roles, import the names of team members that were part of each respective work unit.
    4. Validate the final structure as a group to ensure each of the work units includes all the necessary roles and responsibilities and that there is clear delineation of accountabilities between the work units.

    Input

    Output

    • Work units
    • Work unit mandates
    • Roles with accountabilities and responsibilities
    • Finalized organizational chart

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook & Executive Communications Deck

    Proactively consider and mitigate redesign risks

    Every organizational structure will include certain risks that should have been considered and accepted when choosing the base operating model sketch. Now that the final organizational structure has been created, consider if those risks were mitigated by the final organizational structure that was created. For those risks that weren’t mitigated, have a tactic to control risks that remain present.

    3.5 Identify and mitigate key risks

    1-3 hours

    1. For each of the operating model sketch options, there are specific risks that should have been considered when selecting that model.
    2. Take those risks and transfer them into the correct slide of the Organizational Design Workbook.
    3. Consider if there are additional risks that need to be considered with the new organizational structure based on the customizations made.
    4. For each risk, rank the severity of that risk on a scale of low, medium, or high.
    5. Determine one or more mitigation tactic(s) for each of the risks identified. This tactic should reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event happening.
    InputOutput
    • Final organizational structure
    • Operating model sketch benefits and risks
    • Redesign risk mitigation plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Phase 4

    Plan for Implementation & Change

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    4.1 Select a transition plan

    4.2 Establish the change communication messages

    4.3 Be consistent with a standard set of FAQs

    4.4 Define org. redesign resistors

    4.5 Create a sustainment plan

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership
    • HR Business Partners

    All changes require change management

    Change management is:

    Managing a change that requires replanning and reorganizing and that causes people to feel like they have lost control over aspects of their jobs.

    – Padar et al., 2017
    People Process Technology

    Embedding change management into organizational design

    PREPARE A

    Awareness: Establish the need for organizational redesign and ensure this is communicated well.

    This blueprint is mostly focused on the prepare and transition components.

    D

    Desire: Ensure the new structure is something people are seeking and will lead to individual benefits for all.

    TRANSITION K

    Knowledge: Provide stakeholders with the tools and resources to function in their new roles and reporting structure.

    A

    Ability: Support employees through the implementation and into new roles or teams.

    FUTURE R

    Reinforcement: Emphasize and reward positive behaviors and attitudes related to the new organizational structure.

    Implementing the new organizational structure

    Implementing the organizational structure can be the most difficult part of the process.

    • To succeed in the process, consider creating an implementation plan that adequately considers these five components.
    • Each of these are critical to supporting the final organizational structure that was established during the redesign process.

    Implementation Plan

    Transition Plan: Identify the appropriate approach to making the transition, and ensure the transition plan works within the context of the business.

    Communication Strategy: Create a method to ensure consistent, clear, and concise information can be provided to all relevant stakeholders.

    Plan to Address Resistance: Given that not everyone will be happy to move forward with the new organizational changes, ensure you have a method to hear feedback and demonstrate concerns have been heard.

    Employee Development Plan: Provide employees with tools, resources, and the ability to demonstrate these new competencies as they adjust to their new roles.

    Monitor and Sustain the Change: Establish metrics that inform if the implementation of the new organizational structure was successful and reinforce positive behaviors.

    Define the type of change the organizational structure will be

    As a result, your organization must adopt OCM practices to better support the acceptance and longevity of the changes being pursued.

    Incremental Change

    Transformational Change

    Organizational change management is highly recommended and beneficial for projects that require people to:

    • Adopt new tools and workflows.
    • Learn new skills.
    • Comply with new policies and procedures.
    • Stop using old tools and workflows.

    Organizational change management is required for projects that require people to:

    • Move into different roles, reporting structures, and career paths.
    • Embrace new responsibilities, goals, reward systems, and values.
    • Grow out of old habits, ideas, and behaviors.
    • Lose stature in the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    How you transition to the new organizational structure can be heavily influenced by HR. This is the time to be including them and leveraging their expertise to support the transition “how.”

    Transition Plan Options

    Description

    Pros

    Cons

    Example

    Big Bang Change

    Change that needs to happen immediately – “ripping the bandage off.”

    • It puts an immediate stop to the current way of operating.
    • Occurs quickly.
    • More risky.
    • People may not buy into the change immediately.
    • May not receive the training needed to adjust to the change.

    A tsunami in Japan stopped all imports and exports. Auto manufacturers were unable to get parts shipped and had to immediately find an alternative supplier.

    Incremental Change

    The change can be rolled out slower, in phases.

    • Can ensure that people are bought in along the way through the change process, allowing time to adjust and align with the change.
    • There is time to ensure training takes place.
    • It can be a timely process.
    • If the change is dragged on for too long (over several years) the environment may change and the rationale and desired outcome for the change may no longer be relevant.

    A change in technology, such as HRIS, might be rolled out one application at a time to ensure that people have time to learn and adjust to the new system.

    Pilot Change

    The change is rolled out for only a select group, to test and determine if it is suitable to roll out to all impacted stakeholders.

    • Able to test the success of the change initiative and the implementation process.
    • Able to make corrections before rolling it out wider, to aid a smooth change.
    • Use the pilot group as an example of successful change.
    • Able to gain buy-in and create change champions from the pilot group who have experienced it and see the benefits.
    • Able to prevent an inappropriate change from impacting the entire organization.
    • Lengthy process.
    • Takes time to ensure the change has been fully worked through.

    A retail store is implementing a new incentive plan to increase product sales. They will pilot the new incentive plan at select stores, before rolling it out broadly.

    4.1 Select a transition plan approach

    1-3 hours

    1. List each of the changes required to move from your current structure to the new structure. Consider:
      1. Changes in reporting structure
      2. Hiring new members
      3. Eliminating positions
      4. Developing key competencies for staff
    2. Once you’ve defined all the changes required, consider the three different transition plan approaches: big bang, incremental, and pilot. Each of the transition plan approaches will have drawbacks and benefits. Use the list of changes to inform the best approach.
    3. If you are proceeding with the incremental or the pilot, determine the order in which you will proceed with the changes or the groups that will pilot the new structure first.
    InputOutput
    • Customized operating model sketch
    • New org. chart
    • Current org. chart
    • List of changes to move from current to future state
    • Transition plan to support changes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • HR Business Partners

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Make a plan to effectively manage and communicate the change

    Success of your new organizational structure hinges on adequate preparation and effective communication.

    The top challenge facing organizations in completing the organizational redesign is their organizational culture and acceptance of change. Effective planning for the implementation and communication throughout the change is pivotal. Make sure you understand how the change will impact staff and create tailored plans for communication.

    65% of managers believe the organizational change is effective when provided with frequent and clear communication.

    Source: SHRM, 2021

    Communicate reasons for organizational structure changes and how they will be implemented

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message, i.e. a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state, and that makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The organizational change message should:

    • Explain why the change is needed.
    • Summarize what will stay the same.
    • Highlight what will be left behind.
    • Emphasize what is being changed.
    • Explain how change will be implemented.
    • Address how change will affect various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss the staff’s role in making the change successful.

    Five elements of communicating change

    • What is the change?
    • Why are we doing it?
    • How are we going to go about it?
    • How long will it take us to do it?
    • What will the role be for each department and individual?
    Source: Cornelius & Associates, 2010

    4.2 Establish the change communication messages

    2 hours

    1. The purpose of this activity is to establish a change communication message you can leverage when talking to stakeholders about the new organizational structure.
    2. Review the questions in the Organizational Design Workbook.
    3. Establish a clear message around the expected changes that will have to take place to help realize the new organizational structure.
    InputOutput
    • Customized operating model sketch
    • New org. chart
    • Current org. chart
    • List of changes
    • Transition plan
    • Change communication message for new organizational structure
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Apply the following communication principles to make your IT organization redesign changes relevant to stakeholders

    Be Clear

    • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
    • Choice of language is important: “Do you think this is a good idea? I think we could really benefit from your insights and experience here.” Or do you mean: “I think we should do this. I need you to do this to make it happen.”
    • Don’t use jargon.

    Be Consistent

    • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Test your communication with your team or colleagues to obtain feedback before delivering to a broader audience.
    • A lack of consistency can be interpreted as an attempt at deception. This can hurt credibility and trust.

    Be Concise

    • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
    • There is a risk of diluting your key message if you include too many other details.

    Be Relevant

    • Talk about what matters to the stakeholder.
    • Talk about what matters to the initiative.
    • Tailor the details of the message to each stakeholder’s specific concerns.
    • IT thinks in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be understood but this does not matter to stakeholders. Think: “what’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.

    Frequently asked questions (FAQs) provide a chance to anticipate concerns and address them

    As a starting point for building an IT organizational design implementation, look at implementing an FAQ that will address the following:

    • The what, who, when, why, and where
    • The transition process
    • What discussions should be held with clients in business units
    • HR-centric questions

    Questions to consider answering:

    • What is the objective of the IT organization?
    • What are the primary changes to the IT organization?
    • What does the new organizational structure look like?
    • What are the benefits to our IT staff and to our business partners?
    • How will the IT management team share new information with me?
    • What is my role during the transition?
    • What impact is there to my reporting relationship within my department?
    • What are the key dates I should know about?

    4.3 Be consistent with a standard set of FAQs

    1 hour

    1. Beyond the completed communications plans, brainstorm a list of answers to the key “whats” of your organizational design initiative:
    • What is the objective of the IT organization?
    • What are the primary changes to the IT organization?
    • What does the new organizational structure look like?
    • What are the benefits to our IT staff and to our business partners?
  • Think about any key questions that may rise around the transition:
    • How will the IT management team share new information with me?
    • What is my role during the transition?
    • What impact is there to my reporting relationship within my department?
    • What are the key dates I should know about?
  • Determine the best means of socializing this information. If you have an internal wiki or knowledge-sharing platform, this would be a useful place to host the information.
  • InputOutput
    • Driver(s) for the new organizational structure
    • List of changes to move from current to future state
    • Change communication message
    • FAQs to provide to staff about the organizational design changes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    The change reaction model

    The image contains a picture of the change reaction model. The model includes a double arrow pointing in both directions of left and right. On top of the arrow are 4 circles spread out on the arrow. They are labelled: Active Resistance, Detachment, Questioning, Acceptance.

    (Adapted from Cynthia Wittig)

    Info-Tech Insight

    People resist changes for many reasons. When it comes to organizational redesign changes, some of the most common reasons people resist change include a lack of understanding, a lack of involvement in the process, and fear.

    Include employees in the employee development planning process

    Prioritize

    Assess employee to determine competency levels and interests.

    Draft

    Employee drafts development goals; manager reviews.

    Select

    Manager helps with selection of development activities.

    Check In

    Manager provides ongoing check-ins, coaching, and feedback.

    Consider core and supplementary components that will sustain the new organizational structure

    Supplementary sustainment components:

    • Tools & Resources
    • Structure
    • Skills
    • Work Environment
    • Tasks
    • Disincentives

    Core sustainment components:

    • Empowerment
    • Measurement
    • Leadership
    • Communication
    • Incentives

    Sustainment Plan

    Sustain the change by following through with stakeholders, gathering feedback, and ensuring that the change rationale and impacts are clearly understood. Failure to so increases the potential that the change initiative will fail or be a painful experience and cost the organization in terms of loss of productivity or increase in turnover rates.

    Support sustainment with clear measurements

    • Measurement is one of the most important components of monitoring and sustaining the new organizational structure as it provides insight into where the change is succeeding and where further support should be added.
    • There should be two different types of measurements:
    1. Standard Change Management Metrics
    2. Organizational Redesign Metrics
  • When gathering data around metrics, consider other forms of measurement (qualitative) that can provide insights on opportunities to enhance the success of the organizational redesign change.
    1. Every measurement should be rooted to a goal. Many of the goals related to organizational design will be founded in the driver of this change initiative
    2. Once the goals have been defined, create one or more measurements that determines if the goal was successful.
    3. Use specific key performance indicators (KPIs) that contain a metric that is being measured and the frequency of that measurement.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Obtaining qualitative feedback from employees, customers, and business partners can provide insight into where the new organizational structure is operating optimally versus where there are further adjustments that could be made to support the change.

    4.4 Consider sustainment metrics

    1 hour

    1. Establish metrics that bring the entire process together and that will ensure the new organizational design is a success.
    2. Go back to your driver(s) for the organizational redesign. Use these drivers to help inform a particular measurement that can be used to determine if the new organizational design will be successful. Each measurement should be related to the positive benefits of the organization, an individual, or the change itself.
    3. Once you have a list of measurements, use these to determine the specific KPI that can be qualified through a metric. Often you are looking for an increase or decrease of a particular measurement by a dollar or percentage within a set time frame.
    4. Use the example metrics in the workbook and update them to reflect your organization’s drivers.
    InputOutput
    • Driver(s) for the new organizational structure
    • List of changes to move from current to future state
    • Change communication message
    • Sustainment metrics
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    • Continue into the second phase of the organizational redesign process by defining the required workforce to deliver.
    • Leveraging trends, data, and feedback from your employees, define the competencies needed to deliver on the defined roles.

    Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

    • Organizational design implementations can be highly disruptive for IT staff and business partners.
    • Without a structured approach, IT leaders may experience high turnover, decreased productivity, and resistance to the change.

    Define the Role of Project Management in Agile and Product-Centric Delivery

    • There are many voices with different opinions on the role of project management. This causes confusion and unnecessary churn.
    • Project management and product management naturally align to different time horizons. Harmonizing their viewpoints can take significant work.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    The image contains a picture of Jardena London.

    Jardena London

    Transformation Catalyst, Rosetta Technology Group

    The image contains a picture of Jodie Goulden.

    Jodie Goulden

    Consultant | Founder, OrgDesign Works

    The image contains a picture of Shan Pretheshan.

    Shan Pretheshan

    Director, SUPA-IT Consulting

    The image contains a picture of Chris Briley.

    Chris Briley

    CIO, Manning & Napier

    The image contains a picture of Dean Meyer.

    Dean Meyer

    President N. Dean Meyer and Associates Inc.

    The image contains a picture of Jimmy Williams.

    Jimmy Williams

    CIO, Chocktaw Nation of Oklahoma

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Cole Cioran, Managing Partner

    Dana Daher, Research Director

    Hans Eckman, Principal Research Director

    Ugbad Farah, Research Director

    Ari Glaizel, Practice Lead

    Valence Howden, Principal Research Director

    Youssef Kamar, Senior Manager, Consulting

    Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead

    Baird Miller, Executive Counsellor

    Josh Mori, Research Director

    Rajesh Parab, Research Director

    Gary Rietz, Executive Counsellor

    Bibliography

    “A Cheat Sheet for HR Professionals: The Organizational Development Process.” AIHR, 2021. Web.

    Acharya, Ashwin, Roni Lieber, Lissa Seem, and Tom Welchman. “How to identify the right ‘spans of control’ for your organization.” McKinsey, 21 December 2017. Web.

    Anand. N., and Jean-Louis Barsoux. “What everyone gets wrong about change management. Harvard Business Review, December 2017. Web.

    Atiken, Chris. “Operating model design-first principles.” From Here On, 24 August 2018. Web.

    “Avoid common digital transformation challenges: Address your IT Operating Model Now.” Sofigate, 5 May 2020. Web.

    Baumann, Oliver, and Brian Wu. “The many dimensions of research on designing flat firms.” Journal of Organizational Design, no. 3, vol. 4. 09 May 2022.Web.

    Bertha, Michael. “Cross the project to product chasm.” CIO, 1 May 2020. Web.

    Blenko, Marcia, and James Root. “Design Principles for a Robust Operating Model.” Bain & Company, 8 April 2015. Web.

    Blenko, Marcia, Leslie Mackrell, and Kevin Rosenberg. “Operating models: How non-profits get from strategy to results.” The Bridge Span Group, 15 August 2019. Web.

    Boulton, Clint. “PVH finds perfect fit in hybrid IT operating model amid pandemic.” CIO, 19 July 2021. Web.

    Boulton, Clint. “Why digital disruption leaves no room for bimodal IT.” CIO, 11 May 2017. Web.

    Bright, David, et al. “Chapter 10: Organizational Structure & Change.” Principles of Management, OpenStax, Rice University, 20 March 2019. Book.

    Campbell, Andrew. “Design Principles: How to manage them.” Ashridge Operating Models. 1 January 2022. Web.

    D., Maria. “3 Types of IT Outsourcing Models and How to Choose Between Them.” Cleveroad, 29 April 2022. Web.

    Devaney, Eric. “9 Types of Organizational Structure Every Company Should Consider.” HubSpot, 11 February 2022. Web.

    Devaney, Erik. “The six building blocks of organizational structure.” Hubspot, 3 June 2020. Web.

    Eisenman, M., S. Paruchuri, and P. Puranam. “The design of emergence in organizations.” Journal of Organization Design, vol. 9, 2020. Web.

    Forbes Business Development Council. “15 Clear Signs It’s Time to Restructure the Business.” Forbes, 10 February 2020. Web.

    Freed, Joseph. “Why Cognitive Load Could Be The Most Important Employee Experience Metric In The Next 10 Years.” Forbes, 30 June 2020. Web.

    Galibraith, Jay. “The Star Model.” JayGalbraith.com, n.d. Web.

    Girod, Stéphane, and Samina Karim. “Restructure or reconfigure?” Harvard Business Review, April 2017. Web.

    Goldman, Sharon. “The need for a new IT Operating Model: Why now?” CIO, 27 August 2019. Web.

    Halapeth, Milind. “New age IT Operating Model: Creating harmony between the old and the new.” Wirpo, n.d. Web.

    Harvey, Michelle. “Why a common operating model is efficient for business productivity.” CMC, 10 May 2020. Web.

    Helfand, Heidi. “Dynamic Reteaming.” O’Reilly Media, 7 July 2020. Book.

    JHeller, Martha. “How Microsoft CIO Jim DuBois changed the IT Operating Model.” CIO, 2 February 2016. Web.

    Heller, Martha. “How Stryker IT Shifted to a global operating model.” CIO, 19 May 2021. Web.

    Heller, Michelle. “Inside blue Shields of California’s IT operating model overhaul.” CIO, 24 February 2021. Web.

    Hessing, Ted. “Value Stream Mapping.” Six Sigma Study Guide, 11 April 2014. Web.

    Huber, George, P. “What is Organization Design.” Organizational Design Community, n.d. Web.

    Indeed Editorial Team. “5 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Matrix Organizational Structure.” Indeed, 23 November 2020. Web.

    Indeed Editorial Team. “How to plan an effective organization restructure.” Indeed, 10 June 2021. Web.

    “Insourcing vs Outsourcing vs Co-Sourcing.” YML Group, n.d. Web.

    “Investing in more strategic roles.” CAPS Research, 3 February 2022. Web.

    Jain, Gagan. “Product IT Operating Model: The next-gen model for a digital work.” DevOps, 22 July 2019. Web.

    Kane, Gerald, D. Plamer, and Anh Phillips. “Accelerating Digital Innovation Inside and Out.” Deloitte Insights, 4 June 2019. Web.

    Krush, Alesia. “IT companies with ‘flat’ structures: utopia or innovative approach?” Object Style, 18 October 2018. Web.

    Law, Michael. “Adaptive Design: Increasing Customer Value in Your Organisation.” Business Agility Institute, 5 October 2020. Web.

    LucidContent Team. “How to get buy-in for changes to your organizational structure.” Lucid Chart, n.d. Web.

    Matthews, Paul. “Do you know the difference between competence and capability?” The People Development Magazine, 25 September 2020. Web.

    Meyer, Dean N. “Analysis: Common symptoms of organizational structure problems.” NDMA, n.d. Web.

    Meyer, N. Dean. “Principle-based Organizational Structure.” NDMA Publishing, 2020. Web.

    Morales Pedraza, Jorge. Answer to posting, “What is the relationship between structure and strategy?” ResearchGate.net, 5 March 2014. Web.

    Nanjad, Len. “Five non-negotiables for effective organization design change.” MNP, 01 October 2021. Web.

    Neilson, Gary, Jaime Estupiñán, and Bhushan Sethi. “10 Principles of Organizational Design.” Strategy & Business, 23 March 2015. Web.

    Nicastro, Dom. “Understanding the Foundational Concepts of Organizational Design.” Reworked, 24 September 2020. Web.

    Obwegeser, Nikolaus, Tomoko Yokoi, Michael Wade, and Tom Voskes. “7 Key Principles to Govern Digital Initiatives.” MIT Sloan, 1 April 2020. Web.

    “Operating Models and Tools.” Business Technology Standard, 23 February 2021. Web.

    “Organizational Design Agility: Journey to a combined community.” ODF-BAI How Space, Organizational Design Forum, 2022. Web.

    “Organizational Design: Understanding and getting started.” Ingentis, 20 January 2021. Web.

    Padar, Katalin, et al. “Bringing project and change management roles into sync.” Journal of Change Management, 2017. Web.

    Partridge, Chris. “Evolve your Operating Model- It will drive everything.” CIO, 30 July 2021. Web.

    Pijnacker, Lieke. “HR Analytics: role clarity impacts performance.” Effectory, 25 September 2019. Web.

    Pressgrove, Jed. “Centralized vs. Federated: Breaking down IT Structures.” Government Technology, March 2020. Web.

    Sherman, Fraser. “Differences between Organizational Structure and Design.” Bizfluent, 20 September 2019. Web.

    Skelton, Matthew, and Manual Pais. “Team Cognitive Load.” IT Revolution, 19 January 2021. Web.

    Skelton, Matthew, and Manual Pais. Team Topologies. IT Revolution Press, 19 September 2019. Book

    Spencer, Janet, and Michael Watkins. “Why organizational change fails.” TLNT, 26 November 2019. Web.

    Storbakken, Mandy. “The Cloud Operating Model.” VMware, 27 January 2020. Web.

    "The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, 2010. Web.

    “Understanding Organizational Structures.” SHRM, 31 August 2021. Web.

    "unfix Pattern: Base.” AgilityScales, n.d. Web.

    Walker, Alex. “Half-Life: Alyx helped change Valve’s Approach to Development.” Kotaku, 10 July 2020. Web.

    "Why Change Management.” Prosci, n.d. Web.

    Wittig, Cynthia. “Employees' Reactions to Organizational Change.” OD Practioner, vol. 44, no. 2, 2012. Web.

    Woods, Dan. “How Platforms are neutralizing Conway’s Law.” Forbes, 15 August 2017. Web.

    Worren, Nicolay, Jeroen van Bree, and William Zybach. “Organization Design Challenges. Results from a practitioner survey.” Journal of Organizational Design, vol. 8, 25 July 2019. Web.

    Appendix

    IT Culture Framework

    This framework leverages McLean & Company’s adaptation of Quinn and Rohrbaugh’s Competing Values Approach.

    The image contains a diagram of the IT Culture Framework. The framework is divided into four sections: Competitive, Innovative, Traditional, and Cooperative, each with their own list of descriptors.

    Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}370|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,075 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • The fast evolution of the cybersecurity landscape requires security training and awareness programs that are frequently updated and improved.
    • Security and awareness training programs often fail to engage end users. Lack of engagement can lead to low levels of knowledge retention.
    • Irrelevant or outdated training content does not properly prepare your end users to effectively defend the organization against security threats.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • One-time, annual training is no longer sufficient for creating an effective security awareness and training program.
    • By presenting security as a personal and individualized issue, you can make this new personal focus a driver for your organizational security awareness and training program.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a training program that delivers smaller amounts of information on a more frequent basis to minimize effort, reduce end-user training fatigue, and improve content relevance.
    • Evaluate and improve your security awareness and training program continuously to keep its content up-to-date. Leverage end-user feedback to ensure content remains relevant to those who receive it.

    Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a security awareness and training program that empowers end users, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop your training program

    Create or mature a security awareness and training program that is tailored to your organization.

    • Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users – Phase 1: Develop Your Training Program
    • Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool
    • End-User Security Job Description Template
    • Training Materials – Physical Computer Security
    • Training Materials – Cyber Attacks
    • Training Materials – Incident Response
    • Training Materials – Mobile Security
    • Training Materials – Passwords
    • Training Materials – Phishing
    • Training Materials – Social Engineering
    • Training Materials – Web Usage
    • Security Awareness and Training Vendor Evaluation Tool
    • Security Awareness and Training Metrics Tool
    • End-User Security Knowledge Test Template
    • Security Training Campaign Development Tool

    2. Design an effective training delivery plan

    Explore methods of training delivery and select the most effective solutions.

    • Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users – Phase 2: Design an Effective Training Delivery Plan
    • Information Security Awareness and Training Policy
    • Security Awareness and Training Gamification Guide
    • Mock Spear Phishing Email Examples
    • Security Training Email Templates
    • Security Awareness and Training Module Builder and Training Schedule
    • Security Training Campaign Development Tool
    • Security Training Program Manual
    • Security Awareness and Training Feedback Template
    • Security Awareness Month Week 1: Staying in Touch
    • Security Awareness Month Week 2: Sharing Special Moments
    • Security Awareness Month Week 3: Working and Networking
    • Security Awareness Month Week 4: Families and Businesses
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Outline the Plan for Long-term Program Improvement

    The Purpose

    Identify the maturity level of the existing security awareness and training program and set development goals.

    Establish program milestones and outline key initiatives for program development.

    Identify metrics to measure program effectiveness.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified the gaps between the current maturity level of the security awareness and training program and future target states.

    Activities

    1.1 Create a program development plan.

    1.2 Investigate and select metrics to measure program effectiveness.

    1.3 Execute some low-hanging fruit initiatives for collecting metrics: e.g. create a knowledge test, feedback survey, or gamification guide.

    Outputs

    Customized development plan for program.

    Tool for tracking metrics.

    Customized knowledge quiz ready for distribution.

    Customized feedback survey for training.

    Gamification program outline.

    2 Identify and Assess Audience Groups and Security Training Topics

    The Purpose

    Determine the unique audience groups within your organization and evaluate their risks and vulnerabilities.

    Prioritize training topics and audience groups to effectively streamline program development.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Created a comprehensive list of unique audience groups and the corresponding security training that each group should receive.

    Determined priority ratings for both audience groups and the security topics to be delivered.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify the unique audience groups within your organization and the threats they face.

    2.2 Determine the priority levels of the current security topics.

    2.3 Review audience groups and determine which topics need to be delivered to each group.

    Outputs

    Risk profile for each identified audience group.

    Priority scores for all training topics.

    List of relevant security topics for each identified audience group.

    3 Plan the Training Delivery

    The Purpose

    Identify all feasible delivery channels for security training within your organization.

    Build a vendor evaluation tool and shortlist or harvest materials for in-house content creation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of all potential delivery mechanisms for security awareness and training.

    Built a vendor evaluation tool and discussed a vendor shortlist.

    Harvested a collection of free online materials for in-house training development.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss potential delivery mechanisms for training, including the purchase and use of a vendor.

    3.2 If selecting a vendor, review vendor selection criteria and discuss potential vendor options.

    3.3 If creating content in-house, review and select available resources on the web.

    Outputs

    List of available delivery mechanisms for training.

    Vendor assessment tool and shortlist.

    Customized security training presentations.

    4 Create a Training Schedule for Content Deployment

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for deploying a pilot program to gather valuable feedback.

    Create an ongoing training schedule.

    Define the end users’ responsibilities towards security within the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Created a plan to deploy a pilot program.

    Created a schedule for training deployment.

    Defined role of end users in helping protect the organization against security threats.

    Activities

    4.1 Build training modules.

    4.2 Create an ongoing training schedule.

    4.3 Define and document your end users’ responsibilities towards their security.

    Outputs

    Documented modular structure to training content.

    Training schedule.

    Security job description template.

    End-user training policy.

    Develop a Cloud Testing Strategy for Today's Apps

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}470|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • The growth of the Cloud and the evolution of business operations have shown that traditional testing strategies do not work well with modern applications.
    • Organizations require a new framework around testing cloud applications that account for on-demand scalability and self-provisioning.
    • Expectations of application consumers are continually increasing with speed-to-market and quality being the norm.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Cloud technology does not change the traditional testing processes that many organizations have accepted and adopted. It does, however, enhance traditional practices with increased replication capacity, execution speed, and compatibility through its virtual infrastructure and automated processes. Consider these factors when developing the cloud testing strategy.
    • Involving the business in strategy development will keep them engaged and align business drivers with technical initiatives.
    • Implement cloud testing solutions in a well-defined rollout process to ensure business objectives are realized and cloud testing initiatives are optimized.
    • Cloud testing is green and dynamic. Realize the limitations of cloud testing and play on its strengths.

    Impact and Result

    • Engaging in a formal and standardized cloud testing strategy and consistently meeting business needs throughout the organization maintains business buy-in.
    • The Cloud compounds the benefits from virtualization and automation because of the Cloud’s scalability, speed, and off-premise and virtual infrastructure and data storage attributes.
    • Cloud testing presents a new testing avenue. Realize that only certain tests are optimized in the Cloud, i.e., load, stress, and functional testing.

    Develop a Cloud Testing Strategy for Today's Apps Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a cloud testing strategy.

    Obtain organizational buy-ins and build a standardized and formal cloud testing strategy.

    • Storyboard: Develop a Cloud Testing Strategy for Today's Apps
    • None

    2. Assess the organization's readiness for cloud testing.

    Assess your people, process, and technology for cloud testing readiness and realize areas for improvement.

    • Cloud Testing Readiness Assessment Tool

    3. Plan and manage the resources allocated to each project task.

    Organize and monitor cloud project planning tasks throughout the project's duration.

    • Cloud Testing Project Planning and Monitoring Tool
    [infographic]

    Implement an IT Employee Development Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}592|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Train & Develop
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • There is a growing gap between the competencies organizations have been focused on developing and what is needed in the future.
    • Employees have been left to drive their own development with little direction or support and without the alignment of development to organizational needs.
    • The pace of change in today’s environment demands new competencies while making others obsolete, and IT is challenged with keeping up with upskilling employees.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations position development as employee-owned, yet employees still feel like their needs aren’t being met, and many leave as a result.
    • Development needs to be employee-owned and manager-supported but also organization-informed to ensure that it meets the organization’s needs.
    • Today, operating environments change quickly, and organizations need to develop the competencies employees need both today and in the future.

    Impact and Result

    • Design employee development plans that build the competencies the organization and IT department need both today and in the future.
    • Equip managers and build program support to foster continuous learning and development.
    • Connect the right development opportunity to the right employee through an effective development planning process.

    Implement an IT Employee Development Plan Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement effective development planning, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess employees' development needs

    Assist your employees in setting appropriate development goals.

    • Implement Effective Employee Development Planning – Phase 1: Assess Employees' Development Needs
    • IT Manager Job Aid: Employee Development
    • IT Employee Job Aid: Employee Development
    • IT Employee Career Development Workbook
    • Individual Competency Development Plan
    • IT Competency Library
    • Leadership Competencies Workbook

    2. Select appropriate activities for development

    Review existing and identify new development activities that employees can undertake to achieve their goals.

    • Implement Effective Employee Development Planning – Phase 2: Select Activities for Developing Prioritized Competencies
    • Learning Methods Catalog for IT Employees

    3. Build manager coaching skills

    Establish manager and employee follow-up accountabilities.

    • Implement Effective Employee Development Planning – Phase 3: Build Manager Coaching Skills to Support Employee Development
    • Role Play Coaching Scenarios
    [infographic]

    Embed Business Relationship Management in IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}270|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $21,960 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 19 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Manage Business Relationships
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-business-relationships
    • While organizations realize they need to improve business relationships, they often don’t know how.
    • IT doesn’t know what their business needs and so can’t add as much value as they’d like.
    • They find that their partners often reach out to third parties before they connect with internal IT.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Business relationship management (BRM) is not just about communication, it’s about delivering on business value.
    • Build your BRM program on establishing trust.

    Impact and Result

    • Drive business value into the organization via innovative technology solutions.
    • Improve ability to meet and exceed business goals and objectives, resulting in more satisfied stakeholders (C-suite, board of directors).
    • Enhance ability to execute business activities to meet end customer requirements and expectations, resulting in more satisfied customers.

    Embed Business Relationship Management in IT Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Embed Business Relationship Management Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to establish a practice with well-embedded business relationships, driving IT success.

    This blueprint helps you to establish a relationship with your stakeholders, both within and outside of IT. You’ll learn how to embed relationship management throughout your organization.

    • Embed Business Relationship Management in IT – Phases 1-5

    2. BRM Workbook Deck – A workbook for you to capture the results of your thinking on the BRM practice.

    Use this tool to capture your findings as you work through the blueprint.

    • Embed Business Relationship Management in IT Workbook

    3. BRM Buy-In and Communication Template – A template to help you communicate what BRM is to your organization, that leverages feedback from your business stakeholders and IT.

    Customize this tool to obtain buy in from leadership and other stakeholders. As you continue through the blueprint, continue to leverage this template to communicate what your BRM program is about.

    • BRM Buy-In and Communication Template

    4. BRM Role Expectations Worksheet – A tool to help you establish how the BRM role and/or other roles will be managing relationships.

    This worksheet template is used to outline what the BRM practice will do and associate the expectations and tasks with the roles throughout your organization. Use this to communicate that while your BRM role has a strategic focus and perspective of the relationship, other roles will continue to be important for relationship management.

    • Role Expectations Worksheet

    5. BRM Stakeholder Engagement Plan Worksheet – A tool to help you establish your stakeholders and your engagement with them.

    This worksheet allows you to list the stakeholders and their priority in order to establish how you want to engage with them.

    • BRM Stakeholder Engagement Plan Worksheet

    6. Business Relationship Manager Job Descriptions – These templates can be used as a guide for defining the BRM role.

    These job descriptions will provide you with list of competencies and qualifications necessary for a BRM operating at different levels of maturity. Use this template as a guide, whether hiring internally or externally, for the BRM role.

    • Business Relationship Manager – Level 1
    • Business Relationship Manager – Level 2
    • Business Relationship Manager – Level 3
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Embed Business Relationship Management in IT

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Foundation: Assess and Situate

    The Purpose

    Set the foundation for your BRM practice – understand your current state and set the vision.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of current pain points and benefits to be addressed through your BRM practice. Establish alignment on what your BRM practice is – use this to start obtaining buy-in from stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Define BRM

    1.2 Analyze Satisfaction

    1.3 Assess SWOT

    1.4 Create Vision

    1.5 Create the BRM Mission

    1.6 Establish Goals

    Outputs

    BRM definition

    Identify areas to be addressed through the BRM practice

    Shared vision, mission, and understanding of the goals for the brm practice

    2 Plan

    The Purpose

    Determine where the BRM fits and how they will operate within the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn how the BRM practice can best act on your goals.

    Activities

    2.1 Establish Guiding Principles

    2.2 Determine Where BRM Fits

    2.3 Establish BRM Expectations

    2.4 Identify Roles With BRM Responsibilities

    2.5 Align Capabilities

    Outputs

    An understanding of where the BRM sits in the IT organization, how they align to their business partners, and other roles that support business relationships

    3 Implement

    The Purpose

    Determine how to identify and work with key stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine ways to engage with stakeholders in ways that add value.

    Activities

    3.1 Brainstorm Sources of Business Value

    3.2 Identify Key Influencers

    3.3 Categorize the Stakeholders

    3.4 Create the Prioritization Map

    3.5 Create Your Engagement Plan

    Outputs

    Shared understanding of business value

    A plan to engage with stakeholders

    4 Reassess and Embed

    The Purpose

    Determine how to continuously improve the BRM practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An ongoing plan for the BRM practice.

    Activities

    4.1 Create Metrics

    4.2 Prioritize Your Projects

    4.3 Create a Portfolio Investment Map

    4.4 Establish Your Annual Plan

    4.5 Build Your Transformation Roadmap

    4.6 Create Your Communication Plan

    Outputs

    Measurements of success for the BRM practice

    Prioritization of projects

    BRM plan

    Further reading

    Embed Business Relationship Management in IT

    Show that IT is worthy of Trusted Partner status.

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    Relationships are about trust.

    As long as humans are involved in enabling technology, it will always remain important to ensure that business relationships support business needs. At the cornerstone of those relationships is trust and the establishment of business value. Without trust, you won’t be believed, and without value, you won’t be invited to the business table.

    Business relationship management can be a role, a capability, or a practice – either way it’s essential to ensure it exists within your organization. Show that IT can be a trusted partner by showing the value that IT offers.

    Photo of Allison Straker, Research Director, CIO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Allison Straker
    Research Director, CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Your challenge: Why focus on business relationship management?

    Is IT saying this about business partners?

    I don’t know what my business needs and so we can’t add as much value as we’d like.

    My partners don’t give us the opportunity to provide new ideas to solve business problems

    My partners listen to third parties before they listen to IT.

    We’re too busy and don’t have the capacity to help my partners.

    Three stamps with the words 'Value', 'Innovation', and 'Advocacy'. Are business partners saying this about IT?

    IT does not create and deliver valuable services/solutions that resolve my business pain points.

    IT does not come to me with innovative solutions to my business problems/challenges/issues.

    IT blocks my efforts to drive the business forward using innovative technology solutions.

    IT does not advocate for my needs with the decision makers in the organization.

    Common obstacles

    While organizations realize they need to do better, they often don’t know how to improve.

    Organizations want to:
    • Understand and strategically align to business goals
    • Ensure stakeholders are satisfied
    • Show project value/success

    … these are all things that a mature business relationship can do to improve your organization.

    Key improvement areas identified by business leaders and IT leaders

    Bar chart comparing 'CXO' and 'CIO' responses to multiple areas one whether they need significant improvement or only some improvement. Areas in question are 'Understand Business Goals', 'Define and align IT strategy', 'Measure stakeholder satisfaction with IT', and 'Measure IT project success'. Source: CEO/CIO Alignment Diagnostic, N=446 organizations.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    BRMs who focus on achieving business value can improve organizational results.

    Visualization of a piggy bank labelled 'Business Value' with a person on a ladder labelled 'Strategic Tactical Operational' putting coins into the bank which are labelled 'External & internal views', 'Applied knowledge of the business', 'Strategic perspective', 'Trusted relationship', and 'Empathetic engagements “What’s in it for me/them?”'.

    Business relationships can take a strategic, tactical, or operational perspective.

    While all levels are needed, focus on a strategic perspective for optimal outcomes.

    Create business value through:

    • Applying your knowledge of the business so that conversations aren’t about what IT provides. Focus on what the overall business requires.
    • Ensuring your knowledge includes what is going on internally at your organization and also what occurs externally within and outside the industry (e.g. vendors, technologies used in similar industries or with similar customer interactions).
    • Discussing with the perspective of “what’s in it for [insert business partner here]” – don’t just present IT’s views.
    • Building a trusted strategic relationship – don’t just do well at the basics but also focus on the strategy that can move the organization to where it needs to be.

    Neither you nor your partners can view IT as separate from your overall business…

    …your IT goals need to be aligned with those of the overall business

    IT Maturity Pyramid with 'business goals' and 'IT goals' moving upward along its sides. It has five levels, 'unstable - Ad hoc – IT is too busy and the business is unsatisfied (too expensive, too long, not delivering on needs)', 'firefighter - Order taker – IT engaged on as-needed basis. IT unable to forecast demand to manage own resources', 'trusted operator - IT and business are not always sure of each other’s direction/priorities’, ‘business partner - IT understands and delivers on business needs', and 'innovator - Business and IT work together to achieve shared goals'.

    IT and other lines of business need to partner together – they are all part of the same overall business.

    Four puzzle pieces fitting together representing 'IT' and three other Lines of Business '(LOB)'

    <

    Why it’s important to establish a BRM program

    IT Benefits

    • Provides IT with a view of the lines of business they empower
    • Allows IT to be more proactive in providing solutions that help business partner teams
    • Allows IT to better manage their workload, as new requests can be prioritized and understood

    Business Benefits

    • Provides business teams with a view of the services that IT can help them with
    • Brings IT to the table with value-driven solutions
    • Creates an overall roadmap aligning both partners
    Ladder labelled 'Strategic Tactical Operational'.
    • Drive business value into the organization via innovative technology solutions.
    • Improve ability to meet and exceed business goals and objectives, resulting in more satisfied stakeholders (C-suite, board of directors).
    • Enhance ability to execute business activities to meet end-customer requirements and expectations, resulting in more satisfied customers.

    Increase your business benefits by moving up higher – from operational to tactical to strategic.

    Piggy bank labelled 'Business Value'.

    When IT understands the business, they provide better value

    Understanding all parties – including the business needs and context – is critical to effective business relationships.

    Establishing a focus on business relationship management is key to improving IT satisfaction.

    When business partners are satisfied that IT understands their needs, they have a higher perception of the value of overall IT

    Bar chart with axes 'Business satisfaction with IT understanding of needs' and 'Perception of IT value'. There is an upward trend.

    The relationship between the perception of IT value and business satisfaction is strong (r=0.89). Can you afford not to increase your understanding of business needs?

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group diagnostic data/Business-Aligned IT Strategy blueprint (N=652 first-year organizations that completed the CIO Business Vision diagnostic))

    A tale of two IT partners

    Teleconference with an IT partner asking them to 'Tell me everything'.

    One IT partner approached their business partner without sufficient background knowledge to provide insights.

    The relationship was not strong and did not provide the business with the value they desired.

    Research your business and be prepared to apply your knowledge to be a better partner.

    Teleconference with an IT partner that approached with knowledge of your business and industry.

    The other IT partner approached with knowledge of the business and external parties (vendors, competitors, industry).

    The business partners received this positively. They invited the IT partners to meetings as they knew IT would bring value to their sessions.

    BRM success is measurable Measuring tape.

    1) Survey your stakeholders to measure improvements in customer satisfaction 2) Measure BRM success against the goals for the practice

    Business satisfaction survey

    • Audience: Business leaders
    • Frequency: Annual
    • Metrics:
      • Overall Satisfaction score
      • Overall Value score
      • Relationship Satisfaction:
        • Understand needs
        • Meet needs
        • Communication
    Two small tables showing example 'Value' and 'Satisfaction' scores. Dart board with five darts, each representing a goal, 'Demand Shaping', 'Value Realization', 'Servicing', 'Exploring', and 'Other Goal(s)'.
    Table with a breakdown of the example 'Satisfaction' score, with individual scores for 'Needs', 'Execution', and 'Communication'.

    Maturing your BRM practice is a journey

    Info-Tech has developed an approach that can be used by any organization to improve or successfully implement BRM. The same ladder as before with words 'Strategic', 'Tactical', 'Operational', and a person climbing on it. Become a Trusted Partner and Advisor
    KNOWLEDGE OF INDUSTRY

    STRATEGIC

    Value Creator and Innovator

    Strategic view of IT and the business with knowledge of the market and trends; a connector driving value-added services.

    KNOWLEDGE OF FUNCTIONS

    TACTICAL

    Influencer and Advocate

    Two-way voice between IT and business, understanding business processes and activities including IT touchpoints and growing tactical and strategic view of services and value.

    TABLE STAKES:
    COMMUNICATION
    SERVICE DELIVERY
    PROJECT DELIVERY

    OPERATIONAL

    Deliver

    Communication, service, and project delivery and fulfillment, initial engagement with and knowledge of the business.

    Foundation: Define and communicate the meaning and vision of BRM

    At each level, keep maturing your BRM practice

    ITPartnerWhat to do to move to the next level

    Strategic Partner

    Shared goals for maximizing value and shared risk and reward

    5

    Strategic view of IT and the business with knowledge of the market and trends; a connector driving value-added services.

    Value Creator and Innovator

    See partners as integral to business success and growth

    Focus on continuous learning and improvement.

    Trusted Advisor

    Cooperation based on mutual respect and understanding

    4

    Partners understand, work with, and help improve capabilities.

    Influencer and Advocate

    Sees IT as helpful and reliable

    Strategic: IT needs to demonstrate and apply knowledge of business, industry, and external influences.

    Service Provider

    Routine – innovation is a challenge

    3

    Two-way voice between IT and business; understanding business processes and activities including IT touchpoints and growing tactical and strategic view of services and value.

    Priorities set but still always falling behind.

    Views IT as helpful but they don’t provide guidance

    IT needs to excel in portfolio and transition management.

    Business needs to engage IT in strategy.

    Order Taker

    Distrust, reactive

    2

    Focuses on communication, service, and project delivery and fulfillment, initial engagement with and knowledge of the business.

    Delivery Service

    Engages with IT on an as-needed basis

    Improve Tactical: IT needs to demonstrate knowledge of the business they are in. IT to improve BRM and service management.

    Business needs to embrace BRM role and service management.

    Ad Hoc

    Loudest in, first out

    1

    Too busy doing the basics; in firefighter mode.

    Low satisfaction (cost, duration, quality)

    Improve Operational Behavior: IT to show value with “table stakes” – communication, service delivery, project delivery.

    IT needs to establish intake/demand management.


    Business to embrace a new way of approaching their partnership with IT.

    (Adapted from BRM Institute Maturity Model and Info-Tech’s own model)

    The Info-Tech path to implement BRM

    Use Info-Tech’s ASPIRe method to create a continuously improving BRM practice.

    Info-Tech's ASPIRe method visualized as a winding path. It begins with 'Role Definition', goes through many 'Role Refinements' and ends with 'Metrics'. The main steps to which the acronym refers are 'Assess', 'Situate', 'Plan', 'Implement', and 'Reassess & Embed'.

    Insight summary

    BRM is not just about communication, it’s about delivering on business value.

    Business relationship management isn’t just about having a pleasant relationship with stakeholders, nor is it about just delivering things they want. It’s about driving business value in everything that IT does and leveraging relationships with the business and IT, both within and outside your organization.

    Understand your current state to determine the best direction forward.

    Every organization will apply the BRM practice differently. Understand what’s needed within your organization to create the best fit.

    BRM is not just a communication conduit between IT and the business.

    When implemented properly, a BRM is a value creator, advocate, innovator, and influencer.

    The BRM role must be designed to match the maturity level of the IT organization and the business.

    Before you can create incremental business value, you must master the fundamentals of service and project delivery.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Knowledge of your current situation is only half the battle; knowledge of the business/industry is key.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable:

    Executive Buy-In and Communication Presentation Template

    Explain the need for the BRM practice and obtain buy-in from leadership and staff across the organization.

    Sample of Info-Tech's key deliverable, the Executive Buy-In and Communication Presentation Template.

    BRM Workbook

    Capture the thinking behind your organization’s BRM program.

    Sample of Info-Tech's BRM Workbook deliverable.

    BRM Stakeholder Engagement Plan Worksheet

    Worksheet to capture how the BRM practice will engage with stakeholders across the organization.

    Sample of Info-Tech's BRM Stakeholder Engagement Plan Worksheet deliverable.

    BRM Role Expectations Worksheet

    How business relationship management will be supported throughout the organization at a strategic, tactical, and operational level.

    Sample of Info-Tech's BRM Role Expectations Worksheet deliverable.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    Phase 5

    Call #1: Discuss goals, current state, and an overview of BRM.

    Call #2: Examine business satisfaction and discuss results of SWOT.

    Call #3: Establish BRM mission, vision, and goals. Call #4: Develop guiding principles.

    Call #5: Establish the BRM operating model and role expectations.

    Call #6: Establish business value. Discuss stakeholders and engagement planning. Call #7: Develop metrics. Discuss portfolio management.

    Call #8: Develop a communication or rollout plan.

    Workshop Overview

    Complete the CIO-Business Vision diagnostic prior to the workshop.
    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889
    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Post-Workshop
    Activities
    Set the Foundation
    Assess & Situate
    Define the Operating Model
    Plan
    Define Engagement
    Implement
    Implement BRM
    Reassess
    Next steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    1.1 Discuss rationale and importance of business relationship management

    1.2 Review CIO BV results

    1.3 Conduct SWOT analysis (analyze strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats)

    1.4 Establish BRM vision and mission

    1.5 Define objectives and goals for maturing the practice

    2.1 Create your list of guiding principles (optional)

    2.2 Define business value

    2.3. Establish the operating model for the BRM practice

    2.4 Define capabilities

    3.1. Identify key stakeholders

    3.2 Map, prioritize, and categorize the stakeholders

    3.4 Create an engagement plan

    4,1 Define metrics

    4.2 Identify remaining enablers/blockers for practice implementation

    4.3 Create roadmap

    4.4 Create communication plan

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables
    1. Summary of CIO Business Vision results
    2. Vision and list of objectives for the BRM program
    3. List of business and IT pain points
    1. BRM role descriptions, capabilities, and ownership definitions
    1. BRM reporting structure
    2. BRM engagement plans
    1. BRM communication plan
    2. BRM metrics tracking plan
    3. Action plan and next step
    1. Workshop Report

    ASSESS

    Assess

    1.1 Define BRM

    1.2 Analyze Satisfaction

    1.3 Assess SWOT

    Situate

    2.1 Create Vision

    2.2 Create the BRM Mission

    2.3 Establish Goals

    Plan

    3.1 Establish Guiding Principles

    3.2 Determine Where BRM Fits

    3.3 Establish BRM Expectations

    3.4 Identify Roles With BRM Responsibilities

    3.5 Align Capabilities

    Implement

    4.1 Brainstorm Sources of Business Value

    4.2 Identify Key Influencers

    4.3 Categorize the Stakeholders

    4.4 Create the Prioritization Map

    4.5 Create Your Engagement Plan

    Reassess & Embed

    5.1 Create Metrics

    5.2 Prioritize Your Projects

    5.3 Create a Portfolio Investment Map

    5.4 Establish Your Annual Plan

    5.5 Build Your Transformation Roadmap

    5.6 Create Your Communication Plan

    To assess BRM, clarify what it means to you

    Who are BRM relationships with? Octopus holding icons with labels 'Tech Partners', 'Lines of Business', and 'External Partners'. The BRM has multiple arms/legs to ensure they’re aligned with multiple parties – the partners within the lines of business, external partners, and technology partners.
    What does a BRM do? Engage the right stakeholders – orchestrate key roles, resources, and capabilities to help stimulate, shape, and harvest business value.

    Connect partners (IT and other business) with the resources needed.

    Help stakeholders navigate the organization and find the best path to business value.

    Three figures performing different actions, labelled 'orchestrate', 'connect', and 'navigate'.
    What does a BRM focus on? Circle bisected at many random points to create areas of different colors with four color-coded circles surrounding it. Demand Shaping – Surfacing and shaping business demand
    Value Harvesting – Identifying ways to increase business value and providing insights
    Exploring – Rationalizing demand and reviewing new business, technology, and industry insights
    Servicing – Managing expectations and facilitating business strategy; business capability road mapping

    Determine what business relationship management is

    Many organizations face business dissatisfaction because they do not understand what the role of a BRM should be.

    A BRM Is NOT:
    • Order taker
    • Service desk
    • Project manager
    • Business analyst
    • Service delivery manager
    • Service owner
    • Change manager
    A BRM Is:
    • Value creator
    • Innovator
    • Trusted advisor
    • Strategic partner
    • Influencer
    • Business subject matter expert
    • Advocate for the business
    • Champion for business process improvement
    Business relationship management does not mean a go-between for the business and IT. Its focus should be on delivering VALUE and INNOVATIVE SOLUTIONS to the business.

    1.1 What is BRM?

    1 hour

    Input: Your preliminary thoughts and ideas on BRM

    Output: Themes summarizing what BRM will be at your organization

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Each team member will take a colored sticky note to capture what BRM is and what it isn’t.
    2. As a group, review and discuss the sticky notes.
    3. Group them into themes summarizing what BRM will be at your organization.
    4. Leverage the workbook to brainstorm the definition of BRM at your organization.
    5. Create a refined summary statement and capture it in the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template.

    Download the BRM Workbook

    Download the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template

    It’s important to understand what the business thinks; ask them the right questions

    Leverage the CIO Business Vision Diagnostic to provide clarity on:
    • The organization’s view on satisfaction and importance of core IT services
    • Satisfaction across business priorities
    • IT’s capacity to meet business needs

    Contact your Account Representative to get started

    Sample of various scorecards from the CIO Business Vision Diagnostic.

    1.2 Use their responses to help guide your BRM program

    1 hour

    Input: CIO-Business Vision Diagnostic, Other business feedback

    Output: Summary of your partners’ view of the IT relationship

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: CIO, IT management team

    1. Complete the CIO Business Vision diagnostic.
    2. Analyze the findings from the Business Vision diagnostic or other business relationship and satisfaction surveys. Key areas to look at include:
      • Overall IT Satisfaction
      • IT Value
      • Relationship (Understands Needs, Communicates Effectively, Executes Requests, Trains Effectively)
      • Shadow IT
      • Capacity Needs
      • Business Objectives
    3. Capture the following on your analysis:
      • Success stories – what your business partners are satisfied with
      • Challenges – are the responses consistent across departments?
    4. Leverage the workbook to capture your findings the goals. Key highlights should be documented in the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template.

    Use the BRM Workbook to capture ideas

    Polish the goals in the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template

    Perform a SWOT analysis to explore internal and external business factors

    A SWOT analysis is a structured planning method organizations use to evaluate the effects of internal strengths and weaknesses and external opportunities and threats on a project or business venture.

    Why It Is Important

    • Business SWOT reveals internal and external trends that affect the business. You may uncover relevant information about the business that the other analysis methods did not reveal.
    • The organizational strengths or weaknesses will shed some light on implications that you might not have considered otherwise, such as brand perception or internal staff capability to change.

    Key Tips/Information

    • Although this activity is simple in theory, there is much value to be gained when performed effectively.
    • Focus on weaknesses that can cause a competitive disadvantage and strengths that can cause a competitive advantage.
    • Rank your opportunities and threats based on impact and probability.
    • Info-Tech members who have derived the most insights from a business SWOT analysis usually involved business stakeholders in the analysis.

    SWOT diagram split into four quadrants representing 'Strengths' at top left, 'Opportunities' at bottom left, 'Weaknesses' at top right, and 'Threats' at bottom right.

    Review these questions to help you conduct your SWOT analysis on the business

    Strengths (Internal)
    • What competitive advantage does your organization have?
    • What do you do better than anyone else?
    • What makes you unique (human resources, product offering, experience, etc.)?
    • Do you have location, price, cost, or quality advantages?
    • Does your organizational culture offer an advantage (hiring the best people, etc.)?
    • Do you have a high level of customer engagement or satisfaction?
    Weaknesses (Internal)
    • What areas of your business require improvement?
    • Are there gaps in capabilities?
    • Do you have financial vulnerabilities?
    • Are there leadership gaps (succession, poor management, etc.)?
    • Are there reputational issues?
    • Are there factors contributing to declining sales?
    Opportunities (External)
    • Are there market developments or new markets?
    • Are there industry or lifestyle trends (move to mobile, etc.)?
    • Are there geographical changes in the market?
    • Are there new partnerships or mergers and acquisitions (M&A) opportunities?
    • Are there seasonal factors that can be used to the advantage of the business?
    • Are there demographic changes that can be used to the advantage of the business?
    Threats (External)
    • Are there obstacles that the organization must face?
    • Are there issues with respect to sourcing of staff or technologies?
    • Are there changes in market demand?
    • Are your competitors making changes that you are not making?
    • Are there economic issues that could affect your business?

    1.3 Analyze internal and external business factors using a SWOT analysis

    1 hour

    Input: IT and business stakeholder expertise

    Output: Analysis of internal and external factors impacting the IT organization

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: CIO, IT management team

    1. Break the group into two teams:
      • Assign team A internal strengths and weaknesses.
      • Assign team B external opportunities and threats.
    2. Think about strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats as they pertain to the IT-business relationship. Consider people, process, and technology elements.
    3. Have the teams brainstorm items that fit in their assigned grids. Use the prompt questions on the previous slide as guidance.
    4. Pick someone from each group to fill in the SWOT grid.
    5. Conduct a group discussion about the items on the list; identify implications for the BRM/IT.

    Capture in the BRM Workbook

    SITUATE

    Assess

    1.1 Define BRM

    1.2 Analyze Satisfaction

    1.3 Assess SWOT

    Situate

    2.1 Create Vision

    2.2 Create the BRM Mission

    2.3 Establish Goals

    Plan

    3.1 Establish Guiding Principles

    3.2 Determine Where BRM Fits

    3.3 Establish BRM Expectations

    3.4 Identify Roles With BRM Responsibilities

    3.5 Align Capabilities

    Implement

    4.1 Brainstorm Sources of Business Value

    4.2 Identify Key Influencers

    4.3 Categorize the Stakeholders

    4.4 Create the Prioritization Map

    4.5 Create Your Engagement Plan

    Reassess & Embed

    5.1 Create Metrics

    5.2 Prioritize Your Projects

    5.3 Create a Portfolio Investment Map

    5.4 Establish Your Annual Plan

    5.5 Build Your Transformation Roadmap

    5.6 Create Your Communication Plan

    Your strategy informs your BRM program

    Your strategy is a critical input into your program. Extract critical components of your strategy and convert them into a set of actionable principles that will guide the selection of your operating model.

    Sample of Info-Tech's 'Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy' blueprint.

    Vision, Mission & Principles Chevron pointing right.
    • Leverage your vision and mission statements that communicate aspirations and purpose for key information that can be turned into design principles.
    Business Goal Implications Chevron pointing right.
    • Implications are derived from your business goals and will provide important context about the way BRM needs to change to meet its overarching objectives.
    • Understand how those implications will change the way that work needs to be done – new capabilities, new roles, new modes of delivery, etc.
    Target-State Maturity Chevron pointing right.
    • Determine your target-state relationship maturity for your organization using the BRM goals that have been uncovered.

    Outline your mission and vision for your BRM practice

    If you don’t know where you’re trying to go, how do you know if you’ve arrived?

    Establish the vision of what your BRM practice will achieve.

    Your vision will paint a picture for your stakeholders, letting them know where you want to go with your BRM practice.

    Stock image of a hand painting on a large canvas.

    The vision will also help motivate and inspire your team members so they understand how they contribute to the organization.

    Your strategy must align with and support your organization’s strategy.

    Good Visions
    • Attainable – Aspirational but still within reach
    • Communicable – Easy to comprehend
    • Memorable – Not easily forgotten
    • Practical – Solid, realistic
    • Shared – Create a culture of shared ownership across the team/company
    When Visions Fail
    • Not Shared: Lack of buy-in, no alignment with stakeholders
    • Impractical: No plan or strategy to deliver on the vision
    • Unattainable: Set too far in the future
    • Forgettable: Not championed, not kept in mind
    (Source: UX Magazine, 2011)

    Derive the BRM vision statement

    Stock image of an easel with a bundle of paint brushes beside it. Begin the process of deriving the business relationship management vision statement by examining your business and user concerns. These are the problems your organization is trying to solve.
    Icon of one person asking another a question.
    Problem Statements
    First, ask what problems your organization hopes to solve.
    Icon of a magnifying glass on a box.
    Analysis
    Second, ask what success would look like when those problems were solved.
    Icon of two photos in quotes.
    Vision Statement
    Third, polish the answer into a short but meaningful phrase.

    Paint the picture for your team and stakeholders so that they align on what BRM will achieve.

    Vision statements demonstrate what your practice “aspires to be”

    Your vision statement communicates a desired future state of the BRM organization. The statement is expressed in the present tense. It seeks to articulate the desired role of business relationship management and how it will be perceived.

    Sample vision statements:

    • To be a trusted advisor and partner in enabling business innovation and growth through an engaged design practice.
    • The group will strive to become a world-class value center that is a catalyst for innovation.
    • Apple: “We believe that we are on the face of the earth to make great products and that’s not changing.” (Mission Statement Academy, May 2019.)
    • Coca-Cola: “To refresh the world in mind, body, and spirit, to inspire moments of optimism and happiness through our brands and actions, and to create value and make a difference.” (Mission Statement Academy, August 2019.)

    2.1 Vision generation

    1 hour

    Input: IT and business strategies

    Output: Vision statement

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Review the goals and the sample vision statements provided on the previous slide.
    2. Brainstorm possible vision statements that can apply to your practice. Refer to the guidance provided on the previous page – ensure that it paints a picture for the reader to show the desired target state.
    3. Leverage the workbook to brainstorm the vision. Capture the refined statement in the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template.
    Strong vision statements have the following characteristics
    • Describe a desired future
    • Focus on ends, not means
    • Communicate promise
    • Concise, no unnecessary words
    • Compelling
    • Achievable
    • Inspirational
    • Memorable

    Use the BRM Workbook to capture ideas

    Polish the goals in the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template

    Create the mission statement from the problems and the vision statement

    Your mission demonstrates your current intent and the purpose driving you to achieve your vision.

    It reflects what the organization does for users/customers.

    The main word 'Analysis' is sandwiched between 'Goals and Problems' and 'Vision Statement', each with arrow pointing to the middle. Make sure the practice’s mission statement reflects answers to the questions below:

    The questions:

    • What does the organization do?
    • How does the organization do it?
    • For whom does the organization do it?
    • What value is the organization bringing?

    “A mission statement illustrates the purpose of the organization, what it does, and what it intends on achieving. Its main function is to provide direction to the organization and highlight what it needs to do to achieve its vision.” (Joel Klein, BizTank (in Hull, “Answer 4 questions to get a great mission statement.”))

    Sample mission statements

    To enhance the lives of our end users through our products so that our brand becomes synonymous with user-centricity.

    To enable innovative services that are seamless and enjoyable to our customers so that together we can inspire change.

    Apple’s mission statement: “To bring the best user experience to its customers through its innovative hardware, software, and services.” (Mission Statement Academy, May 2019.)

    Coca Cola’s mission statement: “To refresh the world in mind, body, and spirit, to inspire moments of optimism and happiness through our brands and actions, and to create value and make a difference.” (Mission Statement Academy, August 2019.)

    Tip: Using the “To … so that” format helps to keep your mission focused on the “why.”

    2.2 Develop your own mission statement

    1 hour

    Input: IT and business strategies, Vision

    Output: Mission statement

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Review the goals and the vision statement generated in the previous activities.
    2. Brainstorm possible mission statements that can apply to your BRM practice. Capture this in your BRM workbook.
    3. Refine your mission statement. Refer to the guidance provided on the previous page – ensure that the mission provides “the why”. Document the refined mission statement in the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template.

    “People don't buy what you do; they buy why you do it and what you do simply proves what you believe.” (Sinek, Transcript of “How Great Leaders Inspire Action.”)

    Download the BRM Workbook

    Download the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template

    Areas that BRMs focus on include:

    Establish how much of these your practice will focus on.

    VALUE HARVESTING
    • Tracks and reviews performance
    • Identifies ways to increase business value
    • Provides insights on the results of business change/initiatives
    Circle bisected at many random points to create areas of different colors with four color-coded circles surrounding it. DEMAND SHAPING
    • Isn’t just demand/intake management
    • Surfaces and shapes business demand
    • Is influenced by knowledge of the overall business and external entities
    SERVICING
    • Coordinates resources
    • Manages expectations
    • Facilitates business strategy, business capability road-mapping, and portfolio and program management
    EXPLORING
    • Identifies and rationalizes demand
    • Reviews new business, technology, and industry insights
    • Identifies business value initiatives

    Establish what success means for your focus areas

    Brainstorm objectives and success areas for your BRM practice.

    Circle bisected at many random points to create areas of different colors with four color-coded circles surrounding it. VALUE HARVESTING
    Success may mean that you:
    • Understand the drivers and what the business needs to attain
    • Demonstrate focus on value in discussions
    • Ensure value is achieved, tracking it during and beyond deployment
    DEMAND SHAPING
    Success may mean that you:
    • Understand the business
    • Are engaged at business meetings (invited to the table)
    • Understand IT; communicate clarity around IT to the business
    • Help IT prioritize needs
    SERVICING
    Success may mean that you:
    • Understand IT services and service levels that are required
    • Provide clarity around services and communicate costs and risks
    EXPLORING
    Success may mean that you:
    • Surface new opportunities based on understanding of pain points and growth needs
    • Research and partner with others to further the business
    • Engage resources with a focus on the value to be delivered

    2.3 Establish BRM goals

    1 hour

    Input: Mission and vision statements

    Output: List of goals

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: CIO, IT management team, BRM team

    1. Use the previous slides as a starting point – review the focus areas and sample associated objectives.
    2. Determine if all apply to your role.
    3. Brainstorm the objectives for your BRM practice.
    4. Discuss and refine the objectives and goals until the team agrees on your starting set.
    5. Leverage the workbook to establish the goals. Capture refined goals in the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template.

    Download the BRM Workbook

    Download the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template

    PLAN

    Assess

    1.1 Define BRM

    1.2 Analyze Satisfaction

    1.3 Assess SWOT

    Situate

    2.1 Create Vision

    2.2 Create the BRM Mission

    2.3 Establish Goals

    Plan

    3.1 Establish Guiding Principles

    3.2 Determine Where BRM Fits

    3.3 Establish BRM Expectations

    3.4 Identify Roles With BRM Responsibilities

    3.5 Align Capabilities

    Implement

    4.1 Brainstorm Sources of Business Value

    4.2 Identify Key Influencers

    4.3 Categorize the Stakeholders

    4.4 Create the Prioritization Map

    4.5 Create Your Engagement Plan

    Reassess & Embed

    5.1 Create Metrics

    5.2 Prioritize Your Projects

    5.3 Create a Portfolio Investment Map

    5.4 Establish Your Annual Plan

    5.5 Build Your Transformation Roadmap

    5.6 Create Your Communication Plan

    Guiding principles help you focus the development of your practice

    Your guiding principles should define a set of loose rules that can be used to design your BRM practice to the specific needs of the organization and work that needs to be done.

    These rules will guide you through the establishment of your BRM practice and help you explain to your stakeholders the rationale behind organizing in a specific way.

    Sample Guiding Principles

    Principle Name

    Principle Statement

    Customer Focus We will prioritize internal and external customer perspectives
    External Trends We will monitor and liaise with external organizations to bring best practices and learnings into our own
    Organizational Span We embed relationship management across all levels of leadership in IT
    Role If the resource does not have a seat at the table, they are not performing the BRM role

    3.1 Establish guiding principles (optional activity)

    Input: Mission and vision statements

    Output: BRM guiding principles

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Think about strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats as well as the overarching goals, mission, and vision.
    2. Identify a set of principles that the BRM practice should have. Guiding principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of business relationship management in your organization.

    Download the BRM Workbook

    Download the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template

    Establish the BRM partner model and alignment

    Having the right model and support is just as important as having the right people.

    Gears with different BRM model terms: 'BRM Capabilities', 'BRM & Other Roles', 'Scope (pilot)', 'Operating Unit', 'BRM Expectations Across the organization', and 'Delivery & Support'.

    Don’t boil the ocean: Start small

    It may be useful to pilot the BRM practice with a small group within the organization – this gives you the opportunity to learn from the pilot and share best practices as you expand your BRM practice.

    You can leverage the pilot business unit’s feedback to help obtain buy-in from additional groups.

    Evaluate the approaches for your pilot:
    Work With an Engaged Business Unit
    Icon of a magnifying glass over a group of people.

    This approach can allow you to find a champion group and establish quick wins.

    Target Underperforming Area(s)
    Icon of an ambulance.

    This approach can allow you to establish significant wins, providing new opportunities for value.

    Target the Area(s) Driving the Most Business Value
    Icon of an arrow in a bullseye.

    Provide the largest positive impact on your portfolio’s ability to drive business value; for large strategic or transformative goals.

    Work Across a Single Business Process
    Icon of a process tree.

    This approach addresses a single business process or operation that exists across business units, departments, or locations. This, again, will allow you to limit the number of stakeholders.

    Leverage BRM goals to determine where the role fits within the organization

    Organization tree with a strategic BRM.

    Strategic BRMs are considered IT leaders, often reporting to the CIO.


    Organization tree with an operational BRM.

    In product-aligned organizations, the product owners will own the strategic business relationship from a product perspective (often across LOB), while BRMs will own the strategic role for the line(s) of businesses (often across products) that they hold a relationship with. The BRM role may be played by a product family leader.


    Organization tree with a BRM in a product-aligned organization.

    BRMs may take on a more operational function when they are embedded within another group, such as the PMO. This manifests in:

    • Accountability for projects and programs
    • BRM conversations around projects and programs rather than overall needs
    • Often, there is less focus on stimulating need, more about managing demand
    • This structure may be useful for smaller organizations or where organizations are piloting the relationship capability

    Use the IT structure and the business structure to determine how to align BRM and business partners. Many organizations ensure that each LOB has a designated BRM, but each BRM may work with multiple LOBs. Ensure your alignment provides an even and manageable distribution of work.

    Don’t be intimidated by those who play a significant role in relationship management

    Layers representing the BRM, BA, and Product Owner. Business Relationship Manager: Portfolio View
    • Ongoing with broader organization-wide objectives
    • A BRM’s strategic perspective is focused across projects and products
    The BRM will look holistically across a portfolio, rather than on specific projects or products. Their focus is ensuring value is delivered that impacts the overall organization. Multiple BRMs may be responsible for lines of businesses and ensure that products and project enable LOBs effectively.
    Business Analyst: Product or Project View
    • Works within a project or product
    • Accomplishes specific objectives within the project/product
    The BA tends to be involved in project work – to that end, they are often brought in a bit before a project begins to better understand the context. They also often remain after the project is complete to ensure project value is delivered. However, their main focus is on delivering the objectives within the project.
    Product Owner: Product View
    • Ongoing and strategic view of entire product, with product-specific objectives
    The Product Owner bridges the gap between the business and delivery to ensure their product continuously delivers value. Their focus is on the product.

    3.2 Establish the BRM’s place in the organizational structure

    Input: BRM goals, IT organizational structure, Business organizational structure

    Output: BRM operating model

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Review the current organizational structure – both IT and overall business.
    2. Think about the maturity of the IT organization and what you and your partners will be able to support at this stage in the relationship or journey. Establish whether it is necessary to start with a pilot.
    3. Consider the reporting relationship that is required to support the desired maturity of your practice – who will your BRM function report into?
    4. Consider the distribution of work from your business partners. Establish which BRM is responsible for which partners.
    5. Document where the BRM fits in the organization in the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template.

    Download the BRM Workbook

    Download the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template

    Align your titles to your business partners and ensure it demonstrates your strategic goals

    Some titles that may reflect alignment with your partners:
    • Business Capability Manager
    • Business Information Officer
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Director, Technology Partner
    • IT Business Relationship Manager
    • People Relationship Manager
    • Relationship and Strategy Officer
    • Strategic Partnership Director
    • Technology Partner/People Partner/Finance Partner/etc.
    • Value Management Officer

    Support BRM team members might have “analyst” or “coordinator” as part of their titles.

    Caution when using these titles:
    • Account Manager (do you see your stakeholders as accounts or as partners?)
    • Customer Relationship Manager (do you see your stakeholders as customers or as partners?)
    • People Partner (differentiate your role from HR)

    Determine the expectations for your BRM role(s)

    Below are standard expectations from BRM job descriptions. Establish whether there are changes required for your organization.

    Act as a Relationship Manager
    • Build strong, collaborative relationships with business clients
    • Build strong, collaborative relationships with IT service owners
    • Track client satisfaction with services provided
    • Continuously improve, based on feedback from clients
    Communicate With Business Stakeholders
    • Ensure that effective communication occurs related to service delivery and project delivery (e.g. planned downtime, changes, open tickets)
    • Manage expectations of multiple business stakeholders
    • Provide a clear point of contact within IT for each business stakeholder
    • Act as a bridge between IT and the business
    Service Delivery

    Service delivery breaks out into three activities: service status, changes, and service desk tickets

    • Understand at a high level the services and technologies in use
    • Work with clients to plan and make sure they understand the relevance and impact of IT changes to their operations
    • Define, agree to, and report on key service metrics
    • Act as an escalation point for major issues with any aspect of service delivery
    • Work with service owners to develop and monitor service improvement plans
    Project/Product Delivery
    • Ensure that the project teams provide regular reports regarding project status, issues, and changes
    • Work with project managers and clients to ensure project requirements are well understood and documented and approved by all stakeholders
    • Ensure that the project teams provide key project metrics on a regular basis to all relevant stakeholders

    Determine role expectations (slide 2 of 3)

    Knowledge of the Business

    Understand the main business activities for each department:

    • Understand which IT services are required to complete each business activity
    • Understand business processes and associated business activities for each user group within a department
    Advocate for Your Business Clients
    • Act as an advocate for the client – be invested in client success
    • Understand the strategies and plans of the clients and help develop an IT strategic plan/roadmap that maps to business strategies
    • Help the business understand project governance processes
    • Help clients to develop proposals and advance them through the project intake and assessment process
    Influence Business and IT Stakeholders
    • Influence business and IT stakeholders at multiple levels of the organization to help clients achieve their business objectives
    • Leverage existing relationships to convince decision makers to move forward with business and IT initiatives that will benefit the department and the organization as a whole
    • Understand and solve issues and challenges such as differing agendas, political considerations, and resistance to change
    Knowledge of the Market
    • Understand the industry – trends, competition, future direction
    • Leverage what others are doing to bring innovative ideas to the organization
    • Understand what end customers expect with regards to IT services and bring this intelligence to business leaders and decision makers

    Determine role expectations (slide 3 of 3)

    Value Creator
    • Understand how services currently offered by IT can be put to best use and create value for the business
    • Work collaboratively with clients to define and prioritize technology initiatives (new or enhanced services) that will bring the most business benefit
    • Lead initiatives that help the business achieve or exceed business goals and objectives
    • Lead initiatives that create business value (increased revenue, lower costs, increased efficiency) for the organization
    Innovator
    • Lead initiatives that result in new and better ways of doing business
    • Identify opportunities for using IT in new and innovative ways to bring value to the business and drive the business forward
    • Leverage knowledge of the business, knowledge of the industry, and knowledge of leading-edge technological solutions to transform the way the business operates and provides services to its customers

    3.3 Establish BRM expectations

    Input: BRM goals

    Output: BRM expectations

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Review the BRM expectations on the previous slides.
    2. Customize them – are they the appropriate set of expectations needed for your organization? What needs to be edited in or out?
    3. Add relevant expectations – what are the things that need to be done in the BRM practice at your organization?
    4. Leverage the workbook to brainstorm BRM expectations. Make sure you update them in the BRM Role Expectation Spreadsheet.

    Download the BRM Workbook

    Download the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template

    Various roles and levels within your organization may have a part of the BRM pie

    Where the BRM sits will impact what they are able to get done.

    The BRM role is a strategic one, but other roles in the organization have a part to play in impacting IT-partner relationship.

    Some roles may have a more strategic focus, while others may have a more tactical or operational focus.

    3.4 Identify roles with BRM responsibilities

    Input: BRM goals

    Output: BRM-aligned roles

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Various roles can play a part in the BRM practice, managing business relationships. Which ones make sense in your organization, given the BRM goals?
    2. Identify the roles and capture in the BRM Role Expectation Spreadsheet. Use the Role Expectation Alignment tab, row 1.


    Download the Role Expectations Worksheet

    Determine the focus for each role that may manage business relationships

    Icon of a telescope. STRATEGIC Sets Direction: Focus of the activities is at the holistic, enterprise business level “relating to the identification of long-term or overall aims and interests and the means of achieving them” e.g. builds overarching relationships to enable and support the organization’s strategy; has strategic conversations
    Icon of a house in a location marker. TACTICAL Figures Out the How: Focuses on the tactics required to achieve the strategic focus “skillful in devising means to ends” e.g. builds relationships specific to tactics (projects, products, etc.)
    Icon of a gear cog with a checkmark. OPERATIONAL Executes on the Direction: Day-to-day operations; how things get done “relating to the routine functioning and activities of a business or organization” e.g. builds and leverages relationships to accomplish specific goals (within a project or product)

    3.5 Align BRM capabilities to roles

    Input: Current-state model, Business value matrix, Objectives and goals

    Output: BRM-aligned roles

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Review each group of role expectations – Act as a Relationship Manager, Communicate with Business Stakeholders, etc. For each group, determine the focus each role can apply to it – strategic, tactical, or operational. Refer to the previous slide for examples.
    2. Capture on the spreadsheet:
      • S – This role is required to have a strategic view of the capabilities. They are accountable and set direction for this aspect of relationship management.
      • T – Indicate if the role is required to have a tactical view of the capabilities. This would include whether the role is required to figure out how the capabilities will be done; for example, is the role responsible for carrying out service management or are they just involved to ensure that that set of expectations are being performed?
      • O – Indicate if the role will have an operational view – are they the ones responsible for doing the work?
      • Note: In some organizations, a role may have more than one of these.
    3. The spreadsheet will highlight the cells in green if the role plays more of the strategic role, yellow for tactical, and brown for operational. This provides an overall visual of each role’s part in relationship management.
    4. (Optional) Review each detailed expectation within the group. Evaluate whether specific roles will have a different focus on the unique role expectations.

    Leverage the Role Expectations Worksheet

    Sample role expectation alignment

    Sample of a role expectation alignment table with expectation names and descriptions on the left and a matrix of which roles should have a Strategic (S), Tactical (T), or Operational (O) view of the capabilities.

    IMPLEMENT

    Assess

    1.1 Define BRM

    1.2 Analyze Satisfaction

    1.3 Assess SWOT

    Situate

    2.1 Create Vision

    2.2 Create the BRM Mission

    2.3 Establish Goals

    Plan

    3.1 Establish Guiding Principles

    3.2 Determine Where BRM Fits

    3.3 Establish BRM Expectations

    3.4 Identify Roles With BRM Responsibilities

    3.5 Align Capabilities

    Implement

    4.1 Brainstorm Sources of Business Value

    4.2 Identify Key Influencers

    4.3 Categorize the Stakeholders

    4.4 Create the Prioritization Map

    4.5 Create Your Engagement Plan

    Reassess & Embed

    5.1 Create Metrics

    5.2 Prioritize Your Projects

    5.3 Create a Portfolio Investment Map

    5.4 Establish Your Annual Plan

    5.5 Build Your Transformation Roadmap

    5.6 Create Your Communication Plan

    Speak the same language as your partners: Business Value

    Business value represents the desired outcome from achieving business priorities.

    Value is not only about revenue or reduced expenses. Use this internal-external and capability-financial business value matrix to more holistically consider what is valuable to stakeholders.

    Improved Capabilities
    Enhance Services
    Products and services that enable business capabilities and improve an organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.
    Increase Customer Satisfaction
    Products and services that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce practical market information and insights.
    Inward Outward
    Save Money
    Products and services that reduce overhead. They typically are less related to broad strategic vision or goals and more simply limit expenses that would occur had the product or service not put in place.
    Make money
    (Return on Investment)
    Products and services that are specifically related to the impact on an organization’s ability to create a return on investment.
    Financial Benefits

    Business Value Matrix Axes:

    Financial Benefits vs. Improved Capabilities
    • Improved capabilities refers to the enhancement of business capabilities and skill sets.
    • Financial Benefits refers to the degree in which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and is often highly tangible.
    Inward vs. Outward Orientation
    • Inward refers to value sources that have an internal impact an organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.
    • Outward refers to value sources that come from interactions with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    4.1 Activity: Brainstorm sources of business value

    Input: Product and service knowledge, Business process knowledge

    Output: Understanding of different sources of business value

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Identify your key stakeholders. These individuals are the critical business strategic partners in the organization’s governing bodies.
    2. Brainstorm the different types of business value that the BRM practice can produce.
    3. Is the item more focused on improving capabilities or generating financial benefits?
    4. Is the item focused on the customers you serve or the IT team?
    5. Enter your value item into a cell on the Business Value Matrix based on where it falls on these axes.
    6. Start to think about metrics you can use to measure how effective the product or service is at generating the value source.
    Simplified version of the Business Value Matrix on the previous slide.

    Use the BRM Workbook to capture sources of business value

    Brainstorm the different sources of business value (continued)

    See appendix for more information on value drivers:
    Example:
    Enhance Services
    • Dashboards/IT Situational Awareness
    • Improve measurement of services for data-driven analytics that can improve services
    • Collaborate to support Enterprise Architecture
    • Approval for and support of new applications per customer demand
    • Provide consultation for IT issues
    Axis arrow with 'Improved Capabilities'.
    Axis arrow with 'Financial Benefits'.
    Reach Customers
    • Provide technology roadmaps for IT services and devices
    • Improved "PR" presence: websites, service catalog, etc.
    • Enhance customer experience
    • Faster Time-to-market delivering innovative technologies and current services
    Axis arrow with 'Inward'.Axis arrow with 'Outward'.
    Reduce Costs
    • Achieve better pricing through enterprise agreements for IT services that are duplicated across several orgs
    • Prioritization/ development of roadmap
    • Portfolio management / reduce duplication of services
    • Evolve resourcing strategies to integrate teams (e.g. do more with less)
    Return on Investment
    • Customer -focused dashboards
    • Encourage use of centralized services through external collaboration capabilities that fit multiple use cases
    • Devise strategies for measured/supported migration from older IT systems/software

    Implications of ineffective stakeholder management

    A stakeholder is any group or individual who is impacted by (or impacts) your objectives.

    Challenges with stakeholder management can result from a self-focused point of view. Avoid these challenges by taking on the other’s perspectives – what’s in it for them.

    The key objectives of stakeholder management are to improve outcomes, increase confidence, and enhance trust in IT.

    • Obtain commitment of executive management for IT-related objectives.
    • Enhance alignment between IT and the business.
    • Improve understanding of business requirements.
    • Improve implementation of technology to support business processes.
    • Enhance transparency of IT costs, risks, and benefits.

    Challenges

    • Stakeholders are missed or new stakeholders are identified too late.
    • IT has a tendency to only look for direct stakeholders. Indirect and hidden stakeholders are not considered.
    • Stakeholders may have conflicting priorities, different visions, and different needs. Keeping every stakeholder happy is impossible.
    • IT has a lack of business understanding and uses jargon and technical language that is not understood by stakeholders.

    Implications

    • Unanticipated stakeholders and negative changes in stakeholder sentiment can derail initiatives.
    • Direct stakeholders are identified, but unidentified indirect or hidden stakeholders cause a major impact to the initiative.
    • The CIO attempts to trade off competing agendas and ends up caught in the middle and pleasing no one.
    • There is a failure in understanding and communications, leading stakeholders to become disenchanted with IT.

    Cheat Sheet: Identify stakeholders

    Ask stakeholders “who else should I be talking to?” to discover additional stakeholders and ensure you don’t miss anyone.

    List the people who are identified through the following questions: Take a 360-degree view of potential internal and external stakeholders who might be impacted by the initiative.
    • Who will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts in areas of influence that are affected by what you are doing?
    • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
    • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?
    • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
    • Who benefits from the initiative?
    • Who loses from the initiative?
    • Who can make approvals?
    • Who controls resources?
    • Who has specialist skills?
    • Who implements the changes?
    • Who are the owners, governors, customers, and suppliers to impacted capabilities or functions?

    Executives

    Peers

    Direct reports

    Partners

    Customers

    Stock image of a world.

    Subcontractors

    Suppliers

    Contractors

    Lobby groups

    Regulatory agencies

    Establish your stakeholder network “map”

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your BRM team operates in. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your products directly.

    Notes on the network map

    • Pay special attention to influencers who have many arrows; they are called “connectors,” and due to their diverse reach of influence, should themselves be treated as significant stakeholders.
    • Don’t forget to consider the through-lines from one influencer through intermediate stakeholders or influencers to the final stakeholder – a single influencer may have additional influence via multiple, possibly indirect paths to a single stakeholder.

    Legend for the example stakeholder network map below. 'Black arrows indicate the direction of professional influence'. 'Dashed green arrows indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships'

    Example stakeholder network map visualizing relationships between different stakeholders.

    4.2 Visualize interrelationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers

    Input: List of stakeholders

    Output: Relationships among stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. List direct stakeholders for your area. Ensure it includes stakeholders across the organization (both IT and business units).
    2. Determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders. Consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list: assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    3. Create a stakeholder network map to visualize relationships.
      • (Optional) Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
      • (Optional) Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.
    4. Capture the list or diagram of your stakeholders in your workbook.

    Use the BRM Workbook to capture stakeholders

    Categorize your stakeholders with a stakeholder prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map help teams categorize their stakeholders by their level or influence and ownership.

    There are four areas in the map and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    • Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.
    • Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    Stakeholder prioritization map with axes 'Influence' and 'Ownership/Interest' splitting the map into four quadrants: 'Spectators Low/Low', 'Noisemakers Low/High', 'Mediators High/Low', and 'Players High/High'.

    4.3 Group your stakeholders into categories

    Input: Stakeholder Map

    Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Identify your stakeholder’s interest in and influence on your BRM program.
    2. Map your results to the quadrant in your workbook to determine each stakeholder’s category.

    Stakeholder prioritization map with example 'Stakeholders' placed in or across the four quadrants.

    Level of Influence

    • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
    • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
    • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
    • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
    • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.

    Level of Interest

    How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

    Use the BRM Workbook to map your stakeholders

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks.

    By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, you can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers while ensuring the needs of the Mediators and Players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence; high interest Actively Engage
    Keep them engaged through continuous involvement. Maintain their interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence; low interest Keep Satisfied
    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust, and include them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence; high interest Keep Informed
    Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence; low interest Monitor
    They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Apply a third dimension for stakeholder prioritization: support.

    Support, in addition to interest and influence, is used to prioritize which stakeholders are should receive the focus of your attention. This table indicates how stakeholders are ranked:

    Table with 'Stakeholder Categories' and their 'Level of Support' for prioritizing. Support levels are 'Supporter', 'Evangelist', 'Neutral', and 'Blocker'.

    Support can be determined by rating the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would recommend IT at your organization/your group? Our four categories of support:

    • Blocker – beware of the blocker. These stakeholders do not support your cause and have the necessary drive to impede the achievement of your objectives.
    • Semi-Supporter – while these stakeholders are committed to your objectives, they are somewhat apathetic to advocate on your behalf. They will support you so long as it does not require much effort from them to do so.
    • Neutral – neutrals do not have much commitment to your objectives and are not willing to expend much energy to either support or detract from them.
    • Supporter – these stakeholders are committed to your initiative and are willing to whole-heartedly provide you with support.

    4.4 Update your stakeholder quadrant to include the three dimensions

    Input: Stakeholder Map

    Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would support your initiative/endeavor?
    2. Map your results to the model in your workbook to determine each stakeholder’s category.
    Stakeholder prioritization map with example 'Persons' placed in or across the four quadrants. with The third dimension, 'Level of Support', is color-coded.

    Use the BRM Workbook to map your stakeholders

    Leverage your map to think about how to engage with your stakeholders

    Not all stakeholders are equal, nor can they all be treated the same. Your stakeholder quadrant highlights areas where you may need to engage differently.

    Blockers

    Pay attention to your “blockers,” especially those that appear in the high influence and high interest part of the quadrant. Consider how your engagement with them varies from supporters in this quadrant. Consider what is valuable to these stakeholders and focus your conversations on “what’s in this for them.”

    Neutral & Evangelists

    Stakeholders that are neutral or evangelists do not require as much attention as blockers and supporters, but they still can’t be ignored – especially those who are players (high influence and engagement). Focus on what’s in it for them to move them to become supporters.

    Supporters

    Do not neglect supporters – continue to engage with them to ensure that they remain supporters. Focus on the supporters that are influential and impacted, rather than the “spectators.”

    4.5 Create your engagement plan

    Input: Stakeholder Map/list of stakeholders

    Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Leverage the BRM Stakeholder Engagement Plan spreadsheet. List your key stakeholders.
    2. Consider: how do you show value at your current maturity level so that you can gain trust and your relationship can mature? Establish where your relationship lacks maturity, and consider whether you need to engage with them on a more strategic, tactical, or even operational manner.
      • At lower levels of maturity (Table Stakes), focus on service delivery, project delivery, and communication.
      • At mid-level maturity (Influencer/Advocate), focus on business pain points and a deeper knowledge of the business.
      • At higher maturity levels (Value Creator/Innovator), focus on creating value by leading innovative initiatives that drive the business forward.
    3. Review the stakeholder quadrant. Update the frequency of your communication accordingly.
    4. Capture the agenda for your engagements with them.

    Download and use the BRM Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    Your agenda should vary with the maturity of your relationship

    Agenda
    Stakeholder Information Type Meeting Frequency Lower Maturity Mid-Level Maturity Higher Maturity
    VP Strategic Quarterly
    • Summary of current and upcoming projects and initiatives
    • Business pain points for the department
    • Proposed solutions to address business pain points
    • Innovative solutions to improve business processes and drive value for the department and the organization
    Director Strategic, Tactical Monthly
    • Summary of recent and upcoming changes
    • Summary of current and upcoming projects and initiatives
    • Business pain points for the department
    • Proposed business process improvements
    • Current and upcoming project proposals to address business pain points
    • Innovative solutions to help the department achieve its business goals and objectives
    Manager Tactical Monthly
    • Summary of service desk tickets
    • Summary of recent and upcoming changes
    • Summary of current and upcoming projects and initiatives
    • Business pain points for the team
    • Proposed business activity improvements
    • Current and upcoming projects to address business pain points
    • Innovative solutions to help business users perform their daily business activities more effectively and efficiently

    Lower Maturity – Focus on service delivery, project delivery, and communication

    Mid-Level Maturity – Focus on business pain points and a deeper knowledge of the business

    Higher Maturity – Focus on creating value by leading innovative initiatives that drive the business forward

    Stakeholder – Include both IT and business stakeholders at appropriate levels

    Agenda – Manage stakeholders expectations, and clarify how your agenda will progress as the partnership matures

    REASSESS & EMBED

    Assess

    1.1 Define BRM

    1.2 Analyze Satisfaction

    1.3 Assess SWOT

    Situate

    2.1 Create Vision

    2.2 Create the BRM Mission

    2.3 Establish Goals

    Plan

    3.1 Establish Guiding Principles

    3.2 Determine Where BRM Fits

    3.3 Establish BRM Expectations

    3.4 Identify Roles With BRM Responsibilities

    3.5 Align Capabilities

    Implement

    4.1 Brainstorm Sources of Business Value

    4.2 Identify Key Influencers

    4.3 Categorize the Stakeholders

    4.4 Create the Prioritization Map

    4.5 Create Your Engagement Plan

    Reassess & Embed

    5.1 Create Metrics

    5.2 Prioritize Your Projects

    5.3 Create a Portfolio Investment Map

    5.4 Establish Your Annual Plan

    5.5 Build Your Transformation Roadmap

    5.6 Create Your Communication Plan

    Measure your BRM practice success

    • Metrics are powerful because they drive behavior.
    • Metrics are also dangerous because they often lead to unintended negative outcomes.
    • Metrics should be chosen carefully to avoid getting “what you asked for” instead of “what you intended.”

    Stock image of multiple business people running off the end of a pointed finger like lemmings.

    Questions to ask Are your metrics achievable?
    1. What are the leading indicators of BRM effectively supporting the business’ strategic direction?
    2. How are success metrics aligned with the objectives of other functional groups?

    S pecific

    M easurable

    A chievable

    R ealistic

    T ime-bound

    Embedding the BRM practice within your organization must be grounded in achievable outcomes.

    Ensure that the metrics your practice is measured against reflect realistic and tangible business expectations. Overpromising the impact the practice will have can lead to long-term implementation challenges.

    Determine whether your business is satisfied with IT

    Measuring tape.

    1

    Survey your stakeholders to measure improvements in customer satisfaction.

    Leverage the CIO Business Vision on a regular interval – most find that annual assessments drive success.

    Evaluate whether the addition or increased maturity of your BRM practice has improved satisfaction with IT.

    Business satisfaction survey

    • Audience: Business leaders
    • Frequency: Annual
    • Metrics:
      • Overall Satisfaction score
      • Overall Value score
      • Relationship Satisfaction:
        • Understand needs
        • Meet needs
        • Communication
    Two small tables showing example 'Value' and 'Satisfaction' scores.
    Table with a breakdown of the example 'Satisfaction' score, with individual scores for 'Needs', 'Execution', and 'Communication'.

    Check if you’ve met the BRM goals you set out to achieve

    Measuring tape.

    2

    Measure BRM success against the goals for the practice.

    Evaluate whether the BRM practice has helped IT to meet the goals that you’ve established.

    For each of your goals, create metrics to establish how you will know if you’ve been successful. This might be how many or what type of interactions you have with your stakeholders, and/or it could be new connections with internal or external partners.

    Ensure you have established metrics to measure success at your goals.

    Dart board with five darts, each representing a goal, 'Demand Shaping', 'Value Realization', 'Servicing', 'Exploring', and 'Other Goal(s)'.

    5.1 Create metrics

    Input: Goals, The attributes which can align to goal success

    Output: Measurements of success

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Start with a consideration of your goals and objectives.
    2. Identify key aspects that can support confirming if the goal was successful.
    3. For each aspect, develop a method to measure success with a specific measurement.
    4. When creating the KPI consider:
      • How you know if you are achieving your objective (performance)?
      • How frequently will you be measuring this?
      • Are you looking for an increase, decrease, or maintenance of the metric?
    Table with columns 'BRM Goals', 'Measurement', 'KPI', and 'Frequency'.

    Use the BRM Workbook

    Don’t wait all year to find out if you’re on track

    Leverage the below questions to quickly poll your business partners on a more frequent basis.

    Partner instructions:

    Please indicate how much you agree with each of the following statements. Use a scale of 1-5, where 1 is low agreement and 5 indicates strong agreement:

    Demand Shaping: My BRM is at the table and seeks to understand my business. They help me understand IT and helps IT prioritize my needs.

    Exploring: My BRM surfaces new opportunities based on their understanding of my pain points and growth needs. They engage resources with a focus on the value to be delivered.

    Servicing: The BRM obtains an understanding of the services and service levels that are required, clarifies them, and communicates costs and risks.

    Value Harvesting: Focus on value is evident in discussions – the BRM supports IT in ensuring value realization is achieved and tracks value during and beyond deployment.

    Embedding the BRM practice also includes acknowledging the BRM’s part in balancing the IT portfolio

    IT needs to juggle “keeping the lights on” initiatives with those required to add value to the organization.

    Partner with the appropriate resources (Project Management Office, Product Owners, System Owners, and/or others as appropriate within your organization) to ensure that all initiatives focus on value.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Not every organization will balance their portfolio in the same way. Some organizations have higher risk tolerance and so their higher priority goals may require that they accept more risk to potentially reap more returns.

    Stock image of a man juggling business symbols.

    80% of organizations feel their portfolios are dominated by low-value initiatives that do not deliver value to the business. (Source: Stage-Gate International and Product Development Institute, March/April 2009)

    All new requests are not the same; establish a process for intake and manage expectations and IT’s capacity to deliver value.

    Ensure you communicate your process to support new ideas with your stakeholders. They’ll be clear on the steps to bring new initiatives into IT and will understand and be engaged in the process to demonstrate value.

    Flowchart for an example intake process.

    For support creating your intake process, go to Optimize Project Intake, Approval and Prioritization Sample of Info-Tech's Optimize Project Intake, Approval and Prioritization.

    Use value as your criteria to evaluate initiatives

    Work with project managers to ensure that all projects are executed in a way that meets business expectations.

    Sample of Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.

    Enter risk/compliance criteria under operational alignment: projects must be aligned with the operational goals of the business and IT.

    Business value matrix.

    Enter these criteria under strategic alignment: projects must be aligned with the strategic goals of the business, customer, and IT.
    Enter financial criteria under financial: projects must realize monetary benefits, in increased revenue or decreased costs, while posing as little risk of cost overrun as possible.
    And don’t forget about feasibility: practical considerations for projects must be taken into account in selecting projects.

    5.2 Prioritize your investments/ projects (optional activity)

    Input: Value criteria

    Output: Prioritized project listing

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Review and edit (if necessary) the criteria on tab 2 the Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.
      Screenshot from tab 2 of Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.
    2. Score initiatives and investments on tab 3 using your criteria.
      Screenshot from tab 3 of Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.
    Download Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.

    Visualize where investments add value through an initiative portfolio map

    An initiative portfolio map is a graphic visualization of strategic initiatives overlaid on a business capability map.

    Leverage the initiative portfolio map to communicate the value of what IT is working on to your stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Projects will often impact one or more capabilities. As such, your portfolio map will help you identify cross-dependencies when scaling up or scaling down initiatives.

    Example initiative portfolio map


    Example initiative portfolio map with initiatives in categories like 'Marketing Strategy' and 'Brand Mgmt.'. Certain groups of initiatives have labels detailing when they achieve collectively.

    5.3 Create a portfolio investment map (optional activity)

    Input: Business capability map

    Output: Portfolio investment map

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Build a capability map, outlining the value streams that support your organization’s goals and the high-level capabilities (level 1) that support the value stream (and goals).
      For more support in establishing the capability map, see Document Your Business Architecture.
      Example table for outlining 'Value Streams' and 'Level 1 Capabilities' through 'Goals'.
    2. Identify high-value capabilities for the organization.
    3. What are the projects and initiatives that will address the critical capabilities? Add these under the high-value capabilities.
    4. This process will help you demonstrate how projects align to business goals. Enter your capabilities and projects in Info-Tech’s Initiative Portfolio Map Template.
    Download Info-Tech’s Initiative Portfolio Map Template.

    Establish your annual BRM plan

    To support the BRM capability at your organization, you’ll want to communicate your plan. This will include:
    • Business Feedback and Engagement
      • Engaging with your partners includes meeting with them on a regular basis. Establish this frequency and capture it in your plan. This engagement must include an understanding of their goals and challenges.
      • As Bill Gates said, “We all need people who will give us feedback. That’s how we improve” (Inc.com, 2013). There are various points in the year which will provide you with the opportunity to understand your business partners’ views of IT or the BRM role. List the opportunities to reflect on this feedback in your plan.
    • Business-IT Alignment
      • Bring together the views and perspectives of IT and the business.
      • List the activities that will be required to reflect business goals in IT. These include IT goals, budget, and planning.
    • BRM Improvement
      • The practices put in place to support the BRM practice need to continuously evolve to support a maturing organization. The feedback from stakeholders throughout the organization will provide input into this. Ensure there are activities and time put aside to evaluate the improvements required.
    Stock image of someone discovering a calendar in a jungle with a magnifying glass.

    5.4 Establish your year-in-the-life plan

    Input: Engagement plan, BRM goals

    Output: Annual BRM plan

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Start with your business planning activities – what will you as a BRM be doing as your business establishes their plans and strategies? These could include:
      • Listening and feedback sessions
      • Third-party explorations
    2. Then look at your activities required to integrate within IT – what activities are required to align business directives within your IT groups? Examples can include:
      • Business strategy review
      • Capability map creation
      • Input into the Business-aligned IT strategy
      • IT budget input
    3. What activities are required to continuously improve the BRM role? This may consist of:
      • Feedback discussions with business partners
      • Roadshow with colleagues to communicate and refine the practice
    4. Map these on your annual calendar that can be shared with your colleagues.
    Capture in the BRM Workbook

    Communicate using the Executive Buy-In and Communication Template

    Sample of a slide titled 'BRM Annual Cycle'.

    Sample BRM annual cycle

    Sample BRM annual cycle with row headers 'Business Feedback and Engagement', 'Business-IT Alignment', and 'BRM Improvement' mapped across a Q1 to Q4 timeline with individual tasks in each category.

    5.5 Build your transformation roadmap

    Input: SWOT analysis

    Output: Transformation roadmap

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. Brainstorm and discuss the key enablers that are needed to help promote and ease your BRM program.
    2. Brainstorm and discuss the key blockers (or risks) that may interrupt or derail your BRM program.
    3. Brainstorm mitigation activities for each blocker.
    4. Enablers and mitigation activities can be listed on your transformation roadmap.

    Example:

    Enablers

    • High business engagement and buy-in
    • Supportive BRM leadership
    • Organizational acceptance for change
    • Development process awareness by development teams
    • Collaborative culture
    • Existing tools can be customized for BRM

    Blockers

    • Pockets of management resistance
    • Significant time is required to implement BRM and train resources
    • Geographically distributed resources
    • Difficulty injecting customers in demos

    Mitigation

    • BRM workshop training with all teams and stakeholders to level set expectations
    • Limit the scope for pilot project to allow time to learn
    • Temporarily collocate all resources and acquire virtual communication technology

    Capture in the BRM Workbook

    5.5 Build your transformation roadmap (cont’d)

    1. Roadmap Elements:
      • List the artifacts, changes, or actions needed to implement the new BRM program.
      • For each item, identify how long it will take to implement or change by moving it into the appropriate swim lane. Use timing that makes sense for your organization: Quick Wins, Short Term, and Long Term; Now, Next, and Later; or Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4.

    Example transformation roadmap with BRM programs arranged in columns 'Now', 'Next (3-6 months)', 'Later (6+ months)', and 'Deferred'.

    Communicate the BRM changes to set your practice up for success

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message, i.e. a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state, and that makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The change message should:

    • Explain why the change is needed.
    • Summarize what will stay the same.
    • Highlight what will be left behind.
    • Emphasize what is being changed.
    • Explain how change will be implemented.
    • Address how change will affect various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss the staff’s role in making the change successful.
    Five elements of communicating change
    Diagram titled 'COMMUNICATING THE CHANGE' surrounded by useful questions: 'What is the change?', 'What will the role be for each department and individual?', 'Why are we doing it?', 'How long will it take us to do it?', and 'How are we going to go about it?'.
    (Source: The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change)

    Apply the following communication principles to make your BRM changes relevant to stakeholders

    “We tend to use a lot of jargon in our discussions, and that is a sure fire way to turn people away. We realized the message wasn’t getting out because the audience wasn’t speaking the same language. You have to take it down to the next level and help them understand where the needs are.” (Jeremy Clement, Director of Finance, College of Charleston, Info-Tech Interview, 2018)

    Be Relevant

    • Talk about what matters to the stakeholder. Think: “what’s in it for them?
    • Tailor the details of the message to each stakeholder’s specific concerns.
    • Often we think in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.

    Be Clear

    • Don’t use jargon.
    • Choice of language is important: “Do you think this is a good idea? I think we could really benefit from your insights and experience here.” Or do you mean: “I think we should do this. I need you to do this to make it happen.”

    Be Concise

    • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
    • There is a risk of diluting your key message if you include too many other details.

    Be Consistent

    • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium. A lack of consistency can be interpreted as an attempt at deception. This can hurt credibility and trust.
    • Test your communication with your team or colleagues to obtain feedback before delivering to a broader audience.

    5.6 Create a communications plan tailored to each of your stakeholders

    Input: Prioritized list of stakeholders

    Output: Communication Plan

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)

    Participants: Team

    1. List stakeholders in order of importance in the first column.
    2. Identify the frequency with which you will communicate to each group.
    3. Determine the scope of the communication:
      • What key information needs to be included in the message to ensure they are informed and on board?
      • Which medium(s) will you use to communicate to that specific group?
    4. Develop a concrete timeline that will be followed to ensure that support is maintained from the key stakeholders.

    Audience

    All BRM Staff

    Purpose

    • Introduce and explain operating model
    • Communicate structural changes

    Communication Type

    • Team Meeting

    Communicator

    CIO

    Timing

    • Sept 1 – Introduce new structure
    • Sept 15 – TBD
    • Sept 29 – TBD

    Related Blueprints

    Business Value
    Service Catalog
    Intake Management
    Sample of Info-Tech's 'Document Your Business Architecture' blueprint.
    Sample of Info-Tech's 'Design and Build a User-Facing Service Catalog' blueprint.
    Sample of Info-Tech's 'Manage Stakeholder Relations' blueprint.
    Sample of Info-Tech's 'Document Business Goals and Capabilities for Your IT Strategy' blueprint.
    Sample of Info-Tech's 'Fix Your IT Culture' blueprint.

    Selected Bibliography

    “Apple Mission and Vision Analysis.” Mission Statement Academy, 23 May 2019. Accessed 5 November 2020.

    Barnes, Aaron. “Business Relationship Manager and Plan Build Run.” BRM Institute, 8 April 2014.

    Barnes, Aaron. “Starting a BRM Team - Business Relationship Management Institute.” BRM Institute, 5 June 2013. Web.

    BRM Institute. “Business Partner Maturity Model.” Member Templates and Examples, Online Campus, n.d. Accessed 3 December 2021.

    BRM Institute. “BRM Assessment Templates and Examples.” Member Templates and Examples, Online Campus, n.d. Accessed 24 November 2021.

    Brusnahan, Jim, et al. “A Perfect Union: BRM and Agile Development and Delivery.” BRM Institute, 8 December 2020. Web.

    Business Relationship Management: The BRMP Guide to the BRM Body of Knowledge. Second printing ed., BRM Institute, 2014.

    Chapman, Chuck. “Building a Culture of Trust - Remote Leadership Institute.” Remote Leadership Institute, 10 August 2021. Accessed 27 January 2022.

    “Coca Cola Mission and Vision Analysis.” Mission Statement Academy, 4 August 2019. Accessed 5 November 2020.

    Colville, Alan. “Shared Vision.” UX Magazine, 31 October 2011. Web.

    Cooper, Robert, G. “Effective Gating: Make product innovation more productive by using gates with teeth.” Stage-Gate International and Product Development Institute, March/April 2009. Web.

    Heller, Martha. “How CIOs Can Make Business Relationship Management (BRM) Work.” CIO, 1 November 2016. Accessed 27 January 2022.

    “How Many Business Relationship Managers Should You Have.” BRM Institute, 20 March 2013. Web.

    Hull, Patrick. “Answer 4 Questions to Get a Great Mission Statement.” Forbes, 10 January 2013. Web.

    Kasperkevic, Jana. “Bill Gates: Good Feedback Is the Key to Improvement.” Inc.com, 17 May 2013. Web.

    Merlyn, Vaughan. “Relationships That Matter to the BRM.” BRM Institute, 19 October 2016. Web.

    “Modernizing IT’s Business Relationship Manager Role.” The Hackett Group, 22 November 2019. Web.

    Monroe, Aaron. “BRMs in a SAFe World...That Is, a Scaled Agile Framework Model.” BRM Institute, 5 January 2021. Web.

    Selected Bibliography

    “Operational, adj." OED Online, Oxford University Press, December 2021. Accessed 29 January 2022.

    Sinek, Simon. “Transcript of ‘How Great Leaders Inspire Action.’” TEDxPuget Sound, September 2009. Accessed 7 November 2020.

    “Strategic, Adj. and n.” OED Online, Oxford University Press, December 2016. Accessed 27 January 2022.

    “Tactical, Adj.” OED Online, Oxford University Press, September 2018. Accessed 27 January 2022.

    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, 23 September 2013. Web.

    “Twice the Business Value in Half the Time: When Agile Methods Meet the Business Relationship Management Role.” BRM Institute, 10 April 2015. Web.

    “Value Streams.” Scaled Agile Framework, 30 June 2020. Web.

    Ward, John. “Delivering Value from Information Systems and Technology Investments: Learning from Success.” Information Systems Research Centre, August 2006. Web.

    Appendix

    • Business Value Drivers
    • Service Blueprint
    • Stakeholder Communications
    • Job Descriptions

    Understand business value drivers for ROI and cost

    Make Money

    This value driver is specifically related to the impact a product or service has on your organization’s ability to show value for the investments. This is usually linked to the value for money for an organization.

    Return on Investment can be derived from:

    • Sustaining or increasing funding.
    • Enabling data monetization.
    • Improving the revenue generation of an existing service.
    • Preventing the loss of a funding stream.

    Be aware of the difference among your products and services that enable a revenue source and those which facilitate the flow of funding.

    Save Money

    This value driver relates to the impact of a product or service on cost and budgetary constraints.

    Reduce costs value can be derived from:

    • Reducing the cost to provide an existing product or service.
    • Replacing a costly product or service with a less costly alternative.
    • Bundling and reusing products or services to reduce overhead.
    • Expanding the use of shared services to generate more value for the cost of existing investment.
    • Reducing costs through improved effectiveness and reduction of waste.

    Budgetary pressures tied to critical strategic priorities may defer or delay implementation of initiatives and revision of existing products and services.

    Understand Business Value Drivers that Enhance Your Services

    Operations

    Some products and services are in place to facilitate and support the structure of the organization. These vary depending on what is important to your organization, but should be assessed in relation to the organizational culture and structure you have identified.

    • Adds or improves effectiveness for a particular service or the process and technology enabling its success.

    Risk and Compliance

    A product or service may be required in order to meet a regulatory requirement. In these cases, you need to be aware of the organizational risk of NOT implementing or maintaining a service in relation to those risks.

    In this case, the product or service is required in order to:

    • Prevent fines.
    • Allow the organization to operate within a specific jurisdiction.
    • Remediate audit gaps.
    • Provide information required to validate compliance.

    Internal Information

    Understanding internal operations is also critical for many organizations. Data captured through your operations provides critical insights that support efficiency, productivity, and many other strategic goals.

    Internal information value can be derived by:

    • Identifying areas of improvement in the development of core offerings.
    • Monitoring and tracking employee behavior and productivity.
    • Monitoring resource levels.
    • Monitoring inventory levels.

    Collaboration and Knowledge Transfer

    Communication is integral and products and services can be the link that ties your organization together.

    In this case, the value generated from products and services can be to:

    • Align different departments and multiple locations.
    • Enable collaboration.
    • Capture trade secrets and facilitate organizational learning.

    Understand Business Value Drivers that Connect the Business to Your Customers

    Policy

    Products and services can also be assessed in relation to whether they enable and support the required policies of the organization. Policies identify and reinforce required processes, organizational culture, and core values.

    Policy value can be derived from:

    • The service or initiative will produce outcomes in line with our core organizational values.
    • It will enable or improve adherence and/or compliance to policies within the organization.

    Customer Relations

    Products and services are often designed to facilitate goals of customer relations; specifically, improve satisfaction, retention, loyalty, etc. This value type is most closely linked to brand management and how a product or service can help execute brand strategy. Customers, in this sense, can also include any stakeholders who consume core offerings.

    Customer satisfaction value can be derived from:

    • Improving the customer experience.
    • Resolving a customer issue or identified pain point.
    • Providing a competitive advantage for your customers.
    • Helping to retain customers or prevent them from leaving.

    Market Information

    Understanding demand and market trends is a core driver for all organizations. Data provided through understanding the ways, times, and reasons that consumers use your services is a key driver for growth and stability.

    Market information value can be achieved when an app:

    • Addresses strategic opportunities or threats identified through analyzing trends.
    • Prevents failures due to lack of capacity to meet demand.
    • Connects resources to external sources to enable learning and growth within the organization.

    Market Share

    Market share represents the percentage of a market or market segment that your business controls. In essence, market share can be viewed as the potential for more or new revenue sources.

    Assess the impact on market share. Does the product or service:

    • Increase your market share?
    • Open access to a new market?
    • Help you maintain your market share?

    Service Blueprint

    Service design involves an examination of the people, process and technology involved in delivering a service to your customers.

    Service blueprinting provides a visual of how these are connected together. It enables you to identify and collaborate on improvements to an existing service.

    The main components of a service blueprint are:

    Customer actions – this anchors the service in the experiences of the customer

    Front-stage – this shows the parts of the service that are visible to the customer

    Back-stage – this is the behind-the-scenes actions necessary to deliver the experience to the customer

    Support processes – this is what’s necessary to deliver the back-stage (and front-stage/customer experience), but is not aligned from a timing perspective (e.g. it doesn’t matter if the fridge is stocked when the order is put in, as long as the supplies are available for the chef to use)

    Example service blueprint with the main components listed above as row headers.

    Physical Evidence and Time are blueprint components can be added in to provide additional context & support

    Example service blueprint with the main components plus added components 'Physical Evidence' and 'Time'.

    Stakeholder Communications

    Personalize
    • “What’s in it for me” & Persona development – understanding what the concerns are from the community that you will want to communicate about
    • Get to know the cultures of each persona to identify how they communicate. For the faculty, Teams might not be the answer, but faculty meetings might be, or sending messages via email. Each persona group may have unique/different needs
    • Meet them “where they are”: Be prepared to provide 5-minute updates (with “what’s in it for me” and personas in mind) at department meetings in cases where other communications (Teams etc.) aren’t reaching the community
    • Review the business vision diagnostic report to understand what’s important to each community group and what their concerns are with IT. Definitely review the comments that users have written.
    Show Proof
    • Share success stories tailored to users needs – e.g. if they have a concern with security, and IT implemented a new secure system to better meet their needs, then telling them about the success is helpful – shows that you’re listening and have responded to meet their concerns. Demonstrates how interacting with IT has led to positive results. People can more easily relate to stories

    Reference
    • Consider establishing a repository (private/unlisted YouTube channel, Teams, etc.) so that the community can search to view the tip/trick they need
    • Short videos are great to provide a snippet of the information you want to share
    Responses
    • Engage in 2-way communications – it’s about the messages IT wants to convey AND the messages you want them to convey to you. This helps to ensure that your messages aren’t just heard but are understood/resonate.
    • Let people know how they should communicate with IT – whether it’s engaging through Teams, via email to a particular address, or through in person sessions
    Test & Learn
    • Be prepared to experiment with the content and mediums, and use analytics to assess the results. For example if videos are posted on a site like SharePoint that already has analytics functionality, you can capture the number of views to determine how much they are viewed
    Multiple Mediums
    • Use a combination of one-on-one interviews/meetings and focus groups to obtain feedback. You may want to start with some of the respondents who provided comments on surveys/diagnostics

    BRM Job Descriptions

    Download the Job Descriptions:

    Cybersecurity in Healthcare 2024

    Healthcare cybersecurity is a major concern for healthcare organizations and patients alike. In 2024, the healthcare industry faces several cybersecurity challenges, including the growing threat of ransomware, the increasing use of mobile devices in healthcare, and the need to comply with new regulations.

    Continue reading

    Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}223|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • As cloud vendors, managed service providers, and other IT vendors continue to play a larger role in IT operations, the VMI must evolve to meet new challenges. Maximizing the VMI's impact requires it to keep pace with the IT landscape and transforming from tactical to strategic.
    • Increased spend with and reliance on vendors leads to less control and more risk for IT organizations. The VMI must mature on multiple fronts to continue adding value; staying stagnant is not an option.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An organization’s vendor management initiative must continue to evolve and mature to reach its full strategic value. In the early stages, the vendor management initiative may be seen as transactional, focusing on the day-to-day functions associated with vendor management. The real value of a VMI comes from becoming strategic partner to other functional groups (departments) within your organization.
    • Developing vendor management personnel is critical to the vendor management initiative’s evolution and maturation. For the VMI to mature, its personnel must mature as well. Their professional skills, competencies, and knowledge must increase over time. Failure to accentuate personal growth within the team limits what the team is able to achieve and how the team is perceived.
    • Vendor management is not about imposing your will on vendors; it is about understanding the multi-faceted dynamics between your organization and your vendors and charting the appropriate path forward. Resource allocation and relationship expectations flow from these dynamics. Each critical vendor requires an individual plan to build the best possible relationship and to leverage that relationship. What works with one vendor may not work or even be possible with another vendor…even if both vendors are critical to your success.

    Impact and Result

    • Evolve the VMI from tactical to strategic
    • Improve the VMI’s brand and brand awareness
    • Develop the VMI’s team members to increase the VMI’s impact
    • Take relationships to the next level with your critical vendors
    • Understand how your vendors view your organization as a customer
    • Create and implement plans to improve relationships with critical vendors
    • Create and implement plans to improve underperforming vendors

    Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should continue to evolve and mature your vendor management initiative and to understand the additional elements of Info-Tech’s four-step cycle to running your vendor management initiative.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Executive Brief
    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phases 1-4

    1. Plan

    This phase helps the VMI stay focused and aligned by reviewing existing materials, updating the existing maturity assessment, and ensuring that the foundational elements of the VMI are up to date. The main outcomes from this phase are a current maturity assessment and updated or revised Plan documents.

    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 1

    2. Build

    This phase helps you configure, create, and understand the tools and templates used to elevate the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of the tools that identify which vendors are important to you, tools and concepts to help you take key vendor relationships to the next level, and tools to help you evaluate and improve the VMI and its personnel.

    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 2
    • Elevate – COST Model Vendor Classification Tool
    • Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool
    • Elevate – OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool
    • Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Tool
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    3. Run

    This phase helps you begin integrating the new tools and templates into the VMI’s operations. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to continue your VMI’s maturation and evolution.

    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 3

    4. Review

    This phase helps the VMI stay aligned with the overall organization, stay current, and improve its strategic value as it evolves. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI’s strategic impact.

    • Elevate your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 4

    Infographic

    Workshop: Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Plan and Build

    The Purpose

    Review existing tools and templates and configure new tools and templates.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Updated Maturity Assessment and configured tools and templates.

    Activities

    1.1 Existing Plan document review and new maturity assessment.

    1.2 Optional classification models.

    1.3 Customer positioning model.

    1.4 Two-way scorecards.

    Outputs

    Updated Plan documents.

    New maturity assessment.

    Configured classification model.

    Customer positioning for top five vendors.

    Configured scorecard and feedback form.

    2 Build and Run

    The Purpose

    Configure VMI Tools and Templates.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI.

    Activities

    2.1 Performance improvement plans (PIPs).

    2.2 Relationship improvement plans (RIPs).

    2.3 Vendor-at-a-Glance reports.

    2.4 VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool.

    Outputs

    Configured Performance Improvement Plan.

    Configured Relationship Assessment and Relationship Improvement Plan.

    Configured 60-Second Report and completed Vendor Calendar for one vendor.

    Configured VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool.

    3 Build and Run

    The Purpose

    Continue configuring VMI Tools and Templates and enhancing VM competencies.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI and market intelligence to gather.

    Activities

    3.1 Internal feedback tool.

    3.2 VMI ROI calculation.

    3.3 Vendor recognition program.

    3.4 Assess the Relationship Landscape.

    3.5 Gather market intelligence.

    3.6 Improve professional skills.

    Outputs

    Configured Internal Feedback Tool.

    General framework for a vendor recognition program.

    Completed Relationship Landscape Assessment (representative sample).

    List of market intelligence to gather for top five vendors.

    4 Run and Review

    The Purpose

    Improve the VMI’s brand awareness and impact on the organization; continue to maintain alignment with the overall organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Raising the organization’s awareness of the VMI, and ensuring the VMI Is becoming more strategic.

    Activities

    4.1 Expand professional knowledge.

    4.2 Create brand awareness.

    4.3 Investigate potential alliances.

    4.4 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value.

    4.5 Review and update (governances, policies and procedures, lessons learned, internal alignment, and leading practices).

    Outputs

    Branding plan for the VMI.

    Branding plan for individual VMI team members.

    Further reading

    Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Transform Your VMI From Tactical to Strategic to Maximize Its Impact and Value

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Transform your VMI into a strategic contributor to ensure its longevity.

    The image contains a picture of Phil Bode.

    By the time you start using this blueprint, you should have established a solid foundation for your vendor management initiative (VMI) and implemented many or all of the principles outlined in Info-Tech’s blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management (the Jump Start blueprint). This blueprint (the Elevate blueprint) is meant to continue the evolutionary or maturation process of your VMI. Many of the items presented here will build on and refer to the elements from the Jump Start blueprint. The goal of the Elevate blueprint is to assist in the migration of your VMI from transactional to strategic. Why? Simply put, the more strategic the VMI, the more value it adds and the more impact it has on the organization as a whole.

    While the day-to-day, transactional aspect of running a VMI will never go away, getting stuck in transactional mode is a horrible place for the VMI and its team members:

    • The VMI will never live up to its potential.
    • The work won’t be enjoyable or rewarding for most people.
    • The VMI will be seen paper pushers, gatekeepers, and other things that don’t add value or should be avoided.
    • Being reactive (i.e. putting out fires all day) is exhausting and provides little or no control over the work and workflow.
    • Lastly, the VMI’s return on investment will be low, and unless it was established due to regulatory, audit, or other influences, the VMI could be disbanded. Minimal resources will be available to the VMI…just enough to keep it alive and obtain whatever checkmark needs to be earned to satisfy the original need for its creation.

    To prevent these tragic things from happening, transform the VMI into a strategic contributor and partner internally. This Elevate blueprint provides a roadmap and guidance to get your journey started. Focus on expanding your understanding of customer/vendor dynamics, improving the skills, competencies, and knowledge of the VMI’s team members, contributing value beyond the savings aspect, and building a solid brand internally and with your vendors. This requires a conscious effort and a proactive approach to vendor management…not to mention treating your internal “clients” with respect and providing great customer service.

    At the end of the day, ask yourself one question: If your internal clients had to pay for your services, would they? If you can answer yes, you are well on your way to being strategic. If not, you still have some work to do. Long live the strategic VMI!

    Phil Bode
    Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Each year, IT organizations “outsource” tasks, activities, functions, and other items. During 2021:

    • Spend on as-a-service providers increased 38% over 2020.*
    • Spend on managed service providers increased 16% over 2020.*
    • IT service providers increased their merger and acquisition numbers by 47% over 2020.*

    This leads to more spend, less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

    As new contracts are negotiated and existing contracts are renegotiated or renewed, there is a perception that the contracts will yield certain results, output, performance, solutions, or outcomes. The hope is that these will provide a measurable expected value to IT and the organization. Often, much of the expected value is never realized. Many organizations don’t have a VMI to help:

    • Ensure at least the expected value is achieved.
    • Improve on the expected value through performance management.
    • Significantly increase the expected value through a proactive VMI.

    Vendor Management is a proactive, cross-functional lifecycle. It can be broken down into four phases:

    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run
    • Review

    The Info-Tech process addresses all four phases and provides a step-by-step approach to configure and operate your VMI. The content in this blueprint helps you and the VMI evolve to add value and impact to the organization that was started with the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your VMI.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The VMI must continue to mature and evolve, or it will languish, atrophy, and possibly be disbanded.

    • A transactional approach to vendor management ignores the multi-faceted dynamics in play and limits the VMI’s potential value.
    • Improving the VMI’s impact starts with the VMI’s personnel – their skills, knowledge, competencies, and relationships.
    • Adding value to the organization requires time to build trust and understand the landscape (internal and external).
    *Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Spend on managed service providers and as-a-service providers continues to increase. In addition, IT services vendors continue to be active in the mergers and acquisitions arena. This increases the need for a VMI to help with the changing IT vendor landscape.

    38%

    2021

    16%

    2021

    47%

    2021

    Spend on

    As-a-Service Providers

    Spend on

    Managed Services

    Providers

    IT Services

    Merger & Acquisition

    Growth

    (Transactions)

    Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    Executive Summary

    Common Obstacles

    When organizations execute, renew, or renegotiate a contract, there is an “expected value” associated with that contract. Without a robust VMI, most of the expected value will never be realized. With a robust VMI, the realized value significantly exceeds the expected value during the contract term.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates the expected value of a contract with and without a vmi.

    Source: Based on findings from Geller & Company, 2003.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    A sound, cyclical approach to vendor management will help ensure your VMI meets your needs and stays in alignment with your organization as they both change (i.e. mature and evolve).

    Vendor Management Process

    1. Plan
    • Review and Update Existing Plan Materials
  • Build
    • Vendor Classification Models
    • Customer Positioning Model
    • 2-Way Scorecards
    • Performance Improvement Plan (PIP)
    • Relationship Improvement Plan (RIP)
    • Vendor-at-a-Glance Reports
    • VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool
    • Internal Feedback Tool
    • VMI ROI Calculation Tools
    • Vendor Recognition Program
  • Run
    • Classify Vendors and Identify Customer Position
    • Assess the Relationship Landscape
    • Leverage 2-Way Scorecards
    • Implement PIPs and RIPS
    • Gather Market Intelligence
    • Generate Vendor-at-a-Glance Reports
    • Evaluate VMI Personnel
    • Improve Professional Skills
    • Expand Professional Knowledge
    • Create Brand Awareness
    • Survey Internal Clients
    • Calculate VMI ROI
    • Implement Vendor Recognition Program
  • Review
    • Investigate Potential Alliances
    • Continue Increasing the VMI's Strategic Value
    • Review and Update Governances
    • Outcomes
      • Better Allocation of VMI Resources
      • Measurable Impact of the VMI
      • Increased Awareness of the VMI
      • Improved Vendor Performance
      • Improved Vendor Relationships
      • VMI Team Member Development
      • Strategic Relationships Internally

    Info-Tech’s Methodology for Elevating Your VMI

    Phase 1 - Plan

    Phase 2 - Build

    Phase 3 - Run

    Phase 4 – Review

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Review and Update Existing Plan Materials

    2.1 Vendor Classification Models

    2.2 Customer Positioning Model

    2.3 Two-Way Scorecards

    2.4 Performance Improvement Plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship Improvement Plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-Glance Reports

    2.7 VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool

    2.8 Internal Feedback Tool

    2.9 VMI ROI Calculation

    2.10 Vendor Recognition Program

    3.1 Classify Vendors & Identify Customer Position

    3.2 Assess the Relationship Landscape

    3.3 Leverage Two-Way Scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather Market Intelligence

    3.6 Generate Vendor-at-a-Glance Reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI Personnel

    3.8 Improve Professional Skills

    3.9 Expand Professional Knowledge

    3.10 Create Brand Awareness

    3.11 Survey Internal Clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement Vendor Recognition Program

    4.1 Investigate Potential Alliances

    4.2 Continue Increasing the VMI’s Strategic Value

    4.3 Review and Update

    Phase Outcomes

    This phase helps the VMI stay focused and aligned by reviewing existing materials, updating the existing maturity assessment, and ensuring that the foundational elements of the VMI are up-to-date.

    This phase helps you configure, create, and understand the tools and templates used to elevate the VMI.

    This phase helps you begin integrating the new tools and templates into the VMI’s operations.

    This phase helps the VMI stay aligned with the overall organization, stay current, and improve its strategic value as it evolves.

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1

    An organization’s vendor management initiative must continue to evolve and mature to reach its full strategic value. In the early stages, the vendor management initiative may be seen as transactional, focusing on the day-to-day functions associated with vendor management. The real value of a VMI comes from becoming strategic partner to other functional groups (departments) within your organization.

    Insight 2

    Developing vendor management personnel is critical to the vendor management initiative’s evolution and maturation. For the VMI to mature, its personnel must mature as well. Their professional skills, competencies, and knowledge must increase over time. Failure to accentuate personal growth within the team limits what the team can achieve and how the team is perceived.

    Insight 3

    Vendor management is not about imposing your will on vendors; it is about understanding the multifaceted dynamics between your organization and your vendors and charting the appropriate path forward. Resource allocation and relationship expectations flow from these dynamics. Each critical vendor requires an individual plan to build the best possible relationship and to leverage that relationship. What works with one vendor may not work or even be possible with another vendor – even if both vendors are critical to your success.

    Blueprint Deliverables

    The four phases of maturing and evolving your vendor management initiative are supported with configurable tools, templates, and checklists to help you stay aligned internally and achieve your goals.

    VMI Tools and Templates

    Continue building your foundation for your VMI and configure tools and templates to help you manage your vendor relationships.

    The image contains screenshots of the VMI Tools and Templates.

    Key Deliverables:

    Info-Tech’s

    1. Elevate – COST Model Vendor Classification Tool
    2. Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool
    3. Elevate – OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool
    4. Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan Tool
    5. Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    A suite of tools and templates to help you upgrade and evolve your vendor management initiative.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Improve VMI performance and value.
    • Improve VMI team member performance.
    • Build better relationships with critical vendors.
    • Measure the impact and contributions provided by the VMI.
    • Establish realistic and appropriate expectations for vendor interactions.
    • Understand customer positioning to allocate vendor management resources more effectively and more efficiently.
    • Improve vendor accountability.
    • Increase collaboration between departments.
    • Improve working relationships with your vendors.
    • Create a feedback loop to address vendor/customer issues before they get out of hand or are more costly to resolve.
    • Increase access to meaningful data and information regarding important vendors.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phases 2 and 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Review status of existing plan materials.

    Call #2: Conduct a new maturity assessment.

    Call #3: Review optional classification models.

    Call #4: Determine customer positioning for top vendors.

    Call #5: Configure vendor Scorecards and vendor feedback forms.

    Call #6: Discuss PIPs, RIPs, and vendor-at-a-glance reports.

    Call #7: VMI personnel competency evaluation tool.

    Call #8: Create internal feedback tool and discuss ROI.

    Call #9: Identify vendor recognition program attributes and assess the relationship landscape.

    Call #10: Gather market intelligence and create brand awareness.

    Call #11: Identify potential vendor alliances, review the components of a strategic VMI, and discuss the continuous improvement loop.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 6 to 12 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Plan/Build Run

    Build/Run

    Build/Run

    Run/Review

    Activities

    1.1 Existing Plan document review and new maturity assessment.

    1.2 Optional classification models.

    1.3 Customer positioning model.

    1.4 Two-way scorecards.

    2.1 Performance improvement plans (PIPs).

    2.2 Relationship improvement plans (RIPs).

    2.3 Vendor-at-a-glance reports.

    2.4 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool.

    3.1 Internal feedback tool.

    3.2 VMI ROI calculation.

    3.3 Vendor recognition program.

    3.4 Assess the relationship landscape.

    3.5 Gather market intelligence.

    3.6 Improve professional skills.

    4.1 Expand professional knowledge.

    4.2 Create brand awareness.

    4.3 Investigate potential alliances.

    4.4 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value.

    4.5 Review and update (governances, policies and procedures, lessons learned, internal alignment, and leading practices).

    Deliverables

    1. Updated plan documents.
    2. New maturity assessment.
    3. Configured classification model.
    4. Customer positioning for top 5 vendors.
    5. Configured scorecard and feedback form.
    1. Configured performance improvement plan.
    2. Configured relationship assessment and relationship improvement plan.
    3. Configured 60-second report and completed vendor calendar for one vendor.
    4. Configured VMI personnel competency evaluation tool.
    1. Configured internal feedback tool.
    2. General framework for a vendor recognition program.
    3. Completed relationship landscape assessment (representative sample).
    4. List of market intelligence to gather for top 5 vendors.
    1. Roadmap/plan for improving skills and knowledge for VMI personnel.
    2. Action plan for creating brand awareness for the VMI.
    3. Action plan for creating brand awareness for each VMI team member.

    Using complementary vendor management blueprints

    Jump Start Your VMI and Elevate Your VMI

    The image contains a screenshot to demonstrate using complementary vendor management blueprints.

    Phase 1 – Plan

    Look to the Future and Update Existing Materials

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Review and update existing Plan materials

    2.1 Vendor classification models

    2.2 Customer positioning model

    2.3 Two-way scorecards

    2.4 Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    2.7 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    2.8 Internal feedback tool

    2.9 VMI ROI calculation

    2.10 Vendor recognition program

    3.1 Classify vendors and identify customer position

    3.2 Assess the relationship landscape

    3.3 Leverage two-way scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather market intelligence

    3.6 Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI personnel

    3.8 Improve professional skills

    3.9 Expand professional knowledge

    3.10 Create brand awareness

    3.11 Survey internal clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement vendor recognition program

    4.1 Investigate potential alliances

    4.2 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    4.3 Review and update

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    This phase helps the VMI stay focused and aligned by reviewing existing materials, updating the existing maturity assessment, and ensuring that the foundational elements of the VMI are up-to-date. The main outcomes from this phase are a current maturity assessment and updated or revised Plan documents.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Others as needed

    Phase 1 – Plan

    Phase 1 – Plan revisits the foundational elements from the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative. As the VMI continues to operate and mature, looking backward periodically provides a new perspective and helps the VMI move forward:

    • Has anything changed (mission statement, goals, scope, strengths and obstacles, roles and responsibilities, and process mapping)?
    • What progress was made against the maturity assessment?
    • What is next in the maturity process for the VMI?
    • Were some foundational elements overlooked or not done thoroughly due to time constraints, a lack of knowledge, or other factors?

    Keep an eye on the past as you begin looking toward the future.

    Step 1.1 – Review and update existing Plan materials

    Ensure existing materials are current

    At this point, the basic framework for your VMI should be in place. However, now is a good time to correct any oversights in your foundational elements. Have you:

    • Drafted a mission statement for the VMI and listed its goals, answering the questions “why does the VMI exist” and “what will it achieve”?
    • Determined the VMI’s scope, establishing what is in and outside the purview of the VMI?
    • Listed the VMI’s strengths and obstacles, identifying what you can leverage and what needs to be managed to ensure smooth sailing?
    • Established roles and responsibilities (OIC Chart) for the vendor management lifecycle, defining each internal party’s place in the process?
    • Documented process maps, delineating (at a minimum) what the VMI is doing for each step of the vendor management lifecycle?
    • Created a charter, establishing an operational structure for the VMI?
    • Completed a vendor inventory, identifying the major vendors included in the VMI?
    • Conducted a VMI maturity assessment, establishing a baseline and desired future state to work toward?
    • Defined the VMI’s structure, documenting the VMI’s place in the organization, its services, and its clients?

    If any of these elements is missing, revisit the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative to complete these components. If they exist, review them and make any required modifications.

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    1.1.1 – Review and update existing Plan materials

    1 – 6 Hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review existing documents and tools created or configured during Phase 1 of the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative: mission statement and goals, scope, strengths and obstacles, OIC chart, process maps, charter, vendor inventory, maturity assessment, and structure.
    2. Update the documents as needed.
    3. Redo the maturity assessment if more than 12 months have passed since the initial assessment was conducted.
    Input Output
    • Documents and tools from Phase 1 of the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Updated documents and tools from Phase 1 of the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    Materials Participants
    • Documents and tools from Phase 1 of the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Whiteboard or flip charts (as needed)
    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Download the Jump - Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Phase 2 – Build

    Create New Tools and Consider Alternatives to Existing Tools

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Review and update existing Plan materials

    2.1 Vendor classification models

    2.2 Customer positioning model

    2.3 Two-way scorecards

    2.4 Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    2.7 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    2.8 Internal feedback tool

    2.9 VMI ROI calculation

    2.10 Vendor recognition program

    3.1 Classify vendors and identify customer position

    3.2 Assess the relationship landscape

    3.3 Leverage two-way scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather market intelligence

    3.6 Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI personnel

    3.8 Improve professional skills

    3.9 Expand professional knowledge

    3.10 Create brand awareness

    3.11 Survey internal clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement vendor recognition program

    4.1 Investigate potential alliances

    4.2 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    4.3 Review and update

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    This phase helps you configure, create, and understand the tools and templates used to elevate the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of the tools that identify which vendors are important to you, tools and concepts to help you take key vendor relationships to the next level, and tools to help you evaluate and improve the VMI and its personnel.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Legal
    • Marketing
    • Others as needed

    Phase 2 – Build

    Create and configure tools, templates, and processes

    Phase 2 – Build is similar to its counterpart in the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative; this phase focuses on tools, templates, and concepts that help the VMI increase its strategic value and impact. The items referenced in this phase will require your customization or configuration to integrate them within your organization and culture for maximum effect.

    One goal of this phase is to provide new ways of looking at things and alternate approaches. (For example, two methods of classifying your vendors are presented for your consideration.) You don’t live in a one-size-fits-all world, and options allow you (or force you) to evaluate what’s possible rather than running with the herd. As you review this phase, keep in mind that some of the concepts presented may not be applicable in your environment…or it may be that they just aren’t applicable right now. Timing, evolution, and maturity will always be factors in how the VMI operates.

    Another goal of this phase is to get you thinking about the value the VMI brings to the organization, and just as important, how to capture and report it. Money alone may be at the forefront of most people’s minds when return on investment is brought up, but there are many ways to measure a VMI’s value and impact. This Phase will help you in your pursuit.

    Lastly, a VMI must focus on its internal clients, and that starts with the VMI’s personnel. The VMI is a reflection of its team members – what they do, say, and know will determine how the VMI is perceived…and used.

    Step 2.1 – Vendor classification model

    Determine which classification model works best for your VMI

    The classification model in the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative is simple and easy to use. It provides satisfactory results for the first one or two years of the VMI’s life. After that, a more sophisticated model should be used, one with more parameters or flexibility to accommodate the VMI’s new maturity.

    Two models are presented on the following pages. The first is a variation of the COST model used in the Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative blueprint. The second is the MVP model, which segments vendors into three categories instead of four and eliminates the 50/50 allocation constraint inherent in a 2x2 model.

    Step 2.1 – Vendor classification model

    Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the COST classification model.

    If you used the COST classification model in the Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative blueprint, you are familiar with its framework: vendors are plotted into a 2x2 matrix based on their spend and switching costs and their value to your operation. The simple variation of this model uses three variables to assess the vendor’s value to your operation and two variables to determine the vendor’s spend and switching cost implications.

    The COST classification model presented here sticks to the same basic tenets but adds to the number of variables used to plot a vendor’s position within the matrix. Six variables are used to define a vendor’s value and three variables are used to set the spend and switching cost. This provides greater latitude in identifying what makes a vendor important to you.

    Step 2.1 – Vendor classification model

    Configure the MVP Vendor Classification Tool

    The image contains a screenshot example of the MVP clsssification tool.

    Another option for classifying vendors is the MVP classification model. In this model, vendors fall into one of three categories: minor, valued, or principal. Similar to the COST vendor classification model, the MVP classification model requires a user to evaluate statements or questions to assess a vendor’s importance to the organization. In the MVP approach, each question/statement is weighted, and the potential responses to each question/statement are assigned points (100, 33, or 10) based on their impact. Multiplying the weight (expressed as a percentage) for each question/statement by the response points for each question/statement yields a line-item score. The total number of points obtained by a vendor determines its classification category. A vendor receiving a score of 75 or greater would be a principal vendor (similar to a strategic vendor under the COST model); 55 to 74 points would be a valued vendor (similar to operational or tactical vendor); less than 55 points would be a minor vendor (similar to a commodity vendor).

    Step 2.1 – Vendor classification model

    Which classification model is best?

    By now, you may be asking yourself, “Which model should I use? What is the advantage of the MVP model?” Great questions! Both models work well, but the COST model has a limitation inherent in any basic 2x2 model. Since two axes are used in a 2x2 approach, the effective weighting for each axis is 50%. As a result, the weights assigned to an individual element are reduced by 50%. A simple but extreme example will help clarify this issue (hopefully).

    Suppose you wanted to use an element such as How integrated with our business processes are the vendor's products/services? and weighted it 100%. Under the 2x2 matrix approach, this element only moves the X-axis score; it has no impact on the Y-axis score. The vendor in this hypothetical could max out the X-axis under the COST model, but additional elements would be needed for the vendor to rise from the tactical quadrant to the strategic quadrant. In the MVP model, if the vendor maxed out the score on that one element (at 100%), the vendor would be at the top of the pyramid and would be a principal vendor.

    One model is not necessarily better than the other. Both provide an objective way for you to determine the importance of your vendors. However, if you are using elements that don’t fit neatly into the two axes of the COST model, consider using the MVP model. Play with each and see which one works best in your environment, knowing you can always switch at a later point.

    2.1.1 – COST Model Vendor Classification Tool

    15 – 45 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to decide whether you want to use this model or the MVP model (see next page); if you choose this model, configure it for your environment by reviewing Elevate – COST Model Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters.
      1. Review the questions in column C for each axis (items 1-9), the weights in column D, and the answers/descriptors for each question (columns E, F, G, and H). Make any adjustments necessary to fit your culture, environment, and goals.
      2. Using the Jump Start Your Vendor Management blueprint tool Jump - Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory, sort your vendors by spend; if you used multiple line items for a vendor in the Vendor Inventory Tool, aggregate the spend data for this activity.
      3. Adjust the descriptors and values in row 16 (Item 7) to match your actual data. General guidance for establishing the spend ranges is provided in the tool itself.
    2. No other modifications should be made to the parameters.
    Input Output
    • Jump - Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory from the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Configured COST Model Vendor Classification Tool
    Materials Participants
    • Elevate – Cost Model Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate - COST Model Vendor Classification Tool

    2.1.2 – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool

    15 – 45 Minutes

    1. Meet with the Participants to decide whether you want to use this model or the COST Model (see previous page); if you choose this model, configure it for your environment by reviewing Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters.
    2. Review the questions in column C (Items 1 - 7 ), the answers/descriptors for each question (columns D, E, and F), and the weights in column G. Make any adjustments necessary to fit your culture, environment, and goals.
    3. For the answers/descriptors use words and phrases that resonate with your audience and are as intuitive as possible.
    4. If you use annualized spend as an element, general guidance for establishing the spend ranges is provided in the tool itself.
    5. When assigning a weight value to a question, refrain from going below 5%; weights below this threshold will have minimal to no impact on a vendor's score.
    InputOutput
    • Jump - Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory from the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Configured MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool

    Step 2.2 – Customer positioning model

    Identify how the vendors view your organization

    The image contains a screenshot of the customer positioning model.

    Now that you have configured your choice of vendor classification model (or decided to stick with your original model), it’s time to think about the other side of the coin: How do your vendors view your organization. Why is this important? Because the VMI will have only limited success if you are trying to impose your will on your vendors without regard for how they view the relationship from their perspective. For example, if the vendor is one of your strategic (COST Model) or principal (MVP Model) vendors, but you don’t spend much money with them, you are difficult to work with, and there is no opportunity for future growth, you may have a difficult time getting the vendor to show up for BAMs (business alignment meetings), caring about scorecards, or caring about the relationship period.

    Our experience at Info-Tech interacting with our members through vendor management workshops, guided implementations, and advisory calls has led us to a significant conclusion on this topic: Most customers tend to overvalue their importance to their vendors. To open your eyes about how your vendors actually view your account, use Info-Tech’s OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool. (It is based on the supplier preferencing model pioneered by Steele & Court in 1996 in which the standard 2x2 matrix tool for procurement [and eventually vendor management] was repurposed to provide insights from the vendor’s perspective.) For our purposes, think of the OPEN model for customer positioning as a mirror’s reflection of the COST model for vendor classification. The OPEN model provides a more objective way to determine your importance to your vendors. Ultimately, your relationship with each vendor will be plotted into the 2x2 grid, and it will indicate whether your account is viewed as an opportunity, preferred, exploitable, or negligible.

    *Adapted from Profitable Purchasing Strategies by Paul T. Steele and Brian H. Court

    Step 2.3 – Two-way scorecards

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors

    The image contains a screenshot example of the otwo-way feedback loop with vendors.

    As with the vendor classification models discussed in Step 2.1, the two-way scorecards presented here are an extension of the scorecard and feedback material from the Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative blueprint.

    The vendor scorecard in this blueprint provides additional flexibility and sophistication for your scorecarding approach by allowing the individual variables (or evidence indicators) within each measurement category to be evaluated and weighted. (The prior version only allowed the evaluation and weighting at the category level.)

    On the vendor feedback side, the next evolution is to formalize the feedback and document it in its own scorecard format rather than continuing to list questions in the BAM agenda. The vendor feedback template included with this blueprint provides a sample approach to quantifying the vendor’s feedback and tracking the information.

    The fundamentals of scorecarding remain the same:

    • Keep your eye on what is important to you.
    • Limit the number of measurement categories and evidence indicators to a reasonable and manageable number.
    • Simple is almost always better than complicated.

    2.3.1 – Two-way scorecards (vendor scorecard)

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the scorecard from Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.1 Vendor Scorecard to meet your needs:
      1. Review the measurement categories and criteria and modify as needed.
      2. Weight the measurement categories (Column E) according to their relative importance to each other; make sure the total adds up to 100%.
      3. Weight the measurement criteria (Column D) within each measurement category according to their relative importance to each other; make sure the total adds up to 100%.
    2. As a reminder, the vendor scorecard is for the vendor overall, not for a specific contract.
    3. You can create variations of the scorecard based on vendor categories (e.g. hardware, software, cloud, security, telecom), but avoid the temptation of creating vendor-specific scorecards unless the vendor is unique; conversely, you may want to create two or more scorecards for a vendor that crosses categories (one for each category).
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.1 Vendor Scorecard
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured vendor scorecards
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.1 Vendor Scorecard
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    2.3.2 – Two-way scorecards (vendor feedback form)

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the feedback form from Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.2 Vendor Feedback Form to meet your needs:
      1. Review the measurement categories and criteria and modify as needed.
      2. Weight the measurement categories (Column E) according to their relative importance to each other; make sure the total adds up to 100%.
      3. Weight the measurement criteria (Column D) within each measurement category according to their relative importance to each other; make sure the total adds up to 100%.
    2. As a reminder, the vendor feedback form is for the relationship overall and not for a specific contract.
    3. You can create variations of the feedback form based on vendor categories (e.g. hardware, software, cloud, security, telecom), but avoid the temptation of creating vendor-specific feedback forms unless the vendor is unique; conversely, you may want to create two or more feedback forms for a vendor that crosses categories and you work with different account management teams (one for each team).
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.2 Vendor Feedback Form
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured vendor feedback forms
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.2 Vendor Feedback Form
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 2.4 – Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    Design your template to help underperforming vendors

    It is not uncommon to see performance dips from even the best vendors. However, when poor performance becomes a trend, the vendor manager can work with the vendor to create and implement a performance improvement plan (PIP).

    Performance issues can come from a variety of sources:

    • Contractual obligations.
    • Scorecard items.
    • Compliance issues not specified in the contract.
    • Other areas/expectations not covered by the scorecard or contract (e.g. vendor personnel showing up late for meetings, vendor personnel not being adequately trained, vendor personnel not being responsive).

    PIPs should focus on at least a few key areas:

    • The stated performance in the contract or the expected performance.
    • The actual performance provided by the vendor.
    • The impact of the vendor’s poor performance on the customer.
    • A corrective action plan, including steps to be taken by the vendor and due dates and/or review dates.
    • The consequences for not improving the performance level.

    Info-Tech Insight

    PIPs are most effective when the vendor is an operational, strategic, or tactical vendor (COST model) or a principal or valued vendor (MVP model) and when you are an opportunity or preferred customer (OPEN model).

    2.4.1 – Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    15 – 30 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the two options for PIPs: Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tabs 2.4.1 and 2.4.2. Decide whether you want to use one or both options.
    2. Modify, add, or delete elements from either or both options to meet your needs.
    3. If you want to add signature lines for acknowledgement by the parties or other elements that may have legal implications, check with your legal advisors.
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium - Tabs 2.4.1 and 2.4.2
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured performance improvement plan templates
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium - Tabs 2.4.1 and 2.4.2
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 2.5 – Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    Identify key relationship indicators for your vendors

    Relationships are often taken for granted, and many faulty assumptions are made by both parties in the relationship: good relationships will stay good, bad relationships will stay bad, and relationships don’t require any work. In the vendor management space, these assumptions can derail the entire VMI and diminish the value added to your organization by vendors.

    To complicate matters, relationships are multi-faceted. They can occur:

    • On an organization-to-organization, working level.
      • Do your roadmaps align with the vendors?
      • Do the parties meet their contractual obligations?
      • Do the parties meet their day-to-day requirements (meetings, invoices, responses to inquiries)?
    • On an individual, personnel-to-personnel basis.
      • Do you have a good relationship with the account manager?
      • Does your project manager work well with the vendor’s project manager?
      • Do your executives have good relationships with their counterparts at the vendor?

    Improving or maintaining a relationship will not happen by accident. There must be a concerted effort to achieve the desired results (or get as close as possible). A relationship improvement plan can be used to improve or maintain a relationship with the vendor and the individuals who make up the vendor’s organization.

    Step 2.5 – Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    Identify key relationship indicators for your vendors (continued)

    Improving relationships (or even maintaining them) requires a plan. The first step is to understand the current situation: Is the relationship good, bad, or somewhere in between? While the analysis will be somewhat subjective, it can be made more objective than merely thinking about relationships emotionally or intuitively. Relationships can be assessed based on the presence and quality of certain traits, factors, and elements. For example, you may think communication is important in a relationship. However, that is too abstract and subjective; to be more objective, you would need to identify the indicators or qualities of good communication. For a vendor relationship, they might include (but wouldn’t necessarily be limited to):

    • Vendor communication is accurate and complete.
    • Vendor personnel respond to inquiries on a timely basis.
    • Vendor personnel communications are easy to understand.
    • Vendor personnel communicate with you in your preferred manner (text, email, phone).
    • Vendor personnel discuss the pros and cons of vendor products/services being presented.

    Evaluating these statements on a predefined and consistent scale establishes the baseline necessary to conduct a gap analysis. The second half of the equation is the future state. Using the same criteria, what would or should the communication component look like a year from now? After that is determined, a plan can be created to improve the deficient areas and maintain the acceptable areas.

    Although this example focused on one category, the same methodology can be used for additional categories. It all starts with the simple question that requires a complex answer, “What traits are important to you and are indicators of a good relationship?”

    2.5.1 – Relationship Improvement Plan (RIP)

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the relationship indicators in Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters.
    2. Review the 60 relationship indicators in column E of Tab 2. Set Parameters.
    3. Identify any relationship indicators that are important to you but that are missing from the prepopulated list.
    4. Add the relationship indicators you identified in step 3 above in the space provided at the end of column E of Tab 2. Set Parameters. There is space for up to 15 additional relationship indicators.
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan Tool
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan tool
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan tool
    • Whiteboard of flip chart
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan tool

    Step 2.6 – Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    Configure executive and stakeholder reports

    Executives and stakeholders (“E&S”) discuss vendors during internal meetings and often meet directly with vendors as well. Having a solid working knowledge of all the critical vendors used by an organization is nearly impossible for E&S. Without situational awareness, though, E&S can appear uninformed, can be at the mercy of others with better information, and can be led astray by misinformation. To prevent these and other issues from derailing the E&S, two essential vendor-at-a-glance reports can be used.

    The first report is the 60-Second Report. As the name implies, the report can be reviewed and digested in roughly a minute. The report provides a lot of information on one page in a combination of graphics, icons, charts, and words.

    The second report is a vendor calendar. Although it is a simple document, the Vendor Calendar is a powerful communication tool to keep E&S informed of upcoming events with a vendor. The purpose is not to replace the automated calendaring systems (e.g. Outlook), but to supplement them.

    Combined, the 60-Second Report and the Vendor Calendar provide E&S with an overview of the information required for any high-level meeting with a vendor or to discuss a vendor.

    2.6.1 – Vendor-at-a-glance reports (60-Second Report)

    30 – 90 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the sample 60-Second Report and the Checklist of Potential Topics in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.1 V-at-a-G 60-Second Report.
    2. Identify topics of interest and ways to convey the data/information. (Make sure the data sources are valid and the data are easy to obtain.)
    3. Create a framework for the report and populate the fields with sample data. Use one printed page as a guideline for the framework; if it doesn’t fit on one page, adjust the amount of content until it does. If you adjust the margins, font, size of the graphic content, and other items, make sure you don’t reduce the size too much. The brain needs white space to more easily absorb the content, and people shouldn’t have to squint to read the content!
    4. Share the mockup with the intended audience and get their feedback. Use an iterative approach until you are satisfied that no further changes are necessary (or reasonable). Keep in mind that you will not be able to please everyone!
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.1 V-at-a-G 60-Second Report
    • Design elements and framework for 60-Second Reports
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.1. V-at-a-G 60-Second Report
    • Whiteboard or flip chart
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    2.6.2 – Vendor-at-a-glance reports (vendor calendar)

    15 – 30 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the sample Vendor Calendar format in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.2 V-at-a-G Vendor Calendar.
    2. Brainstorm as a team to identify items to include in the calendar (e.g. business alignment meeting dates, conference dates, contract renewals).
    3. Determine whether you want the Vendor Calendar to be:
      1. A calendar year or a fiscal year (if they are different in your organization)
      2. A rolling twelve-month calendar or a fixed calendar.
    4. Decide whether the fill color for each month should change based on your answers in 3, above. For example, you might want a color scheme by quarter or by year (if you choose a rolling twelve-month calendar).
    5. Share the mockup with the intended audience to get their feedback. Use an iterative approach until you are satisfied that no further changes are necessary (or reasonable). Keep in mind you will not be able to please everyone!
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.2 V-at-a-G Vendor Calendar
    • Brainstorming
    • Framework and topics for Vendor Calendar Reports
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.2 V-at-a-G Vendor Calendar
    • Whiteboard or flip chart
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 2.7 – VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    Identify skills, competencies, and knowledge required for success

    The image contains a screenshot of the VMI personnel competency evaluation tool.

    By now, you have built and begun managing the VMI’s 3-year roadmap and 90-day plans to help you navigate the VMI’s day-to-day operational path. To complement these plans, it is time to build a roadmap for the VMI’s personnel as well. It doesn’t matter whether VMI is just you, you and some part-time personnel, a robust and fully staffed vendor management office, or some other point on the vendor management spectrum. The VMI is a reflection of its personnel, and they must improve their skills, competencies, and knowledge (“S/C/K”) over time for the VMI to reach its potential. As the adage says, “What got you here won’t get you there.”

    To get there requires a plan that starts with creating an inventory of the VMI’s team members’ S/C/K. Initially, focus on two items:

    • What S/C/K does the VMI currently have across its personnel?
    • What S/C/K does the VMI need to get to the next level?

    Conducting an assessment of and developing an improvement plan for each team member will be addressed later in this blueprint. (See steps 3.7 – Evaluate VMI Personnel, 3.8 – Improve Professional Skills, and 3.9 - Expand Professional Knowledge.)

    2.7.1 – VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Review the two options of the competency matrix found in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium tabs 2.7.1 and 2.7.2 and decide which format you want to use.
    2. Review and modify as needed the prepopulated list of skills, competencies, knowledge, and other intellectual assets found in section 1 of the template option you selected in step 1. The list you use should reflect items that are important to your VMI's mission, goals, scope, charter, and operations.
    3. No changes are required to Sections 2 and 3. They are dashboards and will be updated automatically based on any changes you make to the skills, competencies, knowledge, and other intellectual assets elements in section 1.
    Input Output
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tabs 2.7.1 and 2.7.2
    • Current job descriptions
    • A list of competencies, skills, and knowledge VMI personnel
      • Should have
      • Do have

    An assessment and inventory of competencies, skills, knowledge, and other intellectual assets by VMI team member

    Materials Participants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tabs 2.7.1 and 2.7.2
    • VMI team lead
    • VMI team members as needed

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium.

    Step 2.8 – Internal feedback tool

    Create a user-friendly survey to learn about the VMI’s impact on the organization

    The image contains a screenshot of the internal feedback tool.

    *Adapted from “Best Practices for Every Step of Survey Creation” from surveymonkey.com and “The 9 Most Important Survey Design Tips & Best Practices” by Swetha Amaresan.

    As part of the vendor management lifecycle, the VMI conducts an annual review to assesses compliance with policies and procedures, to incorporate changes in leading practices, to ensure that lessons learned are captured and leveraged, to validate that internal alignment is maintained, and to update governances as needed. As the VMI matures, the annual review process should incorporate feedback from those the VMI serves and those directly impacted by the VMI’s efforts. Your internal clients and others will be able to provide insights on what the VMI does well, what needs improvement, what challenges arise when using the VMI’s services, and other issues.

    A few best practices for creating surveys are set out below:*

    1. Start by establishing a clearly defined, attainable, and high-level goal by filling in the blank: "I want to better understand [blank] (e.g. how the VMI impacts our clients and the executives/stakeholders)." From there, you can begin to derive questions that will help you meet your stated goal.
    2. Use mostly “closed-ended” questions in the survey – responses selected from a list provided. Do ask some “open-ended” questions at the end of the survey to obtain specific examples, anecdotes, or compliments by providing space for the respondent to provide a narrative.
    3. Avoid using biased and leading questions, for example, “Would you say the VMI was great or merely fabulous?” The goal is to get real feedback that helps the VMI improve. Don’t ask the respondents to tell you what you want to hear…listen to what they have to say.

    Step 2.8 – Internal feedback tool

    Create a user-friendly survey to learn about the VMI’s impact on the organization (continued)

    The image contains a screenshot of the internal feedback tool.

    4. Pay attention to your vocabulary and phrasing; use simple words. The goal is to communicate effectively and solicit feedback, and that all starts with the respondents being able to understand what you are asking or seeking.

    5. Use response scales and keep the answer choices balanced. You want the respondents to find an answer that matches their feedback. For example, potential answers such as “strongly agree, agree, neutral, disagree, strongly disagree” are better than “strongly agree, agree, other.”

    6. To improve your response rate, keep your survey short. Most people don’t like surveys, but they really hate long surveys. Make every question count, and keep the average response time to a maximum of a couple of minutes.

    7. Watch out for “absolutes;” they can hurt the quality of your responses. Avoid using language such as always, never, all, and every in your questions or statements. They tend to polarize the evaluation and make it feel like an all-or-nothing situation.

    8. Ask one question at a time or request evaluation of one statement at a time. Combining two topics into the same question or statement (double-barreled questions or statements) makes it difficult for the respondent to determine how to answer if both parts require different answers, for example, “During your last interaction with the VMI, how would you rate our assistance and friendliness?”

    2.8.1 – Internal Feedback Tool

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the information in Elevate – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.8.
    2. Two types of surveys are referenced in tab 2.8: a general awareness survey and a specific interaction survey. Decide whether you want to create one or both for your VMI.
      1. For a general awareness survey, review the questions in part 1 of tab 2.8 and make any changes required to meet your needs. Try to keep the number of questions to seven or less. Determine who will receive the survey and how often it will be used.
      2. For a specific interaction survey, review the questions in Part 2 of Tab 2.8. Select up to 7 questions you want to use, making changes to existing questions or creating your own. The goal of this survey is to solicit feedback immediately after one of your internal clients has used the VMI’s services. You may need multiple variations of the survey based on the types of interactions or services the VMI provides.
    3. Balance the length of the surveys against the information you are seeking and the time required for the respondents to complete the survey.
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.8
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured internal surveys
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.8
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate –Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 2.9 – VMI ROI calculation

    Identify ROI variables to track

    After the VMI has been operating for a year or two, questions may begin to surface about the value the VMI provides. “We’re making an investment in the VMI. What are we getting in return?” “Does the VMI provide us with any tangible benefits, or is it another mandatory area like Internal Audit?” To keep the naysayers at bay, start tracking the value the VMI adds to the organization or the return on investment (ROI) provided.

    The easy thing to focus on is money: hard-dollar savings, soft-dollar savings, and cost avoidance. However, the VMI often plays a critical role in vendor-facing activities that lead to saving time, improving performance, and managing risk. All of these are quantifiable and trackable. In addition, internal customer satisfaction (step 2.8 and step 3.11) can provide examples of the VMI’s impact beyond the four pillars of money, time, performance, and risk.

    VMI ROI is a multifaceted and complex topic that is beyond the scope of this blueprint. However, you can do a deep (or shallow) dive on this topic by downloading and reading Info-Tech’s blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO to plot your path for tracking and reporting the VMI’s ROI or value.

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    2.9.1 – VMI ROI calculation

    2 – 4 Hours

    1. Meet with the participants to review the Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO.
    2. Identify your ROI maturity level using the tools from that blueprint.
    3. Develop a game plan for measuring and reporting your ROI.
    4. Configure the tools to meet your needs.
    5. Gain approval from applicable stakeholders or executives.
    Input Output
    • The tools and materials from the Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO
    • Brainstorming
    • Game plan for measuring and reporting ROI
    Materials Participants
    • The Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO and its tools
    • VMI team
    • Executives and stakeholders as needed

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    Step 2.10 – Vendor recognition program

    Address the foundational elements of your program

    A vendor recognition program can provide many benefits to your organization. Obtaining those benefits requires a solid plan and the following foundational elements:

    • Internal alignment: The program must align with your organization’s principles and culture. A vendor recognition program that accentuates value and collaboration will not succeed in a customer environment that operates with a “lowest cost wins/price is the only thing we care about” mentality.
    • Funding: Not every program requires extensive funding (or any funding), but more formal vendor recognition programs do require some investment. Underfunding will make your program look cheap and unimpressive. For example, a certificate of appreciation printed on plain paper using a Word template doesn’t send the same message as a nice plaque engraved with the winner’s name.
    • Support: Executive buy-in and support are essential. Without this, only the most informal vendor recognition programs stand a chance of surviving. Executives and stakeholders are often directly involved in formal programs, and this broadens the appeal of the program from the vendor’s perspective.
    • Designated leader: Someone needs to be in charge of the vendor recognition program. This doesn’t mean only one person is doing all the work, but it does require one person to lead the effort and drive the program forward. Much like the VMI itself, there are things the leader will be able to do themselves and things that will require the input, assistance, and participation from others throughout the organization.

    Step 2.10 – Vendor recognition program

    Leverage the advantages of recognizing vendors

    As with any project, there are advantages and disadvantages with implementing and operating a vendor recognition program.

    Advantages:

    • The Pygmalion effect may come into play; the vendors’ performance can be influenced by your expectations as conveyed through the program.
    • There may be some prestige for the vendor associated with winning one of your awards or receiving recognition.
    • Vendor recognition programs can be viewed as a competition, and this can improve vendor performance as it relates to the program and program categories.
    • The program can provide additional feedback to the vendor on what's important to you and help the vendor focus on those items.
    • The vendors’ executives may have an increased awareness of your organization, which can help build relationships.
    • Performance gains can be maintained or increased. Vendors are competitive by nature. Once a vendor wins an award or receives the recognition, it will strive to win again the following year (or measurement period).

    Step 2.10 – Vendor recognition program

    Manage the disadvantages of recognizing vendors

    Just as a coin has two sides, there are two sides to a vendor recognition program. Advantages must be weighed against disadvantages, or at the very least, you must be aware of the potential disadvantages.

    Disadvantages:

    • The program may require funding, depending upon the scope and type of awards, rewards, and recognition being provided.
    • Some vendors who don’t qualify for the program or who fail to win may get hurt feelings. This may alienate them.
    • In addition to hurt feelings from being excluded or finishing outside of the winner’s circle, some vendors may believe the program shows favoritism to certain vendors or is too subjective.
    • Some vendors may not “participate” in the program; they may not understand the WIIFM (what’s in it for me). You may have to “sell” the benefits and advantages of participation to the vendors.
    • Participation may vary by size of vendor. The award, reward, or recognition may mean more to small and mid-sized companies than large companies.

    Step 2.10 – Vendor recognition program

    Create your program’s framework

    There is no one-size-fits-all approach to creating a vendor recognition program. Your program should align with your goals. For example, do you want to drive performance and collaboration, or do you want to recognize vendors that exceed your expectations? While these are not mutually exclusive, the first step is to identify your goals. Next, focus on whether you want a formal or informal program. An informal program could consist of sending thank-you emails or notes to vendor personnel who go above and beyond; a formal program could consist of objective criteria announced and measured annually, with the winners receiving plaques, publicity, and/or recognition at a formal award ceremony with your executives. Once you have determined the type of program you want, you can begin building the framework.

    Take a “crawl, walk, run” approach to designing, implementing, and running your vendor recognition program. Start small and build on your successes. If you try something and it doesn’t work the way you intended, regroup and try again.

    The vendor recognition program may or may not end up residing in the VMI. Regardless, the VMI can be instrumental in creating the program and reinforcing it with the vendors. Even if the program is run and operated by the VMI, other departments will need to be involved. Seek input from the legal and marketing departments to build a durable program that works for your environment and maximizes its impact.

    Lastly, don’t overlook the simple gestures…they go a long way to making people feel appreciated in today’s impersonal world. A simple (but specific) thank-you can have a lasting impact, and not everything needs to be about the vendor’s organization. People make the organization “go,” not the other way around.

    2.10.1 – Vendor recognition program

    30 – 90 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the checklist in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 Vendor Recognition.
      1. Decide whether you want to create a program that recognizes individual vendor personnel. If so, review part 1 of tab 2.10 and select the elements you are interested in using to build your program.
      2. Decide whether you want to create a program that recognizes vendors at the company level. If so, review part 2 of tab 2.10.
        1. The first section lists elements of an informal and a formal approach. Decide which approach you want to take.
        2. The second section focuses on creating a formal recognition program. Review the checklist and identify elements that you want to include or issues that must be addressed in creating your program.
    2. Create a draft framework of your programs and work with other areas to finalize the program elements, timeline, marketing, budget, and other considerations.
    Input Output
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.10 Vendor Recognition
    • Brainstorming
    • A framework for a vendor recognition program
    Materials Participants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.10. Vendor Recognition
    • Whiteboard or flip chart
    • VMI team
    • Executives and stakeholders as needed
    • Marketing and legal as needed

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Phase 3 – Run

    Use New and Updated Tools and Increase the VMI’s Impact

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Review and update existing Plan materials

    2.1 Vendor classification models

    2.2 Customer positioning model

    2.3 Two-way scorecards

    2.4 Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    2.7 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    2.8 Internal feedback tool

    2.9 VMI ROI calculation

    2.10 Vendor recognition program

    3.1 Classify vendors and identify customer position

    3.2 Assess the relationship landscape

    3.3 Leverage two-way scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather market intelligence

    3.6 Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI personnel

    3.8 Improve professional skills

    3.9 Expand professional knowledge

    3.10 Create brand awareness

    3.11 Survey internal clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement vendor recognition program

    4.1 Investigate potential alliances

    4.2 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    4.3 Review and update

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    This phase helps you begin integrating the new tools and templates into the VMI’s operations. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to continue your VMI’s maturation and evolution.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • IT
    • Legal
    • Marketing
    • Human resources
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Phase 3 – Run

    Implement new processes, tools, and templates and leverage new concepts

    The review and assessment conducted in Phase 1 – Plan and the tools and templates created and configured during Phase 2 – Build are ready for use and incorporation into your operations. As you trek through Phase 3 – Run, a couple of familiar concepts will be reviewed (vendor classification and scorecarding), and additional details on previously introduced concepts will be provided (customer positioning, surveying internal clients); in addition, new ideas will be presented for your consideration:

    • Assessing the relationship landscape
    • Gathering market intelligence
    • Improving professional skills
    • Expanding professional knowledge
    • Creating brand awareness

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors & identify customer position

    Classify your top 25 vendors by spend

    The methodology used to classify your vendors in the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative applies here as well, regardless of whether you use the COST model or the MVP model. Info-Tech recommends using an iterative approach initially to validate the results from the model you configured in step 2.1.

    1. Start with your top 25 vendors by spend. From this pool, select 10 vendors: choose your top three vendors by spend, three from the middle of the pack (e.g. numbers 14, 15, and 16 by spend), and the bottom four by spend. Run all 10 vendors through the classification model and review the results.
    2. If the results are what you expected and do not contain any significant surprises, run the rest of the top 25 vendors through the model.
    3. If the results are not what you expected or do contain significant surprises, look at the configuration page of the tool (tab 2) and adjust the weights slightly. Be cautious in your evaluation of the results before modifying the configuration page – some legitimate results are unexpected or surprises based on biases or subjective expectations. Proceed to point 1 above and repeat this process as needed.

    Remember to share the results with executives and stakeholders. Switching from one classification model to another may lead to concerns or questions. As always, obtain their buy-in on the final results.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Translate terminology and processes if you use the MVP vendor classification model

    If you use the MVP model, the same features will be applicable and the same processes will be followed after classifying your vendors, despite the change in nomenclature. (Strategic vendors are the equivalent of principal vendors; high operational and high tactical vendors are the equivalent of valued vendors; and all other vendors are the equivalent of minor vendors.)

    • Roughly 5% (max) of your total vendor population will be classified as principal.
    • Approximately 10% (max) of your total vendor population will be classified as valued.
    • About 80% of your total vendor population will be classified as minor.
    • Business alignment meetings should be conducted and scorecards should be compiled quarterly for your principal vendors and at least every six months for your valued vendors; business alignment meetings are not necessary for your minor vendors.
    • All other activities will be based on the criteria you used in your MVP model. For example, risk measuring, monitoring, and reporting might be done quarterly for principal and valued vendors if risk is a significant component in your MVP model; if risk is a lesser component, measuring, monitoring, and reporting might be done less frequently (every six or 12 months).

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Determine your customer position for your top 25 vendors using the OPEN model

    The image contains a screenshot of the customer positioning model.

    After classifying your vendors, run your top 25 vendors through the OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool. The information you need can come from multiple sources, including:

    • Talking to internal personnel to determine responses to the OPEN model assessment statements.
    • Compiling spend information.
    • Looking at the vendors’ financial statements.
    • Talking with the vendors to glean additional information.

    At first blush, the results can run the emotional and logical gamut: shocking, demeaning, degrading, comforting, insightful, accurate, off-kilter, or a combination of these and other reactions. To a certain extent, that is the point of the activity. As previously stated, customers often overestimate their importance to a vendor. To be helpful, your perspective must be as objective as possible rather than the subjective view painted by the account team and others within the vendor (e.g. “You’re my favorite client,” “We love working with you,” “You’re one of our key accounts,” or “You’re one of our best clients.”) The vendor often puts customers on a pedestal that is nothing more than sales puffery. How a vendor treats you is more important than them telling you how great you are.

    Use the OPEN model results and the material on the following pages to develop a game plan as you move forward with your vendor-facing VMI activities. The outcomes of the OPEN model will impact your business alignment meetings, scorecards, relationships, expectations, and many other facets of the VMI.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool can be adapted for use at the account manager level to determine how important your account is to the account manager.

    *Adapted from Profitable Purchasing Strategies by Paul T. Steele and Brian H. Court

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Learn how each quadrant of the open model impacts your organization (continued)

    Opportunity

    Low value and high attractiveness

    Characteristics and potential actions by the vendor

    • Higher level of service provided.
    • Higher level of attention.
    • Nurture the customer.1
    • Expand the business and relationship.1
    • Seek new opportunities.2
    • Provide proactive service.
    • Demonstrate added value.

    Customer strategies

    • Leverage the position – the vendor may be willing (at least in the short term) to meet your requirements in order to win more business.3
    • Look for ways to improve your value to the vendor and to grow the relationship and business if it works to your advantage.
    1. Procurement Cube, 2020. 2. Accuity Consultants, 2012. 3. New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Learn how each quadrant of the OPEN model impacts your organization (continued)

    Preferred

    High value and high attractiveness

    Characteristics and potential actions by the vendor

    • High level of service provided.
    • High level of attention, service, and response.1
    • The supplier actively seeks longer-term commitments.2
    • Retain and expand the business and relationship.3
    • Look after and pamper the customer.4
    • Fight to keep the account.
    • There is a dedicated account manager2 (you are the account manager’s only account).

    Customer strategies

    • Establish a rewarding business relationship in which both parties continually seek to add value.3
    • Leverage the relationship to gain better access to innovation, collaborate to eliminate waste, and work together to maintain or increase your competitive advantages.1
      1. Procurement Cube, 2020. 2. Comprara, 2015. 3. New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021. 4. Accuity Consultants, 2012.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Learn how each quadrant of the OPEN model impacts your organization (continued)

    Exploitable

    High value and low attractiveness

    Characteristics and potential actions by the vendor

    • Lower level of service provided.
    • Lower level of attention.
    • Strive for best price from the customer (i.e. premium pricing).1
    • Seek short-term advantage and consistent price increases.
    • Accept risk of losing the customer.
    • Focus on maximizing profits.2
    • Provide reactive service.

    Customer strategies

    • Look for alternative vendors or try to make the relationship more attractive by considering more efficient ways to do business2 or focusing on issues other than pricing.
    • Identify ways to improve your organization’s attractiveness to the vendor or the account manager.
    1. Accuity Consultants, 2012. 2. New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Learn how each quadrant of the open model impacts your organization

    Negligible

    Low value and low attractiveness

    Characteristics and potential actions by the vendor

    • Lower level of service provided.
    • Lower level of attention.1
    • Loss of interest and enthusiasm for customer’s business.
    • Loss of customer will not cause any pain.1
    • Terminate the relationship.2
    • Terms and conditions are the “standard” terms and are non-negotiable.3
    • There is a standard price list and discounts are in line with industry norms.3

    Customer strategies

    • You may wish to consider sourcing from other suppliers who value your business more highly.2
    • Identify the root cause of your position and determine whether it is worthwhile (or possible) to improve your position.
    1. Procurement Cube, 2020. 2. New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021. 3 Comprara, 2015.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Think like a vendor to increase situational awareness

    In summary, vendor actions are understandable and predictable. Learning about how they think and act is invaluable. As some food for thought, consider this snippet from an article aimed at vendors:

    “The [customer positioning] grid or matrix is, in itself, a valuable snapshot of the portfolio of customers. However, it is what we do with this information that governs how effective the tool is. It can be used in many ways:

    • It helps in the allocation of resources to specific customers, and whether the right resources are being allocated to the right customers.
    • It can determine the style of relationship that is appropriate to have with this client – and whether the real relationship truly reflects this.
    • It can influence the amount of time spent with these clients. Interestingly, we often find that a disproportionate amount of management time is spent on [Negligible] Customers (at the expense of spending more time with [Preferred] Accounts)!
    • It should significantly influence the price and profitability targets for specific customers.
    • And, last but by no means least, it should determine our negotiation style for different customers.”1
    1 “Rule No. 5: All Customers/Suppliers Have a Different Value to You,” New Dawn Partners.

    Step 3.2 – Assess the relationship landscape

    Identify key relationships and relationship risks

    After classifying your vendors (COST or MVP model) and identifying your positioning for the top vendors via the OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool, the next step is to assess the relationship landscape. For key vendors (strategic, high operational, and high tactical under the COST model and principal and valued under the MVP model), look closer at the relationships that currently exist:

    • What peer-to-peer relationships exist between your organization and the vendor (e.g. your project manager works closely with the vendor’s project manager)? Look across executives, mid-level management, and frontline employees.
    • What politically charged relationships exist between employees of the two organizations and the organizations themselves? Examples include:
      • Friendships, neighbors, and relationships fostered by children on the same sports team or engaged in other activities.
      • Serving on third-party boards of directors or working with the same charities in an active capacity.
      • Reciprocity relationships where each organization is a customer and vendor to the other (e.g. a bank buys hardware from the vendor and the vendor uses the customer for its banking needs).
    • How long has the contract relationship been in place?

    This information will provide a more holistic view of the dynamics at work (or just beneath the surface) beyond the contract and operational relationships. It will also help you understand any relationship leverage that may be in play…now or in the future…from each party’s perspective.

    3.2.1 – Assess the relationship landscape

    10 - 30 Minutes per vendor

    1. Decide whether to meet with the participants in small groups or as a large group.
    2. Using Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.2 Relationship Landscape, for each important vendor (strategic, tactical, and operational under the COST model or principal and valued under the MVP model), identify and evaluate the relationships that exist for the following categories:
      1. Professional: relationships your personnel have with the vendor’s executives, mid-level management, and frontline employees.
      2. Political: personal relationships between customer and vendor personnel, any professional connections, and any reciprocity between your organization and the vendor.
    Input Output
    • Relationship information
    • Vendor classification categories for each vendor being assessed
    • A list of customer-vendor relationships
    • Potential reciprocity issues to manage
    Materials Participants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.2 Relationship Landscape
    • VMI team
    • Stakeholders
    • Others with knowledge of customer/vendor relationships

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 3.3 – Leverage two-way scorecards

    Roll out your new vendor scorecards and feedback forms

    As you roll out your new, enhanced scorecards, the same principles apply. Only a couple of modifications need to be made to your processes.

    For the vendor scorecards, the VMI will still be driving the process, and internal personnel will still be completing the scorecards. An email or short orientation meeting for those involved will ease the transition from the old format to the new format. Consider creating a FAQ (frequently asked questions) for the new template, format, and content; you’ll be able to leverage it via the email or meeting to answer questions such as: What changed? Why did it change? Why are we doing this? In addition, making a change to the format and content may generate a need for new or additional internal personnel to be part of the scorecarding process. A scorecarding kick-off meeting or orientation meeting will ensure that the new participants buy into the process and acclimate to the process quickly.

    For the vendor feedback, the look and feel is completely new. The feedback questions that were part of the BAM agenda have been replaced by a more in-depth approach that mirrors the vendor scorecards. Consider conducting a kick-off meeting with each participating vendor to ensure they understand the importance of the feedback form and the process for completing it. Remember to update your process to remind the vendors to submit the feedback forms three to five business days prior to the BAM (and update your BAM agenda). You will want time to review the feedback and identify any questions or items that need to be clarified. Lastly, set aside some extra time to review the feedback form in the first BAM after you shift to the formal format.

    Step 3.4 – Implement PIPs and RIPs

    Improve vendor performance

    Underperforming vendors are similar to underperforming employees. There can be many reasons for the lackluster performance, and broaching the subject of a PIP may put the vendor on the defensive. Consider working with the human resources department (or whatever it is called in your organization) to learn some of the subtle nuances and best practices from the employee PIP realm that can be used in the vendor PIP realm.

    When developing the PIP, make sure you:

    • Work with legal to ensure compliance with the contract and applicable laws.
    • Adequately convey the expected performance to the vendor; it is unfair to hold a vendor accountable for unreasonable and unconveyed expectations.
    • Work with the vendor on the PIP rather than imposing the PIP on the vendor.
    • Remain objective and be realistic about timelines and improvement.

    Not all performance issues require a PIP; some can be addressed one-on-one with the vendor’s account manager, project manager, or other personnel. The key is to identify meaningful problems and use a PIP to resolve them when other measures have failed or when more formality is required.

    A PIP is a communication tool, not a punishment tool. When used properly, PIPs can improve relationships, help avoid lawsuits, and prevent performance issues from having a significant impact on your organization.

    Step 3.4 – Implement PIPs and RIPs

    Improve vendor relationships

    After assessing the relationship landscape in step 3.2 and configuring the Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan Tool in step 2.5, the next step is to leverage that information: 1) establish a relationship baseline for each critical vendor; and 2) develop and implement a plan for each to maintain or improve those relationships.

    The Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan Tool provides insights into the actual status of your relationships. It allows you to quantify and qualify those relationships rather than relying on intuition or instinct. It also pinpoints areas that are strong and areas that need improvement. Identify your top seven relationship priorities and build your improvement/maintenance plan around those to start. (This number can be expanded if some of your priorities are low effort or if you have several people who can assist with the implementation of the plan.) Decide which relationship indicators need a formal plan, which ones require only an informal plan, and which ones involve a hybrid approach. Remember to factor in the maintenance aspect of the relationship – if something is going well, it can still be a top priority to ensure that the relationship component remains strong.

    Similar to a PIP, your RIP can be very formal with action items and deadlines. Unlike a PIP, the RIP is typically not shared with the vendor. (It can be awkward to say, “Here are the things we’re going to do to improve our relationship, vendor.”)

    The level of formality for your plan will vary. Customize your plan for each vendor. Relationships are not formulaic, although they can share traits. Keep in mind what works with one person or one vendor may not work for another. It’s okay to revisit the plan if it is not working and make adjustments.

    Step 3.5 – Gather market intelligence

    Determine the nature and scope of your market intelligence

    What is market intelligence?

    Market intelligence is a broad umbrella that covers a lot of topics, and the breadth and depth of those topics depend on whether you sit on the vendor or customer side of the equation. Even on the customer side, the scope and meaning of market intelligence are defined by the role served by those gathering market intelligence. As a result, the first step for the VMI is to set the boundaries and expectations for its role in the process. There can be some overlap between IT, procurement/sourcing, and the VMI, for example. Coordinating with other functional areas is a good idea to avoid stepping on each other’s toes or expending duplicate resources unnecessarily.

    For purposes of this blueprint, market intelligence is defined as gathering, analyzing, interpreting, and synthesizing data and information about your critical vendors (high operational, high tactical, and strategic under the COST model or valued and principal under the MVP model), their competitors, and the industry. Market intelligence can be broken into two basic categories: individual vendors and the industry as a whole. For vendors, it generally encompasses data and information about products and services available, each vendor’s capabilities, reputation, costs, pricing, advantages, disadvantages, finances, location, risks, quality ratings, standard service level agreements (SLAs) and other metrics, supply chain risk, total cost of ownership, background information, and other points of interest. For the industry, it can include the market drivers, pressures, and competitive forces; each vendor’s position in the industry; whether the industry is growing, stable, or declining; whether the industry is competitive or led by one or two dominant players; and the potential for disruption, trends, volatility, and risk for the industry. This represents some of the components of market intelligence; it is not intended to be an exhaustive list.

    Market intelligence is an essential component of a VMI as it matures and strives to be strategic and to provide significant value to the organization.

    Step 3.5 – Gather market intelligence

    Determine the nature and scope of your market intelligence

    What are the benefits of gathering market intelligence?

    Depending on the scope of your research, there are many potential uses, goals, and benefits that flow from gathering market intelligence:

    • Identify potential alternate vendors.
    • Learn more about the vendors and market in general.
    • Identify trends, innovations, and what’s available in the industry.
    • Improve contract protections and mitigate contract/performance risk.
    • Identify more comprehensive requirements for RFPs and negotiations.
    • Identify the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats for vendors.
    • Assist with minority/women/veteran-owned business or small business use initiatives.
    • Improve the pool of potential vendors for future RFPs, which can improve competition for your business.
    • Leverage information gained when negotiating or renegotiating at renewal (better terms and conditions).
    • Ensure ongoing alignment or identify gaps/risks between your current vendor’s capabilities and your needs.

    Step 3.5 – Gather market research and intelligence

    Begin collecting data and information

    What are some potential sources of information for market intelligence?

    For general information, there are many places to obtain market intelligence. Here are some common resources:

    • User groups
    • The internet
    • Vendor demos
    • Vendor marketing materials and websites
    • Internal personnel interviews and meetings
    • Industry publications and general periodicals
    • Trade shows and conferences (hosted or attended by vendors)
    • Requests for information (RFIs) and requests for proposal (RFPs)
    • Vendor financial filings for publicly held companies (e.g. annual reports, 10-K, 10-Q)

    Keep in mind the source of the information may be skewed in favor of the vendor. For example, vendor marketing materials may paint a rosier picture of the vendor than reality. Using multiple sources to validate the data and information is a leading practice (and common sense).

    For specific information, many VMIs use a third-party service. Third-party services can dedicate more resources to research since that is their core function. However, the information obtained from any third party should be used as guidance and not as an absolute. No third-party service has access to every deal, and market conditions can change often and quickly.

    Step 3.5 – Gather market research and intelligence

    Resolve storage and access issues

    Some additional thoughts on market intelligence

    • Market intelligence is another tool in the VMI’s toolbox. How you use it and what you do with the results of your efforts is critical. Collecting information and passing it on without analysis or insights is close to being a capital offense.
    • As previously mentioned, defining the scope and nature of market intelligence is the first step. In conjunction with that, remember to identify where the information will be stored. Set up a system that allows for searching by relevance and easy retrieval. You can become overwhelmed with information.
    • Periodically update the scope and reach of your market intelligence efforts. Do you need to expand, contract, or maintain the breadth and depth of your research? Do new vendors and industries need to be added to the mix?
    • Information can grow stale. Review your market intelligence repository at least annually and purge unneeded or outdated information. Be careful though – some historical information is helpful to show trends and evolution. Decide whether old information should be deleted completely or moved to an archive.
    • Determine who should have access to your repository and what level of access they should have. Do you want to share outside of the VMI? Do you want others to contribute to or modify/edit the material in the repository or only be able to read from the repository?

    Step 3.6 – Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    Keep executives and stakeholders informed about critical vendors

    Much of the guidance provided on reports in the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative holds true for the 60-Second Report and the Vendor Calendar.

    • Determine who will be responsible for updating the reports, knowing that the VMI will be mainly coordinating the process and assembling the data/information rather than obtaining the data firsthand.
    • Determine the frequency. Most likely it will be periodic and ad hoc; for example, you may decide to update the 60-Second Report in whole or in part each quarter, but you may need to update it in the middle of the quarter if an executive has a meeting with one of your critical vendors at that time.
    • Even though you obtained feedback and “approval” from executives and stakeholders during step 2.6, you will still want to seek their input periodically. Their needs may change from time to time with respect to data, information, and formatting. Avoid the temptation to constantly make changes to the format, though. After the initial review cycle, try to make changes only annually as part of your ongoing review process.
    • Unfortunately, these reports require a manual approach; some parts may be automated, but that will depend on your format and systems.

    These reports should be kept confidential. Consider using a “confidential” stamp, header, watermark, or other indicator to highlight that the materials are sensitive and should not be disclosed outside of your organization without approval.

    Step 3.7 – Evaluate VMI personnel

    Compare skills, competencies, and knowledge needed to current levels

    Using the configured VMI personnel assessment tool (Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium tab 2.7.1 or 2.7.2), evaluate each VMI employee’s skills, competencies, and knowledge (S/C/K) against the established minimum level required/desired field for each. Use this tool for full-time and part-time team members to obtain a complete inventory of the VMI’s S/C/K.

    After completing the assessment, you will be able to identify areas where personnel exceed, meet, or fail to meet the minimum level required/desired using the included dashboards. This information can be used to create a development plan for areas of deficiency or areas where improvement is desired for career growth.

    As an alternative, you can assess VMI personnel using their job descriptions. Tab 2.7.3 of the Tools and Templates Compendium is set up to perform this type of analysis and create a plan for improvement when needed. Unlike Tabs 2.7.1 and 2.7.2, however, the assessment does not provide a dashboard for all employee evaluations. Tab 2.7.3 is intended to focus on the different roles and responsibilities for each employee versus the VMI as a whole.

    Lastly, you can use Tab 2.7.4 to evaluate potential VMI personnel during the interview process. Load the roles and responsibilities into the template, and evaluate all the candidates on the same criteria. A dashboard at the bottom of the template quantifies the number of instances each candidate exceeds, meets, and fails to meet the criteria. Used together, the evaluation matrix and dashboard will make it easier to identify each candidate’s strengths and weaknesses (and ultimately select the best new VMI team member).

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Increase proficiency in a few key areas

    The image contains an a screenshot example to demonstrate how to increase proficiency in a few key areas.

    To be an effective member of the VMI requires proficiency in many areas. Some basic skills like computer skills, writing, and time management are straightforward. Others are more nebulous. The focus of this step is on a few of the often-overlooked skills lurking in the shadows:

    • Communication
    • Running a meeting
    • Diplomacy
    • Emotional intelligence quotient (EQ)
    • Influence and persuasion
    • Building and maintaining relationships

    For the VMI to be viewed as a strategic and integral part of the organization, these skills (and others) are essential. Although this blueprint cannot cover all of them, some leading practices, tips, and techniques for each of the skills listed above will be shared over the next several pages.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Communicate more effectively

    Communication is the foundational element for the other professional skills covered in this Step 3.8. By focusing on seven key areas, you can improve your relationships, influence, emotional intelligence quotient, diplomacy, and impact when interacting with others. The concepts for the seven focal points presented here are the proverbial tip of the iceberg. Continue learning about these areas, and recognize that mastering each will require time and practice.

    1. Writing.
      1. Stick with simple words;1 you’re trying to communicate, not impress people with your vocabulary.
      2. Keep your sentences simple;1 use short words, short sentences, and short paragraphs.2
      3. Read your writing aloud;1 If you have to take a breath while reading a sentence out loud, the sentence is too long.
      4. Use a tool like Grammarly or the built-in functionality of Word to determine readability; aim for a score of 60 to 70 or a seventh- or eighth-grade level.3
      5. When reviewing your writing: consider your word choice and the implications of your words; look for unintended interpretations, ambiguities, and implied-tone issues.
    1 Grammarly, 2017. 2 Elna Cain, 2018. 3 Forbes, 2016.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Communicate more effectively (continued)

    2. Speaking

    1. Similar to writing, focus on short words and sentences. Avoid run-on sentences.
    2. Think before speaking and work on eliminating “ums,” “uhs,” and “you knows.” These detract from your message.
    3. Choose words that are “comfortable” for the other person/people. Rule number one in public speaking is to know your audience, and that rule applies beyond public speaking and to groups of all sizes (1 to 1,000+).
    4. Don’t confuse the words with the message.
    5. Pay attention to your tone, pace, and volume. Try to match your counterpart in one-on-one settings.

    3. Body Language.

    1. Understand body language’s limitations; it is part art and part science…not an absolute.
    2. Individual movements and movement clusters can provide information regarding the spoken message – look for consistencies and inconsistencies. A baseline for the person is needed to interpret the body language “accurately.”
    3. Pay attention to your own body language. Does it match the message being conveyed by your words or those of your teammates (in group settings)?

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Communicate more effectively (continued)

    4. Personality.

    1. Identify your counterpart’s personality: Are they extroverted or introverted? Are they effusive or reserved? Are they diplomatic or offensive? Are they collaborative or looking to blame someone?
    2. Appeal to their personality type when possible, but avoid the blame game. For example, don’t be loud and “over the top” with someone who is reserved and quiet.

    5. Style.

    1. Determine your counterpart’s style for both written and spoken communications: Are they direct or indirect? Are they bottom-line or do they prefer descriptions and build-ups? Are they into empirical data or anecdotal examples?
    2. To maximize the connection and communication effectiveness, match their style…even if it means getting out of your comfort zone a little. For example, if you have an indirect style, you will have to be more direct when dealing with someone who is direct; otherwise, you run the risk of alienating your counterpart (i.e. they will get frustrated or bored, or their mind will wander).

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Communicate more effectively (continued)

    6. Learning

    1. People absorb information in three ways:
      1. Visually: These learners need to see things for them to make sense and be retained.
      2. Auditory: These learners need to hear things for them to make sense and be retained.
      3. Kinesthetic/experiential: These learners need to do something or experience it to understand and retain it.
    2. While some people are dominant in one area, most are a combination of one or more methods.
    3. If you can identify a person’s preferred method of learning, you can enhance your ability to communicate. For example, talking (exclusively) with a visual learner will be minimally effective; showing that person a picture or graph while talking will increase your effectiveness.

    7. Actions and inactions.

    1. Communication goes beyond words, messages, body language, and other issues. Your actions or inactions following a communication can undo your hard work to communicate effectively.
    2. Follow through on promises, action items, or requests.
    3. Meet any deadlines or due dates that result from communications. This helps build trust.
    4. Make sure your follow-through items are complete and thorough. Half-way is no way!
    5. Communicate any delays in meeting the deadlines or due dates to avoid

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Tap into your inner diplomat

    Diplomacy can be defined many ways, but this one seems to fit best for the purposes of vendor management: The ability to assert your ideas or opinions, knowing what to say and how to say it without damaging the relationship by causing offense.1 At work, diplomacy can be about getting internal or external parties to work together, influencing another party, and conveying a message tactfully. As a vendor manager, diplomacy is a necessary skill for working with your team, your organization, and vendors.

    To be diplomatic, you must be in tune with others and understand many things about them such as their feelings, opinions, ideas, beliefs, values, positions, preferences, and styles. To achieve this, consider the following guidance:2

    • Modify your communication style: Communication is about getting someone to understand and evaluate your message so they can respond. Approach people the way they want to be approached. For example, sending an email to a person who prefers phone calls may create a communication issue.
    • Choose your words carefully: Use words as an artist uses a brush, paint, and a canvas. Paint a picture through word selection. Similar words can portray different scenes (e.g. the child ran to the store quickly vs. the child raced to the store). Make sure your image is relatable for your counterpart.
    1 “The Art of Tact and Diplomacy,” SkillsYouNeed 2 Communiqué PR, 2020.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Tap into your inner diplomat (continued)

    • Slow down a speak concisely: Say what you have to say…and stop. No one likes a communicator who rambles on and on. Once your message has been conveyed, go into silent mode. Get comfortable with silence; there is no need to fill the void with more meaningless words. Let your counterpart contemplate in peace.
    • Listen to understand: Be an active listener rather than biding your time until you can talk again. Avoid interrupting the other party (whenever possible, but sometimes it is needed!). Show interest in what the other person is saying and ask clarifying questions. Make eye contact, nod your head periodically, and summarize what you hear from time to time. Use your ears and mouth in proportion: listen twice as much as you talk.
    • Consider nonverbals: Read the facial expressions of the speaker and be aware of your own. Faces tend to be expressive; sometimes we are aware of it…and sometimes we aren’t. Try relaxing your face and body to minimize the involuntary expressions that may betray you. Adopt a diplomatic facial expression and practice using it; find the right mix of interest and neutrality.

    Whenever things get tense, take a deep breath, take a break, or stop the communication (based on the situation and what is appropriate). Being diplomatic can be taxing, and it is better to step back than to continue down a wrong path due to stress, emotion, being caught off guard, etc.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Build and maintain relationships

    Relationship building and networking cannot be overvalued. VMI personnel interact with many areas and people throughout the organization, and good relationships are essential. Building and maintaining relationships requires hard work and focusing on the right items. Although there isn’t a scientific formula or a mathematical equation to follow, key elements are present in all durable relationships.

    Focus on building relationships at all levels within your organization. People at every level may have data or information you need, and your relationship with them may be the deciding factor in whether you get the information or not. At other times, you will have data and information to give, and the relationship may determine how receptive others are to your message. Some relationship fundamentals are provided below and continue on the next page.1,2

    • Trust: be honest and ethical and follow through on your commitments.
    • Diversity: build relationships with people who aren’t just like you to expand your mindset.
    • Interrelatedness: understand how what you do impacts others you have relationships with.
    • Varied interaction: a good relationship will incorporate work-related interactions with personal interactions.
    • Effective communication: combine methods of communication but focus on the other person’s preferred method.
    1 ”Seven Characteristics of Successful Work Relationships,” 2006. 2 Success.com, 2022.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Build and maintain relationships (continued)

    • Empathy – understand where the other person is coming from through active listening.
    • Vulnerability – create a judgment-free zone.
    • Respect – this must be given and earned.
    • Real face time – meeting in the offline world signals to the person that they are important (but this is not always possible today).
    • A giving-first mentality – provide something of value before asking for something in return.
    • Unique perspective – tap into what the other person believes and values.
    • Intent – start with genuine interest in the other person and the relationship.
    • Hard work – active engagement and a commitment to the relationship are required.
    • Honesty – be honest in your communications.
    • Challenge – be open to thinking differently and trying new things.
    • Value – identify what you add to the relationship.
    • Conscientiousness – be aware of the relationship’s status and react accordingly.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Run meetings more efficiently and effectively

    Most people don’t get excited about meetings, but they are an important tool in the toolbox. Unfortunately, many meetings are unnecessary and unproductive. As a result, meeting invites often elicit an audible groan from invitees. Eliminating meetings completely is not a practical solution, which leaves one other option: improving them.

    You may not be in charge of every meeting, but when you are, you can improve their productivity and effectiveness by making a few modifications to your approach. Listed below are ten ideas for getting the most out of your meetings:*

    1. Begin with the mindset that you are a steward or protector of the meeting attendees’ time, and you never want attendees to feel that you wasted their time.
    2. Keep the attendee list to essential personnel only. Everyone attending the meeting should be able to justify their attendance (or you should be able to justify it).
    3. Set an appropriate time limit for the meeting. Don’t default to the 60-minute meeting; right-size the meeting time (e.g. 15, 30, or 45 minutes or some other number). Shorter meeting times force participants to focus.
    4. Create and use an agenda. To help you stay focused and to determine who to invite, set up the agenda as a list of questions rather than a list of topics.
    *Adapted from “The Surprising Science Behind Successful Remote Meetings” by Steven G. Rogelberg

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Run meetings more efficiently and effectively (continued)

    5. Use video when anyone is attending virtually. This helps prevent anonymity and increases engagement.

    6. Start and end meetings on time. Running over impacts other meetings and commitments; it also makes you look ineffective and increases stress levels for attendees.

    7. If longer meetings are necessary, build in a short break or time for people to stand up and stretch. Don’t say, “If you need a break or to stand up during the meeting, feel free.” Make it a planned activity.

    8. Keep others engaged by facilitating and drawing specific people into the conversation; however, don’t ask people to contribute on topics that they know nothing about or ask generally if anyone has any comments.

    9. Leverage technology to help with the meeting; have someone monitor the chat for questions and concerns. However, the chat should not be for side conversations, memes, and other distractions.

    10. End the meeting with a short recap, and make sure everyone knows what was decided/accomplished, what next steps are, and which action items belong to which people.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Increase emotional intelligence

    Emotional intelligence (otherwise known as emotional intelligence quotient or EQ) is the ability to understand, use, and manage your own emotions in positive ways to relieve stress, communicate effectively, empathize with others, overcome challenges and defuse conflict.1 This is an important set of skills for working with vendors and internal personnel. Increasing your EQ will help you build better relationships and be seen as a valuable teammate…at all levels within your organization.

    Improving this skill dovetails with other skills discussed in this step 3.8, such as communication and diplomacy. Being well versed in the concepts of EQ won’t be enough. To improve requires a willingness to be open – open to feedback from others and open to new ideas. It also requires practice and patience. Change won’t happen overnight, but with some hard work and perseverance, your EQ can improve.

    There are many resources that can help you on your journey, and here are some tips to improve your EQ:2

    • Practice observing how you feel.
    • Pay attention to how you behave.
    • Learn to look at yourself objectively.
    • Understand what motivates you.
    • Acknowledge your emotional triggers.
    • Be interested in the subject matter.
    1 HelpGuide, 2022. 2 RocheMartin, 2022.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Increase emotional intelligence (continued)

    Tips to improve your EQ (continued from previous page):

    • It’s your choice how you react to a situation.
    • Listen without interruption, preconceptions, or skepticism; absorb their situation and consider how they are feeling before you react.
    • Try to be approachable and accessible.
    • Think about what’s happening from their perspective.
    • Cultivate a curiosity about strangers to understand different opinions, views, and values.
    • Acknowledge what people are saying to show you are actively listening.
    • Think about how you’re physically coming across with your body language, tone of voice, eye contact, and facial expressions.

    Things to avoid:1

    • Drama – don’t let others’ emotions affect or rule yours.
    • Complaining – don’t be a victim; do look for solutions.
    • Dwelling on the past – learn from the past and live in the present.
    • Selfishness – consider others’ needs, not just your own.
    • Being overly critical – understand the other person, then communicate the change you want to see.
    1 RocheMartin, 2022.

    Step 3.8 – Improve Professional Skills

    Use Influence and Persuasion to Benefit the VMI

    Skills such as influence and persuasion are important (even necessary) for vendor managers. (Don’t confuse this with the dark arts version – manipulation.) A good working definition is provided by the Center for Creative Leadership: Influence is the ability to affect the behavior of others in a particular direction, leveraging key tactics that involve, connect, and inspire them.* Influence and persuasion are not about strongarming or blackmailing someone to get your way. Influence and persuasion are about presenting issues, facts, examples, and other items in a way that moves people to align with your position. Sometimes you will be attempting to change a person’s mind, and other times you will be moving them from a neutral stance to agreeing to support your position.

    Building upon the basic communication skills discussed at the start of this step, there are some ways to improve your ability to influence and persuade others. Here are some suggestions to get you started:*

    1. Develop organizational intelligence – learn how your organization truly operates; identify the power brokers and their spheres of control and influence. Many failures to persuade and influence stem from not understanding who can help and how they can help (or hinder) your efforts. The most influential person in your organization may not be the person with the fancy title.
    2. Promote yourself and the team – don’t be afraid to step into the spotlight and demonstrate your knowledge and expertise. To be able to persuade and influence as and individual or a team, credibility must be established.
    * Center for Creative Leadership, 2020.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Use influence and persuasion to benefit the VMI (continued)

    3. Build and maintain trust – trust has two main components: competency and character. In item 2 on the previous page, competency trust was discussed from the perspective of knowledge and expertise. For character trust, you need to be viewed as being above reproach. You are honest and ethical; you follow through and honor your commitments. Once both types of trust are in place, eyes and ears will be open and more receptive to your messages. Bottom line: You can’t influence or persuade people if they don’t trust you.

    4. Grow and leverage networks – the workplace is a dynamic atmosphere, and it requires almost constant networking to ensure adequate contacts throughout the organization are maintained. Leveraging your network is an artform, and it must be used wisely. You don’t want to wear out your welcome by asking for assistance too often.

    As you prepare your plan to influence or persuade someone, ask yourself the following questions:*

    • Who am I attempting to influence?
    • What is the situation and how much support do I need?
    • Why do I need this person’s support for my idea?
    • What tactics can I use, and how can I establish rapport?
    • What responses do I anticipate?
    • What mutual points of agreement can I use?
    • How can I end on a positive note no matter what the outcome is?
    * Center for Creative Leadership, 2020.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Learn more about departments and functions tangential to the VMI

    To function in their roles, VMI personnel must be well versed in the concepts and terminology associated with vendor management. To be strategic and to develop relationships with other departments, divisions, agencies, and functional groups, VMI personnel must also be familiar with the concepts and terminology for functions outside the VMI. Although a deep dive is beyond the scope of this blueprint, understanding basic concepts within each of the topics below is critical:

    • Finance and accounting
    • Project management
    • Contracts and contract management
    • Procurement/sourcing
    • Change management
    • Conflict management
    • Account team dynamics

    It isn’t necessary to be an expert in these subjects, but VMI personnel must be able to talk with their peers intelligently. For example, a vendor manager needs to have a general background in contract terms and conditions to be able to discuss issues with legal, finance, procurement, and project management groups. A well-rounded and well-versed VMI team member can rise to the level of trusted advisor and internal strategic partner rather than wallowing in the operational or transactional world.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand finance and accounting basics

    Finance and accounting terms and concepts are commonplace in every organization. They are the main language of business – they are the way for-profit businesses keep score. Regardless of whether your organization is a for-profit, non-profit, governmental, or other entity, finance and accounting run through the veins of your organization as well. In addition to the customer side of the equation, there is the vendor side of the equation: Every vendor you deal with will be impacted financially by working with you.

    Having a good grasp of finance and accounting terms and concepts will improve your ability to negotiate, talk to finance and accounting personnel (internal and external), conduct ongoing due diligence on your critical vendors, review contracts, and evaluate vendor options, to name just a few of the benefits.

    The concepts listed on the following pages are some of the common terms applicable to finance and accounting. It is not intended to be an exhaustive list. Continue to learn about these concepts and identify others that allow you to grow professionally.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand finance and accounting basics (continued)

    Finance and accounting terms and concepts

    • Cash accounting vs. accrual accounting.
    • Fiscal year vs. calendar year.
    • Profit vs. cash flow.
    • Fixed expenses vs. variable expenses.
    • Capital expense (CapEx) vs. operating expense (OpEx).
    • Depreciation vs. amortization.
    • Payment upfront vs. payment in arrears.
    • Favorable (positive) variance vs. unfavorable (negative) variance.
    • Discretionary expense (cost/expenditure) vs. non-discretionary expense (cost/expenditure).
    • Income statement and its components.
    • Balance sheet and its components.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand finance and accounting basics (continued)

    Finance and accounting terms and concepts (cont’d)

    • Operating profit margin.
    • Net profit margin.
    • Return on assets.
    • Current ratio.
    • Quick ratio.
    • Debt-to-asset ratio.
    • Interest coverage.
    • Total asset turnover.
    • Receivables turnover.
    • Average collection period.
    • Inventory turnover.
    • Time value of money concept.
    • Future value (FV).
    • Present value (PV).
    • Net present value (NPV).
    • Cost of capital.
    • Internal rate of return (IRR).
    • Return on investment (ROI).
    • Payback (payback period or break even).

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand project management basics

    The image contains a screenshot example of expanding professional knowledge.

    Whether your organization has a formal project management office (PMO) or not, project management practices are being used by those tasked with making sure software and software as a service implementations go smoothly, technology refreshes are rolled out without a hitch, and other major activities are successful. Listed below are some common competencies/skills used by project managers to make sure the job gets done right.

    1. Requirements – define the project’s goals, objectives, and requirements.
    2. Scope – develop, monitor, and manage the project’s scope.
    3. Time – develop and manage the timeline and determine the order (parallel and sequential) for the tasks and activities.
    4. Budget – create and manage the project budget and report on any variances.
    5. Resources – manage space, people, software, equipment, services, etc.
    6. Risk – identify, evaluate, monitor, and manage project risk.
    7. Change – manage updated requirements, changes to the scope, and modifications to the contract.
    8. Documentation – work with the project charter, open issue logs, meeting minutes, and various reports.
    9. Communication – communicate with vendor personnel and internal personnel, including stakeholders and executives as needed.
    10. Quality – ensure the deliverables and other work are acceptable and coordinate/conduct acceptance tests.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand project management basics (continued)

    The image contains a screenshot of understanding project management basics.

    The concepts listed below are common project management terms and concepts.1, 2 This list is not intended to be exhaustive. Look internally at your project management processes and operations to identify the concepts applicable in your environment and any that are missing from this list.
    • Project plan
    • Work breakdown structure (WBS)
    • Critical path
    • Project manager
    • Project stakeholder
    • Agile project
    • Waterfall project
    • Milestone
    • Deliverable
    • Dependency
    • Phase
    • Kickoff meeting
    • Project budget
    • Project timeline
    • Resource allocation
    • Project risk
    • Risk management
    • Risk owner
    • Issue log
    • Gantt chart
    1 nTask, 2019. 2 Whiz Labs, 2018.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand contracts and contract lifecycle management basics

    Contracts and contract lifecycle management (CLM) are two separate but related topics. It is possible to have contracts without a formal CLM process, but you can’t have CLM without contracts. This portion of step 3.9 provides some general background on each topic and points you to blueprints that cover each subject in more detail.

    IT contracts tend to be more complicated than other types of contracts due to intellectual property (IP) rights being associated with most IT contracts. As a result, it is necessary to have a basic understanding of IP and common IT contract provisions.

    There are four main areas of IP: copyrights, patents, trademarks, and trade secrets. Each has its own nuances, and people who don’t work with IP often mistake one for another or use the terms interchangeably. They are not interchangeable, and each affords a different type of protection when available (e.g. something may not be capable of being patented, but it can be copyrighted).

    For contract terms and conditions, vendor managers are best served by understanding both the business side and the legal side of the provisions. In addition, a good contract checklist will act as a memory jogger whether you are reviewing a contract or discussing one with legal or a vendor. For more information on contract provisions, checklists, and playbooks, download the Info-Tech blueprints identified to the left.

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Improve Your Statements of Work to Hold Your Vendors Accountable

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand contracts and contract lifecycle management basics (continued)

    CLM is a process that helps you manage your agreements from cradle to grave. A robust CLM process eases the challenges of managing hundreds or even thousands of contracts that affect the day-to-day business and could expose your organization to various types of vendor-related risk.

    Managing a few contracts through the contracting process is easy, but as the number of contracts grows, managing each step of the process for each contract becomes increasingly difficult and time consuming. That’s where CLM and CLM tools can help. Here is a high-level overview of the CLM process:

    1. Request – a request for a contract is initiated.
    2. Create contract – the contract is drafted by the customer or provided by the vendor.
    3. Review risk – areas of risk in the contract are identified.
    4. Approve – base agreement and attachments are approved and readied for negotiations.
    5. Negotiate – the agreement is negotiated and finalized.
    6. Sign – the agreement is signed or executed by the parties.
    7. Capture – the agreement is stored in a centralized repository.
    8. Manage – actively manage the operational and commitment aspects of the agreement.
    9. Monitor compliance – ensure that each party is honoring and complying with its obligations.
    10. Optimize – review the process and the contracts for potential improvements.

    For more information on CLM, download the Info-Tech blueprint identified to the left.

    Download the Info-Tech Blueprint Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand procurement/sourcing basics

    Almost every organization has a procurement or sourcing department. Procurement/sourcing is often the gatekeeper of the processes used to buy equipment and services, lease equipment, license software, and acquire other items. There are many different types of procurement/sourcing departments and several points of maturity within each type. As a result, the general terms listed on the next page may or may not be applicable within your organization. (Or your organization may not have a procurement/sourcing department at all!)

    Identifying your organization’s procurement/sourcing structure is the best place to start. From there, you can determine which terms are applicable in your environment and dive deeper on the appropriate concepts as needed.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand procurement/sourcing basics (continued)

    Procurement sourcing terms and concepts

    • Hard dollar savings
    • Soft dollar savings
    • Cost avoidance
    • Value creation
    • Value created
    • Addressable spend
    • Spend addressed
    • Revenue creation
    • Category management
    • Category manager
    • Targeted negotiations
    • Indirect procurement/sourcing
    • Direct procurement/sourcing
    • Sourcing/procurement processes
    • Sourcing/procurement drivers and metrics
    • RFX (RFP, RFI, RFQ) processes
    • Forecasting value creation
    • Percentage of value creation to spend addressed
    • Category opportunity
    • Category plans
    • Center-led procurement/sourcing
    • Centralized procurement/sourcing
    • Decentralized procurement/sourcing

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand conflict management basics

    Whether you consider conflict management a skill, knowledge, or something in between, there is no denying that vendor managers are often engaged to resolve conflicts and disputes. At times, the VMI will be a “disinterested third party,” sitting somewhere between the vendor and an internal department, line of business, agency, or other functional designation. The VMI also may be one of the parties involved in the dispute or conflict. As a result, a little knowledge and a push in the right direction will help you learn more about how to handle situations where two parties don’t agree.

    To begin with, there are four levels of “formal” dispute resolution. You may be intimately aware of all of them or only have cursory knowledge of how they work and the purpose they serve:

    • Negotiation
    • Mediation
    • Arbitration
    • Litigation

    Their use often can be controlled or limited either contractually or by your organization’s preferences. They may be exclusive or used in combination with one another (e.g. negotiation first, and if things aren’t resolved, arbitration). Look at your contracts and legal department for guidance. It’s important to understand when and how these tools are used and what is expected (if anything) from the VMI.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand conflict management basics (continued)

    The image contains a screenshot of The Thomas-Kilman Conflict Resolution Model.

    Another factor in the conflict management and informal dispute resolution process is the people component. Perhaps the most famous or well-known model on this topic is the Thomas-Kilmann conflict resolution model. It attempts to bring clarity to the five different personality types you may encounter when resolving differences. As the graphic indicates, it is not purely a black-and-white endeavor; it is comprised of various shades of grey.

    The framework presented by Mr. Thomas and Mr. Kilmann provides insights into how people behave and how to engage them based on personality characteristics and attributes. The model sorts people into one of five categories:

    • Avoiders.
    • Competitors.
    • Collaborators.
    • Accommodators.
    • Compromisers.

    Although it is not an absolute science since people are unpredictable at times, the Thomas-Kilmann model provides great insights into human behavior and ways to work with the personality types listed.

    *Kilmann Diagnostics, 2018.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand conflict management basics (continued)

    Although the topic is vastly greater than being presented here, the last consideration is a sound process to follow when the conflict or dispute will be handled informally (at least to start). The simple process presented below works with vendors, but it can be adapted to work with internal disputes as well. The following process assumes that the VMI is attempting to facilitate a dispute between an internal party and a vendor.

    Step 1. Validate the person and the issue being brought to you; don’t discount the person, their belief, or their issue. Show genuine interest and concern.

    Step 2. Gather and verify data; not all issues brought forward can be pursued or pursued as presented. For example, “The vendor is always late with its reports” may or may not be 100% accurate as presented.

    Step 3. Convert data gathered into useful and relatable information. To continue the prior example, you may find that the vendor was late with the reports on specified dates, and this can be converted into “the vendor was late with its reports 50% of the time during the last three months.”

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand conflict management basics (continued)

    Step 4. Escalate findings internally to the appropriate stakeholders and executives as necessary so they are not blindsided if a vendor complains or goes around you and the process. In addition, they may want to get involved if it is a big issue, or they may tell you to get rid of it if it is a small issue.

    Step 5. Engage the vendor once you have your facts and present the issues without judgment. Ask the vendor to do its own fact gathering.

    Step 6. Schedule a meeting to review of the situation and hear the vendor’s version of the facts…they may align, or they may not.

    Step 7. Resolve any differences between your facts/information and the vendor’s. There may be extenuating circumstances, oversights, different data, or other items that come to light.

    Step 8. Attempt to resolve the problem and prevent further occurrences through root cause analysis and collaborative problem-solving techniques.

    Develop your own process and make sure it stays neutral. The process should not put the vendor (or any party) on the defensive. The process is to help the parties reach resolution…not to assign blame.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand account team management basics

    Working with the account or sales team from your critical vendors can be challenging. A basic understanding of account team operations and customer/vendor dynamics will go a long way to improving your interactions (and even vendor performance) over time.

    Sales basics

    • Salespeople are typically paid a base salary and a commission on each sale.
    • Salespeople have quotas that must be met; failure to meet the quota results in probation (at a minimum) or termination.
    • Salespeople sell what they are motivated to sell; the motivation comes in the way of contests, commissions, and recognition. The commission structure is not the same for every service or product sold by the vendor. In addition, incentives may be created to move old product, overstock, or new product (to name a few).
    • Salespeople have multiple goals when interacting with customers:
      • Sell
      • Gather information
      • Build a relationship
      • Get a reference
      • Obtain a reference
      • Increase the vendor’s footprint

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand account team management basics (continued)

    Improving sales and account team dynamics with your organization

    • Conduct due diligence on your account team. Are they “qualified” to work with your account?
    • Set expectations with the account team for the ongoing relationship. Don’t leave it to chance.
    • Evaluate the sales and account teams at least annually. Get feedback from those who work closely with the salespeople and account managers, including stakeholders and executives.
    • Educate people internally about the sales process. At a minimum, counsel them to avoid giving away leverage, answering “damaging” questions, and disclosing confidential information.
    • Try to get involved early in the sales cycle. Sell your value to internal personnel.
    • Work to convert your account manager into your champion within the vendor. The salesperson can benefit by going to bat for you even though they work for the vendor. The commission structure often creates a split loyalty issue. Capitalize on it!
    • Watch out for high turnover. This can indicate a problem at the vendor OR your account is not that attractive/profitable. (See steps 2.2 and 3.1 regarding customer positioning.)

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand account team management basics (continued)

    Improving sales and account team dynamics with your organization (continued)

    • Support effective sales reps by educating them on your organization, the best way to work with you, and the benefits of working with your processes. If they do something above and beyond, consider sending them a thank-you and copying their boss. Little things go a long way.
    • Control the sales process. Require qualified people from your organization to be invited to meetings; require an agenda for those meetings; and avoid “surprise” meetings (those meetings with limited notice and no agenda… "My boss is in town today, and I wanted to stop by and introduce her to you").
    • Don’t be afraid to request a new account manager. For your critical vendors, you should always be dealing with competent account teams. They should have the requisite knowledge of their products and services to be able to answer basic through intermediate questions; they should be ethical; and they should be responsive.
    • Build relationships beyond the salesperson or account manager. Develop a network that extends throughout the sales organization. (For example, the sales manager, sales director, and sales vice president at a minimum.) These people generally have more sway within the vendor organization and can get things done when the need arises.

    For more information on this topic, download the Info-Tech blueprint Evaluate Your Vendor Account Team to Optimize Vendor Relations.

    Step 3.10 – Create brand awareness

    Determine whether a brand makes sense for the VMI

    Branding isn’t just for companies. It is for departments (or whatever you call them at your place of employment) and individuals working in those departments. With a little work and even less money, you can create a meaningful brand for the VMI. While you are at it, you may want to encourage the VMI’s team members to focus a little attention on their personal brands since the VMI and its personnel are intertwined. First, let's define “brand.”

    Ask 50 people, “How do you define ‘brand’?” and you are likely to get 50 different answers. For the purposes of this blueprint, the following definition provides some guiderails by describing what a brand is and isn’t: “A brand is not a logo. A brand is not an identity. A brand is not a product. A brand is a person’s gut feeling about a product, service, or organization.”1 Let’s expand the definition of “a brand is…” to include departments and individuals since that’s the focus of this step, and it doesn’t violate the spirit of the original definition. A further expansion could include the goodwill associated with the product, service, organization, department, or individual.

    Dedicating time and other resources to proactively creating and nurturing the VMI’s brand has many advantages:

    • “If you don’t define your brand, others will.”2 This is your chance to define the VMI’s narrative and influence the perception others have of it.
    • It allows VMI team members to feel connected to the VMI’s vision and goals during their day-to-day activities.
    • It helps form an emotional connection between the VMI and your internal “clients.”
    • “Branding is a way of establishing and consistently reinforcing who you are and what you [do]…”2 Your brand helps you promote the VMI’s value and impact.
    1 Emotive Brand, 2019. 2 Forbes, 2018.

    Step 3.10 – Create brand awareness

    Establish the VMI’s brand and monitor it

    As you embark on creating a brand for the VMI and raising awareness, here are a few considerations to keep in mind:

    • Identify your mission.* Review the VMI’s mission statement and goals. Translate them into statements that connect with your internal clients.
    • Establish your unique value proposition.* What does the VMI provide to your internal clients that would make them go out of their way to use your services? How can you help them in ways others can’t?
    • Create your brand’s visual identity.* Can you create a logo for the VMI? Can you provide a consistent look and feel for the reports you generate and information you provide?
    • Increase brand recognition.* It takes time to build trust and establish a reputation. The same is true of creating a brand and increasing its recognition. Develop a plan for this rather than leaving it to chance.
    • Be consistent. Make sure your brand is consistent with the organization’s brand or at least doesn’t contradict it. The VMI’s brand is based on its values, mission, goals, and other items; these should complement the organization’s values, mission, goals, and other items.
    • Spread the word. Attend internal clients’ staff meetings, conduct lunch & learn sessions, send out a newsletter to ensure that your internal clients know who you are, what you do, and the impact you can make or have made. Make personal connections whenever possible.
    • Monitor your brand. It is not enough to create a brand and turn it loose unsupervised. Seek feedback on the VMI and its brand beyond the internal survey (step 3.11), and adjust your brand periodically as needed.
    * Stevens & Tate, 2019.

    Step 3.10 – Create brand awareness

    Enhance the brand of VMI team members

    As previously mentioned, brands are for individuals as well. In fact, everybody has a brand associated with them…for better or worse...whether they have consciously created and molded it or not. Focusing on the individual brand at this point offers the VMI and its team members the opportunity to enhance the brand for both. After all, the VMI is a reflection of its personnel.

    Here are some things VMI team members can do to enhance their brand:

    • Network internally beyond your immediate team.1 Get to know people and build relationships with others even if you don’t work directly or indirectly with them.
    • Say yes to relevant opportunities.1 Volunteer for projects where you can make an impact and let others see your value; it’s also a good way to build relationships beyond your immediate team.
    • Speak at a conference. According to Jeff Butler (author and TEDx speaker), “Speaking gets you that immediate credibility not only internally but also externally where other companies are now seeing you as an expert.” He also states that “speaking at … conferences is not only good for you but also good for your [organization].”1
    • Share your voice.1 Become a resource for bloggers, authors, and podcasters; consider blogging, writing, and podcasting. Remember not to disclose any proprietary or confidential information, though! Work with your legal and marketing departments before embarking on this path.
    • Set goals and monitor your progress. Track the number of times you are asked to speak or contribute to a blog, podcast, event, or article, and track the number of times you are mentioned or referenced in social media, blogs, articles, and podcasts.2
    1 Forbes, 2018. 2 Oberlo, 2022.

    3.10.1 – Create brand awareness

    30 – 90 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the information in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.10. The worksheet is divided into two parts.
      1. Part 1 is for the VMI to use to create a brand, and
      2. Part 2 is for an individual VMI team member to create a brand.
    2. For Part 1, work as a team to answer the questions to begin identifying components of your brand awareness and building a strategy for the VMI's brand.
    3. For Part 2, individuals can work by themselves or with the team leader to answer the questions and set goals to help build an individual brand (if it is desirable).
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.10
    • Brainstorming
    • VMI brand framework
    • Individual VMI personnel brand framework
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.10
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate - Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 3.11 – Survey internal clients

    Gain insights and feedback from internal sources

    As you deploy your surveys, timing must be considered. For annual surveys, avoid busy seasons such as mid to late December (especially if your organization’s fiscal year is a calendar year). Give people time to recover from any November holidays, and survey them before they become distracted by December holidays (if possible). You may want to push the annual survey until January or February when things have settled back into a normal routine. Your needs for timing and obtaining the results must be balanced against the time constraints and other issues facing the potential respondents.

    For recency surveys, timing can work to your advantage or disadvantage. Send the survey almost immediately after providing assistance. If you wait more than a week or two, memories will begin to fade, and the results will trend toward the middle of the road.

    Regardless of whether it is an annual survey or a recency survey, distributing the surveys to a big enough sample size will be tough. Combine that with low response rates and the results may be skewed. Take what you can get and look for trends over time. Some people may be tough critics; if possible, send the survey to the same people (and incorporate new ones) to see if the tough graders’ responses are remaining true over time. Another way to mitigate some of the tough critics is to review their answers to the open-ended questions. For example, a tough grader may respond with a “4 – helpful” when you were expecting a “5 – very helpful;” the narrative portion of the survey may be consistent with that answer, or it may provide what you were looking for: “The VMI was great to work with on this project.” When confined to a scale, some respondents won’t give the top value/assessment no matter what, but they will sing your praises in a question that requires a narrative response. Taken together, you may get a slightly different picture – one that often favors you.

    Step 3.11 – Survey internal clients

    Gain insights and feedback from internal sources (continued)

    The image contains a screenshot of an example survey.

    After you have received a few responses to your surveys (recency and annual), review the results against your expectations and follow up with some of the respondents. Were the questions clear? Were the answer choices appropriate? Ultimately, you have to decide if the survey provided the meaningful feedback you were looking for. If not, revise the questions and answers choices as needed. (Keep in mind, you are not looking for “feelgood fluff.” You are looking for feedback that will reinforce what you are doing well and show areas for improvement.)

    Once you have the results, it’s time to share them with the executives and stakeholders. When creating a report, consider the following guidance:

    • Don’t just list the data; convert it to usable information.
    • When needed, provide some context and interpretation for the results. For example, if you have an internal goal or service level, indicate this and show how the results compare to the target (e.g. in a bar chart, insert a horizontal line and label it “target”).
    • Present the results on a question-by-question basis, but you may want to combine or aggregate results to provide meaningful information. For example, combine 21% responding with “doing a great job” and 62% responding with “doing a good job” into one statement of “83% of those surveyed said the VMI is doing a good job or doing a great job.”
    • Use an executive summary as an overview or to highlight the key findings, with the detailed data and information on subsequent pages for people who want to dive deeper.

    Step 3.12 – Calculate VMI ROI

    Identify and report the VMI’s value and impact on the organization

    Calculating ROI begins with establishing baselines: what is the current situation? Once those are established, you can begin tracking the impact made by the VMI by looking at the differences between the baseline and the end result. For example, if the VMI is tracking money saved, it is critical to know the baseline amounts (e.g. the initial quote from the vendor, the budgeted amount). If time is being measured, it is important to understand how much time was previously spent on items (e.g. vendor meetings to address concerns, RFPs).

    The blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO will lead you through the process, but there are a couple of key things to remember: 1) some results will be quick and easy – the low-hanging fruit, things that have been ignored or not done well, eliminating waste, and streamlining inefficiencies; and 2) other things may take time to come to fruition. Be patient and make sure you work with finance or others to bring credibility to your calculations.

    When reporting the ROI, remember to include the results of the survey from step 3.11. They are not always quantifiable, but they help executives and stakeholders see the complete picture, and the stories or examples make the ROI “personal” to the organization.

    Reporting can be a challenge. VMIs often underestimate their value and don’t like self-promotion. While you don’t want to feel like you operate in justification mode, many eyes will be on the VMI. The ROI report helps validate and promote the VMI, and it helps build brand awareness for the VMI.

    Step 3.13 – Implement vendor recognition program

    Set your plan in motion

    As indicated in step 2.10, take a “crawl, walk, run” approach to your vendor recognition program. Start off small and grow the program over time. Based on the scope of the program, decide how you’ll announce and promote it. Work with marketing, IT, and others to ensure a consistent message, to leverage technology (e.g. your website), and to maximize awareness.

    For a formal program, you may want to hold a kickoff meeting to introduce the program internally and externally. The external kickoff can be handled in a variety of ways depending on available resources and the extent of the program. For example, a video can be produced and shared with eligible vendors, an email from the VMI or an executive can be used, or the program can be rolled out through BAMs if only BAM participants are eligible for the program. If you are taking an informal approach to the vendor recognition program, you may not need an external kickoff at all.

    For a formal program, collect information periodically throughout the year rather than waiting until the end of the year; however, some data may not be available or relevant until the end of the measurement period. For subjective criteria, the issue of recency may be an issue, and memories will fade over time. (Be careful the subjective portion doesn’t turn into a popularity contest.)

    If the vendor recognition program is not meeting your goals adequately, don’t be afraid to modify it or even scrap it. At some point, you may have to do a partial or total reboot of the program. Creating and maintaining a “lessons learned” document will make a reboot easier and better if it is necessary. Remember: While a vendor recognition program has many potential benefits, your main goals must be achieved or the program adds little or no value.

    Phase 4 - Review

    Ensure Your VMI Continues to Evolve

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Review and update existing Plan materials

    2.1 Vendor classification models

    2.2 Customer positioning model

    2.3 Two-way scorecards

    2.4 Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    2.7 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    2.8 Internal feedback tool

    2.9 VMI ROI calculation

    2.10 Vendor recognition program

    3.1 Classify vendors and identify customer position

    3.2 Assess the relationship landscape

    3.3 Leverage two-way scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather market intelligence

    3.6 Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI personnel

    3.8 Improve professional skills

    3.9 Expand professional knowledge

    3.10 Create brand awareness

    3.11 Survey internal clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement vendor recognition program

    4.1 Investigate potential alliances

    4.2 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    4.3 Review and update

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    This phase helps the VMI stay aligned with the overall organization, stay current, and improve its strategic value as it evolves. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI’s strategic impact.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Phase 4 – Review

    Continue evolving the VMI and keep it up to date

    The emphasis of this final phase is on the VMI’s continued evolution.

    • First up is the concept of alliances. For a small number of vendors, your relationship has the ability to transcend to a different level. A collaborative, synergistic relationship can be achieved under the right circumstances.
    • Next, additional material on transforming the VMI from purely transactional to strategic is provided (along with some reminders from prior phases). To reach its full potential, the VMI must mature and evolve, but this won’t happen without the active management of a well-crafted plan. What got the VMI to this point won’t necessarily work to get you to the next point on the evolution scale.
    • Lastly, remember to stay vigilant about the review process. What is the VMI doing well? Where can it improve? What needs to change?

    Step 4.1 – Investigate potential alliances

    Understand what separates an alliance from a regular relationship

    Chances are you’ve seen a marketing or business alliance at work in your personal life. If you’ve visited a Target store or a Barnes and Noble store, you’ve more than likely walked past the Starbucks counter. The relationship is about more than the landlord-tenant agreement, and the same business concept can exist in non-retail settings. Although they may not be as common in the customer-IT vendor space, alliances can work here as well.

    Definition

    For vendor management purposes, an alliance is a symbiotic relationship between two parties where both benefit beyond the traditional transactional (i.e. buyer-seller) relationship.

    Characteristics

    • Each party remains independent; this is not a true partnership or joint venture from a legal perspective.
    • Each party obtains benefits they wouldn’t be able to obtain by themselves (or, at a minimum, the timeline is accelerated significantly).
    • The relationship is geared toward the long term, and each party contributes resources to achieve synergies.

    Step 4.1 – Investigate potential alliances

    Analyze benefits and risks for the alliance

    Benefits

    • Synergies
    • Innovations
    • Use of pooled resources
    • Access to different areas of expertise
    • Quicker development or improvement of products or services
    • Competitive advantages, new revenue streams, and new markets

    Risks

    • Cultural fit
    • Departing executives/sponsors
    • Return on investment pressures
    • Different interests or expectations
    • Failure to address intellectual property issues adequately
    • Lack of experience and process to manage the relationship

    Step 4.1 – Investigate potential alliances

    Set up the alliance for success

    Keys to success

    • Communicate transparently.
    • Ensure executive participation from both parties.
    • Establish a joint steering committee and alliance governances.
    • Set clear expectations and define what each party wants out of the alliance.
    • Create “alliance managers” in addition to vendor managers and project mangers.
    • Start with a small alliance; don’t go all-in on a big alliance the first time you try it.
    • Create an environment of trust and collaboration; the alliance goes beyond the contract.
    • Make sure both parties are happy with their contributions to and rewards from the alliance.

    The purpose of this step is not to make you an expert on alliances or to encourage you to rush out of your office, cubicle, bedroom, or other workspace looking for opportunities. The purpose is to familiarize you with the concepts, to encourage you to keep your eyes open, and to think about relationships from different angles. How will you make the most of your vendors’ expertise, resources, market, and other things they bring to the table?

    Step 4.2 – Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    Grow the VMI’s impact over time

    Although they are not synonymous concepts, increasing the VMI’s maturity and increasing the VMI’s strategic value can go hand in hand. Evolving the VMI to be strategic allows the organization to receive the greatest benefit for its investment. This isn’t to say that all work the VMI does will be strategic. It will always live in two places – the transactional world and the strategic world – even when it is fully mature and operating strategically. Just like any job, there are transactional tasks and activities that must be done, and some of them are foundational elements for being strategic (e.g. conducting research, preparing reports, and classifying vendors). The VMI must evolve and become strategic for many reasons: staying in the transactional world limits the VMI’s contributions, results, influence and impact; team members will have less job satisfaction and enjoyment and lower salaries; ultimately, the justification for the VMI could disappear.

    To enhance the VMI’s (and, as applicable, its personnel’s) strategic value, continue:

    • Maturing the VMI and its personnel.
    • Building relationships internally and with the critical vendors (typically, high operational, high tactical, and strategic vendors under the COST model and valued and principal vendors under the MVP model).
    • Increasing your knowledge about vendor management and your critical vendors and their industries.
    • Saying yes to opportunities or volunteering for cross-functional teams that allow the VMI to showcase its abilities.
    • Increasing your knowledge of your organization, how it operates, the political environment, and anything else that will help the VMI provide information, insight, and guidance.
    • Learning about your industry and competitors (if applicable).

    Step 4.2 – Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    Shift from transactional to strategic as much as possible

    Indicators of a transactional VMI:

    Indicators of a strategic VMI:

    • Exclusively reactive approach to operations
    • Focused exclusively on day-to-day operations
    • Internal clients are obligated to use the VMI due to policy
    • No perceived value-add; perceived as an administrative function
    • Left out of the RFP process or only have a limited role
    • Left out of the negotiation process or only have a limited role
    • VMI has a narrow reach and impact within the organization
    • Measure of value for the VMI is only quantitative
    • Metrics gathering without analysis and influential use
    • Personnel have limited skills, competencies, and knowledge
    • Proactive approach to operations
    • Focused on the big picture
    • Internal clients seek out or voluntarily consult the VMI
    • VMI is valued for its contributions and impact
    • Good relationships exist with vendors and stakeholders
    • Personnel possess high levels of skill, competency, and knowledge
    • VMI processes are integrated into the organization
    • VMI participates in business strategy development
    • VMI leads or is heavily involved in the RFP & negotiation processes
    • Relationship managers are assigned to all critical vendors
    • Measure of value for the VMI is quantitative and qualitative
    • Metrics are used to make and influence decisions/strategy

    Step 4.3 – Review and update

    Tap into the collective wisdom and experience of your team members

    The vendor management lifecycle is continuous and more chaotic than linear, but the chaos mostly stays within the boundaries of the “plan, build, run, and review” framework outlined in this blueprint and the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative. Two of the goals of managing the lifecycle are: 1) to adapt to a changing world; and 2) to improve the VMI and its impact over time. To do this, keep following the guidance in this phase, but don’t forget about the direction provided in phase 4 of the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative:

    • Review and assess compliance.
    • Compile and leverage lessons learned.
    • Focus on maintaining alignment internally.
    • Identify and incorporate leading practices.
    • Update governances.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Continue reviewing and updating the VMI’s risk footprint. Add risk categories and scope as needed (measurement, monitoring, and reporting). Review Info-Tech’s vendor management-based series of risk blueprints for further information (Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization and others).

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    It is easy for business owners to lose sight of things. There is a saying among entrepreneurs about remembering to work on the business rather than working exclusively in the business. For many entrepreneurs, it is easy to get lost in the day-to-day grind and to forget to look at the bigger picture. A VMI is like a business in that regard – it is easy to focus on the transactional work and lose sight of maturing or evolving the VMI. Don’t let this happen!

    Leverage the tools and templates from this blueprint and adapt them to your environment as needed. Unlike the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative, some of the concepts presented here may take more time, resources, and evolution before you are ready to deploy them. Continue using the three-year roadmap and 90-day plans from the Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative blueprint, and add components from this blueprint when the time is right. The two blueprints are designed to work in concert as you move forward on your VMI journey.

    Lastly, focus on getting a little better each day, week, month, or year: better processes, better policies and procedures, better relationships with vendors, better relationships with internal clients, better planning, better anticipation, better research, better skills, competencies, and knowledge for team members, better communication, better value, and better impact. A little “better” goes a long way, and over time it becomes a lot better.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    IT (and the organization as a whole) are more reliant on vendors than ever before, and vendor management has become increasingly necessary to manage the relationships and manage the risks. Implementing a vendor management initiative is no longer a luxury...it is a necessity.

    Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    Calculating the impact or value of a vendor management office (VMO) can be difficult without the right framework and tools. Let Info-Tech’s tools and templates help you account for the contributions made by your VMO.

    Evaluate Your Vendor Account Team to Optimize Vendor Relations

    Understanding your vendor team’s background, experience, and strategic approach to your account is key to the management of the relationship, the success of the vendor agreement, and, depending on the vendor, the success of your business.

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    Vendors’ failure to perform, including security and compliance violations, can have significant financial consequences. Good vendor management practices help organizations understand the costs of those actions.

    Bibliography

    Amaresan, Swetha. “The 9 Most Important Survey Design Tips & Best Practices.” HubSpot. Accessed 13 July 2022.
    “Best Practices for Every Step of Survey Creation.” Survey Monkey. Accessed 13 July 2022.
    Brevig, Armand. ”Here Is a Quicker Way of Getting Better Supply Market Insights.” Procurement Cube, 30 July 2020. Accessed 19 May 2022.
    Cain, Elna. “9 Simple Ways on How to Improve Your Writing Skills.” Elna Cain, 20 Nov. 2018. Accessed 5 June 2020.
    Colwell, Tony. “How to Select Strategic Suppliers Part 1: Beware the Supplier's Perspective.” Accuity Consultants, 7 Feb 2012. Accessed 19 May 2022.
    “50 Tips for Improving Your Emotional Intelligence.” RocheMartin, 12 Jan. 2022. Accessed 25 July 2022.
    “4 Ways to Strengthen Your Ability to Influence Others.” Center for Creative Leadership, 24 Nov. 2020. Accessed 20 July 2022.
    Ferreira, Nicole Martins. “10 Personal Branding Tips That’ll Elevate Your Business In 2022.” Oberlo, 21 Mar. 2022. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Gartlan, Dan. “4 Essential Brand Components.” Stevens & Tate, 25 Nov. 2019. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Geller & Company. “World-Class Procurement — Increasing Profitability and Quality.” Spend Matters, 2003. Accessed 4 March 2022.
    Gumaste, Pavan. “50 Project Management Terms You Should Know.” Whiz Labs, 2018. Accessed 22 July 2022.
    Hertzberg, Karen. “How to Improve Writing Skills in 15 Easy Steps.” Grammarly, 15 June 2017. Accessed 5 June 2020.
    “Improving Emotional Intelligence (EQ).” HelpGuide, 2022. Accessed 25 July 2022.
    “ISG Index 4Q 2021.” Information Services Group, Inc., 2022. Web.
    Lehoczky, Etelka. “How To Improve Your Writing Skills At Work.” Forbes, 9 Mar. 2016. Accessed 5 June 2020.
    Liu, Joseph. “5 Ways To Build Your Personal Brand At Work.” Forbes, 30 Apr. 2018. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Lloyd, Tracy. “Defining What a Brand Is: Why Is It So Hard?” Emotive Brand, 18 June 2019. Accessed 28 July 2022.
    Nielson, Megan. “The Basic Tenants of Diplomatic Communication.” Communiqué PR, 22 October 2020. Accessed 23 May 2022
    “Positioning Yourself in the Market.” New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021. Accessed 19 May 2022.
    Rogelberg, Steven G. “The Surprising Science Behind Successful Remote Meetings.” sloanreview.mit.edu. 21 May 2020. Accessed 19 July 2022.
    “Rule No 5: All Customers/Suppliers Have a Different Value to You.” newdawnpartners.com. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Bibliography

    Shute, Benjamin. “Supplier Relationship Management: Is Bigger Always Better?” Comprara, 24 May 2015. Accessed 19 May 2022.
    Steele, Paul T. and Brian H. Court. Profitable Purchasing Strategies: A Manager's Guide for Improving Organizational Competitiveness Through the Skills of Purchasing. ‎ McGraw-Hill, 1996.
    “Take the Thomas-Kilmann Conflict Mode Instrument (TKI).” Kilmann Diagnostics, 2018. Accessed 20 Aug. 2020.
    Tallia, Alfred F. MD, MPH, et al. ”Seven Characteristics of Successful Work Relationships.” Fam Pract Manag. 2006 Jan;13(1):47-50.
    “The Art of Tact and Diplomacy.” skillsyouneed.com. Accessed 23 May 2022.
    “13 Key Traits of Strong Professional Relationships.” success.com. Accessed 4 Feb. 2022.
    Wilson, Fred. “Top 40 Project Management Terms and Concepts of 2022.” nTask, 25 Feb. 2019. Accessed 24 July 2022.

    The First 100 Days as CISO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}248|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 50 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Make a good first impression at your new job.
    • Obtain guidance on how you should approach the first 100 days.
    • Assess the current state of the security program and recommend areas of improvement and possible solutions.
    • Develop a high-level security strategy in three months.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Every CISO needs to follow Info-Tech’s five-step approach to truly succeed in their new position. The meaning and expectations of a CISO role will differ from organization to organization and person to person, however, the approach to the new position will be relatively the same.
    • Eighty percent of your time will be spent listening. The first 100 days of the CISO role is an information gathering exercise that will involve several conversations with different stakeholders and business divisions. Leverage this collaborative time to understand the business, its internal and external operations, and its people. Unequivocally, active listening will build company trust and help you to build an information security vision that reflects that of the business strategy.
    • Start “working” before you actually start the job. This involves finding out as much information about the company before officially being an employee. Investigate the company website and leverage available organizational documents and initial discussions to better understand your employer’s leadership, company culture ,and business model.

    Impact and Result

    • Hit the ground running with Info-Tech’s ready-made agenda vetted by CISO professionals to impress your colleagues and superiors.
    • Gather details needed to understand the organization (i.e. people, process, technology) and determine the current state of the security program.
    • Track and assess high-level security gaps using Info-Tech’s diagnostic tools and compare yourself to your industry’s vertical using benchmarking data.
    • Deliver an executive presentation that shows key findings obtained from your security evaluation.

    The First 100 Days as CISO Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why the first 100 days of being a CISO is a crucial time to be strategic. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and discover our five-step approach to CISO success.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare

    Review previous communications to prepare for your first day.

    • CISO Diary
    • Introduction Sheet

    2. Build relationships

    Understand how the business operates and develop meaningful relationships with your sphere of influence.

    3. Inventory components of the business

    Inventory company assets to know what to protect.

    4. Assess security posture

    Evaluate the security posture of the organization by leveraging Info-Tech’s IT Security diagnostic program.

    • Diagnostic Benchmarks: Security Governance & Management Scorecard
    • Diagnostic Benchmarks: Security Business Satisfaction Report

    5. Deliver plan

    Communicate your security vision to business stakeholders.

    • The First 100 Days as CISO Executive Presentation Template
    • The First 100 Days as CISO Executive Presentation Example
    [infographic]

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}399|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,308 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • IT organizations measure services from a technology perspective but rarely from a business goal or outcome perspective.
    • Most organizations do a poor job of identifying and measuring service outcomes over the duration of a service’s lifecycle – never ensuring the services remain valuable and meet expected long-term ROI.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.
    • Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.
    • Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors that have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Impact and Result

    Effective service metrics will provide the following service gains:

    • Confirm service performance and identify gaps.
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value.
    • Validate performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating business value.
    • Ensure service reporting aligns with end-user experience.
    • Achieve and confirm process and regulatory compliance.

    Which will translate into the following relationship gains:

    • Embed IT into business value achievement.
    • Improve the relationship between the business and IT.
    • Achieve higher customer satisfaction (happier end users receiving expected service, the business is able to identify how things are really performing).
    • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors from both IT and the business.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop meaningful service metrics, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics – Executive Brief
    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics – Phases 1-3

    1. Design the metrics

    Identify the appropriate service metrics based on stakeholder needs.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 1: Design the Metrics
    • Metrics Development Workbook

    2. Design reports and dashboards

    Present the right metrics in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 2: Design Reports and Dashboards
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    3. Implement, track, and maintain

    Run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics, then continuously validate your approach and make refinements to the processes.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 3: Implement, Track, and Maintain
    • Metrics Tracking Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Design the Metrics

    The Purpose

    Define stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria and identify IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes.

    Derive meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validate that metrics can be collected and measured.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Design meaningful service metrics from stakeholder needs.

    Validate that metrics can be collected and measured.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine stakeholder needs, goals, and pain points.

    1.2 Determine the success criteria and related IT services.

    1.3 Derive the service metrics.

    1.4 Validate the data collection process.

    1.5 Validate metrics with stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Understand stakeholder priorities

    Adopt a business-centric perspective to align IT and business views

    Derive meaningful business metrics that are relevant to the stakeholders

    Determine if and how the identified metrics can be collected and measured

    Establish a feedback mechanism to have business stakeholders validate the meaningfulness of the metrics

    2 Design Reports and Dashboards

    The Purpose

    Determine the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the metrics are presented in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible to guarantee that they are read and used.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the different presentation options.

    2.2 Assess stakeholder needs for information.

    2.3 Select and design the metric report.

    Outputs

    Learn about infographic, scorecard, formal report, and dashboard presentation options

    Determine how stakeholders would like to view information and how the metrics can be presented to aid decision making

    Select the most appropriate presentation format and create a rough draft of how the report should look

    3 Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    The Purpose

    Run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics to validate your approach.

    Make refinements to the implementation and maintenance processes prior to activating all service metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    High user acceptance and usability of the metrics.

    Processes of identifying and presenting metrics are continuously validated and improved.

    Activities

    3.1 Select the pilot metrics.

    3.2 Gather data and set initial targets.

    3.3 Generate the reports and validate with stakeholders.

    3.4 Implement the service metrics program.

    3.5 Track and maintain the metrics program.

    Outputs

    Select the metrics that should be first implemented based on urgency and impact

    Complete the service intake form for a specific initiative

    Create a process to gather data, measure baselines, and set initial targets

    Establish a process to receive feedback from the business stakeholders once the report is generated

    Identify the approach to implement the metrics program across the organization

    Set up mechanism to ensure the success of the metrics program by assessing process adherence and process validity

    Further reading

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Select IT service metrics that drive business value.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Are you measuring and reporting what the business needs to know?

    “Service metrics are one of the key tools at IT’s disposal in articulating and ensuring its value to the business, yet metrics are rarely designed and used for that purpose.

    Creating IT service metrics directly from business and stakeholder outcomes and goals, written from the business perspective and using business language, is critical to ensuring that the services that IT provides are meeting business needs.

    The ability to measure, manage, and improve IT service performance in relation to critical business success factors, with properly designed metrics, embeds IT in the value chain of the business and ensures IT’s focus on where and how it enables business outcomes.”

    Valence Howden,
    Senior Manager, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • CIO
    • IT VPs
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Align business/IT objectives (design top-down or outside-in)
    • Significantly improve the relationship between the business and IT aspects of the organization
    • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Service Level Managers
    • Service Owners
    • Program Owners
    This Research Will Help Them
    • Identify unusual deviations from the normal operating state
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value
    • Validate the value of performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating benefits realization

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • IT organizations measure services from a technology perspective yet rarely measure services from a business goal/outcome perspective.
    • Most organizations do a poor job of identifying and measuring service outcomes over the duration of a service’s lifecycle – never ensuring the services remain valuable and meet expected long-term ROI.

    Complication

    • IT organizations have difficulty identifying the right metrics to demonstrate the value of IT services to the business in tangible terms.
    • IT metrics, as currently designed, reinforce division between the IT and business perspectives of service performance. They drive siloed thinking and finger-pointing within the IT structure, and prevent IT resources from understanding how their work impacts business value.

    Resolution

    • Our program enables IT to develop the right service metrics to tie IT service performance to business value and user experience.
    • Ensure the metrics you implement have immediate stakeholder value, reinforcing alignment between IT and the business while influencing behavior in the desired direction.
    • Make sure that your metrics are defined in relation to the business goals and drivers, ensuring they will provide actionable outcomes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.
    2. Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.
    3. Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors, which have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Service metrics 101

    What are service metrics?

    Service metrics measure IT services in a way that relates to a business outcome. IT needs to measure performance from the business perspective using business language.

    Why do we need service metrics?

    To ensure the business cares about the metrics that IT produces, start with business needs to make sure you’re measuring the right things. This will give IT the opportunity talk to the right stakeholders and develop metrics that will meet their business needs.

    Service metrics are designed with the business perspective in mind, so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    Perspectives Matter

    Different stakeholders will require different types of metrics. A CEO may require metrics that provide a snapshot of the critical success of the company while a business manager is more concerned about the performance metrics of their department.

    What are the benefits of implementing service metrics?

    Service metrics help IT communicate with the business in business terms and enables IT to articulate how and where they provide business value. Business stakeholders can also easily understand how IT services contribute to their success.

    The majority of CIOs feel metrics relating to business value and stakeholder satisfaction require significant improvement

    A significantly higher proportion of CIOs than CEOs feel that there is significant improvement necessary for business value metrics and stakeholder satisfaction reporting. Stacked horizontal bar chart presenting survey results from CIOs and CXOs of 'Business Value Metrics'. Answer options are 'Effective', 'Some Improvement Necessary', 'Significant Improvement Necessary', and 'Not Required'.N=364

    Stacked horizontal bar chart presenting survey results from CIOs and CXOs of 'Stakeholder Satisfaction Reporting'. Answer options are 'Effective', 'Some Improvement Necessary', 'Significant Improvement Necessary', and 'Not Required'.N=364

    (Source: Info-Tech CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)

    Meaningless metrics are a headache for the business

    A major pitfall of many IT organizations is that they often provide pages of technical metrics that are meaningless to their business stakeholders.

    1. Too Many MetricsToo many metrics are provided and business leaders don’t know what to do with these metrics.
    2. Metrics Are Too TechnicalIT provides technical metrics that are hard to relate to business needs, and methods of calculating metrics are not clearly understood, articulated, and agreed on.
    3. Metrics Have No Business ValueService metrics are not mapped to business goals/objectives and they drive incorrect actions or spend.
    When considering only CEOs who said that stakeholder satisfaction reporting needed significant improvement, the average satisfaction score goes down to 61.6%, which is a drop in satisfaction of 12%.

    A bar that says 73% dropping to a bar that says 61%. Description above.

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)

    Poorly designed metrics hurt IT’s image within the organization

    By providing metrics that do not articulate the value of IT services, IT reinforces its role as a utility provider and an outsider to strategic decisions.

    When the CIOs believe business value metrics weren’t required, 50% of their CEOs said that significant improvements were necessary.

    Pie Chart presenting the survey results from CEOs regarding 'Business Value Metrics'. Description above.

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)
    1. Reinforce the wrong behaviorThe wrong metrics drive us-against-them, siloed thinking within IT, and meeting metric targets is prioritized over providing meaningful outcomes.
    2. Do not reflect user experienceMetrics don’t align with actual business/user experience, reinforcing a poor view of IT services.
    3. Effort ≠ ValueInvesting dedicated resources and effort to the achievement of the wrong metrics will only leave IT more constrained for other important initiatives.

    Articulate meaningful service performance that supports the achievement of business outcomes

    Service metrics measure the performance of IT services and how they enable or drive the activity outcomes.

    A business process consists of multiple business activities. In many cases, these business activities require one or more supporting IT services.

    A 'Business Process' broken down to its parts, multiple 'Business Activities' and their 'IT Services'. For each business process, business stakeholders and their goals and objectives should be identified.

    For each business activity that supports the completion of a business process, define the success criteria that must be met in order to produce the desirable outcome.

    Identify the IT services that are used by business stakeholders for each business activity. Measure the performance of these services from a business perspective to arrive at the appropriate service metrics.

    Differentiate between different types of metrics

    Stakeholders have different goals and objectives; therefore, it is critical to identify what type of metrics should be presented to each stakeholder.

    Business Metrics

    Determine Business Success

    Business metrics are derived from a pure business perspective. These are the metrics that the business stakeholders will measure themselves on, and business success is determined using these metrics.

    Arrow pointing right.

    Service Metrics

    Manage Service Value to the Business

    Service metrics are used to measure IT service performance against business outcomes. These metrics, while relating to IT services, are presented in business terms and are tied to business goals.

    Arrow pointing right.

    IT Metrics

    Enable Operational Excellence

    IT metrics are internal to the IT organization and used to manage IT service delivery. These metrics are technical, IT-specific, and drive action for IT. They are not presented to the business, and are not written in business language.

    Implementing service metrics is a key step in becoming a service provider and business partner

    As a prerequisite, IT organizations must have already established a solid relationship with the business and have a clear understanding of its critical business-facing services.

    At the very least, IT needs to have a service-oriented view and understand the specific needs and objectives associated with each stakeholder.

    Visualization of 'Business Relationship Management' with an early point on the line representing 'Service Provider: Establish service-oriented culture and business-centric service delivery', and the end of the line being 'Strategic Partner'.

    Once IT can present service metrics that the business cares about, it can continue on the service provider journey by managing the performance of services based on business needs, determine and influence service demand, and assess service value to maximize benefits to the business.

    Which processes drive service metrics?

    Both business relationship management (BRM) and service level management (SLM) provide inputs into and receive outputs from service metrics.

    Venn Diagram of 'Business Relationship Management', 'Service Metrics', and 'Service Level Management'.

    Business Relationship Management

    BRM works to understand the goals and objectives of the business and inputs them into the design of the service metrics.

    Service Metrics

    BRM leverages service metrics to help IT organizations manage the relationship with the business.

    BRM articulates and manages expectations and ensures IT services are meeting business requirements.

    Which processes drive service metrics?

    Both BRM and SLM provide inputs into and receive outputs from service metrics.

    Venn Diagram of 'Business Relationship Management', 'Service Metrics', and 'Service Level Management'.

    Service Level Management

    SLM works with the business to understand service requirements, which are key inputs in designing the service metrics.

    Service Metrics

    SLM leverages service metrics in overseeing the day-to-day delivery of IT services. It ensures they are provided to meet expected service level targets and objectives.

    Effective service metrics will deliver both service gains and relationship gains

    Effective service metrics will provide the following service gains:

    • Confirm service performance and identify gaps
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value
    • Validate performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating business value
    • Ensure service reporting aligns with end-user experience
    • Achieve and confirm process and regulatory compliance
        Which will translate into the following relationship gains:
        • Embed IT into business value achievement
        • Improve relationship between the business and IT
        • Achieve higher customer satisfaction (happier end users receiving expected service, the business is able to identify how things are really performing)
        • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors from both IT and the business

    Don’t let conventional wisdom become your roadblock

    Conventional Wisdom

    Info-Tech Perspective

    Metrics are measured from an application or technology perspective Metrics need to be derived from a service and business outcome perspective.
    The business doesn’t care about metrics Metrics are not usually designed to speak in business terms about business outcomes. Linking metrics to business objectives creates metrics that the business cares about.
    It is difficult to have a metrics discussion with the business It is not a metrics/number discussion, it is a discussion on goals and outcomes.
    Metrics are only presented for the implementation of the service, not the ongoing outcome of the service IT needs to focus on service outcome and not project outcome.
    Quality can’t be measured Quality must be measured in order to properly manage services.

    Our three-phase approach to service metrics development

    Let Info-Tech guide you through your service metrics journey

    1

    2

    3

    Design Your Metrics Develop and Validate Reporting Implement, Track, and Maintain
    Sample of Phase 1 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Design Your Metrics'. Sample of Phase 2 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Develop and Validate Reporting'. Sample of Phase 3 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Implement, Track, and Maintain'.
    Start the development and creation of your service metrics by keeping business perspectives in mind, so they are fully aligned with business objectives. Identify the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder preference and need for metrics. Track goals and success metrics for your service metrics programs. It allows you to set long-term goals and track your results over time.

    CIOs must actively lead the design of the service metrics program

    The CIO must actively demonstrate support for the service metrics program and lead the initial discussions to determine what matters to business leaders.

    1. Lead the initiative by defining the need
      Show visible support and demonstrate importance
    2. Articulate the value to both IT and the business
      Establish the urgency and benefits
    3. Select and assemble an implementation group
      Find the best people to get the job done
    4. Drive initial metrics discussions: goals, objectives, actions
      Lead brainstorming with senior business leaders
    5. Work with the team to determine presentation formats and communication methods
      Identify the best presentation approach for senior stakeholders
    6. Establish a feedback loop for senior management
      Solicit feedback on improvements
    7. Validate the success of the metrics
      Confirm service metrics support business outcomes

    Measure the success of your service metrics

    It is critical to determine if the designed service metrics are fulfilling their intended purpose. The process of maintaining the service metrics program and the outcomes of implementing service metrics need to be monitored and tracked.

    Validating Service Metrics Design

    Target Outcome

    Related Metrics

    The business is enabled to identify and improve service performance to their end customer # of improvement initiatives created based on service metrics
    $ cost savings/revenue generated due to actions derived from service metrics

    Procedure to validate the usefulness of IT metrics

    # / % of service metrics added/removed per year

    Alignment between IT and business objectives and processes Business’ satisfaction with IT

    Measure the success of your service metrics

    It is critical to determine if the designed service metrics are fulfilling their intended purpose. The process of maintaining the service metrics program and the outcomes of implementing service metrics need to be monitored and tracked.

    Validating Service Metrics Process

    Target Outcome

    Related Metrics

    Properly defined service metrics aligned with business goals/outcomes
    Easy understood measurement methodologies
    % of services with (or without) defined service metrics

    % of service metrics tied to business goals

    Consistent approach to review and adjust metrics# of service metrics adjusted based on service reviews

    % of service metrics reviewed on schedule

    Demonstrate monetary value and impact through the service metrics program

    In a study done by the Aberdeen Group, organizations engaged in the use of metrics benchmarking and measurement have:
    • 88% customer satisfaction rate
    • 60% service profitability
    • 15% increase in workforce productivity over the last 12 months

    Stock image of a silhouette of three people's head and shoulders.
    (Source: Aberdeen Group. “Service Benchmarking and Measurement.”)

    A service metric is defined for: “Response time for Business Application A

    The expected response time has not been achieved and this is visible in the service metrics. The reduced performance has been identified as having an impact of $250,000 per month in lost revenue potential.

    The service metric drove an action to perform a root-cause analysis, which identified a network switch issue and drove a resolution action to fix the technology and architect redundancy to ensure continuity.

    The fix eliminated the performance impact, allowing for recovery of the $250K per month in revenue, improved end-user confidence in the organization, and increased use of the application, creating additional revenue.

    Implementing and measuring a video conferencing service

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO interview and case material
    Situation

    The manufacturing business operates within numerous countries and requires a lot of coordination of functions and governance oversight. The company has monthly meetings, both regional and national, and key management and executives travel to attend and participate in the meetings.

    Complication

    While the meetings provide a lot of organizational value, the business has grown significantly and the cost of business travel has started to become prohibitive.

    Action

    It was decided that only a few core meetings would require onsite face-to-face meetings, and for all other meetings, the company would look at alternative means. The face-to-face aspect of the meetings was still considered critical so they focused on options to retain that aspect.

    The IT organization identified that they could provide a video conferencing service to meet the business need. The initiative was approved and rolled out in the organization.

    Result:

    IT service metrics needed to be designed to confirm that the expected value outcome of the implementation of video conferencing was achieved.

    Under the direction of the CIO, the business goals and needs driving use of the service (i.e. reduction in travel costs, efficiency, no loss of positive outcome) were used to identify success criteria and key questions to confirm success.

    With this information, the service manager was able to implement relevant service metrics in business language and confirmed an 80% adoption rate and a 95% success rate in term meetings running as expected and achieving core outcomes.

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Develop meaningful service metrics to ensure business and user satisfaction

    1. Design the Metrics 2. Design Reports and Dashboards 3. Implement, Track, and Maintain
    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1. Defining stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria
    2. Derive meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validate with business stakeholders
    3. Validate metrics can be collected and measured
    4. Determine calculation methodology
    1. Presentation format selected based on stakeholder needs and preference for information
    2. Presentation format validated with stakeholders
    1. Identify metrics that will be presented first to the stakeholders based on urgency or impact of the IT service
    2. Determine the process to collect data, select initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    3. Roll out the metrics implementation for a broader audience
    4. Establish roles and timelines for metrics maintenance

    Guided Implementations

    • Design metrics based on business needs
    • Validate the metrics
    • Select presentation format
    • Review metrics presentation design
    • Select and implement pilot metrics
    • Determine rollout process and establish maintenance/tracking mechanism
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Derive Service Metrics From Business Goals
    Module 2:
    Select and Design Reports and Dashboards
    Module 3:
    Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics to Ensure Success
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Meaningful service metrics designed from stakeholder needs
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Appropriate presentation format selected for each stakeholder
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • Metrics implemented and process established to maintain and track program success

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Design the Metrics
    Determine Presentation Format and Implement Metrics
    Gather Service Level Requirements
    Monitor and Improve Service Levels

    Activities

    • 1.1 Determine stakeholder needs
    • 1.2 Determine success criteria and key performance indicators
    • 1.3 Derive metrics
    • 1.4 Validate the metric collection
    • 2.1 Discuss stakeholder needs/preference for data and select presentation format
    • 2.2 Select and design the metric report
    • Requirements
    • 3.1 Determine the business requirements
    • 3.2 Negotiate service levels
    • 3.3 Align operational level agreements (OLAs) and supplier contracts
    • 4.1 Conduct service report and perform service review
    • 4.2 Communicate service review
    • 4.3 Remediate issues using action plan
    • 4.4 Proactive prevention

    Deliverables

    1. Metrics Development Workbook
    1. Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    2. Metrics Tracking Tool
    1. Service Level Management SOP
    2. Service Level Agreement
    1. Service Level Report
    2. Service Level Review
    3. Business Satisfaction Report

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 1

    Design the Metrics

    Step (1): Design the Metrics

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Business Relationship Manager (BRM)
    • Service Level Manager (SLM)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Defined stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria
    • Identified IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes
    • Derived meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validated with business stakeholders
    • Validated that metrics can be collected and measured
    • Determined calculation methodology

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Design the Metrics

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks
    Step 1.1: Design Metrics Step 1.2: Validate the Metrics
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Determine the stakeholder and their needs
    • Identify IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes
    • Derive the service metrics
    Review findings with analyst:
    • For the selected metrics, identify the data source for collection
    • Validate whether or not the data can be created
    • Create a calculation method for the metrics
    Then complete these activities…
    • Using the methodology provided, identify additional stakeholders and map out their success criteria, including KPIs to determine the appropriate service metrics
    Then complete these activities…
    • Determine whether the designed metrics are measurable, and if so, how
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Development Workbook
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Development Workbook

    Design your service metrics – overview

    Figure representing 'CIO'. Step 1
    Derive your service metrics

    Metrics Worksheet

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Validate your metrics

    Metrics Worksheet

    Figures representing 'CIO', 'SLM', and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Confirm with stakeholders

    Metrics Tracking Sheet

    A star.

    Defined IT Service Metrics

    Deriving the right metrics is critical to ensuring that you will generate valuable and actionable service metrics.

    Derive your service metrics from business objectives and needs

    Service metrics must be designed with the business perspective in mind so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    Thus, IT must start by identifying specific stakeholder needs. The more IT understands about the business, the more relevant the metrics will be to the business stakeholders.

    1. Who are your stakeholders?
    2. What are their goals and pain points?
    3. What do the stakeholders need to know?
    4. What do I need to measure?
    5. Derive your service metrics

    Derive your service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 Metrics Development Workbook

    This workbook guides the development and creation of service metrics that are directly tied to stakeholder needs.

    This process will ensure that your service metrics are designed with the business perspective in mind so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    1. Who are the relevant stakeholders?
    2. What are the goals and pain points of your stakeholders?
    3. What do the stakeholders need to know?
    4. What does IT need to measure?
    5. What are the appropriate IT metrics?

    Download the Metrics Development Workbook.

    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Development Workbook.

    Determine your stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 0.5 Hour

    Who are your stakeholders?

    1. Identify the primary stakeholders of your service metrics. Stakeholders are the people who have a very specific need to know about how IT services affect their business outcomes. Different stakeholders can have different perspective on the same IT service metric.Most often, the primary target of service metrics are the business stakeholders, e.g. VP of a business unit.
    2. Identify any additional stakeholders. The CIO is also a stakeholder since they are effectively the business relationship manager for the senior leaders.

    Video Conferencing Case Study
    Manufacturing company

    For this phase, we will demonstrate how to derive the service metrics by going through the steps in the methodology.

    At a manufacturing company, the CIO’s main stakeholder is the CEO, whose chief concern is to improve the financial position of the company.

    Identify goals and pain points of your stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2 0.5 Hour

    What are their goals and pain points?

    1. Clearly identify each stakeholder’s business goals and outcomes. These would be particular business goals related to a specific business unit.
    2. Identify particular pain points for each business unit to understand what is preventing them from achieving the desirable business outcome.

    VC Case Study

    One of the top initiatives identified by the company to improve financial performance was to reduce expense.

    Because the company has several key locations in different states, company executives used to travel extensively to carry out meetings at each location.

    Therefore, travel expenses represent a significant proportion of operational expenses and reducing travel costs is a key goal for the company’s executives.

    What do the stakeholders need to know?

    Supporting Tool icon 1.3 0.5 Hour

    What do the stakeholders need to know?

    1. Identify the key things that the stakeholders would need to know based on the goals and pain points derived from the previous step.These are your success criteria and must be met to successfully achieve the desired goals.

    VC Case Study

    The CEO needs to have assurance that without executives traveling to each location, remote meetings can be as effective as in-person meetings.

    These meetings must provide the same outcome and allow executives to collaborate and make similar strategic decisions without the onsite, physical presence.

    Therefore, the success criteria are:

    • Reduced travel costs
    • Effective collaboration
    • High-quality meetings

    What do I need to measure?

    Supporting Tool icon 1.4 1 Hour

    What does IT need to measure?

    1. Identify the IT services that are leveraged to achieve the business goals and success criteria.
    2. Identify the users of those services and determine the nature of usage for each group of users.
    3. Identify the key indicators that must be measured for those services from an IT perspective.

    VC Case Study

    The IT department decides to implement the video conferencing service to reduce the number of onsite meetings. This technology would allow executives to meet remotely with both audio and video and is the best option to replicate a physical meeting.

    The service is initially available to senior executives and will be rolled out to all internal users once the initial implementation is deemed successful.

    To determine the success of the service, the following needs to be measured:

    1. Outcomes of VC meetings
    2. Quality of the VC meetings
    3. Reduction in travel expenses

    Derive service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 1.5 0.5 Hour

    Derive your service metrics

    1. Derive the service metrics that are meaningful to business stakeholders based on the IT services and the key indicators identified in the previous steps.
    2. Distinguish between service metrics and business metrics. You may identify some business metrics in addition to the IT metrics, and although these are important, IT doesn’t own the process of tracking and reporting business metrics.

    VC Case Study

    In the previous step, IT identified that it must measure the outcomes of VC meetings, quality of the VC meetings, and the reduction in travel expenses. From these, the appropriate service metrics can be derived to answer the needs of the CEO.

    IT needs to measure:

    1. Percent of VC meetings successfully delivered
    2. Growth of number of executive meetings conducted via VC
    Outcomes

    IT also identified the following business metrics:

    1. Reduction in percent of travel expense/spend
    2. Reduction in lost time due to travel

    Validate your metrics

    Once appropriate service metrics are derived from business objectives, the next step is to determine whether or not it is viable to actually measure the metrics.

    Can you measure it? The first question IT must answer is whether the metric is measurable. IT must identify the data source, validate its ability to collect the data, and specify the data requirement. Not all metrics can be measured!
    How will you measure it? If the metric is measurable, the next step is to create a way to measure the actual data. In most cases, simple formulas that can be easily understood are the best approach.
    Define your actions Metrics must be used to drive or reinforce desirable outcomes and behaviors. Thus, IT must predetermine the necessary actions associated with the different metric levels, thresholds, or trends.

    Determine if you can measure the identified metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.6 0.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Determine what data sources are available. Make sure that you know where the information you need is captured, or will need to be captured. This would include:
      • A ticket/request system
      • An auto discovery tool
      • A configuration management database ( CMDB)
    2. Confirm that IT has the ability to collect the information.
      • If the necessary data is already contained in an identified data source, then you can proceed.
      • If not, consider whether it’s possible to gather the information using current sources and systems.
      • Understand the constraints and cost/ROI to implement new technology or revise processes and data gathering to produce the data.

    VC Case Study

    Using the metric derived from the video conferencing service example, IT wants to measure the % of VC meetings successfully delivered.

    What are the data sources?

    • Number of VC meetings that took place
    • Number of service incidents
    • User survey

    Determine if you can measure the identified metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.6 0.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Understand your data requirements
      • To produce relevant metrics from your data, you need to ensure the level of quality and currency that provides you with useful information. You need to define:
        • The level of detail that has to be captured to make the data useful.
        • The consistency of the data, and how it needs to be entered or gathered.
        • The accuracy of the data. This includes how current the data needs to be, how quickly changes have to be made, and how data quality will be verified.

    VC Case Study

    Data requirement for percent of successful VC meetings:

    • Level of detail – user category, location, date/time,
    • Consistency – how efficiently are VC-related incidents opened and closed? Is the data collected and stored consistently?
    • Accuracy – is the information entered accurately?

    Create the calculation to measure it

    Supporting Tool icon 1.7 0.5 Hour

    Determine how to calculate the metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS
    1. Develop the calculations that will be used for each accepted metric. The measurement needs to be clear and straightforward.
    2. Define the scope and assumptions for each calculation, including:
      • The defined measurement period (e.g. monthly, weekly)
      • Exclusions (e.g. nonbusiness hours, during maintenance windows)

    VC Case Study

    Metric: Percent of VC meetings delivered successfully

    IT is able to determine the total number of VC meetings that took place and the number of VC service requests to the help desk.

    That makes it possible to use the following formula to determine the success percentage of the VC service:

    ((total # VC) – (# of VC with identified incidents)) / (total # VC) * 100

    Define the actions to be taken for each metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.7 1.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Centered on the defined metrics and their calculations, IT can decide on the actions that should be driven out of each metric based on one of the following scenarios:
    • Scenario 1: Ad hoc remedial action and root-cause investigation. If the reason for the result is unknown, determining root cause or identifying trends is required to determine required actions.
    • Scenario 2: Predefined remedial action. A set of predetermined actions associated with different results. This is useful when the meaning of the results is clear and points to specific issues within the environment.
    • Scenario 3: Nonremedial action. The metrics may produce a result that reinforces or supports company direction and strategy, or identifies an opportunity that may drive a new initiative or idea.

    VC Case Study

    If the success rate of the VC meetings is below 90%, IT needs to focus on determining if there is a common cause and identify if this is a consistent downward trend.

    A root-cause analysis is performed that identifies that network issues are causing difficulties, impacting the connection quality and usability of the VC service.

    Validate the confirmed metrics with the business

    Supporting Tool icon 1.8 1 Hour

    INPUT: Selected service metrics, Discussion with the business

    OUTPUT: Validated metrics with the business

    Materials: Metrics with calculation methodology

    Participants: IT and business stakeholders, Service owners

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Once you have derived the appropriate metrics and established that the metrics are measurable, you must go back to the targeted stakeholders and validate that the selected metrics will provide the right information to meet their identified goals and success criteria.
    2. Add confirmed metrics to the Metrics Tracking Tool, in the Metrics Tracking Plan tab.
    Service Metric Corresponding
    Business Goal
    Measurement
    Method
    Defined Actions

    Example: Measuring the online banking service at a financial institution

    Who are IT’s stakeholders? The financial institution provides various banking solutions to its customers. Retail banking is a core service offered by the bank and the VP of retail banking is a major stakeholder of IT.
    What are their goals and pain points? The VP of retail banking’s highest priorities are to increase revenue, increase market share, and maintain the bank’s brand and reputation amongst its customers.
    What do they need to know? In order to measure success, the VP of retail banking needs to determine performance in attracting new clients, retaining clients, expanding into new territory, and whether they have increased the number of services provided to existing clients.
    What does IT need to measure? The recent implementation of an online banking service is a key initiative that will keep the bank competitive and help retail banking meet its goals. The key indicators of this service are: the total number of clients, the number of products per client, percent of clients using online banking, number of clients by segment, service, territory.
    Derive the service metrics Based on the key indicators, IT can derive the following service metrics:
    1. Number of product applications originated from online banking
    2. Customer satisfaction/complaints
    As part of the process, IT also identified some business metrics, such as the number of online banking users per month or the number of times a client accesses online banking per month.

    Design service metrics to track service performance and value

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO
    Challenge Solution Results
    The IT organization needed to generate metrics to show the business whether the video conferencing service was being adopted and if it was providing the expected outcome and value.

    Standard IT metrics were technical and did not provide a business context that allowed for easy understanding of performance and decision making.

    The IT organization, working through the CIO and service managers, sat down with the key business stakeholders of the video conferencing service.

    They discussed the goals for the meeting and defined the success criteria for those goals in the context of video conference meeting outcomes.

    The success criteria that were discussed were then translated into a set of questions (key performance indicators) that if answered, would show that the success criteria were achieved.

    The service manager identified what could be measured to answer the defined questions and eliminated any metrics that were either business metrics or non-IT related.

    The remaining metrics were identified as the possible service metrics, and the ability to gather the information and produce the metric was confirmed.

    Service metrics were defined for:

    1. Percent of video conference meetings delivered successfully
    2. Growth in the number of executive meetings conducted via video conference

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1

    Sample of activity 1.1 'Determine your stakeholders'. Determine stakeholder needs, goals, and pain points

    The onsite analyst will help you select key stakeholders and analyze their business objectives and current pain points.

    1.2

    Sample of activity 1.2 'Identify goals and pain points of your stakeholders'. Determine the success criteria and related IT services

    The analyst will facilitate a discussion to uncover the information that these stakeholders care about. The group will also identify the IT services that are supporting these objectives.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.5

    Sample of activity 1.5 'Derive service metrics'. Derive the service metrics

    Based on the key performance indicators obtained in the previous page, derive meaningful business metrics that are relevant to the stakeholders.

    1.6

    Sample of activity 1.6 'Determine if you can measure the identified metric'. Validate the data collection process

    The analyst will help the workshop group determine whether the identified metrics can be collected and measured. If so, a calculation methodology is created.

    1.7

    Sample of activity 1.7 'Create the caluclation to measure it'. Validate metrics with stakeholders

    Establish a feedback mechanism to have business stakeholders validate the meaningfulness of the metrics.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 2

    Design Reports and Dashboards

    Step (2): Design Reports and Dashboards

    PHASE 1PHASE 2PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Presentation format selected based on stakeholder needs and preference for information
    • Presentation format validated with stakeholders

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Design Reports and Dashboards

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 3 weeks
    Step 2.1: Select Presentation Format Step 2.2: Review Design
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review the different format of metrics presentation and discuss the pros/cons of each format
    • Discuss stakeholder needs/preference for data
    • Select the presentation format
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Discuss stakeholder feedback based on selected presentation format
    • Modify and adjust the presentation format as needed
    Then complete these activities…
    • Design the metrics using the selected format
    Then complete these activities…
    • Finalize the design for metrics presentation
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Design the reports – overview

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 1
    Understand the pros and cons of different reporting styles
    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Determine your reporting and presentation style

    Presentation Format Selection

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Design your metrics reports
    A star.

    Validated Service Reports

    The design of service metrics reporting is critically important. The reporting style must present the right information in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible to ensure that it is read and used.

    The reports must also display information in a way that generates actions. If your stakeholders cannot make decisions, kick off activities, or ask questions based on your reports, then they have no value.

    Determine the right presentation format for your metrics

    Most often, metrics are presented in the following ways:

    Dashboard
    (PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.”)
    Sample of the 'Dashboard' metric presentation format.
    Infographic
    (PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants.”)
    Sample of the 'Infographic' metric presentation format.
    Report
    (PwC Blogs. “Northern Lights.”)
    Sample of the 'Report' metric presentation format.
    Scorecard
    (PwC. “Annual Report 2015.”)
    Sample of the 'Scorecard' metric presentation format.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Dashboard

    A dashboard is a reporting method that provides a dynamic at-a-glance view of key metrics from the perspective of key stakeholders. It provides a quick graphical way to process important performance information in real time.

    Features

    Typically web-based

    Dynamic data that is updated in real time

    Advantage

    Aggregates a lot of information into a single view

    Presents metrics in a simplistic style that is well understood

    Provides a quick point-in-time view of performance

    Easy to consume visual presentation style

    Disadvantage

    Complicated to set up well.
    Requires additional technology support: programming, API, etc.

    Promotes a short-term outlook – focus on now, no historical performance and no future trends. Doesn’t provide the whole picture and story.

    Existing dashboard tools are often not customized enough to provide real value to each stakeholder.

    Dashboards present real-time metrics that can be accessed and viewed at any time

    Sample of the 'Dashboard' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.”)
    Metrics presented through online dashboards are calculated in real time, which allows for a dynamic, current view into the performance of IT services at any time.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Infographic

    An infographic is a graphical representation of metrics or data, which is used to show information quickly and clearly. It’s based on the understanding that people retain and process visual information more readily than written details.

    Features

    Turns dry into attractive –transforms data into eye-catching visual memory that is easier to retain

    Can be used as the intro to a formal report

    There are endless types of infographics

    Advantage

    Easily consumable

    Easy to retain

    Eye catching

    Easily shared

    Spurs conversation

    Customizable

    Disadvantage

    Require design expertise and resources

    Can be time consuming to generate

    Could be easily misinterpreted

    Message can be lost with poor design

    Infographics allow for completely unique designs

    Sample of the 'Infographic' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants…”)
    There is no limit when it comes to designing an infographic. The image used here visually articulates the effects of new entrants pulling away the market.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Formal Report

    A formal report is a more structured and official reporting style that contains detailed research, data, and information required to enable specific business decisions, and to help evaluate performance over a defined period of time.

    Definition

    Metrics can be presented as a component of a periodic, formal report

    A physical document that presents detailed information to a particular audience

    Advantage

    More detailed, more structured and broader reporting period

    Formal, shows IT has put in the effort

    Effectively presents a broader and more complete story

    Targets different stakeholders at the same time

    Disadvantage

    Requires significant effort and resources

    Higher risk if the report does not meet the expectation of the business stakeholder

    Done at a specific time and only valuable for that specific time period

    Harder to change format

    Formal reports provide a detailed view and analysis of performance

    Sample of the 'Formal Report' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC Blogs. “Northern Lights: Where are we now?”)
    An effective report incorporates visuals to demonstrate key improvements.

    Formal reports can still contain visuals, but they are accompanied with detailed explanations.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Scorecard

    A scorecard is a graphic view of the progress and performance over time of key performance metrics. These are in relation to specified goals based on identified critical stakeholder objectives.

    Features

    Incorporates multiple metrics effectively.

    Scores services against the most important organizational goals and objectives. Scorecards may tie back into strategy and different perspectives of success.

    Advantage

    Quick view of performance against objectives

    Measure against a set of consistent objectives

    Easily consumable

    Easy to retain

    Disadvantage

    Requires a lot of forethought

    Scorecards provide a time-bound summary of performance against defined goals

    Sample of the 'Scorecard' metric presentation format.
    (PwC. “Annual Report 2015.”)
    Scorecards provide a summary of performance that is directly linked to the organizational KPIs.

    Determine your report style

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    In this section, you will determine the optimal reporting style for the service metrics.

    This guide contains four questions, which will help IT organizations identify the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder preference and needs for metrics.

    1. Who is the relevant stakeholder?
    2. What are the defined actions for the metric?
    3. How frequently does the stakeholder need to see the metric?
    4. How does the stakeholder like to receive information?
    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide.
    Download the Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide.

    Determine your best presentation option

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 2 Hours

    INPUT: Identified stakeholder and his/her role

    OUTPUT: Proper presentation format based on need for information

    Materials: Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Program Manager

    After deciding on the report type to be used to present the metric, the organization needs to consider how stakeholders will consume the metric.

    There are three options based on stakeholder needs and available presentation options within IT.

    1. Paper-based presentation is the most traditional form of reporting and works well with stakeholders who prefer physical copies. The report is produced at a specific time and requires no additional IT capability.
    2. Online documents stored on webpages, SharePoint, or another knowledge management system could be used to present the metrics. This allows the report to be linked to other information and easily shared.
    3. Online dashboards and graphics can be used to have dynamic, real-time reporting and anytime access. These webpages can be incorporated into an intranet and allow the user to view the metrics at any time. This will require IT to continuously update the data in order to maintain the accuracy of the metrics.

    Design your metric reports with these guidelines in mind

    Supporting Tool icon 2.2 30 Minutes
    1. Stakeholder-specificThe report must be driven by the identified stakeholder needs and preferences and articulate the metrics that are important to them.
    2. ClarityTo enable decision making and drive desired actions, the metrics must be clear and straightforward. They must be presented in a way that clearly links the performance measurement to the defined outcome without leading to different interpretations of the results.
    3. SimplicityThe report must be simple to read, understand, and analyze. The language of the report must be business-centric and remove as much complexity as possible in wording, imaging, and context.

    Be sure to consider access rights for more senior reports. Site and user access permissions may need to be defined based on the level of reporting.

    Metrics reporting on the video conferencing service

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO Interview
    The Situation

    The business had a clear need to understand if the implementation of video conferencing would allow previously onsite meetings to achieve the same level of effectiveness.

    Reporting Context

    Provided reports had always been generated from an IT perspective and the business rarely used the information to make decisions.

    The metrics needed to help the business understand if the meetings were remaining effective and be tied into the financial reporting against travel expenses, but there would be limited visibility during the executive meetings.

    Approach

    The service manager reviewed the information that he had gathered to confirm how often they needed information related to the service. He also met with the CIO to get some insight into the reports that were already being provided to the business, including the ones that were most effective.

    Considerations

    The conversations identified that there was no need for a dynamic real-time view of the performance of the service, since tracking of cost savings and utility would be viewed monthly and quarterly. They also identified that the item would be discussed within a very small window of time during the management meetings.

    The Solution

    It was determined that the best style of reporting for the metric was an existing scorecard that was produced monthly, using some infographics to ensure that the information is clear at a glance to enable quick decision making.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1

    Sample of presentation format option slide 'Determine the right presentation format for your metrics'. Understand the different presentation options

    The onsite analyst will introduce the group to the communication vehicles of infographic, scorecard, formal report, and dashboard.

    2.1

    Sample of activity 2.1 'Determine your best presentation option'. Assess stakeholder needs for information

    For selected stakeholders, the analyst will facilitate a discussion on how stakeholders would like to view information and how the metrics can be presented to aid decision making.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.2

    Sample of activity 2.2 'Design your metric reports with these guidelines in mind'. Select and design the metric report

    Based on the discussion, the working group will select the most appropriate presentation format and create a rough draft of how the report should look.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 3

    Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    Step (3): Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    PHASE 1PHASE 2PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Metrics Program Manager

    Activities in this step

    • Determine the first batch of metrics to be implemented as part of the pilot program
    • Create a process to collect and validate data, determine initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    • Present the metric reports to the relevant stakeholders and incorporate the feedback into the metric design
    • Establish a standard process and roll out the implementation of metrics in batches
    • Establish a process to monitor and track the effectiveness of the service metrics program and make adjustments when necessary

    Phase 3 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks
    Step 3.1: Select and Launch Pilot Metrics Step 3.2: Track and Maintain the Metrics
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Identify metrics that will be presented first to the stakeholders based on urgency or impact of the IT service
    • Determine the process to collect data, select initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Review the success of metrics and discuss feedback from stakeholders
    • Roll out the metrics implementation to a broader audience
    • Establish roles and timelines for metrics maintenance
    Then complete these activities…
    • Document the first batch of metrics
    • Document the baseline, initial targets
    • Create a plan to integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create a document that defines how the organization will track and maintain the success of the metrics program
    • Review the metrics program periodically
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Tracking Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Tracking Tool

    Implement, Track, and Maintain the Metrics

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 1
    Run your pilot

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Validate success

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Implement your metrics program in batches

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    A star.

    Active Service Metrics Program

    Once you have defined the way that you will present the metrics, you are ready to run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics.

    This allows you to validate your approach and make refinements to the implementation and maintenance processes where necessary, prior to activating all service metrics.

    Track the performance of your service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1

    The Metrics Tracking Tool will enable you to track goals and success metrics for your service metrics programs. It allows you to set long-term goals and track your results over time.

    There are three sections in this tool:
    1. Metrics Tracking Plan. Identify the metrics to be tracked and their purpose.
    2. Metrics Tracking Actuals. Monitor and track the actual performance of the metrics.
    3. Remediation Tracking. Determine and document the steps that need to be taken to correct a sub-performing metric.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Tracking Tool.

    Select pilot metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1 30 Minutes

    INPUT: Identified services, Business feedback

    OUTPUT: Services with most urgent need or impact

    Materials: Service catalog or list of identified services

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Business representatives

    To start the implementation of your service metrics program and drive wider adoption, you need to run a pilot using a smaller subset of metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    To determine the sample for the pilot, consider metrics that:

    • Are related to critical business services and functions
    • or
    • Address known/visible pain points for the business
    • or
    • Were designed for supportive or influential stakeholders

    Metrics that meet two or more criteria are ideal for the pilot

    Collect and validate data

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2 1 Hour

    INPUT: Identified metrics

    OUTPUT: A data collection mythology, Metrics tracking

    Materials: Metrics

    Participants: SLM, BRM, Service owner

    You will need to start collection and validation of your identified data in order to calculate the results for your pilot metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Initiate data collection
      • Use the data sources identified during the design phase and initiate the data collection process.
    2. Determine start date
      • If historical data can be retrieved and gathered, determine how far back you want your measurements to start.
    3. Compile data and validate
      • Ensure that the information is accurate and up to date. This will require some level of data validation and audit.
    4. Run the metric
      • Use the defined calculation and source data to generate the metrics result.
    5. Record metrics results
      • Use the metrics tracking sheet to track the actual results.

    Determine initial targets

    Supporting Tool icon 3.3 1 Hour

    INPUT: Historical data/baseline data

    OUTPUT: Realistic initial target for improvement

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Service owner

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Identify an initial service objective based on one or more of the following options:

    1. Establish an initial target using historical data and trends of performance.
    2. Establish an initial target based on stakeholder-identified requirements and expectations.
    3. Run the metrics report over a defined period of time and use the baseline level of achievement to establish an initial target.

    The target may not always be a number - it could be a trend. The initial target will be changed after review with stakeholders

    Integrate with SLM and BRM processes

    Supporting Tool icon 3.4 1 Hour

    INPUT: SLM and BRM SOPs or responsibility documentations

    OUTPUT: Integrate service metrics into the SLM/BRM role

    Materials: SLM / BRM reports

    Participants: SLM, BRM, CIO, Program manager, Service manager

    The service metrics program is usually initiated, used, and maintained by the SLM and BRM functions.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Ensure that the metrics pilot is integrated with those functions by:

    1. Engaging with SLM and BRM functions/resources
      • Identify SLM and BRM resources associated with or working on the services where the metrics are being piloted
      • Obtain their feedback on the metrics/reporting
    2. Integrating with the existing reporting and meeting cycles
      • Ensure the metrics will be calculated and available for discussion at standing meetings and with existing reports
    3. Establishing the metrics review and validation cycle for these metrics
      • Confirm the review and validation period for the metrics in order to ensure they remain valuable and actionable

    Generate reports and present to stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 3.5 1 Hour

    INPUT: Identified metrics, Selected presentation format

    OUTPUT: Metrics reports that are ready for distribution

    Materials: Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Participants: BRM, SLM, CIO, Business representatives

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Once you have completed the calculation for the pilot metrics:

    1. Confirm the report style for the selected metrics (as defined in Phase 2)
    2. Generate the reporting for the pilot metrics
    3. Present the pilot metric reports to the identified BRM and SLM resources who will present the reporting to the stakeholders
    4. Gather feedback from Stakeholders on metrics - results and process
    5. Create and execute remediation plans for any actions identified from the metrics
    6. Initiate the review cycle for metrics (to ensure they retain value)

    Plan the rollout and implementation of the metrics reporting program

    Supporting Tool icon 3.6 1 Hour

    INPUT: Feedback from pilot, Services in batch

    OUTPUT: Systematic implementation of metrics

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Program manager

    Upon completion of the pilot, move to start the broader implementation of metrics across the organization:

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Identify the service metrics that you will implement. They can be selected based on multiple criteria, including:
      • Organizational area/business unit
      • Service criticality
      • Pain points
      • Stakeholder engagement (detractors, supporters)
    2. Create a rollout plan for implementation in batches, identifying expected launch timelines, owners, targeted stakeholders, and communications plans
    3. Use the implementation plan from the pilot to roll out each batch of service metrics:
      • Collect and validate data
      • Determine target(s)
      • Integrate with BRM and SLM
      • Generate and communicate reports to stakeholders

    Maintain the service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.7 1.5 Hour

    INPUT: Feedback from business stakeholders

    OUTPUT: Modification to individual metrics or to the process

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool, Metrics Development Workbook

    Participants: CIO, BRM, SLM, Program manager, Service owner

    Once service metrics and reporting become active, it is necessary to determine the review time frame for your metrics to ensure they remain useful.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Confirm and establish a review time frame with stakeholders (e.g. annually, bi-annually, after organizational or strategic changes).
    2. Meet with stakeholders by the review date to discuss the value of existing metrics and validate:
      • Whether the goals associated with the metrics are still valid
      • If the metric is still necessary
      • If there is a more effective way to present the metrics
    3. Track actions based on review outcomes and update the remediation tracking sheet.
    4. Update tracking sheet with last complete review date.

    Maintain the metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.7

    Based on the outcome of the review meeting, decide what needs to be done for each metric, using the following options:

    Add

    A new metric is required or an existing metric needs large-scale changes (example: calculation method or scope).
    Triggers metrics design as shown in phases 1 and 2.

    Change

    A minor change is required to the presentation format or data. Note: a major change in a metric would be performed through the Add option.

    Remove

    The metric is no longer required, and it needs to be removed from reporting and data gathering. A final report date for that metric should be determined.

    Maintain

    The metric is still useful and no changes are required to the metric, its measurement, or how it’s reported.

    Ensuring metrics remain valuable

    VC CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO Interview

    Reviewing the value of active metrics

    When the video conferencing service was initially implemented, it was performed as a pilot with a group of executives, and then expanded for use throughout the company. It was understood that prior to seeing the full benefit in cost reduction and increased efficiency and effectiveness, the rate of use and adoption had to be understood.

    The primary service metrics created for the service were based on tracking the number of requests for video conference meetings that were received by the IT organization. This identified the growth in use and could be used in conjunction with financial metrics related to travel to help identify the impact of the service through its growth phase.

    Once the service was adopted, this metric continued to be tracked but no longer showed growth or expanded adoption.

    The service manager was no longer sure this needed to be tracked.

    Key Activity

    The metrics around requests for video conference meetings were reviewed at the annual metrics review meeting with the business. The service manager asked if the need for the metric, the goal of tracking adoption, was still important for the business.

    The discussion identified that the adoption rate was over 80%, higher than anticipated, and that there was no value in continuing to track this metric.

    Based on the discussion, the adoption metrics were discontinued and removed from data gathering and reporting, while a success rate metric was added (how many meetings ran successfully and without issue) to ensure the ongoing value of the video conferencing service.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1

    Sample of activity 3.1 'Select pilot metrics'. Select the pilot metrics

    The onsite analyst will help the workshop group select the metrics that should be first implemented based on the urgency and impact of these metrics.

    3.2

    Sample of activity 3.2 'Collect and validate data'. Gather data and set initial targets

    The analyst will help the group create a process to gather data, measure baselines, and set initial targets.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    3.5

    Sample of activity 3.5 'Generate reports and present to stakeholders'. Generate the reports and validate with stakeholders

    The Info-Tech analyst will help the group establish a process to receive feedback from the business stakeholders once the report is generated.

    3.6

    Sample of activity 3.6 'Plan the rollout and implementation of the metrics reporting program'. Implement the service metrics program

    The analyst will facilitate a discussion on how to implement the metrics program across the organization.

    3.7

    Sample of activity 3.7 'Maintain the service metrics'. Track and maintain the metrics program

    Set up a mechanism to ensure the success of the metrics program by assessing process adherence and process validity.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.

    Insight 2

    Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.

    Insight 3

    Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors that have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Follow a methodology to identify metrics that are derived from business objectives.
    • Understand the proper presentation format based on stakeholder needs for information.
    • Establish a process to ensure the metrics provided will continue to provide value and aid decision making.

    Processes Optimized

    • Metrics presentation to business stakeholders
    • Metrics maintenance and tracking

    Deliverables Completed

    • Metrics Development Workbook
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    • Metrics Tracking Tool

    Research contributors and experts

    Name Organization
    Joe Evers Joe Evers Consulting
    Glen Notman Associate Partner, Citihub
    David Parker Client Program Manager, eHealth Ontario
    Marianne Doran Collins CIO, The CIO-Suite, LLC
    Chris Kalbfleisch Manager, Service Management, eHealth Ontario
    Joshua Klingenberg BHP Billiton Canada Inc.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Stock image of a menu. Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog
    The user-facing service catalog is the go-to place for IT service-related information.
    Stock image of a laptop keyboard. Unleash the True Value of IT by Transforming Into a Service Provider
    Earn your seat at the table and influence business strategy by becoming an IT service provider.

    Bibliography

    Pollock, Bill. “Service Benchmarking and Measurement: Using Metrics to Drive Customer Satisfaction and Profits.” Aberdeen Group. June 2009. http://722consulting.com/ServiceBenchmarkingandMeasurement.pdf

    PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.” RMI Discussion. LinkedIn SlideShare. September 2015. http://www.slideshare.net/AnandRaoPwC/mega-trends-and-implications-to-retirement

    PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants: Who will be the industry’s Amazon.com?” Health Research Institute. April 2014. https://www.pwc.com/us/en/health-industries/healthcare-new-entrants/assets/pwc-hri-new-entrant-chart-pack-v3.pdf

    PwC. “Northern Lights: Where are we now?” PwC Blogs. 2012. http://pwc.blogs.com/files/12.09.06---northern-lights-2--summary.pdf

    PwC. “PwC’s key performance indicators

    Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}423|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity

    Having shifted operations almost overnight to a remote work environment, and with the crisis management phase of the COVID-19 pandemic winding down, IT leaders and organizations are faced with the following issues:

    • A reduced degree of control with respect to the organization’s assets.
    • Increased presence of unapproved workaround methods, including applications and devices not secured by the organization.
    • Pressure to resume operations at pre-pandemic cadence while still operating in recovery mode.
    • An anticipated game plan for restarting the organization’s project activities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    An organization’s shift back toward the pre-pandemic state cannot be carried out in isolation. Things have changed. Budgets, resource availability, priorities, etc., will not be the same as they were in early March. Organizations must ensure that all departments work collaboratively to support office repatriation. IT must quickly identify the must-dos to allow safe return to the office, while prioritizing tasks relating to the repopulation of employees, technical assets, and operational workloads via an informed and streamlined roadmap.

    As employees return to the office, PMO and portfolio leaders must sift through unclear requirements and come up with a game plan to resume project activities mid-pandemic. You need to develop an approach, and fast.

    Impact and Result

    Responsibly resume IT operations in the office:

    • Evaluate risk tolerance
    • Prepare to repatriate people to the office
    • Prepare to repatriate assets to the office
    • Prepare to repatriate workloads to the office
    • Prioritize your tasks and build your roadmap

    Quickly restart the engine of your PPM:

    • Restarting the engine of the project portfolio won’t be as simple as turning a key and hitting the gas. The right path forward will differ for every project portfolio practice.
    • Therefore, in this publication we put forth a multi-pass approach that PMO and portfolio managers can follow depending on their unique situations and needs.
    • Each approach is accompanied by a checklist and recommendations for next steps to get you on right path fast.

    Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    As the post-pandemic landscape begins to take shape, ensure that IT can effectively prepare and support your employees as they move back to the office.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Evaluate your new risk tolerance

    Identify the new risk landscape and risk tolerance for your organization post-pandemic. Determine how this may impact the second wave of pandemic transition tasks.

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 1: Evaluate Your New Risk Tolerance
    • Resume Operations Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    2. Repatriate people to the office

    Prepare to return your employees to the office. Ensure that IT takes into account the health and safety of employees, while creating an efficient and sustainable working environment

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 2: Repatriate People to the Office
    • Mid-Pandemic IT Prioritization Tool

    3. Repatriate assets to the office

    Prepare the organization's assets for return to the office. Ensure that IT takes into account the off-license purchases and new additions to the hardware family that took place during the pandemic response and facilitates a secure reintegration to the workplace.

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 3: Repatriate Assets to the Office

    4. Repatriate workloads to the office

    Prepare and position IT to support workloads in order to streamline office reintegration. This may include leveraging pre-existing solutions in different ways and providing additional workstreams to support employee processes.

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 4: Repatriate Workloads to the Office

    5. Prioritize your tasks and build the roadmap

    Once you've identified IT's supporting tasks, it's time to prioritize. This phase walks through the activity of prioritizing based on cost/effort, alignment to business, and security risk reduction weightings. The result is an operational action plan for resuming office life.

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 5: Prioritize Your Tasks and Build the Roadmap

    6. Restart the engine of your project portfolio

    Restarting the engine of the project portfolio mid-pandemic won’t be as simple as turning a key and hitting the gas. Use this concise research to find the right path forward for your organization.

    • Restart the Engine of Your Project Portfolio
    [infographic]

    Why learn from Tymans Group?

    The TY classes contain in-depth learning material based on over 30 years of experience in IT Operations and Resilience.

    You receive the techniques, tips, tricks, and "professional secrets" you need to succeed in your resilience journey.

    Why would I share "secrets?"

    Because over time, you will find that "secrets" are just manifested experiences.

    What do I mean by that? Gordon Ramsay, who was born in 1966 like me, decided to focus on his culinary education at age 19. According to his Wikipedia page, that was a complete accident. (His Wikipedia page is a hoot to read, by the way.) And he has nothing to prove anymore. His experience in his field speaks for itself.

    I kept studying in my original direction for just one year longer, but by 21, I founded my first company in Belgium in 1987, in the publishing industry. This was extended by IT experiences in various sectors, like international publishing and hospitality, culminating in IT for high-velocity international financial markets and insurance.

    See, "secrets" are a great way to get you to sign up for some "guru" program that will "tell all!" Don't fall for it, especially if the person is too young to have significant experience.

    There are no "secrets." There is only experience and 'wisdom." And that last one only comes with age.

    If I were in my 20s, 30s, or 40s, there is no chance I would share my core experiences with anyone who could become my competitor. At that moment, I'm building my own credibility and my own career. I like helping people, but not to the extent that it will hurt my prospects. 

    And that is my second lesson: be always honest about your intentions. Yes, always. 

    At the current point in my career, "hurting my prospects" is less important. Yes, I still need to make a living, and in another post, I will explain more about that. Here, I feel it is important to share my knowledge and experience with the next people who will take my place in the day-to-day operations of medium and large corporations. And that is worth something. Hence, "sharing my secrets."

    Gert

    Why learn about resilience from us?

    This is a great opportunity to learn from my 30+ years of resilience experience. TY's Gert experienced 9/11 in New York, and he was part of the Lehman Disaster Recovery team that brought the company back within one (one!) week of the terrorist attack.

    He also went through the London Bombings of 2005 and the 2008 financial crisis, which required fast incident responses, the Covid 2020 issues, and all that entailed. Not to mention that Gert was part of the Tokyo office disaster response team as early as 1998, ensuring that Salomon was protected from earthquakes and floods in Japan.

    Gert was part of the solution (for his clients) to several further global events, like the admittedly technical log4J event in 2021, the 2024 Crowdstrike event, and many other local IT incidents, to ensure that clients could continue using the services they needed at that time.

    Beyond the large corporate world, we helped several small local businesses improve their IT resilience with better cloud storage and security solutions. 

    These solutions and ways of thinking work for any business, large or small.

    The TY team

    Explore our resilience solutions.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}425|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $62,500 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
    • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
    • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive AWS bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
    • Often there are no consequences for over architecting or overspending on AWS.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their AWS spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

    Impact and Result

    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish visibility.
    • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build cost accountability framework

    Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

    • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
    • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
    • Cloud Cost Management Policy
    • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

    2. Establish visibility

    Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

    • Service Cost Cheat Sheet

    3. Define processes and procedures

    Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define processes for right-sizing, and define processes for purchasing commitment discounts.

    • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
    • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

    4. Build implementation plan

    Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

    • Cloud Cost Management Task List

    Infographic

    Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build Cost Accountability Framework

    The Purpose

    Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles and responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Chargeback/showback model to provide clear accountability for costs.

    Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current state

    1.2 Determine cloud cost model

    1.3 Define roles and responsibilities

    Outputs

    Cloud cost management capability assessment

    Cloud cost model

    Roles and responsibilities

    2 Establish Visibility

    The Purpose

    Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop architectural patterns

    2.2 Define dashboards and reports

    2.3 Define account structure

    2.4 Document tagging requirements

    Outputs

    Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

    Dashboards and reports

    Account structure

    Tagging scheme

    3 Define Processes and Procedures

    The Purpose

    Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved capability of reducing costs.

    Documented processes and procedures for continuous improvement.

    Activities

    3.1 Establish governance for tagging

    3.2 Establish governance for costs

    3.3 Define right-sizing process

    3.4 Define purchasing process

    3.5 Define notification and alerts

    Outputs

    Tagging policy

    Cost control policy

    Right-sizing process

    Commitment purchasing process

    Notifications and Alerts

    4 Build Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Document next steps to implement and improve cloud cost management program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

    Activities

    4.1 Document process interaction changes

    4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

    4.3 Build implementation roadmap

    4.4 Build communication plan

    Outputs

    Changes to process interactions

    Cloud cost program KPIs

    Implementation roadmap

    Communication plan

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}493|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • In organizations where technical support is viewed as non-strategic, many see outsourcing as a cost-effective way to provide this support. However, outsourced projects often fall short of their goals in terms of cost savings and the quality of support. 
    • Significant administrative work and up-front costs are required to outsource the service desk, and poor planning often results in project failure and a decrease of end-user satisfaction.
    • A complete turnover of the service desk can result in lost knowledge and control over processes, and organizations without an exit strategy can struggle to bring their service desk back in house and return the confidence of end users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Outsourcing is easy. Realizing the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.
    • You don’t need to standardize before you outsource, but you still need to conduct your due diligence. If you outsource without thinking about how you want the future to work, you will likely be unsatisfied with the result.
    • If cost is your only driver for outsourcing, understand that it comes at a cost. Customer service quality will likely be less, and your outsourcer may not add on frills such as Continual Improvement. Be careful that your specialists don’t end up spending more time working on incidents and service requests.

    Impact and Result

    • First decide if outsourcing is the correct step; there may be more preliminary work to do beforehand.
    • Assess requirements and make necessary adjustments before developing an outsource RFP.
    • Clearly define the project and produce an RFP to provide to vendors.
    • Plan for long-term success, not short-term gain.
    • Prepare to retain some of the higher-level service desk work.

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk Deck – A step-by-step document to walk you through building a strategy for efficient service desk outsourcing.

    This storyboard will help you craft a project charter, create an RFP, and outline strategies to build a long-term relationship with the vendor.

    • Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk – Storyboard
    • Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    2. Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template and Requirements Library – Best-of-breed templates to help you determine processes and build a strategy to outsource them.

    These templates will help you determine your service desk requirements and document your proposed service desk outsourcing strategy.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template

    3. Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template – A structured document to help you outline expectations and communicate requirements to managed service providers.

    This template will allow you to create a detailed RFP for your outsourcing agreement, document the statement of work, provide service overview, record exit conditions, and document licensing model and estimated pricing.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    4. Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template and Scoring Tool – Materials to help you conduct efficient briefings and select the best vendor to fulfill your service desk requirements.

    Use the Reference Interview Template to outline a list of questions for interviewing current/previous customers of your candidate vendors. These interviews will help you with unbiased vendor scoring. The RFP Vendor Scoring Tool will help you facilitate vendor briefings with your list of questions and score candidate vendors efficiently through quantifying evaluations.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template
    • Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Scoring Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    Prepare your RFP for long-term success, not short-term gains

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    Prepare your RFP for long-term success, not short-term gains

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Outsource services with your eyes wide open.

    Cost reduction has traditionally been an incentive for outsourcing the service desk. This is especially the case for organizations that don't have minimal processes in place and those that need resources and skills to fill gaps.

    Although cost reduction is usually the main reason to outsource the service desk, in most cases service desk outsourcing increases the cost in a short run. But without a proper model, you will only outsource your problems rather than solving them. A successful outsourcing strategy follows a comprehensive plan that defines objectives, assigns accountabilities, and sets expectations for service delivery prior to vendor outreach.

    For outsourcing the service desk, you should plan ahead, work as a group, define requirements, prepare a strong RFP, and contemplate tension metrics to ensure continual improvement. As you build a project charter to outline your strategy for outsourcing your IT services, ensure you focus on better customer service instead of cost optimization. Ensure that the outsourcer can support your demands, considering your long-term achievement.

    Think about outsourcing like a marriage deed. Take into account building a good relationship before beginning the contract, ensure to include expectations in the agreement, and make it possible to exit the agreement if expectations are not satisfied or service improvement is not achieved.

    This is a picture of Mahmoud Ramin, PhD, Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Mahmoud Ramin, PhD
    Senior Research Analyst
    Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    In organizations where technical support is viewed as non-strategic, many see outsourcing as a cost-effective way to provide this support. However, outsourcing projects often fall short of their goals in terms of cost savings and quality of support.

    Common Obstacles

    Significant administrative work and up-front costs are required to outsource the service desk, and poor planning often results in project failure and the decrease of end-user satisfaction.

    A complete turnover of the service desk can result in lost knowledge and control over processes, and organizations without an exit strategy can struggle to bring their service desk back in house and reestablish the confidence of end users.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • First decide if outsourcing is the correct step; there may be more preliminary work to do beforehand.
    • Assess requirements and make necessary adjustments before developing an outsource RFP.
    • Clearly define the project and produce an RFP to provide to vendors.
    • Plan for long-term success, not short-term gains.
    • Prepare to retain some of the higher-level service desk work.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outsourcing is easy. Realizing all of the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that need to:

    • Outsource the service desk or portions of service management to improve service delivery.
    • Improve and repatriate existing outsourcing outcomes by becoming more engaged in the management of the function. Regular reviews of performance metrics, staffing, escalation, knowledge base content, and customer satisfaction are critical.
    • Understand the impact that outsourcing would have on the service desk.
    • Understand the potential benefits that outsourcing can bring to the organization.

    This image contains a donut chart with the following information: Salaries and Benefits - 68.50%; Technology - 9.30%; Office Space and Facilities Expense - 14.90%; Travel, Training, and Office Supplies - 7.30%

    Source: HDI 2017

    About 68.5% of the service desk fund is allocated to agent salaries, while only 9.3% of the service desk fund is spent on technology. The high ratio of salaries and expenses over other expense drives organizations to outsource their service desk without taking other considerations into account.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The outsourcing contract must preserve your control, possession, and ownership of the intellectual property involved in the service desk operation. From the beginning of the process, repatriation should be viewed as a possibility and preserved as a capability.

    Your challenge

    This research helps organizations who would like to achieve these goals:

    • Determine objectives and requirements to outsource the service desk.
    • Develop a project charter and build an outsourcing strategy to efficiently define processes to reduce risk of failure.
    • Build an outsourcing RFP and conduct interviews to identify the best candidate for service delivery.
    • Build a long-term relationship with an outsourcing vendor, making sure the vendor is able to satisfy all requirements.
    • Include a continual improvement plan in the outsourcing strategy and contain the option upon service delivery dissatisfaction.

    New hires require between 10 and 80 hours of training (Forward Bpo Inc., 2019).

    A benchmark study by Zendesk from 45,000 companies reveals that timely resolution of issues and 24/7 service are the biggest factors in customer service experience.

    This image contains a bar graph with the following data: Timely issue resolution; 24/7 support; Friendly agent; Desired contact method; Not to repeat info; Proactive support; Self-serve; Call back; Rewards & freebies

    These factors push many businesses to consider service desk outsourcing to vendors that have capabilities to fulfill such requirements.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • In most cases, organizations must perform significant administrative work before they can make a move. Those that fail to properly prepare impede a smooth transition, the success of the vendor, and the ability to repatriate.
    • Successful outsourcing comes from the recognition that an organization is experiencing complete turnover of its service desk staff. These organizations engage the vendor to transition knowledge and process to ensure continuity of quality.
    • IT realizes the most profound hidden costs of outsourcing when the rate of ticket escalation increases, diminishing the capacity of senior technical staff for strategic project work.

    Many organizations may not get the value they expect from outsourcing in their first year.

    Common Reasons:

    • Overall lack of due diligence in the outsourcing process
    • Unsuitable or unclear service transition plan
    • Poor service provider selection and management

    Poor transition planning results in delayed benefits and a poor relationship with your outsourcing service provider. A poor relationship with your service provider results in poor communication and knowledge transfer.

    Key components of a successful plan:

    1. Determine goals and identify requirements before developing an RFP.
    2. Finalize your outsourcing project charter and get ready for vendor evaluation.
    3. Assess and select the most appropriate provider; manage the transition and vendor relationship.

    Outsource the service desk properly, and you could see a wide range of benefits

    Service Desk Outsourcing: Ability to scale up/down; Reduce fixed costs; Refocus IT efforts on core activities; Access to up-to-date technology; Adhere to  ITSM best practices; Increased process optimization; Focus IT efforts on advanced expertise; Reframe to shift-left;

    Info-Tech Insight

    In your service desk outsourcing strategy, rethink downsizing first-level IT service staff. This can be an opportunity to reassign resources to more valuable roles, such as asset management, development or project backlog. Your current service desk staff are most likely familiar with the current technology, processes, and regulations within IT. Consider the ways to better use your existing resources before reducing headcount.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Determine Goals

    Conduct activities in the blueprint to pinpoint your current challenges with the service desk and find out objectives to outsource customer service.

    Define Requirements

    You need to be clear about the processes that will be outsourced. Considering your objectives, we'll help you discover the processes to outsource, to help you achieve your goals.

    Develop RFP

    Your expectations should be documented in a formal proposal to help vendors provide solid information about how they will satisfy your requirements and what their plan is.

    Build Long-Term Relationship

    Make sure to plan for continual improvement by setting expectations, tracking the services with proper metrics, and using efficient communication with the provider. Think about the rainy day and include exit conditions for ending the relationship if needed.

    Info-Tech's methodology

    1. Define the Goal

    2. Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    3. Develop an RFP and Make a Long-Term Relationship

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    Phase Outcomes

    Service Desk Outsourcing Vision and Goals

    Service Desk Processes to Outsource

    Outsourcing Roles and Responsibilities

    Outsourcing Risks and Constraints

    Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Service Desk Outsourcing RFP

    Continual Improvement Plan

    Exit Strategy

    This is an image of the strategy which you will use to build your requirements for outsourcing the service desk.  it includes: 1. Define the Goal; 2. Design an Outsourcing Strategy; 3. Develop RFP and long-term relationship.

    Insight summary

    Focus on value

    Outsourcing is easy. Realizing all of the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.

    Define outsourcing requirements

    You don't need to standardize before you outsource, but you still need to conduct your due diligence. If you outsource without thinking about how you want the future to work, you will likely be unsatisfied with the result.

    Don't focus on cost

    If cost is your only driver for outsourcing, understand that there will be other challenges. Customer service quality will likely be less, and your outsourcer may not add on frills such as Continual Improvement. Be careful that your specialists don't end up spending more time working on incidents and service requests.

    Emphasize on customer service

    A bad outsourcer relationship will result in low business satisfaction with IT overall. The service desk is the face of IT, and if users are dissatisfied with the service desk, then they are much likelier to be dissatisfied with IT overall.

    Vendors are not magicians

    They have standards in place to help them succeed. Determine ITSM best practices, define your requirements, and adjust process workflows accordingly. Your staff and end users will have a much easier transition once outsourcing proceeds.

    Plan ahead to guarantee success

    Identify outsourcing goals, plan for service and system integrations, document standard incidents and requests, and track tension metrics to make sure the vendor does the work efficiently. Aim for building a long-term relationship but contemplate potential exit strategy.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    Use this library to guide you through processes to outsource

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Use this template to craft a proposal for outsourcing your service desk

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template

    Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template

    Use this template to verify vendor claims on service delivery with pervious or current customers

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Service Desk Outsourcing Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Use this tool to evaluate RFP submissions

    Key deliverable:

    This is a screenshot from the key deliverable, Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Document your project scope and outsourcing strategy in this template to organize the project for efficient resource and requirement allocation

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Determine current challenges with the service desk and identify services to outsource.
    • Make the project charter for an efficient outsourcing strategy that will lead to higher satisfaction from IT.
    • Select the best outsource vendor that will satisfy most of the identified requirements.
    • Reduce the risk of project failure with efficient planning.
    • Understand potential feasibility of service desk outsourcing and its possible impact on business satisfaction.
    • Improve end-user satisfaction through a better service delivery.
    • Conduct more efficient resource allocation with outsourcing customer service.
    • Develop a long-term relationship between the enterprise and vendor through a continual improvement plan.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Call #1: Scope your specific challenges and objectives

    Call #3: Identify project stakeholders, and potential risks and constraints

    Call #5: Create a detailed RFP

    Call #6: Identify strategy risks.

    Call #2: Assess outsourcing feasibility and processes to outsourceCall #4: Create a list of metrics to ensure efficient reporting

    Call #7: Prepare for vendor briefing and scoring each vendor

    Call #8: Build a communication plan

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 10 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Define the goal

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analysis outsourcing objectives
    • Assess outsourcing feasibility
    • Identify services and processes to outsource

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Leadership

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 1.1

    Identify goals and objectives

    Activities

    1.1.1 Find out why you want to outsource your service desk

    1.1.2 Document the benefits of outsourcing your service desk

    1.1.3 Identify your outsourcing vision and goals

    1.1.4 Prioritize service desk outsourcing goals to help structure your mission statement

    1.1.5 Craft a mission statement that demonstrates your decision to reach your outsourcing objectives

    Define the goal

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of strengths and weaknesses of the service desk
    • Challenges with the service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service desk outsourcing vision and goals
    • Benefits of outsourcing the service desk
    • Mission statement

    What is your rationale to outsource the service desk?

    Potential benefits of outsourcing the service desk:

    • Bring in the expertise and knowledge to manage tickets according to best-practice guidelines
    • Reduce the timeline to response and resolution
    • Improve IT productivity
    • Enhance IT services and improve performance
    • Augment relationship between IT and business through service-level improvement
    • Free up the internal team and focus IT on complex projects and higher priority tasks
    • Speed up service desk optimization
    • Improve end-user satisfaction through efficient IT services
    • Reduce impact of incidents through effective incident management
    • Increase service consistency via turnover reduction
    • Expand coverage hour and access points
    • Expand languages to service different geographical areas

    1.1.1 Find out why you want to outsource your service desk

    1 hour

    Service desk is the face of IT. Service desk improvement increases IT efficiency, lowers operation costs, and enhances business satisfaction.

    Common challenges that result in deciding to outsource the service desk are:

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Team

    ChallengeExample
    Lack of tier 1 supportStartup does not have a dedicated service desk to handle incidents and provide services to end users.
    Inefficient ticket handlingMTTR is very high and end users are frustrated with their issues not getting solved quickly. Even if they call service desk, they are put on hold for a long time. Due to these inefficiencies, their daily work is greatly impacted.
    Restricted service hoursCompany headquartered in Texas does not have resources to provide 24/7 IT service. When users in the East Asia branch have a laptop issue, they must wait until the next day to get response from IT. This has diminished their satisfaction.
    Restricted languagesCompany X is headquartered in New York. An end user not fluent in English from Madrid calls in for support. It takes five minutes for the agent to understand the issue and log a ticket.
    Ticket backlogIT is in firefighting mode, very busy with taking care of critical incidents and requests from upper management. Almost no one is committed to the SLA because of their limited availability.

    Brainstorm your challenges with the service desk. Why have you decided to outsource your service desk? Use the above table as a sample.

    1.1.2 Document benefits of outsourcing your service desk

    1 hour

    1. Review the challenges with your current service desk identified in activity 1.1.1.
    2. Discuss possible ways to tackle these challenges. Be specific and determine ways to resolve these issues if you were to do it internally.
    3. Determine potential benefits of outsourcing the service desk to IT, business, and end users.
    4. For each benefit, describe dependencies. For instance, to reduce the number of direct calls (benefit), users should have access to service desk as a single point of contact (dependency).
    5. Document this activity in the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Input

    • List of challenges with the current service desk from activity 1.1.1

    Output

    • Benefits of outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Managers

    Why should you not consider cost reduction as a primary incentive to outsourcing the service desk?

    Assume that some of the costs will not go away with outsourcing

    When you outsource, the vendor's staff tend to gradually become less effective as:

    • They are managed by metrics to reduce costs by escalating sooner, reducing talk time, and proposing questionable solutions.
    • Turnover results in new employees that get insufficient training.

    You must actively manage the vendor to identify and resolve these issues. Many organizations find that service desk management takes more time after they outsource.

    You need to keep spending on service desk management, and you may not get away from technology infrastructure spending.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In their first year, almost 42% of Info-Tech's clients do not get the real value of outsourcing services as expected. This iss primarily because of misalignment of organizational goals with outcomes of the outsourced services.

    Consider the hidden costs of outsourcing

    Expected Costs

    Unexpected Costs

    Example

    Transition CostsSeverance and staff retention
    • Cost to adapt to vendor standards
    • Training cost of vendor staff
    • Lost productivity
    • Format for requirements
    • Training report developers to work with vendor systems
    FeesPrice of the engagement
    • Extra fees for additional services
    • Extra charges for uploading data to cloud storage
    • Portal access
    Management CostsTime directing account
    • Time directly managing vendor staff
    • Checking deliverables for errors
    • Disputing penalty amounts
    Rework CostsDowntime, defect rate, etc. (quality metrics measured in SLAs)
    • Time spent adapting deliverables for unanticipated requirements
    • Time spent assuring the quality and usefulness of deliverables
    • Completing quality assurance and updating knowledgebase articles
    • Adapting reporting for presentation to stakeholders

    Determine strategies to avoid each hidden cost

    Costs related to transitioning into the engagementAdapting to standards and training costs

    Adapting to standards: Define the process improvements you will need to work with each potential vendor.

    Training costs for vendor staff: Reduce training costs by keeping the same vendor staff on all of your projects.

    Fee-related costs

    Fees for additional services (that you thought were included)

    Carefully review each proposed statement of work to identify and reduce extra fees. Understand why extra fees occur in the SLA, the contract, and the proposed statement of work, and take steps to protect yourself and the vendor.

    Management-related costs

    Direct management of vendor staff and dispute resolution

    Direct management of vendor staff: Avoid excessive management costs by defining a two-tier management structure on both sides of the engagement.

    Time spent resolving disputes: Avoid prolonged resolution costs by defining terms of divorce for the engagement up front.

    Rework costs

    Unanticipated requirements and integration with existing systems

    Unanticipated requirements: Use a two-stage process to define requirements, starting with business people and then with review by technical staff.

    Integration with existing systems: Obtain a commitment from vendors that deliverables will conform to standards at points of integration with your systems.

    Your outsourcing strategy should address the reasons you decided to outsource

    A clear vision of strategic objectives prior to entering an outsourcing agreement will allow you to clearly communicate these objectives to the Managed Service Provider (MSP) and use them as a contracted basis for the relationship.

    • Define the business' overall approach to outsourcing along with the priorities, rules, and principles that will drive the outsourcing strategy and every subsequent outsourcing decision and activity.
    • Define specific business, service, and technical goals for the outsourcing project and relevant measures of success.

    "People often don't have a clear direction around what they're trying to accomplish. The strategic goals should be documented. Is this a cost-savings exercise? Is it because you're deficient in one area? Is it because you don't have the tools or expertise to run the service desk yourself? Figure out what problem you're trying to solve by outsourcing, then build your strategy around that.
    – Jeremy Gagne, Application Support Delivery Manager, Allegis Group

    Most organizations are driven to consider outsourcing their service desk hoping to improve the following:

    • Ability to scale (train people and acquire skills)
    • Focus on core competencies
    • Decrease capital costs
    • Access latest technology without large investment
    • Resolve labor force constraints
    • Gain access to special expertise without paying a full salary
    • Save money overall

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use your goals and objectives as a management tool. Clearly outline your desired project outcomes to both your in-house team and the vendor during implementation and monitoring. It will allow a common ground to unite both parties as the project progresses.

    Mitigate pitfalls that lay in the way of desired outcomes of outsourcing

    Desired outcomePitfalls to overcome
    IT can focus on core competencies and strategic initiatives rather than break-fix tasks.Escalation to second- and third-level support usually increases when the first level has been outsourced. Outsourcers will have less experience with your typical incidents and will give up on trying to solve some issues more quickly than your internal level-one staff.
    Low outsourcing costs compared to the costs needed to employ internal employees in the same role. Due to lack of incentive to decrease ticket volume, costs are likely to increase. As a result, organizations often find themselves paying more overall for an outsourced service desk than if they had a few dedicated IT service desk employees in-house.
    Improved employee morale as a result of being able to focus on more interesting tasks.Management often expects existing employee morale to increase as a result of shifting their focus to core and strategic tasks, but the fear of diminished job security often spreads to the remaining non-level-one employees.

    1.1.3 Identify outsourcing vision and goals

    Identify the goals and objectives of outsourcing to inform your strategy.

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Team

    1-2 hours

    1. Meet with key business stakeholders and the service desk staff who were involved in the decision to outsource.
    2. As a group, review the results from activity 1.1.1 (challenges with current service desk operations) and identify the goals and objectives of the outsourcing initiative.
    3. Determine the key performance indicator (KPI) for each goal.
    4. Identify the impacted stakeholder/s for each goal.
    5. Discuss checkpoint schedule for each goal to make sure the list stays updated.

    Use the sample table as a starting point:

    1. Document your table in the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.
    IDGoal DescriptionKPIImpacted StakeholdersCheckpoint Schedule
    1Provide capacity to take calls outside of current service desk work hours
    • Decreased in time to response
    • Decreased time to resolve
    • IT Entire organization
    • Every month
    2Take calls in different languages
    • Improved service delivery in different geographical regions
    • Improved end-user satisfaction
    • End users
    • Every month
    3Provide field support at remote sites with no IT presence without having to fly out an employee
    • 40% faster incident resolution and request fulfillment
    • Entire organization
    • Every month
    4Improve ease of management by vendor helping with managing and optimizing service desk tasks
    • Improved service management efficiency
    • Entire organization
    • Every 3 months

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Evaluate organizational demographics to assess outsourcing rationale

    The size, complexity, and maturity of your organization are good indicators of service desk direction with regards to outsourcing.

    Organization Size

    • As more devices, applications, systems, and users are added to the mix, vendor costs will increase but their ability to meet business needs will decrease.
    • Small organizations are often either rejected by vendors for being too small or locked into a contract that is overkill for their actual needs (and budget).

    Complexity

    • Highly customized environments and organizations with specialized applications or stringent regulatory requirements are very difficult to outsource for a reasonable cost and acceptable quality.
    • In these cases, the vendor is required to train skilled support or ends up escalating more tickets back to second- and third-level support.

    Requirements

    • Organizations looking to outsource must have defined outsourcing requirements before looking at vendors.
    • Without a requirement assessment, the vendor won't have guidelines to follow and you won't be able to measure their adherence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Although less adherence to service desk best practices can be one of the main incentives to outsourcing the service desk, IT should have minimal processes in place to be able to set expectations with targeting vendors.

    1.1.4 Prioritize service desk outsourcing goals to help structure mission statement

    0.5-1 hour

    The evaluation process for outsourcing the service desk should be done very carefully. Project leaders should make sure they won't panic internal resources and impact their performance through the transition period.

    If the outsourcing process is rushed, it will result in poor evaluation, inefficient decision making, and project failure.

    1. Refer to results in activity 1.1.3. Discuss the service desk outsourcing goals once again.
    2. Brainstorm the most important objectives. Use sticky notes to prioritize the items from the most important to the least important.
    3. Edit the order accordingly.

    Input

    • Project goals from activity 1.1.3

    Output

    • Prioritized list of outsourcing goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Managers

    Download the Project Charter Template

    1.1.5 Craft a mission statement that demonstrates your decision to reach outsourcing objectives

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager

    0.5-1 hour

    The IT mission statement specifies the function's purpose or reason for being. The mission should guide each day's activities and decisions. The mission statement should use simple and concise terminology and speak loudly and clearly, generating enthusiasm for the organization.

    Strong IT mission statements:

    • Articulate the IT function's purpose and reason for existence
    • Describe what the IT function does to achieve its vision
    • Define the customers of the IT function
    • Can be described as:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable
      • Concise

    Sample mission statements:

    • To help fulfill organizational goals, IT has decided to empower business stakeholders with outsourcing the service desk.
    • To support efficient IT service provision, better collaboration, and effective communication, [Company Name] has decided to outsource the service desk.
    • [Company Name] plans to outsource the service desk so it can identify bottlenecks and inefficiencies with current service desk processes and enable [Company Name] to innovate and support business growth.
    • Considering the goals and benefits determined in the previous activities, outline a mission statement.
    • Document your outsourcing mission statement in the "Project Overview" section of the Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Step 1.2

    Assess outsourcing feasibility

    Activities

    1.2.1 Create a baseline of customer experience

    1.2.2 Identify service desk processes to outsource

    1.2.3 Design an outsourcing decision matrix for service desk processes and services

    1.2.4 Discuss if you need to outsource only service desk or if additional services would benefit from outsourcing too

    Define the goal

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of service desk tasks and responsibilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • End-user satisfaction with the service desk
    • List of processes and services to outsource

    1.2.1 Create a baseline of customer experience

    Solicit targeted department feedback on IT's core service capabilities, communications, and business enablement from end users. Use this feedback to assess end-user satisfaction with each service, broken down by department and seniority level.

    1. Complete an end-user satisfaction survey to define the current state of your IT services, including service desk (timeliness and effectiveness). With Info-Tech's end-user satisfaction program, an analyst will help you set up the diagnostic and will go through the report with you.
    2. Evaluate survey results.
    3. Communicate survey results with team leads and discuss the satisfaction rates and comments of the end users.
    4. Schedule to launch another survey one year after outsourcing the service desk.
    5. Your results will be compared to the following year's results to analyze the overall success/failure of your outsourcing project.

    A decrease of business and end-user satisfaction is a big drive to outsourcing the service desk. Conduct a customer service survey to discover your end-user experience prior to and after outsourcing the service desk.

    Don't get caught believing common misconceptions: outsourcing doesn't mean sending away all the work

    First-time outsourcers often assume they are transferring most of the operations over to the vendor, but this is often not the case.

    1. Management of performance, SLAs, and customer satisfaction remain the responsibility of your organization.
    2. Service desk outsource vendors provide first-line response. This includes answering the phones, troubleshooting simple problems, and redirecting requests that are more complex.
    3. The vendor is often able to provide specialized support for standard applications (and for customized applications if you'll pay for it). However, the desktop support still needs someone onsite, and that service is very expensive to outsource.
    4. Tickets that are focused on custom applications and require specialized or advanced support are escalated back to your organization's second- and third-level support teams.

    Switching to a vendor won't necessarily improve your service desk maturity

    You should have minimal requirements before moving.

    Whether managing in-house or outsourcing, it is your job to ensure core issues have been clarified, processes defined, and standards maintained. If your processes are ad-hoc or non-existent right now, outsourcing won't fix them.

    You must have the following in place before looking to outsource:

    • Defined reporting needs and plans
    • Formalized skill-set requirements
    • Problem management and escalation guidelines
    • Ticket templates and classification rules
    • Workflow details
    • Knowledge base standards

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you expect your problems to disappear with outsourcing, they might just get worse.

    Define long-term requirements

    Anticipate growth throughout the lifecycle of your outsourcing contract and build that into the RFP

    • Most outsourcing agreements typically last three to five years. In that time, you risk outgrowing your service provider by neglecting to define your long-term service desk requirements.
    • Outgrowing your vendor before your contract ends can be expensive due to high switching costs. Managing multiple vendors can also be problematic.
    • It is crucial to define your service desk requirements before developing a request for proposal to make sure the service you select can meet your organization's needs.
    • Make sure that the business is involved in this planning stage, as the goals of IT need to scale with the growth strategy of the business. You may select a vendor with no additional capacity despite the fact that your organization has a major expansion planned to begin two years from now. Assessing future requirements also allows you to culture match with the vendor. If your outlooks and practices are similar, the match will likely click.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't select a vendor for what your company is today – select a vendor for what your company will be years from now. Define your future service desk requirements in addition to your current requirements and leave room for growth and development.

    You can't outsource everything

    Manage the things that stay in-house well or suffer the consequences.

    "You can't outsource management; you can only outsource supervision." Barry Cousins, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    What can be the vendor in charge of?

    What stays in-house?

    • Call and email answering
    • Ongoing daily ticket creation and tracking
    • Tier 1 support
    • Internal escalation to Level 2 support
    • External escalation to specialized Level 2 and Level 3 support
    • Knowledge base article creation
    • Service desk-related hardware acquisition and maintenance
    • Service desk software acquisition and maintenance
    • Security and access management
    • Disaster recovery
    • Staff acquisition
    • Facilities
    • The role of the Service Desk Manager
    • Skills and training standards
    • Document standardization
    • Knowledge base quality assurance and documentation standardization
    • Self-service maintenance, promotion, and ownership
    • Short and long-term tracking of vendor performance

    Info-Tech Insight

    The need for a Service Desk Manager does not go away when you outsource. In fact, the need becomes even stronger and never diminishes.

    Assess current service desk processes before outsourcing

    Process standards with areas such as documentation, workflow, and ticket escalation should be in place before the decision to outsource has been made.

    Every effective service desk has a clear definition of the services that they are performing for the end user. You can't provide a service without knowing what the services are.

    MSPs typically have their own set of standards and processes in play. If your service desk is not at a similar level of maturity, outsourcing will not be pleasant.

    Make sure that your metrics are reported consistently and that they tell a story.

    "Establish baseline before outsourcing. Those organizations that don't have enough service desk maturity before outsourcing should work with the outsourcer to establish the baseline."
    – Yev Khobrenkov, Enterprise Consultant, Solvera Solutions

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outsourcing vendors are not service desk builders; they're service desk refiners. Switching to a vendor won't improve your maturity; you must have a certain degree of process maturity and standardization before moving.

    Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Cleaning Supplies

    SOURCE: PicNet

    Challenge

    • Reckitt Benckiser of Australia determined that its core service desk needed to be outsourced.
    • It would retain its higher level service desk staff to work on strategic projects.
    • The MSP needed to fulfill key requirements outlined by Reckitt Benckiser.

    Solution

    • Reckitt Benckiser recognized that its rapidly evolving IT needs required a service desk that could fulfill the following tasks:
    • Free up internal IT staff.
    • Provide in-depth understanding of business apps.
    • Offer efficient, cost-effective support onsite.
    • Focus on continual service improvement (CSI).

    Results

    • An RFP was developed to support the outsourcing strategy.
    • With the project structure outlined and the requirements of the vendor for the business identified, Reckitt Benckiser could now focus on selecting a vendor that met its needs.

    1.2.1 Identify service desk processes to outsource

    2-3 hours

    Review your prioritized project goals from activity 1.1.4.

    Brainstorm requirements and use cases for each goal and describe each use case. For example: To improve service desk timeliness, IT should improve incident management, to resolve incidents according to the defined SLA and based on ticket priority levels.

    Discuss if you're outsourcing just incident management or both incident management and request fulfillment. If both, determine what level of service requests will be outsourced? Will you ask the vendor to provide a service catalog? Will you outsource self-serve and automation?

    Document your findings in the service desk outsourcing requirements database library.

    Input

    • Outsourcing project goals from activity 1.1.4

    Output

    • List of processes to outsource

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    1.2.2 Design an outsourcing decision matrix for service desk processes and services

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Infrastructure manager

    2-3 hours

    Most successful service desk outsourcing engagements have a primary goal of freeing up their internal resources to work on complex tasks and projects. The key outsourcing success factor is to find out internal services and processes that are standardized or should be standardized, and then determine if they can be outsourced.

    1. Review the list of identified service desk processes from activity 1.2.1.
    2. Discuss the maturity level of each process (low, medium, high) and document under the maturity column of the Outsource the Service Desk Requirements Database Library.
    3. Use the following decision matrix for each process. Discuss which tasks are important to strategic objectives, which ones provide competitive advantage, and which ones require specialized in-house knowledge.
    4. Identify processes that receive high vendor's performance advantage. For instance, access to talent, lower cost at scale, and access to technology.
    5. In your outsourcing assessment, consider a narrow scope of engagement and a broad view of what is important to business outcome.
    6. Based on your findings, determine the priority of each process to be outsourced. Document results in the service desk outsourcing requirements database library, and section 4.1 of the service desk outsourcing project charter.
    • Important to strategic objectives
    • Provides competitive advantage
    • Specialized in-house knowledge required

    This is an image of a quadrant analysis, where the X axis is labeled Vendor's Performance Advantage, and the Y axis is labeled Importance to Business Outcomes.

    • Talent/access to skills
    • Economies of scale/lower cost at scale
    • Access to technology

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Maintain staff and training: you need to know who is being hired, how, and why

    Define documentation rules to retain knowledge

    • Establish a standard knowledge article template and list of required information.
    • Train staff on the requirements of knowledge base creation and management. Help them understand the value of the time spent recording their work.
    • It is your responsibility to assure the quality of each knowledge article. Outline accountabilities for internal staff and track for performance evaluations.

    For information on better knowledge management, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy.

    Expect to manage stringent skills and training standards

    • Plan on being more formal about a Service Manager position and spending more time than you allocated previously.
    • Complete a thorough assessment of the skills you need to keep the service desk running smoothly.
    • Don't forget to account for any customized or proprietary systems. How will you train vendor staff to accommodate your needs? What does their turnaround look like: would it be more likely that you acquire a dependable employee in-house?
    • Staffing requirements need to be actively monitored to ensure the outsourcer doesn't have degradation of quality or hiring standards. Don't assume that things run well – complete regular checks and ask for access to audit results.
    • Are the systems and data being accessed by the vendor highly sensitive or subject to regulatory requirements? If so, it is your job to ensure that vendor staff are being screened appropriately.

    Does your service desk need to integrate to other IT services?

    A common challenge when outsourcing multiple services to more than one vendor is a lack of collaboration and communication between vendors.

    • Leverage SIAM capabilities to integrate service desk tasks to other IT services, if needed.
    • "Service Integration and Management (SIAM) is a management methodology that can be applied in an environment that includes services sourced from a number of service providers" (Scopism Limited, 2020).
    • SIAM supports cross-functional integrations. Organizations that look for a single provider will be less likely to get maximum benefits from SIAM.

    There are three layers of entities in SIAM:

    • Customer Organization: The customer who receives services, who defines the relationship with service providers.
    • Service Integrator: End-to-end service governance and integration is done at this layer, making sure all service providers are committed to their services.
    • Service Provider: Responsible party for service delivery according to contract. It can be combination of internal provider, managed by internal agreements, and external provider, managed by SLAs between providers and customer organization.

    Use SIAM to obtain better results from multiple service providers

    In the SIAM model, the customer organization keeps strategic, governance, and business activities, while integrating other services (either internally or externally).

    This is an image of the SIAM model

    SIAM Layers. Source: SIAM Foundation BoK

    Utilize SIAM to obtain better results from multiple service providers

    SIAM reduces service duplication and improves service delivery via managing internal and external service providers.

    To utilize the SIAM model, determine the following components:

    • Service providers
    • Service consumers
    • Service outcomes
    • Service obstacles and boundaries
    • Service dependencies
    • Technical requirements and interactions for each service
    • Service data and information including service levels

    To learn more about adopting SIAM, visit Scopism.

    1.2.3 Discuss if you need to outsource only service desk or if additional services would benefit from outsourcing too

    1-2 hours

    • Discuss principles and goals of SIAM and how integrating other services can apply within your processes.
    • Review the list of service desk processes and tasks to be outsourced from activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.2.
    • Brainstorm a list of other services that are outsourced/need to be outsourced.
    • Determine providers of each service (both internal and external). Document the other services to be integrated in the project charter template and requirements database library.

    Input

    • SIAM objectives
    • List of service desk processes to outsource

    Output

    • List of other services to outsource and integrate in the project

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Establish requirements for problem management in the outsourcing plan

    Your MSP should not just fulfill SLAs – they should be a proactive source of value.

    Problem management is a group effort. Make sure your internal team is assisted with sufficient and efficient data by the outsourcer to conduct a better problem management.

    Clearly state your organization's expectations for enabling problem management. MSPs may not necessarily need, and cannot do, problem management; however, they should provide metrics to help you discover trends, define recurring issues, and enable root cause analysis.

    For more information on problem management, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Improve Incident and Problem Management.

    PROBLEM MANAGEMENT

    INCIDENT MANAGEMENT

    INTAKE: Ticket data from incident management is needed for incident matching to identify problems. Critical Incidents are also a main input to problem management.

    EVENT MANAGEMENT

    INTAKE: SMEs and operations teams monitoring system health events can identify indicators of potential future issues before they become incidents.

    APPLICATION, INFRASTRUCTURE, and SECURITY TEAMS

    ACTION: Problem tickets require investigation from relevant SMEs across different IT teams to identify potential solutions or workarounds.

    CHANGE MANAGEMENT

    OUTPUT: Problem resolution may need to go through Change Management for proper authorization and risk management.

    Outline problem management protocols to gain value from your service provider

    • For example, with a deep dive into ticket trend analysis, your MSP should be able to tell you that you've had a large number of tickets on a particular issue in the past month, allowing you to look into means to resolve the issue and prevent it from reoccurring.
    • A proactive MSP should be able to help your service levels improve over time. This should be built into the KPIs and metrics you ask for from the outsourcer.

    Sample Scenario

    Your MSP tracks ticket volume by platform.

    There are 100 network tickets/month, 200 systems tickets/month, and 5,000 end-user tickets/month.

    Tracking these numbers is a good start, but the real value is in the analysis. Why are there 5,000 end-user tickets? What are the trends?

    Your MSP should be providing a monthly root-cause analysis to help improve service quality.

    Outcomes:

    1. Meeting basic SLAs tells a small part of the story. The MSP is performing well in a functional sense, but this doesn't shed any insight on what kind of knowledge or value is being added.
    2. The MSP should provide routine updates on ticket trends and other insights gained through data analysis.
    3. A commitment to continual improvement will provide your organization with value throughout the duration of the outsourcing agreement.

    Phase 2

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify roles and responsibilities
    • Determine potential risks of outsourcing the service desk
    • Build a list of metrics

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Leadership

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 2.1

    Identify project stakeholders

    Activity

    2.1.1 Identify internal outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of service desk roles
    • Service desk outsourcing goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcome of this step

    • Outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    Design an outsourcing strategy to capture the vision of your service desk

    An outsourcing strategy is crucial to the proper accomplishment of an outsourcing project. By taking the time to think through your strategy beforehand, you will have a clear idea of your desired outcomes. This will make your RFP of higher quality and will result in a much easier negotiation process.

    Most MSPs are prepared to offer a standard proposal to clients who do not know what they want. These are agreements that are doomed to fail. A clearly defined set of goals (discussed in Phase 1), risks, and KPIs and metrics (covered in this phase) makes the agreement more beneficial for both parties in the long run.

    1. Identify goals and objectives
    2. Determine mission statement
    3. Define roles and responsibilities
    4. Identify risks and constraints
    5. Define KPIs and metrics
    6. Complete outsourcing strategy

    A successful outsourcing initiative depends on rigorous preparation

    Outsourcing is a garbage in, garbage out initiative. You need to give your service provider the information they need to provide an effective product.

    • Data quality is critical to your outsourcing initiative's success.
    • Your vendor will be much better equipped to help you and to better price its services if it has a thorough understanding of your IT environment.
    • This means more than just building a catalog of your hardware and software. You will need to make available documented policies and processes so you and your vendor can understand where they fit in.
    • Failure to completely document your environment can lead to a much longer time to value as your provider will have to spend much more time (and thus much more money) getting their service up and running.

    "You should fill the gap before outsourcing. You should make sure how to measure tickets, how to categorize, and what the cost of outsourcing will be. Then you'll be able to outsource the execution of the service. Start your own processes and then outsource their execution."
    – Kris Krishan, Head of IT and business systems, Waymo

    Case Study

    Digital media company built an outsourcing strategy to improve customer satisfaction

    INDUSTRY: Digital Media

    SOURCE: Auxis

    Challenge

    A Canadian multi-business company with over 13,000 employees would like to maintain a growing volume of digital content with their endpoint management.

    The client operated a tiered model service desk. Tier 1 was outsourced, and tier 2 tasks were done internally, for more complex tasks and projects.

    As a result of poor planning and defining goals, the company had issues with:

    • Low-quality ticket handling
    • High volume of tickets escalated to tier 2, restraining them from working on complex tickets
    • High turn over and a challenge with talent retention
    • Insufficient documentation to train external tier 1 team
    • Long resolution time and low end-user satisfaction

    Solution

    The company structured a strategy for outsourcing service desk and defined their expectations and requirements.

    They engaged with another outsourcer that would fulfill their requirements as planned.

    With the help of the outsourcer's consulting team, the client was able to define the gaps in their existing processes and system to:

    • Implement a better ticketing system that could follow best-practices guidelines
    • Restructure the team so they would be able to handle processes efficiently

    Results

    The proactive planning led to:

    • Significant improvement in first call resolution (82%).
    • MTTR improvement freed tier 2 to focus on business strategic objectives and allowed them to work on higher-value activities.
    • With a better strategy around outsourcing planning, the company saved 20% of cost compared to the previous outsourcer.
    • As a result of this partnership, the company is providing a 24/7 structure in multiple languages, which is aligned with the company's growth.
    • Due to having a clear strategy built for the project, the client now has better visibility into metrics that support long-term continual improvement plans.

    Define roles and responsibilities for the outsourcing transition to form the base of your outsourcing strategy

    There is no "I" in outsource; make sure the whole team is involved

    Outsourcing is a complete top-to-bottom process that involves multiple levels of engagement:

    • Management must make high-level decisions about staffing and negotiate contract details with the vendor.
    • Service desk employees must execute on the documentation and standardization of processes in an effort to increase maturity.
    • Roles and responsibilities need to be clearly defined to ensure that all aspects of the transition are completed on time.
    • Implement a full-scale effort that involves all relevant staff. The most common mistake is to have the project design follow the same top-down pattern as the decision-making process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The service desk doesn't operate in isolation. The service desk interfaces with many other parts of the organization (such as finance, purchasing, field support, etc.), so it's important to ensure you engage stakeholders from other departments as well. If you only engage the service desk staff in your discussions around outsourcing strategy and RFP development, you may miss requirements that will come up when it's too late.

    2.1.1 Identify internal outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    2 hours

    1. The sample RACI chart in section 5 of the Project Charter Template outlines which positions are responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each major task within the outsourcing project.
    2. Responsible, is the group that is responsible for the execution and oversight of activities for the project. Accountable is the owner of the task/process, who is accountable for the results and outcomes. Consulted is the subject matter expert (SME) who is actively involved in the task/process and consulted on decisions. Informed is not actively involved with the task/process and is updated about decisions around the task/process.
    3. Make sure that you assign only one person as accountable per process. There can be multiple people responsible for each task. Consulted and Informed are optional for each task.
    4. Complete the RACI chart with recommended participants, and document in your service desk outsourcing project charter, under section 5.

    Input

    • RACI template
    • Org chart

    Output

    • List of roles and responsibilities for outsource project

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Step 2.2

    Outline potential risks and constraints

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify potential risks and constraints that may impact achievement of objectives

    2.2.2 Arrange groups of tension metrics to balance your reporting

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Outsourcing objectives
    • Potential risks

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Mitigation strategy for each risk
    • Service desk metrics

    Know your constraints to reduce surprises during project implementation

    No service desk is perfect; know your limits and plan accordingly

    Define your constraints to outsourcing the service desk.

    Consider all types of constraints and opportunities, including:

    • Business forces
    • Economic cycles
    • Disruptive tech
    • Regulation and compliance issues
    • Internal organizational issues

    Within the scope of a scouring decision, define your needs and objectives, measure those as much as possible, and compare them with the "as-is" situation.

    Start determining what alternative approaches/scenarios the organization could use to fill the gaps. Start a comparison of scenarios against drivers, goals, and risks.

    Constraints

    Goals and objectives

    • Budget
    • Maturity
    • Compliance
    • Regulations
    • Outsourcing Strategy

    Plan ahead for potential risks that may impede your strategy

    Risk assessment must go hand-in-hand with goal and objective planning

    Risk is inherent with any outsourcing project. Common outsourcing risks include:

    • Lack of commitment to the customer's goals from the vendor.
    • The distraction of managing the relationship with the vendor.
    • A perceived loss of control and a feeling of over-dependence on your vendor.
    • Managers may feel they have less influence on the development of strategy.
    • Retained staff may feel they have become less skilled in their specialist field.
    • Unanticipated expenses that were assumed to be offered by the vendor.
    • Savings only result from high capital investment in new projects on the part of the customer.

    Analyze the risks associated with a specific scenario. This analysis should identify and understand the most common sourcing and vendor risks using a risk-reward analysis for selected scenarios. Use tools and guidelines to assess and manage vendor risk and tailor risk evaluation criteria to the types of vendors and products.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Plan for the worst to prevent it from happening. Evaluating risk should cover a wide variety of scenarios including the worst possible cases. This type of thinking will be crucial when developing your exit strategy in a later exercise.

    2.2.1 Identify potential risks and constraints that may impact achievement of objectives

    1-3 hours

    1. Brainstorm any potential risks that may arise through the outsourcing project. Describe each risk and categorize both its probability of occurring and impact on the organization as high (H), medium (M), or low (L), using the table below:
    Risk Description

    Probability(H/M/L)

    Impact(H/M/L)Planned Mitigation
    Lack of documentationMMUse cloud-based solution to share documents.
    Knowledge transferLMDetailed knowledge-sharing agreement in place in the RFP.
    Processes not followedLHClear outline and definition of current processes.
    1. Identify any constraints for your outsourcing strategy that may restrict, limit, or place certain conditions on the outsourcing project.
      • This may include budget restrictions or staffing limitations.
      • Identifying constraints will help you be prepared for risks and will lessen their impact.
    2. Document risks and constraints in section 6 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Input

    • RACI template
    • Org chart

    Output

    • List of roles and responsibilities for outsource project

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Define service tiers and roles to develop clear vendor SLAs

    Management of performance, SLAs, and customer satisfaction remain the responsibility of your organization.

    Define the tiers and/or services that will be the responsibility of the MSP, as well as escalations and workflows across tiers. A sample outsourced structure is displayed here:

    External Vendor

    Tickets beyond the scope of the service desk staff need to be escalated back to the vendor responsible for the affected system.

    Tier 3

    Tickets that are focused on custom applications and require specialized or advanced support are escalated back to your organization's second- and third-level support teams.

    Tier 2

    The vendor is often able to provide specialized support for standard applications. However, the desktop support still needs someone onsite as that service is very expensive to outsource.

    Tier 1

    Service desk outsource vendors provide first-line response. This includes answering the phones, troubleshooting simple problems, and redirecting requests that are more complex.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you outsource everything, you'll be at the mercy of consultancy or professional services shops later on. You won't have anyone in-house to help you deploy anything; you're at the mercy of a consultant to come in and tell you what to do and how much to spend. Keep your highly skilled people in-house to offset what you'd have to pay for consultancy. If you need to repatriate your service desk later on, you will need skills in-house to do so.

    Don't become obsessed with managing by short-term metrics – look at the big picture

    "Good" metric results may simply indicate proficient reactive fixing; long-term thinking involves implementing proactive, balanced solutions.

    KPIs demonstrate that you are running an effective service desk because:

    • You close an average of 300 tickets per week
    • Your first call resolution is above 90%
    • Your talk time is less than five minutes
    • Surveys reveal clients are satisfied

    While these results may appear great on the surface, metrics don't tell the whole story.

    The effort from any support team seeks to balance three elements:

    FCR: Time; Resources; Quality

    First-Contact Resolution (FCR) Rate

    Percentage of tickets resolved during first contact with user (e.g. before they hang up or within an hour of submitting ticket). Could be measured as first-contact, first-tier, or first-day resolution.

    End-User Satisfaction

    Perceived value of the service desk measured by a robust annual satisfaction survey of end users and/or transactional satisfaction surveys sent with a percentage of tickets.

    Ticket Volume and Cost Per Ticket

    Monthly operating expenses divided by average ticket volume per month. Report ticket volume by department or ticket category, and look at trends for context.

    Average Time to Resolve (incidents) or Fulfill (service requests)

    Time elapsed from when a ticket is "open" to "resolved." Distinguish between ticket resolution vs. closure, and measure time for incidents and service requests separately.

    Focus on tension metrics to achieve long-term success

    Tension metrics help create a balance by preventing teams from focusing on a single element.

    For example, an MSP built incentives around ticket volume for their staff, but not the quality of tickets. As a result, the MSP staff rushed through tickets and gamed the system while service quality suffered.

    Use metrics to establish baselines and benchmarking data:

    • If you know when spikes in ticket volumes occur, you can prepare to resource more appropriately for these time periods
    • Create KB articles to tackle recurring issues and assist tier 1 technicians and end users.
      • Employ a root cause analysis to eliminate recurring tickets.

    "We had an average talk time of 15 minutes per call and I wanted to ensure they could handle those calls in 15 minutes. But the behavior was opposite, [the vendor] would wrap up the call, transfer prematurely, or tell the client they'd call them back. Service levels drive behavior so make sure they are aligned with your strategic goals with no unintended consequences."
    – IT Services Manager, Banking

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure your metrics work cooperatively. Metrics should be chosen that cause tension on one another. It's not enough to rely on a fast service desk that doesn't have a high end-user satisfaction rate or runs at too high a cost; there needs to be balance.

    2.2.2 Arrange groups of tension metrics to balance your reporting

    1-3 hours

    1. Define KPIs and metrics that will be critical to service desk success.
    2. Distribute sticky notes of different colors to participants around the table.
    3. Select a space to place the sticky notes – a table, whiteboard, flip chart, etc. – and divide it into three zones.
    4. Refer to your defined list of goals and KPIs from activity 1.1.3 and discuss metrics to fulfill each KPI. Note that each goal (critical success factor, CSF) may have more than one KPI. For instance:
      1. Goal 1: Increase end-user satisfaction; KPI 1: Improve average transactional survey score. KPI 2: Improve annual relationship survey score.
      2. Goal 2: Improve service delivery; KPI 1: Reduce time to resolve incidents. KPI 2: Reduce time to fulfill service requests.
    5. Recall that tension metrics must form a balance between:
      1. Time
      2. Resources
      3. Quality
    6. Record the results in section 7 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Input

    • Service desk outsourcing goals
    • Service desk outsourcing KPIs

    Output

    • List of service desk metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Phase 3

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build your outsourcing RFP
    • Set expectations with candidate vendors
    • Score and select your vendor
    • Manage your relationship with the vendor

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 3.1

    Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    Activities

    3.1.1 Evaluate your technology, people, and process requirements

    3.1.2 Outline which party will be responsible for which service desk processes

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk processes and requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Knowledge management and technology requirements
    • Self-service requirements

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    Create a detailed RFP to ensure your candidate vendor will fulfill all your requirements

    At its core, your RFP should detail the outcomes of your outsourcing strategy and communicate your needs to the vendor.

    The RFP must cover business needs and the more detailed service desk functions required. Many enterprises only consider the functionality they need, while ignoring operational and selection requirements.

    Negotiate a supply agreement with the preferred outsourcer for delivery of the required services. Ensure your RFP covers:

    1. Service specification
    2. Service levels
    3. Roles and responsibilities
    4. Transition period and acceptance
    5. Prices, payment, and duration
    6. Agreement administration
    7. Outsourcing issues

    In addition to defining your standard requirements, don't forget to take into consideration the following factors when developing your RFP:

    • Employee onboarding and hardware imaging for new users
    • Applications you need current and future support for
    • Reporting requirements
    • Self-service options
    • Remote support needs and locations

    Although it may be tempting, don't throw everything over the wall at your vendor in the RFP. Evaluate your service desk functions in terms of quality, cost effectiveness, and the value provided from the vendor. Organizations should only outsource functions that the vendor can operate better, faster, or cheaper.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Involve the right stakeholders in developing your RFP, not just service desk. If only service desk is involved in RFP discussion, the connection between tier 1 and specialists will be broken, as some processes are not considered from IT's point of view.

    Identify ITSM solution requirements

    Your vendor probably uses a different tool to manage their processes; make sure its capabilities align with the vision of your service desk.

    Your service desk and outsourcing strategy were both designed with your current ITSM solution in mind. Before you hand the reins to an MSP, it is crucial that you outline how your current ITSM solution is being used in terms of functionality.

    Find out if it's better to have the MSP use their own ITSM tools or your ITSM solution.

    Benefits of operating within your own ITSM while outsourcing the service desk:

    Disadvantages of using your own ITSM while outsourcing the service desk:

    • If you provide the service catalog, it's easier to control your ITSM tool yourself.
    • Using your own ITSM and giving access to the outsourcer will allow you to build your dashboard and access your operational metrics rather than relying on the MSP to provide you with metrics.
    • Usage of the current tool may be extended across multiple departments, so it may be in the best interest of your business to have the vendor adopt usage of the current tool.
    • While many ITSM solutions have similar functions, innate differences do exist between them. Outsourcers mostly want to operate in their own ticketing solution. As other departments besides IT may be using the service management tool, you will need to have the same tool across the organization. This makes purchasing the new ITSM license very expensive, unless you operate in the same ITSM as the outsourcer.
    • You need your vendor to be able to use the system you have in order to meet your requirements, which will limit your options in the market.
    • If the outsourcer is using your ITSM, you should provide training to them.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Defining your tool requirements can be a great opportunity to get the tool functionality you always wanted. Many MSPs offer enterprise-level ITSM tools and highly mature processes that may tempt you to operate within their ITSM environment. However, first define your goals for such a move, as well as pros and cons of operating in their service management tool to weigh if its benefits overweigh its downfalls.

    Case Study

    Lone Star College learned that it's important to select a vendor whose tool will work with your service desk

    INDUSTRY: Education

    SOURCE: ServiceNow

    Challenge

    Lone Star College has an end-user base of over 100,000 staff and students.

    The college has six campuses across the state of Texas, and each campus was using its own service desk and ITSM solution.

    Initially, the decision was to implement a single ITSM solution, but organizational complexity prevented that initiative from succeeding.

    A decision was made to outsource and consolidate the service desks of each of the campuses to provide more uniform service to end users.

    Solution

    Lone Star College selected a vendor that implemented FrontRange.

    Unfortunately, the tool was not the right fit for Lone Star's service and reporting needs.

    After some discussion, the outsourcing vendor made the switch to ServiceNow.

    Some time later, a hybrid outsourced model was implemented, with Lone Star and the vendor combining to provide 24/7 support.

    Results

    The consolidated, standardized approach used by Lone Star College and its vendor has created numerous benefits:

    • Standardized reporting
    • High end-user satisfaction
    • All SLAs are being met
    • Improved ticket resolution times
    • Automated change management.

    Lone Star outsourced in order to consolidate its service desks quickly, but the tools didn't quite match.

    It's important to choose a tool that works well with your vendor's, otherwise the same standardization issues can persist.

    Design your RFP to help you understand what the vendor's standard offerings are and what it is capable of delivering

    Your RFP should be worded in a way that helps you understand what your vendor's standard offerings are because that's what they're most capable of delivering. Rather than laying out all your requirements in a high level of detail, carefully craft your questions in a probing way. Then, understand what your current baseline is, what your target requirements are, and assess the gap.

    Design the RFP so that responses can easily be compared against one another.

    It is common to receive responses that are very different – RFPs don't provide a response framework. Comparing vastly different responses can be like comparing apples to oranges. Not only are they immensely time consuming to score, their scores also don't end up accurately reflecting the provider's capabilities or suitability as a vendor.

    If your RFP is causing a ten minute printer backlog, you're doing something wrong.

    Your RFP should not be hundreds of pages long. If it is, there is too much detail.

    Providing too much detail can box your responses in and be overly limiting on your responses. It can deter potentially suitable provider candidates from sending a proposal.

    Request
    For
    Proposal

    "From bitter experience, if you're too descriptive, you box yourself in. If you're not descriptive enough, you'll be inundated with questions or end up with too few bidders. We needed to find the best way to get the message across without putting too much detail around it."
    – Procurement Manager, Utilities

    Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template contains nine sections

    1. Statement of work
      • Purpose, coverage, and participation ààInsert the purpose and goals of outsourcing your service desk, using steps 1.1 findings in this blueprint as reference.
    2. General information
      • Information about the document, enterprise, and schedule of events ààInsert the timeline you developed for the RFP issue and award process in this section.
    3. Proposal preparation instructions
      • The vendor's understanding of the RFP, good faith statement, points of contact, proposal submission, method of award, selection and notification.
    4. Service overview
      • Information about organizational perspective, service desk responsibility matrix, vendor requirements, and service level agreements (SLAs).
    5. Scope of work, specifications and requirements
      • Technical and functional requirements à Insert the requirements gathered in Phase 1 in this section of the RFP. Remember to include both current and future requirements.
    6. Exit conditions
      • Overview of exit strategy and transition process.
    7. Vendor qualifications and references
    8. Account management and estimated pricing
    9. Vendor certification
    This is a screenshot of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    The main point of focus in this document is defining your requirements (discussed in Phase 1) and developing proposal preparation instructions.

    The rest of the RFP consists mostly of standard legal language. Review the rest of the RFP template and adapt the language to suit your organization's standards. Check with your legal departments to make sure the RFP adheres to company policies.

    3.1.1 Evaluate your technology, people, and process requirements

    1-2 hours

    1. Review the outsourcing goals you identified in Phase 1 (activity 1.1.3).
    2. For each goal, divide the defined requirements from your requirements database library (activity 1.2.1) into three areas:
      1. People Requirements
      2. Process Requirements
      3. Technical Requirements
    3. Group your requirements based on characteristics (e.g. recovery capabilities, engagement methodology, personnel, etc.).
    4. Validate these requirements with the relevant stakeholders.
    5. Document your results in section 4 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Input

    • Identified key requirements

    Output

    • Refined requirements to input into the RFP

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Assess knowledge management and technology requirements to enable the outsourcer with higher quality work

    Retain ownership of the knowledgebase to foster long-term growth of organizational intelligence

    With end users becoming more and more tech savvy, organizational intelligence is becoming an increasingly important aspect of IT support. Modern employees are able and willing to troubleshoot on their own before calling into the service desk. The knowledgebase and FAQs largely facilitate self-serve trouble shooting, both of which are not core concerns for the outsource vendor.

    Why would the vendor help you empower end users and decrease ticket volume when it will lead to less revenue in the future? Ticket avoidance is not simply about saving money by removing support. It's about the end-user community developing organizational intelligence so that it doesn't need as much technical support.

    Organizational intelligence occurs when shared knowledge and insight is used to make faster, better decisions.

    When you outsource, the flow of technical insight to your end-user community slows down or stops altogether unless you proactively drive it. Retain ownership of the knowledgebase and ensure that the content is:

    1. Validated to ensure it accurately describes the best solution.
    2. Actionable to ensure it prescribes repeatable, verifiable steps.
    3. Contextual to ensure the reader knows when NOT to apply the knowledge.
    4. Maintained to ensure the solution remains current.
    5. Applied, since knowledge is a cost with no benefit unless you apply it and turn it into organizational intelligence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Include knowledge management process in your ticket handling workflows to make sure knowledge is transferred to the MSP and end users. For more information on knowledge management, refer to Info-Tech's Standardize the Service Desk and Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy blueprints.

    Assess self-service requirements in your outsourcing plan

    When outsourcing the service desk, determine who will take ownership of the self-service portal.

    Nowadays, outsourcers provide innovative services such as self-serve options. However, bear in mind that the quality of such services is a differentiating factor. A well-maintained portal makes it easy to:

    • Report incidents efficiently via use-case-based forms
    • Place requests via a business-oriented service catalog
    • Automate request processes
    • Give visibility on ticket status
    • Access knowledgebase articles
    • Provide status on critical systems
    • Look for services by both clicking service lists and searching them
    • Provide 24/7 service via interactive communication with live agent and AI-powered machine
    • Streamline business process in multiple departments rather than only IT

    In the outsourcing process, determine your expectations from your vendor on self-serve options and discuss how they will fulfill these requirements. Similar to other processes, work internally to define a list of services your organization is providing that you can pass over to the outsourcer to convert to a service catalog.

    Use Info-Tech's Sample Enterprise Services document to start determining your business's services.

    Assess admin rights in your outsourcing plan to give access to the outsourcer while you keep ownership

    Provide accessibility to account management to improve self-service, which enables:

    • Group owners to be named who can add or remove people from their operating units
    • Users to update attributes such as photos, address, phone number
    • Synchronization with HRIS (Human Resource Information Systems) to enable two-way communication on attribute updates
    • Password reset self-service

    Ensure the vendor has access rights to execute regular clean up to help:

    • Find stale and inactive user and computer accounts (inactive, expired, stale, never logged in)
    • Bulk move and disable capabilities
    • Find empty groups and remove
    • Find and assess NTFS permissions
    • Automated tasks to search and remediate

    Give admin rights to outsourcer to enable reporting and auditing capabilities, such as:

    • Change tracking and notifications
    • Password reset attempts, account unlocks, permission and account changes
    • Anomaly detection and remediation
    • Privilege abuse, such as password sharing

    Info-Tech Insight

    Provide your MSP with access rights to enable the service desk to have account management without giving too much authentication. This way you'll enable moving tickets to the outsourcer while you keep ownership and supervision.

    3.1.2 Outline which party will be responsible for which service desk processes

    1-2 hours

    This activity is an expansion to the outcomes of activity 1.2.1, where you determined the outsourcing requirements and the party to deliver each requirement.

    1. Add your identified tasks from the requirements database library to the service desk responsibility matrix (section 4.2 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template).
    2. Break each task down into more details. For instance, incident management may include tier 1, tier 2/3, KB creation and update, reporting, and auditing.
    3. Refer to section 4.1 of your Project Charter to review the responsible party for each use case.
    4. Considering the use cases, assess whether your organization, the MSP, or both parties will be responsible for the task.
    5. Document the results in section 4.2 of the RFP.

    Input

    • Identified key requirements

    Output

    • Responsible party to deliver each task

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Step 3.2

    Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    Activities

    3.2.1 Define your SLA requirements

    3.2.2 Score each vendor to mitigate the risk of failure

    3.2.3 Score RFP responses

    3.2.4 Get referrals, conduct reference interviews and evaluate responses for each vendor

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk outsourcing RFP
    • List of service desk outsourcing requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service desk SLA
    • RFP scores

    Don't rush to judgment; apply due diligence when selecting your vendor

    The most common mistake in vendor evaluation is moving too quickly. The process leading to an RFP evaluation can be exhausting, and many organizations simply want to be done with the whole process and begin outsourcing.

    The most common mistake in vendor evaluation is moving too quickly. The process leading to an RFP evaluation can be exhausting, and many organizations simply want to be done with the whole process and begin outsourcing.

    1. Call around to get referrals for each vendor
    2. Create a shortlist
    3. Review SLAs and contract terms
    4. Select your vendor

    Recognize warning signs in the MSP's proposal to ensure a successful negotiation

    Vendors often include certain conditions in their proposals that masquerade as appealing but may spell disaster. Watch for these red flags:

    1. Discounted Price
      • Vendors know the market value of their competitors' services. Price is not what sets them apart; it's the type of services offered as well as the culture present.
      • A noticeably low price is often indicative of a desperate organization that is not focused on quality managed services.
    2. No Pushback
      • Vendors should work to customize their proposal to suit both their capabilities and your needs. No pushback means they are not invested in your project as deeply as they should be.
      • You should be prepared for and welcome negotiations; they're a sign that both sides are reaching a mutually beneficial agreement.
    3. Continual SLA Improvement
      • Continual improvement is a good quality that your vendor should have, but it needs to have some strategic direction.
      • Throwing continual SLA improvement into the deal may seem great, but make sure that you'll benefit from the value-added service. Otherwise, you'll be paying for services that you don't actually need.

    Clearly define core vendor qualities before looking at any options

    Vendor sales and marketing people know just what to say to sway you: don't talk to them until you know what you're looking for.

    Geography

    Do you prefer global or local data centers? Do you need multiple locations for redundancy in case of disaster? Will language barriers be a concern?

    Contract Length

    Ensure you can terminate a poor arrangement by having shorter terms with optional renewals. It's better to renew and renegotiate if one side is losing in the deal in order to keep things fair. Don't assume that proposed long-term cost savings will provide a satisfactory service.

    Target Market

    Vendors are aiming at different business segments, from startups to large enterprises. Some will accept existing virtual machines, and others enforce compliance to appeal to government and health agencies.

    SLA

    A robust SLA strengthens a vendor's reliability and accountability. Agencies with special needs should have room in negotiations for customization. Providers should also account for regular SLA reviews and updates. Vendors should be tracking call volume and making projections that should translate directly to SLAs.

    Support

    Even if you don't need a vendor with 24/7 availability, vendors who cannot support this timing should be eliminated. You may want to upgrade later and will want to avoid the hassle of switching.

    Maturity

    Vendors must have the willingness and ability to improve processes and efficiencies over time. Maintaining the status-quo isn't acceptable in the constantly evolving IT world.

    Cost

    Consider which model makes the most sense: will you go with per call or per user pricing? Which model will generate vendor motivation to continually improve and meet your long-term goals? Watch out for variable pricing models.

    Define your SLA requirements so your MSP can create a solution that fits

    SLAs ensure accountability from the service provider and determine service price

    SLAs define the performance of the service desk and clarify what the provider and customer can expect in their outsourcing relationship.

    • Service categories
    • The acceptable range of end-user satisfaction
    • The scope of what functions of the service desk are being measured (availability, time to resolve, time to respond, etc.)
    • Credits and penalties for achieving or missing targets
    • Frequency of measurement/reporting
    • Provisions and penalties for ending the contractual relationship early
    • Management and communication structure
    • Escalation protocol for incidents relating to tiers 2 or 3

    Each MSP's RFP response will help you understand their basic SLA terms and enhanced service offerings. You need to understand the MSP's basic SLA terms to make sure they are adequate enough for your requirements. A well-negotiated SLA will balance the requirements of the customer and limit the liability of the provider in a win/win scenario.

    For more information on defining service level requirements, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements.

    3.2.1 Define your SLA requirements

    2-3 hours

    • As a team, review your current service desk SLA for the following items:
      • Response time
      • Resolution time
      • Escalation time
      • End-user satisfaction
      • Service availability
    • Use the sample table as a starting point to determine your current incident management SLA:
    • Determine your SLA expectations from the outsourcer.
    • Document your SLA expectations in section 4.4 of the RFP template.

    Participants: IT Managers, Service Desk Manager, Project Team

    Response
    PriorityResponse SLOResolution SLOEscalation Time
    T1
    Severity 1CriticalWithin 10 minutes4 hours to resolveImmediate
    Severity 2HighWithin 1 business hour8 business hours to resolve20 minutes
    Severity 3MediumWithin 4 business hours24 business hours to resolveAfter 20 minutes without progress
    Severity 4LowSame day (8 hours)72 business hours to resolve After 1 hour without progress
    SLO ResponseTime it takes for service desk to respond to service request or incident. Target response is 80% of SLO
    SLO ResolutionTime it takes to resolve incident and return business services to normal. Target resolution is 80% of SLO

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Get a detailed plan from your selected vendor before signing a contract

    Build a standard process to evaluate candidate vendors

    Use section 5 of Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template for commonly used questions and requirements for outsourcing the service desk. Ask the right questions to secure an agreement that meets your needs. If you are already in a contract with an MSP, tale the opportunity of contract renewal to improve the contract and service.

    This is a screenshot of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Add your finalized assessment questions into Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Scoring Tool to aggregate responses in one repository for comparison. Since the vendors are asked to respond in a standard format, it is easier to bring together all the responses to create a complete view of your options.

    This is an image of the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    3.2.2 Score each vendor to mitigate the risk of failure

    1-2 hours

    Include the right requirements for your organization and analyze candidate vendors on their capability to satisfy them.

    1. Use section 5 of the RFP template to convert your determined requirements into questions to address in vendor briefings.
    2. Review the questions in the context of near- and long-term service desk outsourcing needs. In the template, we have separated requirements into 7 categories:
      • Vendor Requirements (VR)
      • Vendor Qualifications/Engagement/Administration Capabilities (VQ)
      • Service Operations (SO)
      • Service Support (SS)
      • Service Level Agreement (SLA)
      • Transition Processes (TP)
      • Account Management (AM)
    3. Define the priority for each question:
      • Required
      • Desired
      • Optional
    4. Leave the compliance and comments to when you brief with vendors.

    Input

    • Technical and functional requirements

    Output

    • Priority level for each requirement
    • Completed list of requirement questions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    3.2.3 Score RFP responses

    2-3 hours

    1. Enter the requirements questions into the RFP Scoring Tool and use it during vendor briefings.
    2. Copy the Required and Desired priority requirements from the previous activity into the RFP Questions column.
    3. Evaluate each RFP response against the RFP criteria based on the scoring scale.
    4. The Results section in the tool shows the vendor ranking based on their overall scores.
    5. Compare potential outsourcing partners considering scores on individual requirements categories and based on overall scores.

    Input

    • Completed list of requirement questions
    • Priority level for each requirement

    Output

    • List of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers
    • IT Director/CIO

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    3.2.3 Get referrals, conduct reference interviews, and evaluate responses for each vendor

    1. Outline a list of questions to conduct reference interviews with past/present clients of your candidate vendors.
    2. Use the reference interview template as a starting point. As a group review the questions and edit them to a list that will fulfill your requirements.
    3. Ask your candidate vendors to provide you with a list of three to five clients that have/had used their services. Make sure that vendors enforce the interview will be kept anonymous and names and results won't be disclosed.
    4. Ask vendors to book a 20-30 minute call with you and their client.
    5. Document your interview comments in your updated reference interview template.
    6. Update the RFP scoring tool accordingly.

    Input

    • List of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Output

    • Updated list of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template
    • Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Compare pricing models of outsourcing services

    It's a common sales tactic to use a low price as an easy solution. Carefully evaluate the vendors on your short-list and ensure that SLAs, culture, and price all match to your organization.

    Research different pricing models and accurately assess which model fits your organization. Consider the following pricing models:

    Pay per technician

    In this model, a flat rate is allocated to agents tackling your service desk tickets. This is a good option for building long-term relationship with outsourcer's agents and efficient knowledge transfer to the external team; however, it's not ideal for small organizations that deal with few tickets. This is potentially an expensive model for small teams.

    Pay per ticket

    This model considers the number of tickets handled by the outsourcer. This model is ideal if you only want to pay for your requirement. Although the internal team needs to have a close monitoring strategy to make sure the outsourcer's efficiency in ticket resolution.

    Pay per call

    This is based on outbound and inbound calls. This model is proper for call centers and can be less expensive than the other models; however, tracking is not easy, as you should ensure service desk calls result in efficient resolution rather than unnecessary follow-up.

    Pay per time (minutes or hours)

    The time spent on tickets is considered in this model. With this model, you pay for the work done by agents, so that it may be a good and relatively cheap option. As quicker resolution SLA is usually set by the organization, customer satisfaction may drop, as agents will be driven to faster resolution, not necessarily quality of work.

    Pay per user

    This model is based on number of all users, or number of users for particular applications. In this model, correlation between number of users and number of tickets should be taken into account. This is an ideal model if you want to deal with impact of staffing changes on service price. Although you should first track metrics such as mean time to resolve and average number of tickets so you can prevent unnecessary payment based on number of users when most users are not submitting tickets.

    Step 3.3

    Manage the outsource relationship

    Activities

    3.3.1 Analyze your outsourced service desk for continual improvement

    3.3.2 Make a case to either rehabilitate your outsourcing agreement or exit

    3.3.3 Develop an exit strategy in case you need to end your contract early

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk SLA
    • List of impacted stakeholder groups
    • List of impacts and benefits of the outsourced service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Communication plan
    • Vendor management strategy

    Ensure formality of your vendor management practice

    A service desk outsourcing project is an ongoing initiative. Build a relationship plan to make sure the outsourcer complies with the agreement.

    This is an iamge of the cycle of relationship management and pre-contract management.

    Monitor Vendor Performance

    Key Activity:

    Measure performance levels with an agreed upon standard scorecard.

    Manage Vendor Risk

    Key Activity:

    Periodical assessment of the vendors to ensure they are meeting compliance standards.

    Manage Vendor Contracts and Relationships

    Key Activity:
    Manage the contracts and renewal dates, the level of demand for the services/products provided, and the costs accrued.

    COMPLETE Identify and Evaluate Vendors

    Key Activity:
    Develop a plan with procurement and key internal stakeholders to define clear, consistent, and stable requirements.

    COMPLETE Select a Vendor

    Key Activity:
    Develop a consistent and effective process for selecting the most appropriate vendor.

    Manage Vendor Contracts and Relationships

    Key Activity:
    Contracts are consistently negotiated to ensure the vendor and the client have a documented and consistent understanding of mutual expectations.

    Expect the vendor to manage processes according to your standards

    You need this level of visibility into the service desk process, whether in-house or outsourced

    Each of these steps requires documentation – either through standard operating procedures, SLAs, logs, or workflow diagrams.

    • Define key operating procedures and workflows
    • Record, classify, and prioritize tickets
    • Verify, approve, and fulfill tickets
    • Investigate, diagnose, and allocate tickets
    • Resolve, recover, and close tickets
    • Track and report

    "Make sure what they've presented to you is exactly what's happening."
    – Service Desk Manager, Financial Services

    Manage the vendor relationship through regular communication

    Regular contact with your MSP provides opportunities to address issues that emerge

    Designate a relationship manager to act as a liaison at the business to be a conduit between the business and the MSP.

    • The relationship manager will take feedback from the MSP and relate it back to you to bridge the technical and business gap between the two.

    Who should be involved

    • Routine review meetings should involve the MSP and your relationship manager.
    • Technical knowledge may be needed to address specific issues, but business knowledge and relationship management skills are absolutely required.
    • Other stakeholders and people who are deeply invested in the vendor relationship should be invited or at least asked to contribute questions and concerns.

    What is involved

    • Full review of the service desk statistics, escalations, staffing changes, process changes, and drivers of extra billing or cost.
    • Updates to key documentation for the issues listed above and changes to the knowledgebase.
    • Significant drivers of customer satisfaction and dissatisfaction.
    • Changes that have/are being proposed that can impact any of the above.

    Communicate changes to end users to avoid push back and get buy-in

    Top-down processes for outsourcing will leave end users in the dark

    • Your service desk staff has been involved in the outsourcing process the entire time, but end users are affected all the same.
    • The service desk is the face of IT. A radical shift in service processes and points of contact can be detrimental to not only the service desk, but all of IT.
    • Communicating the changes early to end users will both help them cope with the change and help the MSP achieve better results.
      • An internal communication plan should be rolled out in order to inform and educate end users about the changes associated with outsourcing the service desk.
    • Your relationship manager should be tasked with communicating the changes to end users. The focus should be on addressing questions or concerns about the transition while highlighting the value gained through outsourcing to an MSP.
    • Service quality is a two-way street; the end user needs to be informed of proper protocols and points of contact so that the service desk technicians can fulfill their duties to the best of their ability.

    "When my company decided to outsource, I performed the same role but for a different company. There was a huge disruption to the business flow and a lack of communication to manage the change. The transition took weeks before any end users figured out what the new processes were for submitting a ticket and who to ask for help, and from a personal side, it became difficult to maintain relationships with colleagues."
    – IT Specialist for a financial institution

    Info-Tech Insight

    Educate the enterprise on expectations and processes that are handled by the MSP. Identify stakeholder groups affected by the outsourced processes then build a communication plan on what's been changed, what the benefits are, and how they will be impacted. Determine a timeline for communicating these initiatives and how these announcements will be made. Use InfoTech's Sample Communication Plan as a starting point.

    Build a continual improvement plan to make sure your MSP is efficiently delivering services according to expectations

    Ensure that your quality assurance program is repeatable and applicable to the outsourced services

    1. Design a QA scorecard that can help you assess steps the outsourcer agents should follow. Keep the questionnaire high level but specific to your environment. The scorecard should include questions that follow the steps to take considering your intake channels. For instance, if end users can reach the service desk via phone, chat, and email, build your QA around assessing customer service for call, chat, and ticket quality.
    2. Build a training program for agents: Develop an internal monitoring plan to relay detailed feedback to your MSP. Assess performance and utilize KBs as training materials for coaching agents on challenging transactions.
    3. Everything that goes to your service desk has to be documented; there will be no organic transfer of knowledge and experience.
    4. You need to let your MSP know how their efforts are impacting the performance of your organization. Measure your internal performance against the external performance of your service desk.
    5. Constant internal check-ins ensure that your MSP is meeting the SLAs outlined in the RFP.
    6. Routine reporting of metrics and ticket trends allow you to enact problem management. Otherwise, you risk your MSP operating your service desk with no internal feedback from its owner.
    7. Use metrics to determine the service desk functionality.

    Consider the success story of your outsourced service desk

    Build a feedback program for your outsourced services. Utilize transactional surveys to discover and tell outsourcing success to the impacted stakeholders.

    Ensure you apply steps for providing feedback to make sure processes are handled as expected. Service desk is the face of IT. Customer satisfaction on ticket transactions reflects satisfaction with IT and the organization.

    Build customer satisfaction surveys and conduct them for every transaction to get a better sense of outsourced service desk functionality. Collaborate with the vendor to make sure you build a proper strategy.

    • Build a right list of questions. Multiple and lengthy questions may lead to survey taking fatigue. Make sure you ask the right questions and give an option to the customer to comment any additional notes.
    • Give the option to users to rate the transaction. Make the whole process very seamless and doable in a few seconds.
    • Ensure to follow-up on negative feedback. This will help you find gaps in services and provide training to improve customer service.

    3.3.1 Analyze your outsourced service desk for continual improvement

    1 hour

    1. In this project, you determined the KPIs based on your service desk objectives (activity 2.2.2).
    2. Refer to your list of metrics in section 7 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter.
    3. Think about what story you want to tell and determine what factors will help move the narrative.
    4. Discuss how often you would like to track these metrics. Determine the audience for each metric.
    5. Provide the list to the MSP to create reports with auto-distribution.

    Input

    • Determined CSFs and KPIs

    Output

    • List of metrics to track, including frequency to report and audience to report to

    Materials

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Reward the MSP for performance instead of "punishing" them for service failure

    Turn your vendor into a true partner by including an "earn back" condition in the contract

    MSPs often offer clients credit requests (service credits) for their service failures, which are applied to the previous month's monthly recurring charge. They are applied to the last month's MRC (monthly reoccurring charges) at the end of term and then the vendor pays out the residual.

    However, while common, service credits are not always perceived to be a strong incentive for the provider to continually focus on improvement of mean-time-to-respond/mean-time-to-resolve.

    • Engage the vendor as a true partner within a relationship only based upon Service Credits.
    • Suggest the vendor include a minor change to the non-performance processes within the final agreement: the vendor implements an "earn back" condition in the agreement.
    • Where a bank of service credits exists because of non-performance, if the provider exceeds the SLA performance metrics for a number of consecutive months (two is common), then an amount of any prior credits received by client is returned to the provider as an earn back for improved performance.
    • This can be a useful mechanism to drive improved performance.

    Measure the outsourced service desk ROI constantly to drive efficient decisions for continual improvement or an exit plan

    Efficient outsourced service desk causes positive impacts on business satisfaction. To address the true value of the services outsourced, you should evaluate the return on investment (ROI) in these areas: Emotional ROI, Time ROI, Financial ROI

    Emotional ROI

    Service desk's main purpose should be to provide topnotch services to end users. Build a customer experience program and leverage transactional surveys and relationship surveys to constantly analyze customer feedback on service quality.

    Ask yourself:

    • How have the outsourced services improved customer satisfaction?
    • How has the service desk impacted the business brand?
    • Have these services improved agents' job satisfaction?
    • What is the NPS score of the service desk?
    • What should we do to reduce the detractor rate and improve satisfaction leveraging the outsourced service desk?

    Time ROI

    Besides customer satisfaction, SLA commitment is a big factor to consider when conducting ROI analysis.

    Ask these questions:

    • Have we had improvement in FCR?
    • What are the mean time to resolve incidents and mean time to fulfill requests?
    • Is the cost incurred to outsourced services worth improvement in such metrics?

    Financial ROI

    As already mentioned in Phase 1, the main motivation for outsourcing the service desk should not be around cost reduction, but to improve performance. Regardless, it's still important to understand the financial implications of your decision.

    To evaluate the financial impact of your outsourced service desk, ask these questions:

    • How much have the outsourced services impacted our business financially?
    • How much are we paying compared to when it was done internally?
    • Considering the emotional, time, and effort factors, is it worth bringing the services in house or changing the vendor?

    3.3.2 Make a case to either rehabilitate your outsourcing agreement or exit

    3-4 hours

    1. Refer to the results of activity 2.2.2. for the list of metrics and the metrics dashboard over the past quarter.
    2. Consider emotional and time ROI, assess end-user satisfaction and SLA, and run a report comparison with the baseline that you built prior to outsourcing the service desk.
    3. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you stay with the vendor.
    4. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you switch the vendor.
    5. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you repatriate the service desk.
    6. Estimate the non-recurring costs associated with the move, such as the penalty for early contract termination, data center moving costs, and cost of potential business downtime during the move. Sum them to determine the investment.
    7. Calculate the return on investment. Discuss and decide whether the organization should consider rehabilitating the vendor agreement or ending the partnership.

    Input

    • Outsourced service desk metrics
    • Operating expenses

    Output

    • Return on investment

    Materials

    • List of metrics
    • Laptop
    • Markers
    • Flip chart/whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    For more information on conducting this activity, refer to InfoTech's blueprint Terminate the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Relationship

    Define exit conditions to complete your contract with your MSP

    The end of outsourcing is difficult. Your organization needs to maintain continuity of service during the transition. Your MSP needs to ensure that its resources can be effectively transitioned to the next deployment with minimal downtime. It is crucial to define your exit conditions so that both sides can prepare accordingly.

    • Your exit conditions must be clearly laid out in the contract. Create a list of service desk functions and metrics that are important to your organization's success. If your MSP is not meeting those needs or performance levels, you should terminate your services.
    • Most organizations accomplish this through a clear definition of hard and measurable KPIs and metrics that must be achieved and what will happen in the case these metrics are not being regularly met. If your vendor doesn't meet these requirements as defined in your contract, you then have a valid reason and the ability to leave the agreement.

    Examples of exit conditions:

    • Your MSP did not meet their SLAs on priority 1 or 2 tickets two times within a month.
    • If they didn't meet the SLA twice in that 30 days, you could terminate the contract penalty-free.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If things start going south with your MSP, negotiate a "get well plan." Outline your problems to the MSP and have them come back to you with a list of how they're going to fix these problems to get well before you move forward with the contract.

    Try to rehabilitate before you repatriate

    Switching service providers or ending the contract can be expensive and may not solve your problems. Try to rehabilitate your vendor relationship before immediately ending it.

    You may consider terminating your outsourcing agreement if you are dissatisfied with the current agreement or there has been a change in circumstances (either the vendor has changed, or your organization has changed).

    Before doing so, consider the challenges:

    1. It can be very expensive to switch providers or end a contract.
    2. Switching vendors can be a large project involving transfer of knowledge, documentation, and data.
    3. It can be difficult to maintain service desk availability, functionality, and reliability during the transition.

    Diagnose the cause of the problem before assuming it's the MSP's fault. The issue may lie with poorly defined requirements and processes, lack of communication, poor vendor management, or inappropriate SLAs. Re-assess your strategy and re-negotiate your contract if necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There are many reasons why outsourcing relationships fail, but it's not always the vendor's fault.

    Clients often think their MSP isn't doing a great job, but a lot of the time the reason comes back to the client. They may not have provided sufficient documentation on processes, were not communicating well, didn't have a regular point of contact, and weren't doing regular service reviews. Before exiting the relationship, evaluate why it's not working and try to fix things first.

    Don't stop with an exit strategy, you also need to develop a transition plan

    Plan out your transition timeline, taking into account current contract terms and key steps required. Be prepared to handle tickets immediately upon giving notice.

    • Review your outsourcing contract with legal counsel to identify areas of concern for lock-in or breech.
    • Complete a cost/benefit analysis.
    • Bring intellectual property (including ticket data, knowledge base articles, and reports) back in-house (if you'd like to repatriate the service desk) or transfer to the next service desk vendor (if you're outsourcing to another MSP).
    • Review and update service desk standard processes (escalation, service levels, ticket templates, etc.).
    • Procure service desk software, licenses, and necessary hardware as needed.
    • Train the staff (internal for repatriating the service desk, or external for the prospective MSP).
    • Communicate the transition plan and be prepared to start responding to tickets immediately.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Develop a transition plan about six months before the contract notice date. Be proactive by constantly tracking the MSP, running ROI analyses and training staff before moving the services to the internal team or the next MSP. This will help you manage the transition smoothly and handle intake channels so that upon potential exit, users won't be disrupted.

    3.3.3 Develop an exit strategy in case you need to end your contract early

    3-4 hours

    Create a plan to be prepared in case you need to end your contract with the MSP early.

    Your exit strategy should encompass both the conditions under which you would need to end your contract with the MSP and the next steps you will take to transition your services.

    1. Define the exit conditions you plan to negotiate into your contract with the MSP:
      • Identify the performance levels you will require your MSP to meet.
      • Identify the actions you expect the MSP to take if they fail to meet these performance levels.
      • Identify the conditions under which you would leave the contract early.
    2. Develop a strategy for transitioning services in the event you need to leave your contract with the MSP:
      • Will you hand the responsibility to a new MSP or repatriate the service desk back in-house?
      • How will you maintain services through the transition?
    3. Document your exit strategy in section 6 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Input

    • Outsourced service desk metrics
    • Operating expenses

    Output

    • Return on investment

    Materials

    • List of metrics
    • Laptop
    • Markers
    • Flip chart/whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You have now re-envisioned your service desk by building a solid strategy for outsourcing it to a vendor. You first analyzed your challenges with the current service desk and evaluated the benefits of outsourcing services. Then you went through requirements assessment to find out which processes should be outsourced. Thereafter, you developed an RFP to communicate your proposal and evaluate the best candidates.

    You have also developed a continual improvement plan to ensure the outsourcer provides services according to your expectations. Through this plan, you're making sure to build a good relationship through incentivizing the vendor for accomplishments rather than punishing for service failures. However, you've also contemplated an exit plan in the RFP for potential consistent service failures.

    Ideally, this blueprint has helped you go beyond requirements identification and served as a means to change your mindset and strategy for outsourcing the service desk efficiently to gain long-term benefits.

    if you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    This is a picture of Info-Tech analyst Mahmoud Ramin

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    This is a screenshot of activity 1.2.1 found in this blueprint

    Identify Processes to Outsource
    Identify service desk tasks that will provide the most value upon outsourcing.

    This is a screenshot of activity 3.2.2 found in this blueprint

    Score Candidate Vendors
    Evaluate vendors on their capabilities for satisfying your service desk requirements.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    • Improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meeting SLAs.

    Outsource IT Infrastructure to Improve System Availability, Reliability, and Recovery

    • There are very few IT infrastructure components you should be housing internally – outsource everything else.

    Terminate the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Relationship

    • There must be 50 ways to leave your vendor.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Yev Khovrenkov; Enterprise Consultant, Solvera Solutions

    Kamil Salagan; I&O Manager, Bartek Ingredients

    Satish Mekerira; VP of IT, Coherus BioSciences

    Kris Krishan; Head of IT and Business Systems, Waymo

    Kris Arthur; Infra & Security Director, SEKO Logistics

    Valance Howden; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Sandi Conrad; Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Graham Price; Senior Director of Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group

    Barry Cousins; Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Mark Tauschek; VP of I&O Research, Info-Tech Research Group

    Darin Stahl; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Yong; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    A special thank-you to five anonymous contributors

    Bibliography

    Allnutt, Charles. "The Ultimate List of Outsourcing Statistics." MicroSourcing, 2022. Accessed July 2022.
    "Considerations for outsourcing the service desk. A guide to improving your service desk and service delivery performance through outsourcing." Giva. Accessed May 2022.
    Hurley, Allison. "Service Desk Outsourcing | Statistics, Challenges, & Benefits." Forward BPO Inc., 2019. Accessed June 2022.
    Mtsweni, Patricia, et al. "The impact of outsourcing information technology services on business operations." South African Journal of Information Management, 2021, Accessed May 2022.
    "Offshore, Onshore or Hybrid–Choosing the Best IT Outsourcing Model." Calance, 2021. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    "Service Integration and Management (SIAM) Foundation Body of Knowledge." Scopism, 2020. Accessed May 2022.
    Shultz, Aaron. "IT Help Desk Outsourcing Pricing Models Comparison." Global Help Desk Services. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Shultz, Aaron. "4 Steps to Accurately Measure the ROI of Outsourced Help Desk Services" Global Help Desk Services, Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Sunberg, John. "Great Expectations: What to Look for from Outsourced Service Providers Today." HDI. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Walters, Grover. "Pivotal Decisions in outsourcing." Muma Case Review, 2019. Accessed May 2022.
    Wetherell, Steve. "Outsourced IT Support Services: 10 Steps to Better QA" Global Held Desk Services. Accessed May 2022. Web.

    Build a Data Classification MVP for M365

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}67|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications
    • Resources are the primary obstacle to getting a foot hold in O365 governance, whether it is funding or FTE resources.
    • Data is segmented and is difficult to analyze when you can’t see it or manage the relationships between sources.
    • Organizations expect results early and quickly and a common obstacle is that building a proper data classification framework can take more than two years and the business can't wait that long.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Data classification is the lynchpin to ANY effective governance of O/M365 and your objective is to navigate through this easily and effectively and build a robust, secure, and viable governance model.
    • Start your journey by identifying what and where your data is and how much data you have. You need to understand what sensitive data you have and where it is stored before you can protect it or govern that data.
    • Ensure there is a high-level leader who is the champion of the governance objective.

    Impact and Result

    • Using least complex sensitivity labels in your classification are your building blocks to compliance and security in your data management schema; they are your foundational steps.

    Build a Data Classification MVP for M365 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Data Classification MVP for M365 Deck – A guide for how to build a minimum-viable product for data classification that end users will actually use.

    Discover where your data resides, what governance helps you do, and what types of data you're classifying. Then build your data and security protection baselines for your retention policy, sensitivity labels, workload containers, and both forced and unforced policies.

    • Build a Data Classification MVP for M365 Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Build a Data Classification MVP for M365

    Kickstart your governance with data classification users will actually use!

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech Insight

    • Creating an MVP gets you started in data governance
      Information protection and governance are not something you do once and then you are done. It is a constant process where you start with the basics (a minimum-viable product or MVP) and enhance your schema over time. The objective of the MVP is reducing obstacles to establishing an initial governance position, and then enabling rapid development of the solution to address a variety of real risks, including data loss prevention (DLP), data retention, legal holds, and data labeling.
    • Define your information and protection strategy
      The initial strategy is to start looking across your organization and identifying your customer data, regulatory data, and sensitive information. To have a successful data protection strategy you will include lifecycle management, risk management, data protection policies, and DLP. All key stakeholders need to be kept in the loop. Ensure you keep track of all available data and conduct a risk analysis early. Remember, data is your highest valued intangible asset.
    • Planning and resourcing are central to getting started on MVP
      A governance plan and governance decisions are your initial focus. Create a team of stakeholders that include IT and business leaders (including Legal, Finance, HR, and Risk), and ensure there is a top-level leader who is the champion of the governance objective, which is to ensure your data is safe, secure, and not prone to leakage or theft, and maintain confidentiality where it is warranted.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Today, the amount of data companies are gathering is growing at an explosive rate. New tools are enabling unforeseen channels and ways of collaborating.
    • Combined with increased regulatory oversight and reporting obligations, this makes the discovery and management of data a massive undertaking. IT can’t find and protect the data when the business has difficulty defining its data.
    • The challenge is to build a framework that can easily categorize and classify data yet allows for sufficient regulatory compliance and granularity to be useful. Also, to do it now because tomorrow is too late.
    Common Obstacles

    Data governance has several obstacles that impact a successful launch, especially if governing M365 is not a planned strategy. Below are some of the more common obstacles:

    • Resources are the primary obstacle to starting O365 governance, whether it is funding or people.
    • Data is segmented and is difficult to analyze when you can’t see it or manage the relationships between sources.
    • Organizations expect results early and quickly and a common obstacle is that building a "proper data classification framework” is a 2+ year project and the business can't wait that long.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Start with the basics: build a minimum-viable product (MVP) to get started on the path to sustainable governance.
    • Identify what and where your data resides, how much data you have, and understand what sensitive data needs to be protected.
    • Create your team of stakeholders, including Legal, records managers, and privacy officers. Remember, they own the data and should manage it.
    • Categorization comes before classification, and discovery comes before categorization. Use easy-to-understand terms like high, medium, or low risk.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data classification is the lynchpin to any effective governance of O/M365 and your objective is to navigate through this easily and effectively and build a robust, secure, and viable governance model. Start your journey by identifying what and where your data is and how much data do you have. You need to understand what sensitive data you have and where it is stored before you can protect or govern it. Ensure there is a high-level leader who is the champion of the governance objectives. Data classification fulfills the governance objectives of risk mitigation, governance and compliance, efficiency and optimization, and analytics.

    Questions you need to ask

    Four key questions to kick off your MVP.

    1

    Know Your Data

    Do you know where your critical and sensitive data resides and what is being done with it?

    Trying to understand where your information is can be a significant project.

    2

    Protect Your Data

    Do you have control of your data as it traverses across the organization and externally to partners?

    You want to protect information wherever it goes through encryption, etc.

    3

    Prevent Data Loss

    Are you able to detect unsafe activities that prevent sharing of sensitive information?

    Data loss prevention (DLP) is the practice of detecting and preventing data breaches, exfiltration, or unwanted destruction of sensitive data.

    4

    Govern Your Data

    Are you using multiple solutions (or any) to classify, label, and protect sensitive data?

    Many organizations use more than one solution to protect and govern their data, making it difficult to determine if there are any coverage gaps.

    Classification tiers

    Build your schema.

    Pyramid visualization for classification tiers. The top represents 'Simplicity', and the bottom 'Complexity' with the length of the sides at each level representing the '# of policies' and '# of labels'. At the top level is 'MVP (Minimum-Viable Product) - Confidential, Internal (Subcategory: Personal), Public'. At the middle level is 'Regulated - Highly Confidential, Confidential, Sensitive, General, Internal, Restricted, Personal, Sub-Private, Public'. And a the bottom level is 'Government (DOD) - Top Secret (TS), Secret, Confidential, Restricted, Official, Unclassified, Clearance'

    Info-Tech Insight

    Deciding on how granular you go into data classification will chiefly be governed by what industry you are in and your regulatory obligations – the more highly regulated your industry, the more classification levels you will be mandated to enforce. The more complexity you introduce into your organization, the more operational overhead both in cost and resources you will have to endure and build.

    Microsoft MIP Topology

    Microsoft Information Protection (MIP), which is Microsoft’s Data Classification Services, is the key to achieving your governance goals. Without an MVP, data classification will be overwhelming; simplifying is the first step in achieving governance.

    A diagram of multiple offerings all connected to 'MIP Data Classification Service'. Circled is 'Sensitivity Labels' with an arrow pointing back to 'MIP' at the center.
    (Source: Microsoft, “Microsoft Purview compliance portal”)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Using least-complex sensitivity labels in your classification are your building blocks to compliance and security in your data management schema; they are your foundational steps.

    MVP RACI Chart

    Data governance is a "takes a whole village" kind of effort.

    Clarify who is expected to do what with a RACI chart.

    End User M365 Administrator Security/ Compliance Data Owner
    Define classification divisions R A
    Appy classification label to data – at point of creation A R
    Apply classification label to data – legacy items R A
    Map classification divisions to relevant policies R A
    Define governance objectives R A
    Backup R A
    Retention R A
    Establish minimum baseline A R

    What and where your data resides

    Data types that require classification.

    Logos for 'Microsoft', 'Office 365', and icons for each program included in that package.
    M365 Workload Containers
    Icon for MS Exchange. Icon for MS SharePoint.Icon for MS Teams. Icon for MS OneDrive. Icon for MS Project Online.
    Email
    • Attachments
    Site Collections, Sites Sites Project Databases
    Contacts Teams and Group Site Collections, Sites Libraries and Lists Sites
    Metadata Libraries and Lists Documents
    • Versions
    Libraries and Lists
    Teams Conversations Documents
    • Versions
    Metadata Documents
    • Versions
    Teams Chats Metadata Permissions
    • Internal Sharing
    • External Sharing
    Metadata
    Permissions
    • Internal Sharing
    • External Sharing
    Files Shared via Teams Chats Permissions
    • Internal Sharing
    • External Sharing

    Info-Tech Insight

    Knowing where your data resides will ensure you do not miss any applicable data that needs to be classified. These are examples of the workload containers; you may have others.

    Discover and classify on- premises files using AIP

    AIP helps you manage sensitive data prior to migrating to Office 365:
    • Use discover mode to identify and report on files containing sensitive data.
    • Use enforce mode to automatically classify, label, and protect files with sensitive data.
    Can be configured to scan:
    • SMB files
    • SharePoint Server 2016, 2013
    Stock image of a laptop uploading to the cloud with a padlock and key in front of it.
    • Map your network and find over-exposed file shares.
    • Protect files using MIP encryption.
    • Inspect the content in file repositories and discover sensitive information.
    • Classify and label file per MIP policy.
    Azure Information Protection scanner helps discover, classify, label, and protect sensitive information in on-premises file servers. You can run the scanner and get immediate insight into risks with on-premises data. Discover mode helps you identify and report on files containing sensitive data (Microsoft Inside Track and CIAOPS, 2022). Enforce mode automatically classifies, labels, and protects files with sensitive data.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Any asset deployed to the cloud must have approved data classification. Enforcing this policy is a must to control your data.

    Understanding governance

    Microsoft Information Governance

    Information Governance
    • Retention policies for workloads
    • Inactive and archive mailboxes

    Arrow pointing down-right

    Records Management
    • Retention labels for items
    • Disposition review

    Arrow pointing down-left

    Retention and Deletion

    ‹——— Connectors for Third-Party Data ———›

    Information governance manages your content lifecycle using solutions to import, store, and classify business-critical data so you can keep what you need and delete what you do not. Backup should not be used as a retention methodology since information governance is managed as a “living entity” and backup is a stored information block that is “suspended in time.” Records management uses intelligent classification to automate and simplify the retention schedule for regulatory, legal, and business-critical records in your organization. It is for that discrete set of content that needs to be immutable.
    (Source: Microsoft, “Microsoft Purview compliance portal”)

    Retention and backup policy decision

    Retention is not backup.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Retention is not backup. Retention means something different: “the content must be available for discovery and legal document production while being able to defend its provenance, chain of custody, and its deletion or destruction” (AvePoint Blog, 2021).

    Microsoft Responsibility (Microsoft Protection) Weeks to Months Customer Responsibility (DLP, Backup, Retention Policy) Months to Years
    Loss of service due to natural disaster or data center outage Loss of data due to departing employees or deactivated accounts
    Loss of service due to hardware or infrastructure failure Loss of data due to malicious insiders or hackers deleting content
    Short-term (30 days) user error with recycle bin/ version history (including OneDrive “File Restore”) Loss of data due to malware or ransomware
    Short-term (14 days) administrative error with soft- delete for groups, mailboxes, or service-led rollback Recovery from prolonged outages
    Long-term accidental deletion coverage with selective rollback

    Understand retention policy

    What are retention policies used for? Why you need them as part of your MVP?

    Do not confuse retention labels and policies with backup.

    Remember: “retention [policies are] auto-applied whereas retention label policies are only applied if the content is tagged with the associated retention label” (AvePoint Blog, 2021).

    E-discovery tool retention policies are not turned on automatically.

    Retention policies are not a backup tool – when you activate this feature you are unable to delete anyone.

    “Data retention policy tools enable a business to:

    • “Decide proactively whether to retain content, delete content, or retain and then delete the content when needed.
    • “Apply a policy to all content or just content meeting certain conditions, such as items with specific keywords or specific types of sensitive information.
    • “Apply a single policy to the entire organization or specific locations or users.
    • “Maintain discoverability of content for lawyers and auditors, while protecting it from change or access by other users. […] ‘Retention Policies’ are different than ‘Retention Label Policies’ – they do the same thing – but a retention policy is auto-applied, whereas retention label policies are only applied if the content is tagged with the associated retention label.

    “It is also important to remember that ‘Retention Label Policies’ do not move a copy of the content to the ‘Preservation Holds’ folder until the content under policy is changed next.” (Source: AvePoint Blog, 2021)

    Definitions

    Data classification is a focused term used in the fields of cybersecurity and information governance to describe the process of identifying, categorizing, and protecting content according to its sensitivity or impact level. In its most basic form, data classification is a means of protecting your data from unauthorized disclosure, alteration, or destruction based on how sensitive or impactful it is.

    Once data is classified, you can then create policies; sensitive data types, trainable classifiers, and sensitivity labels function as inputs to policies. Policies define behaviors, like if there will be a default label, if labeling is mandatory, what locations the label will be applied to, and under what conditions. A policy is created when you configure Microsoft 365 to publish or automatically apply sensitive information types, trainable classifiers, or labels.

    Sensitivity label policies show one or more labels to Office apps (like Outlook and Word), SharePoint sites, and Office 365 groups. Once published, users can apply the labels to protect their content.

    Data loss prevention (DLP) policies help identify and protect your organization's sensitive info (Microsoft Docs, April 2022). For example, you can set up policies to help make sure information in email and documents is not shared with the wrong people. DLP policies can use sensitive information types and retention labels to identify content containing information that might need protection.

    Retention policies and retention label policies help you keep what you want and get rid of what you do not. They also play a significant role in records management.

    Data examples for MVP classification

    • Examples of the type of data you consider to be Confidential, Internal, or Public.
    • This will help you determine what to classify and where it is.
    Internal Personal, Employment, and Job Performance Data
    • Social Security Number
    • Date of birth
    • Marital status
    • Job application data
    • Mailing address
    • Resume
    • Background checks
    • Interview notes
    • Employment contract
    • Pay rate
    • Bonuses
    • Benefits
    • Performance reviews
    • Disciplinary notes or warnings
    Confidential Information
    • Business and marketing plans
    • Company initiatives
    • Customer information and lists
    • Information relating to intellectual property
    • Invention or patent
    • Research data
    • Passwords and IT-related information
    • Information received from third parties
    • Company financial account information
    • Social Security Number
    • Payroll and personnel records
    • Health information
    • Self-restricted personal data
    • Credit card information
    Internal Data
    • Sales data
    • Website data
    • Customer information
    • Job application data
    • Financial data
    • Marketing data
    • Resource data
    Public Data
    • Press releases
    • Job descriptions
    • Marketing material intended for general public
    • Research publications

    New container sensitivity labels (MIP)

    New container sensitivity labels

    Public Private
    Privacy
    1. Membership to group is open; anyone can join
    2. “Everyone except external guest” ACL onsite; content available in search to all tenants
    1. Only owner can add members
    2. No access beyond the group membership until someone shares it or changes permissions
    Allowed Not Allowed
    External guest policy
    1. Membership to group is open; anyone can join
    2. “Everyone except external guest” ACL onsite; content available in search to all tenants
    1. Only owner can add members
    2. No access beyond the group membership until someone shares it or changes permissions

    What users will see when they create or label a Team/Group/Site

    Table of what users will see when they create or label a team/group/site highlighting 'External guest policy' and 'Privacy policy options' as referenced above.
    (Source: Microsoft, “Microsoft Purview compliance portal”)

    Info-Tech Insights

    Why you need sensitivity container labels:
    • Manage privacy of Teams Sites and M365 Groups
    • Manage external user access to SPO sites and teams
    • Manage external sharing from SPO sites
    • Manage access from unmanaged devices

    Data protection and security baselines

    Data Protection Baseline

    “Microsoft provides a default assessment in Compliance Manager for the Microsoft 365 data protection baseline" (Microsoft Docs, June 2022). This baseline assessment has a set of controls for key regulations and standards for data protection and general data governance. This baseline draws elements primarily from NIST CSF (National Institute of Standards and Technology Cybersecurity Framework) and ISO (International Organization for Standardization) as well as from FedRAMP (Federal Risk and Authorization Management Program) and GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation of the European Union).

    Security Baseline

    The final stage in M365 governance is security. You need to implement a governance policy that clearly defines storage locations for certain types of data and who has permission to access it. You need to record and track who accesses content and how they share it externally. “Part of your process should involve monitoring unusual external sharing to ensure staff only share documents that they are allowed to” (Rencore, 2021).

    Info-Tech Insights

    • Controls are already in place to set data protection policy. This assists in the MVP activities.
    • Finally, you need to set your security baseline to ensure proper permissions are in place.

    Prerequisite baseline

    Icon of crosshairs.
    Security

    MFA or SSO to access from anywhere, any device

    Banned password list

    BYOD sync with corporate network

    Icon of a group.
    Users

    Sign out inactive users automatically

    Enable guest users

    External sharing

    Block client forwarding rules

    Icon of a database.
    Resources

    Account lockout threshold

    OneDrive

    SharePoint

    Icon of gears.
    Controls

    Sensitivity labels, retention labels and policies, DLP

    Mobile application management policy

    Building baselines

    Sensitivity Profiles: Public, Internal, Confidential; Subcategory: Highly Confidential

    Microsoft 365 Collaboration Protection Profiles

    Sensitivity Public External Collaboration Internal Highly Confidential
    Description Data that is specifically prepared for public consumption Not approved for public consumption, but OK for external collaboration External collaboration highly discouraged and must be justified Data of the highest sensitivity: avoid oversharing, internal collaboration only
    Label details
    • No content marking
    • No encryption
    • Public site
    • External collaboration allowed
    • Unmanaged devices: allow full access
    • No content marking
    • No encryption
    • Private site
    • External collaboration allowed
    • Unmanaged devices: allow full access
    • Content marking
    • Encryption
    • Private site
    • External collaboration allowed but monitored
    • Unmanaged devices: limited web access
    • Content marking
    • Encryption
    • Private site
    • External collaboration disabled
    • Unmanaged devices: block access
    Teams or Site details Public Team or Site open discovery, guests are allowed Private Team or Site members are invited, guests are allowed Private Team or Site members are invited, guests are not allowed
    DLP None Warn Block

    Please Note: Global/Compliance Admins go to the 365 Groups platform, the compliance center (Purview), and Teams services (Source: Microsoft Documentation, “Microsoft Purview compliance documentation”)

    Info-Tech Insights

    • Building baseline profiles will be a part of your MVP. You will understand what type of information you are addressing and label it accordingly.
    • Sensitivity labels are a way to classify your organization's data in a way that specifies how sensitive the data is. This helps you decrease risks in sharing information that shouldn't be accessible to anyone outside your organization or department. Applying sensitivity labels allows you to protect all your data easily.

    MVP activities

    PRIMARY
    ACTIVITIES
    Define Your Governance
    The objective of the MVP is reducing barriers to establishing an initial governance position, and then enabling rapid progression of the solution to address a variety of tangible risks, including DLP, data retention, legal holds, and labeling.
    Decide on your classification labels early.

    CATEGORIZATION





    CLASSIFICATION

    MVP
    Data Discovery and Management
    AIP (Azure Information Protection) scanner helps discover, classify, label, and protect sensitive information in on-premises file servers. You can run the scanner and get immediate insight into risks with on-premises data.
    Baseline Setup
    Building baseline profiles will be a part of your MVP. You will understand what type of information you are addressing and label it accordingly. Microsoft provides a default assessment in Compliance Manager for the Microsoft 365 data protection baseline.
    Default M365 settings
    Microsoft provides a default assessment in Compliance Manager for the Microsoft 365 data protection baseline. This baseline assessment has a set of controls for key regulations and standards for data protection and general data governance.
    SUPPORT
    ACTIVITIES
    Retention Policy
    Retention policy is auto-applied. Decide whether to retain content, delete content, or retain and then delete the content.
    Sensitivity Labels
    Automatically enforce policies on groups through labels; classify groups.
    Workload Containers
    M365: SharePoint, Teams, OneDrive, and Exchange, where your data is stored for labels and policies.
    Unforced Policies
    Written policies that are not enforceable by controls in Compliance Manager such as acceptable use policy.
    Forced Policies
    Restrict sharing controls to outside organizations. Enforce prefix or suffix to group or team names.

    ACME Company MVP for M/O365

    PRIMARY
    ACTIVITIES
    Define Your Governance


    Focus on ability to use legal hold and GDPR compliance.

    CATEGORIZATION





    CLASSIFICATION

    MVP
    Data Discovery and Management


    Three classification levels (public, internal, confidential), which are applied by the user when data is created. Same three levels are used for AIP to scan legacy sources.

    Baseline Setup


    All data must at least be classified before it is uploaded to an M/O365 cloud service.

    Default M365 settings


    Turn on templates 1 8 the letter q and the number z

    SUPPORT
    ACTIVITIES
    Retention Policy


    Retention policy is auto-applied. Decide whether to retain content, delete content, or retain and then delete the content.

    Sensitivity Labels


    Automatically enforce policies on groups through labels; classify groups.

    Workload Containers


    M365: SharePoint, Teams, OneDrive, and Exchange, where your data is stored for labels and policies.

    Unforced Policies


    Written policies that are not enforceable by controls in Compliance Manager such as acceptable use policy.

    Forced Policies


    Restrict sharing controls to outside organizations. Enforce prefix or suffix to group or team names.

    Related Blueprints

    Govern Office 365

    Office 365 is as difficult to wrangle as it is valuable. Leverage best practices to produce governance outcomes aligned with your goals.

    Map your organizational goals to the administration features available in the Office 365 console. Your governance should reflect your requirements.

    Migrate to Office 365 Now

    Jumping into an Office 365 migration project without careful thought of the risks of a cloud migration will lead to project halt and interruption. Intentionally plan in order to expose risk and to develop project foresight for a smooth migration.

    Microsoft Teams Cookbook

    Remote work calls for leveraging your Office 365 license to use Microsoft Teams – but IT is unsure about best practices for governance and permissions. Moreover, IT has few resources to help train end users with Teams best practices

    IT Governance, Risk & Compliance

    Several blueprints are available on a broader topic of governance, from Make Your IT Governance Adaptable to Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results and Build an IT Risk Management Program.

    Bibliography

    “Best practices for sharing files and folders with unauthenticated users.” Microsoft Build, 28 April 2022. Accessed 2 April 2022.

    “Build and manage assessments in Compliance Manager.” Microsoft Docs, 15 June 2022. Web.

    “Building a modern workplace with Microsoft 365.” Microsoft Inside Track, n.d. Web.

    Crane, Robert. “June 2020 Microsoft 365 Need to Know Webinar.” CIAOPS, SlideShare, 26 June 2020. Web.

    “Data Classification: Overview, Types, and Examples.” Simplilearn, 27 Dec. 2021. Accessed 11 April 2022.

    “Data loss prevention in Exchange Online.” Microsoft Docs, 19 April 2022. Web.

    Davies, Nahla. “5 Common Data Governance Challenges (and How to Overcome Them).” Dataversity. 25 October 2021. Accessed 5 April 2022.

    “Default labels and policies to protect your data.” Microsoft Build, April 2022. Accessed 3 April 2022.

    M., Peter. "Guide: The difference between Microsoft Backup and Retention." AvePoint Blog, 9 Oct. 2021. Accessed 4 April 2022.

    Meyer, Guillaume. “Sensitivity Labels: What They Are, Why You Need Them, and How to Apply Them.” nBold, 6 October 2021. Accessed 2 April 2022.

    “Microsoft 365 guidance for security & compliance.” Microsoft, 27 April 2022. Accessed 28 April 2022.

    “Microsoft Purview compliance portal.” Microsoft, 19 April 2022. Accessed 22 April 2022.

    “Microsoft Purview compliance documentation.” Microsoft, n.d. Accessed 22 April 2022.

    “Microsoft Trust Center: Products and services that run on trust.” Microsoft, 2022. Accessed 3 April 2022.

    “Protect your sensitive data with Microsoft Purview.” Microsoft Build, April 2022. Accessed 3 April 2022.

    Zimmergren, Tobias. “4 steps to successful cloud governance in Office 365.” Rencore, 9 Sept. 2021. Accessed 5 April 2022.

    Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}350|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $94,858 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Your on-premises Dynamics CRM or AX needs updating or replacing, and you’re not sure whether to upgrade or transition to the cloud with the new Microsoft Dynamics 365 platform. You’re also uncertain about what the cost might be or if there are savings to be had with a transition to the cloud for your enterprise resource planning system.
    • The new license model, Apps vs. Plans and Dual Use Rights in the cloud, includes confusing terminology and licensing rules that don’t seem to make sense. This makes it difficult to purchase proper licensing that aligns with your current on-premises setup and to maximize your choices in transition licenses.
    • There are different licensing programs for Dynamics 365 in the cloud. You need to decide on the most cost effective program for your company, for now and for the future.
    • Microsoft is constantly pressuring you to move to the cloud, but you don’t understand the why. You're uncertain if there's real value in such a strategic move right now, or if should you wait awhile.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on what’s best for you. Do a thorough current state assessment of your hardware and software needs and consider what will be required in the near future (one to four years).
    • Educate yourself. You should have a good understanding of your options from staying on-premises vs. an interim hybrid model vs. a lift and shift to the cloud.
    • Consider the overall picture. There might not be hard cost savings to be realized in the near term, given the potential increase in licensing costs over a CapEx to OpEx savings.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding the best time to transition, from a licensing perspective, could save you significant dollars over the next one to four years.
    • Planning and effectively mapping your current licenses to the new cloud user model will maximize your current investment into the cloud and fully leverage all available Microsoft incentives in the process.
    • Gaining the knowledge required to make the most informed transition decision, based on best timing, most appropriate licensing program, and maximized cost savings in the near term.
    • Engaging effectively with Microsoft and a competent Dynamics partner for deployment or licensing needs.

    Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should learn about Microsoft Dynamics 365 user-based cloud licensing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Timing

    Review to confirm if you are eligible for Microsoft cloud transition discounts and what is your best time to move to the cloud.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 1: Timing
    • Microsoft License Agreement Summary Tool
    • Existing CRM-AX License Summary Worksheet

    2. Licensing

    Begin with a review to understand user-based cloud licensing, then move to mapping your existing licenses to the cloud users and plans.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 2: Licensing
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 On-Premises License Transition Mapping Tool
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 User License Assignment Tool
    • Microsoft Licensing Programs Brief Overview

    3. Cost review

    Use your cloud mapping activity as well your eligible discounts to estimate your cloud transition licensing costs.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 3: Cost Review
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 Cost Estimator

    4. Analyze and decide

    Start by summarizing your choice license program, decide on the ideal time, then move on to total cost review.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 4: Analyze and Decide
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand What You Own and What You Can Transition to the Cloud

    The Purpose

    Understand what you own and what you can transition to the cloud.

    Learn which new cloud user licenses to transition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All your licenses in one summary.

    Eligible transition discounts.

    Mapping of on-premises to cloud users.

    Activities

    1.1 Validate your discount availability.

    1.2 Summarize agreements.

    1.3 Itemize your current license ownership.

    1.4 Review your timing options.

    1.5 Map your on-premises licenses to the cloud-based, user-based model.

    Outputs

    Current agreement summary

    On-premises to cloud user mapping summary

    Understanding of cloud app and plan features

    2 Transition License Cost Estimate and Additional Costs

    The Purpose

    Estimate cloud license costs and other associated expenses.

    Summarize and decide on the best timing, users, and program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Good cost estimate of equivalent cloud user-based licenses.

    Understanding of when and how to move your on-premises licensing to the new Dynamics 365 cloud model.

    Activities

    2.1 Estimate cloud user license costs.

    2.2 Calculate additional costs related to license transitions.

    2.3 Review all activities.

    2.4 Summarize and analyze your decision.

    Outputs

    Cloud user licensing cost modeling

    Summary of total costs

    Validation of costs and transition choices

    An informed decision on your Dyn365 timing, licensing, and costs

    Leverage Big Data by Starting Small

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}201|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 3 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • The desire for rapid decision making is increasing and the complexity of data sources is growing; business users want access to several new data sources, but in a way that is controlled and easily consumable.
    • Organizations may understand the transformative potential of a big data initiative, but struggle to make the transition from the awareness of its importance to identifying a concrete use case for a pilot project.
    • The big data ecosystem is crowded and confusing, and a lack of understanding of that ecosystem may cause a paralysis for organizations.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Big data is simply data. With technological advances, what was once considered big data is now more approachable for all organizations irrespective of size.
    • The variety element is the key to unlocking big data value. Drill down into your specific use cases more effectively by focusing on what kind of data you should use.
    • Big data is about deep analytics. Deep doesn’t mean difficult. Visualization of data, integrating new data, and understanding associations are ways to deepen your analytics.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish a foundational understanding of what big data entails and what the implications of its different elements are for your organization.
    • Confirm your current maturity for taking on a big data initiative, and make considerations for core data management practices in the context of incorporating big data.
    • Avoid boiling the ocean by pinpointing use cases by industry and functional unit, followed by identifying the most essential data sources and elements that will enable the initiative.
    • Leverage a repeatable pilot project framework to build out a successful first initiative and implement future projects en-route to evolving a big data program.

    Leverage Big Data by Starting Small Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should leverage big data, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Undergo big data education

    Build a foundational understanding of the current big data landscape.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 1: Undergo Big Data Education

    2. Assess big data readiness

    Appraise current capabilities for handling a big data initiative and revisit the key data management practices that will enable big data success.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 2: Assess Big Data Readiness
    • Big Data Maturity Assessment Tool

    3. Pinpoint a killer big data use case

    Armed with Info-Tech’s variety dimension framework, identify the top use cases and the data sources/elements that will power the initiative.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 3: Pinpoint a Killer Big Data Use Case
    • Big Data Use-Case Suggestion Tool

    4. Structure a big data proof-of-concept project

    Leverage a repeatable framework to detail the core components of the pilot project.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 4: Structure a Big Data Proof-of-Concept Project
    • Big Data Work Breakdown Structure Template
    • Data Scientist
    • Big Data Cost/Benefit Tool
    • Big Data Stakeholder Presentation Template
    • Big Data Communication Tracking Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Leverage Big Data by Starting Small

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Undergo Big Data Education

    The Purpose

    Understand the basic elements of big data and its relationship to traditional business intelligence.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common, foundational knowledge of what big data entails.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine which of the four Vs is most important to your organization.

    1.2 Explore new data through a social lens.

    1.3 Brainstorm new opportunities for enhancing current reporting assets with big data sources.

    Outputs

    Relative importance of the four Vs from IT and business perspectives

    High-level improvement ideas to report artifacts using new data sources

    2 Assess Your Big Data Readiness

    The Purpose

    Establish an understanding of current maturity for taking on big data, as well as revisiting essential data management practices.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete idea of current capabilities.

    Recommended actions for developing big data maturity.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine your organization’s current big data maturity level.

    2.2 Plan for big data management.

    Outputs

    Established current state maturity

    Foundational understanding of data management practices in the context of a big data initiative

    3 Pinpoint Your Killer Big Data Use Case

    The Purpose

    Explore a plethora of potential use cases at the industry and business unit level, followed by using the variety element of big data to identify the highest value initiative(s) within your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    In-depth characterization of a pilot big data initiative that is thoroughly informed by the business context.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify big data use cases at the industry and/or departmental levels.

    3.2 Conduct big data brainstorming sessions in collaboration with business stakeholders to refine use cases.

    3.3 Revisit the variety dimension framework to scope your big data initiative in further detail.

    3.4 Create an organizational 4-column data flow model with your big data sources/elements.

    3.5 Evaluate data sources by considering business value and risk.

    3.6 Perform a value-effort assessment to prioritize your initiatives.

    Outputs

    Potential big data use cases

    Potential initiatives rooted in the business context and identification of valuable data sources

    Identification of specific data sources and data elements

    Characterization of data sources/elements by value and risk

    Prioritization of big data use cases

    4 Structure a Big Data Proof-of-Concept Project

    The Purpose

    Put together the core components of the pilot project and set the stage for enterprise-wide support.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A repeatable framework for implementing subsequent big data initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Construct a work breakdown structure for the pilot project.

    4.2 Determine your project’s need for a data scientist.

    4.3 Establish the staffing model for your pilot project.

    4.4 Perform a detailed cost/benefit analysis.

    4.5 Make architectural considerations for supporting the big data initiative.

    Outputs

    Comprehensive list of tasks for implementing the pilot project

    Decision on whether or not a data scientist is needed, and where data science capabilities will be sourced

    RACI chart for the project

    Big data pilot cost/benefit summary

    Customized, high-level architectural model that incorporates technologies that support big data

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}264|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $79,249 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 28 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations
    • There is an onslaught of security data – generating information in different formats, storing it in different places, and forwarding it to different locations.
    • The organization lacks a dedicated enterprise security team. There is limited resourcing available to begin or mature a security operations center.
    • Many organizations are developing ad hoc security capabilities that result in operational inefficiencies, the misalignment of resources, and the misuse of security technology investments.
    • It is difficult to communicate the value of a security operations program when trying to secure organizational buy-in to gain the appropriate resourcing.
    • There is limited communication between security functions due to a centralized security operations organizational structure.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
    2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives.
    3. If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Impact and Result

    • A unified security operations process actively transforms security events and threat information into actionable intelligence, driving security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes, addressing the increasing sophistication of cyberthreats, and guiding continuous improvement.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a flexible and systematic security operations program relevant to your organization.

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should enhance your security operations program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess your current state

    Assess current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.

    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 1: Assess Operational Requirements
    • Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Develop maturity initiatives

    Design your optimized state of operations.

    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 2: Develop Maturity Initiatives
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool

    3. Define operational interdependencies

    Identify opportunities for collaboration within your security program.

    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 3: Define Operational Interdependencies
    • Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan
    • Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template
    • Security Operations Collaboration Plan
    • Security Operations Metrics Summary Document
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Operational Requirements

    The Purpose

    Determine current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities, operational inefficiencies, and opportunities for improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine why you need a sound security operations program.

    Understand Info-Tech’s threat collaboration environment.

    Evaluate your current security operation’s functions and capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the benefits of refining your security operations program.

    1.2 Gauge your current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.

    Outputs

    Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool

    2 Develop Maturity Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Begin developing and prioritizing gap initiatives in order to achieve the optimal state of operations.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish your goals, obligations, scope, and boundaries.

    Assess your current state and define a target state.

    Develop and prioritize gap initiatives.

    Define the cost, effort, alignment, and security benefits of each initiative.

    Develop a security strategy operational roadmap.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your current security goals, obligations, and scope.

    2.2 Design your ideal target state.

    2.3 Prioritize gap initiatives.

    Outputs

    Information Security Strategy Requirements Gathering Tool

    Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool

    3 Define Operational Interdependencies

    The Purpose

    Identify opportunities for collaboration.

    Formalize your operational process flows.

    Develop a comprehensive and actionable measurement program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the current security operations process flow.

    Define the security operations stakeholders and their respective deliverables.

    Formalize an internal information-sharing and collaboration plan.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify opportunities for collaboration.

    3.2 Formalize a security operations collaboration plan.

    3.3 Define operational roles and responsibilities.

    3.4 Develop a comprehensive measurement program.

    Outputs

    Security Operations RACI & Program Plan Tool

    Security Operations Collaboration Plan

    Security Operations Cadence Schedule Template

    Security Operations Metrics Summary

    Further reading

    INFO-TECH RESEARCH GROUP

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    Transition from a security operations center to a threat collaboration environment.

    Info-Tech Research Group, Inc. is a global leader in providing IT research and advice. Info-Tech’s products and services combine actionable insight and relevant advice with ready-to-use tools and templates that cover the full spectrum of IT concerns.
    © 1997-2017 Info-Tech Research Group Inc.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    “A reactive security operations program is no longer an option. The increasing sophistication of threats demands a streamlined yet adaptable mitigation and remediation process. Protect your assets by preparing for the inevitable; unify your prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts and provide assurance to your stakeholders that you are making information security a top priority.”

    Phot of Edward Gray, Consulting Analyst, Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Edward Gray,
    Consulting Analyst, Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group



    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • Chief Information Officer (CIO)
    • Chief Information Security Officer (CISO)
    • Chief Operating Officer (COO)
    • Security / IT Management
    • Security Operations Director / Security Operations Center (SOC)
    • Network Operations Director / Network Operations Center (NOC)
    • Systems Administrator
    • Threat Intelligence Staff
    • Security Operations Staff
    • Security Incident Responders
    • Vulnerability Management Staff
    • Patch Management
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Enhance your security program by implementing and streamlining next-generation security operations processes.
    • Increase organizational situational awareness through active collaboration between core threat teams, enriching internal security events with external threat intelligence and enhancing security controls.
    • Develop a comprehensive threat analysis and dissemination process: align people, process, and technology to scale security to threats.
    • Identify the appropriate technological and infrastructure-based sourcing decisions.
    • Design a step-by-step security operations implementation process.
    • Pursue continuous improvement: build a measurement program that actively evaluates program effectiveness.
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Board / Chief Executive Officer
    • Information Owners (Business Directors/VP)
    • Security Governance and Risk Management
    • Fraud Operations
    • Human Resources
    • Legal and Public Relations
    This Research Will Help Them
    • Aid decision making by staying abreast of cyberthreats that could impact the business.
    • Increase visibility into the organization’s threat landscape to identify likely targets or identify exposed vulnerabilities.
    • Ensure the business is compliant with regularity, legal, and/or compliance requirements.
    • Understand the value and return on investment of security operations offerings.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Current security practices are disjointed, operating independently with a wide variety of processes and tools to conduct incident response, network defense, and threat analysis. These disparate mitigations leave organizations vulnerable to the increasing number of malicious events.
    • Threat management has become resource intensive, requiring continuous monitoring, collection, and analysis of massive volumes of security event data, while juggling business, compliance, and consumer obligations.

    Complication

    • There is an onslaught of security data – generating information in different formats, storing it in different places, and forwarding it to different locations.
    • The organization lacks a dedicated enterprise security team. There is limited resourcing available to begin or mature a security operations center.
    • Many organizations are developing ad hoc security capabilities that result in operational inefficiencies, the misalignment of resources, and the misuse of their security technology investments.
    • It is difficult to communicate the value of a security operations program when trying to secure organizational buy-in to gain the appropriate resourcing.
    • There is limited communication between security functions due to a centralized security operations organizational structure.

    Resolution

    • A unified security operations process actively transforms security events and threat information into actionable intelligence, driving security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes, addressing the increasing sophistication of cyberthreats, and guiding continuous improvement.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a flexible and systematic security operations program relevant to your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
    2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives.
    3. If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Data breaches are resulting in major costs across industries

    Horizontal bar chart of 'Per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies', with the highest cost attributed to 'Health', 'Pharmaceutical', 'Financial', 'Energy', and 'Transportation'.

    Average data breach costs per compromised record hit an all-time high of $217 (in 2015); $74 is direct cost (e.g. legal fees, technology investment) and $143 is indirect cost (e.g. abnormal customer churn). (Source: Ponemon Institute, “2015 Cost of Data Breach Study: United States”)

    '% of systems impacted by a data breach', '1% No Impact', '19% 1-10% impacted', '41% 11-30% impacted', '24% 31-50% impacted', '15% more than 50% impacted
    Divider line.
    '% of customers lost from a data breach', '61% Lost <20%', '21% Lost 20-40%', '8% Lost 40-60%', '6% Lost 60-80%', '4% Lost 80-100%'.
    Divider line.
    '% of business opportunity lost from a data breach', '58% Lost <20%', '25% Lost 20-40%', '9% Lost, 40-60%', '5% Lost 60-80%', '4% Lost 80-100%'.
    (Source: The Network, “ Cisco 2017 Security Capabilities Benchmark Study”)

    Persistent issues

    • Organizational barriers separating prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
      Siloed operations limit collaboration and internal knowledge sharing.
    • Lack of knowledgeable security staff.
      Human capital is transferrable between roles and functions and must be cross-trained to wear multiple hats.
    • Failure to evaluate and improve security operations.
      The effectiveness of operations must be frequently measured and (re)assessed through an iterative system of continuous improvement.
    • Lack of standardization.
      Pre-established use cases and policies outlining tier-1 operational efforts will eliminate ad hoc remediation efforts and streamline operations.
    • Failure to acknowledge the auditor as a customer.
      Many compliance and regulatory obligations require organizations to have comprehensive documentation of their security operations practices.

    60% Of organizations say security operation teams have little understanding of each other’s requirements.

    40% Of executives report that poor coordination leads to excessive labor and IT operational costs.

    38-100% Increase in efficiency after closing operational gaps with collaboration.
    (Source: Forbes, “The Game Plan for Closing the SecOps Gap”)

    The solution

    Bar chart of the 'Benefits of Internal Collaboration' with 'Increased Operational Efficiency' and 'Increased Problem Solving' having the highest percentage.

    “Empower a few administrators with the best information to enable fast, automated responses.”
    – Ismael Valenzuela, IR/Forensics Technical Practice Manager, Foundstone® Services, Intel Security)

    Insufficient security personnel resourcing has been identified as the most prevalent challenge in security operations…

    When an emergency security incident strikes, weak collaboration and poor coordination among critical business functions will magnify inefficiencies in the incident response (IR) process, impacting the organization’s ability to minimize damage and downtime.

    The solution: optimize your SOC. Info-Tech has seen SOCs with five analysts outperform SOCs with 25 analysts through tools and process optimization.

    Sources:
    Ponemon. "2016 State of Cybersecurity in Small & Medium-Sized Businesses (SMB).”
    Syngress. Designing and Building a Security Operations Center.

    Maintain a holistic security operations program

    Legacy security operations centers (SOCs) fail to address gaps between data sources, network controls, and human capital. There is limited visibility and collaboration between departments, resulting in siloed decisions that do not support the best interests of the organization.
    Venn diagram of 'Next-Gen Security Operations' with four intersecting circles: 'Prevent', 'Detect', 'Analyze', and 'Respond'.

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address cyberthreats affecting the organization’s brand, business operations, and technology infrastructure on a daily basis.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Diligent patching and vulnerability management, endpoint protection, and strong human-centric security (amongst other tactics) are essential. Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs
    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape. Respond: Organizations can’t rely on an ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook in order to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Info-Tech’s security operations blueprint ties together various initiatives

    Stock image 1.

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

    Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    Deliverables
    • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
    • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
    • Penetration Test RFP Template
    • Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template
    Stock image 2.

    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

    Threat Intelligence
    Threat intelligence addresses the collection, analysis, and dissemination of external threat data. Analysts act as liaisons to their peers, publishing actionable threat alerts, reports, and briefings. Threat intelligence proactively monitors and identifies whether threat indicators are impacting your organization.
    • Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Threat Intelligence RACI Tool
    • Management Plan Template
    • Threat Intelligence Policy Template
    • Alert Template
    • Alert and Briefing Cadence Schedule
    Stock image 3.

    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

    Operations
    Security operations include the real-time monitoring and analysis of events based on the correlation of internal and external data sources. This also includes incident escalation based on impact. Analysts are constantly tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds to further help identify which indicators are most impactful during the analysis phase of operations.
    • Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Event Prioritization Tool
    • Efficiency Calculator
    • SecOps Policy Template
    • In-House vs. Outsourcing Decision-Making Tool
    • SecOps RACI Tool
    • TCO & ROI Comparison Calculator
    Stock image 4.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Incident Response
    Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities. IR teams coordinate root-cause analysis and incident gathering while facilitating post-incident lessons learned. Incident response can provide valuable threat data that ties specific indicators to threat actors or campaigns.
    • Incident Management Policy
    • Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Incident Management Plan
    • Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Various Incident Management Runbooks

    This blueprint will…

    …better protect your organization with an interdependent and collaborative security operations program.

    Phase 01

    Assess your operational requirements.

    Phase 02

    Optimize and further mature your security operations processes

    Phase 3a

    Develop the process flow and specific interaction points between functions

    Phase 3b

    Test your current capabilities with a table top exercise
    Briefly assess your current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.
    Highlight operational weak spots that should be addressed before progressing.
    Develop a prioritized list of security-focused operational initiatives.
    Conduct a holistic analysis of your operational capabilities.
    Define the operational interaction points between security-focused operational departments.
    Document the results in comprehensive operational interaction agreement.
    Test your operational processes with Info-Tech’s security operations table-top exercise.

    Info-Tech integrates several best practices to create a best-of-breed security framework

    Legend for the 'Information Security Framework' identifying blue best practices as 'In Scope' and white best practices as 'Out of Scope'. Info-Tech's 'Information Security Framework' of best practices with two main categories 'Governance' and 'Management', each with subcategories such as 'Context & Leadership' and 'Prevention', each with a group of best practices color-coded to the associated legend identifying them as 'In Scope' or 'Out of Scope'.

    Benefits of a collaborative and integrated operations program

    Effective security operations management will help you do the following:

    • Improve efficacy
      Develop structured processes to automate activities and increase process consistency across the security program. Expose operational weak points and transition teams from firefighting to an innovator role.
    • Improve threat protection
      Enhance network controls through the hardening of perimeter defenses, an intelligence-driven analysis process, and a streamlined incident remediation process.
    • Improve visibility and information sharing
      Promote both internal and external information sharing to enable good decision making.
    • Create and clarify accountability and responsibility
      Security operations management practices will set a clear level of accountability throughout the security program and ensure role responsibility for all tasks and processes involved in service delivery.
    • Control security costs
      Security operations management is concerned with delivering promised services in the most efficient way possible. Good security operations management practices will provide insight into current costs across the organization and present opportunities for cost savings.
    • Identify opportunities for continuous improvement
      Increased visibility into current performance levels and the ability to accurately identify opportunities for continuous improvement.

    Impact

    Short term:

    • Streamlined security operations program development process.
    • Completed comprehensive list of operational gaps and initiatives.
    • Formalized and structured implementation process.
    • Standardized operational use cases that predefine necessary operational protocol.

    Long term:

    • Enhanced visibility into immediate threat environment.
    • Improved effectiveness of internal defensive controls.
    • Increased operational collaboration between prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
    • Enhanced security pressure posture.
    • Improved communication with executives about relevant security risks to the business.

    Understand the cost of not having a suitable security operations program

    A practical approach, justifying the value of security operations, is to identify the assets at risk and calculate the cost to the company should the information assets be compromised (i.e. assess the damage an attacker could do to the business).

    Cost Structure Cost Estimation ($) for SMB
    (Small and medium-sized business)
    Cost Estimation ($) for LE
    (Large enterprise)
    Security controls Technology investment: software, hardware, facility, maintenance, etc.
    Cost of process implementation: incident response, CMBD, problem management, etc.
    Cost of resource: salary, training, recruiting, etc.
    $0-300K/year $200K-2M/year
    Security incidents
    (if no security control is in place)
    Explicit cost:
    1. Incident response cost:
      • Remediation costs
      • Productivity: (number of employees impacted) × (hours out) × (burdened hourly rate)
      • Extra professional services
      • Equipment rental, travel expenses, etc.
      • Compliance fine
      • Cost of notifying clients
    2. Revenue loss: direct loss, the impact of permanent loss of data, lost future revenues
    3. Financial performance: credit rating, stock price
      Hidden cost:
      • Reputation, customer loyalty, etc.
    $15K-650K/year $270K-11M/year

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities
    • Kick-off and introductions.
    • High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.
    • Activity: Define workshop objectives and current state of knowledge.
    • Understand the threat collaboration environment.
    • Understand the benefits of an optimized security operations.
    • Activity: Review preliminary maturity level.
    • Activity: Assess current people, processes, and technology capabilities.
    • Activity: Assess workflow capabilities.
    • Activity: Begin deep-dive into maturity assessment tool.
    • Discuss strategies to enhance the analysis process (ticketing, automation, visualization, use cases, etc.).
    • Activity: Design ideal target state.
    • Activity: Identify security gaps.
    • Build initiatives to bridge the gaps.
    • Activity: Estimate the resources needed.
    • Activity: Prioritize gap initiatives.
    • Activity: Develop dashboarding and visualization metrics.
    • Activity: Plan for a transition with the security roadmap and action plan.
    • Activity: Define and assign tier 1, 2 & 3 SOC roles and responsibilities.
    • Activity: Assign roles and responsibilities for each security operations initiative.
    • Activity: Develop a comprehensive measurement program.
    • Activity: Develop specific runbooks for your top-priority incidents (e.g. ransomware).
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Activity:Conduct attack campaign simulation.
    • Finalize main deliverables.
    • Schedule feedback call.
    Deliverables
    1. Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool
    1. Target State and Gap Analysis (Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool)
    1. Security Operations Role & Process Design
    2. Security Operations RACI Chart
    3. Security Operations Metrics Summary
    4. Security Operations Phishing Process Runbook
    5. Attack Campaign Simulation PowerPoint

    All Final Deliverables

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    PHASE 1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    3

    Define Interdependencies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine why you need a sound security operations program.
    • Understand Info-Tech’s threat collaboration environment.
    • Evaluate your current security operation’s functions and capabilities.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A defined scope and motive for completing this project.
    • Insight into your current security operations capabilities.
    • A prioritized list of security operations initiatives based on maturity level.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.

    Warm-up exercise: Why build a security operations program?

    Estimated time to completion: 30 minutes

    Discussion: Why are we pursuing this project?

    What are the objectives for optimizing and developing sound security operations?

    Stakeholders Required:

    • Key business executives
    • IT leaders
    • Security operations team members

    Resources Required

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Dry-erase markers
    1. Briefly define the scope of security operations
      What people, processes, and technology fall within the security operations umbrella?
    2. Brainstorm the implications of not acting
      What does the status quo have in store? What are the potential risks?
    3. Define the goals of the project
      Clarify from the outset: what exactly do you want to accomplish from this project?
    4. Prioritize all brainstormed goals
      Classify the goals based on relevant prioritization criteria, e.g. urgency, impact, cost.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Don’t develop a security operations program with the objective of zero incidents. This reliance on prevention results in over-engineered security solutions that cost more than the assets being protected.

    Decentralizing the SOC: Security as a function

    Before you begin, remember that no two security operation programs are the same. While the end goal may be similar, the threat landscape, risk tolerance, and organizational requirements will differ from any other SOC. Determine what your DNA looks like before you begin to protect it.

    Security operations must provide several fundamental functions:
    • Real-time monitoring, detecting, and triaging of data from both internal and external sources.
    • In-depth analysis of indicators and incidents, leveraging malware analysis, correlation and rule tweaking, and forensics and eDiscovery techniques.
    • Network/host scanning and vulnerability patch management.
    • Incident response, remediation, and reporting. Security operations must disseminate appropriate information/intelligence to relevant stakeholders.
    • Comprehensive logging and ticketing capabilities that document and communicate events throughout the threat collaboration environment.
    • Tuning and tweaking of technologies to ingest collected data and enhance the analysis process.
    • Enhance overall organizational situational awareness by reporting on security trends, escalating incidents, and sharing adversary tools, tactics, and procedures.
    Venn diagram of 'Security Operations' with four intersecting circles: 'Prevent', 'Detect', 'Analyze', and 'Respond'.
    At its core, a security operations program is responsible for the prevention, detection, analysis, and response of security events.

    Optimized security operations can seamlessly integrate threat and incident management processes with monitoring and compliance workflows and resources. This integration unlocks efficiency.

    Understand the levels of security operations

    Take the time to map out what you need and where you should go. Security operations has to be more than just monitoring events – there must be a structured program.

    Foundational Arrow with a plus sign pointing right. Operational Arrow with a plus sign pointing right. Strategic
    • Intrusion Detection Management
    • Active Device and Event Monitoring
    • Log Collection and Retention
    • Reporting and Escalation Management
    • Incident Management
    • Audit Compliance
    • Vendor Management
    • Ticketing Processes
    • Packet Capture and Analysis
    • SIEM
    • Firewall
    • Antivirus
    • Patch Management
    • Event Analysis and Incident Triage
    • Security Log Management
    • Vulnerability Management
    • Host Hardening
    • Static Malware Analysis
    • Identity and Access Management
    • Change Management
    • Endpoint Management
    • Business Continuity Management
    • Encryption Management
    • Cloud Security (if applicable)
    • SIEM with Defined Use Cases
    • Big Data Security Analytics
    • Threat Intelligence
    • Network Flow Analysis
    • VPN Anomaly Detection
    • Dynamic Malware Analysis
    • Use-Case Management
    • Feedback and Continuous Improvement Management
    • Visualization and Dashboarding
    • Knowledge Portal Ticket Documentation
    • Advanced Threat Hunting
    • Control and Process Automation
    • eDiscovery and Forensics
    • Risk Management
    ——Security Operations Capabilities—–›

    Understand security operations: Establish a unified threat collaboration environment

    Stock image 1.

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address threats impacting the organization’s brand, operations, and technology infrastructure.
    • Managing incident escalation and response.
    • Coordinating root-cause analysis and incident gathering.
    • Facilitating post-incident lessons learned.
    • Managing system patching and risk acceptance.
    • Conducting vulnerability assessment and penetration testing.
    • Monitoring in real-time and triaging of events.
    • Escalating events to incident management team.
    • Tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds.
    • Gathering and analyzing external threat data.
    • Liaising with peers, industry, and government.
    • Publishing threat alerts, reports, and briefings.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Ensure that information flows freely throughout the threat collaboration environment – each function should serve to feed and enhance the next.

    Stock image 2.

    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

    Stock image 3.

    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

    Stock image 4.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    The threat collaboration environment is comprised of three core elements

    Info-Tech Insight

    The value of a SOC can be achieved with fewer prerequisites than you think. While it is difficult to cut back on process and technology requirements, human capital is transferrable between roles and functions and can be cross-trained to satisfy operational gaps.

    Three hexes fitting together with the words 'People', 'Process', and 'Technology'. People. Effective human capital is fundamental to establishing an efficient security operations program, and if enabled correctly, can be the driving factor behind successful process optimization. Ensure you address several critical human capital components:
    • Who is responsible for each respective threat collaboration environment function?
    • What are the required operational roles, responsibilities, and competencies for each employee?
    • Are there formalized training procedures to onboard new employees?
    • Is there an established knowledge transfer and management program?
    Processes. Formal and informal mechanisms that bridge security throughout the collaboration environment and organization at large. Ask yourself:
    • Are there defined runbooks that clearly outline critical operational procedures and guidelines?
    • Is there a defined escalation protocol to transfer knowledge and share threats internally?
    • Is there a defined reporting procedure to share intelligence externally?
    • Are there formal and accessible policies for each respective security operations function?
    • Is there a defined measurement program to report on the performance of security operations?
    • Is there a continuous improvement program in place for all security operations functions?
    • Is there a defined operational vendor management program?
    Technology. The composition of all infrastructure, systems, controls, and tools that enable processes and people to operate and collaborate more efficiently. Determine:
    • Are the appropriate controls implemented to effectively prevent, detect, analyze, and remediate threats? Is each control documented with an assigned asset owner?
    • Can a solution integrate with existing controls? If so, to what extent?
    • Is there a centralized log aggregation tool such as a SIEM?
    • What is the operational cost to effectively manage each control?
    • Is the control the most up-to-date version? Have the most recent patches and configuration changes been applied? Can it be consolidated with or replaced by another control?

    Conduct a preliminary maturity assessment before tackling this project

    Stock image 1.

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment

    At a high level, assess your organization’s operational maturity in each of the threat collaboration environment functions. Determine whether the foundational processes exist in order to mature and streamline your security operations.

    Stock image 2.

    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

    Stock image 3.

    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

    Stock image 4.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Assess the current maturity of your security operations program

    Prioritize the component most important to the development of your security operations program.

    Screenshot of a table from the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment presenting the 'Impact Sub-Weightings' of 'People', 'Process', 'Technology', and 'Policy'.
    Screenshot of a table from the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment assessing the 'Current State' and 'Target State' of different 'Security Capabilities'.
    Each “security capability” covers a component of the overarching “security function.” Assign a current and target maturity score to each respective security capability. (Note: The CMMI maturity scores are further explained on the following slide.) Document any/all comments for future Info-Tech analyst discussions.

    Assign each security capability a reflective and desired maturity score.

    Your current and target state maturity will be determined using the capability maturity model integration (CMMI) scale. Ensure that all participants understand the 1-5 scale.
    Two-way vertical arrow colored blue at the top and green at the bottom. Ad Hoc
    1 Arrow pointing right. Initial/Ad Hoc: Activity is not well defined and is ad hoc, e.g. no formal roles or responsibilities exist, de facto standards are followed on an individual-by-individual basis.
    2 Arrow pointing right. Developing: Activity is established and there is moderate adherence to its execution, e.g. while no formal policies have been documented, content management is occurring implicitly or on an individual-by-individual basis.
    3 Arrow pointing right. Defined: Activity is formally established, documented, repeatable, and integrated with other phases of the process, e.g. roles and responsibilities have been defined and documented in an accessible policy, however, metrics are not actively monitored and managed.
    4 Arrow pointing right. Managed and Measurable: Activity execution is tracked by gathering qualitative and quantitative feedback, e.g. metrics have been established to monitor the effectiveness of tier-1 SOC analysts.
    5 Arrow pointing right. Optimized: Qualitative and quantitative feedback is used to continually improve the execution of the activity, e.g. the organization is an industry leader in the respective field; research and development efforts are allocated in order to continuously explore more efficient methods of accomplishing the task at hand.
    Optimized

    Notes: Info-Tech seldom sees a client achieve a CMMI score of 4 or 5. To achieve a state of optimization there must be a subsequent trade-off elsewhere. As such, we recommend that organizations strive for a CMMI score of 3 or 4.

    Ensure that your threat collaboration environment is of a sufficient maturity before progressing

    Example report card from the maturity assessment. Functions are color-coded green, yellow, and red. Review the report cards for each of the respective threat collaboration environment functions.
    • A green function indicates that you have exceeded the operational requirements to proceed with the security operations initiative.
    • A yellow function indicates that your maturity score is below the recommended threshold; Info-Tech advises revisiting the attached blueprint. In the instance of a one-off case, the client can proceed with this security operations initiative.
    • A red function indicates that your maturity score is well below the recommended threshold; Info-Tech strongly advises to not proceed with the security operations initiative. Revisit the recommended blueprint and further mature the specific function.

    Are you ready to move on to the next phase?

    Self-Assessment Questions

    • Have you clearly defined the rationale for refining your security operations program?
    • Have you clearly defined and prioritized the goals and outcomes of optimizing your security operations program?
    • Have you assessed your respective people, process, and technological capabilities?
    • Have you completed the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool?
    • Were all threat collaboration environment functions of a sufficient maturity level?

    If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to move on to Phase 2: Develop Maturity Initiatives

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    PHASE 2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    3

    Define Interdependencies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish your goals, obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    • Assess your current state and define a target state.
    • Develop and prioritize gap initiatives.
    • Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit of each initiative.
    • Develop a security strategy operational roadmap.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A formalized understanding of your business, customer, and regulatory obligations.
    • A comprehensive current and target state assessment.
    • A succinct and consolidated list of gap initiatives that will collectively achieve your target state.
    • A formally documented set of estimated priority variables (cost, effort, business alignment).
    • A fully prioritized security roadmap that is in alignment with business goals and informed by the organization’s needs and limitations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives

    Align your security operations program with corporate goals and obligations

    A common challenge for security leaders is learning to express their initiatives in terms that are meaningful to business executives.

    Frame the importance of your security operations program to
    align with that of the decision makers’ over-arching strategy.

    Oftentimes resourcing and funding is dependent on the
    alignment of security initiatives to business objectives.

    Corporate goals and objectives can be categorized into three major buckets:
    1. BUSINESS OBLIGATIONS
      The primary goals and functions of the organization at large. Examples include customer retention, growth, innovation, customer experience, etc.
    2. CONSUMER OBLIGATIONS
      The needs and demands of internal and external stakeholders. Examples include ease of use (external), data protection (external), offsite access (internal), etc.
    3. COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS
      The requirements of the organization to comply with mandatory and/or voluntary standards. Examples include HIPAA, PIPEDA, ISO 27001, etc.
    *Do not approach the above list with a security mindset – take a business perspective and align your security efforts accordingly.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Developing a security operations strategy is a proactive activity that enables you to get in front of any upcoming business projects or industry trends rather than having to respond reactively later on. Consider as many foreseeable variables as possible!

    Determine your security operations program scope and boundaries

    It is important to define all security-related areas of responsibility. Upon completion you should clearly understand what you are trying to secure.

    Ask yourself:
    Where does the onus of responsibility stop?

    The organizational scope and boundaries and can be categorized into four major buckets:
    1. PHYSICAL SCOPE
      The physical locations that the security operations program is responsible for. Examples include office locations, remote access, clients/vendors, etc.
    2. IT SYSTEMS
      The network systems that must be protected by the security operations program. Examples include fully owned systems, IaaS, PaaS, remotely hosted SaaS, etc.
    3. ORGANIZATIONAL SCOPE
      The business units, departments, or divisions that will be affected by the security operations program. Examples include user groups, departments, subsidiaries, etc.
    4. DATA SCOPE
      The data types that the business handles and the privacy/criticality level of each. Examples include top secret, confidential, private, public, etc.

    This also includes what is not within scope. For some outsourced services or locations you may not be responsible for security. For some business departments you may not have control of security processes. Ensure that it is made explicit at the outset, what will be included and what will be excluded from security considerations.

    Reference Info-Tech’s security strategy: goals, obligations, and scope activities

    Explicitly understanding how security aligns with the core business mission is critical for having a strategic plan and fulfilling the role of business enabler.

    Download and complete the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication. If previously completed, take the time to review your results.

    GOALS and OBLIGATIONS
    Proceed through each slide and brainstorm the ways that security operations supports business, customer, and compliance needs.

    Goals & Obligations
    Screenshots of slides from the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication.

    PROGRAM SCOPE & BOUNDARIES
    Assess your current organizational environment. Document current IT systems, critical data, physical environments, and departmental divisions.

    If a well-defined corporate strategy does not exist, these questions can help pinpoint objectives:

    • What is the message being delivered by the CEO?
    • What are the main themes of investments and projects?
    • What are the senior leaders measured on?
    Program Scope & Boundaries
    Screenshots of slides from the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication.

    INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITY

    For more information on how to complete the goals & obligations activity please reference Section 1.3 of Info-Tech’s Build an Information Security Strategy blueprint.

    Complete the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    On tab 1. Goals and Obligations:
    • Document all business, customer, and compliance obligations. Ensure that each item is reflective of the over-arching business strategy and is not security focused.
    • In the second column, identify the corresponding security initiative that supports the obligation.
    Screenshot from tab 1 of Info-Tech's Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. Columns are 'Business obligations', 'Security obligations to support the business (optional)', and 'Notes'.
    On tab 2. Scope and Boundaries:
    • Record all details for what is in and out of scope from physical, IT, organizational, and data perspectives.
    • Complete the affiliated columns for a comprehensive scope assessment.
    • As a discussion guide, refer to the considerations slides prior to this in phase 1.3.
    Screenshot from tab 2 of Info-Tech's Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. Title is 'Physical Scope', Columns are 'Environment Name', 'Highest data criticality here', 'Is this in scope of the security strategy?', 'Are we accountable for security here?', and 'Notes'.
    For the purpose of this security operations initiative please IGNORE the risk tolerance activities on tab 3.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    A common challenge for security leaders is expressing their initiatives in terms that are meaningful to business executives. This exercise helps make explicit the link between what the business cares about and what security is trying to do.

    Conduct a comprehensive security operations maturity assessment

    The following slides will walk you through the process below.

    Define your current and target state

    Self-assess your current security operations capabilities and determine your intended state.

    Create your gap initiatives

    Determine the operational processes that must be completed in order to achieve the target state.

    Prioritize your initiatives

    Define your prioritization criteria (cost, effort, alignment, security benefit) based on your organization

    Build a Gantt chart for your upcoming initiatives
    The final output will be a Gantt to action your prioritized initiatives

    Info-Tech Insight

    Progressive improvements provide the most value to IT and your organization. Leaping from pre-foundation to complete optimization is an ineffective goal. Systematic improvements to your security performance delivers value to your organization, each step along the way.

    Optimize your security operations workflow

    Info-Tech consulted various industry experts and consolidated their optimization advice.

    Dashboards: Centralized visibility, threat analytics, and orchestration enable faster threat detection with fewer resources.

    Adding more controls to a network never increases resiliency. Identify technological overlaps and eliminate unnecessary costs.

    Automation: There is shortfall in human capital in contrast to the required tools and processes. Automate the more trivial processes.

    SOCs with 900 employees are just as efficient as those with 35-40. There is an evident tipping point in marginal value.

    There are no plug-and-play technological solutions – each is accompanied by a growing pain and an affiliated human capital cost.

    Planning: Narrow the scope of operations to focus on protecting assets of value.

    Cross-train employees throughout different silos. Enable them to wear multiple hats.

    Practice: None of the processes happen in a vacuum. Make the most of tabletop exercises and other training exercises.

    Define appropriate use cases and explicitly state threat escalation protocol. Focus on automating the tier-1 analyst role.

    Self-assess your current-state capabilities and determine the appropriate target state

    1. Review:
    The heading in blue is the security domain, light blue is the subdomain and white is the specific control.
    2. Determine and Record:
    Ask participants to identify your organization’s current maturity level for each control. Next, determine a target maturity level that meets the requirements of the area (requirements should reflect the goals and obligations defined earlier).
    3.
    In small groups, have participants answer “what is required to achieve the target state?” Not all current/target state gaps will require additional description, explanation, or an associated imitative. You can generate one initiative that may apply to multiple line items.

    Screenshot of a table for assessing the current and target states of capabilities.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When customizing your gap initiatives consider your organizational requirements and scope while remaining realistic. Below is an example of lofty vs. realistic initiatives:
    Lofty: Perform thorough, manual security analysis. Realistic: Leverage our SIEM platform to perform more automated security analysis through the use of log information.

    Consolidate related gap initiatives to simplify and streamline your roadmap

    Identify areas of commonality between gap initiative in order to effectively and efficiently implement your new initiatives.

    Steps:
    1. After reviewing and documenting initiatives for each security control, begin sorting controls by commonality, where resources can be shared, or similar end goals and actions. Begin by copying all initiatives from tab 2. Current State Assessment into tab 5. Initiative List of the Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool and then consolidating them.
    2. Initiatives Consolidated Initiatives
      Document data classification and handling in AUP —› Document data classification and handling in AUP Keep urgent or exceptional initiatives separate so they can be addressed appropriately.
      Document removable media in AUP —› Define and document an Acceptable Use Policy Other similar or related initiatives can be consolidated into one item.
      Document BYOD and mobile devices in AUP —›
      Document company assets in Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) —›

    3. Review grouped initiatives and identify specific initiatives should be broken out and defined separately.
    4. Record your consolidated gap initiatives in the Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool, tab 6. Initiative Prioritization.

    Understand your organizational maturity gap

    After inputting your current and target scores and defining your gap initiatives in tab 2, review tab 3. Current Maturity and tab 4. Maturity Gap in Info-Tech’s Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool.

    Automatically built charts and tables provide a clear visualization of your current maturity.

    Presenting these figures to stakeholders and management can help visually draw attention to high-priority areas and contextualize the gap initiatives for which you will be seeking support.

    Screenshot of tabs 3 and 4 from Info-Tech's Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool. Bar charts titled 'Planning and Direction', 'Vulnerability Management', 'Threat Intelligence', and 'Security Maturity Level Gap Analysis'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Communicate the value of future security projects to stakeholders by copying relevant charts and tables into an executive stakeholder communication presentation (ask an Info-Tech representative for further information).

    Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit

    Define low, medium, and high resource allocation, and other variables for your gap initiatives in the Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool. These variables include:
    1. Define initial cost. One-time, upfront capital investments. The low cut-off would be a project that can be approved with little to no oversight. Whereas the high cut-off would be a project that requires a major approval or a formal capital investment request. Initial cost covers items such as appliance cost, installation, project based consulting fees, etc.
    2. Define ongoing cost. This includes any annually recurring operating expenses that are new budgetary costs, e.g. licensing or rental costs. Do not account for FTE employee costs. Generally speaking you can take 20-25% of initial cost as ongoing cost for maintenance and service.
    3. Define initial staffing in hours. This is total time in hours required to complete a project. Note: It is not total elapsed time, but dedicated time. Consider time required to research, document, implement, review, set up, fine tune, etc. Consider all staff hours required (2 staff at 8 hours means 16 hours total).
    4. Define ongoing staffing in hours. This is the ongoing average hours per week required to support that initiative. This covers all operations, maintenance, review, and support for the initiative. Some initiatives will have a week time commitment (e.g. perform a vulnerability scan using our tool once a week) versus others that may have monthly, quarterly, or annual time commitments that need to averaged out per week (e.g. perform annual security review requiring 0.4 hours/week (20 hours total based on 50 working weeks per year).
    Table relating the four definitions on the left, 'Initial Cost', 'Ongoing Cost (annual)', 'Initial Staffing in Hours', and 'Ongoing Staffing in Hours/Week'. Each row header is a definition and has four sub-rows 'High', 'Medium', 'Low', and 'Zero'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When considering these parameters, aim to use already existing resource allocations.

    For example, if there is a dollar value that would require you to seek approval for an expense, this might be the difference between a medium and a high cost category.

    Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit

    1. Define Alignment with Business. This variable is meant to capture how well the gap initiative aligns with organizational goals and objectives. For example, something with high alignment usually can be tied to a specific organization initiative and will receive senior management support. You can either:
      • Set low, medium, and high based on levels of support the organization will provide (e.g. High – senior management support, Medium – VP/business unit head support, IT support only)
      • Attribute specific corporate goals or initiatives to the gap initiative (e.g. High – directly supports a customer requirement/key contract requirement; Medium – indirectly support customer requirement/key contract OR enables remote workforce; Low – security best practice).
    2. Define Security Benefit. This variable is meant to capture the relative security benefit or risk reduction being provided by the gap initiative. This can be represented through a variety of factors, such as:
      • Reduces compliance or regulatory risk by meeting a control requirement
      • Reduces availability and operational risk
      • Implements a non-existent control
      • Secures high-criticality data
      • Secures at-risk end users
    Table relating the two definitions on the left, 'Alignment with Business', and 'Security Benefit'. Each row header is a definition and has three sub-rows 'High', 'Medium', and 'Low'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Make sure you consider the value of AND/OR. For either alignment with business or security benefit, the use of AND/OR can become useful thresholds to rank similar importance but different value initiatives.

    Example: with alignment with business, an initiative can indirectly support a key compliance requirement OR meet a key corporate goal.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You cannot do everything – and you probably wouldn’t want to. Make educated decisions about which projects are most important and why.

    Apply your variable criteria to your initiatives

    Identify easy-win tasks and high-value projects worth fighting for.
    Categorize the Initiative
    Select the gap initiative type from the down list. Each category (Must, Should, Could, and Won’t) is considered to be an “execution wave.” There is also a specific order of operations within each wave. Based on dependencies and order of importance, you will execute on some “must-do” items before others.
    Assign Criteria
    For each gap initiative, evaluate it based on your previously defined parameters for each variable.
    • Cost – initial and ongoing
    • Staffing – initial and ongoing
    • Alignment with business
    • Security benefit
    Overall Cost/Effort Rating
    An automatically generated score between 0 and 12. The higher the score attached to the initiative, the more effort required. The must-do, low-scoring items are quick wins and must be prioritized first.
    Screenshot of a table from Info-Tech's Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool with all of the previous table row headers as column headers.

    A financial services organization defined its target security state and created an execution plan

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Financial Services | Source: Info-Tech Research Group
    Framework Components
    Security Domains & Accompanied Initiatives
    (A portion of completed domains and initiatives)
    CSC began by creating over 100 gap initiatives across Info-Tech’s seven security domains.
    Current-State Assessment Context & Leadership Compliance, Audit & Review Security Prevention
    Gap Initiatives Created 12
    Initiatives
    14
    Initiatives
    45
    Initiatives
    Gap Initiative Prioritization
    Planned Initiative(s)* Initial Cost Ongoing Cost Initial Staffing Ongoing Staffing
    Document Charter Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Low - ‹1d Low - ‹2 Hour
    Document RACI Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Low - ‹1d Low - ‹2 Hour
    Expand IR processes Medium - $5K-$50K Low - ‹$1K High - ›2w Low - ‹2 Hour
    Investigate Threat Intel Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Medium - 1-10d Low - ‹2 Hour
    CSC’s defined low, medium, and high for cost and staffing are specific to the organization.

    CSC then consolidated its initiatives to create less than 60 concise tasks.

    *Initiatives and variables have been changed or modified to maintain anonymity

    Review your prioritized security roadmap

    Review the final Gantt chart to review the expected start and end dates for your security initiatives as part of your roadmap.

    In the Gantt chart, go through each wave in sequence and determine the planned start date and planned duration for each gap initiative. As you populate the planned start dates, take into consideration the resource constraints or dependencies for each project. Go back and revise the granular execution wave to resolve any conflicts you find.

    Screenshot of a 'Gantt Chart for Initiatives', a table with planned and actual start times and durations for each initiative, and beside it a roadmap with the dates from the Gantt chart plugged in.
    Review considerations
    • Does this roadmap make sense for our organization?
    • Do we focus too much on one quarter over others?
    • Will the business be going through any significant changes during the upcoming years that will directly impact this project?
    This is a living management document
    • You can use the same process on a per-case basis to decide where this new project falls in the priority list, and then add it to your Gantt chart.
    • As you make progress, check items off of the list, and periodically use this chart to retroactively update your progress towards achieving your overall target state.

    Consult an Info-Tech Analyst

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    Onsite workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If a Guided Implementation isn’t enough, we offer low-cost onsite delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to successfully complete your project.
    Photo of TJ Minichillo, Senior Director – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. TJ Minichillo
    Senior Director – Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Edward Gray, Consulting Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. Edward Gray
    Consulting Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Celine Gravelines, Research Manager – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. Celine Gravelines
    Research Manager – Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    If you are not communicating, then you are not secure.

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email workshops@infotech.com for more information.

    Are you ready to move on to the next phase?

    Self-Assessment Questions

    • Have you identified your organization’s corporate goals along with your obligations?
    • Have you defined the scope and boundaries of your security program?
    • Have you determined your organization’s risk tolerance level?
    • Have you considered threat types your organization may face?
    • Are the above answers documented in the Security Requirements Gathering Tool?
    • Have you defined your maturity for both your current and target state?
    • Do you have clearly defined initiatives that would bridge the gap between your current and target state?
    • Are each of the initiatives independent, specific, and relevant to the associated control?
    • Have you indicated any dependencies between your initiatives?
    • Have you consolidated your gap initiatives?
    • Have you defined the parameters for each of the prioritization variables (cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit)?
    • Have you applied prioritization parameters to each consolidated initiative?
    • Have you recorded your final prioritized roadmap in the Gantt chart tab?
    • Have you reviewed your final Gantt chart to ensure it aligns to your security requirements?

    If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to move on to Phase 3: Define Operational Interdependencies

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    PHASE 3

    Define Operational Interdependencies

    1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    3

    Define Interdependencies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the current security operations process flow.
    • Define the security operations stakeholders and their respective deliverables.
    • Formalize an internal information sharing and collaboration plan.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A formalized security operations interaction agreement.
    • A security operations service and product catalog.
    • A structured operations collection plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Tie everything together with collaboration

    If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Define Strategic Needs and Requirements Participate in Information Sharing Communicate Clearly
    • Establish a channel to communicate management needs and requirements and define important workflow activities. Focus on operationalizing those components.
    • Establish a feedback loop to ensure your actions satisfied management’s criteria.
    • Consolidate critical security data within a centralized portal that is accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment, reducing the human capital resources required to manage that data.
    • Participate in external information sharing groups such as ISACs. Intelligence collaboration allows organizations to band together to decrease risk and protect one another from threat actors.
    • Disseminate relevant information in clear and succinct alerts, reports, or briefings.
    • Security operations analysts must be able to translate important technical security issues and provide in-depth strategic insights.
    • Define your audience before presenting information; various stakeholders will interpret information differently. You must present it in a format that appeals to their interests.
    • Be transparent in your communications. Holding back information will only serve to alienate groups and hinder critical business decisions.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Simple collaborative activities, such as a biweekly meeting, can unite prevention, detection, analysis, and response teams to help prevent siloed decision making.

    Understand the security operations process flow

    Process standardization and automation is critical to the effectiveness of security operations.

    Process flow for security operations with column headers 'Monitoring', 'Preliminary Analysis (Tier 1)', 'Triage', 'Investigation & Analysis (Tier 2)', 'Response', and 'Advanced Threat Detection (Tier 3)'. All processes begin with elements in the 'Monitoring' column and end up at 'Visualization & Dashboarding'.

    Document your security operations’ capabilities and tasks

    Table of capabilities and tasks for security operations.
    Document your security operations’ functional capabilities and operational tasks to satisfy each capability. What resources will you leverage to complete the specific task/capability? Identify your internal and external collection sources to satisfy the individual requirement. Identify the affiliated product, service, or output generated from the task/capability. Determine your escalation protocol. Who are the stakeholders you will be sharing this information with?
    Capabilities

    The major responsibilities of a specific function. These are the high-level processes that are expected to be completed by the affiliated employees and/or stakeholders.

    Tasks

    The specific and granular tasks that need to be completed in order to satisfy a portion of or the entire capability.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

    Convert your results into actionable process flowcharts

    Map each functional task or capability into a visual process-flow diagram.

    • The title should reflect the respective capability and product output.
    • List all involved stakeholders (inputs and threat escalation protocol) along the left side.
    • Ensure all relevant security control inputs are documented within the body of the process-flow diagram.
    • Map out the respective processes in order to achieve the desired outcome.
    • Segment each process within its own icon and tie that back to the respective input.
    Example of a process flow made with sticky notes.

    Title: Output #1 Example of a process flow diagram with columns 'Stakeholders', 'Input Processes', 'Output Processes', and 'Threat Escalation Protocol'. Processes are mapped by which stakeholder and column they fall to.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

    Formalize the opportunities for collaboration within your security operations program

    Security Operations Collaboration Plan

    Security operations provides a single pane of glass through which the threat collaboration environment can manage its operations.

    How to customize

    The security operations interaction agreement identifies opportunities for optimization through collaboration and cross-training. The document is composed of several components:

    • Security operations program scope and objectives
    • Operational capabilities and outputs on a per function basis
    • A needs and requirements collection plan
    • Escalation protocol and respective information-sharing guidance (i.e. a detailed cadence schedule)
    • A security operations RACI chart
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Collaboration Plan.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Understand the operational cut-off points. While collaboration is encouraged, understand when the onus shifts to the rest of the threat collaboration environment.

    Assign responsibilities for the threat management process

    Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan

    Formally documenting roles and responsibilities helps to hold those accountable and creates awareness as to everyone’s involvement in various tasks.

    How to customize
    • Customize the header fields with applicable stakeholders.
    • Identify stakeholders that are:
      • Responsible: The person(s) who does the work to accomplish the activity; they have been tasked with completing the activity and/or getting a decision made.
      • Accountable: The person(s) who is accountable for the completion of the activity. Ideally, this is a single person and is often an executive or program sponsor.
      • Consulted: The person(s) who provides information. This is usually several people, typically called subject matter experts (SMEs).
      • Informed: The person(s) who is updated on progress. These are resources that are affected by the outcome of the activities and need to be kept up to date.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Collaboration Plan.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

    Identify security operations consumers and their respective needs and requirements

    Ensure your security operations program is constantly working toward satisfying a consumer need or requirement.

    Internal Consumers External Consumers
    • Business Executives & Management (CIO, CISO, COO):
      • Inform business decisions regarding threats and their association with future financial risk, reputational risk, and continuity of operations.
    • Human Resources:
      • Security operations must directly work with HR to enforce tight device controls, develop processes, and set expectations.
    • Legal:
      • Security operations is responsible to notify the legal department of data breaches and the appropriate course of action.
    • Audit and Compliance:
      • Work with the auditing department to define additional audits or controls that must be measured.
    • Public Relations/Marketing Employees:
      • Employees must be educated on prevalent threats and how to avoid or mitigate them.

    Note: Your organization might not be the final target, but it could be a primary path for attackers. If you exist as a third-party partner to another organization, your responsibility in your technology ecosystem extends beyond your own product or service offerings.

    • Third-Party Contractors:
      • Identify relevant threats across industries – security operations is responsible for protecting more than just itself.
    • Commercial Vendors:
      • Identify commercial vendors of control failures and opportunities for operational improvement.
    • Suppliers:
      • Provide or maintain a certain level of security delivery.
      • Meet the same level of security that is expected of business units.
    • All End Users:
      • Be notified of any data breaches and potential violations of privacy.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    “In order to support a healthy constituency, network operations and security operations should be viewed as equal partners, rather than one subordinate to the other.” (Mitre world-class CISO)

    Define the stakeholders, their respective outputs, and the underlying need

    Security Operations Program Service & Product Catalog

    Create an informal security operations program service and product catalog. Work your way backwards – map each deliverable to the respective stakeholders and functions.

    Action/Output Arrow pointing right. Frequency Arrow pointing right. Stakeholders/Function
    Document the key services and outputs produced by the security operations program. For example:
    • Real-time monitoring
    • Event analysis and incident coordination
    • Malware analysis
    • External information sharing
    • Published alerts, reports, and briefings
    • Metrics
    Define the frequency for which each deliverable or service is produced or conducted. Leverage this activity to establish a state of accountability within your threat collaboration environment. Identify the stakeholders or groups affiliated with each output. Remember to include potential MSSPs.
    • Vulnerability Management
    • Threat Intelligence
    • Tier 1, 2, and 3 Analysts
    • Incident Response
    • MSSP
    • Network Operations
    Remember to include any target-state outputs or services identified in the maturity assessment. Use this exercise as an opportunity to organize your security operations outputs and services.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Develop a central web/knowledge portal that is easily accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment.

    Internal information sharing helps to focus operational efforts

    Organizations must share information internally and through secure external information sharing and analysis centers (ISACs).

    Ensure information is shared in a format that relates to the particular end user. Internal consumers fall into two categories:

    • Strategic Users — Intelligence enables strategic stakeholders to better understand security trends, minimize risk, and make more educated and informed decisions. The strategic intelligence user often lacks technical security knowledge; bridge the communication gap between security and non-technical decision makers by clearly communicating the underlying value and benefits.
    • Operational Users — Operational users integrate information and indicators directly into their daily operations and as a result have more in-depth knowledge of the technical terms. Reports help to identify escalated alerts that are part of a bigger campaign, provide attribution and context to attacks, identify systems that have been compromised, block malicious URLs or malware signatures in firewalls, IDPS systems, and other gateway products, identify patches, reduce the number of incidents, etc.
    Collaboration includes the exchange of:
    • Contextualized threat indicators, threat actors, TTPs, and campaigns.
    • Attribution of the attack, motives of the attacker, victim profiles, and frequent exploits.
    • Defensive and mitigation strategies.
    • Best-practice incident response procedures.
    • Technical tools to help normalize threat intelligence formats or decode malicious network traffic.
    Collaboration can be achieved through:
    • Manual unstructured exchanges such as alerts, reports, briefings, knowledge portals, or emails.
    • Automated centralized platforms that allow users to privately upload, aggregate, and vet threat intelligence. Current players include commercial, government, and open-source information-sharing and analysis centers.
    Isolation prevents businesses from learning from each others’ mistakes and/or successes.

    Define the routine of your security operations program in a detailed cadence schedule

    Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template

    Design your meetings around your security operations program’s outputs and capabilities

    How to customize

    Don’t operate in a silo. Formalize a cadence schedule to develop a state of accountability, share information across the organization, and discuss relevant trends. A detailed cadence schedule should include the following:

    • Activity, output, or topic being discussed.
    • Participants and stakeholders involved.
    • Value and purpose of meeting.
    • Duration and frequency of each meeting.
    • Investment per participant per meeting.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Schedule regular meetings composed of key members from different working groups to discuss concerns, share goals, and communicate operational processes pertaining to their specific roles.

    Apply a strategic lens to your security operations program

    Frame the importance of optimizing the security operations program to align with that of the decision makers’ overarching strategy.

    Strategies
    1. Bridge the communication gap between security and non-technical decision makers. Communicate concisely in business-friendly terms.
    2. Quantify the ROI for the given project.
    3. Educate stakeholders – if stakeholders do not understand what a security operations program encompasses, it will be hard for them to champion the initiative.
    4. Communicate the implications, value, and benefits of a security operations program.
    5. Frame the opportunity as a competitive advantage, e.g. proactive security measures as a client acquisition strategy.
    6. Address the increasing prevalence of threat actors. Use objective data to demonstrate the impact, e.g. through case studies, recent media headlines, or statistics.

    Defensive Strategy diagram with columns 'Adversaries', 'Defenses', 'Assets', and priority level.
    (Source: iSIGHT, “ Definitive Guide to Threat Intelligence”)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Refrain from using scare tactics such as fear, uncertainty, and doubt (FUD). While this may be a short-term solution, it limits the longevity of your operations as senior management is not truly invested in the initiative.

    Example: Align your strategic needs with that of management.

    Identify assets of value, current weak security measures, and potential adversaries. Demonstrate how an optimized security operations program can mitigate those threats.

    Develop a comprehensive measurement program to evaluate the effectiveness of your security operations

    There are three types of metrics pertaining to security operations:

    1) Operations-focused

    Operations-focused metrics are typically communicated through a centralized visualization such as a dashboard. These metrics guide operational efforts, identifying operational and control weak points while ensuring the appropriate actions are taken to fix them.

    Examples include, but are not limited to:

    • Ticketing metrics (e.g. average ticket resolution rate, ticketing status, number of tickets per queue/analyst).
    • False positive percentage per control.
    • Incident response metrics (e.g. mean time to recovery).
    • CVSS scores per vulnerability.

    2) Business-focused

    The evaluation of operational success from a business perspective.

    Example metrics include:

    • Return on investment.
    • Total cost of ownership (can be segregated by function: prevent, detect, analyze, and respond).
    • Saved costs from mitigated breaches.
    • Security operations budget as a percentage of the IT budget.

    3) Initiative-focused

    The measurement of security operations project progress. These are frequently represented as time, resource, or cost-based metrics.

    Note: Remember to measure end-user feedback. Asking stakeholders about their current expectations via a formal survey is the most effective way to kick-start the continuous improvement process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Operational metrics have limited value beyond security operations – when communicating to management, focus on metrics that are actionable from a business perspective.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations Metrics Summary Document.Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Metrics Summary Document.

    Identify the triggers for continual improvement

    Continual Improvement

    • Audits: Check for performance requirements in order to pass major audits.
    • Assessments: Variances in efficiency or effectiveness of metrics when compared to the industry standard.
    • Process maturity: Opportunity to increase efficiency of services and processes.
    • Management reviews: Routine reviews that reveal gaps.
    • Technology advances: For example, new security architecture/controls have been released.
    • Regulations: Compliance to new or changed regulations.
    • New staff or technology: Disruptive technology or new skills that allow for improvement.

    Conduct tabletop exercises with Info-Tech’s onsite workshop

    Assess your security operations capabilities

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Security Operations Tabletop Exercise to guide simulations to validate your operational procedures.

    How to customize
    • Use the templates to document actions and actors.
    • For each new injection, spend three minutes discussing the response as a group. Then spend two minutes documenting each role’s contribution to the response. After the time limit, proceed to the following injection scenario.
    • Review the responses only after completing the entire exercise.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Tabletop Exercise.

    This tabletop exercise is available through an onsite workshop as we can help establish and design a tabletop capability for your organization.

    Are you ready to implement your security operations program?

    Self-Assessment Questions

    • Is there a formalized security operations collaboration plan?
    • Are all key stakeholders documented and acknowledged?
    • Have you defined your strategic needs and requirements in a formalized collection plan?
    • Is there an established channel for management to communicate needs and requirements to the security operation leaders?
    • Are all program outputs documented and communicated?
    • Is there an accessible, centralized portal or dashboard that actively aggregates and communicates key information?
    • Is there a formalized threat escalation protocol in order to facilitate both internal and external information sharing?
    • Does your organization actively participate in external information sharing through the use of ISACs?
    • Does your organization actively produce reports, alerts, products, etc. that feed into and influence the output of other functions’ operations?
    • Have you assigned program responsibilities in a detailed RACI chart?
    • Is there a structured cadence schedule for key stakeholders to actively communicate and share information?
    • Have you developed a structured measurement program on a per function basis?
    • Now that you have constructed your ideal security operations program strategy, revisit the question “Are you answering all of your objectives?”

    If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to implement your security operations program.

    Summary

    Insights

    1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
    2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives
    3. If you are not communicating, then you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Best Practices

    • Have a structured plan of attack. Define your unique threat landscape, as well as business, regulatory, and consumer obligations.
    • Foster both internal and external collaboration.
    • Understand the operational cut-off points. While collaboration is encouraged, understand when the onus shifts to the rest of the threat collaboration environment.
    • Do not bite off more than you can chew. Identify current people, processes, and technologies that satisfy immediate problems and enable future expansion.
    • Leverage threat intelligence to create a predictive and proactive security operations analysis process.
    • Formalize escalation procedures with logic and incident management flow.
    • Don’t develop a security operations program with the objective of zero incidents. This reliance on prevention results in over-engineered security solutions that cost more than the assets being protected.
    • Ensure that information flows freely throughout the threat collaboration environment – each function should serve to feed and enhance the next.
    • Develop a central web/knowledge portal that is easily accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment
    Protect your organization with an interdependent and collaborative security operations program.

    Bibliography

    “2016 State of Cybersecurity in Small & Medium-Sized Businesses (SMB).” Ponemon Institute, June 2016. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Ahmad, Shakeel et al. “10 Tips to Improve Your Security Incident Readiness and Response.” RSA, n.d. Web. 12 Nov. 2016.

    Anderson, Brandie. “ Building, Maturing & Rocking a Security Operations Center.” Hewlett Packard, n.d. Web. 4 Nov. 2016.

    Barnum, Sean. “Standardizing cyber threat intelligence information with the structured threat information expression.” STIX, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    Bidou, Renaud. “Security Operation Center Concepts & Implementation.” IV2-Technologies, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    Bradley, Susan. “Cyber threat intelligence summit.” SANS Institute InfoSec Reading Room, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Building a Security Operations Center.” DEF CON Communications, Inc., 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    “Building a Successful Security Operations Center.” ArcSight, 2015. Web. 21 Nov. 2016.

    “Building an Intelligence-Driven Security Operations Center.” RSA, June 2014. Web. 25 Nov. 2016.

    Caltagirone, Sergio, Andrew Pendergast, and Christopher Betz. “Diamond Model of Intrusion Analysis,” Center for Cyber Threat Intelligence and Threat Research, 5 July 2013. Web. 25 Aug. 2016.

    “Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report: Chief Security Officers Reveal True Cost of Breaches and the Actions Organizations Are Taking.” The Network. Cisco, 31 Jan. 2017. Web. 11 Nov. 2017.

    “CITP Training and Education.” Carnegie Mellon University, 2015. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Creating and Maintaining a SOC.” Intel Security, n.d. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    “Cyber Defense.” Mandiant, 2015. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    “Cyber Security Operations Center (CSOC).” Northrop Grumman, 2014. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Danyliw, Roman. “Observations of Successful Cyber Security Operations.” Carnegie Mellon, 12 Dec. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “Designing and Building Security Operations Center.” SearchSecurity. TechTarget, Mar. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    EY. “Managed SOC.” EY, 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Fishbach, Nicholas. “How to Build and Run a Security Operations Center.” Securite.org, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “Framework for improving critical infrastructure cybersecurity.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 12 Feb. 2014. Web.

    Friedman, John, and Mark Bouchard. “Definitive Guide to Cyber Threat Intelligence.” iSIGHT, 2015. Web. 1 June 2015.

    Goldfarb, Joshua. “The Security Operations Hierarchy of Needs.” Securityweek.com, 10 Sept. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “How Collaboration Can Optimize Security Operations.” Intel, n.d. Web. 2 Nov. 2016.

    Hslatman. “Awesome threat intelligence.” GitHub, 16 Aug. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Implementation Framework – Collection Management.” Carnegie Mellon University, 2015. Web.

    “Implementation Framework – Cyber Threat Prioritization.” Carnegie Mellon University, 03 Oct. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Intelligent Security Operations Center.” IBM, 25 Feb. 2015. Web. 15 Nov. 2016.

    Joshi Follow , Abhishek. “Best Practices for Security Operations Center.” LinkedIn, 01 Nov. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Joshi. “Best Practices for a Security Operations Center.” Cybrary, 18 Sept. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Kelley, Diana and Ron Moritz. “Best Practices for Building a Security Operations Center.” Information Security Today, 2006. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Killcrece, Georgia, Klaus-Peter Kossakowski, Robin Ruefle, and Mark Zajicek. ”Organizational Models for Computer Security Incident Response Teams (CSIRTs).” Carnegie Mellon Software Engineering Institute, Dec. 2003. Carnegie Mellon. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Kindervag , John. “SOC 2.0: Three Key Steps toward the Next-generation Security Operations Center.” SearchSecurity. TechTarget, Dec. 2010. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Kvochko, Elena. “Designing the Next Generation Cyber Security Operations Center.” Forbes Magazine, 14 Mar. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Lambert, P. “ Security Operations Center: Not Just for Huge Enterprises.” TechRepublic, 31 Jan. 2013. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Lecky, M. and D. Millier. “Re-Thinking Security Operations.” SecTor Security Education Conference. Toronto, 2014.

    Lee, Michael. “Three Elements That Every Advanced Security Operations Center Needs.” CSO | The Resource for Data Security Executives, n.d. Web. 16 Nov. 2016.

    Linch, David and Jason Bergstrom. “Building a Culture of Continuous Improvement in an Age of Disruption.” Deloitte LLP, 2014.

    Lynch, Steve. “Security Operations Center.” InfoSec Institute, 14 May 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Macgregor, Rob. “Diamonds or chains – cyber security updates.” PwC, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Make Your Security Operations Center (SOC) More Efficient.” Making Your Data Center Energy Efficient (2011): 213-48. Intel Security. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    Makryllos, Gordon. “The Six Pillars of Security Operations.” CSO | The Resource for Data Security Executives, n.d. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Marchany, R. “ Building a Security Operations Center.” Virginia Tech, 2015. Web. 8 Nov. 2016.

    Marty, Raffael. “Dashboards in the Security Operations Center (SOC).” Security Bloggers Network, 15 Jan. 2016. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Minu, Adolphus. “Discovering the Value of Knowledge Portal.” IBM, n.d. Web. 1 Nov. 2016.

    Muniz, J., G. McIntyre, and N. AlFardan. “Introduction to Security Operations and the SOC.” Security Operations Center: Building, Operating, and Maintaining your SOC. Cisco Press, 29 Oct. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Muniz, Joseph and Gary McIntyre. “ Security Operations Center.” Cisco, Nov. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Muniz, Joseph. “5 Steps to Building and Operating an Effective Security Operations Center (SOC).” Cisco, 15 Dec. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Nathans, David. Designing and Building a Security Operations Center. Syngress, 2015. Print.

    National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-61 Revision 2: Computer Security Incident Handling Guide.” 2012. Web.

    National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-83 Revision 1.” 2013. Web.

    National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-86: Guide to Integrating Forensic Techniques into Incident Response.” 2006. Web.

    F5 Networks. “F5 Security Operations Center.” F5 Networks, 2014. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    “Next Generation Security Operations Center.” DTS Solution, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “Optimizing Security Operations.” Intel, 2015. Web. 4 Nov. 2016.

    Paganini, Pierluigi. “What Is a SOC ( Security Operations Center)?” Security Affairs, 24 May 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Ponemon Institute LLC. “Cyber Security Incident Response: Are we as prepared as we think?” Ponemon, 2014. Web.

    Ponemon Institute LLC. “The Importance of Cyber Threat Intelligence to a Strong Security Posture.” Ponemon, Mar. 2015. Web. 17 Aug. 2016.

    Poputa-Clean, Paul. “Automated defense – using threat intelligence to augment.” SANS Institute InfoSec Reading Room, 15 Jan. 2015. Web.

    Quintagroup. “Knowledge Management Portal Solution.” Quintagroup, n.d. Web.

    Rasche, G. “Guidelines for Planning an Integrated Security Operations Center.” EPRI, Dec. 2013. Web. 25 Nov. 2016.

    Rehman, R. “What It Really Takes to Stand up a SOC.” Rafeeq Rehman – Personal Blog, 27 Aug. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Rothke, Ben. “Designing and Building Security Operations Center.” RSA Conference, 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Ruks, Martyn and David Chismon. “Threat Intelligence: Collecting, Analysing, Evaluating.” MWR Infosecurity, 2015. Web. 24 Aug. 2016.

    Sadamatsu, Takayoshi. “Practice within Fujitsu of Security Operations Center.” Fujitsu, July 2016. Web. 15 Nov. 2016.

    Sanders, Chris. “Three Useful SOC Dashboards.” Chris Sanders, 24 Oct. 2016. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    SANS Institute. “Incident Handler's Handbook.” 2011. Web.

    Schilling, Jeff. “5 Pitfalls to Avoid When Running Your SOC.” Dark Reading, 18 Dec. 2014. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Schinagl, Stef, Keith Schoon, and Ronald Paans. “A Framework for Designing a Security Operations Centre (SOC).” 2015 48th Hawaii International Conference on System Sciences. Computer.org, 2015. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “Security – Next Gen SOC or SOF.” InfoSecAlways.com, 31 Dec. 2013. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    “Security Operations Center Dashboard.” Enterprise Dashboard Digest, n.d. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “Security Operations Center Optimization Services.” AT&T, 2015. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    “Security Operations Centers — Helping You Get Ahead of Cybercrime Contents.” EY, 2014. Web. 6 Nov. 2016.

    Sheikh, Shah. “DTS Solution - Building a SOC (Security Operations Center).” LinkedIn, 4 May 2013. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    Soto, Carlos. “ Security Operations Center (SOC) 101.” Tom's IT Pro, 28 Oct. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “Standardizing and Automating Security Operations.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 3 Sept. 2006. Web.

    “Strategy Considerations for Building a Security Operations Center.” IBM, Dec. 2013. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    “Summary of Key Findings.” Carnegie Mellon University, 03 Oct. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Sustainable Security Operations.” Intel, 2016. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “The Cost of Malware Containment.” Ponemon Institute, Jan. 2015. Web.

    “The Game Plan for Closing the SecOps Gap.” BMC. Forbes Magazine, Jan. 2016. Web. 10 Jan. 2017.

    Veerappa Srinivas, Babu. “Security Operations Centre (SOC) in a Utility Organization.” GIAC, 17 Sept. 2014. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    Wang, John. “Anatomy of a Security Operations Center.” NASA, 2015. Web. 2 Nov. 2016.

    Weiss, Errol. “Statement for the Record.” House Financial Services Committee, 1 June 2012. Web. 12 Nov. 2016.

    Wilson, Tim. “SOC 2.0: A Crystal-Ball Glimpse of the Next-Generation Security Operations Center.” Dark Reading, 22 Nov. 2010. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Zimmerman, Carson. “Ten Strategies of a World-Class Cybersecurity Operations Center.” Mitre, 2014. Web. 24 Aug. 2016.

    Improve Incident and Problem Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}290|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $43,761 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 23 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Incident and problem management
    • Parent Category Link: /improve-your-core-processes/infra-and-operations/i-and-o-process-management/incident-and-problem-management
    • IT infrastructure managers have conflicting accountabilities. It can be difficult to fight fires as they appear while engaging in systematic fire prevention.
    • Repetitive interruptions erode faith in IT. If incidents recur consistently, why should the business trust IT to resolve them?

    Continue reading

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}519|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Laws requiring digital accessibility are changing and differ by location.
    • You need to make sure your digital assets, products, and services (internal and external) are accessible to everyone, but getting buy-in is difficult.
    • You may not know where your gaps in understanding are because conventional thinking is driven by compliance and risk mitigation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The longer you put off accessibility, the more tech debt you accumulate and the more you risk losing access to new and existing markets. The longer you wait to adopt standards and best practices, the more interest you’ll accumulate on accessibility barriers and costs for remediation.
    • Implementing accessibility feels counterintuitive to IT departments. IT always wants to optimize and move forward, but with accessibility you may stay at one level for what feels like an uncomfortably long period. Don’t worry; building consistency and shifting culture takes time.
    • Accessibility goes beyond compliance, which should be an outcome, not the objective. With 1 billion people worldwide with some form of disability, nearly everyone likely has a connection to disability, whether it be in themselves, family, or colleagues. The market of people with disabilities has a spending power of more than $6 trillion (WAI, 2018).

    Impact and Result

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear “accessibility” and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. The Accessibility Business Case for IT – Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.

    A step-by-step approach to walk you through understanding your current state related to accessibility maturity, identifying your desired future state, and building your business case to seek buy-in. This storyboard will help you figure out what’s right for your organization and build the accessibility business case for IT.

    • The Accessibility Business Case for IT – Phases 1-3

    2. Accessibility Business Case Template – A clear, concise, and compelling business case template to communicate the criticality of accessibility.

    The business case for accessibility is strong. Use this template to communicate to senior leaders the benefits, challenges, and risks of inaction.

    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    3. Accessibility Maturity Assessment – A structured tool to help you identify your current accessibility maturity level and identify opportunities to ensure progress.

    This tool uses a capability maturity model framework to evaluate your current state of accessibility. Maturity level is assessed on three interconnected aspects (people, process, and technology) across six dimensions proven to impact accessibility. Complete the assessment to get recommendations based on where you’re at.

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Infographic

    Further reading

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    Accessibility goes beyond compliance

    Analyst Perspective

    Avoid tech debt related to accessibility barriers

    Accessibility is important for individuals, businesses, and society. Diverse populations need diverse access, and it’s essential to provide access and opportunity to everyone, including people with diverse abilities. In fact, access to information and communications technologies (ICT) is a basic human right according to the United Nations.

    The benefits of ICT accessibility go beyond compliance. Many innovations that we use in everyday life, such as voice activation, began as accessibility initiatives and ended up creating a better lived experience for everyone. Accessibility can improve user experience and satisfaction, and it can enhance your brand, drive innovation, and extend your market reach (WAI, 2022).

    Although your organization might be required by law to ensure accessibility, understanding your users’ needs and incorporating them into your processes early will determine success beyond just compliance.

    Heather Leier-Murray, Senior Research Analyst, People and Leadership

    Heather Leier-Murray
    Senior Research Analyst, People and Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach

    Global IT and business leaders are challenged to make digital products and services accessible because inaccessibility comes with increasing risk to brand reputation, legal ramifications, and constrained market reach.

    • Laws requiring digital accessibility are changing and differ by location.
    • You need to make sure your digital assets, products, and services (internal and external) are accessible to everyone.
    • The cost of inaction is rising.

    Understanding where to start, where accessibility lives, and if or when you’re done can be overwhelmingly difficult.

    • Executive leadership buy-in is difficult to get.
    • Conventional thinking is driven by compliance and risk mitigation.
    • You don’t know where your gaps in understanding are.

    Conventional approaches to accessibility often fail because users are expected to do the hard work. You have to be doing 80% of the hard work.1

    Use Info-Tech’s research and resources to do what’s right for your organization. This framework takes away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear “accessibility” and makes the steps for your organization approachable.

    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.

    1. Harvard Business Review, 2021

    Info-Tech Insight
    The longer you put off accessibility, the more tech debt you accumulate and the more you risk losing access to new and existing markets. The longer you wait to adopt standards and best practices, the more interest you’ll accumulate on accessibility barriers and costs for remediation.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who are looking to:

    • Build a business case for accessibility.
    • Ensure that digital assets, products, and services are accessible to everyone, internally and externally.
    • Support staff and build skills to support the organization with accessibility and accommodation.
    • Get assistance figuring out where to start on the road to accessibility compliance and beyond.

    The cost of inaction related to accessibility is rising. Preparing for accessibility earlier helps prevent tech debt; the longer you wait to address your accessibility obligations, the more costly it gets.

    More than 3,500 digital accessibility lawsuits were filed in the US in 2020, up more than 50% from 2018.

    Source: UsableNet. Inc.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make accessibility difficult to address for many organizations:

    • You don’t know where your gaps in understanding are. Recognizing the importance of accessibility and how it fits into the bigger picture is key to developing buy-in.
    • Too often organizations focus on mitigating risk by being compliance driven. Shifting focus to the user experience, internally and externally, will realize better results.
    • Conventional approaches to accessibility often fail because the expectation is for users to do the hard work. One in five people have a permanent disability, but it’s likely everyone will be faced with some sort of disability at some point in their lives.1 Your organization has to be doing at least 80% of the hard work.2
    • Other types of compliance reside clearly with one area of the organization. Accessibility, however, has many homes: IT, user experience (UX), customer experience (CX), and even HR.

    1. Smashing Magazine

    2. Harvard Business Review, 2021

    90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity.

    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2020

    Only 4% of those that claim to prioritize diversity consider disability in those initiatives.

    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2020

    The four principles of accessibility

    WCAG (Web Content Accessibility Guidelines) identifies four principles of accessibility. WCAG is the most referenced standard in website accessibility lawsuits.

    The four principles of accessibility

    Source: eSSENTIAL Accessibility, 2022

    Why organizations address accessibility

    Top three reasons:

    61% 62% 78%
    To comply with laws To provide the best UX To include people with disabilities

    Source: Level Access

    Still, most businesses aren’t meeting compliance standards. Even though legislation has been in place for over 30 years, a 2022 study by WebAIM of 1,000,000 homepages returned a 96.8% WCAG 2.0 failure rate.

    Source: Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice

    How organizations prioritize digital accessibility

    43% rated it as a top priority.

    36% rated it as important.

    Fewer than 5% rated as either low priority or not even on the radar.

    More than 65% agreed or strongly agreed it’s a higher priority than last year.

    Source: Angel Business Communications

    Organizations expect consumers to do more online

    The pandemic led to many businesses going digital and more people doing things online.

    Chart of activities performed more often compared to before COVID-19

    Chart of activities performed for the first time during COVID-19

    Source: Statistics Canada

    Disability is part of being human

    Merriam-Webster defines disability as a “physical, mental, cognitive, or developmental condition that impairs, interferes with, or limits a person’s ability to engage in certain tasks or actions or participate in typical daily activities and interactions.”1

    The World Health Organization (WHO) points out that a crucial part of the definition of disability is that it’s not just a health problem, but the environment impacts the experience and extent of disability. Inaccessibility creates barriers for full participation in society.2

    The likelihood of you experiencing a disability at some point in your life is very high, whether a physical or mental disability, seen or unseen, temporary or permanent, severe or mild.2

    Many people acquire disabilities as they age yet may not identify as “a person with a disability.”3 Where life expectancies are over 70 years of age, 11.5% of life is spent living with a disability. 4

    “Extreme personalization is becoming the primary difference in business success, and everyone wants to be a stakeholder in a company that provides processes, products, and services to employees and customers with equitable, person-centered experiences and allows for full participation where no one is left out.”
    – Paudie Healy, CEO, Universal Access

    1. Merriam-Webster
    2. World Health Organization
    3. Digital Leaders, as cited in WAI, 2018
    4. Disabled World, as cited in WAI, 2018

    Untapped talent resource

    Common myths about people with disabilities:

    • They can’t work.
    • They need more time off or are absent more often.
    • Only basic, unskilled work is appropriate for them.
    • Their productivity is lower than that of coworkers.
    • They cost more to recruit, train, and employ.
    • They decrease others’ productivity.
    • They’re not eligible for governmental financial incentives (e.g. apprentices).
    • They don’t fit in.

    These assumptions prevent organizations from hiring valuable people into the workforce and retaining them.

    Source: Forbes

    50% to 70% of people with disabilities are unemployed in industrialized countries. In the US alone, 61 million adults have a disability.

    Source: United Nations, as cited in Forbes

    Thought Model

    Info-Tech’s methodology for the accessibility business case for IT

    1. Understand Current State 2. Plan for Buy-in 3. Prepare Your Business Case
    Phase Steps
    1. Understand standards and legislation
    2. Build awareness
    3. Understand current accessibility maturity level Define desired future state
    1. Define desired future state
    2. Define goals and objectives
    3. Document roles and responsibilities
    1. Customize and populate the Accessibility Business Case Template and gain approval
    2. Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines
    Phase Outcomes
    • Accessibility maturity assessment
    • Accessibility drivers determined
    • Goals defined
    • Objectives identified
    • Roles and responsibilities documented
    • Business case drafted
    • Approval to move forward with implementing your accessibility program
    • Next steps and timelines

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1 The longer you put off accessibility, the more tech debt you accumulate and the more you risk losing access to new and existing markets. The longer you wait to adopt standards and best practices, the more interest you’ll accumulate on accessibility barriers and costs for remediation.
    Insight 2 Implementing accessibility feels counterintuitive to IT departments. IT always wants to optimize and move forward, but with accessibility you may stay at one level for what feels like an uncomfortably long period. Don’t worry; building consistency and shifting culture takes time.
    Insight 3 Accessibility goes beyond compliance, which should be an outcome, not the objective. With 1 billion people worldwide with some form of disability, nearly everyone likely has a connection to disability, whether it be in themselves, family, or colleagues. The market of people with disabilities has a spending power of more than $6 trillion.1

    1. WAI, 2018

    Blueprint deliverables

    This blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Accessibility Business Case Template

    The business case for accessibility is strong. Use this template to communicate to senior leaders the benefits and challenges of accessibility and the risks of inaction.

    Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Use this assessment to understand your current accessibility maturity.

    Blueprint benefits

    Business Benefits IT Benefits
    • Don’t lose out on a 6-trillion-dollar market.
    • Don’t miss opportunities to work with organizations because you’re not accessible.
    • Enable and empower current employees with disabilities.
    • Minimize potential for negative brand reputation due to a lack of consideration for people with disabilities.
    • Decrease the risk of legal action being brought upon the organization.
    • Understand accessibility and know your role in it for your organization and your team members.
    • Be prepared and able to provide the user experience you want.
    • Decrease tech debt – start early to ensure accessibility for everyone.
    • Access an untapped labor market.
    • Mitigate IT retention challenges.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Improve stakeholder satisfaction and engagement

    • Tracking measures to understand the value of this blueprint is a critical part of the process.
    • Monitor employee engagement, overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT, and the overall end-customer satisfaction.
    • Remember, accessibility is not a one-and-done project – just because measures are positive does not mean your work is done.

    In phase 2 of this blueprint, we will help you establish current-state and target-state metrics for your organization.

    Suggested Metrics
    Overall end-customer satisfaction
    Monies saved through cost optimization efforts
    Employee engagement
    Monies save through application rationalization and standardization

    For more metrics ideas, see the Info-Tech IT Metrics Library.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY
    Technology

    SOURCE
    W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 2018

    Google

    Investing in accessibility
    With an innovative edge, Google invests in accessibility with the objective of making life easier for everyone. Google has created a broad array of accessibility innovations in its products and services so that people with disabilities get as much out of them as anyone else.

    Part of Google’s core mission, accessibility means more to Google than implementing fixes. It is viewed positively by the organization and drives it to be more innovative to make information available to everyone. Google approaches accessibility problems not as barriers but as ways to innovate and discover breakthroughs that will become mainstream in the future.

    Results
    Among Google’s innovations are contrast minimums, auto-complete, voice-control, AI advances, and machine learning auto-captioning. All of these were created for accessibility purposes but have positively impacted the user experience in general for Google.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 4 to 6 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Discuss motivation for the initiative and foundational knowledge requirements.

    Call #2: Discuss next steps to assess current accessibility maturity.

    Call #3: Discuss stakeholder engagement and future-state analysis.

    Call #4: Discuss defining goals and objectives, along with roles and responsibilities.

    Call #5: Review draft business case presentation.

    Call #6: Discuss post-approval steps and timelines.

    Phase 1

    Understand Your Current State

    Phase 1
    1.1 Understand standards and legislation
    1.2 Build awareness
    1.3 Understand maturity level

    Phase 2
    2.1 Define desired future state
    2.2 Define goals and objectives
    2.3 Document roles and responsibilities

    Phase 3
    3.1 Prepare business case template for presentation and approval
    3.2 Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identifying and understanding accessibility and compliance requirements and the ramifications of noncompliance.
    • Defining accessibility, disability, and disability inclusion and building awareness of these with senior leaders.
    • Completing the Accessibility Maturity Assessment to help you understand your current state.

    Step 1.1

    Understand standards and legislation

    Activities

    1.1.1 Make a list of the legislation you need to comply with

    1.1.2 Seek legal and/or professional services’ input on compliance

    1.1.3 Detail the risks of inaction for your organization

    Understand Your Current State

    Outcomes of this step
    You will gain foundational understanding of the breadth of the regulation requirements for your organization. You will have reviewed and understand what is applicable to your organization.

    The regulatory landscape is evolving

    Canada

    • Canadian Human Rights Act
    • Policy on Communications and Federal Identity
    • Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms
    • Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act
    • Accessible Canada Act of 2019 (ACA)

    Europe

    • UK Equality Act 2010
    • EU Web and Mobile Accessibility Directive (2016)
    • EN 301 549 European Standard – Accessibility requirements for public procurement of ICT products and services

    United States

    • Section 508 of the US Rehabilitation Act of 1973
    • Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA)
    • Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act of 1996
    • Air Carrier Access Act of 1986
    • 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act of 2010 (CVAA)

    New Zealand

    • Human Rights Act 1993
    • Online Practice Guidelines for Government

    Australia

    • Disability Discrimination Act 1992 (DDA)

    Regulatory systems are moving toward an international standard.

    1.1.1 Make a list of the legislation you need to comply with

    1. Download the Accessibility Business Case Template.
    2. Conduct research and investigate what legislation and standards are applicable to your organization.
    3. a) Start by looking at your local legislation.
      b) Then consider any other regions you conduct business in.
      c) Also account for the various industries you are in.
    4. While researching, build a list of legislation requirements. Document these in your Accessibility Business Case Template as part of the Project Context section.
    Input Output
    • Research
    • Websites
    • Articles
    • List of legislation that applies to the organization related to accessibility
    Materials Participants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    1.1.2 Seek professional advice on compliance

    1. Have general counsel review your list of regulations and standards related to accessibility or seek legal and/or professional support to review your list.
    2. Review or research further the implications of any suggestions from legal counsel.
    3. Make any updates to the Legal Landscape slide in the Accessibility Business Case Template.
    Input Output
    • Compiled list of applicable legislation and standards
    • Confirmed list of regulations that are applicable to your organization related to accessibility
    Materials Participants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator
    • General counsel/professional services

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Ramifications of noncompliance

    Go beyond financial consequences

    Beyond the costs resulting from a claim, noncompliance can damage your organization in several ways.

    Financial Impact

    ADA Warning Shot: A complaint often indicates pending legal action to come. Addressing issues on a reactive, ad hoc basis can be quite expensive. It can cost almost $10,000 to address a single complaint, and chances are if you have one complaint, you have many.

    Lawsuit Costs: In the US, 265,000 demand letters were sent in 2020 under the ADA for inaccessible websites. On average, a demand letter could cost the company $25,000 (conservatively). These are low-end numbers; another estimate is that a small, quickly settled digital accessibility lawsuit could cost upwards of $350,000 for the defendant.

    Non-Financial Impact

    Reputational Impact: Claims brought upon a company can bring negative publicity with them. In contrast, having a clear commitment to accessibility demonstrates inclusion and can enhance brand image and reputation. Stakeholder expectations are changing, and consumers, investors, and employees alike want to support businesses with a purpose.

    Technology Resource Strains: Costly workarounds and ad hoc accommodation processes take away from efficiency and effectiveness. Updates and redesigns for accessibility and best practices will reduce costs associated with maintenance and service, including overall stakeholder satisfaction improvements.

    Access to Talent: 2022 saw a record high number of job openings, over 11.4 million in the US alone. Ongoing labor shortages require eliminating bias and keeping an open mind about who is qualified.

    Source: May Hopewell

    In the last four years, 83% of the retail 500 have been sued. Since 2018, 417 of the top 500 have received ADA-based digital lawsuits.

    Source: UsableNet

    1.1.3 Detail the risks of inaction for your organization

    1. Using the information that you’ve gathered through your research and legal/professional advice, detail the risks of inaction for your organization.
    2. a) Consider legal risks, consumer risks, brand risks, and employee risks. (Remember, risks aren’t just monetary.)
    3. Document the risks in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • List of applicable legislation and standards
    • Information about risks
    • Identified accessibility maturity level
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Step 1.2

    Build awareness of accessibility and disability inclusion

    Activities

    1.2.1 Identify gaps in understanding

    1.2.2 Brainstorm how to reframe accessibility positively

    Understand Your Current State

    Outcomes of this step
    You’ll have a better understanding of accessibility so that you can effectively implement and promote it.

    Where to look for understanding

    First-hand experience of how people with disabilities interact with your organization is often eye-opening. It will help you understand the benefits and value of accessibility.

    Where to look for understanding

    • Talk with people you know with disabilities that are willing to share.*
    • Find role-specific training that’s appropriate.
    • Research. Articles and videos are easy to find.
    • Set up assistive technology trials.
    • Seek out first-hand experience from people with disabilities and how they work and use digital assets.

    Source: WAI, 2016

    * Remember, people with disabilities aren't obligated to discuss or explain their disabilities and may not be comfortable sharing. If you're asking for their time, be respectful, only ask if appropriate, and accept a "no" answer if the person doesn't wish to assist.

    1.2.1 Identify gaps in understanding

    Find out what accessibility is and why it is important. Learn the basics.

    1. Using the information that you’ve gathered through your research and legal counsel, conduct further research to understand the importance of accessibility.
    2. Answer these questions:
    3. a) What is accessibility? Why is it important?
      b) From the legislation and standards identified in step 1.1, what gaps exist?
      c) What is the definition of disability?
      d) How does your organization currently address accessibility?
      e) What are your risks?
      f) Do you have any current employees who have disabilities?
    4. Review the previous slide for suggestions on where to find more information to answer the above questions.
    5. Document any changes to the risks in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • Articles
    • Interviews
    • Websites
    • Greater understanding of the lived experience of people with disabilities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Articles
    • Websites
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Reframe accessibility as a benefit, not a burden

    A clear understanding of accessibility and the related standards and regulations can turn accessibility from something big and scary to an achievable part of the business.

    The benefits of accessibility are:

    Market Reach Minimized Legal Risks Innovation Retention
    Over 1 billion people with a spending power of $6 trillion make up the global market of people with disabilities.1 Accessibility improves the experience for all users. In addition, many organizations require you to provide proof you meet accessibility standards during the RFP process. Accessibility regulations are changing, and claims are rising. Costs associated with legal proceedings can be more than just financial. Many countries have laws you need to follow. People with disabilities bring diversity of thought, have different lived experiences, and benefit inclusivity, which helps drive engagement. Plus accessibility features often solve unanticipated problems. Employing and supporting people with disabilities can reduce turnover and improve retention, reliability, company image, employee loyalty, ability awareness, and more.

    Source 1: WAI, 2018

    1.2.2 Brainstorm ways to reframe accessibility positively

    1. Using the information that you’ve gathered through your research, brainstorm additional positives of accessibility for your organization.
    2. Clearly identify the problem you want to solve (e.g., reframing accessibility positively in your organization).
    3. Collect any tools you want to use to during brainstorming (e.g., whiteboard, markers, sticky notes)
    4. Write down all the ideas that come to mind.
    5. Review all the points and group them into themes.
    6. Update the Accessibility Business Case Template with your findings.
    InputOutput
    • Research you have gathered
    • List of ways to positively reframe accessibility for your organization
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Sticky notes, whiteboard, pens, paper, markers.
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Make it part of the conversation

    A first step to disability and accessibility awareness is to talk about it. When it is talked about as freely as other things are in the workplace, this can create a more welcoming workplace.

    Accessibility goes beyond physical access and includes technological access and support as well as our attitudes.

    Accessibility is making sure everyone (disabled or abled) can access the workplace equally.

    Adjustments in the workplace are necessary to create an accessible and welcoming environment. Understanding the three dimensions of accessibility in the workplace is a good place to start.

    Source: May Hopewell

    Three dimensions of accessibility in the workplace

    Three dimensions of accessibility in the workplace

    Case Study

    INDUSTRY
    Professional Services

    SOURCE
    Accenture

    Accenture takes an inclusive approach to increase accessibility.

    Accessibility is more than tools

    Employee experience was the focus of embarking on the accessibility journey, ensuring inclusivity was built in and every employee was able to use the tools they needed and could achieve their goals.

    "We are removing barriers in technology to make all of our employees, regardless of their ability, more productive.”
    — Melissa Summers, Managing Director – Global IT, Corporate Technology, Accenture

    Accessibility is inclusive

    The journey began with formalizing a Global IT Accessibility practice and defining an accessibility program charter. This provided direction and underpinned the strategy used to create a virtual Accessibility Center of Excellence and map out a multiyear plan of initiatives.

    The team then identified all the technologies they wanted to enhance by prioritizing ones that were high use and high impact. Involving disability champions gave insight into focus areas.

    Accessibility is innovation

    Working with partners like Microsoft and over 100 employees, Accenture continues toward the goal of 75% accessibility for all its global high-traffic internal platforms.

    Achievements thus far include:

    • 100% of new Accenture video and broadcast content is automatically captioned.
    • Accenture received a perfect Disability Equality Index (US) score of 100 out of 100 for 2017, 2018, and 2019.

    Step 1.3

    Understand your current accessibility maturity level

    Activities

    1.3.1 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Understand Your Current State

    Outcomes of this step
    Completed Accessibility Maturity Assessment to inform planning for and building your business case in Phases 2 and 3.

    Know where you are to know where to go

    Consider accessibility improvements from three interconnected aspects to determine current maturity level

    Accessibility Maturity

    People

    • Consider employee, customer, and user experience.

    Process

    • Review processes to ensure accessibility is considered early.

    Technology

    • Whether it’s new or existing, technology is an important tool to increase accessibility.

    Accessibility maturity levels

    INITIAL DEVELOPING DEFINED MANAGED OPTIMIZE
    At this level, accessibility processes are mostly undocumented, if they exist. Accessibility is most likely happening on a reactive, ad hoc basis. No one understands who is responsible for accessibility or what their role is. At this stage the organization is driven by the need for compliance. At the developing level, the organization is taking steps to increase accessibility but still has a lot of opportunity for improvements. The organization is defining and refining processes and is working toward building a library of assistive tools. At this level, processes related to accessibility are repeatable. However, there’s a tendency to resort to old habits under stress. The organization has tools in place to facilitate accommodation requests and technology is compatible with assistive technologies. Accessibility initiatives are driven by the desire to make the user experience better. The managed level is defined by its effective accessibility controls, processes, and metrics. The organization can mostly anticipate preferences of customers, employees, and users. The roles and responsibilities are defined, and disability is included as part of the organization’s diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) initiatives. This level is not the goal for all organizations. At this level there is a shift in the organization’s culture to a feeling of belonging. The organization also demonstrates ongoing process improvements. Everyone can experience a seamless interaction with the organization. The focus is on continuous improvement and using feedback to inform future initiatives.

    Determine your level of maturity

    Use Info-Tech’s Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    • On the accessibility questionnaire, tab 2, choose how much the statements apply to your organization. Answer the questions based on your knowledge of your current state organizationally.
    • Once you’ve answered all the questions, see the results on the tab 3, Accessibility Results. You can see your overall maturity level and the maturity level for each of six dimensions that are necessary to increase the success of an accessibility program.
    • Click through to tab 4, Recommendations, to see specific recommendations based on your results and proven research to progress through the maturity levels. Keep in mind that not all organizations will or should aspire to the “Optimize” maturity level.

    1.3.1 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    1. Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment and save it with the date so that as you work on your accessibility program, you can reassess later and track your progress.
    2. Once you have saved the assessment, select the appropriate answer for each statement on tab 2, Accessibility Questions, based on your knowledge of the organization’s approach.
    3. After reviewing all the accessibility statements, see your maturity level results on tab 3, Accessibility Results. Then see tab 4, Recommendations, for suggestions based on your answers.
    4. Document your accessibility maturity results in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    Input Output
    • Assess your current state of accessibility by choosing all the statements that apply to your organization
    • Identified accessibility maturity level
    Materials Participants
    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/sponsor
    • IT leadership team

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Phase 2

    Plan for Senior Leader Buy-In

    Phase 1
    1.1 Understand standards and legislation
    1.2 Build awareness
    1.3 Understand maturity level

    Phase 2
    2.1 Define desired future state
    2.2 Define goals and objectives
    2.3 Document roles and responsibilities

    Phase 3
    3.1 Prepare business case template for presentation and approval
    3.2 Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Defining your desired future state.
    • Determining your accessibility program goals and objectives.
    • Clarifying and documenting roles and responsibilities related to accessibility in IT.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Project lead/sponsor
    • IT leadership team
    • Senior leaders/decision makers

    Step 2.1

    Define the desired future state of accessibility

    Activities

    2.1.1 Identify key stakeholders

    2.1.2 Hold a key stakeholder focus group

    2.1.3 Conduct a future-state analysis

    Outcomes of this step
    Following this step, you will have identified your aspirational maturity level and what your accessibility future state looks like for your organization.

    Plan for Senior Leader Buy-In

    Cheat sheet: Identify stakeholders

    Ask stakeholders, “Who else should I be talking to?” to discover additional stakeholders and ensure you don’t miss anyone.

    Identify stakeholders through the following questions:
    • Who in areas of influence will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts of what you are doing?
    • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
    • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?
    • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
    • Who benefits from the initiative?
    • Who is negatively impacted by the initiative?
    • Who can make approvals?
    • Who controls resources?
    • Who has specialist skills?
    • Who implements the changes?
    • Who are the owners, governors, customers, and suppliers of impacted capabilities or functions?
    Take a 360-degree view of potential internal and external stakeholders who might be impacted by the initiative.
    • Executives
    • Peers
    • Direct reports
    • Partners
    • Customers
    • Subcontractors
    • Subcontractors
    • Contractors
    • Lobby groups
    • Regulatory agencies

    Categorize your stakeholders with a stakeholder prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps teams categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    Players – Players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.

    Mediators – Mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.

    Noisemakers – Noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.

    Spectators – Generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    Stakeholder prioritization map

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks.

    By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, you can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers while ensuring the needs of the Mediators and Players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence, high interest Actively Engage
    Keep them engaged through continuous involvement. Maintain their interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence, low interest Keep Satisfied
    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust, and include them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence, high interest Keep Informed
    Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence, low interest Monitor
    They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    2.1.1 Identify key stakeholders

    Collect this information by:

    1. List direct stakeholders for your area. Include stakeholders across the organization (both IT and business units) and externally.
    2. Create a stakeholder map to capture your stakeholders’ interest in and influence on digital accessibility.
    3. Shortlist stakeholders to invite as focus group participants in activity 2.1.2.
      • Aim for a combination of Players, Mediators, and Noisemakers.
    Input Output
    • List of stakeholders
    • Stakeholder requirements
    • A stakeholder map
    • List of stakeholders to include in the focus group in step 2.1.2
    Materials Participants
    • Sticky notes, pens, whiteboard, markers (optional)
    • Project leader/sponsor

    Hold a focus group to initiate planning

    Involve key stakeholders to determine the organizational drivers of accessibility, identify target maturity and key performance indicators (KPIs), and ultimately build the project charter.

    Building the project charter as a group will help you to clarify your key messages and secure buy-in from critical stakeholders up-front, which is key.

    Executing the business case for accessibility requires significant involvement from your IT leadership team. The challenge is that accessibility can be overwhelming because of inherent bias. Members of your IT leadership team will also need to participate in knowledge transfer, so get them involved up-front. The focus group will help stakeholders feel more engaged in the project, which is pivotal for success.

    You may feel like a full project charter isn’t necessary, and depending on your organizational size, it might not be. However, the exercise of building the charter is important regardless. No matter your current climate, some level of socializing the value of and plans for accessibility will be necessary.

    Meeting Agenda

    1. Short introduction
      Led by: Project Sponsor
      • Why the initiative is being considered.
    2. Make the case for the project
      Led by: Project Manager
      • Current state: What does the initiative address?
      • Future state: What is our target state of maturity?
    3. Success criteria
      Led by: Project Manager
      • How will success be measured?
    4. Define the project team
      Led by: Project Manager
      • Description of planned approach.
      • Stakeholder assessment.
      • What is required of the sponsor and stakeholders?
    5. Determine next steps
      Led by: Project Manager

    2.1.2 Hold a stakeholder focus group

    Identify the pain points you want to resolve and some of the benefits that you’d like to see from a program. By doing so, you’ll get a holistic view of what you need to achieve and what your drivers are.

    1. Ask the working group participants (as a whole or in smaller groups) to discuss pain points created by inaccessibility.
      • Challenges related to stakeholders.
      • Challenges created by process issues.
      • Difficulties improving accessibility practices.
    2. Discuss opportunities to be gained from improving these practices.
    3. Have participants write these down on sticky notes and place them on a whiteboard or flip chart.
    4. Review all the points as a group. Group challenges and benefits into themes.
    5. Have the group prioritize the risks and benefits in terms of what the solution must have, should have, could have, and won’t have.
    Input Output
    • Reasons for the project
    • Stakeholder requirements
    • Pain points and risks
    • A prioritized list of risks and benefits of the solution
    Materials Participants
    • Agenda (see previous slide)
    • Sticky notes, pens, whiteboard, markers (optional)
    • IT leadership
    • Other key stakeholders

    While defining future state, consider your drivers

    The Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework identifies three key strategic drivers: compliance, experience, and incorporation.

    • Over 30% of organizations are focused on compliance, according to a 2022 survey by Harvard Business Review and Slack’s Future Forum. The survey asked more than 10,000 workers in six countries about their organizations’ approach to DEI.2

    Even though 90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity,1 over 30% are focused on compliance.2

    1. Harvard Business Review, 2020
    2. Harvard Business Review, 2022

    31.6% of companies remain in the Compliant stage, where they are focused on DEI compliance and not on integrating DEI throughout the organization or on creating continual improvement.

    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2022

    Align the benefits of program drivers to organizational goals or outcomes

    Although there will be various motivating factors, aligning the drivers of your accessibility program provides direction to the program. Connecting the advantages of program drivers to organizational goals builds the confidence of senior leaders and decision makers, increasing the continued commitment to invest in accessibility programming.

    Drivers Compliance Experience Incorporation
    Maturity level Initial Developing Defined Managed Optimized
    Description Any accessibility initiative is to comply with the minimum legislated requirement. Desire to avoid/decrease legal risk. Accessibility initiatives are focused on improving the experience of everyone from the start. Most organizations will be experience driven. Desire to increase accessibility and engagement. Accessibility is a seamless part of the whole organization and initiatives are focused on impacting social issues.
    Advantages Compliance is a good starting place for accessibility. It will reduce legal risk. Being people focused from the start of processes enables the organization to reduce tech debt, provide the best user experience, and realize other benefits of accessibility. There is a sense of belonging in the organization. The entire organization experiences the benefits of accessibility.
    Disadvantages Accessibility is about more than just compliance. Being compliance driven won’t give you the full benefits of accessibility. This can mean a culture change for the organization, which can take a long time. IT is used to moving quickly – it might feel counterintuitive to slow down and take time. It takes much longer to reach the associated level of maturity. Not possible for all organizations.

    Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    After initially ensuring your organization is compliant with regulations and standards, you will progress to building disciplined process and consistent standardized processes. Eventually you will build the ability for predictable process, and lastly, you’ll optimize by continuously improving.

    Depending on the level of maturity you are trying to achieve, it could take months or even years to implement. The important thing to understand, however, is that accessibility work is never done.

    At all levels of the maturity framework, you must consider the interconnected aspects of people, process, and technology. However, as the organization progresses, the impact will shift from largely being focused on process and technology improvement to being focused on people.

    Info-Tech Insight
    IT typically works through maturity frameworks from the bottom to the top, progressing at each level until they reach the end. When it comes to digital accessibility initiatives, being especially thorough, thoughtful, and collaborative is critical to success. This will mean spending more time in the Developing, Defined, and Managed levels of maturity rather than trying to reach Optimized as quickly as you can. This may feel contrary to what IT historically considers as a successful implementation.

    Accessibility maturity levels

    Driver Description Benefits
    Initial Compliance
    • Accessibility processes are mostly undocumented.
    • Accessibility happens mostly on a reactive or ad hoc basis.
    • No one is aware of who is responsible for accessibility or what role they play.
    • Heavily focused on complying with regulations and standards to decrease legal risk.
    • The organization is aware of the need for accessibility.
    • Legal risk is decreased.
    Developing Experience
    • The organization is starting to take steps to increase accessibility beyond compliance.
    • Lots of opportunity for improvement.
    • Defining and refining processes.
    • Working toward building a library of assistive tools.
    • Awareness of the need for accessibility is growing.
    • Process review for accessibility increases process efficiency through avoiding rework.
    Defined Experience
    • Accessibility processes are repeatable.
    • There is a tendency to resort to old habits under stress.
    • Tools are in place to facilitate accommodation.
    • Employees know accommodations are available to them.
    • Accessibility is becoming part of daily work.
    Managed Experience
    • Defined by effective accessibility controls, processes, and metrics.
    • Mostly anticipating preferences.
    • Roles and responsibilities are defined.
    • Disability is included as part of DEI.
    • Employees understand their role in accessibility.
    • Engagement is positively impacted.
    • Attraction and retention are positively impacted.
    Optimized Incorporation
    • Not the goal for every organization.
    • Characterized by a dramatic shift in organizational culture and a feeling of belonging.
    • Ongoing continuous improvement.
    • Seamless interactions with the organization for everyone.
    • Using feedback to inform future initiatives.
    • More likely to be innovative and inclusive, reach more people positively, and meet emerging global legal requirements.
    • Better equipped for success.

    2.1.3 Conduct future-state analysis

    Identify your target state of maturity

    1. Provide the group with your maturity assessment results to review as well as the slides on the maturity levels, framework, and drivers.
    2. Compare the benefits listed on the Accessibility maturity levels slide to those that you named in the previous exercise and determine which maturity level best describes your target state.
    3. Discuss as a group and agree on one desired maturity level to reach.
    4. Review the other levels of maturity and determine what is in and out of scope for the project (higher-level benefits would be considered out of scope).
    5. Document your target state of maturity in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    Input Output
    • Accessibility maturity levels chart on previous slide
    • Maturity level assessment results
    • Target maturity level documented
    Materials Participants
    • Paper and pens
    • Handouts of maturity levels
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Case Study

    Accessibility as a differentiator

    INDUSTRY
    Financial

    SOURCE
    WAI-Engage

    Accessibility inside and out

    As a financial provider, Barclays embarked on the accessibility journey to engage customers and employees with the goal of equal access for all. One key statement that provided focus was “Essential for some, easier for all. ”

    “It's about helping everyone to work, bank and live their lives regardless of their age, situation, abilities or circumstances.”

    Embedding into experiences

    “The Barclays Accessibility team [supports] digital teams to embed accessibility into our services and culture through effective governance, partnering, training and tools. Establishing an enterprise-wide accessibility strategy, standards and programmes coupled with senior sponsorship helps support our publicly stated ambition of becoming the most accessible and inclusive FTSE company.”

    – Paul Smyth, Head of Digital Accessibility, Barclays

    It’s a circle, not a roadmap

    • Barclays continues the journey through partnerships with disability charities and accessibility experts and through regularly engaging with customers and colleagues with disabilities directly.
    • More accessible, inclusive products and services engage and attract more people with disabilities. This translates to a more diverse workforce that identifies opportunities for innovation. This leads to being attractive to diverse talent, and the circle continues.
    • Barclays’ mobile banking app was first to be accredited by accessibility consultants AbilityNet.

    Step 2.2

    Define your accessibility program goals and objectives

    Activities

    2.2.1 Create a list of goals and objectives

    2.2.2 Finalize key metrics

    Plan for Senior Leader Buy-In

    Outcomes of this step
    You will have clear measurable goals and objectives to respond to identified accessibility issues and organizational goals.

    What does a good goal look like?

    Use the SMART framework to build effective goals.

    S Specific: Is the goal clear, concrete, and well defined?
    M Measurable: How will you know when the goal is met?
    A Achievable: Is the goal possible to achieve in a reasonable time?
    R Relevant: Does this goal align with your responsibilities and with departmental and organizational goals?
    T Time-based: Have you specified a time frame in which you aim to achieve the goal?

    SMART is a common framework for setting effective goals. Make sure your goals satisfy these criteria to ensure you can achieve real results.

    2.2.1 Create a list of goals and objectives

    Use the outcomes from activity 2.1.2.

    1. Using the prioritized list of what your solution must have, should have, could have, and won’t have from activity 2.1.2, develop goals.
    2. Remember to use the SMART goal framework to build out each goal (see the previous slide for more information on SMART goals).
    3. Ensure each goal supports departmental and organizational goals to ensure it is meaningful.
    4. Document your goals and objectives in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • Outcomes of activity 2.1.2
    • Organizational and departmental goals
    • Goals and objectives added to your Accessibility Business Case Template
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    2.2.1 Create a list of goals and objectives

    Use the outcomes from activity 2.1.2.

    1. Using the prioritized list of what your solution must have, should have, could have, and won’t have from activity 2.1.2, develop goals.
    2. Remember to use the SMART goal framework to build out each goal (see the previous slide for more information on SMART goals).
    3. Ensure each goal supports departmental and organizational goals to ensure it is meaningful.
    4. Document your goals and objectives in your Accessibility Business Case Template.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Progressing through the accessibility maturity model.
    2. Addressing accessibility earlier in processes to avoid tech debt and rework late in projects or releases.
    3. Making accessibility part of the procurement process as a scoring consideration and vendor choice.
    4. Ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.
    Metric Current Goal
    Overall end-customer satisfaction 90 120
    Monies saved through cost optimization efforts
    Employee engagement
    Monies save through application rationalization and standardization

    For more metrics ideas, see the Info-Tech IT Metrics Library.

    2.2.2 Finalize key metrics

    Finalize key metrics the organization will use to measure accessibility success

    1. Brainstorm how you would measure the success of each goal based on the benefits, challenges, and risks you previously identified.
    2. Write each of the metric ideas down and finalize three to five key metrics which you will track. The metrics you choose should relate to the key challenges or risks you have identified and match your desired maturity level and driver.
    3. Document your key metrics in the Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • Accessibility challenges and benefits
    • Goals from activity 2.2.1
    • Three to five key metrics to track
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team
    • Project lead/sponsor

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Step 2.3

    Document accessibility program roles and responsibilities

    Activities

    2.3.1 Populate a RACI chart

    Plan for Senior Leader Buy-In

    Outcomes of this step
    At the end of this step, you will have a completed RACI chart documenting the roles and responsibilities related to accessibility for your accessibility business case.

    2.3.1 Populate a RACI

    Populate a RACI chart to identify who should be responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each key activity.

    Define who is responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for the project team:

    1. Write out the list of all stakeholders along the top of a whiteboard. Write out the key project steps along the left-hand side.
    2. For each initiative, identify each team member’s role. Are they:
      Responsible: The one responsible for getting the job done.
      Accountable: Only one person can be accountable for each task.
      Consulted: Are involved by providing knowledge.
      Informed: Receive information about execution and quality.
    3. As you proceed, continue to add tasks and assign responsibility to the RACI chart in the appendix of the Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • Stakeholder list
    • Key project steps
    • Project RACI chart
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Phase 3

    Prepare your business case and get approval

    Phase 1
    1.1 Understand standards and legislation
    1.2 Build awareness
    1.3 Understand maturity level

    Phase 2
    2.1 Define desired future state
    2.2 Define goals and objectives
    2.3 Document roles and responsibilities

    Phase 3
    3.1 Prepare business case template for presentation and approval
    3.2 Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Compiling the work and learning you’ve done so far into a business case presentation.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Project lead/sponsor
    • Senior leaders/approval authority

    There is a business case for accessibility

    • When planning for initiatives, a business case is a necessary tool. Although it can feel like an administrative exercise, it helps create a compelling argument to senior leaders about the benefits and necessity of building an accessibility program.
    • No matter the industry, you need to justify how the budget and effort you require for the initiative support organizational goals. However, senior leaders of different industries might be motivated by different reasons. For example, government is strongly motivated by legal and equity aspects, commercial companies may be attracted to the increase in innovation or market reach, and educational and nonprofit companies are likely motivated by brand enhancement.
    • The organizational focus and goals will guide your business case for accessibility. Highlight the most relevant benefits to your operational landscape and the risk of inaction.

    Source: WAI, 2018

    “Many organizations are waking up to the fact that embracing accessibility leads to multiple benefits – reducing legal risks, strengthening brand presence, improving customer experience and colleague productivity.”
    – Paul Smyth, Head of Digital Accessibility, Barclays
    Source: WAI, 2018

    Step 3.1

    Customize and populate the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Activities

    3.1.1 Prepare your business case template for presentation and approval

    Build Your Business Case

    Outcomes of this step
    Following this step, you will have a customized business case presentation that you can present to senior leaders.

    Use Info-Tech’s template to communicate with stakeholders

    Obtain approval for your accessibility program by customizing Info-Tech’s Accessibility Business Case Template, which is designed to effectively convey your key messages. Tailor the template to suit your needs.

    It includes:

    • Project context
    • Project scope and objectives
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap
    • Next steps

    Info-Tech Insight
    The support of senior leaders is critical to the success of your accessibility program development. Remind them of the benefits and impact and the risks associated with inaction.

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    3.1.1 Prepare a presentation for senior leaders to gain approval

    Now that you understand your current and desired accessibility maturity, the next step is to get sign-off to begin planning your initiatives.

    Know your audience:

    1. Consider who will be included in your presentation audience.
    2. You want your presentation to be succinct and hard-hitting. Management’s time is tight, and they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery. Impact them hard and fast with the challenges, benefits, and risks of inaction.
    3. Contain the presentation to no more than an hour. Depending on your audience, the actual presentation delivery could be quite short. You want to ensure adequate time for questions and answers.
    4. Schedule a meeting with the key decision makers who will need to approve the initiatives (IT leadership team, executive team, the board, etc.) and present your business case.
    InputOutput
    • Activity results
    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment results
    • A completed presentation to communicate your accessibility business case
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team
    • Project sponsor
    • Project stakeholders
    • Senior leaders

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Step 3.2

    Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines

    Activities

    3.2.1 Prepare for implementation: Complete the implementation prep to-do list and assign proposed timelines

    Build Your Business Case

    Outcomes of this step
    This step will help you gain leadership’s approval to move forward with building and implementing the accessibility program.

    Prepare to implement your program

    Complete the to-do list to ensure you are ready to move your accessibility program forward.

    To Do Proposed Timeline
    Reach out to your change management team for assistance.
    Discuss your plan with HR.
    Build a project team.
    Incorporate any necessary changes from senior leaders into your business case.
    [insert your own addition here]
    [insert your own addition here]
    [insert your own addition here]
    [insert your own addition here]

    3.2.1 Prep for implementation (action planning)

    Use the implementation prep to-do list to make sure you have gathered relevant information and completed critical steps to be ready for success.

    Use the list on the previous slide to make sure you are set up for implementation success and that you’re ready to move your accessibility program forward.

    1. Assign proposed timelines to each of the items.
    2. Work through the list, collecting or completing each item.
    3. As you proceed, keep your identified drivers, current state, desired future state, goals, and objectives in mind.
    Input Output
    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Business case presentation and any feedback from senior leaders
    • Goals, objectives, identified drivers, and desired future state
    • High-level action plan
    Materials Participants
    • Previous slide containing the checklist
    • Project lead

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice

    • Create a practice that is focused on human outcomes; it starts and ends with the people you are designing for. This includes:
      • Establishing a practice with a common vision.
      • Enhancing the practice through four design factors.
      • Communicating a roadmap to improve your business through design.

    Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

    • Users are demanding more valuable web functionalities and improved access to your website services.
    • The criteria of user acceptance and satisfaction involves more than an aesthetically pleasing user interface (UI). It also includes how emotionally attached the user is to the website and how it accommodates user behaviors.

    IT Diversity & Inclusion Tactics

    • Although inclusion is key to the success of a diversity and inclusion (D&I) strategy, the complexity of the concept makes it a daunting pursuit.
    • This is further complicated by the fact that creating inclusion is not a one-and-done exercise. Rather, it requires the ongoing commitment of employees and managers to reassess their own behaviors and to drive a cultural shift.

    Fix Your IT Culture

    • Go beyond value statements to create a culture that enables the departmental strategy.
    • There is confusion about how to translate culture from an abstract concept to something that is measurable, actionable, and process driven.
    • Organizations lack clarity about who is accountable and responsible for culture, with groups often pointing fingers at each other.

    Works cited

    “2021 State of Digital Accessibility.” Level Access, n.d. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022

    ”2022 Midyear Report: ADA Digital Accessibility Lawsuits.” UsableNet, 2022. Accessed 9 Nov. 2022

    “Barclay’s Bank Case Study.” WAI-Engage, 12 Sept. 2018. Accessed 7 Nov. 2022.

    Bilodeau, Howard, et al. “StatCan COVID-19 Data to Insights for a Better Canada.” Statistics Canada, 24 June 2021. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.

    Casey, Caroline. “Do Your D&I Efforts Include People With Disabilities?” Harvard Business Review, 19 March 2020. Accessed 28 July 2022.

    Digitalisation World. “Organisations failing to meet digital accessibility standards.” Angel Business Communications, 19 May 2022. Accessed Oct. 2022.

    “disability.” Merriam-Webster.com Dictionary, Merriam-Webster, https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/disability. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.

    “Disability.” World Health Organization, 2022. Accessed 10 Aug 2022.

    “Driving the Accessibility Advantage at Accenture.” Accenture, 2022. Accessed 7 Oct. 2022.

    eSSENTIAL Accessibility. The Must-Have WCAG 2.1 Checklist. 2022

    Hopewell, May. Accessibility in the Workplace. 2022.

    “Initiate.” W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 31 March 2016. Accessed 18 Aug. 2022.

    Kalcevich, Kate, and Mike Gifford. “How to Bake Layers of Accessibility Testing Into Your Process.” Smashing Magazine, 26 April 2021. Accessed 31 Aug. 2022.

    Noone, Cat. “4 Common Ways Companies Alienate People with Disabilities.” Harvard Business Review, 29 Nov. 2021. Accessed Jul. 2022.

    Taylor, Jason. “A Record-Breaking Year for ADA Digital Accessibility Lawsuits.” UsableNet, 21 December 2020. Accessed Jul. 2022.

    “The Business Case for Digital Accessibility.” W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 9 Nov. 2018. Accessed 4 Aug. 2022.

    “The WebAIM Million.” Web AIM, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.

    Washington, Ella F. “The Five Stages of DEI Maturity.” Harvard Business Review, November - December 2022. Accessed 7 Nov. 2022.

    Wyman, Nicholas. “An Untapped Talent Resource: People With Disabilities.” Forbes, 25 Feb. 2021. Accessed 14 Sep. 2022.

    Applications Priorities 2022

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}183|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy

    There is always more work than hours in the day. IT often feels understaffed and doesn’t know how to get it all done. Trying to satisfy all the requests results in everyone getting a small piece of the pie and in users being dissatisfied.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Focusing on one initiative will allow leaders to move the needle on what is important.

    Impact and Result

    Focus on the big picture, leveraging Info-Tech’s blueprints. By increasing maturity and efficiency, IT staff can spend more time on value-added activities.

    Applications Priorities 2022 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Applications Priorities 2022 – A deck that discusses the five priorities we are seeing among Applications leaders.

    There is always more work than hours in the day. IT often feels understaffed and doesn’t know how to get it all done. Trying to satisfy all the requests results in everyone getting a small piece of the pie and in users being dissatisfied. Use Info-Tech's Applications Priorities 2022 to learn about the five initiatives that IT should prioritize for the coming year.

    • Applications Priorities Report for 2022
    [infographic]

    Assess the Viability of M365-O365 Security Add-Ons

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}251|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting

    The technical side of IT security demands the best security possible, but the business side of running IT demands that you determine what is cost-effective and can still do the job. You likely shrugged off the early iterations of Microsoft’s security efforts, but you may have heard that things have changed. Where do you start in evaluating Microsoft’s security products in terms of effectiveness? The value proposition sounds tremendous to the CFO, “free” security as part of your corporate license, but how does it truly measure up and how do you articulate your findings to the business?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Microsoft’s security products have improved to the point where they are often ranked competitively with mainstream security products. Depending on your organization’s licensing of Office 365/Microsoft 365, some of these products are included in what you’re already paying for. That value proposition is hard to deny.

    Impact and Result

    Determine what is important to the business, and in what order of priority.

    Take a close look at your current solution and determine what are table stakes, what features you would like to have in its replacement, and what your current solution is missing.

    Consider Microsoft’s security solutions using an objective methodology. Sentiment will still be a factor, but it shouldn’t dictate the decision you make for the good of the business.

    Assess the Viability of M365/O365 Security Add-Ons Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to assess the viability of M365/O365 security add-ons. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four key steps to completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review your current state

    Examine what you are licensed for, what you are paying, what you need, and what your constraints are.

    • Microsoft 365/Office 365 Security Add-Ons Assessment Tool

    2. Assess your needs

    Determine what is “good enough” security and assess the needs of your organization.

    3. Select your path

    Decide what you will go with and start planning your next steps.

    [infographic]

    Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}604|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • Business architecture, including value stream and business capability models, is the tool you need to reposition your organization for post-COVID-19 success.
    • Your business architecture model represents your strategic business components. It guides the development of all other architectures to enable new and improved business function.
    • Evaluating your current business architecture, or indeed rebuilding it, creates a foundation for facilitated discussions and target state alignment between IT and the senior C-suite.
    • New projects and initiatives during COVID-19 must evolve business architecture so that your front-line workers and your customers are supported through the resolution of the pandemic. Specifically, your projects and initiatives must be directly traced to evolving your architecture.
    • Business architecture anchors downstream architectural iterations and initiatives. Measure business capability enablement results directly from projects and initiatives using a business architecture model.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on your most disruptive, game-changing innovations that have been on the backburner for some time. Here you will find the ingredients for post-pandemic success.

    Impact and Result

    • Craft your business architecture model, aligned to the current climate, to refocus on your highest priority goals and increase your chances of post-COVID-19 excellence.

    Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create minimum viable business architecture

    Create your minimum viable business architecture.

    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture Storyboard
    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture – Healthcare
    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture – Higher Education
    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture – Manufacturing
    • Business Capability Modeling

    2. Identify COVID-19 critical capabilities for your industry

    If there are a handful of capabilities that your business needs to focus on right now, what are they?

    3. Brainstorm COVID-19 business opportunities

    Identify business opportunities.

    4. Enrich capability model with COVID-19 opportunities

    Enrich your capability model.

    [infographic]

    Manage Service Catalogs

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}44|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}44|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,956
    • member rating average days saved: 24
    • Parent Category Name: Service Planning and Architecture
    • Parent Category Link: /service-planning-and-architecture

    The challenge

    • Your business users may not be aware of the full scope of your services.
    • Typically service information is written in technical jargon. For business users, this means that the information will be tough to understand.
    • Without a service catalog, you have no agreement o what is available, so business will assume that everything is.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • Define your services from a user's or customer perspective.
      • When your service catalog contains too much information that does not apply to most users, they will not use it.
    • Separate the line-of-business services from enterprise services. It simplifies your documentation process and makes the service catalog more comfortable to use.

    Impact and results 

    • Our approach helps you organize your service catalog in a business-friendly way while keeping it manageable for IT.
    • And manageable also means that your service catalog remains a living document. You can update your service records easily.
    • Your service catalog forms a visible bridge between IT and the business. Improve IT's perception by communicating the benefits of the service catalog.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started

    Our concise executive brief shows you why building a service catalog is a good idea for your company. We'll show you our methodology and the ways we can help you in handling this.

    Minimize the risks from attrition through an effective knowledge transfer process.

    Launch the initiative

    Our launch phase will walk you through the charter template, build help a balanced team, create your change message and communication plan to obtain buy-in from all your organization's stakeholders.

    • Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog – Phase 1: Launch the Project (ppt)
    • Service Catalog Project Charter (doc)

    Identify and define the enterprise services

    Group enterprise services which you offer to everyone in the company, logically together.

    • Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog – Phase 2: Identify and Define Enterprise Services (ppt)
    • Sample Enterprise Services (ppt)

    Identify and define your line-of-business (LOB) services

    These services apply only to one business line. Other business users should not see them in the catalog.

    • Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog – Phase 3: Identify and Define Line of Business Services (ppt)
    • Sample LOB Services – Industry Specific (ppt)
    • Sample LOB Services – Functional Group (ppt)

    Complete your services definition chart

    Complete this chart to allow the business to pick what services to include in the service catalog. It also allows you to extend the catalog with technical services by including IT-facing services. Of course, separated-out only for IT.

    • Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog – Phase 4: Complete Service Definitions (ppt)
    • Services Definition Chart (xls)

    Manage Exponential Value Relationships

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}210|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

    Implementing exponential IT will require businesses to work with external vendors to facilitate the rapid adoption of cutting-edge technologies such as generative artificial intelligence. IT leaders must:

    These challenges require new skills which build trust and collaboration among vendors.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Outcome-based relationships require a higher degree of trust than traditional vendor relationships. Build trust by sharing risks and rewards.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess your readiness to take on the new types of vendor relationships that will help you succeed.
    • Identify where you need to build your capabilities in order to successfully manage relationships.
    • Successfully manage outcomes, financials, risk, and relationships in complex vendor relationships.

    Manage Exponential Value Relationships Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Manage Exponential Value Relationships Storyboard – Learn about the new era of exponential vendor relationships and the capabilities needed to succeed.

    This research walks you through how to assess your capabilities to undertake a new model of vendor relationships and drive exponential IT.

    • Manage Exponential Value Relationships Storyboard

    2. Exponential Relationships Readiness Assessment – Assess your readiness to engage in exponential vendor partnerships.

    This tool will facilitate your readiness assessment.

    • Exponential Relationships Readiness Assessment
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Manage Exponential Value Relationships

    Are you ready to manage outcome-based agreements?

    Analyst Perspective

    Outcome-based agreements require a higher degree of mutual trust.

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez

    Exponential IT brings with it an exciting new world of cutting-edge technology and increasingly accelerated growth of business and IT. But adopting and driving change through this paradigm requires new capabilities to grow impactful and meaningful partnerships with external vendors who can help implement technologies like artificial intelligence and virtual reality.

    Building outcome-based partnerships involves working very closely with vendors who, in many cases, will have just as much to lose as the organizations implementing these new technologies. This requires a greater degree of trust between parties than a standard vendor relationship. It also drastically increases the risks to both organizations; as each loses some control over data and outcomes, they must trust that the other organization will follow through on commitments and obligations.

    Outcome-based partnerships build upon traditional vendor management practices and create the potential for organizations to embrace emerging technology in new ways.

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez
    Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Exponential IT drives change

    Vendor relationships must evolve

    To deliver exponential value

    Implementing exponential IT will require businesses to work with external vendors to facilitate the rapid adoption of cutting-edge technologies such as generative artificial intelligence. IT leaders must:

    • Build strategic relationships with external entities to support the autonomization of the enterprise.
    • Procure, operate, and manage contracts and performance in outcome-based relationships.
    • Build relationships with new vendors.

    These challenges require new skills which build trust and collaboration with vendors.

    Traditional vendor management approaches are still important for organizations to develop and maintain. But exponential relationships bring new challenges:

    • A shift from managing technology service agreements to managing business capability agreements
    • Increased vendor access to intellectual property, confidential information, and customers

    IT leaders must adapt traditional vendor management capabilities to successfully lead this change.

    Outcome-based relationships should not be undertaken lightly as they can significantly impact the risk profile of the organization. Use this research to:

    • Assess your foundational vendor management capabilities as well as the transformative capabilities you need to manage outcome-based relationships.
    • Identify where you need to build your capabilities in order to successfully manage relationships.
    • Successfully manage outcomes, financials, risk, and relationships in complex vendor partnerships.

    Exponential value relationships will help drive exponential IT and autonomization of the enterprise.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outcome-based partnerships require a higher degree of trust than traditional vendor relationships. Build trust by sharing risks and rewards.

    Vendor relationships can be worth billions of dollars

    Positive vendor relationships directly impact the bottom line, sometimes to the tune of billions of dollars annually.

    • Organizations typically spend 40% to 80% of their total budget on external suppliers.
    • Greater supplier trust translates directly to greater business profits, even in traditional vendor relationships.1
    • Based on over a decade of data from vehicle manufacturers, greater supplier relationships nearly doubled the unit profit margin on vehicles, contributing over $20 billion to Toyota’s annual profits based on typical sales volume.2
    • Having positive vendor relationships can be instrumental in times of crisis – when scarcity looms, vendors often choose to support their best customers.3,4 For example, Toyota protected itself from the losses many original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) faced in 2020 and showed improved profitability that year due to increased demand for vehicles which it was able to supply as a result of top-ranked vendor relationships.
    1 PR Newswire, 2022.
    2 Based on 10 years of data comparing Toyota and Nissan, every 1-point increase in the company’s Working Relations Index was correlated with a $15.77 net profit increase per unit. Impact on Toyota annual profits is based on 10.5 million units sold in 2021 and 2022.
    3 Interview with Renee Stanley, University of Texas at Arlington. Conducted 17 May 2023.
    4 Plante Moran, 2020.

    Supplier Trust Impacts OEM Profitability

    Sources: Macrotrends, Plante Moran 2022, Nissan 2022 and 2023, and Toyota 2022. Profit per car is based on total annual profit divided by total annual sales volume.

    Outcome-based relationships are a new paradigm

    In a new model where organizations are procuring autonomous capabilities, outcomes will govern vendor relationships.

    An outcome-based relationship requires a higher level of mutual trust than traditional vendor relationships. This requires shared reward and shared risk.

    Don’t forget about traditional vendor management relationships! Not all vendor relationships can (or should) be outcome-based.

    Managing Exponential Value Relationships.

    Case study

    INDUSTRY: Technology

    SOURCE: Press Release

    Microsoft and OpenAI partner on Azure, Teams, and Microsoft Office suite

    In January 2023, Microsoft announced a $10 billion investment in OpenAI, allowing OpenAI to continue scaling its flagship large language model, ChatGPT, and giving Microsoft first access to deploy OpenAI’s products in services like GitHub, Microsoft Office, and Microsoft Teams.

    Shared risk

    Issues with OpenAI’s platforms could have a debilitating effect on Microsoft’s own reputation – much like Google’s $100 billion stock loss following a blunder by its AI platform Bard – not to mention the financial loss if the platform does not live up to the hype.

    Shared reward

    This was a particularly important strategic move by Microsoft, as its main competitors develop their own AI models in a race to the top. This investment also gave OpenAI the resources to continue scaling and evolving its services much faster than it would be capable of on its own. If OpenAI’s products succeed, there is a significant upside for both companies.

    The image contains a graph that demonstrates time to reach 1 million users.

    Adapt your approach to vendor relationships

    Both traditional vendors and exponential relationships are important.

    Traditional

    procurement

    Vendor

    management

    Exponential vendor relationships

    • Ideal for procuring a product or service
    • Typically evaluates vendors based on their capabilities and track record of success
    • Focuses on metrics, KPIs, and contracts to deliver success to the organization purchasing the product or service
    • Vendors typically only have access to company data showing what is required to deliver their product or service
    • Ideal for managing vendors supplying products or services
    • Typically evaluates vendors based on the value and the criticality of a vendor to drive VM-resource allocation
    • External vendors do not generally participate in sharing of risks or rewards outside of payment for services or incentives/penalties
    • Vendors typically have limited access to company data
    • Ideal for procuring an autonomous capability
    • Typically evaluated based on the total possible value creation for both parties
    • External vendors share in substantial portions of the risks and rewards of the relationship
    • Vendors typically have significant access to company data, including proprietary methods, intellectual property, and customer lists

    Use this research to successfully
    manage outcome-based relationships.

    Use Info-Tech’s research to Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative.

    Common obstacles

    Exponential relationships require new approaches to vendor management as businesses autonomize:

    • Autonomization refers to the shift toward autonomous business capabilities which leverage technologies such as AI and quantum computing to operate independently of human interaction.
    • The speed and complexity of technology advancement requires that businesses move quickly and confidently to develop strong relationships and deliver value.
    • We are seeing businesses shift from procuring products and services to procuring autonomous business capabilities (sometimes called “as a service,” or aaS). This shift can drive exponential value but also increases complexity and risk.
    • Exponential IT requires a shift in emphasis toward more mature relationship and risk management strategies, compared to traditional vendor management.

    The shift from technology service agreements to business capability agreements needs a new approach

    Eighty-seven percent of organizations are currently experiencing talent shortages or expect to within a few years.

    Source: McKinsey, “Mind the [skills] gap”, 2021.

    Sixty-three percent of IT leaders plan to implement AI in their organizations by the end of 2023.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group survey, 2022

    Insight summary

    Build trust

    Successfully managing exponential relationships requires increased trust and the ability to share both risks and rewards. Outcome-based vendors typically have greater access to intellectual property, customer data, and proprietary methods, which can pose a risk to the organization if this information is used to benefit competitors. Build mutual trust by sharing both risks and rewards.

    Manage risk

    Outcome-based relationships with external vendors can drastically affect an organization’s risk profile. Carefully consider third-party risk and shared risk, including ESG risk, as well as the business risk of losing control over capabilities and assets. Qualified risk specialists (such as legal, regulatory, contract, intellectual property law) should be consulted before entering outcome-based relationships.

    Drive outcomes

    Fostering strategic relationships can be instrumental in times of crisis, when being the customer of choice for key vendors can push your organization up the line from the vendor’s side – but be careful about relying on this too much. Vendor objectives may not align with yours, and in the end, everyone needs to protect themselves.

    Assess your readiness for exponential value relationships

    Key deliverable:

    Exponential Relationships Readiness Assessment

    Determine your readiness to build exponential value relationships.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Save thousands of dollars by leveraging this research to assess your readiness, before you lose millions from a relationship gone bad.

    Our research indicates that most organizations would take months to prepare this type of assessment without using our research. That’s over 80 person-hours spent researching and gathering data to support due diligence, for a total cost of thousands of dollars. Doesn’t your staff have better things to do?

    Start by answering a few brief questions, then return to this slide at the end to see how much your answers have changed.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Use Info-Tech’s research to Exponential Relationships Readiness Assessment.

    Estimated time commitment without Info-Tech’s research (person-hours)

    Establish a baseline

    Gauge the effectiveness of this research by asking yourself the following questions before and after completing your readiness assessment:

    Questions

    Before

    After

    To what extent are you satisfied with your current vendor management approach?

    How many of your current vendors would you describe as being of strategic importance?

    How much do you spend on vendors annually?

    How much value do you derive from your vendor relationships annually?

    Do you have a vendor management strategy?

    What outcomes are you looking to achieve through your vendor relationships?

    How well do you understand the core capabilities needed to drive successful vendor management?

    How well do you understand your current readiness to engage in outcome-based vendor relationships?

    Do you feel comfortable managing the risks when working with organizations to implement artificial intelligence and other autonomous capabilities?

    How to use this research

    Five tips to get the most out of your readiness assessment.

    1. Each category consists of five competencies, with a maximum of five points each. The maximum score on this assessment is 100 points.
    2. Effectiveness levels range from basic (level 1) to advanced (level 5). Level 1 is generally considered the baseline for most effectively operating organizations. If your organization is struggling with level 1 competencies, it is recommended to improve maturity in those areas before pursuing exponential relationships.
    3. This assessment is qualitative; complete the assessment to the best of your ability, based on the scoring rubric provided. If you fall between levels, use the lower one in your assessment.
    4. The scoring rubric may not perfectly fit the processes and practices within every organization. Consider the spirit of the description and score accordingly.
    5. Other industry- and region-specific competencies may be required to succeed at exponential relationships. The competencies in this assessment are a starting point, and internal validation and assessments should be conducted to uncover additional competencies and skills.

    Financial management

    Manage your budget and spending to stay on track throughout your relationship.

    “Most organizations underestimate the amount of time, money, and skill required to build and maintain a successful relationship with another organization. The investment in exponential relationships is exponential in itself – as are the returns.”

    – Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Executive leadership team, including CIO
    • CFO
    • Vendor management leader
    • Other internal stakeholders of vendor relationships

    Activities:

    • Assess your ability to manage scope and budget in exponential IT relationships.

    Successfully manage complex finances

    Stay on track and keep your relationship running smoothly.

    Why is this important?

    • Finance is at the core of most business – it drives decision making, acts as a constraint for innovation and optimization, and plays a key role in assessing options (such as return on investment or payback period).
    • Effectively managing finances is a critical success factor in developing strong relationships. Each organization must be able to manage their own budget and spending in order to balance the risk and reward in the relationship. Often, these risks and rewards will come in the form of profit and loss or revenue and spend.

    Build it into your practice:

    1. Ensure your financial decision-making practices are aligned with the organizational and relationship strategy. Do metrics and criteria reflect the organization’s goals?
    2. Develop strong accounting and financial analysis practices – this includes the ability to conduct financial due diligence on potential vendors.
    3. Develop consistent methodology to track and report on the desired outcomes on a regular basis.

    Build your ability to manage finances

    The five competencies needed to manage finances in exponential value relationships are:

    Budget procedures

    Financial alignment

    Adaptability

    Financial analysis

    Reporting & compliance

    Clearly articulate and communicate budgets, with proactive analysis and reporting.

    There is a strong, direct alignment between financial outcomes and organizational strategy and goals.

    Financial structures can manage many different types of relationships and structures without major overhaul.

    Proactive financial analysis is conducted regularly, with actionable insights.

    This exceeds legal requirements and includes proactive and actionable reporting.

    Relationship management

    Drive exponential value by becoming a customer of choice.

    “The more complex the business environment becomes — for instance, as new technologies emerge or as innovation cycles get faster — the more such relationships make sense. And the better companies get at managing individual relationships, the more likely it is that they will become “partners of choice” and be able to build entire portfolios of practical and value-creating partnerships.”

    (“Improving the management of complex business partnerships.” McKinsey, 2019)

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Executive leadership team, including CIO
    • Vendor management leader
    • Other internal stakeholders of vendor relationships

    Activities:

    • Assess your ability to manage relationships in exponential IT relationships.

    Take your relationships to the next level

    Maintaining positive relationships is key to building trust.

    Why is this important?

    • All relationships will experience challenges, and the ability to resolve these issues will rely heavily on the relationship management skills and soft skills of the leadership within each organization.
    • Based on a 20-year study of vendor relationships in the automotive sector, business-to-business trust is a function of reasonable demands, follow-through, and information sharing.
    (Source: Plante Moran, 2020)

    Build it into your practice:

    1. Develop the soft skills necessary to promote psychological safety, growth mindset, and strong and open communication channels.
    2. Be smart about sharing information – you don’t need to share everything, but being open about relevant information will enhance trust.
    3. Both parties need to work hard to develop trust necessary to build a true relationship. This will require increased access to decision-makers, clearly defined guardrails, and the ability for unsatisfied parties to leave.

    Build your ability to manage relationships

    The five competencies needed to manage relationships in exponential partnerships are:

    Strategic alignment

    Follow-through

    Information sharing

    Shared risk & rewards

    Communication

    Work with vendors to create roadmaps and strategies to drive mutual success.

    Ensure demands are reasonable and consistently follow through on commitments.

    Proactively and freely share relevant information between parties.

    Equitably share responsibility for outcomes and benefits from success.

    Ensure clear, proactive, and frequent communication occurs between parties.

    Performance management

    Outcomes management focuses on results, not methods.

    According to Jennifer Robinson, senior editor at Gallup, “This approach focuses people and teams on a concrete result, not the process required to achieve it. Leaders define outcomes and, along with managers, set parameters and guidelines. Employees, then, have a high degree of autonomy to use their own unique talents to reach goals their own way.” (Forbes, 2023)

    In the context of exponential relationships, vendors can be given a high degree of autonomy provided they meet their objectives.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Executive leadership team, including CIO
    • Vendor management leader
    • Other internal stakeholders of vendor relationships

    Activities:

    • Assess your ability to manage outcomes in exponential IT relationships.

    Manage outcomes to drive mutual success

    Build trust by achieving shared objectives.

    Why is this important?

    • Relationships are based on shared risk and shared reward for all parties. In order to effectively communicate the shared rewards, you must first understand and communicate your objectives for the relationship, then measure outcomes to ensure all parties are benefiting.
    • Effectively managing outcomes reduces the risk that one party will choose to leave based on a perception of benefits not being achieved. Parties may still leave the agreement, but decisions should be based on shared facts and issues should be communicated and addressed early.

    Build it into your practice:

    1. Clearly articulate what you hope to achieve by entering an outcome-based relationship. Each party should outline and agree to the goals, objectives, and desired outcomes from the relationship.
    2. Document how rewards will be shared among parties. What type of rewards are anticipated? Who will benefit and how?
    3. Develop consistent methodology to track and report on the desired outcomes on a regular basis. This might consist of a vendor scorecard or a monthly meeting.

    Build your ability to manage outcomes

    The five competencies needed to manage outcomes in exponential value relationships are:

    Goal setting

    Negotiation

    Performance tracking

    Issue
    resolution

    Scope management

    Set specific, measurable and actionable goals, and communicate them with stakeholders.

    Clearly articulate and agree upon measurable outcomes between all parties.

    Proactively track progress toward goals/outcomes and discuss results with vendors regularly.

    Openly discuss potential issues and challenges on a regular basis. Find collaborative solutions to problems.

    Proactively manage scope and discuss with vendors on a regular basis.

    Risk management

    Exponential IT means exponential risk – and exponential rewards.

    One of the key differentiators between traditional vendor relationships and exponential relationships is the degree to which risk is shared between parties. This is not possible in all industries, which may limit companies’ ability to participate in this type of exponential relationship.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Executive leadership team, including CIO
    • Vendor management leader
    • Risk management leader
    • Other internal stakeholders of vendor relationships

    Activities:

    • Assess your ability to manage risk in exponential IT relationships.

    Relationships come with a lot of hidden risks

    Successfully managing complex risks can be the difference between a spectacular success and company-ending failure.

    Why is this important?

    • Relationships inherently involve a loss of control. You are relying on another party to fulfill their part of the agreement, and you depend on the success of the outcome. Loss of control comes with significant risks.
    • Sharing in risk is what differentiates an outcome-based relationship from a traditional vendor relationship; vendors must have skin in the game.
    • Organizations must consider many different types of risk when considering a relationship with a vendor: fraud, security, human rights, labor relations, ESG, and operational risks. Remember that risk is not inherently bad; some risk is necessary.

    Build it into your practice:

    1. Build or hire the necessary risk expertise needed to properly assess and evaluate the risks of potential vendor relationships. This includes intellectual property, ESG, legal/regulatory, cybersecurity, data security, and more.
    2. Develop processes and procedures which clearly communicate and report on risk on a regular basis.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Some highly regulated industries (such as finance) are prevented from transferring certain types of risk. In these industries, it may be much more difficult to form vendor relationships.

    Don’t forget about third-party ESG risk

    Customers care about ESG. You should too.

    Protect yourself against third-party ESG risks by considering the environmental and social impacts of your vendors.

    Third-party ESG risks can include the following:

    • Environmental risk: Vendors with unsustainable practices such as carbon emissions or waste generation of natural resource depletion can negatively impact the organization’s environmental goals.
    • Social risk: Unsafe or illegal labor practices, human rights violations, and supply chain management issues can reflect negatively on organizations that choose to work with vendors who engage in such practices.
    • Governance risk: Vendors who engage in illegal or unethical behaviors, including bribery and corruption or data and privacy breaches can impact downstream customers.

    Working with vendors that have a poor record of ESG carries a very real reputational risk for organizations who do not undertake appropriate due diligence.

    A global survey of nearly 14,000 customers revealed that…

    Source: EY Future Consumer Index, 2021

    Seventy-seven percent of customers believe companies have a responsibility to manufacture sustainably.

    Sixty-eight percent of customers believe businesses should ensure their suppliers meet high social and environmental standards.

    Fifty-five percent of customers consider the environmental impact of production in their purchasing decisions.

    Build your ability to manage risk

    The five competencies needed to manage risk in exponential value relationships are:

    Third-party risk

    Value chain

    Data management

    Regulatory & compliance

    Monitoring & reporting

    Understand and assess third-party risk, including ESG risk, in potential relationships.

    Assess risk throughout the value chain for all parties and balance risk among parties.

    Proactively assess and manage potential data risks, including intellectual property and strategic data.

    Manage regulatory and compliance risks, including understanding risk transfer and ultimate risk holder.

    Proactive and open monitoring and reporting of risks, including regular communication among stakeholders.

    Contract management

    Contract management is a critical part of vendor management.

    Well-managed contracts include clearly defined pricing, performance-based outcomes, clear roles and responsibilities, and appropriate remedies for failure to meet requirements. In outcome-based relationships, contracts are generally used as a secondary method of enforcing performance, with relationship management being the primary method of addressing challenges and ensuring performance.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Executive leadership team, including CIO
    • Vendor management leader
    • Risk management leader
    • Other internal stakeholders of vendor relationships

    Activities:

    • Assess your ability to manage risk in exponential IT relationships.

    Build your ability to manage contracts

    The five competencies needed to manage contracts in exponential value relationships are:

    Pricing

    Performance outcomes

    Roles and responsibilities

    Remedies

    Payment

    Pricing is clearly defined in contracts so that the total cost is understood including all fees, optional pricing, and set caps on increases.

    Contracts are performance-based whenever possible, including deliverables, milestones, service levels, due dates, and outcomes.

    Each party's roles and responsibilities are clearly defined in the contract documents with adequate detail.

    Contracts contain appropriate remedies for a vendor's failure to meet SLAs, due dates, and other obligations.

    Payment is made after performance targets are met, approved, or accepted.

    Activity 1: Assess your readiness for exponential relationships

    1-3 hours

    1. Gather key stakeholders from across your organization to participate in the readiness assessment exercise.
    2. As a group, review the core competencies from the previous four sections and determine where your organization’s effectiveness lies for each competency. Record your responses in the Exponential Relationships Readiness Assessment tool.

    Download the Exponential Relationships Readiness Assessment tool.

    Input Output
    • Core competencies
    • Knowledge of internal processes and capabilities
    • Readiness assessment
    Materials Participants
    • Exponential
      Relationships Readiness Assessment
      tool
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Executive leadership team, including CIO
    • Vendor management leader
    • Other internal stakeholders of vendor relationships

    Understand your assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Executive leadership team, including CIO
    • Vendor management leader
    • Other internal stakeholders of vendor relationships

    Activities:

    • Create an action plan.

    Understand the results of your assessment

    Consider the following recommendations based on your readiness assessment scores:

    • The chart to the right shows sample results. The bars indicate the recommended scores, and the line indicates the readiness score.
    • Three or more categories below the recommended scores, or any categories more than five points below the recommendation: outcome-based relationships are not recommended at this time.
    • Two or more categories below the recommended scores: Proceed with caution and limit outcome-based relationships to low-risk areas. Continue to mature capabilities.
    • One category below the recommended scores: Evaluate the risks and benefits before engaging in higher-risk vendor relationships. Continue to mature capabilities.
    • All categories at or above the recommended scores: You have many of the core capabilities needed to succeed at exponential relationships! Continue to evaluate and refine your vendor relationships strategy, and identify any additional competencies needed based on your industry or region.

    Acme Corp Exponential Relationships Readiness.

    Activity 2: Create an action plan

    1 hour

    1. Gather the stakeholders who participated in the readiness assessment exercise.
    2. As a group, review the results of the readiness assessment. Where there any surprise? Do the results reflect your understanding of the organization’s maturity?
    3. Determine which areas are likely to limit the organization’s relationship capability, based on lowest scoring areas and relative importance to the organization.
    4. Break out into groups and have each group identify three actions the organization could take to mature the lowest scoring areas.
    5. Bring the group back together and prioritize the actions. Note who will be accountable for each next step.
    InputOutput
    • Readiness assessment
    • Action plan to improve maturity of capabilities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Exponential
      Relationship Readiness Assessment
      tool
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Executive leadership team, including CIO
    • Vendor management leader
    • Other internal stakeholders of vendor relationships

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    Create and implement a vendor management framework to begin obtaining measurable results in 90 days.

    Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative
    Transform your VMI from tactical to strategic to maximize its impact and value

    Evaluate Your Vendor Account Team to Optimize Vendor Relations
    Understand the value of knowing your account team’s influence in the organization, and your influence, to drive results.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an IT Risk Management Program
    Mitigate the IT risks that could negatively impact your organization.

    Build an IT Budget
    Effective IT budgets are more than a spreadsheet. They tell a story.

    Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset
    Thrive through the next paradigm shift..

    Author

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez
    Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Kim is a professional engineer and Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) with over a decade of experience in management and engineering consulting spanning healthcare, higher education, and commercial sectors. She has worked on some of the largest hospital construction projects in Canada, from early visioning and IT strategy through to design, specifications, and construction administration. She brings a practical and evidence-based approach, with a track record of supporting successful projects.

    Kim holds a Bachelor’s degree in Honours Mechatronics Engineering and an option in Management Sciences from the University of Waterloo.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Jack Hakimian

    Jack Hakimian
    Senior Vice President
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Jack has more than 25 years of technology and management consulting experience. He has served multibillion-dollar organizations in multiple industries including financial services and telecommunications. Jack also served several large public sector institutions.

    He is a frequent speaker and panelist at technology and innovation conferences and events and holds a Master’s degree in Computer Engineering as well as an MBA from the ESCP-EAP European School of Management.

    Michael Tweedie

    Michael Tweedie
    Practice Lead, CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mike Tweedie brings over 25 years as a technology executive. He’s led several large transformation projects across core infrastructure, application and IT services as the head of Technology at ADP Canada. He was also the Head of Engineering and Service Offerings for a large French IT services firm, focused on cloud adoption and complex ERP deployment and management.

    Mike holds a Bachelor’s degree in Architecture from Ryerson University.

    Scott Bickley

    Scott Bickley
    Practice Lead, VCCO
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Bickley is a Practice Lead & Principal Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group, focused on Vendor Management and Contract Review. He also has experience in the areas of IT Asset Management (ITAM), Software Asset Management (SAM), and technology procurement along with a deep background in operations, engineering, and quality systems management.

    Scott holds a B.S. in Justice Studies from Frostburg State University. He also holds active IAITAM certification designations of CSAM and CMAM and is a Certified Scrum Master (SCM).

    Donna Bales

    Donna Bales
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Donna Bales is a Principal Research Director in the CIO Practice at Info-Tech Research Group, specializing in research and advisory services in IT risk, governance, and compliance. She brings over 25 years of experience in strategic consulting and product development and has a history of success in leading complex, multistakeholder industry initiatives.

    Donna has a bachelor’s degree in economics from the University of Western Ontario.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Jennifer Perrier

    Jennifer Perrier
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Jennifer has 25 years of experience in the information technology and human resources research space, joining Info-Tech in 1998 as the first research analyst with the company. Over the years, she has served as a research analyst and research manager, as well as in a range of roles leading the development and delivery of offerings across Info-Tech’s product and service portfolio, including workshops and the launch of industry roundtables and benchmarking. She was also Research Lead for McLean & Company, the HR advisory division of Info-Tech, during its start-up years.

    Jennifer’s research expertise spans the areas of IT strategic planning, governance, policy and process management, people management, leadership, organizational change management, performance benchmarking, and cross-industry IT comparative analysis. She has produced and overseen the development of hundreds of publications across the full breadth of both the IT and HR domains in multiple industries. In 2022, Jennifer joined Info-Tech’s IT Financial Management Practice with a focus on developing financial transparency to foster meaningful dialogue between IT and its stakeholders and drive better technology investment decisions.

    Phil Bode

    Phil Bode
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Phil has 30+ years of experience with IT procurement-related topics: contract drafting and review, negotiations, RFXs, procurement processes, and vendor management. Phil has been a frequent speaker at conferences, a contributor to magazine articles in CIO Magazine and ComputerWorld, and quoted in many other magazines. He is a co-author of the book The Art of Creating a Quality RFP.

    Phil has a Bachelor of Science in Business Administration with a double major of Finance and Entrepreneurship and a Bachelor of Science in Business Administration with a major of Accounting, both from the University of Arizona.

    Research Contributors

    Erin Morgan

    Erin Morgan
    Assistant Vice President, IT Administration
    University of Texas at Arlington

    Renee Stanley

    Renee Stanley
    Assistant Director IT Procurement and Vendor Management
    University of Texas at Arlington

    Note: Additional contributors did not wish to be identified.

    Bibliography

    Andrea, Dave. “Plante Moran’s 2022 Working Relations Index® (WRI) Study shows supplier relations can improve amid industry crisis.” Plante Moran, 25 Aug 2022. Accessed 18 May 2023.
    Andrea, Dave. “Trust between suppliers and OEMs can better prepare you for the next crisis.” Plante Moran, 9 Sept 2020. Accessed 17 May 2023.
    Cleary, Shannon, and Carolan McLarney. “Organizational Benefits of an Effective Vendor Management Strategy.” IUP Journal of Supply Chain Management, Vol. 16, Issue 4, Dec 2019.
    De Backer, Ruth, and Eileen Kelly Rinaudo. “Improving the management of complex business partnerships.” McKinsey, 21 March 2019. Accessed 9 May 2023 .
    Dennean, Kevin et al. “Let's chat about ChatGPT.” UBS, 22 Feb 2023. Accessed 26 May 2023.
    F&I Tools. “Nissan Worldwide Vehicle Sales Report.” Factory Warranty List, 2022. Accessed 18 May 2023.
    Gomez, Robin. “Adopting ChatGPT and Generative AI in Retail Customer Service.” Radial, 235, April 2023. Accessed 10 May 2023.
    Harms, Thomas and Kristina Rogers. “How collaboration can drive value for you, your partners and the planet.” EY, 26 Oct 2021. Accessed 10 May 2023.
    Hedge & Co. “Toyota, Honda finish 1-2; General Motors finishes at 3rd in annual Supplier Working Relations Study.” PR Newswire, 23 May 2022. Accessed 17 May 2023.
    Henke Jr, John W., and T. Thomas. "Lost supplier trust, lost profits." Supply Chain Management Review, May 2014. Accessed 17 May 2023.
    Information Services Group, Inc. “Global Demand for IT and Business Services Continues Upward Surge in Q2, ISG Index™ Finds.” BusinessWire, 7 July 2021. Accessed 8 May 2023.
    Kasanoff, Bruce. “New Study Reveals Costs Of Bad Supplier Relationships.” Forbes, 6 Aug 2014. Accessed 17 May 2023.
    Macrotrends. “Nissan Motor Gross Profit 2010-2022.” Macrotrends. Accessed 18 May 2023.
    Macrotrends. “Toyota Gross Profit 2010-2022.” Macrotrends. Accessed 18 May 2023.
    McKinsey. “Mind the [skills] gap.” McKinsey, 27 Jan 2021. Accessed 18 May 2023.
    Morgan, Blake. “7 Examples of How Digital Transformation Impacted Business Performance.” Forbes, 21 Jul 2019. Accessed 10 May 2023.
    Nissan Motor Corporation. “Nissan reports strong financial results for fiscal year 2022.” Nissan Global Newsroom, 11 May 2023. Accessed 18 May 2023.

    Bibliography

    “OpenAI and Microsoft extend partnership.” Open AI, 23 Jan 2023. Accessed 26 May 2023.
    Pearson, Bryan. “The Apple Of Its Aisles: How Best Buy Lured One Of The Biggest Brands.“ Forbes, 23 Apr 2015. Accessed 23 May 2023.
    Perifanis, Nikolaos-Alexandros and Fotis Kitsios. “Investigating the Influence of Artificial Intelligence on Business Value in the Digital Era of Strategy: A Literature Review.” Information, 2 Feb 2023. Accessed 10 May 2023.
    Scott, Tim and Nathan Spitse. “Third-party risk is becoming a first priority challenge.” Deloitte. Accessed 18 May 2023.
    Stanley, Renee. Interview by Kim Osborne Rodriguez, 17 May 2023.
    Statista. “Toyota's retail vehicle sales from 2017 to 2021.” Statista, 27 Jul 2022. Accessed 18 May 2023.
    Tlili, Ahmed, et al. “What if the devil is my guardian angel: ChatGPT as a case study of using chatbots in education.” Smart Learning Environments, 22 Feb 2023. Accessed 9 May 2023.
    Vitasek, Kate. “Outcome-Based Management: What It Is, Why It Matters And How To Make It Happen.” Forbes, 12 Jan 2023. Accessed 9 May 2023.

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}358|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $103,124 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 55 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Project Management Office
    • Parent Category Link: /project-management-office
    • Problems with project management offices (PMOs) often start with a lack of a clear definition of what the PMO is actually about and what the organization does.
    • Few organizations provide the minimum required services, and many are not using their PMOs effectively. Many people see the PMO as nothing more than the “project document police,” i.e. a source of red tape rather than a helpful support system. This impacts staffing and hiring.
    • The PMO is often misunderstood as a center for project management governance when it also needs to facilitate the communication of project data from project teams to decision makers to ensure that appropriate decisions get made around resourcing, approval of new projects, etc.
    • Accountability is something that is not clearly defined for many activities that flow through the PMO. Business leaders, project workers, and project managers are rarely as aligned as they need to be.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There is a gap in the perception of the actual role of the PMO in many organizations by different stakeholder groups. Many people see the PMO as police that produce red tape rather than a helpful support system. Those that need to present a coherent plan to leadership to champion the need for a PMO often have an uphill battle.
    • Determine the PMO’s role and needs and then determine your staff needs based on that PMO.
    • Staff the PMO according to its actual role and needs. Don’t rush to the assumption that PMO staff starts with accomplished project managers.
    • The difference in a winning PMO is determined by a roadmap or plan created at the beginning.

    Impact and Result

    • Define a PMO with functions that work for you based on the needs of your organization and the gaps in services. A “fit-for-purpose” PMO is the right kind of PMO for your organization.
    • Determine your PMO staffing needs. Our approach to building a PMO starts by analyzing the staffing requirements of your PMO mandate.
    • Create purpose-built role descriptions. Once you understand the staff and skills you’ll need to succeed, we have job description aids you’ll need to fill the roles.

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare and Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO – An actionable deck to help you establish a valuable PMO.

    Before setting up or re-structuring a PMO, organizational need should not only be taken into consideration but used as a foundation. Phase 1 of this blueprint will help you define the services that your PMO should provide to your organization, instead of the one-size-fits-all approach that doesn’t work.

    • Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO – Phases 1-3

    2. PMO Role Definition Tool – An Excel tool to help you define the services of your PMO.

    Use the PMO Role Definition Tool to establish your PMO current state and the service gaps you may have. Use the results to determine the role your PMO should play within your organization.

    • PMO Role Definition Tool

    3. PMO Project Charter – A template to formalize your PMO and make sure everyone is on the same page.

    The PMO Project Charter shares the vision to achieve consensus between stakeholders and projects and initiatives of the PMO. Use this template to jump-start your PMO project.

    • PMO Project Charter

    4. Blank Job Description Template – A template to create different job descriptions from.

    Use this template to create your job descriptions from scratch.

    • Blank Job Description Template

    5. Portfolio Manager Job Description – A clear and realistic job description template for a Portfolio Manager.

    The Portfolio Manager will oversee the business of discovering unsatisfied needs, articulating them as project demand, and organizing appropriate responses. Your customers are the people who approve projects, and you will service them.

    • Portfolio Manager

    6. PMO Job Description Builder Workbook – An Excel tool to help you access PMO staffing requirements.

    This tool will help you assess staffing requirements to facilitate project management, business analysis, and organizational change management outcomes.

    • PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    7. PMO Strategic Plan – A template to help you compose a PMO strategy.

    This template will help you compose a PMO strategy. Follow the steps in the blueprint to complete the strategy.

    • PMO Strategic Plan

    8. Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool – An Excel tool to analyze the impact of change to the organization.

    Use the Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool to analyze the effects of a change across the organization, and to assess the likelihood of adoption to right-size your OCM efforts.

    • Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool

    9. PMO MS Project Plan – A template to map out timeline for completing the tasks to create your PMO.

    Use this tool to determine the next steps and assign tasks to the appropriate people.

    • PMO MS Project Plan Sample

    Infographic

    Workshop: Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define

    The Purpose

    Get a common understanding of your PMO options.

    Determine where you are and engage leadership.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear vision for your PMO and an articulated reason for establishing it.

    An understanding of you PMO goals and which challenges it sets to address.

    Activities

    1.1 PPM Current State Scorecard

    1.2 SWOT Analysis

    1.3 Current State and Leadership Engagement

    1.4 PMO Mandate and Vision

    Outputs

    PPM Current State Scorecard Results

    SWOT Results

    PMO Role Development Tool

    PMO Charter

    2 Staff

    The Purpose

    Identify organizational design.

    Build job descriptions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An analysis of staffing requirements of your PMO that aligns with your mandate from phase 1.

    Job description aids to fill the necessary roles.

    Activities

    2.1 Right, Wrong, Missing, Confusing

    2.2 PMO Function, Roles, and Responsibilities

    2.3 Job Descriptions

    Outputs

    Right, Wrong, Missing, Confusing Results

    Job Description Survey Tool

    Job Description Templates

    3 Plan

    The Purpose

    Create a roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An actionable roadmap that can be presented to leadership and implemented.

    Activities

    3.1 Roadmap Hierarchy and Staffing and Sizing

    3.2 Governance and Authority

    Outputs

    PMO Roadmap Draft

    Governance Authority

    4 Change

    The Purpose

    Set up governance and OCM.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An introduction to the concept of governance and tools for a change impact analysis.

    Activities

    4.1 Analyze the impact of the change across multiple dimensions and stakeholder groups.

    4.2 Gain sponsorship.

    Outputs

    Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool

    Sponsor Template

    Further reading

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    Turn planning into action with a realistic PMO timeline.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Prepare an actionable roadmap for your PMO.

    Photo of Ugbad Farah, PMP, Senior Research Analyst, PPM, Info-Tech Research Group

    We all have junk drawers somewhere in our homes, and we probably try not to think about what’s going on in there. We’re just happy that they close and that the contents are concealed from anyone living in or passing through the house.

    What goes in these junk drawers? Things that don’t have a home, things you don’t know what to do with, and things you don’t have the time or desire to deal with. Eventually, the drawer gets full, and it doesn’t serve you anymore because you can’t add anything else to it. Instead of cleaning the drawer and keeping the things you need, you throw everything away in one sweep. One day you will start the process again.

    The junk drawer is like your project management office (PMO). The PMO is given projects that are barely scoped, projects that don’t have clear sponsors, and ad hoc administrative tasks you don’t have the time or desire to deal with. Inevitably, your PMO is out of capacity. This happens rather quickly, since it’s understaffed. You question its purpose because you made it a junk drawer. You even think about closing it. One day you will start the process again.

    Use this blueprint to stop the madness. Learn how to properly define, staff, and plan a roadmap of a PMO that will actually serve your organization.

    Ugbad Farah, PMP
    Senior Research Analyst, PPM
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that are facing these challenges:

    • No visibility into projects
    • The organization views the PMO as unnecessary overhead
    • The PMO is not properly staffed to support the organization’s needs
    • Project managers/staff aren’t providing information or following processes
    • Leadership and sponsors are disengaged

    Pie chart of 'IT Time Allocation by Area'. The grey section on the bottom left represents 'Projects and Project Portfolio Management, 11.5%'.
    IT is responsible for many different business services. The data from Info-Tech’s IT Staffing diagnostic shows that 11.5% of staff time is spent on projects and project portfolio management. (Source: Info-Tech IT Staffing Benchmark Report)

    PMOs can’t do everything and be all things to all people. Define limits with a strong mandate and effective staffing. Make sure you have the skills and capacity to support required PMO functions.

    Project management chaos

    PMOs get pulled into the day-to-day project and resourcing issues, making it difficult to focus on running a portfolio:

    1. Teammates seem unphased by overdue tasks and missed milestones.
    2. Fire drills may happen more often than planned projects.
    3. Resources are allocated and then redirected to something more urgent.
    4. Communication that’s stuck in silos, leading to confusion about priorities.
    5. Due dates mysteriously shift without explanation.
    6. Project teams are more focused on the due date than adoption and outcomes.

    Common obstacles

    IT and PMO leaders face several challenges.

    • Many people see the PMO as nothing more than the “project document police,” i.e. a source of red tape rather than a helpful support system. This impacts staffing and hiring.
    • The PMO is often misunderstood as a center for project management governance, when it also needs to facilitate the communication of project data from project teams to decision makers to ensure that appropriate decisions get made around resourcing, approval of new projects, etc.
    • Accountability is something that is not clearly defined for many activities that flow through the PMO. Business leaders, project workers, and project managers are rarely as aligned as they need to be.

    The Reality

    68% — Sixty-eight percent of stakeholders see their PMOs as sources of unnecessary bureaucratic red tape. (Source: KeyedIn, 2014)

    50% — Fifty percent of PMOs close within the first three years due to such things as poorly defined mandates and poor leadership. (Source: KeyedIn, 2014)

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Get a departmental job description first. Defining your PMO may not be as simple as it seems. Explore the boundaries of portfolio, project, resource, and organizational change management before jumping ahead with processes and tools.
    2. The staffing plan should come before your long-term plan. Get buy-in around your definition of the roles needed to run your PMO before articulating a long-term plan. Too often, plans have been accepted without the commensurate level of staffing. Our approach gives you a chance to put hiring on the roadmap as a predecessor to accountability.
    3. Keep your eye on the ball. Build your PMO around the operational imperative to recognize completed projects as an early milestone in broader changes. In other words, projects exist to create change.

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for your PMO

    Turn planning into action with a realistic PMO timeline.

    50% of PMOs close within the first 3 years.

    Logo for Info-Tech.


    Logo for ITRG.

    01 Define

    DEFINE THE RIGHT KIND OF PMO

    Establish the purpose of your PMO. Identify organizational needs to fill in gaps instead of duplicating efforts.

    LOGICAL FALLACY
    “If we approve more work, we'll get more done.”

    A properly run portfolio reconciles demand (project requests) to supply (available people) and drives throughput by approving the amount of projects that can get done.

    02 Staff

    STAFF THE PMO FOR RESILIENCE

    Analyze the staffing requirements for your PMOs mandate. Create purpose-built role descriptions.

    FALSE ASSUMPTION
    “Our best project manager should run the PMO.”

    Your best project manager should be running projects and, no, they shouldn't do both.

    03 Plan

    PREPARE AN ACTIONABLE ROADMAP

    The difference in a winning PMO is determined by a roadmap or plan created at the beginning. Leaders should understand the full scope of the plan before committing their teams to the project.

    COMMON MISTAKE
    “We'll get great at project management now and worry about portfolio management later.”

    Too often, PMOs focus on project management rigor and plan to do portfolio management after that's done. But few successfully maintain the process long enough to get there. If you start with portfolio management, leadership might soften their demands for project management rigor.

    04 Execute

    ALIGN TO STRATEGIC PLAN

    Use the power of organizational change management to ensure success and adoption. Iterate through the finer points of planning and execution to deploy the kind of PMO defined in step 1, with the people described in step 2, and the strategic roadmap articulated in step 3.

    PROJECT MYOPIA
    “Let's focus on delivering the project on time so we can move on to our next project.”

    Don't forget why the idea got approved in the first place. The goal is to sustain beneficial business outcomes well beyond the completion of your project.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Preparing an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    1. Define the PMO 2. Staff the PMO 3. Prepare a Roadmap
    Phase Steps
    1. Get a Common Understanding of Your PMO Options
    2. Determine Where You Are and Engage Leadership
    1. Identify Organizational Design
    2. Build Job Descriptions
    1. Create Roadmap
    2. Governance and OCM
    Phase Outcomes A clear vision for your PMO and an articulated reason for establishing it.
    An understanding of your PMO goals and which challenges it sets to address.
    An analysis of staffing requirements of your PMO that aligns with your mandate from phase 1. Job descriptions help to fill the necessary roles. An actionable roadmap that can be presented to leadership and implemented. An introduction to the concept of governance and tools for a change impact analysis.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    There is a gap in the perception of the actual role of the PMO in many organizations by different stakeholder groups. Many people see the PMO police that produce red tape rather than a helpful support system. Those that need to present a coherent plan to leadership championing the need for a PMO often have an uphill battle.

    Phase 1 insight

    Determine the PMO’s role and needs and then determine your staff needs based on that PMO.

    PMO leaders are all too often set up to fail, left to make successes out of PMOs that:

    1. have poorly defined mandates;
    2. lack the proper resourcing to support the services the organization requires; or
    3. lack executive leadership, vision, and backing.

    Phase 2 insight

    Staff the PMO according to its actual role and needs. Don’t rush to the assumption that PMO staff starts with accomplished project managers.

    Many organizations have PMOs of one person, and it is simply not a long-term recipe for success. People in this situation have a lot of weight on their shoulders and feel like they are being set up to fail. It is very challenging for anyone to run a PMO alone without support or administrative help.

    Phase 3 insight

    The difference in a winning PMO is determined by a roadmap or plan created at the beginning.

    When you are determining what your PMO will provide in the future, it is important to align the ambition of the PMO with the maturity of the business. Too often, a lot of effort is spent trying to convince businesses of the value of a PMO.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    PMO Role Definition Tool Sample of the PMO Role Definition Tool deliverable. PMO Project Charter Template Sample of the PMO Project Charter Template deliverable.
    Blank Job Description Template
    Sample of the Blank Job Description Template deliverable.
    Sample Job Descriptions
    Sample of the Sample Job Descriptions deliverable.
    PMO Job Description Builder Workbook
    Sample of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook deliverable.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    PMO Strategic Plan
    Sample of the PMO Strategic Plan deliverable.
    PMO MS Project Plan Sample
    Sample of the PMO MS Project Plan Sample deliverable.
    Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool
    Sample of the Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool deliverable.

    Benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Determine how you can fill gaps and not duplicate efforts to bring value to your organization.
    • Ensure that key PMO capabilities like portfolio management, project management, and organizational change management are in balance.
    • Staffing is purpose-driven. Avoid putting good people in the wrong role.

    Business Benefits

    • Intake and governance have a primary focus and are not merely afterthoughts of someone primarily focused on project management methodology.
    • Avoid unrealistic commitments by ensuring better upfront analysis of ability to execute.
    • Ensure appropriately mandated sponsor management.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Phase 1

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.
    • Call #2: Assess current state and determine PMO role/type.
    • Call #3: Complete job description survey.
    • Phase 2

    • Call #4: Analyze survey results and complete FTE analysis.
    • Call #5: Discuss necessary roles and create job descriptions.
    • Phase 3

    • Call #6: Discuss business goals and priorities.
    • Call #7: Identify and prioritize initiatives on roadmap.
    • Call #8: Discuss governance and organizational change.
    • Call #9: Summarize results in strategic plan and discuss next steps.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Activities
    Define

    1.1 Review PPM Current State Scorecard Results

    1.2 Get a Common Understanding of Your PMO Options

    1.3 Conduct SWOT Analysis

    1.4 Current State and Leadership Engagement

    1.5 PMO Mandate and Vision

    Staff

    2.1 Identify Organizational Design

    2.2 Right, Wrong, Missing, Confusing

    2.3 PMO Function, Roles, and Responsibilities

    2.4 Job Descriptions

    Plan

    3.1 Roadmap Top-Level Hierarchy

    3.2 Roadmap Second-Level Hierarchy

    3.2 Staffing and Sizing

    3.3 Reconcile and Finalize Roadmap

    3.4 Governance and Authority

    Change

    4.1 Importance of OCM

    4.2 Sponsorship

    4.3 Analyze the Impact of the Change Across Multiple Dimensions and Stakeholder Groups

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. PPM Current State Scorecard
    2. SWOT Results
    3. PMO Role Development Tool
    4. PMO Charter
    1. Right, Wrong, Missing, Confusing Results
    2. Job Description Survey Tool
    3. Job Description Templates
    1. PMO Roadmap Draft
    2. Governance and Authority Activity
    1. Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool
    2. Sponsor Template
    1. Completed PMO Roadmap draft
    2. PMO Strategic Plan draft

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    Phase 1

    Define the Right Kind of PMO

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Get a Common Understanding of Your PMO Options
    • 1.2 Determine Where You Are and Engage Your Leadership

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify Organizational Design
    • 2.2. Build Job Descriptions

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Create Roadmap
    • 3.2 Governance and OCM

    A PMO may not simply be an office of project managers

    Project management offices are evolving and taking on activities that differ from company to company.

    1915 1930s 1950s 1980s 1990s
    Frederick Taylor introduces the PMO with the implementation of the scientific management method and the increase in the number and complexity of projects. The US Air Corps creates a Project Office function to monitor aircraft development (probably the first record of the term being used). The US military starts developing complex missile systems. Each weapon system was composed of several sub-projects grouped together in system program offices (SPOs). This built the structures underlying the traditional PMO. The Project Office concept exported to construction and IT. The PMO gains a lot of momentum with professional associations and project management certifications becoming recognized industry standards.

    Organizations are confused about what a PMO is, whether they should have one, and what it should do

    PMBOK

    The responsibilities of a PMO can range from providing project management support functions to the direct management of one or more projects. The PMO is an organizational body assigned with various responsibilities related to the centralized and coordinated management of those projects under its domain.

    The PMO may play a role in supporting strategic alignment and delivering organizational value, integrating data and information for organizational strategic projects, and evaluating how higher-level strategic objectives are being fulfilled.

    COBIT

    The PMO can be responsible for portfolio maintenance, setting a standard approach for project and program and portfolio management.

    OPM

    The PMO is an organizational body assigned with various responsibilities related to the centralized and coordinated management of those projects under its domain.

    In an effort to set a standard, the governance frameworks have over complicated it for most of us.

    Use Info-Tech’s framework to create the PMO that works for your organization

    Determine the Services Your PMO Will Provide
    Manage your PMO services in alignment with your mandate and your organization’s needs.

    Establish Your PMO’s Mandate
    Figure out the purpose of your PMO and write it down so it’s clear to your leadership. Align your mandate to the organization’s needs.

    Ensure Organizational Needs Are Being Met
    Before you can decide on what your PMO will do, find out who’s doing what in your organization so you can fill gaps instead of duplicating efforts.

    Hierarchy of PMO Needs
    Hierarchy of PMO needs with 'Organizational Needs' as the base, 'PMO Mandate' in the middle, and 'PMO Services' at the top.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider the principles of Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, which view the lower tiers of the hierarchy as fundamentally required to validate the pursuit of the higher tiers.

    Step 1.1

    Get a Common Understanding of Your PMO Options

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Review PMO Types
    • 1.1.2 SWOT Analysis

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review Info-Tech’s PMO Types
    • Complete a Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats Analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO director and/or portfolio manager
    • PMO staff/stakeholders
    • Project managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Current state analysis
    Define the Right Kind of PMO
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2

    People mistake the PMO as only an office with project managers

    It sounded simple enough, but no one could really explain what it meant.

    PMOs are often born out of necessity or desperation. A traumatic event happens, and leadership decides that it wouldn’t have happened had there been a “Project Management Office.” The phrase itself is often quite reassuring and offers the hope of some sort of sanity and order.

    People may not really be able to explain what a PMO is, but they do have a common understanding that it should solve all project management issues. But simply prescribing the “PMO” as a remedy for every organizational alignment is not going to be sufficient. There are different types of PMOs and more importantly there are different types of organizations.

    Screenshot of a Google search for 'what is a project management office'.
    Google and the Google logo are trademarks of Google LLC.

    The PMI has described what a PMO could be

    The PMI does not have a standard for PMOs like it does for things like project, program, and portfolio management. Its PMO definitions should be used as more of a reference point than a best practice.

    But what should it do?

    • Supportive: Provides a consultative role to projects by supplying templates, best practices, training, access to information, and lessons learned from previous projects.
    • Controlling: Provides support and requires compliance through various means.
    • Directive: Takes control of the projects by directly executing them.

    The PMI described three types of PMOs. These three types are well known in the industry, but they are essentially characteristics and do little to help people understand the functions and services of a PMO. There continue to be questions about the role a PMO should play in an organization and how it’s supposed to add value.

    Stock photo of two sticky notes reading 'project' and 'management'.

    Thousands of practitioners came together at the 2012 PMI Symposium and expanded upon PMBOK’s PMO types

    1. Managing
      Manages the work in projects and programs.
    2. Consulting
      Serves as an experience-based consultative body to project managers.
    3. Project Repository
      Repository of previous project documentation, lessons learned, etc.
    4. Enterprise PMO
      Provides PMO services to the organization.
    5. Center of Excellence
      Creates the standard and methodologies and provides tools.
    6. Managerial
      Manages the project and program managers, and eventually, other project resources.
    7. Delivery
      Manages the project and programs.

    1.1.1 Leverage Info-Tech’s PMO types to anchor yourself

    We have narrowed it down to five types of PMOs.

    ePMO
    Icon for ePMO.
    IT PMO
    Icon for IT PMO.
    PMO
    Icon for PMO.
    CMO
    Icon for CMO.
    CoE
    Icon for CoE.
    Enterprise
    Highest level PMO, typically responsible to align project and program work to strategy-significant projects or programs for the entire organization. Could include both IT and business units.
    IT
    IT PMOs provide project-related support for IT project portfolios. For many organizations PMOs originate in IT departments because of the structure required for technology-related projects.
    Project/Program
    Provides project-related tactical service as an entity to support a specific project or program. Can be dismantled when program is done.
    Change
    Change management offices (CMO) help build change management capabilities and enable change readiness in organizations.
    Excellence
    These centers differ in size and mode of organization, depending on their subject and scope. They support project work by providing the organizations with standard methodologies and tools.

    What is your definition of a PMO?

    Use this model to clearly show what is in and out of scope.

    ePMO IT PMO PMO CMO CoE
    PPM Reporting for enterprise portfolio and the financial/human resources needed to deliver them X
    PPM Finance for project/portfolio capital and expense X X
    PPM Customer Management – the customers, sponsors of the project X X
    PPM Strategy Management – projects and programs relate to corporate X X X
    PPM Program Management – related projects in the portfolio X X X
    PPM Time Accounting X X x
    PPM Business Relationship Management (BRM) X X
    PPM Project Information System (PMIS) – organization of project information X X
    PPM Administrative Support – general assistance with Portfolio X
    PPM Record Keeping – Enterprise Information X X
    RM Forecasting X
    PM Quality Assurance X X
    PM Procurement and Vendor Management X X X
    PM Project Status Reporting X X
    PM PM Services X X X
    PM Training X
    PM PM SOP X
    OCM Adoption X X
    OCM Change Management X X
    OCM Benefits Attainment X X
    OCM Forecast Benefits X X
    OCM Track Benefits X X
    GOV Intake X
    GOV Governance X X
    GOV Reporting X X X X

    Use Info-Tech’s PMO function matrix to help provide role definitions for your PMO

    Info-Tech’s potential PMO capabilities are in the header of the table below. These are the services a PMO may (or may not) provide depending on the needs of the organization.

    Portfolio Management Resource Management Project Management Organizational Change Management PMO Governance
    Recordkeeping and bookkeeping Strategy management Assessment of available supply of people and their time Project status reporting PM SOP
    (e.g. feed the portfolio, project planning, task managing)
    Benefits management Technology and infrastructure
    Reporting Financial management HR Security
    PMIS Intake Matching supply to demand based on time, cost, scope, and skill set requirements Procurement and vendor management Legal Financial
    CRM/RM/BRM Program management
    Tracking of utilization based on the allocations Quality Intake
    Time Accounting PM services
    (e.g. staffing project managers or coordinators)
    Quality assurance Organizational change management Project progress, visibility, and process
    Forecasting of utilization via supply-demand reconciliation Closure and lessons learned
    Administrative support PM Training

    The rest of this blueprint will help you choose the right capabilities and accompanying job functions for your PMO.

    Various options for specific PMO job functions are listed below each capability. PMO leaders need to decide which of these functions are required for their organization.

    1.1.2 SWOT analysis

    45-60 minutes

    Input: Current PMO governance documents and SOPs

    Output: An assessment of current strengths, opportunities, threats, and weaknesses of capabilities in previous slide

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Sticky notes

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff/stakeholders, Project managers

    Perform a SWOT analysis to assess the current state of PMO capabilities covered on the previous slide.

    The purpose of the SWOT is to begin to define the goals of this implementation by assessing your project management, portfolio management, resource management, organizational change management, and governance capabilities and cultivating alignment around the most critical opportunities and challenges.

    Follow these steps to complete the SWOT analysis:

    1. Have participants discuss and identify strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.
    2. Spend roughly 60 minutes on this. Use a whiteboard, flip chart, or PowerPoint slide to document results of the discussion as points are made.
    3. Make sure results are recorded and saved either using the template provided in the next slide or by taking a picture of the whiteboard or flip chart.

    1.1.2 Sample SWOT analysis

    Strengths

    • Knowledge, skills, and talent of project staff.
    • We have fairly effective project management processes.
    • Motivation to get things done when priorities, goals, and action plans are clear.

    Weaknesses

    • IT-business communication and alignment.
    • No standards are currently in place across departments. Staff are unsure which templates to use and how/when/why to use them.
    • There are no formal intake structures in place. Projects are approved and it’s up to us to “figure it out.”
    • We have no prioritization practices to keep up with constantly changing priorities and shifts in the marketplace.

    Opportunities

    • Establish portfolio discipline to improve IT-business communication through more effective and efficient project coordination.
    • Stronger initiation processes should translate to smoother project execution.
    • Establish more disciplined and efficient weekly/monthly project reporting practices that should facilitate more effective communication with senior leaders.

    Threats

    • Risk of introducing burdensome processes and documentation that takes more time away from getting things done.
    • We tried to formalize a PMO in the past and it failed after eight months.
    • We have no insight into project resourcing.

    Step 1.2

    Determine Where You Are and Engage Your Leadership

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Assess Current State
    • 1.2.2 Gap Analysis
    • 1.2.3 Vision Exercise
    • 1.2.4 PMO Charter
    • 1.2.5 Strategic Planning

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess the current state of your PPM/PM services using the PMO Role Definition Tool
    • Determine current gaps in your services and processes using the PMO Role Definition Tool
    • Discuss the vison for your PMO
    • Start creating your PMO charter

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO director and/or portfolio manager
    • PMO staff/stakeholders
    • Project managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Results of PMO Role Definition Tool
    • PMO vision
    • PMO charter

    Define the Right Kind of PMO

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2

    Why do organizations need a PMO?

    Stock image of a man thinking.

    “If a company is not a project-oriented organization, there’s less of a need for a PMO. If they are project-focused though, they should have one. Otherwise, who’s driving the delivery of their projects? Who’s establishing their methodology? How are they managing resources efficiently?” (Mary Hubbard, PMP, director of the PMO at Siemens Government Technologies Inc., A PMI Global Executive Council Member)

    Signs you might need a PMO:

    • A lack of project transparency.
    • Significant discrepancies in project results.
    • Poor customer satisfaction rates.
    • An inability to cost projects accurately.
    • A high percentage of delayed or cancelled projects.
    • High project failure rates.
    • Poor alignment of project activity and business strategy investments.
    • Inconsistent project management processes and methodologies.
    • A lack of collaboration and knowledge sharing.
    • Little to no resource training to meet IT and business needs.
    • A lack of resource management for utilization and capacity.
    • Little to no visibility into project, program, and portfolio-level status.

    Why does your organization need a PMO?

    Observe the needs of your organization before deciding on services to support it.
    • Observe what is and what is not in place. Look for existing processes, tools, and systems and evidence that they are being followed. You might already have some pieces in place; the question becomes what to keep and what not to keep.
    • What does your organization look like?
      • Name
      • Population
      • Current Project Lifecycle
      • IT Services Team
      • # of Unique Applications
      • Annual Budget
    • Gather a list of potential areas for improvement where a PMO can add value. Once a list is established, convert it to a prioritized queue of initiatives. A key item on your list should be how projects go from beginning to end so you can understand the potential issues and opportunities with your current project delivery.
    Stock image of a hierarchy mapped out over a birds eye view of people.

    Ideally, we wouldn’t invest in project, portfolio, or OCM because they’re overhead processes without any direct value…

    …but you need to spend just enough to demonstrate you are a diligent steward of the assets under your administration.

    Organizational Change Management

    • Well-run projects can fail without OCM.
    • More than anyone else, it’s up to the sponsor to pursue outcomes.

    Project Management

    • Determine the current project management standards and methodologies.
    • Uncover any forms and templates that are currently in use.
    • If there is a lack of project management knowledge among current or future staff, you will need to do some training.

    Portfolio Management

    • Who currently approves projects and who will be approving them in the future?
    • Who is accountable for approving too many projects?
    • What roles does resource capacity play? Is it constrained or do you approve everything?
    • Are the resources in your PMO full-time?
    • How big is your portfolio?
    • How much do you spend on resources (hours or months)?

    Governance

    • Governance can mean many different things: intake, finance, over-sight of existing projects, resource management, technology and architecture, and process.
    • Don’t try to introduce governance without considering the people who may already be governing different areas.
    • Consider what things can be done without getting executive approval.

    Define your PMO’s role in the organization

    Use Info-Tech’s PMO Role Definition Tool to help establish your PMO’s future state.

    • Use Info-Tech’s PMO Role Definition Tool to figure out the functions your PMO should provide.
    • The current-state analysis uses specific questions to assess how you are doing things now and provide you with some situational awareness.
    • The gap analysis uses another set of specific questions to uncover the holes in your organization and the services that are not being provided.
    • Based on the answers you gave to the questions, the tool will populate the functions that your PMO should provide to your organization: the services your organization needs.
    • Use the outputs to start looking into missing functions and ultimately start building or re-establishing the responsibilities of your PMO.
    • Consider having multiple team members answer all the questions to establish alignment and get realistic data.

    Sample of the PMO Role Definition Tool.

    Download the PMO Role Definition Tool

    Hey, you don’t to have to spend anything on portfolio, project, and organizational change management! Assuming of course…

    • You have enough people to do all your projects
    • All projects are getting done on time
    • Your customers and employees are happy
    • You have complete visibility into the portfolio
    • Your projects align with your corporate strategy
    • Your projects align with your operational needs
    • Your strategic and operational needs are in harmony
    • You have the right skills
    • You are using all resources provided to you
    • People self-identify the right work and independently do that work
    • Time is not wasted
    • The work is production-ready (i.e. high quality)
    • Vendors honor their commitments
    • The sponsor is confident they’re getting what was committed
    • You have sufficient reports for the portfolio
    • Stakeholders make it through transitions with minimal resistance
    • The organization is prepared to adopt the outcomes of projects
    • The sponsors’ forecasted benefits are realized
    • Stakeholders are aware of the need for change
    • Stakeholders transition well from current to future state

    Use the tool on the next slide to see where you may need to spend.

    1.2.1 Assess the current state of your project environment

    20-30 minutes

    Input: Understanding of current project portfolio environment

    Output: Completed current state survey

    Materials: Tab 1 of Info-Tech’s PMO Role Definition Tool

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff/stakeholders, Project managers

    Screenshot from tab 1 of Info-Tech’s PMO Role Definition Tool.

    Screenshot from tab 1 of Info-Tech’s PMO Role Definition Tool. There are three columns: '#', 'Question', and 'Answer'.

    There are 20 current-state questions in column C. Together, the questions address the five capabilities in Info-Tech’s PMO function matrix (slide 28).

    Use the drop-down menu in column D to answer Agree, Somewhat Agree, Neutral, Somewhat Disagree, or Disagree to each question in column C.

    The questions are broad by design. Answer them honestly and select “neutral” if anything is not applicable.

    1.2.2 Set your target state needs to identify gaps

    15-30 minutes

    Input: Reflection on the question, “If I/We do nothing, someone in the organization is…”

    Output: Completed target state survey

    Materials: Tab 2 of Info-Tech’s PMO Role Definition Tool

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff/stakeholders, Project managers

    Screenshot from tab 2 of Info-Tech’s PMO Role Definition Tool.

    Screenshot from tab 2 of Info-Tech’s PMO Role Definition Tool. There are four columns: '#', 'Question', 'Answer', and 'Department'.

    Each question in column C of tab 2 should be answered in the context of, “If I do nothing, someone in the organization is…”

    Answer each question by using the drop-down menu in column D to select “Yes,” “No,” “I don’t know,” or “N/A.”

    If “Yes” include the department or area that is responsible.

    Hierarchy of PMO needs with 'Organizational Needs' highlighted. 'Organizational Needs' at the base, 'PMO Mandate' in the middle, and 'PMO Services' at the top.

    Review the preliminary list of your potential PMO functions

    Tab 3 of the PMO Role Definition Tool contains a customized version of Info-Tech’s PMO definition matrix, based upon your inputs in the previous two tabs.

    Screenshot from tab 3 of Info-Tech’s PMO Role Definition Tool. It is titled 'PMO Functions and Groups' and contains a table with five columns: 'Portfolio Management', 'Resource Management', 'Project Management', 'Organizational Change Management', and 'Governance'. Each column contains high level recommendations, and at the bottom of the columns are outputs.

    The name of the box is the group the function belongs to.

    These outputs are based on the answers to the questions on the previous 2 tabs.

    In each group’s box are high-level recommendations.

    Consider your stakeholders

    Who benefits from the new or updated PMO structure?

    In a matrix environment, understanding the challenges other teams are facing is a core requirement of an effective PMO. The best way to understand this is through direct engagement like conducting interviews and taking surveys with management and members of other teams.

    Ask yourself these questions about your PMO:

    • Are we doing the right things?
    • Do we know the current status of projects?
    • Are we managing, escalating, and resolving project issues?
    • Do PMs have the right training?
    • What is our overall utilization?

    A PMO should be structured to provide service to the organization. View it as a business, serving the stakeholders.

    1.2.3 Complete this vision exercise to produce an initial mandate for a new/improved PMO

    45-60 minutes

    Input: Outputs from SWOT analysis

    Output: An initial PMO mandate

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Sticky notes

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff/stakeholders, Project managers

    Now that you have an idea of the services your organization needs from steps 1.1 and 1.2 of this blueprint, you can discuss the target state of your PMO.

    Follow these steps to complete the SWOT analysis:

    1. Each person writes one aspect of a future state that would solve the issues described in the SWOT analysis (activity 1.1.1). Use sticky notes and post them on the whiteboard.
    2. As a group, identify which of these aspects would be good candidates for embodying the “core element” of your PMO’s new mandate.
    3. From the aspects gathered, have everyone individually come up with a statement of one to two sentences they think captures the overall theme and vision of this PMO.
    4. Collectively choose the best statement to use as the working mandate for your new project management office. This mandate can be modified as needed in the time leading up the creation and launch of your PMO.

    Hierarchy of PMO needs with 'PMO Mandate' highlighted. 'Organizational Needs' at the base, 'PMO Mandate' in the middle, and 'PMO Services' at the top.

    1.2.4 Use Info-Tech’s PMO Project Charter template to help capture your mandate and obtain approval

    3-4 hours

    Input: Activity 1.2.3, Logical considerations for PMO deployment (see bulleted list on this slide)

    Output: An assessment of current strengths, opportunities, threats, and weaknesses of capabilities in previous slide

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Sticky notes

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff/stakeholders, Project managers

    A successful PMO will offer a range of services which business units can rely on. The aim of the PMO charter is to outline what is in scope for the PMO and what services it will initially offer.

    A project charter serves several important functions. It organizes the project so you can make efficient and effective resource allocation decisions. It also communicates important details about the project purpose, scope definition, and project parameters.

    To use this template, simply modify or delete all information in grey text and convert the remaining text to black before printing or sending. Sections within the Template include:

    1. PMO Mandate
    2. Goals & Benefits
    3. Scope Definition
    4. Key PMO Stakeholders
    5. Projected Timeline for Implementation
    6. Project Roles and Responsibilities
    7. High-Level Budget
    8. High-Level Risk Assessment

    Sample of the PMO Project Charter Template.

    Download the PMO Project Charter Template

    Engage leadership to refine target-state expectations

    Stock image of a person with a megaphone. ?
    Will project managers be included in the PMO? Which projects and programs will be in the PMO’s mandate?
    ?
    Will the PMO have decision-making authority? If so, how much and on what issues?
    ?
    Where in the organizational structure will the PMO report?

    “Changing the perception of project management from ‘busy work’ to ‘valued efforts’ is easier when the PMO is properly aligned.” (Project Management Institute, October 2009)

    Don’t assume your PMO is merely tactical

    It can help drive strategy instead of just being a technical arm.

    Strategic

    Stock image of a business person.

    Tactical

    Strategic Alignment
    Leadership assumes that your presence will optimize the alignment of projects to corporate strategy.
    Process Adherence
    Leadership assumes you’re all about process.
    Portfolio Thinking
    Leadership assumes that you’re thinking about the overall throughput of projects through the portfolio.
    Project Thinking
    Leadership assumes you’re not thinking beyond the boundaries of a single project at any given time.
    Outcomes Focused
    Leadership assumes that you’re focused on the outcomes forecast by sponsors.
    Timeline Focused
    Leadership assumes you’re focused on delivering projects on time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A key success factor for a PMO is to take part of strategic conversations; when they are left out, it creates a barrier. The PMO is the connective tissue between strategy and tactics. Don’t risk your benefits by not having the PMO Director at the table before you make decisions.

    Avoid the disconnect

    Create a strategic plan with project professionals at the table.

    • Strategic plans should guide organizations to future states, yet many don’t ever get used. This is because there is a disconnect between the people creating the strategic plan and the people being asked to implement it. Strategic planners don’t often develop their plans with the help of project managers who can ensure the plan is transferred into a working operational plan.
    • Strategic planners are broad thinkers with high-level plans whereas project professionals often work in the trenches. The disconnect between the two can often result in cost overruns, delays in implementation, low worker morale, and an overall chaotic work environment.
    • By putting strategic planners and project managers together to work on the strategic planning process, they can see what the other sees and plan accordingly.
    • Twenty-seven percent more projects are executed successfully when a company’s structure and resources align with their strategy (KPMG, 2017).

    “The failure to build a bridge between the strategic planning process and project management’s planning process is a major reason strategic plans don’t work.” (Bruce McGraw, Project/Programme Manager)

    1.2.5 Strategic planning

    1 hour

    To create a strategic plan that provides value, recognize that the strategic plan for the PMO is not the PMO charter.

    • The PMO charter is the organizational mandate for the PMO. It defines the role, purpose and functions of the PMO. It articulates who the PMO's sponsors and customers are, the services that it offers, and the staffing and support structures required to deliver those services. And, it assumes that a decision to have a PMO has already been made.
    • A strategic plan enables the PMO to play an essential role in achieving a company’s business goals, setting out clear objectives and then providing a roadmap on how to achieve them. A strategic plan maps the tools and resources necessary to achieve successful project outcomes.

    To create a results-driven strategic plan for your PMO, it is helpful to follow a top-down format:

    • Start by going through the list on the right and update the strategic plan.
    • What are the top project-related issues and opportunities you want your PMO to address and what’s the value to the business of trusting them?

    Vision: this needs to be a vivid and common image
    Mission: this is the special assignment that is given to a group
    Goals: these are broad statements of future conditions
    Objectives: these are operational statements that indicate how much and by when (e.g. deliverables or intangible objectives like productivity)
    Strategies: these are the set of actions that need to take place
    Needs: these are the things required to carry out the strategy
    Critical Success Factors: these are the key areas of activity in which favorable results are necessary to reach the goal

    Download the PMO Strategic Plan

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    Phase 2

    Staff Your PMO for Resilience

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Get a Common Understanding of Your PMO Options
    • 1.2 Determine Where You Are and Engage Your Leadership

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify Organizational Design
    • 2.2. Build Job Descriptions

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Create Roadmap
    • 3.2 Governance and OCM

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Follow our two-step approach to successfully staff your PMO.

    1. Determine your PMO staffing needs.
      Our approach to building a PMO starts by analyzing the staffing requirements of your PMO mandate.
    2. Create purpose-built role descriptions.
      Once you have an understanding of the staff and skills you’ll need to succeed, we have job description aids you’ll need to fill the roles.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Save time developing a purpose-built approach. There is no one-size-fits-all approach to PMO staffing. The advice and tools in this research will help you quickly determine your unique staffing needs and guide your next steps to get the staffing you need.
    2. Leverage insider research. We’ve worked with thousands of PMOs and have seen the good, the bad, and the ugly of PMO staffing. The approach in this research is informed by client successes and will help you avoid the common mistakes that drive PMO failure.

    IT staff allocation for project work

    Projects and Project Portfolio Management

    58.3% — 58% of respondents feel they have the appropriate staffing level to execute project management effectively. (Source: Info-Tech IT Staffing Benchmark Report)

    59.8% — 59% feel they have the appropriate staffing level to execute requirements gathering effectively. (Source: Info-Tech IT Staffing Benchmark Report)

    The GDP contributions from project-oriented industries are forecasted to reach $20.2 trillion over the next 20 years. (Source: “Project Management: Job Growth and Talent Gap” Project Management Institute, 2017)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Project work is only going to increase, and in general, people are dissatisfied with their current staffing levels.

    Step 2.1

    Identify Organizational Design

    Activities
    • 2.1.1 Right, Wrong, Missing, Confusing
    • 2.1.2 Map Your Current Structure
    • 2.1.3 Inventory Assessment
    • 2.1.4 Job Description Survey

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Complete a Right, Wrong, Missing, Confusing analysis
    • Determine your current organizational/PMO structure
    • Assess your current inventory
    • Complete the job description survey

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO director and/or portfolio manager
    • PMO staff/stakeholders
    • Project managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Current-state analysis
    • Job description survey results

    Staff Your PMO for Resilience

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    2.1.1 Right, wrong, missing, confusing

    30-45 minutes

    Input: Current PMO process, Current PMO org. chart

    Output: An assessment of current things that are being done right and wrong and what is currently missing and confusing

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Sticky notes

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff, Project managers

    Perform a right, wrong, missing, confusing analysis to assess the current state of your PMO and its staff.

    The purpose of this exercise is to begin to define the goals of this implementation by assessing your staffing capabilities and cultivating alignment around the most critical opportunities and challenges.

    Follow these steps to complete the analysis:

    1. Have participants discuss what is wrong, right, missing, and confusing.
    2. Spend roughly 45 minutes on this. Use a whiteboard, flip chart, or PowerPoint slide to document results of the discussion as points are made.
    3. Make sure results are recorded and saved by taking a picture of the whiteboard or flip chart.

    Organizational types

    1. Functional
      Functional organizations are structured around the functions the organization needs to be performed.
    2. Projectized
      Projectized organizations are organized around projects for maximal project management effectiveness.
    3. Matrix
      Matrix organizations have structures that blend the characteristics of functional and projectized organizations.

    Functional organization

    The traditional hierarchical organizational structure.

    A functional hierarchical structure with 'Functional Managers' highlighted and the note 'Project coordination'. 'Chief Executive' at the top, 'Functional Managers' in the middle, and 'Staff' at the bottom.
    Adapted from ProjectEngineer, 2019
    1. Employees are organized by specialties like human resources, information technology, sales, marketing, administration, etc.
    2. The project management role will be performed by a team member of a functional area under the management of a functional manager.
    3. Resources for the project will need to be negotiated for with the functional managers, and the accessibility of those resources will be based on business conditions. Any escalations of issues would need to be taken to the functional manager.
    4. The project management role would act more like a project coordinator who does not usually carry the title of project manager.
    5. Project management is considered a part-time responsibility. Of all the organizational types, this one tends to be the most difficult for the project manager. The project manager lacks the authority to assign resources and must acquire people and other resources from multiple functional managers.
    6. Because the project manager has little to no authority, the project can take longer to complete than in other organizational structures, and there is generally no recognized project management methodology or best practices.

    Projectized organization

    The majority of project resources are involved in project work.

    A projectized hierarchical structure with a single project hierarchy highlighted and the note 'Project coordination'. 'Chief Executive' at the top, 'Project Managers' in the middle, and 'Staff' at the bottom.
    Adapted from ProjectEngineer, 2019
    1. The project manager has increased independence and authority and is a full-time member of a project organization. They have project resources available to them, such as project coordinators, project schedulers, business analysts, and plan administrators.
    2. The project manager is responsible to the sponsor and/or senior management. The project manager has authority and control of the budget, and any escalation of issues would be taken to the sponsor.
    3. Given that the project resources report to the project manager versus the functional area, there may be a decrease in the subject matter expertise of the team members.
    4. Team members are usually co-located within the same office or virtually co-located to maximize communication effectiveness.
    5. There can be some functional units within the organization; however, those units play a supportive role, without authority over the project manager.
    6. There is no defined hierarchy. Resources are brought together specifically for the purpose of a project. At the end of each project, resources are either reassigned to another project or returned to a resource pool.

    Matrix organization

    A combination of functional and projectized.

    A matrix hierarchical structure with the lowest row highlighted and the note 'Project coordination'. 'Chief Executive' at the top, 'Functional Managers' in the middle, mainly 'Staff' at the bottom, except one 'Project Manager' who coordinates across functions.
    Adapted from ProjectEngineer, 2019
    1. A matrix organization is a blended organizational structure. Although a functional hierarchy is still in place, the project manager is recognized as a valuable position and is given more authority to manage the project and assign resources.
    2. Matrix organizations can be classified as weak, balanced, or strong based on the relative authority of the functional manager and project manager. If the project manager is given more of a project coordinator role, then the organization is considered a weak matrix. If the project manager is given much more authority on resources and budget spending, the organization is considered a strong matrix.
    3. Matrix structures evolve in response to the rise of large-scale projects in contemporary organizations. These projects require efficient processing of large amounts of information.
    4. Working in a matrix organization is challenging and structurally complex. Employees have dual reporting relationships – generally to both a functional manager and a project and/or product manager. However, if done well, it offers the best of both worlds.
    5. The matrix organization structure usually exists in large and multi-project organizations. Here they can move employees whenever and wherever their services are needed. The matrix structure has the flexibility to transfer the organization’s talent by considering employees to be shared resources.

    The project management office

    The vast majority of PMOs are understaffed and underequipped.

    • They are often born out of necessity or desperation.
    • They have no long-terms goals; they tend to go from year to year trying to meet the organization’s needs.
    • They don’t have clear mandates, so it is difficult to determine how they are providing value.
    • Over time (and sometimes even from day one), project management offices find that other tasks fall into their area of responsibility. This often happens when the work has nowhere else to go.
    • Resource management is the challenge, both in terms of being able to allocate skilled resources to projects and within the PMO itself. Staffing gaps within the PMO are often met by individuals wearing more than one hat.

    A stock photo of a circle of chairs in a field being occupied by only two people.

    2.1.2 Map your current structure

    30 minutes to 1 hour

    Input: Current org. charts and PMO structures, Info-Tech’s PMO Function Matrix

    Output: Structure chart

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff, Project managers

    1. As a group, review your current organizational and PMO structure.
    2. Map out both, or if your PMO is small, map out how it fits into the overall structure.
      • Make sure to think about your process, reporting structures, and escalation hierarchies.
      • Consider the capabilities on slide 59 as you work.
      • Use the sample structure on the next page as a guide.

    Stock image of a business hierarchy.

    Sample PMO structure

    Sample PMO structure with 'PMO Director' at the top. 'Portfolio Administrator' below, but not directly in charge of others. Then 'Program Manager', 'Change Manager', 'Resource Management Analyst', 'Business Relationship Manager', and 'Business Analyst' all report to the PMO Director. Below 'Program Manager' are two 'Project Managers' then 'Project Coordinator'. Stock photo of a hand placing a puzzle piece of a business person on it into a puzzle.

    Info-Tech’s PMO Function Matrix

    Info-Tech’s potential PMO capabilities are in the header of the table below.

    Portfolio Management Resource Management Project Management Organizational Change Management PMO Governance
    Recordkeeping and bookkeeping Strategy management Assessment of available supply of people and their time Project status reporting PM SOP
    (e.g. feed the portfolio, project planning, task managing)
    Benefits management Technology and infrastructure
    Reporting Financial management HR Security
    PMIS Intake Matching supply to demand based on time, cost, scope, and skill set requirements Procurement and vendor management Legal Financial
    CRM/RM/BRM Program management
    Tracking of utilization based on the allocations Quality Intake
    Time Accounting PM services
    (e.g. staffing project managers or coordinators)
    Quality assurance Organizational change management Project progress, visibility, and process
    Forecasting of utilization via supply-demand reconciliation Closure and lessons learned
    Administrative support PM Training

    2.1.3 Inventory assessment

    30-45 minutes

    Input: Understanding of your current situation regarding project intake and process

    Output: Survey results

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff, Project managers

    When staffing your PMO, it is important to understand your current situation regarding project intake and process.

    Answer the following questions, and be as detailed as possible:

    • What is your project intake process?
    • How many projects do you currently have?
    • How many people lead projects?
    • Are those who lead projects distributed (federated) or centralized?
    • What tools do you use to manage your portfolio, projects, and resources?

    Stock image of a magnifying glass over an idea lightbulb surrounded by the six classic question words.

    2.1.4 Job description survey

    45 minutes to 1 hour

    Input: Tab 1 of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    Output: List of current projects, processes, and tools

    Materials: PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff, Project managers

    On tab 1 of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook, use the survey to help determine potential role requirements across various project portfolio management, project management, business analysis, and organizational change management activities.

    Follow these steps to complete the survey:

    1. Consider the role that you are trying to fill.
    2. Read each question carefully and use the drop-down menu to answer whether the activity in column C is a core, ancillary, or out-of-scope job duty.

    Download the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    2.1.4 Job description survey continued

    Sample of the Job Description Survey with questions and responses.

    Step 2.2

    Build Job Descriptions

    Activities
    • 2.2.1 Analyze Survey Results
    • 2.2.2 FTE Analysis
    • 2.2.3 Create Your Job Descriptions

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Complete the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook
    • Create job descriptions

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO director and/or portfolio manager
    • PMO staff/stakeholders
    • Project managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • PMO org. chart
    • Completed job descriptions

    Staff Your PMO for Resilience

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    2.2.1 Analyze survey results

    30 minutes

    Tab 2 of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook shows the survey results from tab 1.

    The job activities are ranked in a prioritized list. The analysis will help you determine if you require a portfolio manager, program manager, project manager, business analyst, organizational change manager, or a combination.

    Follow these steps to analyze your results:

    • Digest the prioritized ranking. The job activities are ranked in a prioritized list (from most essential to the role to least essential) in column D. The core process or capability that corresponds to each activity is listed in column C.
    • Use the drop-down menu in column F to decide if the core job duties and ancillary job duties will or will not be included in the role description. Out-of-scope activities will automatically be removed.

    Screenshot of the 'Job Description Survey Results' from the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook.

    Download the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    2.2.2 FTE analysis

    30 minutes

    Input: Tab 3 of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    Output: Total estimated monthly time commitments, Preliminary FTE analysis

    Materials: PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff, Project managers

    Tab 3 of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook is used to complete the FTE analysis.

    Download the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    2.2.2 FTE analysis continued

    Screenshot of the 'FTE analysis' on tab 3 of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook. It has a table with columns for 'Rank', 'Process', 'Activity', and 'Est. Monthly Time Commitments (aka Column E)' with note 'Base these initial estimates on the number of projects and project teams, as well as the number of internal and external customers and stakeholders'. There is also a table of totals with a pie chart of the 'Distribution of Role Responsibilities'. The value for 'Total Estimated Monthly Timing Commitment' is in cell J5, and the note for the value of 'Preliminary FTE Analysis' is 'If your preliminary FTE analysis comes out to be more than 1 FTE, you may want to revisit your analysis on tabs 1 and 2 to further limit this role, or to further delineate it across multiple roles and FTEs'.

    On tab 3, use column E to estimate the monthly time commitments required for each activity in the role.

    Tip: Base estimates on the number of projects and project teams as well as the number of internal and external stakeholders across the portfolio(s) of projects and programs.

    Cell J5 will provide a preliminary recommended FTE count for the role.

    Job description content

    Screenshot of the 'Job Description Content' section of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook.

    This is an output tab based on your analysis in tabs 1 and 2. Copy and paste the content and add it under the relevant heading in Info-Tech's Blank Job Description Template later in this blueprint.

    Screenshot of the 'Blank Job Description Template' section of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook.

    For each capability you are including in your job description, there is a list of common certifications. These can also be copied and pasted into the Blank Job Description Template.

    Download the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    How to determine the roles in your PMO

    It’s not black and white.

    While your PMO should have someone to lead the team, aside from that it’s hard to be specific about the exact roles your PMO needs without understanding the needs of your organization.

    This is why it’s important to define your PMO first. Your team members should best support the function and capabilities of your PMO.

    For example:

    • If you want to provide a training program to project managers, you’ll need your PMO to have people with experience delivering training and with experience having done the job before.
    • If your PMO provides management information and deep portfolio analysis, you’ll need someone on the team who knows their way around data analysis tools.

    You should have a mix of skills in the PMO team, each complementing the others. You may have administrators and coordinators, data analysts and software experts, trainers, coaches, and senior managers.

    “If you want to go fast, go alone. If you want to go far, go together.” (African proverb)

    Managing projects and building PMOs are not the same thing

    Your best project manager should be running projects, and, no, they can’t do both.

    • Your new PMO needs a leader to get it off the ground, but don’t assume that the best project manager is best suited to build the PMO. The goal-oriented passion of a successful project manager may prove to be antithetical to the forward-looking finesse and political acumen needed to develop and staff the PMO as an organizational unit. Avoid the common mistake of promoting effective people into positions where they become ineffective, a concept often referred to as “The Peter Principle.”
    • You can’t determine if your best project manager fits the PMO leadership role if the PMO’s role isn’t clearly defined. Carefully define and clearly articulate the PMO’s role to understand the skill set needed to develop and lead your PMO.
    • Project managers often propose to create a PMO without considering the fit with project portfolio management and organizational change management. If the leadership doesn’t understand the magnitude of what is being requested, they may well think a project manager is best suited to run the PMO. The prestige and/or compensation is attractive, but project managers will often spin their wheels and naturally focus on what they know how to do: manage projects. Start with a PMO design to align with business expectations.

    The Peter Principle

    The Peter Principle was first introduced by Canadian sociologist Laurence Johnston Peter describing the pitfalls of bureaucratic organizations. The original principle states that "in a hierarchically structured administration, people tend to be promoted up to their level of incompetence.” The principle is based on the observation that whenever someone succeeds at their job, the organizational response is to promote them, thus people will continue to be promoted until they reach a point where they’re no longer excelling at their job. At that point, they would no longer be promoted. Followed to its logical conclusion, organizations will continue to take successful people and rotate them to new positions until they are no longer effective.

    PMO Director/Lead

    Job overviews for different kinds of PMO directors.

    The job descriptions on the next few pages are associated with the descriptive headings, but it is important to recognize that these diverse roles can all fall under the job title of PMO director.

    Portfolio Management

    As PMO director, you will oversee the throughput of IT projects using portfolio management, project management, and organizational change management disciplines.

    You and your team will directly manage the intake of new project requests, the preparation of evaluation-ready project proposals, and the handoff of approved project initiation documents to project managers in other departments. You will forecast and track the availability of people to do the project work throughout the project life cycle. You will publish monthly and annual portfolio reporting based on information collected from the project teams, and you will oversee the closure of projects with follow-up reporting to those who approved them.

    From time to time, the PMO may be required to identify projects that should be frozen or canceled based on criteria set forth by the leadership and/or industry best practices.

    While currently out of scope, successful candidates should be comfortable with the possibility that the PMO may required to develop full life cycle organizational change management in the future. As well, experienced project managers in the PMO may be required to manage high-risk, high-visibility projects from time to time.

    PMO Director/Lead

    Job overviews for different kinds of PMO directors.

    Project Management

    As PMO director, you will oversee a team of professional project managers who are responsible for the company’s high-risk, high-visibility, and strategic projects.

    You and your team will receive initiation documents and assigned resourcing for approved projects from the company’s authorized decision makers. You will manage the fulfillment of the project requirements, providing regular status updates to project and portfolio stakeholders and escalating concerns when projects are struggling to meet their commitments for scope, cost, and timelines.

    Over time, the PMO will take on an increasing role in organizational change management. The PMO will transition its focus from project delivery to business outcomes. Over time, the PMO will transition project sponsors from articulating requirements to delivering results.

    Project Policy

    As PMO director, you will oversee the establishment, support, and promotion of company-wide standards for project management.

    You and your team will modernize and maintain the company policy manuals and processes for everything related to project management. You will adapt our legacy PMBOK-based standards to cover iterative project management approaches as well as the more formal approaches required for construction projects, outsourced projects, and a wide variety of non-IT projects.

    PMO Director/Lead

    Job overviews for different kinds of PMO directors.

    Project Governance

    As PMO director, you will oversee the governance of project spending, delivery, and impact.

    You and your team will ensure that project proposals address the broad needs of the organization via strategic alignment, operational alignment, appropriateness of timing, identification and management of risk, and ability to execute. You will represent the needs and interests of the shareholder, ratepayer, or constituent by validating adherence to the organization’s published policies for project, portfolio, and organizational change management.

    The PMO is independent from the broader information technology division and will retain a mandate to ensure transparency and disclosure relative to the consumption of the organization’s scarce resources in the pursuit of high-risk IT projects.

    Stock photo of a compass pointing in the direction of leadership.

    Info-Tech sample job descriptions

    Use the sample job descriptions available with this blueprint as a guide when creating your descriptions.

    1. PMO Director
    2. Portfolio Manager
    3. Portfolio Administrator
    4. Project Manager
    5. Project Coordinator
    6. Resource Management Analyst
    1. Program Manager
    2. Change Manager
    3. Business Analyst
    4. Business Relationship Manager
    5. Product Owner
    6. Scrum Master

    Stock photo of a pen resting on a 'job duties' section of a job description.

    2.2.3 Create your job descriptions

    30 minutes

    Input: PMO Job Description Builder Workbook

    Output: Job descriptions

    Materials: Blank Job Description Template

    Participants: PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff, Project managers

    When you’ve determined the roles you need, you can start creating your job descriptions. If none of our out-of-the-box, pre-populated job description templates suit your needs, use the results of Info-Tech’s PMO Job Description Builder Workbook and the Blank Job Description Template to create your purpose-built job description.

    Follow these steps to create your job description:

    1. Copy the content from tab 4 of the PMO Job Description Builder Workbook and paste it under the relevant headings in the “Responsibilities” section of the Blank Job Description Template. Delete any unused headings if they are not relevant to your role. Additionally, use the list of common certifications on tab 4 of the Workbook to inform that section of the Blank Job Description Template.
    2. Use the sample job descriptions on the blueprint landing page as a guide for filling out the remaining sections of the document.

    Download the Blank Job Description Template

    2.2.3 Create your job descriptions continued

    Screenshot of the Blank Job Description Template.

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    Phase 3

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Get a Common Understanding of Your PMO Options
    • 1.2 Determine Where You Are and Engage Your Leadership

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify Organizational Design
    • 2.2. Build Job Descriptions

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Create Roadmap
    • 3.2 Governance and OCM

    Having a strategy is essential but real value and benefits are delivered through projects

    9.9% of every dollar is wasted due to poor project performance

    52% of projects are delivered to stakeholder satisfaction

    51% of projects are likely to meet original the goal and business intent
    (Source: Project Management Institute, 2018)

    You’re always going to have troubled projects

    Have the organizational discipline to step away from the mess and develop a plan.

    • The world of modern project management has been in place for over 50 years and yet business leaders still seem to put the pressure on troubled projects instead of broken processes.
    • With higher portfolio maturity comes higher performance, warranting investment in the PMO.
    • Instead of alternative cost-reduction measures, such as stopping an individual project, we find that PMO resources (or the entire PMO) are being cut. In most cases, this demonstrates a lack of understanding of the value of portfolio management processes and related impacts.
    • Plan for a series of improvements over time so you’re not continually using your PMO resources on troubled projects. Instead, maintain an ongoing focus on improvement.

    Stock photo of an axe stuck in a piece of wood.
    “If I had six hours to chop down a tree, I’d spend the first four hours sharpening the axe.” (Anonymous woodsman)

    All improvements cannot be done at once

    • The difference in a winning PMO is determined by a roadmap or plan created at the beginning.
    • Leaders should understand the full scope of the plan before committing their teams to the project.
    • All improvements cannot be done at once. The best PMOs create an approach of overall governance and strictly adhere to it. After the approach is defined, a roadmap can be plotted, executed, and delivered effectively.
    • The exercise of creating a roadmap is less about the plan and more about raising the level of understanding for stakeholders.
    • We often find that the PMO is ahead of the business's views of how the PMO can support and add value to the business. A lot of effort is spent trying to convince businesses of the value of a PMO, usually without complete success.
    • The PMO needs to align to the strategic goals of the business, providing the business understands or accepts that alignment. By aligning your roadmap activities to business drivers, you are more likely to get ownership from the business for the initiatives.
    Stock image of a winding path between two map markers.

    A PMO can benefit your business and organization as a whole

    Your PMO can:

    1. Help to align the project or portfolio with a focus on the future strategy of the organization.
    2. Be a mechanism to deliver projects successfully, keep them on track, and report when scheduling, budget, and other scope issues could derail the project.
    3. Create a portfolio of projects and understand the links and dependencies between the projects. This provides you with a bird's-eye view to make better decisions based on changes as they arise.
    4. Facilitate better communications with customers and stakeholders.
    5. Enforce project management governance and ensure consistent standards throughout the organization.
    6. Strategize on how to best use shared resources and best use them productively.

    “If you run projects and the projects have a significant level of cost or have significant level of impact, then you can really benefit from a PMO. Certainly, the larger the projects, the bigger the budget, the more there are projects, then the more you can benefit from a PMO.” (Michael Fritsch, Vice President PMO, Confoe)

    “PMOs are there to ensure project and program success and that’s critical because organizations deliver value through projects and programs.” (Brian Weiss, Vice President, Practitioner Career Development, Project Management Institute)

    Step 3.1

    Create Roadmap

    Activities
    • 3.1.1 Business Goals
    • 3.1.2 Roadmap
    • 3.1.3 Resources

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine business goals
    • Create roadmap
    • Establish resources

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO director and/or portfolio manager
    • PMO staff/stakeholders
    • Project managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • PMO roadmap aligned to business goals

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    3.1.1 Business goals and priorities

    30 minutes

    Input: Business strategies and goals, Current PMO org. chart

    Output: An initial short, medium, long-term roadmap of initiatives

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Sticky notes, Slide 83

    Participants: IT leaders/CIO, PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff, Project managers

    When you are determining what your PMO will provide in the future, it is important to align the ambition of the PMO with the maturity of the business. Too often, a lot of effort is spent trying to convince businesses of the value of a PMO.

    Before you develop your roadmap, try to seek out the key strategies that the business is currently driving to get the proper ownership for the proposed initiatives.

    • What does leadership want to accomplish?
    • What are the key strategies the business is currently driving?
    • What are the current pain points?

    Once you’ve established the business strategies, start mapping out your initiatives:

    • For each initiative, consider the activities you think will work best to take you from your current to future state. It’s okay to keep this high level, we will break them down later in the blueprint.
    • Don’t place activities on a roadmap with dates yet. Use the table on the next slide to record the activities against each initiative at a high level.
    Current State Business Strategies PMO Initiatives Future State Business Strategies
    Short Term Medium Term Long Term
    Portfolio Management Project Intake Process
    Triage Process
    Project Levelling
    Book of Record
    Approval
    Prioritization
    Reporting
    Resource Allocation
    Resource Management
    Project Management Standardize Project Management
    Methodologies
    PM Training
    Organizational Change Management Benefits
    Governance Project progress, visibility, and process
    Documentation

    3.1.2 Create your roadmap

    1-2 hours

    Services should be introduced gradually and your PMO roadmap should clearly highlight this and explain when key deliverables will be achieved.

    Consider the below top-level tasks and add any others that pertain to your organization:

    • Enable Transition
    • Establish Governance
    • Organizational Chart
    • Technology and Infrastructure
    • Develop Portfolio Management Capabilities and Guidelines
    • Standardize Project Management Methodology
    • Organizational Change Management
    • Strategy Management

    Download Info-Tech’s PMO MS Project Plan Sample to see a full list of top-level tasks and second-level tasks. Once done, you can visually plot the tasks on a roadmap. See the next few slides for roadmap visuals.

    Stock photo of median lines on a road with the years 2021-2023 painted between them.

    Download the PMO MS Project Plan Sample

    Screenshot of PMO MS Project Plan Sample

    Screenshot of PMO MS Project Plan Sample with notes point out the headings as 'Top-level hierarchy' and the list contents as 'Second-level-hierarchy'.

    Sample roadmap

    A sample roadmap with column headers 'Task' and 'Q1', 'Q2', 'Q3', 'Q4', and 'Q1' with 3 months beneath each quarter. Under 'Task' are 'Establish Tradition', 'Establish Governance', 'Organizational Chart', and 'Technology and Infrastructure'; these are the 'Top-level-hierarchy'. There are arrows laid out in the table cross section with different steps; these are the 'Second-level hierarchy'.

    Sample roadmap

    A sample roadmap with monthly column headers 'Jan' through 'Jun'. Rows are 'Develop Portfolio Management Capabilities and Guidelines', 'Standardize Project Management Methodology', and 'Design Resource Management Process'. There are processes laid out in the table cross section that are color-coded as 'Completed', 'In progress', and 'Planned'.

    Consider the resources you will need

    Use these Info-Tech resources to make sure your roadmap will be successful.

    Finances – Understand and be transparent about the real costs of your project.

    People – Strategize according to skill sets and availability. Use the org. chart in phase 2 of this blueprint as a starting place (slide 58).

    Assets – Determine the tangible resources you may buy like software and licenses.

    Stock photo of a thinking man.

    3.1.3 Define resources

    30 minutes

    Input: Project documentation, Current resources

    Output: List of resources for your PMO

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT leaders/CIO, PMO director and/or portfolio manager, PMO staff, Project managers

    Resources for your projects include staff, equipment, and materials. Resource management at the PMO level will help you manage those resources, get visibility into projects, and keep them moving forward. Be sure to consider the resources that will get your PMO off the ground.

    Determine the resources you currently have and the resources your PMO will need and add them to your strategic plan:

    1. Finances — It’s essential that you know, and are transparent about, the real cost of creating your PMO and new process. Don’t forget to consider post deployment costs as well.
    2. People — Every project depends on the skill sets that individual team members bring to the table. Strategize according to these skill sets and their availability for the duration of a project. Some team members may have other work responsibilities and limited time for the project, so you need to accommodate this.
    3. Assets — These include the tangible resources you may have to buy, lease, or arrange for, such as workspace, software and licenses, computer hardware, testing equipment, and so on.

    Step 3.2

    Governance and OCM

    Activities
    • 3.2.1 Governance
    • 3.2.2 OCM
    • 3.2.3 Perform a Change Impact Analysis
    • 3.2.4 Determine Dimensions of Change
    • 3.2.5 Determine Depth of Impact

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess/understand governance
    • Conduct impact analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO director and/or portfolio manager
    • PMO staff/stakeholders
    • Project managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Governance Structures
    • Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for Your PMO

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    Clearly define the authority your PMO will have

    The following section includes slides from Info-Tech’s Make Governance Adaptable blueprint. Download the blueprint to dive deeper into IT governance.

    Governance is an important part of building a strong PMO. A PMO governance framework defines the authority and the support it requires to maximize portfolio and project management capabilities throughout the business. It should sit within your overall governance framework and as the PMO matures, its roles and responsibilities will also change to adapt with business demands and additional capabilities.

    Your framework can:

    • Specify PMO authority
    • Introduce and apply process standards, polices, and directives as it pertains to project and portfolio management
    • Facilitate executive and leadership involvement
    • Foster a collaborative environment between the PMO and the business

    A PMO governance framework enables PMO leaders to establish the common guidelines and manage the distribution of authority given to the PMO.

    Visit Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Stock photo of a group working together.

    Common causes of poor governance

    Key causes of poor or misaligned governance
    1. Governance and its value to your organization is not well understood, often being confused or integrated with more granular management activities.
    2. Business executives fail to understand that IT governance is a function of the business and not the IT department.
    3. Poor past experiences have made “governance” a bad word in the organization – a constraint and barrier that must be circumvented to get work done.
    4. There is misalignment between accountability and authority throughout the organization, and the wrong people are involved in governance practices.
    5. There is an unwillingness to change a governance approach that has served the organization well in the past, leading to challenges when the organization starts to change practices and speed of delivery.
    6. There is a lack of data and data-related capabilities required to support good decision making and the automation of governing decisions.
    7. The goals and strategy of the organization are not known or understood, leaving nothing for IT governance to orient around.
    Five key symptoms of ineffective governance committees
    1. No actions or decisions are generated – The committee produces no value and makes no decisions after it meets. The lack of value output makes the usefulness of the committee questionable.
    2. Overallocation of resources – There is a lack of clear understanding of capacity and value in work to be done, leading to consistent underestimation of required resources and resource overallocation.
    3. Decisions are changed outside of committee – Decisions that are made or initiatives that are approved are changed when the proper decision makers are involved or the right information becomes available.
    4. Decisions conflict with organizational direction – Governance decisions conflict with organizational needs, showing a visible lack of alignment and behavioral disconnects that work against organizational success. Often due to power that’s not accounted for within the structure.
    5. Consistently poor outcomes are produced from governance direction – Lack of business acumen in members and relevant data or understanding of organizational goals drives poor measured outcomes from the decisions made in the committee.

    IT PMO

    Chair:
    Updated:

    Mandate

    Ensure business value is achieved through information and technology (IT) investments by aligning strategic objectives and client needs with IT initiatives and their outcomes.

    Committee Goals

    • Maximize throughput of the most valuable projects
    • Ensure visibility of current and pending projects
    • Minimize resource waste and optimize of alignment of skills to assignments
    • Clarify accountability for post-project benefits attainment and facilitate the tracking/reporting of those benefits
    • Drive approval and prioritization of IT initiatives based on their alignment with business goals and strategy
    • Establish a consistent process for handling intake/demand

    Committee Metrics

    • % of approved IT initiatives that measure benefit achievement upon completion
    • % of IT initiatives with direct alignment to organizational strategic direction
    • % of initiatives approved by exception

    Decisions and responsibilities by purpose

    Responsibilities
    STRATEGIC ALIGNMENT

    Ensure initiatives align with organizational objectives
    Embed strategic goals and prioritization approach within process
    Define intake approach

    VALUE DELIVERY
    • Ensure all IT initiatives have a defined value expectation (excepting innovation activities)
    • Approve and prioritize IT initiatives based on value
    RISK MANAGEMENT

    Assess risk as a factor of prioritizing and approving initiatives

    RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

    Decide on the allocation of IT resources

    PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT

    Ensure process is in place to measure and validate performance of IT initiatives

    Committee Membership
    Role

    CIO, Product Owner, Service Owner, IT VPs, BRM, PMO Director, CISO/CRO

    Individual

    IT Steering Committee

    Chair:
    Updated:

    Mandate

    Ensure business value is achieved through information and technology (IT) investments by aligning strategic objectives and client needs with IT initiatives and their outcomes.

    Committee Goals

    • Align IT initiatives with organizational goals
    • Evaluate, approve, and prioritize IT initiatives
    • Approve IT strategy
    • Reinforce (if provided) or establish risk appetite and threshold
    • Confirm value achievement of approved initiatives
    • Set target investment mix and optimize IT resource utilization

    Committee Metrics

    • % of approved IT initiatives that meet or exceed value expectation
    • % of IT initiatives with direct alignment to organizational strategic direction
    • Level of satisfaction with IT decision making
    • % of initiatives approved by exception

    Committee Overview

    Committee Name Committee Membership Mandate
    Executive Leadership Committee CEO, CFO, CTO, CDO, CISO/CRO, CIO, Enterprise Architect/Chief Architect, CPO Provide strategic and operational leadership to the company by establishing goals, developing strategy, and directing/validating strategic execution.
    Enterprise Risk Committee CISO/CRO, CPO, Enterprise Risk Manager, BU Leaders, CFO, CTO, CDO Govern enterprise risks to ensure that risk information is available and integrated to support governance decision making. Ensure the definition of the organizational risk posture and that an enterprise risk approach is in place.
    IT Steering Committee CIO, Product Owner, Service Owner, IT VPs, BRM, PMO Director, CISO/CRO Ensure business value is achieved through information and technology (IT) investments by aligning strategic objectives and client needs with IT initiatives and their outcomes.
    IT Risk Council IT Risk Manager, CISO, IT Directors Govern IT risks within the context of business strategy and objectives to align the decision-making processes towards the achievement of performance goals. It will also ensure that a risk management framework is in place and risk posture (risk appetite/threshold) is defined.
    PPM Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, BRMs Ensure the best alignment of IT initiatives and program activity to meet the goals of the business.
    Architectural Review Board Service/Product Owners, Enterprise Architects, Chief Architect, Domain Architects Ensure enterprise and related architectures are managed and applied enterprise-wise. Ensure the alignment of IT initiatives to business strategy and architecture and compliance to regulatory standards. Establish architectural standards and guidelines. Review and recommend initiatives.
    Change Advisory Board Service/Product Owner, Change Manager, IT Directors or Managers Ensure changes are assessed, prioritized, and approved to support the change management purpose of optimizing the throughput of successful changes with a minimum of disruption to business function.

    Decisions and responsibilities by purpose

    Responsibilities
    STRATEGIC ALIGNMENT
    • Ensure initiatives align with organizational objectives
    • Approve strategies and policies that ensure the organization benefits from IT
    • Propose innovative uses of IT to enable the business to compete and perform better
    • Make decisions that account for human preferences and behavior
    VALUE DELIVERY
    • Validate the achievement of benefits from IT initiatives
    • Ensure all IT initiatives have a defined value expectation (excepting innovation activities)
    • Ensure stakeholder value and value drivers are understood
    • Prioritize IT work based on value
    • Define a prioritization approach with stakeholders
    RISK MANAGEMENT
    • Ensure creation, maintenance, and observation of policies and procedures, ensuring conformance where needed
    • Ensure ethical behavior in IT
    • Ensure IT meets the requirements of laws, regulations, and contracts
    • Develop or reinforce the risk appetite and threshold
    • Ensure risk management framework is in place
    RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
    • Identify the target investment mix
    • Decide on the allocation of IT resources
    • Define required IT capabilities
    PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
    • Confirm that IT supports business processes with the right capabilities and capacity
    • Ensure data is up to date and secure
    • Monitor the extent to which prioritization of IT resources matches organizational objectives
    • Measure extent to which IT supports the business
    • Measure adherence to regulations
    Committee Membership
    Role

    CIO, Product Owner, Service Owner, IT VPs, BRM, PMO Director, CISO/CRO

    Individual

    Sample Governance Model

    A sample governance model with four levels and roles dispersed throughout the levels with arrows indicating hierarchy. The levels are 'Enterprise: Defines organizational goals. Directs or regulates the performance and behavior of the enterprise, ensuring it has the structure and capabilities to achieve its goals', 'Strategic: Ensures IT initiatives, products, and services are aligned to organizational goals and strategy and provide expected value. Ensure adherence to key principles', 'Tactical: Ensures key activities and planning are in place to execute strategic initiatives', and 'Operational: Ensures effective execution of day-to-day functions and practices to meet their key objectives'. Roles in Enterprise are 'Board', 'Executive Leadership Committee', and 'Enterprise Risk Committee'. Roles in Strategic are 'IT Steering Committee', plus three half in Strategic, 'IT PMO', 'Architectural Review Board', and 'IT Risk Council'. One role is half in Strategic and half in Tactical, 'Change Advisory Board'.

    3.2.1 Governance and authority

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of key tasks

    Output: Initial Authority Map

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Sticky notes, Strategic Plan

    Participants: IT leadership, Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers

    Now that you’ve determined the activities on your roadmap, it’s important to determine who is going to be responsible for the following:

    • Intake Scoring
    • Project Approvals
    • Staffing and Resource Management
    • Portfolio Reporting
    • Communications and Organizational Change Management
    • Benefits Attainment
    • Formalized Project Closure
    1. For each task have participants discuss who is ultimately accountable for the decision and who has the ultimate authority to make that decision.
    2. Place the sticky notes on the swim lanes in the strategic plan to represent the area or person has authority over it.
    3. Add all initiatives to your PMO governance framework.

    Download the PMO Strategic Plan

    Governance and Authority

    Committee Name Committee Membership
    Executive Leadership Committee CEO, CFO, CTO, CDO, CISO/CRO, CIO, Enterprise Architect/Chief Architect, CPO
    Enterprise Risk Committee CISO/CRO, CPO, Enterprise Risk Manager, BU Leaders, CFO, CTO, CDO
    IT Steering Committee CIO, Product Owner, Service Owner, IT VPs, BRM, PMO Director, CISO/CRO
    IT Risk Council IT Risk Manager, CISO, IT Directors,
    PPM Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, BRMs
    Architectural Review Board Service/Product Owners, Enterprise Architects, Chief Architect, Domain Architects
    Change Advisory Board Service/Product Owner, Change Manager, IT Directors or Managers

    PMO Governance Framework

    PMO Authority
    • Resource Management
    • Customer Relationship
    • Vendor & Contractor Relationships
    • Intake and Scoring
    • Project Approvals
    • Organizational Change Management
    Standards and Policies
    • Portfolio Management Process
    • Project Governance
    Guidelines
    • Project Classification Guidelines
    Executive Oversight
    • Establish Steering Committees
    • Sponsorship
    • Spending Authorization
    • Execution Oversight
    • Spending Cessation
    • Benefits Attainment
    • Organizational Change Management

    Customize groupings as appropriate.

    Document key achievements governance initiatives.

    Completed projects aren’t necessarily successful projects

    The constraints that drive project management (time, scope, and budget) are insufficient for driving the overall success of project efforts.

    For instance, a project may come in on time, on budget, and in scope, but…

    • …if users and stakeholders fail to adopt…
    • …and the intended benefits are not achieved...

    …then that “successful project” represents a massive waste of the organization’s time and resources.

    Organizational change management (OCM) is a supplement to project management that is needed to ensure the intended value is realized. It is the practice through which the PMO or other body can improve user adoption rates and maximize project benefits. Without it, IT might finish the project but the business might fail to recognize the intended benefits.

    Start with next step and refer to Info-Tech research on OCM for a deeper dive. Impact analysis is the cornerstone of any OCM strategy. By shining a light on considerations that might have otherwise escaped project planners and decision makers, an impact analysis is an essential component to change management and project success.

    Change Impact Analysis

    1. It is important to establish a process for analyzing how the change of your PMO roadmap processes will impact different areas of the business and how to manage these impacts. Analyze change impacts across multiple dimensions to ensure nothing is overlooked.
    2. A thorough analysis of change impacts will help the PMO processes:
      • Bypass avoidable problems.
      • Remove non-fixed barriers to success.
      • Acknowledge and minimize the impacts of unavoidable barriers.
      • Identify and leverage potential benefits.
      • Measure the success of the change.

    3.2.2 Perform a change impact analysis to make your planning more complete

    Use Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool to weigh all the factors involved in the change.

    Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool helps to document the change impact across multiple dimensions, enabling you to review the analysis with others to ensure that the most important impacts are captured. The tool also helps to effectively monitor each impact throughout project execution.

    • Change impact considerations can include products, services, states, provinces, cultures, time zones, legal jurisdictions, languages, colors, brands, subsidiaries, competitors, departments, jobs, stores, locations, etc.
    • Each of these dimensions is an MECE (Mutually Exclusive, Collectively Exhaustive) list of considerations that could be impacted by the change. For example, a North American retail chain might consider “Time Zones” as a key dimension, which could break down as Newfoundland, Atlantic, Eastern, Central, Mountain, and Pacific.

    Sample of the Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool.

    Download the Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool

    3.2.3 Assess the current state of your project environment

    15 minutes

    The “2. Set Up” tab of the Impact Tool is where you enter project-specific data pertaining to the change initiative.

    The inputs on this tab are used to auto-populate fields and drop-down menus on subsequent tabs of the analysis.

    Document the stakeholders (by individual or group) associated with the project who will be subject to the impacts.

    You are allowed up to 15 entries. Try to make this list comprehensive. Missing any key stakeholders will threaten the value of this activity as a whole.

    If you find that you have more than 15 individual stakeholders, you can group individuals into stakeholder groups.

    Sample of the Impact Analysis Tool Set-Up Tab. There is a space for 'Project Name' and a list of 'Project Stakeholders'.
    Keep in mind…

    An impact analysis is not a stakeholder management exercise.

    Impact assessments cover:

    • How the change will affect the organization.
    • How individual impacts might influence the likelihood of adoption.

    Stakeholder management covers:

    • Resistance/objections handling.
    • Engagement strategies to promote adoption.

    We will cover the latter in the next step.

    3.2.4 Determine the relevant considerations for analyzing the change impacts

    15-30 minutes

    Use the survey on tab 3 of the Impact Analysis Tool to determine the dimensions of change that are relevant.

    The impact analysis is fueled by the 13-question survey on tab 3 of the tool.

    This survey addresses a comprehensive assortment of change dimensions, ranging from customer-facing considerations to employee concerns, to resourcing, logistical, and technological questions.

    Once you have determined the dimensions that are impacted by the change, you can go on to assess how individual stakeholders and stakeholder groups are affected by the change.

    Sample of the Change Impact Survey on tab 3 of the Impact Analysis Tool.
    Screenshot of tab “3. Impact Survey,” showing the 13-question survey that drives the impact analysis.

    Ideally, the survey should be performed by a group of project stakeholders together. Use the drop-down menus in column K to record your responses.

    Impacts will be felt differently by different stakeholders and stakeholder groups

    As you assess change impacts, keep in mind that no impact will be felt the same across the organization. Depth of impact can vary depending on the frequency (will the impact be felt daily, weekly, monthly?), the actions necessitated by it (e.g. will it change the way the job is done or is it simply a minor process tweak?), and the anticipated response of the stakeholder (support, resistance, indifference?).

    Use the Organizational Change Depth Scale below to help visualize various depths of impact. The deeper the impact, the tougher the job of managing change will be.

    Procedural
    Behavioral
    Interpersonal
    Vocational
    Cultural
    Procedural change involves changes to explicit procedures, rules, policies, processes, etc. Behavioral change is similar to procedural change, but goes deeper to involve the changing tacit or unconscious habits. Interpersonal change goes beyond behavioral change to involve changing relationships, teams, locations, reporting structures, and other social interactions. Vocational change requires acquiring new knowledge and skills and accepting the loss or decline in the value or relevance of previously acquired knowledge and skills. Cultural change goes beyond interpersonal and vocational change to involve changing personal values, social norms, and assumptions about the meaning of good vs. bad or right vs. wrong.
    Example: providing sales reps with mobile access to the CRM application to let them update records from the field. Example: requiring sales reps to use tablets equipped with a custom mobile application for placing orders from the field. Example: migrating sales reps to work 100% remotely. Example: migrating technical support staff to field service and sales support roles. Example: changing the operating model to a more service-based value proposition or focus.

    3.2.5 Determine the depth of each impact for each stakeholder group

    1-3 hours

    Tab “4. Impact Analysis” of the Analysis Tool contains the meat of the impact analysis activity.

    1. The “Impact Analysis” tab is made up of 13 change impact tables (see next slide for a screenshot of one of these tables).
      • You may not need to use all 13 tables. The number of tables you use coincides with the number of “yes” responses you gave in the previous tab.
      • If you do not need all 13 impact tables (i.e. if you do not answer “yes” to all thirteen questions in tab 2) the unused/unnecessary tables will not auto-populate.
    2. Use one table per change impact. Each of your “yes” responses from tab 3 will auto-populate at the top of each change impact table. You should go through each of your “yes” responses in turn.
    3. Analyze how each impact will affect each stakeholder or stakeholder group touched by the project.
      • Column B in each table will auto-populate with the stakeholder groups from the Set-Up tab.
    4. Use the drop-down menus in columns C, D, and E to rate the frequency of each impact, the actions necessitated by each impact, and the anticipated response of each stakeholder group.
      • Each of the options in these drop-down menus is tied to a ranking table that informs the ratings on the two subsequent tabs.
    5. If warranted, you can use the “Comments” cells in column F to note the specifics of each impact for each stakeholder/group.

    See the next slide for an accompanying screenshot of a change impact table from tab 4 of the Analysis Tool.

    Screenshot of “Impact Analysis” tab

    Screenshot of the Impact analysis tab of the Analysis Tool.

    The stakeholder groups entered on the Set Up tab will auto-populate in column B of each table.

    Your “yes” responses from the survey tab will auto-populate in the cells to the right of the “Change Impact” cells.

    Use the drop-down menus in this column to select how often the impact will be felt for each group (e.g. daily, weekly, periodically, one time, or never).

    “Actions” include “change to core job duties,” “change to how time is spent,” “confirm awareness of change,” etc.

    Use the drop-down menus to hypothesize what the stakeholder response might be. For the purpose of this impact analysis, a guess is fine. A more detailed communication plan can be created later.

    Review your overall impact rating to help assess the likelihood of change adoption

    Use the “Overall Impact Rating” on tab 5 to help right-size your OCM efforts.

    Based upon your assessment of each individual impact, the Analysis Tool will provide you with an “Overall Impact Rating” in tab 5.

    • This rating is an aggregate of each of the individual change impact tables used during the analysis and the rankings assigned to each stakeholder group across the frequency, required actions, and anticipated response columns.
    Projects in the red zone should have maximum change governance, applying a full suite of OCM tools and templates as well as revisiting the impact analysis exercise regularly to help monitor progress.

    Increased communication and training efforts, as well as cross-functional partnerships, will also be key for success.

    Projects in the yellow zone also require a high level of change governance.
    Screenshot of 'Overall Impact Rating' scale on tab 5 of the Analysis Tool.
    To free up resources for those OCM initiatives that require more discipline, projects in the green zone can ease up in their OCM efforts somewhat. With a high likelihood of adoption as is, stakeholder engagement and communication efforts can be minimized somewhat for these projects, so long as the PMO is in regular contact with key stakeholders.

    Use the other outputs on tab 5 to help structure your OCM efforts

    In addition to the overall impact rating, tab 5 has other outputs that will help you assess specific impacts and how the overall change will be received by stakeholders.

    Screenshot of the Impact Analysis Outputs on tab 5 of the Analysis Tool. There are tables ranking risk impacts and stakeholders, as well as an impact zone map.

    This table displays the highest risk impacts based on frequency and action inputs on tab 4.

    Here you’ll find the stakeholders, ranked again based on frequency and action, who will be most impacted by the proposed changes.

    These are the five stakeholders most likely to support changes, based on the Anticipated Response column on tab 4.

    The stakeholder groups entered on the Set Up tab will auto-populate in column B of each table.

    In addition to these outputs, this tab also lists top five change resistors and has an impact register and list of potential impacts to watch out for (i.e. your “maybe” responses from tab 3).

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    • A strong PMO is one than can link performance to the overall goals of the organization.
    • Use these examples of KPIs to measure success.
    Metric KPI
    Portfolio Performance Return on Investment (ROI) for projects and programs
    Alignment of spend with objectives
    Resource Utilization Rate (hours allocated to projects actual vs. allocation)
    Customer/Stakeholder Satisfaction
    # of strategic projects approved vs. completed
    Project/Program Performance % of completed projects (planned vs. actual)
    % of projects completed on time (based on original due date)
    % of projects completed on budget
    % of projects delivering their expected business outcomes
    Actual delivery of benefits vs. planned benefits
    % of customer satisfaction
    Project manager satisfaction rating
    PMO % of approved IT initiatives that measure benefit achievement upon completion
    % of IT initiatives with direct alignment to organizational strategic direction

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Knowledge Gained
    • PMO Options and “Best Practices”
    • PMO Types
    • Key PMO Functions/Services

    The PMO staffing model that you use will depend on many different factors. It is in your hands to create and define what your staffing needs are for your organization.

    The success of your PMO is linked to the plan you create before executing on it.

    Processes Optimized
    • Establishing organizational need.
    • Getting situational awareness to build a solid foundation for the PMO.
    • Identifying organizational design and establishing PMO structure and staffing needs.
    • Creating an actionable roadmap.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Deliverables Completed
    • PMO Role Development Tool
    • Initial PMO Mandate
    • PMO Job Description Builder Workbook
    • PMO job descriptions
    • PMO Strategic Plan
    • Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Photo of Ugbad Farah.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of the Job Description Survey activity.
    Job Description Survey
    Use the survey to help determine potential role requirements across various project portfolio management, project management, business analysis, and organizational change management activities.
    Sample of the Job Descriptions builder activity.
    Create Your Job Descriptions
    Use the job descriptions as a guide when creating your own job descriptions based on the outputs from the tool.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock photo of two people looking over their finances. Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy
    Time is money; spend it wisely.
    Stock photo of a hand with a pen resting on paper. Establish Realistic IT Resource Management Practices
    Holistically balance IT supply and demand to avoid overallocation.
    Stock photo of light bending through a tunnel. Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects
    Spend less time managing processes and more time delivering results.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock photo of a group working on a project. Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization
    Decide which IT projects to approve and when to start them.
    Stock photo of a round table silhouetted in front of a window. Master Organizational Change Management Practices
    PMOs, if you don’t know who is responsible for org change, it’s you.
    Stock photo of the nose of a fighter jet. Set a Strategic Course of Action for the PMO in 100 Days
    Use your first 100 days as PMO leader to define a mandate for long-term success.

    Bibliography

    Alexander, Moira. “How to Develop a PMO Strategic Plan.” CIO, 11 July 2018. Web.

    Barlow, Gina, Andrew Tubb, and Grant Riley. “Driving Business Performance. Project Management Survey 2017.” KPMG, 2017. Accessed 11 Jan. 2022.

    Brennan, M. V., and G. Heerkens. “How we went from zero project management to PMO implementation—a real life story.” Paper presented at PMI® Global Congress 2009—North America, Orlando, FL. Project Management Institute, 13 October 2009. Web.

    Casey, W., and W. Peck. “Choosing the right PMO setup.” PM Network, vol. 15, no. 2, 2001, pp. 40-47. Web.

    “COBIT 2019 Framework Governance and Management Objectives.” ISACA, 2019. PDF.

    Crawford, J. K. “Staffing your strategic project office: seven keys to success.” Paper presented at Project Management Institute Annual Seminars & Symposium, San Antonio, TX. Project Management Institute, 2002. Web.

    Davis, Stanley M., and Paul R. Lawrence. “Problems of Matrix Organizations.” Harvard Business Review, May 1978. Web.

    Dow, William D. “Chapter 6: The Tactical Guide for Building a PMO.” Dow Publishing, 2012. PDF.

    Giraudo, L., and E. Monaldi. “PMO evolution: from the origin to the future.” Paper presented at PMI® Global Congress 2015—EMEA, London, England. Project Management Institute, 11 May 2015. Web.

    Greengard, S. “No PMO? Know when you need one.” PM Network, vol. 27, no. 12, 2013, pp. 44-49. Web.

    Hobbs, J. B., and M. Aubry. “What research is telling us about PMOs.” Paper presented at PMI® Global Congress 2009—EMEA, Amsterdam, North Holland, The Netherlands. Project Management Institute, May 2009. Web.

    Jordan, Andy. “Staffing the Strategic PMO.” ProjectManagement.com, 24 October 2016. Web.

    Lang, Greg. “5 Questions to Answer When Building a Roadmap.” LinkedIn, 2 October 2016. Accessed 15 Apr. 2021.

    Manello, Carl. “Establish a PMO Roadmap.” LinkedIn, 10 February 2021. Accessed 29 Mar. 2021.

    Martin, Ken. “5 Steps to Set Up a Successful Project Management Office.” BrightWork, 9 July 2018. Accessed 29 Mar. 2021.

    Miller, Jen A. “What Is a Project Management Office (PMO) and Do You Need One?” CIO, 19 October 2017. Accessed 16 Apr. 2021.

    Needs, Ian. “Why PMOs Fail: 5 Shocking PMO Statistics.” KeyedIn, 6 January 2014. Web.

    Ovans, Andrea. “Overcoming the Peter Principle.” Harvard Business Review, 22 December 2014. Web.

    PMI®. “A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge.” 6th Ed. Project Management Institute, 2017.

    PMI®. “Ahead of the Curve: Forging a Future-Focused Culture.” Pulse of the Profession. Project Management Institute, 11 February 2020. Accessed 21 April 2021.

    PMI®. “Project Management: Job Growth and Talent Gap.” Project Management Institute, 2017. Web.

    PMI®. “Pulse of the Profession: Success in Disruptive Times.” Project Management Institute, 2018. Web.

    PMI®.“The Project Management Office: In Sync with Strategy.” Project Management Institute, March 2012. Web.

    “Project Management Organizational Structures.” PM4Dev, 2016. Web.

    Rincon, I. “Building a PMO from the ground up: Three stories, one result.” Paper presented at PMI® Global Congress 2014—North America, Phoenix, AZ. Project Management Institute, 26 October 2014. Web.

    Roseke, Bernie. “The 4 Types of Project Organizational Structure.” ProjectEngineer, 16 August 2019. Web.

    Sexton, Peter. “Project Delivery Performance: AIPM and KPMG Project Management Survey 2020 - KPMG Australia.” KPMG, 9 November 2020. Web.

    The Change Management Office (CMO). Prosci, n.d. Accessed 7 July 2021.

    “The New Face of Strategic Planning.” Project Smart, 27 March 2009. Accessed 29 Mar. 2021.

    “The State of Project Management Annual Survey.” Wellington PPM Intelligence, 2018. Web.

    “The State of the Project Management Office : Enabling Strategy Execution Excellence.” PM Solutions Research, 2016. Web.

    Wagner, Rodd. “New Evidence The Peter Principle Is Real - And What To Do About It.” Forbes, 10 April 2018. Accessed 14 Apr. 2021.

    Wright, David. “Developing Your PMO Roadmap.” Paper presented at PMI® Global Congress 2012—North America, Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada. Project Management Institute, 2012. Accessed 29 March 2021.

    Create a Game Plan to Implement Cloud Backup the Right Way

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}469|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Storage & Backup Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /storage-and-backup-optimization
    • Cloud adoption is frequently driven by hype rather than careful consideration of the best-fit solution.
    • IT is frequently rushed into cloud adoption without appropriate planning.
    • Organizations frequently lack appropriate strategies to deal with cloud-specific backup challenges.
    • Insufficient planning for cloud backup can exacerbate problems rather than solving them, leading to poor estimates of the cost and effort involved, budget overruns, and failure to meet requirements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The cloud isn’t a magic bullet, but it tends to deliver the most value to organizations with specific use cases – frequently smaller organizations who are looking to avoid the cost of building or upgrading a data center.
    • Cloud backup does not necessarily reduce backup costs so much as it moves them around. Cloud backup distributes costs over a longer term. Organizations need to compare the difference in CAPEX and OPEX to determine if making the move makes financial sense.
    • The cloud can deliver a great deal of value for organizations who are looking to reduce the operational effort demanded by an existing tape library for second- or third-tier backups.
    • Data security risks in some cases may be overstated, depending on what on-premises security is available. However, targeting backup to the cloud introduces other risks that need to be considered before implementation is given the green light.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand if cloud backup is the right solution for actual organizational needs.
    • Make an informed decision about targeting backup to the cloud by considering the big picture TCO and effort level involved in adoption.
    • Have a ready strategy to mitigate the most common challenges with cloud adoption projects.
    • Develop a roadmap that lays out the required step-by-step to implement cloud backup.

    Create a Game Plan to Implement Cloud Backup the Right Way Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the benefits and risks of targeting backups to the cloud

    Build a plan to mitigate the risks associated with backing data up in the cloud.

    • Storyboard: Create a Game Plan to Implement Cloud Backup the Right Way

    2. Determine if the cloud can meet the organization's data requirements

    Assess if the cloud is a good fit for your organization’s backup data.

    • Cloud Backup Implementation Game Plan Tool

    3. Mitigate the Challenges of Backing Up to the Cloud

    Build a cloud challenge contingency plan.

    4. Build a Cloud Backup Implementation Roadmap

    Perform a gap analysis to determine cloud backup implementation initiatives.

    Infographic

    Workshop: Create a Game Plan to Implement Cloud Backup the Right Way

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Evaluate the business case for targeting backup at the cloud

    The Purpose

    Understand how cloud backup will affect backup and recovery processes

    Determine backup and recovery objectives

    Assess the value proposition of cloud backup

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A high-level understanding of the benefits of moving to cloud backup

    A best-fit analysis of cloud backup in comparison to organizational needs

    Activities

    1.1 Document stakeholder goals for cloud backup

    1.2 Document present backup processes

    1.3 Document ideal backup processes

    1.4 Review typical benefits of cloud backup

    Outputs

    Documented stakeholder goals

    Current backup process diagrams

    Ideal backup process diagram

    2 Identify candidate data sets and assess opportunities and readiness

    The Purpose

    Identify candidate data sets for cloud-based backup

    Determine RPOs and RTOs for candidate data sets

    Identify potential value specific to each data set for targeting backup at the cloud

    Evaluate organizational readiness for targeting backup at the cloud

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented recovery objectives

    Recommendations for cloud backup based on actual organizational needs and readiness

    Activities

    2.1 Document candidate data sets

    2.2 Determine recovery point and recovery time objectives for candidate data sets

    2.3 Identify potential value of cloud-based backup for candidate data sets

    2.4 Discuss the risk and value of cloud-based backup versus an on-premises solution

    2.5 Evaluate organizational readiness for cloud backup

    2.6 Identify data sets to move to the cloud

    Outputs

    Validated list of candidate data sets

    Specific RPOs and RTOs for core data sets

    An assessment of the value of cloud backup for data sets

    A tool-based recommendation for moving backups to the cloud

    3 Mitigate the challenges of backing up to the cloud

    The Purpose

    Understand different cloud provider models and their specific risks

    Identification of how cloud backup will affect IT infrastructure and personnel

    Strategize ways to mitigate the most common challenges of implementing cloud backup

    Understand the client/vendor relationship in cloud backup

    Understand the affect of cloud backup on data security

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Verified best-fit cloud provider model for organizational needs

    Verified strategy for meeting the most common challenges for cloud-based backup

    A strong understanding of how cloud backup will change IT

    Strategies for approaching vendors to ensure a strong footing in negotiations and clear expectations for the client/vendor relationship

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss the impact of cloud backup on infrastructure and IT environment

    3.2 Create a cloud backup risk contingency plan

    3.3 Document compliance and security regulations

    3.4 Identify client and vendor responsibilities for cloud backup

    3.5 Discuss and document the impact of cloud backup on IT roles and responsibilities

    3.6 Compile a list of implementation intiatives

    3.7 Evaluate the financial case for cloud backup

    Outputs

    Cloud risk assessment

    Documented contingency strategies for probabe risks

    Negotiation strategies for dealing with vendors

    A committed go/no-go decision on the value of cloud backup weighted against the effort of implementation

    4 Build a cloud backup implementation roadmap

    The Purpose

    Create a road map for implementing cloud backup

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine any remaining gaps between the present state and the ideal state for cloud backup

    Understand the steps and time frame for implementing cloud backup

    Allocate roles and responsibilities for the implementation intitiative

    A validated implementation road map

    Activities

    4.1 Perform a gap analysis to generate a list of implementation intiatives

    4.2 Prioritize cloud backup initiatives

    4.3 Assess risks and dependencies for critical implementation initiatives

    4.4 Assign ownership over implementation tasks

    4.5 Determine road map time frame and structure

    4.6 Populate the roadmap with cloud backup initiatives

    Outputs

    A validated gap analysis

    A prioritized list of cloud backup initiatives

    Documented dependencies and risks associated with implementation tasks

    A roadmap for targeting backups at the cloud

    Develop the Right Message to Engage Buyers

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions

    Sixty percent of marketers find it hard to produce high-quality content consistently. SaaS marketers have an even more difficult job due to the technical nature of content production. Without an easy content development strategy, marketers have an insurmountable task of continually creating interesting content for an audience they don’t understand.

    Globally, B2B SaaS marketers without the ability to consistently produce and activate quality content will experience:

    • High website bounce rates and low time on site
    • Low page views
    • A low percentage of return visitors
    • Low conversions
    • Low open and click-through rates on email campaigns

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Marketing content that identifies the benefit of the product along with a deep understanding of the buyer pain points, desired value, and benefit proof points is a key driver in delivering value to a prospect, thereby increasing marketing metrics such as open rates, time on site, page views, and click-through rates.

    Impact and Result

    Marketers that activate the SoftwareReviews message mapping architecture will be able to crack the code on the formula for improving open and click-through rates.

    By applying the SoftwareReviews message mapping architecture, clients will be able to:

    • Quickly diagnose the current state of their content marketing effectiveness compared to industry metrics.
    • Compare their current messaging approach versus the key elements of the Message Map Architecture.
    • Create more compelling and relevant content that aligns with a buyer’s needs and journey.
    • Shrink marketing and sales cycles.
    • Increase the pace of content production.

    Develop the Right Message to Engage Buyers Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop the Right Message to Engage Buyers Executive Brief – A mapping architecture to enable marketers to crack the code on the formula for improving open and click-through rates.

    Through this blueprint marketers will learn how to shift content away from low-performing content that only focuses on the product and company to high-performing customer-focused content that answers the “What’s in it for me?” question for a buyer, increasing engagement and conversions.

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Develop the Right Message to Engage Buyers

    Drive higher open rates, time-on-site, and click-through rates with buyer-relevant messaging.

    Analyst Perspective

    Develop the right message to engage buyers.

    Marketers only have seven seconds to capture a visitor's attention but often don't realize that the space between competitors and their company is that narrow. They often miss the mark on content and create reams of product and company-focused messaging that result in high bounce rates, low page views, low return visits, low conversions, and low click-through rates.

    We wouldn't want to sit in a conversation with someone who only speaks about themselves, so why would it be any different when we buy something? Today's marketers must quickly hook their visitors with content that answers the critical question of "What's in it for me?"

    Our research finds that leading content marketers craft messaging that lets their audience ”know they know them,” points out what’s in it for them, and includes proof points of promised value. This simple, yet often missed approach, we call Message Mapping, which helps marketers grab a visitor’s initial attention and when applied throughout the customer journey will turn prospects into customers, lifelong buyers, advocates, and referrals.

    Photo of Terra Higginson, Marketing Research Director, SoftwareReviews.

    Terra Higginson
    Marketing Research Director
    SoftwareReviews

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Globally, B2B SaaS marketers without the ability to consistently produce and activate quality content will experience:

    • High website bounce rates and low time on site
    • Low page views
    • A low percentage of return visitors
    • Low conversions
    • Low open and click-through rates on email campaigns
    Sixty percent of marketers find it hard to produce high-quality content consistently. SaaS marketers have an even more difficult job due to the technical nature of content production. Without an easy content development strategy, marketers have an insurmountable task of continually creating interesting content for an audience they don’t understand.
    Common Obstacles

    Marketers struggle to create content that quickly engages the buyer because they lack:

    • Resources to create a high volume of quality content.
    • True buyer understanding.
    • Experience in how to align technical messaging with the buyer persona.
    • Easy-to-deploy content strategy tools.
    Even though most marketers will say that it’s important to produce interesting content, only 58% of B2B markers take the time to ask their customers what’s important to them. Without a true and deep understanding of buyers, marketers continue to invest their time and resources in an uninteresting product and company-focused diatribe.
    SoftwareReviews’ Approach

    By applying the SoftwareReviews’ message mapping architecture, clients will be able to:

    • Quickly diagnose the current state of their content marketing effectiveness compared to industry metrics.
    • Compare their current messaging approach against the key elements of the Message Map Architecture.
    • Create more compelling and relevant content that aligns with a buyer’s needs and journey.
    • Shrink marketing and sales cycles.
    • Increase the pace of content production.
    Marketers that activate the SoftwareReviews message mapping architecture will be able to crack the code on the formula for improving open and click-through rates.

    SoftwareReviews Insight

    Marketing content that identifies the benefit of the product, along with a deep understanding of the buyer pain points, desired value, and benefit proof-points, is a key driver in delivering value to a prospect, thereby increasing marketing metrics such as open rates, time on site, page views, and click-through rates.

    Your Challenge

    65% of marketers find it challenging to produce engaging content.

    Globally, B2B SaaS marketers without the ability to consistently produce and activate quality content will experience:

    • High website bounce rates and low time on site
    • Low page views
    • A low percentage of return visitors
    • Low conversions
    • Low open and click-through rates on email campaigns

    A staggering 60% of marketers find it hard to produce high-quality content consistently and 62% don’t know how to measure the ROI of their campaigns according to OptinMonster.

    SaaS marketers have an even more difficult job due to the technical nature of content production. Without an easy content development strategy, marketers have an insurmountable task of continually creating interesting content for an audience they don’t understand.


    Over 64% of marketers want to learn how to build a better content
    (Source: OptinMonster, 2021)

    Benchmark your content marketing

    Do your content marketing metrics meet the industry-standard benchmarks for the software industry?
    Visualization of industry benchmarks for 'Bounce Rate', 'Organic CTR', 'Pages/Session', 'Average Session Duration', '% of New Sessions', 'Email Open Rate', 'Email CTR', and 'Sales Cycle Length (Days)' with sources linked below.
    GrowRevenue, MarketingSherpa, Google Analytics, FirstPageSage, Google Analytics, HubSpot
    • Leaders will measure content marketing performance against these industry benchmarks.
    • If your content performance falls below these benchmarks, your content architecture may be missing the mark with prospective buyers.

    Common flaws in content messaging

    Why do marketers have a hard time consistently producing messaging that engages the buyer?

    Mistake #1

    Myopic Focus on Company and Product

    Content suffers a low ROI due to a myopic focus on the company and the product. This self-focused content fails to engage prospects and move them through the funnel.

    Mistake #2

    WIIFM Question Unanswered

    Content never answers the fundamental “What’s in it for me?” question due to a lack of true buyer understanding. This leads to an inability to communicate the value proposition to the prospect.

    Mistake #3

    Inability to Select the Right Content Format

    Marketers often guess what kind of content their buyers prefer without any real understanding or research behind what buyers would actually want to consume.

    Leaders Will Avoid the “Big Three” Pitfalls
    • While outdated content, poor content organization on your website, and poor SEO are additional strategic factors (outside the scope of this research), poor messaging structure will doom your content marketing strategy.
    • Leaders will be vigilant to diagnose current messaging structure and avoid:
      1. Making messaging all about you and your company.
      2. Failing to describe what’s in it for your prospects.
      3. Often guessing at what approach to use when structuring your messaging.

    Implications of poor content

    Without quality content, the sales and marketing cycles elongate and content marketing metrics suffer.
    • Lost sales: Research shows that B2B buyers are 57-70% done with their buying research before they ever contact sales.(Worldwide Business Research, 2022)
    • The buyer journey is increasingly digital: Research shows that 67% of the buyer's journey is now done digitally.(Worldwide Business Research, 2022)
    • Wasted time: In a Moz study of 750,000 pieces of content, 50% had zero backlinks, indicating that no one felt these assets were interesting enough to reference or share. (Moz, 2015)
    • Wasted money: SaaS companies spend $342,000 to $1,080,000 per year (or more) on content marketing. (Zenpost, 2022) The wrong content will deliver a poor ROI.

    50% — Half of the content produced has no backlinks. (Source: Moz, 2015)

    Content matters more than ever since 67% of the buyer's journey is now done digitally. (Source: Worldwide Business Research, 2022)

    Benefits of good content

    A content mapping approach lets content marketers:
    • Create highly personalized content. Content mapping helps marketers to create highly targeted content at every stage of the buyer’s journey, helping to nurture leads and prospects toward a purchase decision.
    • Describe “What’s in it for me?” to buyers. Remember that you aren’t your customer. Good content quickly answers the question “What’s in it for me?” (WIIFM) developed from the findings of the buyer persona. WIIFM-focused content engages a prospect within seven seconds.
    • Increase marketing ROI. Content marketing generates leads three times greater than traditional marketing (Patel, 2016).
    • Influence prospects. Investing in a new SaaS product isn’t something buyers do every day. In a new situation, people will often look to others to understand what they should do. Good content uses the principles of authority and social proof to build the core message of WIIFM. Authority can be conferred with awards and accolades, whereas social proof is given through testimonials, case studies, and data.
    • Build competitive advantage. Increase competitive advantage by providing content that aligns with the ideal client profile. Fifty-two percent of buyers said they were more likely to buy from a vendor after reading its content (1827 Marketing, 2022).
    Avoid value claiming. Leaders will use client testimonials as proof points because buyers believe peers more than they believe you.

    “… Since 95 percent of the people are imitators and only 5 percent initiators, people are persuaded more by the actions of others than by any proof we can offer. (Robert Cialdini, Influence: The Psychology of Persuasion)

    Full slide: 'Message Map Architecture'.

    Full slide: 'Message Map Template' with field descriptions and notes.

    Full slide: 'Message Map Template' with field descriptions, no notes.

    Full slide: 'Message Map Template' with blank fields.

    Full slide: 'Message Map Template' with 'Website Example segment.com' filled in fields.

    Full slide: 'Website Example segment.com' the website as it appears online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Full slide: 'Website Example segment.com' the website as it appears online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Full slide: 'Website Example segment.com' the website as it appears online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Full slide: 'Website Example segment.com' the website as it appears online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Email & Social Post Example

    Use the message mapping architecture to create other types of content.

    Examples of emails and social media posts as they appear online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Insight Summary

    Create Content That Matters

    Marketing content that identifies the benefit of the product along with a deep understanding of the buyer pain points, desired value, and benefit proof-points is a key driver in delivering value to a prospect, thereby increasing marketing metrics such as open rates, time on site, page views, and click-through rates.

    What’s in It for Me?

    Most content has a focus on the product and the company. Content that lacks a true and deep understanding of the buyer suffers low engagement and low conversions. Our research shows that all content must answer ”What’s in it for me?” for a prospect.

    Social Proof & Authority

    Buyers that are faced with a new and unusual buying experience (such as purchasing SaaS) look at what others say about the product (social proof) and what experts say about the product (authority) to make buying decisions.

    Scarcity & Loss Framing

    Research shows that scarcity is a strong principle of influence that can be used in marketing messages. Loss framing is a variation of scarcity and can be used by outlining what a buyer will lose instead of what will be gained.

    Unify the Experience

    Use your message map to structure all customer-facing content across Sales, Product, and Marketing and create a unified and consistent experience across all touchpoints.

    Close the Gap

    SaaS marketers often find the gap between product and company-focused content and buyer-focused content to be so insurmountable that they never manage to overcome it without a framework like message mapping.

    Related SoftwareReviews Research

    Sample of 'Create a Buyer Persona and Journey' blueprint.

    Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

    Make it easier to market, sell, and achieve product-market fit with deeper buyer understanding.
    • Reduce time and treasure wasted chasing the wrong prospects.
    • Improve product-market fit.
    • Increase open and click-through rates in your lead gen engine.
    • Perform more effective sales discovery and increase eventual win rates.
    Sample of 'Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth' blueprint.

    Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth

    Have a significant and well-targeted impact on business success and growth by knowing how your brand performs, identifying areas of improvement, and making data-driven decisions to fix it.
    • Importance of brand is recognized, endorsed, and prioritized.
    • Support and resources allocated.
    • All relevant data and information collected in one place.
    • Ability to make data-driven recommendations and decisions on how to improve.
    Sample of 'Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy' blueprint.

    Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy

    Creating a compelling Go-to-Market strategy, and keeping it current, is a critical software company function – as important as financial strategy, sales operations, and even corporate business development – given its huge impact on the many drivers of sustainable growth.
    • Align stakeholders on a common vision and execution plan.
    • Build a foundation of buyer and competitive understanding.
    • Deliver a team-aligned launch plan that enables commercial success.

    Bibliography

    Arakelyan, Artash. “How SaaS Companies Increase Their ROI With Content Marketing.” Clutch.co, 27 July 2018. Accessed July 2022.

    Bailyn, Evan. “Average Session Duration: Industry Benchmarks.” FirstPageSage, 16 March 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Burstein, Daniel. “Marketing Research Chart: Average clickthrough rates by industry.” MarketingSherpa, 1 April 2014. Accessed July 2022.

    Cahoon, Sam. “Email Open Rates By Industry (& Other Top Email Benchmarks).” HubSpot, 10 June 2021. Accessed July 2022.

    Cialdini, Robert. Influence: Science and Practice. 5th ed. Pearson, 29 July 2008. Print.

    Cialdini, Robert. Influence: The Psychology of Persuasion. Revised ed. Harper Business, 26 Dec. 2006. Print.

    Content Marketing—Statistics, Evidence and Trends.” 1827 Marketing, 7 Jan. 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Devaney, Erik. “Content Mapping 101: The Template You Need to Personalize Your Marketing.” HubSpot, 21 April 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Hiscox Business Insurance. “Growing Your Business--and Protecting It Every Step of the Way.” Inc.com. 25 April 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Hurley Hall, Sharon. “85 Content Marketing Statistics To Make You A Marketing Genius.” OptinMonster, 14 Jan. 2021. Accessed July 2022.

    Patel, Neil. “38 Content Marketing Stats That Every Marketer Needs to Know.” NeilPatel.com, 21 Jan. 2016. Web.

    Prater, Meg. “SaaS Sales: 7 Tips on Selling Software from a Top SaaS Company.” HubSpot, 9 June 2021. Web.

    Polykoff, Dave. “20 SaaS Content Marketing Statistics That Lead to MRR Growth in 2022.” Zenpost blog, 22 July 2022. Web.

    Rayson, Steve. “Content, Shares, and Links: Insights from Analyzing 1 Million Articles.” Moz, 8 Sept. 2015. Accessed July 2022.

    “SaaS Content Marketing: How to Measure Your SaaS Content’s Performance.” Ken Moo, 9 June 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Taylor Gregory, Emily. “Content marketing challenges and how to overcome them.” Longitude, 14 June 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Visitors Benchmarking Channels. Google Analytics, 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    WBR Insights. “Here's How the Relationship Between B2B Buying, Content, and Sales Reps Has Changed.” Worldwide Business Research, 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    “What’s a good bounce rate? (Here’s the average bounce rate for websites).” GrowRevenue.io, 24 Feb. 2020. Accessed July 2022.

    Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}555|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Web Experience Management (WEM) solutions have emerged as applications that provide marketers and other customer experience professionals with a complete set of tools for web content management, delivery, campaign execution, and site analytics.
    • However, many organizations are unsure of how to leverage these new technologies to enhance their customer interaction strategy.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • WEM products are not a one-size-fits-all investment: unique evaluations and customization is required in order to deploy a solution that fits your organization.
    • WEM technology often complements core CRM and marketing management products – it does not supplant it, and must augment the rest of your customer experience management portfolio.
    • WEM provides benefits by giving web visitors a better experience – leveraging tools such as web analytics gives the customer a tailored experience. Marketing can then monitor their behavior and use this information to warm leads.

    Impact and Result

    • Deploy a WEM platform and execute initiatives that will strengthen the web-facing customer experience, improving customer satisfaction and unlocking new revenue opportunities.
    • Avoid making unnecessary new WEM investments.
    • Make informed decisions about the types of technologies and initiatives that are necessary to support WEM.

    Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a WEM strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Harness the value of web experience management

    Make the case for a web experience management suite and structure the WEM strategy project.

    • Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy Phase 1: Harness the Value of Web Experience Management
    • Web Experience Management Strategy Summary Template
    • WEM Project Charter Template

    2. Create the vision for web experience management

    Identify the target state WEM strategy, assess current state, and identify gaps.

    • Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy Phase 2: Create the Vision for Web Experience Management

    3. Execute initiatives for WEM deployment

    Build the WEM technology stack and create a web strategy initiatives roadmap.

    • Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy Phase 3: Execute Initiatives for WEM Deployment
    • Web Process Automation Investment Appropriateness Assessment Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch the WEM Selection Project

    The Purpose

    Discuss the general project overview for the WEM selection.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Launch of your WEM selection project.

    Development of your organization’s WEM requirements. 

    Activities

    1.1 Facilitation of activities from the Launch the WEM Project and Collect Requirements phase, including project scoping and resource planning.

    1.2 Conduct overview of the WEM market landscape, trends, and vendors.

    1.3 Conduct process mapping for selected marketing processes.

    1.4 Interview business stakeholders.

    1.5 Prioritize WEM functional requirements.

    Outputs

    WEM Procurement Project Charter

    WEM Use-Case Fit Assessment

    2 Plan the Procurement and Implementation Process

    The Purpose

    Plan the procurement and the implementation of the WEM solution.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Selection of a WEM solution.

    A plan for implementing the selected WEM solution. 

    Activities

    2.1 Complete marketing process mapping with business stakeholders.

    2.2 Interview IT staff and project team, identify technical requirements for the WEM suite, and document high-level solution requirements.

    2.3 Perform a use-case scenario assessment, review use-case scenario results, identify use-case alignment, and review the WEM Vendor Landscape vendor profiles and performance.

    2.4 Create a custom vendor shortlist and investigate additional vendors for exploration in the marketplace.

    2.5 Meet with project manager to discuss results and action items.

    Outputs

    Vendor Shortlist

    WEM RFP

    Vendor Evaluations

    Selection of a WEM Solution

    WEM projected work break-down

    Implementation plan

    Framework for WEM deployment and CRM/Marketing Management Suite Integration

    Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}293|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $6,459 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications
    • Communication and collaboration portfolios are overburdened with redundant and overlapping services. Between Office 365, Slack, Jabber, and WebEx, IT is supporting a collection of redundant apps. This redundancy takes a toll on IT, and on the user.
    • Shadow IT is easier than ever, and cheap sharing tools are viral. Users are literally carrying around computers in their pockets (in the form of smartphones). IT often has no visibility into how these devices – and the applications on them – are used for work.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You don’t know what you don’t know. Unstructured conversations with users will uncover insights.
    • Security is meaningless without usability. If security controls make a tool unusable, then users will rush to adopt something that’s free and easy.
    • Training users on a new tool once isn’t effective. Engage with users throughout the collaboration tool’s lifecycle.

    Impact and Result

    • Few supported apps and fewer unsupported apps. This will occur by ensuring that your collaboration tools will be useful to and used by users. Give users a say through surveys, focus groups, and job shadowing.
    • Lower total cost of ownership and greater productivity. Having fewer apps in the workplace, and better utilizing the functionality of those apps, will mean that IT can be much more efficient at managing your ECS.
    • Higher end-user satisfaction. Tools will be better suited to users’ needs, and users will feel heard by IT.

    Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a new approach to communication and collaboration apps, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a shared vision on the future of communication and collaboration

    Identify and validate goals and collaboration tools that are used by your users, and the collaboration capabilities that must be supported by your desired ECS.

    • Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy – Phase 1: Create a Shared Vision on the Future of Communication and Collaboration
    • Enterprise Collaboration Strategy Template
    • Building Company Communication and Collaboration Technology Improvement Plan Executive Presentation
    • Communications Infrastructure Stakeholder Focus Group Guide
    • Enterprise Communication and Collaboration System Business Requirements Document

    2. Map a path forward

    Map a path forward by creating a collaboration capability map and documenting your ECS requirements.

    • Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy – Phase 2: Map a Path Forward
    • Collaboration Capability Map

    3. Build an IT and end-user engagement plan

    Effectively engage everyone to ensure the adoption of your new ECS. Engagement is crucial to the overall success of your project.

    • Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy – Phase 3: Proselytize the Change
    • Collaboration Business Analyst
    • Building Company Exemplar Collaboration Marketing One-Pager Materials
    • Communication and Collaboration Strategy Communication Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify What Needs to Change

    The Purpose

    Create a vision for the future of your ECS.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Validate and bolster your strategy by involving your end users.

    Activities

    1.1 Prioritize Components of Your ECS Strategy to Improve

    1.2 Create a Plan to Gather Requirements From End Users

    1.3 Brainstorm the Collaboration Services That Are Used by Your Users

    1.4 Focus Group

    Outputs

    Defined vision and mission statements

    Principles for your ECS

    ECS goals

    End-user engagement plan

    Focus group results

    ECS executive presentation

    ECS strategy

    2 Map Out the Change

    The Purpose

    Streamline your collaboration service portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented the business requirements for your collaboration services.

    Reduced the number of supported tools.

    Increased the effectiveness of training and enhancements.

    Activities

    2.1 Create a Current-State Collaboration Capability Map

    2.2 Build a Roadmap for Desired Changes

    2.3 Create a Future-State Capability Map

    2.4 Identify Business Requirements

    2.5 Identify Use Requirements and User Processes

    2.6 Document Non-Functional Requirements

    2.7 Document Functional Requirements

    2.8 Build a Risk Register

    Outputs

    Current-state collaboration capability map

    ECS roadmap

    Future-state collaboration capability map

    ECS business requirements document

    3 Proselytize the Change

    The Purpose

    Ensure the system is supported effectively by IT and adopted widely by end users.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Unlock the potential of your ECS.

    Stay on top of security and industry good practices.

    Greater end-user awareness and adoption.

    Activities

    3.1 Develop an IT Training Plan

    3.2 Develop a Communications Plan

    3.3 Create Initial Marketing Material

    Outputs

    IT training plan

    Communications plan

    App marketing one-pagers

    Generative AI: Market Primer

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}349|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Much of the organization remains in the dark for understanding what Gen AI is, complicated by ambiguous branding from vendors claiming to provide Gen AI solutions.
    • Searching the market for a Gen AI platform is nearly impossible, owing to the sheer number of vendors.
    • The evaluative criteria for selecting a Gen AI platform are unclear.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You cannot rush Gen AI selection and implementation. Organizations with (1) FTEs devoted to making Gen AI work (including developers and business intelligence analysts), (2) trustworthy and regularly updated data, and (3) AI governance are just now reaching PoC testing.
    • Gen AI is not a software category – it is an umbrella concept. Gen AI platforms will be built on different foundational models, be trained in different ways, and provide varying modalities. Do not expect Gen AI platforms to be compared against the same parameters in a vendor quadrant.
    • Bad data is the tip of the iceberg for Gen AI risks. While Gen AI success will be heavily reliant on the quality of data it is fine-tuned on, there are independent risks organizations must prepare for, from Gen AI hallucinations and output reliability to infrastructure feasibility and handling high-volume events.
    • Prepare for ongoing instability in the Gen AI market. If your organization is unsure about where to start with Gen AI, the secure route is to examine what your enterprise providers are offering. Use this as a learning platform to confidently navigate which specialized Gen AI provider will be viable for meeting your use cases.

    Impact and Result

    • Consensus on Gen AI scope and key Gen AI capabilities
    • Identification of your readiness to leverage Gen AI applications
    • Agreement on Gen AI evaluative criteria
    • Knowledge of vendor viability

    Generative AI: Market Primer Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Generative AI: Market Primer – Contextualize the marketspace and prepare for generative AI selection.

    Use Info-Tech’s best practices for setting out a selection roadmap and evaluative criteria for narrowing down vendors – both enterprise and specialized providers.

    • Generative AI: Market Primer Storyboard
    • Data Governance Policy
    • AI Governance Storyboard
    • AI Architecture Assessment and Project Planning Tool
    • AI Architecture Assessment and Project Planning Tool – Sample
    • AI Architecture Templates
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Generative AI: Market Primer

    Cut through Gen AI buzzwords to achieve market clarity.

    Analyst Perspective

    The generative AI (Gen AI) marketspace is complex, nascent, and unstable.

    Organizations need to get clear on what Gen AI is, its infrastructural components, and the governance required for successful platform selection.

    Thomas Randall

    The urge to be fast-moving to leverage the potential benefits of Gen AI is understandable. There are plenty of opportunities for Gen AI to enrich an organization’s use cases – from commercial to R&D to entertainment. However, there are requisites an organization needs to get right before Gen AI can be effectively applied. Part of this is ensuring data and AI governance is well established and mature within the organization. The other part is contextualizing Gen AI to know what components of this market the organization needs to invest in.

    Owing to its popularity surge, OpenAI’s ChatGPT has become near synonymous with Gen AI. However, Gen AI is an umbrella concept that encompasses a variety of infrastructural architecture. Organizations need to ask themselves probing questions if they are looking to work with OpenAI: Does ChatGPT rest on the right foundational model for us? Does ChatGPT offer the right modalities to support our organization’s use cases? How much fine-tuning and prompt engineering will we need to perform? Do we require investment in on-premises infrastructure to support significant data processing and high-volume events? And do we require FTEs to enable all this infrastructure?

    Use this market primer to quickly get up to speed on the elements your organization might need to make the most of Gen AI.

    Thomas Randall

    Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Much of the organization remains in the dark for understanding what Gen AI is, complicated by ambiguous branding from vendors claiming to provide Gen AI solutions.
    • Searching the market for a Gen AI platform is near impossible, owing to the sheer number of vendors.
    • The evaluative criteria for selecting a Gen AI platform is unclear.

    Common Obstacles

    • Data governance is immature within the organization. There is no source of truth or regularly updated organizational process assets.
    • AI functionality is not well understood within the organization; there is little AI governance for monitoring and controlling its use.
    • The extent of effort and resources required to make Gen AI a success remains murky.

    Info-Tech's Solution

    This market primer for Gen AI will help you:

    1. Contextualize the Gen AI market: Learn what components of Gen AI an organization should consider to make Gen AI a success.
    2. Prepare for Gen AI selection: Use Info-Tech’s best practices for setting out a selection roadmap and evaluative criteria for narrowing down vendors – both enterprise and specialized providers.

    “We are entering the era of generative AI.
    This is a unique time in our history where the benefits of AI are easily accessible and becoming pervasive with co-pilots emerging in the major business tools we use today. The disruptive capabilities that can potentially drive dramatic benefits also introduces risks that need to be planned for.”

    Bill Wong, Principal Research Director – Data and BI, Info-Tech Research Group

    Who benefits from this project?

    This research is designed for:

    • Senior IT, developers, data staff, and project managers who:
      • Have received a mandate from their executives to begin researching the Gen AI market.
      • Need to quickly get up to speed on the state of the Gen AI market, given no deep prior knowledge of the space.
      • Require an overview of the different components to Gen AI to contextualize how vendor comparisons and selections can be made.
      • Want to gain an understanding of key trends, risks, and evaluative criteria to consider in their selection process.

    This research will help you:

    • Articulate the potential business value of Gen AI to your organization.
    • Establish which high-value use cases could be enriched by Gen AI functionality.
    • Assess vendor viability for enterprise and specialized software providers in the Gen AI marketspace.
    • Collect information on the prerequisites for implementing Gen AI functionality.
    • Develop relevant evaluative criteria to assist differentiating between shortlisted contenders.

    This research will also assist:

    • Executives, business analysts, and procurement teams who are stakeholders in:
      • Contextualizing the landscape for learning opportunities.
      • Gathering and documenting requirements.
      • Building deliverables for software selection projects.
      • Managing vendors, especially managing the relationships with incumbent enterprise software providers.

    This research will help you:

    • Identify examples of how Gen AI applications could be leveraged for your organization’s core use cases.
    • Verify the extent of Gen AI functionality an incumbent enterprise provider has.
    • Validate accuracy of Gen AI language and architecture referenced in project deliverables.

    Insight Summary

    You cannot speedrun Gen AI selection and implementation.

    Organizations with (1) FTEs devoted to making Gen AI work (including developers and business intelligence analysts), (2) trustworthy and regularly updated data, and (3) AI governance are just now reaching PoC testing.

    Gen AI is not a software category – it is an umbrella concept.

    Gen AI platforms will be built on different foundational models, be trained in different ways, and provide varying modalities. Do not expect to compare Gen AI platforms to the same parameters in a vendor quadrant.

    Bad data is the tip of the iceberg for Gen AI risks.

    While Gen AI success will be heavily reliant on the quality of data it is fine-tuned on, there are independent risks organizations must prepare for: from Gen AI hallucinations and output reliability to infrastructure feasibility to handle high-volume events.

    Gen AI use may require changes to sales incentives.

    If you plan to use Gen AI in a commercial setting, review your sales team’s KPIs. They are rewarded for sales velocity; if they are the human-in-the-loop to check for hallucinations, you must change incentives to ensure quality management.

    Prepare for ongoing instability in the Gen AI market.

    If your organization is unsure about where to start with Gen AI, the secure route is to examine what your enterprise providers are offering. Use this as a learning platform to confidently navigate which specialized Gen AI provider will be viable for meeting your use cases.

    Brace for a potential return of on-premises infrastructure to power Gen AI.

    The market trend has been for organizations to move to cloud-based products. Yet, for Gen AI, effective data processing and fine-tuning may call for organizations to invest in on-premises infrastructure (such as more GPUs) to enable their Gen AI to function effectively.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for understanding the Gen AI marketspace

    Phase Steps

    1. Contextualize the Gen AI marketplace

    1. Define Gen AI and its components.
    2. Explore Gen AI trends.
    3. Begin deriving Gen AI initiatives that align with business capabilities.

    2. Prepare for and understand Gen AI platform offerings

    1. Review Gen AI selection best practices and requisites for effective procurement.
    2. Determine evaluative criteria for Gen AI solutions.
    3. Explore Gen AI offerings with enterprise and specialized providers.
    Phase Outcomes
    1. Achieve consensus on Gen AI scope and key Gen AI capabilities.
    2. Identify your readiness to leverage Gen AI applications.
    3. Hand off to Build Your Generative AI Roadmap to complete pre-requisites for selection.
    1. Determine whether deeper data and AI governance is required; if so, hand off to Create an Architecture for AI.
    2. Gain consensus on Gen AI evaluative criteria.
    3. Understand vendor viability.

    Guided Implementation

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    • Call #1: Discover if Gen AI is right for your organization. Understand what a Gen AI platform is and discover the art of the possible.
    • Call #2: To take advantage of Gen AI, perform a business capabilities analysis to begin deriving Gen AI initiatives.
    • Call #3: Explore whether Gen AI initiatives can be achieved either with incumbent enterprise players or via procurement of specialized solutions.
    • Call #4: Evaluate vendors and perform final due diligence.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    The Gen AI market evaluation process should be broken into segments:

    1. Gen AI market education with this primer
    2. Structured approach to selection
    3. Evaluation and final due diligence

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful"

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Software selection engagement

    Five advisory calls over a five-week period to accelerate your selection process

    • Receive expert analyst guidance over five weeks (on average) to select and negotiate software.
    • Save money, align stakeholders, speed up the process, and make better decisions.
    • Use a repeatable, formal methodology to improve your application selection process.
    • Get better, faster results guaranteed, included in membership.
    Software selection process timeline. Week 1: Awareness - 1 hour call, Week 2: Education & Discovery - 1 hour call, Week 3: Evaluation - 1 hour call, Week 4: Selection - 1 hour call, Week 5: Negotiation & Configuration - 1 hour call.

    Click here to book your selection engagement.

    Software selection workshops

    40 hours of advisory assistance delivered online.

    Select better software, faster.

    • 40 hours of expert analyst guidance
    • Project and stakeholder management assistance
    • Save money, align stakeholders, speed up the process, and make better decisions
    • Better, faster results guaranteed; 25K standard engagement fee
    Software selection process timeline. Week 1: Awareness - 5 hours of Assistance, Week 2: Education & Discovery - 10 hours of assistance, Week 3: Evaluation - 10 hours of assistance, Week 4: Selection - 10 hours of assistance, Week 5: Negotiation & Configuration - 10 hours of assistance.

    Click here to book your workshop engagement.

    Build a Continual Improvement Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}463|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • IT managers must work hard to maintain and improve service quality or risk performance deterioration over time.
    • Leadership may feel lost about what to do next and which initiatives have higher priority for improvement.
    • The backlog of improvement initiatives makes the work even harder. Managers should involve the right people in the process and build a team that is responsible to monitor, measure, prioritize, implement, and test improvements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Without continual improvement, sustained service quality will be temporary. Organizations need to put in place an ongoing process to detect potential services, enhance their procedures, and sustain their performance, whatever the process maturity is.

    Impact and Result

    • Set strategic vision for the continual improvement program.
    • Build a team to set regulations, processes, and audits for the program.
    • Set measurable targets for the program.
    • Identify and prioritize improvement initiatives.
    • Measure and monitor progress to ensure initiatives achieve the desired outcome.
    • Apply lessons learned to the next initiatives.

    Build a Continual Improvement Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Continual Improvement Program – A step-by-step document to walk you through building a plan for efficient IT continual improvement.

    This storyboard will help you craft a continual improvement register and a workflow to ensure sustained service improvements that fulfill ongoing increases in stakeholder expectations.

    • Build a Continual Improvement Program Storyboard

    2. Continual Improvement Register and Workflow – Structured documents to help you outline improvement initiatives, prioritize them, and build a dashboard to streamline tracking.

    Use the Continual Improvement Register and Continual Improvement Workflow to help you brainstorm improvement items, get a better visibility into the items, and plan to execute improvements.

    • Continual Improvement Register
    • Continual Improvement Workflow (Visio)
    • Continual Improvement Workflow (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Build a Continual Improvement Program

    Don’t stop with process standardization; plan to continually improve and help those improvements stick.

    Analyst Perspective

    Go beyond standardizing basics

    IT managers often learn how to standardize IT services. Where they usually fail is in keeping these improvements sustainable. It’s one thing to build a quality process, but it’s another challenge entirely to keep momentum and know what to do next.

    To fill the gap, build a continual improvement plan to continuously increase value for stakeholders. This plan will help connect services, products, and practices with changing business needs.

    Without a continual improvement plan, managers may find themselves lost and wonder what’s next. This will lead to misalignment between ongoing and increasingly high stakeholder expectations and your ability to fulfill these requirements.

    Build a continual improvement program to engage executives, leaders, and subject matter experts (SMEs) to go beyond break fixes, enable proactive enhancements, and sustain process changes.

    Photo of Mahmoud Ramin, Ph.D., Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group. Mahmoud Ramin, Ph.D.
    Senior Research Analyst
    Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Even high-quality services and products need to be aligned with rising stakeholder expectations to sustain operational excellence.
    • Without the right leadership, commitment, and processes, improvements in service quality can be difficult to sustain.
    • Continual improvement is not only a development plan but also an organizational culture shift, which makes stakeholder buy-in even challenging.

    Common Obstacles

    • IT managers must work hard to maintain and improve service quality or risk performance deterioration over time.
    • Leadership feels lost about what to do next and which initiatives have higher priority for improvement.
    • A backlog of improvement initiatives makes the work even harder. Managers should involve the right people in the process and build a team that is responsible for monitoring, measuring, prioritizing, implementing, and testing improvements.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Set a strategic vision for the continual improvement program.
    • Build a team to set regulations, processes, and audits for the program.
    • Set measurable targets for the program.
    • Identify and prioritize improvement initiatives.
    • Measure and monitor progress to ensure initiatives achieve the desired outcome.
    • Apply lessons learned to the next initiatives.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Without continual improvement, any process maturity achieved around service quality will not be sustained. Organizations need to put in place an ongoing program to maintain their current maturity and continue to grow and improve by identifying new services and enhancing existing processes.

    Purpose of continual improvement

    There should be alignment between ongoing improvements of business products and services and management of these products and services. Continual improvement helps service providers adapt to changing environments. No matter how critical the service is to the business, failure to continually improve reduces the service value.

    Image of a notebook with an illustration titled 'Continuous Improvement'.

    Continual improvement is one of the five elements of ITIL’s Service Value System (SVS).

    Continual improvement should be documented in an improvement register to record and manage improvement initiatives.

    Continual improvement is a proactive approach to service management. It involves measuring the effectiveness and efficiency of people, processes, and technology to:

    • Identify areas for improvement.
    • Adapt to changes in the business environment.
    • Align the IT strategy to organizational goals.

    A continual improvement process helps service management move away from a reactive approach that focuses only on fixing problems as they occur.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure the basics are in place before you embark on a continual improvement initiative.

    Benefits of embedding a cross-organizational continual improvement approach

    Icon of a computer screen. Encourage end users to provide feedback on service quality. Icon of a crossed pencil and wrench.

    Provide an opportunity to stakeholders to define requirements and raise their concerns.

    Icon of a storefront.

    Embed continual improvement in all service delivery procedures.

    Icon of chevrons moving backward.

    Turn failures into improvement opportunities rather than contributing to a blame culture.

    Icon of a telescope.

    Improve practice effectiveness that enhances IT efficiency.

    Icon of a thumbs up in a speech bubble.

    Improve end-user satisfaction that positively impacts brand reputation.

    Icon of shopping bags.

    Improve operational costs while maintaining a high level of satisfaction.

    Icon of a magnifying glass over a map marker.

    Help the business become more proactive by identifying and improving services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It’s the responsibility of the organization’s leaders to develop and promote a continual improvement culture. Work with the business unit leads and communicate the benefits of continual improvement to get their buy-in for the practice and achieve the long-term impact.

    Build a feedback program to get input into where improvement initiatives are needed

    A well-maintained continual improvement process creates a proper feedback mechanism for the following stakeholder groups:
    • Users
    • Suppliers
    • Service delivery team members
    • Service owners
    • Sponsors
    An efficient feedback mechanism should be constructed around the following initiatives:
    Target with an arrow in the bullseye. The arrow has four flags: 'Perceived value by users', 'Service effectiveness', 'Service governance', and 'Service demand'.
    Stakeholders who participate in feedback activities should feel comfortable providing suggestions for improvement.

    Work closely with the service desk team to build communication channels to conduct surveys. Avoid formal bureaucratic communications and enforce openness in communicating the value of feedback the stakeholders can provide.

    Info-Tech Insight

    When conducting feedback activities with users, keep surveys anonymous and ensure users’ information is kept confidential. Make sure everyone else is comfortable providing feedback in a constructive way so that you can seek clarification and create a feedback loop.

    Implement an iterative continual improvement model and ensure that your services align with your organizational vision

    Build a six-step process for your continual improvement plan. Make it a loop, in which each step becomes an input for the next step. A cycle around a dartboard with numbered steps: '01 Determine your goals', '02 Define the process team', '03 Determine initiatives', '04 Prioritize initiatives', '05 Execute improvement', '06 Establish a learning culture'.

    1. Determine your goals

    A vision statement communicates your desired future state of the IT organization.

    Your IT goals should always support your organizational goals. IT goals are high-level objectives that the IT organization needs to achieve to reach a target state.
    A cycle of the bolded statements on the right surrounding a dartboard with two bullseyes.

    Understand the high-level business objectives to set the vision for continual improvement in a way that will align IT strategies with business strategies.

    Obtaining a clear picture of your organization’s goals and overall corporate strategy is one of the crucial first steps to continual improvement and will set the stage for the metrics you select. Document your continual improvement program goals and objectives.

    Knowing what your business is doing and understanding the impact of IT on the business will help you ensure that any metrics you collect will be business focused.

    Understanding the long-term vision of the business and its appetite for commitment and sponsorship will also inform your IT strategy and continual improvement goals.

    Assess the future state

    At this stage, you need to visualize improvement, considering your critical success factors.

    Critical success factors (CSFs) are higher-level goals or requirements for success, such as improving end-user satisfaction. They’re factors that must be met in order to reach your IT and business strategic vision.

    Select key performance indicators (KPIs) that will identify useful information for the initiative: Define KPIs for each CSF. These will usually involve a trend, as an increase or decrease in something. If KPIs already exist for your IT processes, re-evaluate them to assess their relevance to current strategy and redefine if necessary. Selected KPIs should provide a full picture of the health of targeted practice.

    KPIs should cover these four vectors of practice performance:

    1. Quantity
      How many continual improvement initiatives are in progress
    2. Quality
      How well you implemented improvements
    3. Timeliness
      How long it took to get continual improvement initiatives done
    4. Compliance
      How well processes and controls are being executed, such as system availability
    Cross-section of a head split into sections with icons in the middle sections.

    Examples of key CSFs and KPIs for continual improvement

    CSF

    KPI

    Adopt and maintain an effective approach for continual improvement Improve stakeholder satisfaction due to implementation of improvement initiatives.
    Enhance stakeholder awareness about continual improvement plan and initiatives.
    Increase continual improvement adoption across the organization.
    Commit to effective continual improvement across the business Improve the return on investment.
    Increase the impact of the improvement initiatives on process maturity.
    Increase the rate of successful improvement initiatives.

    Prepare a vision statement to communicate the improvement strategy

    IT Implications + Business Context –› IT Goals
    • IT implications are derived from the business context and inform goals by aligning the IT goals with the business context.
    • Business context encompasses an understanding of the factors impacting the business from various perspectives, how the business makes decisions, and what it is trying to achieve.
    • IT goals are high-level, specific objectives that the IT organization needs to achieve to reach the target state. IT goals begin a process of framing what IT as an organization needs to be able to do in the target state.

    IT goals will help identify the target state, IT capabilities, and the initiatives that will need to be implemented to enable those capabilities.

    The vision statement is expressed in the present tense. It seeks to articulate the desired role of IT and how IT will be perceived.

    Strong IT vision statements have the following characteristics:
    Arrow pointing right. Describe a desired future
    Arrow pointing right. Focus on ends, not means
    Arrow pointing right. Communicate promise
    Arrow pointing right. Work as an elevator pitch:
    • Concise; no unnecessary words
    • Compelling
    • Achievable
    • Inspirational
    • Memorable

    2. Define the process team

    The structure of each continual improvement team depends on resource availability and competency levels.

    Make sure to allocate continual improvement activities to the available resources and assess the requirement to bring in others to fulfill all tasks.

    Brainstorm what steps should be included in a continual improvement program:

    • Who is responsible for identifying, logging, and prioritizing improvement opportunities?
    • Who makes the business case for improvement initiatives?
    • Who is the owner of the register, responsible for documenting initiatives and updating their status?
    • Who executes implementation?
    • Who evaluates implementation success?
    Match stakeholder skill sets with available resources to ensure continual improvement processes are handled properly. Brainstorm skills specific to the program:
    • Knowledge of provided products and services.
    • Good understanding of organization’s goals and objectives.
    • Efficiency in collecting and measuring metrics, understanding company standards and policies, and presenting them to impacted stakeholders.
    • Competency in strategic thinking and aligning the organization’s goals with improvement initiatives.

    Enable the continual improvement program by clarifying responsibilities

    Determine roles and responsibilities to ensure accountability

    The continual improvement activities will only be successful if specific roles and responsibilities are clearly identified.

    Depending on available staff and resources, you may be able to have full-time continual improvement roles, or you may include continual improvement activities in individuals’ job descriptions.

    Each improvement action that you identify should have clear ownership and accountability to ensure that it is completed within the specified timeframe.

    Roles and responsibilities can be reassigned throughout the continual improvement process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Create cross-functional teams to improve perspective and not focus on only one small group when trying to problem solve. Having other teams hear and reframe the issue or talk about how they can help to solve issues as a team can create bigger solutions that will help the entire IT team, not just one group.

    Consider assigning dedicated continual improvement roles

    Silhouette of a business person.
    CI Coordinator

    Continual improvement coordinators are responsible for moving projects to the implementation phase and monitoring all continual improvement roles.

    Silhouette of a business person.
    Business Owner

    Business owners are accountable for business governance, compliance, and ROI analysis. They are responsible for operational and monetary aspects of the business.

    Silhouette of a business person.
    IT Owner

    IT owners are responsible for developing the action plan and ensuring success of the initiatives. They are usually the subject matter experts, focusing on technical aspects.

    3. Determine improvement initiatives

    Businesses usually make the mistake of focusing too much on making existing processes better while missing gaps in their practices.

    Gather stakeholder feedback to help you evaluate the maturity levels of IT practices Sample of the End User Satisfaction Survey.

    You need to understand the current state of service operations to understand how you can provide value through continual improvement. Give everyone an opportunity to provide feedback on IT services.

    Use Info-Tech’s End User Satisfaction Survey to define the state of your core IT services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Become proactive to improve satisfaction. Continual improvement is not only about identifying pain points and improving them. It enables you to proactively identify initiatives for further service improvement using both practice functionality and technology enablement.

    Understand the current state of your IT practices

    Determine the maturity level of your IT areas to help you understand which processes need improvement. Involve the practice team in maturity assessment activities to get ideas and input from them. This will also help you get their buy-in and engagement for improvement.

    Leverage performance metrics to analyze performance level. Metrics play a key role in understanding what needs improvement. After you implement metrics, have an impact report regularly generated to monitor them.

    Use problem management to identify root causes for the identified gaps. Potential sources of problems can be:

    • Recurring issues that may be an indicator of an underlying problem.
    • Business processes or service issues that are not IT related, such as inefficient business process or service design issues.

    Establish an improvement roadmap and execute initiatives

    Build a continual improvement register (CIR) for your target initiatives

    A CIR is a document used for recording your action plan from the beginning to the end of the improvement project.

    If you just sit and plan for improvements without acting on them, nothing will improve. CIR helps you create an action plan and allows you to manage, track, and prioritize improvement suggestions.

    Consider tracking the following information in your CIR, adjusted to meet the needs of your organization:

    Information

    Description

    Business value impact Identify approved themes or goals that each initiative should apply to. These can and should change over time based on changing business needs.
    Effort/cost Identify the expected effort or cost the improvement initiative will require.
    Priority How urgent is the improvement? Categorize based on effort, cost, and risk levels.
    Status Ensure each initiative has a status assigned that reflects its current state.
    Timeline List the timeframe to start the improvement initiative based on the priority level.
    CI functional groups Customize the functional groups in your CI program

    Populate your register with ideas that come from your first round of assessments and use this document to continually add and track new ideas as they emerge.

    You can also consider using the register to track the outcomes and benefits of improvement initiatives after they have been completed.

    Activity: Use the Continual Improvement Register template to brainstorm responsibilities, generate improvement initiatives, and action plan

    1-3 hours
    1. Open the Continual Improvement Register template and navigate to tab 2, Setup.
    2. Brainstorm your definitions for the following items to get a clear understanding of these items when completing the CIR. The more quantification you apply to the criteria, the more tangible evaluation you will do:
      • Business value impact categories
      • Effort/cost
      • Priority
      • Status
      • Timeline
    3. Discuss the teams that the upcoming initiatives will belong to and update them under CI Functional Groups.
    1. Analyze the assessment data collected throughout stakeholder feedback and your current-state evaluation.
    2. Use this data to generate a list of initiatives that should be undertaken to improve the performance of the targeted processes.
    3. Use sticky notes to record identified CI initiatives.
    4. Record each initiative in tab 3, CI Register, along with associated information:
      • A unique ID number for the initiative
      • The individual who submitted the idea
      • The team the initiative belongs to
      • A description of the initiative

    Download the Continual Improvement Register template

    Activity: Use the Continual Improvement Register template to brainstorm responsibilities, generate improvement initiatives, and action plan

    Input

    • List of key stakeholders for continual improvement
    • Current state of services and processes

    Output

    • Continual improvement register setup
    • List of initiatives for continual improvement

    Materials

    • Continual improvement register
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participant

    • CIO
    • IT managers
    • Project managers
    • Continual improvement manager/coordinator

    4. Prioritize initiatives

    Prioritization should be transparent and available to stakeholders.

    Some initiatives are more critical than others to achieve and should be prioritized accordingly. Some improvements require large investments and need an equally large effort, while some are relatively low-cost, low-effort improvements. Focus on low-hanging fruit and prioritize low-cost, low-effort improvements to help the organization with rapid growth. This will also help you get stakeholder buy-in for the rest of your continual improvement program.

    Prioritize improvement initiatives in your CIR to increase visibility and ensure larger improvement initiatives are done the next cycle. As one improvement cycle ends, the next cycle begins, which allows the continual improvement team to keep pace with changing business requirements.

    Stock image of a person on a ladder leaning against a bookshelf.

    Identify “quick wins” that can provide immediate improvement

    Prioritize these quick wins to immediately demonstrate the success of the continual service improvement effort to the business.

    01

    Keep the scope of the continual improvement process manageable at the beginning by focusing on a few key areas that you want to improve.
    • If you have identified pain points, addressing these will demonstrate the value of the project to the business to gain their support.
    • Choose the services or processes that continue to disrupt or threaten service – focus on where pain points are evident and where there is a need for improvement.
    • Critical services to improve should emerge from the current-state assessments.

    02

    From your list of proposed improvements, focus on a few of the top pain points and plan to address those.

    03

    Choose the right services to improve at the first stage of continual improvement to ensure that the continual improvement process delivers value to the business.

    Activity: Prioritize improvement initiatives

    2-3 hours

    Input: List of initiatives for continual improvement

    Output: Prioritized list of initiatives

    Materials: Continual improvement register, Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Laptops

    Participants: CIO, IT managers, Project managers, Continual improvement manager

    1. In the CI Register tab of the Continual Improvement Register template, define the status, priority, effort/cost, and timeline according to the definition of each in the data entry tab.
    2. Review improvement initiatives from the previous activity.
    3. Record the CI coordinator, business owner, and IT owner for each initiative.
    4. Fill out submission date to track when the initiative was added to the register.
    5. According to the updated items, you will get a dashboard of items based on their categories, effort, priority, status, and timeline. You will also get a visibility into the total number of improvement initiatives.
    6. Focus on the short-term initiatives that are higher priority and require less effort.
    7. Refer to the Continual Improvement Workflow template and update the steps.

    Download the Continual Improvement Register template

    Download the Continual Improvement Workflow template

    5. Execute improvement

    Develop a plan for improvement

    Determine how you want to reach your improvement objectives. Define how to make processes work better.
    Icons representing steps. Descriptions below.
    Make a business case for your action plan Determine budget for implementing the improvement and move to execution. Find out how long it takes to build the improvement in the practice. Confirm the resources and skill sets you require for the improvement. Communicate the improvement plan across the business for better visibility and for seamless organizational change management, if needed. Lean into incremental improvements to ensure practice quality is sustained, not temporary. Put in place an ongoing process to audit, enhance, and sustain the performance of the target practice.

    Create a specific action plan to guide your improvement activities

    As part of the continual improvement plan, identify specific actions to be completed, along with ownership for each action.

    The continual improvement process must:

    • Define activities to be completed.
    • Create roles and assign ownership to complete activities.
    • Provide training and awareness about the initiative.
    • Define inputs and outputs.
    • Include reporting.

    For each action, identify:

    • The problem.
    • Who will be responsible and accountable.
    • Metric(s) for assessment.
    • Baseline and target metrics.
    • Action to be taken to achieve improvement (training, new templates, etc.).

    Choose timelines:

    • Firm timelines are important to keep the project on track.
    • One to two months for an initiative is an ideal length of time to maintain interest and enthusiasm for the specific project and achieve a result.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every organization is unique in terms of its services, processes, strengths, weaknesses, and needs, as well as the expectations of its end users. There is no single action plan that will work for everyone. The improvement plan will vary from organization to organization, but the key elements of the plan (i.e. specific priorities, timelines, targets, and responsibilities) should always be in place.

    Build a communication plan to ensure the implementation of continual improvement stakeholder buy-in

    1. Throughout the improvement process, share information about both the status of the project and the impact of the improvement initiatives.
    Icon of a group of people. Encourage a collaborative environment across all members of the practice team.
    Icon of an ascending graph. Motivate every individual to continue moving upward and taking ownership over their roles.
    Icon of overlapping speech bubbles. Communication among team members ensures that everyone is on the same page working together toward a common goal.
    Icon of a handshake. The most important thing is to get the support of your team. Unless you have their support, you won’t be able to deliver any of the solutions you draw up.
    2. The end users should be kept in the loop so they can feel that their contribution is valued.
    Icon of an arrow pointing right. When improvements happen and only a small group of people are involved in the results and action plan, misconceptions will arise.
    Icon of a thumbs up in a speech bubble. If communication is lacking, end users will provide less feedback on the practice improvements.
    Icon of a cone made of stacked layers. For end users to feel their concerns are being considered, you must communicate the findings in a way that conveys the impact of their contribution.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To be effective, continual improvement requires open and honest feedback from IT staff. Debriefings work well for capturing information about lessons learned. Break down the debriefings into smaller, individual activities completed within each phase of the project to better capture the large amount of data and lessons learned within that phase.

    Measure the success of your improvement program

    Continual improvement is everybody’s job within the organization.

    Determine how improvements impacted stakeholders. Build a relationship pyramid to analyze how improvements impacted external users and narrow down to the internal users, implementing team, and leaders.
    1. How did we make improvements with our partners and suppliers? –› Look into your contracts and measure the SLAs and commitments.
    2. How could improvement initiatives impact the organization? –› Involve everybody to provide feedback. Rerun the end-user satisfaction survey and compare with the baseline that you obtained before improvement implementation.
    3. How does the improvement team feel about the whole process? –› What were the lessons learned, and can the team apply the lessons in the next improvement initiatives?
    4. How did the leaders manage and lead improvements? –› Were they able to provide proper vision to guide the improvement team through the process?
    A relationship pyramid with the initial questions on the left starting from '1' at the bottom to '4' at the 2nd highest level.

    Measure changes in selected metrics to evaluate success

    Measuring and reporting are key components in the improvement process.

    Adjust improvement priority based on updated objectives. Justify the reason. Refer to your CIR to document it.

    Did you get there?

    Part of the measurement should include a review of CSFs and KPIs determined in step 1 (assess the future state). Some may need to be replaced.

    • After an improvement has been implemented, it is important to regularly monitor and evaluate the CSFs and KPIs you chose and run reports to evaluate whether the implemented improvement has actually resolved the service/process issues or helped you achieve your objectives.
    • Establish a schedule for regularly reviewing key metrics that were identified in Step 1 and assessing change in those metrics and progress toward reaching objectives.
    • In addition to reviewing CSFs, KPIs, and metrics, check in with the IT organization and end users to measure their perceptions of the change once an appropriate amount of time has passed.
    • Ensure that metrics are telling the whole story and that reporting is honest in order to be informative.
    Outcomes of the continual improvement process should include:
    • Improved efficiency, effectiveness, and quality of processes and services.
    • Processes and services more aligned with the business needs and strategy.
    • Maturity of processes and services.

    For a guideline to determine a list of metrics, refer to Info-Tech’s blueprints:

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure you’re measuring the right things and considering all sources of information. Don’t rely on a single or very few metrics. Instead, consider a group of metrics to help you get a better holistic view of improvement initiatives and their impact on IT operations.

    6. Establish a learning culture and apply it to other practices

    Reflect on lessons learned to drive change forward

    What did you learn?
    Icon of a checklist and pencil. Ultimately, continual improvement is an ongoing educational program.
    Icon of a brain with a lighting bolt.
    Icon of a wrench in a speech bubble. By teaching your team how to learn better and identify sources of new knowledge that can be applied going forward, you maximize the efficacy of your team and improvement plan effort.
    What obstacles prevented you from reaching your target condition?
    Icon of a map marker. If you did not reach your target goals, reflect as a team on what obstacles prevented you from reaching that target.
    Icon of a wrench in a gear. Focus on the obstacles that are preventing your team from reaching the target state.
    Icon of a sun behind clouds. As obstacles are removed, new ones will appear, and old ones will disappear.

    Compare expectations versus reality

    Compare the EC (expected change) to the AC (actual change)
    Arrow pointing down.
    Arrow pointing left and down labelled 'Small'. Evaluate the differences: how large is the difference from what you expected? Arrow pointing right and down labelled 'Large'.
    Things are on track and the issue could have simply been an issue with timing of the improvement. More reflection is needed. Perhaps it is a gap in understanding the goal or a poor execution of the action plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Regardless of the cause, large differences between the EC and the AC provide great learning opportunities about how to approach change in the future.

    A cycle around a dartboard with numbered steps: '01 Determine your goals', '02 Define the process team', '03 Determine initiatives', '04 Prioritize initiatives', '05 Execute improvement', '06 Establish a learning culture'.

    Think long-term to sustain changes

    The continual improvement process is ongoing. When one improvement cycle ends, the next should begin in order to continually measure and evaluate processes.

    The goal of any framework is steady and continual improvement over time that resets the baseline to the current (and hopefully improved) level at the end of each cycle.

    Have processes in place to ensure that the improvements made will remain in place after the change is implemented. Each completed cycle is just another step toward your target state.
    Icon of a group of people. Ensure that there is a continual commitment from management.
    Icon of a bar chart. Regularly monitor metrics as well as stakeholder feedback after the initial improvement period has ended. Use this information to plan the next improvement.
    Icon of gears. Continual improvement is a combination of attitudes, behavior, and culture.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of 'Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy'. Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy

    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals, IT excellence, and driving technology innovation.

    Sample of 'Develop Meaningful Service Metrics'. Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Reinforce service orientation in your IT organization by ensuring your IT metrics generate value-driven resource behavior.

    Sample of 'Common Challenges to incident management success'. Improve Incident and Problem Management

    Rise above firefighter mode with structured incident management to enable effective problem management.

    Works Cited

    “Continual Improvement ITIL4 Practice Guide.” AXELOS, 2020. Accessed August 2022.

    “5 Tips for Adopting ITIL 4’s Continual Improvement Management Practice.” SysAid, 2021. Accessed August 2022.

    Jacob Gillingham. “ITIL Continual Service Improvement And 7-Step Improvement Process” Invensis Global Learning Services, 2022. Accessed August 2022.

    Leadership, Culture and Values

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}34|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}34|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $912
    • member rating average days saved: 7
    • Parent Category Name: People and Resources
    • Parent Category Link: /people-and-resources

    The challenge

    • Your talent pool determines IT performance and stakeholder satisfaction. You need to retain talent and continually motivate them to go the extra mile.
    • The market for IT talent is growing, in the sense that talent has many more options these days. Turnover is a serious threat to IT's ability to deliver top-notch service to your company.
    • Engagement is more than HR's responsibility. IT leadership is accountable for the retention of top talent and the overall productivity of IT employees.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • Engagement goes both ways. Your initiatives must address a real need, and employees must actively seek the outcomes. Engagement is not a management edict.
    • Engagement is not about access to the latest perks and gadgets. You must address the right and challenging issues. Use a systematic approach to find what lives among the employees and address these.
    • Your impact on your employees is many times bigger than HR's. Leverage your power to lead your team to success and peak performance.

    Impact and results 

    • Our engagement diagnostic and other tools will help get to the root of disengagement in your team.
    • Our guidance helps you to avoid common errors and engagement program pitfalls. They allow you to take control of your own team's engagement.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started

    Our concise executive brief shows you why engagement is critical to IT performance in your company. We'll show you our methodology and the ways we can help you in handling this.

    Measure your employee engagement

    You can use our full engagement surveys.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 1: Measure Employee Engagement (ppt)
    • Engagement Strategy Record (doc)
    • Engagement Communication Template (doc)

    Analyze the results and brainstorm solutions

    Understand your employees' engagement drivers. Involve your team in brainstorming engagement initiatives.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 2: Analyze Results and Ideate Solutions (ppt)
    • Engagement Survey Results Interpretation Guide (ppt)
    • Full Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide (ppt)
    • Pulse Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide (ppt)
    • Focus Group Facilitation Guide Driver Definitions (doc)
    • One-on-One Manager Meeting Worksheet (doc)

    Select and implement engagement initiatives

    Choose those initiatives that show the most promise with the most significant impact. Create your action plan and establish transparent and open, and ongoing communication with your team.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template (xls)
    • IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template (doc)

    Build your knowledge transfer roadmap

    Knowledge transfer is an ongoing effort. Prioritize and define your initiatives.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 3: Select and Implement Engagement Initiatives (ppt)
    • Summary of Interdepartmental Engagement Initiatives (doc)
    • Engagement Progress One-Pager (ppt)

     

    Change Management's Role in Incident Prevention: standard changes

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    During peak business hours, I witnessed a straightforward database field addition bring down a whole e-commerce platform. It was meant to be standard procedure, the type of “standard change” that is automatically approved because we have performed it innumerable times.

    Adding a field to the end of a table and having applications retrieve data by field name instead of position made the change itself textbook low-impact. There is no need to alter the application or the functional flow. This could have been problematic in the past if you added a field in the middle of the list and it affected the values of other fields, but adding it at the end? That ought to have been impenetrable.

    However, it wasn't.

    Before I tell you what went wrong, let me explain why this is important to all of the IT professionals who are reading this.

    Over the past three decades, industry data has repeatedly supported what this incident taught me: our presumptions about “safe” changes are frequently our greatest weakness. Upon reviewing the ITIL research, I was not surprised to learn that failed changes, many of which were categorized as “standard” or “low-risk,” are responsible for about 80% of unplanned outages.

    When you look more closely, the numbers become even more concerning. Since I've been following the Ponemon Institute's work for years, I wasn't surprised to learn that companies with well-established change management procedures have 65% fewer unscheduled outages. The paradox surprised me: many of these “mature” procedures still operate under the premise that safety correlates with repetition.

    What I had been observing in the field for decades was confirmed when Gartner released their research showing that standard changes are responsible for almost 40% of change-related incidents. The very changes we consider safe enough to avoid thorough review subtly create some of our greatest risks. IBM's analysis supports the pattern I've seen in innumerable organizations: standard changes cause three times as much business disruption due to their volume and our decreased vigilance around them, whereas emergency changes receive all the attention and scrutiny.

    Aberdeen Group data indicates that the average cost of an unplanned outage has increased to $300,000 per hour, with change-related failures accounting for the largest category of preventable incidents. This data makes the financial reality stark.

    What precisely went wrong with the addition of that database field that caused our e-commerce platform to crash?

    We were unaware that the addition of this one field would cause the database to surpass an internal threshold, necessitating a thorough examination of its execution strategy. In its algorithmic wisdom, the database engine determined that the table structure had changed enough to necessitate rebuilding its access and retrieval mechanisms. Our applications relied on high-speed requests, and the new execution plan was terribly unoptimized for them.

    Instead of completing quotes or purchases, customers were spending minutes viewing error pages. All applications began to time out while they awaited data that just wasn't showing up in the anticipated amounts of time. Thousands of transactions were impacted by a single extra field that should have been invisible to the application layer.

    The field addition itself was not the primary cause. We assumed that since we had made similar adjustments dozens of times previously, this one would also act in the same way. Without taking into account the hidden complexities of database optimization thresholds, we had categorized it as a standard change based on superficial similarities.

    My approach to standard changes was completely altered by this experience, and it is now even more applicable in DevOps-driven environments. Many organizations use pipeline deployments, which produce a standard change at runtime. It's great for speed and reliability, but it can easily fall into the same trap.

    However, I have witnessed pipeline deployments result in significant incidents for non-code-related reasons. Due to timing, resource contention, or environmental differences that weren't noticeable in earlier runs, a deployment that performed flawlessly in development and staging abruptly fails in production. Although the automation boosts our confidence, it may also reveal blind spots.

    Over the course of thirty years, I have come to the unsettling realization that there is no such thing as a truly routine change in complex systems. Every modification takes place in a slightly different setting, with varying environmental factors, data states, and system loads. What we refer to as “standard changes” are actually merely modifications with comparable processes rather than risk profiles.

    For this reason, I support contextual change management. We must consider the system state, timing, dependencies, and cumulative effect of recent changes rather than just categorizing them based on their technical features. After three other changes have changed the system's behavior patterns, a change made at two in the morning on a Sunday with little system load is actually different from the same change made during peak business hours.

    Effective change advisory boards must therefore go beyond assessing individual changes separately. I've worked with organizations where the change board carefully considered and approved each modification on its own merits, only to find that the cumulative effect of seemingly unrelated changes led to unexpected interactions and stress on the system. The most developed change management procedures I've come across mandate that their advisory boards take a step back and look at the whole change portfolio over a specified period of time. They inquire whether we are altering the database too frequently during a single maintenance window. Could there be unanticipated interactions between these three different application updates? What is the total resource impact of this week's approved changes?

    It's the distinction between forest management and tree management. While each change may seem logical individually, when combined, they can create situations beyond the scope of any single change assessment.

    Having worked in this field for thirty years, I've come to the conclusion that our greatest confidences frequently conceal our greatest vulnerabilities. Our primary blind spots frequently arise from the changes we've made a hundred times before, the procedures we've automated and standardized, and the adjustments we've labeled as “routine.”

    Whether we should slow down our deployment pipelines or stop using standard changes is not the question. In the current competitive environment, speed and efficiency are crucial. The issue is whether we are posing the appropriate queries before carrying them out. Are we taking into account not only what the change accomplishes but also when it occurs, what else is changing at the same time, and how our systems actually look right now?

    I've discovered that the phrase “we've done this before” is more dangerous in IT operations than “what could go wrong?” Because, despite what we may believe, we never actually perform the same action twice in complex systems.

    Here is what I would like you to think about: which everyday modifications are subtly putting your surroundings at risk? Which procedures have you standardized or automated to the extent that you no longer challenge their presumptions? Most importantly, when was the last time your change advisory board examined your changes as a cohesive portfolio of system modifications rather than as discrete items on a checklist?

    Remember that simple addition to a database field the next time you're tempted to accept a standard change. The most unexpected outcomes can occasionally result from the most routine adjustments.

    I'm always up for a conversation if you want to talk about your difficulties with change management.

    pricing

    • TymansGroupVideosExcerpt: BasicFor freelancers$19/ month 10 presentations/monthSupport at $25/hour1 campaign/month Choose plan StandardFor medium sized teams$29/ month 50 presentations/month5 hours of free support10 campaigns/month Choose plan EnterpriseFor large companies$79/ month Unlimited presentationsUnlimited supportUnlimited campaigns Choose plan

    Pricing

    Our pricing options will be available soon for simple download,

    In the meantime, please book a free discovery call. No cost, no sales pitch.

    Continue reading

    Project Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}48|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}48|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $303,499
    • member rating average days saved: 42
    • Parent Category Name: Project Portfolio Management and Projects
    • Parent Category Link: /ppm-and-projects

    The challenge

    • Ill-defined or even lack of upfront project planning will increase the perception that your IT department cannot deliver value because most projects will go over time and budget.
    • The perception is those traditional ways of delivering projects via the PMBOK only increase overhead and do not have value. This is less due to the methodology and more to do with organizations trying to implement best-practices that far exceed their current capabilities.
    • Typical best-practices are too clinical in their approach and place unrealistic burdens on IT departments. They fail to address the daily difficulties faces by staff and are not sized to fit your organization.
    • Take a flexible approach and ensure that your management process is a cultural and capacity fit for your organization. Take what fits from these frameworks and embed them tailored into your company.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • The feather-touch is often the right touch. Ensure that you have a lightweight approach for most of your projects while applying more rigor to the more complex and high-risk developments.
    • Pick the right tools. Your new project management processes need the right tooling to be successful. Pick a tool that is flexible enough o accommodate projects of all sizes without imposing undue governance onto smaller projects.
    • Yes, take what fits within your company from frameworks, but there is no cherry-picking. Ensure your processes stay in context: If you do not inform for effective decision-making, all will be in vain. Develop your methods such that guide the way to big-picture decision taking and support effective portfolio management.

    Impact and results 

    • The right amount of upfront planning is a function of the type of projects you have and your company. The proper levels enable better scope statements, better requirements gathering, and increased business satisfaction.
    • An investment in a formal methodology is critical to projects of all sizes. An effective process results in more successful projects with excellent business value delivery.
    • When you have a repeatable and consistent approach to project planning and execution, you can better communicate between the IT project managers and decision-makers.
    • Better communication improves the visibility of the overall project activity within your company.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started.

    Read our executive brief to understand why you should tailor project management practices to the type of projects you do and your company and review our methodology. We show you how we can support you.

    Lay the groundwork for project management success

    Assess your current capabilities to set the right level of governance.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 1: Lay the Groundwork for PM Success (ppt)
    • Project Management Triage Tool (xls)
    • COBIT BAI01 (Manage Programs and Projects) Alignment Workbook (xls)
    • Project Level Definition Matrix (xls)
    • Project Level Selection Tool (xls)
    • Project Level Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Project Management SOP Template (doc)

    Small project require a lightweight framework

    Increase small project's throughput.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 2: Build a Lightweight PM Process for Small Initiatives (ppt)
    • Level 1 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Closure Checklist Template (doc)

    Build the standard process medium and large-scale projects

    The standard process contains fully featured initiation and planning.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 3: Establish Initiation and Planning Protocols for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Stakeholder and Impact Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Level 2 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Kick-Off Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Scope Statement Template (doc)
    • Project Staffing Plan(xls)
    • Communications Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Customer/Sponsor Project Status Meeting Template (doc)
    • Level 2 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Quality Management Workbook (xls)
    • Benefits Management Plan Template (xls)
    • Risk Management Workbook (xls)

    Build a standard process for the execution and closure of medium to large scale projects

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 4: Develop Execution and Closing Procedures for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Team Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Light Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Detailed Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Light Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Detailed Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Deliverable Acceptance Form Template (doc)
    • Handover to Operations Template (doc)
    • Post-Mortem Review Template (doc)
    • Final Sign-Off and Acceptance Form Template (doc)

    Implement your project management standard operating procedures (SOP)

    Develop roll-out and training plans, implement your new process and track metrics.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 5: Implement Your PM SOP (ppt)
    • Level 2 Project Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Process Costing Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Training Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Training Monitoring Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (MS Project)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (xls)

     

     

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}438|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $18,849 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 66 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • Your organization has introduced project portfolio management (PPM) processes that require new levels of visibility into the project portfolio that were not required before.
    • Key PPM decision makers are requesting new or improved dashboards and reports to help support making difficult decisions.
    • Often PPM dashboards and reports provide too much information and are difficult to navigate, resulting in information overload and end-user disengagement.
    • PPM dashboards and reports are laborious to maintain; ineffective dashboards end up wasting scarce resources, delay decisions, and negatively impact the perceived value of the PMO.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Well-designed dashboards and reports help actively engage stakeholders in effective management of the project portfolio by communicating information and providing support to key PPM decision makers. This tends to improve PPM performance, making resource investments into reporting worthwhile.
    • Observations and insights gleaned from behavioral studies and cognitive sciences (largely ignored in PPM literature) can help PMOs design dashboards and reports that avoid information overload and that provide targeted decision support to key PPM decision makers.

    Impact and Result

    • Enhance your PPM dashboards and reports by carrying out a carefully designed enhancement project. Start by clarifying the purpose of PPM dashboards and reports. Establish a focused understanding of PPM decision-support needs, and design dashboards and reports to address these in a targeted way.
    • Conduct a thorough review of all existing dashboards and reports, evaluating the need, effort, usage, and satisfaction of each report to eliminate any unnecessary or ineffective dashboards and design improved dashboards and reports that will address these gaps.
    • Design effective and targeted dashboards and reports to improve the engagement of senior leaders in PPM and help improve PPM performance.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should enhance your PPM reports and dashboards, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish a PPM dashboard and reporting enhancement project plan

    Identify gaps, establish a list of dashboards and reports to enhance, and set out a roadmap for your dashboard and reporting enhancement project.

    • Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports – Phase 1: Establish a PPM Dashboard and Reporting Enhancement Project Plan
    • PPM Decision Support Review Workbook
    • PPM Dashboard and Reporting Audit Workbook
    • PPM Dashboard and Reporting Audit Worksheets – Exisiting
    • PPM Dashboard and Reporting Audit Worksheets – Proposed
    • PPM Metrics Menu
    • PPM Dashboard and Report Enhancement Project Charter Template

    2. Design and build enhanced PPM dashboards and reporting

    Gain an understanding of how to design effective dashboards and reports.

    • Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports – Phase 2: Design and Build New or Improved PPM Dashboards and Reporting
    • PPM Dashboard and Report Requirements Workbook
    • PPM Executive Dashboard Template
    • PPM Dashboard and Report Visuals Template
    • PPM Capacity Dashboard Operating Manual

    3. Implement and maintain effective PPM dashboards and reporting

    Officially close and evaluate the PPM dashboard and reporting enhancement project and transition to an ongoing and sustainable PPM dashboard and reporting program.

    • Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports – Phase 3: Implement and Maintain Effective PPM Dashboards and Reporting
    • PPM Dashboard and Reporting Program Manual
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish a PPM Dashboard and Reporting Enhancement

    The Purpose

    PPM dashboards and reports will only be effective and valuable if they are designed to meet your organization’s specific needs and priorities.

    Conduct a decision-support review and a thorough dashboard and report audit to identify the gaps your project will address.

    Take advantage of the planning stage to secure sponsor and stakeholder buy-in.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Current-state assessment of satisfaction with PPM decision-making support.

    Current-state assessment of all existing dashboards and reports: effort, usage, and satisfaction.

    A shortlist of dashboards and reports to improve that is informed by actual needs and priorities.

    A shortlist of dashboards and reports to create that is informed by actual needs and priorities.

    The foundation for a purposeful and focused PPM dashboard and reporting program that is sustainable in the long term.

    Activities

    1.1 Engage in PPM decision-making review.

    1.2 Perform a PPM dashboard and reporting audit and gap analysis.

    1.3 Identify dashboards and/or reports needed.

    1.4 Plan the PPM dashboard and reporting project.

    Outputs

    PPM Decision-Making Review

    PPM Dashboard and Reporting Audit

    Prioritized list of dashboards and reports to be improved and created

    Roadmap for the PPM dashboard and reporting project

    2 Design New or Improved PPM Dashboards and Reporting

    The Purpose

    Once the purpose of each PPM dashboard and report has been identified (based on needs and priorities) it is important to establish what exactly will be required to produce the desired outputs.

    Gathering stakeholder and technical requirements will ensure that the proposed and finalized designs are realistic and sustainable in the long term.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Dashboard and report designs that are informed by a thorough analysis of stakeholder and technical requirements.

    Dashboard and report designs that are realistically sustainable in the long term.

    Activities

    2.1 Review the best practices and science behind effective dashboards and reporting.

    2.2 Gather stakeholder requirements.

    2.3 Gather technical requirements.

    2.4 Build wireframe options for each dashboard or report.

    2.5 Review options: requirements, feasibility, and usability.

    2.6 Finalize initial designs.

    2.7 Design and record the input, production, and consumption workflows and processes.

    Outputs

    List of stakeholder requirements for dashboards and reports

    Wireframe design options

    Record of the assessment of each wireframe design: requirements, feasibility, and usability

    A set of finalized initial designs for dashboards and reports.

    Process workflows for each initial design

    3 Plan to Roll Out Enhanced PPM Dashboards and Reports

    The Purpose

    Ensure that enhanced dashboards and reports are actually adopted in the long term by carefully planning their roll-out to inputters, producers, and consumers.

    Plan to train all stakeholders, including report consumers, to ensure that the reports generate the decision support and PPM value they were designed to.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An informed, focused, and scheduled plan for rolling out dashboards and reports and for training the various stakeholders involved.

    Activities

    3.1 Plan for external resourcing (if necessary): vendors, consultants, contractors, etc.

    3.2 Conduct impact analysis: risks and opportunities.

    3.3 Create an implementation and training plan.

    3.4 Determine PPM dashboard and reporting project success metrics.

    Outputs

    External resourcing plan

    Impact analysis and risk mitigation plan

    Record of the PPM dashboard and reporting project success metrics

    Increase Grant Application Success

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}314|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $7,799 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
    • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
    • Writing grants has not been prioritized by the organization.
    • Your organization is unable to start, finish, and/or continue priority projects or initiatives as it does not have sufficient funds.
    • Grants are applied to in an ad hoc manner by employees who do not have sufficient time and resources to dedicate to the process.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    There are three critical components to the grant application process:

    • Being strategic about the grant opportunities your organization chooses to pursue.
    • Dedicating sufficient time and resources to writing a competitive grant application.
    • Ensuring your organization will be able to adhere to the grant parameters if awarded the funding.

    Impact and Result

    • By leveraging Info-Tech’s methodology, your organization will strategically select, write, and submit competitive grant applications, securing additional funding sources to support the organization and the communities you serve.
    • This research can enhance the grant writing capabilities of the organization and ensure that every grant chosen aligns with your organizational priorities.
    • This blueprint will drive consensus on which grant applications should be prioritized by the organization, ensuring resourcing, feasibility, and significance are considered.

    Increase Grant Application Success Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should enhance your organization's grant application lifecycle and how you can increase the number of grants your organization is awarded. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways Info-Tech can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify Opportunities

    Identify grant funding opportunities that align with your organization's priorities. Ensure the programs, services, projects, and initiatives that align with these priorities can be financially supported by grant funding.

    • Increase Grant Application Success – Phase 1: Identify Opportunities
    • Grant Identification and Prioritization Tool for Organizations

    2. Grant Prioritization

    Prioritize applying for the grant opportunities that your organization identified. Be sure to consider the feasibility of implementing the project or initiative if your organization is awarded the grant.

    • Increase Grant Application Success – Phase 2: Grant Prioritization

    3. Write the Grant Application

    Write a competitive grant application that has been strategically developed and actively critiqued by various internal and external reviewers.

    • Increase Grant Application Success – Phase 3: Write the Grant Application
    • Grant Writing Checklist

    4. Submit the Grant Application

    Submit an exemplary grant application that meets the guidelines and expectations of the granting agency prior to the due date.

    • Increase Grant Application Success – Phase 4: Submit the Grant Application
    • Grant Follow-up Email Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Increase Grant Application Success

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Determine Your Organization's Priorities

    The Purpose

    Determine the key priorities of your organization and identify grant funding opportunities that align with those priorities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prevents duplicate grant applications from being submitted

    Ensures the grant and the organization's priorities are aligned

    Increases the success rate of grant applications

    Activities

    1.1 Discuss grant funding opportunities and their importance to the organization.

    1.2 Identify organizational priorities.

    Outputs

    An understanding of why grants are important to your organization

    A list of priorities being pursued by your organization

    2 Prioritize Grant Funding Opportunities

    The Purpose

    Identify potential grant funding opportunities that align with the projects/initiatives the organization would like to pursue. Prioritize these funding opportunities and identify which should take precedent based on resourcing, importance, likelihood of success, and feasibility.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Generate a list of potential funding opportunities that can be revisited when resources allow

    Obtain consensus from your working group on which grants should be pursued based on how they have been prioritized

    Activities

    2.1 Develop a list of potential grant funding opportunities.

    2.2 Define the resource capacity your organization has to support the granting writing process.

    2.3 Discuss and prioritize grant opportunities

    Outputs

    A list of potential grant funding opportunities

    Realistic expectations of your organization's capacity to undertake the grant writing lifecycle

    Notes and priorities from your discussion on grant opportunities

    3 Sketch a Grant Application

    The Purpose

    Take the grant that was given top priority in the last section and sketch out a draft of what that application will look like. Think critically about the sketch and determine if there are opportunities to further clarify and demonstrate the goals of the grant application.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A sketch ready to be developed into a grant application

    A critique of the sketch to ensure that the application will be well understood by the reviewers of your submission

    Activities

    3.1 Sketch the grant application.

    3.2 Perform a SWOT analysis of the grant sketch.

    Outputs

    A sketched version of the grant application ready to be drafted

    A SWOT analysis that critically examines the sketch and offers opportunities to enhance the application

    4 Prepare to Submit the Grant Application

    The Purpose

    Have the grant application actively critiqued by various internal and external individuals. This will increase the grant application's quality and generate understanding of the application submission and post-submission process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of individuals (internal and external) that can potentially review the application prior to submission

    Preparation for the submission process

    An understanding of why the opportunity to learn how to improve future grant applications is so important

    Activities

    4.1 Identify potential individuals who will review the draft of your grant application.

    4.2 Discuss next steps around the grant submission.

    4.3 Review grant writing best practices.

    Outputs

    A list of potential individuals who can be asked to review and critique the grant application

    An understanding of what the next steps in the process will be

    Knowledge of grant writing best practices

    AI and the Future of Enterprise Productivity

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}329|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • We’re witnessing a fundamental transformation in how businesses operate and productivity is achieved.
    • Advances in narrow but powerful forms of artificial intelligence (AI) are being driven by a cluster of factors.
    • Applications for enterprise AI aren’t waiting for the emergence of a general AI. They’re being rapidly deployed in task-specific domains. From robotic process automation (RPA) to demand forecasting, from real-world robotics to AI-driven drug development, AI is boosting enterprise productivity in significant ways.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Algorithms are becoming more advanced, data is now richer and easier to collect, and hardware is cheaper and more powerful. All of this is true and contributes to the excitement around enterprise AI applications, but the biggest difference today is that enterprises are redesigning their processes around AI, rather than simply adding AI to their existing processes.

    Impact and Result

    This report outlines six emerging ways AI is being used in the enterprise, with four future scenarios outlining their possible trajectories. These are designed to guide strategic decision making and facilitate future-focused ideation.

    AI and the Future of Enterprise Productivity Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Read the trend report

    This report outlines six emerging ways AI is being used in the enterprise, with four future scenarios outlining their possible trajectories. These are designed to guide strategic decision making and facilitate future-focused ideation.

    • AI and the Future of Enterprise Productivity Trend Report
    • AI and the Future of Enterprise Productivity Trend Report (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Adopt Generative AI in Solution Delivery

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}146|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Delivery teams are under continuous pressure to deliver high value and quality solutions with limited capacity in complex business and technical environments. Common challenges experienced by these teams include:
      • Attracting and retaining talent
      • Maximizing the return on technology
      • Confidently shifting to digital
      • Addressing competing priorities
      • Fostering a collaborative culture
      • Creating high-throughput teams
    • Gen AI offers a unique opportunity to address many of these challenges.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Your stakeholders' understanding of Gen AI, its value, and its application can be driven by hype and misinterpretation. This confusion can lead to unrealistic expectations and set the wrong precedent for the role Gen AI is intended to play.
    • Your SDLC is not well documented and is often executed inconsistently. An immature practice will not yield the benefits stakeholders expect.
    • The Gen AI marketplace is broad and diverse. Selecting the appropriate tools and partners is confusing and overwhelming.
    • There is a skills gap for what is needed to configure, adopt, and operate Gen AI.

    Impact and Result

    • Ground your Gen AI expectations. Set realistic and achievable goals centered on driving business value and efficiency across the entire SDLC by enabling Gen AI in key tasks and activities. Propose the SDLC as the ideal pilot for Gen AI.
    • Select the right Gen AI opportunities. Discuss how proven Gen AI capabilities can be applied to your solution delivery practice to achieve the outcomes and priorities stakeholders expect. Lessons learned sow the foundation for future Gen AI scaling.
    • Assess your Gen AI readiness in your solution delivery teams. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of Gen AI.

    Adopt Generative AI in Solution Delivery Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Adopt Generative AI in Solution Delivery Storyboard – A step-by-step guide that helps you assess whether Gen AI is right for your solution delivery practices.

    Gain an understanding of the potential opportunities that Gen AI can provide your solution delivery practices and answer the question "What should I do next?"

    • Adopt Generative AI in Solution Delivery Storyboard

    2. Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool – A tool to help you understand if your solution delivery practice is ready for Gen AI.

    Assess the readiness of your solution delivery team for Gen AI. This tool will ask several questions relating to your people, process, and technology, and recommend whether or not the team is ready to adopt Gen AI practices.

    • Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Adopt Generative AI in Solution Delivery

    Drive solution quality and team productivity with the right generative AI capabilities.

    Analyst Perspective

    Build the case for Gen AI with the right opportunities.

    Generative AI (Gen AI) presents unique opportunities to address many solution delivery challenges. Code generation can increase productivity, synthetic data generation can produce usable test data, and scanning tools can identify issues before they occur. To be successful, teams must be prepared to embrace the changes that Gen AI brings. Stakeholders must also give teams the opportunity to optimize their own processes and gauge the fit of Gen AI.

    Start small with the intent to learn. The right pilot initiative helps you learn the new technology and how it benefits your team without the headache of complex setups and lengthy training and onboarding. Look at your existing solution delivery tools to see what Gen AI capabilities are available and prioritize the use cases where Gen AI can be used out of the box.

    This is a picture of Andrew Kum-Seun

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Research Director,
    Application Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Delivery teams are under continuous pressure to deliver high-value, high-quality solutions with limited capacity in complex business and technical environments. Common challenges experienced by these teams include:

    • Attracting and retaining talent
    • Maximizing the return on technology
    • Confidently shifting to digital
    • Addressing competing priorities
    • Fostering a collaborative culture
    • Creating high-throughput teams

    Generative AI (Gen AI) offers a unique opportunity to address many of these challenges.

    Common Obstacles

    • Your stakeholders' understanding of what is Gen AI, its value and its application, can be driven by hype and misinterpretation. This confusion can lead to unrealistic expectations and set the wrong precedent for the role Gen AI is intended to play.
    • Your solution delivery process is not well documented and is often executed inconsistently. An immature practice will not yield the benefits stakeholders expect.
    • The Gen AI marketplace is very broad and diverse. Selecting the appropriate tools and partners is confusing and overwhelming.
    • There is a skills gap for what is needed to configure, adopt, and operate Gen AI.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Ground your Gen AI expectations. Set realistic and achievable goals centered on driving business value and efficiency across the entire solution delivery process by enabling Gen AI in key tasks and activities. Propose this process as the ideal pilot for Gen AI.
    • Select the right Gen AI opportunities. Discuss how proven Gen AI capabilities can be applied to your solution delivery practice and achieve the outcomes and priorities stakeholders expect. Lessons learned sow the foundation for future Gen AI scaling.
    • Assess your Gen AI readiness in your solution delivery teams. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of Gen AI.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Position Gen AI as a tooling opportunity to enhance the productivity and depth of your solution delivery practice. Current Gen AI tools are unable to address the various technical and human complexities that commonly occur in solution delivery. Assess the fit of Gen AI by augmenting low-risk, out-of-the-box tools in key areas of your solution delivery process and teams.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching Info-Tech Insight

    Position Gen AI is a tooling opportunity to enhance the productivity and depth of your solution delivery practice. However, current Gen AI tools are unable to address the various technical and human complexities that commonly occur in solution delivery. Assess the fit of Gen AI by augmenting low-risk, out-of-the-box tools in key areas of your solution delivery process and teams.

    Understand and optimize first, automate with Gen AI later.
    Gen AI magnifies solution delivery inefficiencies and constraints. Adopt a user-centric perspective to understand your solution delivery teams' interactions with solution delivery tools and technologies to better replicate how they complete their tasks and overcome challenges.

    Enable before buy. Buy before build.
    Your solution delivery vendors see AI as a strategic priority in their product and service offering. Look into your existing toolset and see if you already have the capabilities. Otherwise, prioritize using off-the-shelf solutions with pre-trained Gen AI capabilities and templates.

    Innovate but don't experiment.
    Do not reinvent the wheel and lower your risk of success. Stick to the proven use cases to understand the value and fit of Gen AI tools and how your teams can transform the way they work. Use your lessons learned to discover scaling opportunities.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT benefits

    Business benefits

    • Select the Gen AI tools and capabilities that meet both the solution delivery practice and team goals, such as:
    • Improved team productivity and throughput.
    • Increased solution quality and value.
    • Greater team satisfaction.
    • Motivate stakeholder buy-in for the investment in solution delivery practice improvements.
    • Validate the fit and opportunities with Gen AI for future adoption in other IT departments.
    • Increase IT satisfaction by improving the throughput and speed of solution delivery.
    • Reduce the delivery and operational costs of enterprise products and services.
    • Use a pilot to demonstrate the fit and value of Gen AI capabilities and supporting practices across business and IT units.

    What is Gen AI?

    An image showing where Gen AI sits within the artificial intelligence.  It consists of four concentric circles.  They are labeled from outer-to-inner circle in the following order: Artificial Intelligence; Machine Learning; Deep Learning; Gen AI

    Generative AI (Gen AI)
    A form of ML whereby, in response to prompts, a Gen AI platform can generate new output based on the data it has been trained on. Depending on its foundational model, a Gen AI platform will provide different modalities and use case applications.

    Machine Learning (ML)
    The AI system is instructed to search for patterns in a data set and then make predictions based on that set. In this way, the system learns to provide accurate content over time. This requires a supervised intervention if the data is inaccurate. Deep learning is self-supervised and does not require intervention.

    Artificial Intelligence (AI)
    A field of computer science that focuses on building systems to imitate human behavior. Not all AI systems have learning behavior; many systems (such as customer service chatbots) operate on preset rules.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Many vendors have jumped on Gen AI as the latest marketing buzzword. When vendors claim to offer Gen AI functionality, pin down what exactly is generative about it. The solution must be able to induce new outputs from inputted data via self-supervision – not trained to produce certain outputs based on certain inputs.

    Augment your solution delivery teams with Gen AI

    Position Gen AI as a tooling opportunity to enhance the productivity and depth of your solution delivery practice. Current Gen AI tools are unable to address the various technical and human complexities that commonly occur in solution delivery; assess the fit of Gen AI by augmenting low-risk, out-of-the-box tools in key areas of your solution delivery process and teams.

    Solution Delivery Team

    Humans

    Gen AI Bots

    Product owner and decision maker
    Is accountable for the promised delivery of value to the organization.

    Business analyst and architect
    Articulates the requirements and aligns the team to the business and technical needs.

    Integrator and builder
    Implements the required solution.

    Collaborator
    Consults and supports the delivery.

    Administrator
    Performs common administrative tasks to ensure smooth running of the delivery toolchain and end-solutions.

    Designer and content creator
    Provides design and content support for common scenarios and approaches.

    Paired developer and tester
    Acts as a foil for existing developer or tester to ensure high quality output.

    System monitor and support
    Monitors and recommends remediation steps for operational issues that occur.

    Research deliverable

    This research is accompanied by a supporting deliverable to help you accomplish your goals.

    Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool

    Assess the readiness of your solution delivery team for Gen AI. This tool will ask several questions relating to your people, process, and technology, and recommend whether the team is ready to adopt Gen AI practices.

    This is a series of three screenshots from the Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool

    Step 1.1

    Set the context

    Activities

    1.1.1 Understand the challenges of your solution delivery teams.

    1.1.2 Outline the value you expect to gain from Gen AI.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications VP
    • Applications Director
    • Solution Delivery Manager
    • Solution Delivery Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • SWOT Analysis to help articulate the challenges facing your teams.
    • A Gen AI Canvas that will articulate the value you expect to gain.

    IT struggles to deliver solutions effectively

    • Lack of skills and resources
      Forty-six percent of respondents stated that it was very or somewhat difficult to attract, hire, and retain developers (GitLab, 2023; N=5,010).
    • Delayed software delivery
      Code development (37%), monitoring/observability (30%), deploying to non-production environments (30%), and testing (28%) were the top areas where software delivery teams or organizations encountered the most delays (GitLab, 2023, N=5,010).
    • Low solution quality and satisfaction
      Only 64% of applications were identified as effective by end users. Effective applications are identified as at least highly important and have high feature and usability satisfaction (Application Portfolio Assessment, August 2021 to July 2022; N=315).
    • Burnt out teams
      While workplace flexibility comes with many benefits, longer work hours jeopardize wellbeing. Sixty-two percent of organizations reported increased working hours, while 80% reported an increase in flexibility ("2022 HR Trends Report," McLean & Company, 2022; N=394) .

    Creating high-throughput teams is an organizational priority.

    CXOs ranked "optimize IT service delivery" as the second highest priority. "Achieve IT business" was ranked first.

    (CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, August 2021 to July 2022; n=568)

    1.1.1 Understand the challenges of your solution delivery teams

    1-3 hours

    1. Complete a SWOT analysis of your solution delivery team to discover areas where Gen AI can be applied.
    2. Record this information in the Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool.

    Strengths

    Internal characteristics that are favorable as they relate to solution delivery

    Weaknesses

    Internal characteristics that are unfavorable or need improvement

    Opportunities

    External characteristics that you may use to your advantage

    Threats

    External characteristics that may be potential sources of failure or risk

    Record the results in the Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool

    Output

    • SWOT analysis of current state of solution delivery practice

    Participants

    • Applications VP
    • Applications Director
    • Solution Delivery Manager
    • Solution Delivery Team

    Gen AI can help solve your solution delivery challenges

    Why is software delivery an ideal pilot candidate for Gen AI?

    • Many software delivery practices are repeatable and standardized.
    • Software delivery roles that are using and implementing Gen AI are technically savvy.
    • Automation is a staple in many commonly used tools.
    • Change will likely not impact business operations.

    Improved productivity

    Gen AI jumpstarts the most laborious and mundane parts of software delivery. Delivery teams saved 22 hours (avg) per software use case when using AI in 2022, compared to last year when AI was not used ("Generative AI Speeds Up Software Development," PRNewswire, 2023).

    Fungible resources

    Teams are transferrable across different frameworks, platforms, and products. Gen AI provides the structure and guidance needed to work across a wider range of projects ("Game changer: The startling power generative AI is bringing to software development," KPMG, 2023).

    Improved solution quality

    Solution delivery artifacts (e.g. code) are automatically scanned to quickly identify bugs and defects based on recent activities and trends and validate against current system performance and capacity.

    Business empowerment

    AI enhances the application functionalities workers can build with low- and no-code platforms. In fact, "AI high performers are 1.6 times more likely than other organizations to engage non-technical employees in creating AI applications" ("The state of AI in 2022 — and a half decade in review." McKinsey, 2022, N=1,492).

    However, various fears, uncertainties, and doubts challenge Gen AI adoption

    Black Box

    Little transparency is provided on the tool's rationale behind content creation, decision making, and the use and storage of training data, creating risks for legal, security, intellectual property, and other areas.

    Role Replacement

    Some workers have job security concerns despite Gen AI being bound to their rule-based logic framework, the quality of their training data, and patterns of consistent behavior.

    Skills Gaps

    Teams need to gain expertise in AI/ML techniques, training data preparation, and continuous tooling improvements to support effective Gen AI adoption across the delivery practice and ensure reliable operations.

    Data Inaccuracy

    Significant good quality data is needed to build trust in the applicability and reliability of Gen AI recommendations and outputs. Teams must be able to combine Gen AI insights with human judgment to generate the right outcome.

    Slow Delivery of AI Solution

    Timelines are sensitive to organizational maturity, experience with Gen AI, and investments in good data management practices. 65% of organizations said it took more than three months to deploy an enterprise-ready AIOps solution (OpsRamp, 2022).

    Define the value you want Gen AI to deliver

    Well-optimized Gen AI instills stakeholder confidence in ongoing business value delivery and ensures stakeholder buy-in, provided proper expectations are set and met. However, business value is not interpreted or prioritized the same across the organization. Come to a common business value definition to drive change in the right direction by balancing the needs of the individual, team, and organization.

    Business value cannot always be represented by revenue or reduced expenses. Dissecting value by the benefit type and the value source's orientation allows you to see the many ways in which Gen AI brings value to the organization.

    Financial benefits vs. intrinsic needs

    • Financial benefits refers to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics, such as revenue generation and cost saving.
    • Intrinsic needs refers to how a product, service, or business capability enhanced with Gen AI meets functional, user experience, and existential needs.

    Inward vs. outward orientation

    • Inward refers to value sources that are internally impacted by Gen AI and improve your employees' and teams' effectiveness in performing their responsibilities.
    • Outward refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external stakeholders and customers and were improved from using Gen AI.

    See our Build a Value Measurement Framework blueprint for more information about business value definition.

    An image of the Business Value Matrix for Gen AI

    Measure success with the right metrics

    Establishing and monitoring metrics are powerful ways to drive behavior and strategic changes in your organization. Determine the right measures that demonstrate the value of your Gen AI implementation by aligning them with your Gen AI objectives, business value drivers, and non-functional requirements.

    Select metrics with different views

    1. Solution delivery practice effectiveness
      The ability of your practice to deliver, support, and operate solutions with Gen AI
      Examples: Solution quality and throughput, delivery and operational costs, number of defects and issues, and system quality
    2. Solution quality and value
      The outcome of your solutions delivered with Gen AI tools
      Examples: Time and money saved, utilization of products and services, speed of process execution, number of errors, and compliance with standards
    3. Gen AI journey goals and milestones
      Your organization's position in your Gen AI journey
      Examples: Maturity score, scope of Gen AI adoption, comfort and
      confidence with Gen AI capabilities, and complexity of Gen AI use cases

    Leverage Info-Tech's Diagnostics

    IT Management & Governance

    • Improvement to application development quality and throughput effectiveness
    • Increased importance of application delivery and maintenance capabilities across the IT organization
    • Delegation of delivery accountability across more IT roles

    CIO Business Vision

    • Improvements to IT satisfaction and value from delivered solutions
    • Changes to the value and importance of IT core services enabled with Gen AI
    • The state of business and IT relationships
    • Capability to deliver and support Gen AI effectively

    1.1.2 Outline the value you expect to gain from Gen AI

    1-3 hours

    1. Complete the following fields to build your Gen AI canvas:
      1. Problem that Gen AI is intending to solve
      2. List of stakeholders
      3. Desired business and IT outcomes
      4. In-scope solution delivery teams, systems, and capabilities.
    2. Record this information in the Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool.

    Output

    • Gen AI Canvas

    Participants

    • Applications VP
    • Applications Director
    • Solution Delivery Manager
    • Solution Delivery Team

    Record the results in the Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool

    1.1.2 Example

    Example of an outline of the value you expect to gain from Gen AI

    Problem statements

    • Manual testing procedures hinder pace and quality of delivery.
    • Inaccurate requirement documentation leads to constant redesigning.

    Business and IT outcomes

    • Improve code quality and performance.
    • Expedite solution delivery cycle.
    • Improve collaboration between teams and reduce friction.

    List of stakeholders

    • Testing team
    • Application director
    • CIO
    • Design team
    • Project manager
    • Business analysts

    In-scope solution delivery teams, system, and capabilities

    • Web
    • Development
    • App development
    • Testing
    • Quality assurance
    • Business analysts
    • UI/UX design

    Align your objectives to the broader AI strategy

    Why is an organizational AI strategy important for Gen AI?

    • All Gen AI tactics and capabilities are designed, delivered, and managed to support a consistent interpretation of the broader AI vision and goals.
    • An organizational strategy gives clear understanding of the sprawl, criticality, and risks of Gen AI solutions and applications to other IT capabilities dependent on AI.
    • Gen AI initiatives are planned, prioritized, and coordinated alongside other software delivery practice optimizations and technology modernization initiatives.
    • Resources, skills, and capacities are strategically allocated to meet the needs of Gen AI considering other commitments in the software delivery optimization backlog and roadmap.
    • Gen AI expectations and practices uphold the persona, values, and principles of the software delivery team.

    What is an AI strategy?

    An AI strategy details the direction, activities, and tactics to deliver on the promise of your AI portfolio. It often includes:

    • AI vision and goals
    • Application, automation, and process portfolio involved or impacted by AI
    • Values and principles
    • Health of your AI portfolio
    • Risks and constraints
    • Strategic roadmap

    Step 1.2

    Evaluate opportunities for Gen AI

    Activities

    1.2.1 Align Gen AI opportunities with teams and capabilities.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications VP
    • Applications Director
    • Solution Delivery Manager
    • Solution Delivery Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understand the Gen AI opportunities for your solution delivery practice.

    Learn how Gen AI is employed in solution delivery

    Gen AI opportunity Common Gen AI tools and vendors Teams than can benefit How can teams leverage this? Case study
    Synthetic data generation
    • Testing
    • Data Analysts
    • Privacy and Security
    • Create test datasets
    • Replace sensitive personal data

    How Unity Leverages Synthetic Data

    Code generation
    • Development
    • Testing
    • Code Templates & Boilerplate
    • Code Refactoring

    How CI&T accelerated development by 11%

    Defect forecasting and debugging
    • Project Manager & Quality Assurance
    • Development
    • Testing
    • Identify root cause
    • Static and dynamic code analysis
    • Debugging assistance

    Altran Uses Microsoft Code Defect AI Solution

    Requirements documentation and elicitation
    • Business Analysts
    • Development
    • Document functional requirements
    • Writing test cases

    Google collaborates with Replit to reduce time to bring new products to market by 30%

    UI design and prototyping
    • UI/UX Design
    • Development
    • Deployment
    • Rapid prototyping
    • Design assistance

    How Spotify is Upleveling Their Entire Design Team

    Other common AI opportunities solutions include test case generation, code translation, use case creation, document generation, and automated testing.

    Opportunity 1: Synthetic data generation

    Create artificial data that mimics the structure of real-life data.

    What are the expected benefits?

    • Availability of test data: Creation of large volumes of data compatible for testing multiple systems within the organization.
    • Improved privacy: Substituting real data with artificial leads to reduced data leaks.
    • Quicker data provisioning: Automated generation of workable datasets aligned to company policies.

    What are the notable risks and challenges?

    • Generalization and misrepresentations: Data models used in synthetic data generation may not be an accurate representation of production data because of potentially conflicting definitions, omission of dependencies, and multiple sources of truth.
    • Lack of accurate representation: It is difficult for synthetic data to fully capture real-world data nuances.
    • Legal complexities: Data to build and train the Gen AI tool does not comply with data residency and management standards and regulations.

    How should teams prepare for synthetic data generation?

    It can be used:

    • To train machine learning models when there is not enough real data, or the existing data does not meet specific needs.
    • To improve quality of test by using data that closely resembles production without the risk of leveraging sensitive and private information.

    "We can simply say that the total addressable market of synthetic data and the total addressable market of data will converge,"
    Ofir Zuk, CEO, Datagen (Forbes, 2022)

    Opportunity 2: Code generation

    Learn patterns and automatically generate code.

    What are the expected benefits?

    • Increased productivity: It allows developers to generate more code quickly.
    • Improved code consistency: Code is generated using a standardized model and lessons learnt from successful projects.
    • Rapid prototyping: Expedite development of a working prototype to be verified and validated.

    What are the notable risks and challenges?

    • Limited contextual understanding: AI may lack domain-specific knowledge or understanding of requirements.
    • Dependency: Overreliance on AI generated codes can affect developers' creativity.
    • Quality concerns: Generated code is untested and its alignment to coding and quality standards is unclear.

    How should teams prepare for code generation?

    It can be used to:

    • Build solutions without the technical expertise of traditional development.
    • Discover different solutions to address coding challenges.
    • Kickstart new development projects with prebuilt code.

    According to a survey conducted by Microsoft's GitHub, a staggering 92% of programmers were reported as using AI tools in their workflow (GitHub, 2023).

    Opportunity 3: Defect forecasting & debugging

    Predict and proactively address defects before they occur.

    What are the expected benefits?

    • Reduced maintenance cost: Find defects earlier in the delivery process, when it's cheaper to fix them.
    • Increased efficiency: Testing efforts can remain focused on critical and complex areas of solution.
    • Reduced risk: Find critical defects before the product is deployed to production.

    What are the notable risks and challenges?

    • False positives and negatives: Incorrect interpretation and scope of defect due to inadequate training of the Gen AI model.
    • Inadequate training: Training data does not reflect the complexity of the solutions code.
    • Not incorporating feedback: Gen AI models are not retrained in concert with solution changes.

    How should teams prepare for defect forecasting and debugging?

    It can be used to:

    • Perform static and dynamic code analysis to find vulnerabilities in the solution source code.
    • Forecast potential issues of a solution based on previous projects and industry trends.
    • Find root cause and suggest solutions to address found defects.

    Using AI technologies, developers can reduce the time taken to debug and test code by up to 70%, allowing them to finish projects faster and with greater accuracy (Aloa, 2023).

    Opportunity 4: Requirements documentation & elicitation

    Capturing, documenting, and analyzing function and nonfunctional requirements.

    What are the expected benefits?

    • Improve quality of requirements: Obtain different perspectives and contexts for the problem at hand and help identify ambiguities and misinterpretation of risks and stakeholder expectation.
    • Increased savings: Fewer resources are consumed in requirements elicitation activities.
    • Increased delivery confidence: Provide sufficient information for the solution delivery team to confidently estimate and commit to the delivery of the requirement.

    What are the notable risks and challenges?

    • Conflicting bias: Gen AI models may interpret the problem differently than how the stakeholders perceive it.
    • Organization-specific interpretation: Inability of the Gen AI models to accommodate unique interpretation of terminologies, standards, trends and scenarios.
    • Validation and review: Interpreting extracted insights requires human validation.

    How should teams prepare for requirements documentation & elicitation?

    It can be used to:

    • Document requirements in a clear and concise manner that is usable to the solution delivery team.
    • Analyze and test requirements against various user, business, and technical scenarios.

    91% of top businesses surveyed report having an ongoing investment in AI (NewVantage Partners, 2021).

    Opportunity 5: UI design and prototyping

    Analyze existing patterns and principles to generate design, layouts, and working solutions.

    What are the expected benefits?

    • Increased experimentation: Explore different approaches and tactics to solve a solution delivery problem.
    • Improved collaboration: Provide quick design layouts that can be reshaped based on stakeholder feedback.
    • Ensure design consistency: Enforce a UI/UX design standard for all solutions.

    What are the notable risks and challenges?

    • Misinterpretation of UX Requirements: Gen AI model incorrectly assumes a specific interpretation of user needs, behaviors, and problem.
    • Incorrect or missing requirements: Lead to extensive redesigns and iterations, adding to costs while hampering user experience.
    • Design creativity: May lack originality and specific brand aesthetics if not augmented well with human customizability and creativity.

    How should teams prepare for UI design and prototyping?

    It can be used to:

    • Visualize the solution through different views and perspectives such as process flows and use-case diagrams.
    • Create working prototypes that can be verified and validated by stakeholders and end users.

    A study by McKinsey & Company found that companies that invest in AI-driven design outperform their peers in revenue growth and customer experience metrics. They were found to achieve up to two times higher revenue growth than industry peers and up to 10% higher net promoter score (McKinsey & Company, 2018).

    Determine the importance of your opportunities by answering these questions

    Realizing the complete potential of Gen AI relies on effectively fostering its adoption and resulting changes throughout the entire solution delivery process.

    What are the challenges faced by your delivery teams that could be addressed by Gen AI?

    • Recognize the precise pain points, bottlenecks, or inefficiencies faced by delivery teams.
    • Include all stakeholders' perspectives during problem discovery and root cause analysis.

    What's holding back Gen AI adoption in the organization?

    • Apart from technical barriers, address cultural and organizational challenges and discuss how organizational change management strategies can mitigate Gen AI adoption risk.

    Are your objectives aligned with Gen AI capabilities?

    • Identify areas where processes can be modernized and streamlined with automation.
    • Evaluate the current capabilities and resources available within the organization to leverage Gen AI technologies effectively.

    How can Gen AI improve the entire solution delivery process?

    • Investigate and evaluate the improvements Gen AI can reasonably deliver, such as increased accuracy, quickened delivery cycles, improved code quality, or enhanced cross-functional collaboration.

    1.2.1 Align Gen AI opportunities to teams and capabilities

    1-3 hours

    1. Associate the Gen AI opportunities that can be linked to your system capabilities. These opportunities refer to the potential applications of generative AI techniques, such as code generation or synthetic data, to address specific challenges.
      1. Start by analyzing your system's requirements, constraints, and areas where Gen AI techniques can bring value. Identify the potential benefits of integrating Gen AI, such as increased productivity, or enhanced creativity.
      2. Next, discern potential risks or challenges, such as dependency or quality concerns, associated with the opportunity implementation.
    2. Record this information in the Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool.

    Output

    • Gen AI opportunity selection

    Participants

    • Applications VP
    • Applications Director
    • Solution Delivery Manager
    • Solution Delivery Team

    Record the results in the Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool

    Keep an eye out for red flags

    Not all Gen AI opportunities are delivered and adopted the same. Some present a bigger risk than others.

    • Establishing vague targets and success criteria
    • Defining Gen AI as substitution of human capital
    • Open-source software not widely adopted or validated
    • High level of dependency on automation
    • Unadaptable cross-functional training across organization
    • Overlooking privacy, security, legal, and ethical implications
    • Lack of Gen AI expertise and understanding of good practices

    Step 1.3

    Assess your readiness for Gen AI

    Activities

    1.3.1 Assess your readiness for Gen AI.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications VP
    • Applications Director
    • Solution Delivery Manager
    • Solution Delivery Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • A completed Gen AI Readiness Assessment to confirm how prepared you are to embrace Gen AI in your solution delivery team.

    Prepare your SDLC* to leverage Gen AI

    As organizations evolve and adopt more tools and technology, their solution delivery processes become more complex. Process improvement is needed to simplify complex and undocumented software delivery activities and artifacts and prepare it for Gen AI. Gen AI scales process throughput and output quantity, but it multiplies the negative impact of problems the process already has.

    When is your process ready for Gen AI?

    • Solution value Ensures the accuracy and alignment of the committed feature and change requests to what the stakeholder truly expects and receives.
    • ThroughputDelivers new products, enhancements, and changes at a pace and frequency satisfactory to stakeholder expectations and meets delivery commitments.
    • Process governance Has clear ownership and appropriate standardization. The roles, activities, tasks, and technologies are documented and defined. At each stage of the process someone is responsible and accountable.
    • Process management Follows a set of development frameworks, good practices, and standards to ensure the solution and relevant artifacts are built, tested, and delivered consistently and repeatably.
    • Technical quality assurance – Accommodates committed non-functional requirements within the stage's outputs to ensure products meet technical excellence expectations.

    *software development lifecycle

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Modernize Your SDLC blueprint.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook

    Assess the impacts from Gen AI changes

    Ensure that no stone is left unturned as you evaluate the fit of Gen AI and prepare your adoption and support plans.

    By shining a light on considerations that might have otherwise escaped planners and decision makers, an impact analysis is an essential component to Gen AI success. This analysis should answer the following questions on the impact to your solution delivery teams.

    1. Will the change impact how our clients/customers receive, consume, or engage with our products/services?
    2. Will there be an increase in operational costs, and a change to compensation and/or rewards?
    3. Will this change increase the workload and alter staffing levels?
    4. Will the vision or mission of the team change?
    5. Will a new or different set of skills be needed?
    6. Will the change span multiple locations/time zones?
    7. Are multiple products/services impacted by this change?
    8. Will the workflow and approvals be changed, and will there be a substantial change to scheduling and logistics?
    9. Will the tools of the team be substantially different?
    10. Will there be a change in reporting relationships?

    See our Master Organizational Change Management Practices blueprint for more information.

    Brace for impact

    A thorough analysis of change impacts will help your software delivery teams and change leaders:

    • Bypass avoidable problems.
    • Remove non-fixed barriers to success.
    • Acknowledge and minimize the impact of unavoidable barriers.
    • Identify and leverage potential benefits.
    • Measure the success of the change.

    Many key IT capabilities are required to successfully leverage Gen AI

    Portfolio Management

    An accurate and rationalized inventory of all Gen AI tools verifies they support the goals and abide to the usage policies of the broader delivery practice. This becomes critical when tooling is updated frequently and licenses and open- source community principles drastically change (e.g. after an acquisition).

    Quality Assurance

    Gen AI tools are routinely verified and validated to ensure outcomes are accurate, complete, and aligned to solution delivery quality standards. Models are retrained using lessons learned, new use cases, and updated training data.

    Security & Access Management

    Externally developed and trained Gen AI models may not include the measures, controls, and tactics you need to prevent vulnerabilities and protect against threats that are critical in your security frameworks, policies, and standards.

    Data Management & Governance

    All solution delivery data and artifacts can be transformed and consumed in various ways as they transit through solution delivery and Gen AI tools. Data integrations, structures, and definitions must be well-defined, governed, and monitored.

    OPERATIONAL SUPPORT

    Resources are available to support the ongoing operations of the Gen AI tool, including infrastructure, preparing training data, and managing integration with other tools. They are also prepared to recover backups, roll back, and execute recovery plans at a moment's notice.

    Apply Gen AI good practices in your solution delivery practice

    1. Keep the human in the loop.
      Gen AI models cannot produce high-quality content with 100% confidence. Keeping the human in the loop allows people to directly give feedback to the model to improve output quality.
    2. Strengthen prompt and query engineering.
      The value of the outcome is dependent on what is being asked. Good prompts and queries focus on creating the optimal input by selecting and phrasing the appropriate words, sentence structures, and punctuation to illustrate the focus, scope, problem, and boundaries.
    3. Thoughtfully prepare your training data.
      Externally hosted Gen AI tools may store your training data in their systems or use it to train their other models. Intellectual property and sensitive data can leak into third-party systems and AI models if it is not properly masked and sanitized.
    4. Build guardrails into your Gen AI models.
      Guardrails can limit the variability of any misleading Gen AI responses by defining the scope and bounds of the response, enforcing the policies of its use, and clarifying the context of its response.
    5. Monitor your operational costs.
      The cost breakdown will vary among the types of Gen AI solution and the vendor offerings. Cost per query, consultant fees, infrastructure hosting, and licensing costs are just a few cost factors. Open source can be an attractive cost-saving option, but you must be willing to invest in the roles to assume traditional vendor accountabilities.
    6. Check the licenses of your Gen AI tool.
      Each platform has licenses and agreements on how their solution can or cannot be used. They limit your ability to use the tool for commercial purposes or reproductions or may require you to purchase and maintain a specific license to use their solution and materials.

    See Build Your Generative AI Roadmap for more information.

    Assess your Gen AI readiness

    • Solution delivery team
      The team is educated on Gen AI, its use cases, and the tools that enable it. They have the skills and capacity to implement, create, and manage Gen AI.
    • Solution delivery process and tools
      The solution delivery process is documented, repeatable, and optimized to use Gen AI effectively. Delivery tools are configured to enable, leverage and manage Gen AI assets to improve their performance and efficiency.
    • Solution delivery artifacts
      Delivery artifacts (e.g. code, scripts, documents) that will be used to train and be leveraged by Gen AI tools are discoverable, accurate, complete, standardized, of sufficient quantity, optimized for Gen AI use, and stored in an accessible shared central repository.
    • Governance
      Defined policies, role definitions, guidelines, and processes that guide the implementation, development, operations, and management of Gen AI.
    • Vision and executive support
      Clear alignment of Gen AI direction, ambition, and objectives with broader business and IT priorities. Stakeholders support the Gen AI initiative and allocate human and financial resources for its implementation within the solution delivery team.
    • Operational support
      The capabilities to manage the Gen AI tools and ensure they support the growing needs of the solution delivery practice, such as security management, hosting infrastructure, risk and change management, and data and application integration.

    1.3.1 Assess your readiness for Gen AI

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the current state of your solution delivery teams including their capacity, skills and knowledge, delivery practices, and tools and technologies.
    2. Determine the readiness of your team to adopt Gen AI.
    3. Discuss the gaps that need to be filled to be successful with Gen AI.
    4. Record this information in the Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool.

    Record the results in the Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment Tool

    Output

    • Gen AI Solution Delivery Readiness Assessment

    Participants

    • Applications VP
    • Applications Director
    • Solution Delivery Manager
    • Solution Delivery Team

    Recognize that Gen AI does not require a fully optimized solution delivery process

    1. Consideration; 2. Exploration; 3. Incorporation; 4. Proliferation; 5. Optimization.  Steps 3-5 are Recommended maturity levels to properly embrace Gen AI.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Develop Your Value-First Business Process Automation (BPA) Strategy.

    Be prepared to take the next steps

    Deliver Gen AI to your solution delivery teams

    Modernize Your SDLC
    Efficient and effective SDLC practices are vital, as products need to readily adjust to evolving and changing business needs and technologies.

    Adopt Generative AI in Solution Delivery
    Generative AI can drive productivity and solution quality gains to your solution delivery teams. Level set expectations with the right use case to demonstrate its value potential.

    Select Your AI Vendor & Implementation Partner
    The right vendor and partner are critical for success. Build the selection criteria to shortlist the products and services that best meets the current and future needs of your teams.

    Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI
    Build a framework that will guide your teams through the selection of an off-the-shelf AI tool with a clear definition of the business case and preparations for successful adoption.

    Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    Your Gen AI implementation doesn't start with technology, but with an effective plan that your team supports and is aligned to broader stakeholder and sponsor priorities and goals.

    Build your Gen AI practice

    • Get Started With AI
    • AI Strategy & Generative AI Roadmap
    • AI Governance

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook
    Optimize and automate your business processes with a user-centric approach.

    Embrace Business Managed Applications
    Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations
    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence
    Optimize your organization's enterprise application capabilities with a refined and scalable methodology.

    Create an Architecture for AI
    Build your target state architecture from predefined best-practice building blocks.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision
    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices
    Ensure your software systems solution is architected to reflect stakeholders' short- and long-term needs.

    Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business
    Use design thinking and journey mapping to make IT the business' go-to problem solver.

    Modernize Your SDLC
    Deliver quality software faster with new tools and practices.

    Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI
    A practical guide to ensure return on your off-the-shelf AI investment.

    Bibliography

    "Altran Helps Developers Write Better Code Faster with Azure AI." Microsoft, 2020.
    "Apply Design Thinking to Complex Teams, Problems, and Organizations." IBM, 2021.
    Bianca. "Unleashing the Power of AI in Code Generation: 10 Applications You Need to Know — AITechTrend." AITechTrend, 16 May 2023.
    Biggs, John. "Deep Code Cleans Your Code with the Power of AI." TechCrunch, 26 Apr 2018.
    "Chat GPT as a Tool for Business Analysis — the Brazilian BA." The Brazilian BA, 24 Jan 2023.
    Davenport, Thomas, and Randy Bean. "Big Data and AI Executive Survey 2019." New Vantage Partners, 2019.
    Davenport, Thomas, and Randy Bean. "Big Data and AI Executive Survey 2021." New Vantage Partners, 2021.
    Das, Tamal. "9 Best AI-Powered Code Completion for Productive Development." Geek flare, 5 Apr 2023.
    Gondrezick, Ilya. "Council Post: How AI Can Transform the Software Engineering Process." Forbes, 24 Apr 2020.
    "Generative AI Speeds up Software Development: Compass UOL Study." PR Newswire, 29 Mar 2023.
    "GitLab 2023 Global Develops Report Series." Gitlab, 2023.
    "Game Changer: The Startling Power Generative AI Is Bringing to Software Development." KPMG, 30 Jan 2023.
    "How AI Can Help with Requirements Analysis Tools." TechTarget, 28 July 2020.
    Indra lingam, Ashanta. "How Spotify Is Upleveling Their Entire Design Team." Framer, 2019.
    Ingle, Prathamesh. "Top Artificial Intelligence (AI) Tools That Can Generate Code to Help Programmers." Matchcoat, 1 Jan 2023.
    Kaur, Jagreet . "AI in Requirements Management | Benefits and Its Processes." Xenon Stack, 13 June 2023.
    Lange, Danny. "Game On: How Unity Is Extending the Power of Synthetic Data beyond the Gaming Industry." CIO, 17 Dec 2020.
    Lin, Ying. "10 Artificial Intelligence Statistics You Need to Know in 2020." OBERLO, 17 Mar. 2023.
    Mauran, Cecily. "Whoops, Samsung Workers Accidentally Leaked Trade Secrets via ChatGPT." Mashable, 6 Apr 2023.

    Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}372|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,779 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Organizations often tackle compliance efforts in an ad hoc manner, resulting in an ineffective use of resources.
    • The alignment of business objectives, information security, and data privacy is new for many organizations, and it can seem overwhelming.
    • GDPR is an EU regulation that has global implications; it likely applies to your organization more than you think.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Financial impact isn’t simply fines. A data controller fined for GDPR non-compliance may sue its data processor for damage.
    • Even day-to-day activities may be considered processing. Screen-sharing from a remote location is considered processing if the data shown onscreen contains personal data!
    • This is not simply an IT problem. Organizations that address GDPR in a siloed approach will not be as successful as organizations that take a cross-functional approach.

    Impact and Result

    • Follow a robust methodology that applies to any organization and aligns operational and situational GDPR scope. Info-Tech's framework allows organizations to tackle GDPR compliance in a right-sized, methodical approach.
    • Adhere to a core, complex GDPR requirement through the use of our documentation templates.
    • Understand how the risk of non-compliance is aligned to both your organization’s functions and data scope.
    • This blueprint will guide you through projects and steps that will result in quick wins for near-term compliance.

    Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should fast track your GDPR compliance efforts, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand your compliance requirements

    Understand the breadth of the regulation’s requirements and document roles and responsibilities.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 1: Understand Your Compliance Requirements
    • GDPR RACI Chart

    2. Define your GDPR scope

    Define your GDPR scope and prioritize initiatives based on risk.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 2: Define Your GDPR Scope
    • GDPR Initiative Prioritization Tool

    3. Satisfy documentation requirements

    Understand the requirements for a record of processing and determine who will own it.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 3: Satisfy Documentation Requirements
    • Record of Processing Template
    • Legitimate Interest Assessment Template
    • Data Protection Impact Assessment Tool
    • A Guide to Data Subject Access Requests

    4. Align your data breach requirements and security program

    Document your DPO decision and align security strategy to data privacy.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 4: Align Your Data Breach Requirements & Security Program

    5. Prioritize your GDPR initiatives

    Prioritize any initiatives driven out of Phases 1-4 and begin developing policies that help in the documentation effort.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 5: Prioritize Your GDPR Initiatives
    • Data Protection Policy
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Your Compliance Requirements

    The Purpose

    Kick-off the workshop; understand and define GDPR as it exists in your organizational context.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritize your business units based on GDPR risk.

    Assign roles and responsibilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Kick-off and introductions.

    1.2 High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.

    1.3 Identify and define GDPR initiative within your organization’s context.

    1.4 Determine what actions have been done to prepare; how have regulations been handled in the past?

    1.5 Identify key business units for GDPR committee.

    1.6 Document business units and functions that are within scope.

    1.7 Prioritize business units based on GDPR.

    1.8 Formalize stakeholder support.

    Outputs

    Prioritized business units based on GDPR risk

    GDPR Compliance RACI Chart

    2 Define Your GDPR Scope

    The Purpose

    Know the rationale behind a record of processing.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine who will own the record of processing.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the necessity for a record of processing.

    2.2 Determine for each prioritized business unit: are you a controller or processor?

    2.3 Develop a record of processing for most-critical business units.

    2.4 Perform legitimate interest assessments.

    2.5 Document an iterative process for creating a record of processing.

    Outputs

    Initial record of processing: 1-2 activities

    Initial legitimate interest assessment: 1-2 activities

    Determination of who will own the record of processing

    3 Satisfy Documentation Requirements and Align With Your Data Breach Requirements and Security Program

    The Purpose

    Review existing security controls and highlight potential requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the initiatives you’ll be working on align with existing controls and future goals.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine the appetite to align the GDPR project to data classification and data discovery.

    3.2 Discuss the benefits of data discovery and classification.

    3.3 Review existing incident response plans and highlight gaps.

    3.4 Review existing security controls and highlight potential requirements.

    3.5 Review all initiatives highlighted during days 1-3.

    Outputs

    Highlighted gaps in current incident response and security program controls

    Documented all future initiatives

    4 Prioritize GDPR Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Review project plan and initiatives and prioritize.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize outputs of the workshop, with a strong understanding of next steps.

    Activities

    4.1 Analyze the necessity for a data protection officer and document decision.

    4.2 Review project plan and initiatives.

    4.3 Prioritize all current initiatives based on regulatory compliance, cost, and ease to implement.

    4.4 Develop a data protection policy.

    4.5 Finalize key deliverables created during the workshop.

    4.6 Present the GDPR project to key stakeholders.

    4.7 Workshop executive presentation and debrief.

    Outputs

    GDPR framework and prioritized initiatives

    Data Protection Policy

    List of key tools

    Communication plans

    Workshop summary documentation

    Knowledge Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}33|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}33|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000
    • member rating average days saved: 2
    • Parent Category Name: People and Resources
    • Parent Category Link: /people-and-resources
    Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss

    Implement a Social Media Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}560|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • IT is being caught in the middle of various business units, all separately attempting to create, staff, implement, and instrument a social media program.
    • Requests for procuring social media tools and integrating with CRM systems are coming from all directions, with no central authority governing a social media program or coordinating business goals.
    • Public Relations and Corporate Communications groups have been acting as the first level of response to social media channels since the company’s first Twitter account went live, but the volume of inquiries received through social channels has become too great for these groups to continue in a first responder role.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Social media immaturity is an opportunity for IT leadership. As with so many of the “next new things,” IT has an opportunity to help the business understand social media technologies, trends, and risks, and coordinate efforts to approach social media as a united company.
    • Social media maturity must reach the Social Media Steering Committee stage before major investments in technology can proceed. As with all business initiatives, technology automation decisions cannot be made without respect to organizational and process maturity. Social media strategy stakeholders must join together and form a steering committee to create policies and procedures, govern strategy, develop workflows, and facilitate technology selection processes. IT not only belongs on such a steering committee, but it can also be instrumental in the formation of it.
    • Info-Tech’s research repeatedly indicates that the greatest return from social media investments is in the customer service domain, by reacting to incoming social inquiries and proactively listening to social conversations for product and service inquiry opportunities. This means CRM integration is essential to long-term social media program success.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess your organization’s social maturity to know where to begin and where to go in implementation of a social media program.
    • Form a social media steering committee to bring order to chaos among different business units.
    • Develop comprehensive workflows to categorize and prioritize inquiries, and then route them to the appropriate part of the business for resolution.
    • Consider creating one or more physical social media command centers to process large volumes of social inquiries more efficiently and monitor real-time social media metrics to improve critical response times.

    Implement a Social Media Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess your organization's social maturity

    Know where to begin and where to go in implementation of a social media program.

    • Storyboard: Implement a Social Media Program
    • Social Media Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Form a social media steering committee

    Bring order to chaos among different business units.

    • Social Media Steering Committee Charter Template
    • Social Media Acceptable Use Policy
    • Blogging and Microblogging Guidelines Template

    3. Consider creating one or more physical social media command centers

    Process large volumes of social inquiries more efficiently, and monitor real-time social media metrics to improve critical response times.

    • Social Media Representative
    • Social Media Manager
    [infographic]

    Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}407|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,065 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Business Analysis
    • Parent Category Link: /business-analysis
    • Organizations often have many business processes that rely on manual, routine, and repetitive data collection and processing work. These processes need to be automated to meet strategic priorities.
    • Your stakeholders may have decided to invest in process automation solutions. They may be ready to begin the planning and delivery of their first automated processes.
    • However, if your processes are costly, slow, defective, and do not generate the value end users want, automation will only magnify these inefficiencies.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Put the user front and center. Aim to better understand the end user and their operational environment. Use cases, data models, and quality factors allow you to visualize the human-computer interactions from an end-user perspective and initiate a discussion on how technology and process improvements can be better positioned to help your end users.
    • Build for the future. Automation sets the technology foundations and process governance and management building blocks in your organization. Expect that more automation will be done using earlier investments.
    • Manage automations as part of your application portfolio. Automations are add-ons to your application portfolio. Unmanaged automations, like applications, will sprawl and reduce in value over time. A collaborative rationalization practice pinpoints where automation is required and identifies which business inefficiencies should be automated next.

    Impact and Result

    • Clarify the problem being solved. Gain a grounded understanding of your stakeholders’ drivers for business process automation. Discuss current business operations and systems to identify automation candidates.
    • Optimate your processes. Apply good practices to first optimize (opti-) and then automate (-mate) key business processes. Take a user-centric perspective to understand how users interact with technology to complete their tasks.
    • Deliver minimum viable automations (MVAs). Maximize the learning of automation solutions and business operational changes through small, strategic automation use cases. This sets the foundations for a broader automation practice.

    Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Business Process Automation Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to optimize and automate your business processes.

    This blueprint helps you develop a repeatable approach to understand your process challenges and to optimize and automate strategic business processes.

    • Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook – Phases 1-3

    2. Business Process Automation Playbook – A repeatable set of practices to assess, optimize, and automate your business processes.

    This playbook template gives your teams a step-by-step guide to build a repeatable and standardized framework to optimize and automate your processes.

    • Business Process Automation Playbook

    3. Process Interview Template – A structured approach to interviewing stakeholders about their business processes.

    Info-Tech's Process Interview Template provides a number of sections that you can populate to help facilitate and document your stakeholder interviews.

    • Process Interview Template

    4. Process Mapping Guide – A guide to mapping business processes using BPMN standards.

    Info-Tech's Process Mapping Guide provides a thorough framework for process mapping, including the purpose and benefits, the best practices for facilitation, step-by-step process mapping instructions, and process mapping naming conventions.

    • Process Mapping Guide

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Automation Opportunities

    The Purpose

    Understand the goals and visions of business process automation.

    Develop your guiding principles.

    Build a backlog of automation opportunities

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Business process automation vision, expectations, and objectives.

    High-priority automation opportunities identified to focus on.

    Activities

    1.1 State your objectives and metrics.

    1.2 Build your backlog.

    Outputs

    Business process automation vision and objectives

    Business process automation guiding principles

    Process automation opportunity backlog

    2 Define Your MVAs

    The Purpose

    Assess and optimize high-strategic-importance business process automation use cases from the end user’s perspective.

    Shortlist your automation solutions.

    Build and plan to deliver minimum viable automations (MVAs).

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Repeatable framework to assess and optimize your business process.

    Selection of the possible solutions that best fit the business process use case.

    Maximized learning with a low-risk minimum viable automation.

    Activities

    2.1 Optimize your processes.

    2.2 Automate your processes.

    2.3 Define and roadmap your MVAs.

    Outputs

    Assessed and optimized business processes with a repeatable framework

    Fit assessment of use cases to automation solutions

    MVA definition and roadmap

    3 Deliver Your MVAs

    The Purpose

    Modernize your SDLC to support business process automation delivery.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An SDLC that best supports the nuances and complexities of business process automation delivery.

    Activities

    3.1 Deliver your MVAs

    Outputs

    Refined and enhanced SDLC

    Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}274|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $62,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture Domains
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-domains
    • A mature EA function is increasingly becoming an organizational priority to drive innovation, provide insight, and define digital capabilities.
    • Proliferation of digital technology has increased complexity, straining the EA function to deliver insights.
    • An EA tool increases the efficiency with which the EA function can deliver insights, but a large number of organizations have not a selected an EA tool that suits their needs.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • EA tool value largely comes from tying organizational context and requirements to the selection process.
    • Organizations that have selected an EA tool often fail to have it adopted and show its true value. To ensure successful adoption and value delivery, the EA tool selection process must account for the needs of business stakeholders and tool users.

    Impact and Result

    • Link the need for the EA tool to your organization’s EA value proposition. The connection enables the EA tool to address the future needs of stakeholders and the design style of the EA team.
    • Use Info-Tech’s EA Solution Recommendation Tool to create a shortlist of EA tools that is suited to the preferences of the organization.
    • Gather additional information on the shortlist of EA tool vendors to narrow down the selection using the EA Tool Request for Information Template.

    Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should procure an EA tool in the digital age, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Executive Brief
    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phases 1-3

    1. Make the case

    Decide if an EA tool is needed in your organization and define the requirements of EA tool users.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 1: Make the Case
    • EA Value Proposition Template
    • EA Tool User Requirements Template

    2. Shortlist EA tools

    Determine your organization’s preferences in terms of product capabilities and vendor characteristics.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 2: Shortlist EA Tools
    • EA Solution Recommendation Tool

    3. Select and communicate the process

    Gather information on shortlisted vendors and make your final decision.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 3: Select and Communicate the Process
    • EA Tool Request for Information Template
    • EA Tool Demo Script Template
    • Request for Proposal (RFP) Template
    • EA Tool Selection Process Template
    [infographic]

    IT Governance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}22|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}22|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}22|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $124,127
    • member rating average days saved: 37
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-governance
    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you may want to redesign your IT governance, Review our methodology, and understand how we can support you in completing this process.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}432|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,059 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • All too often, the portfolio of programs and projects looks more like a random heap than a strategically organized and balanced collection of investments that will drive the business forward.
    • Portfolio managers know that with the right kind of information and the right level of process maturity they can get better results through the portfolio; however, organizations often assume (falsely) that the required level of maturity is out of reach from their current state and perpetually delay improvements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The information needed to define clear and usable criteria for organizing the portfolio of programs and projects already exists. Portfolio managers only need to identify the sources of that information and institute processes for regularly reviewing that information in order to define those criteria.
    • Once a portfolio manager has a clear idea of the goals and constraints that shape what ought to be included (or removed) from the portfolio and once these have been translated into clear and usable portfolio criteria, basic portfolio management processes can be instituted to ensure that these criteria are used consistently throughout the various stages of the project lifecycle.
    • Portfolio management frameworks and processes do not need to be built from scratch. Well-known frameworks – such as the one outlined in COBIT 5 APO05 – can be instituted in a way that will allow even low-maturity organizations to start organizing their portfolio.
    • Organizations do not need to grow into portfolio management frameworks to get the benefits of an organized portfolio; instead, they can grow within such frameworks.

    Impact and Result

    • An organized portfolio will ensure that the projects and programs included in it are strategically aligned and can actually be executed within the finite constraints of budgetary and human resource capacity.
    • Portfolio managers are better empowered to make decisions about which projects should be included in the portfolio (and when) and are better empowered to make the very tough decisions about which projects should be removed from the portfolio (i.e. cancelled).
    • Building and maturing a portfolio management framework will more fully integrate the PMO into the broader IT management and governance frameworks, making it a more integral part of strategic decisions and a better business partner in the long run.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should maintain an organized portfolio of programs and projects, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current state of the portfolio and PPM processes

    Analyze the current mix of programs and projects in your portfolio and assess the maturity of your current PPM processes.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 1: Assess the Current State of the Portfolio and PPM Processes
    • Project Portfolio Organizer
    • COBIT APO05 (Manage Portfolio) Alignment Workbook

    2. Enhance portfolio organization through improved PPM criteria and processes

    Enhance and optimize your portfolio management processes to ensure portfolio criteria are clearly defined and consistently applied across the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 2: Enhance Portfolio Organization Through Improved PPM Criteria and Processes
    • Portfolio Management Standard Operating Procedures

    3. Implement improved portfolio management practices

    Implement your portfolio management improvement initiatives to ensure long-term sustainable adoption of new PPM practices.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 3: Implement Improved Portfolio Management Practices
    • Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Portfolio Mix and Portfolio Process Current State

    The Purpose

    Analyze the current mix of the portfolio to determine how to better organize it according to organizational goals and constraints.

    Assess which PPM processes need to be enhanced to better organize the portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An analysis of the existing portfolio of projects (highlighting areas of concern).

    An analysis of the maturity of current PPM processes and their ability to support the maintenance of an organized portfolio.

    Activities

    1.1 Pre-work: Prepare a complete project list.

    1.2 Define existing portfolio categories, criteria, and targets.

    1.3 Analyze the current portfolio mix.

    1.4 Identify areas of concern with current portfolio mix.

    1.5 Review the six COBIT sub-processes for portfolio management (APO05.01-06).

    1.6 Assess the degree to which these sub-processes have been currently achieved at the organization.

    1.7 Assess the degree to which portfolio-supporting IT governance and management processes exist.

    1.8 Perform a gap analysis.

    Outputs

    Analysis of the current portfolio mix

    Assessment of COBIT alignment and gap analysis.

    2 Define Portfolio Target Mix, Criteria, and Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Define clear and usable portfolio criteria.

    Record/design portfolio management processes that will support the consistent use of portfolio criteria at all stages of the project lifecycle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly defined and usable portfolio criteria.

    A portfolio management framework that supports the consistent use of the portfolio criteria across all stages of the project lifecycle.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify determinants of the portfolio mix, criteria, and constraints.

    2.2 Define the target mix, portfolio criteria, and portfolio metrics.

    2.3 Identify sources of funding and resourcing.

    2.4 Review and record the portfolio criteria based upon the goals and constraints.

    2.5 Create a PPM improvement roadmap.

    Outputs

    Portfolio criteria

    Portfolio metrics for intake, monitoring, closure, termination, reprioritization, and benefits tracking

    Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap

    3 Design Improved Portfolio Sub-Processes

    The Purpose

    Ensure that the portfolio criteria are used to guide decision making at each stage of the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Processes that support decision making based upon the portfolio criteria.

    Processes that ensure the portfolio remains consistently organized according to the portfolio criteria.

    Activities

    3.1 Ensure that the metrics used for each sub-process are based upon the standard portfolio criteria.

    3.2 Establish the roles, accountabilities, and responsibilities for each sub-process needing improvement.

    3.3 Outline the workflow for each sub-process needing improvement.

    Outputs

    A RACI chart for each sub-process

    A workflow for each sub-process

    4 Change Impact Analysis and Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    The Purpose

    Ensure that the portfolio management improvement initiatives are sustainably adopted in the long term.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Stakeholder engagement.

    Sustainable long-term adoption of the improved portfolio management practices.

    Activities

    4.1 Conduct a change impact analysis.

    4.2 Create a stakeholder engagement plan.

    Outputs

    Change Impact Analysis

    Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    Completed Portfolio Management SOP

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}38|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}38|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Teaser Video: Visit Website
    • Teaser Video Title: Disaster Recovery Planning
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $92,268
    • member rating average days saved: 36
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk
    The show must go on. Make sure your IT has right-sized DR capabilities.

    Enterprise Application Selection and Implementation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}29|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}29|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $37,356
    • member rating average days saved: 34
    • Parent Category Name: Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /applications

    The challenge

    • Large scale implementations are prone to failure. This is probably also true in your company. Typically large endeavors like this overrun the budget, are late to deliver, or are abandoned altogether. It would be best if you manage your risks when starting such a new project.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • Large-scale software implementations continue to fail at very high rates. A recent report by McKinsey & Company estimates that 66% go over budget, 33% over time, and 17% delivered less value than expected. Most companies will survive a botched implementation, but 17% threatened the existence of the company involved.
    • With all the knowledge sharing that we have today with oodles of data at our disposal, we should expect IT-providers to have clear, standardized frameworks to handle these implementations. But projects that overrun by more than 200% still occur more often than you may think.
    • When you solicit a systems integrator (SI), you want to equip yourself to manage the SI and not be utterly dependent on their methodology.

    Impact and results 

    • You can assume proper accountability for the implementation and avoid over-reliance on the systems integrator.
    • Leverage the collective knowledge and advice of additional IT professionals
    • Review the pitfalls and lessons learned from failed integrations.
    • Manage risk at every stage.
    • Perform a self-assessment at various stages of the integration path.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Executive Summary

    Determine the rations for your implementation

    See if a custom-of-the-shelf process optimization makes sense.

    • Storyboard: Govern and Manage an Enterprise Software Implementation (ppt)

    Prepare

    Determine the right (level of) governance for your implementation.

    • Large Software Implementation Maturity Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Project Success Measurement Tool (xls)
    • Risk Mitigation Plan Template (xls)

    Plan and analyze

    Prepare for the overall implementation journey and gather your requirements. Then conduct a stage-gate assessment of this phase.

    • Project Phases Entry and Exit Criteria Checklist Tool (xls)
    • Project Lessons Learned Document (doc)

    Design, build and deploy

    Conduct a stage-gate assessment after every step below.

    • Make exact designs of the software implementation and ensure that all stakeholders and the integrator completely understand.
    • Build the solution according to the requirements and designs.
    • Thoroughly test and evaluate that the implementation meets your business expectations. 
    • Then deploy

    Initiate your roadmap

    Review your dispositions to ensure they align with your goals. 

    • Build an Application Rationalization Framework – Phase 4: Initiate Your Roadmap (ppt)
    • Disposition Prioritization Tool (xls)

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}300|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    There are many challenges for I&O when it comes to digital transformation, including:

    • Legacy infrastructure technical debt
    • Skills and talent in the IT team
    • A culture that resists change
    • Fear of job loss

    These and many more will hinder your progress, which demonstrates the need to invest in modernizing your infrastructure, investing in training and hiring talent, and cultivating a culture that supports digital transformation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    By using the framework of culture, competencies, collaboration and capabilities, organizations can create dimensions in their I&O structure in order to shift from traditional infrastructure management to becoming a strategic enabler, driving agility, innovation, and operational excellence though the effective integration of people, process, and technology.

    Impact and Result

    By driving a customer-centric approach, delivering a successful transformation can be tailored to the business goals and drive adoption and engagement. Refining your roadmap through data and analytics will drive this change. Use third-party expertise to guide your transformation and help build that vision of the future.

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation – Unlock the full potential of your infrastructure with a digital transformation strategy and clear the barriers for success.

  • Be customer centric as opposed to being technology driven.
  • Understanding business needs and pain points is key to delivering solutions.
  • Approach infrastructure digital transformation in iterations and look at this as a journey.
    • Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation Storyboard
    • I&O Digital Transformation Maturity Assessment Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation

    Unlock the full potential of your infrastructure with a digital transformation strategy and clear the barriers to success.

    Analyst Perspective

    It’s not just about the technology!

    Many businesses fail in their endeavors to complete a digital transformation, but the reasons are complex, and there are many ways to fail, whether it is people, process, or technology. In fact, according to many surveys, 70% of digital transformations fail, and it’s mainly down to strategy – or the lack thereof.

    A lot of organizations think of digital transformation as just an investment in technology, with no vision of what they are trying to achieve or transform. So, out of the gate, many organizations fail to undergo a meaningful transformation, change their business model, or bring about a culture of digital transformation needed to be seriously competitive in their given market.

    When it comes to I&O leaders who have been given a mandate to drive digital transformation projects, they still must align to the vision and mission of the organization; they must still train and hire staff that will be experts in their field; they must still drive process improvements and align the right technology to meet the needs of a digital transformation.

    John Donovan

    John Donovan

    Principal Research Director, I&O
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Digital transformation requires I&O teams to shift from traditional infrastructure management to becoming a strategic enabler, driving agility, innovation, and operational excellence through effective integration of people, process, and technology.

    Insight 1

    Collaboration is a key component of I&O – Promote strong collaboration between I&O and other business functions. When doing a digital transformation, it is clear that this is a cross-functional effort. Business leaders and IT teams need to align their objectives, prioritize initiatives, and ensure that you are seamlessly integrating technologies with the new business functions.

    Insight 2

    Embrace agility and adaptability as core principles – As the digital landscape continues to evolve, it is paramount that I&O leaders are agile and adaptable to changing business needs, adopting new technology and implementing new innovative solutions. The culture of continuous improvement and openness to experimentation and learning will assist the I&O leaders in their journey.

    Insight 3

    Future-proof your infrastructure and operations – By anticipating emerging technologies and trends, you can proactively plan and organize your team for future needs. By investing in scalable, flexible infrastructure such as cloud services, automation, AI technologies, and continuously upskilling the IT staff, you can stay relevant and forward-looking in the digital space.

    Tactical insight

    An IT infrastructure maturity assessment is a foundational step in the journey of digital transformation. The demand will be on performance, resilience, and scalability. IT infrastructure must be able to support innovation and rapid deployment of services.

    Tactical insight

    Having a clear strategy, with leadership commitment along with hiring and training the right people, monitoring and measuring your progress, and ensuring it is a business-led journey will increase your chances of success.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    There are a lot of challenges for I&O when it comes to digital transformation, including:

    • Legacy infrastructure technical debt.
    • Skills and talent in the IT team.
    • A culture that resists change.
    • Fear of job loss.

    These and many more will hinder your progress, which demonstrates the need to invest in modernizing your infrastructure, investing in training and hiring talent, and cultivating a culture that supports digital transformation.

    Common Obstacles

    Many obstacles to digital transformation begin with non-I&O activities, including:

    • Lack of a clear vision and strategy.
    • Siloed organizational structure.
    • Lack of governance and data management.
    • Limited budget and resources.

    By addressing these obstacles, I&O will have a better chance of a successful transformation and delivering the full potential of digital technologies.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Building a culture of innovation by developing clear goals and creating a vision will be key.

    • Be customer centric as opposed to being technology driven.
    • Understand the business needs and pain points in order to effectively deliver solutions.
    • Approach infrastructure digital transformation in iterations and look at it as a journey.

    By completing the Info-Tech digital readiness questionnaire, you will see where you are in terms of maturity and areas you need to concentrate on.

    Info-Tech Insight

    By driving a customer-centric approach, delivering a successful transformation can be tailored to the business goals and drive adoption and engagement. Refining your roadmap through data and analytics will drive this change. Use third-party expertise to guide your transformation and help build that vision of the future.

    The cost of digital transformation

    The challenges that stand in the way of your success, and what is needed to reverse the risk

    What CIOs are saying about their challenges

    26% of those CIOs surveyed cite resistance to change, with entrenched viewpoints demonstrating a real need for a cultural shift to enhance the digital transformation journey.

    Source: Prophet, 2019.

    70% of digital transformation projects fall short of their objectives – even when their leadership is aligned, often with serious consequences.

    Source: BCG, 2020.

    Having a clear strategy and commitment from leadership, hiring and training the right people, monitoring and measuring your progress, and ensuring it is a business-led journey will increase your chances of success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cultural change, business alignment, skills training, and setting a clear strategy with KPIs to demonstrate success are all key to being successful in your digital journey.

    Small and medium-sized enterprises

    What business owners and CEOs are saying about their digital transformation

    57% of small business owners feel they must improve their IT infrastructure to optimize their operations.

    Source: SMB Story, 2023.

    64% of CEOs believe driving digital transformation at a rapid pace is critical to attracting and retaining talent and customers.

    Source: KPMG, 2022.

    Info-Tech Insight

    An IT infrastructure maturity assessment is a foundational step in the journey of digital transformation. The demand will be on performance, resilience, and scalability. IT infrastructure must be able to support innovation and rapid deployments.

    Standardize the Service Desk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}477|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $24,155 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Not everyone embraces their role in service support. Specialists would rather work on projects than provide service support.
    • The Service Desk lacks processes and workflows to provide consistent service. Service desk managers struggle to set and meet service-level expectations, which further compromises end-user satisfaction.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service desk improvement is an exercise in organizational change. Engage specialists across the IT organization in building the solution. Establish a single service-support team across the IT group and enforce it with a cooperative, customer-focused culture.
    • Don’t be fooled by a tool that’s new. A new service desk tool alone won’t solve the problem. Service desk maturity improvements depend on putting in place the right people and processes to support the technology.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a consistent customer service experience for service desk patrons, and increase efficiency, first-call resolution, and end-user satisfaction with the Service Desk.
    • Decrease time and cost to resolve service desk tickets.
    • Understand and address reporting needs to address root causes and measure success and build a solid foundation for future IT service improvements.

    Standardize the Service Desk Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Standardize the Service Desk Research – A step-by-step document that helps you improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meet SLAs.

    Use this blueprint to standardize your service desk by assessing your current capability and laying the foundations for your service desk, design an effective incident management workflow, design a request fulfillment process, and apply the discussions and activities to make an actionable plan for improving your service desk.

    • Standardize the Service Desk – Phases 1-4

    2. Service Desk Maturity Assessment – An assessment tool to help guide process improvement efforts and track progress.

    This tool is designed to assess your service desk process maturity, identify gaps, guide improvement efforts, and measure your progress.

    • Service Desk Maturity Assessment

    3. Service Desk Project Summary – A template to help you organize process improvement initiatives using examples.

    Use this template to organize information about the service desk challenges that the organization is facing, make the case to build a right-sized service desk to address those challenges, and outline the recommended process changes.

    • Service Desk Project Summary

    4. Service Desk Roles and Responsibilities Guide – An analysis tool to determine the right roles and build ownership.

    Use the RACI template to determine roles for your service desk initiatives and to build ownership around them. Use the template and replace it with your organization's information.

    • Service Desk Roles and Responsibilities Guide

    5. Incident Management and Service Desk Standard Operating Procedure – A template designed to help service managers kick-start the standardization of service desk processes.

    The template will help you identify service desk roles and responsibilities, build ticket management processes, put in place sustainable knowledgebase practices, document ticket prioritization scheme and SLO, and document ticket workflows.

    • Incident Management and Service Desk SOP

    6. Ticket and Call Quality Assessment Tool – An assessment tool to check in on ticket and call quality quarterly and improve the quality of service desk data.

    Use this tool to help review the quality of tickets handled by agents and discuss each technician's technical capabilities to handle tickets.

    • Ticket and Call Quality Assessment Tool

    7. Workflow Library – A repository of typical workflows.

    The Workflow Library provides examples of typical workflows that make up the bulk of the incident management and request fulfillment processes at the service desk.

    • Incident Management and Service Desk Workflows (Visio)
    • Incident Management and Service Desk Workflows (PDF)

    8. Service Desk Ticket Categorization Schemes – A repository of ticket categories.

    The Ticket Categorization Schemes provide examples of ticket categories to organize the data in the service desk tool and produce reports that help managers manage the service desk and meet business requirements.

    • Service Desk Ticket Categorization Schemes

    9. Knowledge Manager – A job description template that includes a detailed explication of the responsibilities and expectations of a Knowledge Manager role.

    The Knowledge Manager's role is to collect, synthesize, organize, and manage corporate information in support of business units across the enterprise.

    • Knowledge Manager

    10. Knowledgebase Article Template – A comprehensive record of the incident management process.

    An accurate and comprehensive record of the incident management process, including a description of the incident, any workarounds identified, the root cause (if available), and the profile of the incident's source, will improve incident resolution time.

    • Knowledgebase Article Template

    11. Sample Communication Plan – A sample template to guide your communications around the integration and implementation of your overall service desk improvement initiatives.

    Use this template to develop a communication plan that outlines what stakeholders can expect as the process improvements recommended in the Standardize the Service Desk blueprint are implemented.

    • Sample Communication Plan

    12. Service Desk Roadmap – A structured roadmap tool to help build your service desk initiatives timeline.

    The Service Desk Roadmap helps track outstanding implementation activities from your service desk standardization project. Use the roadmap tool to define service desk project tasks, their owners, priorities, and timeline.

    • Service Desk Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Standardize the Service Desk

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay Service Desk Foundations

    The Purpose

    Discover your challenges and understand what roles, metrics, and ticket handling procedures are needed to tackle the challenges.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set a clear understanding about the importance of service desk to your organization and service desk best practices.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current state of the service desk.

    1.2 Review service desk and shift-left strategy.

    1.3 Identify service desk metrics and reports.

    1.4 Identify ticket handling procedures

    Outputs

    Current state assessment

    Shift-left strategy and implications

    Service desk metrics and reports

    Ticket handling procedures

    2 Design Incident Management

    The Purpose

    Build workflows for incident and critical incident tickets.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Distinguish incidents from service requests.

    Ticket categorization facilitates ticket. routing and reporting.

    Develop an SLA for your service desk team for a consistent service delivery.

    Activities

    2.1 Build incident and critical incident management workflows.

    2.2 Design ticket categorization scheme and proper ticket handling guidelines.

    2.3 Design incident escalation and prioritization guidelines.

    Outputs

    Incident and critical incident management workflows

    Ticket categorization scheme

    Ticket escalation and prioritization guidelines

    3 Design Request Fulfilment

    The Purpose

    Build service request workflows and prepare self-service portal.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Standardize request fulfilment processes.

    Prepare for better knowledge management and leverage self-service portal to facilitate shift-left strategy.

    Activities

    3.1 Build service request workflows.

    3.2 Build a targeted knowledgebase.

    3.3 Prepare for a self-serve portal project.

    Outputs

    Distinguishing criteria for requests and projects

    Service request workflows and SLAs

    Knowledgebase article template, processes, and workflows

    4 Build Project Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Now that you have laid the foundation of your service desk, put all the initiatives into an action plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Discuss priorities, set timeline, and identify effort for your service desk.

    Identify the benefits and impacts of communicating service desk initiatives to stakeholders and define channels to communicate service desk changes.

    Activities

    4.1 Build an implementation roadmap.

    4.2 Build a communication plan

    Outputs

    Project implementation and task list with associated owners

    Project communication plan and workshop summary presentation

    Further reading

    Analyst Perspective

    "Customer service issues are rarely based on personality but are almost always a symptom of poor and inconsistent process. When service desk managers are looking to hire to resolve customer service issues and executives are pushing back, it’s time to look at improving process and the support strategy to make the best use of technicians’ time, tools, and knowledge sharing. Once improvements have been made, it’s easier to make the case to add people or introduce automation.

    Replacing service desk solutions will also highlight issues around poor process. Without fixing the baseline services, the new solution will simply wrap your issues in a prettier package.

    Ultimately, the service desk needs to be the entry point for users to get help and the rest of IT needs to provide the appropriate support to ensure the first line of interaction has the knowledge and tools they need to resolve quickly and preferably on first contact. If your plans include optimization to self-serve or automation, you’ll have a hard time getting there without standardizing first."

    Sandi Conrad

    Principal Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    A method for getting your service desk out of firefighter mode

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • The CIO and senior IT management who need to increase service desk effectiveness and timeliness and improve end-user satisfaction.
    • The service desk manager who wants to lead the team from firefighting mode to providing consistent and proactive support.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Service desk teams who want to increase their own effectiveness and move from a help desk to a service desk.
    • Infrastructure and applications managers who want to decrease reactive support activities and increase strategic project productivity by shifting repetitive and low-value work left.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Create a consistent customer service experience for service desk patrons.
    • Increase efficiency, first-call resolution, and end-user satisfaction with the Service Desk.
    • Decrease time and cost to resolve service desk tickets.
    • Understand and address reporting needs to address root causes and measure success.
    • Build a solid foundation for future IT service improvements.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • The CIO and senior IT management who need to increase service desk effectiveness and timeliness and improve end-user satisfaction.
    • If only the phone could stop ringing, the Service Desk could become proactive, address service levels, and improve end-user IT satisfaction.

    Complication

    • Not everyone embraces their role in service support. Specialists would rather work on projects than provide service support.
    • The Service Desk lacks processes and workflows to provide consistent service. Service desk managers struggle to set and meet service-level expectations, which further compromises end-user satisfaction.

    Resolution

    • Go beyond the blind adoption of best-practice frameworks. No simple formula exists for improving service desk maturity. Use diagnostic tools to assess the current state of the Service Desk. Identify service support challenges and draw on best-practice frameworks intelligently to build a structured response to those challenges.
    • An effective service desk must be built on the right foundations. Understand how:
      • Service desk structure affects cost and ticket volume capacity.
      • Incident management workflows can improve ticket handling, prioritization, and escalation.
      • Request fulfillment processes create opportunities for streamlining and automating services.
      • Knowledge sharing supports the processes and workflows essential to effective service support.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Service desk improvement is an exercise in organizational change. Engage specialists across the IT organization in building the solution. Establish a single service-support team across the IT group and enforce it with a cooperative, customer-focused culture. Don’t be fooled by a tool that’s new. A new service desk tool alone won’t solve the problem. Service desk maturity improvements depend on putting in place the right people and processes to support the technology

    Directors and executives understand the importance of the service desk and believe IT can do better

    A double bar graph is depicted. The blue bars represent Effectiveness and the green bars represent Importance in terms of service desk at different seniority levels, which include frontline, manager, director, and executive.

    Source: Info-Tech, 2019 Responses (N=189 organizations)

    Service Desk Importance Scores

      No Importance: 1.0-6.9
      Limited Importance: 7.0-7.9
      Significant Importance: 8.0-8.9
      Critical Importance: 9.0-10.0

    Service Desk Effectiveness Scores

      Not in Place: N/A
      Not Effective: 0.0-4.9
      Somewhat Ineffective: 5.0-5.9
      Somewhat Effective: 6.0-6.9
      Very Effective: 7.0-10.0

    Info-Tech Research Group’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program assesses the importance and effectiveness of core IT processes. Since its inception, the MGD has consistently identified the service desk as an area to leverage.

    Business stakeholders consistently rank the service desk as one of the top five most important services that IT provides

    Since 2013, Info-Tech has surveyed over 40,000 business stakeholders as part of our CIO Business Vision program.

    Business stakeholders ranked the following 12 core IT services in terms of importance:

    Learn more about the CIO Business Vision Program.
    *Note: IT Security was added to CIO Business Vision 2.0 in 2019

    Top IT Services for Business Stakeholders

    1. Network Infrastructure
    2. IT Security*
    3. Data Quality
    4. Service Desk
    5. Business Applications
    6. Devices
    7. Client-Facing Technology
    8. Analytical Capability
    9. IT Innovation Leadership
    10. Projects
    11. Work Orders
    12. IT Policies
    13. Requirements Gathering
    Source: Info-Tech Research Group, 2019 (N=224 organizations)

    Having an effective and timely service desk correlates with higher end-user satisfaction with all other IT services

    A double bar graph is depicted. The blue bar represents dissatisfied ender user, and the green bar represents satisfied end user. The bars show the average of dissatisfied and satisfied end users for service desk effectiveness and service desk timeliness.

    On average, organizations that were satisfied with service desk effectiveness rated all other IT processes 46% higher than dissatisfied end users.

    Organizations that were satisfied with service desk timeliness rated all other IT processes 37% higher than dissatisfied end users.
    “Satisfied” organizations had average scores =8.“Dissatisfied" organizations had average scores “Dissatisfied" organizations had average scores =6. Source: Info-Tech Research Group, 2019 (N=18,500+ respondents from 75 organizations)

    Standardize the service desk the Info-Tech way to get measurable results

    More than one hundred organizations engaged with Info-Tech, through advisory calls and workshops, for their service desk projects in 2016. Their goal was either to improve an existing service desk or build one from scratch.

    Organizations that estimate the business impact of each project phase help us shed light on the average measured value of the engagements.

    "The analysts are an amazing resource for this project. Their approach is very methodical, and they have the ability to fill in the big picture with detailed, actionable steps. There is a real opportunity for us to get off the treadmill and make real IT service management improvements"

    - Rod Gula, IT Director

    American Realty Advisors

    Three circles are depicted. The top circle shows the sum of measured value dollar impact which is US$1,659,493.37. The middle circle shows the average measured value dollar impact which is US$19,755.87. The bottom circle shows the average measured value time saved which is 27 days.

    Info-Tech’s approach to service desk standardization focuses on building service management essentials

    This image depicts all of the phases and steps in this blueprint.

    Info-Tech draws on the COBIT framework, which focuses on consistent delivery of IT services across the organization

    This image depicts research that can be used to improve IT processes. Service Desk is circled to demonstrate which research is being used.

    The service desk is the foundation of all other service management processes.

    The image shows how the service desk is a foundation for other service management processes.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Standardize the Service Desk – project overview

    This image shows the project overview of this blueprint.

    Info-Tech delivers: Use our tools and templates to accelerate your project to completion

    Project Summary

    Image of template.

    Service Desk Standard Operating Procedures

    Image of tool.

    Service Desk Maturity Assessment Tool

    Image of tool.

    Service Desk Implementation Roadmap

    Image of tool Incident, knowledge, and request management workflows

    Incident, knowledge, and request management workflows

    The project’s key deliverable is a service desk standard operating procedure

    Benefits of documented SOPs:

    Improved training and knowledge transfer: Routine tasks can be delegated to junior staff (freeing senior staff to work on higher priority tasks).

    IT automation, process optimization, and consistent operations: Defining, documenting, and then optimizing processes enables IT automation to be built on sound processes, so consistent positive results can be achieved.

    Compliance: Compliance audits are more manageable because the documentation is already in place.

    Transparency: Visually documented processes answer the common business question of “why does that take so long?”

    Cost savings: Work solved at first contact or with a minimal number of escalations will result in greater efficiency and more cost-effective support. This will also lead to better customer service.

    Impact of undocumented/undefined SOPs:

    Tasks will be difficult to delegate, key staff become a bottleneck, knowledge transfer is inconsistent, and there is a longer onboarding process for new staff

    IT automation built on poorly defined, unoptimized processes leads to inconsistent results.

    Documenting SOPs to prepare for an audit becomes a major time-intensive project.

    Other areas of the organization may not understand how IT operates, which can lead to confusion and unrealistic expectations.

    Support costs are highest through inefficient processes, and proactive work becomes more difficult to schedule, making the organization vulnerable to costly disruptions.

    Workshop Overview

    Image depicts workshop overview occurring over four days.

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Phase 1

    Lay Service Desk Foundations

    Step 1.1:Assess current state

    Image shows the steps in phase 1. Highlight is on step 1.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 1.1.1 Outline service desk challenges
    • 1.1.2 Assess the service desk maturity

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    Alignment on the challenges that the service desk faces, an assessment of the current state of service desk processes and technologies, and baseline metrics against which to measure improvements.

    Deliverables

    • Service Desk Maturity Assessment

    Standardizing the service desk benefits the whole business

    The image depicts 3 circles to represent the service desk foundations.

    Embrace standardization

    • Standardization prevents wasted energy on reinventing solutions to recurring issues.
    • Standardized processes are scalable so that process maturity increases with the size of your organization.

    Increase business satisfaction

    • Improve confidence that the service desk can meet service levels.
    • Create a single point of contact for incidents and requests and escalate quickly.
    • Analyze trends to forecast and meet shifting business requirements.

    Reduce recurring issues

    • Create tickets for every task and categorize them accurately.
    • Generate reliable data to support root-cause analysis.

    Increase efficiency and lower operating costs

    • Empower end users and technicians with a targeted knowledgebase (KB).
    • Cross-train to improve service consistency.

    Case Study: The CIO of Westminster College took stock of existing processes before moving to empower the “helpless desk”

    Scott Lowe helped a small staff of eight IT professionals formalize service desk processes and increase the amount of time available for projects.

    When he joined Westminster College as CIO in 2006, the department faced several infrastructure challenges, including:

    • An unreliable network
    • Aging server replacements and no replacement plan
    • IT was the “department of no”
    • A help desk known as the “helpless desk”
    • A lack of wireless connectivity
    • Internet connection speed that was much too slow

    As the CIO investigated how to address the infrastructure challenges, he realized people cared deeply about how IT spent its time.

    The project load of IT staff increased, with new projects coming in every day.

    With a long project list, it became increasingly important to improve the transparency of project request and prioritization.

    Some weeks, staff spent 80% of their time working on projects. Other weeks, support requirements might leave only 10% for project work.

    He addressed the infrastructure challenges in part by analyzing IT’s routine processes.

    Internally, IT had inefficient support processes that reduced the amount of time they could spend on projects.

    They undertook an internal process analysis effort to identify processes that would have a return on investment if they were improved. The goal was to reduce operational support time so that project time could be increased.

    Five years later, they had a better understanding of the organization's operational support time needs and were able to shift workloads to accommodate projects without compromising support.

    Common challenges experienced by service desk teams

    Unresolved issues

    • Tickets are not created for all incidents.
    • Tickets are lost or escalated to the wrong technicians.
    • Poor data impedes root-cause analysis of incidents.

    Lost resources/accountability

    • Lack of cross-training and knowledge sharing.
    • Lack of skills coverage for critical applications and services.
    • Time is wasted troubleshooting recurring issues.
    • Reports unavailable due to lack of data and poor categorization.

    High cost to resolve

    • Tier 2/3 resolve issues that should be resolved at tier 1.
    • Tier 2/3 often interrupt projects to focus on service support.

    Poor planning

    • Lack of data for effective trend analysis leads to poor demand planning.
    • Lack of data leads to lost opportunities for templating and automation.

    Low business satisfaction

    • Users are unable to get assistance with IT services quickly.
    • Users go to their favorite technician instead of using the service desk.

    Outline the organization’s service desk challenges

    1.1.1 Brainstorm service desk challenges

    Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    A. As a group, outline the areas where you think the service desk is experiencing challenges or weaknesses. Use sticky notes or a whiteboard to separate the challenges into People, Process, and Technology so you have a wholistic view of the constraints across the department.

    B. Think about the following:

    • What have you heard from users? (e.g. slow response time)
    • What have you heard from executives? (e.g. poor communication)
    • What should you start doing? (e.g. documenting processes)
    • What should you stop doing? (e.g. work that is not being entered as tickets)

    C. Document challenges in the Service Desk Project Summary.

    Participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    Assess current service desk maturity to establish a baseline and create a plan for service desk improvement

    A current-state assessment will help you build a foundation for process improvements. Current-state assessments follow a basic formula:

    1. Determine the current state of the service desk.
    2. Determine the desired state of the service desk.
    3. Build a practical path from current to desired state.
    Image depicts 2 circles and a box. The circle on the 1. left has assess current state. The circle on the right has 2. assess target state. The box has 3. build a roadmap.

    Ideally, the current-state assessment should align the delivery of IT services with organizational needs. The assessment should achieve the following goals:

    1. Identify service desk pain points.
    2. Map each pain point to business services.
    3. Assign a broad business value to the resolution of each pain point.
    4. Map each pain point to a process.

    Expert Insight

    Image of expert.

    “How do you know if you aren’t mature enough? Nothing – or everything – is recorded and tracked, customer satisfaction is low, frustration is high, and there are multiple requests and incidents that nobody ever bothers to address.”

    Rob England

    IT Consultant & Commentator

    Owner Two Hills

    Also known as The IT Skeptic

    Assess the process maturity of the service desk to determine which project phase and steps will bring the most value

    1.1.2 Measure which activity will have the greatest impact

    The Service Desk Maturity Assessmenttool helps organizations assess their service desk process maturity and focus the project on the activities that matter most.

    The tool will help guide improvement efforts and measure your progress.

    • The second tab of the tool walks through a qualitative assessment of your service desk practices. Questions will prompt you to evaluate how you are executing key activities. Select the answer in the drop-down menus that most closely aligns with your current state.
    • The third tab displays your rate of process completeness and maturity. You will receive a score for each phase, an overall score, and advice based on your performance.
    • Document the results of the efficiency assessment in the Service Desk Project Summary.

    The tool is intended for periodic use. Review your answers each year and devise initiatives to improve the process performance where you need it most.

    Where do I find the data?

    Consult:

    • Service Manager
    • Service Desk Tools
    Image is the service desk tools.

    Step 1.2:Review service support best practices

    Image shows the steps in phase 1. Highlight is on step 1.2.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    1. 1.2.1 Identify roles and responsibilities in your organization
    2. 1.2.2 Map out the current and target structure of the service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    Identifying who is accountable for different support practices in the service desk will allow workload to be distributed effectively between functional teams and individuals. Closing the gaps in responsibilities will enable the execution of a shift-left strategy.

    Deliverables

    • Roles & responsibilities guide
    • Service desk structure

    Everyone in IT contributes to the success of service support

    Regardless of the service desk structure chosen to meet an organization’s service support requirements, IT staff should not doubt the role they play in service support.

    If you try to standardize service desk processes without engaging specialists in other parts of the IT organization, you will fail. Everyone in IT has a role to play in providing service support and meeting service-level agreements.

    Service Support Engagement Plan

    • Identify who is accountable for different service support processes.
    • Outline the different responsibilities of service desk agents at tier 1, tier 2, and tier 3 in meeting service-level agreements for service support.
    • Draft operational-level agreements between specialty groups and the service desk to improve accountability.
    • Configure the service desk tool to ensure ticket visibility and ownership across queues.
    • Engage tier 2 and tier 3 resources in building workflows for incident management, request fulfilment, and writing knowledgebase articles.
    • Emphasize the benefits of cooperation across IT silos:
      • Better customer service and end-user satisfaction.
      • Shorter time to resolve incidents and implement requests.
      • A higher tier 1 resolution rate, more efficient escalations, and fewer interruptions from project work.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Specialists tend to distance themselves from service support as they progress through their career to focus on projects.

    However, their cooperation is critical to the success of the new service desk. Not only do they contribute to the knowledgebase, but they also handle escalations from tiers 1 and 2.

    Clear project complications by leveraging roles and responsibilities

    R

    Responsible: This person is the staff member who completes the work. Assign at least one Responsible for each task, but this could be more than one.

    A

    Accountable: This team member delegates a task and is the last person to review deliverables and/or task. Sometimes Responsible and Accountable can be the same staff. Make sure that you always assign only one Accountable for each task and not more.

    C

    Consulted: People who do not carry out the task but need to be consulted. Typically, these people are subject matter experts or stakeholders.

    I

    Informed: People who receive information about process execution and quality and need to stay informed regarding the task.

    A RACI analysis is helpful with the following:

    • Workload Balancing: Allowing responsibilities to be distributed effectively between functional teams and individuals.
    • Change Management: Ensuring key functions and processes are not overlooked during organizational changes.
    • Onboarding: New employees can identify their own roles and responsibilities.

    A RACI chart outlines which positions are Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed

    Image shows example of RACI chart

    Create a list of roles and responsibilities in your organization

    1.2.1 Create RACI matrix to define responsibilities

    1. Use the Service Desk Roles and Responsibilities Guidefor a better understanding of the roles and responsibilities of different service desk tiers.
    2. In the RACI chart, replace the top row with specific roles in your organization.
    3. Modify or expand the process tasks, as needed, in the left column.
    4. For each role, identify the responsibility values that the person brings to the service desk. Fill out each column.
    5. Document in the Service Desk SOP. Schedule a time to share the results with organization leads.
    6. Distribute the chart between all teams in your organization.

    Notes:

    • Assign one Accountable for each task.
    • Have at least one Responsible for each task.
    • Avoid generic responsibilities, such as “team meetings.”
    • Keep your RACI definitions in your documents, as they are sometimes tough to remember.

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You'll Need

    • Service Desk SOP
    • Roles and Responsibilities Guide
    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Build a single point of contact for the service desk

    Regardless of the service desk structure chosen to meet your service support requirements, end users should be in no doubt about how to access the service.

    Provide end users with:

    • A single phone number.
    • A single email address.
    • A single web portal for all incidents and requests.

    A single point of contact will ensure:

    • An agent is available to field incidents and requests.
    • Incidents and requests are prioritized according to impact and urgency.
    • Work is tracked to completion.

    This prevents ad hoc ticket channels such as shoulder grabs or direct emails, chats, or calls to a technician from interrupting work.

    A single point of contact does not mean the service desk is only accessible through one intake channel, but rather all tickets are directed to the service desk (i.e. tier 1) to be resolved or redirected appropriately.

    Image depicts 2 boxes. The smaller box labelled users and the larger box labelled Service Desk Tier 1. There are four double-sided arrows. The top is labelled email, the second is walk-in, the third is phone, the fourth is web portal.

    Directors and executives understand the importance of the service desk and believe IT can do better

    A double bar graph is depicted. The blue bars represent Effectiveness and the green bars represent Importance in terms of service desk at different seniority levels, which include frontline, manager, director, and executive.

    Source: Info-Tech, 2019 Responses (N=189 organizations)

    Service Desk Importance Scores

      No Importance: 1.0-6.9
      Limited Importance: 7.0-7.9
      Significant Importance: 8.0-8.9
      Critical Importance: 9.0-10.0

    Service Desk Effectiveness Scores

      Not in Place: N/A
      Not Effective: 0.0-4.9
      Somewhat Ineffective: 5.0-5.9
      Somewhat Effective: 6.0-6.9
      Very Effective: 7.0-10.0

    Info-Tech Research Group’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program assesses the importance and effectiveness of core IT processes. Since its inception, the MGD has consistently identified the service desk as an area to leverage.

    Business stakeholders consistently rank the service desk as one of the top five most important services that IT provides

    Since 2013, Info-Tech has surveyed over 40,000 business stakeholders as part of our CIO Business Vision program.

    Business stakeholders ranked the following 12 core IT services in terms of importance:

    Learn more about the CIO Business Vision Program.
    *Note: IT Security was added to CIO Business Vision 2.0 in 2019

    Top IT Services for Business Stakeholders

    1. Network Infrastructure
    2. IT Security*
    3. Data Quality
    4. Service Desk
    5. Business Applications
    6. Devices
    7. Client-Facing Technology
    8. Analytical Capability
    9. IT Innovation Leadership
    10. Projects
    11. Work Orders
    12. IT Policies
    13. Requirements Gathering
    Source: Info-Tech Research Group, 2019 (N=224 organizations)

    Having an effective and timely service desk correlates with higher end-user satisfaction with all other IT services

    A double bar graph is depicted. The blue bar represents dissatisfied ender user, and the green bar represents satisfied end user. The bars show the average of dissatisfied and satisfied end users for service desk effectiveness and service desk timeliness.

    On average, organizations that were satisfied with service desk effectiveness rated all other IT processes 46% higher than dissatisfied end users.

    Organizations that were satisfied with service desk timeliness rated all other IT processes 37% higher than dissatisfied end users.
    “Satisfied” organizations had average scores =8.“Dissatisfied" organizations had average scores “Dissatisfied" organizations had average scores =6. Source: Info-Tech Research Group, 2019 (N=18,500+ respondents from 75 organizations)

    Standardize the service desk the Info-Tech way to get measurable results

    More than one hundred organizations engaged with Info-Tech, through advisory calls and workshops, for their service desk projects in 2016. Their goal was either to improve an existing service desk or build one from scratch.

    Organizations that estimate the business impact of each project phase help us shed light on the average measured value of the engagements.

    "The analysts are an amazing resource for this project. Their approach is very methodical, and they have the ability to fill in the big picture with detailed, actionable steps. There is a real opportunity for us to get off the treadmill and make real IT service management improvements"

    - Rod Gula, IT Director

    American Realty Advisors

    Three circles are depicted. The top circle shows the sum of measured value dollar impact which is US$1,659,493.37. The middle circle shows the average measured value dollar impact which is US$19,755.87. The bottom circle shows the average measured value time saved which is 27 days.

    Info-Tech’s approach to service desk standardization focuses on building service management essentials

    This image depicts all of the phases and steps in this blueprint.

    Info-Tech draws on the COBIT framework, which focuses on consistent delivery of IT services across the organization

    This image depicts research that can be used to improve IT processes. Service Desk is circled to demonstrate which research is being used.

    The service desk is the foundation of all other service management processes.

    The image shows how the service desk is a foundation for other service management processes.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Standardize the Service Desk – project overview

    This image shows the project overview of this blueprint.

    Info-Tech delivers: Use our tools and templates to accelerate your project to completion

    Project Summary

    Image of template.

    Service Desk Standard Operating Procedures

    Image of tool.

    Service Desk Maturity Assessment Tool

    Image of tool.

    Service Desk Implementation Roadmap

    Image of tool Incident, knowledge, and request management workflows

    Incident, knowledge, and request management workflows

    The project’s key deliverable is a service desk standard operating procedure

    Benefits of documented SOPs:

    Improved training and knowledge transfer: Routine tasks can be delegated to junior staff (freeing senior staff to work on higher priority tasks).

    IT automation, process optimization, and consistent operations: Defining, documenting, and then optimizing processes enables IT automation to be built on sound processes, so consistent positive results can be achieved.

    Compliance: Compliance audits are more manageable because the documentation is already in place.

    Transparency: Visually documented processes answer the common business question of “why does that take so long?”

    Cost savings: Work solved at first contact or with a minimal number of escalations will result in greater efficiency and more cost-effective support. This will also lead to better customer service.

    Impact of undocumented/undefined SOPs:

    Tasks will be difficult to delegate, key staff become a bottleneck, knowledge transfer is inconsistent, and there is a longer onboarding process for new staff

    IT automation built on poorly defined, unoptimized processes leads to inconsistent results.

    Documenting SOPs to prepare for an audit becomes a major time-intensive project.

    Other areas of the organization may not understand how IT operates, which can lead to confusion and unrealistic expectations.

    Support costs are highest through inefficient processes, and proactive work becomes more difficult to schedule, making the organization vulnerable to costly disruptions.

    Workshop Overview

    Image depicts workshop overview occurring over four days.

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Phase 1

    Lay Service Desk Foundations

    Step 1.1:Assess current state

    Image shows the steps in phase 1. Highlight is on step 1.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 1.1.1 Outline service desk challenges
    • 1.1.2 Assess the service desk maturity

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    Alignment on the challenges that the service desk faces, an assessment of the current state of service desk processes and technologies, and baseline metrics against which to measure improvements.

    Deliverables

    • Service Desk Maturity Assessment

    Standardizing the service desk benefits the whole business

    The image depicts 3 circles to represent the service desk foundations.

    Embrace standardization

    • Standardization prevents wasted energy on reinventing solutions to recurring issues.
    • Standardized processes are scalable so that process maturity increases with the size of your organization.

    Increase business satisfaction

    • Improve confidence that the service desk can meet service levels.
    • Create a single point of contact for incidents and requests and escalate quickly.
    • Analyze trends to forecast and meet shifting business requirements.

    Reduce recurring issues

    • Create tickets for every task and categorize them accurately.
    • Generate reliable data to support root-cause analysis.

    Increase efficiency and lower operating costs

    • Empower end users and technicians with a targeted knowledgebase (KB).
    • Cross-train to improve service consistency.

    Case Study: The CIO of Westminster College took stock of existing processes before moving to empower the “helpless desk”

    Scott Lowe helped a small staff of eight IT professionals formalize service desk processes and increase the amount of time available for projects.

    When he joined Westminster College as CIO in 2006, the department faced several infrastructure challenges, including:

    • An unreliable network
    • Aging server replacements and no replacement plan
    • IT was the “department of no”
    • A help desk known as the “helpless desk”
    • A lack of wireless connectivity
    • Internet connection speed that was much too slow

    As the CIO investigated how to address the infrastructure challenges, he realized people cared deeply about how IT spent its time.

    The project load of IT staff increased, with new projects coming in every day.

    With a long project list, it became increasingly important to improve the transparency of project request and prioritization.

    Some weeks, staff spent 80% of their time working on projects. Other weeks, support requirements might leave only 10% for project work.

    He addressed the infrastructure challenges in part by analyzing IT’s routine processes.

    Internally, IT had inefficient support processes that reduced the amount of time they could spend on projects.

    They undertook an internal process analysis effort to identify processes that would have a return on investment if they were improved. The goal was to reduce operational support time so that project time could be increased.

    Five years later, they had a better understanding of the organization's operational support time needs and were able to shift workloads to accommodate projects without compromising support.

    Common challenges experienced by service desk teams

    Unresolved issues

    • Tickets are not created for all incidents.
    • Tickets are lost or escalated to the wrong technicians.
    • Poor data impedes root-cause analysis of incidents.

    Lost resources/accountability

    • Lack of cross-training and knowledge sharing.
    • Lack of skills coverage for critical applications and services.
    • Time is wasted troubleshooting recurring issues.
    • Reports unavailable due to lack of data and poor categorization.

    High cost to resolve

    • Tier 2/3 resolve issues that should be resolved at tier 1.
    • Tier 2/3 often interrupt projects to focus on service support.

    Poor planning

    • Lack of data for effective trend analysis leads to poor demand planning.
    • Lack of data leads to lost opportunities for templating and automation.

    Low business satisfaction

    • Users are unable to get assistance with IT services quickly.
    • Users go to their favorite technician instead of using the service desk.

    Outline the organization’s service desk challenges

    1.1.1 Brainstorm service desk challenges

    Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    A. As a group, outline the areas where you think the service desk is experiencing challenges or weaknesses. Use sticky notes or a whiteboard to separate the challenges into People, Process, and Technology so you have a wholistic view of the constraints across the department.

    B. Think about the following:

    • What have you heard from users? (e.g. slow response time)
    • What have you heard from executives? (e.g. poor communication)
    • What should you start doing? (e.g. documenting processes)
    • What should you stop doing? (e.g. work that is not being entered as tickets)

    C. Document challenges in the Service Desk Project Summary.

    Participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    Assess current service desk maturity to establish a baseline and create a plan for service desk improvement

    A current-state assessment will help you build a foundation for process improvements. Current-state assessments follow a basic formula:

    1. Determine the current state of the service desk.
    2. Determine the desired state of the service desk.
    3. Build a practical path from current to desired state.
    Image depicts 2 circles and a box. The circle on the 1. left has assess current state. The circle on the right has 2. assess target state. The box has 3. build a roadmap.

    Ideally, the current-state assessment should align the delivery of IT services with organizational needs. The assessment should achieve the following goals:

    1. Identify service desk pain points.
    2. Map each pain point to business services.
    3. Assign a broad business value to the resolution of each pain point.
    4. Map each pain point to a process.

    Expert Insight

    Image of expert.

    “How do you know if you aren’t mature enough? Nothing – or everything – is recorded and tracked, customer satisfaction is low, frustration is high, and there are multiple requests and incidents that nobody ever bothers to address.”

    Rob England

    IT Consultant & Commentator

    Owner Two Hills

    Also known as The IT Skeptic

    Assess the process maturity of the service desk to determine which project phase and steps will bring the most value

    1.1.2 Measure which activity will have the greatest impact

    The Service Desk Maturity Assessmenttool helps organizations assess their service desk process maturity and focus the project on the activities that matter most.

    The tool will help guide improvement efforts and measure your progress.

    • The second tab of the tool walks through a qualitative assessment of your service desk practices. Questions will prompt you to evaluate how you are executing key activities. Select the answer in the drop-down menus that most closely aligns with your current state.
    • The third tab displays your rate of process completeness and maturity. You will receive a score for each phase, an overall score, and advice based on your performance.
    • Document the results of the efficiency assessment in the Service Desk Project Summary.

    The tool is intended for periodic use. Review your answers each year and devise initiatives to improve the process performance where you need it most.

    Where do I find the data?

    Consult:

    • Service Manager
    • Service Desk Tools
    Image is the service desk tools.

    Step 1.2:Review service support best practices

    Image shows the steps in phase 1. Highlight is on step 1.2.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    1. 1.2.1 Identify roles and responsibilities in your organization
    2. 1.2.2 Map out the current and target structure of the service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    Identifying who is accountable for different support practices in the service desk will allow workload to be distributed effectively between functional teams and individuals. Closing the gaps in responsibilities will enable the execution of a shift-left strategy.

    Deliverables

    • Roles & responsibilities guide
    • Service desk structure

    Everyone in IT contributes to the success of service support

    Regardless of the service desk structure chosen to meet an organization’s service support requirements, IT staff should not doubt the role they play in service support.

    If you try to standardize service desk processes without engaging specialists in other parts of the IT organization, you will fail. Everyone in IT has a role to play in providing service support and meeting service-level agreements.

    Service Support Engagement Plan

    • Identify who is accountable for different service support processes.
    • Outline the different responsibilities of service desk agents at tier 1, tier 2, and tier 3 in meeting service-level agreements for service support.
    • Draft operational-level agreements between specialty groups and the service desk to improve accountability.
    • Configure the service desk tool to ensure ticket visibility and ownership across queues.
    • Engage tier 2 and tier 3 resources in building workflows for incident management, request fulfilment, and writing knowledgebase articles.
    • Emphasize the benefits of cooperation across IT silos:
      • Better customer service and end-user satisfaction.
      • Shorter time to resolve incidents and implement requests.
      • A higher tier 1 resolution rate, more efficient escalations, and fewer interruptions from project work.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Specialists tend to distance themselves from service support as they progress through their career to focus on projects.

    However, their cooperation is critical to the success of the new service desk. Not only do they contribute to the knowledgebase, but they also handle escalations from tiers 1 and 2.

    Clear project complications by leveraging roles and responsibilities

    R

    Responsible: This person is the staff member who completes the work. Assign at least one Responsible for each task, but this could be more than one.

    A

    Accountable: This team member delegates a task and is the last person to review deliverables and/or task. Sometimes Responsible and Accountable can be the same staff. Make sure that you always assign only one Accountable for each task and not more.

    C

    Consulted: People who do not carry out the task but need to be consulted. Typically, these people are subject matter experts or stakeholders.

    I

    Informed: People who receive information about process execution and quality and need to stay informed regarding the task.

    A RACI analysis is helpful with the following:

    • Workload Balancing: Allowing responsibilities to be distributed effectively between functional teams and individuals.
    • Change Management: Ensuring key functions and processes are not overlooked during organizational changes.
    • Onboarding: New employees can identify their own roles and responsibilities.

    A RACI chart outlines which positions are Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed

    Image shows example of RACI chart

    Create a list of roles and responsibilities in your organization

    1.2.1 Create RACI matrix to define responsibilities

    1. Use the Service Desk Roles and Responsibilities Guidefor a better understanding of the roles and responsibilities of different service desk tiers.
    2. In the RACI chart, replace the top row with specific roles in your organization.
    3. Modify or expand the process tasks, as needed, in the left column.
    4. For each role, identify the responsibility values that the person brings to the service desk. Fill out each column.
    5. Document in the Service Desk SOP. Schedule a time to share the results with organization leads.
    6. Distribute the chart between all teams in your organization.

    Notes:

    • Assign one Accountable for each task.
    • Have at least one Responsible for each task.
    • Avoid generic responsibilities, such as “team meetings.”
    • Keep your RACI definitions in your documents, as they are sometimes tough to remember.

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You'll Need

    • Service Desk SOP
    • Roles and Responsibilities Guide
    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Build a tiered generalist service desk to optimize costs

    A tiered generalist service desk with a first-tier resolution rate greater than 60% has the best operating cost and customer satisfaction of all competing service desk structural models.

    Image depicts a tiered generalist service desk example. It shows a flow from users to tier 1 and to tiers 2 and 3.

    The success of a tiered generalist model depends on standardized, defined processes

    Image lists the processes and benefits of a successful tiered generalist service desk.

    Define the structure of the service desk

    1.2.2 Map out the current and target structure of the service desk

    Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    Instructions:

    1. Using the model from the previous slides as a guide, discuss how closely it matches the current service desk structure.
    2. Map out a similar diagram of your existing service desk structure, intake channels, and escalation paths.
    3. Review the structure and discuss any changes that could be made to improve efficiency. Revise as needed.
    4. Document the outcome in the Service Desk Project Summary.

    Image depicts a tiered generalist service desk example. It shows a flow from users to tier 1 and to tiers 2 and 3.

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    Use a shift-left strategy to lower service support costs, reduce time to resolve, and improve end-user satisfaction

    Shift-left strategy:

    • Shift service support tasks from specialists to generalists.
    • Implement self-service.
    • Automate incident resolution.
    Image shows the incident and service request resolution in a graph. It includes metrics of cost per ticket, average time to resolve, and end-user satisfaction.

    Work through the implications of adopting a shift-left strategy

    Overview:

    Identify process gaps that you need to fill to support the shift-left strategy and discuss how you could adopt or improve the shift-left strategy, using the discussion questions below as a guide.

    Which process gaps do you need to fill to identify ticket trends?

    • What are your most common incidents and service requests?
    • Which tickets could be resolved at tier 1?
    • Which tickets could be resolved as self-service tickets?
    • Which tickets could be automated?

    Which processes do you most need to improve to support a shift-left strategy?

    • Which incident and request processes are well documented?
    • Do you have recurring tickets that could be automated?
    • What is the state of your knowledgebase maintenance process?
    • Which articles do you most need to support tier 1 resolution?
    • What is the state of your web portal? How could it be improved to support self-service?

    Document in the Project Summary

    Step 1.3: Identify service desk metrics and reports

    Image shows the steps in phase 1. Highlight is on step 1.3.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 1.3 Create a list of required reports to identify relevant metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    Managers and analysts will have service desk metrics and reports that help set expectations and communicate service desk performance.

    Deliverables

    • A list of service desk performance metrics and reports

    Engage business unit leaders with data to appreciate needs

    Service desk reports are an opportunity to communicate the story of IT and collect stakeholder feedback. Interview business unit leaders and look for opportunities to improve IT services.

    Start with the following questions:

    • What are you hearing from your team about working with IT?
    • What are the issues that are contributing to productivity losses?
    • What are the workarounds your team does because something isn’t working?
    • Are you able to access the information you need?

    Work with business unit leaders to develop an action plan.

    Remember to communicate what you do to address stakeholder grievances.

    The service recovery paradox is a situation in which end users think more highly of IT after the organization has corrected a problem with their service compared to how they would regard the company if the service had not been faulty in the first place.

    The point is that addressing issues (and being seen to address issues) will significantly improve end-user satisfaction. Communicate that you’re listening and acting, and you should see satisfaction improve.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Presentation is everything:

    If you are presenting outside of IT, or using operational metrics to create strategic information, be prepared to:

    • Discuss trends.
    • Identify organizational and departmental impacts.
    • Assess IT costs and productivity.

    For example, “Number of incidents with ERP system has decreased by 5% after our last patch release. We are working on the next set of changes and expect the issues to continue to decrease.”

    Engage technicians to ensure they input quality data in the service desk tool

    You need better data to address problems. Communicate to the technical team what you need from them and how their efforts contribute to the usefulness of reports.

    Tickets MUST:

    • Be created for all incidents and service requests.
    • Be categorized correctly, and categories updated when the ticket is resolved.
    • Be closed after the incidents and service requests are resolved or implemented.

    Emphasize that reports are analyzed regularly and used to manage costs, improve services, and request more resources.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Service Desk Manager: Technical staff can help themselves analyze the backlog and improve service metrics if they’re looking at the right information. Ensure their service desk dashboards are helping them identify high-priority and quick-win tickets and anticipate potential SLA breaches.

    Produce service desk reports targeted to improve IT services

    Use metrics and reports to tell the story of IT.

    Metrics should be tied to business requirements and show how well IT is meeting those requirements and where obstacles exist.

    Tailor metrics and reports to specific stakeholders.

    Technicians require mostly real-time information in the form of a dashboard, providing visibility into a prioritized list of tickets for which they are responsible.

    Supervisors need tactical information to manage the team and set client expectations as well as track and meet strategic goals.

    Managers and executives need summary information that supports strategic goals. Start by looking at executive goals for the support team and then working through some of the more tactical data that will help support those goals.

    One metric doesn’t give you the whole picture

    • Don’t put too much emphasis on a single metric. At best, it will give you a distorted picture of your service desk performance. At worst, it will distort the behavior of your agents as they may adopt poor practices to meet the metric.
    • The solution is to use tension metrics: metrics that work together to give you a better sense of the state of operations.
    • Tension metrics ensure a balanced focus toward shared goals.

    Example:

    First-call resolution (FCR), end-user satisfaction, and number of tickets reopened all work together to give you a complete picture. As FCR goes up, so should end-user satisfaction, as number of tickets re-opened stays steady or declines. If the three metrics are heading in different directions, then you know you have a problem.

    Rely on internal metrics to measure and improve performance

    External metrics provide useful context, but they represent broad generalizations across different industries and organizations of different sizes. Internal metrics measured annually are more reliable.

    Internal metrics provide you with information about your actual performance. With the right continual improvement process, you can improve those metrics year over year, which is a better measure of the performance of your service desk.

    Whether a given metric is the right one for your service desk will depend on several different factors, not the least of which include:

    • The maturity of your service desk processes.
    • Your ticket volume.
    • The complexity of your tickets.
    • The degree to which your end users are comfortable with self-service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Take external metrics with a grain of salt. Most benchmarks represent what service desks do across different industries, not what they should do. There also might be significant differences between different industries in terms of the kinds of tickets they deal with, differences which the overall average obscures.

    Use key service desk metrics to build a business case for service support improvements

    The right metrics can tell the business how hard IT works and how many resources it needs to perform:

    1. End-User Satisfactions:
      • The most important metric for measuring the perceived value of the service desk. Determine this based on a robust annual satisfaction survey of end users and transactional satisfaction surveys sent with a percentage of tickets.
    2. Ticket Volume and Cost per Ticket:
      • A key indicator of service desk efficiency, computed as the monthly operating expense divided by the average ticket volume per month.
    3. First-Contact Resolution Rate:
      • The biggest driver of end-user satisfaction. Depending on the kind of tickets you deal with, you can measure first-contact, first-tier, or first-day resolution.
    4. Average Time to Resolve (Incident) or Fulfill (Service Requests):
      • An assessment of the service desk's ability to resolve tickets effectively, measuring the time elapsed between the moment the ticket status is set to “open” and the moment it is set to “resolved.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    Metrics should be tied to business requirements. They tell the story of how well IT is meeting those requirements and help identify when obstacles get in the way. The latter can be done by pointing to discrepancies between the internal metrics you expected to reach but didn’t and external metrics you trust.

    Use service desk metrics to track progress toward strategic, operational, and tactical goals

    Image depicts a chart to show the various metrics in terms of strategic goals, tactical goals, and operational goals.

    Cost per ticket and customer satisfaction are the foundation metrics of service support

    Ultimately, everything boils down to cost containment (measured by cost per ticket) and quality of service (measured by customer satisfaction).

    Cost per ticket is a measure of the efficiency of service support:

    • A higher than average cost per ticket is not necessarily a bad thing, particularly if accompanied by higher-than-average quality levels.
    • Conversely, a low cost per ticket is not necessarily good, particularly if the low cost is achieved by sacrificing quality of service.

    Cost per ticket is the total monthly operating expense of the service desk divided by the monthly ticket volume. Operating expense includes the following components:

    • Salaries and benefits for desktop support technicians
    • Salaries and benefits for indirect personnel (team leads, supervisors, workforce schedulers, dispatchers, QA/QC personnel, trainers, and managers)
    • Technology expense (e.g. computers, software licensing fees)
    • Telecommunications expenses
    • Facilities expenses (e.g. office space, utilities, insurance)
    • Travel, training, and office supplies
    Image displays a pie chart that shows the various service desk costs.

    Create a list of required reports to identify metrics to track

    1.3.1 Start by identifying the reports you need, then identify the metrics that produce them

    1. Answer the following questions to determine the data your reports require:
      • What strategic initiatives do you need to track?
        • Example: reducing mean time to resolve, meeting SLAs
      • What operational areas need attention?
        • Example: recurring issues that need a permanent resolution
      • What kind of issues do you want to solve?
        • Example: automate tasks such as password reset or software distribution
      • What decisions or processes are held up due to lack of information?
        • Example: need to build a business case to justify infrastructure upgrades
      • How can the data be used to improve services to the business?
        • Example: recurring issues by department
    2. Document report and metrics requirements in Service Desk SOP.
    3. Provide the list to your tool administrator to create reports with auto-distribution.

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You'll Need

    • Service Desk SOP
    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Step 1.4: Review ticket handling procedures

    Image shows the steps in phase 1. Highlight is on step 1.4.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 1.4.1 Review ticket handling practices
    • 1.4.2 Identify opportunities to automate ticket creation and reduce recurring tickets

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    Managers and analysts will have best practices for ticket handling and troubleshooting to support ITSM data quality and improve first-tier resolution.

    DELIVERABLES

    • List of ticket templates and recurring tickets
    • Ticket and Call QA Template and ticket handling best practices

    Start by reviewing the incident intake process to find opportunities for improvement

    If end users are avoiding your service desk, you may have an intake problem. Create alternative ways for users to seek help to manage the volume; keep in mind not every request is an emergency.

    Image shows the various intake channels and the recommendation.

    Identify opportunities for improvement in your ticket channels

    The two most efficient intake channels should be encouraged for the majority of tickets.

    • Build a self-service portal.
      • Do users know where to find the portal?
      • How many tickets are created through the portal?
      • Is the interface easy to use?
    • Deal efficiently with email.
      • How quickly are messages picked up?
      • Are they manually transferred to a ticket or does the service desk tool automatically create a ticket?

    The two most traditional and fastest methods to get help must deal with emergencies and escalation effectively.

    • Phone should be the fastest way to get help for emergencies.
      • Are enough agents answering calls?
      • Are voicemails picked up on time?
      • Are the automated call routing prompts clear and concise?
    • Are walk-ins permitted and formalized?
      • Do you always have someone at the desk?
      • Is your equipment secure?
      • Are walk-ins common because no one picks up the phone or is the traffic as you’d expect?

    Ensure technicians create tickets for all incidents and requests

    Why Collect Ticket Data?

    If many tickets are missing, help service support staff understand the need to collect the data. Reports will be inaccurate and meaningless if quality data isn’t entered into the ticketing system.

    Image shows example of ticket data

    Set ticket handling expectations to drive a consistent process

    Set expectations:

    • Create and update tickets, but not at the expense of good customer service. Agents can start the ticket but shouldn’t spend five minutes creating the ticket when they should be troubleshooting the problem.
    • Update the ticket when the issue is resolved or needs to be escalated. If agents are escalating, they should make sure all relevant information is passed along to the next technician.
    • Update user of ETA if issue cannot be resolved quickly.
    • Ticket templates for common incidents can lead to fast creation, data input, and categorizations. Templates can reduce the time it takes to create tickets from two minutes to 30 seconds.
    • Update categories to reflect the actual issue and resolution.
    • Reference or link to the knowledgebase article as the documented steps taken to resolve the incident.
    • Validate incident is resolved with client; automate this process with ticket closure after a certain time.
    • Close or resolve the ticket on time.

    Use the Ticket and Call Quality Assessment Tool to improve the quality of service desk data

    Build a process to check-in on ticket and call quality monthly

    Better data leads to better decisions. Use the Ticket and Call Quality Assessment Toolto check-in on the ticket and call quality monthly for each technician and improve service desk data quality.

    1. Fill tab 1 with technician’s name.
    2. Use either tab 2 (auto-scoring) or tab 3 (manual scoring) to score the agent. The assessment includes ticket evaluation, call evaluation, and overall metric.
    3. Record the results of each review in the score summary of tab 1.
    Image shows tool.

    Use ticket templates to make ticket creation, updating, and resolution more efficient

    A screenshot of the Ticket and Call Quality Assessment Tool

    Implement measures to improve ticket handling and identify ticket template candidates

    1.4.1 Identify opportunities to automate ticket creation

    1. Poll the team and discuss.
      • How many members of the team are not creating tickets? Why?
      • How can we address those barriers?
      • What are the expectations of management?
    2. Brainstorm five to ten good candidates for ticket templates.
      • What data can auto-fill?
      • What will help process the ticket faster?
      • What automations can we build to ensure a fast, consistent service?
      • Note:
        • Ticket template name
        • Information that will auto-fill from AD and other applications
        • Categories and resolution codes
        • Automated routing and email responses
    3. Document ticket template candidates in the Service Desk Roadmap to capture the actions.

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You'll Needs

    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Phase 2

    Design Incident Management Processes

    Step 2.1: Build incident management workflows

    Image shows the steps in phase 2. Highlight is on step 2.1.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 2.1.1 Review incident management challenges
    • 2.1.2 Define the incident management workflow
    • 2.1.3 Define the critical incident management workflow
    • 2.1.4 Design critical incident communication plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    Workflows for incident management and critical incident management will improve the consistency and quality of service delivery and prepare the service desk to negotiate reliable service levels with the organization.

    DELIVERABLES

    • Incident management workflows
    • Critical incident management workflows
    • Critical incident communication plan

    Communicate the great incident resolution work that you do to improve end-user satisfaction

    End users think more highly of IT after the organization has corrected a problem with their service than they would have had the service not been faulty in the first place.

    Image displays a graph to show the service recovery paradox

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use the service recovery paradox to your advantage. Address service desk challenges explicitly, develop incident management processes that get services back online quickly, and communicate the changes.

    If you show that the service desk recovered well from the challenges end users raised, you will get greater loyalty from them.

    Assign incident roles and responsibilities to promote accountability

    The role of an incident coordinator or manager can be assigned to anyone inside the service desk that has a strong knowledge of incident resolution, attention to detail, and knows how to herd cats.

    In organizations with high ticket volumes, a separate role may be necessary.

    Everyone must recognize that incident management is a cross-IT organization process and it does not have to be a unique service desk process.

    An incident coordinator is responsible for:

    • Improving incident management processes.
    • Tracking metrics and producing reports.
    • Developing and maintaining the incident management system.
    • Developing and maintaining critical incident processes.
    • Ensuring the service support team follows the incident management process.
    • Gathering post-mortem information from the various technical resources on root cause for critical or severity 1 incidents.

    The Director of IT Services invested in incident management to improve responsiveness and set end-user expectations

    Practitioner Insight

    Ben Rodrigues developed a progressive plan to create a responsive, service-oriented culture for the service support organization.

    "When I joined the organization, there wasn’t a service desk. People just phoned, emailed, maybe left [sticky] notes for who they thought in IT would resolve it. There wasn’t a lot of investment in developing clear processes. It was ‘Let’s call somebody in IT.’

    I set up the service desk to clarify what we would do for end users and to establish some SLAs.

    I didn’t commit to service levels right away. I needed to see how many resources and what skill sets I would need. I started by drafting some SLA targets and plugging them into our tracking application. I then monitored how we did on certain things and established if we needed other skill sets. Then I communicated those SOPs to the business, so that ‘if you have an issue, this is where you go, and this is how you do it,’ and then shared those KPIs with them.

    I had monthly meetings with different function heads to say, ‘this is what I see your guys calling me about,’ and we worked on something together to make some of the pain disappear."

    -Ben Rodrigues

    Director, IT Services

    Gamma Dynacare

    Sketch out incident management challenges to focus improvements

    Common Incident Management Challenges

    End Users

    • No faith in the service desk beyond speaking with their favorite technician.
    • No expectations for response or resolution time.
    • Non-IT staff are disrupted as people ask their colleagues for IT advice.

    Technicians

    • No one manages and escalates incidents.
    • Incidents are unnecessarily urgent and more likely to have a greater impact.
    • Agents are flooded with requests to do routine tasks during desk visits.
    • Specialist support staff are subject to constant interruptions.
    • Tickets are lost, incomplete, or escalated incorrectly.
    • Incidents are resolved from scratch rather than referring to existing solutions.

    Managers

    • Tickets are incomplete or lack historical information to address complaints.
    • Tickets in system don’t match the perceived workload.
    • Unable to gather data for budgeting or business analysis.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consistent incident management processes will improve end-user satisfaction with all other IT services.

    However, be prepared to overcome these common obstacles as you put the process in place, including:

    • Absence of management or staff commitment.
    • Lack of clarity on organizational needs.
    • Outdated work practices.
    • Poorly defined service desk goals and responsibilities.
    • Lack of a reliable knowledgebase.
    • Inadequate training.
    • Resistance to change.

    Prepare to implement or improve incident management

    2.1.1 Review incident management challenges and metrics

    1. Review your incident management challenges and the benefits of addressing them.
    2. Review the level of service you are providing with the current resources. Define clear goals and deliverables for the improvement initiative.
    3. Decide how the incident management process will interface with the service desk. Who will take on the responsibility for resolving incidents? Specifically, who will:
      • Log incidents.
      • Perform initial incident troubleshooting.
      • Own and monitor tickets.
      • Communicate with end users.
      • Update records with the resolution.
      • Close incidents.
      • Implement next steps (e.g. initiate problem management).
    4. Document recommendations and the incident management process requirements in the Service Desk SOP.

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You’ll Need

    • Service Desk SOP
    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Distinguish between different kinds of tickets for better SLAs

    Different ticket types are associated with radically different prioritization, routing, and service levels. For instance, most incidents are resolved within a business day, but requests take longer to implement.

    If you fail to distinguish between ticket types, your metrics will obscure service desk performance.

    Common Service Desk Tickets

    • Incidents
      • An unanticipated interruption of a service.
        • The goal of incident management is to restore the service as soon as possible, even if the resolution involves a workaround.
    • Problems
      • The root cause of several incidents.
        • The goal of problem management is to detect the root cause and provide long-term resolution and prevention.
    • Requests
      • A generic description for small changes or service access
        • Requests are small, frequent, and low risk. They are best handled by a process distinct from incident, change, and project management.
    • Changes
      • Modification or removal of anything that could influence IT services.
        • The scope includes significant changes to architectures, processes, tools, metrics, and documentation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations sometimes mistakenly classify small projects as service requests, which can compromise your data, resulting in a negative impact to the perceived value of the service desk.

    Separate incidents and service requests for increased customer service and better-defined SLAs

    Defining the differences between service requests and incidents is not just for reporting purposes. It also has a major impact on how service is delivered.

    Incidents are unexpected disruptions to normal business processes and require attempts to restore services as soon as possible (e.g. the printer is not working).

    Service requests are tasks that don’t involve something that is broken or has an immediate impact on services. They do not require immediate resolution and can typically be scheduled (e.g. new software).

    Image shows a chart on incidents and service requests.

    Focus on the big picture first to capture and streamline how your organization resolves incidents

    Image displays a flow chart to show how to organize resolving incidents.

    Document your incident management workflow to identify opportunities for improvement

    Image shows a flow cart on how to organize incident management.

    Workflow should include:

    • Ticket creation and closure
    • Triage
    • Troubleshooting
    • Escalations
    • Communications
    • Change management
    • Documentation
    • Vendor escalations

    Notes:

    • Notification and alerts should be used to set or reset expectations on delivery or resolution
    • Identify all the steps where a customer is informed and ensure we are not over or under communicating

    Collaborate to define each step of the incident management workflow

    2.1.2 Define the incident management workflow

    Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Option 1: Whiteboard

    1. Discuss the workflow and draw it on the whiteboard.
    2. Assess whether you are using the best workflow. Modify it if necessary.
    3. Engage the team in refining the process workflow.
    4. Transfer data to Visio and add to the SOP.

    Option 2: Tabletop Exercise

    1. Distribute index cards to each member of the team.
    2. Have each person write a single task they perform on the index card. Be granular. Include the title or the name of the person responsible.
    3. Mark cards that are decision points. Use a card of a different color or use a marker to make a colored dot.
    4. Arrange the index cards in order, removing duplicates.
    5. Assess whether you are using the best workflow. Engage the team to refine it if necessary.
    6. Transfer data to Visio and add to the Service Desk SOP.

    Participants

    • Service Manager
    • Service Desk Support
    • Applications or Infrastructure Support

    What You’ll Need

    • Flip Chart Paper
    • Sticky Notes
    • Pens
    • Service Desk SOP
    • Project Summary

    Formalize the process for critical incident management to reduce organizational impact

    Discuss these elements to see how the organization will handle them.

    • Communication plan:
      • Who communicates with end users?
      • Who communicates with the executive team?
    • It’s important to separate the role of the technician trying to solve a problem with the need to communicate progress.
    • Change management:
    • Define a separate process for regular and emergency change management to ensure changes are timely and appropriate.
    • Business continuity plan:
    • Identify criteria to decide when a business continuity plan (BCP) must be implemented during a critical incident to minimize the business impact of the incident.
    • Post-mortems:
    • Formalize the process of discussing and documenting lessons learned, understanding outstanding issues, and addressing the root cause of incidents.
    • Source of incident notification:
    • Does the process change if users notify the service desk of an issue or if the systems management tools alert technicians?

    Critical incidents are high-impact, high-urgency events that put the effectiveness and timeliness of the service desk center stage.

    Build a workflow that focuses on quickly bringing together the right people to resolve the incident and reduces the chances of recurrence.

    Document your critical incident management workflow to identify opportunities for improvement

    Image shows a flow cart on how to organize critical incident management.

    Workflow should include:

    • Ticket creation and closure
    • Triage
    • Troubleshooting
    • Escalations
    • Communications plan
    • Change management
    • Disaster recovery or business continuity plan
    • Documentation
    • Vendor escalations
    • Post-mortem

    Collaborate to define each step of the critical incident management workflow

    2.1.3 Define the critical incident management workflow

    Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Option 1: Whiteboard

    1. Discuss the workflow and draw it on the whiteboard.
    2. Assess whether you are using the best workflow. Modify it if necessary.
    3. Engage the team in refining the process workflow.
    4. Transfer data to Visio and add to the SOP.

    Option 2: Tabletop Exercise

    1. Distribute index cards to each member of the team.
    2. Have each person write a single task they perform on the index card. Be granular. Include the title or the name of the person responsible.
    3. Mark cards that are decision points. Use a card of a different color or use a marker to make a colored dot.
    4. Arrange the index cards in order, removing duplicates.
    5. Assess whether you are using the best workflow. Engage the team to refine it if necessary.
    6. Transfer data to Visio and add to the Service Desk SOP.

    Participants

    • Service Manager
    • Service Desk Support
    • Applications or Infrastructure Support

    What You’ll Need

    • Flip Chart Paper
    • Sticky Notes
    • Pens
    • Service Desk SOP

    Establish a critical incident management communication plan

    When it comes to communicating during major incidents, it’s important to get the information just right. Users don’t want too little, they don’t want too much, they just want what’s relevant to them, and they want that information at the right time.

    As an IT professional, you may not have a background in communications, but it becomes an important part of your job. Broad guidelines for good communication during a critical incident are:

    1. Communicate as broadly as the impact of your incident requires.
    2. Communicate as much detail as a specific audience requires, but no more than necessary.
    3. Communicate as far ahead of impact as possible.

    Why does communication matter?

    Sending the wrong message, at the wrong time, to the wrong stakeholders, can result in:

    • Drop in customer satisfaction.
    • Wasted time and resources from multiple customers contacting you with the same issue.
    • Dissatisfied executives kept in the dark.
    • Increased resolution time if the relevant providers and IT staff are not informed soon enough to help.

    Info-Tech Insight

    End users understand that sometimes things break. What’s important to them is that (1) you don’t repeatedly have the same problem, (2) you keep them informed, and (3) you give them enough notice when their systems will be impacted and when service will be returned.

    Automate communication to save time and deliver consistent messaging to the right stakeholders

    In the middle of resolving a critical incident, the last thing you have time for is worrying about crafting a good message. Create a series of templates to save time by providing automated, tailored messages for each stage of the process that can be quickly altered and sent out to the right stakeholders.

    Once templates are in place, when the incident occurs, it’s simply a matter of:

    1. Choosing the relevant template.
    2. Updating recipients and messaging if necessary.
    3. Adding specific, relevant data and fields.
    4. Sending the message.

    When to communicate?

    Tell users the information they need to know when they need to know it. If a user is directly impacted, tell them that. If the incident does not directly affect the user, the communication may lead to decreased customer satisfaction or failure to pay attention to future relevant messaging.

    What to say?

    • Keep messaging short and to the point.
    • Only say what you know for sure.
    • Provide only the details the audience needs to know to take any necessary action or steps on their side and no more. There’s no need to provide details on the reason for the failure before it’s resolved, though this can be done after resolution and restoration of service.

    You’ll need distinct messages for distinct audiences. For example:

    • To incident resolvers: “Servers X through Y in ABC Location are failing intermittently. Please test the servers and all the connections to determine the exact cause so we can take corrective action ASAP.”
    • To the IT department head: “Servers X through Y in ABC Location are failing intermittently. We are beginning tests. We will let you know when we have determined the exact cause and can give you an estimated completion time.”
    • To executives: “We’re having an issue with some servers at ABC Location. We are testing to determine the cause and will let you know the estimated completion time as soon as possible.”
    • To end users: “We are experience some service issues. We are working on a resolution diligently and will restore service as soon as possible.”

    Map out who will need to be contacted in the event of a critical incident

    2.1.4 Design the critical incident communication plan

    • Identify critical incidents that require communication.
    • Identify stakeholders who will need to be informed about each incident.
    • For each audience, determine:
      1. Frequency of communication
      2. Content of communication
    Use the sample template to the right as an example.

    Some questions to assist you:

    • Whose work will be interrupted, either by their services going down or by their workers having to drop everything to solve the incident?
    • What would happen if we didn’t notify this person?
    • What level of detail do they need?
    • How often would they want to be updated?
    Document outcomes in the Service Desk SOP. Image shows template of unplanned service outage.

    Measure and improve customer satisfaction with the use of relationship and transactional surveys

    Customer experience programs with a combination of relationship and transactional surveys tend to be more effective. Merging the two will give a wholistic picture of the customer experience.

    Relationship Surveys

    Relationship surveys focus on obtaining feedback on the overall customer experience.

    • Inform how well you are doing or where you need improvement in the broad services provided.
    • Provide a high-level perspective on the relationship between the business and IT.
    • Help with strategic improvement decisions.
    • Should be sent over a duration of time and to the entire customer base after they’ve had time to experience all the services provided by the service desk. This can be done as frequently as per quarter or on a yearly basis.
    • E.g. An annual satisfaction survey such as Info-Tech’s End User Satisfaction Diagnostic.

    Transactional Surveys

    Transactional surveys are tied to a specific interaction or transaction your end users have with a specific product or service.

    • Help with tactical improvement decisions.
    • Questions should point to a specific interaction.
    • Usually only a few questions that are quick and easy to complete following the transaction.
    • Since transactional surveys allow you to improve individual relationships, they should be sent shortly after the interaction with the service desk has occurred.
    • E.g. How satisfied are you with the way your ticket was resolved?

    Add transactional end-user surveys at ticket close to escalate unsatisfactory results

    A simple quantitative survey at the closing of a ticket can inform the service desk manager of any issues that were not resolved to the end user’s satisfaction. Take advantage of workflows to escalate poor results immediately for quick follow-up.

    Image shows example of survey question with rating.

    If a more complex survey is required, you may wish to include some of these questions:

    Please rate your overall satisfaction with the way your issue was handled (1=unsatisfactory, 5=fantastic)

    • The professionalism of the analyst.
    • The technical skills or knowledge of the analyst.
    • The timeliness of the service provided.
    • The overall service experience.

    Add an open-ended, qualitative question to put the number in context, and solicit critical feedback:

    What could the service desk have done to improve your experience?

    Define a process to respond to both negative and positive feedback

    Successful customer satisfaction programs respond effectively to both positive and negative outcomes. Late or lack of responses to negative comments may increase customer frustration, while not responding at all to the positive comments may give the perception of indifference. If customers are taking the time to fill out the survey, good or bad, they should be followed up with

    Take these steps to handle survey feedback:

    1. Assign resources to receive, read, and track responses. The entire team doesn’t need to receive every response, while a single resource may not have capacity to respond in a timely manner. Decide what makes the most sense in your environment.
    2. Respond to negative feedback: It may not be possible to respond to every customer that fills out a survey. Set guidelines for responding to negative surveys with no details on the issue; don’t spend time guessing why they were upset, simply ask the user why they were unsatisfied. The critical piece of taking advantage of the service recovery paradox is in the follow-up to the customer.
    3. Investigate and improve: Make sure you investigate the issue to ensure that it is a justified complaint or whether the issue is a symptom of another issue’s root cause. Identify remediation steps to ensure the issue does not repeat itself, and then communicate to the customer the action you have taken to improve.
    4. Act on positive feedback as well: If it’s easy for customers to provide feedback, then make room in your process for handling the positive results. Appreciate the time and effort your customers take to give kudos and use it as a tool to build a long-term relationship with that user. Saying thank you goes a long way and when customers know their time matters, they will be encouraged to fill out those surveys. This is also a good way to show what a great job the service desk team did with the interaction.

    Analyze survey feedback month over month to complement and justify metric results already in place

    When you combine the tracking and analysis of relationship and transactional survey data you will be able to dive into specific issues, identify trends and patterns, assess impact to users, and build a plan to make improvements.

    Once the survey data is centralized, categorized, and available you can start to focus on metrics. At a minimum, for transactional surveys, consider tracking:

    • Breakdown of satisfaction scores with trends over time
    • Unsatisfactory surveys that are related to incidents and service requests
    • Total surveys that have been actioned vs pending

    For relationship surveys, consider tracking:

    • Satisfaction scores by department and seniority level
    • Satisfaction with IT services, applications, and communication
    • Satisfaction with IT’s business enablement

    Scores of overall satisfaction with IT

    Image Source: Info-Tech End User Satisfaction Report

    Prioritize company-wide improvement initiatives by those that have the biggest impact to the entire customer base first and then communicate the plan to the organization using a variety of communication channels that will draw your customers in, e.g. dashboards, newsletters, email alerts.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider automating or using your ITSM notification system as a direct communication method to inform the service desk manager of negative survey results.

    Step 2.2: Design ticket categorization

    Image shows the steps in phase 2. Highlight is on step 2.2

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 2.2.1 Assess ticket categorization
    • 2.2.2 Enhance ticket categories with resolution and status codes

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    The reviewed ticket categorization scheme will be easier to use and deploy more consistently, which will improve the categorization of data and the reliability of reports.

    DELIVERABLES

    • Optimized ticket categorization

    Design a ticket classification scheme to produce useful reports

    Reliable reports depend on an effective categorization scheme.

    Too many options cause confusion; too few options provide little value. As you build the classification scheme over the next few slides, let call routing and reporting requirements be your guide.

    Effective classification schemes are concise, easy to use correctly, and easy to maintain.

    Image shows example of a ticket classification scheme.

    Keep these guidelines in mind:

    • A good categorization scheme is exhaustive and mutually exclusive: there’s a place for every ticket and every ticket fits in only one place.
    • As you build your classification scheme, ensure the categories describe the actual asset or service involved based on final resolution, not how it was reported initially.
    • Pre-populate ticket templates with relevant categories to dramatically improve reporting and routing accuracy.
    • Use a tiered system to make the categories easier to navigate. Three tiers with 6-8 categories per tier provides up to 512 sub-categories, which should be enough for the most ambitious team.
    • Track only what you will use for reporting purposes. If you don’t need a report on individual kinds of laptops, don’t create a category beyond “laptops.”
    • Avoid “miscellaneous” categories. A large portion of your tickets will eventually end up there.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t do it alone! Collaborate with managers in the specialized IT groups responsible for root-cause analysis to develop a categorization scheme that makes sense for them.

    The first approach to categorization breaks down the IT portfolio into asset types

    WHY SHOULD I START WITH ASSETS?

    Start with asset types if asset management and configuration management processes figure prominently in your practice or on your service management implementation roadmap.

    Image displays example of asset types and how to categorize them.

    Building the Categories

    Ask these questions:

    • Type: What kind of asset am I working on?
    • Category: What general asset group am I working on?
    • Subcategory: What particular asset am I working on?

    Need to make quick progress? Use Info-Tech Research Group’s Service Desk Ticket Categorization Schemes template.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Think about how you will use the data to determine which components need to be included in reports. If components won’t be used for reporting, routing, or warranty, reporting down to the component level adds little value.

    The second approach to categorization breaks down the IT portfolio into types of services

    WHY SHOULD I START WITH SERVICES?

    Start with asset services if service management generally figures prominently in your practice, especially service catalog management.

    Image displays example of service types and how to categorize them.

    Building the Categories

    Ask these questions:

    • Type: What kind of service am I working on?
    • Category: What general service group am I working on?
    • Subcategory: What particular service am I working on?

    Need to make quick progress? Use Info-Tech Research Group’s Service Desk Ticket Categorization Schemes template.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Remember, ticket categories are not your only source of reports. Enhance the classification scheme with resolution and status codes for more granular reporting.

    Improve the categorization scheme to enhance routing and reporting

    2.2.1 Assess whether the service desk can improve its ticket categorization

    1. As a group, review existing categories, looking for duplicates and designations that won’t affect ticket routing. Reconcile duplicates and remove non-essential categories.
    2. As a group, re-do the categories, ensuring that the new categorization scheme will meet the reporting requirements outlined earlier.
      • Are categories exhaustive and mutually exclusive?
      • Is the tier simple and easy to use (i.e. 3 tiers x 8 categories)?
    3. Test against recent tickets to ensure you have the right categories.
    4. Record the ticket categorization scheme in the Service Desk Ticket Categorization Schemes template.

    A screenshot of the Service Desk Ticket Categorization Schemes template.

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You’ll Need

    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard
    • Service Desk Ticket Categorization Scheme

    Enhance the classification scheme with resolution and status codes for more granular reporting

    Resolution codes differ from detailed resolution notes.

    • A resolution code is a field within the ticketing system that should be updated at ticket close to categorize the primary way the ticket was resolved.
    • This is important for reporting purposes as it adds another level to the categorization scheme and can help you identify knowledgebase article candidates, training needs, or problems.

    Ticket statuses are a helpful field for both IT and end users to identify the current status of the ticket and to initiate workflows.

    • The most common statuses are open, pending/in progress, resolved, and closed (note the difference between resolved and closed).
    • Waiting on user or waiting on vendor are also helpful statuses to stop the clock when awaiting further information or input.

    Common Examples:

    Resolution Codes

    • How to/training
    • Configuration change
    • Upgrade
    • Installation
    • Data import/export/change
    • Information/research
    • Reboot

    Status Fields

    • Declined
    • Open
    • Closed
    • Waiting on user
    • Waiting on vendor
    • Reopened by user

    Identify and document resolution and status codes

    2.2.2 Enhance ticket categories with resolution codes

    Discuss:

    • How can we use resolution information to enhance reporting?
    • Are current status fields telling the right story?
    • Are there other requirements like project linking?

    Draft:

    1. Write out proposed resolution codes and status fields and critically assess their value.
    2. Resolutions can be further broken down by incident and service request if desired.
    3. Test resolution codes against a few recent tickets.
    4. Record the ticket categorization scheme in the Service Desk SOP.

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Technician(s)

    What You’ll Need

    • Whiteboard or Flip Chart
    • Markers

    Step 2.3: Design incident escalation and prioritization

    Image shows the steps in phase 2. Highlight is on step 2.3.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 2.3.1 Build a small number of rules to facilitate prioritization
    • 2.3.2 Define escalation rules
    • 2.3.3 Define automated escalations
    • 2.3.4 Provide guidance to each tier around escalation steps and times

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    The reviewed ticket escalation and prioritization will streamline queue management, improve the quality of escalations, and ensure agents work on the right tickets at the right time.

    DELIVERABLES

    • Optimized ticket prioritization scheme
    • Guidelines for ticket escalations
    • List of automatic escalations

    Build a ticket prioritization matrix to make escalation assessment less subjective

    Most IT leaders agree that prioritization is one of the most difficult aspects of IT in general. Set priorities based on business needs first.

    Mission-critical systems or problems that affect many people should always come first (i.e. Severity Level 1).

    The bulk of reported problems, however, are often individual problems with desktop PCs (i.e. Severity Level 3 or 4).

    Some questions to consider when deciding on problem severity include:

    • How is productivity affected?
    • How many users are affected?
    • How many systems are affected?
    • How critical are the affected systems to the organization?

    Decide how many severity levels the organization needs the service desk to have. Four levels of severity are ideal for most organizations.

    Image shows example ticket prioritization matrix

    Collect the ticket prioritization scheme in one diagram to ensure service support aligns to business requirements

    Image shows example ticket prioritization matrix

    Prioritize incidents based on severity and urgency to foreground critical issues

    2.3.1 Build a clearly defined priority scheme

    Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    1. Decide how many levels of severity are appropriate for your organization.
    2. Build a prioritization matrix, breaking down priority levels by impact and urgency.
    3. Build out the definitions of impact and urgency to complete the prioritization matrix.
    4. Run through examples of each priority level to make sure everyone is on the same page.

    Image shows example ticket prioritization matrix

    Document in the SOP

    Participants

    • Service Managers
    • Service Desk Support
    • Applications or Infrastructure Support

    What You'll Need

    • Flip Chart Paper
    • Sticky Notes
    • Pens
    • Service Desk SOP

    Example of outcome from 2.3.1

    Define response and resolution targets for each priority level to establish service-level objectives for service support

    Image shows example of response and resolution targets.

    Build clear rules to help agents determine when to escalate

    2.3.2 Assign response, resolution, and escalation times to each priority level

    Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Instructions:

    For each incident priority level, define the associated:

    1. Response time – time from when incident record is created to the time the service desk acknowledges to the customer that their ticket has been received and assigned.
    2. Resolution time – time from when the incident record is created to the time that the customer has been advised that their problem has been resolved.
    3. Escalation time – maximum amount of time that a ticket should be worked on without progress before being escalated to someone else.

    Participants

    • Service Managers
    • Service Desk Support
    • Applications or Infrastructure Support

    What You'll Need

    • Flip Chart Paper
    • Sticky Notes
    • Pens

    Image shows example of response and resolution targets

    Use the table on the previous slide as a guide.

    Discuss the possible root causes for escalation issues

    WHY IS ESCALATION IMPORTANT?

    Escalation is not about admitting defeat, but about using your resources properly.

    Defining procedures for escalation reduces the amount of time the service desk spends troubleshooting before allocating the incident to a higher service tier. This reduces the mean time to resolve and increases end-user satisfaction.

    You can correlate escalation paths to ticket categories devised in step 2.2.

    Image shows example on potential root causes for escalation issues.

    Build decision rights to help agents determine when to escalate

    2.3.3 Provide guidance to each tier around escalation steps and times

    Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Instructions

    1. For each support tier, define escalation rules for troubleshooting (steps that each tier should take before escalation).
    2. For each support tier, define maximum escalation times (maximum amount of time to work on a ticket without progress before escalating).
    Example of outcome from step 2.3.3 to determine when to escalate issues.

    Create a list of application specialists to get the escalation right the first time

    2.3.4 Define automated escalations

    Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    1. Identify applications that will require specialists for troubleshooting or access rights.
    2. Identify primary and secondary specialists for each application.
    3. Identify vendors that will receive escalations either immediately or after troubleshooting.
    4. Set up application groups in the service desk tool.
    5. Set up workflows in the service desk tool where appropriate.
    6. Document the automated escalations in the categorization scheme developed in step 2.2 and in the Service Desk Roles and Responsibilities Guide.

    A screenshot of the Service Desk Roles and Responsibilities Guide

    Participants

    • Service Managers
    • Service Desk Support
    • Applications or Infrastructure Support

    What You'll Need

    • Flip Chart Paper
    • Sticky Notes
    • Pens

    Phase 3

    Design Request Fulfilment Processes

    Step 3.1: Build request workflows

    Image shows the steps in phase 3. Highlight is on step 3.1.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 3.1.1 Distinguish between requests and small projects
    • 3.1.2 Define service requests with SLAs
    • 3.1.3 Build and critique request workflows

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    Workflows for service requests will improve the consistency and quality of service delivery and prepare the service desk to negotiate reliable service levels with the organization.

    DELIVERABLES

    • Workflows for the most common service requests
    • An estimated service level for each service request
    • Request vs. project criteria

    Standardize service requests for more efficient delivery

    Definitions:

    • An incident is an unexpected disruption to normal business processes and requires attempts to restore service as soon as possible (e.g. printer not working).
    • A service request is a request where nothing is broken or impacting a service and typically can be scheduled rather than requiring immediate resolution (e.g. new software application).
    • Service requests are repeatable, predictable, and easier to commit to SLAs.
    • By committing to SLAs, expectations can be set for users and business units for service fulfillment.
    • Workflows for service requests should be documented and reviewed to ensure consistency of fulfillment.
    • Documentation should be created for service request procedures that are complex.
    • Efficiencies can be created through automation such as with software deployment.
    • All service requests can be communicated through a self-service portal or service catalog.

    PREPARE A FUTURE SERVICE CATALOG

    Standardize requests to develop a consistent offering and prepare for a future service catalog.

    Document service requests to identify time to fulfill and approvals.

    Identify which service requests can be auto-approved and which will require a workflow to gain approval.

    Document workflows and analyze them to identify ways to improve SLAs. If any approvals are interrupting technical processes, rearrange them so that approvals happen before the technical team is involved.

    Determine support levels for each service offering and ensure your team can sustain them.

    Where it makes sense, automate delivery of services such as software deployment.

    Distinguish between service requests and small projects to ensure agents and end users follow the right process

    The distinction between service requests and small projects has two use cases, which are two sides of the same resourcing issue.

    • Service desk managers need to understand the difference to ensure the right approval process is followed. Typically, projects have more stringent intake requirements than requests do.
    • PMOs need to understand the difference to ensure the right people are doing the work and that small, frequent changes are standardized, automated, and taken out of the project list.

    What’s the difference between a service request and a small project?

    • The key differences involve resource scope, frequency, and risk.
    • Requests are likely to require fewer resources than projects, be fulfilled more often, and involve less risk.
    • Requests are typically done by tier 1 and 2 employees throughout the IT organization.
    • A request can turn into a small project if the scope of the request grows beyond the bounds of a normal request.

    Example: A mid-sized organization goes on a hiring blitz and needs to onboard 150 new employees in one quarter. Submitting and scheduling 150 requests for onboarding new employees would require much more time and resources.

    Projects are different from service requests and have different criteria

    A project, by terminology, is a temporary endeavor planned around producing a specific organizational or business outcome.

    Common Characteristics of Projects:

    • Time sensitive, temporary, one-off.
    • Uncertainty around how to create the unique thing, product, or service that is the project’s goal.
    • Non-repetitive work and sizeable enough to introduce heightened risk and complexity.
    • Strategic focus, business case-informed capital funding, and execution activities driven by a charter.
    • Introduces change to the organization.
    • Multiple stakeholders involved and cross-functional resourcing.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Projects require greater risk, effort, and resources than a service request and should be redirected to the PMO.

    Standard service requests vs. non-standard service requests: criteria to make them distinct

    • If there is no differentiation between standard and non-standard requests, those tickets can easily move into the backlog, growing it very quickly.
    • Create a process to easily identify non-standard requests when they enter the ticket queue to ensure customers are made aware of any delay of service, especially if it is a product or service currently not offered. This will give time for any approvals or technical solutioning that may need to occur.
    • Take recurring non-standard requests and make them standard. This is a good way to determine if there are any gaps in services offered and another vehicle to understand what your customers want.

    Standard Requests

    • Very common requests, delivered on an on-going basis
    • Defined process
    • Measured in hours or days
    • Uses service catalog, if it exists
    • Formalized and should already be documented
    • The time to deal with the request is defined

    Non-Standard Requests

    • Higher level complexity than standard requests
    • Cannot be fulfilled via service catalog
    • No defined process
    • Not supplied by questions that Service Request Definition (SRD) offers
    • Product or service is not currently offered, and it may need time for technical review, additional approvals, and procurement processes

    The right questions can help you distinguish between standard requests, non-standard requests, and projects

    Where do we draw the line between a standard and non-standard request and a project?

    The service desk can’t and shouldn’t distinguish between requests and projects on its own. Instead, engage stakeholders to determine where to draw the line.

    Whatever criteria you choose, define them carefully.

    Be pragmatic: there is no single best set of criteria and no single best definition for each criterion. The best criteria and definitions will be the ones that work in your organizational context.

    Common distinguishing factors and thresholds:

    Image shows table of the common distinguishing factors and thresholds.

    Distinguish between standard and non-standard service requests and projects

    3.1.1 Distinguish between service requests and projects

    1. Divide the group into two small teams.
    2. Each team will brainstorm examples of service requests and small projects.
    3. Identify factors and thresholds that distinguish between the two groups of items.
    4. Bring the two groups together and discuss the two sets of criteria.
    5. Consolidate one set of criteria that will help make the distinction between projects and service requests.
    6. Capture the table in the Service Desk SOP.

    Image shows blank template of the common distinguishing factors and thresholds.

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You'll Need

    • Service Desk SOP
    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Distinguishing factors and thresholds

    Don’t standardize request fulfilment processes alone

    Everyone in IT contributes to the fulfilment of requests, but do they know it?

    New service desk managers sometimes try to standardize request fulfilment processes on their own only to encounter either apathy or significant resistance to change.

    Moving to a tiered generalist service desk with a service-oriented culture, a high first-tier generalist resolution rate, and collaborative T2 and T3 specialists can be a big change. It is critical to get the request workflows right.

    Don’t go it alone. Engage a core team of process champions from all service support. With executive support, the right process building exercises can help you overcome resistance to change.

    Consider running the process building activities in this project phase in a working session or a workshop setting.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If they build it, they will come. Service desk improvement is an exercise in organizational change that crosses IT disciplines. Organizations that fail to engage IT specialists from other silos often encounter resistance to change that jeopardizes the process improvements they are trying to make. Overcome resistance by highlighting how process changes will benefit different groups in IT and solicit the feedback of specialists who can affect or be affected by the changes.

    Define standard service requests with SLAs and workflows

    WHY DO I NEED WORKFLOWS?

    Move approvals out of technical IT processes to make them more efficient. Evaluate all service requests to see where auto-approvals make sense. Where approvals are required, use tools and workflows to manage the process.

    Example:

    Image is an example of SLAs and workflows.

    Approvals can be the main roadblock to fulfilling service requests

    Image is example of workflow approvals.

    Review the general standard service request and inquiry fulfillment processes

    As standard service requests should follow standard, repeatable, and predictable steps to fulfill, they can be documented with workflows.

    Image is a flow chart of service and inquiry request processes.

    Review the general standard service request and inquiry fulfillment processes

    Ensure there is a standard and predictable methodology for assessing non-standard requests; inevitably those requests may still cause delay in fulfillment.

    Create a process to ensure reasonable expectations of delivery can be set with the end user and then identify what technology requests should become part of the existing standard offerings.

    Image is a flowchart of non-standard request processes

    Document service requests to ensure consistent delivery and communicate requirements to users

    3.1.2 Define service requests with SLAs

    1. On a flip chart, list standard service requests.
    2. Identify time required to fulfill, including time to schedule resources.
    3. Identify approvals required; determine if approvals can be automated through defining roles.
    4. Discuss opportunities to reduce SLAs or automate, but recognize that this may not happen right away.
    5. Discuss plans to communicate SLAs to the business units, recognizing that some users may take a bit of time to adapt to the new SLAs.
    6. Work toward improving SLAs as new opportunities for process change occur.
    7. Document SLAs in the Service Desk SOP and update as SLAs change.
    8. Build templates in the service desk tool that encapsulate workflows and routing, SLAs, categorization, and resolution.

    Participants

    • Service Desk Managers
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You'll Need

    • Service Desk SOP
    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Info-Tech Insight

    These should all be scheduled services. Anything that is requested as a rush needs to be marked as a higher urgency or priority to track end users who need training on the process.

    Analyze service request workflows to improve service delivery

    3.1.3 Build and critique request workflows

    1. Divide the group into small teams.
    2. Each team will choose one service request from the list created in the previous module and then draw the workflow. Include decision points and approvals.
    3. Discuss availability and technical support:
      • Can the service be fulfilled during regular business hours or 24x7?
      • Is technical support and application access available during regular business hours or 24x7?
    4. Reconvene and present workflows to the group.
    5. Document workflows in Visio and add to the Service Desk SOP. Where appropriate, enter workflows in the service desk tool.

    Critique workflows for efficiencies and effectiveness:

    • Do the workflows support the SLAs identified in the previous exercise?
    • Are the workflows efficient?
    • Is the IT staff consistently following the same workflow?
    • Are approvals appropriate? Is there too much bureaucracy or can some approvals be removed? Can they be preapproved?
    • Are approvals interrupting technical processes? If so, can they be moved?

    Participants

    • Service Desk Managers
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You'll Need

    • Service Desk SOP
    • Project Summary
    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Step 3.2: Build a targeted knowledgebase

    Image shows the steps in phase 3. Highlight is on step 3.2.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 3.2.1 Design knowledge management processes
    • 3.2.2 Create actionable knowledgebase articles

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    The section will introduce service catalogs and get the organization to envision what self-service tools it might include.

    DELIVERABLES

    • Knowledgebase policy and process

    A knowledgebase is an essential tool in the service management toolbox

    Knowledge Management

    Gathering, analyzing, storing & sharing knowledge to reduce the need to rediscover known solutions.

    Knowledgebase

    Organized repository of IT best practices and knowledge gained from practical experiences.

    • End-User KB
    • Give end users a chance to resolve simple issues themselves without submitting a ticket.

    • Internal KB
    • Shared resource for service desk staff and managers to share and use knowledge.

    Use the knowledgebase to document:

    • Steps for pre-escalation troubleshooting.
    • Known errors.
    • Workarounds or solutions to recurring issues.
    • Solutions that require research or complex troubleshooting.
    • Incidents that have many root causes. Start with the most frequent solution and work toward less likely issues.

    Draw on organizational goals to define the knowledge transfer target state

    Image is Info-Tech’s Knowledge Transfer Maturity Model
    *Source: McLean & Company, 2013; N=120

    It’s better to start small than to have nothing at all

    Service desk teams are often overwhelmed by the idea of building and maintaining a comprehensive integrated knowledgebase that covers an extensive amount of information.

    Don’t let this idea stop you from building a knowledgebase! It takes time to build a comprehensive knowledgebase and you must start somewhere.

    Start with existing documentation or knowledge that depends on the expertise of only a few people and is easy to document and you will already see the benefits.

    Then continue to build and improve from there. Eventually, knowledge management will be a part of the culture.

    Engage the team to build a knowledgebase targeted on your most important incidents and requests

    WHERE DO I START?

    Inventory and consolidate existing documentation, then evaluate it for audience relevancy, accuracy, and usability. Use the exercise and the next slides to develop a knowledgebase template.

    Produce a plan to improve the knowledgebase.

    • Identify the current top five or ten incidents from the service desk reports and create related knowledgebase articles.
    • Evaluate for end-user self-service or technician resolution.
    • Note any resolutions that require access rights to servers.
    • Assign documentation creation tasks for the knowledgebase to individual team members each week.
    • Apply only one incident per article.
    • Set goals for each technician to submit one or two meaningful articles per month.
    • Assign a knowledge manager to monitor creation and edit and maintain the database.
    • Set policy to drive currency of the knowledgebase. See the Service Desk SOP for an example of a workable knowledge policy.

    Use a phased approach to build a knowledgebase

    Image is an example of a phased approach to build a knowledge base

    Use a quarterly, phased approach to continue to build and maintain your knowledgebase

    Continual Knowledgebase Maintenance:

    • Once a knowledgebase is in place, future articles should be written using established templates.
    • Articles should be regularly reviewed and monitored for usage. Outdated information will be retired and archived.
    • Ticket trend analysis should be done on an ongoing basis to identify new articles.
    • A proactive approach will anticipate upcoming issues based on planned upgrades and maintenance or other changes, and document resolution steps in knowledgebase articles ahead of time.

    Every Quarter:

    1. Conduct a ticket trend analysis. Identify the most important and common tickets.
    2. Review the knowledgebase to identify relevant articles that need to be revised or written.
    3. Use data from knowledge management tool to track expiring content and lesser used articles.
    4. Assign the task of writing articles to all IT staff members.
    5. Build and revise ticket templates for incident and service requests.

    Assign a knowledge manager role to ensure accountability for knowledgebase maintenance

    Assign a knowledge manager to monitor creation and edit and maintain database.

    Knowledge Manager/Owner Role:

    • Has overall responsibility for the knowledgebase.
    • Ensures content is consistent and maintains standards.
    • Regularly monitors and updates the list of issues that should be added to the knowledgebase.
    • Regularly reviews existing knowledgebase articles to ensure KB is up to date and flags content to retire or review.
    • Assigns content creation tasks.
    • Optimizes knowledgebase structure and organization.
    • See Info-Tech’s knowledge manager role description if you need a hand defining this position.

    The knowledge manager role will likely be a role assigned to an existing resource rather than a dedicated position.

    Develop a template to ensure knowledgebase articles are easy to read and write

    A screenshot of the Knowledgebase Article Template

    QUICK TIPS

    • Use non-technical language whenever possible to help less-technical readers.
    • Identify error messages and use screenshots where it makes sense.
    • Take advantage of social features like voting buttons to increase use.
    • Use Info-Tech’s Knowledge Base Article Template to get you started.

    Analyze the necessary features for your knowledgebase and compare them against existing tools

    Service desk knowledgebases range in complexity from simple FAQs to fully integrated software suites.

    Options include:

    • Article search with negative and positive filters.
    • Tagging, with the option to have keywords generate top matches.
    • Role-based permissions (to prevent unauthorized deletions).
    • Ability to turn a ticket resolution into a knowledgebase article (typically only available if knowledgebase tool is part of the service desk tool).
    • Natural language search.
    • Partitioning so relevant articles only appear for specific audiences.
    • Editorial workflow management.
    • Ability to set alerts for scheduled article review.
    • Article reporting (most viewed, was it useful?).
    • Rich text fields for attaching screenshots.

    Determine which features your organization needs and check to see if your tools have them.

    For more information on knowledgebase improvement, refer to Info-Tech’s Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy.

    Document your knowledge management maintenance workflow to identify opportunities for improvement

    Workflow should include:

    • How you will identify top articles that need to be written
    • How you will ensure articles remain relevant
    • How you will assign new articles to be written, inclusive of peer review
    Image of flowchart of knowledgebase maintenance process.

    Design knowledgebase management processes

    3.2.1 Design knowledgebase management processes

    1. Assign a knowledge manager to monitor creation and edit and maintain the database. See Info-Tech’s knowledge manager role description if you need a hand defining this position.
    2. Discuss how you can use the service desk tool to integrate the knowledgebase with incident management, request fulfilment, and self-service processes.
    3. Discuss the suitability of a quarterly process to build and edit articles for a target knowledgebase that covers your most important incidents and requests.
    4. Set knowledgebase creation targets for tier 1, 2, and 3 analysts.
    5. Identify relevant performance metrics.
    6. Brainstorm elements that might be used as an incentive program to encourage the creation of knowledgebase articles and knowledge sharing more generally.
    7. Set policy to drive currency of knowledgebase. See the Service Desk SOP for an example of a workable knowledge policy.

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You’ll Need

    • Service Desk SOP
    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Create actionable knowledgebase articles

    3.2.2 Run a knowledgebase working group

    Write and critique knowledgebase articles.

    1. On a whiteboard, build a list of potential knowledgebase articles divided by audience: Technician or End User.
    2. Each team member chooses one topic and spends 20 minutes writing.
    3. Each team member either reads the article and has the team critique or passes to the technician to the right for peer review. If there are many participants, break into smaller groups.
    4. Set a goal with the team for how, when, and how often knowledgebase articles will be created.
    5. Capture knowledgebase processes in the Service Desk SOP.

    Audience: Technician

    • Password update
    • VPN printing
    • Active directory – policy, procedures, naming conventions
    • Cell phones
    • VPN client and creation set-up

    Audience: End users

    • Set up email account
    • Password creation policy
    • Voicemail – access, change greeting, activities
    • Best practices for virus, malware, phishing attempts
    • Windows 10 tips and tricks

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You’ll Need

    • Service Desk SOP
    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard

    Step 3.3: Prepare for a self-service portal project

    Image shows the steps in phase 3. Highlight is on step 3.3.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 3.3.1 Develop self-service tools for the end user
    • 3.3.2 Make a plan for creating or improving the self-service portal

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    The section prepares you to tackle a self-service portal project once the service desk standardization is complete.

    DELIVERABLES

    • High-level activities to create a self-service portal

    Design the self-service portal with the users’ computer skills in mind

    A study by the OECD offers a useful reminder of one of usability’s most hard-earned lessons: you are not the user.

    • There is an important difference between IT professionals and the average user that’s even more damaging to your ability to predict what will be a good self-service tool: skills in using computers, the internet, and technology in general.
    • An international research study explored the computer skills of 215,942 people aged 16-65 in 33 countries.
    • The results show that across 33 rich countries, only 5% of the population has strong computer-related abilities and only 33% of people can complete medium-complexity computer tasks.
    • End users are skilled, they just don’t have the same level of comfort with computers as the average IT professional. Design your self-service tools with that fact in mind.
    Image is of a graph showing the ability of computer skills from age 16-65 among various countries.

    Take an incremental and iterative approach to developing your self-service portal

    Use a web portal to offer self-serve functionality or provide FAQ information to your customers to start.

    • Don’t build from scratch. Ideally, use the functionality included with your ITSM tool.
    • If your ITSM tool doesn’t have an adequate self-service portal functionality, then harness other tools that IT already uses. Common examples include Microsoft SharePoint and Google Forms.
    • Make it as easy as possible to access the portal:
      • Deploy an app to managed devices or put the app in your app store.
      • Create a shortcut on people’s start menus or home screens.
      • Print the URL on swag such as mousepads.
    • Follow Info-Tech’s approach to developing your user facing service catalog.

    Some companies use vending machines as a form of self serve. Users can enter their purchase code and “buy” a thin client, mouse, keyboard, software, USB keys, tablet, headphones, or loaners.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Building the basics first will provide your users with immediate value. Incrementally add new features to your portal.

    Optimize the portal: self-service should be faster and more convenient than the alternative

    Design the portal by demand, not supply

    Don’t build a portal framed around current offerings and capabilities just for the sake of it. Build the portal based on what your users want and need if you want them to use it.

    Make user experience a top priority

    The portal should be designed for users to self-serve, and thus self-service must be seamless, clear, and attractive to users.

    Speak your users’ language

    Keep in mind that users may not have high technical literacy or be familiar with terminology that you find commonplace. Use terms that are easy to understand.

    Appeal to both clickers and searchers

    Ensure that users can find what they’re looking for both by browsing the site and by using search functionality.

    Use one central portal for all departments

    If multiple departments (i.e. HR, Finance) use or will use a portal, set up a shared portal so that users won’t have to guess where to go to ask for help.

    You won’t know unless you test

    You will know how to navigate the portal better than anyone, but that doesn’t mean it’s intuitive for a new user. Test the portal with users to collect and incorporate feedback.

    Self-service portal examples (1/2)

    Image is of an example of the self-service portal

    Image source: Cherwell Service Management

    Self-service examples (2/2)

    Image is of an example of the self-service portal

    Image source: Team Dynamix

    Keep the end-user facing knowledgebase relevant with workflows, multi-device access, and social features

    Workflows:

    • Easily manage peer reviews and editorial and relevance review.
    • Enable links and importing between tickets and knowledgebase articles.
    • Enable articles to appear based on ticket content.

    Multi-device access:

    • Encourage users to access self-service.
    • Enable technicians to solve problems from anywhere.

    Social features:

    • Display most popular articles first to solve trending issues.
    • Enable voting to improve usability of articles.
    • Allow collaboration on self-service.

    For more information on building self-service portal, refer to Info-Tech’s Optimize the Service Desk with a Shift-Left Strategy

    Draft a high-level project plan for a self-service portal project

    3.3.1 Draft a high-level project plan for a self-service portal project

    1. Identify stakeholders who can contribute to the project.
      • Who will help with FAQ creation?
      • Who can design the self-service portal?
      • Who needs to sign off on the project?
    2. Identify the high-level tasks that need to be done.
      • How many FAQs need to be created?
      • How will we design the service catalog’s web portal?
      • What might a phased approach look like?
      • How can we break down the project into design, build, and implementation tasks?
      • What is the rough timeline for these tasks?
    3. Capture the high-level activities in the Service Desk Roadmap.

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    What You’ll Need

    • Flip Chart
    • Whiteboard
    • Implementation Roadmap

    Once you have a service portal, you can review the business requirements for a service catalog

    A service catalog is a communications device that lists the IT services offered by an organization. The service catalog is designed to enable the creation of a self-service portal for the end user. The portal augments the service desk so analysts can spend time managing incidents and providing technical support.

    The big value comes from workflows:

    • Improved economics and a means to measure the costs to serve over time.
    • Incentive for adoption because things work better.
    • Abstracts delivery from offer to serve so you can outsource, insource, crowdsource, slow, speed, reassign, and cover absences without involving the end user.

    There are three types of catalogs:

    • Static:Informational only, so can be a basic website.
    • Routing and workflow: Attached to service desk tool.
    • Workflow and e-commerce: Integrated with service desk tool and ERP system.
    Image is an example of service catalog

    Image courtesy of University of Victoria

    Understand the time and effort involved in building a service catalog

    A service catalog will streamline IT service delivery, but putting one together requires a significant investment. Service desk standardization comes first.

    • Workflows and back-end services must be in place before setting up a service catalog.
    • Think of the catalog as just the delivery mechanism for service you currently provide. If they aren’t running well and delivery is not consistent, you don’t want to advertise SLAs and options.
    • Service catalogs require maintenance.
    • It’s not a one-time investment – service catalogs must be kept up to date to be useful.
    • Service catalog building requires input from VIPs.
    • Architects and wordsmiths are not the only ones that spend effort on the service catalog. Leadership from IT and the business also provide input on policy and content.

    Sample Service Catalog Efforts

    • A college with 17 IT staff spent one week on a simple service catalog.
    • A law firm with 110 IT staff spent two months on a service catalog project.
    • A municipal government with 300 IT people spent over seven months and has yet to complete the project.
    • A financial organization with 2,000 IT people has spent seven months on service catalog automation alone! The whole project has taken multiple years.

    “I would say a client with 2,000 users and an IT department with a couple of hundred, then you're looking at six months before you have the catalog there.”

    – Service Catalog Implementation Specialist,

    Health Services

    Draft a high-level project plan for a self-service portal project

    3.2.2 Make a plan for creating or improving the self-service portal

    Identify stakeholders who can contribute to the project.

    • Who will help with FAQs creation?
    • Who can design the self-service portal?
    • Who needs to sign off on the project?

    Evaluate tool options.

    • Will you stick with your existing tool or invest in a new tool?

    Identify the high-level tasks that need to be done.

    • How will we design the web portal?
    • What might a phased approach look like?
    • What is the rough timeline for these tasks?
    • How many FAQs need to be created?
    • Will we have a service catalog, and what type?

    Document the plan and tasks in the Service Desk Roadmap.

    Examples of publicly posted service catalogs:

    University of Victoria is an example of a catalog that started simple and now includes multiple divisions, notifications, systems status, communications, e-commerce, incident registration, and more.

    Indiana University is a student, faculty, and staff service catalog and self-service portal that goes beyond IT services.

    If you are ready to start building a service catalog, use Info-Tech’s Design and Build a User-Facing Service Catalog blueprint to get started.

    Phase 4

    Plan the Implementation of the Service Desk

    Step 4.1: Build communication plan

    Image shows the steps in phase 4. Highlight is on step 4.1.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 4.1.1 Create the communication plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    The communication plan and project summary will help project managers outline recommendations and communicate their benefits.

    DELIVERABLES

    • Communication plan
    • Project summary

    Effectively communicate the game plan to IT to ensure the success of service desk improvements

    Communication is crucial to the integration and overall implementation of your service desk improvement.

    An effective communication plan will:

    • Gain support from management at the project proposal phase.
    • Create end-user buy-in once the program is set to launch.
    • Maintainthe presence of the program throughout the business.
    • Instill ownership throughout the business, from top-level management to new hires.

    Build a communication plan to:

    1. Communicate benefits to IT:
      • Share the standard operating procedures for training and feedback.
      • Train staff on policies as they relate to end users and ensure awareness of all policy changes.
      • As changes are implemented, continue to solicit feedback on what is and is not working and communicate adjustments as appropriate.
    2. Train technicians:
      • Make sure everyone is comfortable communicating changes to customers.
    3. Measure success:
      • Review SLAs and reports. Are you consistently meeting SLAs?
      • Is it safe to communicate with end users?

    Create your communication plan to anticipate challenges, remove obstacles, and secure buy-in

    Why:

    • What problems are you trying to solve?

    What:

    • What processes will it affect (that will affect me)?

    Who:

    • Who will be affected?
    • Who do I go to if I have issues with the new process?
    3 gears are depicted. The top gear is labelled managers with an arrow going clockwise. The middle gear is labelled technical staff with an arrow going counterclockwise. The bottom gear is labelled end users with an arrow going clockwise

    When:

    • When will this be happening?
    • When will it affect me?

    How:

    • How will these changes manifest themselves?

    Goal:

    • What is the final goal?
    • How will it benefit me?

    Create a communication plan to outline the project benefits

    Improved business satisfaction:

    • Improve confidence that the service desk can solve issues within the service-level agreement.
    • Channel incidents and requests through the service desk.
    • Escalate incidents quickly and accurately.

    Fewer recurring issues:

    • Tickets are created for every incident and categorized correctly.
    • Reports can be used for root-cause analysis.

    Increased efficiency or lower cost to serve:

    • Use FAQs to enable end users to self-solve.
    • Use knowledgebase to troubleshoot once, solve many times.
    • Cross-train to improve service consistency.

    Enhanced demand planning:

    • Trend analysis and reporting improve IT’s ability to forecast and address the demands of the business.

    Organize the information to manage the deployment of key messages

    Example of how to organize and manage key messages

    Create the communication plan

    4.1.1 Create the communication plan

    Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    Develop a stakeholder analysis.

    1. Identify everyone affected by the project.
    2. Assess their level of interest, value, and influence.
    3. Develop a communication strategy tailored to their level of engagement.

    Craft key messages tailored to each stakeholder group.

    Finalize the communication plan.

    1. Examine your roadmap and determine the most appropriate timing for communications.
    2. Assess when communications must happen with executives, business unit leaders, end users, and technicians.
    3. Identify any additional communication challenges that have come up.
    4. Identify who will send out the communications.
    5. Identify multiple methods for getting the messages out (newsletters, emails, posters, company meetings).
    6. For inspiration, you can refer to the Sample Communication Plan for the project.

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    Step 4.2: Build implementation roadmap

    Image shows the steps in phase 4. Highlight is on step 4.2.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • 4.2.1 Build implementation roadmap

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Representation from tier 2 and tier 3 specialists

    Outcomes

    The implementation plan will help track and categorize the next steps and finalize the project.

    DELIVERABLES

    • Implementation roadmap

    Collaborate to create an implementation plan

    4.2.1 Create the implementation plan

    Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    Determine the sequence of improvement initiatives that have been identified throughout the project.

    The purpose of this exercise is to define a timeline and commit to initiatives to reach your goals.

    Instructions:

    1. Review the initiatives that will be taken to improve the service desk and revise tasks, as necessary.
    2. Input each of the tasks in the data entry tab and provide a description and rationale behind the task.
    3. Assign an effort, priority, and cost level to each task (high, medium, low).
    4. Assign ownership to each task.
    5. Identify the timeline for each task based on the priority, effort, and cost (short, medium, and long term).
    6. Highlight risk for each task if it will be deferred.
    7. Track the progress of each task with the status column.

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Agents

    A screenshot of the Roadmap tool.

    Document using the Roadmap tool.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    ImplementHardware and Software Asset Management

    Optimize Change Management Incident and Problem Management Build a Continual Improvement Plan for the Service Desk

    The Standardize blueprint reviews service desk structures and metrics and builds essential processes and workflows for incident management, service request fulfillment, and knowledge management practices.

    Once the service desk is operational, there are three paths to basic ITSM maturity:

    • Having the incident management processes and workflows built allows you to:
      • Introduce Change Management to reduce change-related incidents.
      • Introduce Problem Management to reduce incident recurrence.
      • Introduce Asset Management to augment service management processes with reliable data.

    Solicit targeted department feedback on core IT service capabilities, IT communications, and business enablement. Use the results to assess the satisfaction of end users, with each service broken down by department and seniority level.

    Works cited

    “Help Desk Staffing Models: Simple Analysis Can Save You Money.” Giva, Inc., 2 Sept. 2009. Web.

    Marrone et al. “IT Service Management: A Cross-national Study of ITIL Adoption.” Communications of the Association for Information Systems: Vol. 34, Article 49. 2014. PDF.

    Rumburg, Jeff. “Metric of the Month: First Level Resolution Rate.” MetricNet, 2011. Web.

    “Service Recovery Paradox.” Wikipedia, n.d. Web.

    Tang, Xiaojun, and Yuki Todo. “A Study of Service Desk Setup in Implementing IT Service Management in Enterprises.” Technology and Investment: Vol. 4, pp. 190-196. 2013. PDF.

    “The Survey of Adult Skills (PIAAC).” Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), 2016. Web.

    Contributors

    • Jason Aqui, IT Director, Bellevue College
    • Kevin Sigil, IT Director, Southwest Care Centre
    • Lucas Gutierrez, Service Desk Manager, City of Santa Fe
    • Rama Dhuwaraha, CIO, University of North Texas System
    • Annelie Rugg, CIO, UCLA Humanities
    • Owen McKeith, Manager IT Infrastructure, Canpotex
    • Rod Gula, IT Director, American Realty Association
    • Rosalba Trujillo, Service Desk Manager, Northgate Markets
    • Jason Metcalfe, IT Manager, Mesalabs
    • Bradley Rodgers, IT Manager, SecureTek
    • Daun Costa, IT Manager, Pita Pit
    • Kari Petty, Service Desk Manager, Mansfield Oil
    • Denis Borka, Service Desk Manager, PennTex Midstream
    • Lateef Ashekun, IT Manager, City of Atlanta
    • Ted Zeisner, IT Manager, University of Ottawa Institut de Cardiologie

    Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}85|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

    IT is being challenged to change how it operates to better support evolving organizations by:

    • Considering the needs of customers, end users, and organizational stakeholders simultaneously.
    • Leveraging resources strategically to support the various IT and digital services being offered.
    • Creating a digital services enablement office that can design, monitor, and continuously enhance services.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The role of IT is changing, and with that, how IT needs to operate to deliver value is also changing. Don’t get left behind with an irrelevant IT operating model.
    • Elevate your reputation as a leader beyond the CIO role. Mature your organization’s digital services by considering the customer experience first.
    • As recessions, disasters, and pandemics hit, don’t adopt old ways of operating with 2008 centralized models. Embrace a hybrid IT where value sets your organization apart.

    Impact and Result

    • Embrace the Exponential IT Operating Model so you can:
      • Say “yes” to stakeholders trying to provide a better experience for customers and consumers.
      • Leverage data more effectively across your organization.
      • Consider how to integrate and deliver services using resources effectively and strategically.

    Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model Deck – The next generation operating model for organizations embracing exponential IT.

    This research piece is for any IT leaders looking to support the organization in its post-transformation state by focusing on the customer experience when operating. CIOs struggling with outdated IT operating models can demonstrate true partnership with this digital services next-generation IT operating model.

    • Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model Storyboard

    2. Exponential IT Operating Model Readiness Assessment – A tool to assess your organization’s readiness to adopt this next generation of IT operating models.

    Use this tool to determine whether your organization has the fundamental components necessary to support the adoption of an Exponential IT operating model.

    • Exponential IT Operating Model Readiness Assessment

    3. Career Vision Roadmap Tool – A template to create a simple visual roadmap of your desired career progression from CIO to chief digital services officer (CDSO).

    Use this template to create a roadmap on how to transform your career from CIO to CDSO leveraging key strengths and relationships. Focus on opportunities to demonstrate IT’s maturity and the customer experience at the forefront of your decisions.

    • Career Vision Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model

    The operating model for organizations embracing Exponential IT and transforming into technology-first enterprises.

    Analyst Perspective

    Be the organization that can thrive in an exponential IT world.

    A picture of Carlene McCubbin A picture of Brittany Lutes

    Carlene McCubbin
    Research Practice Lead
    CIO Organizational
    Transformation Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Brittany Lutes
    Research Director,
    CIO Organization Transformation Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    IT leaders are increasingly expected to be responsible for understanding and delivering high-value customer experiences. This evolution depends on the distribution and oversight of IT capabilities that are embedded throughout the organizational structure.

    Defining digital strategic objectives, establishing governance frameworks for an autonomous culture, and enabling the organization to act on insightful data are all impossible without a new way of operating that involves the oversight and accountability of advancing IT roles. Through exponential change, functional groups can lose clarity regarding their responsibilities, creating a sense of ambiguity and disorder.

    But adopting a new way of working that supports an exponential IT organization does not have to be difficult. Leveraging Info-Tech Research Group's next-generation operating model, you can clearly demonstrate how the organization will collaborate to deliver on the various digital and IT services. This is no longer just an IT operating model, but a technology-first enterprise model.

    Included in this blueprint:

    Exponential IT Model

    Defines how the Exponential IT model operates and delivers value to the organization.
    This is done by exploring:

    • Exponential IT cultural norms and behaviors
    • Opportunities and risks of the Exponential IT model
    • A breakdown of the embedded, integrated, and centralized aspects of the model
    • Operating model value stream stages
    • An assessment on whether the Exponential IT operating model is right for your organization

    Changing Role of IT Leader

    Defines how chief information officers (CIOs) can operate or elevate their role in this changing operating model.

    • Identifies why the C-suite is changing – again
    • How IT leaders should consider where they will add value in the new operating model
    • Outlines examples of future organization-wide structures and where IT roles are positioned
    • Supports IT leaders in developing themselves to operate in this structure

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    IT is challenged to change how it operates to better support evolving organizations. IT must:

    • Consider the needs of customers, end users, and organization stakeholders simultaneously.
    • Leverage resources strategically to support the various IT and digital services being offered.
    • Create a digital services enablement office to design, monitor, and enhance services continuously.

    While many organizations have projects that support a digital strategy, few have an operating model that supports this digital services strategy.

    Common Obstacles

    Organizations struggle to support the definition and ongoing maintenance of services because:

    • The organization's Digital and IT services offerings are not clear.
    • The functional team accountable to deliver on each IT or Digital service is ambiguous.
    • There are insufficient resources to support all the IT and Digital services being offered.
    • C-suite leaders required to support the services are missing or in the wrong role to effectively lead.
    • Technology has not been standardized to ensure consistency and effectiveness.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Embrace the IT operating model that focuses on the enablement and delivery of Digital and IT services by:

    • Having technology stakeholders actively collaborate to decide on priorities and deliver on objectives.
    • Leveraging data more effectively across the organization to understand and meet user needs.
    • Ensuring technology architecture and security standards are well-established and followed by all throughout the organization.
    • Allocating dedicated and skilled resources to ensure services can be continuously delivered.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The first IT operating model where customer engagement with IT and Digital Services is at the forefront.

    What is an operating model?

    An IT operating model is a visual representation of the way your IT organization will function using a clear and coherent blueprint. This visualization demonstrates how capabilities are organized and aligned to deliver on the business mission and strategic and technological objectives.

    The should visualize the optimization and alignment of the IT organization to deliver the capabilities required to achieve business goals. Additionally, it should demonstrate the workflow so key stakeholders can understand where inputs flow in and outputs flow out of the IT organization. Investing time in the front-end to get the operating model right is critical. This will give you a framework to rationalize future organizational changes, allowing you to be more iterative and your model to change as the business changes.

    An image of a sample Operating Model


    From computerization to digitization to the new frontier in autonomization, IT has progressively matured, enabling it to actively lead this next stage of business transformation.

    EXPONENTIAL RISK
    Autonomous processes will integrate with human-led processes, creating risks to business continuity, information security, and quality of delivery. Supplier power will exacerbate business risks.

    EXPONENTIAL REWARD
    The efficiency gains and new value chains created through artificial intelligence (AI), robotics, and additive manufacturing will be very significant. Most of this value will be realized through the augmentation of human labor.

    EXPONENTIAL DEMAND
    Autonomous solutions for productivity and back-office applications will eventually become commoditized and provided by a handful of large vendors. There will, however, be a proliferation of in-house algorithms and workflows to autonomize the middle and front office, offered by a busy landscape of industry-centric capability vendors.

    EXPONENTIAL IT

    Exponential IT involves IT leading the cognitive re-engineering of the organization with evolved practices for:

    • IT governance
    • Asset management
    • Vendor management
    • Data management
    • Business continuity management
    • Information security management

    To learn more about IT's journey into autonomization, check out Info-Tech Research Group's Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset blueprint.

    The IT operating model must evolve to respond to exponential change

    • Ensuring customers are not an afterthought to IT leaders. Customers inform how and where IT leaders invest resources to realize organizational objectives.
    • Adopting a formalized approach to service definition and delivery to eliminate silos.
    • Leveraging data throughout the organization to better inform and enable the various digital services in meeting customer demands.
    • Responding to employee demands for development and training opportunities by applying skills in new settings.
    • Having cross-collaboration mechanisms built into the ways of operating to reduce silos across the organization.
    • Enabling services through a strong set of governance and risk mandates and practices.
    • Eliminating the need for IT capabilities to only be within an IT department.

    IT can no longer be just a service provider:

    78% of IT leaders with established digital strategies and 45% of IT leaders with emerging digital strategies are driven by customer experiences.
    Source: Foundry "Digital Business Study,"2023

    40% - The number of CIOs that are responsible for creating new products or services to support revenue generation.
    Source: Foundry, "The State of the CIO," 2023

    This change requires a breakdown of traditional IT-business divisions

    CIOs must recognize that separating IT from the business is restrictive

    • Many organizations have recently completed or are in the process of completing a digital transformation focused on enhanced employee and customer experiences.
    • Post-transformation organizations must change how they operate to continue to deliver on those enhanced experiences, especially for the customer.
    • There must no longer be a wall between IT and the business, but a unified organization offering digital services that include IT components. Already, 81% of work is being performed across the functional boundaries created in an organization (Deloitte, 2023).
    • Effectively designing, delivering, and maintaining these services depends on a Digital Services functional layer, expanding IT's involvement into how the business delivers worthwhile experiences to customers.
    • This Digital Services functional layer will consider whether the new services are better owned by the IT group or another area of the organization.
    • CIOs need to be prepared to adopt a new way of operating or be left to manage a smaller subset of IT functions.

    "I think we've done the IT industry a disservice by constantly referring to IT and the business, artificially creating this wedge."
    – David Vidoni, VP of IT at Pegasystems
    Source: Dan Roberts, CIO, 2023

    Four trends driving an Exponential IT organization include:

    Emerging Technologies

    • 67% of respondents to KPMG's 2022 Global Tech Survey indicated they intend to embrace emerging platforms by the end of 2024.(1)
    • The technology landscape is constantly shifting with artificial intelligence (AI), quantum computing, 5G cellular networks, and next-generation robotics. Each of these technologies requires new capabilities and a new way in which those capabilities are organized.

    Enhanced Customer Experiences

    • 24% of CIOs have been tasked by their CEO to increase the customer experience.(3)
    • Organizations realize that to gain and retain customers, it has become necessary to consistently evaluate service offerings and identify opportunities for enhancement or new services.

    Digital Trust

    • 1/3 of CISOs plan to increase their GRC focus during the next year and 36% have already begun to implement Zero Trust components.(2)
    • Risk and security capabilities mature focusing on defined enterprise accountability, consideration of ethics and inclusivity and proactive security controls.

    Embedded Technology & Skills

    • Spending on embedded software is expected to increase to $21.5 billion by 2027.(4)
    • The technology strategy no longer resides solely within IT. The organization must take ownership of this strategy while they define their digital strategies. Technology services are also embedded.

    (1) "Global Tech Survey," KPMG, 2022
    (2) "Global Digital Trust Insights Report," PwC, 2023
    (3) "State of IT Report," Foundry, 2023
    (4) "Global surge in embedded software demand; here is why," DAC Digital, 2023

    Application of the Four Key Trends on your Exponential IT operating model:

    Respond to Emerging Technology In response to changing customer demands, organizations need to actively seek, assess, and integrate emerging technology offerings easily and effectively. By governing data at an enterprise level and implementing the necessary guardrails in the form of architecture and security standards at the technology layer, it becomes easier to adopt new technologies such as artificial intelligence (AI). This should be tied to any mandated objectives.
    Build Digital Trust Capabilities Finding and hiring the right security professionals has long been a challenge for organizations. In the Exponential IT model, focus on security oversight increases and fewer operational resources are required. The model sees governing IT security processes and vendor delivery as priorities to enable the right technology without exposing the organization to undue risk. There should be more security-related capabilities in your Exponential IT model.
    Elevate the Customer Experience Evolving the organization's digital offering requires understanding of and active response to the changing demands of customers. This is accomplished by leveraging information from organization-wide data sources and the modular components of the organization's current digital offerings. The components can be reconfigured (or new ones added) to create digital services for the customer.
    Formalize Embedded Business Technology & Roles Technology is actively included in the organization's business (digital) strategy. This ensures that technology remains an embedded component of how the organization competes in the market, supplies invaluable services, and delivers on strategic objectives. The separation of IT from the organization becomes redundant.
    Visualize your IT Operating Model.

    Adopting an Exponential IT operating model is typically influenced by resonating with the following drivers:

    Culture

    IT Strategy & Objectives

    Organization Operating Model

    Organization Size & Structure

    Perception of IT

    Risk Appetite

    A cooperative and innovative culture where the organization does not feel constrained by current processes. Establishing a growth mindset across all the organization's groups is reflected by the trust service owners receive.

    Focused on delivering the best customer experience. The roadmap would include ample opportunities to better support the customer in obtaining or exceeding the degree of value they receive from the organization.

    Empowering service owners across the organization to be accountable for the delivery and value of their services. Lots of collaboration among stakeholders who know what services are offered and how those services leverage technology.

    More appropriate for larger organizations due to the resources required to design and enable successful services. IT resources would also be pooled by skills.

    IT is not a service provider but an equal that enables the organization's success. Without IT involvement, digital services may be omitted and opportunities to enhance the customer experience would be missed.

    While innovation and new service offerings are critical to success, there are functional groups that remain focused on defining the level of risk tolerance that supports the appropriate risk appetite to consider new service offerings.

    Section 1: The Next-Generation Operating Model

    The Technology Value Trinity

    Delivery of Business Value & Strategic Needs

    I&T OPERATING MODEL

    DIGITAL & TECHNOLOGY STRATEGY

    I&T GOVERNANCE

    The model for how IT is organized to deliver on business needs and strategies.

    The identification of objectives and initiatives necessary to achieve business goals.

    Ensures the organization and its customers extract maximum value from the use of information and technology.

    All three elements of the Technology Value Trinity work together to deliver business value and achieve strategic needs. As one changes, the others must change as well.
    How do these three elements relate?

    • I&T Operating Model aligns resources, processes, measures, stakeholders, value streams, and decision rights to enable the delivery of your strategy and priorities. This is done by strategically structuring IT capabilities in a way that enables the organization's vision and considers the context in which the model will operate.
    • Digital and IT Strategy tells you what you must achieve to be successful. For an Exponential IT organization, customer demands and digital service offerings would drive strategic decisions.
    • I&T Governance is the confirmation of IT's goals and strategy, which ensures the alignment of IT and business strategy. This is the mechanism by which you continuously prioritize work so that what is delivered aligns with the strategy.

    Strategy, operating models, and governance are too often considered separate practices – strategies are defined without clarity on how to support. A significant change to your strategy necessitates a change to your operating model, which in turn necessitates a change to your governance and organizational structure.

    The Exponential IT operating model delivers value across seven components

    Exponential IT

    Capabilities

    Products, Services and Technology

    Performance Measures

    Stakeholder Engagement & Collaboration

    Decision Rights & Authority

    Value Streams

    Sourcing

    IT capabilities in the Exponential IT model are spread across the organization. The result removes the separation between IT and the organization. Instead, the organization takes accountability for ensuring technology capabilities are delivered.

    Digital service offerings dominate this model, focusing on providing better experiences for customers. Some technology platforms are specific to a service such as access management, while others span service offerings such as architecture or security.

    This model's success is measured by the overall ability to satisfy the customer experience through designing and delivering the right digital service offerings. Service owners are responsible for continuously monitoring and advancing the delivery of the service.

    The end-customer is the main stakeholder for this operating model, where understanding their needs and demands informs the design, maintenance, and improvement of all services. There is no longer IT vs. the business but an organizational perspective of services.

    This model's decision-making spans the organization. The service owners of digital offerings have authority and autonomy deciding which services to design, how they should be integrated with other services, and how those services will continually deliver value to customers.

    Exponential IT's five core value streams are:

    1. Identifying and prioritizing customer needs
    2. Designing IT and Digital Services
    3. Enabling IT & Digital Service success
    4. Assigning skilled employees to deliver services
    5. Owning & managing services

    Internal resource pools might need to be supplemented with contract resources when demand exceeds capacity, requiring a strong partnership with the Vendor Management Team. Service owners will also need to engage and manage the performance of their vendor solution partners.

    Organizations adopting the Exponential IT Model will experience new norms and behaviors

    Customer-Centric
    Dedicated to the customer experience and making sure that the end customer is considered first and foremost.

    "Yes" Approach
    The organization can say yes to emerging technology and customer desires because it has organized itself to be agile in its digital service offerings.

    Digital Service Ownership
    Digital service offerings are owned and managed across the organization ensuring the continuous delivery of value to customers.

    Employee Development
    Resources are organized into pods based on specific skills or functions increasing the likelihood of adopting new skills.

    Autonomization
    Centralized and accessible data provides service owners autonomy when making informed decisions that support enhanced customer experiences.

    Exponential IT is an embedded model approach

    Info-Tech has identified seven common IT operating model archetypes. Each model represents a different approach to who delivers technology services and how. Each model is designed to drive different outcomes, as the way your organization is structured will dictate the way it behaves. The Exponential IT model is an emerging archetype which capitalizes on embedded delivery.

    An image of the exponential IT embedded model approach.

    Centralized

    Shifted

    Embedded

    Owned and operated by leadership within IT. IT takes full responsibility of the functional areas and maintains control over the outcomes.

    Can be owned/operated by a variety of leadership roles throughout the organization. This can shift from IT ownership to other organizational leadership. Decisions about ownership are often made to enable quick response or mitigate risks.

    Owned/operated by leadership outside of traditional IT. Another area of the organization has taken authoritative power over the outcome of this functional area for a quicker response.

    Even as an embedded IT operating model, shifted and centralized IT functions as support

    1. Embedded functions required for scaled autonomation
      Definition and oversight of the organization's strategic direction demonstrated through a customer-first culture, data insights, and a well-defined risk appetite.
    2. Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering
      Actively considers the customer experience and designs the appropriate services to be delivered. Considers all aspects in the design and delivery of services by exploring opportunities to integrate components to enhance customer experiences or architecting new service offerings to eliminate gaps.
    3. Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources
      Technology functions continue to deliver exceptional services to the enterprise including clear standards for technology and solution architecture, application of security requirements, and resources to enable various service offerings.

    Opportunities and risks of the Exponential IT model

    Opportunities

    Risks
    • Focused on the end-customer experience and how to ensure that customer remains satisfied and loyal to the organization.
    • The capability center allows resources to be used strategically according to where they would most improve the customer experience.
    • Services are owned by the most appropriate areas within the organization—sometimes IT and other times not. In either case, services should always possess technological knowledge.
    • The organization's transformation strategy is not just driving IT's strategy but how IT should be organized and operating. This eliminates disconnect from larger strategic objectives.
    • Data intelligence and customer insights enable the shifted and centralized areas of the operating model to deliver effective and valuable experiences for all stakeholders.
    • Requires a high degree of maturity to support a variety of individuals in owning IT and digital capabilities.
    • Organizational buy-in to this operating model archetype is a must. IT cannot select this operating model without that support.
    • Processes around how all IT and Digital Services consider security and technology standards need to be well-documented and enforceable.
    • Depending on which leaders oversee the three areas of the model (embedded, shifted, or centralized), power struggles could occur which negatively impact services.
    • This model will demand governance, risk, and culture to be at the forefront of how it operates. If an accountability framework does not exist, expect this model to fail.

    The Exponential IT operating model blends embedded, shifted and centralized delivery to balance agility & risk

    An image of the Exponential IT Operating Model.

    The Exponential IT model commands a new placement and significance of IT capabilities

    Using capabilities for the operating model

    • Capabilities are focused on the entire system that would be in place to satisfy a particular need. This not only includes the people who are able to complete a specific task, but the technology, processes, and resources required to deliver.
    • Focusing on capabilities rather than the individuals in organizational redesign enables a more objective and holistic view of what your organization is striving toward.
    • Capabilities deliver on specific need(s) and how they are organized changes the way those needs are delivered.
    The Exponential IT principles as an image: Strategy and Governance, Financial Management, Service Planning and Architecture, People and Resources, Security and Risk, Applications, Data and Analytics, Infrastructure and Operations, and PPM and Projects.

    1. Embedded functions required for autonomization

    Overview of the function:

    • Focuses on a single strategy and roadmap for the organization that actively includes technology.
    • Governance, risk, compliance, and general oversight are defined and embedded throughout the organization.
    • Ensures that quality data is being generated to help inform the defined digital service offering.
    • Readies the organization to adopt emerging technology quickly and with minimal disruption to other digital service offerings.
    • A team of technical experts that decides what information should exist for operational efficiency or service innovation.

    Embedded functions required for autonomization

    2. Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering

    Overview of the function:

    • Analyzes and responds to insights about the customer experience.
    • Maintains the portfolio of the organization's digital service offerings.
    • Considers what is necessary to operate efficiently as an organization while simultaneously exploring emerging technology to optimize new or existing digital services.
    • Requires the expertise and involvement of both business-minded and technology-skilled resources.
    • The differentiating factor from other IT operating models is how it holistically considers all the components throughout the organization and how they are connected.

    Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering

    3. Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources

    Overview of the function:

    • Compared with other IT operating model archetypes, the Exponential IT model has fewer capabilities that are centralized within the technology function of an organization.
    • Architecture and standards are the foundation of successful embedded delivery, ensuring reuse, improved integration, and a unified experience. This includes technology, risk, data, AI and security architecture, models, and standards.
    • Employee resources are also organized in pods to be leveraged based on greatest need and skills availability.
    • This lets the organization be more agile when innovating and implementing new digital service offerings.

    Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources

    Exponential IT explores new value stream stages

    Customer Perspective

    The organization is continually anticipating their wants and needs and establishing mechanisms to vocalize those needs.

    Customer receives the right IT and digital services to respond to their needs.

    The service is easy to use and continuously responds to wants and needs.

    The service is meeting expectations or exceeding them.

    There is a dedicated service owner who can hear demands and feedback, then action desirable outcomes.

    Value Stream Stages

    An image of the Value Stream

    Organizational Perspective

    Expected Outcome

    Customers' wants and needs are understood and at times anticipated before the customer requests them.

    Assess needs to determine if service is already offered or needs to be created. Design services that will enhance the customer experience.

    Look for opportunities to integrate processes and resources to increase the performance of IT and Digital Services.

    Ensure that the right employees with the right skills are working to develop or enhance service offering.

    The service owner manages the ongoing lifecycle of the service and establishes a roadmap on how value will continue to be delivered.

    Critical Processes

    • Customer experience
    • Research and innovation
    • Stakeholder management
    • Research and innovation
    • Service design & portfolio management
    • Performance management
    • Continuous improvement
    • Integration planning
    • Service management
    • Resource planning and allocation
    • Service strategy & roadmap
    • Service governance
    • Service performance management

    Metrics

    • Customer satisfaction score
    • Service-to-need alignment
    • Gaps in service portfolio
    • Speed to design services
    • Service performance
    • Service adoption
    • Time to resolve customer demand
    • Frequency by which service requires enhancements
    • Service satisfaction
    • Alignment of service strategy to organization strategy

    1.1 Assess if the Exponential IT operating model is right for your organization

    1 hour

    1. Begin by downloading the Exponential IT Operating Model Assessment.
    2. Review the questions within each of the operating model components. For each question, use the drop-down menu to determine your level of agreement.
    3. The more your organization agrees with the statements, the more likely your organization is prepared to implement an Exponential IT operating model.
    4. The less your organization agrees with the statements, the more likely you should adopt a different IT operating model.
    5. For support implementing the Exponential IT or another IT operating model, explore the Visualize Your IT Operating Model blueprint (coming soon).

    Input

    • Desire to change the organization's IT & Digital operating model

    Output

    • Desire to implement the IT & Digital Service Enablement operating model

    Materials

    • Exponential IT Operating Model Assessment

    Participants

    • Executive IT leadership
    • Business leadership

    Explore other Info-Tech research to support your organization transformation initiatives

    Visualize the IT Operating Model blueprint (coming soon)

    Visualize the IT Operating Model blueprint (coming soon)

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Section 2: Elevating the CIO Role

    The next generation of IT C-suite roles are here

    As the operating model changes and becomes increasingly embedded into the organization's delivery of IT and Digital Services, new C-suite roles are being defined

    • One of the most critical roles being defined in this change is the Chief Digital Services Officer (CDSO) who focuses on all components of the digital experience from the lens of the customer.
    • There are two directions from which the CDSO role is typically approached as it gains popularity:
      • CIOs evolve beyond just information and technology—focusing on how IT & Digital Services enhance the customer experience
      • Business leaders who have technical know-how increase their involvement and responsibility over IT related functions
    • IT leaders need to consider where they would rather sit: focused only on technology and remaining a service provider to the organization, or embedding technology into the services, products, and organization in general?

    60%

    The number of APAC CIOs who can anticipate their job to be challenged by their peers within the organization.

    Source: Singh, Yashvendra, CIO, 2023.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This is not about making the CIO report to someone else but allowing the CIO to elevate their role into that of a CDSO.

    Increasing IT leadership's span of control throughout the organization

    As maturity increases so does span of control, ownership & executive influence

    Organizations hoping to fully adopt the Exponential IT operating model require a shift in leadership expectations. Notably, these leaders will have oversight and accountability for functions beyond the traditional IT group.

    As the organization matures its governance, security, and data management practices, increasing how it delivers high-impact experiences to customers, it would have one leader who owns all the components to ensure clear alignment with goals and business strategy.

    An image of a graph where the X axis is labeled Span of Control & Influence, and the Y axis is Organization Maturity.

    Emerging Exponential IT organizations will have distributed authority

    • Organizations beginning their transition toward an exponential model often continue to have distributed leaders providing oversight of distinct functional areas.
    • Their spans of control are smaller, but very clearly defined, eliminating confusion through a transparent accountability framework.
    • Each leader strives toward optimization and efficiency regarding IT capabilities, for which they are responsible.
    1. Distributed Leadership
      Embedded functions required for scaled autonomation
      Distributed leaders identify the ways technology will enable them to advance enterprise objectives while maintaining autonomy over their own functions. They may oversee technology.
    2. Experience Officer
      Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering
      An Experience Officer will help consider the insights gained from enterprise data and make informed decisions around enterprise service offerings. They actively explore new ways to deliver high-value experiences.
    3. Chief Technology Officer (CTO)
      Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources
      A CTO will continue to oversee the core technology, including infrastructure and service management functions.

    Established organizations will be driven by a digital transformation journey

    • Organizations that have begun to deliver on their transformation journey will typically see two distinct C-suite leaders emerge—the CIO and the CDO.
    • The Chief Digital Officer (CDO) often explores ways to optimize the integration and management of data to enable insightful decision making from the organization.
    • The Chief Information Officer (CIO), however, considers mechanisms to standardize how new technologies can be integrated with the architecture.
    • While both leaders have distinct responsibilities, their roles intersect at the customer experience.

    An image of the digital transformation journey

    Advanced organizations will be managed by a single emerging role

    • A single leader will oversee all the functional areas where value is delivered and enabled by IT capabilities.
    • Through a large span of control, this leader can holistically consider opportunities to optimize the customer experience and ensure recommendations are actioned to deliver on that enhanced experience.
    • This leader's span of control will require a strong understanding of both strategic and operational functions to authoritatively oversee all aspects for which they are responsible.

    CDSO – Chief Digital Service Officer

    1. Embedded functions required for scaled autonomation
      The CDSO will set, oversee, and manage the delivery of an enterprise's digital strategy, ensuring accountability through good governance and data practices.
    2. Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering
      They ensure that the enterprise holistically considers the various services that could be offered to exceed customer expectations through high-impact experiences.
    3. Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources
      They also ensure stable and secure architecture standards to enable consistency across the organization and a seamless ability to integrate new technology to support service offerings.

    Evolution of the IT C-suite now includes the CDSO

    Chief Digital Service Officer

    Chief Information Officer

    Chief Digital Officer

    Chief Technology Officer

    Chief Experience Officer

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Board
    • CEO/Executive Leadership
    • Organization Leadership
    • Service Owners
    • Customers & End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Oversight of the entire portfolio of IT and Digital Services
    • Use of information & technology to meet organizational objectives

    *Some leaders in this role are being called Chief Digital Information Officer.

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Board
    • CEO/Executive Leadership
    • Organization Leadership
    • End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Oversight of the information and technology required to support and enable the organization

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Board
    • CEO/Executive Leadership
    • Customers & End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Oversight on transforming how the organization uses technology, often considering customer perspectives

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Organization Leadership
    • Customers & End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Collaborating with the CIO, the CTO leads the organization's ability to integrate and adopt necessary technology products and services

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Customers & End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Establish the customer experience strategy
    • Create policies to support that strategy
    • Collaborate with other organizational leaders to integrate any activities around the customer experience

    Examples of what the emerging organizational structure can look like

    An image of three hierarchies, showing what the emerging organizational structure can look like.

    This is more than a new title for IT leaders

    It's about establishing a business first perspective

    • IT leaders exploring this new way of operating are not just adopting the new title of CDSO or CDIO.
    • These leaders must change how information, technology, and digital experiences are consumed across the various stakeholders – especially the end customer.
    • IT leaders who pursue this new IT operating model choose to be more than order takers for an organization.
    • They are:
      • Partners in defining the organization's digital service offerings
      • Recognizing the benefits of distributing decision-making authority for IT-related aspects to others throughout the organization
      • Prioritizing capabilities like portfolio management, architecture, vendor management, relationship management, cloud and user experience

    "'For me, the IT portfolio for the next few years and the IT architecture have taken the place that IT strategy used to have,' he adds. This view doesn't position IT outside of the organization, but rather gives it central importance in the company."
    – Bernd Rattey, Group CIO and CDO of Deutsche Bahn (DB), qtd. by Jens Dose, CIO, 2023

    1.2 Plan your career move to CDSO

    1-3 hours

    • Create a roadmap on how to move from your current role to CDSO by identifying current strengths and opportunities to improve.
    • Download the Career Vision Roadmap Tool from the website. An example of this is on the next slide.
    • Document the tagline. This is your overarching career focus and goal – what is your passion? Think beyond titles to what you want to be doing, the atmosphere you want to be in, and what you want to add value to.
    • Document the current role: what are the strengths, achievements and opportunities?
    • Consider the CDSO role: how will you build stronger relationships and competencies to elevate your profile within the organization? What is an example of what someone would display in this role?
    • Define specific roles or stakeholders that you should develop a stronger relationship with.

    Download the Career Vision Roadmap Tool

    Input

    • Desire to implement the IT & Digital Service Enablement Operating Model

    Output

    • Roadmap to elevate from a CIO to a CDSO

    Materials

    • Career Vision Roadmap
    • IT & Digital Services Enablement operating model archetype
    • CDSO job profile

    Participants

    • CIO (or any other role aspiring to eventually become a CDSO)
    • Individual activity

    Career Vision Roadmap:
    Executive Leader
    Akbar K.

    Sample

    To provide customers with an exceptional experience by ensuring all IT and Digital Services consider and anticipate their needs or wants. Enable IT and Digital Services to be successful through clear leadership, strong collaboration, and continuous improvement or innovation.

    CIO

    1. Establish technology standards that enable the organization to consistently and securely integrate platforms or solutions.
    2. Lead the project team that defined and standardized the organization's reference architecture.
    3. Need to work on listening to a variety of stakeholder demands rather than only specific roles/titles.

    Transition

    • Strengths: Technology acumen, budget planning, allocating resources
    • Enhance: Stakeholder relationship management.
    • Work with current CDO to define and implement more digital transformation initiatives.

    CDSO

    • Being responsive to customer expectations and communicating clear and realistic timelines.
    • Establish trust among the organization that services will deliver expected value.
    • Empowering service owners to manage and oversee the delivery of their services.

    Network Opportunities

    • Connect with board members and understand each of their key areas of priority.
    • Begin to interact with end customers and define ways that will enhance their customer experience.
    • Chief Digital Officer

    Actions now in line with aspiration

    Appendix: Capabilities & Capability Model

    IT and digital capabilities

    Using capabilities for the operating model:

    • Capabilities are focused on the entire system that would be in place to satisfy a particular need. This not only includes people who have skills to complete a specific task, but also the technology, processes, and resources required to deliver.
    • Focusing on capabilities rather than the individuals in organizational redesign enables a more objective and holistic view of what your organization is striving toward.
    • Capabilities deliver on specific need(s) and how they are organized changes the way those need(s) are delivered.

    An image of the IT Management and Governance Framework.

    Strategic Direction

    • IT Governance
    • Strategic Planning
    • Digital Strategy
    • Performance Measurement
    • IT Management & Policies
    • Organizational Quality Management
    • R&D and Innovation
    • Stakeholder Management

    People & Resources

    • Strategic Communications
    • People Resource Management
    • Workforce Strategy & Planning
    • Organizational Change Enablement
    • Adoption & Training
    • Financial/Budget Management
    • Vendor Portfolio Management
    • Vendor Selection & Contract Management
    • Vendor Performance Management

    Architecture & Integration

    • Enterprise Architecture Delivery
    • Business Architecture Delivery
    • Solution Architecture Delivery
    • Technology Architecture
    • Data Architecture
    • Security Architecture
    • Process Integration
    • Integration Planning

    Service Planning

    • Service Governance
    • Service Strategy & Roadmap
    • Service Management
    • Service Governance
    • Service Performance Measurement
    • Service Design & Planning
    • Service Orchestration

    Security & Risk

    • Security Strategic Planning
    • Risk Management
    • External Compliance Management
    • Security Response & Recovery Management
    • Security Management
    • Controls & Internal Audit Planning
    • Security Defense Operations
    • Security Administration
    • Cybersecurity Threat Intelligence
    • Integrated Physical/IT Security
    • OT/IoT Security
    • Data Protection & Privacy

    Application Delivery

    • Application Lifecycle Management
    • Systems Integration Management
    • Application Development
    • User Experience
    • Quality Assurance & UAT
    • Application Maintenance
    • Low Code Development

    Project Portfolio Management

    • Demand Management
    • Requirement Analysis Management
    • Portfolio Management
    • Project Management

    Data & Business Intelligence (BI)

    • Reporting & Analytics
    • Data Management
    • Data Quality
    • Data Integration
    • Enterprise Content Management
    • Data Governance
    • Data Strategy
    • AI/ML Management

    Service Delivery

    • Operations Management
    • Service Desk Management
    • Incident Management
    • Problem Management
    • Service Enhancements
    • Operational Change Enablement
    • Release Management
    • Automation Management

    Infrastructure & Operations

    • Asset Management
    • Infrastructure Portfolio Strategic Planning
    • Availability & Capacity Management
    • Network & Infrastructure Management
    • Configuration Management
    • Cloud Orchestration
    An image of the summary slide for this blueprint, with the headings: Centralized; Shifted; and Embedded.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Donna Bales
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Bickley
    Practice Lead – Vendor Management Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Christine Coz
    Executive Counselor – Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Duraid Ibrahim
    Executive Counselor – Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Chris Goodhue
    Managing Partner– Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead – CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mike Tweedie
    Practice Lead – CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Vicki van Alphen
    Executive Counselor – Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    *Plus an additional 5 industry experts who anonymously contributed to this research piece.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset

    • To succeed in the coming business transformation, IT will have to adopt different priorities in its mission, governance, capabilities, and partnerships.
    • CIOs will have to provide exceptionally mature services while owning business targets.

    Become a Transformational CIO

    • Business transformations are happening, but CIOs are often involved only when it comes time to implement change. This makes it difficult for the CIO to be perceived as an organizational leader.
    • Elevate your stature as a business leader.
    • Create a high-powered IT organization that is focused on driving lasting change, improving client experiences, and encouraging collaboration across the entire enterprise.

    Define Your Digital Business Strategy

    • Design a strategy that applies innovation to your business model, streamline and transform processes, and make use of technologies to enhance interactions with customers and employees.
    • Pre-pandemic digital strategies have been primarily focused on automation. However, your post-pandemic digital strategy must focus on driving resilience for growth opportunities.

    Bibliography

    Bennet, Trevon. "What is a Chief Experience Officer (CXO)? And what do they do?" Indeed, 14 March 2023. https://www.indeed.com/career-advice/finding-a-job/what-is-chief-experience-officer#:~:text=A%20CXO%20plans%20strategies%20and,customer%20acquisition%20and%20retention%20strategies
    Bishop, Carrie. "Five years of Digital Services in San Francisco." Medium, 20 January 2022. https://medium.com/san-francisco-digital-services/five-years-of-digital-services-in-san-francisco-805a758c2b83
    DAC Digital and Chawla, Yash. "Global surge in embedded software demand; here is why." DAC Digital, 2023 <ttps://dac.digital/global-surge-in-embedded-software-demand-here-is-why/
    Deloitte. "If you want your digital transformation to succeed, align your operating model to your strategy." Harvard Business Review, 31 January 2020. https://hbr.org/sponsored/2020/01/if-you-want-your-digital-transformation-to-succeed-align-your-operating-model-to-your-strategy.
    Deloitte. "2023 Global Human Capital Trends Report." Deloitte, 2023. https://www2.deloitte.com/content/dam/Deloitte/sg/Documents/human-capital/sea-cons-hc-trends-report-2023.pdf
    Dose, Jens. "Deutsche Bahn CIO on track to decentralize IT." CIO, 19 April 2023. https://www.cio.com/article/473071/deutsche-bahn-cio-on-track-to-decentralize-it.html
    Ehrlich, Oliver., Fanderl, Harald., Maldara, David., & Mittangunta, Divya. "How the operating model can unlock the power of customer experience." McKinsey, 28 June 2022. https://www.mckinsey.com/capabilities/growth-marketing-and-sales/our-insights/how-the-operating-model-can-unlock-the-full-power-of-customer-experience
    FCW. "Digital Government Summit Agenda." FCW. 2021. https://events-archive.fcw.com/events/2021/digital-government-summit/index.html
    Foundry. "State of the CIO." IDG, 25 January 2023. https://foundryco.com/tools-for-marketers/research-state-of-the-cio/
    Foundry. "Digital Business Study 2023: IT Leaders are future-proofing their business with digital strategies." IDG, 2023. https://foundryco.com/tools-for-marketers/research-digital-business/
    Indeed Editorial Team. "Centralized vs. Decentralized Structures: 7 Key Differences." Indeed, 10 March 2023. https://www.indeed.com/career-advice/career-development/centralized-vs-decentralized
    Indeed Editorial Team. "What is process integration?." Indeed, 14 November 2022. https://ca.indeed.com/career-advice/career-development/process-integration#:~:text=Process%20integration%2C%20or%20business%20process,it%20reach%20its%20primary%20objectives
    KPMG International. "Global Tech Report." KPMG, 2022.
    McHugh, Brian. "Service orchestration is reshaping IT—Here's what to know." Active Batch, 8 November 2022. https://www.advsyscon.com/blog/service-orchestration-what-is/
    Morris, Chris. "IDC FutureScape: Worldwide CIO Agenda 2023 Predictions."" IDC, January, 2023. https://www.idc.com/getdoc.jsp?containerId=AP49998523
    PwC. "Global Digital Trust Insights Report." PwC, 2023
    Roberts, Dan. "5 CIOs on building a service-oriented IT culture." CIO, 13 April 2023. https://www.cio.com/article/472805/5-cios-on-building-a-service-oriented-it-culture.html
    Singh, Yashvendra. "CIOs must evolve to stave off existential threat to their role." CIO, 30 March 2023. https://www.cio.com/article/465612/cios-must-evolve-to-stave-off-existential-threat-to-their-role.html
    Spacey, John. "16 Examples of IT Services." Simplicable, 28 January 2018. https://simplicable.com/IT/it-services

    Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}412|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Senior leadership is asking difficult questions about the organization’s dependency on third-party cloud services and the risk that poses.
    • IT leaders have limited control over third-party incidents and that includes cloud services. Yet they are on the hot seat when cloud services go down.
    • While vendors have swooped in to provide resilience options for the more-common SaaS solutions, it is not the case for all cloud services.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • No control over the software does not mean no recovery options. Solutions range from designing an IT workaround using alternate technologies to pre-defined third-party service continuity options (e.g. see options for O365) to business workarounds.
    • Even where there is limited control, you can at least define an incident response plan to streamline notification, assessment, and implementation of workarounds. Leadership wants more options than simply waiting for the service to come back online.
    • At a minimum, IT’s responsibility is to identify and communicate risk to senior leadership. That starts with a vendor review to identify SLA issues and overall resilience gaps.

    Impact and Result

    • Follow a structured process to assess cloud resilience risk.
    • Identify opportunities to mitigate risk – at the very least, ensure critical data is protected.
    • Summarize cloud services risk, mitigation options, and incident response for senior leadership.

    Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss – Step-by-step guide to assess risk, identify risk mitigation options, and create an incident response plan.

    Even where there is limited control, you can define an incident response plan to streamline notification, assessment, and implementation of workarounds.

    • Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss Storyboard

    2. Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review – Review your key cloud vendors’ SLAs, incident preparedness, and data protection strategy.

    At a minimum, IT’s responsibility is to identify and communicate risk to senior leadership. That starts with a vendor review to identify SLA and overall resilience gaps.

    • Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool

    3. SaaS Incident Response Workflows – Use these examples to guide your efforts to create cloud incident response workflows.

    The examples illustrate different approaches to incident response depending on the criticality of the service and options available.

    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows (Visio)
    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows (PDF)

    4. Cloud Services Resilience Summary – Use this template to capture your results.

    Summarize cloud services risk, mitigation options, and incident response for senior leadership.

    • Cloud Services Resilience Summary
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss

    Resilience and disaster recovery in an increasingly Cloudy and SaaSy world.

    Analyst Perspective

    If you think cloud means you don’t need a response plan, then get your resume ready.

    Frank Trovato

    Most organizations are now recognizing that they can’t ignore the risk of a cloud outage or data loss, and the challenge is “what can I do about it?” since there is limited control.

    If you still think “it’s in the cloud, so I don’t need to worry about it,” then get your resume ready. When O365 goes down, your executives are calling IT, not Microsoft, for an answer of what’s being done and what can they do in the meantime to get the business up and running again.

    The key is to recognize what you can control and what actions you can take to evaluate and mitigate risk. At a minimum, you can ensure senior leadership is aware of the risk and define a plan for how you will respond to an incident, even if that is limited to monitoring and communicating status.

    Often you can do more, including defining IT workarounds, backing up your SaaS data for additional protection, and using business process workarounds to bridge the gap, as illustrated in the case studies in this blueprint.

    Frank Trovato
    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Use this blueprint to expand your DRP and BCP to account for cloud services

    As more applications are migrated to cloud-based services, disaster recovery (DR) and business continuity plans (BCP) must include an understanding of cloud risks and actions to mitigate those risks. This includes evaluating vendor and service reliability and resilience, security measures, data protection capabilities, and technology and business workarounds if there is a cloud outage or incident.

    Use the risk assessments and cloud service incident response plans developed through this blueprint to supplement your DRP and BCP as well as further inform your crisis management plans (e.g. account for cloud risks in your crisis communication planning).

    Overall Business Continuity Plan

    IT Disaster Recovery Plan

    A plan to restore IT application and infrastructure services following a disruption.

    Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Planning blueprint provides a methodology for creating the IT DRP. Leverage this blueprint to validate and provide inputs for your IT DRP.

    BCP for Each Business Unit

    A set of plans to resume business processes for each business unit.

    Info-Tech’s Develop a Business Continuity Plan blueprint provides a methodology for creating business unit BCPs as part of an overall BCP for the organization.

    Crisis Management Plan

    A plan to manage a wide range of crises, from health and safety incidents to business disruptions to reputational damage.

    Info-Tech’s Implement Crisis Management Best Practices blueprint provides a framework for planning a response to any crisis, from health and safety incidents to reputational damage.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Senior leadership is asking difficult questions about the organization’s dependency on third-party cloud services and the risk that poses.
    • Migrating to cloud services transfers much of the responsibility for day-to-day platform maintenance but not accountability for resilience.
    • IT leaders are often responsible for not just the organization’s IT DRP but also BCP and other elements of overall resilience. Cloud risk adds another element IT leaders need to consider.
    • IT leaders have limited control over third-party incidents and that includes cloud services. With SaaS services in particular, recovery or continuity options may be limited.
    • While vendors have swooped in to provide resilience options for the more common SaaS solutions, that is not the case for all cloud services.
    • Part of the solution is defining business process workarounds and that depends on cooperation from business leaders.
    • At a minimum, IT’s responsibility is to identify and communicate risk to senior leadership. That starts with a vendor review to identify SLA and overall resilience gaps.
    • Adapt how you approach downtime and data loss risk, particularly for SaaS solutions where there is limited or no control over the system.
    • Even where there is limited control, you can define an incident response plan to streamline notification, assessment, and implementation of workarounds. Leadership wants more options than simply waiting for the service to come back online.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Asking vendors about their DRP, BCP, and overall resilience has become commonplace. Expect your vendors to provide answers so you can assess risk. Furthermore, your vendor may have additional offerings to increase resilience or recommendations for third parties who can further assist your goals of improving cloud service resilience.

    Key deliverable

    Cloud Services Resilience Summary

    Provide leadership with a summary of cloud risk, downtime workarounds implemented, and additional data protection.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Services Resilience Summary.

    Additional tools and templates in this blueprint

    Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool

    Use this tool to gather vendor input, evaluate vendor SLAs and overall resilience, and track your own risk mitigation efforts.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool.

    SaaS Incident Response Workflows

    Use the examples in this document as a model to develop your own incident response workflows for cloud outages or data loss.

    The image contains a screenshot of the SaaS Incident Response Workflows.

    This blueprint will step you through the following actions to evaluate and mitigate cloud services risk

    1. Assess your cloud risk
    • Review your cloud services to determine potential impact of downtime/data loss, vendor SLA gaps, and vendor’s current resilience.
  • Identify options to mitigate risk
    • Explore your cloud vendor’s resilience offerings, third-party solutions, DIY recovery options, and business workarounds.
  • Create an incident response plan
    • Document your cloud risk mitigation strategy and incident response plan, which might include a failover strategy, data protection, and/or business continuity.

    Cloud Risk Mitigation

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Assess risk

    Phase 1: Assess your cloud risk

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Assess your cloud risk

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Cloud does not guarantee uptime

    Public cloud services (e.g. Azure, GCP, AWS) and popular SaaS solutions experience downtime every year.

    A few cloud outage examples:

    • Microsoft Azure AD outage, March 15, 2022:
      Many users could not log into O365, Dynamics, or the Azure Portal.
      Cause: software change.
    • Three AWS outages in December 2021: December 7 (Netflix and others impacted), December 15 (Duo, Zoom, Slack, others), December 20 (Slack, Epic Games, others). Cause: network issues, power outage.
    • Salesforce outage, May 12, 2022: Users could not access the Lightning platform. Cause: expired certificate.

    Cloud availability

    • Migrating to cloud services can improve availability, as they typically offer more resilience than most organizations can afford to implement themselves.
    • However, having multiple data centers, zones, and regions doesn’t prevent all outages, as we see every year with even the largest cloud vendors.

    DR challenges for IaaS, PaaS, and cloud-native

    While there are limits to what you control, often traditional “failover” DR strategy can apply.

    High-level challenges and resilience options:

    • IaaS: No control over the hardware, but you can failover to another region. This is fairly similar to traditional DR.
    • PaaS: No control over the software platform (e.g. SQL server as a service), but you can back up your data and explore vendor options to replicate your environment.
    • Cloud-native applications: As with PaaS, you can back up your data and explore vendor options to replicate your environment.

    Plan for resilience

    • Include DR requirements when designing cloud service implementation. For example, for IaaS solutions, identify what data would need to be replicated and what services may need to be “always on” (e.g. database services where high-availability is demanded).
    • Similarly, for PaaS and cloud-native solutions, consult your vendor regarding options to build in resilience options (e.g. ability to failover to another environment).

    DR challenges for SaaS solutions

    SaaS is the biggest challenge because you have no control over any part of the base application stack.

    High-level challenges and resilience options:

    • No control over the hardware (or the facility, maintenance processes, and so on).
    • No control over the base application (control is limited to configuration settings and add-on customizations or integrations).
    • Options to back up your data will depend on the service.

    Note: The rest of this blueprint is focused primarily on SaaS resilience due to the challenges listed here. For other cloud services, leverage traditional DR strategies and vendor management to mitigate risk (as summarized on the previous slides).

    Focus on what you can control

    • For SaaS solutions in particular, you must toss out traditional DR. If Salesforce has an outage, you won’t be involved in recovering the system.
    • Instead, DR for SaaS needs to focus on improving resilience where you do have control and implementing business workarounds to bridge the gap.

    Evaluate your cloud services to clarify your specific risks

    Time and money is limited, so focus first on cloud services that are most critical and evaluate the vendors’ SLA and existing resilience capabilities.

    The activities on the next two slides will evaluate risk through two approaches:

    Activity 1: Estimate potential impact of downtime and data loss to quantify the risk and determine which cloud services are most critical and need to be prioritized. This is done through a business impact analysis that assesses:

    • Impact on revenue or costs (if applicable).
    • Impact on reputation (e.g. customer impact).
    • Impact on regulatory compliance and health and safety (if applicable).

    Activity 2: Review the vendor to identify risks and gaps. Specifically, evaluate the following:

    • Incident Management SLAs (e.g. does the SLA include RTO/RPO commitments? Do they meet your requirements?)
    • Incident Response Preparedness (e.g. does the vendor have a DRP, BCP, and security incident response plan?)
    • Data Protection (e.g. does their backup strategy and data security meet your standards?)

    Activity 1: Quantify potential impact and prioritize cloud services using a business impact analysis (BIA)

    1-3 hours

    1. Download the latest version of our DRP BIA: DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool. The tool includes instructions.
    2. Include the cloud services you want to assess in the list of applications/systems (see the tool excerpt below), and follow the BIA methodology outlined in the Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan blueprint.
    3. Use the results to quantify potential impact and prioritize your efforts on the most-critical cloud services.

    The image contains a screenshot of the DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool.

    Materials
    • DRP BIA Tool
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff who can provide a well-rounded perspective on potential impact. They will create the first draft of the BIA.
    • Review the draft BIA with relevant business leaders to refine and validate the results.

    Activity 2: Review your key cloud vendors’ SLAs, incident preparedness, and data protection strategy

    1-3 hours

    Use the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool as follows:

    1. Send the Vendor Questionnaire tab to your cloud vendors to gather input, and review your existing agreements.
    2. Copy the vendor responses into the tool (see the instructions in the tool) and evaluate. See the example excerpt below.
    3. Identify action items to clarify gaps or address risks. Some action items might not be defined yet and will need to wait until you have had a chance to further explore risk mitigation options.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool.

    Materials
    • Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.

    Phase 2: Identify options to mitigate risk

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Assess your cloud risk

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Consult your vendor to identify options to improve resilience, as a starting point

    Your vendor might also be able to suggest third parties that offer additional support, backup, or service continuity options.

    • The Vendor Questionnaire tab in the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool includes a section at the bottom where your vendor can name additional options to improve resilience (e.g. premium support packages, potentially their own DR services).
    • If your vendor has not completed that part of the questionnaire, meet with them to discuss this. Asking service vendors about resilience has become commonplace, so they should be prepared to answer questions about their own offerings and potentially can name trusted third-party vendors who can further assist you.
    • Leverage Info-Tech’s advisory services to evaluate options outlined by your vendor and potential third-party options (e.g. enterprise backup solutions that support backing up SaaS data).

    Some SaaS solutions have plenty of resilience options; others not so much

    • The pervasiveness of O365 has led vendors to close the service continuity gap, with options to send and receive email during an outage and back up your data.
    • With many SaaS solutions, there isn’t going to be a third-party service continuity option, but you might still be able to at least back up your data and implement business process workarounds to close the service gap.

    Example SaaS risk and mitigation: O365

    Risk

    • Several outages every year (e.g. MS Teams July 20, 2022).
    • SLA exceptions include “Scheduled Downtime,” which can occur with just five days’ notice.
    • The Recycling Bin is your data backup, depending on your setup.

    Options to mitigate risk (not an exhaustive list):

    • Third-party solutions for email service continuity.
    • Several backup vendors (e.g. Veeam, Rubrik) can protect most of your O365 suite.
    • Business continuity workarounds leveraging synced OneDrive, SharePoint, and Outlook (access to calendar invites).

    Example SaaS risk and mitigation: Salesforce

    Risk

    • Downtime has been infrequent, but Salesforce did have a major outage in May 2021 (DNS issue) and May 2022 (expired certificate).
    • At the time of this writing, the Main Services Agreement does not commit to a specific uptime value and specifies the usual exclusions.
    • Similarly, there are limited commitments regarding data protection.

    Options to mitigate risk (not an exhaustive list):

    • Salesforce provides a backup and restore service offering.
    • In addition, some third-party vendors support backing up Salesforce data for additional protection against data corruption or data loss.
    • Business continuity workarounds can further reduce the impact of downtime (e.g. record updates in MS Word and leverage Outlook for contact info until Salesforce is recovered).

    Establish a baseline standard for risk mitigation, regardless of cloud service

    At a minimum, set a goal to review vendor risk at least annually, define standard processes for monitoring outages, and review options to back up your SaaS data.

    Example baseline standard for cloud risk mitigation

    • Review vendor risk at least annually. This includes reviewing SLAs, vendor’s incident preparedness (e.g. do they have a current DRP, BCP, and Security IRP?), and the vendor’s data protection strategy.
    • Incident response plans must include, at a minimum, steps to monitor vendor outage and communicate status to relevant stakeholders. Where possible, business process workarounds are defined to bridge the service gap.
    • For critical data (based on your BIA and an evaluation of risk), maintain your own backups of SaaS data for additional protection.

    Embed risk mitigation standards into existing IT operations

    • Include specific SLA requirements, including incident management processes, in your RFP process and annual vendor review.
    • Define cloud incident response in your incident management procedures.
    • Include cloud data considerations in your backup strategy reviews.

    Phase 3: Create an incident response plan

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Assess your cloud risk

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Activity 1: Review the example incident response workflows and case studies as a starting point

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the SaaS Incident Response Workflows examples. The examples illustrate different approaches to incident response depending on the criticality of the service and options available.
    2. Review the case studies on the next few slides, which further illustrate the resilience and incident response solutions implemented.
    3. Note the key elements:
    • Detection
    • Assessment
    • Monitoring status / contacting the vendor
    • Communication with key stakeholders
    • Invoking workarounds, if applicable

    Example SaaS Incident Response Workflow Excerpt

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of the SaaS Incident Response Workflow Excerpt.
    Materials
    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows examples
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.
    • Relevant business process owners to provide input and define business workarounds, where applicable.

    Case Study 1: Recovery plan for critical fundraising event

    If either critical SaaS dependency fails, the following plan is executed:

    1. Donors are redirected to a predefined alternate donation page hosted by a different service. The alternate page connects to the backup payment processing service (with predefined integrations).
    2. Marketing communications support the redirect.
    3. While the backup solution doesn’t gather as much data, the payment details provide enough information to follow up with donors where necessary.

    Criticality justified a failover option

    The Annual Day of Giving generates over 50% of fundraising for the year. It’s critically dependent on two SaaS solutions that host the donation page and payment processing.

    To mitigate the risk, the organization implemented the ability to failover to an alternate “environment” – much like a traditional DR solution – supported by workarounds to manage data collection.

    Case Study 2: Protecting customer data

    Daily exports from a SaaS-hosted donations site reduce potential data loss:

    1. Daily exports to a CRM support donor profile updates and follow-ups (tax receipts, thank-you letters, etc.).
    2. The exports also mitigate the risk of data loss due to an incident with the SaaS-hosted donation site.
    3. This company is exploring more-frequent exports to further reduce the risk of data loss.

    Protecting your data gives you options

    For critical data, do you want to rely solely on the vendor’s default backup strategy?

    If your SaaS vendor is hit by ransomware or if their backup frequency doesn’t meet your needs, having your own data backup gives you options.

    It can also support business process workarounds that need to access that data while waiting for SaaS recovery.

    Case Study 3: Recovery plan for payroll

    To enable a more accurate payroll workaround, the following is done:

    1. After each payroll run, export the payroll data from the SaaS solution to a secure location.
    2. If there is a SaaS outage when payroll must be submitted, the exported data can be modified and converted to an ACH file.
    3. The ACH file is submitted to the bank, which has preapproved this workaround.

    BCP can bridge the gap

    When leadership looks to IT to mitigate cloud risk, include BCP in the discussion.

    Payroll is a good example where the best recovery option might be a business continuity workaround.

    IT often still has a role in business continuity workarounds, as in this case study: specifically, providing a solution to modify and convert the payroll data to an ACH file.

    Activity 2: Run tabletop planning exercises as a starting point to build your incident response plan

    1-3 hours

    1. Follow the tabletop planning instructions provided in the Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan blueprint.
    2. Run the exercise for each cloud service. Keep the scenario generic at first (e.g. cloud service is down with no reported root cause) so you can focus on your response. Capture response steps and gaps.
    3. Add complexity in subsequent exercises (e.g. data loss plus downtime), and use that to expand and refine the workflow as needed.
    4. Use the resulting workflows as the core piece of your incident response plan.
    5. Supplement the workflow with relevant checklists or procedures. At this point you can choose to incorporate this into your DRP or BCP or maintain these documents as supplements to those plans.
      See the DRP Case Study and BCP Case Study for an example of DRP-BCP documentation.

    Example tabletop planning results excerpt with gaps identified

    The image contains an example tabletop planning results excerpt with gaps identified.

    Materials
    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows examples
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.
    • Review results with relevant business process owners to provide input and define business workarounds where applicable.

    Activity 3: Summarize cloud services resilience to inform senior leadership of current risks and mitigation efforts

    1-3 hours

    1. Use the Cloud Services Resilience Summary example as a template to capture the following:
    • The results of your vendor review (i.e. incident management SLAs, incident response preparedness, data protections strategy).
    • The current state of your downtime workarounds and additional data loss protection.
    • Your baseline standard for cloud services risk mitigation.
    • Summary of resilience, risks, workarounds, and data loss protection for each individual cloud service that you have reviewed.
  • Present the results to senior leadership to:
    • Highlight risks to inform business decisions to mitigate or accept those risks.
    • Summarize actions already taken to mitigate risks.
    • Communicate next steps (e.g. action items to address remaining risks).

    Cloud Services Resilience Summary – Table of Contents

    The image contains a screenshot of Cloud Services Resilience Summary – Table of Contents.
    Materials
    • Cloud Services Resilience Summary
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.
    • Review results with relevant business process owners to provide input and define business workarounds where applicable.

    Summary: For cloud services, after evaluating risk, IT must adapt how they approach risk mitigation

    1. Identify failover options where possible
    • A failover strategy is possible for many cloud services (e.g. IaaS replication to another region, or failing over SaaS to an alternate solution as in case study 1).
  • At least protect your data
    • Explore supplementary backup options to protect against ransomware, data corruption, or data loss and support business continuity workarounds (see case study 2).
  • Leverage BCP to close the gap
    • This doesn’t absolve IT of its role in mitigating cloud incident risk, but business process workarounds can bridge the gap where IT options are limited (see case study 3).

    Related Info-Tech Research

    IT DRP Maturity Assessment

    Get an objective assessment of your DRP program and recommendations for improvement.

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan

    Close the gap between your DR capabilities and service continuity requirements.

    Develop a Business Continuity Plan

    Streamline the traditional approach to make BCP development manageable and repeatable.

    Implement Crisis Management Best Practices

    Don’t be another example of what not to do. Implement an effective crisis response plan to minimize the impact on business continuity, reputation, and profitability.

    Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}397|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • There are no standardized processes for the intake of new ideas and no consistent view of the drivers needed to assess the value of these ideas.
    • IT is spending money on low-value services and doesn’t have the ability to understand and track value in order to prioritize IT investment.
    • CIOs are not trusted to drive innovation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The service portfolio empowers IT to be a catalyst in business strategy, change, and growth.
    • IT must drive value-based investment by understanding value of all services in the portfolio.
    • Organizations must assess the value of their services throughout their lifecycle to optimize business outcomes and IT spend.

    Impact and Result

    • Optimize IT investments by prioritizing services that provide more value to the business, ensuring that you do not waste money on low-value or out-of-date IT services.
    • Ensure that services are directly linked to business objectives, goals, and needs, keeping IT embedded in the strategic vision of the organization.
    • Enable the business to understand the impact of IT capabilities on business strategy.
    • Ensure that IT maintains a strategic and tactical view of the services and their value.
    • Drive agility and innovation by having a streamlined view of your business value context and a consistent intake of ideas.
    • Provide strategic leadership and create new revenue by understanding the relative value of new ideas vs. existing services.

    Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Service portfolio management enables organizations to become strategic value creators by establishing a dynamic view of service value. Understand the driving forces behind the need to manage services through their lifecycles.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish the service portfolio

    Establish and understand the service portfolio process by setting up the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 1: Establish the Service Portfolio
    • Service Portfolio Worksheet

    2. Develop a value assessment framework

    Use the value assessment tool to assess services based on the organization’s context of value.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 2: Develop a Value Assessment Framework
    • Value Assessment Tool
    • Value Assessment Example Tool

    3. Manage intake and assessment of initiatives

    Create a centralized intake process to manage all new service ideas.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 3: Manage Intake and Assessment of Initiatives
    • Service Intake Form

    4. Assess active services

    Continuously validate the value of the existing service and determine the future of service based on the value and usage of the service.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 4: Assess Active Services

    5. Manage and communicate the service portfolio

    Communicate and implement the service portfolio within the organization, and create a mechanism to seek out continuous improvement opportunities.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 5: Manage and Communicate the Service Portfolio
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish the Service Portfolio

    The Purpose

    Establish and understand the service portfolio process by setting up the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    Understand at a high level the steps involved in managing the service portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Adapt the Service Portfolio Worksheet to organizational needs and create a plan to begin documenting services in the worksheet.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    1.2 Adapt the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    Outputs

    Knowledge about the use of the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    Adapt the worksheet to reflect organizational needs and structure.

    2 Develop a Value Assessment Framework

    The Purpose

    Understand the need for a value assessment framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the organizational context of value through a holistic look at business objectives.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Value Assessment Tool to validate and determine service value.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand value from business context.

    2.2 Determine the governing body.

    2.3 Assess culture and organizational structure.

    2.4 Complete the value assessment.

    2.5 Discuss value assessment score.

    Outputs

    Alignment on value context.

    Clear roles and responsibilities established.

    Ensure there is a supportive organizational structure and culture in place.

    Understand how to complete the value assessment and obtain a value score for selected services.

    Understand how to interpret the service value score.

    3 Manage Intake and Assessment of Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Create a centralized intake process to manage all new service ideas.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Encourage collaboration and innovation through a transparent, formal, and centralized service intake process.

    Activities

    3.1 Review or design the service intake process.

    3.2 Review the Service Intake Form.

    3.3 Design a process to assess and transfer service ideas.

    3.4 Design a process to transfer completed services to the service catalog.

    Outputs

    Create a centralized process for service intake.

    Complete the Service Intake Form for a specific initiative.

    Have a process designed to transfer approved projects to the PMO.

    Have a process designed for transferring of completed services to the service catalog.

    4 Assess Active Services

    The Purpose

    Continuously validate the value of existing services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure services are still providing the expected outcome.

    Clear next steps for services based on value.

    Activities

    4.1 Discuss/review management of active services.

    4.2 Complete value assessment for an active service.

    4.3 Determine service value and usage.

    4.4 Determine the next step for the service.

    4.5 Document the decision regarding the service outcome.

    Outputs

    Understand how active services must be assessed throughout their lifecycles.

    Understand how to assess an existing service.

    Place the service on the 2x2 matrix based on value and usage.

    Understand the appropriate next steps for services based on value.

    Formally document the steps for each of the IRMR options.

    5 Manage and Communicate Your Service Portfolio

    The Purpose

    Communicate and implement the service portfolio within the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Obtain buy-ins for the process.

    Create a mechanism to identify changes within the organization and to seek out continuous improvement opportunities for the service portfolio management process and procedures.

    Activities

    5.1 Create a communication plan for service portfolio and value assessment.

    5.2 Create a communication plan for service intake.

    5.3 Create a procedure to continuously validate the process.

    Outputs

    Document the target audience, the message, and how the message should be communicated.

    Document techniques to encourage participation and promote participation from the organization.

    Document the formal review process, including cycle, roles, and responsibilities.

    Availability and Capacity Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}10|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}10|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}10|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10.0
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,950
    • member rating average days saved: 10
    • Parent Category Name: Resilient IT Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /resilience/resilient-operations-and-it
    Develop your availability and capacity management plant and align it with exactly what the business expects.

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}582|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
    • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
    • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Enterprise architecture is not a technical function – it should be business-value driven and forward looking, positioning organizational assets in favor of long-term strategy rather than short-term tactics.

    Impact and Result

    • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
    • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
    • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
    • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our Executive Brief to find out how implementing a successful enterprise architecture governance framework can benefit your organization.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Current State of EA Governance

    Identify the organization’s standing in terms of the enterprise architecture practice, and know the gaps and what the EA practice needs to fulfill to create a good governance framework.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 1: Current State of EA Governance
    • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
    • EA Governance Assessment Tool

    2. EA Fundamentals

    Understand the EA fundamentals and then refresh them to better align the EA practice with the organization and create business benefit.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 2: EA Fundamentals
    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template
    • EA Principles Template

    3. Engagement Model

    Analyze the IT operating model and identify EA’s role at each stage; refine it to promote effective EA engagement upfront in the early stages of the IT operating model.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 3: Engagement Model
    • EA Engagement Model Template

    4. EA Governing Bodies

    Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies, and creating an architecture review process.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 4: EA Governing Bodies
    • Architecture Board Charter Template
    • Architecture Review Process Template

    5. EA Policy

    Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 5: EA Policy
    • EA Policy Template
    • EA Assessment Checklist Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

    6. Architectural Standards

    Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability. Develop a process to update the architectural standards to ensure relevancy and promote process transparency.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 6: Architectural Standards
    • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

    7. Communication Plan

    Craft a plan to engage the relevant stakeholders, ascertain the benefits of the initiative, and identify the various communication methods in order to maximize the chances of success.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 7: Communication Plan
    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Current State of EA governance (Pre-workshop)

    The Purpose

    Conduct stakeholder interviews to understand current state of EA practice and prioritize gaps for EA governance based on organizational complexity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized list of actions to arrive at the target state based on the complexity of the organization

    Activities

    1.1 Determine organizational complexity.

    1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.

    1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps.

    1.4 Conduct senior management interviews.

    Outputs

    Organizational complexity score

    EA governance current state and prioritized list of EA governance component gaps

    Stakeholder perception of the EA practice

    2 EA Fundamentals and Engagement Model

    The Purpose

    Refine EA fundamentals to align the EA practice with the organization and identify EA touchpoints to provide guidance for projects.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment of EA goals and objectives with the goals and objectives of the organization

    Early involvement of EA in the IT operating model

    Activities

    2.1 Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools.

    2.2 Craft the EA vision and mission.

    2.3 Develop the EA principles.

    2.4 Identify the EA goals.

    2.5 Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

    Outputs

    EA vision and mission statement

    EA principles

    EA goals and measures

    Identified EA engagement touchpoints and EA level of involvement

    3 EA Governing Bodies

    The Purpose

    Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies and creating an architecture review process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models while no additional layers of bureaucracy are introduced

    Activities

    3.1 Identify the number of governing bodies.

    3.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.

    3.3 Define the architecture review process.

    Outputs

    Architecture board structure and coverage

    Identified architecture review template

    4 EA Policy

    The Purpose

    Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved architecture compliance, which ties investments to business value and provides guidance to architecture practitioners

    Activities

    4.1 Define the scope.

    4.2 Identify the target audience.

    4.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.

    4.4 Craft an assessment checklist.

    Outputs

    Defined scope

    Inclusion and exclusion criteria for project review

    Architecture assessment checklist

    5 Architectural Standards and Communication Plan

    The Purpose

    Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability.

    Craft a communication plan to implement the new EA governance framework in order to maximize the chances of success.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Consistent development of architecture, increased information exchange between stakeholders

    Improved process transparency

    Improved stakeholder engagement

    Activities

    5.1 Identify and standardize EA work products.

    5.2 Classifying the architectural standards.

    5.3 Identifying the custodian of standards.

    5.4 Update the standards.

    5.5 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

    5.6 Create a communication plan.

    Outputs

    Identified set of EA work products to standardize

    Architecture information taxonomy

    Identified set of custodian of standards

    Standard update process

    List of EA governance initiatives

    Communication plan for EA governance initiatives

    Further reading

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Focus on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    "Enterprise architecture is not a technology concept, rather it is the foundation on which businesses orient themselves to create and capture value in the marketplace. Designing architecture is not a simple task and creating organizations for the future requires forward thinking and rigorous planning.

    Architecture processes that are supposed to help facilitate discussions and drive option analysis are often seen as an unnecessary overhead. The negative perception is due to enterprise architecture groups being overly prescriptive rather than providing a set of options that guide and constrain solutions at the same time.

    EA groups should do away with the direct and control mindset and change to a collaborate and mentor mindset. As part of the architecture governance, EA teams should provide an option set that constrains design choices, and also be open to changes to standards or best practices. "

    Gopi Bheemavarapu, Sr. Manager, CIO Advisory Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Understand the importance of enterprise architecture (EA) governance and how to apply it to guide architectural decisions.
    • Enhance your understanding of the organization’s current EA governance and identify areas for improvement.
    • Optimize your EA engagement model to maximize value creation.
    • Learn how to set up the optimal number of governance bodies in order to avoid bureaucratizing the organization.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Business Relationship Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers
    • IT Analysts
    • Quality Assurance Leads
    • Software Developers

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Give an overview of enterprise architecture governance
    • Clarity on the role of enterprise architecture team

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Deployed solutions do not meet business objectives resulting in expensive and extensive rework.
    • Each department acts independently without any regular EA touchpoints.
    • Organizations practice project-level architecture as opposed to enterprise architecture.

    Complication

    • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
    • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
    • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

    Resolution

    • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
    • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints, rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
    • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
    • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology imperatives.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Enterprise architecture is critical to ensuring that an organization has the solid IT foundation it needs to efficiently enable the achievement of its current and future strategic goals rather than focusing on short-term tactical gains.

    What is enterprise architecture governance?

    An architecture governance process is the set of activities an organization executes to ensure that decisions are made and accountability is enforced during the execution of its architecture strategy. (Hopkins, “The Essential EA Toolkit.”)

    EA governance includes the following:

    • Implement a system of controls over the creation and monitoring of all architectural components.
    • Ensure effective introduction, implementation, and evolution of architectures within the organization.
    • Implement a system to ensure compliance with internal and external standards and regulatory obligations.
    • Develop practices that ensure accountability to a clearly identified stakeholder community, both inside and outside the organization.

    (TOGAF)

    IT governance sets direction through prioritization and decision making, and monitors overall IT performance.

    The image shows a circle set within a larger circle. The inner circle is connected to the bottom of the larger circle. The inner circle is labelled EA Governance and the larger circle is labelled IT Governance.

    EA governance ensures that optimal architectural design choices are being made that focus on long-term value creation.

    Harness the benefits of an optimized EA governance

    Core benefits of EA governance are seen through:

    Value creation

    Effective EA governance ensures alignment between organizational investments and corporate strategic goals and objectives.

    Cost reduction

    Architecture standards provide guidance to identify opportunities for reuse and eliminate redundancies in an organization.

    Risk optimization

    Architecture review processes and assessment checklists ensure that solutions are within the acceptable risk levels of the organization.

    EA governance is difficult to structure appropriately, but having an effective structure will allow you to:

    • Achieve business strategy through faster time-to-market innovations and capabilities.
    • Reduced transaction costs with more consistent business processes and information across business units.
    • Lower IT costs due to better traceability, faster design, and lower risk.
    • Link IT investments to organizational strategies and objectives
    • Integrate and institutionalizes IT best practices.
    • Enable the organization to take full advantage of its information, infrastructure, and hardware and software assets.
    • Support regulatory as well as best practice requirements such as auditability, security, responsibility, and accountability.

    Organizations that have implemented EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA programs

    Modern day CIOs of high-performing organizations use EA as a strategic planning discipline to improve business-IT alignment, enable innovation, and link business and IT strategies to execution.

    Recent Info-Tech research found that organizations that establish EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA initiatives.

    The image shows a bar graph, with Impact from EA on the Y-axis, and different initiatives listed on the X-axis. Each initiative has two bars connected to it, with a blue bar representing answers of No and the grey bar representing answers of Yes.

    (Info-Tech Research Group, N=89)

    Measure EA governance implementation effectiveness

    Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an “enabler” of business outcomes to senior executives.

    EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
    Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

    Enterprise Architecture Management

    • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

    IT Investment Portfolio Management

    • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

    Solution Development

    • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
    • Number of building blocks reused.

    Operations Management

    • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

    Business Value

    • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
    • Decreased time to production.
    • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

    An insurance provider adopts a value-focused, right-sized EA governance program

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    The insurance sector has been undergoing major changes, and as a reaction, businesses within the sector have been embracing technology to provide innovative solutions.

    The head of EA in a major insurance provider (henceforth to be referred to as “INSPRO01”) was given the mandate to ensure that solutions are architected right the first time to maximize reuse and reduce technology debt. The EA group was at a critical point – to demonstrate business value or become irrelevant.

    Complication

    The project management office had been accountable for solution architecture and had placed emphasis on short-term project cost savings at the expense of long term durability.

    There was a lack of awareness of the Enterprise Architecture group within INSPRO01, and people misunderstood the roles and responsibilities of the EA team.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped define the responsibilities of the EA team and clarify the differences between the role of a Solution Architect vs. Enterprise Architect.

    The EA team was able to make the case for change in the project management practices to ensure architectures are reviewed and approved prior to implementation.

    As a result, INSPRO01 saw substantial increases in reuse opportunities and thereby derived more value from its technology investments.

    Success factors for EA governance

    The success of any EA governance initiative revolves around adopting best practices, setting up repeatable processes, and establishing appropriate controls.

    1. Develop best practices for managing architecture policies, procedures, roles, skills, and organizational structures.
    2. Establish organizational responsibilities and structures to support the architecture governance processes.
    3. Management of criteria for the control of the architecture governance processes, dispensations, compliance assessments, and SLAs.

    Info-Tech’s approach to EA governance

    Our best-practice approach is grounded in TOGAF and enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

    Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.

    Right-sized. Insert EA governance into existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.

    Measured. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance, and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.

    Balanced. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

    Info-Tech’s EA governance framework

    Info-Tech’s architectural governance framework provides a value-focused, right-sized approach with a strong emphasis on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    Use Info-Tech’s templates to complete this project

    1. Current state of EA governance
      • EA Capability - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
      • EA Governance Assessment Tool
    2. EA fundamentals
      • EA Vision and Mission Template
      • EA Goals and Measures Template
      • EA Principles Template
    3. Engagement model
      • EA Engagement Model Template
    4. EA governing bodies
      • Architecture Board Charter Template
      • Architecture Review Process Template
    5. EA policy
      • EA Policy Template
      • Architecture Assessment Checklist Template
      • Compliance Waiver Process Template
      • Compliance Waiver Form Template
    6. Architectural standards
      • Architecture Standards Update Process Template
    7. Communication Plan
      • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
      • EA Governance Framework Template

    As you move through the project, capture your progress with a summary in the EA Governance Framework Template.

    Download the EA Governance Framework Template document for use throughout this project.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (1/2)

    Current state of EA governance EA Fundamentals Engagement Model EA Governing Bodies
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Determine organizational complexity

    1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

    1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

    2.1 Craft the EA vision and mission

    2.2 Develop the EA principles

    2.3 Identify the EA goals

    3.1 Build the case for EA engagement

    3.2 Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

    4.1 Identify the number of governing bodies

    4.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies

    4.3 Define the architecture review process

    Guided Implementations
    • Determine organizational complexity
    • Assess current state of EA governance
    • Develop the EA fundamentals
    • Review the EA fundamentals
    • Review the current IT operating model
    • Determine the target engagement model
    • Identify architecture boards and develop charters
    • Develop an architecture review process

    Phase 1 Results:

    • EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment
    • EA governance assessment

    Phase 2 Results:

    • EA vision and mission
    • EA goals and measures
    • EA principles

    Phase 3 Results:

    • EA engagement model

    Phase 4 Results:

    • Architecture board charter
    • Architecture review process

    EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (2/2)

    EA Policy Architectural Standards Communication Plan
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    5.1 Define the scope of EA policy

    5.2 Identify the target audience

    5.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria

    5.4 Craft an assessment checklist

    6.1 Identify and standardize EA work products

    6.2 Classify the architectural standards

    6.3 Identify the custodian of standards

    6.4 Update the standards

    7.1 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

    7.2 Identify stakeholders

    7.3 Create a communication plan

    Guided Implementations
    • EA policy, assessment checklists, and decision types
    • Compliance waivers
    • Understand architectural standards
    • EA repository and updating the standards
    • Create a communication plan
    • Review the communication plan

    Phase 5 Results:

    • EA policy
    • Architecture assessment checklist
    • Compliance waiver process
    • Compliance waiver form

    Phase 6 Results:

    • Architecture standards update process

    Phase 7 Results:

    • Communication plan
    • EA governance framework

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Pre-workshopWorkshop Day 1Workshop Day 2Workshop Day 3Workshop Day 4
    ActivitiesCurrent state of EA governance EA fundamentals and engagement model EA governing bodies EA policy Architectural standards and

    communication plan

    1.1 Determine organizational complexity

    1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

    1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

    1.4 Senior management interviews

    1. Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools
    2. Craft the EA vision and mission
    3. Develop the EA principles.
    4. Identify the EA goals
    5. Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model
    1. Identify the number of governing bodies
    2. Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
    3. Define the architecture review process
    1. Define the scope
    2. Identify the target audience
    3. Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
    4. Craft an assessment checklist
    1. Identify and standardize EA work products
    2. Classifying the architectural standards
    3. Identifying the custodian of standards
    4. Updating the standards
    5. List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
    6. Identify stakeholders
    7. Create a communication plan
    Deliverables
    1. EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment tool
    2. EA governance assessment tool
    1. EA vision and mission template
    2. EA goals and measures template
    3. EA principles template
    4. EA engagement model template
    1. Architecture board charter template
    2. Architecture review process template
    1. EA policy template
    2. Architecture assessment checklist template
    3. Compliance waiver process template
    4. Compliance waiver form template
    1. Architecture standards update process template
    2. Communication plan template

    Phase 1

    Current State of EA Governance

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Current State of EA Governance

    1. Current State of EA Governance
    2. EA Fundamentals
    3. Engagement Model
    4. EA Governing Bodies
    5. EA Policy
    6. Architectural Standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine organizational complexity
    • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components
    • Identify and prioritize gaps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritized list of gaps

    Info-Tech Insight

    Correlation is not causation – an apparent problem might be a symptom rather than a cause. Assess the organization’s current EA governance to discover the root cause and go beyond the symptoms.

    Phase 1 guided implementation outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Current State of EA Governance

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Step 1.1: Determine organizational complexity

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss how to use Info-Tech’s EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool.
    • Discuss how to complete the inputs on the EA Governance Assessment Tool.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Conduct an assessment of your organization to determine its complexity.
    • Assess the state of EA governance within your organization.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
    • EA Governance Assessment Tool

    Step 1.2: Assess current state of EA governance

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the output of the EA governance assessment and gather feedback on your goals for the EA practice.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Discuss whether you are ready to proceed with the project.
    • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Governance Assessment Tool

    Right-size EA governance based on organizational complexity

    Determining organizational complexity is not rocket science. Use Info-Tech’s tool to quantify the complexity and use it, along with common sense, to determine the appropriate level of architecture governance.

    Info-Tech’s methodology uses six factors to determine the complexity of the organization:

    1. The size of the organization, which can often be denoted by the revenue, headcount, number of applications in use, and geographical diversity.
    2. The solution alignment factor helps indicate the degree to which various projects map to the organization’s strategy.
    3. The size and complexity of the IT infrastructure and networks.
    4. The portfolio of applications maintained by the IT organization.
    5. Key changes within the organization such as M&A, regulatory changes, or a change in business or technology leadership.
    6. Other negative influences that can adversely affect the organization.

    Determine your organization’s level of complexity

    1.1 2 hours

    Input

    • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

    Output

    • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Capability section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool to facilitate a session on determining your organization’s complexity.

    Download EA Organizational - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the results in the EA governance framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Understand the components of effective EA governance

    EA governance is multi-faceted and it facilitates effective use of resources to meet organizational strategic objectives through well-defined structural elements.

    EA Governance

    • Fundamentals
    • Engagement Model
    • Policy
    • Governing Bodies
    • Architectural Standards

    Components of architecture governance

    1. EA vision, mission, goals, metrics, and principles that provide a direction for the EA practice.
    2. An engagement model showing where and in what fashion EA is engaged in the IT operating model.
    3. An architecture policy formulated and enforced by the architectural governing bodies to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.
    4. Governing bodies to assess projects for compliance and provide feedback.
    5. Architectural standards that codify the EA work products to ensure consistent development of architecture.

    Next Step: Based on the organization’s complexity, conduct a current state assessment of EA governance using Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool.

    Assess the components of EA governance in your organization

    1.2 2 hrs

    Input

    • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

    Output

    • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Governance section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the “EA Governance Assessment Tool” to facilitate a session on identifying the best practices to be applied in your organization.

    Download Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the identified best practices in the EA governance framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template


    Conduct a current state assessment to identify limitations of the existing EA governance framework

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    INSPRO01 was planning a major transformation initiative. The organization determined that EA is a strategic function.

    The CIO had pledged support to the EA group and had given them a mandate to deliver long-term strategic architecture.

    The business leaders did not trust the EA team and believed that lack of business skills in the group put the business transformation at risk.

    Complication

    The EA group had been traditionally seen as a technology organization that helps with software design.

    The EA team lacked understanding of the business and hence there had been no common language between business and technology.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped the EA team create a set of 10 architectural principles that are business-value driven rather than technical statements.

    The team socialized the principles with the business and technology stakeholders and got their approvals.

    By applying the business focused architectural principles, the EA team was able to connect with the business leaders and gain their support.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Determine organizational complexity.
    • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.
    • Identify and prioritize gaps.

    Outcomes

    • Organizational complexity assessment
    • EA governance capability assessment
    • A prioritized list of capability gaps

    Phase 2

    EA Fundamentals

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    EA Fundamentals

    1. Current State of EA Governance
    2. EA Fundamentals
    3. Engagement Model
    4. EA Governing Bodies
    5. EA Policy
    6. Architectural Standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Craft the EA vision and mission
    • Develop the EA principles.
    • Identify the EA goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance

    Info-Tech Insight

    A house divided against itself cannot stand – ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned with the organization’s goals and objectives.

    Phase 2 guided implementation outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: EA Fundamentals

    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

    Step 2.1: Develop the EA fundamentals

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss the importance of the EA fundamentals – vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
    • Understand how to align the EA vision, mission, goals, and measures to your organization’s vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Develop the EA vision statements.
    • Craft the EA mission statements.
    • Define EA goals and measures.
    • Adopt EA principles.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Principles Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template

    Step 2.2: Review the EA fundamentals

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review the EA fundamentals in conjunction with the results of the EA governance assessment tool and gather feedback.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine the EA vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
    • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Principles Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template

    Fundamentals of an EA organization

    Vision, mission, goals and measures, and principles form the foundation of the EA function.

    Factors to consider when developing the vision and mission statements

    The vision and mission statements provide strategic direction to the EA team. These statements should be created based on the business and technology drivers in the organization.

    Business Drivers

    • Business drivers are factors that determine, or cause, an increase in value or major improvement of a business.
    • Examples of business drivers include:
      • Increased revenue
      • Customer retention
      • Salesforce effectiveness
      • Innovation

    Technology Drivers

    • Technology drivers are factors that are vital for the continued success and growth of a business using effective technologies.
    • Examples of technology drivers include:
      • Enterprise integration
      • Information security
      • Portability
      • Interoperability

    "The very essence of leadership is [that] you have a vision. It's got to be a vision you articulate clearly and forcefully on every occasion. You can't blow an uncertain trumpet." – Theodore Hesburgh

    Develop vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles to define the EA capability direction and purpose

    EA capability vision statement

    Articulates the desired future state of EA capability expressed in the present tense.

    • What will be the role of EA capability?
    • How will EA capability be perceived?

    Example: To be recognized by both the business and IT as a trusted partner that drives [Company Name]’s effectiveness, efficiency, and agility.

    EA capability mission statement

    Articulates the fundamental purpose of the EA capability.

    • Why does EA capability exist?
    • What does EA capability do to realize its vision?
    • Who are the key customers of the EA capability?

    Example: Define target enterprise architecture for [Company Name], identify solution opportunities, inform IT investment management, and direct solution development, acquisition, and operation compliance.

    EA capability goals and measures

    EA capability goals define specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. EA capability measures define how to validate the achievement of the EA capability goals.

    Example:

    Goal: Improve reuse of IT assets at [Company Name].

    Measures:

    • The number of building blocks available for reuse.
    • Percent of projects that utilized existing building blocks.
    • Estimated efficiency gain (= effort to create a building block * reuse count).

    EA principles

    EA principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of IT in constructing, transforming, and operating the enterprise by informing and restricting target-state enterprise architecture design, solution development, and procurement decisions.

    Example:

    • EA principle name: Reuse.
    • Statement: Maximize reuse of existing assets.
    • Rationale: Reuse prevents duplication of development and support efforts, increasing efficiency, and agility.
    • Implications: Define architecture and solution building blocks and ensure their consistent application.

    EA principles guide decision making

    Policies can be seen as “the letter of the law,” whereas EA principles summarize “the spirit of the law.”

    The image shows a graphic with EA Principles listed at the top, with an arrow pointing down to Decisions on the use of IT. At the bottom are domain-specific policies, with two arrows pointing upwards: the arrow on the left is labelled direct, and the arrow on the right is labelled control. The arrow points up to the label Decisions on the use of IT. On the left, there is an arrow pointing both up and down. At the top it is labelled The spirit of the law, and at the bottom, The letter of the law. On the right, there is another arrow pointing both up and down, labelled How should decisions be made at the top and labelled Who has the accountability and authority to make decisions? at the bottom.

    Define EA capability goals and related measures that resonate with EA capability stakeholders

    EA capability goals, i.e. specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. Use COBIT 5, APO03 process goals, and metrics as a starting point.

    The image shows a chart titled Manage Enterprise Architecture.

    Define relevant business value measures to collect indirect evidence of EA’s contribution to business benefits

    Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an enabler of business outcomes to senior executives.

    EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
    Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

    Enterprise Architecture Management

    • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

    IT Investment Portfolio Management

    • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

    Solution Development

    • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
    • Number of building blocks reused.

    Operations Management

    • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

    Business Value

    • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
    • Decreased time to production.
    • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

    Refine the organization’s EA fundamentals

    2.1 2 hrs

    Input

    • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

    Output

    • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the Table of Contents with four sections highlighted, beginning with EA Vision Statement and ending with EA Goals and Measures.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the three templates and hold a working session to facilitate a session on creating EA fundamentals.

    Download the EA Vision and Mission Template, the EA Principles Template, and the EA Goals and Measures Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Document the final vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures within the EA Governance Framework.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template


    Ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned to the organizational needs

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    The EA group at INSPRO01 was being pulled in multiple directions with requests ranging from architecture review to solution design to code reviews.

    Project level architecture was being practiced with no clarity on the end goal. This led to EA being viewed as just another IT function without any added benefits.

    Info-Tech recommended that the EA team ensure that the fundamentals (vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures) reflect what the team aspired to achieve before fixing any of the process concerns.

    Complication

    The EA team was mostly comprised of technical people and hence the best practices outlined were not driven by business value.

    The team had no documented vision and mission statements in place. In addition, the existing goals and measures were not tied to the business strategic objectives.

    The team had architectural principles documented, but there were too many and they were very technical in nature.

    Result

    With Info-Tech’s guidance, the team developed a vision and mission statement to succinctly communicate the purpose of the EA function.

    The team also reduced and simplified the EA principles to make sure they were value driven and communicated in business terms.

    Finally, the team proposed goals and measures to track the performance of the EA team.

    With the fundamentals in place, the team was able to show the value of EA and gain organization-wide acceptance.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Craft the EA vision and mission.
    • Develop the EA principles.
    • Identify the EA goals.

    Outcomes

    • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance.

    Phase 3

    Engagement Model

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Engagement Model

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build the case for EA engagement
    • Engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
    • Target EA engagement model

    Info-Tech Insight

    Perform due diligence prior to decision making. Use the EA Engagement Model to promote conversations between stage gate meetings as opposed to having the conversation during the stage gate meetings.

    Phase 3 guided implementation outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: EA engagement model

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Step 3.1 Review the current IT operating model

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review Info-Tech’s IT operating model.
    • Understand how to document your organization’s IT operating model.
    • Document EA’s current role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Document your organization’s IT operating model.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Engagement Model Template

    Step 3.2: Determine the target engagement model

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your organization’s current state IT operating model.
    • Review your EA’s role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.
    • Document the role and responsibility of EA in the future state.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Document EA’s future role within each stage of your organization’s IT operating model.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Engagement Model Template.

    The three pillars of EA Engagement

    Effective EA engagement revolves around three basic principles – generating business benefits, creating adaptable models, and being able to replicate the process across the organization.

    Business Value Driven

    Focus on generating business value from organizational investments.

    Repeatable

    Process should be standardized, transparent, and repeatable so that it can be consistently applied across the organization.

    Flexible

    Accommodate the varying needs of projects of different sizes.

    Where these pillars meet: Advocates long-term strategic vs. short-term tactical solutions.

    EA interaction points within the IT operating model

    EA’s engagement in each stage within the plan, build, and run phases should be clearly defined and communicated.

    Plan Strategy Development Business Planning Conceptualization Portfolio Management
    Build Requirements Solution Design Application Development/ Procurement Quality Assurance
    Run Deploy Operate

    Document the organization’s current IT operating model

    3.1 2-3 hr

    Input

    • IT project lifecycle

    Output

    • Organization’s current IT operating model.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, IT department leads, business leaders.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to document the current IT operating model. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

    1. Map out the IT operating model.

    1. Find a project that was just deployed within the organization and backtrack every step of the way to the strategy development that resulted in the conception of the project.
    2. Interview the personnel involved with each step of the process to get a sense of whether or not projects usually move to deployment going through these steps.
    3. Review Info-Tech’s best-practice IT operating model presented in the EA Engagement Model Template, and add or remove any steps to the existing organization’s IT operating model as necessary. Document the finalized steps of the IT operating model.

    2. Determine EA’s current role in the operating model.

    1. Interview EA personnel through each step of the process and ask them their role. This is to get a sense of the type of input that EA is having into each step of the process.
    2. Using the EA Engagement Model Template, document the current role of EA in each step of the organization’s IT operation as you complete the interviews.

    Download the EA Engagement Model Template to document the organization’s current IT operating model.

    Define RACI in every stage of the IT operating model (e.g. EA role in strategy development phase of the IT operating model is presented below)

    Strategy Development

    Also known as strategic planning, strategy development is fundamental to creating and running a business. It involves the creation of a longer-term game plan or vision that sets specific goals and objectives for a business.

    R Those in charge of performing the task. These are the people actively involved in the completion of the required work. Business VPs, EA, IT directors R
    A The one ultimately answerable for the correct and thorough completion of the deliverable or task, and the one who delegates the work to those responsible. CEO A
    C Those whose opinions are sought before a decision is made, and with whom there is two-way communication. PMO, Line managers, etc. C
    I Those who are kept up to date on progress, and with whom there is one-way communication. Development managers, etc. I

    Next Step: Similarly define the RACI for each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

    Best practices on the role of EA within the IT operating model

    Plan

    Strategy Development

    C

    Business Planning

    C

    Conceptualization

    A

    Portfolio Management

    C

    Build

    Requirements

    C

    Solution Design

    R

    Application Development/ Procurement

    R

    Quality Assurance

    I

    Run

    Deploy

    I

    Operate

    I

    Next Step: Define the role of EA in each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

    Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

    3.2 2 hrs

    Input

    • Organization’s IT operating model.

    Output

    • Organization’s EA engagement model.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business leaders, IT department leaders.

    The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Engagement Model Template with the EA Engagement Summary section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Engagement Model Template and hold a working session to define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model.

    Download the EA Engagement Model Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Document the target state role of EA within the EA Governance Framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template


    Design an EA engagement model to formalize EA’s role within the IT operating model

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    INSPRO01 had a high IT cost structure with looming technology debt due to a preference for short-term tactical gains over long-term solutions.

    The business satisfaction with IT was at an all-time low due to expensive solutions that did not meet business needs.

    INSPRO01’s technology landscape was in disarray with many overlapping systems and interoperability issues.

    Complication

    No single team within the organization had an end-to-end perspective all the way from strategy to project execution. A lot of information was being lost in handoffs between different teams.

    This led to inconsistent design/solution patterns being applied. Investment decisions had not been grounded in reality and this often led to cost overruns.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped INSPRO01 identify opportunities for EA team engagement at different stages of the IT operating model. EA’s role within each stage was clearly defined and documented.

    With Info-Tech’s help, the EA team successfully made the case for engagement upfront during strategy development rather than during project execution.

    The increased transparency enabled the EA team to ensure that investments were aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Build the case for EA engagement.
    • Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

    Outcomes

    • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
    • Target EA engagement model

    Phase 4

    EA Governing Bodies

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    EA Governing Bodies

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify the number of governing bodies
    • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
    • Define the architecture review process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Charter definition for each EA governance board

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use architecture governance like a scalpel rather than a hatchet. Implement governing bodies to provide guidance rather than act as a police force.

    Phase 4 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 4: Create or identify EA governing bodies

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Step 4.1: Identify architecture boards and develop charters

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Understand the factors influencing the number of governing bodies required for an organization.
    • Understand the components of a governing body charter.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify how many governing bodies are needed.
    • Define EA governing body composition, meeting frequency, and domain of coverage.
    • Define the inputs and outputs of each EA governing body.
    • Identify mandatory inclusion criteria.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Architecture Board Charter Template

    Step 4.2: Develop an architecture review process

    Follow-up with an analyst call:

    • Review the number of boards identified for your organization and gather feedback.
    • Review the charters developed for each governing body and gather feedback.
    • Understand the various factors that impact the architecture review process.
    • Review Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine the charters for governing bodies.
    • Develop the architecture review process for your organization.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Architecture Review Process Template

    Factors that determine the number of architectural boards required

    The primary purpose of architecture boards is to ensure that business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models without introducing additional layers of bureaucracy.

    The optimal number of architecture boards required in an organization is a function of the following factors:

    • EA organization model
      • Distributed
      • Federated
      • Centralized
    • Architecture domains Maturity of architecture domains
    • Project throughput

    Commonly observed architecture boards:

    • Architecture Review Board
    • Technical Architecture Committee
    • Data Architecture Review Board
    • Infrastructure Architecture Review Board
    • Security Architecture Review Board

    Info-Tech Insight

    Before building out a new governance board, start small by repurposing existing forums by adding architecture as an agenda item. As the items for review increase consider introducing dedicated governing bodies.

    EA organization model drives the architecture governance structure

    EA teams can be organized in three ways – distributed, federated, and centralized. Each model has its own strengths and weaknesses. EA governance must be structured in a way such that the strengths are harvested and the weaknesses are mitigated.

    Distributed Federated Centralized
    EA org. structure
    • No overarching EA team exists and segment architects report to line of business (LOB) executives.
    • A centralized EA team exists with segment architects reporting to LOB executives and dotted-line to head of (centralized) EA.
    • A centralized EA capability exists with enterprise architects reporting to the head of EA.
    Implications
    • Produces a fragmented and disjointed collection of architectures.
    • Economies of scale are not realized.
    • High cross-silo integration effort.
    • LOB-specific approach to EA.
    • Requires dual reporting relationships.
    • Additional effort is required to coordinate centralized EA policies and blueprints with segment EA policies and blueprints.
    • Accountabilities may be unclear.
    • Can be less responsive to individual LOB needs, because the centralized EA capability must analyze needs of multiple LOBs and various trade-off options to avoid specialized, one-off solutions.
    • May impede innovation.
    Architectural boards
    • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and common services.
    • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB-specific needs.
    • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns and common services.
    • Cross-enterprise boards to ensure adherence to enterprise standards and reduce integration costs.
    • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB specific needs.
    • Enterprise working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and all services.
    • Central board to ensure adherence to enterprise standards.

    Architecture domains influences the number of architecture boards required

    • An architecture review board (ARB) provides direction for domain-specific boards and acts as an escalation point. The ARB must have the right mix of both business and technology stakeholders.
    • Domain-specific boards provide a platform to have focused discussions on items specific to that domain.
    • Based on project throughput and the maturity of each domain, organizations would have to pick the optimal number of boards.
    • Architecture working groups provide a platform for cross-domain conversations to establish organization wide standards.
    Level 1 Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
    Level 2 Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
    Level 3 Architecture Working Groups Architects

    Create a game plan for the architecture boards

    • Start with a single board for each level – an architecture review board (ARB), a technical architecture committee (TAC), and architecture working groups.
    • As the organization matures and the number of requests to the TAC increase, consider creating domain-specific boards – such as business architecture, data architecture, application architecture, etc. – to handle architecture decisions pertaining to that domain.

    Start with this:

    Level 1 Architecture Review Board
    Level 2 Technical Architecture Committee
    Level 3 Architecture Working Groups

    Change to this:

    Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
    Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
    Architecture Working Groups Architects

    Architecture boards have different objectives and activities

    The boards at each level should be set up with the correct agenda – ensure that the boards’ composition and activities reflect their objective. Use the entry criteria to communicate the agenda for their meetings.

    Architecture Review Board Technical Architecture Committee
    Objective
    • Evaluates business strategy, needs, and priorities, sets direction and acts as a decision making authority of the EA capability.
    • Directs the development of target state architecture.
    • Monitors performance and compliance of the architectural standards.
    • Monitor project solution architecture compliance to standards, regulations, EA principles, and target state EA blueprints.
    • Review EA compliance waiver requests, make recommendations, and escalate to the architecture review board (ARB).
    Composition
    • Business Leadership
    • IT Leadership
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Business Managers
    • IT Managers
    • Architects
    Activities
    • Review compliance of conceptual solution to standards.
    • Discuss the enterprise implications of the proposed solution.
    • Select and approve vendors.
    • Review detailed solution design.
    • Discuss the risks of the proposed solution.
    • Discuss the cost of the proposed solution.
    • Review and recommend vendors.
    Entry Criteria
    • Changes to IT Enterprise Technology Policy.
    • Changes to the technology management plan.
    • Approve changes to enterprise technology inventory/portfolio.
    • Ongoing operational cost impacts.
    • Detailed estimates for the solution are ready for review.
    • There are significant changes to protocols or technologies responsible for solution.
    • When the project is deviating from baselined architectures.

    Identify the number of governing bodies

    4.1 2 hrs

    Input

    • EA Vision and Mission
    • EA Engagement Model

    Output

    • A list of EA governing bodies.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to identify the number of governing bodies. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

    1. Examine the EA organization models mentioned previously. Assess how your organization is structured, and identify whether your organization has a federated, distributed or centralized EA organization model.
    2. Reference the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide. Assess the architecture domains, and define how many there are in the organization.
    3. Architecture domains:
      1. If no defined architecture domains exist, model the number of governing bodies in the organization based on the “Start with this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
      2. If defined architecture domains do exist, model the number of governing bodies based on the “Change to this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
    4. Name each governing body you have defined in the previous step. Download Info-Tech’s Architecture Board Charter Template for each domain you have named. Input the names into the title of each downloaded template.

    Download the Architecture Board Charter Template to document this activity.

    Defining the governing body charter

    The charter represents the agreement between the governing body and its stakeholders about the value proposition and obligations to the organization.

    1. Purpose: The reason for the existence of the governing body and its goals and objectives.
    2. Composition: The members who make up the committee and their roles and responsibilities in it.
    3. Frequency of meetings: The frequency at which the committee gathers to discuss items and make decisions.
    4. Entry/Exit Criteria: The criteria by which the committee selects items for review and items for which decisions can be taken.
    5. Inputs: Materials that are provided as inputs for review and decision making by the committee.
    6. Outputs: Materials that are provided by the committee after an item has been reviewed and the decision made.
    7. Activities: Actions undertaken by the committee to arrive at its decision.

    Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

    4.2 3 hrs

    Input

    • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

    Output

    • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Governance Framework document, with the Architecture Board Charters highlighted.

    Step 1 Facilitate

    Hold a working session with the stakeholders to define the charter for each of the identified architecture boards.

    Download Architecture Board Charter Template

    Step 2 Summarize

    • Summarize the objectives of each board and reference the charter document within the EA Governance Framework.
    • Upload the final charter document to the team’s common repository.

    Update the EA Governance Framework document


    Considerations when creating an architecture review process

    • Ensure that architecture review happens at major milestones within the organization’s IT Operating Model such as the plan, build, and run phases.
    • In order to provide continuous engagement, make the EA group accountable for solution architecture in the plan phase. In the build phase, the EA group will be consulted while the solution architect will be responsible for the project solution architecture.

    Plan

    • Strategy Development
    • Business Planning
    • A - Conceptualization
    • Portfolio Management

    Build

    • Requirements
    • R - Solution Design
    • Application Development/ Procurement
    • Quality Assurance

    Run

    • Deploy
    • Operate

    Best-practice project architecture review process

    The best-practice model presented facilitates the creation of sound solution architecture through continuous engagement with the EA team and well-defined governance checkpoints.

    The image shows a graphic of the best-practice model. At the left, four categories are listed: Committees; EA; Project Team; LOB. At the top, three categories are listed: Plan; Build; Run. Within the area between these categories is a flow chart demonstrating the best-practice model and specific checkpoints throughout.

    Develop the architecture review process

    4.3 2 hours

    Input

    • A list of all EA governing bodies.
    • Info-Tech’s best practice architecture review process.

    Output

    • The new architecture review process.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    Hold a working session with the participants to develop the architecture review process. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

    1. Reference Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process embedded within the “Architecture Review Process Template” to gain an understanding of an ideal architecture review process.
    2. Identify the stages within the plan, build, and run phases where solution architecture reviews should occur, and identify the governing bodies involved in these reviews.
    3. As you go through these stages, record your findings in the Architecture Review Process Template.
    4. Connect the various activities leading to and from the architecture creation points to outline the review process.

    Download the Architecture Review Process Template for additional guidance regarding developing an architecture review process.

    Develop the architecture review process

    4.3 2 hrs

    Input

    • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

    Output

    • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents, with the Architecture Review Process highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download Architecture Review Process Template and facilitate a session to customize the best-practice model presented in the template.

    Download the Architecture Review Process Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the process changes and document the process flow in the EA Governance Framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Right-size EA governing bodies to reduce the perception of red tape

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    At INSPRO01, architecture governance boards were a bottleneck. The boards fielded all project requests, ranging from simple screen label changes to complex initiatives spanning multiple applications.

    These boards were designed as forums for technology discussions without any business stakeholder involvement.

    Complication

    INSPRO01’s management never gave buy-in to the architecture governance boards since their value was uncertain.

    Additionally, architectural reviews were perceived as an item to be checked off rather than a forum for getting feedback.

    Architectural exceptions were not being followed through due to the lack of a dispensation process.

    Result

    Info-Tech has helped the team define adaptable inclusion/exclusion criteria (based on project complexity) for each of the architectural governing boards.

    The EA team was able to make the case for business participation in the architecture forums to better align business and technology investment.

    An architecture dispensation process was created and operationalized. As a result architecture reviews became more transparent with well-defined next steps.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Identify the number of governing bodies.
    • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.
    • Define the architecture review process.

    Outcomes

    • Charter definition for each EA governance board

    Phase 5

    EA Policy

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    EA Policy

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define the EA policy scope
    • Identify the target audience
    • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
    • Create an assessment checklist

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • The completed EA policy
    • Project assessment checklist
    • Defined assessment outcomes
    • Completed compliance waiver process

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use the EA policy to promote EA’s commitment to deliver value to business stakeholders through process transparency, stakeholder engagement, and compliance.

    Phase 5 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 5: EA Policy

    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

    Step 5.1–5.3: EA Policy, Assessment Checklists, and Decision Types

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss the three pillars of EA policy and its purpose.
    • Review the components of an effective EA policy.
    • Understand how to develop architecture assessment checklists.
    • Understand the assessment decision types.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Define purpose, scope, and audience of the EA policy.
    • Create a project assessment checklist.
    • Define the organization’s assessment decision type.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Policy Template
    • EA Assessment Checklist Template

    Step 5.4: Compliance Waivers

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your draft EA policy and gather feedback.
    • Review your project assessment checklists and the assessment decision types.
    • Discuss the best-practice architecture compliance waiver process and how to tailor it to your organizational needs.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine the EA policy based on feedback gathered.
    • Create the compliance waiver process.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

    Three pillars of architecture policy

    Architecture policy is a set of guidelines, formulated and enforced by the governing bodies of an organization, to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.

    Architecture compliance – promotes compliance to organizational standards through well-defined assessment checklists across architectural domains.

    Business value – ensures that investments are tied to business value by enforcing traceability to business capabilities.

    Architectural guidance – provides guidance to architecture practitioners on the application of the business and technology standards.

    Components of EA policy

    An enterprise architecture policy is an actionable document that can be applied to projects of varying complexity across the organization.

    1. Purpose and Scope: This EA policy document clearly defines the scope and the objectives of architecture reviews within an organization.
    2. Target Audience: The intended audience of the policy such as employees and partners.
    3. Architecture Assessment Checklist: A wide range of typical questions that may be used in conducting Architecture Compliance reviews, relating to various aspects of the architecture.
    4. Assessment Outcomes: The outcome of the architecture review process that determines the conformance of a project solution to the enterprise architecture standards.
    5. Compliance Waiver: Used when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

    Draft the purpose and scope of the EA policy

    5.1 2.5 hrs

    Input

    • A consensus on the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

    Output

    • Documented version of the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Policy section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Policy Template and hold a working session to draft the EA policy.

    Download the EA Policy Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    • Summarize purpose, scope, and intended audience of the policy in the EA Governance Framework document.
    • Update the EA policy document with the purpose, scope and intended audience.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Architecture assessment checklist

    Architecture assessment checklist is a list of future-looking criteria that a project will be assessed against. It provides a set of standards against which projects can be assessed in order to render a decision on whether or not the project can be greenlighted.

    Architecture checklists should be created for each EA domain since each domain provides guidance on specific aspects of the project.

    Sample Checklist Questions

    Business Architecture:

    • Is the project aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives?
    • What are the business capabilities that the project supports? Is it creating new capabilities or supporting an existing one?

    Data Architecture:

    • What processes are in place to support data referential integrity and/or normalization?
    • What is the physical data model definition (derived from logical data models) used to design the database?

    Application Architecture:

    • Can this application be placed on an application server independent of all other applications? If not, explain the dependencies.
    • Can additional parallel application servers be easily added? If so, what is the load balancing mechanism?

    Infrastructure Architecture:

    • Does the solution provide high-availability and fault-tolerance that can recover from events within a datacenter?

    Security Architecture:

    • Have you ensured that the corporate security policies and guidelines to which you are designing are the latest versions?

    Create architectural assessment checklists

    5.2 2 hrs

    Input

    • Reference architecture models.

    Output

    • Architecture assessment checklist.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Assessment Checklist section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template and hold a working session to create the architectural assessment checklists.

    Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    • Summarize the major points of the checklists in the EA Governance Framework document.
    • Update the EA policy document with the detailed architecture assessment checklists.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Architecture assessment decision types

    • As a part of the proposed solution review, the governing bodies produce a decision indicating the compliance of the solution architecture with the enterprise standards.
    • Go, No Go, or Conditional are a sample set of decision outcomes available to the governing bodies.
    • On a conditional approval, the project team must file for a compliance waiver.

    Approved

    • The solution demonstrates substantial compliance with standards.
    • Negligible risk to the organization or minimal risks with sound plans of how to mitigate them.
    • Architectural approval to proceed with delivery type of work.

    Conditional Approval

    • The significant aspects of the solution have been addressed in a satisfactory manner.
    • Yet, there are some aspects of the solution that are not compliant with standards.
    • The architectural approval is conditional upon presenting the missing evidence within a minimal period of time determined.
    • The risk level may be acceptable to the organization from an overall IT governance perspective.

    Not Approved

    • The solution is not compliant with the standards.
    • Scheduled for a follow-up review.
    • Not recommended to proceed until the solution is more compliant with the standards.

    Best-practice architecture compliance waiver process

    Waivers are not permanent. Waiver terms must be documented for each waiver specifying:

    • Time period after which the architecture in question will be compliant with the enterprise architecture.
    • The modifications necessary to the enterprise architecture to accommodate the solution.

    The image shows a flow chart, split into 4 sections: Enterprise Architect; Solution Architect; TAC; ARB. To the right of these section labels, there is a flow chart that documents the waiver process.

    Create compliance waiver process

    5.4 3-4 hrs

    Input

    • A consensus on the compliance waiver process.

    Output

    • Documented compliance waiver process and form.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the Table of Contents with the Compliance Waiver Form section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA compliance waiver template and hold a working session to customize the best-practice process to your organization’s needs.

    Download the EA Compliance Waiver Process Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    • Summarize the objectives and high-level process in the EA Governance Framework document.
    • Update the EA policy document with the compliance waiver process.
    • Upload the final policy document to the team’s common repository.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Creates an enterprise architecture policy to drive adoption

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    EA program adoption across INSPRO01 was at its lowest point due to a lack of transparency into the activities performed by the EA group.

    Often, projects ignored EA entirely as it was viewed as a nebulous and non-value-added activity that produced no measurable results.

    Complication

    There was very little documented information about the architecture assessment process and the standards against which project solution architectures were evaluated.

    Additionally, there were no well-defined outcomes for the assessment.

    Project groups were left speculating about the next steps and with little guidance on what to do after completing an assessment.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped the EA team create an EA policy containing architecture significance criteria, assessment checklists, and reference to the architecture review process.

    Additionally, the team also identified guidelines and detailed next steps for projects based on the outcome of the architecture assessment.

    These actions brought clarity to EA processes and fostered better engagement with the EA group.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Define the scope.
    • Identify the target audience.
    • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.
    • Create an assessment checklist.

    Outcomes

    • The completed EA policy
    • Project assessment checklist
    • Defined assessment outcomes
    • Completed compliance waiver process

    Phase 6

    Architectural Standards

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Architectural Standards

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify and standardize EA work products
    • Classify the architectural standards
    • Identify the custodian of standards
    • Update the standards

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • A standardized set of EA work products
    • A way to categorize and store EA work products
    • A defined method of updating standards

    Info-Tech Insight

    The architecture standard is the currency that facilitates information exchange between stakeholders. The primary purpose is to minimize transaction costs by providing a balance between stability and relevancy.

    Phase 6 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 6: Architectural standards

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Step 6.1: Understand Architectural Standards

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss architectural standards.
    • Know how to identify and define EA work products.
    • Understand the standard content of work products.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify and standardize EA work products.

    Step 6.2–6.3: EA Repository and Updating the Standards

    Review with analyst:

    • Review the standardized EA work products.
    • Discuss the principles of EA repository.
    • Discuss the Info-Tech best-practice model for updating architecture standards and how to tailor them to your organizational context.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build a folder structure for storing EA work products.
    • Use the Info-Tech best-practice architecture standards update process to develop your organization’s process for updating architecture standards.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

    Recommended list of EA work products to standardize

    • EA work products listed below are typically produced as a part of the architecture lifecycle.
    • To ensure consistent development of architecture, the work products need to be standardized.
    • Consider standardizing both the naming conventions and the content of the work products.
    1. EA vision: A document containing the vision that provides the high-level aspiration of the capabilities and business value that EA will deliver.
    2. Statement of EA Work: The Statement of Architecture Work defines the scope and approach that will be used to complete an architecture project.
    3. Reference architectures: A reference architecture is a set of best-practice taxonomy that describes components and the conceptual structure of the model, as well as graphics, which provide a visual representation of the taxonomy to aid understanding. Reference architectures are created for each of the architecture domains.
    4. Solution proposal: The proposed project solution based on the EA guidelines and standards.
    5. Compliance assessment request: The document that contains the project solution architecture assessment details.
    6. Architecture change request: The request that initiates a change to architecture standards when existing standards can no longer meet the needs of the enterprise.
    7. Transition architecture: A transition architecture shows the enterprise at incremental states that reflect periods of transition that sit between the baseline and target architectures.
    8. Architectural roadmap: A roadmap that lists individual increments of change and lays them out on a timeline to show progression from the baseline architecture to the target architecture.
    9. EA compliance waiver request: A compliance waiver request that must be made when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

    Standardize the content of each work product

    1. Purpose - The reason for the existence of the work product.
    2. Owner - The owner of this EA work product.
    3. Target Audience - The intended audience of the work product such as employees and partners.
    4. Naming Pattern - The pattern for the name of the work product as well as its file name.
    5. Table of Contents - The various sections of the work product.
    6. Review & Sign-Off Authority - The stakeholders who will review the work product and approve it.
    7. Repository Folder Location - The location where the work product will be stored.

    Identify and standardize work products

    6.1 3 hrs

    Input

    • List of various documents being produced by projects currently.

    Output

    • Standardized list of work products.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to identify and standardize work products. Facilitate the activity using the steps below.

    1. Identifying EA work products:
      1. Start by reviewing the list of all architecture-related documents presently produced in the organization. Any such deliverable with the following characteristics can be standardized:
        1. If it can be broken out and made into a standalone document.
        2. If it can be made into a fill-in form completed by others.
        3. If it is repetitive and requires iterative changes.
      2. Create a list of work products that your organization would like to standardize based on the characteristics above.
    2. The content and format of standardized EA work products:
      1. For each work product your organization wishes to standardize, look at its purpose and brainstorm the content needed to fulfill that purpose.
      2. After identifying the elements that need to be included in the work product to fulfill its purpose, order them logically for presentation purposes.
      3. In each section of the work product that need to be completed, include instructions on how to complete the section.
      4. Review the seven elements presented in the previous slide and include them in the work products.

    EA repository - information taxonomy

    As the EA function begins to grow and accumulates EA work products, having a well-designed folder structure helps you find the necessary information efficiently.

    Architecture meta-model

    Describes the organizationally tailored architecture framework.

    Architecture capability

    Defines the parameters, structures, and processes that support the enterprise architecture group.

    Architecture landscape

    An architectural presentation of assets in use by the enterprise at particular points in time.

    Standards information base

    Captures the standards with which new architectures and deployed services must comply.

    Reference library

    Provides guidelines, templates, patterns, and other forms of reference material to accelerate the creation of new architectures for the enterprise.

    Governance log

    Provides a record of governance activity across the enterprise.

    Create repository folder structure

    6.2 5-6 hrs

    Input

    • List of standardized work products.

    Output

    • EA work products mapped to a repository folder.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, IT department leads.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to create a repository structure. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

    1. Start with the taxonomy on the previous slide, and sort the existing work products into these six categories.
    2. Assess that the work products are sorted in a mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive fashion. This means that a certain work product that appears in one category should not appear in another category. As well, make sure these six categories capture all the existing work products.
    3. Based on the categorization of the work products, build a folder structure that follows these categories, which will allow for the work products to be accessed quickly and easily.

    Create a process to update EA work products

    • Architectural standards are not set in stone and should be reviewed and updated periodically.
    • The Architecture Review Board is the custodian for standards.
    • Any change to the standards need to be assessed thoroughly and must be communicated to all the impacted stakeholders.

    Architectural standards update process

    Identify

    • Identify changes to the standards

    Assess

    • Review and assess the impacts of the change

    Document

    • Document the change and update the standard

    Approve

    • Distribute the updated standards to key stakeholders for approval

    Communicate

    • Communicate the approved changes to impacted stakeholders

    Create a process to continually update standards

    6.3 1.5 hrs

    Input

    • The list of work products and its owners.

    Output

    • A documented work product update process.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the screenshot of the Table of Contents with the Standards Update Process highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the standards update process template and hold a working session to customize the best practice process to your organization’s needs.

    Download the Architecture Standards Update Process Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the objectives and the process flow in the EA governance framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Create architectural standards to minimize transaction costs

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    INSPRO01 didn’t maintain any centralized standards and each project had its own solution/design work products based on the preference of the architect on the project. This led to multiple standards across the organization.

    Lack of consistency in architectural deliverables made the information hand-offs expensive.

    Complication

    INSPRO01 didn’t maintain the architectural documents in a central repository and the information was scattered across multiple project folders.

    This caused key stakeholders to make decisions based on incomplete information and resulted in constant revisions as new information became available.

    Result

    Info-Tech recommended that the EA team identify and standardize the various EA work products so that information was collected in a consistent manner across the organization.

    The team also recommended an information taxonomy to store the architectural deliverables and other collateral.

    This resulted in increased consistency and standardization leading to efficiency gains.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Identify and standardize EA work products.
    • Classify the architectural standards.
    • Identify the custodian of standards.
    • Update the standards.

    Outcomes

    • A standardized set of EA work products
    • A way to categorize and store EA work products
    • A defined method of updating standards

    Phase 7

    Communication Plan

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Communication Plan

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
    • Identify stakeholders
    • Create a communication plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Communication Plan
    • EA Governance Framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    By failing to prepare, you are preparing to fail – maximize the likelihood of success for EA governance by engaging the relevant stakeholders and communicating the changes.

    Phase 7 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 6: Operationalize the EA governance framework

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1 week

    Step 7.1: Create a Communication Plan

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss how to communicate changes to stakeholders.
    • Discuss the purposes and benefits of the EA governance framework.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify the stakeholders affected by the EA governance transformations.
    • List the benefits of the proposed EA governance initiative.
    • Create a plan to communicate the changes to impacted stakeholders.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template

    Step 7.2: Review the Communication Plan

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the communication plan and gather feedback on the proposed stakeholders.
    • Confer about the various methods of communicating change in an organization.
    • Discuss the uses of the EA Governance Framework.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine your communication plan and use it to engage with stakeholders to better serve customers.
    • Create the EA Governance Framework to accompany the communication plan in engaging stakeholders to better understand the value of EA.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template

    Communicate changes to stakeholders

    The changes made to the EA governance components need to be reviewed, approved, and communicated to all of the impacted stakeholders.

    Deliverables to be reviewed:

    • Fundamentals
      • Vision and Mission
      • Goals and Measures
      • Principles
    • Architecture review process
    • Assessment checklists
    • Policy Governing body charters
    • Architectural standards

    Deliverable Review Process:

    Step 1: Hold a meeting with stakeholders to review, refine, and agree on the changes.

    Step 2: Obtain an official approval from the stakeholders.

    Step 3: Communicate the changes to the impacted stakeholders.

    Communicate the changes by creating an EA governance framework and communication plan

    7.1 3 hrs

    Input

    • EA governance deliverables.

    Output

    • EA Governance Framework
    • Communication Plan.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to create the EA governance framework as well as the communication plan. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

    1. EA Governance Framework:
      1. The EA Governance Framework is a document that will help reference and cite all the materials created from this blueprint. Follow the instructions on the framework to complete.
    2. Communication Plan:
      1. Identify the stakeholders based on the EA governance deliverables.
      2. For each stakeholder identified, complete the “Communication Matrix” section in the EA Governance Communication Plan Template. Fill out the section based on the instructions in the template.
      3. As the stakeholders are identified based on the “Communication Matrix,” use the EA Governance Framework document to communicate the changes.

    Download the EA Governance Communication Plan Template and EA Governance Framework Template for additional instructions and to document your activities in this phase.

    Maximize the likelihood of success by communicating changes

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    The EA group followed Info-Tech’s methodology to assess the current state and has identified areas for improvement.

    Best practices were adopted to fill the gaps identified.

    The team planned to communicate the changes to the technology leadership team and get approvals.

    As the EA team tried to roll out changes, they encountered resistance from various IT teams.

    Complication

    The team was not sure of how to communicate the changes to the business stakeholders.

    Result

    Info-Tech has helped the team conduct a thorough stakeholder analysis to identify all the stakeholders who would be impacted by the changes to the architecture governance framework.

    A comprehensive communication plan was developed that leveraged traditional email blasts, town hall meetings, and non-traditional methods such as team blogs.

    The team executed the communication plan and was able to manage the change effectively.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative.
    • Identify stakeholders.
    • Create a communication plan.
    • Compile the materials created in the blueprint to better communicate the value of EA governance.

    Outcomes

    • Communication plan
    • EA governance framework

    Bibliography

    Government of British Columbia. “Architecture and Standards Review Board.” Government of British Columbia. 2015. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.gov.bc.ca/cio/standards/asrb.page >

    Hopkins, Brian. “The Essential EA Toolkit Part 3 – An Architecture Governance Process.” Cio.com. Oct 2010. Web. April 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2372450/enterprise-architecture/the-essential-ea-toolkit-part-3---an-architecture-governance-process.html >

    Kantor, Bill. “How to Design a Successful RACI Project Plan.” CIO.com. May 2012. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2395825/project-management/how-to-design-a-successful-raci-project-plan.html >

    Sapient. “MIT Enterprise Architecture Guide.” Sapient. Sep 2004. Web. Jan 2016. < http://web.mit.edu/itag/eag/FullEnterpriseArchitectureGuide0.1.pdf >

    TOGAF. “Chapter 41: Architecture Repository.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap41.html >

    TOGAF. “Chapter 48: Architecture Compliance.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap48.html >

    TOGAF. “Version 9.1.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/

    United States Secret Service. “Enterprise Architecture Review Board.” United States Secret Service. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.archives.gov/records-mgmt/toolkit/pdf/ID191.pdf >

    Virginia Information Technologies Agency. “Enterprise Architecture Policy.” Commonwealth of Virginia. Jul 2006. Web. Jan 2016. < https://www.vita.virginia.gov/uploadedfiles/vita_main_public/library/eapolicy200-00.pdf >

    Research contributors and experts

    Alan Mitchell, Senior Manager, Global Cities Centre of Excellence, KPMG

    Alan Mitchell has held numerous consulting positions before his role in Global Cities Centre of Excellence for KPMG. As a Consultant, he has had over 10 years of experience working with enterprise architecture related engagements. Further, he worked extensively with the public sector and prides himself on his knowledge of governance and how governance can generate value for an organization.

    Ian Gilmour, Associate Partner, EA advisory services, KPMG

    Ian Gilmour is the global lead for KPMG’s enterprise architecture method and Chief Architect for the KPMG Enterprise Reference Architecture for Health and Human Services. He has over 20 years of business design experience using enterprise architecture techniques. The key service areas that Ian focuses on are business architecture, IT-enabled business transformation, application portfolio rationalization, and the development of an enterprise architecture capability within client organizations.

    Djamel Djemaoun Hamidson, Senior Enterprise Architect, CBC/Radio-Canada

    Djamel Djemaoun is the Senior Enterprise Architect for CBC/Radio-Canada. He has over 15 years of Enterprise Architecture experience. Djamel’s areas of special include service-oriented architecture, enterprise architecture integration, business process management, business analytics, data modeling and analysis, and security and risk management.

    Sterling Bjorndahl, Director of Operations, eHealth Saskatchewan

    Sterling Bjorndahl is now the Action CIO for the Sun Country Regional Health Authority, and also assisting eHealth Saskatchewan grow its customer relationship management program. Sterling’s areas of expertise include IT strategy, enterprise architecture, ITIL, and business process management. He serves as the Chair on the Board of Directors for Gardiner Park Child Care.

    Huw Morgan, IT Research Executive, Enterprise Architect

    Huw Morgan has 10+ years experience as a Vice President or Chief Technology Officer in Canadian internet companies. As well, he possesses 20+ years experience in general IT management. Huw’s areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, integration, e-commerce, and business intelligence.

    Serge Parisien, Manager, Enterprise Architecture at Canada Mortgage Housing Corporation

    Serge Parisien is a seasoned IT leader with over 25 years of experience in the field of information technology governance and systems development in both the private and public sectors. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, strategy, and project management.

    Alex Coleman, Chief Information Officer at Saskatchewan Workers’ Compensation Board

    Alex Coleman is a strategic, innovative, and results-driven business leader with a proven track record of 20+ years’ experience planning, developing, and implementing global business and technology solutions across multiple industries in the private, public, and not-for-profit sectors. Alex’s expertise includes program management, integration, and project management.

    L.C. (Skip) Lumley , Student of Enterprise and Business Architecture

    Skip Lumley was formerly a Senior Principle at KPMG Canada. He is now post-career and spends his time helping move enterprise business architecture practices forward. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture program implementation and public sector enterprise architecture business development.

    Additional contributors

    • Tim Gangwish, Enterprise Architect at Elavon
    • Darryl Garmon, Senior Vice President at Elavon
    • Steve Ranaghan, EMEIA business engagement at Fujitsu

    Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}279|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • Many business groups in the organization are siloed and have disjointed services that lead to a less than ideal customer experience.
    • Service management is too often process-driven and is implemented without a holistic view of customer value.
    • Businesses get caught up in the legacy of their old systems and find it difficult to move with the evolving market.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Customer experience is the new battleground. Parity between products is creating the need to differentiate via customer experience.
    • Don’t forget your employees! Enterprise service management (ESM) is also about delivering exceptional experiences to your employees so they can deliver exceptional services to your customers.
    • ESM is not driven by tools and processes. Rather, ESM is about pushing exceptional services to customers by pulling from organizational capabilities.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand ESM concepts and how they can improve customer service.
    • Use Info-Tech’s advice and tools to perform an assessment of your organization’s state for ESM, identify the gaps, and create an action plan to move towards an ESM pilot.
    • Increase business and customer satisfaction by delivering services more efficiently.

    Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should move towards ESM, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand ESM and get buy-in

    Understand the concepts of ESM, determine the scope of the ESM program, and get buy-in.

    • Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management – Phase 1: Understand ESM and Get Buy-in
    • Enterprise Service Management Executive Buy-in Presentation Template
    • Enterprise Service Management General Communications Presentation Template

    2. Assess the current state for ESM

    Determine the current state for ESM and identify the gaps.

    • Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management – Phase 2: Assess the Current State for ESM
    • Enterprise Service Management Assessment Tool
    • Enterprise Service Management Assessment Tool Action Plan Guide
    • Enterprise Service Management Action Plan Tool

    3. Identify ESM pilot and finalize action plan

    Create customer journey maps, identify an ESM pilot, and finalize the action plan for the pilot.

    • Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management – Phase 3: Identify ESM Pilot and Finalize Action Plan
    • Enterprise Service Management Customer Journey Map Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand ESM and Get Buy-In

    The Purpose

    Understand what ESM is and how it can improve customer service.

    Determine the scope of your ESM initiative and identify who the stakeholders are for this program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of ESM concepts.

    Understanding of the scope and stakeholders for your ESM initiative.

    Plan for getting buy-in for the ESM program.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the concepts and benefits of ESM.

    1.2 Determine the scope of your ESM program.

    1.3 Identify your stakeholders.

    1.4 Develop an executive buy-in presentation.

    1.5 Develop a general communications presentation.

    Outputs

    Executive buy-in presentation

    General communications presentation

    2 Assess the Current State for ESM

    The Purpose

    Assess your current state with respect to culture, governance, skills, and tools.

    Identify your strengths and weaknesses from the ESM assessment scores.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of your organization’s current enablers and constraints for ESM.

    Determination and analysis of data needed to identify strengths or weaknesses in culture, governance, skills, and tools.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand your organization’s mission and vision.

    2.2 Assess your organization’s culture, governance, skills, and tools.

    2.3 Identify the gaps and determine the necessary foundational action items.

    Outputs

    ESM assessment score

    Foundational action items

    3 Define Services and Create Custom Journey Maps

    The Purpose

    Define and choose the top services at the organization.

    Create customer journey maps for the chosen services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of prioritized services.

    Customer journey maps for the prioritized services.

    Activities

    3.1 Make a list of your services.

    3.2 Prioritize your services.

    3.3 Build customer journey maps.

    Outputs

    List of services

    Customer journey maps

    Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}81|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $34,649 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • Digital investments often under deliver on expectations of return, and there is no cohesive approach to managing the flow of capital into digital.
    • The focus of the business has historically been to survive technological disruption rather than to thrive in it.
    • Strategy is based mostly on opinion rather than an objective analysis of the outcomes customers want from the organization.
    • Digital is considered a buzzword – nobody has a clear understanding of what it is and what it means in the organization’s context.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The purpose of going digital is getting one step closer to the customer. The mark of a digital organization lies in how they answer the question, “How does what we’re doing contribute to what the customer wants from us?”
    • The goal of digital strategy is digital enablement. An organization that is digitally enabled no longer needs a digital strategy, it’s just “the strategy.”

    Impact and Result

    • Focus strategy making on delivering the digital outcomes that customers want.
      • Leverage the talent, expertise, and perspectives within the organization to build a customer-centric digital strategy.
    • Design a balanced digital strategy that creates value across the five digital value pools:
      • Digital marketing, digital channels, digital products, digital supporting capabilities, and business model innovation.
    • Ask how disruption can be leveraged, or even become the disruptor.
      • Manage disruption through quick-win approaches and empowering staff to innovate.
    • Use a Digital Strategy-on-a-Page to spark the digital transformation.
      • Drive awareness and alignment on the digital vision and spark your organization’s imagination around digital.

    Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand how digital disruption is driving the need for transformation, and how Info-Tech’s methodology can help.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Scope the digital transformation

    Learn how to apply the Digital Value Pools thought model and scope strategy around them.

    • Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page – Phase 1: Scope the Digital Transformation

    2. Design the digital future state vision

    Identify business imperatives, define digital outcomes, and define the strategy’s guiding principles.

    • Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page – Phase 2: Design the Digital Future State Vision
    • Digital Strategy on a Page

    3. Define the digital roadmap

    Define, prioritize, and roadmap digital initiatives and plan contingencies.

    • Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page – Phase 3: Define the Digital Roadmap

    4. Sustain digital transformation

    Create, polish, and socialize the Digital Strategy-on-a-Page.

    • Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page – Phase 4: Sustain Digital Transformation
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Scope the Digital Transformation

    The Purpose

    Identify the need for and use of digital strategy and determine a realistic scope for the digital strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The digital strategy project is planned and scoped around a subset of the five digital value pools.

    Activities

    1.1 Introduction to digital strategy.

    1.2 Establish motivation for digital.

    1.3 Discuss in-flight digital investments.

    1.4 Define the scope of digital.

    1.5 Identify stakeholders.

    1.6 Perform discovery interviews.

    1.7 Select two value pools to focus day 2, 3, and 4 activities.

    Outputs

    Business model canvas

    Stakeholder power map

    Discovery interview results

    Two value pools for focus throughout the workshop

    2 Design the Digital Future State Vision

    The Purpose

    Create guiding principles to help define future digital initiatives. Generate the target state with the help of strategic goals.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish the basis for planning out the initiatives needed to achieve the target state from the current state.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify digital imperatives.

    2.2 Define key digital outcomes.

    2.3 Create a digital investment thesis.

    2.4 Define digital guiding principles.

    Outputs

    Corporate strategy analysis, PESTLE analysis, documented operational pain points (value streams)

    Customer needs assessment (journey maps)

    Digital investment thesis

    Digital guiding principles

    3 Define the Digital Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Understand the gap between the current and target state. Create transition options and assessment against qualitative and quantitative metrics to generate a list of initiatives the organization will pursue to reach the target state. Build a roadmap to plan out when each transition initiative will be implemented.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize the initiatives the organization will use to achieve the target digital state. Create a roadmap to plan out the timing of each initiative and generate an easy-to-present document for digital strategy approval.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify initiatives to achieve digital outcomes.

    3.2 Align in-flight initiatives to digital initiatives.

    3.3 Prioritize digital initiatives.

    3.4 Document architecturally significant requirements for high-priority initiatives.

    Outputs

    Digital outcomes and KPIs

    Investment/value pool matrix

    Digital initiative prioritization

    Architecturally significant requirements for high-priority initiatives

    4 Define the Digital Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Plan your approach to socializing the digital strategy to help facilitate the cultural changes necessary for digital transformation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Plant the seed of digital and innovation to start making digital a part of the organization’s DNA.

    Activities

    4.1 Review and refine Digital Strategy on a Page.

    4.2 Assess company culture.

    4.3 Define high-level cultural changes needed for successful transformation.

    4.4 Define the role of the digital transformation team.

    4.5 Establish digital transformation team membership and desired outcomes.

    Outputs

    Digital Strategy on a Page

    Strategyzer Culture Map

    Digital transformation team charter

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}179|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $64,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • The traditional model of managing applications does not address the demands of today’s rapidly changing market and digitally minded business, putting stress on scarce IT resources. The business is fed up with slow IT responses and overbearing desktop and system controls.
    • The business wants more control over the tools they use. Software as a service (SaaS), business process management (BPM), robotic process automation (RPA), artificial intelligence (AI), and low-code development platforms are all on their radar.
    • However, your current governance and management structures do not accommodate the risks and shifts in responsibilities to business-managed applications.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT is a business partner, not just an operator. Effective business operations hinge on high-quality, valuable, fit-for-purpose applications. IT provides the critical insights, guidance, and assistance to ensure applications are implemented and leveraged in a way that maximizes return on investment, whether it is being managed by end users or lines of business (LOBs). This can only happen if the organization views IT as a critical asset, not just a supporting player.
    • All applications should be business owned. You have applications because LOBs need them to meet the objectives and key performance indicators defined in the business strategy. Without LOBs, there would be no need for business applications. LOBs define what the application should be and do for it to be successful, so LOBs should own them.
    • Everything boils down to trust. The business is empowered to make their own decisions on how they want to implement and use their applications and, thus, be accountable for the resulting outcomes. Guardrails, role-based access, application monitoring, and other controls can help curb some risk factors, but it should not come at the expense of business innovation and time-sensitive opportunities. IT must trust the business will make rational application decisions, and the business must trust IT to support them in good times and bad.

    Impact and Result

    • Focus on the business units that matter. BMA can provide significant value to LOBs if teams and stakeholders are encouraged and motivated to adopt organizational and operational changes.
    • Reimagine the role of IT. IT is no longer the gatekeeper that blocks application adoption. Rather, IT enables the business to adopt the tools they need to be productive and they guide the business on successful BMA practices.
    • Instill business accountability. With great power comes great responsibility. If the business wants more control of their applications, they must be willing to take ownership of the outcomes of their decisions.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should embrace business-managed applications, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Embrace Business-Managed Applications – Phases 1-3
    • Business-Managed Applications Communication Template

    1. State your objectives

    Level-set the expectations for your business-managed applications.

    • Embrace Business- Managed Applications – Phase 1: State Your Objectives

    2. Design your framework and governance

    Identify and define your application managers and owners and build a fit-for-purpose governance model.

    • Embrace Business-Managed Applications – Phase 2: Design Your Framework & Governance

    3. Build your roadmap

    Build a roadmap that illustrates the key initiatives to implement your BMA and governance models.

    • Embrace Business-Managed Applications – Phase 3: Build Your Roadmap

    [infographic]

    Workshop: Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 State Your Objectives

    The Purpose

    Define business-managed applications in your context.

    Identify your business-managed application objectives.

    State the value opportunities with business-managed applications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A consensus definition and list of business-managed applications goals

    Understanding of the business value business-managed applications can deliver

    Activities

    1.1 Define business-managed applications.

    1.2 List your objectives and metrics.

    1.3 State the value opportunities.

    Outputs

    Grounded definition of a business-managed application

    Goals and objectives of your business-managed applications

    Business value opportunity with business-managed applications

    2 Design Your Framework & Governance

    The Purpose

    Develop your application management framework.

    Tailor your application delivery and ownership structure to fit business-managed applications.

    Discuss the value of an applications committee.

    Discuss technologies to enable business-managed applications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Fit-for-purpose and repeatable application management selection framework

    Enhanced application governance model

    Applications committee design that meets your organization’s needs

    Shortlist of solutions to enable business-managed applications

    Activities

    2.1 Develop your management framework.

    2.2 Tune your delivery and ownership accountabilities.

    2.3 Design your applications committee.

    2.4 Uncover your solution needs.

    Outputs

    Tailored application management selection framework

    Roles definitions of application owners and managers

    Applications committee design

    List of business-managed application solution features and services

    3 Build Your Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build your roadmap to implement busines-managed applications and build the foundations of your optimized governance model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Implementation initiatives

    Adoption roadmap

    Activities

    3.1 Build your roadmap.

    Outputs

    Business-managed application adoption roadmap

     

    Identify Opportunities to Mature the Security Architecture

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}385|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Secure Cloud & Network Architecture
    • Parent Category Link: /secure-cloud-network-architecture
    • Organizations do not have a solid grasp on the complexity of their infrastructure and are unaware of the overall risk to their infrastructure posed by inadequate security.
    • Organizations do not understand how to properly create and deliver value propositions of technical security solutions.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The security architecture is a living, breathing thing based on the risk profile of your organization.
    • Compliance and risk mitigation create an intertwined relationship between the business and your security architecture. The security architecture roadmap must be regularly assessed and continuously maintained to ensure security controls align with organizational objectives.

    Impact and Result

    • A right-sized security architecture can be created by assessing the complexity of the IT department, the operations currently underway for security, and the perceived value of a security architecture within the organization. This will bring about a deeper understanding of the organizational infrastructure.
    • Developing a security architecture should also result in a list of opportunities (i.e. initiatives) that an organization can integrate into a roadmap. These initiatives will seek to improve security operations and strengthen the IT department’s understanding of security’s role within the organization.
    • A better understanding of the infrastructure will help to save time on determining the correct technologies required from vendors and therefore cut down on the amount of vendor noise.
    • Creating a defensible roadmap will assist with justifying future security spend.

    Identify Opportunities to Mature the Security Architecture Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a right-sized security architecture, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the organization’s ideal security architecture

    Complete three unique assessments to define the ideal security architecture maturity for your organization.

    • Identify Opportunities to Mature the Security Architecture – Phase 1: Identify the Organization's Ideal Security Architecture
    • Security Architecture Recommendation Tool
    • None

    2. Create a security program roadmap

    Use the results of the assessments from Phase 1 of this research to create a roadmap for improving the security program.

    • Identify Opportunities to Mature the Security Architecture – Phase 2: Create a Security Program Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}132|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 115 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management

    Organizations are joining the wave and adopting machine learning and artificial intelligence (AI) to unlock the value in their data and power their competitive advantage. But to succeed with these complex analytics programs, they need to begin by looking at their data – empowering their people to realize and embrace the valuable insights within the organization’s data.

    The key to achieve becoming a data-driven organization is to foster a strong data culture and equip employees with data skills through an organization-wide data literacy program.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Start with real business problems in a hands-on format to demonstrate the value of data.
    • Use a formalized organization-wide approach to data literacy program to bridge the data skills gap.
    • Provide relevant and practical training programs tailored to different learning styles and tenures (e.g. onboarding, development plan).

    Impact and Result

    Data literacy is critical to the success of digital transformation and AI analytics. Info-Tech’s approach to creating a sustainable and effective data literacy program is recognizing it is:

    • More than just technical training. A data literacy program isn’t just about data; it encompasses aspects of business, IT, and data.
    • More than a one-off exercise. To keep the literacy skills alive the program must be regular, sustainable, and tailored to different needs across all levels of the organization.
    • More than one delivery format. Different delivery methods need to be considered to suit various learning styles to ensure an effective delivery.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy Storyboard – A step-by-step guide to help organizations build an effective and sustainable data literacy program that benefits all employees who work with data.

    Data literacy as part of the data governance strategic program should be launched to all levels of employees that will help your organization bridge the data knowledge gap at all levels of the organization. This research recommends approaches to different learning styles to address data skill needs and helps members create a practical and sustainable data literacy program.

    • Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy Storyboard

    2. Fundamental Data Literacy Program Template – A document that provides an example of a fundamental data literacy program.

    Kick off a data awareness program that explains the fundamental understanding of data and its lifecycle. Explore ways to create or mature the data literacy program with smaller amounts of information on a more frequent basis.

    • Fundamental Data Literacy Program Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture, bridging the data knowledge gaps across all levels of the organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    Data literacy is the missing link to becoming a data-driven organization.

    “Digital transformation” and “data driven” are two terms that are inseparable. With organizations accelerating in their digital transformation roadmap implementation, organizations need to invest in developing data skills with their people. Talent is scarce and the demand for data skills is huge, with 70% of employees expected to work heavily with data by 2025. There is no time like the present to launch an organization-wide data literacy program to bridge the data knowledge gap and foster a data-driven culture.

    Data literacy training is as important as your cybersecurity training. It impacts all levels of the organization. Data literacy is critical to success with digital transformation and AI analytics.

    Annabel Lui

    Principal Advisory Director, Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Organizations are joining the wave and adopting machine learning (ML) and artificial intelligence (AI) to unlock the value in their data and power their competitive advantage. But to succeed with these complex analytics programs, they need to begin by empowering their people to realize and embrace the valuable insights within the organization’s data.

    The key to becoming a data-driven organization is to foster a strong data culture and equip people with data skills through an organization-wide data literacy program.

    Common Obstacles

    Challenges the data leadership is likely to face as digital transformation initiatives drive intensified competition:

    • Resistance to change
    • Technological distractions
    • “Shadow data”
    • Difficulty securing resources and skilled data professionals
    • Inability to appreciate the value of data and its meaning for users – even fear of it

    Info-Tech's Approach

    We interviewed data leaders and instructors to gather insights about investing in data:

    • Start with real business problems in a hands-on format to demonstrate the value of data.
    • Implement a formalized organization-wide approach to data literacy program to bridge the data skill gap.
    • Provide relevant and practical training programs tailored to different learning styles and tenures (e.g. onboarding,development plan).

    Info-Tech Insight

    By thoughtfully designing a data literacy training program for the audience's own experience, maturity level, and learning style, organizations build the data-driven and engaged culture that helps them to unlock their data's full potential and outperform other organizations.

    Your Challenge

    Data literacy is the missing link to drive business outcomes from data.

    • Having a data-driven culture as an organization’s mission statement without implementing a data literacy program is like making an empty promise and leaving the value unrealized and unattainable.
    • A study conducted by the Data Literacy Project clearly indicates that organizations with aggressive data literacy programs will outperform those who do not have such programs. By 2030, data literacy will be one of the most sought-after skill sets. All employees require data literacy skills.
    • Everyone has a role in data. From employees who are actively involved in data collection to operational teams who create reports with analytics tools and finally to executives who use data to make business decisions – they all require continuous data literacy training in a data-driven organization. Because of differences in maturity, data literacy strategies cannot be one-size-fits-all.

    “Data literacy is the ability to read, work with, analyze, and communicate with data. It's a skill that empowers all levels of workers to ask the right questions of data and machines, build knowledge, make decisions, and communicate meaning to others.” – Qlik, n.d.

    75% of organizational employees have access to data tools – only 21% demonstrated confidence in their data skills.

    Source: Accenture, 2020.

    89% of C-level executives expect team members to explain how data has informed their decisions, but only 11% employees are fully confident in their ability to read, analyze, work with, and communicate with data

    Source: Qlik, 2022.

    Data debt or data asset?

    Manage your data as strategic assets.

    “[Data debt is] when you have undocumented, unused, incomplete, and inconsistent data,” according to Secoda (2023). “When … data debt is not solved, data teams could risk wasting time managing reports no one uses and producing data that no one understands.”

    Signs of data debt when considering investing in data literacy:

    • Lack of definition and understanding of data terms, therefore they don’t speak the same language. Without data literacy, an organization will not succeed in becoming a data-driven organization.
    • Putting data literacy as a low priority. Organization sees this as “another” training to put on the list and keeps it on the back burner.
    • Data literacy is not seen as the number one skill set needed in the organization. However, anyone who works with data requires data skills.
    • End users are not trained on self-serve features and tools.
    • Focusing on a minority group of people rather than everyone in the organization or seeing it as a one-off exercise.
    • Delays or failure to deliver digital transformation projects due to lack of data skills and data access issues.

    66%

    of organizations say a backlog of data debt is impacting new data management initiatives.

    40%

    of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.

    30%

    of organizations are unable to become data-driven.

    Source: Experian, 2020

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Data literacy is critical to success with digital transformation and AI analytics.

    Diagram showing components of Data literacy: 1 - Data: understand your data, 2 - Business: define the purpose, 3 - IT: Introduce new ways of working

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. More than just technical training. Data literacy program isn’t just about data but rather encompasses aspects of business, IT, and data.
    2. More than a one-off exercise. To keep literacy skills alive, the program must be routine and sustainable, tailored to different needs across all levels of the organization.
    3. More than one delivery format. Different delivery methods need to be considered to suit various learning styles.

    Data needs to be processed

    Data – facts – are organized, processed, and given meaning to become insights.

    Data, information, knowledge, insight, wisdom

    Image source: Welocalize, 2020.

    Data represents a discrete fact or event without relation to other things (e.g. it is raining). Data is unorganized and not useful on its own.

    Information organizes and structures data so that it is meaningful and valuable for a specific purpose (i.e. it answers questions). Information is a refined form of data.

    When information is combined with experience and intuition, it results in knowledge. It is our personal map/model of the world.

    Knowledge set with context generates insight. We become knowledgeable as a result of reading, researching, and memorizing (i.e. accumulating information).

    Wisdom means the ability to make sound judgments. Wisdom synthesizes knowledge and experiences into insights.

    Investment in data literacy is a game changer.

    Data literacy is the ability to collect, manage, evaluate, and apply data in a critical manner.

    A data-driven culture is “an operating environment that seeks to leverage data whenever and wherever possible to enhance business efficiency and effectiveness” (Forbes).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data-driven culture refers to a workplace where decisions are made based on data evidence, not on gut instinct.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for building a data literacy program

    Phase Steps

    1. Define Data Literacy Objectives

    1.1 Understand organization’s needs

    1.2 Create vision and objective for data literacy program

    2. Assess Learning Style and Align to Program Design

    2.1 Create persona and identify audience

    2.2 Assess learning style and align to program design

    2.3 Determine the right delivery method

    3. Socialize Roadmap and Milestones

    3.1 Establish a roadmap

    3.2 Set key performance metrics and milestones

    Phase Outcomes

    Identify key objectives to establish and grow the data literacy program by articulating the problem and solutions proposed.

    Assess each audience’s learning style and adapt the program to their unique needs.

    Show a roadmap with key performance indicators to track each milestone and tell a data story.

    Insight Summary

    “In a world of more data, the companies with more data-literate people are the ones that are going to win.”

    – Miro Kazakoff, senior lecturer, MIT Sloan, in MIT Sloan School of Management, 2021

    Overarching insight

    By thoughtfully designing a data literacy training program personalized to each audience's maturity level, learning style, and experience, organizations can develop and grow a data-driven culture that unlocks the data's full potential for competitive differentiation.

    Module 1 insight

    We can learn a lot from each other. Literacy works both ways – business data stewards learn to “speak data” while IT data custodians understand the business context and value. Everyone should strive to exchange knowledge.

    Module 2 insight

    Avoid traditional classroom teaching – create a data literacy program that is learner-centric to allow participants to learn and experiment with data.

    Aligning program design to those learning styles will make participants more likely to be receptive to learning a new skill.

    Module 3 insight

    A data literacy program isn’t just about data but rather encompasses aspects of business, IT, and data. With executive support and partnership with business, running a data literacy program means that it won’t end up being just another technical training. The program needs to address why, what, how questions.

    Tactical insight

    A lot of programs don’t include the fundamentals. To get data concepts to stick, focus on socializing the data/information/knowledge/wisdom foundation.

    Tactical insight

    Many programs speak in abstract terms. We present case studies and tangible use cases to personalize training to the audience’s world and showcase opportunities enabled through data.

    Key performance indicators (KPIs) for your data literacy program

    How do you know if your data literacy program is successful? Here are some useful KPIs:

    Program Adoption Metrics

    • Percentage of employees attending data literacy training
    • Percentage of participants who report gains in data management knowledge after training sessions
    • Maturity assessment result
    • Survey and diagnostic feedback before and after training
    • Trend analysis of overall data literacy program

    Operational Metrics

    • Number of requests for analytics/reporting services
    • Number of reports created by users
    • Speed and quality of business decisions
    • User satisfaction with reports and analytics services
    • Improved business performance (customer satisfaction)
    • Improved valuation of organization data

    A data-driven culture builds tools and skills, builds users’ trust in the quality of data across sources, and raises the skills and understanding among the frontlines by encouraging everyone to leverage data for critical thinking and innovation.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of the project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1

    Session 2

    Session 3

    Session 4

    Activities

    Define Data Literacy Objectives

    1.1 Review Data Culture Diagnostic results

    1.2 Identify business context: business goals, initiatives

    1.3 Create vision and objective for data literacy program

    Assess Learning Style and Align to Program Design

    2.1 Identify audience

    2.2 Assess learning style and align to program design

    2.3 Determine the right delivery method

    Build a Data Literacy Roadmap and Milestones

    3.1 Identify program initiatives and topics

    3.2 Determine delivery methods

    3.3 Build the data literacy roadmap

    Operational Strategy to implement Data Literacy

    4.1 Identify key performance metrics

    4.2 Identify owners and document RACI matrix

    4.3 Discuss next steps and wrap up.

    Deliverables

    1. Diagnostics reports (data culture survey)
    2. Vision and value statement
    1. Assessment of audience covering all levels of organization
    1. List of key program initiatives and topics
    2. Allocation of delivery methods
    3. Roadmap
    1. Data literacy metrics
    2. List of owners and roles and responsibilities
    3. Next step and implementation schedule

    Phase 1

    Define Data Literacy Objectives

    Phase 1: step 1 - Understand organization's needs, step 2 - Create vision and objective for data literacy program.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the organization’s needs.
    • Create vision and objective for data literacy program.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data governance sponsor
    • Data owners
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians

    1.1 Gauge your organization’s current data culture

    Conduct data culture survey or diagnostic.

    1. Identify members of the data user base, data consumers, and other key stakeholders for surveying.
    2. Conduct an information session to introduce Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic survey. Explain the objective and importance of the survey and its role in helping to understand the organization’s current data culture and inform the improvement of that culture.
    3. Roll out the Info-Tech Data Culture Diagnostic survey to the identified users and stakeholders.
    4. Debrief and document the results and scorecard in the Data Strategy Stakeholder Interview Guide and Findings document.

    Input

    • Email addresses of participants in your organization who should receive the survey

    Output

    • Your organization’s Data Culture Scorecard for understanding current data culture as it relates to the use and consumption of data
    • An understanding of whether data is currently perceived to be an asset to the organization

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic service

    Participants

    • Participants include those at the senior leadership level through to middle management, as well as other business stakeholders at varying levels across the organization
    • Data owners, stewards, and custodians
    • Core data users and consumers

    Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for details on launching a Data Culture Diagnostic.

    1.2 Define data literacy objectives

    1. Understand the organization’s needs by identifying opportunities and challenges relating to data. Document the described real-life examples.
    2. Categorize the list and identify areas where data literacy can address the business problem.
    3. Create a vision statement for the data literacy program, ensuring that it covers all levels of the organization.
    4. Articulate the intended targets and goals in planning for a data literacy program.

    Input

    • List of opportunities and challenges relating to data
    • Relevant business real-life examples

    Output

    • Categorized list of data literacy needs
    • Vision for literacy program
    • Targets and goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • CDO or sponsor
    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data governance working group

    Quick wins for improving data literacy

    Data collected through Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic suggests three ways to improve data literacy:

    87%

    think more can be done to define and document commonly used terms with methods such as a business data glossary.

    68%

    think they can have a better understanding of the meaning of all data elements that are being captured or managed.

    86%

    feel that they can have more training in terms of tools as well as on what data is available at the organization.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group's Data Culture Diagnostic, 2022; N=2,652

    Quick Wins

    • Create a business data glossary to document and define common terms.
    • Provide easy access to the business data glossary and procedures on how data is captured and managed.
    • Launch an organization-wide data literacy program.

    Delivering value is a means and the goal

    Start with real business problems in a hands-on format to demonstrate the value of data.

    Identify business problem:

    • Business decisions without facts are just guesses.
    • Management spends a lot of time finding and fixing data.
    • Unknown challenges on data assets and risk.
    • Incomplete view of customer/client and industry.
    • Not ready for modern data opportunities (e.g. artificial intelligence).

    Create an objective

    Treat data as a strategic asset to gain insight into our customers for all levels of organization.

    The solution: Data-driven culture powered by people who speak data.

    • Data dictionary
    • Data literacy
    • Trusted single source
    • Access to analytics tools
    • Decision making

    "According to Forrester, 91% of organizations find it challenging to improve the use of data insights for decision-making – even though 90% see it as a priority. Why the disconnect? A lack of data literacy."

    – Alation, 2020

    Fundamental data literacy

    Data literacy is more than just a technical training or a one-off exercise.

    Info-Tech provides various topics suited for a data literacy program that can accommodate different data skill requirements and encompasses relevant aspects of business, IT, and data.

    Info-Tech Research Group’s Data Literacy Program

    Use discovery and diagnostics to understand users’ comfort level and maturity with data.

    Data lunch 'n' learn

    • The power and value of data
    • Everyone is a data steward
    • Becoming data literate
    • Data 101
    • The future is data
    1 hour
    For: General audience, senior leadership, data leads, change management

    Speak data

    • What is data
    • Meet the data team
    • Day in the life of a steward
    • How data impacts you
    • Tools of the trade
    1/2 day
    For: New stewards, data owners, pre-data strategy workshop

    Your data story

    • Ask the right questions
    • Find the top five data elements
    • Understand your data
    • Present your data story
    • Lessons from COVID-19
    1/2 day
    For: New stewards, business data owners, pre-BI/analytics workshop

    Phase 2

    Assess Learning Style and Align to Program Design

    Phase 2: step 1 - Identify audience, step 2 - Access learning style and align to program design, step 3 - Determine the right delivery method.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify your audience.
    • Assess learning styles and align them to the data program design.
    • Determine the right delivery method.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data governance sponsor
    • Data owners
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians

    Avoid common pitfalls

    75%

    feel that training was too long to remember or to apply in their day-to-day work.

    21%

    find training had insufficient follow-up to help them apply on the job.

    Source: Grovo, 2018.

    1. Information Overload

      Trying to cover too much useful information results in overwhelm and does not deliver on key training objectives.
    2. Limited Implementation

      Learning is only the beginning. The real results are obtained when learning is followed by practice, which turns new knowledge into reliable habits.
    3. Lack of Organizational Alignment

      Implementing training without a clear link to organizational objectives leaves you unable to clearly communicate its value, undermines your ability to secure buy-in from attendees and executives, and leaves you unable to verify that the training is actually improving effectiveness.

    2.1 Understand learning style

    1. Create persona and identify the audiences and their roles in data across all levels of the organization.
    2. Identify the data program initiatives and assign the best delivery method to each initiative.
    3. Assign participants to each program initiative based on their skill gap and learning style.

    Input

    • List of audiences, their roles, and tenures
    • Data skill gap assessment
    • List of literacy program initiatives/topics

    Output

    • Target audience grouping
    • List of program initiatives with assigned groups

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • CDO or sponsor
    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data governance working group

    You and data

    Is data an integral part of your work?

    Do you feel comfortable finding and using data in your organization?

    • Many people feel intimidated by data and therefore miss out on what data can do for them.
    • Often the obstacle is language. If you don’t understand the semantics around data, you will not feel confident to contribute to discussions around data.
    • You use data every day but need additional vocabulary to understand how to handle it properly.
    • Data literacy is the ability to “speak data” and to understand what data means (i.e. how to read charts and graphs, draw valid conclusions, and recognize when data is misinterpreted or used inappropriately to be misleading).
    • The business often doesn’t understand its role in data governance and how it informs and assists IT in responsible data management.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT and data professionals need to understand the business as much as business needs to talk about data. Bidirectional learning and feedback improves the synergy between business and IT.

    Create personas

    Persona creation is a way to brainstorm ideas for the data literacy program.

    Choose a data role (e.g. data steward, data owner, data scientist).

    Describe the persona based on goals, priorities, tenures, preferred learning style, type of work with data.

    Identify data skill and level of skills required.

    Persona 1: Denise - Manager, People and Culture. Goals, priorities, tenure, data role, learning style, skill level

    Consider these other ways to brainstorm:

    • Review current in-flight projects.
    • Analyze types of data requests.
    • Understand needs by department.
    • Share learnings in a community of practice.

    Program design

    Categorize into six data skill areas

    Not everyone needs the same level of skill sets

    Bullseye board with skill levels (Innermost going outward): Expert, advanced, intermediate and Basic. The six data skill areas: 1. Understanding Data, 2. Find and Obtain Data, 3. Read, Interpret and Evaluate Data, 4. Manage Data, 5. Create and Use Data, 6. Tell a Story and Share Data are placed equally around in sections.

    Map the personas to the program

    Bridging the data knowledge gap.

    • Each component will promote the value of data to all levels of employees when demonstrating the right way for data to be understood, managed, and consumed in the organization.
    • Categorizing the data literacy program into six areas and levels of skill sets will provide clarity into which areas to focus on.
    • The program is intended to be implemented in stages, allowing the audience to learn and adopt the new skills. Leveraging in-flight projects for rolling out training will have a higher success because the need is already built into the project.
    Personas are placed at different points in the data skill area and skill level.

    Align program design to learning styles

    The four methods (Discussion, Information, Coaching, and Self-Discovery) are based on learner-centered model design rather than the traditional teacher-centered model.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Tailor your data literacy program to meet your organization’s needs, filling your range of knowledge gaps and catering to different levels of users.

    When it comes to rolling out a data literacy program, there is no one-size-fits-all solution. Your data literacy program is intended to spread knowledge throughout your organization. It should target everyone from executive leadership to management to subject matter experts across all functions of the business.

    Discussion method

    Delivery Method

    • Interactive format between instructor and learner
    • Instructor empowers and motivates learner through dialogues and exercises

    The imaginative learner

    The imaginative learner group likes to engage in feelings and spend time on reflection. This type of learner desires personal meaning and involvement. They focus on personal values for themselves and others and make connections quickly.

    For this group of learners, their question is: why should I learn this?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek meaning
    • Need to be personally involved
    • Learn by listening and sharing ideas
    • Function through social interaction

    Information method

    Delivery Method

    • Instructor does most of the talking in the training
    • Instructor is teaching the content, delivering the training content, and demonstrating

    Analytical learner

    The analytical learner group likes to listen, to think about information, and to come up with ideas. They are interested in acquiring facts and delving into concepts and processes. They can learn effectively and enjoy doing independent research.

    For this group of learners, their question is: what should I learn?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek and examine the facts
    • Need to know what experts think
    • Interested in ideas and concepts
    • Critique information and collect data
    • Function by adapting to experts

    Coaching method

    Delivery Method

    • Learning has on-the-job training or learning through role-play exercises
    • Instructor is coaching and facilitating learner

    Common sense learner

    The common sense learner group likes thinking and doing. They are satisfied when they can carry out experiments, build and design, and create usability. They like tinkering and applying useful ideas.

    For this group of learners, their question is: how should I learn?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek usability
    • Need to know how things work
    • Learn by testing theories using practical methods
    • Use factual data to build concepts
    • Enjoy hands-on experience

    Self-discovery method

    Delivery Method

    • Interactive format between instructor and learner
    • Instructor provides evaluation and remedial instruction

    Common sense learner

    The dynamic learner group learns through doing and experiencing. They are continually looking for hidden possibilities and researching ideas to make original adjustments. They learn through trial and error and self-discovery.

    For this group of learners, their question is: what if I learn this?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek hidden possibilities
    • Need to know what can be done with things
    • Learn by trial and error
    • Enjoy variety and excel in being flexible

    Delivery method considerations

    There are four common ways to learn a new skill: by watching, conceptualizing, doing, and experiencing. The following are some suggestions on ways to implement your data literacy program through different delivery methods.

    There are four common ways to learn a new skill: by watching, conceptualizing, doing, and experiencing. The following are some suggestions on ways to implement your data literacy program through different delivery methods.

    Phase 3

    Map Out Data Literacy Roadmap and Milestones

    Phase 3: step 1 - Roadmap exercise, step 2 - Set key performance metrics and milestones.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Complete a roadmap exercise.
    • Set key performance metrics and milestones.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data governance sponsor
    • Data owners
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians

    3.1 Build the data literacy roadmap and milestones

    1-3 hours
    1. Gather the data literacy objectives and list of program initiatives with their assigned groups.
    2. Discuss each program initiative with the data literacy creation team, assigning content owners and estimating effort required to build the content.

    For the Gantt chart:

    • Input the roadmap start year.
    • List each data literacy topic and delivery method.
    • Populate the planned start and end dates for the prepopulated list of program initiatives.

    Input

    • List of data literacy topics with assigned groups
    • Vision statement of data literacy program
    • Data literacy objectives

    Output

    • Roadmap Gantt chart
    • List of program initiatives with start and end date
    • Content owner assignment

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • MS Projects/Excel

    Participants

    • CDO or sponsor
    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data governance working group

    Data literacy journey mapping

    Making it sustainable

    • Deliver the literacy program in stages to make it easier for the audience to consume the content.
    • Allow opportunities to apply the learnings at work.
    • Map out the data literacy trainings as they get delivered and identify gaps, if any. Continue to refine and adjust the program and delivery method for better outcome.
    • Set clear goals and KPIs measurement up front.
    • Conduct Info-Tech Research Group’s Data Culture Diagnostics to set the baseline and repeat the assessment in 12 to 18 months.
    • Assign champions to lead change and influence end users to adopt better processes.
    Data Literacy journey mapping. Different departments need different skills in data literacy.

    Research contributors

    Name

    Position

    Andrea Malick Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Andy Neill AVP, Data and Analytics, Chief Enterprise Architect, Info-Tech Research Group
    Crystal Singh Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Imad Jawadi Senior Manager, Consulting Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group
    Irina Sedenko Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Reddy Doddipalli Senior Workshop Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Sherwick Min Technical Counselor, Info-Tech Research Group
    Wayne Cain Principal Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech’s Data Literacy Program

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1

    Session 2

    Session 3

    Session 4

    Activities

    Understand the WHY and Value of Data

    1.1 Business context, business objectives, and goals

    1.2 You and data

    1.3 Data journey from data to insights

    1.4 Speak data – common terminology

    Learn about the WHAT Through Data Flow

    2.1 Data creation

    2.2 Data ingestion

    2.3 Data accumulation

    2.4 Data augmentation

    2.5 Data delivery

    2.6 Data consumption

    Explore the HOW Through Data Visualization Training

    3.1 Ask the right questions

    3.2 Find the top five data elements

    3.3 Understand your data

    3.4 Present your data story

    3.5 Sharing of lessons learned

    Put Them All Together Through Data Governance Awareness

    4.1 Data governance framework

    4.2 Data roles and responsibilities

    4.3 Data domain and owners

    Deliverables

    1. Learning material for understanding the data fundamental and its terminology
    1. Learning material for data flow elements
    1. Learning material for data visualization
    1. Learning material for data governance awareness program

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Establish Data Governance

    Deliver measurable business value.

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    Streamline your data management program with our simplified framework.

    Bibliography

    About Learning. “4MAT overview.” About Learning., 16 Aug. 2001. Web.

    Accenture. “The Human Impact of Data Literacy,” Accenture, 2020. Web.

    Anand, Shivani. “IDC Reveals India Data and Content Technologies Predictions for 2022 and onwards; Focus on Data Literacy for an Elevated data Culture.” IDC, 14 Mar. 2022. Web.

    Belissent, Jennifer, and Aaron Kalb. “Data Literacy: The Key to Data-Driven Decision Making.” Alation, April 2020. Web.

    Brown, Sara. “How to build data literacy in your company.” MIT Sloan School of Management, 9 Feb 2021. Web.

    ---. “How to build a data-driven company.” MIT Sloan School of Management, 24 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Domo. “Data Never Sleeps 9.0.” Domo, 2021. Web.

    Dykes, Brent. “Creating A Data-Driven Culture: Why Leading By Example Is Essential.” Forbes, 26 Oct. 2017. Web.

    Experian. “10 signs you are sitting on a pile of data debt.” Experian, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021. Web.

    Experian. “2019 Global Data Management Research.” Experian, 2019. Web.

    Knight, Michelle. “Data Literacy Trends in 2023: Formalizing Programs.” Dataversity, 3 Jan. 2023. Web.

    Ghosh, Paramita. “Data Literacy Skills Every Organization Should Build.” Dataversity, 2 Nov. 2022. Web.

    Johnson, A., et al., “How to Build a Strategy in a Digital World,” Compact, 2018, vol. 2. Web.

    LifeTrain. “Learning Style Quiz.” EMTrain, Web.

    Lambers, E., et al. “How to become data literate and support a data-drive culture.” Compact, 2018, vol. 4. Web.

    Marr, Benard. “Why is data literacy important for any business?” Bernard Marr & Co., 16 Aug. 2022. Web.

    Marr, Benard. “8 simple ways to enhance your data literacy skills.” Bernard Marr & Co., 16 Aug. 2022. Web/

    Mendoza, N.F. “Data literacy: Time to cure data phobia” Tech Republic, 27 Sept. 2022. Web.

    Mizrahi, Etai. “How to stay ahead of data debt and downtime?” Secoda, 17 April 2023. Web.

    Needham, Mass., “IDC FutureScape: Top 10 Predictions for the Future of Intelligence.” IDC, 5 Dec. 2022. Web.

    Paton, J., and M.A.P. op het Veld. “Trusted Analytics.” Compact, 2017, vol. 2. Web.

    Qlik. “Data Literacy to be Most In-Demand Skill by 2030 as AI Transforms Global Workplaces.” Qlik., 16 Mar 2022. Web.

    Qlik. “What is data literacy?” Qlik, n.d. Web.

    Reed, David. Becoming Data Literate. Harriman House Publishing, 1 Sept. 2021. Print.

    Salomonsen, Summer. “Grovo’s First-Time Manager Microlearning® Program Will Help Your New Managers Thrive in 2018.” Grovos Blog, 5 Dec. 2018. Web.

    Webb, Ryan. “More Than Just Reporting: Uncovering Actionable Insights From Data.” Welocalize, 1 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}189|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $471,249 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 53 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Project Management Office
    • Parent Category Link: /project-management-office
    • As an enterprise PMO leader, you need to evolve your PMO framework beyond an IT-centric model of project portfolio management (PPM) to optimize communication and coordination on enterprise-wide initiatives.
    • While senior leaders are demanding greater uniformity in strategic project execution, individual departments currently operate—to the detriment of the organization—as sovereign silos.
    • You know that the answer is a more strategically aligned enterprise PMO framework, but you’re unsure of how to start building the case for one, especially when the majority of upper management view PMOs as support entities rather than strategic partners.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An EPMO can’t simply be imposed on an organization. If it is not backed by an executive sponsor, then there needs to be an identifiable business value in implementing one, and you need to communicate this value to stakeholders throughout the enterprise.
    • EPMOs add value not by enforcing project or program governance, but by helping organizations achieve strategic goals and manage change.
    • EPMOs enable organizations to succeed on enterprise-wide initiatives by connecting the individual parts to the whole. They should serve as the coordinating mechanism that ensures the flow of information and resources across departments and programs.

    Impact and Result

    • Find the right balance between a command and control approach that dictates governance standards versus an approach that gives business units flexibility to manage projects, programs, and portfolios the way they see fit, as long as they meet certain reporting, process, and record keeping requirements.
    • Effectively define the EPMO’s role, reach, and authority in terms of Portfolio Governance, Project Leadership, and PPM Administration. An organizationally appropriate mix of these three practices will not only ensure stakeholder buy-in, but it will help foster the right conditions for EPMO success.
    • Build strong cross-departmental relationships upon soft or informal grounds by positioning your EPMO as your organization’s portfolio network, i.e. an enterprise hub that facilitates the flow of reliable information and enables timely responsiveness to change.

    Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how implementing an EPMO could help your organization achieve business goals, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and discover the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Gather requirements

    Evaluate executive stakeholder needs and assess your current capabilities to ensure your implementation strategy sets realistic expectations.

    • Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO – Phase 1: Gather Requirements
    • EPMO Capabilities Survey

    2. Define the plan

    Define an organizationally appropriate scope and mandate for your EPMO to ensure that your processes serve the needs of the whole.

    • Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO – Phase 2: Define the Plan
    • EPMO Charter Template
    • EPMO Communication Planning Template

    3. Implement the plan

    Establish clearly defined and easy-to-follow EPMO processes that minimize project complexity and improve enterprise project results.

    • Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO – Phase 3: Implement the Plan
    • EPMO Process Guide and SOP Template
    • EPMO Communications Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Gather Requirements

    The Purpose

    Identify breakdowns in the flow of portfolio data across the enterprise to pinpoint where and how an EPMO can best intervene.

    Assess areas of strength and opportunity in your PPM capabilities to help structure and drive the EPMO.

    Define stakeholder needs and expectations for the EPMO in order to cultivate capabilities and services that help drive informed and engaged project decisions at the executive level.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A current state picture of the triggers that are driving the need for an EPMO at your organization.

    A current state understanding of the strengths you bring to the table in constructing an EPMO as well as the areas you need to focus on in building up your capabilities.

    A target state set by stakeholder requirements and expectations, which will enable you to build out an implementation strategy that is aligned with the needs of the executive layer.

    Activities

    1.1 Map current enterprise PPM workflows.

    1.2 Conduct a SWOT analysis.

    1.3 Identify resourcing considerations and other implementation factors.

    1.4 Survey stakeholders to establish the right mix of EPMO capabilities.

    Outputs

    An overview of the flow of portfolio data and information across the organization

    An overview of current strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats

    A preliminary assessment of internal and external factors that could impact the success of this implementation

    The ability to construct a project plan that is aligned with stakeholder needs and expectations

    2 Define the Plan

    The Purpose

    Define an appropriate scope for the EPMO and the deployment it services.

    Devise a plan for engaging and including the appropriate stakeholders during the implementation phase.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear purview for the EPMO in relation to the wider enterprise in order to establish appropriate expectations for the EPMO’s services throughout the organization.

    Engaged stakeholders who understand that they have a stake in the successful implementation of the EPMO.

    Activities

    2.1 Prepare your EPMO value proposition.

    2.2 Define the role and organizational reach of your EPPM capabilities.

    2.3 Establish a communication plan to create stakeholder awareness.

    Outputs

    A clear statement of purpose and benefit that can be used to help build the case for an EPMO with stakeholders

    A functional charter defining the scope of the EPMO and providing a statement of the services the EPMO will provide once established

    An engaged executive layer that understands the value of the EPMO and helps drive its success

    3 Implement the Plan

    The Purpose

    Establish clearly defined and easy-to-follow EPMO processes that minimize project complexity.

    Develop portfolio and project governance structures that feed the EPMO with the data decision makers require without overloading enterprise project teams with processes they can’t support.

    Devise a communications strategy that helps achieve organizational buy-in.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The reduction of project chaos and confusion throughout the organization.

    Processes and governance requirements that work for both decision makers and project teams.

    Organizational understanding of the universal benefit of the EPMO’s processes to stakeholders throughout the enterprise. 

    Activities

    3.1 Establish EPMO roles and responsibilities.

    3.2 Document standard procedures around enterprise portfolio reporting, PPM administration, and project leadership.

    3.3 Review enterprise PPM solutions.

    3.4 Develop a stakeholder engagement and resistance plan.

    Outputs

    Clear lines of portfolio accountability

    A fully actionable EPMO Standard Operating Procedure document that will enable process clarity

    An informed understanding of the right PPM solution for your enterprise processes

    A communications strategy document to help communicate the organizational benefits of the EPMO

    Don’t Allow Software Licensing to Derail Your M&A

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}135|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Assuming that all parties are compliant in their licensing is a risky proposition. Most organizations are deficient in some manner of licensing. Know where those gaps are before finalizing M&A activity and have a plan in place to mitigate them right away.
    • Vendors will target companies that have undergone recent M&A activity with an audit. Vendors know that the many moving parts of M&A activity often result in license shortfall, and they may look to capitalize during the transition with audit revenue.
    • New organizational structure can offer new licensing opportunities. Take advantage of the increased volume discounting, negotiation leverage, and consolidation opportunities afforded by a merger or acquisition.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • To mitigate risks and create accurate cost estimates, create a contingency fund to compensate for unavailability of information.
    • Gathering and analyzing information is an iterative process that is ongoing throughout due diligence. Update your assumptions, risks, and budget as you obtain new information.
    • Communication with the M&A team and business process owners should be constant throughout due diligence. IT integration does not exist in isolation.

    Impact and Result

    • CIOs must be part of the conversation during the exploration/due diligence phase before the deal is closed to examine licensing compliance and software costs that could have a direct result on the valuation of the new organization.
    • Both organizations must conduct thorough due diligence (such as internal SAM audits), analyze the information, and define critical assumptions to create a strategy for the resultant IT enterprise.
    • The IT team is involved in integration, synergy realization, and cost considerations that the business often does not consider or take into account with respect to IT. License transfer, assignability, use, and geographic rights all come into play and can be overlooked.

    Don’t Allow Software Licensing to Derail Your M&A Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you shouldn’t allow software licensing to derail your M&A deal, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the M&A process with respect to software licensing

    Grasp the key pain points of software licensing and the effects it has on an M&A. Review the benefits of early IT involvement and identify IT’s capabilities.

    • Don’t Allow Software Licensing to Derail Your M&A – Phase 1: M&A Overview
    • M&A Software Asset Maturity Assessment

    2. Perform due diligence

    Understand the various steps and process when conducting due diligence. Request information and assess risks, make assumptions, and budget costs.

    • Don’t Allow Software Licensing to Derail Your M&A – Phase 2: Due Diligence
    • License Inventory
    • IT Due Diligence Report
    • M&A Software Asset RACI Template

    3. Prepare for integration

    Take a deeper dive into the application portfolios and vendor contracts of both organizations. Review integration strategies and design the end-state of the resultant organization.

    • Don’t Allow Software Licensing to Derail Your M&A – Phase 3: Pre-Integration Planning
    • Effective Licensing Position Tool
    • IT Integration Roadmap Tool

    4. Execute on the integration plan

    Review initiatives being undertaken to ensure successful integration execution. Discuss long-term goals and how to communicate with vendors to avoid licensing audits.

    • Don’t Allow Software Licensing to Derail Your M&A – Phase 4: Integration Execution
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Don’t Allow Software Licensing to Derail Your M&A

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 M&A Overview

    The Purpose

    Identify the goals and objectives the business has for the M&A.

    Understand cultural and organizational structure challenges and red flags.

    Identify SAM/licensing challenges and red flags.

    Conduct maturity assessment.

    Clarify stakeholder responsibilities.

    Build and structure the M&A team.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The capabilities required to successfully examine software assets and licensing during the M&A transaction.

    M&A business goals and objectives identified.

    IT M&A team selected.

    Severity of SAM challenges and red flags examined.

    Activities

    1.1 Document pain points from previous experience.

    1.2 Identify IT opportunities during M&A.

    Outputs

    M&A Software Asset Maturity Assessment

    2 Due Diligence

    The Purpose

    Take a structured due diligence approach that properly evaluates the current state of the organization.

    Review M&A license inventory and use top five vendors as example sets.

    Identify data capture and reporting methods/tools.

    Scheduling challenges.

    Scope level of effort and priority list.

    Common M&A pressures (internal/external).

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear understanding of the steps that are involved in the due diligence process.

    Recognition of the various areas from which information will need to be collected.

    Licensing pitfalls and compliance risks to be examined.

    Knowledge of terms and conditions that will limit ability in pre-integration planning.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify IT capabilities for an M&A.

    2.2 Create your due diligence team and assign accountability.

    2.3 Use Info-Tech’s IT Due Diligence Report Template to track key elements.

    2.4 Document assumptions to back up cost estimates and risk.

    Outputs

    M&A Software Asset RACI Template

    IT Due Diligence Report

    3 Pre-Integration Planning

    The Purpose

    Review and map legal operating entity structure for the resultant organization.

    Examine impact on licensing scenarios for top five vendors.

    Identify alternative paths and solutions.

    Complete license impact for top five vendors.

    Brainstorm action plan to mitigate negative impacts.

    Discuss and explore the scalable process for second level agreements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identification of the ideal post-M&A application portfolio and licensing structures.

    Recognition of the key considerations when determining the appropriate combination of IT integration strategies.

    Design of vendor contracts for the resultant enterprise.

    Recognition of how to create an IT integration budget.

    Activities

    3.1 Work with the senior management team to review how the new organization will operate.

    3.2 Document the strategic goals and objectives of IT’s integration program.

    3.3 Interview business leaders to understand how they envision their business units.

    3.4 Perform internal SAM audit.

    3.5 Create a library of all IT processes in the target organization as well as your own.

    3.6 Examine staff using two dimensions: competency and capacity.

    3.7 Design the end-state.

    3.8 Communicate your detailed pre-integration roadmap with senior leadership and obtain sign-off.

    Outputs

    IT Integration Roadmap Tool

    Effective License Position

    4 Manage Post-M&A Activities

    The Purpose

    Finalize path forward for top five vendors based on M&A license impact.

    Disclose findings and financial impact estimate to management.

    Determine methods for second level agreements to be managed.

    Provide listing of specific recommendations for top five list.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Initiatives generated and executed upon to achieve the technology end-state of each IT domain.

    Vendor audits avoided.

    Contracts amended and vendors spoken to.

    Communication with management on achievable synergies and quick wins.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify initiatives necessary to realize the application end-state.

    4.2 Identify initiatives necessary to realize the end-state of IT processes.

    4.3 Identify initiatives necessary to realize the end-state of IT staffing.

    4.4 Prioritize initiatives based on ease of implementation and overall business impact.

    4.5 Manage vendor relations.

    Outputs

    IT Integration Roadmap Tool

    Gain Control of Cloud Integration Strategies Before they Float Away

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}362|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Integration
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-integration
    • IT is typically backlogged with tasks while the business waits to implement key solutions to remain competitive. In this competitive space, Cloud solutions offer attractive benefits to business stakeholders especially around agility and cost.
    • Moving to the Cloud involves more than outsourcing a component of the technology stack. Roles, processes, and authentication technologies need to be redefined to fit a distributed stack where parts of the IT solution space reside on-premise while the rest are in the Cloud.
    • Cloud integration means accepting loss of control in product development. A Cloud vendor will address the needs of most constituents and any high degree of customization which counteracts their business model. This makes integration a complex initiative involving two separate parties trying to align.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Cloud integration is a fundamental commitment to change within the organization as it deeply impacts roles, processes, and technologies.
    • Be prepared to lose some degree of control of SLA management. IT will have to manage multiple Cloud SLAs and deliver a lowest common approach to the business. This may mean lowering the SLA standards previously set with on-premise solutions.
    • Cloud integration isn’t just about the technology. It is a dedication to establish solid relationships with the Cloud vendor. Understanding where the cloud solution is moving and what issues are being addressed are critical to creating an organizational road map for the future.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop a Cloud integration strategy by proactively understanding the impact of Cloud integration efforts to the organization.
    • Realize that Cloud integration will be an ongoing process of collaboration with the business, and that the initial implementation does not constitute an end.
    • Implement an integrated support structure that includes on-premise and cloud stacks.

    Gain Control of Cloud Integration Strategies Before they Float Away Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the impacts of Cloud computing on Data, Application, Access, and Service Level Agreement integration

    Assess your current level of Cloud adoption and integration, focusing on solutions that are emerging in the market and the applicability to your IT environment.

    • Storyboard: Gain Control of Cloud Integration Strategies Before they Float Away
    • Cloud Integration Checklist
    • None
    [infographic]

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}522|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Requirements & Design
    • Parent Category Link: /requirements-and-design

    The process of navigating from waterfall to Agile can be incredibly challenging. Even more problematic; how do you operate your requirements management practices once there? There traditionally isn’t a role for a business analyst, the traditional keeper of requirements. It isn’t like switching on a light.

    You likely find yourself struggling to deliver high quality solutions and requirements in Agile. This is a challenge for many organizations, regardless of how long they’ve leveraged Agile.

    But you aren’t here for assurances. You’re here for answers and help.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

    Impact and Result

    Info-Tech’s advice? Why choose? Why have to pick between traditional waterfall and Agile delivery? If Agile without analysis is a recipe for disaster, Agile with analysis is the solution. How can you leverage the Info-Tech approach to align your Agile and requirements management efforts into a powerful combination?

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment is your guide.

    Use the contents and exercises of this blueprint to gain a shared understanding of the two disciplines, to find your balance in your approach, to define your thresholds, and ultimately, to prepare for new ways of working.

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment Blueprint – Agile and Requirements Management are complementary, not competitors

    Provides support and guidance for organizations struggling with their requirements management practices in Agile environments.

    • Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment Storyboard

    2. Agile Requirements Playbook – A practical playbook for aligning your teams, and articulating the guidelines for managing your requirements in Agile.

    The Agile Requirements Playbook becomes THE artifact for your Agile requirements practices. Great for onboarding, reviewing progress, and ensuring a shared understanding of your ways of working.

    • Agile Requirements Playbook

    3. Documentation Calculator – A tool for determining the right level of documentation for your organization, and whether you’re spending too much, or even not enough, on Agile Requirements documentation.

    The Documentation Calculator can inform your documentation decison making, ensuring you're investing just the right amount of time, money, and effort.

    • Documentation Calculator

    4. Agile Requirements Workbook – Supporting tools and templates in advancing your Agile Requirements practice, to be used in conjunction with the Agile Requirements Blueprint, and the Playbook.

    This workbook is designed to capture the results of your exercises in the Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment Storyboard. Each worksheet corresponds to an exercise in the storyboard. This is a tool for you, so customize the content and layout to best suit your product. The workbook is also a living artifact that should be updated periodically as the needs of your team and organization change.

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    5. Agile Requirements Assessment – Establishes your current Agile requirements maturity, defines your target maturity, and supports planning to get there.

    The Agile Requirements Assessment is a great tool for determining your current capabilities and maturity in Agile and Business Analysis. You can also articulate your target state, which enables the identification of capability gaps, the creation of improvement goals, and a roadmap for maturing your Agile Requirements practice.

    • Agile Requirements Assessment

    Infographic

    Workshop: Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    The Purpose

    Sets the context for the organization, to ensure a shared understanding of the benefits of both Agile and business analysis/requirements management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Have a shared definition of Agile and business analysis / requirements.

    Understand the current state of Agile and business analysis in your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Define what Agile and business analysis mean in your organization.

    1.2 Agile requirements assessment.

    Outputs

    Alignment on Agile and business analysis / requirements in your organization.

    A current and target state assessment of Agile and business analysis in your organization.

    2 Tailoring Your Approach

    The Purpose

    Confirm you’re going the right way for effective solution delivery.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Confirm the appropriate delivery methodology.

    Activities

    2.1 Confirm your selected methodology.

    Outputs

    Confidence in your selected project delivery methodology.

    3 Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    The Purpose

    Provides the guardrails for your Agile requirements practice, to define a high-level process, roles and responsibilities, governance and decision-making, and how to deal with change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly defined interactions between the BA and their partners

    Define a plan for management and governance at the project team level

    Activities

    3.1 Define your agile requirements process.

    3.2 Define your agile requirements RACI.

    3.3 Define your governance.

    3.4 Define your change and backlog refinement plan.

    Outputs

    Agile requirements process.

    Agile requirements RACI.

    A governance and documentation plan.

    A change and backlog refinement approach.

    4 Planning Your Next Steps

    The Purpose

    Provides the action plan to achieve your target state maturity

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Recognize and prepare for the new ways of working for communication, stakeholder engagement, within the team, and across the organization.

    Establish a roadmap for next steps to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    Activities

    4.1 Define your stakeholder communication plan.

    4.2 Identify your capability gaps.

    4.3 Plan your agile requirements roadmap.

    Outputs

    A stakeholder communication plan.

    A list of capability gaps to achieve your desired target state.

    A prioritized roadmap to achieve the target state.

    5 Agile Requirements Techniques (Optional)

    The Purpose

    To provide practical guidance on technique usage, which can enable an improved experience with technical elements of the blueprint.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An opportunity to learn new tools to support your Agile requirements practice.

    Activities

    5.1 Managing requirements' traceability.

    5.2 Creating and managing user stories.

    5.3 Managing your requirements backlog.

    5.4 Maintaining a requirements library.

    Outputs

    Support and advice for leveraging a given tool or technique.

    Support and advice for leveraging a given tool or technique.

    Support and advice for leveraging a given tool or technique.

    Support and advice for leveraging a given tool or technique.

    Further reading

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors

    Analyst's Perspective

    The temptation when moving to Agile is to deemphasize good requirements practices in favor of perceived speed. If you're not delivering on the needs of the business then you have failed, regardless of how fast you've gone.

    Delivery in Agile doesn't mean you stop needing solid business analysis. In fact, it's even more critical, to ensure your products and projects are adding value. With the rise of Agile, the role of the business analyst has been misunderstood.

    As a result, we often throw out the analysis with the bathwater, thinking we'll be just fine without analysis, documentation, and deliberate action, as the speed and dexterity of Agile is enough.

    Consequently, what we get is wasted time, money, and effort, with solutions that fail to deliver value, or need to be re-worked to get it right.

    The best organizations find balance between these two forces, to align, and gain the benefits of both Agile and business analysis, working in tandem to manage requirements that bring solutions that are "just right".

    This is a picture of Vincent Mirabelli

    Vincent Mirabelli
    Principal Research Director, Applications Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The process of navigating from waterfall to Agile can be incredibly challenging. And even more problematic; how do you operate your requirements management practices once there? Since there traditionally isn't a role for a business analyst; the traditional keeper of requirements. it isn't like switching on a light.

    You likely find yourself struggling to deliver high quality solutions and requirements in Agile. This is a challenge for many organizations, regardless of how long they've leveraged Agile.

    But you aren't here for assurances. You're here for answers and help.

    Common Obstacles

    many organizations and teams face is that there are so busy doing Agile that they fail to be Agile.

    Agile was supposed to be the saving grace of project delivery but is misguided in taking the short-term view of "going quickly" at the expense of important elements, such as team formation and interaction, stakeholder engagement and communication, the timing and sequencing of analysis work, decision-making, documentation, and dealing with change.

    The idea that good requirements just happen because you have user stories is wrong. So, requirements remain superficial, as you "can iterate later"…but sometimes later never comes, or doesn't come fast enough.

    Organizations need to be very deliberate when aligning their Agile and requirements management practices. The work is the same. How the work is done is what changes.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Infotech's advice? Why choose? Why have to pick between traditional waterfall and Agile delivery? If Agile without analysis is a recipe for disaster, Agile with analysis is the solution. And how can you leverage the Info-Tech approach to align your Agile and requirements management efforts into a powerful combination?

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment is your guide.

    Use the contents and exercises of this blueprint to gain a shared understanding of the two disciplines, to find your balance in your approach, to define your thresholds, and ultimately, to prepare for new ways of working.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

    The temptation when moving to Agile is to deemphasize good requirements practices in favor of perceived speed. If you're not delivering on the needs of the business, then you have failed, regardless of how fast you've gone.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

    The temptation when moving to Agile is to deemphasize good requirements practices in favor of perceived speed. If you're not delivering on the needs of the business, then you have failed, regardless of how fast you've gone

    Phase 1 insight

    • The purpose of requirements in waterfall is for approval. The purpose in Agile is for knowledge management, as Agile has no memory.
    • When it comes to the Agile manifesto, "over" does not mean "instead of".
    • In Agile, the what of business analysis does doesn't change. What does change is the how and when that work happens.

    Phase 2 insight

    • Understand your uncertainties; it's a great way to decide what level of Agile (if any) is needed.
    • Finding your "Goldilocks" zone will take time. Be patient.

    Phase 3 insight

    • Right-size your governance, based on team dynamics and project complexity. A good referee knows when to step in, and when to let the game flow.
    • Agile creates a social contract amongst the team, and with their leaders and organization.
    • Documentation needs to be valuable. Do what is acceptable and necessary to move work to future steps. Not documenting also comes with a cost, but one you pay in the future. And that bill will come due, with interest (aka, technical debt, operational inefficiencies, etc.).
    • A lack of acceptable documentation makes it more difficult to have agility. You're constantly revalidating your current state (processes, practices and structure) and re-arguing decisions already made. This slows you down more than maintaining documentation ever would.

    Phase 4 insight

    • Making Agile predictable is hard, because people are not predictable; people are prone to chaos.

    There have been many challenges with waterfall delivery

    It turns out waterfall is not that great at reducing risk and ensuring value delivery after all

    • Lack of flexibility
    • Difficulty in measuring progress
    • Difficulties with scope creep
    • Limited stakeholder involvement
    • Long feedback loops

    48%
    Had project deadlines more than double

    85%
    Exceeded their original budget by at least 20%

    25%
    At least doubled their original budget

    This is an image of the waterfall project results

    Source: PPM Express.

    Agile was meant to address the shortcomings of waterfall

    The wait for solutions was too long for our business partners. The idea of investing significant time, money, and resources upfront, building an exhaustive and complete vision of the desired state, and then waiting months or even years to get that solution, became unpalatable for them. And rightfully so. Once we cast a light on the pains, it became difficult to stay with the status quo. Given that organizations evolve at a rapid pace, what was a pain at the beginning of an initiative may not be so even 6 months later.

    Agile became the answer.

    Since its' first appearance nearly 20 years ago, Agile has become the methodology of choice for a many of organizations. According to the 15th Annual State of Agile report, Agile adoption within software development teams increased from 37% in 2020 to 86% in 2021.

    Adopting Agile led to challenges with requirements

    Requirements analysis, design maturity, and management are critical for a successful Agile transformation.

    "One of the largest sources of failure we have seen on large projects is an immature Agile implementation in the context of poorly defined requirements."
    – "Large Scale IT Projects – From Nightmare to Value Creation"

    "Requirements maturity is more important to project outcomes than methodology."
    – "Business Analysis Benchmark: Full Report"

    "Mature Agile practices spend 28% of their time on analysis and design."
    – "Quantitative Analysis of Agile Methods Study (2017): Twelve Major Findings"

    "There exists a Requirements Premium… organizations using poor practices spent 62% more on similarly sized projects than organizations using the best requirements practices."
    – "The Business Case for Agile Business Analysis" - Requirements Engineering Magazine

    Strong stakeholder satisfaction with requirements results in higher satisfaction in other areas

    This is an image of a bar graph comparing the percentage of respondents with high stakeholder satisfaction, to the percentage of respondents with low stakeholder satisfaction for four different categories.  these include: Availability of IT Capacity to Complete Projects; Overall IT Projects; IT Projects Meet Business Needs; Overall IT Satisfaction

    N= 324 small organizations from Info-Tech Research Group's CIO Business Vision diagnostic.

    Note: High satisfaction was classified as organizations with a score greater or equal to eight and low satisfaction was every organization that scored below eight on the same questions.

    Info-Tech's Agile requirements framework

    This is an image of Info-Tech's Agile requirements framework.  The three main categories are: Sprint N(-1); Sprint N; Sprint N(+1)

    Agile requirements are a balancing act

    Collaboration

    Many subject matter experts are necessary to create accurate requirements, but their time is limited too.

    Communication

    Stakeholders should be kept informed throughout the requirements gathering process, but you need to get the right information to the right people.

    Documentation

    Recording, organizing, and presenting requirements are essential, but excessive documentation will slow time to delivery.

    Control

    Establishing control points in your requirements gathering process can help confirm, verify, and approve requirements accurately, but stage gates limit delivery.

    What changes for the business analyst?

    In Agile, the what of business analysis does not change.

    What does change is the how and when that work happens.

    Business analysts need to focus on six key elements when managing requirements in Agile.

    • Team formation and interaction
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication
    • The timing and sequencing of their work
    • Decision-making
    • Documentation
    • Dealing with change

    Where does the business analysis function fit on an Agile team?

    Team formation is key, as Agile is a team sport

    A business analyst in an Agile team typically interacts with several different roles, including:

    • The product owner,
    • The Sponsor or Executive
    • The development team,
    • Other stakeholders such as customers, end-users, and subject matter experts
    • The Design team,
    • Security,
    • Testing,
    • Deployment.

    This is an image the roles who typically interact with a Business Analyst.

    How we do our requirements work will change

    • Team formation and interaction
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication
    • The timing and sequencing of their work
    • Decision-making
    • Documentation
    • Dealing with change

    As a result, you'll need to focus on;

    • Emphasizing flexibility
    • Enabling continuous delivery
    • Enhancing collaboration and communication
    • Developing a user-centered approach

    Get stakeholders on board with Agile requirements

    1. Stakeholder feedback and management support are key components of a successful Agile Requirements.
    2. Stakeholders can see a project's progression and provide critical feedback about its success at critical milestones.
    3. Management helps teams succeed by trusting them to complete projects with business value at top of mind and by removing impediments that are inhibiting their productivity.
    4. Agile will bring a new mindset and significant numbers of people, process, and technology changes that stakeholders and management may not be accustomed to. Working through these issues in requirements management enables a smoother rollout.
    5. Management will play a key role in ensuring long-term Agile requirements success and ultimately rolling it out to the rest of the organization.
    6. The value of leadership involvement has not changed even though responsibilities will. The day-to-day involvement in projects will change but continual feedback will ultimately dictate the success or failure of a project.

    Measuring your success

    Tracking metrics and measuring your progress

    As you implement the actions from this Blueprint, you should see measurable improvements in;

    • Team and stakeholder satisfaction
    • Requirements quality
    • Documentation cost

    Without sacrificing time to delivery

    Metric Description and motivation
    Team satisfaction (%) Expect team satisfaction to increase as a result of clearer role delineation and value contribution.
    Stakeholder satisfaction (%) Expect Stakeholder satisfaction to similarly increase, as requirements quality increases, bringing increased value
    Requirements rework Measures the quality of requirements from your Agile Projects. Expect that the Requirements Rework will decrease, in terms of volume/frequency.
    Cost of documentation Quantifies the cost of documentation, including Elicitation, Analysis, Validation, Presentation, and Management
    Time to delivery Balancing Metric. We don't want improvements in other at the expense of time to delivery

    Info-Tech's methodology for Agile requirements

    1. Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    2. Tailoring Your Approach

    3. Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    4. Planning Your Next Steps

    Phase Activities

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Decide the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 Manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 Define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    Phase Outcomes

    Recognize the benefits and detriments of both Agile and BA.

    Understand the current state of Agile and business analysis in your organization.

    Confirm the appropriate delivery methodology.

    Manage your requirements backlog.

    Connect the business need to user story.

    Clearly defined interactions between the BA and their partners.

    Define a plan for management and governance at the project team level.

    Documentation and tactics that are right-sized for the need.

    Recognize and prepare for the new ways of working for communication, stakeholder engagement, within the team, and across the organization.

    Establish a roadmap for next steps to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    Blueprint tools and templates

    Key deliverable:

    This is a screenshot from the Agile Requirements Playbook

    Agile Requirements Playbook

    A practical playbook for aligning your teams and articulating the guidelines for managing your requirements in Agile

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    This is a screenshot from the Documentation Calculator

    Documentation Calculator

    A tool to help you answer the question: What is the right level of Agile requirements documentation for my organization?

    This is a screenshot from the Agile Requirements Assessment

    Agile Requirements Assessment

    Establishes your current maturity level, defines your target state, and supports planning to get there.

    This is a screenshot from the Agile Requirements Workbook

    Agile Requirements Workbook

    Supporting tools and templates in advancing your Agile requirements practice, to be used with the Agile Requirements Blueprint and Playbook.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    1. Framing Agile and Business Analysis / 2. Tailoring Your Approach 3. Defining Your Requirements
    Thresholds
    3. Defining Your Requirements Thresholds / 4. Planning Your Next Steps (OPTIONAL) Agile Requirements Techniques (a la carte) Next Steps and Wrap-Up (Offsite)

    Activities

    What does Agile mean in your organization? What do requirements mean in your organization?

    Agile Requirements Assessment

    Confirm your selected methodology

    Define your Agile requirements process

    Define your Agile requirements RACI (Optional)

    Define your Agile requirements governance

    Defining your change management plan

    Define your

    communication plan

    Capability gap list

    Planning your Agile requirements roadmap

    Managing requirements traceability

    Creating and managing user stories

    Managing your requirements backlog

    Maintaining a requirements library

    Develop Agile Requirements Playbook

    Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    Set up review time for workshop deliverables and next steps

    Outcomes

    Shared definition of Agile and business analysis / requirements

    Understand the current state of Agile and business analysis in your organization

    Agile requirements process

    Agile requirements RACI (Optional)

    Defined Agile requirements governance and documentation plan

    Change and backlog refinement plan

    Stakeholder communication plan

    Action plan and roadmap for maturing your Agile requirements practice

    Practical knowledge and practice about various tactics and techniques in support of your Agile requirements efforts

    Completed Agile Requirements Playbook

    Guided Implementation

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #4: Define your approach to project delivery.

    Call #6: Define your Agile requirements process.

    Call #9: Identify gaps from current to target state maturity.

    Call #2: Assess current maturity.

    Call #5: Managing your requirements backlog.

    Call #7: Define roles and responsibilities.

    Call #10: Pprioritize next steps to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    Call #3: Identify target-state capabilities.

    Call #8: Define your change and backlog refinement approach.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 10 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    Phase 1

    Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Confirm the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • EXERCISE: What do Agile and requirements mean in your organization?
    • ASSESSMENT: Agile requirements assessment
    • KEY DELIVERABLE: Agile Requirements Playbook

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business analyst and project team
    • Stakeholders
    • Sponsor/Executive

    Managing Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Step 1.1

    Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    Activities

    1.1.1 Define what Agile and business analysis mean in your organization

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business analyst and project team
    • Sponsor/Executive

    Outcomes of this step

    • Recognize the benefits and detriments of both Agile and business analysis

    Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    There have been many challenges with waterfall delivery

    It turns out waterfall is not that great at reducing risk and ensuring value delivery after all

    • Lack of flexibility
    • Difficulty in measuring progress
    • Difficulties with scope creep
    • Limited stakeholder involvement
    • Long feedback loops

    48%
    Had project deadlines more than double

    85%
    Exceeded their original budget by at least 20%

    25%
    At least doubled their original budget

    This is an image of the Waterfall Project Results

    Source: PPM Express.

    Business analysis had a clear home in waterfall

    Business analysts had historically been aligned to specific lines of business, in support of their partners in their respective domains. Somewhere along the way, the function was moved to IT. Conceptually this made sense, in that it allowed BAs to provide technical solutions to complex business problems. This had the unintended result of lost domain knowledge, and connection to the business.

    It all starts with the business. IT enables business goals. The closer you can get to the business, the better.

    Business analysts were the main drivers of helping to define the business requirements, or needs, and then decompose those into solution requirements, to develop the best option to solve those problems, or address those needs. And the case for good analysis was clear. The later a poor requirement was caught, the more expensive it was to fix. And if requirements were poor, there was no way to know until much later in the project lifecycle, when the cost to correct them was exponentially higher, to the tune of 10-100x the initial cost.

    This is an image of a graph showing the cost multiplier for Formulating Requirements, Architecture Design, Development, Testing and, Operations

    Adapted from PPM Express. "Why Projects Fail: Business Analysis is the Key".

    Agile was meant to address the shortcomings of waterfall

    The wait for solutions was too long for our business partners. The idea of investing significant time, money, and resources upfront, building an exhaustive and complete vision of the desired state, and then waiting months or even years to get that solution became unpalatable for them. And rightfully so. Once we cast a light on the pains, it became difficult to stand pat in the current state. And besides, organizations evolve at a rapid pace. What was a pain at the beginning of an initiative may not be so even six months later.

    Agile became the answer.

    Since its first appearance nearly 20 years ago, Agile has become the methodology of choice for a huge swathe of organizations. According to the 15th Annual State of Agile report, Agile adoption within software development teams increased from 37% in 2020 to 86% in 2021.

    To say that's significant is an understatement.

    The four core values of Agile helped shift focus

    According to the Agile manifesto, "We value. . ."

    This is an image of what is valued according to the Agile Manifesto.

    "…while there is value in the items on the right, we value the items on the left more."

    Source: Agilemanifesto, 2001

    Agile has made significant inroads in IT and beyond

    94% of respondents report using Agile practices in their organization

    according to Digital.AI's "The 15th State of Agile Report"

    That same report notes a steady expansion of Agile outside of IT, as other areas of the organization seek to benefit from increased agility and responsiveness, including Human Resources, Finance and Marketing.

    While it addressed some problems…

    This is an image of the Waterfall Project Results, compared to Agile Product Results.

    "Agile projects are 37% faster to market than [the] industry average"

    (Requirements Engineering Magazine, 2017)

    • Business requirements documents are massive and unreadable
    • Waterfall erects barriers and bottlenecks between the business and the development team
    • It's hard to define the solution at the outset of a project
    • There's a long turnaround between requirements work and solution delivery
    • Locking in requirements dictates an often-inflexible solution. And the costs to make changes tend to add up.

    …Implementing Agile led to other challenges

    This is an image of a series of thought bubbles, each containing a unique challenge resulting from implementing Agile.

    Adopting Agile led to challenges with requirements

    Requirements analysis, design maturity, and management are critical for a successful Agile transformation.

    "One of the largest sources of failure we have seen on large projects is an immature Agile implementation in the context of poorly defined requirements."
    – BCG, 2015

    "Requirements maturity is more important to project outcomes than methodology."
    – IAG Consulting, 2009.

    "Mature Agile practices spend 28% of their time on analysis and design."
    – InfoQ, 2017."

    "There exists a Requirements Premium… organizations using poor practices spent 62% more on similarly sized projects than organizations using the best requirements practices."
    – Requirements Engineering Magazine, 2017

    Strong stakeholder satisfaction with requirements results in higher satisfaction in other areas

    This is an image of a bar graph comparing the percentage of respondents with high stakeholder satisfaction, to the percentage of respondents with low stakeholder satisfaction for four different categories.  these include: Availability of IT Capacity to Complete Projects; Overall IT Projects; IT Projects Meet Business Needs; Overall IT Satisfaction

    N= 324 small organizations from Info-Tech Research Group's CIO Business Vision diagnostic.

    Note: High satisfaction was classified as organizations with a score greater or equal to eight and low satisfaction was every organization that scored below eight on the same questions.

    Agile is being misinterpreted as an opportunity to bypass planning and analysis activities

    Agile is a highly effective tool.

    This isn't about discarding Agile. It is being used for things completely outside of what was originally intended. When developing products or code, it is in its element. However, outside of that realm, its being used to bypass business analysis activities, which help define the true customer and business need.

    Business analysts were forced to adapt and shift focus. Overnight they morphed into product owners, or no longer had a place on the team. Requirements and analysis took a backseat.

    The result?

    Increased rework, decreased stakeholder satisfaction, and a lot of wasted money and effort.

    "Too often, the process of two-week sprints becomes the thing, and the team never gets the time and space to step back and obsess over what is truly needed to delight customers."
    Harvard Business Review, 9 April 2021.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Requirements in Agile are the same, but the purpose of requirements changes.

    • The purpose of requirements in waterfall is for stakeholder approval.
    • The purpose of requirements in Agile is knowledge management; to maintain a record of the current state.

    Many have misinterpreted the spirit of Agile and waterfall

    The stated principles of waterfall say nothing of how work is to be linear.

    This is an image of a comparison between using Agile and Being Prescriptive.This is an image of Royce's 5 principles for success.

    Source: Royce, Dr. Winston W., 1970.

    For more on Agile methodology, check out Info-Tech's Agile Research Centre

    How did the pendulum swing so far?

    Shorter cycles of work made requirements management more difficult. But the answer isn't to stop doing it.

    Organizations went from engaging business stakeholders up front, and then not until solution delivery, to forcing those partners to give up their resources to the project. From taking years to deliver a massive solution (which may or may not even still fit the need) to delivering in rapid cycles called sprints.

    This tug-of-war is costing organizations significant time, money, and effort.

    Your approach to requirements management needs to be centered. We can start to make that shift by better aligning our Agile and business analysis practices. Outside of the product space, Agile needs to be combined with other disciplines (Harvard Business Review, 2021) to be effective.

    Agility is important. Though it is not a replacement for approach or strategy (RCG Global Services, 2022). In Agile, team constraints are leveraged because of time. There is a failure to develop new capabilities to address the business needs Harvard Business Review, 2021).

    Agility needs analysis.

    Agile requirements are a balancing act

    Collaboration

    Many subject matter experts are necessary to create accurate requirements, but their time is limited too.

    Communication

    Stakeholders should be kept informed throughout the requirements gathering process, but you need to get the right information to the right people.

    Documentation

    Recording, organizing, and presenting requirements are essential, but excessive documentation will slow time to delivery.

    Control

    Establishing control points in your requirements gathering process can help confirm, verify, and approve requirements accurately, but stage gates limit delivery.

    Start by defining what the terms mean in your organization

    We do this because there isn't even agreement by the experts on what the terms "Agile" and "business analysis" mean, so let's establish a definition within the context of your organization.

    1.1.1 What do Agile and business analysis mean in your organization?

    Estimated time: 30 Minutes

    1. Explore the motivations behind the need for aligning Agile with business analysis. Are there any current challenges related to outputs, outcomes, quality? How can the team and organization align the two more effectively for the purposes of requirements management?
    2. Gather the appropriate stakeholders to discuss their definition of the terms "Agile" and "business analysis" It can be related to their experience, practice, or things they've read or heard.
    3. Brainstorm and document all shared thoughts and perspectives.
    4. Synthesize those thoughts and perspectives into a shared definition of each term, of a sentence or two.
    5. Revisit this definition as needed, and as your Agile requirements efforts evolve.

    Input

    • Challenges and experiences/perspectives related to Agile and business requirements

    Output

    • A shared definition of Agile and business analysis, to help guide alignment on Agile requirements management

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Build your Agile Requirements Playbook

    Keep the outcomes of this blueprint in a single document

    Share at the beginning of a new project, as part of team member onboarding, and revisit as your practice matures.

    This is a series of three screenshots from the Agile Requirements Playbook.

    Your Agile Requirements Playbook will include

    • Your shared definition of Agile and business analysis for your organization
    • The Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment
    • A Methodology Selection Matrix
    • Agile requirements RACI
    • A defined Agile requirements process
    • Documentation Calculator
    • Your Requirements Repository Information
    • Capability Gap List (from current to target state)
    • Target State Improvement Roadmap and Action Plan

    Step 1.2

    Align Agile and Business Analysis Within Your Organization

    Activities

    1.2.1 Assess your Agile requirements maturity

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst and Project Team
    • Stakeholders
    • Sponsor/Executive

    Outcomes of this step

    • Complete the Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment to establish your current and target states

    Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    Consider the question: "Why Agile?"

    What is the driving force behind that decision?

    There are many reasons to leverage the power of Agile within your organization, and specifically as part of your requirements management efforts. And it shouldn't just be to improve productivity. That's only one aspect.
    Begin by asking, "Why Agile?" Are you looking to improve:

    • Time to market
    • Team engagement
    • Product quality
    • Customer satisfaction
    • Stakeholder engagement
    • Employee satisfaction
    • Consistency in delivery of value
    • Predictably of your releases

    Or a combination of the above?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Project delivery methodologies aren't either/or. You don't have to be 100% waterfall or 100% Agile. Select the right approach for your project, product, or service.

    In the end, your business partners don't want projects delivered faster, they want value faster!

    For more on understanding Agile, check out the Implement Agile Practices That Work Blueprint

    Responses to a 2019 KPMG survey:

    13% said that their top management fully supports Agile transformation.

    76% of organizations did not agree that their organization supports Agile culture.

    62% of top management believe Agile has no implications for them.

    What changes for the business analyst?

    Business analysts need to focus on six key elements when managing requirements in Agile.

    • Team formation and interaction
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication
    • The timing and sequencing of their work
    • Decision-making
    • Documentation
    • Dealing with change

    In Agile, the what of business analysis does not change.

    What does change is the how and when that work happens.

    1.2.1 Assess your Agile requirements maturity

    This is a series of screenshots from the Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment.

    1.2.1 Assess your Agile requirements maturity

    Estimated time: 30 Minutes

      1. Using the Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment, gather all appropriate stakeholders, and discuss and score the current state of your practice. Scoring can be done by:
        1. Consensus: Generally better with a smaller group, where the group agrees the score and documents the result
        2. Average: Have everyone score individually, and aggregate the results into an average, which is then entered.
        3. Weighted Average: As above, but weight the individual scores by individual or line of business to get a weighted average.
      2. When current state is complete, revisit to establish target state (or hold as a separate session) using the same scoring approach as in current state.
        1. Recognize that there is a cost to maturity, so don't default to the highest score by default.
        2. Resist the urge at this early stage to generate ideas to navigate from current to target state. We will re-visit this exercise in Phase 4, once we've defined other pieces of our process and practice.

    Input

    • Participant knowledge and experience

    Output

    • A current and target state assessment of your Agile requirements practice

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Tailoring Your Approach

    Phase 2

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Confirm the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Selecting the appropriate delivery methodology
    • Managing your requirements backlog
    • Tracing from business need to user story

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Managing Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Step 2.1

    Confirm the Best-fit Approach for Delivery

    Activities

    2.1.1 Confirm your methodology

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A review of potential delivery methodologies to select the appropriate, best-fit approach to your projects

    Confirming you're using the best approach doesn't have be tricky

    Selecting the right approach (or confirming you're on the right track) is easier when you assess two key inputs to your project; your level of certainty about the solution, and the level of complexity among the different variables and inputs to your project, such as team experience and training, the number of impacted stakeholders or context. lines of business, and the organizational

    Solution certainty refers to the level of understanding of the problem and the solution at the start of the project. In projects with high solution certainty, the requirements and solutions are well defined, and the project scope is clear. In contrast, projects with low solution certainty have vague or changing requirements, and the solutions are not well understood.

    Project complexity refers to the level of complexity of the project, including the number of stakeholders, the number of deliverables, and the level of technical complexity. In projects with high complexity, there are many stakeholders with different priorities, many deliverables, and high technical complexity. In contrast, projects with low complexity have fewer stakeholders, fewer deliverables, and lower technical complexity.

    "Agile is a fantastic approach when you have no clue how you're going to solve a problem"

    • Ryan Folster, Consulting Services Manager, Business Analysis, Dimension Data

    Use Info-Tech's methodology selection matrix

    Waterfall methodology is best suited for projects with high solution certainty and high complexity. This is because the waterfall model follows a linear and sequential approach, where each phase of the project is completed before moving on to the next. This makes it ideal for projects where the requirements and solutions are well-defined, and the project scope is clear.

    On the other hand, Agile methodology is best suited for projects with low solution certainty. Agile follows an iterative and incremental approach, where the requirements and solutions are detailed and refined throughout the project. This makes it ideal for projects where the requirements and solutions are vague or changing.

    Note that there are other models that exist for determining which path to take, should this approach not fit within your organization.

    Use info-tech's-methodology-selection-matrix

    This is an image of Info-Tech’s methodology selection matrix

    Adapted from The Chaos Report, 2015 (The Standish Group)

    Download the Agile Requirements Workbook

    2.1.1 Confirm your methodology

    Estimated time: 30 Minutes

    1. Using the Agile Requirements Workbook, find the tab labelled "Methodology Assessment" and answer the questions to establish your complexity and certainty scores, where;

    1 = Strongly disagree
    2 = Disagree
    3 = Neutral
    4 = Agree
    5 = Strongly agree.

    1. In the same workbook, plot the results in the grid on the tab labelled "Methodology Matrix".
    2. Projects falling into Green are good fits for Agile. Yellow are viable. And Red may not be a great fit for Agile.
    3. Note: Ultimately, the choice of methodology is yours. Recognize there may be additional challenges when a project is too complex, or uncertainty is high.

    Input

    • Current project complexity and solution certainty

    Output

    • A clear choice of delivery methodology

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Step 2.2

    Manage Your Requirements Backlog

    Activities

    2.2.1 Create your user stories

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understand how to convert requirements into user stories, which populate the Requirements Backlog.

    Tailoring Your Approach

    There is a hierarchy to requirements

    This is a pyramid, with the base being: Solution Requirements; The middle being: Stakeholder Requirements; and the Apex being: Business Requirements.
    • Higher-level statements of the goals, objectives, or needs of the enterprise.
    • Business requirements focus on the needs of the organization, and not the stakeholders within it.

    Defines

    Intended benefits and outcomes

    • Statements of the needs of a particular stakeholder or class of stakeholders, and how that stakeholder will interact with a solution.

    Why it is needed, and by who

    • Describes the characteristics of a solution that meets business requirements and stakeholder requirements. Functional describes the behavior and information that the solution will manage. They describe capabilities the system will be able to perform in terms of behaviors or operations. Non-functional represents constraints on the ultimate solution and tends to be less negotiable.

    What is needed, and how its going to be achieved

    Connect the dots with a traceability matrix

    Business requirements describe what a company needs in order to achieve its goals and objectives. Solution requirements describe how those needs will be met. User stories are a way to express the functionality that a solution will provide from the perspective of an end user.

    A traceability matrix helps clearly connect and maintain your requirements.

    To connect business requirements to solution requirements, you can start by identifying the specific needs that the business has and then determining how those needs can be met through technology or other solutions; or what the solution needs to do to meet the business need. So, if the business requirement is to increase online sales, a solution requirement might include implementing a shopping cart feature on your company website.

    Once you have identified the solution requirements, you can then use those to create user stories. A user story describes a specific piece of functionality that the solution will provide from the perspective of a user.

    For example, "As a customer, I want to be able to add items to my shopping cart so that I can purchase them." This user story is directly tied to the solution requirement of implementing a shopping cart feature.

    Tracing from User Story back up to Business Requirement is essential in ensuring your solutions support your organization's strategic vison and objectives.

    This is an image of a traceability matrix for Business Requirements.

    Download the Info-Tech Requirements Traceability Matrix

    Improve the quality of your solution requirements

    A solution requirement is a statement that clearly outlines the functional capability that the business needs from a system or application.

    There are several attributes to look for in requirements:

    Verifiable

    Unambiguous

    Complete

    Consistent

    Achievable

    Traceable

    Unitary

    Agnostic

    Stated in a way that can be easily tested

    Free of subjective terms and can only be interpreted in one way

    Contains all relevant information

    Does not conflict with other requirements

    Possible to accomplish with budgetary and technological constraints

    Trackable from inception through to testing

    Addresses only one thing and cannot be decomposed into multiple requirements

    Doesn't pre-suppose a specific vendor or product

    For more on developing high quality requirements, check out the Improve Requirements Gathering Blueprint

    Prioritize your requirements

    When everything is a priority, nothing is a priority.

    Prioritization is the process of ranking each requirement based on its importance to project success. Each requirement should be assigned a priority level. The delivery team will use these priority levels to ensure efforts are targeted toward the proper requirements as well as to plan features available on each release. Use the MoSCoW Model of Prioritization to effectively order your requirements.

    The MoSCoW Model of Prioritization

    This is an image of The MoSCoW Model of Prioritization

    The MoSCoW model was introduced by Dai Clegg of Oracle UK in 1994

    (Source: ProductPlan).

    Base your prioritization on the right set of criteria

    Criteria Description
    Regulatory and legal compliance These requirements will be considered mandatory.
    Policy compliance Unless an internal policy can be altered or an exception can be made, these requirements will be considered mandatory.
    Business value significance Give a higher priority to high-value requirements.
    Business risk Any requirement with the potential to jeopardize the entire project should be given a high priority and implemented early.
    Likelihood of success Especially in proof-of-concept projects, it is recommended that requirements have good odds.
    Implementation complexity Give a higher priority to low implementation difficulty requirements.
    Alignment with strategy Give a higher priority to requirements that enable the corporate strategy.
    Urgency Prioritize requirements based on time sensitivity.
    Dependencies A requirement on its own may be low priority, but if it supports a high-priority requirement, then its priority must match it.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is easier to prioritize requirements if they have already been collapsed, resolved, and rewritten. There is no point in prioritizing every requirement that is elicited up front when some of them will eventually be eliminated.

    Manage solution requirements in a Product backlog

    What is a backlog?

    Agile teams are familiar with the use of a Sprint Backlog, but in Requirements Management, a Product Backlog is a more appropriate choice.

    A product backlog and a Sprint backlog are similar in that they are both lists of items that need to be completed in order to deliver a product or project, but there are some key differences between the two.

    A product backlog is a list of all the features, user stories, and requirements that are needed for a product or project. It is typically created and maintained by the business analyst or product owner and is used to prioritize and guide the development of the product.

    A Sprint backlog, on the other hand, is a list of items specifically for an upcoming sprint, which is an iteration of work in Scrum. The Sprint backlog is created by the development team and is used to plan and guide the work that will be done during the sprint. The items in the Sprint backlog are typically taken from the product backlog and are prioritized based on their importance and readiness.

    For more on building effective product backlogs, visit Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    A backlog stores and organizes requirements at various stages

    Your backlog must give you a holistic understanding of demand for change in the product.

    A well-formed backlog can be thought of as a DEEP backlog

    Detailed appropriately: Requirements are broken down and refined as necessary

    Emergent: The backlog grows and evolves over time as requirements are added and removed.

    Estimated: The effort to deliver a requirement is estimated at each tier.

    Prioritized: A requirement's value and priority are determined at each tier.

    This is an image of an inverted funnel, with the top being labeled: Ideas; The middle being labeled: Qualified; and the bottom being labeled: Ready.

    Adapted from Essential Scrum

    Ensure requests and requirements are ready for development

    Clearly define what it means for a requirement, change, or maintenance request to be ready for development.

    This will help ensure the value and scope of each functionality and change are clear and well understood by both developers and stakeholders before the start of the sprint. The definition of ready should be two-fold: ready for the backlog, and ready for coding.

    1. Create a checklist that indicates when a requirement or request is ready for the development backlog. Consider the following questions:
      1. Is the requirement or request in the correct format?
      2. Does the desired functionality or change have significant business value?
      3. Can the requirement or request be reasonably completed within defined release timelines under the current context?
      4. Does the development team agree with the budget and points estimates?
      5. Is there an understanding of what the requirement or request means from the stakeholder or user perspective?
    2. Create a checklist that indicates when a requirement or request is ready for development. Consider the following questions:
      1. Have the requirements and requests been prioritized in the backlog?
      2. Has the team sufficiently collaborated on how the desired functionality or change can be completed?
      3. Do the tasks in each requirement or request contain sufficient detail and direction to begin development?
      4. Can the requirement or request be broken down into smaller pieces?

    Converting solution requirements into user stories

    Define the user

    Who will be interacting with the product or feature being developed? This will help to focus the user story on the user's needs and goals.

    Create the story

    Create the user story using the following template: "As a [user], I want [feature] so that [benefit]."
    This helps articulate the user's need and the value that the requirement will provide.

    Decompose

    User stories are typically too large to be implemented in a single sprint, so they should be broken down into smaller, more manageable tasks.

    Prioritize

    User stories are typically too large to be implemented in a single sprint, so they should be broken down into smaller, more manageable tasks.

    2.2.1 Create your user stories

    Estimated time: 60 Minutes

    1. Gather the project team and relevant stakeholders. Have access to your current list of solution requirements.
    2. Leverage the approach on previous slide "Converting Solution Requirements into User Stories" to generate a collection of user stories.

    NOTE: There is not a 1:1 relationship between requirements and user stories.
    It is possible that a single requirement will have multiple user stories, and similarly, that a single user story will apply to multiple solution requirements.

    Input

    • Requirements
    • Use Case Template

    Output

    • A collection of user stories

    Materials

    • Current Requirements

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Use the INVEST model to create good user stories

    At this point your requirements should be high-level stories. The goal is to refine your backlog items, so they are . . .

    A vertical image of the Acronym: INVEST, taken from the first letter of each bolded word in the column to the right of the image.

    Independent: Ideally your user stories can be built in any order (i.e. independent from each other). This allows you to prioritize based on value and not get caught up in sequencing and prerequisites.
    Negotiable: As per the Agile principle, collaboration over contracts. Your user stories are meant to facilitate collaboration between the developer and the business. Therefore, they should be built to allow negotiation between all parties.
    Valuable: A user story needs to state the value so it can be effectively prioritized, but also so developers know what they are building.
    Estimable: As opposed to higher-level approximation given to epics, user stories need more accuracy in their estimates in order to, again, be effectively prioritized, but also so teams can know what can fit into a sprint or release plans.
    Small: User stories should be small enough for a number of them to fit into a sprint. However, team size and velocity will impact how many can be completed. A general guideline is that your teams should be able to deliver multiple stories in a sprint.
    Testable: Your stories need to be testable, which means they must have defined acceptance criteria and any related test cases as defined in your product quality standards.
    Source: Agile For All

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    Phase 3

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Confirm the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assigning roles and responsibilities optional (Tool: RACI)
    • Define your Agile requirements process
    • Calculate the cost of your documentation (Tool: Documentation Calculator)
    • Define your backlog refinement plan

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Managing Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Step 3.1

    Define Project Roles and Responsibilities

    Activities

    3.1.1 Define your Agile requirements RACI (optional)

    3.1.2 Define your Agile requirements process

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A defined register of roles and responsibilities, along with a defined process for how Agile requirements work is to be done.

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    Where does the BA function fit on an Agile team?

    Team formation is key, as Agile is a team sport

    A business analyst in an Agile team typically interacts with several different roles, including the product owner, development team, and many other stakeholders throughout the organization.

    This is an image the roles who typically interact with a Business Analyst.

    • The product owner, to set the priorities and direction of the project, and to gather requirements and ensure they are being met. Often, but not always, the BA and product owner are the same individual.
    • The development team, to provide clear and concise requirements that they can use to build and test the product.
    • Other stakeholders, such as customers, end-users, and subject matter experts to gather their requirements, feedback and validate the solution.
      • Design, to ensure that the product meets user needs. They may provide feedback and ensure that the design is aligned with requirements.
      • Security, to ensure that the solution meets all necessary security requirements and to identify potential risks and appropriate use of controls.
      • Testing, to ensure that the solution is thoroughly tested before it is deployed. They may create test cases or user scenarios that validate that everything is working as intended.
      • Deployment, to ensure that the necessary preparations have been made, including testing, security, and user acceptance.

    Additionally, during the sprint retrospectives, the team will review their performance and find ways to improve for the next sprint. As a team member, the business analyst helps to identify areas where the team could improve how they are working with requirements and understand how the team can improve communication with stakeholders.

    3.1.1 (Optional) Define Your Agile Requirements RACI

    Estimated Time: 60 Minutes

    1. Identify the project deliverables: The first step is to understand the project deliverables and the tasks that are required to complete them. This will help you to identify the different roles and responsibilities that need to be assigned.
    2. Define the roles and responsibilities: Identify the different roles that will be involved in the project and their associated responsibilities. These roles may include project manager, product owner, development team, stakeholders, and any other relevant parties.
    3. Assign RACI roles: Assign a RACI role to each of the identified tasks. The RACI roles are:
      1. Responsible: the person or team who is responsible for completing the task
      2. Accountable: the person who is accountable for the task being completed on time and to the required standard
      3. Consulted: the people or teams who need to be consulted to ensure the task is completed successfully
      4. Informed: the people or teams who need to be informed of the task's progress and outcome
    4. Create the RACI chart: Use the information gathered in the previous steps to create a matrix or chart that shows the tasks, the roles, and the RACI roles assigned to each task.
    5. Review and refine: Review the RACI chart with the project team and stakeholders to ensure that it accurately reflects the roles and responsibilities of everyone involved. Make any necessary revisions and ensure that all parties understand their roles and responsibilities.
    6. Communicate and implement: Communicate the RACI chart to all relevant parties and ensure that it is used as a reference throughout the project. This will help to ensure that everyone understands their role and that tasks are completed on time and to the required standard.

    Input

    • A list of required tasks and activities
    • A list of stakeholders

    Output

    • A list of defined roles and responsibilities for your project

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    A Case Study in Team Formation

    Industry: Anonymous Organization in the Energy sector
    Source: Interview

    Challenge

    Agile teams were struggling to deliver within a defined sprint, as there were consistent delays in requirements meeting the definition of ready for development. As such, sprints were often delayed, or key requirements were descoped and deferred to a future sprint.

    During a given two-week sprint cycle, the business analyst assigned to the team would be working along multiple horizons, completing elicitation, analysis, and validation, while concurrently supporting the sprint and dealing with stakeholder changes.

    Solution

    As a part of addressing this ongoing pain, a pilot program was run to add a second business analyst to the team.

    The intent was, as one is engaged preparing requirements through elicitation, analysis, and validation for a future sprint, the second is supporting the current sprint cycle, and gaining insights from stakeholders to refine the requirements backlog.

    Essentially, these two were leap-frogging each other in time. At all times, one BA was focused on the present, and one on the future.

    Result

    A happier team, more satisfied stakeholders, and consistent delivery of features and functions by the Agile teams. The pilot team outperformed all other Agile teams in the organization, and the "2 BA" approach was made the new standard.

    Understanding the Agile requirements process

    Shorter cycles make effective requirements management more necessary, not less

    Short development cycles can make requirements management more difficult because they often result in a higher rate of change to the requirements. In a shorter timeframe, there is less time to gather and verify requirements, leading to a higher likelihood of poor or incomplete requirements. Additionally, there may be more pressure to make decisions quickly, which can lead to less thorough analysis and validation of requirements. This can make it more challenging to ensure that the final solution meets the needs of the stakeholders.
    When planning your requirements cycles, it's important to consider;

    • Your sprint logistics (how long?)
    • Your release plan (at the end of every sprint, monthly, quarterly?)
    • How the backlog will be managed (as tickets, on a visual medium, such as a Kanban board?)
    • How will you manage communication?
    • How will you monitor progress?
    • How will future sprint planning happen?

    Info-Tech's Agile requirements framework

    Sprint N(-1)

    Sprint N

    Sprint N(+1)

    An image of Sprint N(-1) An image of Sprint N An image of Sprint N(+1)

    Changes from waterfall to Agile

    Gathering and documenting requirements: Requirements are discovered and refined throughout the project, rather than being gathered and documented up front. This can be difficult for business analysts who are used to working in a waterfall environment where all requirements are gathered and documented before development begins.
    Prioritization of requirements: Requirements are prioritized based on their value to the customer and the team's ability to deliver them. This can be difficult for business analysts who are used to prioritizing requirements based on the client's needs or their own understanding of what is important.

    Defining acceptance criteria: Acceptance criteria are defined for each user story to ensure that the team understands what needs to be delivered. Business analysts need to understand how to write effective acceptance criteria and how to use them to ensure that the team delivers what the customer needs.
    Supporting Testing and QA: The business analyst plays a role in ensuring that testing (and test cases) are completed and of proper quality, as defined in the requirements.

    Managing changing requirements: It is expected that requirements will change throughout the project. Business analysts need to be able to adapt quickly to changing requirements and ensure that the team is aware of the changes and how they will impact the project.
    Collaboration with stakeholders: Requirements are gathered from a variety of stakeholders, including customers, users, and team members. Business analysts need to be able to work effectively with all stakeholders to gather and refine requirements and ensure that the team is building the right product.

    3.1.2 Define your Agile requirements process

    Estimated time: 60 Minutes

    1. Gather all relevant stakeholders to discuss and define your process for requirements management.
    2. Have a team member facilitate the session to define the process. The sample in the Agile Requirements Workbook can be used optionally as a starting point. You can also use any existing processes and procedures as a baseline.
    3. Gain agreement on the process from all involved stakeholders.
    4. Revisit the process periodically to review its performance and make adjustments as needed.

    NOTE: The process is intended to be at a high enough level to leave space and flexibility for team members to adapt and adjust, but at a sufficient depth that everyone understands the process and workflows. In other words, the process will be both flexible and rigid, and the two are not mutually exclusive.

    Input

    • Project team and RACI
    • Existing Process (if available)

    Output

    • A process for Agile requirements that is flexible yet rigid

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Establish the right level of governance and decision-making

    Establishing the right level of governance and decision making is important in Agile requirements because there is a cost to decision making, as time plays an important factor. Even the failure to decide can have significant impacts.

    Good governance and decision-making practices can help to minimize risks, ensure that requirements are well understood and managed, and that project progress is tracked and reported effectively.

    In Agile environments, this often involves establishing clear roles and responsibilities, implementing effective communication and collaboration practices, and ensuring that decision-making processes are efficient and effective.

    Good requirements management practices can help to ensure that projects are aligned with organizational goals and strategy, that stakeholders' needs are understood and addressed, and that deliverables are of high quality and meet the needs of the business.

    By ensuring that governance and decision-making is effective, organizations can improve the chances of project success, and deliver value to the business. Risks and costs can be mitigated by staying small and nimble.

    Check out Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Develop an adaptive governance process

    A pyramid, with the number 4 at the apex, and the number 1 at the base.  In order from base-apex, the following titles are found to the right of the pyramid: Ad-Hoc governance; Controlled Governance; Agile Governance; Embedded/Automated governance.

    Maturing governance is a journey

    Organizations should look to progress in their governance stages. Ad-hoc and controlled governance tends to be slow, expensive, and a poor fit for modern practices.

    The goal as you progress through your stages is to delegate governance and empower teams to make optimal decisions in real-time, knowing that they are aligned with the understood best interests of the organization.

    Automate governance for optimal velocity, while mitigating risks and driving value.

    This puts your organization in the best position to be adaptive and able to react effectively to volatility and uncertainty.

    A graph charting Trust and empowerment on the x-axis, and Progress Integration on the Y axis.

    Five key principles for building an adaptive governance framework

    Delegate and empower

    Decision making must be delegated down within the organization, and all resources must be empowered and supported to make effective decisions.

    Define outcomes

    Outcomes and goals must be clearly articulated and understood across the organization to ensure decisions are in line and stay within reasonable boundaries.

    Make risk- informed decisions

    Integrated risk information must be available with sufficient data to support decision making and design approaches at all levels of the organization.

    Embed / automate

    Governance standards and activities need to be embedded in processes and practices. Optimal governance reduces its manual footprint while remaining viable. This also allows for more dynamic adaptation.

    Establish standards and behavior

    Standards and policies need to be defined as the foundation for embedding governance practices organizationally. These guardrails will create boundaries to reinforce delegated decision making.

    Sufficient decision-making power should be given to your Agile teams

    Push the decision-making process down to your pilot teams.

    • Bring your business stakeholders and subject matter experts together to identify the potential high-level risks.
    • Bring your business stakeholders and subject matter experts together to identify the potential high-level risks.
    • Discuss with the business the level of risk they are willing to accept.
    • Define the level of authority project teams have in making critical decisions.

    "Push the decision making down as far as possible, down to the point where sprint teams completely coordinate all the integration, development, and design. What I push up the management chain is risk taking. [Management] decides what level of risk they are willing to take and [they] demonstrate that by the amount of decision making you push down."
    – Senior Manager, Canadian P&C Insurance Company, Info-Tech Interview

    Step 3.2

    Define Your Level of Acceptable Documentation

    Activities

    3.2.1 Calculate the cost of documentation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Quantified cost of documentation produced for your Agile project.

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    Right-size Your Documentation

    Why do we need it, and what purpose does it serve?

    Before creating any documentation, consider why; why are you creating documentation, and what purpose is it expected to serve?
    Is it:

    • … to gain approval?
    • … to facilitate decision-making?
    • .. to allow the team to think through a challenge or compare solution options?

    Next, consider what level of documentation would be acceptable and 'enough' for your stakeholders. Recognize that 'enough' will depend on your stakeholder's personal definition and perspective.
    There may also be considerations for maintaining documentation for the purposes of compliance, and auditability in some contexts and industries.
    The point is not to eliminate all documentation, but rather, to question why we're producing it, so that we can create just enough to deliver value.

    "What does the next person need to do their work well, to gain or create a shared understanding?"
    - Filip Hendrickx, Innovating BA and Founder, altershape

    Documentation comes at a cost

    We need to quantify the cost of documentation, against the expected benefit

    All things take time, and that would imply that all things have an inherent cost. We often don't think in these terms, as it's just the work we do, and costs are only associated with activities requiring additional capital expenditure. Documentation of requirements can come at a cost in terms of time and resources. Creating and maintaining detailed documentation requires effort from project team members, which could be spent on other aspects of the project such as development or testing. Additionally, there may be costs associated with storing and distributing the documentation.

    When creating documentation, we are making a decision. There is an opportunity cost of investing time to create, and concurrently, not working on other activities. Documentation of requirements can come at a cost in terms of time and resources. Creating and maintaining detailed documentation requires effort from project team members, which could be spent on other aspects of the project such as development or testing. Additionally, there may be costs associated with storing and distributing the documentation.

    In order to make better informed decisions about the types, quantity and even quality of the documentation we are producing, we need to capture that data. To ensure we are receiving good value for our documentation, we should compare the expected costs to the expected benefits of a sprint or project.

    3.2.1 Calculate the cost of documentation

    Estimated time: as needed

    1. Use this tool to quantify the cost of creating and maintaining current state documentation for your Agile requirements team. It provides an indication, via the Documentation Cost Index, of when your project is documenting excessively, relative to the expected benefits of the sprint or project.
    2. In Step 1, enter the hourly rate for the person (or persons) completing the business analysis function for your Agile team. NB: This does not have to be a person with the title of business analyst. If there are multiple people fulfilling this role, enter the average rate (if their rates are same or similar) or a weighted average (if there is a significant range in the hourly rate)
    3. In Step 2, enter the expected benefit (in $) for the sprint or project.
    4. In Step 3, enter the total number of hours spent on each task/activity during the sprint or project. Use blank spaces as needed to add tasks and activities not listed.
    5. In Step 4, you'll find the Documentation Cost Index, which compares your total documentation cost to the expected benefits. The cell will show green when the value is < 0.8, yellow between 0.8 and 1, and red when >1.
    6. Use the information to plan future sprints and documentation needs, identify opportunities for improvement in your requirements practice, and find balance in "just enough" documentation.

    Input

    • Project team and RACI
    • Existing Process (if available)

    Output

    • A process for Agile requirements that is flexible yet rigid

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Lack of documentation also comes at a cost

    Lack of documentation can bring costs to Agile projects in a few different ways.

    • Onboarding new team members
    • Improving efficiency
    • Knowledge management
    • Auditing and compliance
    • Project visibility
    • Maintaining code

    Info-Tech Insight

    Re-using deliverables (documentation, process, product, etc.) is important in maintaining the velocity of work. If you find yourself constantly recreating your current state documentation at the start of a project, it's hard to deliver with agility.

    Step 3.3

    Manage Requirements as an Asset

    Activities

    3.3.1 Discuss your current perspectives on requirements as assets

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Awareness of the value in, and tactics for enabling effective management of requirements as assets

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    What do we mean by "assets"?

    And when do requirements become assets?

    In order to delivery with agility, you need to maximize the re-usability of artifacts. These artifacts could take the form of current state documentation, user stories, test cases, and yes, even requirements for re-use.
    Think of it like a library for understanding where your organization is today. Understanding the people, processes, and technology, in one convenient location. These artifacts become assets when we choose to retain them, rather than discard them at the end of a project, when we think they'll no longer be needed.
    And just like finding a single book in a vast library, we need to ensure our assets can be found when we need them. And this means making them searchable.
    We can do this by establishing criteria for requirements and artifact reuse;

    • What business need and benefit is it aligned to?
    • What metadata needs to be attached, related to source, status, subject, author, permissions, type, etc.?
    • Where will it be stored for ease of retrieval?

    Info-Tech Insight

    When writing requirements for products or services, write them for the need first, and not simply for what is changing.

    The benefits of managing requirements as assets

    Retention of knowledge in a knowledge base that allows the team to retain current business requirements, process documentation, business rules, and any other relevant information.
    A clearly defined scope to reduce stakeholder, business, and compliance conflicts.
    Impact analysis of changes to the current organizational assets.

    Source: Requirement Engineering Magazine, 2017.

    A case study in creating an asset repository

    Industry: Anonymous Organization in the Government sector
    Source: Interview

    Challenge

    A large government organization faced a challenge with managing requirements, processes, and project artifacts with any consistency.

    Historically, their documentation was lacking, with multiple versions existing in email sent folders and manila folders no one could find. Confirming the current state at any given time meant the heavy lift of re-documenting and validating, so that effort was avoided for an excessive period.

    Then there was a request for audit and compliance, to review their existing documentation practices. With nothing concrete to show, drastic recommendations were made to ensure this practice would end.

    Solution

    A small but effective team was created to compile and (if not available) document all existing project and product documentation, including processes, requirements, artifacts, business cases, etc.

    A single repository was built and demonstrated to key stakeholders to ensure it would satisfy the needs of the audit and compliance group.

    Result

    A single source of truth for the organization, which was;

    • Accessible (view access to the entire organization).
    • Transparent (anyone could see and understand the process and requirements as intended).
    • A baseline for continuous improvement, as it was clear what the one defined "best way" was.
    • Current, where no one retained current documentation outside of this library.

    3.3.1 Discuss your current perspectives on requirements as assets

    Estimated time: 30 Minutes

    1. Gather all relevant stakeholder to share perspectives on the use of requirements as assets, historically in the organization.
    2. Have a team member facilitate the session. It is optional to document the findings.
    3. After looking at the historical use of requirements as assets, discuss the potential uses, benefits, and drawbacks of managing as assets in the target state.

    Input

    • Participant knowledge and experience

    Output

    • A shared perspective and history on requirements as assets

    Materials

    • A method for data capture (optional)

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Apply changes to baseline documentation

    Baseline + Release Changes = New Baseline

    • Start from baseline documentation dramatically to reduce cost and risk
    • Treat all scope as changes to baseline requirements
    • Sum of changes in the release scope
    • Sum of changes and original baseline becomes the new baseline
    • May take additional time and effort to maintain accurate baseline

    What is the right tool?

    While an Excel spreadsheet is great to start off, its limitations will become apparent as your product delivery process becomes more complex. Look at these solutions to continue your journey in managing your Agile requirements:

    Step 3.4

    Define Your Requirements Change Management Plan

    Activities

    3.4.1 Triage your requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • An approach for determining the appropriate level of governance over changes to requirements.

    Expect and embrace change

    In Agile development, change is expected and embraced. Instead of trying to rigidly follow a plan that may become outdated, Agile teams focus on regularly reassessing their priorities and adapting their plans accordingly. This means that the requirements can change often, and it's important for the team to have a process in place for managing these changes.

    A common approach to managing change in Agile is to use a technique called "backlog refinement." Where previously we populated our backlog with requirements to get them ready for development and deployment, this involves regularly reviewing and updating the list of work to be done. The team will prioritize the items on the evolving backlog, and the prioritized items will be worked on during the next sprint. This allows the team to quickly respond to changes in requirements and stay focused on the most important work.

    Another key aspect of managing change in Agile is effective communication. The team should have regular meetings, such as daily stand-up meetings or weekly sprint planning meetings, to discuss any changes in requirements and ensure that everyone is on the same page.

    Best practices in change and backlog refinement

    Communicate

    Clearly communicate your change process, criteria, and any techniques, tools, and templates that are part of your approach.

    Understand impacts/risks

    Maintain consistent control and communication and ensure that an impact assessment is completed. This is key to managing risks.

    Leverage tools

    Leverage tools when you have them available. This could be a Requirements Management system, a defect/change log, or even by turning on "track changes" in your documents.

    Cross-reference

    For every change, define the source of the change, the reason for the change, key dates for decisions, and any supporting documentation.

    Communicate the reason, and stay on message throughout the change

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message: a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state and makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff. They create the change vision with staff to build ownership and commitment.

    • The change message should:
    • Explain why the change is needed.
    • Summarize the things that will stay the same.
    • Highlight the things that will be left behind.
    • Emphasize the things that are being changed.
    • Explain how the change will be implemented.
    • Address how the change will affect the various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss staff's role in making the change successful.

    The five elements of communicating the reason for the change:

    An image of a cycle, including the five elements for communicating the reason for change.  these include: What will the role be for each department and individual?; What is the change?; Why are we doing it?; How are we going to go about it?; How long will it take us?

    How to make the management of changes more effective

    Key decisions and considerations

    How will changes to requirements be codified?
    How will intake happen?

    • What is the submission process?
    • Who has approval to submit?
    • What information is needed to submit a request?

    How will potential changes be triaged and evaluated?

    • What criteria will be used to assess the impact and urgency of the potential change?
    • How will you treat material and non-material changes?

    What is the review and approval process?

    • How will acceptance or rejection status be communicated to the submitter?

    3.4.1 Triage Your requirements

    An image of an inverted triangle, with the top being labeled: No Material Impact, the middle being labeled: Material impact; and the bottom being labeled: Governance Impact.  To the right of the image, are text boxes elaborating on each heading.

    If there's no material impact, update and move on

    An image of an inverted triangle, with the top being labeled: No Material Impact, the middle being labeled: Material impact; and the bottom being labeled: Governance Impact. To the right of the image, is a cycle including the following terms: Validate change; Update requirements; Track change (log); Package and communicate

    Material changes require oversight and approval

    An image of an inverted triangle, with the top being labeled: No Material Impact, the middle being labeled: Material impact; and the bottom being labeled: Governance Impact. To the right of the image, is a cycle including the following terms: Define impact; Revise; Change control needed?; Implement change.

    Planning Your Next Steps

    Phase 4

    Planning Your Next Steps

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Confirm the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Completing Your Agile Requirements Playbook
    • EXERCISE: Capability Gap List

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Managing Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Step 4.1

    Preparing New Ways of Working

    Activities

    4.1.1 Define your communication plan

    Planning Your Next Steps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Recognize the changes required on the team and within the broader organization, to bring stakeholders on board.

    How we do requirements work will change

    • Team formation and interaction
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication
    • The timing and sequencing of their work
    • Decision-making
    • Documentation
    • Dealing with change

    As a result, you'll need to focus on;

    Emphasizing flexibility: In Agile organizations, there is a greater emphasis on flexibility and the ability to adapt to change. This means that requirements may evolve over time and may not be fully defined at the beginning of the project.
    Enabling continuous delivery: Agile organizations often use continuous delivery methods, which means that new features and functionality are delivered to users on a regular basis. This requires a more iterative approach to requirements management, as new requirements may be identified and prioritized during the delivery process.
    Enhancing collaboration and communication: Agile organizations place a greater emphasis on collaboration and communication between team members, stakeholders, and customers.
    Developing a user-centered approach: Agile organizations often take a user-centered approach to requirements gathering, which means that the needs and goals of the end-user are prioritized.

    Change within the team, and in the broader organization

    How to build an effective blend Agile and requirements management

    Within the team

    • Meetings should happen as needed
    • Handoffs should be clear and concise
    • Interactions should add value
    • Stand-ups should similarly add value, and shouldn't be for status updates

    Within the organization

    • PMO inclusion, to ensure alignment across the organization
    • Business/Operating areas, to recognize what they are committing to for time, resources, etc.
    • Finance, for how your project or product is funded
    • Governance and oversight, to ensure velocity is maintained

    "Whether in an Agile environment or not, collaboration and relationships are still required and important…how you collaborate, communicate, and how you build relationships are key."
    - Paula Bell, CEO, Paula A. Bell Consulting

    Get stakeholders on board with Agile requirements

    1. Stakeholder feedback and management support are key components of successful Agile requirements.
    2. Stakeholders can see a project's progression and provide critical feedback about its success at critical milestones.
    3. Management helps teams succeed by trusting them to complete projects with business value at top of mind and by removing impediments that are inhibiting their productivity.
    4. Agile will bring a new mindset and significant amounts of people, process, and technology changes that stakeholders and management may not be accustomed to. Working through these issues in requirements management enables a smoother rollout.
    5. Management will play a key role in ensuring long-term Agile requirements success and ultimately rolling it out to the rest of the organization.
    6. The value of leadership involvement has not changed even though responsibilities will. The day-to-day involvement in projects will change but continual feedback will ultimately dictate the success or failure of a project.

    4.1.1 Define your communication plan

    Estimated time: 60 Minutes

      1. Gather all relevant stakeholder to create a communication plan for project or product stakeholders.
      2. Have a team member facilitate the session.
      3. Identify
      4. ;
        1. Each stakeholder
        2. The nature of information they are interested in
        3. The channel or medium best to communicate with them
        4. The frequency of communication
      5. (Optional) Consider validating the results with the stakeholders, if not present.
      6. Document the results in the Agile Requirements Workbook and include in Agile Requirements Playbook.
      7. Revisit as needed, whether at the beginning of a new initiative, or over time, to ensure the content is still valid.

    Input

    • Participant knowledge and experience

    Output

    • A plan for communicating with stakeholders

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team

    Step 4.2

    Develop a Roadmap for Next Steps

    Activities

    4.2.1 Develop your Agile requirements action plan

    4.2.2 Prioritize with now, next, later

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A comprehensive and prioritized list of opportunities and improvements to be made to mature the Agile requirements practice.

    Planning Your Next Steps

    Identify opportunities to improve and close gaps

    Maturing at multiple levels

    With a mindset of continuous improvement, there is always some way we can get better.

    As you mature your Agile requirements practice, recognize that those gaps for improvement can come from multiple levels, from the organizational down to the individual.

    Each level will bring challenges and opportunities.

    The organization

    • Organizational culture
    • Organizational behavior
    • Political will
    • Unsupportive stakeholders

    The team

    • Current ways of working
    • Team standards, norms and values

    The individual

    • Practitioner skills
    • Practitioner experience
    • Level of training received

    Make sure your organization is ready to transition to Agile requirements management

    A cycle is depicted, with the following Terms: Learning; Automation; Integrated teams; Metrics and governance; Culture.

    Learning:

    Agile is a radical change in how people work
    and think. Structured, facilitated learning is required throughout the transformation to
    help leaders and practitioners go from

    doing Agile to being Agile.

    Automation:

    While Agile is tool-agnostic at its roots, Agile work management tools and DevOps inspired SDLC tools that have become a key part of Agile practices.

    Integrated Teams:


    While temporary project teams can get some benefits from Agile, standing, self-organizing teams that cross business, delivery, and operations are essential to gain the full benefits of Agile.

    Metrics and Governance:

    Successful Agile implementations
    require the disciplined use

    of delivery and operations
    metrics that support governance focused on developing better teams.

    Culture:

    Agile teams believe that value is best created by standing, self-organizing cross-functional teams who deliver sustainably in frequent,
    short increments supported by leaders
    who coach them through challenges.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Agile gaps may only have a short-term, perceived benefit. For example, coding without a team mindset can allow for maximum speed to market for a seasoned developer. Post-deployment maintenance initiatives, however, often lock the single developer as no one else understands the rationale for the decisions that were made.

    4.2.1 Develop your Agile requirements action plan

    Estimated time: 60 Minutes

    1. Gather all relevant stakeholder to create a road map and action plan for requirements management.
    2. Have a team member facilitate the session using the results of the Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment.
    3. Identify gaps from current to future state and brainstorm possible actions that can be taken to address those gaps. Resist the urge to analyze or discuss the feasibility of each idea at this stage. The intent is idea generation.
    4. When the group has exhausted all ideas, the facilitator should group like ideas together, with support from participants. Discuss any ideas that are unclear or ambiguous.
    5. Document the results in the Agile Requirements Workbook.

    Note: the feasibility and timing of the ideas will happen in the following "Now, Next, Later" exercise.

    Prioritize your roadmap

    Taking steps to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    An image of the Now; Next; Later technique.

    The "Now, Next, Later" technique is a method for prioritizing and planning improvements or tasks. This involves breaking down a list of tasks or improvements into three categories:

    • "Now" tasks are those that must be completed immediately. These tasks are usually urgent or critical, and they must be completed to keep the project or organization running smoothly.
    • "Next" tasks are those that should be completed soon. These tasks are not as critical as "now" tasks, but they are still important and should be tackled relatively soon.
    • "Later" tasks are those that can be completed later. These tasks are less critical and can be deferred without causing major problems.

    By using this technique, you can prioritize and plan the most important tasks first, while also allowing for flexibility and the ability to adjust plans as necessary.
    This process also helps you get a clear picture on what needs to be done first and what can be done later. This way you can work on the most important things first, and keep track of what you need to do next, for keeping the development/improvement process smooth and efficient.

    Monitor your progress

    Monitoring progress is important in achieving your target state. Be deliberate with your actions, to continue to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    As you navigate toward your target state, continue to monitor your progress, your successes, and your challenges. As your Agile requirements practice matures, you should see improvements in the stated metrics below.

    Establish a cadence to review these metrics, as well as how you are progressing on your roadmap, against the plan.

    This is not about adding work, but rather, about ensuring you're heading in the right direction; finding the balance in your Agile requirements practice.

    Metric
    Team satisfaction (%) Expect team satisfaction to increase as a result of clearer role delineation and value contribution.
    Stakeholder satisfaction (%) Expect stakeholder satisfaction to similarly increase, as requirements quality increases, bringing increased value.
    Requirements rework Measures the quality of requirements from your Agile projects. Expect that the requirements rework will decrease, in terms of volume/frequency.
    Cost of documentation Quantifies the cost of documentation, including elicitation, analysis, validation, presentation, and management.
    Time to delivery Balancing metric. We don't want improvements in other at the expense of time to delivery.

    Appendix

    Research Contributors and Experts

    This is a picture of Emal Bariali

    Emal Bariali
    Business Architect & Business Analyst
    Bariali Consulting

    Emal Bariali is a Senior Business Analyst and Business Architect with 17 years of experience, executing nearly 20 projects. He has experience in both waterfall and Agile methodologies and has delivered solutions in a variety of forms, including custom builds and turnkey projects. He holds a Master's degree in Information Systems from the University of Toronto, a Bachelor's degree in Information Technology from York University, and a post-diploma in Software & Database Development from Seneca College.

    This is a picture of Paula Bell

    Paula Bell
    Paula A. Bell Consulting, LLC

    Paula Bell is the CEO of Paula A Bell Consulting, LLC. She is a Business Analyst, Leadership and Career Development coach, consultant, speaker, and author with 21+ years of experience in corporate America in project roles including business analyst, requirements manager, business initiatives manager, business process quality manager, technical writer, project manager, developer, test lead, and implementation lead. Paula has experience in a variety of industries including media, courts, manufacturing, and financial. Paula has led multiple highly-visible multi-million-dollar technology and business projects to create solutions to transform businesses as either a consultant, senior business analyst, or manager.

    Currently she is Director of Operations for Bridging the Gap, where she oversees the entire operation and their main flagship certification program.

    This is a picture of Ryan Folster

    Ryan Folster
    Consulting Services Manager, Business Analysis
    Dimension Data

    Ryan Folster is a Business Analyst Lead and Product Professional from Johannesburg, South Africa. His strong focus on innovation and his involvement in the business analysis community have seen Ryan develop professionally from a small company, serving a small number of users, to large multi-national organizations. Having merged into business analysis through the business domain, Ryan has developed a firm grounding and provides context to the methodologies applied to clients and projects he is working on. Ryan has gained exposure to the Human Resources, Asset Management, and Financial Services sectors, working on projects that span from Enterprise Line of Business Software to BI and Compliance.

    Ryan is also heavily involved in the local chapter of IIBA®; having previously served as the chapter president, he currently serves as a non-executive board member. Ryan is passionate about the role a Business Analyst plays within an organization and is a firm believer that the role will develop further in the future and become a crucial aspect of any successful business.

    This is a picture of Filip Hendrickx

    Filip Hendrickx
    Innovating BA, Visiting Professor @ VUB
    altershape

    Filip loves bridging business analysis and innovation and mixes both in his work as speaker, trainer, coach, and consultant.

    As co-founder of the BA & Beyond Conference and IIBA Brussels Chapter president, Filip helps support the BA profession and grow the BA community in and around Belgium. For these activities, Filip received the 2022 IIBA® EMEA Region Volunteer of the Year Award.

    Together with Ian Richards, Filip is the author ofBrainy Glue, a business novel on business analysis, innovation and change. Filip is also co-author of the BCS book Digital Product Management and Cycles, a book, method and toolkit enabling faster innovation.

    This is a picture of Fabricio Laguna

    Fabricio Laguna
    Professional Speaker, Consultant, and Trainer
    TheBrazilianBA.com

    Fabrício Laguna, aka The Brazilian BA, is the main reference on business analysis in Brazil. Author and producer of videos, articles, classes, lectures, and playful content, he can explain complex things in a simple and easy-to-understand way. IIBA Brazil Chapter president between 2012-2022. CBAP, AAC, CPOA, PMP, MBA. Consultant and instructor for more than 25 years working with business analysis, methodology, solution development, systems analysis, project management, business architecture, and systems architecture. His online courses are approved by students from 65 countries.

    This is a picture of Ryland Leyton

    Ryland Leyton
    Business Analyst and Agile Coach
    Independent Consultant

    Ryland Leyton, CBAP, PMP, CSM, is an avid Agile advocate and coach, business analyst, author, speaker, and educator. He has worked in the technology sector since 1998, starting off with database and web programming, gradually moving through project management and finding his passion in the BA and Agile fields. He has been a core team member of the IIBA Extension to the BABOK and the IIBA Agile Analysis Certification. Ryland has written popular books on agility, business analysis, and career. He can be reached at www.RylandLeyton.com.

    This is a picture of Steve Jones

    Steve Jones
    Supervisor, Market Support Business Analysis
    ISO New England

    Steve is a passionate analyst and BA manager with more than 20 years of experience in improving processes, services and software, working across all areas of software development lifecycle, business change and business analysis. He rejoices in solving complex business problems and increasing process reproducibility and compliance through the application of business analysis tools and techniques.

    Steve is currently serving as VP of Education for IIBA Hartford. He is a CBAP, certified SAFe Product Owner/Product Manager, Six Sigma Green Belt, and holds an MS in Information Management and Communications.

    This is a picture of Angela Wick

    Angela Wick
    Founder
    BA-Squared and BA-Cube

    Founder of BA-Squared and BA-Cube.com, Angela is passionate about teaching practical, modern product ownership and BA skills. With over 20 years' experience she takes BA skills to the next level and into the future!
    Angela is also a LinkedIn Learning instructor on Agile product ownership and business analysis, an IC-Agile Authorized Trainer, Product Owner and BA highly-rated trainer, highly-rated speaker, sought-after workshop facilitator, and contributor to many industry publications, including:

    • IIBA BABOK v3 Core Team, leading author on the BABOK v3
    • Expert Reviewer, IIBA Agile Extension to the BABOK
    • PMI BA Practice Guide – Expert Reviewer
    • PMI Requirements Management Practice Guide – Expert Reviewer
    • IIBA Competency Model – Lead Author and Team Lead, V1, V2, and V3.

    This is a picture of Rachael Wilterdink

    Rachael Wilterdink
    Principal Consultant
    Infotech Enterprises

    Rachael Wilterdink is a Principal Consultant with Infotech Enterprises. With over 25 years of IT experience, she holds multiple business analysis and Agile certifications. As a consultant, Rachael has served clients in the financial, retail, manufacturing, healthcare, government, non-profit, and insurance industries. Giving back to the professional community, Ms. Wilterdink served on the boards of her local IIBA® and PMI® chapters. As a passionate public speaker, Rachael presents various topics at conferences and user groups across the country and the world. Rachael is also the author of the popular eBook "40 Agile Transformation Pain Points (and how to avoid or manage them)."

    Bibliography

    "2021 Business Agility Report: Rising to the Challenge." Business Agility, 2021. Accessed 13 June 2022.
    Axure. "The Pitfalls of Agile and How We Got Here". Axure. Accessed 14 November 2022.
    Beck, Kent, et al. "Manifesto for Agile Software Development." Agilemanifesto. 2001.
    Brock, Jon, et al. "Large-Scale IT Projects: From Nightmare to Value Creation." BCG, 25 May 2015.
    Bryar, Colin and Bill Carr. "Have We Taken Agile Too Far?" Harvard Business Review, 9 April 2021. Accessed 11 November, 2022.
    Clarke, Thomas. "When Agile Isn't Responsive to Business Goals" RCG Global Services, Accessed 14 November 2022.
    Digital.ai "The 15th State of Agile Report". Digital.ai. Accessed 21 November 2022.
    Hackshall, Robin. "Product Backlog Refinement." Scrum Alliance. 9 Oct. 2014.
    Hartman, Bob. "New to Agile? INVEST in good user stories." Agile For All.
    IAG Consulting. "Business Analysis Benchmark: Full Report." IAG Consulting, 2009.
    Karlsson, Johan. "Backlog Grooming: Must-Know Tips for High-Value Products." Perforce. 18 May 2018
    KPMG. Agile Transformation (2019 Survey on Agility). KPMG. Accessed November 29.
    Laguna, Fabricio "REQM guidance matrix: A framework to drive requirements management", Requirements Engineering Magazine. 12 September 2017. Accessed 10 November 2022.
    Miller, G. J. (2013). Agile problems, challenges, & failures. Paper presented at PMI® Global Congress 2013—North America, New Orleans, LA. Newtown Square, PA: Project Management Institute.
    Product Management: MoSCoW Prioritization." ProductPlan, n.d. Web.
    Podeswa, Howard "The Business Case for Agile Business Analysis" Requirements Engineering Magazine. 21 February 2017. Accessed 7 November 2022.
    PPM Express. "Why Projects Fail: Business Analysis is the Key". PPM Express. Accessed 16 November 2022.
    Reifer, Donald J. "Quantitative Analysis of Agile Methods Study: Twelve Major Findings." InfoQ, 6 February, 2017.
    Royce, Dr. Winston W. "Managing the Development of Large Software Systems." Scf.usc.edu. 1970. (royce1970.pdf (usc.edu))
    Rubin, Kenneth S. Essential Scrum: A Practical Guide to the Most Popular Agile Process. Pearson Education. 2012.
    Singer, Michael. "15+ Surprising Agile Statistics: Everything You Need To Know About Agile Management". Enterprise Apps Today. 22 August 2022.
    The Standish Group. The Chaos Report, 2015. The Standish Group.

    Where do I go next?

    Improve Requirements Gathering

    Back to basics: great products are built on great requirements.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    Requirements for Small and Medium Enterprises

    Right-size the guidelines of your requirements gathering process.

    Implement Agile Practices that Work

    Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

    Create an Agile-Friendly Gating and Governance Model

    Use Info-Tech's Agile Gating Framework as a guide to gating your Agile projects following a "trust but verify" approach.

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Create a Work-From-Anywhere Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}323|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 33 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

    Work-from-anywhere isn’t going anywhere. During the initial rush to remote work, tech debt was highlighted and the business lost faith in IT. IT now needs to:

    • Rebuild trust with the CXO.
    • Identify gaps created from the COVID-19 rush to remote work.
    • Identify how IT can better support remote workers.

    IT went through an initial crunch to enable remote work. It’s time to be proactive and learn from our mistakes.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • It’s not about embracing the new normal; it’s about resiliency and long-term success. Your strategy needs to not only provide short-term operational value but also make the organization more resilient for the unknown risks of tomorrow.
    • The nature of work has fundamentally changed. IT departments must ensure service continuity, not for how the company worked in 2019, but for how the company is working now and will be working tomorrow.
    • Ensure short-term survival. Don’t focus on becoming an innovator until you are no longer stuck in firefighting.
    • Aim for near-term innovation. Once you’re a trusted operator, become a business partner by helping the business better adapt business processes and operations to work-from-anywhere.

    Impact and Result

    Follow these steps to build a work-from-anywhere strategy that resonates with the business:

    • Identify a vision that aligns with business goals.
    • Design the work-from-anywhere value proposition for critical business roles.
    • Benchmark your current maturity.
    • Build a roadmap for bridging the gap.

    Benefit employees’ remote working experience while ensuring that IT heads in a strategic direction.

    Create a Work-From-Anywhere Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create a work-from-anywhere strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define a target state

    Identify a vision that aligns with business goals, not for how the company worked in 2019, but for how the company is working now and will be working tomorrow.

    • Work-From-Anywhere Strategy Template
    • Work-From-Anywhere Value Proposition Template

    2. Analyze current fitness

    Don’t focus on becoming an innovator until you are no longer stuck in firefighting mode.

    3. Build a roadmap for improving enterprise apps

    Use these blueprints to improve your enterprise app capabilities for work-from-anywhere.

    • Microsoft Teams Cookbook – Sections 1-2
    • Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools – Phases 1-3
    • Adapt Your Customer Experience Strategy to Successfully Weather COVID-19 Storyboard
    • The Rapid Application Selection Framework Deck

    4. Build a roadmap for improving strategy, people & leadership

    Use these blueprints to improve IT’s strategy, people & leadership capabilities for work-from-anywhere.

    • Define Your Digital Business Strategy – Phases 1-4
    • Training Deck: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams
    • Sustain Work-From-Home in the New Normal Storyboard
    • Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT – Phases 1-3
    • Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic Storyboard
    • Adapt Your Onboarding Process to a Virtual Environment Storyboard
    • Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home Storyboard
    • The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday Storyboard

    5. Build a roadmap for improving infrastructure & operations

    Use these blueprints to improve infrastructure & operations capabilities for work-from-anywhere.

    • Stabilize Infrastructure & Operations During Work-From-Anywhere – Phases 1-3
    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phases 1-5
    • Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan Storyboard
    • Build a Digital Workspace Strategy – Phases 1-3

    6. Build a roadmap for improving IT security & compliance capabilities

    Use these blueprints to improve IT security & compliance capabilities for work-from-anywhere.

    • Cybersecurity Priorities in Times of Pandemic Storyboard
    • Reinforce End-User Security Awareness During Your COVID-19 Response Storyboard

    Infographic

    Workshop: Create a Work-From-Anywhere Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define a Target State

    The Purpose

    Define the direction of your work-from-anywhere strategy and roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Base your decisions on senior leadership and user needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify drivers, benefits, and challenges.

    1.2 Perform a goals cascade to align benefits to business needs.

    1.3 Define a vision and success metrics.

    1.4 Define the value IT brings to work-from-anywhere.

    Outputs

    Desired benefits for work-from-anywhere

    Vision statement

    Mission statement

    Success metrics

    Value propositions for in-scope user groups

    2 Review In-Scope Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Focus on value. Ensure that major applications and IT capabilities will relieve employees’ pains and provide them with gains.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn from past mistakes and successes.

    Increase adoption of resulting initiatives.

    Activities

    2.1 Review work-from-anywhere framework and identify capability gaps.

    2.2 Review diagnostic results to identify satisfaction gaps.

    2.3 Record improvement opportunities for each capability.

    2.4 Identify deliverables and opportunities to provide value for each.

    2.5 Identify constraints faced by each capability.

    Outputs

    SWOT assessment of work-from-anywhere capabilities

    Projects and initiatives to improve capabilities

    Deliverables and opportunities to provide value for each capability

    Constraints with each capability

    3 Build the Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build a short-term plan that allows you to iterate on your existing strengths and provide early value to your users.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Provide early value to address operational pain points.

    Build a plan to provide near-term innovation and business value.

    Activities

    3.1 Organize initiatives into phases.

    3.2 Identify tasks for short-term initiatives.

    3.3 Estimate effort with Scrum Poker.

    3.4 Build a timeline and tie phases to desired business benefits.

    Outputs

    Prioritized list of initiatives and phases

    Profiles for short-term initiatives

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}602|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Train & Develop
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • 52% of small business owners agree that labor quality is their most important problem, and 76% of executives expect the talent market to get even more challenging.
    • The problem? You can't compete on salary, training budgets are slim, you need people skilled in all areas, and even one resignation represents a large part of your workforce.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The usual, reactive approach to workforce management is risky:
      • Optimizing tactics helps you hire faster, train more, and negotiate better contracts.
      • But fulfilling needs as they arise costs more, has greater risk of failure, and leaves you unprepared for future needs.
    • In a small enterprise where every resource counts, in which one hire represents 10% of your workforce, it is essential to get it right.

    Impact and Result

    • Workforce planning helps you anticipate future needs.
    • More lead time means better decisions at lower cost.
    • Small Enterprises benefit most, since every resource counts.

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management Deck – Find out why workforce planning is critical for small enterprises.

    Use this storyboard to lay the foundation of people and resources management practices in your small enterprise IT department.

    • The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management – Phases 1-3

    2. Workforce Planning Workbook – Use the tool to successfully complete all of the activities required to define and estimate your workforce needs for the future.

    Use these concise exercises to analyze your department’s talent current and future needs and create a skill sourcing strategy to fill the gaps.

    • Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises

    3. Knowledge Transfer Tools – Use these templates to identify knowledge to be transferred.

    Work through an activity to discover key knowledge held by an employee and create a plan to transfer that knowledge to a successor.

    • IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    4. Development Planning Tools – Use these tools to determine priority development competencies.

    Assess employees’ development needs and draft a development plan that fits with key organizational priorities.

    • IT Competency Library
    • Leadership Competencies Workbook
    • IT Employee Career Development Workbook
    • Individual Competency Development Plan
    • Learning Methods Catalog for IT Employees

    Infographic

    Workshop: The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay Your Foundations

    The Purpose

    Set project direction and analyze workforce needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Planful needs analysis ensures future workforce supports organizational goals.

    Activities

    1.1 Set workforce planning goals and success metrics.

    1.2 Identify key roles and competency gaps.

    1.3 Conduct a risk analysis to identify future needs.

    1.4 Determine readiness of internal successors.

    Outputs

    Work with the leadership team to:

    Extract key business priorities.

    Set your goals.

    Assess workforce needs.

    2 Create Your Workforce Plan

    The Purpose

    Conduct a skill sourcing analysis, and determine competencies to develop internally.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A careful analysis ensures skills are being sourced in the most efficient way, and internal development is highly aligned with organizational objectives.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine your skill sourcing route.

    2.2 Determine priority competencies for development.

    Outputs

    Create a workforce plan.

    2.Determine guidelines for employee development.

    3 Plan Knowledge Transfer

    The Purpose

    Discover knowledge to be transferred, and build a transfer plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure key knowledge is not lost in the event of a departure.

    Activities

    3.1 Discover knowledge to be transferred.

    3.2 Identify the optimal knowledge transfer methods.

    3.3 Create a knowledge transfer plan.

    Outputs

    Discover tacit and explicit knowledge.

    Create a knowledge transfer roadmap.

    4 Plan Employee Development

    The Purpose

    Create a development plan for all staff.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A well-structured development plan helps engage and retain employees while driving organizational objectives.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify target competencies & draft development goals

    4.2 Select development activities and schedule check-ins.

    4.3 Build manager coaching skills.

    Outputs

    Assess employees.

    Prioritize development objectives.

    Plan development activities.

    Build management skills.

    Further reading

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Quickly start getting the right people, with the right skills, at the right time

    Is this research right for you?

    Research Navigation

    Managing the people in your department is essential, whether you have three employees or 300. Depending on your available time, resources, and current workforce management maturity, you may choose to focus on the overall essentials, or dive deep into particular areas of talent management. Use the questions below to help guide you to the right Info-Tech resources that best align with your current needs.

    Question If you answered "no" If you answered "yes"

    Does your IT department have fewer than 15 employees, and is your organization's revenue less than $25 million (USD)?

    Review Info-Tech's archive of research for mid-sized and large enterprise clients.

    Follow the guidance in this blueprint.

    Does your organization require a more rigorous and customizable approach to workforce management?

    Follow the guidance in this blueprint.

    Review Info-Tech's archive of research for mid-sized and large enterprise clients.

    Analyst Perspective

    Workforce planning is even more important for small enterprises than large organizations.

    It can be tempting to think of workforce planning as a bureaucratic exercise reserved for the largest and most formal of organizations. But workforce planning is never more important than in small enterprises, where every individual accounts for a significant portion of your overall productivity.

    Without workforce planning, organizations find themselves in reactive mode, hiring new staff as the need arises. They often pay a premium for having to fill a position quickly or suffer productivity losses when a critical role goes unexpectedly vacant.

    A workforce plan helps you anticipate these challenges, come up with solutions to mitigate them, and allocate resources for the most impact, which means a greater return on your workforce investment in the long run.

    This blueprint will help you accomplish this quickly and efficiently. It will also provide you with the essential development and knowledge transfer tools to put your plan into action.

    This is a picture of Jane Kouptsova

    Jane Kouptsova
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    52% of small business owners agree that labor quality is their most important problem.1

    Almost half of all small businesses face difficulty due to staff turnover.

    76% of executives expect the talent market to get even more challenging.2

    Common Obstacles

    76% of executives expect workforce planning to become a top strategic priority for their organization.2

    But…

    30% of small businesses do not have a formal HR function.3

    Small business leaders are often left at a disadvantage for hiring and retaining the best talent, and they face even more difficulty due to a lack of support from HR.

    Small enterprises must solve the strategic workforce planning problem, but they cannot invest the same time or resources that large enterprises have at their disposal.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    A modular, lightweight approach to workforce planning and talent management, tailored to small enterprises

    Clear activities that guide your team to decisive action

    Founded on your IT strategy, ensuring you have not just good people, but the right people

    Concise yet comprehensive, covering the entire workforce lifecycle from competency planning to development to succession planning and reskilling

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every resource counts. When one hire represents 10% of your workforce, it is essential to get it right.

    1CNBC & SurveyMonkey. 2ADP. 3Clutch.

    Labor quality is small enterprise's biggest challenge

    The key to solving it is strategic workforce planning

    Strategic workforce planning (SWP) is a systematic process designed to identify and address gaps in today's workforce, including pinpointing the human capital needs of the future.

    Linking workforce planning with strategic planning ensures that you have the right people in the right positions, in the right places, at the right time, with the knowledge, skills, and attributes to deliver on strategic business goals.

    SWP helps you understand the makeup of your current workforce and how well prepared it is or isn't (as the case may be) to meet future IT requirements. By identifying capability gaps early, CIOs can prepare to train or develop current staff and minimize the need for severance payouts and hiring costs, while providing clear career paths to retain high performers.

    52%

    of small business owners agree that labor quality is their most important problem.1

    30%

    30% of small businesses have no formal HR function.2

    76%

    of senior leaders expect workforce planning to become the top strategic challenge for their organization.3

    1CNBC & SurveyMonkey. 2Clutch. 3ADP.

    Workforce planning matters more for small enterprises

    You know that staffing mistakes can cost your department dearly. But did you know the costs are greater for small enterprises?

    The price of losing an individual goes beyond the cost of hiring a replacement, which can range from 0.5 to 2 times that employee's salary (Gallup, 2019). Additional costs include loss of productivity, business knowledge, and team morale.

    This is a major challenge for large organizations, but the threat is even greater for small enterprises, where a single individual accounts for a large proportion of IT's productivity. Losing one of a team of 10 means 10% of your total output. If that individual was solely responsible for a critical function, your department now faces a significant gap in its capabilities. And the effect on morale is much greater when everyone is on the same close-knit team.

    And the threat continues when the staffing error causes you not to lose a valuable employee, but to hire the wrong one instead. When a single individual makes up a large percentage of your workforce, as happens on small teams, the effects of talent management errors are magnified.

    A group of 100 triangles is shown above a group of 10 triangles. In each group, one triangle is colored orange, and the rest are colored blue.

    Info-Tech Insight

    One bad hire on a team of 100 is a problem. One bad hire on a team of 10 is a disaster.

    This is an image of Info-Tech's small enterprise guide o people and resource management.

    Blueprint pre-step: Determine your starting point

    People and Resource management is essential for any organization. But depending on your needs, you may want to start at different stages of the process. Use this slide as a quick reference for how the activities in this blueprint fit together, how they relate to other workforce management resources, and the best starting point for you.

    Your IT strategy is an essential input to your workforce plan. It defines your destination, while your workforce is the vessel that carries you there. Ensure you have at least an informal strategy for your department before making major workforce changes, or review Info-Tech's guidance on IT strategy.

    This blueprint covers the parts of workforce management that occur to some extent in every organization:

    • Workforce planning
    • Knowledge transfer
    • Development planning

    You may additionally want to seek guidance on contract and vendor management, if you outsource some part of your workload outside your core IT staff.

    Track metrics

    Consider these example metrics for tracking people and resource management success

    Project Outcome Metric Baseline Target
    Reduced training costs Average cost of training (including facilitation, materials, facilities, equipment, etc.) per IT employee
    Reduced number of overtime hours worked Average hours billed at overtime rate per IT employee
    Reduced length of hiring period Average number of days between job ad posting and new hire start date
    Reduced number of project cancellations due to lack of capacity Total of number of projects cancelled per year
    Increased number of projects completed per year (project throughput) Total number of project completions per year
    Greater net recruitment rate Number of new recruits/Number of terminations and departures
    Reduced turnover and replacement costs Total costs associated with replacing an employee, including position coverage cost, training costs, and productivity loss
    Reduced voluntary turnover rate Number of voluntary departures/Total number of employees
    Reduced productivity loss following a departure or termination Team or role performance metrics (varies by role) vs. one year ago

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1:

    Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Assess current workforce needs.

    Call #4: Determine skill sourcing route.

    Call #6:

    Identify knowledge to be transferred.

    Call #8: Draft development goals and select activities.

    Call #3: Explore internal successor readiness.

    Call #5:Set priority development competencies.

    Call #7: Create a knowledge transfer plan.

    Call #9: Build managers' coaching & feedback skills.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 4 to 6 calls over the course of 3 to 4 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    1.Lay Your Foundations 2. Create Your Workforce Plan 3. Plan Knowledge Transfer 3. Plan Employee Development Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)
    Activities

    1.1 Set workforce planning goals and success metrics

    1.2 Identify key roles and competency gaps

    1.3 Conduct a risk analysis to identify future needs

    1.4 Determine readiness of internal successors

    1.5 Determine your skill sourcing route

    1.6 Determine priority competencies for development

    3.1 Discover knowledge to be transferred

    3.2 Identify the optimal knowledge transfer methods

    3.3 Create a knowledge transfer plan

    4.1 Identify target competencies & draft development goals

    4.2 Select development activities and schedule check-ins

    4.3 Build manager coaching skills

    Outcomes

    Work with the leadership team to:

    1. Extract key business priorities
    2. Set your goals
    3. Assess workforce needs

    Work with the leadership team to:

    1. Create a workforce plan
    2. Determine guidelines for employee development

    Work with staff and managers to:

    1. Discover tacit and explicit knowledge
    2. Create a knowledge transfer roadmap

    Work with staff and managers to:

    1. Assess employees
    2. Prioritize development objectives
    3. Plan development activities
    4. Build management skills

    Info-Tech analysts complete:

    1. Workshop report
    2. Workforce plan record
    3. Action plan

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Each onsite day is structured with group working sessions from 9-11 a.m. and 1:30-3:30 p.m. and includes Open Analyst Timeslots, where our facilitators are available to expand on scheduled activities, capture and compile workshop results, or review additional components from our comprehensive approach.

    This is a calendar showing days 1-4, and times from 8am-5pm

    Phase 1

    Workforce Planning

    Workforce Planning

    Knowledge Transfer

    Development Planning

    Identify needs, goals, metrics, and skill gaps.

    Select a skill sourcing strategy.

    Discover critical knowledge.

    Select knowledge transfer methods.

    Identify priority competencies.

    Assess employees.

    Draft development goals.

    Provide coaching & feedback.

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Phase Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Managers
    • Human resource partner (if applicable)

    Additional Resources

    Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises

    Phase pre-step: Gather resources and participants

    1. Ensure you have an up-to-date IT strategy. If you don't have a formal strategy in place, ensure you are aware of the main organizational objectives for the next 3-5 years. Connect with executive stakeholders if necessary to confirm this information.
      If you are not sure of the organizational direction for this time frame, we recommend you consult Info-Tech's material on IT strategy first, to ensure your workforce plan is fully positioned to deliver value to the organization.
    2. Consult with your IT team and gather any documentation pertaining to current roles and skills. Examples include an org chart, job descriptions, a list of current tasks performed/required, a list of company competencies, and a list of outsourced projects.
    3. Gather the right participants. Most of the decisions in this section will be made by senior leadership, but you will also need input from front-line managers. Ensure they are available on an as-needed basis. If your organization has an HR partner, it can also be helpful to involve them in your workforce planning process.

    Formal workforce planning benefits even small teams

    Strategic workforce planning (SWP) is a systematic process designed to identify and address gaps in your workforce today and plan for the human capital needs of the future.

    Your workforce plan is an extension of your IT strategy, ensuring that you have the right people in the right positions, in the right places, at the right time, with the knowledge, skills, and attributes to deliver on strategic business goals.

    SWP helps you understand the makeup of your current workforce and how well prepared it is or isn't (as the case may be) to meet future IT requirements. By identifying capability gaps early, CIOs can prepare to train or develop current staff and minimize the need for severance payouts and hiring costs, while providing clear career paths to retain high performers.

    The smaller the business, the more impact each individual's performance has on the overall success of the organization. When a given role is occupied by a single individual, the organization's performance in that function is determined wholly by one employee. Creating a workforce plan for a small team may seem excessive, but it ensures your organization is not unexpectedly hit with a critical competency gap.

    Right-size your workforce planning process to the size of your enterprise

    Small organizations are 2.2 times more likely to have effective workforce planning processes.1 Be mindful of the opportunities and risks for organizations of your size as you execute the project. How you build your workforce plan will not change drastically based on the size of your organization; however, the scope of your initiative, the size of your team, and the tactics you employ may vary.

    Small Organization

    Medium Organization

    Large Organization

    Project Opportunities

    • Project scope is much more manageable.
    • Communication and planning can be more manageable.
    • Fewer roles can clarify prioritization needs and promotability.
    • Project scope is more manageable.
    • Moderate budget for workforce planning initiatives is needed.
    • Communication and enforcement is easier.
    • Larger candidate pool to pull from.
    • Greater career path options for staff.
    • In-house expertise may be available

    Project Risks

    • Limited resources and time to execute the project.
    • In-house expertise is unlikely.
    • Competencies may be informal and not documented.
    • Limited overlap in responsibilities, resulting in fewer redundancies.
    • Limited staff with experience for the project.
    • Workforce planning may be a lower priority and difficult to generate buy-in for.
    • Requires more staff to manage workforce plan and execute initiatives.
    • Less collective knowledge on staff strengths may make career planning difficult.
    • Geographically dispersed business units make collaboration and communication difficult.

    1 McLean & Company Trends Report 2014

    1.1 Set project outcomes and success metrics

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm key pain points that the IT department experiences due to the lack of a workforce plan. Ask them to consider turnover, retention, training, and talent acquisition.
    2. Discuss any key themes that arise and brainstorm your desired project outcomes. Keep a record of these for future reference and to aid in stakeholder communication.
    3. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      1. For each desired outcome, consider what metrics you could use to track progress. Keep your initial list of pain points in mind as you brainstorm metrics.
      2. Write each of the metric suggestions on a whiteboard and agree to track 3-5 metrics. Set targets for each metric. Consider the effort required to obtain and track the metric, as well as its reliability.
      3. Assign one individual for tracking the selected metrics. Following the meeting, that individual will be responsible for identifying the baseline and targets, and reporting on metrics progress.

    Input

    Output

    • List of workforce data available
    • List of workforce metrics to track the workforce plan's impact

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Leadership team
    • Human resource partner (if applicable)

    1.2 Identify key roles and competency gaps

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, identify all strategic, core, and supporting roles by reviewing the organizational chart:
      1. Strategic: What are the roles that must be filled by top performers and cannot be left vacant in order to meet strategic objectives?
      2. Core: What roles are important to drive operational excellence?
      3. Supporting: What roles are required for day-to-day work, but are low risk if the role is vacant for a period of time?
    2. Working individually or in small groups, have managers for each identified role define the level of competence required for the job. Consider factors such as:
      1. The difficulty or criticality of the tasks being performed
      2. The impact on job outcomes
      3. The impact on the performance of other employees
      4. The consequence of errors if the competency is not present
      5. How frequently the competency is used on the job
      6. Whether the competency is required when the job starts or can be learned or acquired on the job within the first six months
    3. Continue working individually and rate the level of proficiency of the current incumbent.
    4. As a group, review the assessment and make any adjustments.

    Record this information in the Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises.

    Download the Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises

    1.2 Identify key roles and competency gaps

    Input Output
    • Org chart, job descriptions, list of current tasks performed/required, list of company competencies
    • List of competency gaps for key roles
    Materials Participants
    • Leadership team
    • Managers

    Conduct a risk-of-departure analysis

    A risk-of-departure analysis helps you plan for future talent needs by identifying which employees are most likely to leave the organization (or their current role).

    A risk analysis takes into account two factors: an employee's risk for departure and the impact of departure:

    Employees are high risk for departure if they:

    • Have specialized or in-demand skills (tenured employees are more likely to have this than recent hires)
    • Are nearing retirement
    • Have expressed career aspirations that extend outside your organization
    • Have hit a career development ceiling at your organization
    • Are disengaged
    • Are actively job searching
    • Are facing performance issues or dismissal OR promotion into a new role

    Employees are low risk for departure if they:

    • Are a new hire or new to their role
    • Are highly engaged
    • Have high potential
    • Are 5-10 years out from retirement

    If you are not sure where an employee stands with respect to leaving the organization, consider having a development conversation with them. In the meantime, consider them at medium risk for departure.

    To estimate the impact of departure, consider:

    • The effect of losing the employee in the near- and medium-term, including:
      • Impact on the organization, department, unit/team and projects
      • The cost (in time, resources, and productivity loss) to replace the individual
      • The readiness of internal successors for the role

    1.3 Conduct a risk analysis to identify future needs

    1-3 hours

    Preparation: Your estimation of whether key employees are at risk of leaving the organization will depend on what you know of them objectively (skills, age), as well as what you learn from development conversations. Ensure you collect all relevant information prior to conducting this activity. You may need to speak with employees' direct managers beforehand or include them in the discussion.

    • As a group, list all your current employees, and using the previous slide for guidance, rank them on two parameters: risk of departure and impact of departure, on a scale of low to high. Record your conclusions in a chart like the one on the right. (For a more in-depth risk assessment, use the "Risk Assessment Results" tab of the Key Roles Succession Planning Tool.)
    • Employees that fall in the "Mitigate" quadrant represent key at-risk roles with at least moderate risk and moderate impact. These are your succession planning priorities. Add these roles to your list of key roles and competency gaps, and include them in your workforce planning analysis.
    • Employees that fall in the "Manage" quadrants represent secondary priorities, which should be looked at if there is capacity after considering the "Mitigate" roles.

    Record this information in the Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises.

    This is an image of the Risk analysis for risk of departure to importance of departure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't be afraid to rank most or all your staff as "high impact of departure." In a small enterprise, every player counts, and you must plan accordingly.

    1.3 Conduct a risk analysis to identify future needs

    Input Output
    • Employee data on competencies, skills, certifications, and performance. Input from managers from informal development conversations.
    • A list of first- and second-priority at-risk roles to carry forward into a succession planning analysis
    Materials Participants
    • Leadership team
    • Managers

    Determine your skill sourcing route

    The characteristics of need steer hiring managers to a preferred choice, while the marketplace analysis will tell you the feasibility of each option.

    Sourcing Options

    Preferred Options

    Final Choice

    four blue circles

    A right facing arrow

    Two blue circles A right facing arrow One blue circle
    State of the Marketplace

    State of the Marketplace

    Urgency: How soon do we need this skill? What is the required time-to-value?

    Criticality: How critical, i.e. core to business goals, are the services or systems that this skill will support?

    Novelty: Is this skill brand new to our workforce?

    Availability: How often, and at what hours, will the skill be needed?

    Durability: For how long will this skill be needed? Just once, or indefinitely for regular operations?

    Scarcity: How popular or desirable is this skill? Do we have a large enough talent pool to draw from? What competition are we facing for top talent?

    Cost: How much will it cost to hire vs. contract vs. outsource vs. train this skill?

    Preparedness: Do we have internal resources available to cultivate this skill in house?

    1.4 Determine your skill sourcing route

    1-3 hours

    1. Identify the preferred sourcing method as a group, starting with the most critical or urgent skill need on your list. Use the characteristics of need to guide your discussion. If more than one option seems adequate, carry several over to the next step.
    2. Consider the marketplace factors applicable to the skill in question and use these to narrow down to one final sourcing decision.
      1. If it is not clear whether a suitable internal candidate is available or ready, refer to the next activity for a readiness assessment.
    3. Be sure to document the rationale supporting your decision. This will ensure the decision can be clearly communicated to any stakeholders, and that you can review on your decision-making process down the line.

    Record this information in the Workforce Planning Workbook for Small Enterprises.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider developing a pool of successors instead of pinning your hopes on just one person. A single pool of successors can be developed for either one key role that has specialized requirements or even multiple key roles that have generic requirements.

    Input

    Output

    • List of current and upcoming skill gaps
    • A sourcing decision for each skill

    Materials

    Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Human resource partner (if applicable)

    1.5 Determine readiness of internal successors

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, and ensuring you include the candidates' direct managers, identify potential successors for the first role on your list.
    2. Ask how effectively the potential successor would serve in the role today. Review the competencies for the key role in terms of:
      1. Relationship-building skills
      2. Business skills
      3. Technical skills
      4. Industry-specific skills or knowledge
    3. Determine what competencies the succession candidate currently has and what must be learned. Be sure you know whether the candidate is open to a career change. Don't assume – if this is not clear, have a development conversation to ensure everyone is on the same page.
    4. Finally, determine how difficult it will be for the successor to acquire missing skills or knowledge, whether the resources are available to provide the required development, and how long it will take to provide it.
    5. As a group, decide whether training an internal successor is a viable option for the role in question, considering the successor's readiness and the characteristics of need for the role. If a clear successor is not readily apparent, consider:
      1. If the development of the successor can be fast-tracked, or if some requirements can be deprioritized and the successor provided with temporary support from other employees.
      2. If the role in question is being discussed because the current incumbent is preparing to leave, consider negotiating an arrangement that extends the incumbent's employment tenure.
    6. Record the decision and repeat for the next role on your list.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A readiness assessment helps to define not just development needs, but also any risks around the organization's ability to fill a key role.

    Input

    Output

    • List of roles for which you are considering training internally
    • Job descriptions and competency requirements for the roles
    • List of roles for which internal successors are a viable option

    Materials

    Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Candidates' direct managers, if applicable

    Use alternative work arrangements to gain time to prepare successors

    Alternative work arrangements are critical tools that employers can use to achieve a mutually beneficial solution that mitigates the risk of loss associated with key roles.

    Alternative work arrangements not only support employees who want to keep working, but more importantly, they allow the business to retain employees that are needed in key roles who are departure risks due to retirement.

    Viewing retirement as a gradual process can help you slow down skill loss in your organization and ensure you have sufficient time to train successors. Retiring workers are becoming increasingly open to alternative work arrangements. Among employed workers aged 50-75, more than half planned to continue working part-time after retirement.
    Source: Statistics Canada.

    Flexible work options are the most used form of alternative work arrangement

    A bar graph showing the percent of organizations who implemented alternate work arrangement, for Flexible work options; Contract based work; Part time roles; Graduated retirement programs; Part year jobs or job sharing; Increased PTO for employees over a certain age.

    Source: McLean & Company, N=44

    Choose the alternative work arrangement that works best for you and the employee

    Alternative Work Arrangement Description Ideal Use Caveats
    Flexible work options Employees work the same number of hours but have flexibility in when and where they work (e.g. from home, evenings). Employees who work fairly independently with no or few direct reports. Employee may become isolated or disconnected, impeding knowledge transfer methods that require interaction or one-on-one time.
    Contract-based work Working for a defined period of time on a specific project on a non-salaried or non-wage basis. Project-oriented work that requires specialized knowledge or skills. Available work may be sporadic or specific projects more intensive than the employee wants. Knowledge transfer must be built into the contractual arrangement.
    Part-time roles Half days or a certain number of days per week; indefinite with no end date in mind. Employees whose roles can be readily narrowed and upon whom people and critical processes are not dependent. It may be difficult to break a traditionally full-time job down into a part-time role given the size and nature of associated tasks.
    Graduated retirement Retiring employee has a set retirement date, gradually reducing hours worked per week over time. Roles where a successor has been identified and is available to work alongside the incumbent in an overlapping capacity while he or she learns. The role may only require a single FTE, and the organization may not be able to afford the amount of redundancy inherent in this arrangement.

    Choose the alternative work arrangement that works best for you and the employee

    Alternative Work Arrangement Description Ideal Use Caveats
    Part-year jobs or job sharing Working part of the year and having the rest of the year off, unpaid. Project-oriented work where ongoing external relationships do not need to be maintained. The employee is unavailable for knowledge transfer activities for a large portion of the year. Another risk is that the employee may opt not to return at the end of the extended time off with little notice.
    Increased paid time off Additional vacation days upon reaching a certain age. Best used as recognition or reward for long-term service. This may be a particularly useful retention incentive in organizations that do not offer pension plans. The company may not be able to financially afford to pay for such extensive time off. If the role incumbent is the only one in the role, this may mean crucial work is not being done.
    Altered roles Concentration of a job description on fewer tasks that allows the employee to focus on his or her specific expertise. Roles where a successor has been identified and is available to work alongside the incumbent, with the incumbent's new role highly focused on mentoring. The role may only require a single FTE, and the organization may not be able to afford the amount of redundancy inherent in this arrangement.

    Phase 2

    Knowledge Transfer

    Workforce Planning

    Knowledge Transfer

    Development Planning

    Identify needs, goals, metrics, and skill gaps.

    Select a skill sourcing strategy.

    Discover critical knowledge.

    Select knowledge transfer methods.

    Identify priority competencies.

    Assess employees.

    Draft development goals.

    Provide coaching & feedback.

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Phase Participants

    • Leadership/management team
    • Incumbent & successor

    Additional Resources

    IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Determine your skill sourcing route

    Knowledge transfer plans have three key components that you need to complete for each knowledge source:

    Define what knowledge needs to be transferred

    Each knowledge source has unique information which needs to be transferred. Chances are you don't know what you don't know. The first step is therefore to interview knowledge sources to find out.

    Identify the knowledge receiver

    Depending on who the information is going to, the knowledge transfer tactic you employ will differ. Before deciding on the knowledge receiver and tactic, consider three key factors:

    • How will this knowledge be used in the future?
    • What is the next career step for the knowledge receiver?
    • Are the receiver and the source going to be in the same location?

    Identify which knowledge transfer tactics you will use for each knowledge asset

    Not all tactics are good in every situation. Always keep the "knowledge type" (information, process, skills, and expertise), knowledge sources' engagement level, and the knowledge receiver in mind as you select tactics.

    Don't miss tacit knowledge

    There are two basic types of knowledge: "explicit" and "tacit." Ensure you capture both to get a well-rounded overview of the role.

    Explicit Tacit
    • "What knowledge" – knowledge can be articulated, codified, and easily communicated.
    • Easily explained and captured – documents, memos, speeches, books, manuals, process diagrams, facts, etc.
    • Learn through reading or being told.
    • "How knowledge" – intangible knowledge from an individual's experience that is more from the process of learning, understanding, and applying information (insights, judgments, and intuition).
    • Hard to verbalize, and difficult to capture and quantify.
    • Learn through observation, imitation, and practice.

    Types of explicit knowledge

    Types of tacit knowledge

    Information Process Skills Expertise

    Specialized technical knowledge.

    Unique design capabilities/methods/models.

    Legacy systems, details, passwords.

    Special formulas/algorithms/ techniques/contacts.

    • Specialized research & development processes.
    • Proprietary production processes.
    • Decision-making processes.
    • Legacy systems.
    • Variations from documented processes.
    • Techniques for executing on processes.
    • Relationship management.
    • Competencies built through deliberate practice enabling someone to act effectively.
    • Company history and values.
    • Relationships with key stakeholders.
    • Tips and tricks.
    • Competitor history and differentiators.

    e.g. Knowing the lyrics to a song, building a bike, knowing the alphabet, watching a YouTube video on karate.

    e.g. Playing the piano, riding a bike, reading or speaking a language, earning a black belt in karate.

    Embed your knowledge transfer methods into day-to-day practice

    Multiple methods should be used to transfer as much of a person's knowledge as possible, and mentoring should always be one of them. Select your method according to the following criteria:

    Info-Tech Insight

    The more integrated knowledge transfer is in day-to-day activities, the more likely it is to be successful, and the lower the time cost. This is because real learning is happening at the same time real work is being accomplished.

    Type of Knowledge

    • Tacit knowledge transfer methods are often informal and interactive:
      • Mentoring
      • Multi-generational work teams
      • Networks and communities
      • Job shadowing
    • Explicit knowledge transfer methods tend to be more formal and one way:
      • Formal documentation of processes and best practices
      • Self-published knowledge bases
      • Formal training sessions
      • Formal interviews

    Incumbent's Preference/Successor's Preference

    Ensure you consult the employees, and their direct manager, on the way they are best prepared to teach and learn. Some examples of preferences include:

    1. Prefer traditional classroom learning, augmented with participation, critical reflection, and feedback.
    2. May get bored during formal training sessions and retain more during job shadowing.
    3. Prefer to be self-directed or self-paced, and highly receptive to e-learning and media.
    4. Prefer informal, incidental learning, tend to go immediately to technology or direct access to people. May have a short attention span and be motivated by instant results.
    5. May be uncomfortable with blogs and wikis, but comfortable with SharePoint.

    Cost

    Consider costs beyond the monetary. Some methods require an investment in time (e.g. mentoring), while others require an investment in technology (e.g. knowledge bases).

    The good news is that many supporting technologies may already exist in your organization or can be acquired for free.

    Methods that cost time may be difficult to get underway since employees may feel they don't have the time or must change the way they work.

    2.1 Create a knowledge transfer plan

    1-3 hours

    1. Working together with the current incumbent, brainstorm the key information pertaining to the role that you want to pass on to the successor. Use the IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template to ensure you don't miss anything.
      • Consider key knowledge areas, including:
        • Specialized technical knowledge.
        • Specialized research and development processes.
        • Unique design capabilities/methods/models.
        • Special formulas/algorithms/techniques.
        • Proprietary production processes.
        • Decision-making criteria.
        • Innovative sales methods.
        • Knowledge about key customers.
        • Relationships with key stakeholders.
        • Company history and values.
      • Ask questions of both sources and receivers of knowledge to help determine the best knowledge transfer methods to use.
        • What is the nature of the knowledge? Explicit or tacit?
        • Why is it important to transfer?
        • How will the knowledge be used?
        • What knowledge is critical for success?
        • How will the users find and access it?
        • How will it be maintained and remain relevant and usable?
        • What are the existing knowledge pathways or networks connecting sources to recipients?
    2. Once the knowledge has been identified, use the information on the following slides to decide on the most appropriate methods. Be sure to consult the incumbent and successor on their preferences.
    3. Prioritize your list of knowledge transfer activities. It's important not to try to do too much too quickly. Focus on some quick wins and leverage the success of these initiatives to drive the project forward. Follow these steps as a guide:
      1. Take an inventory of all the tactics and techniques which you plan to employ. Eliminate redundancies where possible.
      2. Start your implementation with your highest risk role or knowledge item, using explicit knowledge transfer tactics. Interviews, use cases, and process mapping will give you some quick wins and will help gain momentum for the project.
      3. Then move forward to other tactics, the majority of which will require training and process design. Pick 1-2 other key tactics you would like to employ and build those out. For tactics that require resources or monetary investment, start with those that can be reused for multiple roles.

    Record your plan in the IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template.

    Download the IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    Download the Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Info-Tech Insight

    Wherever possible, ask employees about their personal learning styles. It's likely that a collaborative compromise will have to be struck for knowledge transfer to work well.

    2.1 Create a knowledge transfer plan

    Input

    Output

    • List of roles for which you need to transfer knowledge
    • Prioritized list of knowledge items and chosen transfer method

    Materials

    Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Incumbent
    • Successor

    Not every transfer method is effective for every type of knowledge

    Knowledge Type
    Tactic Explicit Tacit
    Information Process Skills Expertise
    Interviews Very Strong Strong Strong Strong
    Process Mapping Medium Very Strong Very Weak Very Weak
    Use Cases Medium Very Strong Very Weak Very Weak
    Job Shadow Very Weak Medium Very Strong Very Strong
    Peer Assist Strong Medium Very Strong Very Strong
    Action Review Medium Medium Strong Strong
    Mentoring Weak Weak Strong Very Strong
    Transition Workshop Strong Strong Strong Weak
    Storytelling Weak Weak Strong Very Strong
    Job Share Weak Weak Very Strong Very Strong
    Communities of Practice Strong Weak Very Strong Very Strong

    This table shows the relative strengths and weaknesses of each knowledge transfer tactic compared against four different knowledge types.

    Not all techniques are effective for all types of knowledge; it is important to use a healthy mixture of techniques to optimize effectiveness.

    Employees' engagement can impact knowledge transfer effectiveness

    Level of Engagement
    Tactic Disengaged/ Indifferent Almost Engaged - Engaged
    Interviews Yes Yes
    Process Mapping Yes Yes
    Use Cases Yes Yes
    Job Shadow No Yes
    Peer Assist Yes Yes
    Action Review Yes Yes
    Mentoring No Yes
    Transition Workshop Yes Yes
    Storytelling No Yes
    Job Share Maybe Yes
    Communities of Practice Maybe Yes

    When considering which tactics to employ, it's important to consider the knowledge holder's level of engagement. Employees who you would identify as being disengaged may not make good candidates for job shadowing, mentoring, or other tactics where they are required to do additional work or are asked to influence others.

    Knowledge transfer can be controversial for all employees as it can cause feelings of job insecurity. It's essential that motivations for knowledge transfer are communicated effectively.

    Pay particular attention to your communication style with disengaged and indifferent employees, communicate frequently, and tie communication back to what's in it for them.

    Putting disengaged employees in a position where they are mentoring others can be a risk, as their negativity could influence others not to participate, or it could negate the work you're doing to create a positive knowledge sharing culture.

    Employees' engagement can impact knowledge transfer effectiveness

    Effort by Stakeholder

    Tactic

    Business Analyst

    IT Manager

    Knowledge Holder

    Knowledge Receiver

    Interviews

    These tactics require the least amount of effort, especially for organizations that are already using these tactics for a traditional requirements gathering process.

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Process Mapping

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Use Cases

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Job Shadow

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Peer Assist

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Action Review

    These tactics generally require more involvement from IT management and the BA in tandem for preparation. They will also require ongoing effort for all stakeholders. It's important to gain stakeholder buy-in as it is key for success.

    Low

    Medium

    Medium

    Low

    Mentoring

    Medium

    High

    High

    Medium

    Transition Workshop

    Medium

    Low

    Medium

    Low

    Storytelling

    Medium

    Medium

    Low

    Low

    Job Share

    Medium

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    Communities of Practice

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Phase 3

    Development Planning

    Workforce Planning

    Knowledge Transfer

    Development Planning

    Identify needs, goals, metrics, and skill gaps.

    Select a skill sourcing strategy.

    Discover critical knowledge.

    Select knowledge transfer methods.

    Identify priority competencies.

    Assess employees.

    Draft development goals.

    Provide coaching & feedback.

    The Small Enterprise Guide to People and Resource Management

    Phase Participants

    • Leadership team
    • Managers
    • Employees

    Additional Resources

    Effective development planning hinges on robust performance management

    Your performance management framework is rooted in organizational goals and defines what it means to do any given role well.

    Your organization's priority competencies are the knowledge, skills and attributes that enable an employee to do the job well.

    Each individual's development goals are then aimed at building these priority competencies.

    Mission Statement

    To be the world's leading manufacturer and distributor of widgets.

    Business Goal

    To increase annual revenue by 10%.

    IT Department Objective

    To ensure reliable communications infrastructure and efficient support for our sales and development teams.

    Individual Role Objective

    To decrease time to resolution of support requests by 10% while maintaining quality.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Without a performance management framework, your employees cannot align their development with the organization's goals. For detailed guidance, see Info-Tech's blueprint Setting Meaningful Employee Performance Measures.

    What is a competency?

    The term "competency" refers to the collection of knowledge, skills, and attributes an employee requires to do a job well.

    Often organizations have competency frameworks that consist of core, leadership, and functional competencies.

    Core competencies apply to every role in the organization. Typically, they are tied to organizational values and business mission and/or vision.

    Functional competencies are at the department, work group, or job role levels. They are a direct reflection of the function or type of work carried out.

    Leadership competencies generally apply only to people managers in the organization. Typically, they are tied to strategic goals in the short to medium term

    Generic Functional
    • Core
    • Leadership
    • IT
    • Finance
    • Sales
    • HR

    Use the SMART model to make sure goals are reasonable and attainable

    S

    Specific: Be specific about what you want to accomplish. Think about who needs to be involved, what you're trying to accomplish, and when the goal should be met.

    M

    Measurable: Set metrics that will help to determine whether the goal has been reached.

    A

    Achievable: Ensure that you have both the organizational resources and employee capability to accomplish the goal.

    R

    Relevant: Goals must align with broader business, department, and development goals in order to be meaningful.

    T

    Time-bound: Provide a target date to ensure the goal is achievable and provide motivation.

    Example goal:

    "Learn Excel this summer."

    Problems:

    Not specific enough, not measurable enough, nor time bound.

    Alternate SMART goal:

    "Consult with our Excel expert and take the lead on creating an Excel tool in August."

    3.2 Identify target competencies & draft development goals

    1 hour

    Pre-work: Employees should come to the career conversation having done some self-reflection. Use Info-Tech's IT Employee Career Development Workbook to help employees identify their career goals.

    1. Pre-work: Managers should gather any data they have on the employee's current proficiency at key competencies. Potential sources include task-based assessments, performance ratings, supervisor or peer feedback, and informal conversation.

      Prioritize competencies. Using your list of priority organizational competencies, work with your employees to help them identify two to four competencies to focus on developing now and in the future. Use the Individual Competency Development Plan template to document your assessment and prioritize competencies for development. Consider the following questions for guidance:
      1. Which competencies are needed in my current role that I do not have full proficiency in?
      2. Which competencies are related to both my career interests and the organization's priorities?
      3. Which competencies are related to each other and could be developed together or simultaneously?
    2. Draft goals. Ask your employee to create a list of multiple simple goals to develop the competencies they have selected to work on developing over the next year. Identifying multiple goals helps to break development down into manageable chunks. Ensure goals are concrete, for example, if the competency is "communication skills," your development goals could be "presentation skills" and "business writing."
    3. Review goals:
      1. Ask why these areas are important to the employee.
      2. Share your ideas and why it is important that the employee develop in the areas identified.
      3. Ensure that the goals are realistic. They should be stretch goals, but they must be achievable. Use the SMART framework on the previous slide for guidance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Lack of career development is the top reason employees leave organizations. Development activities need to work for both the organization and the employee's own development, and clearly link to advancing employees' careers either at the organization or beyond.

    Download the IT Employee Career Development Workbook

    Download the Individual Competency Development Plan

    3.2 Identify target competencies & draft development goals

    Input

    Output

    • Employee's career aspirations
    • List of priority organizational competencies
    • Assessment of employee's current proficiency
    • A list of concrete development goals

    Materials

    Participants

    • Employee
    • Direct manager

    Apply a blend of learning methods

    • Info-Tech recommends the 70-20-10 principle for learning and development, which places the greatest emphasis on learning by doing. This experiential learning is then supported by feedback from mentoring, training, and self-reflection.
    • Use the 70-20-10 principle as a guideline – the actual breakdown of your learning methods will need to be tailored to best suit your organization and the employee's goals.

    Spend development time and effort wisely:

    70%

    On providing challenging on-the-job opportunities

    20%

    On establishing opportunities for people to develop learning relationships with others, such as coaching and mentoring

    10%

    On formal learning and training programs

    Internal initiatives are a cost-effective development aid

    Internal Initiative

    What Is It?

    When to Use It

    Special Project

    Assignment outside of the scope of the day-to-day job (e.g. work with another team on a short-term initiative).

    As an opportunity to increase exposure and to expand skills beyond those required for the current job.

    Stretch Assignment

    The same projects that would normally be assigned, but in a shorter time frame or with a more challenging component.

    Employee is consistently meeting targets and you need to see what they're capable of.

    Training Others

    Training new or more junior employees on their position or a specific process.

    Employee wants to expand their role and responsibility and is proficient and positive.

    Team Lead On an Assignment

    Team lead for part of a project or new initiative.

    To prepare an employee for future leadership roles by increasing responsibility and developing basic managerial skills.

    Job Rotation

    A planned placement of employees across various roles in a department or organization for a set period of time.

    Employee is successfully meeting and/or exceeding job expectations in their current role.

    Incorporating a development objective into daily tasks

    What do we mean by incorporating into daily tasks?

    The next time you assign a project to an employee, you should also ask the employee to think about a development goal for the project. Try to link it back to their existing goals or have them document a new goal in their development plan.

    For example: A team of employees always divides their work in the same way. Their goal for their next project could be to change up the division of responsibility so they can learn each other's roles.

    Another example:

    "I'd like you to develop your ability to explain technical terms to a non-technical audience. I'd like you to sit down with the new employee who starts tomorrow and explain how to use all our software, getting them up and running."

    Info-Tech Insight

    Employees often don't realize that they are being developed. They either think they are being recognized for good work or they are resentful of the additional workload.

    You need to tell your employees that the activity you are asking them to do is intended to further their development.

    However, be careful not to sell mundane tasks as development opportunities – this is offensive and detrimental to engagement.

    Establish manager and employee accountability for following up

    Ensure that the employee makes progress in developing prioritized competencies by defining accountabilities:

    Tracking Progress

    Checking In

    Development Meetings

    Coaching & Feedback

    Employee accountability:

    • Employees need to keep track of what they learn.
    • Employees should take the time to reflect on their progress.

    Manager accountability:

    • Managers need to make the time for employees to reflect.

    Employee accountability:

    • Employees need to provide managers with updates and ask for help.

    Manager accountability:

    • Managers need to check in with employees to see if they need additional resources.

    Employee accountability:

    • Employees need to complete assessments again to determine whether they have made progress.

    Manager accountability:

    • Managers should schedule monthly meetings to discuss progress and identify next steps.

    Employee accountability:

    • Employees should ask their manager and colleagues for feedback after development activities.

    Manager accountability:

    • Managers can use both scheduled meetings and informal conversations to provide coaching and feedback to employees.

    3.3 Select development activities and schedule check-ins

    1-3 hours

    Pre-work: Employees should research potential development activities and come prepared with a range of suggestions.

    Pre-work: Managers should investigate options for employee development, such as internal training/practice opportunities for the employee's selected competencies and availability of training budget.

    1. Communicate your findings about internal opportunities and external training allowance to the employee. This can also be done prior to the meeting, to help guide the employee's own research. Address any questions or concerns.
    2. Review the employee's proposed list of activities, and identify priority ones based on:
      1. How effectively they support the development of priority competencies.
      2. How closely they match the employee's original goals.
      3. The learning methods they employ, and whether the chosen activities support a mix of different methods.
      4. The degree to which the employee will have a chance to practice new skills hands-on.
      5. The amount of time the activities require, balanced against the employee's work obligations.
    3. Guide the employee in selecting activities for the short and medium term. Establish an understanding that this list is tentative and subject to ongoing revision during future check-ins.
      1. If in doubt about whether the employee is over-committing, err on the side of fewer activities to start.
    4. Schedule a check-in for one month out to review progress and roadblocks, and to reaffirm priorities.
    5. Check-ins should be repeated regularly, typically once a month.

    Download the Learning Methods Catalog

    Info-Tech Insight

    Adopt a blended learning approach using a variety of techniques to effectively develop competencies. This will reinforce learning and accommodate different learning styles. See Info-Tech's Learning Methods Catalog for a description of popular experiential, relational, and formal learning methods.

    3.3 Select development activities and schedule check-ins

    Input

    Output

    • List of potential development activities (from employee)
    • List of organizational resources (from manager)
    • A selection of feasible development activities
    • Next check-in scheduled

    Materials

    Participants

    • Employee
    • Direct manager

    Tips for tricky conversations about development

    What to do if…

    Employees aren't interested in development:

    • They may have low aspiration for advancement.
    • Remind them about the importance of staying current in their role given increasing job requirements.
    • Explain that skill development will make their job easier and make them more successful at it; sell development as a quick and effective way to learn the skill.
    • Indicate your support and respond to concerns.

    Employees have greater aspiration than capability:

    • Explain that there are a number of skills and capabilities that they need to improve in order to move to the next level. If the specific skills were not discussed during the performance appraisal, do not hesitate to explain the improvements that you require.
    • Inform the employee that you want them to succeed and that by pushing too far and too fast they risk failure, which would not be beneficial to anyone.
    • Reinforce that they need to do their current job well before they can be considered for promotion.

    Employees are offended by your suggestions:

    • Try to understand why they are offended. Before moving forward, clarify whether they disagree with the need for development or the method by which you are recommending they be developed.
    • If it is because you told them they had development needs, then reiterate that this is about helping them to become better and that everyone has areas to develop.
    • If it is about the development method, discuss the different options, including the pros and cons of each.

    Coaching and feedback skills help managers guide employee development

    Coaching and providing feedback are often confused. Managers often believe they are coaching when they are just giving feedback. Learn the difference and apply the right approach for the right situation.

    What is coaching?

    A conversation in which a manager asks questions to guide employees to solve problems themselves.

    Coaching is:

    • Future-focused
    • Collaborative
    • Geared toward growth and development

    What is feedback?

    Information conveyed from the manager to the employee about their performance.

    Feedback is:

    • Past-focused
    • Prescriptive
    • Geared toward behavior and performance

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't forget to develop your managers! Ensure coaching, feedback, and management skills are part of your management team's development plan.

    Understand the foundations of coaching to provide effective development coaching:

    Knowledge Mindset Relationship
    • Understand what coaching is and how to apply it:
    • Identify when to use coaching, feedback, or other people management practices, and how to switch between them.
    • Know what coaching can and cannot accomplish.
    • When focusing on performance, guide an employee to solve problems related to their work. When focusing on development, guide an employee to reach their own development goals.
    • Adopt a coaching mindset by subscribing to the following beliefs:
    • Employees want to achieve higher performance and have the potential to do so.
    • Employees have a unique and valuable perspective to share of the challenges they face as well as the possible solutions.
    • Employees should be empowered to realize solutions themselves to motivate them in achieving goals.
    • Develop a relationship of trust between managers and employees:
    • Create an environment of psychological safety where employees feel safe to be open and honest.
    • Involve employees in decision making and inform employees often.
    • Invest in employees' success.
    • Give and expect candor.
    • Embrace failure.

    Apply the "4A" behavior-focused coaching model

    Using a model allows every manager, even those with little experience, to apply coaching best practices effectively.

    Actively Listen

    Ask

    Action Plan

    Adapt

    Engage with employees and their message, rather than just hearing their message.

    Key active listening behaviors:

    • Provide your undivided attention.
    • Observe both spoken words and body language.
    • Genuinely try to understand what the employee is saying.
    • Listen to what is being said, then paraphrase back what you heard.

    Ask thoughtful, powerful questions to learn more information and guide employees to uncover opportunities and/or solutions.

    Key asking behaviors:

    • Ask open-ended questions.
    • Ask questions to learn something you didn't already know.
    • Ask for reasoning (the why).
    • Ask "what else?"

    Hold employees and managers accountable for progress and results.

    During check-ins, review each development goal to ensure employees are meeting their targets.

    Key action planning behaviors:

    Adapt to individual employees and situations.

    Key adapting behaviors:

    • Recognize employees' unique characteristics.
    • Appreciate the situation at hand and change your behavior and communication in order to best support the individual employee.

    Use the following questions to have meaningful coaching conversations

    Opening Questions

    • What's on your mind?
    • Do you feel you've had a good week/month?
    • What is the ideal situation?
    • What else?

    Problem-Identifying Questions

    • What is most important here?
    • What is the challenge here for you?
    • What is the real challenge here for you?
    • What is getting in the way of you achieving your goal?

    Problem-Solving Questions

    • What are some of the options available?
    • What have you already tried to solve this problem? What worked? What didn't work?
    • Have you considered all the possibilities?
    • How can I help?

    Next-Steps Questions

    • What do you need to do, and when, to achieve your goal?
    • What resources are there to help you achieve your goal? This includes people, tools, or even resources outside our organization.
    • How will you know when you have achieved your goal? What does success look like?

    The purpose of asking questions is to guide the conversation and learn something you didn't already know. Choose the questions you ask based on the flow of the conversation and on what information you would like to uncover. Approach the answers you get with an open mind.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid the trap of "hidden agenda" questions, whose real purpose is to offer your own advice.

    Use the following approach to give effective feedback

    Provide the feedback in a timely manner

    • Plan the message you want to convey.
    • Provide feedback "just-in-time."
    • Ensure recipient is not preoccupied.
    • Try to balance the feedback; refer to successful as well as unsuccessful behavior.

    Communicate clearly, using specific examples and alternative behaviors

    • Feedback must be honest and helpful.
    • Be specific and give a recent example.
    • Be descriptive, not evaluative.
    • Relate feedback to behaviors that can be changed.
    • Give an alternative positive behavior.

    Confirm their agreement and understanding

    • Solicit their thoughts on the feedback.
    • Clarify if not understood; try another example.
    • Confirm recipient understands and accepts the feedback.

    Manager skill is crucial to employee development

    Development is a two-way street. This means that while employees are responsible for putting in the work, managers must enable their development with support and guidance. The latter is a skill, which managers must consciously cultivate.

    For more in-depth management skills development, see the Info-Tech "Build a Better Manager" training resources:

    Bibliography

    Anderson, Kelsie. "Is Your IT Department Prepared for the 4 Biggest Challenges of 2017?" 14 June 2017.
    Atkinson, Carol, and Peter Sandiford. "An Exploration of Older Worker Flexible Working Arrangements in Smaller Firms." Human Resource Management Journal, vol. 26, no. 1, 2016, pp. 12–28. Wiley Online Library.
    BasuMallick, Chiradeep. "Top 8 Best Practices for Employee Cross-Training." Spiceworks, 15 June 2020.
    Birol, Andy. "4 Ways You Can Succeed With a Staff That 'Wears Multiple Hats.'" The Business Journals, 26 Nov. 2013.
    Bleich, Corey. "6 Major Benefits To Cross-Training Employees." EdgePoint Learning, 5 Dec. 2018.
    Cancialosi, Chris. "Cross-Training: Your Best Defense Against Indispensable Employees." Forbes, 15 Sept. 2014.
    Cappelli, Peter, and Anna Tavis. "HR Goes Agile." Harvard Business Review, Mar. 2018.
    Chung, Kai Li, and Norma D'Annunzio-Green. "Talent Management Practices of SMEs in the Hospitality Sector: An Entrepreneurial Owner-Manager Perspective." Worldwide Hospitality and Tourism Themes, vol. 10, no. 4, Jan. 2018.
    Clarkson, Mary. Developing IT Staff: A Practical Approach. Springer Science & Business Media, 2012.
    "CNBC and SurveyMonkey Release Latest Small Business Survey Results." Momentive, 2019. Press Release. Accessed 6 Aug. 2020.
    Cselényi, Noémi. "Why Is It Important for Small Business Owners to Focus on Talent Management?" Jumpstart:HR | HR Outsourcing and Consulting for Small Businesses and Startups, 25 Mar. 2013.
    dsparks. "Top 10 IT Concerns for Small Businesses." Stratosphere Networks IT Support Blog - Chicago IT Support Technical Support, 16 May 2017.
    Duff, Jimi. "Why Small to Mid-Sized Businesses Need a System for Talent Management | Talent Management Blog | Saba Software." Saba, 17 Dec. 2018.
    Employment and Social Development Canada. "Age-Friendly Workplaces: Promoting Older Worker Participation." Government of Canada, 3 Oct. 2016.
    Exploring Workforce Planning. Accenture, 23 May 2017.
    "Five Major IT Challenges Facing Small and Medium-Sized Businesses." Advanced Network Systems. Accessed 25 June 2020.
    Harris, Evan. "IT Problems That Small Businesses Face." InhouseIT, 17 Aug. 2016.
    Heathfield, Susan. "What Every Manager Needs to Know About Succession Planning." Liveabout, 8 June 2020.
    ---. "Why Talent Management Is an Important Business Strategy." Liveabout, 29 Dec. 2019.
    Herbert, Chris. "The Top 5 Challenges Facing IT Departments in Mid-Sized Companies." ExpertIP, 25 June 2012.
    How Smaller Organizations Can Use Talent Management to Accelerate Growth. Avilar. Accessed 25 June 2020.
    Krishnan, TN, and Hugh Scullion. "Talent Management and Dynamic View of Talent in Small and Medium Enterprises." Human Resource Management Review, vol. 27, no. 3, Sept. 2017, pp. 431–41.
    Mann Jackson, Nancy. "Strategic Workforce Planning for Midsized Businesses." ADP, 6 Feb. 2017.
    McCandless, Karen. "A Beginner's Guide to Strategic Talent Management (2020)." The Blueprint, 26 Feb. 2020.
    McFeely, Shane, and Ben Wigert. "This Fixable Problem Costs U.S. Businesses $1 Trillion." Gallup.com, 13 Mar. 2019.
    Mihelič, Katarina Katja. Global Talent Management Best Practices for SMEs. Jan. 2020.
    Mohsin, Maryam. 10 Small Business Statistics You Need to Know in 2020 [May 2020]. 4 May 2020.
    Ramadan, Wael H., and B. Eng. The Influence of Talent Management on Sustainable Competitive Advantage of Small and Medium Sized Establishments. 2012, p. 15.
    Ready, Douglas A., et al. "Building a Game-Changing Talent Strategy." Harvard Business Review, no. January–February 2014, Jan. 2014.
    Reh, John. "Cross-Training Employees Strengthens Engagement and Performance." Liveabout, May 2019.
    Rennie, Michael, et al. McKinsey on Organization: Agility and Organization Design. McKinsey, May 2016.
    Roddy, Seamus. "The State of Small Business Employee Benefits in 2019." Clutch, 18 Apr. 2019.
    SHRM. "Developing Employee Career Paths and Ladders." SHRM, 28 Feb. 2020.
    Strandberg, Coro. Sustainability Talent Management: The New Business Imperative. Strandberg Consulting, Apr. 2015.
    Talent Management for Small & Medium-Size Businesses. Success Factors. Accessed 25 June 2020.
    "Top 10 IT Challenges Facing Small Business in 2019." Your IT Department, 8 Jan. 2019.
    "Why You Need Workforce Planning." Workforce.com, 24 Oct. 2022.

    Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}322|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Businesses prioritize speed to market over secure coding and testing practices in the development lifecycle. As a result, vulnerabilities exist naturally in software.
    • To improve overall system security, organizations are leveraging external security researchers to identify and remedy vulnerabilities, so as to mitigate the overall security risk.
    • A primary challenge to developing a coordinated vulnerability disclosure (CVD) program is designing repeatable procedures and scoping the program to the organization’s technical capacity.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Having a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program is likely to be tomorrow’s law. With pressures from federal government agencies and recommendations from best-practice frameworks, it is likely that a CVD will be mandated in the future to encourage organizations to be equipped and prepared to respond to externally disclosed vulnerabilities.
    • CVD programs such as bug bounty and vulnerability disclosure programs (VDPs) may reward differently, but they have the same underlying goals. As a result, you don't need dramatically different process documentation.

    Impact and Result

    • Design a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program that reflects business, customer, and regulatory obligations.
    • Develop a program that aligns your resources with the scale of the coordinated vulnerability disclosure program.
    • Follow Info-Tech’s vulnerability disclosure methodology by leveraging our policy, procedure, and workflow templates to get you started.

    Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should design a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess goals

    Define the business, customer, and compliance alignment for the coordinated vulnerability disclosure program.

    • Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program – Phase 1: Assess Goals
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    2. Formalize the program

    Equip your organization for coordinated vulnerability disclosure with formal documentation of policies and processes.

    • Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program – Phase 2: Formalize the Program
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Policy
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Plan
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Workflow (Visio)
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Workflow (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Tech Trend Update: If Digital Ethics Then Data Equity

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}100|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    COVID-19 is driving the need for quick technology solutions, including some that require personal data collection. Organizations are uncertain about the right thing to do.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Data equity approaches personal data like money, putting the owner in control and helping to protect against unethical systems.

    Impact and Result

    There are some key considerations for businesses grappling with digital ethics:

    1. If partnering, set expectations.
    2. If building, invite criticism.
    3. If imbuing authority, consider the most vulnerable.

    Tech Trend Update: If Digital Ethics Then Data Equity Research & Tools

    Tech Trend Update: If Digital Ethics Then Data Equity

    Understand how to use data equity as an ethical guidepost to create technology that will benefit everyone.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Tech Trend Update: If Digital Ethics Then Data Equity Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}593|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
    • Managers are responsible for driving the best performance out of their staff while still developing individuals professionally.
    • Micromanaging tasks is an ineffective, inefficient way to get things done and keep employees engaged at the same time.
    • Both managers and employees view goal setting as a cumbersome process that never materializes in day-to-day work.
    • Without a consistent and agile goal-setting environment that pervades every day, managers risk low productivity and disengaged employees.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Effective performance management occurs throughout the year, on a daily and weekly basis, not just at annual performance review time. Managers must embrace this reality and get into the habit of setting agile short-term goals to drive productivity.
    • Employee empowerment is one of the most significant contributors to employee engagement, which is a proven performance driver. Short-term goal setting, which is ultimately employee-owned, develops and nurtures a strong sense of employee empowerment.
    • Micromanaging employee tasks will get managers nowhere quickly. Putting in the effort to collaboratively define goals that benefit both the organization and the employee will pay off in the long run.
    • Goal setting should not be a cumbersome activity, but an agile, rolling habit that ensures employees are focused, supported, and given appropriate feedback to continue to drive performance.

    Impact and Result

    • Managers who have daily meetings to set goals are 17% more successful in terms of employee performance than managers who set goals annually.
    • Managers must be agile goal-setting role models, or risk over a third of their staff being confused about productivity expectations.
    • Managers that allow tracking of goals to be an inhibitor to goal setting are most likely to have a negative effect on employee performance success. In fact, tracking goals should not be a priority in the short-term.

    Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Learn the agile, short-term goal-setting process

    Implement agile goal setting with your team right away and drive performance.

    • Storyboard: Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance
    [infographic]

    Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}68|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $6,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 15 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Today’s customers expect a top-tier experience when interacting with businesses.
    • The advancements in IVR technology mean that IT departments are managing added complexity in drafting a strategy for a top-tier IVR approach.
    • Implementing best practices and the right enabling technology stack is critical to supporting world-class customer experience through IVR.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don’t assume that contact centers and IVR systems are relics of the past. Customers still look to phone calls as being the most effective way to get a fast answer.
    • Tailor your IVR system for your customers. There is no “one-size-fits-all” approach – understand your key customer demographics and support their experience by implementing the most effective strategies for them.
    • Don’t buy best of breed, buy best for you. Base your enabling technology selection on your requirements and use cases, not on the latest industry trends and developments.

    Impact and Result

    • Before selecting and deploying technology solutions, create a database of common customer pain points and FAQs to act as an outline for the call flow tree.
    • Understand and apply operational best practices, such as ensuring proper call menu organization and using self-service applications, to improve IVR metrics and, ultimately, the customer experience.
    • Understand emerging technologies and evolving trends in the IVR space, including natural language processing and integrating your IVR with other essential enterprise applications (e.g. customer relationship management platforms).

    Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Transformative IVR Experience Deck – A deck outlining the best strategies and enabling technologies to implement in your IVR approach to improve your customer experience.

    This storyboard offers insight into impactful strategies and beneficial enabling technologies to implement in your IVR approach to improve your customers’ experience and to reduce the load on your support staff. This deck outlines IT’s role in the IVR development process, offering insight into how to develop an effective IVR call flow and providing details on relevant enabling technologies to consider implementing to further improve your offering.

    • Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers – Phases 1-4

    2. IVR Call Flow Template – A template designed to help you build an effective call flow tree by providing further insight into how to better understand your customers.

    This template demonstrates an ideal IVR approach, outlining a sample call flow for a telecommunications company designed to meet the needs of a curated customer persona. Use this template to gain a better understanding of your own key customers and to construct your own call flow tree.

    • Create an IVR Call Flow That Empowers Your Customers
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers

    Learn the strategies that will allow you to develop an effective interactive voice response (IVR) framework that supports self-service and improves customer experience.

    Stop! Are you ready for this project?

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • Business analysts, application directors/managers, and customer service leaders tasked with developing and executing a technology enablement strategy for optimizing their contact center approach.
    • Any organization aiming to improve its customer experience by implementing a customer-centric approach to over-the-phone service via an IVR system.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Adopt the best strategies for outlining an effective IVR approach and for transforming an existing IVR system.
    • Improve customer experience and ultimately customer satisfaction by enabling you to create a more efficient IVR call flow tree.
    • Select the proper IVR strategies to focus on based on the maturity level of your organization's call center.
    • Review the "art of the possible" and learn of the latest developments in successful IVR execution.
    • Learn IT's role in developing a successful IVR system and in developing a technology strategy that optimizes your IVR approach.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Today's customers expect a top-tier experience when interacting with businesses.
    • The advancements in IVR technology mean that IT departments are managing added complexity in drafting a strategy for a top-tier IVR approach.
    • Implementing best practices and the right enabling technology stack is critical to supporting world-class customer experience through IVR.

    Common Obstacles

    • Many organizations do not have a clear understanding of customers' drivers for contacting their IVR.
    • As many contact centers look to improve the customer experience, the need for an impactful IVR system has markedly increased. The proliferation of recommendations for IVR best practices and related technologies has made it difficult to identify and implement the right approach.
    • With a growing number of IVR-related requests, IT must be prepared to speak intelligently about requirements and the "art of the possible."

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Before selecting and deploying technology solutions, create a database of common customer call drivers to act as an outline for the call flow tree.
    • Understand and apply operational best practices, such as ensuring proper call menu organization and using self-service applications, to improve IVR metrics and, ultimately, the customer experience.
    • Understand evolving trends and emerging technologies in the IVR space, including offering personalized service and using natural language processing/conversational AI.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Tailor your IVR system specifically for your customers. There is no one-size-fits-all approach. Understand your key customers and support their experience by implementing the most effective strategies for them.

    Voice is still the dominant way in which customers choose to receive support

    Despite the contrary beliefs that the preference for phone support and IVR systems is declining, studies have consistently shown that consumers still prefer receiving customer service over the phone.

    76%

    of customers prefer the "traditional" medium of phone calls to reach customer support agents.

    50%

    of customers across all age groups generally use the phone to contact customer support, making it the most-used customer service channel.

    Your IVR approach can make or break your customers' experience

    The feelings that customers are left with after interacting with contact centers and support lines has a major impact on their future purchase decisions

    Effective IVR systems provide customers with positive experiences, keeping them happy and satisfied. Poorly executed IVR systems leave customers feeling frustrated and contribute to an overall negative experience. Negative experiences with your IVR system could lead to your customers taking their business elsewhere.

    In fact, research by Haptik shows that an average of $262 per customer is lost each year due to poor IVR experiences ("7 Conversational IVR Trends for 2021 and Beyond," Haptik, 2021).

    50%

    of customers have abandoned their business transactions while dealing with an IVR system.

    Source: Vonage, 2020

    45%

    of customers will abandon a business altogether due to a poor IVR experience.

    Source: "7 Remarkable IVR Trends For the Year 2022 And Beyond," Haptik, 2021

    IVR systems only improve your customers' experience when done properly

    There are many common mistakes that organizations make when implementing their own IVR strategies:

    1. Offering too many menu options. IVR systems are supposed to allow customers to resolve their inquiries quickly, so it is integral that you organize your menu effectively. Less is more when it comes to your IVR call flow tree.
    2. A lack of self-service capabilities. IVR systems are meant to maximize customer service and improve the customer experience by offering self-service functionality. If resolutions for common issues can't be found through IVR, your return on investment (ROI) is limited.
    3. Having callers get stuck in an "IVR loop." Customers caught hearing the same information repeatedly will often abandon their call. Don't allow customers to get "tangled" in your call flow tree; always make human contact an option.
    4. Not offering personalized service. The inability to identify customers by their number or other identifying features leads to poor personalization and time wasted repeating information, contributing to an overall negative experience.
    5. Not updating the IVR system. By not taking advantage of new developments in IVR technology and by not using customer and employee feedback to upgrade your offering, you are missing out on the potential to improve your customers' experience. Complacency kills, and your organization will be at a competitive disadvantage because of it.

    Implement a transformative IVR approach that empowers your customers

    Call flow trees don't grow overnight; they require commitment, nurturing, and care

    1. Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree
      • Your call flow tree will only grow as strong as the roots allow it; begin beneath the surface by understanding the needs of your customers and the goals of your organization first, before building your initial IVR menu.
    2. Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out
      • Empower your customers by directing your call flow tree to self-service applications where possible and to live agents when necessary.
    3. Let Your Call Flow Tree Flourish
      • Integrate your IVR with other relevant business applications and apply technological developments that align with the needs of your customers and the goals of your organization.
    4. Keep Watering Your Call Flow Tree
      • Don't let your call flow tree die! Elicit feedback from relevant stakeholders and develop an iterative review cycle to identify and implement necessary changes to your call flow tree, ensuring continued growth.

    IT plays an integral role in supporting the IVR approach

    IT is responsible for providing technology enablement of the IVR strategy

    While IT may not be involved in organizing the call flow tree itself, their impact on an organization's IVR approach is undeniable. Not only will IT assist with the implementation and integration of your IVR system, they will also be responsible for maintaining the technology on an ongoing basis. As such, IT should be a part of your organization's software selection team, following Info-Tech's methodology for optimizing your software selection process.

    • With an understanding of the organization's customer experience management strategy and business goals, IT should be looked toward to:
    • Provide insight into the "art of the possible" with IVR systems.
    • Recommend enabling technologies relative to your call center's maturity (e.g. agent assist and natural language processing).
    • Outline integration capabilities with your existing application portfolio.
    • Highlight any security concerns.
    • Assist with vendor engagement.
    • Take part in stakeholder feedback groups, consulting with agents about their pain points and attempting to solve their problems.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

    Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out Let Your IVR Call Flow Tree Flourish Keep Watering Your Call Flow Tree

    Call #1: Introduce the project, scoping customer call drivers and defining metrics of success.

    Call #3: Discuss the importance of promoting self-service and how to improve call routing processes, assessing the final tiers of the IVR.

    Call #4: Discuss the benefits of integrating your IVR within your existing business architecture and using relevant enabling technologies.

    Call #5: Discuss how to elicit feedback from relevant stakeholders and develop an iterative IVR review cycle, wrapping up the project.

    Call #2: Begin assessing initial IVR structure.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series

    of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 5 to 7 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Understand your customers

    1.2 Develop goals for your IVR

    1.3 Align goals with KPIs

    1.4 Build your initial IVR menu

    2.1 Build the second tier of your IVR menu

    2.2 Build the third tier of your IVR menu

    3.1 Learn the benefits of a personalized IVR

    3.2 Review new technology to apply to your IVR

    4.1 Gather insights on your IVR's performance

    4.2 Create an agile review method

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Building a database of your customers' call drivers
    • Developing IVR-related goals and connecting them with your key performance indicators (KPIs)
    • Developing the first tier of your IVR menu

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Implement a Transformative IVR Approach That Empowers Your Customers

    Step 1.1

    Understand Your Customers

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    1.1.1 Build a database of the reasons why your customers call your contact center

    Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of your customers' call drivers

    Help your customers get to where they need to go

    Understand which questions customers need answered the most and organize your IVR menu accordingly

    • With any IVR system, your primary focus should be creating a simple, easily navigated call flow. You not only want your customers to be able to find the solutions that they are looking for, but you want them to be able to do so easily and quickly.
    • In order to direct customers more efficiently, you need to understand why they're motivated to call your contact center. This will be different for every organization, so it requires a deeper understanding of your customers.
    • After understanding the motivators behind your customers' reasons for calling, you'll be able to organize your call flow tree effectively.
    • Assign the most popular reasons that customers call first in your IVR call flow. Organizing your call flow in such a way will ensure a quicker turn around time for customer inquiries, providing callers with the immediate resolution that they are seeking.

    "Call flows are the structure of a call center's interactive voice response (IVR). They define the path a caller takes to reach a resolution. The more efficient the flow, the quicker a resolution can be – thereby delivering a better caller experience."

    Thomas Randall, Ph.D.
    Senior Research Analyst
    Info-Tech Research Group

    1.1.1 Activity: Build a list of the most common reasons that your key customers call your contact center

    30 minutes

    1. As a group, review the reasons that customers call your contact center. This includes reviewing which questions are asked most frequently, what services are most often inquired about, and what pain points and complaints live agents hear most regularly.
    2. Organize each call driver from most to least popular based on how often they are heard.
    3. Record your findings.
    Input Output
    • List of common customer questions
    • List of common customer pain points/complaints
    • Database of customer call drivers
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Project team
    • Customer service leaders/live agents

    Info-Tech Insight

    To understand why your customers are calling, first you need to know who your customers are. Improve your caller understanding by creating customer personas.

    1.1.1 Activity: Build a list of the most common reasons that your key customers call your contact center

    Example

    Customer Call Drivers
    Need to pay a bill
    Complaints about an outage to their service
    Inquiry about new plans
    Need to update account information
    Complaints about their last bill

    Step 1.2

    Develop Goals for Your IVR

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    1.2.1 Outline IVR-related goals relevant to your organization.

    Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Goals for your organizational IVR

    Create IVR-related goals you wish for your organization to achieve

    Organizations across different industries will measure success in a multitude of ways; develop goals that are relevant to your needs and desires

    Based on your customer experience strategy and what industry you're in, the goals that you aim to accomplish will look different. A doctor's office will be more concerned with an accurate diagnosis and high first call resolution rate than low average talk time!

    Setting business goals relevant to your organization is only half of the battle; it's just as important to hold your organization accountable to those goals and measure your continued progress toward meeting them.

    1.2.1 Activity: Brainstorm a list of goals that you would like your organization to achieve when optimizing your IVR approach

    30 minutes

    1. In two to three groups, brainstorm goals related to your IVR that are relevant to your organization.
    2. Classify these goals as being either quick wins or part of a longer-term engagement based on the time they would take to accomplish.
    3. Introduce your goals to the entire group, coming to an agreement on the top goals that the organization should aim to achieve through implementing a new/transformed IVR approach.
    InputOutput
    • Customer experience strategy
    • Desired IVR-related achievements
    • Organizational IVR goals
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Project team

    1.2.1 Activity: Brainstorm a list of goals that you would like your organization to achieve when optimizing your IVR approach

    Example

    Goal Designation
    Lower the average queue time Quick win
    Lower call abandonment rate Quick win
    Lower customer attrition Long-term
    Lower employee attrition Long-term
    Increase average speed of answer Quick win

    Step 1.3

    Align Your Goals With Your KPIs

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    1.3.1 Review your organizational IVR goals and connect them with your key performance indicators (KPIs)

    Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Metrics used to measure organizational success related to your IVR

    Ensure you are using the proper metrics for measuring the success of your call flow tree

    You won't know if your IVR is operating successfully if you don't know what success looks like for you. It is important to align your contact center KPIs with your business goals so you can hold your IVR system accountable.

    Example

    Metric Description Current Score Target Score [Date/Year]
    First call resolution
    Average abandonment rate
    Customer attrition
    Employee attrition
    Average queue time
    Service level
    Average speed of answer
    Average handle time
    Average call transfer rate
    Average talk time
    Customer self-service resolution
    Agent satisfaction
    Customer satisfaction

    1.3.1 Activity: Develop KPIs for your contact center and connect them to your organization's business goals

    30 minutes

    1. As a group, establish the metrics or KPIs that will be used to measure your progress against the organizational IVR goals created in Activity 1.2.1.
    2. Take note of your current score for each of your organizational goals and determine your target score.
    3. Attach a deadline or target date by which you would like to reach your target score. Target dates can vary based on whether your goal is classified as a quick win or part of a longer-term engagement.
    InputOutput
    • Organizational IVR goals
    • KPIs
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Project team

    Step 1.4

    Build Your Initial IVR Menu

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    1.4.1 Develop the first tier of your IVR menu, determining the initial selections that customers will have to choose from

    Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Tier one of your IVR call flow tree

    Keep your IVR concise – minimize the length of your voice prompts and limit the depth of your menus

    You don't want to overload your customers with information. Providing your callers with overly detailed prompts and too many menu options will only lead to frustration, ultimately diminishing both the efficiency and the effectiveness of your IVR. Limiting the length of your voice prompts and the depth of your menus will lay out a clear path for your callers, increasing the likelihood that they are able to navigate your IVR accurately.

    Each of your IVR menus should provide your customers with no more than five selections.

    Your IVR should offer a maximum of three menu tiers.

    Each of your selection "descriptions" or voice prompts should be no longer than four seconds in length.

    Info-Tech Insight

    According to a study by Telzio (2020), introductory IVR messages that greet your customers and identify your company should be under 7.9 seconds in length. Longer introductions will only bore, frustrate, and overload the customer before the call really even begins.

    When developing your voice prompts, it is integral to speak clearly using simple and easily understood language

    • Speak clearly and stay away from industry-specific jargon to ensure that your voice prompts are widely understood by your customer base. This will allow callers to digest the information relayed through your IVR more accurately.
    • Part of increasing the retention of information communicated through your IVR is also ensuring that sufficient pauses are taken between each of your voice prompts. Just as you want to avoid overloading your customers with voice prompts that are too long and too detailed, you also want to give your callers adequate time to process the information that is being relayed to them.
    • Improving the ease of listening to your IVR will reduce the risk of overwhelming your callers and will increase the likelihood that they are able to follow along appropriately, directing themselves down the proper call flow.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Securing voice talent and be expensive and cumbersome. Consider using an automated voice through a text-to-speech solution for your prompts. This will ensure that all your prompts are consistent throughout your menus, and it also makes it significantly easier to provide crucial updates within your IVR system.

    When sufficient pauses are taken between menu options, input errors can be reduced by over…

    Source: Ansafone Contact Centers, 2019

    1.4.1 Activity: Begin building your call flow tree by developing the initial selections that customers will choose from when dialing into your IVR

    30 minutes

    1. Review the database of customer call drivers completed in Activity 1.1.1 to create the opening menu of your IVR call flow tree.
    2. Limit your selections/prompts to a maximum of five by grouping related questions, services, and complaints/pain points into broad categories.
    3. Organize your selections/prompts according to how often customers call in relating to that topic.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Remember: You don't need five selections! That is the maximum recommended number of prompts to use and will most likely be reserved for more complex call flows. More isn't always better. If you can limit your initial menu to fewer selections, then do so.

    InputOutput
    • Database of customer call drivers
    • Initial IVR menu
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Project team

    1.4.1 Activity: Begin building your call flow tree by developing the initial selections that customers will choose from when dialing into your IVR

    Example

    IVR Initial Greeting

    1. For Billing and Payments

    2. To Report an Outage

    3. To Make Changes to Your Plan or Account

    Phase 2

    Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Understand your customers

    1.2 Develop goals for your IVR

    1.3 Align goals with KPIs

    1.4 Build your initial IVR menu

    2.1 Build the second tier of your IVR menu

    2.2 Build the third tier of your IVR menu

    3.1 Learn the benefits of a personalized IVR

    3.2 Review new technology to apply to your IVR

    4.1 Gather insights on your IVR's performance

    4.2 Create an agile review method

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Completing the second tier of your call flow tree
    • Completing the third and final tier of your call flow tree

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Implement a Transformative IVR Approach That Empowers Your Customers

    Step 2.1

    Build the Second Tier of Your IVR Menu

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    • 2.1.1 Complete the second tier of your call flow tree, branching out from your initial menu

    Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Tier 2 of your IVR call flow tree

    An IVR system should empower your customers to solve problems on their own

    Integrate business applications into your IVR menus to enable self-service capabilities and automate processes where possible

    • An IVR system should assist your customer service team while also empowering your customers. This can be accomplished through offering self-service and using automated messaging via a broadcast messaging system.
    • Some common self-service practices include providing callers with the ability to check credit card statements, pay bills, and track shipments.
    • Automated messaging can be used to address common customer questions. For instance, if a company-wide issue exists, an automated message can outline the issue and highlight the approximate time for resolution, providing customers with the answer they were seeking while eliminating the need to speak to a live agent. This technique is commonly practiced by internet providers during outages.
    • Providing callers with the opportunity to find a resolution for themselves through self-service and automated messaging not only improves the customer experience but also frees up your customer service team for more pressing matters.

    73%

    of customers want to be provided with the ability to solve issues on their own.

    67%

    of customers prefer to use self-service options over speaking with a customer service representative.

    Source: Raffle, 2020

    2.1.1 Activity: Grow your call flow tree! Begin branching out from your initial menu options and develop the second tier of your IVR system

    30 minutes

    1. Branch out from your initial IVR menu created in Activity 1.4.1. Get more specific in your prompts, branching out from the general groupings you have created.
    2. Consult with your database of customer call drivers created in Activity 1.1.1 to organize your subgroupings, again prioritizing the services most sought and the questions, complaints, and pain points most frequently heard.
    3. Limit each subsection to a maximum of five prompts.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Always provide your callers with the option to go back to a previous menu or to have menu options repeated.

    InputOutput
    • Database of customer call drivers
    • Initial IVR menu
    • Second IVR menu
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Project team

    2.1.1 Activity: Grow your call flow tree! Begin branching out from your initial menu options and develop the second tier of your IVR system

    Example

    This is an image of the sample flow tree from Activity 2.1.1


    Step 2.2

    Build the Third Tier of Your IVR Menu

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    2.2.1 Complete your call flow tree by branching out your third and final tier of menu options.

    Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Third and final tier of your IVR call flow tree

    Provide your callers with the option to speak to a live agent – but not too soon

    While promoting self-service and automating certain processes will improve the functionality of your IVR, it is also important to realize that some issues will ultimately require human intervention. An effective IVR system harmonizes these concepts by making human contact an option, but not too early in the process. You need to find the right balance!

    When organizing your IVR call flow tree, you need to be conscious of sending clients in an endless "IVR loop." You should never have your IVR continually repeat its menu options. Customers will abandon an IVR if they are stuck in an IVR loop, being forced to listen to the same information repeatedly without having a way to reach an agent.

    If a problem cannot be solved within three steps or by the third tier of your IVR menus, callers should be provided with the option to speak to a live agent, if not automatically routed to one. By providing your callers with the option to speak to a live agent on the third tier of your IVR, you are still offering ample time for customers to discover an avenue to solve their issue on their own through self-service, without frustrating them by losing them in an endless loop of IVR options.

    30%

    of customers say that not being able to reach a human agent is the most frustrating aspect of a poor customer service experience.

    Source: ProProfs Chat, 2022

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider routing callers to a live agent not only on the third tier of your IVR menus but also after three input errors. Multiple input errors can show an eagerness to speak to a representative or a strong misunderstanding of the IVR offering.

    How you direct a customer to a live agent can make all the difference

    Don't think that just offering your customers the option to speak to a live agent is enough. When aiming to significantly improve your customers' experience, how you direct calls to your live agents plays a major role. When a call is being directed to a live agent, be sure to:

    • Optimize your call routing and minimize call transfers. Use skills-based routing to direct your incoming client calls to the most suitable agent to resolve their issue. Inaccurately routing callers through your IVR leads to having to transfer the customer to another agent, which is a major contributor to a negative customer experience.
    • Include wait-time expectations and call-back functionality. There is no denying it: Waiting on hold can be a real pain. If a customer needs to go on hold, inform them of where they are in the queue and what the approximate wait time is. A little transparency can go a long way. You should also provide customers with the option to have a representative call them back. This greatly improves the customer experience, particularly when wait times are long.
    • Play useful on-hold messages. If a customer does decide to wait on the line to speak to a representative, ensure your on-hold messaging doesn't negatively impact their experience. Always have multiple songs and messages available to cycle through to limit customer annoyance. For on-hold messages, consider mentioning self-service capabilities available on other channels or providing company news and information on special promotions. Know your key customer demographics and plan your on-hold messaging accordingly.

    72%

    of customers view having to talk to multiple agents as poor customer service.

    Source: ProProfs Chat, 2022

    33%

    of customers highlight waiting on hold as being their biggest frustration.

    Source: EmailAnalytics, 2022

    2.2.1 Activity: Complete your call flow tree!

    30 minutes

    1. Branch out from the second tier of your IVR call flow tree created in Activity 2.1.1, connecting relevant prompts with self-service applications and automated responses. Keep in mind, most of your frequently asked questions can and should be directed toward an automated response.
    2. Direct all remaining prompts to a live agent, ensuring each selection from your second-tier menu is capped off appropriately.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Remember: Your IVR system doesn't live in isolation. The information offered by your IVR, particularly from automated messages, should be consistent with information found within other resources (e.g. online knowledge bases).

    InputOutput
    • Tier 1 and 2 of your IVR menus
    • Completed IVR call flow
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Project team

    2.2.1 Activity: Complete your call flow tree!

    Example

    This is an image of the sample flow tree from Activity 2.2.1

    Phase 3

    Let Your IVR Call Flow Tree Flourish

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Understand your customers

    1.2 Develop goals for your IVR

    1.3 Align goals with KPIs

    1.4 Build your initial IVR menu

    2.1 Build the second tier of your IVR menu

    2.2 Build the third tier of your IVR menu

    3.1 Learn the benefits of a personalized IVR

    3.2 Review new technology to apply to your IVR

    4.1 Gather insights on your IVR's performance

    4.2 Create an agile review method

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Reviewing the benefits of offering personalized service
    • Reviewing new technologies offered in the IVR space

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Implement a Transformative IVR Approach That Empowers Your Customers

    Step 3.1

    Learn the Benefits of a Personalized IVR

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    3.1.1 Review the benefits of offering personalized service, namely by connecting your IVR system with your customer knowledge base

    Let Your IVR Call Flow Tree Flourish

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding the importance of offering personalized service

    Personalizing service is integral for improving your customer experience

    Integrate your IVR system with your customer relationship management (CRM) system or customer knowledge base of choice to provide support to your customers on a personal level.

    The integration of your IVR system with your CRM or other applicable knowledge base allows for customer data (e.g. customer history and previous interactions) to be accessible to your staff during calls. Access to this data allows for a deeper understanding of your customers and for personalization of service. This provides immediate benefits to your contact center that will improve your customer experience.

    When you inevitably do need to transfer a customer to another agent, they won't have to repeat their issue to a new representative, as all their information will now be easily accessible. Being forced to repeat themselves to multiple agents is a major cause of frustration for customers. This integration would also allow you to route callers to the previous agent that they dealt with whenever possible for the purpose of continuity, and it would enable you to implement other beneficial technologies as well.

    One such example is "agent assist." Agent assist is an AI bot that listens in on calls, learning customer context and automatically searching knowledge bases to help resolve queries without the agent having to put the caller on hold to manually perform that work themselves. Not only does agent assist improve customer resolution times, but it also ramps up onboarding time, allowing for new agents to enter the workforce and perform with confidence earlier.

    76%

    of consumers expect personalized experiences.

    71%

    of customers expect internal collaboration so that they don't have to repeat themselves.

    Source: Zendesk, 2019

    Personalization can empower your IVR in many ways

    Personalizing your IVR does much more than just provide your customer service representatives with conversational context. Personalization enables your IVR to recognize callers by their phone number, or even by voice via biometric authentication technologies.

    This advanced level of recognition allows your IVR to greet your callers by name, speak to them in their preferred language, send follow-up correspondence to their preferred method of communication (i.e. email or SMS), and even provide them with contact numbers and addresses for your organization's physical locations that are closest to them.

    An example of a more advanced functionality is having your IVR call flow personalized for each customer based on their call history. As customers call in, their data is collected, ultimately improving your IVR's ability to predict and understand caller intent. This makes personalized call flows possible. If customers typically call in to make payments, your IVR can logically deduce that their next call will be for the same reason, and it will alter the call menu to direct them to that functionality more efficiently.

    Step 3.2

    Review New Technology to Apply to Your IVR

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    3.2.1 Review new technologies offered in the IVR space and understand their impact

    Let Your IVR Call Flow Tree Flourish

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding of key technologies

    Let your customers tell you exactly what they need

    Use natural language processing and conversational AI to further advance your IVR offering

    Instead of making your customers work their way through your call flow tree to find out what they need, why not just ask them? Conversational IVR, also known as an "intuitive IVR system," makes this possible.

    Think Google Assistant, Siri, and Alexa. Your customers can simply tell you what they need and your conversational IVR, using the advancements in natural language processing and conversational AI, will take it from there, directing callers to the resources needed to resolve their issues.

    Powerful enough to understand full sentences and not just select words or phrases, the increased intelligence of a conversational IVR system allows it to handle complex customer inquiries. Leveraging machine learning capabilities, the system will only continue to improve its ability to understand caller intent, ultimately leading to increased call routing accuracy as it fields more and more calls.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Remember: Your customers want fast and easy, not overwhelming and confusing. Some customers who are greeted with an open-ended question from a conversational IVR may not be sure how to respond.

    Understand your key customer demographics and act accordingly. It may be beneficial to provide your callers with guidelines of what to say. Outlining appropriate responses that will guide your customers to their desired department quicker will boost their experience with your conversational IVR.

    There are a lot of benefits to implementing a conversational IVR

    • Putting your callers in control and offering a more humanized approach, conversational IVRs are the preferred first point of contact for customers.
    • Conversational IVRs reduce the time required to reach resolution and can handle more calls than a standard IVR.
    • Conversational IVRs allow for the collection of more relevant data. By not limiting callers to predetermined menu options, you can track the reasons behind customers' calls with more accuracy, using this data to drive future IVR developments.
    • Conversational IVRs are more cost-effective than standard IVRs. According to a report by IBM, companies world-wide spend over $1.3 trillion to address 256 billion customer calls annually. This means that each call a live agent addresses costs an average of $30 (Cognigy, 2020). With a conversational IVR, that cost can be reduced to one-eighth (ETCIO.com, 2020).
    • Conversational IVRs can be handle calls in multiple languages, offering improved scalability for companies operating multi-nationally.

    60%

    of callers will bypass the pre-recorded messages in a standard IVR to reach a human voice.

    Source: Cognigy, 2020

    66%

    of requests can be resolved faster by a conversational IVR than by a live agent.

    Source: Cognigy, 2020

    Despite this, only...

    28%

    of IVR systems contacted use voice response as their primary input method.

    Source: Telzio, 2020

    How do you know if a conversational IVR is right for your organization?

    Large, enterprise-level organizations that field a high volume of customer calls are more likely to receive the benefits and higher ROI from implementing a conversational IVR

    Instead of updating the entire IVR system and implementing a conversational IVR, smaller and mid-level organizations should consider attaching a natural language processing front-end to their existing IVR. Through this, you will be able to reap a lot of the same benefits you would if you were to upgrade to a conversational IVR.

    You can attach a natural language processing front-end to your existing IVR in two ways.

    1. Use an API to recognize your customer's voice prompts. Greet your customers with a question, such as "what is your reason for calling," as your initial IVR menu, and when your customer answers, their response will be sent to your selected API (Amazon Lex, IBM Watson, Google Dialogflow, etc.). The API will then process the customer's input and direct the caller to the appropriate branch of your call flow tree.
    2. Use a conversational AI platform to field your calls. Implement a conversational AI platform to be the first point of contact for your customers. After receiving and analyzing the input from your customers, the platform would then route your callers to your current IVR system and to the appropriate menu, whether that be to an automated message, a self-service application, or a live agent.

    Phase 4

    Keep Watering Your IVR Call Flow Tree

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Understand your customers

    1.2 Develop goals for your IVR

    1.3 Align goals with KPIs

    1.4 Build your initial IVR menu

    2.1 Build the second tier of your IVR menu

    2.2 Build the third tier of your IVR menu

    3.1 Learn the benefits of a personalized IVR

    3.2 Review new technology to apply to your IVR

    4.1 Gather insights on your IVR's performance

    4.2 Create an agile review method

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understanding the importance of receiving feedback from relevant stakeholders and the best practices for obtaining feedback
    • Understanding the best practices for developing an ongoing review cycle

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Implement a Transformative IVR Approach That Empowers Your Customers

    Step 4.1

    Gather Insights on Your IVR's Performance

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    4.1.1 Understand the importance of receiving feedback and review the best methods for obtaining it from your clients.

    Keep Watering Your IVR Call Flow Tree

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding of the importance of receiving feedback and how to obtain it from customers

    Elicit feedback from your employees and from your customers

    Your live agents are on the proverbial front lines, fielding calls from customers daily. As such, they are the prime stakeholders for knowing what kinds of calls the organization receives and how often. Their input on the most frequent reasons that customers call, whether it be to address common pain points or to have FAQs answered, is invaluable. Ask them regularly for their feedback on how the IVR system is performing and which updates should be implemented.

    While improving the agent experience is a driver behind adopting an IVR system, the focus should always be improving your customer experience. So why wouldn't you ask your customers for their feedback on your IVR offering? Most customers don't only want to be asked to provide feedback, they expect to be asked. Have your agents ask your customers directly about their experience with your IVR or use the functions of your IVR to offer automated end-of-call surveys.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Many IVR systems are capable of recording calls. Listening back on previous calls is another great way to further understand how your IVR is performing, and it also can provide a glimpse into your customers' experience.

    Surveys provide great insight into your customers' level of satisfaction – not only with your IVR but also with your live agents

    Customer satisfaction score (CSAT) is a great way to determine how happy callers are with their experiences with your organization. CSAT surveys ask your clients outright how satisfied they are with their recent interaction and have them rate your service on a scale. While straightforward, the feedback received from CSAT surveys is more general and can lack depth.

    For more detailed responses, consider asking your clients an open-ended question as opposed to using a rating scale. This will provide you with a more specific understanding of your customers' experience. For this, an IVR system that supports voice transcription is best. Automated speech-to-text functionality will ensure rapid results.

    Another option is to offer a survey that includes skip logic. These multi-tiered surveys, much like an IVR call flow tree, direct your callers to different follow-up questions based on their previous answers. While capable of providing more insight into the customer experience, these surveys are only recommended for more complex service offerings.

    Customer feedback is vitally important

    Asking for feedback makes your callers feel valued, and it also provides your organization with extremely useful information – including an understanding of what you may need to change within your IVR

    90%

    of consumers believe that organizations should provide them with the opportunity to give customer feedback.

    Source: SmallBizGenius, 2022

    41%

    of customer support professionals say that CSAT is their team's most important KPI.

    Source: Hiver, 2022

    Step 4.2

    Create an Agile Review Method

    This step will walk you through the following activity:

    4.2.1 Understand the best practices for developing an ongoing review cycle for your IVR approach

    Keep Watering Your IVR Call Flow Tree

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
    • IT project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding of the importance of IVR maintenance and of the development of an iterative review cycle

    Create an agile review method to continually enhance your call flows

    • Track items
      • Elicit feedback from your key stakeholders (i.e. live agents) as part of a regular review – every month, two months, six months, or year – of your call flow tree's efficiency. Delve into the feedback elicited from your customers at the same intervals. Look for patterns and trends and record items accordingly.
    • Manage backlog
      • Store and organize your recorded items into a backlog, prioritizing items to implement in order of importance. This could be structured by way of identifying which items are a quick win vs. which items are part of a more strategic and long-term implementation.
    • Perform iteration
      • Record key metric scores and communicate the changes you have planned to stakeholders before you implement items. Then, make the change.
    • Be retrospective
      • Examine the success of the implementation by comparing your metric scores from before and after the change. Record instances where performing similar changes could be carried out better in future iterations.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    • Knowledge Gained
      • Benefits of enabling personalized service
      • IVR-enabling technologies
      • Methods of eliciting feedback
    • Processes Optimized
      • IVR voice prompt creation
      • IVR voice prompt organization
      • IVR review cycles
    • Deliverables Completed
      • Database of customer call drivers
      • Organizational IVR goals and KPIs
      • IVR call flow tree

    Related Info-Tech Research

    This is a picture of a hand holding a cellular phone

    Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution

    • IT needs a method to pinpoint which contact center solution best aligns with business objectives, adapting to a post-COVID-19 world of remote work, flexibility, and scalability.
    This image contains a screenshot from Info-tech's Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management.

    Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

    • Customer expectations around personalization, channel preferences, and speed-to-resolution are at an all-time high. Your customers are willing to pay more for high-value experiences, and having a strong customer experience management (CXM) strategy is a proven path to creating sustainable value for the organization.
    This image contains a screenshot from Info-tech's IT Strategy Research Center

    IT Strategy Research Center

    • Create an IT strategy based on business needs, not just intuition.
    This image contains a screenshot from Info-tech's SoftwareReviews blueprint.

    SoftwareReviews

    • Accelerate and improve your software selection process with enterprise software reviews. Focus on available resources for communications platform as a service providers and conversational intelligence software.

    Bibliography

    "7 Conversational IVR Trends for 2021 and Beyond." Haptik, 25 March 2021. Accessed 16 June 2022.
    "7 Remarkable IVR Trends For the Year 2022 And Beyond." Haptik, 30 Dec. 2021. Accessed 27 April 2022.
    "8 IVR Strategies that Keep Customers Happy." Ansafone Contact Centers, 31 May 2019. Accessed 25 April 2022.
    "Agent Assist." Speakeasy AI, 19 April 2022. Accessed 27 April 2022.
    "AI chatbot that's easy to use." IBM, n.d. Accessed 21 June 2022.
    "IVR Trends to Watch in 2020 and Beyond: Inside CX." Intrado, 1 May 2020. Accessed 27 April 2022.
    "RIP IVR: 1980-2020." Vonage, 2 June 2020. Accessed 16 June 2022.
    Andrea. "What do Customers Want? – 37 Customer Service Statistics." SmallBizGenius, 17 March 2022. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Anthony, James. "106 Customer Service Statistics You Must See: 2021/2022 Data & Analysis." FinancesOnline, 14 Jan. 2022. Accessed 27 April 2022.
    Brown, James. "14 stats that prove the importance of self-service in customer service." raffle, 13 Oct. 2020. Accessed 17 June 2022.
    Buesing, Eric, et al. "Getting the best customer service from your IVR: Fresh eyes on an old problem." McKinsey & Company, 1 Feb. 2019. Accessed 25 April 2022.
    Callari, Ron. "IVR Menus and Best Practices." Telzio, 4 Sep. 2020. Accessed 27 April 2022.
    Cornell, Jared. "104 Customer Service Statistics & Facts of 2022." ProProfs Chat, 6 April 2022. Accessed 16 June 2022.
    DeCarlo, Matthew. "18 Common IVR Mistakes & How To Configure Effective IVR." GetVoIP, 13 June 2019. Accessed 27 April 2022.
    DeMers, Jayson. "77 Customer Service Statistics to Know." EmailAnalytics, 23 March 2022. Accessed 27 April 2022.
    Frants, Valeriy. Interview. Conducted by Austin Wagar, 22 June 2022.
    Grieve, Patrick. "Personalized customer service: what it is and how to provide it." Zendesk, 28 June 2019. Accessed 27 April 2022.
    "How Natural Language Processing Can Help Your Interactive Voice Response System Meet Best Practice." Hostcomm, 15 July 2019. Accessed 25 April 2022.
    "IVR and customer experience: get the best UX for your clients." Kaleyra, 14 Dec. 2020. Accessed 25 April 2022.
    Irvine, Bill. "Selecting an IVR System for Customer Satisfaction Surveys." IVR Technology Group, 14 April 2020. Accessed 22 June 2022.
    Kulbyte, Toma. "Key Customer Experience Statistics to Know." SuperOffice, 24 June 2021. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Leite, Thiago. "What's the Difference Between Standard & Conversational IVR?" Cognigy, 27 Oct. 2020. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Maza, Cristina. "What is IVR? The ultimate guide." Zendesk, 30 Sep. 2020. Accessed 25 April 2022.
    McCraw, Corey. "What is IVR Call Flow? Benefits, Features, Metrics & More." GetVoIP, 30 April 2020. Accessed 25 April 2022.
    Mircevski, Bruno. "Smart IVR Introduction – What Is It and Why You Should Use It." Ideta, 7 March 2022. Accessed 28 April 2022.
    Oriel, Astha. "Artificial Intelligence in IVR: A Step Towards Faster Customer Services." Analytics Insight, 19 Aug. 2020. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Perzynska, Kasia. "What is CSAT & How to Measure Customer Satisfaction?" Survicate, 9 March 2022. Accessed 22 June 2022.
    Pratt, Mary K. "How to set business goals, step by step." TechTarget, 27 April 2022. Accessed 21 June 2022.
    Robinson, Kerry. "Insight of the Week: Make Your IVR More Like Alexa." Waterfield Tech, 20 April 2022. Accessed 25 April 2022.
    Sehgal, Karishma. "Exclusive Research – 76% of customer service teams offer support outside of business hours." Hiver, 4 May 2022. Accessed 22 June 2022.
    Smith, Mercer. "111 Customer Service Statistics and Facts You Shouldn't Ignore." Help Scout, 23 May 2022. Accessed 24 June 2022.
    Thompson, Adrian. "A Guide to Conversational IVR." The Bot Forge, 27 Jan. 2021. Accessed 21 June 2022.
    Tolksdorf, Juergen. " 5 Ways to Leverage AI and Agent-Assist to Improve Customer Experience." Genesys, 19 May 2020. Accessed 27 April 2022.
    Vaish, Aakrit. "5 ways conversational IVR is helping businesses revolutionize customer service." ETCIO.com, 20 March 2020. Web.
    Westfall, Leah. "Improving customer experience with the right IVR strategy." RingCentral, 23 July 2021. Accessed 25 April 2022.